IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-l) 
 
 ;**^ 
 
 jy 
 
 'i ■'*• . 
 
 »*■■- 
 
 » 
 
 ; 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 til 
 
 -T/-^ 
 
 1.25 
 
 Its' 
 
 ■tt liiii 12.2 
 
 .DM 
 
 ' 1.4 ■ 1.6 
 
 ,6" 
 
 ? 
 
 » 
 
 X. 
 
 Photographic* 
 -Sciences --: 
 Corporation 
 
 '^r^^^v ^ 
 
 at WMT MAM STtir 
 
 yVIMTIt.N.Y. I4SI0 
 
 ^ 
 
 ■f 
 
 ,•* 
 
 (7U) •73-4S09 
 
 * ♦ 
 
 *. 
 

 * 
 
 " 
 
 ■-*'■■' 
 
 CIHM/ICMH 
 
 * - 
 
 CIHM/ICMH 
 
 
 Microfiche 
 
 Collection de 
 
 k 
 
 Series. 
 
 microfiches. > 
 
 > 
 
 * 
 
 
 Is 
 
 
 W _' _ ^ 
 
 r 
 
 .v-_. _ — 
 
 -;' 
 
 
 '•«* 
 
 > 
 
 
 •^T 
 
 •"S^ 
 
 
 
 -.^v 
 
 Canadian Institute for Historicai IVIicroreproductions / Inatitut Canadian da microraproductions hiatoriquaa 
 
 
 ' *. 
 
 M 
 
Technical and Bibliographic Notaa/Notas tachniquaa at bibliographiquca 
 
 Tha Inttituta haa aRamptad to obtain tha baat 
 original copy availabia for filming, ^aaturaa of thia 
 copy which may ba bibiiographieaHy uniqua. 
 which may aitar any of tha imagaa in tha 
 raproduction, or Which may significantly changa 
 tha uaual mathod of filming, ara chackad balow. 
 
 D 
 
 Colourad covara/ 
 Couvartura da coulaur 
 
 r~n Covara damagad/ 
 
 D 
 D 
 
 Couvactura andommagAa 
 
 Covara raatorad and/or laminatad/ 
 Couvartura raatauria at/ou pallicul^ 
 
 Covar titia missing/ 
 
 ta titra da couvortur* manqua 
 
 r~~l Colourad mapa/ 
 
 Cartaa gAograpMquaa an coulaur 
 
 Colourad ihk (i.a. othar than blua or black)/ 
 Encra da coulaur (i.a; autra qua blaua ou noira) 
 
 □ ColouradTplataa and/or illuatrationa/ 
 Planchaa at/ou illuatrationa an coulaur 
 
 □ Bound with otfiar matarial/ 
 Rali4 avac d'autraa documants • - 
 
 D 
 
 Tight binding may.cauaa shadowa or distortion 
 along intarior margin/ 
 
 Laroliura sarria paut eauaar da I'ombra ou da la 
 diatoraion la long da la marga int4riaur» 
 
 □ B(ank laavaa addad during rastoration may 
 appaar within tho ta|(t. Whanovar possibla. thaaa 
 hava baan omittad from filming/ 
 II sa paut qua eartainss pagas bianchss ajoutiaa 
 lors d'una raatauration apparaiaaant dans la taxta. 
 mala, lorsqua cala «tait poaaibia, caa pagaa n'ont 
 paa iti fitmaaa. 
 
 4» 
 
 □ Additional eommanta:/ 
 Commantairaa supplAmantairaa: 
 
 L'Inatitut a microfilm* 1« maillaur axamplaira 
 qu'il iui a ataj>ossibia da sa procurer. Las datails 
 da cat axamplaira qui sont paut-«tr« uniquas du , 
 point da vua bibliographiqua. qui pouvont modifier 
 una image raproduite. ou qiii pauvent exiger une 
 modification dans la mathoda normale de fiimage 
 sont indiquta ci-dessous. 
 
 r~| Coloured pages/ 
 
 Pagae da coulaur 
 
 Pagaa damagad/ 
 Pagaa endommegaes 
 
 D 
 El 
 
 Pagaa reatored and/or laminatad/ , 
 Pagaa reatauraea at/ou pellicuiaea 
 
 Pagaa discoloured, staiffad or foxed/ 
 Pagas dacoloraes. tadhtt^as ou piquAas 
 
 r~~\ Pagaa detached/ 
 
 Pagaa datachaes 
 
 Showthrough> 
 Tranaparanca 
 
 Quality of prir 
 
 Qualiti in^gaia da ('impression 
 
 includes supplementary matarii 
 Comprend du metariel suppi^mentaira 
 
 Only edition availabia/ 
 Sauie adition disponibia 
 
 rri Showthrough/ 
 
 rn Quality of print varies/ 
 
 |~n includea supplementary material/ a» 
 
 I — j Only edition availabia/ 
 
 □ Pages wholly or psrtially obscured by errata 
 slips, tissues, etc.. hava been refilmed to 
 ensure the best possible image/ 
 Lea pages totalement ou partiellement 
 obscurcies par un feuilletd 'errata, une peiure. 
 etc.. ont ata filmaes A nouveau de fapon a 
 obtenir la meilleure image possible. 
 
 This item is filmed at tha reduction ratio i:hecked below/ 
 
 Ce document est filma au taux de raduction indiqua ci-daaaoua. 
 
 10X UX ItX 22X 
 
 % 
 
 7 
 
 12X 
 
 IfX 
 
 2^ 
 
 mtm 
 
 XX 
 
 aox 
 
 UX 
 
 mx 
 
 «X 
 
«tails 
 M du ^ 
 nodifier 
 >r una 
 ilmaga 
 
 IS 
 
 Th« copy f1lin«d hcraluw bmtm raproducsd thanks 
 to th« g«n«ro«ity of: 
 
 D.B.WeldonUiir8ry ' * 
 
 Univsnity of Wsftmm Ontario 
 (Rsgional Hiitory Room) 
 
 Tho imagoo appoaring hora ara tha baat quality 
 poaaibia eonaidaring tha eoiMlition and iagibility 
 of tha original copy and in Icaaping with tha 
 filming contraat apadficationa. 
 
 Original copiaa in printad papar eovara ara fllmad 
 baginning with tha front eovar and andlng on 
 tha laat pi^ga with a printad or illuatratad impraa- 
 tion, or tha bacic eovar whan appropriata. All 
 othar original copiaa ara filmad baginning on tha 
 first paga with a printad or illuatratad impraa- 
 sion, and anding on tha Iwt paga with a printad . 
 or ilhistratad impraaalon.^ 
 
 L'axamplaira filmA fut raproduit grica i la 
 g^niroaiti da: 
 
 D. B. Waldon Library 
 Uoivarsity of Wattsrn Ontario 
 (Rsgional History Room) ^ 
 
 Laa imagaa suivantaa ont 4t4 raproduitaa avac la 
 plua grand aoin, compta tanu da la condition at 
 da la nattat* da I'axamplaira fllmA, at an 
 OonformitA avac laa conditiona du contrat da 
 fUmaga. 
 
 Laa axamplairaa orlginaux dont la couvartura an 
 papiar aat impHm4a sont film4a an commandant 
 par la pramiar plat at an tarminant soit par la 
 damlAralMKia qui comporta una amprainta 
 d'impraaaion ou d'liluatration, soit par la sacond 
 plat, salon la cas. Tous las autras axamplairas 
 orlginaux sont fUmia an commandant par la 
 prami4ra paga 'qui comporta una amprainta 
 dimpraaalon ou dllluatration at mn tarminant par 
 la damlAra paga qui comporta una talla 
 amprainta. 
 
 Tha laat racordad frama on aach microficha 
 shall contain ttia symbol ««>> (maaning "'COJN- 
 tlfriUED"). or tha symbol ▼ (maaning "END"), 
 whichavar appiiaa. . 
 
 Un"daa symbolaa sulvants apparaltra sur la 
 damlAra imaga da chaqua microficha. salon la 
 caa: la symbola — »> signifia "A SUIVRE". la 
 symbola ▼ signifia "FIN". 
 
 irrata 
 
 to 
 
 Mapa, piataa. chf rt», ate., may ba fllmad at 
 diffarant raduetion ratioa* Thoaa too larga to ba 
 antiraiy ineludad in ona axpoaura ara filmad 
 baginning in ttia uppar laft hand«eomar. laft to 
 right and top to bottom, aa many framaa aa 
 raquirad. Tha following diagrama iUuatrata tha 
 mathod: 
 
 psiura. 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 % 
 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 Laa oartaa. planchas. tablaaux. ate., pauvant Atra 
 filmAa i daa taux da rMUction diffiranta. 
 Loraqua la documant aat trop grand pour 4tra 
 raproduit 9n un saul clich4. 11 aat filmA i partir 
 da I'angla supAriaur gaucha, da gaucha k droita. 
 at da haut an Imm, an pranant la nombra 
 d'Imagas n4caasaira. Las dla^rammas 'suivsnts 
 illustrant la mAthoda. 
 
 D 
 
 «x 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 S 
 
 6 
 
^ 
 
 f ' ' ' . « ' ■ ■ ' 
 
 "i 
 
 - 
 
 ■ . ■ ■ V 
 
 V 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 .*» 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 '■■ 
 
 
 . . ■ ■ .• -. ■ -'^- 
 
 
 
 - • 
 
 • 
 
 . 
 
 m 
 
 ■^i.. 
 -^»4^. 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 V ■ - . ,- ■ ■■'■' -■■"." 4 ..:■'-■■■-,.■..■ , - ■■ 
 
 ¥ » 
 
 ': '-4- *''■ ' '■-■'•'-■ 
 
 ■■■-.■ ■■■!-■. 
 
 
 /^ 
 
 *, c^^ 
 
THE NEW 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK 
 
 
 
 
 FIOR 
 
 ELEMENTARY AND- ADVANCED CLASSES 
 '>v IN HIGH SCHOOLS, *^ : - 
 
 CONTAINING 
 
 INTRODUCTORY LESSONS, AUTHORS, AND 
 ,PROSE COMPOSITION. 
 
 BY 
 
 ADAM CARrVthE^^s! M.A.; 
 
 Lecturer mt Greek.yUniversUy College, TormUo, ' 
 
 T^l:nc? ROBERTSON, B.A., 
 
 Amnnate Pn^femtr cif Greek, Kirtorio College, TormUo. 
 
 V 
 
 TORONTO: 
 
 WILLIAM BRIQQs, 
 
/ 
 
 ' -'^ fc. 
 
 9 
 
 ^- 
 
 r 
 
 ' * 
 
 Entered accordlnR to Act of the Parliament of Canada, in the y^ one 
 thousand nine hundred, by William Brioos. at the Department of 
 Agriculture. 
 
 N 
 
 ,^■1 \ 
 
 <&f i ■ 
 
 ~^^-s."" 
 
 V 
 
 ■tv 
 
 vt 
 
 <>.^ 
 
 
 .*' 
 
 
 
 ■■■l-' ■-•'■" 
 
 S/ 
 
 
 «t . 
 
 
 ■*■«« 
 
 
 y 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 « « 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 ft 
 
 
 
 -.:^^. : 
 
 
 -T*/ - " -: 
 
 ■ • 
 
 -,. ■: .-, ■ /: 
 
 
 - 
 
 * 
 
 • 
 
 ( 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
o. 
 
 .* 
 
 /• 
 
 PRERACE. 
 
 \ 
 
 Thb present edition of the Primary Latih B6ok appears in 
 response to instructions from the Edncation Department of 
 Ontario, which desires that the authorized text-books in 
 Latm shsjl retain, unchanged and unrevised, thp Introductorv, -j^ 
 Lemons of the former text-books, and shall also include the 
 selections from Nepos and C»sar prescribed tor matriculation ^ 
 . by the University of Toronto, together w«h amiotations) 
 vocabularies and exercises in prpse composition and si ' 
 translation based on these-selections".^ ■ ' 
 
 . The authors regret that it has proved impossible for ™ ■ 
 present to secure permission to revise, the Introductory ti 
 sops also. One .«suit is a diffe«,n«e- between the old and the" 
 new portion of the book in the marking of the "hidden 
 quantities » of certain words-a matter on which much new 
 hght has been thrown since th« -Brst appearance of the 
 Primaht Latin Book in .1892. The chief differences are in 
 the words c&sl, clfasis and jdasi; ftrmus, mrlHmmia, «JlFctu^ 
 quirtus, vallum and vSstO, which, it is now Wriyeatat 
 lished, are to be marked as above. 
 ToBOHTO, j4«ju««, 1900; v. 
 
 
 
 ¥ 
 
 .;:i:- 
 
 >/ 
 
 «i.1 
 
«%•- 
 
 
 
 
 . . . . ' 
 
 • - 
 
 :r[' 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 t 
 
 I 
 
 « 
 
 
 . * ■ 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 -* * ■ ', 
 
 ^^ 
 
 • 
 
 ■; 
 
 w 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 :N .. - "^ . ■ - 
 
 ■ - V - 
 
 :.■-- .1 .■..,. . 
 
 '.^ 
 
 ' 
 
 [ 
 
 f ■■ ■ -■ 
 If , 
 
 • , ■ 
 
 
 "V ■'-■■ 
 
 
 .♦. 
 
 ' 
 
 • 
 • 
 
 Mi' 
 
 
 \ 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 
 ■f 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 f 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 ^'."^ 
 
 ■■:;;■:; 
 
 ■' ^ '':'. '■ 
 
 c • 
 
 
 
 
 ' -'¥-;-' '^.-''- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' ' f 
 
 
 
 . ■ • ■ 
 
 '■'' ■ I 
 
 
 
■p 
 
 K 
 
 cont;ents. 
 
 PAST 
 
 te. 
 
 I. Introductory Lessons and Exermsed 
 II. Preparatory Lessons in Continuous Readinff * 
 m. Inflection- ™»aing . 
 
 I. Paradigms of Inflation , . 
 _ 11. Epitome of Rules and Peculiarities .* .* * 
 
 IV. Selections from Nepos and Caesar, with Annotations- ' 
 
 Nepos : Themistocles, Aristides, Hannibal 
 ;^ Caesar : De Bello Gallico, Bk, IV., Bk. V. 1-2.3 
 
 Annotations on the Selections . 
 
 V. Latin Prose Composition and Translation at Sightl * 
 I. Rules of Syntax and Exercises in Prose Composit 
 11. iixercises in Translation at Sight 
 VI. Vocabularies and Index— 
 
 ; I. Latin-English Vocabulary 
 
 : IL English-Latin Vocabulary n~\ ■ ' \ °! 
 III. Index . . ' ' '\ 
 
 PAOV 
 . 1 
 
 . 115 
 
 .170 
 
 . 185 
 ..201 
 .229 
 
 ion. 285 
 . 448 
 
 . 466 
 . 528 
 . 559 
 
 ■■■;g:;PART L 
 
 ■%-* ■■'■■■ '-- - ':",>*^'' o 
 
 I.B80H ^*^^^^°»Y I^«8SON8 AND Exercises. 
 
 Introductory.-Pronunciation. Syllabication, Accent 
 
 I. Present Indicative Active of Conjugations I. and II. \ ' 
 II. Nominative Singular and Plural of Declensions I. and 11 
 
 III. Accusative Singular and Plural of Declensions L and II ' 
 
 IV. Genitive Singular and Plural of Declensions L and II ' 
 V. Dative Singular and Plural of Declensions i. and H 
 
 _ ■«» with Accusative . 
 
 vTf' i^n':^«°* J.'»^»«»«ve Active of Conjugations' L and II ' * 
 VIL Ablative Singular and Plnn.1 of I^donoiuuH * 
 
 i:> tod IL 
 
 1 
 
 8 
 6 
 6 
 
 8 
 10 
 
 CttOT, iM, d, aft, with Ablative 
 
 v 
 
 11 
 
VI 
 
 ->■■ 
 
 coirrENTs. 
 
 •#■ 
 
 unsoir 
 VIIL 
 
 IX. 
 X. 
 
 XI. 
 
 XII. 
 XIIL 
 XIV. 
 
 XV. 
 XVI. 
 
 XVII. 
 
 XVIII. 
 
 XIX. 
 
 XX. 
 
 / XXI. 
 
 XXII. 
 
 xxm. 
 
 XXIV. 
 XXV. 
 
 ^ XXVI. 
 I XXVII. 
 
 XXVIII. 
 XXIX. 
 
 XXX. 
 
 XXXI. 
 
 ^ XXXII. 
 
 XXXIII. 
 XXXIV. 
 
 XXXV. 
 
 XXXVI. 
 
 XXXVII. 
 
 XXXVIII. 
 
 XXXIX. 
 
 PAOB 
 
 Vocative Singular and Plural of Declensions I. and II. 
 
 Kouns in er and ir of Declension II. Use of -que . 
 Nouns in um of Declension II. Gender . 
 Adjectives of Declensions I. and II, . . / 
 Future Indicative Active of Conjugations I. and II. . 
 Masculine and Ferflinine Nouns of Declension II f. 
 Perfect Indicative Active of all Conjugations 
 Neuter Nouns of Declension III. . . . . . 
 
 Pluperfect Indicative Active of all Conjugations . 
 Prepositions a, oft, ad, cum, de, ex, in, inter, per,. post, 
 
 propter, sine, trdna 25 
 
 Future Perfect Indicative Active of all-^onjugations . 26 
 
 Adjectives of Declension III 
 
 Complementary Infinitive (Active Voice) . i 
 Nouns of Declension IV. . . , , . 
 Perfect Indicative Passive of all Conjugations . , 
 Ablativ^ of Agent with a, ab . : ' . . .34 
 Pluperfect and Future Perfect Indicative Passive of 
 
 all Conjugations . . J ♦ ."' , . 
 Nouns of Declension V. Ordinal Numerals . . 
 Ablative of Point of Time. Accusative of Duration of 
 
 Time . . . . ... ... 
 
 Nouns of Declension III. with /-stems ' . ,, . 
 4*resent, Imperfect and Future Indicative Passive of 
 
 Conjugations I. and II. . :» ■, {*" , . 
 Regular Comparison, of Adjiectives . ^ . .» 
 Indicative and Present Infinitive of num. Predicate 
 
 Adjectives . . . ... . . 
 
 Dative with Adjectives , > . ,i , . " . 
 Irregular Comparison of Adjectives - , - r-%^ 
 Present^dicative Active and Passive of Conjugations 
 
 Iir and IV ... 
 
 Adjectives with Genitive in -ius ... . ■. 
 Imperfect and Future Indicative Active and Passive 
 
 of Conjugations III. and IV. . » . 
 Cardinal Numerals . ... 
 Active Periphrastic Conjugation . . . , .62 
 Use of MUle. Accusative of Extent of Space . . 53 
 Dative with Special Intransitive Verbs . . . 56 
 Relative Pronoun. i. . ' . ... . . C8 
 
 J3 
 15 
 16 
 18 
 19 
 20 
 22 
 24 
 
 28 
 29 
 .30 
 32 
 
 36 
 38 
 
 39 
 40 
 
 42 
 43 
 
 ■ » 
 
 44 
 45^ 
 46 
 
 48 
 49 
 
 60 
 61 
 
PAOB 
 
 ue . 
 
 13 
 
 
 15 
 
 
 16 
 
 
 18 
 
 
 19 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 22 
 
 
 24 
 
 >ost. 
 
 
 
 25 - 
 
 IS . 
 
 26 
 
 
 28 
 
 
 29 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 32 
 
 
 34 
 
 of 
 
 
 ■"• 
 
 m::-:^^ 
 
 * ■ 
 
 ■^i»-.:::. ■ 
 
 1 of 
 
 
 t 
 
 39 
 
 ■ • , 
 
 40 
 
 1 of 
 
 .. T . : 
 
 ■ ■-•- 
 
 m ■■-^r 
 
 , 
 
 43 
 
 !ate 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 44 
 
 » 
 
 43^ 
 
 ■-■*■"> 
 
 46 
 
 ons 
 
 
 • 
 
 48 
 
 ■ 
 
 49 
 
 jive 
 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 fll 
 
 
 62 . 
 
 
 53 
 
 
 66 
 
 
 C6 
 
 CONTENTS. , 
 
 »■'■■■-.■ 
 
 UB80K 
 
 ^L. Passive Periphniatic Conjugation . . / V * 
 
 • XLII. Personal Pronouns^^o, tii is ' * * * 
 
 yJ^S* ^''a''^ ""* ^«^"* ^^ Gerundives .' .*' V . ' * 
 
 ^LV ?^"i':^r°''^'- Po««-BiveProhoun;' ' ' 
 XLV. Perfect Participle Passive % ' * 
 
 iyj?^''°*^"'^''P^"^°«^«- I^resent Infinitive* Passive - 
 XLIX. Demonstrative Pronouns, ipse, idem . ^'''^ V 
 
 U Ablative Absolute . . °. - ' * 
 
 • > LI. Interrogative Pronouns * ' * ' °" " 
 
 LIII. Deponent Verbs . ' * ' ' 
 
 - ^V f^^'7«^8P««ifi«ation: Ommwith ^ompirative * 
 LV. Accusative and Infinitive ^"pawne . 
 
 m. Genitive and Ablative of eha;acte;istic* * ^* ' 
 
 Present and Perfect Infinitive Passive. Infiniti;es oi 
 
 LVnr AufT'^T'- I>*«^« «^-Purpose . "'*^*^«« °^ 
 
 LX. Pltjperfect Subjunctive Active. Subj;ncti;e of' sum' 
 Cum with Subjunctive . """' 
 
 LXI. Po8s^m . . jm£ ,. ! ; • • 
 
 LXII. Perfect Subjuncti jPtive: : Subjuictiv; P^v; 
 
 ■ IXTTT ^f."^J"^°*^^««^M«ct Question . ^'^"• 
 
 LJLIII. Volo, nold, maid . 4»» * • • . 
 
 ^^ ^"^'"^*" ^^^" ^ ^"^^^* N«^won ; t : 
 
 LXVI. Subjunctive of Purpose '* * * * * 
 
 LXVIH. Gerund . ' * ; 
 LXIX. Gerundive Construction V 
 LXX. Indefinite Pronouns 
 Supplementary Exercises ' . 
 I^view Exercises in AociJeiioe 
 
 Vii 
 
 PAea 
 68, j 
 
 69 
 
 . 61 
 
 . ^2 
 
 . 63 
 
 . 65 
 
 . 67 
 
 . 68 
 
 '. 69 
 
 72 
 
 .74 ; 
 
 76 
 
 78 
 79 
 81 
 84 
 
 * 
 J55 
 
 87- , 
 88_ 
 
 «9; 
 91 
 
 ■x ^"•.- 
 
 lamic 
 
 92 
 
 94 
 
 96 
 
 97 
 
 98 
 100 
 101 
 102 
 104 f 
 106 
 
^ 
 
 Vlll 
 
 ,j 
 
 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 PART V. 
 
 I. Rules of Syntax and Exercises in Prose Composition. 
 
 c 
 
 
 PAO« 
 
 [!oncor<J 
 
 s . 
 
 .'385' 
 
 • ' 
 
 • 
 
 . 291 
 
 .•■■>- 
 
 . • 
 
 : 293 
 
 - ■.>.!. 
 
 • 
 
 /<298 
 
 /• 
 
 ' • 
 
 .302 
 
 '• 
 
 ' • . 
 
 . 305 
 
 ."■'■ ,-■• / 
 
 • 
 
 . . 309 
 ). 313 
 
 • 
 
 ■ 
 • 
 
 CHAFTItl 
 
 Introduotory.-^Order of Words, Order of Clauses, Conconjs . 
 J I. The Accusative and Inftnitlve 
 II. "Complementary Infinitive . . ! . 
 * -» III. Final Clauses (dlauses of Pur jJose) . 
 IV. Consecutive Clauses (Clauses of Result) . 
 'V. Questibns, Direct and Indirect . «^ . 
 yi. The Present and Perfect .Participles' . 
 VII. The^ Ablative Absolute . ,. , . 
 • Vm. Verbs Completed by the Dativ^, the Genitive or the 
 
 .' ' Al>la|bive. *The Impersonal Passive . . - . , 316 
 
 IX.. Conditional Sentei;ices . .' . . **. . . ^20 
 X. Clauses of Concession. Clauses of Proviso. • Conditional 
 
 Clauses of Comparison 324 
 
 XL. Uses of the Acbusativo * • •. . . . . . 327 
 
 XII. Uses of the Dative . . . . . . ^ .,331 
 
 XIII. Use^ of the Genitive . . ., . . . . 336 
 
 XIV. Usesof the Ablative . . . , I . .341 
 ^ XV. Vef-bal Nouns — Infinitive, Gerund, Supine .♦ ". . , . 848 
 -* ^VJ. Verbal Adjectives — Gerundive, Participles . . ,3S52 
 
 XVJIi- Expressions of Place and Time . . ; . . 355 
 
 XVIII. Imperative. Independent 'Uses of the Subjunctive . 359 
 
 XIX. Verbs of Fearing. Uses of Quln and Quominm . . 363 
 
 XX: Dirty, Necessity, Possibility, Pei-mission .^ . . .36^ 
 
 ^XXI. Causal Sentences. Uses "of Cum -. : ^^ ^^-^^^ ^^^ — 
 
 XXII. . Temporal Clauses . - .' . . 373 
 
 XXIII. Personal, Demonstrative, Reflexive and Possessive Pro- 
 
 nouns« . . ' m' * • • • • 377 
 
 XliV. Indefinite Pronouns . » ' ^ ^- • '^^* •^82 
 
 iSv. The Relative Pronoun . «'.*.. ♦', •: '386 
 
 XXVL Subordinate Clauses in Indirect Narration . . .390 
 
 XXVIL Tenses of the 5jidieative. . . , - ; ^, .394 
 
 XXVIIL Indirecti^arration . ^ . .- ; . . , . 398 
 
 XXIX. Diflferent Forms of thp Noun X^ause . * * V 406 
 
,■ •t-. 
 
 OSITION. ' 
 PAQl 
 
 , . 281 
 
 • ' • «M«fO 
 
 ^ ^ 298 
 7^ . 302 
 . .305 
 . . . 309 
 . / . 313 
 3r the 
 . . 316 
 
 . . feo 
 
 iiional 
 
 . 324 
 
 . .327 
 
 . .:33r 
 
 . .336 
 . 341 
 . . 348 
 . .>352 
 . .355 
 e . 359 
 
 . ms 
 
 . .36? 
 
 - i m 
 
 . . 373 
 
 B Pro 
 
 . 377 
 . 382 
 ^186 
 . 390 
 .:394 
 . S0IS 
 . 406 
 T=-tiO= 
 
 1 .V ■;- 
 
 /•--•' 
 
 
 
 • •I 
 
 "'« •■ 
 
 ■:'*■ 
 
 v.. 
 
 ■M"--^ 
 
 
 
 / ' V- 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK 
 
 \' 
 
 ;/ 
 
 I=fARX I, 
 
 
 • INTEODUCT^Y LESgoijS Ind EXERCISES. 
 
 .. ■.,>/ : - V"; ';.-»:■ ■ ■:'.■:■ •;:••:;■ ■ "■ 
 
 , V- ^RONUlsrciATlON OF. LATIN- 
 
 ^ ^ I. Sounds of- the Letters.» ' " 
 
 ft is ^wMied like the'first a in^oM, papa. 
 ^ * " second /u'iV^ I. ^ «^-^ 
 
 1,0^ 
 
 # 
 
 & 
 ^8 
 S 
 Jf 
 I 
 Q 
 
 6. 
 1i 
 
 tl 
 
 •I 
 
 II 
 If 
 
 II 
 II 
 
 ^.*y.: 
 
 second aiiiafui, papai 
 'A 
 
 II 
 
 ^ 
 
 / 
 
 II 
 II 
 II 
 II 
 II 
 
 e in they. _• ' , ^ 
 t irTat*^ • '. *- . ^ ♦ ■: ': 
 i inmachiig^. \\ 
 o in obey, or the firatVin oho. ^' 
 • o in ^Zy, or the second o in oho. 
 It in^t*, or 00 in foot. 
 00 in hoot. • . ; 
 
 J 
 
 
 >* 
 
 ,w 
 
 ^--J 
 
 .^ 
 
m 
 
 I ! 
 
 / 
 
 . ; 
 
 ll^- 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 Dlphthonjfrs. 
 
 In diphthofigs both vowels phould be sounjiedan^ their 
 
 proper order. 
 
 " 
 
 f ■ 
 
 
 ae is sounded much like the 
 
 at in padn.^ 
 
 *tt -• II 
 
 ir" 
 
 II 
 
 <yu in our, houte. 
 
 06 M 
 
 M 
 
 It 
 
 wa in loade.^ j. 
 
 •i . H 
 
 11 
 
 II 
 
 ei in vein. 
 
 •U ij 
 
 11 
 
 II 
 
 ew in blew. 
 
 tti ' It 
 
 - 11' 
 
 II _ 
 
 ttat in tveep. 
 
 
 '.W . 
 
 Consonants, 
 
 ",. V 
 
 Consonants are for the most part pronounced i^ in English, 
 with the following exceptions : .- * 
 
 . " * . ■.■".'■■■.■• 
 
 0' is always i^unded as ip com«, liever as in cent.. 
 
 g 
 
 II 
 
 II 
 
 m game, n 
 
 ii^^cri». 
 
 ■ ' 
 
 -' II 
 
 M 
 
 in this, II 
 
 II his. 
 
 
 M 
 
 • 
 
 If 
 
 iA native, ji .. 
 in axe, a 
 
 II naiion. 
 M exact 
 
 j 
 
 1» 
 
 II 
 
 yinyet. 
 
 .v\ ■ ■■ 
 
 V 
 
 II 
 
 II 
 
 ^ in vxint. 
 
 n before c, g, qu, x, is sounded as ng, or as n in an^. . 
 , 11. Syllabication. . - 
 
 ■•; ' ■ ;^ ., -• . . . ■ ' \ . ' , •^ 
 
 In the* following list the words in parentheses are EngligK 
 words to be contrasted with the Latin; in other cases ^ the 
 Latin and tl^e English words to be contrasted have the same 
 .'spelling, the quantity of the Latin words being marked." 
 
 Dii, salvS, miles, pares, mdne, cdre, honor, c<ymes, odnsUmis^ * ^ 
 pahna {palm), aliinns {alien), resistd {resist), possiisiO {possess, pos^ 
 iession), co||^fofillR?r-^«andemn), legiiinis {legion), festind {h(uten\ ' 
 '' 4iHptidlii^iiptiaJ), a/nctid {auction), disertor {deserter), scSna {soen*)^ * 
 r9gnim\reigning). 
 
 _ *% .■•;"■ : ' " ** 
 
 "^ vlr^ It la held by some that tu U apunded like ai in aMs, and Mliks ot in tain. 
 
 fc Thnwighpiit thlfc 
 
 aeoordl 
 
 y( ^ ^ |j i^ f^^ indiflataili a T t oa Pt in 
 
 Towsb not marked are 
 
 [ingljr to be regarded as abort. 
 
 
PART L--INTRODUCTOKY LESSONS. 
 
 3 
 
 . inSt^tS ^ ^^ ^^^^-^- ^^ sounds .pres^l;. 
 
 ;..:'■■ ,;- : ■^^^:.■-.;■;,,.•; .III. ACCENT.^ "',.r::f\-. ■', "^ ■ 
 
 (a) mc^-vea 
 an'-nas 
 
 rf-pa 
 I'-ter 
 
 .t«'-ld 
 
 ▼a da 
 Mr'-vo c6n'-.nl 
 
 Ob.ervatlon.-How are words of two syllables accent ? 
 
 (b) «pe-ra'-mns 
 ▼eo-tl-s&'.ii 
 
 •a-lu'-tem 
 
 re-dux'-lt 
 
 po-ten'-t£s 
 
 l-do'-ne-us 
 
 i* -ne-ra 
 
 precedes two consonants • Z li! 1 !««* «jUable is long or 
 
 <^« 
 
 LESSON I. 
 
 («) 0^P»,n4mn.. «» <«Ja<*. ,„Mm».. u^ order. 
 
 Valnerant, <^y iwund. 
 (c) Valnerat. he, she or iip\ 
 - ivounda. 
 
 OoQvoo&a, 1/ou co/i together. 
 
 Bemovent, *^i/ renu>re. 
 Obtlnet, Ae, ghe or it, occupies. 
 
 Removes, i/ot* remove, ? Z 
 
 <^^ •peaking to one person.) 
 
 «' 
 
 
 
 Jfs. 
 
PBIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 ! :' 
 
 ! 
 
 Canvoe&tl», you call together. RemovHi», you remom, 
 (When speaking to more than one person.) 
 (d) Vulnero. I , wound. Jubeo. I order. \ 
 
 Oppngno, I attack. Ohtlneo, I occupy. 
 
 Ob8ervatlon.-How does Latin express the persons we, they, 
 M she It, you and I, as subjects of thejerb ? What two classes 
 of verb are represented ? What irregularity is there in joining 
 the personal endings to the first part?! . 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 "^ Vo<^bulary. . 
 
 (Are and «re are U8e*d to indicate -a and -§« verbs respectively.) 
 
 Adeqaito, Are, ride up. 
 Cdnvood, Are, summon, call 
 
 together. ^ 
 
 Habed, 6re, have. 
 Impero, Are, give order», 
 Jabed, fere, order. 
 ^hvlgo, &re, sail. 
 Obtlneo, §re, occupy. 
 
 ^■asfii 
 
 Oppugrno, Are, attack. 
 PAreo, §re, be obedient. 
 Faro,- &re,^prepare, procure. 
 Permoved, §re, alarm. 
 Proper©, Are, ^a«^«n. 
 Removed, ere, remove. 
 Teneo, 6re, hold. 
 Valnerd, Are, wound. 
 
 I.-1. PermovSs. 2. TenSmus. 3. Convocant. 4. Parfttis. 6 
 Imperfimus. 6. Jubet. 7. Pftr6mus. 8. Vuhierant. 9. HabeS.' 
 10. JubStis U. Tenet. 12. Adequitant. 13. Removet. 14. 
 Propero. 15. Oppttgnfttis. 16. ObtinSs. 
 
 i^"^' '^^}^^f 2. He sails. 3. I hold. 4. You (singu. 
 W)orfer. 6. Yon (plural) h^ye. 6. We prepare. 7. She has. 
 8^I«jccupy. 9^Hewounds. 10. It alarms. 11. They remove. 
 12. She as obed„nt. 13. We give orders. 14. You (plural) 
 alarm. 15. They attack. 16. You (singtUar) ride up. 
 
 ng is -amut or -ant, ^mu$ 
 aded to forms fr«tirAw>ntir.« 
 
 or i»?*'i^«iIS"f h"""* "'^* J^ supposed that the endln» 
 7T". J *""***«. the same end iim, -mw». -nt etc ar» «HH 
 
-INTKODUOTORT LBSSONa g 
 
 . . ' ■ *-^ '■ 
 
 LESSON II. -' 
 
 (a) Vainerimu.. we wound or u^ are wounding. 
 ^abent, . f^V order or th^y are <n-denZ. 
 Oppu«n»t. heattac)^ or he is attacking. ' 
 
 Bominl, <Ae jRoman». 
 
 Nautae, fAe aaiiora. 
 • » lieutenant calls together 
 '('he lieutenants order. 
 tf>^ victory aiarms. 
 
 I 
 
 (6) Bdm&nna, a Bcyman 
 Naata, the sailor, 
 l-eg&tn» oonvooat, 
 lie^&tljubent, 
 Victoria pennovet. 
 
 - "« v^t^wry Oriart 
 
 Vlctorlae permovent, vict<mes alarm. 
 
 ^ endings, -t .„d .r^tltd? ^T^ '" ^"° ' The person.! 
 whenfLglish d„::'^mTC" * """" '" "' ™'^"'' ""* 
 
 EXERCISE II. 
 
 Vocabulary,' '"I 
 
 Bapbarnfc I. m., barbarian. aalln. ■ ™ « , , 
 
 B*lg* «e. m., Bd^n (one of th ^ ^ ^" "•"™ »' 
 
 » tribe in Gaul) " ^ , /""' '"""'^ "»"«1 G">1)- 
 
 • plural), /«^, ^""'' <'» ^"»"°- »7- «»»-'«0«. 
 
 «potn\TK:„t';^^^;^rcr:'- '■'^■^«- 
 
 nent 7. Barbart «leqS 8 OeJ^ T' *• **" "^ 
 "PpOgnant. 10. Bel^eTbUnL iT^ "^*""- "• T"™« 
 
 .ent 10 'tt.Jt "^^ ^PpW. 15. Victariaa 
 
 movent. 16. JNTauta habet. 
 
 # 
 
 per- 
 
6 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 n.— 1. We are awaiting. 2. They are removing. 3. He is 
 holding. 4. The ^uadrons ride up. 6. The victory alarms. 6. 
 The allies summon. 7. The lieutenant is sailing. 8. The sailor 
 removes. 9. You are prepariiM;^ 10. The Belgians have. 11. 
 The forces occupy. 12. The^man is ordering. 13. We are 
 obedient.' 14. The lieutenant is giving orders. 15. The Gauls 
 occupy. 16. The barbarians axe attacking. "^ 
 
 ; 
 
 n^ 
 
 LESSON' III. 
 
 v^ 
 
 Tlotdria R6m&nos permovet, the victory alarma the Bomans. 
 LSgr&tas vlotdrlam nuntiat, the lieutenant announces the victory. 
 €6piae legatom exspeotant, the forces are atvaiting the lieutenant., 
 Bom&nX oopias exspeotant, the Somans are aivaiting the forces. 
 
 ObserT|itlon.->|What different forms have nouns in us and a» in 
 the singular and the plural, when they are .used as the subject, and 
 when they ar6 used as the object of ihe verb ?^ How does the 
 order of the Latin sentences differ from that of the English ?'' ' 
 
 Animus, I, m., spirit^ 
 
 heaH. 
 Captlvas, X, m., captive. 
 Comporto, Are.^rin^ tn. 
 €5nflrm6, Are, encourage 
 
 lishy arfuse. 
 Bqnas, I, m., horse. 
 Et, and. 
 
 EXERCISE III. -^, . 
 
 Tooabnlary. 
 
 «itnd, Nunttas, i, m.', messenger, met- 
 sage. 
 Pertarbo, Are, throw into con^ 
 ftision, disturb, 
 estah- Praeda, ae, f., pkinder. 
 
 Provlnola, ae, f., provined 
 Puirno,, Are, fight. 
 Servna, X, m., slave. 
 
 Labl^nus, I, m., LaMemis (a Saper6, Are, conquer, prevail. 
 
 Roman's name). 
 Looas, I, m., place, .positionf 
 ground. 
 
 Trlbunns, I, m., tribune (a 
 military officer among the 
 Rouuins). 
 
 1. The form used itfth&tfbbjeot Ib called the Ifominative Com, that uaed M th« 
 object the Adcvsative Case. 
 
 S. It mtut n()t be euppoaed mat this ordir ia invariable in Latin, but it should b« 
 rfft a tnad by -the hffjfinnffir -until he ha i l e an e d ■ ompthl i m »1 Uw (*mtt<oratle— lc = 
 
 to all other nnenu 
 
 ■ome of the cases) of vuiation from the general rule., Thia applies 
 rules of order, k) which attention may be directed. 
 
.1 
 
 PABT L— INTBODUpTOBY ^JESSONa 7 
 
 I.— 1. CSpifis superat. 2. Praedam comportftmus. 3. Bominl 
 locum obtinent. 4. Labifinus equos removet. 6. Le^Udd et 
 tribunos convocfts. 6. Viadriae animos confirmant. 7.. I^rvl 
 pOgnant. 8. NOntiuniexspectkt. 9. Captives habstis. 10.^elgae 
 GaUos superant. 11. Barbari Romanos et sociSs perturbank 12 
 Belgaa permovet. 13. Oopiam habeo. 14. Tiinna cojias perturb 
 bat. 15. Victoriam nOntias. 16. Nautae ISgfttum exspeotant. 
 
 II.— 1. The slaves are wounding the messenger. 2. The forces 
 occupy the province. 3. The Germans conquer the Gauls. 4. 
 The lieutenant conquers the Germans and the Belgians. 5. The 
 tribunes await the aUies. 6. You' attack the place. 7.' It abuses 
 the spirit. 8. The flight akrms the barbarians. 9. The sailor 
 announces the flight. 10. I am summoning the lieutenants. 11. 
 The forces are awaiting the squadroiis. 12. They have plenty 
 13. It disturbs the heart». 14. You (plural) are fighting. 15. 
 The sailors prevail. 16. The captive is obedient. 
 
 LESSON iv. 
 
 Equo» I6g&t6nun removet, he remove» the horse» of the lieu- 
 
 tenant». 
 Soclds Belar&rnm exspeotat, ^e atoait» the aUie» of the Belgian», 
 Puga tarmae anlmom i«ff&tl the flight of the »qtuuiron alarm» 
 
 permovet, the mind of the lieutenant. ' 
 
 Xki^om Wgritl removet, he remove» the lieutenant'* horae. ■ 
 
 Observation.— How is of expressed in Latin ? What is the 
 position of the word translated by means of o/, or by the Emrlish 
 possessive ?^ * , 
 
 EXERCISE IV. 
 Tooabalarjr. 
 Aedurt^ I. m., on Aedxum; in Coiitlne6, «re, hem in, restrain. 
 plural, the Aedm (a tribe in Cotta, ae, m., Gotta (a Roman's 
 
 <**"!)• name). 
 
 Clbu., I, m., food. , B5, ,,,, ^^^ g,^; 
 
 Conetll 6,fcre, >i4nnow. Fiim^ t , m .^. 
 
 1. This form to known m the QtniHvt Com. 
 
8 
 
 PniMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 ■!i 
 
 'I . 
 
 «alba, ae, m., Oalbix (a Eo- Oooupfi, Are, «etee. > V 
 
 ^ man's name). Porta, ae, f., ^ofe. 
 
 Inopla, ae, f., Joan*, «carc%. Probo, Are, /owr. ; ^ 
 
 KAtura. ae. f., nflrfwre. Sententia, ae. f., opinio». 
 
 Obaideo, «re, blockade, beset. via, ae. f., road. 
 
 I.— I. RCmanl copias Germftnorum superant. 2. Sententiam 
 Cottae probamus. 3. Sententia LabiSnl superat. 4. Inopia cibi 
 Belgfts perturbat. 6. Equum Galbae vuhierat. 6. Socil Belgft, 
 rum locum oppflgnant. 7. NstOra loci Aeduos continet. 8. Aedui 
 portfia occupant. 9. VictSriae copiftrum animos sociorum cSnfir- 
 •Mrt. 10. Barbarl copiSs parant. 11. Copiae Belgarum locum 
 obwdent. 12. LabiSnus copiam captlvorum habet. 13. Fuga 
 turmftrum Belgfts permovet. 14. Equos l6gat6rum removet. 15. 
 Victoriam ISgfttl nOntiat. i 
 
 n.—l. We are removing the horse of the lieutenant. 2 The 
 allies of the Aeduf give food. 3. Galba's sons procure horses. 4. 
 The victory of Galba arouses the Belgians' spirit. 5. The forces 
 of the allies beset the roa48. 6. The tribune's son has plenty of 
 horses. 7. You are wounding the sons of Cotta and Labienus. ^ 
 The heutenant wins over the Belgians. 9. The Belgians are 
 awaiting the forces of the Gauls. ,10. A squadron 'rides up 11 
 They favor the place. 12. The tribunes and the lieutenants 
 restrain the forces. 13. We favor the opinions of the lieutenants 
 and the tribunes. 14. Galba procures forces. 
 
 i>Um. 
 
 50N V. 
 
 tESSO 
 
 (a)L6g4t6vlot6ilamnuiitlat. he cmrmmces the victory to the 
 
 - lieutencmt. 
 
 Provlnoiae Imperat. ; h^ gives orders to m provmee. 
 
 CoplU imperat, ' he gives orders to the forces. 
 
 Sootl. praedam ddnat, hejntsentsthepiwndertotheaUiM. 
 
 ^b.wvatlon.-How is to before a noun expressed in Latin? 
 mat IS the position of the wo rd transited by means of tofi 
 
PABT I.~INTRODUCTORY LESSONa 
 
 9 
 
 (6) Ad pravtoolam properat. he hastens to the proving 
 Adcoplasadequltat. he rides up Uf the forces. 
 
 Ad egrato. adequHat. , he rides up to the lieutenants, . 
 Ad locum learatos oonvooat, he mmmms the lieutenants to the 
 
 place. ^ 
 
 *^T'*"'!r*"' !« «0 ««fo" a noun expre^ed in Latin 
 
 -;>;- :: :: :-^';'-^ • ■ exercisjj v. "' /. ' ^ ^/ ^;- \ ' . '. 
 
 Vooabnlary. 
 Agrrlcultura. ae. f., agHoidtt^, Pertlneo. «re. e:«W 
 
 fa/i-ming. 
 Oono, are, present^* 
 Evooo, |kre. chaUenge. . 
 Fliia, ae, f., dari^hter. * 
 !talla, ae, f., Italy. 
 hegatns, I, m., arnbassad&r. 
 
 Praestd« l^re,^ ««perior. 
 Ffiarna,!^, f., mm, fighting. 
 Responded, *re, r^y, 
 Rhgnoi I. m., the Mine. 
 Blpa, ^, f., hank. ^ ■ 
 Sllva^,^e, f., wood, forest. 
 
 VentMo, are, cowie o/fcn. 
 
 Cralll I^mShos ad pflgnan^svocant. 6. berma^ Belgis praestent' 
 7. I^SgStus ad copifts adeolkitaf ft H««;^t>- . - "^e"* P™®««"it- 
 
 Sa™ ad locum pertinTt T2 ^'l ^^^,^'?*» «dequittaui. 11. 
 
 II.— 1. Labienus hastens to W foreea 9 T™, ._ 
 the forces of the Belirians 1 w! .. ^ supenor to 
 
 Theyg„.ntpartJr^th -^tivt TCrn*!?""™""- *' 
 the alUes of the Ge™a„srilX„ir « JT''''" ™ o™' 
 
 thewaUs. 7. The woods, extend t^rBh^elTS:!^"'" 
 to the provinofi Q w« V . -^n*"e- o. 1 giv&«orders 
 
 «nh»r.r °n ^r?_':° J.:'!!. ^;:!"' ^ °' "■- •^<- >- *^ 
 
 ^«.a^n, Hde up to the ha^ha^'. irSrnus'::piri^;„!^: 
 

 10 
 
 PAIMART LATIN BOOK. 
 
 ambassadors. 13. He cbaUenges the Gaul to battle. 14. The 
 forces of the Germans ride up to the banks of the Rhine. 15. He 
 summons the lieutenants to the province. ^ 
 
 ^■^ 
 
 1 ,» 
 
 ' |i 
 
 LESSON VI. 
 
 (a) Opp&irn&bat. he ims attacking, or^ iuied to attack. 
 
 Jabel»&inas, we were ordering, or toe tised to order. . ^ 
 
 Convoo&bant, th^y were summoning, or they used to summon. 
 
 PermoTebatis, you (plur.) were <rf#rmtnsr, or ymi ^ised to alarm. 
 
 Talner&bAa, you (sing. ) v;ere wounding, or you used to vxmnd. 
 
 (6) Jnbebam, I was ordering; or I used to order. 
 
 ^ ponTocAban^ Twa^ summoning, or I used to summon. 
 
 Observation.— ThjS new element in the Latin verbs. What 
 Idea does this neW element eiqaress ? What new personal ending 
 is used? What point of time is referred to ?^ 
 
 ■^■:-'^■-^^:v/ ■:.:.■:•;- EXERCISE VI. -' '■^\-:^;^ :,;. '■'y:::'.■ 
 ' "'" '" Voeabnlary* ^' 
 t OoiiipleA. ^vt>,jm up, fill. Hlemo, Are. pass fhs Winter, 
 
 ^rmot hret strengthen. winter. 
 
 Fosaa, ae, f., trench, moat. • Impetrd, Are, (A>tain one's^ re- 
 Fanda, ae, f., «Ktn^. quest. 
 
 Gallia, ae, f., Qa^d (the country Prdvooo, Are, call <mt, challenge, 
 
 now called France). Remaned, £re, remain. 
 
 Qladinn, I, m., sword. Revood, Are, recall. 
 
 I.— 1. Exspectabftmus. 2. OppOgnabant. 3. ComplSbat. 4. 
 Habetis. 5. StudSbam. 6. Perturbant. 7. RemovSbat. 8. 
 Hiemabant. 9. Fossfis complsbaiit. 10. Gladium Hautae da- 
 batis. 11. Ad Galliam ventitabatis. 12. RemanSmus. 13. Ro- 
 manos ad pflgnam Svocabant. 14. Impetratis. 15. Fundam 
 hal^. 16. Locum firmabant. 
 
 1. No«oe th^ where wo» or were are uaed to translate these forms, containing the 
 letters -6a, the English verb will end in -inq. (The translation by the simple i>a«t 
 tenae of English ihould not even be referred to until the student is much furtom 
 •dyancea.) 
 
 %. Pbi A^«,A<r« t***», »iy, ow, your, in place qf im^», as the context migxests. 
 
PART L— INTRODUCTORT LESSONa H 
 
 « w! ^*" *r^'"^«- ,4- I ^*« obedient. 5. We used to have. 
 6. We are fiUmg up the trench. 7. You (pi^er.) were ordering 
 8 You (^n^.) are superior. 9. They were attacking the wall 
 10. I was hastenmg to Itely. 11. ^, was occupying 12. He 
 used to favor. 13. They used to have. 14. I remain 16 She 
 obtams her request. 16. They were strengthening the ^alls. 
 
 . .. , ■ 'f- ■ ■ ■ 
 
 LESSON VII. 
 
 (a) Warfttum fand& vulnerat, he wounds tJu lievienm^ with a 
 
 tiling. 
 Cum tnrm& prop*rot, h^ hmtens wUh a squadron.* 
 
 I-egatum ariadlo vianerat. t^ wotmds th^ lieuiemmt wUh a 
 
 sword. 
 
 Cum ooptl. hlemat. ^ inters tmth the forces. 
 
 Locum murl. et fo«X. ilrmat. A« stren^hens thepla^ with waHs 
 
 and trenches. 
 Cum Gain, puffuant. they Ji^M wUh the Gavls. 
 
 Ob-rvatlon.--In what t^o ways is with expressed in Latin f 
 Wha^correspondxng different is there in the meaning of «^^ 
 
 , (6) In GalllA hiemat. 
 In food remanent» 
 
 Copias & pug^n4 revoeat, 
 Ab It&llA properat. 
 
 he winters in Qaid.^ 
 
 they remain in the plaee. 
 
 he recoils the forces from battle. 
 
 .... - he hastens fr&m Italy. 
 
 e*r** ** ^6«»Anl., Im- he obtains his request frmn the 
 ***'**• ^^^wmtand the Bmnans. 
 
 1. These forms are known m the Al>laHve Case. ' " 
 
 ynents, mSJer^SS^'^; Sn^^idiS %; "'^* *»?« R,„,„h y^th, !s used of one'. 
 
 
w» 
 
 ; 
 
 t 
 
 r 1 
 
 12 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BQOK. 
 
 EXERCISE VII. 
 
 1): 
 
 Tooabnlary. . 
 
 Clroanido, «re, mMTownd. Peoutito, ae. f, nu>fUiy. ^ 
 
 Colloc6.are. station, place. Permaned, §re.i>er*M*. 
 
 Compare, are, raise, coUect. Prohlbeo, ere, restram, 
 
 Contlneo, ere, keep, hem in. Ramu». l, m., branch. 
 
 ■ "Vfurta,ae,f., iwongr-^foinatn- Sa«ltta,ae,f., arrow. 
 
 Insldlae, arum, f. (used in plu- Submoveo, ere. drive off. 
 
 raljonly), ambush. \ 
 
 Italia hiemabamus. 3. Galli milros copiis complfi^ 4 Bel«ae 
 Wmoroet fossa firmant. 5. Silva ab AeduisTBelg«s peS- 
 net. 6. Labi6nu» copiSs m Insidiis coUocabat. 7. Barbari fossfts 
 ramls complent. 8. Cum tu^ma ad locum properabam. 9. Triba- 
 num sagitta vulnerS^. 10. Captivi in sententia permanent. 11. 
 Copias a pagna revocabanius. 12. Sagittis et fundis A^duos a 
 maro submovebant. 13. Cum fflio Iggati ad Iteliam navigabatis. 
 14. Barbari m loco remanebant. 15, LSgatI Aeduorum a sociTs 
 Gemanorum impetrant. 16. GermanI cum Belgb pflgnabant. 
 17. Animos copiarum pecOnia sollicitatis. 
 
 II.- 1. Forests 'used to extend from Gaul to Italy. 2 The 
 tribunes were keeping the forces in the woods. 3. He was re- 
 straining the allies from battle. 4. The barbarians used to fight 
 with shngs. 6. They reriiain with the lieutenant. 6. The aUies 
 were raising forces in Gaul, 7. We were surrounding the place 
 with trenches. 8. t^bienus\used to winter with the aMes 9 
 \ye were^sadmg from Itely to the province with the lieutenant. 
 lU. Ihe barbarians used to station ambushes in the wood^ '^ H 
 You were wounding the tribune's son with a sKng. 12. W 
 obtains her request from Labienus. 13. You are driving off the 
 Gauls from the place. 14. I was passing the winter ^th the 
 heutenant and tribunes m the province. 15. They were tiyina to 
 
 
) 
 
 4 
 
 PART I.— INTBODUGTORY LESSOlNa 
 
 18 
 
 A..i>. 
 
 . •-- - LESSON VIII. 
 
 '"^ '" ZZT "^'X- ""■ '^'"V'^^(y^) opinion. La. 
 
 ' rti- .. T,r, - ( opinion. ' , 
 
 Observatlon.-What forms of the nouns endini. in ^ ^ 
 
 used in speaking to a nfir«nn 2 t , . .^^^ ^ "' ^***^ * «^e '^ 
 
 order m which the case, are us^Sy ariZ^ ^ ^? ?, ,'?'' 
 
 - forjns ofV noun in this order is cauld Z^' ^' "^ ** 
 
 aiff^ntsoriesofendings^«.Z'^,,t*:"**»<'"»' '"' *^ 
 
 «.ita^d 'r""' "^' '°^°" ^' «« ?«««»-' %-rfs ^,„. " 
 
 ded,ension of „1, and th^f „» »''«">» Jhe<Jiff^„ce between the 
 
 by always gi^ Te^I^tetinr a ^f" '°J- *"" ^""""^' 
 -un endin, in t is leolin'e™ Z pit TS:.^^^ "•"*« » 
 
 Muram et f..^. or n.armn ^ ,^ „^ j„^ 
 fogsamqne, .... ^ 
 
 -^^'!!li*!!!^rf^^^ of .q„e.* 
 
 iirinfnT f— "-A""' -"" «ntil ExercL XMV o^V^T "^l"**^ have often to 
 
 I? into Utm. Per several exerS ?o comlt h?«**' bere^''arly omitted in 
 
 omission. *° ^*""® ***«8« word? are put in paren- 
 
 I'g g'S^^^ kS; »^y'!;„"o^ giv^n. and a, no 1^. .. ... ,,, 
 
 ^^^yi j-g!i mt .||. thn Mn^H. u> fadtarte to what deolerisSn 5S 
 
 ^-^■•MsZXtV^^X" "'"^' *'*•' ^*^"* ^« *'"«d to the aynable before' -,„.; 
 
 y 
 
 

 rBIMART LATIN BOOK, 
 
 EXERCISE VIII. 
 
 
 VoMibalary. 
 mgnfm.ylandjfieldytem Need, &re, ibtZI. 
 
 tory. 
 
 Amloitla, ae, f., friendship, 
 . Amicus, i, m.,ym7Mi. 
 Arbiter, t^;!, m., ar6i(rerfor. 
 Faber, bri, m., toorkmcm. 
 
 Non, not. 
 
 Ooioialtd, &re, concecU, ,. 
 Puer, eri, m., hoy. 
 Sooer, erI, m.y father-in-Uiw.^ ^ 
 TAoo, &re, be iinoccupiedy' 2m 
 wade. , • 
 
 /n 
 
 Oener, erI, m., son-in-law^ 
 
 Uberl, drum, m. (in plural Va«td, Are, lay loowtc. 
 
 . GBly), children. Vlou», i, m., vOfce^. 
 
 MArons, 1, m., Marcu» (a maii|s Vlr, w^iri, m., mem. 
 
 name). ^ * 
 
 I.r-1. Agros ^lffodsqple^ Aedul, habStis. 2. LabiSnus fabrte 
 nautasque ad GaUi«p oonvocat. »* Cum llberis ad RhSnum pro- 
 perant. 4. GaUls, so^il, arbitros dant. 5. X Iggftto, Belgae, nSn 
 impetrftmus. 6. ~€tormAnI agrj;||^el^um vastftbant. 7. Cum 
 Aeduls, Labis Jte, amloitiam confirmfis. ' 8. In agriis Aeduoriim 
 liiemftbftmus. 9. Pueros tn sUvte txjoultant. 10. Socenun ISgfttl 
 llberoBque necant. 11. Virum gladio vulnerant. 12. Cumgenerto 
 ad copifis adequitat. 
 
 n.— 1. He grants lands to tHe ton-in-law ojf the tribune. 2. 
 ^^r?uits pardon to the boys. 3. The workmen used, to come 
 oSmt to tjie wall. 4. You u6ed to have friends, Marcus.' 6. The 
 lands. of the Belgians are unoccupied. 6. ^e ^a^i^gre estab 
 lishing friendship with the Belgi^Mu 7. The forc^8 B^i£h ting 
 in the land. of the Belgians. J. The father-in-law j||^B^pnant 
 was giwg iftoney to the children of (his) ^end. 9. They are 
 giving landi^ to the Germans, lieutenant. 10. The men were fight- 
 ing M^words, the bbys with slings and arrows. 11. The forces 
 oTtheTMiilMia are laying waste the land of the Gauls. 12. They 
 ^mnilibush.- 
 
 were 
 
 'i$< 
 
* PART L— INTBODUOTOKV LB8S0II& - > IJ 
 
 LESSON' IX. ~ 
 
 (») In part Ili., section 3, « given the dedenrion of ..„p,„ 
 
 ifc^Zrlir^T^"''' ^'^ ** ^l^on of noun, ,„dln» in am 
 ifljr %om th»t of nouns ending in a. ? "ifuiam 
 
 olelditll'"* •"'"r'* '"""^ ""^ *• ««"bol"!" of thfa «,d 
 JSS"""' *" "'"*" - *• «*■«>« <" «•» noun. Zt 
 
 ^ ObaerTatlon.— Of what Bender are all >k^ T«*i 
 »efer to males? to fetoales ? t« wLT^' -^ ^ "**"^ *^* 
 
 >: EXERCISE IX. 
 
 I «I ^ Vocabulary. ^ 
 
 vascra, cram, n. (plural form nr.n^A a / - 
 
 _ «thsn,gjj„„,e.^),,^. -«*.*'•."«««. '"^"^ 
 
 L.= w.tU^„e.n.g),^^e_*..„.^ 
 
 
 icompknt r^ * P«»lio rerocat. 7. MOrum oppidTvi^ 
 
 vent' 10. ^r^;«L offlr'"*!**^:- «• ^"*- -•" -^ 
 
 teM»»». 12 BeUmn ^ """**"*• "• PnwudiS locum 
 

 y~l . 
 
 * 
 
 •a 
 
 M 
 
 PRIMiilY i^ATIN BOOK. 
 
 ■ -s^ 
 
 'v 
 
 n.r-il. They are 'stationing 'igaitisons in the towns. 2. Wft 
 were bringing in plenty of com. 3. The forces of the Belgiails 
 ^, were renewing war with Labienus. 4. The Germans continue in 
 (their) allegiance.; 5. The allies of the Romans kill the garrison» 
 of the toWTis. 6. He was arousing the spirit of the boy with 
 examples «nd rewards. 7. The children have an example. 8i 
 The Helvetians were laying waste the lands of the Aedui, and 
 taking by storm (their) towns and villages. 9. The forces were 
 renewing the battle. 10. They are attacking the camp. 11. 
 He was stationing a garrison in the town. 12.- They used to 
 come often with the barbarians to the winter quarters of the forces." 
 -13. You were surrounding the camp with a trench. 14. He gives 
 orders to the gafrison. 15. The Gauls attack the camp and fill up 
 the trench. 
 
 
 
 LESSON X. 
 
 (a) 1. Jj^gktxiH el&TXks, a fwmous liexdenant. 
 2. Tiotorla olara^ a/amot(^ incforj/. 
 
 '3. J^^eta'plvivct elhvxirnt a fammia exg/mpU. * 
 
 4. Leg&tl ol&rl, of afa/mous lieutenant. ' 
 
 6. Yletdri&e ol&rae, fa/nums victoriea. 
 
 (b) 6. ¥lr Claras, a /xmous man. 
 
 7. BelgaB clarlf the famovs Belgians. 
 
 8. Ager pikhlleua, puMic land. 
 
 9. Jjoena anper, a rough place. 
 
 10. Vanta perltn»f a akUful aaUor. 
 
 11. Vantarum perltornm, of skilftd aaUort, 
 
 (c) 12. J/Lalta exempla, many examples^ V * 
 
 13. Cum panel» BelglBf uHth a feio Belgians. 
 
 14. RellquI Belfirae, the remaining. Belgians. 
 
 15. M&gnae coplaet large forces. * . , 
 
 Ob8«rvatlon.— (a) Does the Latin adjective remain unchanged^ 
 like the English ? Is there a change in the gepder, the number, 
 or the case of the nouns accompanying the adjectives, comparing 
 (i.) 1, 2 and 3 ; (ii.) 2 and 5 ; (iii.) 1 and 4 ? 
 
 (6) Are the endinjgs of nouns and aajectives always alike ? Hnw 
 
PART L— INTBODUCTORY LESSONa |7 
 
 (c) What is the position of the adjective in 1 to 11 ? in 12 tol6? 
 When 18 the adjective placed before its noun ?i ' 
 
 In Part III., section 10, is given the declensibn of adjectires 
 whose mascuhne nominative singular ends in us or «r. 
 
 -Ob«ervatlon.-Is there any difference between the declension 
 ofi^these adjectives (bonus, liber and ae^er) and the declension 
 of the nouns given in sections 1, 2 and 3 ? How does the vocabu- 
 lary indicate whether an adjective ending in er is declined like 
 Ilber 6r hke aeger ? 
 
 •;."'■' EXERCISE X. 
 
 - Vooabulapy, 
 
 Advepgus. a. urn, urmiccessful. Latus. a, urn. broad, wide 
 Altnn, a, ,nm. high, deep, Mber. era, erum./ree. 
 
 A«per, era. erum. r^i^ged, rmt^h. Maipnus. a, um. great, large. 
 Commoveo, ere. disturb, alarm, Marltimn., a. um, mariHme, of 
 «^^*«*^;, or on the sea. ' "^ 
 
 ^'*^rtte'"' ^'^*"*' ''^^^oiis, Numeru., I, m., ntmftef . ; ; , 
 
 w M^- . "^ * ii , .-^-^^ ^'^* **• ^*' «hore, coast; dra 
 
 Ezolto, are, stttnidate. WW «.y,WK«.^ *i. > «'^ 
 
 „,• ., ' inarxtxma, the ^a coast. 
 
 Flnmmus. a, um. neighlnmng, PaucI, ae. a (plural), /eii;. 
 
 HeivJiT''* TTf .. >*»P«'«». I. m., nation, jacopfe. 
 
 the Helvettam. ^ Saxum. I. n., ,ton«. ^ 
 
 Idoneus. a. um. s^ntahle. soUlolto. Are. <m^«, 6n6e, «rj, 
 
 Inclto. are, aroiMe, ,<tV rep. to tvin oven. . 
 
 J'~^' ^""* ^*'^'* ^*^ ^* '"^^'^ »'*^ firmant. 2. 5ram mari- 
 
 ctum BeTl '""^*^«"*- «• S«>.«Hu«i adversum animos ^ 
 rjum num """^°"*- «' ^"^^^ -P^^ ^nsidifta coUoTnt. 
 8 T t¥ ""r"""" "^"^^™"^ "* ''^"^i"»"» Praedam copils dJnat 
 
 (c) when^he nonn is inodifl^d Tv k * h ;«^en»expre8BinK number or quantity: 
 
 _ 2. The best wavVfinonili« «# *^_-i-.. .. . ' ^**»" °- 
 
 
s 
 
 '(,-■/ • 
 
 1« 
 
 ■•^ 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 X 
 
 10. Ad provinciam finitimam ren- 
 
 locum idoneum convocant. 
 titabafc. ' . 
 
 II.— 1. A few tribunes were stirring up the allies by frequent 
 messag^es. 2. They are wintering in the provinces on the sea with 
 the remaining forces. 3. You were stimulating a few Gauls with 
 large rewards. 4. Rugged forests extend from the sea coast to the 
 neighboring proVinces. . 6. The Helvetians are superior to the rest 
 of the (literally, remaining) §auls. 6. We are laying waste the 
 Helvetian territory with large forces. 7. They used to strengthen 
 the camp with wide trenshes. 8. The neighboring province is 
 unoccupied. 9. He was raising large forces in the Helvetian 
 territory. 10. The defeats (literally, un^iccess/ul battles) alarm 
 the rest of the Belgians. - 
 
 (p) Impetrabis,. 
 Snperabitia, 
 Removeblt» 
 
 LESSON XL • 
 
 you will gain youj request, 
 you uHll conquer. 
 
 he will remove. , *■ . ^'.. 
 
 Cioxn^\i:\iimvkei, we shall Jill up. ♦ 
 
 Observation.— What new element is found in the Latin verbs ? 
 What idea does it express ? What point of time is referred to ? 
 (6) Imp«t;rabo, I shall gain my request. 
 
 Saperabnnt, they will conquer. 
 
 Removebo, / shall remove. 
 
 Oomplebunt, th^y u)ill Jill up. 
 
 Observation.— What variations occur in that part of the Latin 
 verb which expresses shall or unll f 
 
 EXERCISE XI. 
 Vocabulary, 
 Oattellam. I, n., fort. Laorlma, ao. f., tear. - 
 
 Corttas,a,uin,cereain,yi.ced, spe- Maltas. a, urn, miu^h, iyn plu". 
 
 ^iM^- ral) many. 
 
 «onddnd. Are, overlook. Obiieord, Are, 6c«MK*rfe^p^^^~ 
 
 Flrniaa, a, am. potmrful, strong. Peoiknia, ae, f., sum of money. 
 Impero. ftre. require, demand. Pcrlcnlam, I, n.. danger. 
 
 iaM|r«r» irra» grnm, fresh. 
 
 PrlvAtvs» a, mn, priv(Ue. 
 
 
initimam yen- 
 
 PART I.— INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 19 
 
 ^ I.~l. Multe oppida expugnabimus. 2. MSgnS» cum '^ul6 
 bellumrenovabitis. 3. L.gatos et tribunes ad cTrtum locu'Trn^ 
 vocabit ^ Injunas privatas condonabo. 5. Locum praesidio 
 firmo ten.b.t. 6. Copiae integrae bellum renovabunt. Tm^ 
 nam frmnenti copiam comportabamus. 8. Multis^ cum lacrini 
 legatunaobseorat. 9. Cert.m numerum fabr5rum imperubi~ 
 Copias to insidiis collooabis. f »"ii. j.u, 
 
 IL-l He will winter with thj rest of the forces in the' 
 ne,ghbormgprovmce. 2. Many Belgians wUl continue in (theW 
 allegumoe 3. We shaU surround the place with a wai aid 
 numerous forts. 4. Powerful nations wiU conquer Gaul T You 
 w, 1 conquer a powerful nation. 6. The rest of the Gennans d<^ 
 
 STl, V t '*"*". «"""^ of*" to ">« cmp with a laise number 
 o^ the barbanans. 9. They will strengthen the test of the ^ 
 
 ^mpZiT '"■ "" °P™°" "' "" -»' »' "•» «bun« 
 
 Ofc 
 
 of the Latin 
 
 LESSON XII. 
 (a) The student should examine and learn the endin™ nf rt« 
 «oun, of the thirf declension, given in Part IIL.LSon T 
 
 n m,^tre";othr/v""''r """"«' ^' *"« «>■'"«'' '"»» tJ" 
 
 formed ) * ° vocabulary are the other cases 
 
 (fc) Consul Rom&ntf,. a i?oman comitl. 
 Con«uii« Romanl. o/a iioman comiti. 
 Resrlo f Inltima, a neighboring district 
 
 Ab reglpne f Inltln.ft, /rom a neighboring district. 
 
 i' . _^ • • —'"" — I - 11 ■ ^p*' 
 
 -iuctlon. In the .»„e way dM ,^ often to ttsc^^^rjffi, TL\rTJ''' **' '" » 
 
20 
 
 PRIMART LATIN BOOK, 
 
 -^ 
 
 
 k 
 
 ,' . . „ EXERCISE, XII. '•■■__ ' l 
 
 . Vocabulary. , ' ■ ^r 
 
 Oaes-ar, -arls, m., Oatsar. Jk^les, mlllMg, m., addier. 
 
 Centari-6, -^onls, m., centurion. ]fli^titu-dd, -dlnis,f.,muJ^tYt«fe, 
 
 Clvl-t&Hf -thtlSf f., state, greaJt number. 
 
 Co-bors, -liortls, f., cohort, com- Obses, obsidls, m., hostage. 
 
 pany (one-tenth of a legion). Or-do, -dinls. m., rank. ^ 
 
 Eqnes, equitig, m., horse soldjer. Pax, paois, t, peace. 
 I (in plural) cawfn/. ; ,- | VedeBf pedltls, m., foot soldiefflJ: 
 
 f t^gl-b,-6nla,t, legion. ^ - (in phiraX) infa/ntry. ^^ 
 
 I Moroa-tor, -toHs, m., trader» , Serxb, are,' keep. ii li 
 
 1. — 1. ObsidSs Caesarl dabimus. 2. Mercfttor^ ad legiSheiit^ 
 ventitabant. 3. Pacem et amicitiam cum Caesare confirmUbit. 4. 
 MllitgaordinesnonjServabant.^ 5. Pauci peditSs mftgnam multi- 
 tadinem equitura superant* 6. Cum reliquls legionibus in Qallift' 
 hieipabS. 7. Caesar magnum obsidum numerum' imp^t. 8. 
 TribiinSs mllitum et cenfcurionSs convocabat. 9. Mililes reli- 
 quarum legionum civitfttem in oflBlcio cortt^Sbunt. 10. PaucS^ ; 
 cohort§8 in insidils coUocat. i ' 
 
 II. — 1. He rides up to Csesar. 2. Csesar will hasten with the 
 rest of the* legion to tl^ town. 3. You Wi^ grant pardon to the 
 centurion. 4. The rest laf the cohorts will lay waste the neighbor- 
 ing territory. 5. tVe were restraining the legions from battle. '•§-.. 
 The opinion of the centurion w^U prevail. 7. He fills thq,,camp 
 llith a multitude of soldiers. 8. paesar establishes peace with the 
 ^Neighboring stated. 9. He will \»jinter in Gaul with the rest of the 
 legion and the c^Valry. 10. Thejj try to win over the rest of ihe 
 states. 11. With a few soldi vs we shall hasten to the camp. . 
 
 f\ 
 
 )b( 
 
 I 1 ! 
 
 .. .. LESSON XIII. 
 
 , (o) Bxpugrn&vl, -^ - J have taken by storm, or I took by storm. ~ 
 Bxpuffn&vlatl, you (sing.) have taken by starm, or you took 
 
 by stoitn. 
 
 --^ A 
 
 I. S«e footooU 2, pay* 10> 
 
 
 ,»,-■ v'^ V i 
 
 I. SMfOOtQOttltPl^ir 
 
 A 
 
Y^^^T ^.—INTRODUCTORY LESSON& 21 
 
 ; Expugn^Tlt. , he has takeii by stam, or he took by storm ■ 
 . Expugnavlnms. ' we have taken by stoi-m, or we Jook by stoi^ 
 : Expufirpavl«tl8. yott (plural) ;ta,,e ^«A^n by storm, or yow ^oofc 
 * ' ' by storm.' ' - . 
 
 Expu«na,verunt, they have, taken by stcrrm^ov they took by st<yrm. 
 ObsePvatlon.-What changes occur in the verb forms, compar-' 
 ^cZi^f::^ ^^ ^^-blance to regular personal endi^s. 
 
 .inS.r::^r^^ ^^^^ ^^ ^" ^ eoniugaa as given^ 
 
 ^^b«ervatl^.-Are.theendii;^"&und in «xp^^navl, etc., 
 found in all these verbs ? . 
 
 (c) First Conjugation. 
 
 Present Tense. Perfe6t Tense. 
 
 amo 
 do 
 8td 
 adjuvo 
 
 atnavl 
 dedl 
 Btetl *• 
 adJuvX 
 
 Second Conjugation. 
 
 Present Tense. Perfect Tense. " 
 
 Third Conjugation. 
 
 Present Tense. Perfefct Tense. 
 
 inoneo 
 Tided 
 Jabed 
 remaned 
 
 monuX 
 vidl 
 JussX 
 re mans! 
 
 pegro 
 
 lego 
 
 sumo 
 
 mltto 
 
 pared 
 
 rfixl . 
 Mgl 
 sfiimpgl 
 migl 
 
 Fourth Conjugation. 
 
 Present Tense. Perfect Tense. 
 
 andio 
 
 venlo 
 
 vlnold 
 
 sentlo 
 
 ooinperlo 
 
 andlvl 
 
 venl 
 
 vlnxl 
 
 sens! 
 
 OQinperX 
 
 peperol 
 
 m^ril?"''"'""^' '•! '^*''»" ^^"^ *^" present t^ttie'perfect 
 re IcrorSvrilT:"^ f "*^"'^ '^^' conjugation? In what one 
 
 Notice that m tjievocabularies t^iat foUow, the perfect tei^e is 
 always clearly indftSted.». .- . .- |f«^ecii wnae w 
 
 »* oonluptlon i «rniLtom^LTiKw 'iVl "• '"".'1 ■»•« '" "•« pSi™ 
 
 i 
 
 '/ ' 
 
22 
 
 '■ 
 
 r-- 
 
 I 
 
 \ 
 
 * • ^ 
 
 PRIMARY LATIlf BOOK. 
 
 V 
 
 M' 
 
 EXERCISE XIII.v K ; r 
 
 si ■ V'/.. . ■ '•;..■>' '■.Vocabulary* ■ ■"■^,- /■ - - .7'''.' '^r.':;.' " \ _ 
 Aoolpld, aocepi, receu'e. • Munid, munlviv fortify^ protect, 
 
 Arma, armdrum, n. (in plural Per-maned, 6re, -mansi, retnam. 
 
 only), arms. 
 Do, dare, dedl, give. 
 Facio, fed, do, make. 
 Faoul-tas, -tatis, f., opportunity. 
 Gero, greggT, carry on, whge. 
 Jnvd, are, iuvl, aid; assist.-^ 
 
 Peto, petXvI^ ask, seek. 
 
 Pond, poanlt place, pitch (c&mp), 
 
 lay dmon. 
 Tra-do, -dldf, give up. 
 Vallum, 1, n,, wall, rampart (of 
 — "r^ camp). . ^- ^^ -^^^^_ 
 
 Moved, ere, movl, move. Venlo, veni, come. ^ 
 
 I.— 1. Gessimus. 2. AccSpSrunt. .3. Tradidit. 4. Caesar, 
 castra movit. ,5. JB[elv§tiI paceiri a Caesare petiveruni 6. Facul- 
 tatem' fugae c^ptivis dedistl. 7. Magna praesidia in oppidis posui. 
 8. ReliqUae Qphort§p castra vallo fossaque miiniverunt. 9. Caesar 
 magnam injuriam fgcit. 10. Socil legiones frumentS juverunt. 
 11. Caesar legionibus veniam dedit. 12. In officio permansimus. 
 13. Cum multis equitibus ad castra vSnit. 14. Arma po^ui^tis et 
 obsidSs dedistis. 15. Agros habemus. '^ / j 
 
 II.— 1. He has aided. 2. We gat«.- 3. She has sought. 4. 
 You have moved. 5. We came. ^. We received the hostages. 
 7. The Gauls waged war with Csesar. 8. They gave up, (their) 
 arms, cai)tive8 (and) hostages to Ceesar. 9. You' fortified the camp- 
 with high walls. 10. tJessar has made peace with the neighboring - 
 states. 11. The Gauls gave lands to the Germans. 12. I have 
 received many injuries from thfe Romans. ' 13. He placed a garri- 
 son in the camp. 14. You gave the legion to the lieutenant. 15.- 
 They came with a few horsemen to Ceesar. 16. The} rest of the 
 legion pitched the camp. 17. The soldiers* move th<J camp. 18. 
 You received great injury fijom Ccesar. 19. They have villages. 
 
 LESSON- XIV. 
 
 ^^e student should turn to the nouns of the third declension, 
 given in Part III., secti^ 5. 
 
 oi»i»vfttfSn.— uompafe the endings oi the nouna in wotioiTr 
 
 1 
 
PART L— INTRODUCTORY JJISSONa 
 
 23 
 
 with those of the nouns in section 4. What differences are there 
 in the endings? What is i the gender of the* nouns in section 5? 
 in section 4 ? In what rerfpect do neuter nouns of the second and 
 third declensions agree ? \ 
 
 EXERCISE XIV, 
 • Vooabalalry. " ' 
 
 Ag-nien,-mlnU,n.y line of inarch, Imped-ld, -IvI, obstruct. 
 
 army (on the march). 
 Amltto, diinlsl, Jose. 
 i[vert-6» -I^ turn asideJ 
 Contend-o, -I, liasten. 
 Dlg-«edd, -cessi, depart, 
 
 draw.^ 
 Flu-men, -mliilg, n., fiver. 
 
 with- 
 
 Iter, Itinerls, n., march, road, 
 I4at-a8, -erlg, n., side, Jtank. 
 Op-US, -erls, n., work, fortijicar 
 
 tion. 
 Per-floid, -teel, Jinish. 
 SIgrnum, I,, n., standard, signal.^ 
 Tnln-us, -erls, n., wound. 
 
 I.~l. Iter a. flamine avertimus. 2. Mflitgs opus perfScSrunt. 
 3.- PaucI equitSs yulnera acc6p6runt. 4. Magnis itineribus Caesar 
 ad fltimen contendit. 5. Signum proelil cohortibus dedit. 6. 
 Multi pedites ab agmine discgsserunt. 7. MllitSs ab opere revo- 
 cavit. 8. Silva pertinet a fltlmine ad castra. 9. LegatI ad Caesa- 
 rem in^ itinere vgnSrunt. 10. Cohort6s signa fimlsgrunt. 11. 
 Iter agminis impedlverunt. 12. HelvStii iter fScSrunt,* 
 
 ^^;~1- You have received a wound. 2. Csesar recalled the 
 soldiers from work. 3. Broad ^^ivers hem in the Helvetii. 4. We 
 have finished the fortification of the camp, 5. They have marched 
 (literally, ntade a march) from the province. 6. By a forced 
 {literally, great) march I came to the camp. 7. Csesar has turned 
 aside (his) march from the Helvetii. 8. ,We have lost a standard. 
 
 9. A few soldiers have left (literally, depaHed from) the standards. 
 
 10. The river has protected the sides of the camp. 11. We came 
 to the river with the rest of the cohorts. 12. We received a few 
 wounds. 
 
 -S 
 
 ^' ^eedoab^Ilmm, MUinWy, I depatt from. 
 
 S. A genitive depending on signum (=»igtMl) BhooM b« tmiuUtad byibr. 
 
 8. In ii In t^ls phraae to be tnndated on. 
 
 \ 
 
 r 
 
u 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOE:. 
 
 LESSON XV. 
 
 Dederam; I had given. 
 Miseras, you (sing.) had sent. 
 Jusserat, /w had orde^r^. 
 
 Teneramns, xve had come. 
 Jusseratls, yon (plural) had 
 
 ordered. 
 Dederant, they had given. 
 
 Observation.— Personal endings. What letters are found in 
 each Latin word ? What word occurs in the translation of each of 
 these Latin words? Referring to Lesson XIII. (c), aj-e these 
 forms obtained from the present or the perfect tense ? ^ _ 
 
 EXERCISE XV. ^ ; 
 
 Yooabulary-. 
 OdgnosoS. oogrnoifl, learn, find Mittd, mlsl, «enc{. 
 
 *"**• Ob-tlneo, ere, -tlnul, ^oW, IKW- 
 Con-fagld, -fugl,/ee. » »ess. ' 
 
 Oon-sldo, -sedl, encamp. Ooonp-o, are, -hvl, seize. 
 
 Con-venid, -veni, ifome together, Be-duoot -duxl, lead back. 
 
 assemble. IReganm, h n., royal potver. 
 
 I&ruptl 6, -onla, t, sally. Rhenus. 1, m., ij/iine. 
 
 Bxplora-tor, -tdrls, m., scout. Tlm-eo, 6re, -ul, /car, be afraid. 
 
 Impedimenta, dram, n. (in plu- Trans-duoo, -duxl, lead across. 
 ral), baggage, baggagyi^ani- • i ' "^ 
 
 mals. 
 
 I.— 1. CSpias reduxeras. 2. Ad RhSnum contenderat. 3. 
 LSgatSs misimus. 4. ExplSratorSs iter cognoverant. 5. Barbaras 
 fciment. 6, Eruptionem fgcerant. 7. CSpiae ,c6ns§deranfc. 8. 
 RSgnum obtinuerat. 9. AccSperSmus. 10. DiscSsserant. 
 GessSrunt. 12. PSceram. • 13. Vulnerant. 14. Dedimus. 
 Javistis. 16. Posueratis. 17. Petlvimu^. 18. DiscSssit. 
 ConfQgeramus. 20. Properat. 21. Imperftverat, 
 
 n.— 1. He had led the soldiers across. 2. They came together 
 
 to CfiBsar. 3. I shall seize the royal power. 4. We had sent 
 
 *S scouts. 6. They had fled to the baggage. 6. Ctesar encamped 
 
 with the rest of the forces. 7. Ambassadors had nnmft' f^ 
 
 11. 
 15. 
 19. 
 
PART I.— INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 
 
 25 
 
 The forces had encamped. 10. They received a few bounds 11 
 He has sought peace. 12. We had given. 13. You had led back 
 the legion. 14. I had finished. 15. We encamped. 16. She had 
 sent. 17. We were hastening. 18. You sent. 19. They wiU 
 wound. 20. I received. . . 
 
 LESSON XVI. 
 
 ~Ab Italia pertlnet, 
 Ad Caesarem venerant. 
 Cum Gallls pacem fecit, 
 De pace legratos mlserunt. 
 
 ^ extends from Italy. 
 
 they came to Ckesar. 
 
 he made peace with the Gauls. 
 
 they sent ambassadors concerning 
 
 {oT about) peace, 
 they hrin^ in com out of (or from) 
 
 the fields, 
 he winters in the province, 
 he sent the forces into (or to) Gaul. 
 sllvas Iter he marched between the river and 
 ; the woods. 
 
 he is influential among the Bel- 
 gians, 
 they marched through the province, 
 he found md through (or by means 
 
 of) the Hehetians. 
 he found oiit by means of letters. 
 ^ he found out aftef the battle. 
 Oer- they are^afraid on account of the 
 grmt number of Germans. 
 -, . they fear without cause. 
 
 1 rans Bhgnum oonsederunt. thsy encamped across the RhiAU. 
 
 c.rr.'?*/?,"'"'^^ meaning of the prepositions used, and the 
 case which follows each of them. The difference between m with 
 accusative and In With ablative; »b and ex, «d and m with 
 accusative ; the ablative of means and per with accusative. 
 
 ^xiPgrrls frumentam compor- 
 
 tant. 
 In provlnola hlemat, 1; 
 
 Coplas In Galllam mlslt. 
 Inter flumen et 
 
 fecit, 
 Inter Belgas valet, . - 
 
 Per prorlnolam Iter feoernnt, 
 Per Helvetlos oofl^novit, 
 
 liltterlg c5gnovlt, 
 Post pugnam odgnovlti* 
 Propter mnltltudlnem 
 
 nianornm tlment. 
 Sine oanga tlment. 
 
 i^ 
 
 \ 
 
26 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 Ky 
 
 Vocabulliry. 
 Auotorl-tas, -t&tts, f., influence. Morg, mortis, f., death'. 
 Dedltl-o, -onis, f., surrender .^ 
 Inool-d, -ill, dwell, inhabit. 
 Inopla, ae, f., want, scarcity. 
 Judlo-d« are, -^xt, decide. » 
 
 ..<.* « 
 
 y. 
 
 AV K. 
 
 Pater, patrls, va.., father. 
 Tlm-or, -oris, xa.^fear.-^ 
 V»f-ed, ere, -ul^ 6« influential. 
 Vlp-tus, -tutls, ^, valw, bravery: 
 
 I. —1. Sine injOria per provinciam iter f ecimus. 2. FrOmentupi 
 ex agrls^in^castra comportabant. 3. Post proelium legati ad 
 Caesarem d§ deditione venenmt. 4. Trans Rhenum in locd" idoneo 
 consedmt, 5. Magnam inter Belgas auctoritatem prpfeer vir- 
 tutem habebat. 6. Militgs ex hibemis et a Caesare co^^^erant. \ 
 7. J^x captms cognoverat. 8. In certum locum conventramus. 
 9 Arbitros inter civitates dedit. 10, Germanos sine causa timent. 
 11. Cum rehquls^gionibus in GaUi4m contendit. 12. Ex castris 
 discessistis. 13. Iter in provinciam averterant. 14 Ariha ex 
 oppido tradiderunt. 15.; Sine causa bellum gejaseratis. A.. 
 
 II. -1. He had sent the forces across the^yer into G^uf. 2. 
 
 ^^^'^^?*^ ^^"""""^^ '''^"*'- ^- After the a^aiii' of (his) fathir 
 he had held the royal power. 4. They had made numerous sallies 
 
 l^out of the woods. 5. the rest of the Belgians had sent ambassa- 
 dors concerning peace. 6. He used to.be influential among the 
 Irauls. 7. They remain in the camp not without great danger" on 
 account of the scarcity of corn. 8. They had plac\d the baggage 
 between the river and the cavalry. 9. He led back' tL, forces into 
 winter quarters. 10. We shall not decide about the road H 
 They had dwelt across the Rhine. 12. On account of (their)" fear 
 
 > they had fled into the woods. 13. ' Caesar had led across the forces 
 without" baggage. 14. We used to have lands across the Rhine in 
 the province. 15. Out of a large number few received wounds 
 
 (a) Dederls, you (sing.) wUl have VenerlWus, we\hall have come. , 
 
 ^*^^^* . Jttsserlrts, yoM (plur.) ttn« /taiJC 
 
 Mlserlt, he will have sent, ordered. ' 
 
 tfferlt . he inU have ordered. -Pwtwtartr^A^!.!/ wt7; haw giviti. 
 
 ^ili£^x^Sk 
 
.- VI 
 
 ^ PART I.— I^RODUCTORY ikisSONS. 27 
 
 • Ob8ePvatIon.-Peraond endings. What letter are found in 
 ^h I^tm word in the translation of which are Wnd the words 
 Ml hnvetv w^l Uve f Axe these f qrms obtained from the present 
 or the perfect tense ? / ^ 
 
 (6) Dedero. I MX liav^given, MUero, I shaU have sent. -\ 
 
 Ob8ePvatlon.-What variation occurs in that part of the Latin 
 verb which expresses «/loZZ /laue? 
 
 (c) In Part III sectiop 27, may be found the names by tehich 
 
 the tenses of ^e Latin verb are known. ~^^^^— --- r ^ ^ 
 V» '■■■'_: '■-■::■■-'--■■".■/:■■■■.:.-.' i]'-: ^''y'c-:":' :■} \ - ' ■" ■ 
 
 / EXERCISE XVII. * ' 
 
 Tooabalary. >" 
 
 D6-ll«6, -legrl. chooser ' j„„e6, ere, Jussl. order: - . 
 
 De-ppno, -posul, layd^. Memorla. Ae, f., memcyry. - ' 
 
 '' dLiT""; ""' '*"T'' ^*''- '•«-**"««' -<*«-!. carry, bnn^. 
 DabIt-o,.^e. -avi, /t.a^tofe, Have l^egl-o. -onls. f., reW district. 
 
 «„„ . ^ . ««-"n«o, ere, -tlnul, /jreservc; 
 
 •^*^>' Video, ere, vidl, see. • ' 
 
 3 ^TI J-'^'°' «.^ legione delegerat. 2. Murum perdtlxeriJ^T 
 3. Arma deposuennt. 4. Regionem vastaverunt. 5. Legio mon- 
 ^ non tengbit. 6. VidStis. 7. Renovabam. 8. DiscS^t^ 9 
 Judicavera 10. Dubit^ba^ius. 11. D.terret. 12. ^^Lil 
 13. Gesseramus. 14. Discgsserit. 15. Compl§bunt. 16. Expu^ 
 
 ^: 
 
 bered rtt™H ^*' f'^" *" '"«'"'"y- ^- You had remem- 
 
 i ITsLtTi"' r^™," '** '"^™^)- ^- 'TW «"' have routed. 
 
 7 I ^n r o™f • ®- ^" ^^ ^^*^*^- «• They chose. 
 
 7. I shall order. 8. We have come. 9. We were holding w 
 
 Kti^'^t'Th"- ^Tr^ --'»««■•«• 12- Sheuslto'be 
 Urif^e 1^^ ^™ ":■'• ■"■ ^« »•«•" have sent. 
 ijIuS^. "'^y°"^"- ^?- You are deciding, 18 Tn,. 
 
r- 
 
 28 
 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 '7. 
 
 W' 
 
 M^ 
 
 LESSON XVXII. 
 
 .\ 
 
 Turn to the adjectives of the third declension, as given in Part 
 III., section 11. 
 
 V Ob8ervaMon.-How far do the^endmgs of the adjective agree 
 with those of the noun, 'as given in sections 4 ^nd & (cWparing 
 forms of thfe same gender always)? Is there always a separate 
 form for the feminine nominative? fpr the neuter nominative? 
 Examine the vocabulary, to see how 'the genitive ease and the 
 different genders of adjectives of the third declension are marked.* 
 '■* " ''•/'.'■'. .:;. ■■' '~- • '"■ 
 
 ;, EXERCISE XVIII. ^ 
 
 :' ■-" ■ " ;■/ ■ -' -'■ ■ ■ , . 
 
 Vooabulary. 
 
 Beollvis, e, doping. " Levis, e. dight, trifling. 
 
 Duplex, dapiiols, dmibh. Omnia, e, all. 
 
 Eques^ter, -trig, -tre, o/carc^ri/, pQt-ens, -entis, powerful. 
 
 • Prae-oeps, -oipitis, steep. 
 
 ■ Beo-ens, -entis, recent, tmeas- 
 hausted. 
 
 cavalry- (adjective). 
 Fertilis, e,/er«t/e. 
 Port lg, e, brave. 
 Humilis, e, loWj lowly. 
 Inoead-o, -I, burn. 
 
 Sllvesiris, e, wooded. 
 Vel-6x, -dels, swift^ active. 
 
 I.— 1. Praesidia in omnibus oppidis collocabit. 2.' Proelium 
 equestre fScimus.» 3. F«iam Iggato, viro forti et poten^, dedit. 
 4. In loco silvestri consederant. 5. Copiae recentSs et integrae 
 proehum reiiovabant. 6. AnimSs omnium sociSrum confirmat. 
 7. PeditSs v6l6cSs et fortSs d§l6geram. 8. Duplicem fossam ft 
 castris ad flttmen perdQxit. 9. Omnia arma trfididSrunt. 10. 
 Levia equestria proelia fScerant.» 11. Per regionem fertilem iter 
 fScerant.^ 12. Ex humill loco ad magnam auctoritatem MSrcum 
 perdaxerat. 
 
 AdLnlL^^l^t^? ?°* f"***"^ *" «* ^R' «•)) «' «»». are of thTthird deolension. 
 i the Zi«v?<S o!Sh k' ?" *?^ generally in (a) masculine and feminine, -ft. neuter 
 ■«.the genitive of each being the same as the mascul ne nominative: (b) masculine 
 
 ;^;,&'"®V?*' ""H^'- -**••-**»« »«""*^« 0' each being thHame m «if Sine 
 «* «'f ?/L\* ' ^"^ n?"»»»»»; 'eminine and neuter, -m, the ^nitivehavinj Intw taplaS 
 
 fMliumfaeio^ljlgM a batO», literally, Imakta battle.' 
 
PART I.- 
 
 j - 
 
 INTKODUCTDBY LESSONS. 
 
 29 
 
 H.— 1. They had fortified the camp with a double wall. 2: 
 Cffisar removed the horses of all thd lieutenants. 3. They were 
 laying Waste all the lands. 4.- The Helvetians had burned aU the 
 towns, all the rest of the viUages; (and) all the com. 5. He had 
 not laid aside the memory of the recent wrongs. 6. He has 
 granted pardon to all thecaptives. 7. You have pitched the camp 
 in a. sloping and steep place. 8. He wiU have sent fresh and 
 unexhausted cavalry. 9. I hastened witTi aU the cavalry to the 
 river. 10. We njarched through fertile lands. 11. We shaU 
 deter. the Gawls by (our) recent victoiy. 12. He summons the- 
 centuriona of all ranks. 
 
 t 
 
 'fM' 
 
 LESSON XIX. 
 
 3ellnm''reno^re dabltant, 
 Coplas in provinoia Jusslt 
 
 hl^^are«, 
 Labiejiam locum tenere Jus- 
 
 /serat, ' .■ 
 
 Legratos dlsoddere vetnlt* 
 
 /■ - 'J 
 
 / ■- - 
 
 Lablenam Jnbet oastra mu- 
 Hire, 
 
 Venire dubitat. 
 
 they hesitate to renew the wa/r, 
 he ordered the forces to winter in 
 
 the province, 
 he had ordered Lahienus to hold 
 
 the place. . . : ' 
 
 he forbade the lieviendnts to de- 
 part. 
 
 he orders Lahienus to fortify the 
 camp. 
 
 he hesitates to come. 
 
 Observation.— In each sentence notice how one verb <Sompletes 
 the meaning of the other. Formation of the ii^nitive in^ach 
 conjugation. What is generaUy the position^ of the infinitive? 
 Notice that m the vocabularies that foUow, the infinitive is always 
 given, as a means of indicating the conjugation to Which a verb 
 belongs.^ ' 
 
 EXERCISE Xli -^ 
 
 \ ' .-■-■>..■; ■; . ^ 
 
 Vocabulary, 
 Aude6,^e. venh^re. Cogo. ere. oo6»l. collect, compel. 
 
 Ooepi (used m the perfect tenses Constltu-o. ere, -i, determine. 
 oruy) began. Desll-ld, ire. -ul. leap down. ' 
 
 I ■ ^" '° *^® general vocabulary, at the end <rf the book. 
 
 <K 
 
 "^1 
 
l' * 
 
 ao 
 
 >i 
 
 PRIMABY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 ^^\f^' ^®^"™ ^^^ Germanis gerere constituit. 2. . Mfliigs 
 yetuiVab signia discedere. 3. Ex finitimls regionibus mllitas 
 jubet convenire. 4. Oppidum oppugnare et portaa incendere 
 coeperunt. 5. LggatI ad castra venire dubitaverant. 6. Magna 
 praesidia in omnibus oppidis constituit. collocare, et cum reliquls 
 copiis in vico Aeduorum hiemare. 7. Copias in»hTbema rediicere 
 constituerat. 8. Omngs ISgatos coggit equos removSre. 9. Multls 
 cum lacrimls Caesarem obsec^Sre coepimus. 10. Proelium renovare 
 non audebunt. 11. Omnia oppida incendere constitueramus. 12. 
 Labignum cum omnibus equitibus locum tenere jussit. 13. Pa- 
 ~ trem imperium dSponere coegit. ~ 
 
 II.— 1. Ceesar had ordered all the Aedui to give up (their) arms. 
 2. They determined to send ambassadors to Cses^r concerning 
 peace. 3. They had begun to lay waste the. lands of the allies. 
 4. Ccesar forbade thp legions to leave (their) work; 5. They have 
 begun to collect forces. 6. He ordered all the soldiers to leap 
 down. 7. They began to fill up the trenches with branches. 8. 
 He had ordered the soldiers to fortify the camp with a double 
 trench. 9. We determined to collect forces and wage war with 
 Ceesar. 10. They do not venture to send ambassadors. , 11. He 
 had compelled the Aedui to give hostages. 12. They hesitate to 
 winter in Gaul. 13. The Gauls began to assemble out of all the 
 towns. -■•: 
 
 LESSON XX. • . ' 
 
 Turij to the nouns of the fourth declension given in Part III. 
 section 7. 
 
 Obsepvatlon.— The case-ehdings of the declension. The geiiaer 
 of the nouns in us and in u.^ How does tl^e vocabulary indicate 
 that a noun is of the fourth declension ? . 
 
 --. ■ ■ ■ i ' ■-*■ ' EXfikciSE XX.- -■ 
 
 ■-■',• "■,-'•■.- . »'.-'"■*"". 
 
 JLdventns, us. m., arrival. 
 OoinmeAtns. fls, m., auppUea.'* 
 
 Oom-inlttA, «re, -mUl, mtrn$t; 
 (with proelium) jom, heffin. 
 
 1. S«» Part III., Motion W, t. _ t See footn^t* 1, page fSL 
 
. -PART I.— INTRODUCTORY LESSONa ^ ^^^^^ ^^^^^ 
 
 Conspectus» nn, m., sight, view. Lacus, us, m, lake. ' ^^ 
 
 Cornu, u«. n wing (of an army). Ma^lstratus. u., m., mo^frafe. 
 Dexter, tra. trnm. WriTif \ - /y. ' y-vi'.wn?,. 
 
 o^ce. 
 
 Pedltatus, u^m., infatyJtnj.^ 
 Sal-US, rjitis, f., safety. 
 Sus-tiqed, ere, -tinni, wiih^ 
 
 stand, endure. . 
 Usus, us, m., experience^ > 
 
 Dexter, tra, trnm, right. 
 Dlscessns, us, tn.^ departure. 
 Equltatns, us, m., cavalry.^ 
 Exercltus, us, m., army. 
 Homp, hominis, m., man, (in 
 
 plural) people. 
 linpetus, us, m., cUtack, fimj. 
 
 ^^'^""^ adventum Caesaris obsides dare eori&titUM^^ 
 ^ Galh impetum m» equitfitum fecerunt. 3. Cum equitatfl Helvgti- 
 . orum proehum commlssrunt. 4. Helvgtil agros Aeduorum in con- 
 "«pectu exercitus RomanI vastabant. 5. A lacfl ad flUmen mOrum 
 duphcem perddxeramus. 6. Magistratum obtinObat.c 7. Salatem 
 magistratuum equit^tui commisit. 8. In» dextrS coma omnem 
 equitatum coUocavit. 9. Oppidum mSgno impetfl onpflrarT 
 coeperunt 10 EquitatOs in* cOnspectuT vSneL. Tm^! 
 «tratus multitadinem hominum ex agrls coSgerant. 12. Reliqu^ 
 exercitum I^biSno dare constituit. 13. Exemtum sine miS 
 commeata cogere n6n audsbunt. . U. Legates ab omnibus eSr 
 citibus^convenlre jtlssit, , % ^ 
 
 H« n,^^' 1\? r^ """"^ ""^^^'^"^ *^^ ^^^^' «f <^h« cavalry. 2. 
 He oi^ered the lieutenant to remove out of sight the horses of ail 
 
 tne cavalry. 4. After the departure of the Belgians they had 
 
 to present to the cavalry. 6. He hastened to the lake '7 We 
 have determmed to await Labienus' arrival. 8. He brdl™ M l! 
 
 rpXrio'Zr- '- ««^^^ ^-bidden the sol^Itoeet 
 nnlnJA^^l """'^ «"^rounding the forces with cavalrv 
 
 found nnfT u ^ '"''^^ experience in camps. 13. He 
 
 ^u. d ou through scouts about the departure of the aUies ^4 
 H ^e.s,tates to entrust aM the plm^ ^eijt^^ '*' 
 
 thj^^.nSnr"'' *^ *o^ ""»<» '" Latin I n the dngular. not In th. plunJ. fa njJT^ 
 "»• »,!»»• 17. , . 4. Tr»ii«l«t« in her* by in, not into. - 
 
 ft6ca:. 
 
 ^■' 
 
m 
 
 i 
 'III 
 
 9 
 I 
 
 I III 
 
 I'i' 
 
 
 !l 
 
 9» 
 
 z' 
 
 *' 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK 
 
 LESSON XXI. 
 
 (a) Mlssas sumt 
 Saperatas e%. 
 
 I have been sent, or I vxts sent. 
 
 you (sing.) have been conqitered, or you 'were 
 
 conquered, 
 he has been hea/rd, or he was heard, 
 toe have been recalled, or we were recalled, 
 you (plural) have been ordered, or you were 
 ■■■■. ordered. ■^„,.'- •■•;-.-.■...--■;■-■,.. 
 ___ Oo&otI ainnt, ' they have been compelled, or they were compelletj^ 
 
 Observation. — Twofold translation. Voice. Number of words 
 in each Latin phrase. Which indicates the person ? What does 
 the change Of ending in the other indicate ? 
 
 Andltns est, 
 BevooatI samnsn 
 JussX estis, p 
 
 «> 
 
 1 
 
 (6) Jussa est» 
 Aadltam est, 
 Liooas munXtus est, 
 Castra munlta sunt, 
 Liegion^s missae sunt. 
 
 she was ordered. 
 
 it has been heard. 
 
 the place was fortified. 
 
 the camp was fortified. 
 
 the legions have been sent. 
 
 the soldiers have been ordered. 
 
 Mllites J ussi sunt. 
 
 Observation. — What new endings are found in these verbs? 
 What^o the diflFerent endings indicate 1 '~ , 
 
 ^■^- 
 
 Prownt. 
 «mo 
 
 ^vetA 
 
 moned 
 J abed 
 O4»mmove6 
 com pled 
 
 '*«^. 
 
 cdgndsco 
 
 First Conjugaxion. 
 
 Perfect Actjvtt 
 am&vl 
 dedl 
 Tetal 
 
 Secokd Conjugation., 
 monnl 
 jussX 
 oomrndTl 
 «omplivl 
 
 'Third- Conjcoation. 
 
 . r«xl~-~ "^ - '"'■'; 
 
 ^^ cdgndvl 
 
 V 
 
 Perfect Passive. 
 am&tas sum 
 datus sum 
 vetltas sum 
 
 monltns sum . 
 Jassus sum 
 oommdtns sum 
 eompUtosjmni 
 
 oo&otas sum 
 cdynltns snm 
 
 mitt» 
 
 %iM 
 
 mlMiis tvm 
 
 •>t 
 
or you -were 
 
 assiv». 
 
 
 1 sum 
 
 .-'■'■. 
 
 lam 
 
 '■ ■"*■• 't 
 
 1 sum 
 
 ■•■*.:"■' 
 
 la Hum . 
 
 1*1= - , 
 
 ■am 
 
 '!;'.■ 
 
 tos >am 
 
 '■":f ■' 
 
 tosaam 
 
 •> 
 
 •am 
 
 
 1 «am 
 
 
 »• •am 
 
 
 •am 
 
 
 ■ ■ ■'---•- , ,^ \ ■ 
 
 ;{:>-'.-; 
 
 PART I.— INTBODUCTORY LESSONS. 
 
 33 
 
 Present. 
 aadld 
 sentlo '\ 
 vinold 
 
 Fourth Conjugation. 
 
 Perfect Active. 
 audlTl 
 •ensl^ 
 vlnzl ' 
 
 "■ie!* ■ 
 
 Perfect Paaeive. 
 andltns «am 
 sensas sum 
 vinotas som 
 
 "H 
 
 < 
 
 Y^« 
 
 Ob«erv«tioa.-l8 the relation between the forms of the perfect 
 
 nJl! % *"^ conjugation? In what respect do all the 
 
 . perfect passive forms agree ? i' «« wi cne 
 
 7^%otice how in the vocabularies SlSiow^^^fo^^ ^^ 
 each verb, from which <^e perfect passive may easily be^Z,^ 
 
 EXERCISE XXI. 
 
 I' 
 
 Vocabulary, 
 
 enti-mt, begin. — ; V ^^^^^.^' "• "• «om, «. 
 
 tum,<riaTm. . food 6,«*. "* 
 
 «A netu. 
 
 _««/:« fry^om. . tun., lead across. 
 
 Faelo, ere. «oi, faetun,. do, Va.t-o, Are -Avi. a*» / 
 
 r^i^T'^^'^'^rl^^^ ^ve. four form,, endlnir i„ ... .^.^ 
 
 these have no constant reliUon oiie to .^mhpr i.. f iH" '"jf ««««Pt'on of the flnt tw^ 
 
 Uon a-^-^Vrit^of ve beTwr chLS.T£^^J." 'r^ '^^^o^^^nt^:^ n^.'^Zi^ 
 •*^ to -u,. -gum; and in ii.eTuTcS'ni^^l^.^'Jir\L'\!^- ■^'kI conjug^ag 
 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 '41 
 
% 
 
 
 u 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 ■1 
 
 I 
 
 I._l, Agrl vastati sunt. 2. Copia© coactae sunt. 3. D5l6cti 
 aumus. 4. Cognitum est. 5: Oppida incensa sunt. 6. Equitatus 
 missus est. 7. Jussus sum. 8. Vetita es.^ 9. 'Locus est^ mflnituB. 
 10. Opus perfectum est. 11. Equi remot? sunt. 12. Fossa com- 
 pleta est. 13. Reducti sumus. 14. Coriyocati sunt. 15.' Pro- 
 hibita est. 16. Prohibitae sunt. 17. Vulnus acceptum est. 18. 
 Proelium factum est. 19. Exei^itus transductus est. 20. Caesar 
 commotus est. > 
 
 II. —1. The soldiers were ordered. 2. A large number of n(ien 
 
 has been collected. , 3. Wounds were received. 4. We have been 
 
 sent. 5. 3he has been wounded. 6. The camp was fortified. 7. 
 
 I was ordered. 8. The war was renewed. 9. The arms have been 
 
 given up. 10. The "forces were Jed back. 11. The cavalry has 
 
 been led across. -12. Garrisons were stationed. 13. A legion was 
 
 Stationed. 14. Hostages have been given. 15. We -have been 
 
 :•.•.. ■ - "alarmed. 16. You have been ordered. .17. The signal was given. 
 
 VV* .-i" *18i^The battle has been begun. ' Id. The camp was takeii by 
 
 *^.. \i;;> ;;r '»"• «t^^^puu 20. The magistrates were called together. 
 
 • v.. '„•■* '.*;**:»■ ^ - , ■ I ■'■■.">..-■* 
 
 \-<U'W''J \* ■ ^ -^ . v-' 
 
 ••*.^'3^ li- 
 
 
 
 LESSON XXII. 
 
 Fand& valnfer&tns est, 
 Agrl a ooplls vastati sunt. 
 
 he tocM» iwwnci^ed by a sling, 
 the Jktda have been laid vxMte by 
 thefoi'Ceal, 
 Iiooas vallo fosfaque munXtus the pla^e iWM fortified by a loall 
 
 est, 4 clnd trench. .' 
 
 l^ui a Caesare remdtl s^nt, , the horses were removed by Chsar. 
 
 ». Observation.— Two ways of translating by. Which is used in 
 connection with the passive voice to^ denote the person by whom 
 something is done ?' . v 
 
 I / 
 
 1. Est munituK haa the same meaning as munilut-eit. Not only may the order be 
 /iiuuige«l in'those perfect panive forma, but the two p«rt« are «oiuetime» separated by 
 other words. 
 -f t r-W th thp ftnt i lT B Tnlnfi n fttid nh will mittn /rm ■ w^h ihn |iMsiu , JV?» "f ^» 
 
 whichever the reel of Um sentenoe requires. 
 
 ~ir^' 
 
 1»-^ 
 
I— »»«i »o« n-OtJtj(i- 
 
 ''^T /•— INTftQBUCTORY LESSONS. 
 
 X 
 
 «5 
 
 EXERCISE XXII. 
 
 f^- 
 
 . ' ; -^ Vooftbulary. 
 
 Onus, oAerig, n., burden. Pertm-K - - 
 
 re, pregsi, -pres- • throw into confusion 
 
 sum, overwhelm. «,„„ .^,. ^'^"/'«^m^- 
 
 Prae-mltto, ere, -mui, -mlggum, 
 
 r . , . ' Y / ^ ^nd in advance. 
 
 . I.-1; Obsidgs ab Helvetiia Caesarl dati 'sunt ^ 2 TaaSfr » 
 remoti sunfc Q ta - , ^ omnium ex conspecta 
 
 barbarians 3^ '"k"."""'"*'"' ''^ "-e attack of the 
 trench t v!„ WeT" nT '"^'*<"* ^-^ " «""P"* and 
 fiUed with I» ^r ^» ■«»"-' fr»«>--k. 5. TheVdl™ 
 
 remove the hoL r^^J'™/"*"™^ "^^ ">« "«"*«•«* ^ 
 from every wT' 8 W ^""u"'" '"^^'^ *^ '«^»'»".- 
 
 f^j.ian..\T..«ei'::r5rBXr:.3tr.o^^4^'' 
 " Autrjr.tirj'^rtnr'^"^^^^^^^^ 
 
 been laid waate by, the GeZns V„b """^^•'' *"" 
 
 "WO»- 16 Arm» w.,J ™*'"- , "■ She was wounded by an 
 
 fo^es we« ^T" «T "P > »« *» Belgians. 16. ^The " 
 'j*^ aiarmed by the scarcity of com it a n • 
 
 «ade out of the woods by the Gauls 18 T^' ^^^7 ^** 
 
 mtocamp. "^ "te v*auis.. 18. The army mtm led ^ok 
 
 \ 
 
 I' 9m looteott I. pf nu 
 
 — u-- 
 
 .f 
 
FRIMART LATIN BOOK. 
 
 yC 
 
 ^ . LESSON XXIIL • . . ; 
 
 (a) MiBBVLBer am, I had been sent. Bevo^atl eramnsi we had been 
 
 . recalled, ' 
 
 Conimdtas er&i, you (sing.) JussX eratls, you (plural) had ' 
 
 had been ala/rmed. ' ^een ordered. 
 
 AndXtas erat, he had been Cohetl eranU they had been com- 
 , - heard. * pelled. . • / . 
 
 \ Andltam erat, U had been ^astra munlta ejrant»^^ cam^ 
 
 _^ _____ ^^^^^ _^________ _____ ________ ^^ ^^^^yj^^^^^ ____________ 
 
 Jusga erat, she had been or- Copiae missae erant, the' forces 
 dered. . .^ j^ had been sent. 
 
 ' Observation. — Compare these phrases with those given in Les- 
 son XXL (a) and (&)♦ What differences ,in form and meaning do 
 you find? , ' ^. 
 
 (6) Missus ero, I shall have be^ Bchr^iitl erlmws,, we dudl have 
 sent. y been recalled. • 
 
 ' Comin5ta9 erls, you (sing.) Jussi eritls, ycm (plural)- will 
 i will have b&en alarmed. have been ordered. ' ^ 
 
 .* AndXtam e«lt, it will have Castra munXta erant, t/ie camp 
 * been heard. v)ill have been fortified. 
 
 J&ssa erlt, she wUl ha/oe been Copiae missae ernn.t, the force» 
 
 ordered. will have been sent. ' ,. 
 
 "■';■'■*■ ' , ■■■'■; 
 
 Observation.— Compare these phrases with those ilv (a). What 
 differences in form and meaning do you find ? _ i A, , _i . 
 
 ^ (c) MXseram, I had seiiti 
 
 Jusser&tls, yow (plural) /uid Of» 
 ' " - dered. 
 
 Andlverat, he had htard. Co^gerant, they had. compelled. 
 
 MXsero, I shall have sent. MunXverlnt, they wiU have fot> 
 
 l';-^ - .-'■:^^-: .:. :. ' - ■ .; ;- ' ;' ■ tified. ■ - ■■'m^ V^V r -- -;■-/;;. 
 
 Obiervfttton.— Compare these forms with the phnwws in (o) aftA 
 (6). What is the difference between the corresponding active and 
 pmaivo foiTOB in Latin ? . — 
 
 ..,* 
 
 ^y-A^ 
 
 '■^ •.■■■' 
 
PABT L--INTBODUCTORY LESSONS. 
 
 
 we had hem 
 
 ad been eom- 
 
 ve aludl have 
 
 EXERCISE XXIII. 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 ^r^ 
 
 Ad-duoo.ere. -dftrf, -duotum. In-Btruo, ere/ -.truxl, -.trft- 
 
 -, - - I. turn, arato M». > 
 
 Compar-6, ^re. .&vl. -atum. Tollo, ere, ««tuH. .nblatum, 
 
 .«uiA^ ready, ^atm^ . takeaway. , , 
 
 • I.~i: Copiae InBtructae erant. 1 AdductI erSmus. 3. Frtt- 
 r^SLT^fT ent. .t. Jtissus era: 5. Convocatl «i;nt. 
 6. GoUocfitI sunt 7. Cbggeramus. 8. IncendSrunt. 9. Oppida 
 
 . 13. Removit. ■ 14. Muniveratis. 15. Sustulimus. 16. Addtix- 
 eram 17. Instrficti «unt. 18. :fe'Q88a erat completa. 19. Vuln^ 
 
 -K* o?^ "" ^«'^^«^^«««n» erat. 23. JubSbat. 24. Com- 
 movebit. 2o. SuBtinueramus. ^6. Dslggeras. 27. Delfectus erSa. 
 28. Cogmtum.ent. 29. Sublatum erat. 30. Vulneratis. ' 
 
 •^IL-l. The war had been renewed, g. We had renewed. 3. 
 
 5 ThThTV"'"'^?^- '• ''^^ ^^«^^^ ^^<1 ^-^- drawn up 
 5. They had been made ready. 6. The battle wak^begun. 7 
 
 11 T^r ^ ^^y/^*^ "^ «advance. 10. It had be^n finS. 
 11. They used to favor.^ 12. We were caUing together.AlS 
 They wiU have found out., 14. ^t was found out. 15. Th^ h^ 
 beencompeUed. 16. The legion was led back. 17. TheSo^ 
 had been led across. 18. You were sent in advance.' 19 S^ 
 
 rry"^^22 "iJ"'' THr^^? ^^'^^- ^^- ^ ^^«^ ^- ^^ 
 
 away. ^ ii. The camp had been fortified. 23. They wiU 4ake the 
 rihtV'rr ^^•^«^^"— ve. 25. They VJld^^ 
 given. 29, Ig»ye. 3| Iwasgiving. , _,: , , _ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1» 
 
 
 
 
 . >4- 
 
 
 ' t 
 
 ■-■■f-- 
 
 
 
 — .... 
 
 » 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 ■ ■» 
 
 -jL. 
 
 ■ ■ - ♦ . ■■ 
 
 Jfcl 
 
 
 ., v.; 
 
 -4— 
 
 
 
 -.■:fc.:#-:.^,^ 
 
'-*., 
 
 88 
 
 PRIMABY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 V-, 
 
 i^ 
 
 ' LESSON XXIV. ■' 
 
 (a) Turn to the nouns bf the fifth declension, given in Part III., 
 section 8. , ' 
 
 Observation. — The case-elidings of the declension. How does 
 the vocabulary indicate that a noun is of the fifth declension ? Of 
 what gender are most nouns of this declension ?^ ' • 
 
 (6) Turn to the list, of ordinal numerals, given in Part HI., 
 section 15. ^ _: . ';, -^^ — _^ . _ _„,_^ — _-i-^ ___.^^_ 
 
 Observation. — Forms and translation. Notice the way in which 
 thirteenth, fourteenth, twenty-Jirst, etc., are expressed. 
 
 In the general Vocabulary all ordinal numerals are given as 
 follows : primus» a«. nm, Jirst ; sdoiindns, a, am, second ; deoi- 
 mas* a» ani, tenth. What is indicated by the letters a» am ? 
 
 "' ^ ' EXERCISE XXIV. " ''':':£-_/ 
 
 J ... - . " ■ ' ■ 
 
 fcv ^ .Vocabulary, 
 
 : '■'■<■"'■■■ ~f . ' " ■■ ■ - 
 
 ^" Aoidst €1» f., line of battle, line. Ocoasus, us» m., setting. 
 
 /Dies, ei, m., day. Pars, partis, f., part. 
 
 MgreginHf a, am, remarkable. Res, rel, f., thing, matter, affair, 
 
 VlA&»,et,f.,h.on^, word, fidelity. Scientia, ae, i., knowledgei 
 
 Hora, ae,f., hour. , Sol, soils, m., sun. 
 
 Mllltarls, e, mtZitory. .-^ 1 " Spes, el, f., Tiope. . 
 
 t.^1. Spem fugae sustulerat. 2. MflitSs in aciS Instracti sunt. 
 3. Cum tertift legione in provincia hiemHre constituit. 4. Fidera 
 servftyit d5 numero diSrum. 5. Scientiam rei^ mllitSris habet. 
 6. Ab horft septimS. ad occS^stim solis pflgnSiverant^ 7. Multlis 
 rSbus adducti erant. 8. Egregiam fid^m lSg9.tI cognoverat. 9. 
 Tertia pars exercitfls interfecta est. 10. OmnSs centurionSs 
 quartfie cohortis irilerfecti erant. 11. DS fid6 GallSrum dubitft- 
 '•vw^nt. 12. Propter inopiam omnium rSrum mflitSs nOnae legionis 
 in pr5vinci»m redftcere constituerat. 13. Omuem Bpe^l saltltis in 
 virtate po8u'erS.mus. . 
 
 1. See Part III., BectTon 61, 6. 7 
 
 if 9t$ mUitari» <tbe ^gulu)mm,Uitary ajfitirt,th« art tifwurfar», ' 
 
 ^tf" 
 
 ■■•S" ,. 
 
 . ' 
 
How does 
 
 ision? Of ' 
 
 * ■. 
 
 Part m., 
 
 :PAET L— INTBODUCTOBY LESSONS. - 09 
 
 n.-|. An atj»ck had beJmade by the soldiers of tlie fifth 
 legion p^ the first line. ^ 2. They had been influenced by the 
 hope of^plunder. 3. The forces had been led back to the camp 
 after^the^fourth day. 4. All things will h^ive been made ready. 
 5. m second Hne had been surrounded by the barbarians. 6. He 
 h^ |iad, great experience in military afiairs.» 7. He drew up the 
 Jin^ :of?battle. 8. They had inhabited a third part of Gaul. 9. 
 Thef will not withstand the first attack of the forces. 10 The 
 forces had been influenced by the want of everything (lUerally, aU 
 things). 11. The matter had been tom out through scouts. 12. 
 They had come into Gaul not without gi^t hope of plunder. 13. 
 '.He had atafcioned the tenth legion in ambuali. 
 
 
 . LESSON XXV. 
 
 ..Tertlo dig ad" Caesairem ve- on the third day they came to 
 ' nerunt, ' . ,,•*;•-.> • • Goum ••/■■ 
 
 Hora septlma proeltttm com- hejoiri^baMU at the seventh 
 
 "»'»**• hour. 
 
 Ocoasu soils In oa«tra reductl they were led back mto camp at 
 ■"***•;: «iwwe* (literally, at the s©t^ 
 
 ting of the sun). 
 . • Multos dies Iter feoerant, they had ma/rched many day. 
 
 . Magnam partem dlel pugna^ thsy had fought a large part of 
 .. " ve'ant, v the day. 
 
 Panoas horag Impetus ansti- for a few hours they withstood the 
 naernnt, attacks^ 
 
 ObserTation,— the two ideas connected with time found in 
 these sentences. The mode of expressing each in Latin. Is each 
 ^ idea always expressed in the same way in English ? • 
 
 EXERCISE XXY :y^^- '■■''' Mi :■■-- 
 (For this, and all subseqwnt exercises, no 8p<ic{dl>oe(Mary wOt 
 ^ he given. The student m^ist depend entirely on. the general vocabu- 
 l<mes, at the end of the hook.) 
 
 l*J|WlootiK>toJ^ page 81. 
 
 2. See footnote 2, psgfe 88. 
 
i 
 
 ■ 
 
 I. 
 
 !|40 
 
 'V. 
 
 P&IMAR7 LATIN BOOK. 
 
 I.^l. Posters diS castra LabiSnl opp%nSre dScrftverant. 2. 
 Complilr@s hoi^ ptlgnaverunt. 3. Nocte-a,d Bhenum contendit. ,v 
 4. Soils occastl copiae in castr^ reductae sunt. 6. Multds annos 
 rSgnum obtinuerat. • 6. HorS . cinciter decimS. diSI ntlntium ad 
 Labienum mlsimus. 7. 'Permultos di^ iter per pjovinciam fSce- 
 rant. 8. ^.Continues compftirSs dies (JJaesar aciem Instrtlxit. 9. ' 
 Prima Idee res ab exploratoribus confirmata est. 10. Certo anni 
 tempore magistjeatfls a Caesare convenire jtlssi erant.' 11. Tertiam 
 partem Galliae paucos anno& incolueramus. 12. Advents Oaesans 
 barbar! constiterunt. '» 
 
 II.::— 1. The Helvetians moved their camp the next day at 4ay- 
 break. 2. In the third watch they .made a sally out of the town 
 with all their forces. 3. Frrr wn^miiQ ]|iiiii « they withstood the 
 attacks of the cavalry. 4. On the first arrival of the army numer- 
 ous sallies had beei\ made by the Gauls. 6. He decided to attack 
 the town on the seventh day. 6. They had for many days laid 
 waste the lands -of the Aedui. 7. Oil the . following day an attack 
 was made by the Gauls on the cavalry. 8. The camp was moved . 
 in the fourth" wateh with^ great noise and confusion. 9. AfterJiis 
 father's death he had possessed the royal powerfor several yewsL 
 10. At daybreak on the remaining days a double line of battle Tiaa^ 
 been drawn up°by Caesar. 11. They had waged war with th^ 
 Romaics for many years. 12. We reached the camp tlie third hour 
 of the day. , 
 
 LESSON XXVI. 
 
 Turn to the nouns of the third declension, given in Part HI., 
 section 6. *, 
 
 Observation. — How do the case-endings differ from those ^ven 
 in sections 4 and 5 (comparing always nouns of the same gender) 1 
 Do the same differences occur in all the' words?' Compare the 
 adjectives of the third declension given in Part III., section 11. 
 
 Notice also the irregular declension of the nouns given^n Part 
 III., section 9. 
 
 1. Uwout». 
 ~S. Molt ntntiui luiying^ the 
 
 I eiiainf{B wiii iw niuuu to Doioiij^ to ( 
 
 dMHes: 
 
 
P^T L— INTKODUCTOKY LESSONS. 
 
 ■ ^M' " "■ ' ■ ■"■-■. 
 EXERCISE XXVI. 
 
 41 
 
 
 I.-1. Equitgs impetum hostium sustinent. 2. FinSa AeduSrum 
 multos menses ferrS et Ignl vastati sunt. 3. Nfivium figOrft efc 
 .rSmorum mottl barbarl peWotI erant. 4. Culmina Alpium ab 
 hostibus oocupata erant 5. Animalia .t^ue mfignum Wrum 
 servorum.et clientmm GaUl lg„l cremabant. 6. Postero diS 
 Labienum cum omnI equitatfl montem tenere jtlssit. 7. In fInSs 
 hostm^ mcursionem fscerant. 8. HieRje nav6s constituit aedifi- 
 care. 9 E fimbus hostium HelvSti6rum in finSs AeduSrum iter 
 P^r vim fScSrunt. 10. In ftnibus hostium- hiemSverat. 11. Prop- 
 ter altitfldmem montium castra in valle posita sunt. 12. N5v6s 
 ex fimtmils regiSnibus jubet convenire. ^ 
 
 /i'~^l'^^^^ ^^ ^""* * ^"^^ "'""'^^'^ «^ «hip« ^^ the third year 
 of the w^ 2. He demanded a Ikrge number of hostages. 3. An 
 attecWas made at ^aybreak by the enemy on the line of battle. 
 >4 All tlfe^wns of the enemy were buried. 5. They had marched 
 through the province hy iliterally, through) force. 6. They were 
 alarmed by the violence of the rivers. 7. For many years he used 
 to have a large iju^ber of retainers. 8. A forest used to extend 
 from the mountam to the territ.>ries of the Aedui, and restrain» 
 thejpnemy s cavahy from imroads. 8. On account of the depth of 
 the sea, the soldiers hesitated to leap down out of the ship, io 
 The forces of the enemy had been dismayed by the size of the 
 
 he fields with.fire and sword. 12. For several years he had 
 leased all the rest of.the revenues of the Aeduii 
 
 ge&?rgula"n^«^ *" *• *"■ "• «^"^ •^^» *-<> "yM'Wes in both nominative and 
 
 . (4) Neuter nouiM ending in e, al or ar. * / 
 
 ^o^^Ztil^Z'l.^Zt'''^^^ •»>»«- -nHar. the 
 
 continent or mainland. ^**' "'* ' ^^> » »»»•? ; eonttnmt, the 
 
 a word, not a «epM»te wort. 'mdemtood are expre«ed io Latin by part S 
 
42 
 
 PRIMAEY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 LESSON XXVI] 
 
 ^ Turn to the present, imperfect and future indicative (active and 
 |Mtssive) of the first and second conjugations, as given in Part III.» 
 sections 27 and 28. 
 
 I-';-,, 'l» 
 
 ObgerTatlon. — ^From which of the principal parts are these 
 tenses formed in the active voice ? in the passive voice ? How is 
 the difference between the voices indicated in Latin 1} 
 
 1; 
 
 EXERCISE XXVII. 
 
 « I. — 1. HelvStil loci nfttttrft cdntiiientar. 2. M9,gnae copiae ab 
 hostibus compar&bantur. 3. Tertia pars GaUiae S. Belgis obtinS- 
 tur. 4. A Gallls 8ollicitfi.b§jnur. 6. Mons S. LabiSnd tengbitur. 
 6. Fuga Gallorum comAiovSminf. 7. Magnam inter BelgSs aucto- 
 ritatem hab@re vidSris. 8, Vicus montibus continebatur. 9. 
 EquitSs peditum virtiite servantur. 10. In servitate tenSberis. 
 11. Numerus hostium augStur. 12. Naves tempestatibus dStine- 
 buntur. 13. HostSs & ptigna tempestatibus continSbantur. 14. 
 Adventtl Caesaris commovBbar. ' 15. Copiae hostium S castris 
 videntur. 16. Iter & flflmine averttere vidSbimur. 17. Provincia 
 ab hostibus incursiSnibus vastab&tur. 18. Multitfldine hominum 
 castra complebuntur. W«. * 
 
 n. — 1. The forces of the enemy are being increased. 2. Stones 
 were being placed on the wall. 3. The battle will be renewed. 
 4. You will be awaited by the consul. 5. The Helvetians are 
 inclosed by the river Rhine, the Jura mountains,^ and the river 
 Rhone. 6. We shall not be alarmed by the departure of the 
 allies. 7. The arrival of the forces was being awaited by the 
 citizens. 8. For several successive days the enemy's, forces are 
 kept in camp by storms. 9. The lands of the Aedui used to be 
 laid waste by the Germans. . 10. It is announced to Ceesar. 11. I 
 shall be held in subjection. 12. They seem to fear without cause. 
 
 1. Notice also that there is no change whatever in the part that precedes the 
 personal ending, except that { before s is changed €% 4 before rit (er having almost 
 the same Bouna M ir. but being earier topronounceV 
 
 2. Use the Btfl|^Iar of nums, which has the meaning of a mowUain e^titt't» wdl~ 
 as of a single mamUain or hilL 
 
...... ^ . "-^ ■■ ■ ;.. 
 
 - PAKT t— INTRODUCTORY LESSONa ^ 43 
 
 13. They were removedr 14. We were removing. 15. They weri; 
 being removed. 16. He will recall 17 v^ ^". xney were 
 ift Tn,«„ ™n V. 1, , recaii. 17. jfou will be recalled 
 
 Fortls, brave; 
 Veldx, sioift ; 
 
 ■I . ■ .- ^ 
 
 LESSON XXVIII. 1 .^ :/ 
 
 fortlop, hramr; fortinnlmuHMavest or very 
 ■'- ■ '■: '■-■: • .brave. ■■ .'r • 
 
 veloclop, swy^er; veloolsslnms, «wn/^ or 
 _ very swift. 
 
 Potens. ^Knm:/^; poteriilor, more potentl«,„.„s.mo^ori^ry 
 
 i?oioer/tt;. pwjoerful. 
 
 ObsePvatlon.-Endings indicating the different degrees of com 
 panson. Formation of comparative and «uperla^ Lm the 
 positive.^ Twofold I«.li8li^aa^ji^«,p,ri,y^7^ *^" ^'««^ ^^^ 
 
 (6) Vter «ttiitofa, o/ a braver man. 
 
 Flumen l&tla8. a broader Hver. 
 
 Fossae latldpes, broader trenches. ' 
 
 Miutls foptlsslmi. of a very brave soldier. 
 
 Flumen latlsslmum, a very broad river. 
 
 ■ Fowae latlssimae. very broad trenches, » 
 
 Observatlon.-How 40 the case-endinfes of the commrativP 
 
 tfZVr^' adMtives of the positfve de|ree beloS^ 
 the same declension l (See section 11.) , ^'^^&^ to 
 
 yi: 
 
 Minrtm weO 
 
 "^^^«-^?^^S!5S1!7' °* *''' ^"^* ***«^*« «' ^*" adjectives is respectively 
 
I^ 
 
44 
 
 PRII^RY LATIN B00&. 
 
 ./;! 
 
 ,' EXERCISE XXVIII. 
 
 I,_l. HelvStii fluimne IStissimS et altissim5 continentur. 2. 
 Oaesarem dS adventtt Labignl certioreiii fec6runt. 3. Urbs in 
 monte altissimo posita erat. 4. PeditSs vglocissimi et fortissimi 
 delect! sunt. 5. Humiliores & potentioribus ext)ul8l erant. 6. 
 LegionSs longiore itinere circumdOxit. 7. In dSnsissimas silvas 
 confugSrunt. 8. Castra Ifttioribus fossis rnOnlta sunt. 9. Ad 
 flOmen Ifitius venerant. 10. RSs opportunissima accidit. 11. 
 Crebri6r§8 exploratores in finSs hostium misit. 12. In novissi- 
 mum agmen impetum f ecerunt. / , 
 
 II.— 1. The Helvetians had been informed of {literally, about) 
 the enemy's departure. 2. The enemy sought denser forests. 3. 
 He gives his daughter to the centurion, a very brave and.piowerful^ 
 man. 4. He';^me at 8) most opportune time. 5. They had sent 
 the^ noblest (men) of the state. 6. They are alarmed by the 
 .Ttaipearance of the wider vessels. 7. He ordered Labienus to makQ 
 '*^e vessels -lower andtwider. 8. They used to pdiSsesB most fertile 
 lands. 9. The rear was being thrown into confusion. 10. They 
 encamped in a very fertile region. 11. Th^ used to be hemmed 
 in by higher mountains and a broader ri^. 12. A deeper river 
 hems in the Helvetians. 13. Ctesar hig^'Jbeen informed by more 
 frequent messages. 14. He had,^^,)55|iRisted the safety of the 
 hostages to the bravest soldiers, /f; ' 
 
 : LESSON XXIXr- 
 
 4 (at^iman» est, he waa^ ipt has Bdmanus est* heua Moman» 
 
 '^''^^'^^^'^^^^^'- '*''^- ■■■■■ '■',,. •• ' 
 
 .d:^'0: "if ugBi Hunt, they tvere ordered. FortiSs sunt, they are hratf. 
 
 \, Cd^nttani erat, it l^nd been Potens orat, he was powerful, 
 
 found out. ■ ■ fJ 
 
 Wt9Anctl fRrvintt thiy wUl have lAh^rl mww$* ^^V '^^ ^ f"^ 
 
 ^r-^—r—-^-, been led back: % ~: 
 
 i I 
 
 Obsefvatlon. — What difference in translation occurs when '•«•, 
 »ant, etc., are joined with a noun or adjective, pot with the part 
 
 t. i.*., vtry powerful. Sae footnote 1, psge 41. > ; 
 
 I.. 
 
 :» ; 
 
 n 
 
PART L—INTBODUCTORY LESSON& 
 
 werfui. 
 
 * 
 
 ¥hen '«ti» 
 the put 
 
 .J 
 
 * '. "', ■-' ■' ' '■ 
 
 M 
 
 45 
 
 of the verb used in forming the perfect tenses ? In what case is 
 the, noun of adjective in the predicate with the verb som ? 
 
 (&) Turn to the inflection of the verb 
 section 41. ' 
 
 £f> 
 
 sum, given in Part III., 
 
 Observation.— Formation and translation of the Mi tenses in 
 the indicative, and of the present infinitive. 
 
 __:.:„,::,_._.. __::;:.;: .;::.:: exercise xxix/:- ;■■: .: :-•'-,-:: 
 
 I.— 1. OnmiumGaUorum fortissimi sunt Belgae. 2. Exercitus 
 ^rat^ m conspectu. 3. Pwlculosum est. 4. In armis sumus: 5. 
 Tertia nocte Iflna erat pl6na. 6. Locus erat idoneus. 7.« OmnSs 
 rss comparatae erant. 8. NoctSs breviorgs sunt. ' 9. Castra angu- 
 stiSra erant. 10. Sp5s est sublflta. 11. Rsx fuerat. 12. Miserior 
 et ^vior esse fortOna SSquanorum vidstur. 13. MSns altissimus 
 est inter SSquanos et HelVstiSs. 14. In itinere erfttis. 15. Prop- 
 ter frigora frOmenta in agrls matilra non erant. 16. MfliWs mon- 
 temtenSbant. ,17. Adventua hostium cSgnitus erat. 18. Reliquae 
 navSs erunt infltiles. 19. Non audSbunt esse inimlcl. 20Vir 
 fortissimus et nSbHissimua fuit. 21. ReductI sunt. 22. Foaaa 
 erat ante oppidum. 23. HomS sum. 
 
 ■ ■ s- 
 
 II.~1. All thei^est of the Belg^ns ftreTin arms. ^S^e^ 
 through the province wUl be longer. 3. Ambassadors were^sent. 
 4. The adjacent regions are veiyfertUe. 5. They are aided. 6; 
 The Belgians seem to be very hostile^ 7. There» is scarcity of all 
 things 8. They were awaiting. 9. The night was very short. 
 10. The vessels are low ahd wide. 11. The forces were sent in 
 advance. 12. The allies used to be free. 13. They began to be 
 hostile. 14. There» had been great danger. 15. Nothing is 
 easier. 16. We shaU be thrown into confusion. 17. You are 
 useful friends. 18. They have been in Ccesar's army. 19. He 
 has been influenced. 20. They are making ready all things. 21. 
 It IS uncertain. *• -. ■ ■',■■■;.■■;■■ ■ -■■p---' '■■',^- ' T. ■ 
 
 ''Uunat7tt^J»j^\^I2i^t^^^"^ equivwent In Latin, wTiioli would «tpNii 
 wwrjora («n mm prMmt and " ten mm are presmt " by the Mine won!». *^ 
 
 * 7%a« (the Introductory adverb) haa no equlvi^lent in Latin. Sea footnote 1. 1 ' 
 
 ■ 'l*' ■ taial ' ■ M. ■ ..■■■.. . ■ ^^ _ 
 
m 
 
 ■M 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 LESSON XXX. 
 
 
 Popnlo Bomand perlouldsam it was dangerous to the Bomcm 
 erat, ' people. ' 
 
 Helvetlls erat Inimlons, he vxts hostile to the Helvetia/n». 
 
 Flnitiml sunt Oalliae, they are adja>cent to Oaul. 
 
 Observation.^ — Nature of the adjectives. Addition of a noun 
 defining their application. Case of the noun indicating the person 
 concerned or the thing to which the quality is directed. Does the , 
 dative in these sentences generally precede or follow the adjective^ 
 it refers to?'^ , 
 
 ^ /\ -EXERCISE XXX. ^ ' '/'t;:';' . ':>; /■ 
 
 I. — 1. Amicus fuerat HelvStiis. 2. Caesai^ es fid§Iis. 3. In- 
 cursidnes hostium prov^nciae sunt perlculosae. 4. Fugae similia 
 erat discSssus. 5. Turpissimum ^ est reipublicae. 6. Nihil estr' 
 gr&tius dis immortSlibus. 7. Omnibus equitibus incognitum erat. ' 
 8. Gain flnitiml Belgis erant. 9. Caesai^ erat inimlcus. 10. 
 C&ii fuSrunt dIs immort&libus. 11. Yulnera mllitl periculosa sunt. 
 12. Qa}ll non parSs erant Belgis. 13. Multls civibus erit grfttum. 
 
 n. — 1. We are not equal to the enemy's cavalry. 2. The 
 Aedui are adjacent to the provinces. 3. Nothing was more dis- 
 graceful to the Germans. 4. The road is dangerous to the army. 
 5. She is dear to aU. 6. We used to ba friendly to the Romans. 
 7. They are useiul friends to the hostages. 8. We had been 
 faithful to the Roman people. 9. The punishments are more 
 pleasing to the immortal gods. 10. He used t0 seem to be hostile 
 to the Roman people, ll. The war will b^ dangerous to the state. 
 12. The harbors were unknown to the Gauls. 13. It is siAiilar to 
 the GaUio war. ' ^ ' m ' 
 
 'Mr 
 
 LESSON XXXL 
 
 ^1... 
 
 Turn to the list of irregularities in the comparison of adjeotivesi 
 given in Part 111.« section 13 (parts ii., iii. and iv.). 
 
 1. For beglnnei» it ; 
 
 1. For beginnei» it nu»r be ■umole 
 iataa in tna omtnaiy w iyjaa i w nffinf 
 
 , S. 8m footnote 2, p«g« S. 
 
 be ■ulHolent to «Jl attention to tii> me of <l>tlTM (tnm» 
 
 " (mi " '" "" 
 
< PART L— -INTRODUCTOEY LESSON& * 47 
 
 Ob.ervatlon^The difierence between the comparison of these 
 Bectwes and the regular comparison, given in Lesson XXVIII. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXI. > 
 
 PoriTtlsT^ ^! "^^^"""^ «"Ititadinem equitum ab.tllteri(^ 
 Cl ^ « ^^*' P'^^' ""'^^ Germanis. 3. Ascgnsus est 
 
 facUlimus. 4 Supenore anno minore cum perlculo beUum gesse- 
 rant. 5. CrSbemma aedificia in GaUia sunt. 6. Proximft nocte 
 summa^erat difficultSs. 7. Ocelum est citerioris provinciae opp^ 
 t?"' «f r«™u"^- 8. Spem celerrimae vict^riae habent. 9. MftxkL 
 ittneribuB m Galliam citeriorem contendit. 10. Iter per.prSvin- 
 ciam erat facilbmum. 11. Summam scientiam rel mili^\abet. 
 12. Supenora loca occupSverant. 13. In citeriore GaUia legiOnSs 
 conscrlps^ 14 Superi5re amio cum proximis clvitfitibus^em 
 wLTJH conWvSrunt. 15. Pn>pter smnmam virttitem , 
 hZ WP- « Supenoribus disbus mftjorem motmn exspecta- ^ 
 16 t ^P^"^''^™ P*"^^"* ^"^ dSnsissimls castrls coii- 
 
 rvft '" 
 
 "■~^' """«y '»^-J»Il«!ted veiy many sMpTavthe preoedin» 
 Sr'd .f " "^ r"" "^ "^ diffloult. 8. They had beef 
 rfaftoned in the upper line. 4. He h«l sent very /r^ueht me,- 
 
 ri#«iO tame of the year more Btotee were oonepiring. 6 For the 
 toger part of the summer they had.waged war in hither Gaol. 7 
 ^ey made an attack from (ItUrMy, out of) thehigher griund. 8. 
 They were attacking the outer fortifications. 9. He had come on 
 -the preceding day to the smjler oamp with a Urger number of 
 foot-Boldiers.. 10. The depth of the river i, ve^ great 11 
 Geneva « the farthest town of the Allobroges, «id the nea^st ^ 
 
 r^GaSr^ ^K n"T" *'^- "■ '^'^ 1»™«' 'he fin«,t city 
 !»• 1 hey bad collected vegr large forces. 
 
\ 
 
 48 
 
 PRD«ABY LATIN BOpK. 
 
 -*» «- 
 
 ./ .^v *i LESSON XXXII. ; • 
 
 (a) Turn to tib present indicative active of tjj^e third conjuga- • 
 tion, given in iSrt III., section 27. '; ^' 
 
 Observation.— Personal endings. Manner of joining personal " 
 endings to the common part reg-.^ >; -' '* ^ |i 
 
 (6) In the same -way examine the present indicative ^tive of the 
 fourth conjugation, in the same section. ;i 
 
 " (c) Turn to the present indicative, passive of the third and fourth ~ 
 conjugations, given in section 28. , 
 
 ^bgervatlon.— Is the diflerence between the active and th* 
 passive» in the present tense, the same as in the first and second 
 conjugations?» Y ; , * ' ; ' f ' % 
 
 . / ; EXERCISE XXXII.. • * 
 
 i— 1. A Caesare in Galliam praemittituV. ?. HostSs in silvSjaC 
 repelluntur,. 3. I,iSgatt ab omnibus civjtatibus veniunt. 4. Ter- , 
 tiam partem Galliae incolitis. 5. Ad castra vSnit : ad castra venit.- 
 6. Ex castris discSdunt. 7. Ad Caesarem convenlmus. 8. Castra 
 ,T*U6 altissimS mflmuntur. O.-Viticlminl: vinciminL, 10. Pontem 
 rescindunt. 11. Rhodanus provinciani ab HelvStiis dividit. 12. 
 Vicus flflmine dividitur. 13. A populo RSmftnS impedlmur. 14. 
 Exercitum in Olteriorem Galliam dtJcis. 16. Axjiem circumveniunt. 
 16. Vinclmus. 17. Castra in loc6 idflneS pSnimus. 18. Oppid» 
 omnia incendunt. 19. In fluCtOs dSsilit. 20. Cum equitatd Hel- 
 T6ti5rum proelium conimittunt. ^ ^ -^ , ^ J 
 
 n.— 1. They leap down out of the ship. 2. The line of battle 
 is drawn up. 3. You are enrolling a legion. 4. A, few foot- 
 soldiers fall. 5. We are being surrounded by the Gaujs. 6. We 
 aire waging war with the Romans. 7. They assemble on the 
 seventh day. 8. They send agjbassadors to Csesar about peace." 
 9. The legion is led. back /into wmter quarters. 10. You are 
 "binding. 11. We are conqiternig. 12. The bridge i» broken down.^ 
 
 1. With, beginners It ii Bufflcient for all practical purpotwa to ooniMer the prwent 
 rtcm «a e nctin y In thw noMo nant preoedin y o. e.g., rag-, pon-, gtr-. To Introduce tb» 
 ■o-oalled thematio vowel -«~wIiroiIy oauM oonnmoB. \ ~ 
 
 % See footnote 1, page 41 
 
 ■to. 
 
 
Lve of the . '^'^ 
 
 4 -fr^f 
 
 PART I.— .INtIiOPUCTORY LESSONS. 
 
 49 
 
 /l.' 
 
 13. THiey fortify the camp" with a wall and trehbh. 14. A meseagA 
 is sen£ to CfBsar. 15. They are assembling from all the camps. 
 16. The camp is pitched in a valley. 17. Lat)ienus id sent in 
 advance with the scouts. 18. I am hindered by the violence of 
 the river. 19. I am cut off from the army. 20. It is annoimced. 
 
 - Tiim to the adjectives whose declension ia.givep in Part UliV 
 section 14. ' .*r:. -,. ■ .'"Vft; ' " ■,. -^'^ ■ t ■--/■■..; • ■ 
 
 . ObserTrftion.— Declension to which these adjectives in l^e main 
 b6long.^ Irregulanties in declension. % - . 
 
 The most peculiar of the common uses ©f the adjectives^ veil in 
 the list may be observed in the following sentences : '^ 
 
 Alia loca foasis, alia vallls, Sotm places fw vxul fortifyina ioith 
 
 ,«lla turrlbus muniebat.; . ^ ^^trencheSy others' tktit' waUSf 
 
 . '. " * " J others with Uywera: 
 
 Altera legi5 In OaUi& hlem^t, ,On<r iegum is ivinteriri^ in Oavl, 
 
 altera in ItalU. • > the other in Italy. ; s'.... 
 
 1 . * \ . EXEBgiSE x:^xiii. 
 
 T.— 1. Alteram iter fafcilius erat. 2. LSgfttl totius G^iae ad 
 Caesarem veniunt.^ 3. Ciim sola decim& legidne proelium com- 
 mittit 4. Aliiditer habSmiis nt^Uum.^ 5. Belinquitur'» Ona per 
 
 * SSqlianSs. vi^. 6. In utram partem flflm^n 'fluit ?3 7. Nfllll acci- 
 derat. 8. Neuter proelium comhiittere aud^bit. 9. Un6 tempore 
 4^ »^v|^W equit&tfls et^& LatiSnl victSrift certior factus est. 10. 
 Alteram partem vicl Gallis concSdit, alteram cohortibus. 11. Ab 
 »lils audiunt. 12. Alia in^parte legiOnSs collocavit. 13: FactiS- 
 num alterius princi^tum tenent Aed^ui» alterius 86quanl. 14. 
 Sjne 0113 perlculS oastra miiuiunt.. I5i A^^er SSquanus optimus 
 
 -Test tStlus GalUae. ' -^ ^* ^ , ; ^^ 4 . 
 
 
 ii tm n | < 
 
 1. Kullum «ffreM with iter, and is placed where it in for emphasia* n^e. 
 ■ .^•?L '!!l!!^°'°*^J!l ""*""'?/''? " ! !^ "^ ^*'" inf , md.int/.rv th^^ In Pnflhh, wh fi m 
 
 rwHTBtpoBdlag word la found 1b Xaffn, may Be ahown. 8m footnote I, page 46. 
 8. 9ee footaote S^ page 1». ""^ 
 
 Tj- 
 
 
60 
 
 PEIMAEY LATIN BOOK* 
 
 ^--^ n.-tl. He gives orders to- the whole province. '2. An «ttack ' 
 was made from all directions at one time. 3. Some Iflrthe 
 ■ trenches, others attack "the Vails. 4.. It is pleasing to neither. 5. 
 They had marched through /the province without (doinfe) any 
 mischief. 6. The Sequani alone do^ riot venture to ask aid. 7. 
 He puts the baggage of the whole army in a suitable place. 8. 
 They assembled in (Uferally, to) one place. 9. They made a sally 
 from «other part of the town. 10. On the other bank of the 
 river a legion is left. 11. Neither line begins the battle. 12. ^e 
 
 , hastened to the oth~er< camp. '13. Some he. ordered to give up 
 tbeir arms, others to give hostages. 14. We shall aid neither/' 
 16. He will not be deterred by the iilfluence of anaSatate. 
 
 ] , I i^EssoN xxxrv. 
 
 (a) Turn to the imperfects arid future indicative active of ^e 
 third and fourth cOnjugations\ given in Part HI., s*ection 27. 
 
 OliSBervatiloii.— Compare Ihei^ with ^he corresponding forms in 
 the first and second conjugati^s. Are they formed from thci 
 same principal part? Have they the same letters indicating "mjo^s, 
 ivere or used to? shall or toUlf^, 
 
 (b) The corresponding forms of 
 Part III., section 28. ,^^ 
 
 Observation.— Are the changes from the active to the passive 
 made in the same way as in the first and Second conjugations ?» ' 
 
 EXERCISE XXXIT. ' <^ = 
 
 [.— 1^ B^um gerebant. 2. AciSs InstruSbatur. 3. "DBsiliSmus. ' 
 Commoventur. 5. LegiSnem cOnscrlbSbat. 6. Castra mOniS- 
 us. • t. MittSmur. 8. ConveniSbfttis. 9. IntercKldSminl. ^ 
 
 10, ^Uum gerunt. 11. Veni6)t)at. 12. Oppida incendfibantur. 
 
 13- rraemittuntur. 14. Castra mflnisbantur. 15. Vinciar. 16. ' 
 
 D6^j^ntu^. 17. Prohibetis. 18. Impedlris. 19. Vino«is. 20. 
 
 Trftdcttur. 
 
 passive voice are given in 
 
 1. SM ^(Ms^oU \ page 19. 2. Bee footnote 1, iM«e 45. 8. See footnot* 1, pag* 4«. 
 
 -ir- 
 
1»ART I. — INTRODUCTOBt LESSONa 
 
 61 
 
 '9y 
 
 n.— 1. They were assembling. 2. We shall depart. 3. He 
 was leading back. 4. I shall be led back. 5. He was leaping 
 down. 6. The camp is bei^g fortified. 7. He will encamp. 8. 
 
 . They will move the camp. *'9. I. shall be restrained. 10. It used 
 to divide. H. It was being fortified. 12. We were waging war. 
 13. A legion will be enrolled. 14. You will be bound. 15. You 
 will be^coiiiquered. 16. Jou will have conquered. 17. Arms were 
 being got ready. 18. You shall b© hindered. 19. I used to come. ' 
 
 ; 20. We shall not begin battle. ' 
 
 * 
 
 ';-!* 
 
 7t ' 
 
 'P 
 
 't 
 
 LESSON XXXV. 
 
 Turn» to the list of cardinal numerals given in Part III., sec- 
 ,' tion,!©/" ,: '"...:; :: v ",■,,-..'.■,:■'■. ..'■ 
 
 PbMrvation. — Notice the similarity in form of the cardinal and 
 ordinal numerals; the formation of the words from Eleven to 
 twenty ; the manner of ea^pressing twenty-one and similar num- 
 bers ; the Various expressions for eighteen and similar numbers.. 
 . For the declension of the cardinal numerals,' -see piirt III., seo- 
 
 tipnie.» ' : ; 
 
 ' * V , • EXEHCISE XlXXV. ,f ^ 
 
 '. ■ ■. V» . » 
 
 I-— !• DuSs legionSs in citeriore Gallia conscribsbat, et tr6s ex 
 
 ■ hibemis SdtbceKit. 2, Quingeiitis equitibus mfignam multittldinem 
 
 hostium propuleranti 3. I)i6s circitey quindecim iter f gcerSmus. 
 
 4. Ad, Caesarem cum duqentls obsidibus veniebat. 5. NftvSs 
 
 octodecim ex superiore porta solvent.> 6. Signa mllitftria quattuor 
 
 ^ et jgeptuSginta ad Caesarem retulgrunt. 7. Centum viginti quln- 
 
 jaj^pftgos habent. 8. EquitSs circiter' triginta trftnsportftveratl 
 
 . 9. ^uattuordecim anhos bellum gesserant. 10. «Cum sescentis 
 
 , equitibus firuptionem fgeSrunt, 11. Digs decem et octp trftns 
 
 KhSnum consftcaemus. 12. NftvSs octogintft coactae erant. . 13. 
 
 Legi^nem quartam decimam in'provinoiam redacet. 14. Quadrft- 
 
 ginta oohortSs coactae sunt. 15. Digs continuos quinque d^pi&i 
 
 in acie Instrttxit. '' ■> > 
 
 1. The dMleiuion and um of miUe »re tokan up in LMton XXXYII. 
 
62 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 _ > . ■ ■ , « 
 
 II.— 1. He drei^^up a triple line of four legions. 2. He was. 
 demanding -five hundred hostages. 3. In one summer two very 
 great tirars had been finished. 4. They had taken forty-three 
 towns and about two hundred villages. 6. An attack was made by 
 four hundred cavalry. 6. He ordered Labieijus with two legions 
 and one hundred and fifty cavalry to ascend the mountain. 7 
 They were collecting twenty-eight ships, a Thirty-five soldier^ 
 will be chosen from the whole^army. 9. Twenty-three forts were 
 made. 10. The viUage is divided into two parts by a rive^- 11 
 There.were two parties ^ in Gaul. 12. Ab^t four hundred vilAges 
 wiU be bumM. 13. He left two legions in the camp, and with 
 . the remammg six marched for nine days through the territories of 
 the Belgians. 14.' Two legions, the eleventh and the sixteenth, 
 will be left on the other bank. 15. On the twenty-fifth day two 
 hundred and fifty horsemen had been coUected. 16. They wUi 
 give up the two sons of Galba, and three hundred and fifty 
 hostages. 17. They have three months' corn. 
 
 -4,. '■■ .: ^ ■:...■/,.. ,. .■.■■■■-' ,. .' . * 
 
 ,, " . — - y^) :„„ 
 
 V ... 
 
 -*^ 
 
 
 / 
 
 if-' 
 
 ./ 
 
 LESSON XXXVI. 
 
 Mtssuras baii, 
 
 * " ■■ ■ 
 
 he is going to send, he is about to send^ 
 ; he intends to send. ' ■] 
 
 ^ve are going to lay vxisU, we a/re (mtliei 
 ^ ' point of laying vxiste. . .« 
 
 **^*?v**:"*" -"""** *'*"*** ^ forces loere on the point of fortify. 
 
 - ' / '■-''' : i'lig, fvere about to fortify.'. 
 
 Jugsui^nfl eram, ^ " '. I was going to order. ' 
 
 Legrld non ventura erlt, the legion toUl not be \iMy to come. 
 
 Pb8ervatipn.-Formation of iMi verbal phrases. Changes 
 tgnding u^ I, ae, a. From which of the principal paries are 
 Ii%ru8, JasRuras, etc., obtained? Various translations pos- ' ' 
 for each form." To which voice do the verbs belong ? Difier-^^^" < 
 
 ence in meaning and formation between mlMus e.t and mlMuru. ^ 
 est, etc. , 
 
He was- s 
 wo very 
 •ty-three 
 made by , 
 ) legions 
 ain. 7. 
 soldiers '^ 
 rts were 
 er. 11.. 
 villages 
 tid with 
 ories of 
 :teenth,' 
 lay twq 
 ey will * 
 id fifty 
 
 / 
 
 ■V ..;. 
 
 PART I. — INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXVI. 
 
 53 
 
 / • 
 
 I. — 1^. Buodecim cohortes coHcturi sumus. 2. Omnia aedificia 
 incensurl erant et iter per provinciam per vim temptattiri. 3. 
 Sine equitattl n6n est venttirus. 4. Bellum cum Romanis gestilri 
 ierant. 5. Ntlllo cimi periculo copiap ad proxima castra perventiirae 
 sunt. 6. Neque obsides repetituri, neque auxilium a populo 
 Rdmllnd imploratClri erant, 7. Centuriones et ^ribtinos militum 
 convocatiirus sum. 8. Proxima nocte quarta vigilia castra mota 
 "©rant.. 9. D5 itinere brevi teinpore jQdicattiri estis. 10. Omngs ' 
 collgs et loca superiota occupatflri eramus. 11. Impedjmenta 
 relictOrl et gruptionem facturi sumus. 12. Injurias Aeduorum 
 non neglecttlrus erit. 13. Aeduls, obsides non rfeddittirus sum. 
 14. Amicitiam populi Roman! recHsat^us est. 16. Cflr ab officid 
 discessOrus es ? 
 
 11.-— 1. The enemy are going to send ambassadors and ^ve 
 hostages. 2. Reinforcements are likely to come from the nearest 
 winter quarters. 3. The forces are going to winter in hither Q&xjI. 
 4. The flight of the Gauls is likely to alarm the Romans. 5. We 
 are intending to aid the other army. 6. They were about to lead 
 across three-fourths (literally, ihre^ parts) of their forces. 7. She 
 is not likely to gain her request. 8. They had been on the point 
 of giving up their arms. 9. He was about to make an attack with 
 three hundred cavalry. 10. The army was led out of the camp the 
 next day. 11. We are likely to finish the war. without any danger. 
 
 12. They are not likely to refrain from wrong-doing and mischief. ' 
 
 13. I intend to say nothing about Labienus' opinion. 14. Neither v 
 wrill be likely to begin battle. 15. We shall spend three disiys in ^ 
 the province. • ., " 
 
 LESSON XXXVIl. 
 
 (a) Mills eqalt^H mlttentar, 
 Adventns mllle eqttltnm, 
 
 -Cm» a Btll«""«yittibw ■ 
 t«iidlt* . 
 
 ^«fr 
 
 JO, thousand koraemen wUl he sent, 
 the arrival of a thousand horsemen. 
 he haatened ioith a thofUiand horae 
 
 men. 
 
 i i-.i 
 
 -.':-*W 
 
h 
 
 54 
 
 PKIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 ^ Tria mlUla equltnm mit- three thousand horsemen wUl he 
 *«"*"'• sent. 
 
 Cumdu6bu«mmibu«eqal. A« h^tened with two thousand 
 turn eontendlt, V horsemen. 
 
 ;^b«ervatlon.-Diflference between singular and plural of mllle 
 m decWon, and in relation to other parts of the sentence, ^or 
 declension, see Part III., section 16. 
 
 (6) MUle passus pertlaet. i^4xtends a thtusa^wi paces, or a 
 
 "■ : - ' " ■ ■ mite. 
 
 ~ ^ Trla mUlla Pawmmi abest.^ heisthrk thoxisand paces, or threT 
 ' ' _ # , - miles, distant. 
 
 .TTr^'^'T^^ what case does Latin indicate distance or the 
 extent oi space ? . W: 
 
 »».'■ 
 
 EXERCISE XXXVII. 
 
 Jl*'^^?? ™''"^^ consederant miUia passuum octo a 
 
 eastns Romanorum. 2. MiUia hominum octogint^ delecta sunt. 
 S. gumma ommum erat millia trecenta sexaginta octo. 4. Locus 
 sescentos passfls abest. 5. A lacu Lemanno ad flOmen Rhodanum 
 milha passuum decem novem murum perducit. ■ 6. NtUIam partem 
 noctis Iter mtermiserunt. 7. Millia sex convenerunt. 8. Ex 
 miUibus tngmta tertia pars interfecta erat 9. A Germanis iter 
 paucorum dierum aberant. 10. Milites aggerem latum pedes tre- 
 centos tngmte altum pedes octoginta exstruxerunt. 11. Spatium 
 fcnum mmium" patet. 12. Ex proelio «lillia hominum triginta 
 tna 8uperfusnint.3 13. Multa millia passuum agri vacant. 14. 
 bilva novem di§rum iter patet. 15. Sex miUia peditum reliquit; 
 
 \J^'~\ '"'^^ ^""^ ''"^ ""'^^' ^^^*^"*' 2. He restored about twenty 
 thousand captives to th. Aedui. 3. The camp was pitched thtee 
 mil^s from CaBsar's camp. 4. Out of a number of fifty-two thou- 
 sand scarce^, a fourth part is left. 5. At day-break he w«s a mile 
 and a half from tlie enemy's camp. 6 . The rest of the legions are 
 
 Of L^XosS a^'Inftt*"^^^^^^ ^ftmmisacompound 
 
 ift^ ncraUy omittoa wfaw the genitive of mUtta la lUW. '■ 
 
 8. Prom mpersum; see footnote 1. 
 
 * 
 
toUl be 
 hoiisand 
 
 f mlile 
 • For 
 
 ?«, or a 
 or three 
 
 ( or the 
 
 octo a 
 . sunt. 
 Locus 
 ianum 
 )artem 
 8. Ex 
 Is iter 
 is tre- 
 >atium 
 iginta 
 . 14. 
 
 uit; 
 
 venty 
 thtee 
 thou- 
 . mile 
 IS are 
 
 pound 
 ailarly 
 
 PART 1. — INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 
 
 55 
 
 a great distance away. 7. The Boil with fifteen thousand men. 
 were bringing up the line of march. 8. We were about a mile 
 away from the river. 9. Twenty-three thousand Gauls had come 
 to Cffisar.' 10. The territories of the Helvetians used to extend 
 two hundred and for|y miles. 11. He selected a suitable place 
 about six hundred paces from the Germans. 12. The Gauls will 
 send twenty-five thousand, the Belgians ten, the Germans three. 
 13. We shall advance a journey of ten miles. 14. Four thousand 
 men had been slain. 15. A town of th« Belgians was eight miles 
 -from the camp. J:^ _ _.„ _. 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 LESSON XXXVIIL 
 
 Caesarl p&rent, ^ 
 EquitatuI Bomanp praegtant* 
 
 liOgidnl snbveniantt 
 Provlnoiae Iniperat, \ '^ 
 
 Mllltl persaadet. 
 
 H they obey (or a/re obedient to) CcBsar. 
 they surpass (or a/re superior to) 
 
 the Boman cavalry, 
 they aid (or give aid to) the legion. 
 ■1 he commands (or gives orders to) 
 the province. 
 , he persuades (literally, makes it 
 ^ agreeable to) the soldier. 
 
 Observation»— What Case is used with these Latin verbs to 
 express the object of the English verbs? Notice that in all the 
 examples the word expressed by this case represents the person 
 indirectly aflFected (to, or for, or in connection with whom some- 
 thing is done). ' 
 
 Notice how the general vocabulary indicates when if verb (e.gf., 
 reslsto) belongs to the same class as those given above. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXVIII. 
 I.— 1. Alii eruptionibus resistunt, alfl equitibus subveniunt. 2. 
 Dumnorigi mSgnls praemils persuftdet. 3. Ex mSgno equitum 
 numero nSnntOlI Galliols rSbus favebant. 4. Aeduorum civit&tl 
 Caesar indulserat. 6. Caesar Dumnorigi IgnSvit. 6. Maritimis 
 rflyinnihiiH quattuor rBgSs praeerant.^ 7. Nflllft in r6 commtlnl 
 
 1. For prattum, Me footnote 1, petre 54. 
 
 
 y 
 
56 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 salati deerat.» 8. Omnibus Gallls praestant. 9. NecessftriS tern- 
 .^ pore civifcftti subvenerat. 10. LegionI succurnmt et equitum 
 impetas sustinent. 11. Neque ad conciUa veniunt neque imperio 
 Caesans pftrent. 12. Omnia nSvibus deerant.i 13. ReUqiiae 
 legiSngs Caesari satisfScerant* L ; fe v .■ 
 
 II. -1. They will aid the allies. 2. He was injuring C«sar and 
 the government. 3. They decided to give hostages and obey the ^ 
 rule of the Roman people. 4. Dumnorix had command of the / 
 cavalry. 6. Dumnorix favors the Helvetians on account of the 
 relationship. 6. Caesar had indulged the tenth legion, and used"^^~^ 
 to trust (it) on account of (its) valor. 7. In another direction two ' 
 legions were resisting the enemy. 8. They spared neither women^ 
 nor infants. 9. The Germans used to surpass the Belgians 10 
 They had given satisfaction to the Aedui about the injuries ll' 
 One thingj»^ was lacking fo Caesar. .12. He favors Labxenufl^a4 
 opinion. 13. The infantry was aiding the cavalry. /^ '' " 
 
 \- 
 
 LESSON XXXIX. 
 
 Legatus qui missus erat» 
 Leglo, quae mlssa erat, 
 Oppidnm quod erat expugna- 
 
 turn, 
 LSgatus quern inlserant, '^ 
 
 Adyentus legatorum quos ml- 
 ■erant. 
 
 thi ambassador who had been sew 
 the legion which ha^ hen sen^. 
 the town which hadlka£^en by 
 
 storm. ■ •F^^'tt-.. 
 
 the ambassador' whom they^M 
 
 sent. \ * " "^^v 
 
 th^ arnval qf the ambdssadors 
 
 whom they had sent. 
 Ab oppldd quod erat expug- from the toton which had hem' 
 m&tum, \ ia^g^ j^ ^^.^^^ 
 
 Oerm&nl qulbusoum bellum the Oerrmns With whom they had 
 gesserant. , ^ ■ ^aged war. 
 
 . Observation.— Change of form in the relative pronoun. (The 
 declension of qui is given in Part III., section 24.) Whatdeter- 
 
 1. For d4m,m, see footnote 1, page 64 
 
 JKitl 
 
 . .- "' """g ^1». tne worg tftiw fc w i th. <^n ftdittntlvf. /nr riV-«t- > ■ 
 
 / 
 
11. 
 
 .11 
 
 
 • / 
 / 
 
 PART L — INTEQDUCTOKY LESSONS. 
 
 67 
 
 mines the number, the gender, the case, of the pronoun? Cum 
 with the relative. The position of the clause introduced by the 
 .TOlative pronoun.^ ^ ..m. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXIX. - - 
 
 I. — 1. Ex altera parte vici, quam Gallis concSsserat, omnSs 
 discgdere uoepgruiit. ,2., Reliquum exercitum in^ Morinos, ab 
 quibus legati non vSn^^nt, dOxit. 3. Cum sola decima legiSne, 
 
 ^6 qua non dubita 
 poster© die l§gatu 
 in^ Morinos, qui 
 Commium, ciljus vi: 
 fines Aedu6rum,'qirf 
 
 f^ndulserat, discessilrus erat. 4. Caesar 
 bus, quas ex Britannia redOxerat, 
 f ecerant, misit. 6. Cum l^atis 
 consilium probabat, mittit^6. In 
 xihii S§quanis erant, exercitum dtfifit. 7. 
 Ab oirijnibus natiSnJbus, quae trans RhSnum incolunt, IggatI ad 
 Caesarem missi sunt. " 8. Naves habent plOrimas, quibus in Bri- 
 tanniam navigant, 9. Ad oppidum, ' quod circiter mille passes 
 aberat, confugerunt. 10. Omnibus druidibus praeest Onus, qui 
 summam habet auctoritatem. ' ^ / 
 
 n.— 1. ^he Belgians are nearest to the Germans, who dwell 
 across Ihe Rhine, with whom they are coniinually waging war. 2. 
 ,He ordered IJabienus with two legions which had wintered in the_ 
 province to hasten to the river, which was ten miles distant. 3. 
 They did* what they had been ordered.. 4. He is likely to per- 
 suade Casticus, whose father has poss€S|^||royal power a.mong the 
 Sequani for many years. 5. He will collect idl his retainers, of 
 whom he has a great number. 6. He sends tl^e cavalry in advance 
 throuigh the forest (of) Ardennes,^ which is the largest in (literally ^ 
 of) all Gaul. 7. Twenty-four thousand Germans came» to Ario- 
 vistus, who had settled in the country of the Sequani. 8. Two 
 legions, which he had enrolled in hither Gaul, brought up the 
 whole line of march. 9. The Sequani, through whose territories 
 
 1. The relative clause is regularly placed immediately after ihe word to which the 
 relative pronoun refers (the antecedent). The order in each of the Latin sentences in 
 the exercise should be observed. 
 
 2. Translate in by against. 
 
 "' Oaul, wh e re th e o ity N>= 
 
 "STin BUClTphraseB as ifie 
 
 / ' 
 
 Borne, etc., Latin does not use the g^enitive, but puts the wbAls in the same case. 
 
S8 
 
 PjRIMART LATIN BOOK. 
 
 wtuT'^t'''/''' *°"« '""''""•' *« t»™ which hrf 
 
 Exspeotandns est, 
 Eqnng removendns est, 
 Legatus mlttendiis erat, 
 Looas munlendas erlC-^ 
 Oastra m&nlenda erant, 
 Bellnm «rerendam est, 
 Le^atl mlttendl sunt, 
 l>egid exspeotanda erlt. 
 
 LESSON XL. . 
 
 h^ shoxUd he mvaiteff. 
 
 the horse mtist be removed. 
 
 an anfhassador orvght to have b^n sent. 
 
 tf^e place will have to be f&rtiful 
 
 the oampJiad to be/ortified. 
 
 war if tojiewaged^i 
 
 ambassadors oxight to be sent. 
 
 the legion will' have 4o be aimited\ 
 
 r.- t "^ f'f^ywn wwnaveto be awaited 
 
 Cop.a.«,p.e.»nd«. .™,.. tKe force, ^uld ka« 6e»Z«l. 
 
 new'TX' a7/Tr"*" '" *" ""'"""' conjugations „f!the 
 
 various translations given for each tense ««"^"(Uve. The 
 
 " • 
 
 EXERCISE XL. 
 
 \ 
 
 suir^ ^l^r «''"'*^"™ ^*- 2. Ugm ad Caesa^em mittendl 
 rLLfT7T "^''^ ^*""^ concsdenda est, altera cohort^us 
 4. InjOriae AeduSrum non negligendae erant fi Pw. r "^* 
 
 tempore «gen*, erant. 8. In hibema redaoendt suLa 9 «W 
 cendus atdue dsterrendus erlL, i/i ft- °°"' '""""• "• Ooer- 
 
 veferj«,ue refioienZeunt il '^ ™ "*"'" ««•'«««"»«». 
 
 12. L5gM. .udien7l«T' 13 H^ '^""P"'^''"'' *'• ' 
 
 A J - , ""*«"ui erant. ij. HostCs sunt onnrimenHT tA 
 
 Aeduos ab fnjarift dSfendT 1K n^ • *" "PP"»nenaL 14. 
 
 «rant. ^ J^^"* <»«endl. 15., Copiae hostium submpvendae 
 
 2 ^^' ^"i**"! ^''"'^' «houldhave been removed out of siaht 
 4. The arrival of the odiferfja w1?h.K n ■^ uui, or signt. 
 __^_ ""0 ""fP'-te wfilbh Cieaar sent must be awaited. 
 
 ^^Thl8 form ii "oalled the Otrundiv* 
 
 ft fli^ fniiliiiiti n ittii 
 
 '||«cprw,e«dutyorn«0Mdty, and t4lw.ys 
 
 
 -■'v: 
 
 ;>■ # 
 
 T* 
 
PART I. — INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 
 
 59 
 
 lich had 
 
 y which i^ 
 
 3. The opportunity is hot to be lost. 4. The camp ought to be 
 fortified with a double wall. 5. The Ime of battle had to be 
 drawn up. 6. The hostages will have to be restored. 7. Two 
 cohorts should have been sent to the smaller camp, which was 
 three miles distant. 8. Peace must be estabUshed with the near- 
 est states. 9. The war ought to be renewed.' 10. The baggage 
 should have been stationed in one place. 11. Forces had to be 
 raised. 12. The rest of the army is to be led into the country 
 of the Morini. 13. The soldiers should be re|&led from work. 
 14. You should have been sent in advance. 16. The camp must) 
 be defended. 
 
 W 
 
 LESSON XLI. 
 
 w 
 
 0omni5tl «ant qnod magrna they were alarmed because a large 
 
 pars exeroitus interfeota paH of fhe army had been 
 
 ^ erat, ; ;. ■ ' ;.: giain. : . 
 
 p>am Rom&nX oastra ponant, while the Bomans were pitching 
 
 ^ hostes Impetam «ublto fe- their camp, the enemy inid- 
 
 ogrnnt. -^ denly made an attack, 
 
 Ubl parati Bunt» oppida^ omnia when they were ready, theybitmed 
 
 lnoend§rnnt, all their towns. 
 
 Postqaam pervenlt. «^bsidgs after (or when),he ai-rived, hejckf 
 
 poposolt, , manded hostages. 
 
 Sltnnl atque d6 adventu Cae- as soon as they were informed of 
 
 ■arl» oertt6r«s fa«tl sant, Cvesar's arrival, they sent am- 
 
 i««&t5s mla^rnnt, bassadors^ - . 
 
 Obtldea, «t lmp«r&v«^at, nd- the hostages were brought, OB he 
 
 ^ dttMlBunt, V • , . -hqdprdered, 
 
 Observalloii.— How are the ideas because, whUe, when, after, a» 
 soon a» and as expressed in Latin ? What pwbliarity in the tense 
 used wia dam ?» IVhat tense is used after abl, po«tqnam. «imal 
 fttqae ?* The position of the dependent clause in each sentence. 
 
 1. Utln 
 •xpeot«(L 
 
 the praMDt tenM with dum, where the imperfect miyht have beMi 
 
 fciSi^SSS^S^^S^it^^ .<Walr«. wl»«* w,i^ 
 
 
60 
 
 PKIMAKY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 # 
 
 ' EXERCISE XLI. ' - : 
 
 * • , ' '' . ■ 
 
 .b~^' S»'""'»««»*<Jiffl<'<J«« quod mlUtSs mSgno et giavl onere 
 «rmorum opppessl sunt. 2. Cbi ISgsa ad Caesarem rLrtSrunt 
 obsides quingento. p„p<«oit. 3. Postquam omnS, BelgL™ 
 »pjae m „„um locum oolite, sunt, ad flomen AxonaiA, quod est ^ 
 «rito ^Z""' <=°ntend5™„t. 4. Dum beUum ouL Venetis 
 gentur, Sablnus cum copils quSs 5 Caesare «coiperat, in fines 
 ,^m„rum perytat. 6. Missrior et g^vior est Ir^ SSqua- 
 
 ^tque m tado constiterunt, in hostSs impetum fScSrunt. 7. Ut 
 
 9 S^r r ' ™"»P««rtnt, impetum subito ftcSrunt. 
 
 1^ undf ir T " '°'''*""' '^'»' I5gatus«.teriectus est. 
 
 proehum non commlserant, novissimum agmen lacessere coepSrunt. 
 
 ,% - - 7-«--- 7— 
 
 (n.-l. Wheri neither army begin» tlfe battle, Cwsar leads his 
 forces back to the camp. 2. Of aU the, Gauls ihe Belgi»" 
 thebravest, because they were the nearest to the G«„!ans, with 
 whom they were coHtmually waging war. 3. We are go m, to 
 march th«,ugh the p«.vince, because we have no other C^ 1 
 .When the Helvetwns were informed of (iiferoiiy, a*o«() QesarV 
 amval they _sent ambassadors. 6. He orde^d the HelveuZl 
 rebuild aU the towns which they had burned, because theTuce 
 r.leTb.l'w.'°'"'^"'''"»'^''P'««>- «• The forces haT^ 
 7. While tl>o Bhip, were asserabUng, ambassadprs came from a 
 We part of the Morini to g«sar. 8. As s«.„ .s he leameTof 
 ,(i,(era«v, «60UO Cesar's departure, he began to coUect fore» 9 
 
 he turned (his) march aside from the Helvetians. W. The bar- 
 banans were aUrmed because the town had been taken by storm., 
 
 l|^n'^«Snn?;S^wiSVoo±SL^^ ^^ <>' -dependent* 
 
 . 8. C^ft» mewii wA«r« M well M u»A#n. «»«111» vero. 
 
 < 8— footaotol. pf 4g> \ '*^' 
 
 V. 
 
 
 
 .frr. J 
 
I onere 
 tgrunt, - 
 Igarum ^ 
 I est in 
 ^enetia 
 1 fines 
 Sgqua- , 
 ^ simul - 
 7. Ut 
 s erat. 
 Srunt. 
 us est, 
 omani 
 eruni. 
 
 is his 
 i were 
 , with 
 ng to 
 i. 4. 
 Bsar'» 
 ^ns to 
 place 
 ad to /jji 
 corn, 
 om a 
 Bd of 
 . 9. 
 edui, . 
 bar- 
 rm, . 
 
 ;P 'Ik 
 
 ndent 
 hi* ia 
 
 f 
 
 PAKT X-^INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 
 
 LESSON XLII. 
 
 61. 
 
 /T 
 
 The declension of the pronouns egro (I), tu (you), ai^d !■« ea* Id 
 (/lej s/ie, it), is given in Part III., sections 18, 19 and 22. 
 
 Observation. — The translation of the various forms of the per^ 
 sonal pronouns.^ " # ■ ' 
 
 ■ ^^^: ^■■■- '-^V'^^' '-'^ EXERCISE XIJI. -''-[mM::. 
 
 I. — 1. Pacem voblscum' fScerSmus. 2. Ab eis circumveniSmur. 
 3. Impetum in nos fecelPunt. 4* Magnam inter edis auctoritatem 
 hab@bat, 5. Nihil S. vobis postuli^ 6. Ubi legatos d§ deditione 
 ad 0um misSrunt, adventum .Caesaris eos exspectare jtissit. 7. 
 TScum^ remittendl sunt. * 8. Mirum mihl videtur. 9. Duo 
 f ratrel eis praeerant. 10. Jussit eos impedimenta in iinum locum 
 collocare et eum mfiiHre. 11. Ego vobis regna confciliabo. 12. 
 NOntius a te missus erat. 13. Id ab eo comperit. 14. NSbte 
 nocSbat. 15. Mihi, n^ tibi, indulgSbat. 16. Els satisfScimus 
 dS injflrils quas intuleramua^j 17. Tfi, LabiSne, mihi relque ptlb- 
 licae Qtilis fuistl. 18. Alteram partem ylcl'eis concessit, 
 
 II.— 1. They sent ambassadors to him. 2. They will not spare 
 you. 3.. Hostages will be ^ven up to us by youi 4. Peace must 
 be established with them. 5. \^ slew a large part of them. 6. 
 When we were informed of Ceesar'S arrival, we sent ambassadors 
 to him. 7. He ordered us to select a suitable place and fortify it 
 with a double wall. 8. They fafor us, not you. 9. The citizens 
 fear you. 10. J had not made war o^ the Gauls, but the Gauls 
 on me. 11. We do not oeliev© him. 12. They will come with 
 you. 13. We were eight milps from hiwiT' 14. He is not likely to 
 persuade her. 15. Hte strove with us f# many years about th« 
 leadership. 16. (His) son will have to be restored to him. j(.7. ' 
 We shall aid the Gauls, who are wintering with uiS, neither wfth 
 com nor (any) other thing. 18. He sen^n army into the coilnfcry 
 of the Morini, because ambassadors had not come from them. 
 
 1. The nomiiifttive of these pronountf should be uaed only when the subject of tbc' 
 verb is to be emphauEed. . 
 
 2. With the ablative (both singular and pliiral>(»f «fj;o, tu, mii, and (generally of qui 
 d futs, the prepoa'"' ._ - . . -. ... . . .... 
 
 The aooent. In roofa i 
 
 and qu%4, the prepoiHtioD cum Is uIaccmI after th» nronoun, forming on6 word with'lt. 
 I. Is oifctne Hyllablc procedititf i 
 
 # 
 
 cum. 
 
 8. The phrMW f«r molw mtr on is Mlum if\ftro, with Um dftUvfl (wm t; 
 the idea of on. >. 
 
 -T^- 
 
 -,•»■ 
 
 V% 
 
62 
 
 PEIMARY LATIN BOo£ 
 
 
 * :». . LESSON XLIII. " 
 
 ^ *Bellum '&, RomanU gegtum- war hid hem waged by the Bo- ' 
 
 ,v erat, \ :/ , ^^^^ > 
 
 ,,BeUum RSmahls «rerfendum tmf sluyuld have been waged by 
 **^ ■ *^ -Bowa»i5}, or </ie Brnnana 
 
 shoidd have waged vxtr. 
 Acles & Caesare Instruota eirt, the litie was draim up by Omr ' 
 Aoles Cae«arl Instruenda «it., the line^ must be'^^rawti ^up by. 
 -^■-^~^^—'-.- ■ :_ ,.;; \,.,.. -;.-.- -^ ..■..^:^ •----—- Obso/t, or Ctesar mW dnwo 
 ^ ^ ^ uptheline. 
 
 ^ Ocoaslo ft mg n6«f amlttetur. i/te oppcyrtuiiUy wi^not be lo»t 
 ' ^ -'-■■':-■■ : . ■/'- by me. ■ '* 
 
 I OooaslS mthi non ftmittenda ths opp<yrtunity r^mt not be l^ost 
 
 . **S **■ * ■ ^y '^y*'^^ I mu8t not lose the 
 
 ' ' oppoHunity. 
 
 ObgerTatlon.-How is the pe>8ohal agent e-xpressed in Latin 
 . with ordinary passive forms ? with the gerundive ? Notice also the 
 free translation qf the gerundive by the active voice » 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 EXERCISE XLIir. 
 
 ,1' f ^*"^ '''^'^' ^""^ tempore erant agenda ; vexiUum prO- 
 •pflnendum,»8%num tubft dandum, ab opere revocandl militfis qui 
 castra raunire coeperant, acigs Instruenda. 2. Allobrogibus vel 
 pers«sm-I sumus, vel vl coftctflrl. 3. COpiae' hostium Sablna 
 distinendae erunt. 4. Olflssis, quae ab els missa est, nSbfa est • 
 «xspectanda. 6. Loca superiSra occupfttOrl sunt. 6. Postquaii 
 -•quitfitus m cSnspectura v6nit, hostSs terga vertSrunt mtonusqX 
 •Orum numerus est occlsus. 7. NoUam partem nootia iter ysbfa 
 intermittendumest. 8. Mihi nOn ftm^tenda erat ocoftsiO. 9. Rsa 
 tibi cogitanda est. 10. Castra erant i^ngustiSra quod sine impedl- 
 mentis Caesar legiOnfis trftnsportftverat. 11. Dum reliqaae c^iae 
 
 • 
 
 i • 
 
 »a^'»-4assE^3»sfa 
 
the Eo- 
 
 iged by 
 r. 
 
 ,up by . 
 t draw 
 
 I '•• 
 
 ■f 
 
 f-l» 
 
 JP:ABT L—INTRODUCTOBY LESSONa 
 
 63 
 
 12?^^ ComplurSs/ # efe 
 
 (Jonvemunt, llgafcl ad eum venSfunt. 
 
 i, occiderunt^ ^ •' 1 
 
 - ■*-"^ ' ' , ■'"■ . . ."'■ ^" ' - , ■ ■ ' ■ ' 
 
 IL-^1. Ambassadors fehould have feefen sent to him by us 2 
 
 r You must not lead a larger number of men across. 3. Caesar wUl 
 h^e to raise large forces. 4. When CjBsar found \^ out, he 
 o^ered them to hasten with us to the river. %. We are not going» '' 
 to make war on^ them, because the winters are very early in Oaul 
 ft Opportunity had been given him.^ 7. Labienus must seize the 
 heights. 8. The army will have to be led across without baggage 
 on account of the scarcity of ships. 9. Some had to fiU up the 
 trencher others to tear down the waUs. m 1' mW not neglect 
 the wrongs of the Aedui. .11. He was going to bre^ uj, «tmp 
 
 .Ihe next night in the fourth wateh. 12. They must await the 
 
 ^mval of the forces. 13. As soon as they made an attack on us, 
 Cs^sar had to remove all the horses out of siglit. 14. The Morini 
 from whom ambassadors have not come, are going to coUect verJ 
 iarge.forces and renew the war. 
 
 •r" . 
 
 , . ' LESSON XLIV. 
 
 * t 
 
 (a) SS abdldlt. , hehidhimsdf. 
 
 86 abdlderunt, they hid thsmselvM. f /. 
 
 Oua. Iegl6ii§s s6oam «diizlt, he led mit tm legions with him. 
 
 Diias legrion^s oum eo mlait, he sent tvw legions/mth him. 
 
 ^Ob.ervatloil.-Th^,^clension ^f4he' word fro^ M)h .* comes 
 CPart III section 20r kow art '«tps^gular and plural to be 
 distinguished? Two transla^ns (e.g., him and hUself) given, 
 l^ifference between n6 and is. Kftsition when used irith oiim.» •*' 
 
 ival. 
 
 (h) Menm adventam exapeo- he awaited 
 ■-: '. , Uylt, 
 
 ■ tunm adventam. Caesar, he awaited youJarriml, GoBtar, / 
 
 -^;.- ezspeot&vtt, „ >" * 
 
 Nostrum ad vi^atam exspeo- h^ ttioaited our arrivcU. 
 tAvIt. 
 
 ^a. See footnot. 8. p.ge 61. 2. Lite rally, (o A**, : * |^ footnof 2, pi«. «L ' r 
 
 --^f, . ... 
 
 
 '&' 
 
 ^. 
 
m 
 
 ■^w 
 
 64 
 
 % PRIMARY EITIN BOOK. 
 
 "^««tikmMflayentam exspeo- ^ awaited ymw arrival 
 
 vlfo^ «4dv«intam annm elk; he ordered tts to await 
 
 ., 8iieot$reJu88lt,r i:!|^ 
 
 Nps ad|v:entam ^tigiS:gpeo|' they orderM w^'a 
 
 A- 
 
 ** , ■' " .;. *^A^ J.tt8«€rini|, 
 
 nt 
 
 us tm^fl^iiW , their ^ 
 
 iitam eornm ^erm:M,oriSkrei wjiUJ^m^ 
 
 •A-.1 
 
 »eotare Juf 
 
 proiioi ^ _ ^^ 
 
 of t^0^'ripi'|| 
 ice bewsC 
 
 sea 
 
 'i y',:"^?^ 
 
 I|l'«^:| 
 
 pinft'^ Part III., section 21. piffef- 
 #11118 and eja8f sana a|i|| ei&ramj 
 
 (c),||j|i»^'ei^^^<ii4^^- . l^ '¥^% ;.«wy ^aw wp ^/leir ar^^ 
 
 In offlof 5 l^i^ik^l'bimag, tw sWi' remain in owiffiejiance. 
 
 ^FXlttink ^8lt, >; i^»* ;, ^ ^ aen* hi» sonl,^ • 
 
 -i^tflllam itp|||n mlslt» %^»K he sent his own son. 
 
 ^l?^'vation^ When -are the English possessive pronouns not 
 ^VesseA in Latin ?i What », the effect if they are e4>re88ed 
 "whett liot needed for clearness' sak© ? » . • 
 
 
 A 
 
 ^ ^ -■ ■ ' ■^'-' ' ■V:':'--\ ^:"^ ■ ;■■ 
 
 '^^, tI'^1- In conspecta exercitOs nostrl, agri eorum vastati erant. 
 '2. ESrum fugft ndstrl» erant perterritl. 3. COr d5 tua virtate aut 
 dS m«^ dfligentia dSspSrSa? 4: ^5 suaque» omnia sine mora eJ 
 dSdid&nint. 5. Eos suum adventuni exspectare jilssit. 6. Ubi d6 
 . ejus adventa HelvStil certiorSs facti sunt, Iggatos ad eum misgrunt. 
 7.^trem tuum ad 's6 vocat. ^. Helvetil qui vos non solum 
 in sUta sed etiam in vestrto finibus superavgrunt, nostro^&rcitul 
 non pargs sunt. 9. Ego mels copils itieSque exercitfl vjHlfegna 
 conciliabS. -^, Legio, qi^ sgcum habgbat, in ncjg^sj 
 ffioit. 11. Sequknis, qui ^^ ftngs suos eum reci 
 
 I 
 
 A 
 
 .,' tl 
 
 ' si 
 
 ■% .a 
 
 ':.'-w 
 
 se 
 
 o\ 
 
 12 
 
 it 
 
 wl 
 
 go 
 . th 
 
 \ 1. Bee footnote 2, pagre 18 
 
 ^H mml wiihotitittronn^ 
 ^ruTidt, peopU, and $ua 
 
inc$. ^ ., 
 
 not 
 ssed 
 
 ant. 
 
 I aut^ 
 
 a eiV 
 
 ad»r 
 
 unt. ., 
 
 lura 
 
 jitui 
 
 igna 
 
 bum 
 
 fura 
 
 
 t. 
 
 PAUt r.--:INTRODUCTORr LESSONS. 
 
 66 
 
 fZ^dlT^'l!'^ ^"^"^"^ '^"' '"'^*' «°^«S« «-"«iStis sunt' per- 
 terend . 12. Regnum m civitate sua occupatOrus est. 13. Ves- 
 
 Srul" "if T"" ^''''"'"" neglexerunt. I4. S.sS in silv^s 
 -abdaderunt. 15. Caesar primum suum deinde omnium eqids ex 
 
 • ■■ ■ • ; «1 ■" '■ ," -: ■;■■.■ ■■-'*'"" -^ 'j ■- - J. * 
 
 *) - ii . - .' ** . . , 
 
 S^ had now led their forces into the te.Storie» of the 
 AMui, and were laying waste their fields. 3. Hergayft the sienal 
 
 " stllC T. ."^ ']" ""^"""^ ^^""^ ^^- «• Th«y '^ »00 with- 
 ^he attacks of our men.. 7. On his arriv/they withdrew 
 
 .^Ives and all theV possessions' in», the town 8. They 
 
 seh^e». to hun. 10 For the sake of their safety I neglected my 
 
 o™ 4anger. 11. They are going to join battle with^ur men.^ 
 
 ■f ih I r° "«tn«nmg his Aen' from battle. 13. We learAed' ' 
 
 wl^".? ^"^ ."'?*f"8«'^- "■ C«»»' ought to lead the legion» 
 which he has with hun across. into our province. 15. We are ^ 
 
 "■%• ..;>- 
 
 ■% 
 
 j LESSON XLV. 
 ^VBntu Caesar^ oomm6« 't?mf,we^e alcmmi by C<^9ar'sa^ 
 
 JdirentuCae.«^,.:c<^«5tI.le. alarmed "(or being alam^d) by 
 ^^ «Ato.ml.erunt, . ,^ Ccesar^, ^^^ ^^ 'J^^ 
 
 ' ' hostage». 
 
 06plaeln4n^IoopBioo4otae e^/orce. /u«« bem gathered to 
 
 Odplae in unum loouA, ooftol^e. «Ae/orce., after being gathered (or 
 „^,.^ prfivlnoliim '^teutul^^.^^^^^^ 
 
 . *,. 
 
 
66 
 
 PRIMAK^ LATIN BOOK. 
 
 Obgervatlon. — The use and force of oommdtl/coaotae» d61eota» 
 
 when no longer joined vMh parts of the verb 8^m.^ The diflPerent 
 translatigns given. The voice. The relation in point of time of 
 th4 participle and the principal verb. The formation and declen- 
 _j aion of the participle. v ) 
 
 ' V ^EXERCISE XLV. ' ' 
 
 ' . ; ' ■ ■ .■■■.-■■■ ' -■- '•■^- ■" ■ ^ '•' '-■ 
 
 I. — X' Nostro adventu commotus, Caesar duas legionSs in citeri- 
 ore Gallia conscribit. , 2. NSnnulli pudore adducti remanebunt. 
 3. Vulneribus confecti, barbari s§ in fugam contulerunt." 4. 
 Bepentino 6jus advents prohibitus, copia^ in fines suos' reduxit. 
 5. In nostros disjectos impetum fgcerunt. 6; In omnibus coUibus 
 expositas hostium copies armatas conspexit. 7. Spe praedae 
 adducti," in Galliam contendefunt.' 8. Hostes vulneribus confectos 
 ex loco superiore in fltimen compulimus. 9. Barbari commoti 
 ^uod oppidum, ef natura loci et manu munitum, expHgnatum 
 erat, mSjorSs copifis parare coepSrunt. 10. OmnSs Belgarum 
 cdpiae,''in Onum locum coactae, ad eum veniSbant. 11. Impulsi 
 a principibus, a nobis defecttiri erant. 12. Hostes undique cir- 
 '- cumventi, fuga salflteni petierunt. 13. Celeritate Romanorum 
 commoti, ISgatos ad eum dS dSditidne mittunt. «14. Alteram 
 partem vici Gallis conoSssit, alteram vacuam ab eis relictam cohor- 
 tibus attribuit. ' 15. 5elvetii omnium rSrum ihopia adducti ||%at6s 
 ad eum misSrunt. < , ^ . 
 
 . ■ ■ ■■ -ija: ■•■ '■■ :.■ ■ ■; , ' .'• ■' -.;-■ ■.' 
 
 • n. — ^^1. After beihg driven back into the town they made a sally. 
 2. They withdrew themselves and all their possessions into ^place 
 excellently fortified by nature. 3.\ Alarhied by the want of^sup- 
 plies, he hastened the next day to the province. 4. Th^ ^edui, 
 after being called brothers by the senate, are held in bond^e by 
 him. 5. Being defeated by the first attack of our men, \ they 
 betook themselves to the camp. 6. Dumnorix on ,being recalled 
 had resisted^the cavalry. 7. The Aedui, being defeated by him, 
 hacl suffered great loss. 8. The soldiers, weighed down iSjr th^ 
 heavy burden of their armor, had to join battle with the enenSy 
 
 —————— — — r ' ' ' ' vi " II "; ■ 
 
 1. This part of thcr Verb ia know^ as tbe JPer/ect FartieipU, Poiiivt. 
 
 ^^ 
 
 i. O pt ilufa i' um la hum tmjtfn vr 
 
 Ik JR # * • . #( here, as often, means both .... and. 
 
 ^^ 
 
 .,• t 
 
 • 'if 
 
 ^ 
 
 ;W 
 

 PART I.-.-INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 
 
 *f' 
 
 6lr 
 
 at an unfavorable time., 9. Caesar, on jbe)w«^ormed of their 
 approac^j, leads out with him all the cavafr£aS-^astens to them. 
 10. Led by his influence, they detained the^inbassadors sent by 
 him. . 11. Dismayed by the appearance' of the ships, t^e bar- 
 barians halted. 12. The Aedui, having been crushed by the v 
 battles and disasters, had giyjin hostages Ix) him. 13. The Hel- 
 vetians, alarmed by his sudden approach, are going to send an^bas- 
 sadors to him. 14. He has led his forces across into Gaul, liftKing.^^. 
 been ask^d and invited by the Gauls. 15. Driven by madness and 
 folly, they have made war 1 on us. - ii- \ ; . 
 
 ^^ ^LESSON XLVI. 
 
 Turning to Part III., section 39, examme the inflection of the 
 
 verb oaplo, in the indicative (active and passive), the present 
 
 . infinitive active, and the gerundive passive. . , A . 
 
 Obsepvatloii.— The pec,uliarities of inflection in v^s like 
 oaplo.^ • -^ ^t! _, — ' 
 
 EXERCISE XLVI, 
 I.— 1. Accipiet. 2. S6 recipiunt. 3. Facieudfim est. 4. 
 conjicisbant. 5. Niintiat. 6. Res est suscipienda. 7. Ss in 
 oppidum «recipere coeperunt. 8. Suscipietur. 9. Superi6ra loca 
 multitfldinehostium compl§ta conspicigbantur. 10. I^erfacile est 
 conata perficere. 11. Munltiones perficientur. 12. Legates inter- 
 ficiunt. 13. Ex oppido profugere non audebunt. 14. CondicionSs 
 pacis accipiendae erant. 15. Ab amicitia populi RomanI dSficiS 
 ^ bant. 16. Non^olum vIrSs sed etiam tela nostros dedcii^ ' 
 
 II.— 1. Thi Roman people makes. peace with themvAWrhey 
 
 undertake the wj^r. 3. They w;ere marching through the province. 
 
 4. The war should not have been undertaken. 5. We fortify. 6i> 
 
 » Supplies will fail us. 7. He will be put to death by them. 8. 
 
 &^ T^^^- ^^""^ °^<l«red to hurl their darts. 9. The fortifications must 
 
 ; 12. Thjjfflpil announce. 13. They hesitate to revolt from the 
 Ae^ui. 14. He undertakes tlie matter. 15. They perceive him. 
 16. They were fleeing. 
 
 t 
 
 See footnote 3, pag^e 61. 
 
 . » 2. S^e Part III., eeotion 67. 
 
 3 
 
 %*. 
 
jpl 
 
 68 
 
 -^=*= 
 
 ir 
 
 i 
 
 .'!■ 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 (a) Turn to PartJ^„4^pl!^P^3. 
 Obgervation.-^lme declension of iilo and Hie,* 
 
 *-^\ 
 
 '^^* 
 
 «; 
 
 4 
 
 (6) ProTinoia i^ea haeo est. Ilia this 'i^nmrnjovince, that (is) yowr^i, 
 
 vestra, . ;,, -'/ ..j^K^P^^^ ■ lH:, '%-, 
 
 - Eiim loihdlili munXvernnt, theyforUjied that place. - '^ ' -'^ 
 
 In ed8^.i3|tl haeo faciebant they rtiMde an attack. on those who 
 
 ^~----p--.ym^jxmteceruntf^-^ were doing this (literally, 
 
 ' '^^W these things).^ 
 
 ■ -^e^^TR^o®"» a Caesare pe- the awhassadors asked peace o/ 
 ^^fernnt. Hie baeo re- Ccesar. He answered as fol- 
 
 '^^1 Jf^^^^^^* .* ioM?s (literally, these things). 
 
 Ot)8cJrvation.-2^he various translations of Wc, Hie and is. 
 What word is u^H for that (those) wten emphatii» (by contngt) ? 
 when the antecedent o£ a relative ? When is liie, not is, us^for 
 
 he (thc^ etc.) ?''r*\% 
 
 %XERCISE XLVII, 
 
 
 ^p 
 
 k 
 
 ;■'„-■• _ ,-1. 
 
 I.— 1. Haec omnia ^Gallfe era^ incognita, 2. Gallos, qul*«^ 
 loca incoluerant, expulerunt. ^oS/^os GerniMjSs Helvetii, iM 
 solum in suis, sed etiam in.^ill6rurti finibus, '$uperaverant. 4; 
 Haec consuetudo vietifcumfjla noi^mparanka est. 5. Hi in 
 armis sunt, illi domi reiSEienfc. 6. Ad eam sentehtiam haec ratiS 
 4|duxit. .7. Dumhas^cinWlocisgeruntur, adma^ikasregionSs, 
 qiiibus^attuor reges p^iint, nuntill milb. m. Nostri pila 
 in hostes conjiciunt. Illi prin^ocohculfsu ti^t^m ppnjortf pr^i- 
 mSs ja^vafl petierunt. 9: Hoc iktus msui|||^inet circiter J|illia 
 pa88uti|^ quingenta. 10. At its, «^Amiserat, «xplorittoribus haec 
 cSgnoviir. IL Hunq iUi compreh^irg|;. .12. Hujus loci haec 
 erat natl|r| #13. Uni ei dmnibi^SSpani nihil eauum rerum 
 fac^nt, quSs cgtert fecerant. 14. "Ilium pro amicd, te pro hoste 
 
 ■; - ' ' I nl I III in l iar I ^ I It^y ^ i, 
 
 l.«^Ser footnote 2, page 56. --. . • 
 
 A^iii^^-ES^'ii??^^ an emphtttle if; hepce when he or they is emphiaired, Uh 
 
 « 
 
 example. 
 
 ^' *■ 
 
t 
 
 yuA's,* ' 
 
 who 
 
 *k 
 
 e o/ 
 
 igs). 
 
 l8. 
 
 ,t)? 
 
 for 
 
 7^- 
 
 
 non 
 4. 
 
 I in 
 atio 
 iSs, 
 pila 
 
 Ilia 
 aec 
 aec 
 um 
 «te 
 
 UU 
 
 PART I.— INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 69 
 
 from^tJll^t'n'^K "'^ '^' ^"""^^'^^ ^^ ^«^^ their camp 
 from that place. 2. On being informed of these things, he orders 
 
 this armt /It ^.T '""^ ^*^^" *^^^*^"^« ^^««r ^as sent 
 
 toir'^S L?r^ 'f '" '"'^^ ''"^««' *^^y «-^ ambassador. 
 
 ore^r;xtL?r- ^ "' "^''' "^*^ '^"^^- ^- The width of this 
 
 arrfL ? 7 r' ^^^' J"""^^^- ^- ^^ ^ th^«« the Belgians 
 
 this 1 Tt ' '''"!r *'^^ ^^^ "^^^^«* *« *^« »-"---• 8 % 
 
 o e S: thr P^'^^^-/;;-- »• On their arrival he leads h^ 
 forces into the country of 'the Morini. They flee into the woods 
 
 tTmeZTld .f I'^^i^-^^^^'^" ^^"' ^^^ -^"^g«^- 11 At ha^ 
 time he held the le^i^ng place in this state. 12. They hasten 
 
 Tott::Tnt ''"^ "'^ "^^^ '^^«^-^ ^^« fortilcatfons 
 13 Our men drove them into the woods, but lost a few of (liter. 
 
 border of hese woods, they betook themselves k, their friends 
 and Caesay led his forces iAto winter quarters. ' 
 
 's approach 
 ces. 
 
 WE 
 
 
 -- ' LESSON XLVIIL. • 
 
 Turn to Part III., section 33. 
 
 (6) AdventurtiCaesarlsexgpec- while aiwitin^> 
 t&ns mhgnf ooplas he raised. 
 ooegrlt, ^ 
 
 AdventnmCae8«rl,ex«pec. whUe awadfi^^cr^s approach 
 ^ tante. castra munle- we sh^l fortify the camp. 
 
 Wiritum fortlter re-lgten- Mey wounded the lieutenant wkUe 
 tem vnlnePaviPunt. • A« ,^a, fe^^^,;^ remtvag. 
 Xlm*^*****^" «"«Petum t^ mode an a^^ocfc on them as 
 "***"' (or MJ^i7e or when) they totre 
 
 Aeeinn. 
 
 1. See footnote 2, page 19. 
 
70 
 
 PBIMABY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 Observation,— Declension and agreement of present participle 
 active. The different translations^given. The voice. The reli- 
 tion in point of time of the participle and of the principal verb. 
 
 (c) Eqult§gpevooarIJjg8it/ he ordered the cavalry to be re- 
 
 Po88a8oompl6rlJu88lt, he ordered the trenches to he Jilled: 
 
 , Nave» ojg^ J U88lt. •; he wdered ships to he collated. 
 
 Oastra ihunlrX Ju88lt, he ordered a camp tb be fcyrtified. 
 
 .;Ob8epvatloii.— The formation in each conjugation arid the 
 translation of the present infinitive passive. . , 
 
 * EXERCISE XLVIII. 
 
 'U I- 
 
 I.— 1. DiscedSns ab hlberJils in Italiam, jflssit plarimSs hieme 
 nfivgs aedificSri. 2. LegSs Aeduonim duo ex QnS familia magi- 
 strfitOs creftrl vetant. 3. iMagnum numerum eorum fugientium 
 conciderunt. 4. Haec flgns a Caesare petivit. 5. Nav6s paulum 
 removSrf et rSmIs incitan et ad^ latua apertum hostium constitui 
 jOssit. 6. SuccurritilllVorgnusetlaborantlsubvenit. 7. Equites 
 cSdere sSque in castra recipere, simul castra altiore vallo munirl 
 jlissit. 8. Caesar petentibus Aeduis concSssit. 9. Scaphas mili- 
 Jibus complSri jubet, et subsidia eis quos laborantes , conspicit 
 submittl. 10. Hunc f\igientem silvae tSxSrunt. 11. Obsides in 
 continentemaddttcl jussit...l2. Fortiter pflgnans interfectus est. 
 
 - 13. Hostgs, his rebus permoti, LutStiam incendl, pontgsque Sjus/ / 
 oppidi rescindl jubent. :^ ' 
 
 II.— 1. He orders the ambassadors to be called to him. 2. 
 C*sar, while expecting a larger uprising of Gaul, began to hold a * • 
 le^. 3. Weeping they besought him. 4. He ordered the camp 
 to be fortified by a wall. 5. We made an attack on theenemy as 
 
 - they were betaking themselves to the camp. 6. Our men, while 
 resisting bravely, were surrounded by the enemy's cavalry. 7. 
 He ordered the enemy to be dislodged and driven off with slings 
 
 ^and arrows. 8. Lucius Cotta while fighting is slain with a very 
 large portion of the soldiers, the rest betake themselves to the 
 camp. 9. On departing they order cavalry to bo procured. 10. 
 
 1. Translate ad here by on. 
 
 X 
 
 
 . ' '■■■.'. '.' '■■'.' 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 y\ f« 
 
 ■'■';■ p 
 
 .-..'.' ai 
 
 A P 
 a( 
 
 si 
 1 
 
 ^^ 
 
■"— T 
 
 Ik 
 
 
 
 
 
 i^ 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 j^ • 
 
 
 
 1/ 
 
 PART I.-— INTBODUCTORY LESSONS. 
 
 71 
 
 Influenced by their statements, he ordered the battle to be begun. 
 11. The enemy, because they had a larger number of men, sur- 
 rounded our men as they wei» fighting. 12. We seized him as 
 he was fleeing. / ' 
 
 "I 
 
 ' , LESSON XLIX. , 
 
 ' <a) Turn to Part III., section 23. 
 
 ObserTatlon. — The declension of lp«e and idem. 
 (6) Labie^am cum daabag le- h^ wclers Labiemis with two te- 
 Srionlbnsoastramtihlre gions to fortify the camp^ he 
 
 \ Jubet, Ipse in Galliam himself fuxMem tit ^kijd. 
 
 ■ oontendlt, ;/. r'- -, ;„ _•..;, -■■ .._ ; 
 
 Ab Aednls ipsis certlor foo- he was informed by the Aedui 
 
 tus est, 7, ;/ ' themselves. 
 
 B6 ad oastra reogpernnt, they betook them^lvfs to the camp. 
 
 Easdem oopias relXqnit, he left the same forces. 
 
 Obgervation.— The translation of Ipse and Idem. The differ- 
 ence between se and ipse.^ 
 
 "/:::^•'■^;■■• ■■■•7-^/ ■/■:;/■ • ^ -^ - EXERCISE -XLIX. '-^ ■'■■^:-\" '/--'' i . . 
 '■■/,','■'■'"' ■ ■ ■ ■ ' " ■ , 
 
 ,, l.—l. Eodem tempore Caesarem certiorem faciunt d6 6jus 
 
 # adventa. 2. Omnibus Gallls idem^ est faciendum, quod HelvStil 
 
 fScSrunt. 3. Aquilam intra vallum projScit, ipse pro castris 
 
 pflgnans occiditur. 4. Postulat eadem.^ 5. Haec. ipsi ab alils 
 
 audiverant. 6. Eodem die ho^tSs sub i^onte consederant millia 
 
 passuum ab Cae^aris castris octo. 7. Neque Caesaris ipslus 
 
 adventus neque Labi&ii cognitus erat.' 8. Ab eisdem nostra con- 
 
 fiilia hostibus 6nun%ritur. 9. Constituit cohortgs duas in pi-Svincift 
 
 collocare, et ip^c&^reliqias Sjiis legionis cohortibSs hiemare. 
 
 10. Horuni aucta&^tte adducti, eadem de causa legates retinent. 
 
 ^ 11. Eadem nocte sg interficiunt. 12. Eidem piincipes qui? ante 
 
 ' ^vSnerant tA eum revertgrunt. 13. Ipse in Aeduos, quae oivitftai 
 
 - — — — — ^ — . " 
 
 1. Se is the reflexive pronoun of the third pehK>n ; ipse is used purely for emiptauia. 
 il may be used of any person. ' . _^ . '' 
 
 and may] 
 
 ■.* 
 
 3ee footnote 2, page 56. 
 
 Notice that, after idem, qui may be translated a», instead of who. 
 
 *.^ 
 
' • 
 
 f 
 
 m 
 
 X- 
 
 PKIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 propmqua his locis erat, contendit. 14. His dS rSbus Caesar' 
 certior factus, quod ipse l<mge aberat, naves aedifican, rgmiges ex 
 provincia institUI, nautas gubematoresque eompararl jubet. 
 
 n.^1. On the same day ambassadots sent by. the enemy came 
 to Csesar, 2. He himself drew up a triple line of four legionS. 3. ' 
 He hastens to them by the same route and sendt all the cavalry 
 before him. 4. He had leamedthis from th6' Itomans themselves 
 through the same messengers. 5. He ordered them to be sent to 
 higi. 6, The eame night the camp was moved. 7. These are tK& ^ 
 same enemies with whom the . Helvetians have waged war -8*-" 
 They themselves sought denser forests. 9. The enemy heto«3k ^ 
 themselves to the camp. 10. The next day they moVethe camp ' * 
 • from that place ; Csesar does the same. 11. Supplies began to fail " ' 
 the enemy . themselves. 12. Hostages were given up, %d the ^ '. 
 two sons, of the king himself. 13. They were ordered to give*' ' 
 themselves up to him. 14. The. Sequani remained silent in the^ •. ' 
 .^ine- dejection. 16. He himself began the battle on {Uteraliy'.^: 
 Jxm^) the» right wing. 16.^The town was protected by the very 
 natUfe {hterally, the nocture itself) of the place. • . «^ ' ' 
 
 •^ 
 
 i^.s' 
 
 i f^ 
 
 ■4^ 
 
 LESSON«L. ' i ^ 
 
 <*») 0aBtrts.«>muiiItl8, oopla» Inl the camp hamiig bean f(yrt\fiedy ht 
 
 Htruxit, . drewuphi^fdrces/ 
 
 Obgldlbu. «ooeptl.. p&cem (litgraljy, hostigeft hatdng been 
 
 feolt, .^^ ^ . " received) h^ng received 
 
 ' -* T'v " ■ '^^^^^9^' {or 'hfter receiving 
 
 . r,:^ *^ . ' hostages), he made peace. 
 
 ArmtatradltL/pacem feolt, (litorally, arms haying been given 
 *" up) WJ/WJM (or «w) the arms 
 
 ^t>ere given up^ he rhade peace. 
 Itoptotu fa«t6. nostra* per- , (literally,, an attack Jiaving been 
 turbaverunt. made) rmki7ig an attack, Uief 
 
 * threw our men tntocanfusim 
 
 Cognito Cae^rt^ adventu. (Utorally, Crosar's arrival havmg 
 
 :» 
 
 ^fl^. 
 
 * l'. OJ*' • 
 
 IftgrAtd* mlitant/ 
 
 4l 
 
 been learned) on letfi/iyiing of 
 Ccuak't arrival, ■'i^»y i^ U y/ ■_ 
 amhassadoin, ■ • i \ ?r ., 
 
 >■.' i,- 
 
 . r " 
 
 i'» 
 
 ^ y^-- 
 
 
 ipl' ' *■ • ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 -t-L. 
 
 ' • 
 
 k 
 
 \ 
 
 ' 
 
 1 * 
 
 w'~ 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 ■I 
 
 • 
 
 ! 
 
 *■ 
 
Caesar 
 ges ex 
 
 came 
 S. 3. 
 avalry 
 selves 
 snt^to 
 ?e th\ 
 :. -8. 
 ieto(j(]k: 
 camp 
 io fail 
 1 the 
 
 give* 
 ti the^ 
 rally, ' 
 
 very 
 
 >ART I.— INTJlODyCTORY LESSONS. 
 
 .j'tSf- 
 
 ■^■... 
 
 d,hM 
 
 I 
 
 4 
 
 been 
 
 eived 
 iving 
 
 iven 
 ifm» 
 ioce. 
 3een , 
 
 M' 
 
 1 »■ ' 
 
 73 
 
 ^ . Observation.— The nature of the ablative abspWte.* ThdVari- 
 . ^ ous translations for the ablative absolute, in the .perfect participle 
 passive. The abstnce of a perfect participle active in Latin. 
 
 (b) ^ostrXs onstra oppugrnanti- while (or as) our men were assart- 
 bus, eraptionem boste* ing. the camp, theetiemy made 
 
 /eoernnt, . * a sally. ; , 
 
 t ■ .■ ? ■ ■*■ ■""■'. 
 
 * yP ■ !i •'■."■ 
 
 Obgervation. — The translation of the' ablativW absolute in the 
 
 ■ prfisent participle Active. The position of the ablative absolute 
 
 ■clause.. ^ . , ■J^ '• ■ *__ "■ . ' ■ 
 
 """7-^ ■""''"*■ r"::^":''^'" " EXERCISE l:'"""^"- 
 
 \.- 
 
 ..*. 
 
 l'-.Wi 
 
 .>!!*'. 
 
 » 
 
 V 
 
 1,7^1, Hoc proeljo facto, exercitum tradflcit. 2. Data signS ex- 
 •- castris 6rumpunt. ' 3. Vjcis aedificiisque, eorum incSnsIs, Caesar •>'. 
 % exercitum redOxit.'. 4..dis rebus ^xpositis, Bignum dkt. 4, His 
 ntintils acceptis, eonsiliumconvocavit. 6. GqUo occupSto^ inille 
 .. passiis ab nostrls mun^tiolllfcus cOnsIdunt. 7-. Germftnl clftmSre 
 ^' ,,' ,.' audits, armis abj^ctis sg ex castris ej6cgrunt. 8. H6c facts, ' 
 /*• "' duabus tegiOnibus quas in Ita|lia conscripSerat in ciSstrls relictlsi^^ 
 * '. '■■relic[ua8 sex legiones pro castris in acigconstitujt. 9. His ntlntili • . 
 ,;• ^Mf V Ijtterisque commotus, r§ frftmentaria comijarftta, castra movet. 10. 
 ^i;.; «IfalJo hoste-prohibente, legionem in provinciam perdftxit, ibiqt» 
 
 ^" "S-*!, W*"nav<t. 11. His cSnstitutls rebus, paulum suprft eum locttmil^ 
 W ,. pontem fec^runt. 12. Dsditione facta obsidibusque acceptis, prao* 
 , vw» ^ , ®^^^* dsddcent. 13. itinere conversS, hovissimum agmen lacesser^ *^ ' « 
 :^^^^i ^'^^P^^**^*'* Multa, ipso praesente^ in concilia Qajl^rum dicta * 
 
 ' V *i»^®^***^' ^^' P^^^i^go <ii8Jecta equitibua^ue repulsia, impetuni in 
 
 eosfScSrunt. 16. Impedimentis relictis firuptione facta, elsdeni; > 
 ^ itineribus 'quibus perv6nerant,-ad flQmen EhSnum contendfirunt» r ^ 
 
 17. Celeritate nostrdrum permStl, ICgatQs ad Caesarpm d6 dSJiti6n« , 
 ' "' mittunt, et p6tentibu« Rgmis impotrant. 18. Itaque r6 frtlmen*|,, 
 
 taria pr6*l8& equitatllque co^paratfl, in hostlum flpSs exercituna * 
 ' ititrodOxit. 19. N^hil tjmentibua nostrls, hostes impetum ffiijlSrunb. a, «f 
 
 ^> , -^. InstrAetS exercitjtt ufc loci natflra postulabat, proelium com* - a 
 
 ,. f mlBiftl* 21; Helv6j;il impedimenta in tinum locum cpritulSrunt,' ipil-' 
 -r . 7^ 1-6 jjBCtfl ndittp eqiiitatfl, phalange facta, »ub prlinam postri^ abiem 
 
 , ■iicc63sSrunt. 22. Caesar, primup* BuS deinde omnium' ex iXJn--i' a.. 
 ' ■ ipectfljremSCIs e(:|[ul8, proelium comrtilsit. • ^ ^ 
 
 im 
 
 ^ 
 
 fe-1 
 
 nt 
 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 - il 
 
 P 
 
 
 '. * 
 
 
 i.' 
 
 ^ 
 
 t I 
 
 b» •<. 
 
 f 
 
 i< 
 
 'I 
 
 
74 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 r 
 I 
 
 II.— 1. After receiving many wounds, they betook themselves 
 %> the woods. 2. Having pitched the camp, they determined to 
 await his arrival. 3. Collecting large forces, he drives hiiH «mt of 
 th^ state. 4. When several towns had been takeii by storm 
 -■ Cosiar determined to await the fleet. 5. Havirig procured silp* 
 V phes and selected the cavahy, he began to march into that c^^tiy. 
 . ' 6. Drawing their swords,, they seized the gates. 7. Havai'g sent 
 ambassadors, they had sought peace from him., .8. As a l^Me 
 number had been slairl, the- rest cast themselves into the riyer. 
 9. After capturing a large number of men and cattle and laying 
 . ^*«*e the fields, he compelled them to give hostages.* 10. As. 
 our men were in distress, he ordered the third line to make an 
 attack on the enemy's forces. 11. When several battles had been 
 fought, they sent ambassadors to Caesar and surrendered them- 
 selves to him. 12.. On learning thw (literaily, these things), he 
 sends Labienus in advance with three legions ; he himself with the 
 remaining two hastened to the river. 13. While these were 
 fighting, a few fled to the pamp. 14. Having slain a third part 
 of them, our men began to attack the town. 16.1 On learning of 
 his arrival, the enemy, coUecting large forces, began a cavalry 
 battle with our men on the march ; then on their cavalry bein^ ' 
 ■ defeated, they suddenly disclosed the infantry which the^iad 
 stationed in ambush. 16. As (but) a few are defending (it), they 
 are likely to take the town by storm. 17. Having thus routed all - 
 the forces of the enemy, they withdrew themselves to their own 
 ,oamp. 18. He himself, after drawing up a triple line of battle, 
 advanced to the enemy^s camp, m The signal being given, our ' 
 men, made an attack on the enem><e line. 20. Having in one' 
 «ummer finished two v6ry important {literally, great) wars, Ccesar^ 
 withdrew the army into winter quarters ; he himself wintered m, 
 hither Gaul. 21. As these were resisting bravely, he ordered tl» ' 
 •hips to be removed. 
 
 i^te ssoN Li: : 
 
 Quern aanm belli habent ? 
 QnldvflnUUM? 
 
 vko Art* p^rt^inded ymt f 
 
 whit experience qfivarhave thiyf 
 
 V. 
 
 i. 
 
 why havi^fmrmmr 
 
 ...^ 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 '- -> 
 
■^ 
 
 t ,, , 
 
 )lves 
 d to 
 it of , 
 )rm, 
 sUp-^ 
 itry. 
 
 arge. 
 
 ver. 
 
 i^ing 
 
 ) an 
 een 
 em- 
 he , 
 the".' 
 ere 
 )art 
 ;of 
 Jry 
 ill 
 
 M 
 
 iey 
 aU 
 wn 
 Je, 
 )ur 
 >ne 
 sar 
 in 
 he 
 
 
 ifr 
 
 
 PAET ^«r-IlfTBODUCTORY LESSONS. 
 
 m- 
 
 Quanta est Insula ? 
 IJter est oelerlor ? 
 €ur me acousas? 
 
 . /' 
 
 -^ 
 
 howlarge is the island?. 
 
 which (of the two) is the swifter? 
 
 why do yoxi accuse me ? i^ 
 > , ' ■ ' 
 
 Observation.— The difference between the English and the 
 Latin verb in asking a question, i The declension of \he interroga- 
 tive pronouns. (For quls and qui, see Part III., section 26 ; for 
 nter, section 14.) _^ ' 
 
 I.— 1. Quanta est Insulae raagnittidd? 2. In u^ram partem ^" 
 fliimen fluit ? 3. Quia Sjus consllil auctor fuit ? 4. Qua de eausa^ 
 disc6dunt ? 5. Cognito Caesaris adventu, bellum parSre coepSrtint, 
 6. Quae et quantae nationfis Britanniam incolunt ? 7. Quid mihi 
 faciendum est? 8. Prima luce productis omnibus copils, dupUcI 
 aciS InstrQcta, hostes exspectabat. 9. «His ygbus cognitis, eura 
 ad s6 vocari jubet. 10. Cflr ab officio discessarus es? 11,. Qui^ 
 bus ^x regionibus^ vSnistis, quasque ibi uSs cognovistis ? H. 
 Quiddubitfia? 13. Quid petunt aUud Roman!? 14. Quid ill6 
 beU6 simile fuit ? 15. Cur dS vestra virtilte aut dg mea dlUgentia 
 ' despSratIs ? 16. Hac oratione habita, concilium, dimlsit, 
 
 II.— 1. What states are in arms ? 2. Why have they led their 
 forces across into our territories?" 3. What* was. s&id ift tH' 
 councU of the Gauls about him? 4. Afermed by i?h© scarcity of 
 com and supplies, he hastened the ije^t day into the proving» 
 after burning all the buildings of that village., 6.' What* is beiig 
 done in the enemy's camp ? 6. In whj^fc^ phwe have the forces of 
 the- enemy encamped? 7. How lar^e^ number of men are they . 
 'likely to send to that war? 8. The enemy, after losing.all their 
 W^ge, fled. 9. What (littralhj, of what soH) is the nature of 
 th^ mountain? 10. On giving this answer he withdrew. 11. In 
 
 J^K th-T!i . '***[' ^i"® 5nl«,rroKat.ve, pronoun) cominR after either the whole or 
 Pltin «2! J ', ?" ^'!^ *'^*' '"^* '^" '""""' No nuoh difference is found irt 
 
 .7^;: 2. In.... jAarfem- <n , . . .'dirtetion, Htefally, ««to , . . . qu»rt«r (or part). 
 
 ■luL^n"ni^!vn«ur°'^*'''*ii"'"°"" **''■•'** *'*^ * """" **''"»' depend, on a preno- 
 Si h ♦h« ,^r H -^ ^'*' ^^" ?'^" '" P"""»"". prejKMiition, noun; Oji». owieDig usual 
 Wth the relative pronoun» alno, and is often found with ei^phatic adJeolivM 
 
 See f oS ^ot^tlpi^eMf' ^^^*''*"^'"''*^ ^*^' ''^ ^^^ *^^ W »*•* 
 
 '4- . 
 
 r 
 
 '■, ' 
 
 ■1^' 
 
 <!'"' 
 
 *• 
 
76 
 
 PniMAKT LATIN BOOK. 
 
 ^ 
 
 -0 
 
 whati place is Caesar? 12. In whafci direction are the enemy 
 marching ? 13. With whom are they waging war ? 14. What» 
 have you heard or learned about this matter? 1^. On receiving 
 hostages he leaves Labienus with the cavalry in the^me village ; 
 ^ he himself hastens to the nearest town. 16. What is more dis- 
 * graceful? 17. Which is the more disgraceful deed ? 
 
 . tt\ 
 
 ** " 
 
 LESSON LII; 
 
 
 <# Longre. fa/r ; longlus. faHhef ; longlMlme^faHhest, or very 
 
 hlhet*, freely i Ilberins, *nore llberrlmg, most, or very 
 
 freehj. 
 SAirlter, Jiercely ; acrlas, more 
 
 . fiercely. 
 Fortiter, bravely; fortlnei, more 
 
 bravely. . 
 frailgrenter, care- dUlgrentlus, 
 
 /idly; 
 
 freely. 
 aoQrrlme. m^at, or very 
 
 fiercely. 
 fortlssime, rkont^' or very 
 
 bravely. 
 dlllgrentlsRime, mod, or 
 
 more carefully. vei-y carefully. 
 
 --^ -w."-^ 
 
 ^ Observation.— The regular formation of adverbs from adjectives 
 in the positive, comparative and superlative degrees.» * 
 
 (6) Turn to Part III., section 17. '^ # 
 
 Ob.6rvatUn.— Irregular formation and comparison of adverbs. ■ 
 
 (c) Qaam m&xlm&B oopla» coe- lie coUected ftyrce» as large as jm- 
 
 Qttam longrlsMlme, 
 
 .-i 
 
 as far asjiossibU. 
 
 < Obsepvation.— The translation of a superlative modified by 
 
 quam.^ . ^^,, , ;•■■.■-■.,■ ■ ■; ;* 
 
 ■■''■■ EXERGISE^ LII. :y;, -;;■;. ^..^ -v-Vi:/" / 
 
 ^^.^i^' Hdrum omnium fortissimi sunt Belgae, propt»wi*qw»d 1 
 ^a l^t aomanitate pfSvinciae longissimfi abaunt 2. Intw- 
 
 j 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 •^^z 
 
emy 
 
 Tiat» 
 ving 
 age; 
 dis- 
 
 •AET t-^INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 
 
 7^ 
 
 - ■TSiB' 
 
 very 
 oery 
 }ery 
 m-y 
 or 
 
 ves 
 
 s.' 
 
 o$- 
 
 by 
 
 jt: 
 
 9- 
 
 pretibus remotls, dicit llberius atque audacius. 3. Ss in cuyrfls 
 citissimg recipiunt. ' 4. Ea res legionl feliciter evenit. 5. Novo 
 genere pugnae perterritls nostris, illi per medios kudacissimg per- 
 raperunt. 6. Quato maximia itineribu» in (Jalliam ulteriorem 
 
 -contendifc. 7. Id quod ipsi aegei^ime confecerant, ille tino die 
 fgcit. 8. Cupidissime populi RomanI amicitiam appetunt.' 9. 
 Mflites legionis decimae, cui (juam maxipig confidebat, acriter 
 pugnaverunt. 10. Qua minimg arduus ascensus erab, ex oppido 
 gruptionera subito fgcerunt. 11. FaciUimS impettis hostium difl- 
 tius sustinebimus. 12. Haec civitas longe plOrimum totius GaUiae 
 valet, ta Hj^ec civitas diaplurimum totius GaUiae valebat. 
 14. His rebus quam maturrime accuyrere constituit. 15. Huic 
 
 ^ legionl Caesar indulserat praecipue, et propter virttitem confide- 
 bat maxims. 16. OmnSs acerrimS fortissimgque ptlgnaverunt. 
 17. Quam aequissimum locum delegit, at4ife castra quam mSximS 
 
 contjiixit. ' 
 
 n.—r. They will resist us less easily. 2. Tliey are approaching 
 nearer. 3. After procuring supplies as quickly ^s possible, he 
 * hastens by forced marches towards Ar|pvistus. 4. Our men were 
 greatly alarmed. 6. They began to resist more boldly and fight 
 more bravely. 6. He, persuades them more easily because th« ' 
 Helvetians are hemmed in oh aU sides by the nature of the coun- 
 try. 7. Our meh hesitated to leap down, chiefly on adcount of the 
 4epth of the sea. 8. He forbade the soldier» to depart too far» 
 from the line of march. 9. Our men, quickly making an attack 6n 
 them, fought lohg and vigorously. 10. He ordered as many ships 
 as possible to be crtll^ted in that winter. 11. The right of Ambas- 
 sadors must be more carefully -upheld. 12. Many ships were most 
 senously shattered. 13. He demanded as largo a number of 
 soldiers as possible. 14. He stationed the army in wintej- quarterti 
 in th98e states which had last matle war. 1^, H^ himself is slain 
 while fighting bravely. 16. He determined to have an escort as 
 feiendly as ijossiblo. 17. He has ^i^aged many wars with thd 
 Oeighfeoring states most succesulwlly^w^ 
 
 1. '^'^*'^»^^ too/or by ihMiiomfmt^irtiMtmBy,^ 
 
 .-•■■a.i 
 
 4 . 
 
 --«.■■ '-■.■,■ 
 
 '^'^- ^ 
 
 .-:1-': 
 
 
 ■ ■■.■:■;,.' 1^'^''' 
 
 '%. 
 
 -,:-■- 1 > 
 
 -..(7 
 
r 
 
 W' .^?. . 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 , LESSON LIII. 
 
 ■ . V ■ '■* •• ■ ■ ■" \ 
 
 (a) Mor&bantar. theyi were cte- SeoutI erant*. they hadfoUowed. 
 
 laying. Seqnl eoeplt, lie began to follow. ^ 
 
 Moratno, after delaying. . Potltnr, he gains. '-*"' 
 
 Veretur, he fears. \ Potltus, having gained. • 
 
 "*^*'^^*'***-^**^'*fl'* \' Progvedltnr, he advances.^ 
 
 Cservatlon.— To what voice do these verb-forms belong (a) 
 respect to their form, (W with respect to the^traaslatiqn ?^ -_ 
 
 quens, while ffMotoing. 
 ^ Seouturl sant, they are going tofdloxo. 
 
 n. 
 
 *■ f? 
 
 
 
 Ob«ervatlon.— To which voice (Jo these forms belong 
 
 For a synopsis of the deponent Verb in all^cinjugations, s^e' 
 Part III., section 40. "* 
 
 1 ' < 
 
 ■\ 
 
 EXERCISE Llil. 
 
 i'— 1- I^um in his locis Caesar moratur, tempestSs subitS coorta 
 est. 2. HelvStil, oppidls^suls viclsque exflstis, cum eis proficiscen- 
 tur; & Lggatos conantes dicere «prohibuit. 4. Hostes impeditoJi 
 nostrl cSnsecatI, mftgnum numerum eorum concIdSrunt. 5. Ino- 
 piam frtlmenti veritus, cSnstituit non progredl longius. S. Nostris 
 mllitibus cunctantibus, centurib deos contestfttus desiKt. 7. Id 
 conspicati, Selvetil, itinere converse, nostros Insequi' ac lacessere 
 coepSrunt. 8. Dum civitas jus suum exsequi conatur, Orgetorix 
 mortuus est. 9. Germanos cSdentes insequi ausi efrant. • 10. 
 Cohortatus suos, hostfis aggressus est. 11. NS in locia quidem 
 superiSribus hostSs consistere patiuntu». 12. Repulsl »b equitattl 
 86 in siivas abdidSrunt, locuiix, nacti Sgregig et natQrft et o^&m» 
 mtlnltum. 13. Hi nostrds adortl proelium rfnovant. ' 14. His 
 constitntla yebus, nactus idoneara tempestatem, tertia vigilifi solvit, 
 equitgs<iue in dlteriferera |wr^um progredl et s« kequi jflssit. mL 
 
 1..^' 5)1?*'^®^*'* *"■" ''*"*"' DemitsittH. The priwipal purtm, m given in the vooabo» 
 «ry, differ, of wmrae, from thou», of the remJlar active verb; «.a., mmrr. ari. 
 
 the ii i fln i ti v» HiBTkiim ^lu) ooujuui ^ro" 
 
 
 ^ »nd 
 
 
 'i 
 
 ■. » 
 
 perfect lndk»tiv»i 
 
 i \. 
 
 
•■«.■- 1 
 
 
 
 --.-■- ■. ^ 
 
 vV';'- 
 
 :£: 1 
 
 rwedX 
 
 ■* ' 
 
 Uow. ^ 
 
 
 ■ '^:^ V''; 
 
 
 '■■* ■ .^ . 
 
 » ,: 
 
 
 .;. : ■•- 
 
 
 V ■■ . 
 
 r(a) 
 
 ■•■^:>. 
 
 I .V...V ^ 
 
 ■ .V. 1*. 
 
 
 
 .'>-•:;/ 
 
 
 ■* ■ ■■ 
 
 "■. ' j 
 
 see' 
 
 )orta 
 icen- 
 
 iito^ . 
 
 Ino- 
 
 strls 
 
 .Id 
 
 isere 
 
 onx , 
 
 10. ~^^ 
 
 dem 
 
 tatft-.-- 
 
 per», 
 
 Hto 
 
 Ivit, . -, , ,M 
 
 If 
 15, if' 
 
 »bu- 
 
 v 
 
 • P-^K'T I.— INTRODUCTORY LESSONa 7» 
 
 Equi^ttl' 8U5 pulso atque Insequentibus nostris, subito pedestrSs 
 copias^ ostendenmfc. „ . 
 
 ti^^TV -fT' *^^^ encouraging his men, gives the signal. 2. 
 Ihe Aedui had promised corn. 3. He did not aUow the soldiera 
 to go outside of the fortifications. 4. On the fnterpreters being 
 removed he converses with him more freely. 5. After advancing 
 sev^n miles from that place,, he drew up the line of battle, el 
 sudden war arose-in Gaul. 7. When this battle had been reported, 
 those who had come to the Rhine began to return'; he himself se 
 out for hither Gaul. 8. He ordered the Helvetians to return to 
 their own territories, from which they had set out. 9. They have 
 _ ^ot_ventured^to attack us. 10. They wiU attempt to seie the 
 higher ground. 11. He' himself sets out with all his forces. 12 
 
 theSr ' ^7;:;^ **^^^^"^R «^ ^^e Helvetians, they^hastened to 
 the territories of the Germans. 13. A great storm having arisen, 
 
 ^^''^'^'''^'^^^^^^ 14. Suddenly attack: 
 
 mg them, they slew a large number. 15. With whom Wai) 
 does he hold converse ? ,, ' • , »^ ^i*ra*} 
 
 . LESSON LIV. ^ . - 
 
 (a) Vlrtute prae«t«nt. ' 'they are superior in vaior. 
 
 , . Celerltate omne» praeofe- th^y excel all in speed, 
 
 * . dunt, ,,, , /' ■■;■ ■ 
 
 Opiilda numerd dnodeoim, t<»mis twelve in mm 
 Oppldum ^mlne Bibra», ^ a tomi Bihravc byname. 
 
 sgeci^ what respect a statement or term is to be ^pM. ^ 
 
 (5) Fo|.tl6re. qaam Galll .unt. they are hAver than tk. Ga^dn 
 Hlberai» e«t mlni^r ,„a™ Irehnd i, maUer than Britain 
 Britannia» ' 
 
 ^.Awplln. octl„«re«t.e nAv#. mmr thm, eight hundred vemU 
 MTMfi^H mlnti i ■By 
 
 W taw ihun nevm kunand uddiera 
 
 rmr 
 
 ^i 
 
 MM' 
 
 oonv0nliuiit 
 
 aaaembU, 
 
 
 ■* ■; 
 
m 
 
 PBIMARY LATIN BOOK. ' 
 
 IX '■'■> 
 
 ObserTation. — The force of quam after a comparative.^ The 
 omission of quam with numerals.^ 
 
 i ■ .- . ■*■ . ■ . ■ -■■<-.■ 
 
 : V EXERCISE LIV. 
 
 I.-r-l. Haec civitas hominum multitudine praestabat. 2. Magis 
 virtute quam Violo contendimus. 3. Veneti scientia atque usu 
 nauticS,rum rerum reliquos Gallos antecedunt. 4. Virtute omiii- 
 bus^praestatis. 5. Uno die^amplius vigintl- urbes incenduntur. 
 6. Praestat omnia a populo Romano pati quam ab G«,llis interfici. 
 -7. Flumen ab castrls non amplius millia passuum decern aberat. 
 8, Germanos Galli virtute superabant. 9. Pliirimum inter eos 
 Bellovaci et^ virtiite et aiictoritate et hominum numero valent. 
 10. Haec res Caesari non mfnorem quam ipsa victoria voluptatem 
 attulit.* 11. Aquitania et^ regionum latitudine et multitudine 
 homintim tertia pars Galliae est aestimanda. 12. Gallos disperses 
 adortu^, magiS ratione et consilio quam virtute vicit. 13. Plils 
 tertia parte interfecta, reliquos in fugam con jiciunt. 
 
 II. — 1. The Helvetians surpass in valor all: the rest of the Gauls. 
 2. They are strong in infantry. 3. He himself was not farther 
 than a mile And a. half\ from the enemy's camp. 4. Our fleet was 
 superior in swiftness. \5. They themselves have not more thali 
 three hundred cavalry. 6- They are going to burn all their own 
 towns, twelve in nufnberi 7. The Gauls do not compare them- 
 selves with t^jem in valor. 8. The lot of the Sequani is more 
 wretched and bitter than (that) of the others. ^. Our men wem 
 equal to tljg[ enemy botih in valor ano^in number. 10. The nightiT^ 
 are shorter than in Gaul. 11. Labienus has coUecte^^^ the ships, / 
 two hundred in number. 12; It is better to be slain in battle (urn 
 aci^e) than not to regain our liberty. * v 
 
 I. So also after words implying comparison, e.g., praettat, it is better. The use of 
 th^ ablative of comparison is omitted here because of it« rarity in Oasar. 
 
 . 2. So oAly after amplius, plus, minus and longiu». , „ 
 
 I. S^ footnote 3, page '66. \ -^ *:,», M:^. 
 
 4. From aih-o. - ■ - -■^.--.:.,— .^,--.^-^^^, -^. .v ; "-^;^V;, 
 
 \ 
 
 W- 
 
 ^-r- 
 
 !►• 
 
agis 
 iisu 
 iiiii- 
 tur. * 
 ficl. 
 
 rat. ::r '' 
 
 eos , 
 ent. .-'■;•■. 
 kem 
 line 
 rsos 
 
 ^108 
 
 PART X — INTRODUCTORY LESSONJS. 
 
 ^81 
 
 ''W 
 
 LESSON. LV.» 
 
 
 (a) Bespondent Bdmands ve- they ansimr that the Romans are 
 nXre, coming. 
 
 Exlstimat Gallon esse in- he thinks that the Chnds a/re hos- 
 
 Imlods, tile. 
 
 Certior faotas est Helvetios he has been informed that the Hd- 
 iter facere, vetians are m,arching. 
 
 ^ Intellegrit nostros castra he perceives that our men are 
 movere, breaking up camp. 
 
 Observation. — The Latin equivalent for English clauses intro- 
 duced by ^/la^ after «verbs of saying, thiiiking, knowing, perceiving. 
 Mood. Case of subject. Translation pf ^?ia^. 
 
 (&) Respondent Romanos vg- they arisfioer that the BomM/ns have 
 
 nisse, come. 
 
 Existlmat Gallos falsse in- he thinks that the Gavis /latfe been 
 
 Imlcds* hostile. 
 
 Intellegrit nostros oastra he perceives that mir men are' 
 
 moturos ^esse), . ' . 9oi'n'9 to wu)t?c the camp» 
 
 Respondet se non vent&ram he dnsu^ers thad he wHl not fiorM. 
 
 > (esse), / ife; 
 
 Respondent enm ndil ven- they answer that he wUl not come* 
 t&rnin (esse), * " 
 
 > Observation,— The formatidn .of the various tens0sof the infini- 
 tive active, and their translation after \|^rbs of saying, thinkihg^ 
 etc. (See Part III., section 31, and for tlie verb sum, section 41.) 
 The changes of form in the future infinitive.^ Use of sd and earn 
 as subject of an infinitive.' , 
 
 ' i III " I |i I. I ill I I I I f au^ — ■ I I ■ I V i i i i ' ■ . — ^ • m i l 1 , 11 II • ihf iii Ti'^' i iTl i t' i III ^ 
 
 1. On account of the length and difflcullj^of this lesson, the exercisl^fti so arnuifrad 
 
 ' jbhat sections (a). (^) and (<^) m&y be taken os've^rate lessons.' See nioreiul^ Part II.» 
 
 iections 12 and 16, and Part III., section 101, h. > 
 
 Itt subject. 
 
 UiBMltlvecb|idil<U. AstJI^l 
 should, always be expressed bv a 
 
 ft ° A 
 
 n.to the Bubjeot of th» verb on i»Bfait tha 
 
 liar 
 ronoun 
 
 V 
 
 . ■— -..A... J 
 
 endihgi with in« lilfl^lUV*, tbf inii>j^r 
 loun in the aoousitive case. f. 
 
 
a2 
 
 > 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOQK. 
 
 UfH^ertlor f&otw 
 
 face re* 
 
 1 t> 
 
 mtt0-hi/had been informed that they 
 
 JRomans 
 
 ^ * * were coming. 
 
 Be.p«nd«runtR6m&^v;6, «iet/ amtwrerf ki< the Bomans 
 
 Exl.tlm&bttt oopia. ventu- h^ thm^ht that the farces would 
 r&«(eg8e). ;. ame. 1 * 
 
 ^ Ob.erv«tlon.-The transition of the varjoirleZs of the 
 infinitive, when the Verb of saying, thinking, et..., is in ^ pa^t 
 tense, ».6., imperfect, perfect («English past) or pluperfect. ^ ^*^^ 
 
 EXERCISE liVf 
 
 ^S?i 
 
 '^'~^'')'^'^^^^y^rit GallSs ex vico discSdere.j#2. InteUdgit 
 Ne^ios belluin parftre. • 3. Nostros ex nfivl dgsilrrfcSnspiciun?» 
 4. Hostem intrft portfts esse existimant.^ 5. Dicit cSpifts hostium 
 fossas complfire vaUumque sciiidere, ^ 6. VidStis nihil esse arduun^. 
 
 J^^ \' ^^^Wik ^^^^*<^«n» existimat. 8. CSgnoscit nftvSs 
 m oontin en^Mi rtisse, 9. DuSs, v^nisse legionSs videt. 10. 
 !I 1^ ■^mm^^^'''^' 11. Copifis temperatarfis ab injOrift 
 et maldicio^l^iPat. 12. Eis sgsS vel persu5sure>«?vel vl cofto 
 \fi^ existimant. 13. Omnem bxercituin disc6ssisse 
 
 :(e) I4f Respondit mfignam tJaesarem injOriVW 
 nOntiftverant Gallos adventum Romanorum exspec^ 
 16. Negavit Aedufe 86 obsid6s redditurum esse. 17. HelvStil 
 angustos s5 fthSs habere arbitrabantur.»* 18. :HelvSti6s tempera- 
 tOr^b injmoa existimabat.3 ^9. Ex captlvis cognovit flflm^ ab 
 castrts suls non.amphus miUia passuum duodecim- abess^, trans 
 Id flflnien omnSs Nervios cGnsSdisse,. adventumque ibi RoinanCrum 
 exspectare 20. HostSs simul .a^ue s6 ex fuga recSperunr^^ 
 Caesarem d6 pace -legates misgrunt, atque obsidSs s5 datOi^ 
 polhcitl sunt. 21.- Caesarl renttntiatur Helv6ti6s iter in Aeduorum 
 
 I» i^t:S^£.^;!Srj\!!^tl^r^ '^"o^^g. th, Unp^rteot ten„ i. .renenOlv t. 
 
 bnQntiant. 
 
 e. 16. Re< 
 
 constituisse. 
 17. HelvStir 
 
 # 
 
 » 
 
 \ 
 
 "^ 
 
 ^: 
 
 I 
 
 
 -■># 
 
# 
 
 they 
 
 matis , ^ 
 
 ■' 
 
 1 
 
 V 
 
 PART I.— INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 
 
 83 
 
 ftn68 facere. 22. Caesar postquam per expMWrSs comperit 
 hostSs 8^86 in 8ilvfi8 recepisse, inopiam frtlmenti veritus, constituit . 
 nsn progredl longius. 23. Helv6til timore. perterritSs RomSnCs 
 . discSdere & 86 existiraabant.i 24. BreviSrSs esse quam in Gallifi 
 noctSs vidgbamus.^ > . "*: : 
 
 IL-Ca) 1. He learns that the Belgians are assembling. 2. 
 Ihey think that Ceesar is waging war without suppUes. 3. He 
 sees that the German» dd not Venture to begin battle. 4. ThW y 
 bring back word that the enejg| cavalry are riding up and hur^"'^^'^ 
 ing stones and weapons, 5.^ understand that cavaliy, ships 
 (and) provisions are waijtiifg. 6. He says that the com is now 
 npe m the fields. - 
 
 (6) 7. They perceive that Ceesar lias led across the foJt5e8 with 
 out baggage. 8. He thinks that Labienus will order the Aedui to " 
 send ambassado^B. 9. He learns that the Britons have seized the 
 ambassador an4 put (him) in chains. 10. He says that they have 
 rested all hope of safety in valor alone. 11. They bring back word 
 that C«sar, after leading his army across, has bn)ken down the 
 
 L"X.^ges '""^^^^ "^ ""' ^^''"'*^'^' ^^* '"^y ^ 
 
 niai^^^VT'^"^^ *^** ^^ ^^"^*^ ^'^^^ up camp the next 
 mght. 14 On the same day Caesar was informed by scouts that 
 the enemy had encamped at the foot of the mountain, eight miles . 
 from his camp 15. He promised not to neglect^» the wrongs of 
 the Aedui 16. He was informed that all the neighboring sLes 
 were revolting. 17. They promised not to revolt.^ 18 The^ , 
 declare hat they will neither send ambassadors nor surrender the^ 
 ^8. m He said that for this reason he had been silent. 20. V 
 
 Fi^i these he learns that a town, protected by woods and marshes, 
 « iK)t far distant from that place. 21. They said that, influenced 
 by him, they had revolted from the Aedui. 22. He declares that 
 they have always been hostUe to him. 23. C^sar, thinking (it*.,- 
 ^ly, hanng thought) that this had happened quite opportunely 
 demands hostages. 24. He promised to finish^ the wTwithou 
 any danger to,them (itferoiiy, o/^/iAem). * - 
 
 1. See footnote 8, page 82. y 
 
 ■«^ 
 
 P«^.iS^"*^ P"***^./^ ■«» md vuUng ate' premu infinitive .fter verb. (^ 
 

 
 
 y 
 < 
 
 : •■ 
 
 
 4 
 
 n 
 
 . », 
 
 
 » 
 
 • 
 
 > 
 
 ' " • 
 
 . I* » 
 
 ■ ■ ' 
 
 * 
 
 - ' 
 
 
 '■ ■ 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 1^ * 
 
 • .■ - 
 
 ... ^ 
 
 
 
 
 ,1 
 
 
 w-J 
 
 iT- ■ 
 
 A 
 
 • 
 
 ■« 
 
 
 ■ , 
 
 ■■ 
 
 '. ; 
 
 ■V . 
 
 
 : f- 
 
 [-^1, -I-,— 1.. I,,.., ,11 — 
 
 ■• 
 
 
 . 
 
 1 
 
 ..„:,^._.:j 
 
 ■. : ;' . ■ 
 
 . ''■" 
 
 1 
 
 ■■'.■: ..■■■/ ■"■. 
 
 '; ■: ■''■■-' 
 
 '.:Yv^ '■, ' 
 
 '•' ■ ''■:■'-- 
 
 ' -■ " ^ 
 
 
 
 ^ . 
 
 ■• 
 
 ' JL *' 
 
 •■■ 
 
 - 'p.1 
 
-m 
 
 m. 
 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■'. " 
 
 ■ , *o\':. - ;: ...;; 
 
 
 , .-. ■ ■■--■■ ■' -'■f ..- • 
 
 ■ - -"• -.'^S^'- ' 
 
 -~,- - ^'v-- •-- 
 
 
 - 
 
 "■ --'-^^r.— ,: — 
 
 --■■■■--^: ■- - - ■ 
 
 -1, ■ - J- ■ --- •»--■-■ 
 
 — •- 
 
 .-, „■ ,«.--_ 
 
 
 :,. ..,■_»* ■ i . 
 
 ■;//..; ■ ■'■ •■ 
 
 .'/.-■ 
 
 1 
 
 t 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 * ■ k ■ 
 
 ■''■/■', ■;:i/ 
 
 
 . « 
 
 
 1 r-—- ' - 
 
 - "*- ^ 
 
 ** 
 
 '•■•r""" 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ ■ ■■-■>■ 
 
 ';;/■•; ^ 
 
 ^■■'^*".l*-./ 
 
 
 "-. - ' . ■.' 
 
 , * ' 
 
 ». . V;- 
 
 ■■'■■■•■ 
 
 
 
 ■"■.'•■ ■>.-■ "V 
 
 *"■ ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■■■■■ 
 
 
 HH 
 
 MMMH 
 
 

 i\ :W*- 
 
 « 
 
 IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 '<l 
 
 s"*»**. 
 
 ■A 
 
 «^ 
 
 ^>' 
 
 > > 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 1.0 *ia la 
 
 -**- 
 
 I.I 
 
 ly 
 
 lU 
 IK 
 
 w 
 
 w 
 
 ■tt 1^ ■2.2 
 
 12.0 
 
 1.8 
 
 IL25 i 1.4 
 
 I 
 
 1.6 
 
 \ 
 
 ^. 
 
 "W. 
 
 m 
 
 i 
 
 V 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sdences 
 Corporation 
 
 7M 
 
 * <* 
 
 
 i ^Jts.^' 
 
 ^y^ 
 
 v^^ 
 
 w 
 
 IS wKt «MM tTmr 
 
 WnSTN.N.Y. USM « 
 (7l*)t7a^503 
 
 ^7"^ 
 ^ 
 

 
 . ' - 
 
 
 "' "^ :■•' '**< ■ 
 
 
 
 ■ .N.J " ■ •■ ■ 
 
 . ■ ■ ■:'%-■■ - ^.v ■ ...■.;■ : ■ :■< 
 
 *■■■ ' . 
 
 1. ■'■■■■;■ ■. ■ , , 
 
 >' 
 
 . .■ ■ ' 
 • ' ' ' ■• • ', .:.'.■ 
 
 . ■* 
 
 , "-■ -»-■■'■,_"■■ 
 
 '■■■'■'-../■-. 
 
 
 
 ■ # , 
 
 f V,,. 
 
 • 
 
 ^ ■ "''■■ .',/■. . . ...... 
 
 ' '■■.■■ 
 
 
 / ■ 
 
 '-■'■., ^ ■ ., . ■■• ..■'.« 
 
 \, ' ■ ,. 
 
 
 
 'I 
 
 * . . ■ \ 
 
 .,,. ;^^ .. ■■.■•♦ . " .- - . .. " 
 
 
 • 
 
 '^ • 
 
 ^ 
 
 s^ 
 
 
 • 
 
 -f . 
 
 ■ ■ * * ■ • ■ . " " 
 
 . " ' - ■ • • , ■ ■ ■ 
 
 p"" 
 
 
 ■'^. ■ ' ■ ■ -v " 
 
 # * 
 
 *" . "■ 
 
 1 . . ■ 1, ' " 
 
 ftT " 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 f 
 
 
y 
 
 84 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 ii: 
 
 LESaON LVI. 
 
 Vlr m&xlmae virtutUi 
 Ol&aslfl navlnm vlglntl, 
 Novem dterum Iter, 
 
 \ 
 I 
 
 ^Mdn« m&srn& altttudine, 
 Vir m&x1m& vlrtute, 
 Immftnl corpornm m&gnltu- 
 dlAe homines. 
 
 x^a man of the greatest bravery, 
 , a fleet of twenty ships, 
 a nine days' march (literally, a 
 
 march of nine days). 
 a mountain of great height, 
 a man of the gmatest bravery, 
 men of hiige si& (of bodies). 
 
 _Ob.ervatlon^The cases used to describe the qualities or char- 
 a^tenstics of objects Which case is used when the descripdon 
 refers to number? which case is preferred when physical char^ 
 tenstics are described?» *'"j'«c»i cnarac- 
 
 ^ 
 
 EXERCISE LVI. 
 
 ^.~1. Repent NerviSs esse hominSs mfi«nae virtHtis. 2. Qtiod 
 «a^ civitts mftgnke inter Belgfts auct6rit4tis, atque hom^um 
 miUhttldme praestabat, sescentos obsid.s poposcit. 3. Vol! nus 
 ^bonus mHitum, vir et cOnsUil ma«nl et summae vix^aTb ad 
 Galbam accumt, at^ue anam esse spem salatis docet. 4. M^rcft- 
 
 TNeXl'??''''"^ ^^'^^"^ ^^""^^^« esse praedicaW. 
 6. Nemi vails pedum novem et fossft quindecim» hibema cingunt. 
 
 6. Erat mter Labisnum atque hostem difflcill trftnsita fltoien 
 
 LS:; sir? 8%''""'i.'^^^^^^ ^^^^^^^ **"« oneris't^r„; 
 
 Tnfrtr^ « -.«J- «^P^«^«5r6s certior factus est silvam esse 
 
 toflnl«mfi«n.tadme. 9 Vei^iagetorix, summae potentiae adul^ 
 
 convocat. 10. CSteri Cjusdem generis sunt hamftniSrSs. , 
 
 II.--1. Re |<ras distant a f;w days' journey from him 2 A 
 mountem of great height takes up the rest of the space. T It wat 
 
 stretches from the river Rhine to their territories. 5. 
 
 t See more fully Part III., .eotloin 81, e, and 86, e. 
 JgJ"!^"' »*'^ o^ the y^-aU »nd th» hntdth at thm *..^ ,^u .-> 4w. . . . 
 
 i 
 
 ■W_ 
 
 % 
 
 Mu-'^jm;. 
 
 % 
 
 rM^i^^ti. 
 
PART l—INTRCm^^ g5 
 
 brought Wk word that the Germans wwe (mm) of incredible 
 bravery. B. They- are going to fortify the toyn with a rampart 
 twelve feet high (lUerally, of twelve feet). 7. He found that Dum- ' 
 nonx was (a man) of the utmost boldness, and of great influence 
 with the Gauls on account 6f his Uberality.. 8. He sends to them 
 .Valerius, a young man of the highest valor and accompihments. 
 9 He did not think that men of an unfHendly disposition would 
 refram from wrong-doing and mischief. 10. This state was power- 
 ful, and was of great weight among them. * . ' 
 
 * LESSON LVII^ 
 
 (a)Certlor faotas est asros he vxu informed that the fielda 
 
 vastftrlr ; were being laid wcuste. 
 
 Responderunt il«r6» vastft- they armoe^ thtU' their fielda had 
 
 ; to. ©t opplda lno6n.i| - been laid waste and their 
 
 *■■*• towns lyumed. 
 
 Pollloltl sunt s6 seout&rds they prmnised to follow QiteTaXlj, 
 
 (esse), • . ; that they would follow). 
 
 mxlteosloquIcfiiiAtdsosse, he said they had attempted to 
 
 ■ ., -■■;•,. speak. ' ■ * ^ 
 
 Obse'rvatlon.- Formation of present and perfect infinitive pas- 
 sive (see Part III., section 32). Changes in form of the perfect 
 mfimtive passive. Infinitive of Deponents (see Part: Hi., section 
 40). Compare Lesson LV. .. "^* ■ 
 
 (6) I»ri|e«ldi4««trt.i^ 't% «^ a proMton (Utermlly^ 
 
 i- for a protection) to t^ccw»».' 
 
 pnml» quae erant &sul aU thirds which were of service 
 i nostril V . y Giterally, for an advantage) 
 
 ^''•- vC ■ to our men. 
 
 JVostrls erat Impediments, it irns a hindrance (LitenXlj, for 
 
 K^ • » hindrance) to <mr nwn. 
 
 Eqult«. au«lli6 uostrls ml- they sent the cavalry as aid Qiter. 
 
 ' '*""'*' >Uy. fo r an «id^ to mi^ «>^, 
 
 otto mid itwr men. 
 

 M 
 
 PAHURY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 * ^!!!"'**!?**""^^ "^ ^^ ** • J)redicate to state th. purDo« 
 a person, or thing serves.» 7 P«rpow 
 
 ■^ -v' EXERCISE LTlI. 
 
 f«cieSn 7 i^ iiJ' ^"l"""™' «'«™ »'»»ibu. Galfi, esse 
 
 mlsit' 9 CM, """'P"*'"^ «leommm-jjegionem subsidia nostris 
 mtat. 9. GaHls ttSgno erat impediments. 10. ArbitrtUI eum 
 nan loi^pus pragredl canStOrum, in flnta sues revZ^^f T 
 
 ^c^"'s s»rr """^ -««nitfldinrr^: 
 
 impedtae^ ^ ««ntCaeswem, praesidia quinque cohortium 
 
 Zrr^ . ; ^^ '*'">"'' "«P"» P«™» lope profe<*um 
 «8«. 13. ■ Hac msgna sibi asm fore arbitrSbantiur.» *™'°n?" 
 
 enlm^^^'a^H'"""'' *!!." *"' "^™' "as being a^ted fcy iie 
 
 h«i be» .„t endued weJl leftr^^^'^r^^r • 
 
 S^' 7 O^Av" """"^ *^" .' «•">'^''° ""-W «risen Z 
 "•Wi. 7. One thmg was a great advantage to our Jen R ThZ 
 
 -^ Its- z urpufto^dZh'-'Tin'z.r ^'" - 
 
 waning which were M „«. L (itS ihei .^""IT 
 
 «aid that he would set out for the province the neitTv 13 h! , 
 Perceived that our men were being surrounded b yte enemy ^- 
 
 / 
 
 ^ 
 
 <-" 
 
 ;.A 
 
 
 q>okea 
 
 — - — - ■■■j»*«j 
 
 - ^ 
 
.. ^c- 
 
 PABT L—INTBODUCTOET LESSONa 
 
 m 
 
 «V 
 
 r/ 
 
 LESSON LVIII. , 
 
 MftgnAoeleritftted«oarr«rant, it^rcm dotim^wi^ great 9wift- 
 
 nessT^ 
 Alia ratidQe bellom «erjint/ ih^y carry oti tht war in cmotJur 
 
 ' manner. 
 
 Sommdatadlooaatramuniaiit, th^y fortify the camp wiih the. 
 
 • greatest zeal. 
 
 Wnk eSmanetAdlne diaUnimnt, they leaped down, accorcling to 
 
 their ctutom. 
 Oaesarla volnntftlii profeoti they set out with Gamfs consent.^ 
 
 •lUlt, 
 
 Observation. — The use and translation of the ablative ejfpress- 
 ing the nuuiner in which, or that in accordance with wjiich, some- 
 thing is done. ~ . 
 
 .}■''■■':■' EXERCISE Lvinf'f:^-""— '"^ ■ ' 
 
 1.— 1. Equitibus noHrls pulsis, incrSdibill C^leritfttead flOmen 
 ' dScurrunt. 2. .Gallls mfign6 erat impediments quod nfldflcorpore 
 pagnftvSrunt. 3. Ab els cCghOvit GallOs m6re su5 conciliS habittJ, 
 ntlntiSs in omnSs partSs dimlsisse. 4. HostSs mftximS clftmSre 
 sciOls vallum ascendere coepBtunt. 5. COnsuSttldine suft Caesax 
 cohortSs complOrSs praesidiO castrls rellquerat. 6. Repperit id 
 flamen per flnfis Aedupmm in Rhodanum Influere incrSdibill 
 lenitftte. 7. Ad castra mftgnC curstl contendSrunt. 8. CSnsSnsfl 
 omnium GallSrum, pftce facta, Germftnl hunc sibi domiciliC locum 
 d6l6g6runt. 9. Ad haec Caesar respondit sS nunquam alift ratidne 
 bellum gesttlrum. 10. Summ6 studi« mllit«s nftvCs aedificftre 
 veterSsque refibere cpepSrunt. 
 
 / n.— -1. He ordered the camp to be moved with greater noise and 
 
 rSjOnfusion. 2. He said this i^ a loud voice. 3. They reported 
 
 ■ that all the Gauls with loud weeping began to ask aid from Caesar. 
 
 .4i. Having with incredible speed covered a great distance, they 
 
 reached the camp on the eighth day. 6. According to their cus- 
 
 tom , they leap dawn and fight «t^loofe. 
 
 i 
 
 word that the camp had^been fortified with the same care on 
 
 ^ 
 
;f WMABT I'ATIN BOOK > A : 
 
 (t«e ex).all 8id««. \ He answered &t he would not come on any 
 other condition. 8. Wi£h the same speed they hastened towaiZ 
 
 Zr/' '• '^ff^.^^^^o^^^ theysLt ambassado't 
 hm^and promised to give hostages. 10. He found out through 
 soouts that, according to the practice of tJie Roman people S 
 enemy were fortifying a camp. >^"^ "«"* peopie^e 
 
 ' , . - '^'^. ,,:: ■■ ■- '''■*■'"..' ■•.■'A '" 
 
 A^ 
 
 tESSON LIX. 
 
 Impotnm tam aul,lt6 faoluat they rmke an attack «, ^uJuLrdy 
 
 ut nemo re.l.t»t, thai ^ ^ ,^^^ "^ 
 
 Impetum tam «ablto f#c#rnnt they made an attack so siidderdv 
 
 ut nenBo re«l«teret, . that no one resisted. 
 
 Tant«.tlmoriioste,occupWlt fuch a panic seized th^ erunnyM 
 .ut proellum oommlttere they did notdc^e to join 
 
 non aud§rent, 1 battle. "^ " 
 
 Acoldlt^nt cartra mUlte. mu- it happened that th. soldiers ^re 
 
 n ren , „ ,, , fortifying the camp. 
 
 ObierTatlon.-Formati6n of ge subjunctive in the pres^ht and * 
 ZTIT r^" '' f --i-«*tions. (See Part III.,. sSn 2^)1 
 The translation and use of these tenses of the subjunctivf ki 
 dependent sentences of result> l>osition.of the clause^^^^^ 
 
 ■^■■^■■■." ':■ ■■-- EXERcisK LIX.. ::.'". ;:-v:. '^ ■•. ':;;■.: 
 
 i ^"T^V"^'*^ i™P«*"n^;f5cSrunt ut hostSs tei^ vertei^nt. 
 t f,^„^,**™ ^»»»'-"^ «"«» ut haec non sbiam. 3.Tta flelvS^l^ 
 tostitatl sunt ut obsidSs accipere non dare soleant. 4 Tantri u^ 
 ^^mor ut discdere ab signis n5n audSrSmus. 5. Accirut G^ 
 capita compa^ent. 6. Ita currfls collodant ut. expeditum ^^ 
 
 ««jii^tton'" ^'^ "'•• "^"^" »»• '^' »•>« -ubjunctiv of the verb. In ^ of the thii» 
 Indicative. thB Jmi«rf««f ist» *"; iZL . «naicative ig; the nresent like the preeent 
 
 hjdi«aive:tTein;^^^^^^^ the prea... „.« tne .._.. 
 
 truulation than the 
 
 >nlng (the remit olj 
 
 f'. 
 
PABT |,*-T|NTBQDticTORY LESSONa" 
 
 B9 
 
 GaUiae tStlus principStum obtinSrent. 8. Tarn celeriter 6rup^ 
 tionem faciimt ut nSmo resistat. 9. Tantam sibi auctsritfttem; 
 comparfiyerafc ut undique ad eum ISgfttiongs concurrerent. 10 
 Tantum exercitatione efficiu^t .ut in praecipitl loc6 equSs brevi 
 mbderSri soleant. 11. Sic nostros contempsSrunt ut fossSa com- 
 plere audSrent! 12. HostSs tantam virtatem, praestitSrunt ut 
 altissimas ripas ascendQj^ audlrent. 
 
 II.-1. The enemy yTefe^ terrified that they fled to the woodsr 
 2. So great was the v^or*f the soldiers that aU fought' fiercely 
 *id bravely. 3. On their arrival such a change occurred (lUeraily, 
 wa^ made) that our men at once renewed the battle. 4. It hap- 
 pened that the soldiers were leaving the standards^ 5. Such wm 
 the swiftness of the Germans that they equaUed tl^e speed of 
 their horses. 6. So great is the panic that we do not venture tq^ 
 engage battle with them. 7. So great a storm arose that very feiT 
 Qf aU the ships reached land. 8. The enemy have been so aUmned 
 by his arrival that they are sending ambass^ors about peace. 9 
 They fought so fiercely that no onff dared lejive the standards. 10 
 They display such viilor that the neighboring states eagetly seek 
 their friendship. 11. They have such influence among the Bei- 
 gians that no one dares to lay waste their fields. 12. So quicl^^ 
 yere they (UteraUy, so great wm tKeir quickness) that he with 
 «iifliculty saved himself from the enemy's hands. ' • 
 
 €um frumentam nostrl «om- when our men ioere bringing in 
 port&rent. oertior faotaa «om, Ae tocw m/o»wd . . . . 
 
 est . . 
 
 Cum haeo YldlM«»l. eqiilt«. when he iwm (literally, had seen) 
 
 mlslt, ^ ^^j^^ ^ gg^ ^^ cavalry. 
 
 Cum «gro. v«.tAvlswnt, oppl- when (or after, or since) they had 
 
 da oppuffn&vdrunt. laid waste the fields (or aftw 
 
 , laying waste the fields), they 
 
 * - ' attacked the Jtowns. 
 
 t)ttmmm»pap,tt»ab»Met,«f>r. t< ^ ftm h^ twfff g mi7e distanL ho r 
 
 «•rftiotutpn,,,^^^ 
 
 u>as iiiformed . i , ,. 
 
do 
 
 PRIKARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 introduced by oBBi. poMtion <rf a»e cUmim,. 
 
 c 
 
 EXERCISE tX. 
 
 ■ ^ J; Cuu. «pp„p„.^^„, Bri,^.^ temper* *ubT« 
 
 TSnisset. Rsml, out Dro,™7?X iV " f* * """" <>« "nprtvlso 
 
 8. Kc«t;. cu;'?f,rrL^±t„:«'^'^'*"''»^»'- 
 
 Cae«ai.4 «.,«, „ i.- "^"^» "Jciperent^ l^ostibus occurrunt 9 
 
 P«<ls «int. ""* ~' *«""*'™ ^«« »' 1«««« no» 
 
 m;il(»w(th.tlJ,™*^T''°"'°"»P'^- 2. When our 
 
 oom to be brought in hT • 7* , '"'*' ''*' "^ ordered 
 G.ule W dew^ : « '"« •nformed by «,oute that .Jl the 
 
 _^^ -41,. 1. See footnote 1, ptee 88 «eZT"/ " "^ ~ 
 
 ! i?.."*"^ ^"1'"'' than that of the princiS verb. ""'^ '"''•'" **>« Plup«<«o» 
 
 ^ 
 
 V4V. 
 
 U 
 
 ■tri:; 
 
 ** B * a i o etnete ti^ 
 
 See footnote 1, pa^ 8«. ' 
 
 —•% i-T^:- 
 
PABTX — ^INTBODUCTORT LESSON&^ 
 
 91 
 
 approached nearer, he was oidered to tlirow ai^ay hu arm^. 8. So 
 *«reat ia the scarcity of aU tl^ngs that we are in veiy great danger.; 
 9. When he was a few day^^' march from their territories, ambas- 
 sadors came to him. 10. When the Gauk(saw that our legions 
 were being hard pre88ed,Uhey hastened towards the camp. 11. 
 On learning that Ceesar/Was going to set out that night, they 
 stationed an ambush in the woo^. 1^ 1% happened that the 
 camp was smaller. ' ^ 
 
 LESSON LXI. 
 
 Haeo faoere poniun« 
 
 ||<Oam haeo faoere non possent. 
 
 Dixit f£ haeo faoere posse, 
 iMxlt se haeo faoere potaisse, 
 
 ■ ... ■ "■ 
 
 Haeo faoere ndm pota^ront» 
 
 SnbmoTirl ndn possont. 
 
 I am t^le to do thisy or I can do 
 
 this. ■ rt 
 
 wJuin they tvere not aUe to do thisy 
 
 or when they could not do' 
 
 thit. . 
 he said that he cotUd do this, 
 he said that he cotdd have done 
 
 this (literally, had been able 
 
 to do). * 
 
 they were unable to do this, or 
 
 they could not do^is, 
 they cannot be driven^ 
 
 ObservatIon.-Tran8lation of the varioiis forms oJF possmn with 
 the present infinitive of anothei^ yerb. (For the conjugation of 
 possam. see Part Dtt., section 42.) Position of the infinitive.^ 
 
 EXERCISE LXI. 
 
 I.— 1. Ntllll civitftti GermanSrum persuAdSre potestis. 2 Vsbia 
 po8s«mus.fltilSs esse amid. 3. Ab his sS dSfendere, trftditis armls 
 non possunt. 4. Minus facile eam rem cSnsequI poterunt.' 5^ 
 Cmn oppidum exptlgnftre n5n potuissent, agros pop^JfitI sunt. 
 e. N-e ipse quidem spSrat nostrum exercitum superftrl posse. 7 
 9uid sine reHquIs legiSnibus eflScere potestis? 8. Id efficeri . 
 
92 
 
 PEIMABT LATIJ» BOOK. 
 
 «, .mpedimenta, quae ,5cum porttre n6n poterant, cto flamed 
 Khenrnn deposuSrunt. .10. T,nU ert GermSnSrum virttla uTnS 
 4[ quidem immortSlfe parSs esse possint. n. Cum ab proximis 
 Germajib .mpetrire non possent, tUteriores temptant. 12 NS 
 
 «dio venire non poterSmua. 14. Oppidum oppflgnSre o6naM 
 
 S"'lf r "^ '"°^''"' -^titadiaenT'ex^^rS 
 potuerunt, 15. %ecqmspati potest? 
 
 thf?T« ? .r" v^"** ^^^^^ ^"^ territottes. 2. He thinks 
 rellthle .H ''f'^i^^-^' 3- When they could not" 
 
 IhTS^'Z' :V"'"^T^'^^'''''^'^' *• He was informed 
 that they had. not been able to hold out (any) longer. 5 Thev 
 could not withstand the attecks of our men. 6.^He has iZ 
 
 Ze' fht ""^* ^^' "P *'"^' ^"^^^^y- »• S"ch a storm 
 
 arose that we were not a^le to finish the work. 10. They did) 
 
 Lt Il'^L uT ^'"T"^'' theym^^ht that not e^n) their/ 
 ttL 12 rs ! "'"^^ T'- ''• "^' -jL^«r^ily prevent 
 
 couWh. ^ r. .r *^" "^"^"^^ ^^ ^«^^^ *h«t nothing 
 ^o^dbeaccomphshed; 13. You cannot be seen from the enemy's 
 c^mp. 14. We have been so alarmed by these things, that we L 
 le^ easUy resist the enemy. 15. They could nft pursue Z 
 enemy, becaiise the cavalry had been unable to set out ^ ^ 
 
 ■;^::v,X. y^^'-"". :.:■ LESSON' LXII. :. :\ A' ./:/■.' .,. . \ 
 
 /a) Study the ^formation of the perfect subjunctive active of 
 ■^conjugations (Part III., section 29),» and of the subjunctive 
 passive, aU tenses (Part III., section 30).» uojunctiye 
 
 <6) Bosrat qui» tlbl persuaserlt, Ae asks who has permaded ym 
 Bogavlt qul8 tlbl persua- he asked who had pervaded you. 
 
 peri;c?Tuttre'oa^^^^^^^^ *<> ^-^ "I- B-tion. 41 and 42. ,or th. 
 
 in k^^t^:^J'J^^ ««' -^^ ->-^ alio the ,hbJUBotlve-of the A^..., ,,^ 
 
 i':'M 
 
 ■r^t 
 
 ■iWiM&tfdiiH^ 
 
-'ft I 
 
 
 PART L^iNTRODUCTOBY 'LESSONS. 
 
 1 
 
 9a 
 
 *- ; Qnem asnm belli habeant he iiiquires tcfca* experience cf 
 qnaerit, war they ham. . ' ; 
 
 Qnem usam belli ^abSrent he learned what ekperitnce ofwar 
 I cognovit, V they had. 
 
 : Quid Tgnisaetls nofa Intel- I did not •understand why yoxir 
 leg^bam, J^ad come. ' 
 
 <|aanta faenlt&s daretnr they pointed out what an oppor- 
 demonstraverant» tunity was qfforded. 
 
 Obsei^atlon.— The mood used in dependent sentencef intro- 
 duced by an interrogative. ^ Contrast th» independent sentences 
 given in Lesson LI. The translation of the different tenses of !lhe 
 subjunctive.^ ^ 
 
 EXERCISE LXII. 
 
 ^'—1^' Ab his quaeslvit quae cTvitfitSs in arm& essent. 2. Rogat 
 quSs' in partes hostes iter faciant. 3. Ex loco superiore quae r6s 
 in nostris castris gererentur conspicatus, decimam legionem subsidiS 
 nostrls misit. 4. Rogftvit cCtf eos ab officio discessOros jtidicft- 
 rSraus. 5. Quibus' in locis sit Caesar ex captivis quaerunt. 6. 
 Ostendit quae* in concilio Gallorum de eo sint dicta. 7. Intefle- 
 gebat quanto^ cum periculo le'gionem ex hibernis gductOriis esset. 
 8. Ejus rei quae causa esSfet miiStus eraty 9: Caesar intellegSbat 
 qua» d5 causa ea dicerent. 10. Ibi ex captivis cognoscit quae* in 
 hostium castrls gerantur. 11. Flumen est incredibili ISnitate, 
 ita lit oculls, in utram n^em fluat, jildicarl nori possit. ^2. 
 Insidiafl verebStur quod <hBp de causa discSderent hostes nondum 
 perspexerat. ^| , ' ■ ^ 
 
 n.^1. He asked him why they \rere coming to him. 2. They 
 asked in what' direction they were being led. 3. He could dis- 
 cover neither what (literaUy, how great) was the size of the island, 
 nor what nations inhabited (it). 4. They know what* he does, 
 with whom he converses. 5. *They ask the merchants from what» 
 districts they come, and what things they have l^rned there. 6; 
 Although Csesar understood for what» reason they had said this, 
 he yet ordered him to come to him with two hundred hostages. 
 
 _liThe_verb8 upon which theeemibjunctiveclftyuwii depenA 
 "TWrarajf, knowing, tellinjc, perceiving and deciding. 
 
 a. See footnote 2, page 88. 8. See footnote 3, page 76. 4. See footnote 4, pag^ TR 
 
-/ 
 
 '% 
 
 U'^ 
 
 94 
 
 PBHIAKY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 being done, in Gaul. 10 He co-mT?^'- *; «« «ht-ws wh,f is 
 done in oui camp. 11 mlT^ "1 ^^™' "■>•*' ^» "«ii»» 
 
 «*." ^-),«...L^;.rzsrnX^ ieZ'r"f ^ 
 
 as guard, for the shibs 12 Tl.o« _ P^' *® ^^t* ten cohDrts 
 
 * '*\ ■ , '.'■.■■■■■ ^ • . 
 
 f • 
 
 
 Hae^Wre^uIt. he toishes to do this. . t- ^ ^ 
 
 Ha.e ,,oe,e «.,...,. ,, ,^ ^ ^^ ^ ^^ . ^ or Ae u«. ;^ 
 
 ni..«cti«r4S : ' '^"^''«•'""' »'""»« verb,, «e p^ 
 
 EXERCISE LXJII. 
 
 %,■<■ 
 
 ^ I.-4. Quas2inpart8svuItisproj5ci8cI? 2 0„«.i n 1 * 
 
 3. Servire quam pag„a.e n^lL^T q!«?Z7 ^"^^^^^^ 
 nol€bat, posters die in r.^ • • Viuod JortQnam temptSre 
 
 . rr^.uZnltoT^':Zl"'Ti:^'^*- '■^'^^ 
 •quod W f«=ere nauarf w'^,**^'^- ^" E5s intertciet 
 
 post ter^m hostem ^tq,e^„^"'j"L'' ™"*"'- "• <^ 
 10. Praiidium qu«m «mSl h^)^ ^ »»««>»«« popoecit. 
 
 faoere vJUt . l|^Ce:tior 4«, est e^^Sd Jl^^S,."*"'"™', 
 
 ii^!J'^^!l:^:^l^^:^;^2^^ ^" did thia be- 
 
 , 1* S6e footnote 4, pare 75.' ^ p__ " ~ .>_ 
 
1 
 
 „ ' . P^B? I— INTBODUCTORy LESSONa. 96 
 
 «HBSB Kedid not ™K tlftt pUw to be unoccupied.'- a The^ 
 «mwered tUt ftey UA been unwilling to co^-to him. 4 hJ 
 ^ed wKy we were «(.ore wiUingto e'ubmit tb«n to fight. 6."ThI 
 
 f^r 1°/-'"";!'' '"■" '^* '^'»^- «• He »»id th.t he «rhed to ' 
 ^tW w.thhm .bout these thing,. 7. You wieh to «ttle in fte^ 
 temtones. 8. "As-he^ wished the bueine» to be finished he „" 
 out at o^. «SThey i« so alsrmed by his .rn^ll^^ 
 
 n Tk 7 .V* >»>««• 10. We h«l rather be ^iin-th^ 
 betray th^le t» the enen»y. ' 11. He .deed why i^w^ 
 WwUHngto hold the place.. 12. They sludtluit they^lT 
 
 lf2l r r* ''• "^^" '■^*"* ■«' »"'-'» Brit^ Z^ 
 
 \ 
 
 
 /■ 
 
 LESSON LXIV. 
 
 f^ 
 
 M: 
 
 Hoswi Mtatum, qui n,i„u.^ «^ en^y have detcmed ^ am- 
 erat, reMnuerunt, . 'basmdor who M been mU 
 
 • . V** * • . ^'^'^^*»^ fvham the^a/re detain- 
 
 C6irnom,tt 16gr4tum qtfem retl- /te Zearn* l^ they wUl put to 
 
 Tse"* ***' ^"^«'•'•«ta'*» \ death the ambasmdor whom 
 
 ip»io« -m.\.. > they am deiainina. , 
 
 Exl«t,mabat legratum qfaem re.> «^.^AU^ta^ th^ wavld put to' 
 
 - «J^'««* eo. mterfecturo. death the arnbas^^ador whom 
 
 «oiiw • ' -. they ivere detaining. 
 
 . "^nI.o,I4...*,.^n.. - tt, fi,«„^ j^ ,^^ 
 
 CerMo, WW. e.tO«U6.oom- ^.^t^ in/bnW «ia* «ie Qa^ 
 
 ^^^ia» co«irlf9#ttt,~ 
 
 wana Aod collected forces: - 
 
 ^z-* 
 
 -^J \ 
 
 .^ 
 
$r 
 
 
 PBJMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 '^• 
 
 liJEuration.* 
 
 «b«r*,«l„„._The difference betwee/English and Latin nsaee 
 m^Uhve or other suboMinate sentences when put in indir^ 
 
 tXERCISE LXI^. * 
 
 - ■-, ..... ^ , ^ 
 
 ' d'^i^^^^^ ^'^ '^^*^' *^ «™^^"« natlonibus, quae 
 tmns Rhfenum mcolerent, ad «6 venire. 2. Itespondet cum sola. 
 . decima legione, d6 qua non dubitet, se proeHum commissOrum. 
 
 3. Nmitiaverunt.omnes navgs affllctSs esse quod nautae vim tem- 
 pestatis pati «on potuissent. 4. ReSponderunt impulsos a sufe 
 ^ principfeus, qui dicerenfc Aeduos ab Gaesare in s«irvitfltem redactoa « 
 
 ' ^esse 86 ab AeduIs.dSfecisse. 5. BenantiSverunt GaUos proe'litim 
 ^ diS non commissuros, quod ampflorgs copiSs, quae nori^um con- 
 
 JTT: ^^T'*^"-^"*- ^- ^^'^^^^^ Caesarem faciunt Venetoa 
 naves habere plQnma«,.quibua in Britanniam navigare soleant. 7. 
 Amm^ivertat Caesar Sequanos nihU eSrum rSrum facere quis 
 ceterl facerent. 8. Respondit miseriorem efc graviSr^ esse forta- ' 
 nam Sequanorum quam=» reliquorum quod soli querl non audSrent. 
 a Ex captivis cognovit omnes Gallos ad oK>idum quod circiter 
 ; miUia passuum quinque abesset confflgisse. \o. Per explfirfitorea 
 
 • tSdtoTle "^^*^ ''"'"^' '^^^ ^"^ '''^^''''* *"*"' ^*'^"*^ 
 
 "'"~i '^?.® informed Caesar that the Germans who dwell 
 across the Rhine are in arms. 2. The> think that they will 
 recover the hostages which they have given to Crassus. 3. He 
 _ 1?^«^^^«^ *»»»*> «»r nien were being thrown into great confusion, 
 because they were unable to keep their ranks. 4. On the same , 
 day Ceesar was infohned by scouts that the enemy had encamped 
 . at «le foot of a mountain, which was eight miles frgm his camp. 
 
 5. They promised to do what» he had commanded. 6. He was 
 informed that all the Belgians were conspiring, because they did 
 , not wish a Roman amy ttJ winter in Gaul. 7. He thought* that 
 ■ JJ'f;:;""if ""***« ^^«*'*h«y, were promising. 8. He had learned ' 
 that t|* Germans were awaiting the cavalry which had been sent 
 
 «. In tnwlrttng thUwatenoe wipply the word that. ^' 
 
 fc 6m hwt no f «, p^gr TOT 
 
 'i. See footnote 8, ptgt M. 
 
 ■*;: 
 
 
,■»■,=;-«, 
 
 ^ ■*■-■-. 
 
 ^J' I— INTBODUCTOHT lESSONa 
 
 aciyxss the Rhine fl tt,^ ;5-#-* • 
 
 had said this h^: iS^ t^^^-^ «^«t the leadjnf^ wli 
 
 should not be received From thoslwho f; "^' *^^"^^* «^-"^ 
 voluntarily made v.ar. ' '^^^''' /^^^r seeking peace, had 
 
 LESSON LXV. 
 
 'y 
 
 - It " " °°"^"""'' ""■' ™"> -- ^ ni.; ^.o# 
 
 its co^^rr.""""' '-«^''?i««» i» the inflection of ,.,, ^, 
 
 EXEBCISE iXv. ■ 
 
 one„. no,W .ubi^,™;^;-»,^'^^- propter eaq„«,fe«b.^ 
 H«---l. He was informaH fl.o* « , - 
 
 1 An»!.* #-~^Z "^" *'**^ on them 
 
 
 9 
 
 
 
C.: 
 
 98 
 
 PBIMABT LATIN BOOK. 
 
 or their aUies. 6. On this answer being brought back to Osesar, 
 he a second time sends ambassadors to him. 7. The report is 
 carried with, incredible speed to Labienus. 8. They found out 
 what he had said and reported (it) to Ctesar. 9. The ambassadors 
 denied that the Germans were making war on the allies of the 
 Roman people. 10. AU these differ f|^m on» another* in language 
 and laws, llj He explains how {literally, in what) these nations 
 differ from one another.^ 12. Galba is slain and his head brought 
 back to the camp. 13. He attacked them when the Helvetians 
 could not bring aid to their friends. ^- 14. Such was the strength 
 of the ships that they easily withstood the storm. 15. He 
 ordered the ba^age to be coUected to {literaUy, into) one place, 
 and that (place) to be foAified. 
 
 f 
 
 \t 
 
 > 
 
 jLESSON LXVI, \ 
 
 (a) Profeotns est at oppldum he set out that (or in order that) 
 oppuirnaret, he might attack the totm, or 
 
 he set otit to atta^ik the toum. 
 
 Port&s olaadl Jnbet, ni in- he orders the gates to be closed^ 
 
 Juria aooiplatnr; " that (or in order that) injury 
 
 ' # may not he received, or leU 
 
 It-' 
 
 injury be received. 
 
 ^ .Observation. — The mood used to express purpose. The differ- 
 ence between at and n£. The yarious translations. The tenses 
 
 used in sentences of purpose.^ 
 purpose. _ ^ 
 
 (6) Ldflr&tas mls^ipnt qal p&- 
 oem peterentt 
 
 The position of the clause of 
 
 they sent ambassadors to seek 
 peace (literally, who were to 
 seek peace, or who should 
 seek peace). 
 
 1,^ J'Vom on^ ano(A«r, literally, a»t<m^ (A«mM/«Mi - ,. 
 
 1 See footnote 2, i>Affe 04. 
 
 S. The preibent sublunbtive It used where English would use may, <.«., after th« 
 primary ten^ (see footnote 1, page 82), the lini)erfeot where Kngiish would use 
 might, <.«., ^ter the $eeondary tenses. Notice als« that in clauses of purpose the 
 Wbiunot i yo it not to b e franilat i urt, ■■ \ % ynnnrally th n nas ii , hy th s Wngliah indl o ativ i 
 
 (•M foolnot# S. pi^ 88X 
 
 :/-• 
 
* V 
 
 p.— iirmCM>UCTORY LESSONS, 
 
 / V ■■■■■•■■; '^ -;"V'-i-. ^Z- 
 
 ^ perturbarentur. dismayed. ^ 
 
 Petere^oep,t_nt li G^„ta he began to'ask to he left in CM 
 rellnqueretur, * »'» www. 
 
 „ EXERCISE LXVI. x / 
 
 » P„,. « r <'»«««'n vSnSrunt qui pScem netoren' 
 
 ». EquitSs monit ut qu,m Uti^ims pery».ent,.r in "r*""* 
 
 gem f«sm„,r„t oel^riter perrumpere ^Zl 12 K^^" 
 praemittit qui Baios His o.,a j ^ ppssimus. 12. NOntiSa 
 
 et ntsgno „„me« St^ in b •.^"™' ""■" ^»»'"» '««iSnibus 
 
 bmvely te wip, out the ^i^ ™'tha fliS^t 3 "^ r,"" """" 
 
 
 S» Sm tootoote 8, frngt i 
 
 •/. 
 
 ■ r- 
 
\ 
 
 
 100 
 
 PfilMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 might carry on the war in their own territories -7 TT. 
 to remain in his allegiance ' 8 ThTJ^ u n He urged him 
 
 C^or) to come to thfm 9 LI f T ^**' ^'''^'"^^^' -^^^^" 
 couialt be finishea^O. HeTea Te'irt TtlT ^'^ "^'' 
 that he might pursue the Helvetians 11 H« w . T "'"^'^ 
 
 the army across in order to ^un-h tie Oelr!:^'^'^^,^'^ 
 may not be 'compelled to spend the summer^n Ganl K i ? 
 W to come to him with two hundred hoXges ' """ '"^T 
 
 LESSON LXVIL 
 
 Turn to the conjugation of the verbs eo and fi« P.rf ttt 
 sections 46 and 46. .' ^*^ ^^* 
 
 *t' ■ ■■ • ■■•■ ""■; 
 . EXERCISE LXVII.. ; . 
 
 JP-1. TrftnseuntRhgnumnavibusiatibusaue S Fvr.iA^.^ . ^ 
 . Jflssit quid fieret cSgnoscere S TTa» «? «^^ , ^P^^^^tSrSs 
 
 ro^"^r..:iTALt;rr:^ r- rr rr ' 
 
 16. R<«5vit„umh«,t8s.p.ifldem S;:»:" rMm^^T"'- 
 
 tu. „t fortiter pogntont, ,„id 6«« ^u^ .LL^ w r" ^ 
 "BU decim» legiSne Ib«: ;, ■ »"■- «sreiioit. 18. Cum 
 
 /2. Notice that «o. while VBrv 1«.«™« /. <* * 
 
 / 
 
 :M 
 
 i'i 
 
iy^r 
 
 PABT I.~INTB0DUCT0^ LESS0J!JS. 101. 
 
 II.--1. He orders a sally to be made 2 Tho* • , 
 
 Helvetians were crossmc 3 W«^?i f^ That xiyer, the 
 
 tenth legion alonrT He ^d no. f*l'*^ "^ «^° ^ ^^^ 
 
 -o^upied, lest the OerlL^o^ ci:::^ i^ th"^ "?• *^ 
 territories. 6. Thev will n«f .11 .1 „ ""^ Helvetians' 
 
 their tenitories Tfa^orier^n ' "°'™"»°« 'o 8° «"«"gh 
 the e„e„, ,_ ^^i/^ ^. Z "he tril'^'" '^ "T» °» 
 with two legion .„d 11 the Tv'.W t^nr'w/'" ^T'T"* 
 .through whose territories tho* l,..r \ , "«^«"«d those 
 
 back. 8. HedecW^Zt!u^«°? *° ''"»8 'h/HelTCtians 
 
 done (UtenUly, to be dZe). U flt wf inf ""'I Tr^"" '^'"^ 
 had crossed the river had „„! 1. ""f,"^»™*! that those who 
 friends.. 12 ThrL^- '" '"* ^ ""^ "d *» their 
 
 13. That was b^^'^trrthaT^r""!:^ m^ '"'' "^™^- 
 mer they are surrounded bv our »va^rv 16 H <.r"^ ""' 
 this coulj be done. 16 aLuT^... ^" *'"'"«''* *"«" 
 
 orossed the Bhine 17 tC ""'"'*"'* •^™»°« have 
 
 18. He is infom,^ that the Ge™ ""' T"" ""' "^ '""^ "™'- 
 h^v^been invited bX^^T^""' »" "^^ ^ ««-d 
 
 ..%."■ 
 
 LESSON LXVIIL ^ • 
 
 
 N 
 
.> 
 
 J 
 
 . 102 
 
 I'- 
 
 PHIMAKY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 the gerundive m its forms ? NT; 
 
 EXERCISE LXVIIh . ' -^ 
 
 I.-1. ReliqutonfivgsparatasadnftvigahdiiminvSnit. 2. Omni 
 spS impetrandl ade«ipta, prlncipfis GaUiae soUicitfire coepit. 3 
 CSgnoverat equitefcum praedandP causa trfins Rhgnum missum 
 esse. 4. Caesar^^oquendi^ finem facit. 5. Ulciscendl^^ RSmanos 
 oo^ionem dlmit^re nolebant. 6. Hunc ad egrediendum^ nequl 
 quam idoneum locum arbitratur. 7. Cum finem oppflgnandi 
 ,.nox fscisset, IggfitI d6 pace ad eu^ v6n6runt. 8. Ea X ad 
 oppOgnandum flsul erant, comparSrS coepit. 9. Equitgs frOmen- 
 tandx ^usa praemittendl erant. 10. Nostrl, dgpositis armls,.in 
 mtimendS occupati sunt. ., . "»,»«* 
 
 JHZ^' '^*^/'^?^^ ^^" "^^"^«'« «d^ancing into unfavorable 
 ground m order to fight. 2. This was the reason for (literally, of) 
 
 rr' T%r^Z- '• ^' '*^ ««^ suitable weather for sJSi^ 
 4 Tmie f or (^. Wiy, of) hurling their javelins at the enemy is not 
 
 Sr; A "" "^"^ r^ '^^' ^^' "^^^ ^*^ ^'^^^ *he river, 
 they left the camp in order to piUage. 6. They had made our men 
 
 more eager for fighting. 7. Suddenly making a sally, they leave 
 the enemy no opportunity of learning what was being done. 8. 
 .w7 ^ ^^^^]^rge forces for an atteck (literally, for aita^lc 
 tng). 9. They made an end of pursuing. JO. They made an 
 attack so suddenly, that time for (literaUy, of) taking up arms ^ 
 was not given. •'/ •© r ~"«» ^ 
 
 '^ 
 
 LESSON LXIX. 
 
 Prae«ldium pontl. tuendl cau- he station, a garrison for the jtmr- 
 
 •4 ponlt, 
 
 pose of protecting the bridge, 
 or to protect the bridge (liter- 
 ally, for the sake of tb« 
 bridge totje defended). 
 
 ^ ^«>y u,e, ad and the gerund to txy^ ^ ryi^ te^th«r than 
 
 MM. 
 
 Ife- 
 
 8. For the «MTUod of deponent verbe. lee Part m.. aeotion 06. e. ^ 
 
 ^- 
 
 
PART, I.—INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 
 
 103 
 
 IMlBoaltas faolendl pontls. 
 
 th£ diffktdty of building a bridge 
 , (literally, of, or-ais regards,» 
 
 I ^ the bridge which is €6 be 
 
 built> 
 Legator mlserunt ad paeem th^y sent dmbasaddors to seek peace 
 patendton,; ^ ^ _ (literdly, for the peace which 
 
 ' ^ . was to be sought). 
 
 II» petendft pace Kaeo dl- in asking peace, they spoke thu8, 
 xernnt, 
 
 \':: ' "..:±:-..[ ' . '• ./■/;:.:,:'::;:■_.:.;.■::,:-,.■. i/. _:::.. . .V. 
 
 Ob«ervation.-The use of the gerundive msteaH of the gerund 
 with an object.» How may purpose be expressed by the gerundive 
 construction? How is this gerundive construction to be distin- 
 guished from the usg^f the gerundive given in Le^n XL. ? 
 
 EXERCISE LXirf 
 
 Jh~~7 i" ^ ^^^^' ISgatos.ad eum pficis ^tendae cauaft 
 nnttunt^ 2 my^s Ifttiorgs facit ad multitfldiner jOmenterum 
 t^portandam. S. In agrls vastandis occupftti sunt. 4 Cae^ 
 
 m5b^6ssunt 6 Sp6 expflgnandi oppidi adductus, mfij5r«s c5piite 
 c<«ere coepit. 7. Rediti5nis sps sublfttt,» parfitierSs ad om^ 
 subeunda erilnt 8. Haec faciunt reciper^d^ suarum, ZT 
 mm ^^"^r'T *^ ««"^°i**«d^ AeduSs profectum esse. 
 
 fi ?^7^' "^t "f. •f""*"^ f"" •" «ides to defend thelUmi. 
 
 TumW „?T^ .' T""^- *• '^'>' P"""^ « sufficiently 1«™ 
 t-»»» for the punK>ae of lending «id. . 8. He «nds . lieu tenant in 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
104> 
 
 PRIitARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 ^r ■•• ■ ■ ■■ . • , . 
 
 advance to ascertain these (things). 9. He answered that the 
 seventh legion had been sent to seek supplies. 10. Caasar runs 
 down to encourage the soldiers. -^ 
 
 X- 
 
 •mr 
 
 ^ . LESSON LXX: 
 
 Pontemresclndljusgitngquls he ordered the bridged be (ytU 
 Human tranrtrut, down, lest wny one should 
 
 - — <^o»» the river, or thai no one 
 
 might cross the river. 
 AUquos ex n&vl egredtent6s they saw seme leaving the skip. 
 oonspexernnt, 
 
 Qulsque 1« o6n«peotu Caesfcls each was Jighting in Coesar's sight. 
 pugrnabat, 
 
 CompreHendunt utrumque, they seize each (ot both). 
 
 Neque.turpluaquloquamhabe- nor is anything considered more 
 
 '*"'* disgraceful. 
 
 QuWam oentuHo ad e^m ac- a certain cefituTUHi mis vp to 
 
 *"•"•"• him. * 
 
 Ob-rTatIon.-U8e and translation of qui., allqul^ qulgque. 
 uterque. quLquam, quidam. For the declension of these pro- 
 nouns see Part IH., section 26. Which of the two words for any 
 ^ used after ne ? Which of. the two word« fpr each implies e2 
 
 ■'; -.:■:':■:-'-::■'■-' EXERCISE htx. "" .. V 
 
 I.-1. PrtocipSs cQjusque civitfttis ad sS vocat. 2. ProximS diS 
 Caesar ex castrls utrisque copifis dOxit. 3. AUquem d6 mottl • 
 GaUSrum ntotium sS acceptOrSs existimftbant. 4. IdSneum quen- 
 dwn hominem dSlSgit ex ils qu6s sgcum habSbat. S6. Cum R5- 
 mtols SS beUum gesttlros dixSrunt, neque cajusquam» imperiS 
 obtemperattlros. 6. MlHtSs ex oppidS exire jtlssit nS quam^in- 
 jdnam acciperent. 7. Ab Ariovisto postulftvit nS quSs RhSnum 
 
 «Jtog^^lKffi^ 'te'i^v^jyggA T^?!LTL!°gig?°^ 
 
^^»T L— INTRODUCTORY LESSONa 105 
 
 nave™, xo. sn.ptibtr:„Mtair Lrr:^'"^- 
 
 capere posset. *' ^ ^^"^ »"»* 
 
 2 nrnl^f ^"^ f ^'**'^^^^' '^ «/) these came to him by nkht 
 ^. Me orders each to return q T»,o« k i , ^ "ignt. 
 
 (.« ad) e«h b«Jc of Cri^r f fc' 't^*',,'"? '"^ »» 
 
 1. Translate ad by /or. 
 
 a See footnote 1, page 104. 
 
 r 
 
 7 
 
 
 V 
 
 
106 
 
 PRikARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES. 
 
 •' (J%ts exercise niay be introduced after Lesson XXIII.) 
 
 Ad initium dilv&rum Caesar pervSnit, et castra munire instituit. 
 Bdm&nl in opere dispersi suntr Subito ex omnibus partibus 
 silvae hostSs SvoUlvSrunt et in militSs impetum f§c6runt. Romani 
 celeriter anna cgpSrunt hostSsque in silvas repulSruntet multos 
 interfecgrunt. OmnSs hostium agri S, Romanis vastati sunt, 
 ylclque incSnsI. Caesar exercitum redOxit et in finitimis civita- 
 tibus in hibernls coUocavit. ^^ 
 
 -^Adapted from CcBsdr, B. Q., 111^28, 29^.) 
 
 (This exercise may he introduced after Lesmi XXXII.) 
 
 Britanniae interior pars ab ils^ incolitur, qui^ nftti' sunt in 
 Insula, maritima pars ab iis, qui praedae causa ex BelgiS trans- 
 iSrunt* et ibi permansSrunt atque agros colere coeperunt. Homi- 
 num est Infinlta multittldo, creberrimaque^ aedificja. Loca** sunt 
 temperatidra quam' in Gallia. Insula natOra* est triquetra, cujus» 
 Unum latus est contra Galliam. Ex his^" omnibus longg sunt 
 hOmamssiml qui" Cantmm incolunt. InteriSrSs frttmenta non 
 serunt, sed lacte^^ et "^me vivunt, pellibusque sunt vestl^i.^ 
 Omngs sS" BritannI vitr6 inficiunt, quod^^ caeruleum efficit colo- 
 rem,j«tque hSc** horridiorgs sunt in pugna. Una" ex parte est 
 Hibemia, minor quam^ Britannia, et complurgs ramorgs subjectae* 
 sunt Insulae. Breviorgs sunt quam^ in continent! noctgs. 
 
 — {Adapted from Gasar, E.G., v., 12-14.) 
 
 1. '='Thfm. 2. =Who. 8. Natt gutU = have been bom. 4. From transeo. 6. 
 BupplyHhereare. 6. ^The ^hmate, literally, the regiona. 7. =,Than. 8. ''^Tn 
 «*«*?• »:. = Ofj^hieh. 10. = Theee. 11. = Those who. 12. Translate ablative b 
 Y, b i fmeaiu _sf. 13. , = Clothed. U. ^Themativea. is. rnr Which. 
 
 1 
 
1 
 
 PART L— INTRODUCfrOBY LBSSONS. 
 
 i'> 
 
 107 
 
 i 
 
 r 
 
 s.d.mn «x. oohortium imp^taentls<> reSnquit «to^TaTw^S 
 
 
 IV., 
 
 V. \ 
 
 1 
 
 . {Thi, exercm may U intjodwed <ffl«-J^emn Xiri^ ' 
 
 p^^." ™"^ 'ai^S" .^r.-'ex'^rirt" .K 
 
 C«.8.«ml5g4tasd8pSce„S5rupt. ^ '^PSnmt, stotun ad 
 
 /^ 
 
 
 <j' 
 
 m 
 
■■f 
 
 ^ 
 
 V 
 
 "3 
 
 raiMAR? LATIN BOOK. 
 
 "V. . .. 
 
 (Thi9 exereise rmij be introduced after Lesson LIIL) ' 
 
 Wmihrn gestis, Labi5n6 in cottfinentl cum tribus legionibus 
 efc equitum iniUibus duobus reUcto, ipse cum quinque legionibus 
 ^t eodem.numerS equitum,. quern in continent! rellquerat, solis 
 occasu hftygs solvit. OmnSs naves ad Britanniam acc6ss6runt 
 circiter meridiem, neque in eo loco hostis est visus, ^ ut^ posteS 
 Caesar ex captlvis cognovit, magnae copiae, quae convgnerant, ' 
 multitadme navium perterrit^e & b'tore discSsserant ac se in» I 
 supenora loca abdiderant. Caesar, exposito exercitii et loc6 cas- : 
 tris» idSneo capto, cohortibus decern ad* mare relictiset equitibus 
 trecentis, tertia vigilia ad hostSs contendit. MiUia passuum cir- 
 «Iter duodecim progressus, liostium c6pias conspicStus est: 
 
 , —(Ada0edfr(ymC(E9ar,B.G.,r.l8,9.) 
 
 M 
 ■w 
 
 C'V 
 
 VJ- 
 
 (This exercise rmyhe introdu^ after Lisson LVII.) 
 
 Caesar AvariciS complutSs di€s commoratus, summamque ibi 
 «opiam frumenti et reUqui com'meg,tus^ nahctus, exercitum ex« 
 labore atque inopia reficit. Jam prope hieme confectft, legfitl ad> 
 «um i^orum yeniunt, qui, haec locflti sunt: dutf magisStum 
 gerer6,-et utrumque^ eflrum se ISgibus " crefitum essje; dicere; 
 horum esse alterum Convictolitavem, ilorentem et illi 
 lescentum, altj^rum Cotum, antiquiftha familia natj 
 ip^um hominem^summae potenti* et magnae c6gnatiG-»-^^x,.«^ 
 tem esse on^nem in armis; divlsum» senatum, dMsum populum. 
 ^»^8ar, e^^a *eU6 discgdere dgtrimentosum esse existimabat, 
 tamen ip^l^ .4edu6s proficisci statuit, senatumque omnem ad 
 ■sg gvbcav^!^ Pfc&.^ ^ '^^^ .. % 
 
 iptedfr&m Ccesar, B. G.^y'IL, SS, S3.) 
 
 cum. 6. = _,-. 
 not mean andy: 
 4itn(nnn taae. 
 
 ^Translate dffjve ^ for. 4. =By or at. 5. =^At Avari- 
 a ^v-^^^2/u*^u ^ ,.7=,^»«* (?«e ia part of the woid, and does 
 8. Ntttu» with the ablative = &orn c/Tdtiemded fiwk 9.U» 
 
PART I.— yfTRODUCTORY tESSONa ^ IQ^ 
 
 ; i^ # (This exercise may he introduced aftir Lesson LXII.\ 
 feStot "J^^ T*^ posset quanta '^^ 
 
 ,>t^,aestaco;pZ^^^ "' nannollae na.^, ancorls 
 
 - - • . -{Adapted froin CceSar] B.Q., IV., 20-29.) 
 
 ■>, 
 
 ■I „ 
 
 BUIs,-ptignandI« temVus du^tteret ' "^ ^'^'^'^^ • 
 
 -{Adapted from Ossar, K^G., 11.^ 21.) ^ 
 
 1. 
 
 
 II- -By. 12. From eonsisto. 13. = Bis cotnZ!u^^' with «^na. 10. = Each. 
 
/i«. 
 
 IW 
 
 'fk 
 
 
 BOOK. 
 
 ^|EW EXERGISES ON THE 
 
 ■^ ..rW- "■■•■• -ACCIDENCE.^ 
 
 I. Deditie th^ foUowin^ combinations of a nov>n with an adjective iti 
 
 ^ ' Duplex fossa, commflne consilium, reliqua cohors, alia rSs, regia 
 finitima, omnis pars, longius iter, incrSdibilis virtfls (a.)," m&jor 
 pai^, manus dextra, tSta aciSs («j.), omnis annus, Belgae soli (p.),' 
 ihjOria vetus, Olla nftvis, pflgna superior, nftvis longa, exercitus 
 Hosier, vir fortis, r6s famili&ris, idoneus locus, omnis copia^ vfira 
 pars, ager ferax, locus superior, reliqui Belgae (p.), aciSs tpplex 
 («.), vetus n&vis, tote prSvincia, omne genus, proelium equestre, 
 continSns impetus, primus 6rd6, complOrSs anni (p.), caput s5lum, 
 homS nSbilis, omnia arma (p.), nullus ager, omnis eqvdtfttus (a.), 
 tlnum proelium, castra m&j^ra (p.), nOllus commOnis magistratus, 
 primum agmen, altera pars, equit&tus noster (s.), omnis 6rd6, silva 
 
 ' continSns, proxima nox, par bellum, t6te «Ivitfts, castra n&vftlia 
 ^(p.), latus apertum, omne tempus, altius vallum, r5s opportOna, 
 
 Awmmtlne ^jlculum, silva dSnsior, alia pars, hnmilior nAvis, 
 eqUes ROmanus, reliqua legio, tlnum latus, ntlllus hostis, legiS- 
 n&rius miles, signum mllitftre, communis salOs («.), locus dSolIvis, 
 commflne perlculum, m&jor c5pia, aliud tempus, pedestre iter, 
 ingSns mfignitado («.), continul complOrSs diSs (p.), m&gnum iter, 
 
 '' oninis sp6s («..), tlllus di6s, c5piae pedestrSs (p.), superior diCs, 
 
 • fillies integer ac rec6ns, summa spSs (a.). ' 
 
 II. Give the other degrees of comparison of the fMotoing adjectives^ 
 in the same case, gender and number as the form given : 
 
 Facillimd, ftcrem, altiasiniae, breviOrom, mAjOribus, optimftriini, 
 
 - 1. ThcM «eipiMS »re intended to be suggestive merely, for whloh reason the 
 
 examples given to llluntrate many of the ri^iost valuable Itlnds of drill are few in 
 number, the teacher l>eing left to add, as he easily oan, further examples 'of the 
 same nature. 4 
 
 2. The letter» rrt and («\mm^l,^ th>t fh« »nml^t.TT* rtmUt It trfT ttt fllPtiltirl In t»W 
 
 ttoffuiiur or pluna only, as th« cm* may be. . ■ , ■>■ ~^ ^^ 
 
PART L—INTRODUCTORY LESSOKS. 
 
 \ 
 
 m 
 
 y 
 
 fortis, crSbrb, vfeteris, multos, ditissimi, humUiorl, prima, difficilia 
 dSnsissima, superiore, gravium, proximuni, celemmas, magni»* 
 ferocissimam, potent§s, plSno, antlquam, parvum. * 
 
 ni. Chan^ the follmoing adjectives to agree with the mmm in 
 
 parentheses : ., 
 
 Omnis (rSrum), complOrSs (annorum), paucus (disbus), mSgnus 
 (copias), . plQs (loca), ingSns (magnitQdine), omnis (nobiUtfttis) 
 (faims (annos), novus (rSrum), mSgnus (aucWritftfcis), plorimus 
 vetusque (nSves), noster (mari), reliquua (ordinSs), mftximua (ihul- 
 titflOml), finitimus (partem), inlquior (locum), dexj^r (comtl) 
 alter (castra), summus (duce), omnis (hlbernis), singulfiria (atudifi)! 
 
 TV. Cfive^iJte Latin numerals for the following numbers, in agree- 
 m^nt with the nouns in parentheses:^ 
 
 * 
 
 ^3 (horfts), 200 (obsidibus), 2 (legiSnibus), 3rd (di6), 3 (diSrum) 
 20 (vltf«), 1000 (equitSs), 1000 (equitibus), 1500 (Belgfts), 1 (ryJl 
 lo). 1 (Qphorfcis). 10th GegiSnem), 10 (legiSnum), Ist (acie^ 12" 
 ann6s),.lst (mipet^,.4th (nocte), 3 (miUia), 2 (millibus), W 
 (Iegi6), 4th (diem), 1892nd (anno). 
 
 V. Decline the foUmving ambitKitions of a prommn and nmm in 
 
 agreement: 
 
 Nostra ^tra, utrumque latus, ilia pars, Kbc p^Uum, u^ue 
 castra, quidam miles, hic locus, is coUis, hoc ipsum fldmen, 3 
 que tempus {s.\ idem iUud consilium, qui dies, qu» legiO meus 
 films, haec clvitfts, eadem rSs. •• , ,4«» *«gio, meus 
 
 VI. Write thm forms of hic, is, 4Uu8, iUe, qui. Idem, ti^ibA wiU 
 
 <»Stree with the foUounng w<yrds : , 
 
 an^S '''''^""' ^"^' ^^""^' '^"^' "^^^^"™' eohortl^'diSbus, 
 
 VII. ^^ the <dher degrees of c<nn}>cmson of the fM^ 
 
 j nd too, oao pi iwim^ i, mul tum, minus, mfaime, fortiter, iorfi». 
 . nwhus. mWOr^ ||oi^ Ilberrims, diQ^ «r. »<««i, 
 
112 
 
 ■Nw 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 K: 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 r-:^: 
 
 VIII. Clrcumvenio, surround; colloco, station; do, give; inter- 
 &ii6,Ml; jubeo, arder; imtto,^ send ; accipio, receue; re- 
 linquS, leave; venio, come; video, see. ^ • 
 
 ' Conor, attempt ; experior, try ; poUiceor, promise; proficiscor, 
 ' set out; progredior, advance. 
 
 Write out the principal parts of these verbs. -, **- 
 
 Under each of the pMixipal parts (a) of mitto, (6) of conor, 
 
 wri^e out the names of the moods and tenses which are formed 
 
 from it. 
 
 3. Name and mrUe out in ftM the tenses qf:Vie indicative who, e 
 
 first person singular means : 
 I shaU send, I have given, I am coming, I had left, I shall 
 order, I receive, I was coming, I sbaU have seen, I station,. 
 , ' •■ I saw. , ■ :■ ■.* ■ " 4^-^: ,. 
 
 I was ordered, I shall be sent, I have been left, I used to be^'^^ 
 
 sent, I am ordered, J had been ordered. 
 I had promised, I shaU attempt, I advance, I advanced, I 
 
 shall set out, I have tried. * . , ' 
 
 4. TroAndate the following forms : 
 Circumvent! erant, interficit, accipistur, vSnertlmus, dabunt, 
 
 mittens, vidSris, collocantur, jOssae estis, relinquar. 
 PollicSbantur, prSgredimur, cSnfitus est, experigmini, pro. 
 ficiscitur. ^* 
 
 5. Tramdate the following forms : 
 Wo shaU leave, they will station, he had sent, they come, 
 
 they were kiUed, you shaU have seen, we were giving, it 
 has been received, you are being surrounded, I shall order. 
 We shaU attempt, he tried, she had promised, I was setting 
 oi|t, they advance. 
 
 a. Translate the following : 
 
 Cum vidisset, n6 interficerSmur, cum coUocftrent, ut venfret, 
 
 nS accipifttur, quod rellquerit", quia interfectus esset, cum 
 
 jubeat, nS detur. *^ 
 
 ^ Cum proficiscerStur, n6 cOnantur, quod pcllicitus sis, ut ©x- 
 
 periftmur, cum progress! essent. 
 ?■• Wriiijmt (ft) the thir d aingnlar impaifi i x^l siiljum.live fmwiw, 
 
 # 
 
|A»T I.— INTRODUCTORY LESSONS, 
 
 im 
 
 native whose 
 
 h 
 
 perfect s^junctive active and passive, of mitto, circumveniij. d(J 
 video arul interficio ; and (b) ths iMrd singrdar present and ph^. 
 feet s^d>juncttve and the third plural imperfect mbjunctim of%oZv 
 expenor, poUiceor, proficiscor and progredior. - " * 
 
 8. Write out and mime all th^ infinUives, active amd pamve, oJi 
 relinquo, accipio, coUojjo, video, circumvenio. 
 
 9. Translate: \ '"v:- : " . -:■ -■■;*,;■■-.-,.-;; -:■ V 
 (Dicit eos) mittere, reliquiae, interf ectos esse, coUocfirl, ve J 
 
 turos esse, profecttiros esse, progredl, conafcos'esse. 7 
 
 - (Dmt eos) venire, dedisse, cireumventos esse, mitti, acce^ 
 turos esse, conaturos esse, cSnSn, poUicitos esse. - 
 (JOssus est) venire, interfici, proficiscl. 
 10 Write oi^t and nams all the participles, aci^ and pa^ve, of 
 jubeS, interficio, coUoco, mitto, circumvenio, c6nor, progred or! 
 expenor, polhceor, proficiscor. 
 
 11. Wnte out th^ participles meanimj while coming, after ad- 
 rnf f fr ^'^^ «""o^nded, wWle attempting, in a^eement 
 with thefollotmng words: militibus, Caesar^m. legione, legionis 
 equitum, exercitul. . » *«, 
 
 12. Write out the genUive of the gencnd of do, venio, prSgredior, 
 Video and relmquo ; and all cases of the gerxmd o/ proficiscor 
 
 "^^' Write md the following parts : 
 
 ^irdHng^dar pluperfect mbjunctive active of do, mim. 
 Second plural present subjunctive active of venio, coUocd ' 
 Third plural imperfect indicative passive of interficio re- 
 linquo. ^- ; 
 
 ^irst pluraj future indicative active of d[6, venid, yid^ 
 
 ^^^MtinfinUive active of vide(i,yem6,.inter&cik 
 Present infinitive passive of accipio, do, mittO. 
 
 :Future paHiciple active feminine plural accuaative of rideS m 
 relinqufl. • ^ * I 
 
 ^«rundive ablative singular neuter of acoipia, da, juhe6, ' ^- 
 14. Name fxdly the following forms : #^ 
 
 . ViderSmur, accipifitis, rellquit, interficiendOs, cOnfttI sunt» 
 Pg>fifilHc T . progTftRHT, intorfficl , jubua lum, duU «weut. det . 
 
 8 
 
 videris. 
 
^♦v 
 
 •/ 
 
 PMMABir LATIN BOOK. \ 
 
 'W^e f^ eorf^iaponding active or passive form (as the cas$ 
 '-, vnay he) of hhe following : , ' .,. ■ ■ i 
 
 ' Jilterfgcit, relinqu^m, reliquisset, datum est, videtur, diccipi- 
 / Siis, accipere, daijuiu esse/ ,^^ 
 
 I64 Write the corre^Hmding form in, thi indicative or stibjunctive 
 (as the case may be) of- the folloioing : ' 
 
 Dabat) misisset, vSnerunt, circumveniatur, relict! essent, 
 jtisseram, jubied, interficitur. 
 
 17. Translate: He promises to come, he was ordered to come, 
 he was asked to come, so terrified as to come, it is difficult to 
 dome, he did this in order to come ; they said that he had come, 
 so important that he had conie, he did this that he might come ; 
 they attack the soldiers who are coming, he learns who are coming, 
 they attack those who are coming, he learns that they are attackr 
 ing the soldiers who are coming. , v 
 
 IX.— 1. Write out^ the principal parts of sum, possum, feto, e6, 
 vole, ?i5l6, mS.16, fio. , * 
 
 2. WrijffMit in ftdl the present indicative and stibjunctive of thes$ 
 
 verbs. \ ^ 
 
 3. Write out the following parts : / / 
 Fifrst singular imperfect and future indicative of sum, possutn, 
 
 e5. . , 
 
 , Third singidar imperfect sijK>3unctive of sum, possum, fero^^S, 
 vols, fio. , 
 
 Present participle^ nominative and genitive singular j o/ pos- 
 sum, absum, e5> • I ' ; / 
 Present invperaJiive of ferOf ^6, nolo. , / ' 
 Oenitive of genind of ieffio, &5. /^^ 
 
 Write out the principal par^s of the compounds of f er6 with in, 
 , ex, ab, «d, dis, sub, con,} ob ; of eo tvith pr5 dnd re ; and 
 of BVLta u)ith &h and pro. \ I* 
 
 ,- — T- f ^ - V" 
 
 m 
 
 ■-■i 
 
 
 \ r 
 
 
 t V 
 
,\ 
 
 PART II. — PREPARAtORYREADINd. 
 
 116 
 
 ■'¥ 
 
 ' ' f 
 
 PREPARATORY LESSONS IN CONTINUOUS " 
 . / READING. 
 
 ^ ^ ^^ "" — li A Bry^e GeneraTs Death; ^"^ ^ _-_-_^-:_._--- 
 
 Dux quidam, proelio cutfi GaUls commisso, gravissimo vulnere 
 afflictus erat, et hurni moribqndus jacebat. Subito anus 6x ils qui 
 circumstabant mllitibtjs clamavitl "Ecce fugiunt." «'Qui fugi- 
 unt ?" rogat dux. '*GaMi," respondet miles. Turn dux, '^Jam 
 moriar/'inquit, " fgllx." /Quae cum dixisset, i^tatim exanimatus est. 5 
 
 Notes.-!, proelio oomUisso i abl. absolute ; render in English by the active 
 •voice- 2. ex its. " pf th||.j^ith militibus; ex is often used for the partitive gen 
 esi^ecially after numerals. ^/Quae ito indicate more clearly the connection with 
 the precedmg«word8, Latin cjinstantly uses qui for Ate or is, and places it before even 
 a conjunction ; so here quaejm used for haee " this " ; literally, "which things." • 
 
 8. /a Lesson from a Cockfight * > ; 
 
 Bello Persico, ouih Themistocles magno cum exercka iter in 
 hostgs faceret, duos/gallos vidit in via dimicantes. Turn militgs ad 
 spectaculum convodSVit, et banc orationem habuit : «' Hi galli n6n 
 pt5 patria dimicanl non pro dis, n6n pro glSria, n6n pro llbertate, 
 non pro llberis ; de^nulla re dimicant nisi dS victoria." Hac oril- 6 
 tiSne animos militum excitaVit, nee hostes eorum impetum sua- 
 tingre poterant. 
 
 «) ^'7^' ^®'*** persico I in which the Greeks were repelling a Pereian invasion 
 - flrallout this, nbtice, is not GaUbs. 2. dlnilcante» i present participle, agree- 
 ing wiOi gcUlos. l^ate " fighting," .n6t "while flghtlng." 3. hano. . . .habuit i 
 
 TJ^^iu'"^^!^ ^**'" " '''"°^'" '••"<»"'• ""°'" *• «"■! from deus (see 
 Part IH., secUo^^). 6. liberls i from liberi. 
 
 iIS'...^.: S. The NemQan Lion. ' - __ -;^. :^. .!___: 
 
 (The JFirtt of the Twelve Labors of Heteules.y. » 
 In valle Jffemeae leS ingSns vlv5bat, etpecora hominSpque cotldiS 
 iterncifib^ --_j:w!ysfelieu8y-r6x Tirynthisriferoutem ad IS^ advoT 
 cavit, elq^e dixit : «' JubeS tS huno leonem quam celerrimS inter* 
 
 V^'-.-,':' 
 
 .>- ■'■' 
 
/••■ t 
 
 116 
 
 "PRIMARY latin" BOOK. 
 
 / 
 
 ficere." S^tim proficiscitur Jlercules. Clava sagittlsque frtistrS, 
 iisus, tandem impetu facto manibus interfecit. Turn ad Euty- 
 sthe.um reversus'est, mortuum leonera umerls impositum ferens.' 
 
 N.— 1. vivebat, Interflolebat t render the imperfect here by "used to." 5. 
 nsnis i perfect participle of utor ;. translate, "when he had used." 6. uinerls 
 imposltoint umeria is dative; literally, "placed-on with-reference-to-the-shoul-; 
 ders"; translate simply, "on his shoulders," omitting "placed." 
 
 4. The Happiest Man. 
 
 iia. 
 
 V 
 
 Olim Croesus SoloneAi, virum sapientissimum, percontatus est : 
 
 «t Quern jildicas omaitjip hominum beatissimum V\ Solon respondit ; 
 
 "Meo quidem judiciS, beatissimus fuit Tellus Atheniensis. Nam 
 florente civitate filios habuerat, bonos viros honestosque, eosque 
 omnes superstites ; idemque vltae finem habuit pra^larissimum ; 
 nam'in pugnfi, pro patria fortissimo ptignans, repulsis nostibus, in- 
 terfectus est ; turn Athenienses eum publice sepeliverunt^^t magno 
 y in honore semper habebant. " ' 
 
 N.— 1. Croesus t king of Lydia in Asia Minor, and proverbial for his great riches. 
 1. Solonem t Solon was one of the " seven wis9 men 'i of Greece, who in his exten- 
 sive travels once came to Croesus' court. 3. quidem i best rendered by emphasid on 
 the wdrd "my." 4. florente civitate : abl. absolute; "while his country was 
 prosperous." ' ,4. eosque « English idiom would omit "those " ; eos refers to the 
 ^ same persons as yi2tog and viros. 5, Idem i render, "he also"; literally, " he the 
 same man." 8. habebant t " held." ^ 
 
 ' * ■ • • » 
 
 6. The Death of Epaminondait 
 
 Epamlnondas non solum inter Thebanos, sed etiam inter omn§8 
 / , Graecos ejus tempoTis praeclarissimus fuit, et fortiter pro patria 
 •^^ . animam deppsuit. Nam cufti oppidum Mantineam oppflgnaret, 
 
 hostes in eum impetu facto graviter vulneraverunt. Ppstea cuni 
 in castra reportatus esset, et moribundum se esse sensiss^t, rog^vit 5 
 ■ . num sciltum salvum esset. Amid cum salvum esse respondissent, 
 
 ad seafferri jussit. Tum rogftvit num victi essent hostes. Accepto 
 response superatos esse pmnes et in fugam con jectos, "Jam satis 
 ' est,*' inquit, "invictus enim:morior." Turn extrahl telum S vul- 
 nere jussit atque statim mortuus @st. m ^ 10 
 
 . -i - - - • • ■ , 
 
 '' - ' N.— 2. te^porlst "age" or "period"; it was in 362 B.O.' that he ffell. S: 
 
 Mantineam t" in apposition with oppidtnn : English idiom is "the town ,q/' Man- 
 tinea." <}. Amlel i Bubjrot of rcsponfUssent ; translate after cum. 6. esse, 
 affe Jgi * widarrtaad td, that ia, leutum. 8. ontmi is n a vor thp'flwt wokL in 
 
 ita clMlie, tt ia the English " for.' 
 
PART II.— *PREPARATORY READING. 
 
 m 
 
 6. 086881*8 Oallio Wan. 
 
 Jalius Caesar cum Lucio Bibulo consul factus est. ProximS 
 anno dScreta est ei Gallia cum legionibus decern. Is piimum vicit 
 Helvetios, deindeperbellagravissima QsqueadOceiinum processit. 
 Domuit amiis novem omnem Galliam, quae inter Alpes, flflmen- 
 Rhodamim, Rhenum et Oceanum est. Britannis mox bellum S 
 intulit, qui ante eum ne nomen quideln Romanorum cognoverant ; 
 et eos quoque, obsidibus acceptis, stlpendiarios fecit. Atque Ger- 
 manos trans Rhenum aggressus multis proelils vicit. 
 
 N.— 2. deoreta est i the governors of the Roman provinces were appointed by . 
 the Senate; the usual expression for this is provincia decretaest. 3. per» "by." 
 4. annis novem t 68 to 50 B.C. 6. est t "lies." 6. ne qnldemt note tha 
 position. 
 
 7. The Rival Painters. ;* 
 
 Zeuxis et Parrhasius pictores fuerunt nobilissimi. Hi quondam 
 inter se de arte contendebant. Zeuxis uvas pinxit ita callidS ut 
 aves ad tabulam advolarent, uvas comedere cupientes. Turn Par- 
 rhasius linteum pinxit. Hoc cum Zeuxis vidisset, existimans 
 verum esse linteum, quo tabula occultaretur, dixit : ** Remove 6 
 linteum, et ostende picturam." Mox cognito errore, victoriam 
 dedit Parrhasio, dixitque : " Victus sum ; nam ego aves fefelli, td 
 autem ipsum Zeuxim. " ^ 
 
 'N.— 2. Inter se i "with one another." 2. avast English idiom would add 
 "some." 5. esse, occultaretur i in Zeuxis' own thoughts these would bee«« and 
 occultatur. 7. tu — Zeuxlm : understand /^6Ki«rt. 
 
 8. Not at Home. 
 
 ' Scipio Nasica olim ad poetam Ennium venit. Sed cum eum ab 
 6stio quaesivisset, ancilla dixit eum donii non esse. Sensit autem 
 Scipio illam domini jiissu dixisse et ilium intus esse. Paucis post 
 diebus ad Nasicam venit Ennius et eum a janup, quaeslvit. Excla- 
 mat ipse Nasica se doml non esse. Tum Ennius, ♦' Quid ?" inquit, 
 "ego non cognosco vocem tuam?" Responditj autem NSsica :. 
 •'Homo es impudgns. Ego, cum te quaerereAi, ancillae tuae 
 crgdidi te domi non esse; t^ mihi non credis ipsi?" 
 
 N.— 1. eum.... quaes! vlsaett "asked fof him at the door"; so In line 4. 
 8. panels post dlebnsi literally, "afterwards (or later) by a few days." 7, 
 
 ^^a<b i crM6~govern» the dative instead of the aocuaatiTe. ?. Ipsl: dati^^ 
 emphasizing miJii. 
 
 r 
 
 / 
 
1X8 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 »r, ■ ■ 
 
 r 
 
 1 1 
 
 \ 
 
 9. How Torquatus Beoeiyed his Name. 
 Galll conti^ Romanos ptignabant. Interim Gallus quidam, 
 torque decoratu8, qui et viribus et magnitadine ceteros praestkbat, 
 processit et voce magna fortissimum Romanorum ad pugnam pro- 
 vocavit. Nemo audebat prodlre, propter ejus magnitadinem. 
 Deinde Gallus irridere coepit Romanos. Turn indlgnatus Titus 5 
 : Manlius, nobilissimus juvenis, processit et contra Galium constitit. 
 : Diuet acriter, utroque exercitu inspectante, pugnaverunt. Tan- 
 dem Manlius Galium occidit, torquemque detraxit eamque in col- 
 ^ lum suura imposuit. Itaque ipse posterique ejus Torquati sunt 
 appellati. 10 
 
 N.-l. Oalll t in the fourth century B.C., hordes of Gauls invaded Italy, burned 
 Rome, and only after years of fighting were driven back to the northern part of Italy 
 where they settled. 2. viribus t see Part III., section 9; abl. of specification^ 
 defining "in what respect." 6. nobillssimns » referrihg to birth. 7. utroque t 
 from uterque; render freely by " both " ; abl. absolute. 
 
 ' 10. Varus. 
 
 Quintilius Varus, dux Romanus, ab Arminio in Gfermania proe- 
 lio yictus est. Qui cum vidisset jam nQllam esse spem salutis, 
 gladio destricto, sese pccidit. Caput ejus postea a principe Qerma- 
 horum ad Augustum Romam missum est. Ea clades tanto dolore 
 Augustum aflPBcit, ut multos postea menses cotidie exclamaret : 
 '•Redde mihi, Vare, measlegiongs." ^ 
 
 N.— 1. Arminio I the Latin form ot Hermann. It was Arminius who pre- 
 vented the Romans from adding Germany to their empire. 2. Qui j see note on 
 1, 5. 4. Bomam 1 with the names of cities and towns mption towards is expressed 
 by the accusative m^ttt a prepo«ttton. 
 
 i- . : ■ 
 
 11. Union is Strength. 
 Agricola senex cum mortem sibi appropinquare "sentlret, flliSs 
 convocavit (quos interdum inter se discordare ^ie bat), et fascem 
 virgarum afferri jussit. Quibus allatis, flliSs hortabatur ut hunc 
 fascem frangerent. Quod cum facere non possent, distribuit sin- 
 gulls singulas virgas ; eisque celeriter fractis, docuit fllios quam 
 firma ygs esset concordia, quamque imbgcillis discordia. 
 
 N.-l. sibi « with appropinquare. English would omit the pronoun. 2. inter 
 •e I see note on 7. 2. 3. QuibuB and 4. Quod t see note on 1, 5. 3. ut . after 
 verbs of urgmg, asking, etc., Latin uses ut and the subjunctive where Engli* uses 
 the infinitive with "to." 4. singulis singulas t "one rod to each "; literally. 
 to single (sons) ijinglo rod H ." fi. qnnmi "h o w"} foUo w «l-fay-the rol^ mic 
 
 / 
 
 of indirect question. 
 
 y 
 
V 
 
 ^ 
 
 PART II.— PREPARATORY READING. 
 
 12. Alexander's War^hone. 
 
 119 
 
 Alexander rex equum nomine Bticephalum habSbat. Hic equut, 
 ubi omatus erat armatusque ad proelium, nSminein se cSnscendere, 
 nisi regem, passus est. Bello Indico Alexander improvise in hos- 
 tium multitudinem incidit. Conjectisque undiqu^in regent tells, 
 equus vulneribus multls in cervice atque in latere perfossus est. 
 Moribundus tamen § mediis hostibus regem citissime rettulit; 
 atque cum eum exfra tela extulisset, statim concidit. Turn r8x 
 Alexander, parts, victoria, opp\dum in elsdem locis condidft, idque 
 Bticephalam appellavit. — ^^^^"^ -— --4-— ___^ — ^__^;._ „,^__ 
 
 N.— 2. ad I " for." 6. Morlbnndns « add in the English " although." 6. e 
 mediis liostibng < "out Jf the midst of the enemy." To express " the middle of," 
 Latin uses an adjective, medius, in agreement; compare our "mid-stream," "mid- 
 ocean." 8. parta: from ^rto. 8. loots t "spot." 
 
 • 
 
 13. ilhe Legend of Corviniis. 
 
 Copiae Gkdlorum magnae agrum Romanum insederant, c5nsul§s- 
 que Romani aciem instruebant. Dux interea Gallofum, vir ingenti 
 proceritate, venire jussit et congredi, si quis pugnare secum ex 
 omni Romano exercitu auderet. Turn' Marcus Valerius adulS- 
 scens, tribunus militum, se obtulit. Sed cum processisset armatus, 5 
 corvus repente advolat et supra, galeam insistit. Mox commisso 
 proelio, corvus in Gall! 6s atque oculos pugnaxe coepit ; manum 
 unguibus laniabat, atque revolabat in galeam triblim. Sic Valerius, 
 sua virtute nixus et opera corvi adj^tus, ducem hostium ferocissi- 
 mum vicit interf ecitque. Ita corvus non golum victoriam ei, sed 10 
 etiam nomen, dedit. Nam postea Corvinus est dictus. 
 
 N.— 1. Gallomm t see note on 9, 1. 2. Ingenti proceritate > abl. of ' 
 
 characteristic; translate hy "of." 3. si qais't literally "if any one he bade 
 
 (him)," etc.; translate "bade any one who to come." 7. pngrnare in t "to 
 
 attack." 8. laniabat, revolabat t render the imperfect by "would." 
 
 14. The Battle of Thermopylae. 
 
 Cum XerxSs bellum Graeciae inferret, Graeci angustias, nomine 
 Thermopylfis, occupSre constituerunt. Itaque octo millia riilitura 
 ad ilium locum missa sunt. His copiis Leonidam, rggem Lacedae- 
 moniorum praefecerunt. Is trecentqs Lacedaemgnios contrS, Per- ^ 
 -gas edflxiV^-euffl^^^teris^ oopiia Qraeoormii «t ^hermopylifr^ 
 sarum, adventuni exspectavit. Xerxes autem cum comperisset 
 
 
 u* 
 
120 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 --i::- 
 
 quantae cdpiae angusti3B defendei^nt, prlmo risit ; turn legatum ad 
 
 eos misit, et jusait arma ponere. Sed is redilt Infecta re. N^ 
 
 cum Lacedaemoniis dixisset : " Sagittae nostras lucem soils obsciit 
 
 rftbunt," re8f)oil(ierunt illi : "Itaque in umbra dimicabimus." 10/ 
 
 Quattuor dies Xerxes cum multls suis millibus hominum exspec- 
 
 tavit ; quints die, cum Leonidas copias non abduxisset, proelii^m 
 
 commisit. Sed magnus numerus Persarum aut vubleratus aut 
 
 interfectus est ; reliqui fugerunt. Turn decern mi^i^^ electprum 
 
 militutn a rege in angustias missa sunt. Sed etiam hi cesser unt. 15^ 
 
 Cum rex jam de victoria desperaiet, proditor inventus est. Eghi- 
 
 altes enim, peciinia corruptus, Persas certiores fecit viam"^8Q 
 
 • qua transire possent, et a tergo impetum in Graecos f^e^se. 
 
 Cum Leonidas haec audivisset, magnam partem exe^cit^s refin^it: 
 
 Ipse cum exiguls copiis 'mansit. Acceperat enim hoc oraculum..: 20 
 
 " Aut delebitur Sparta, aut rex interficiStur." Trccenti igitur illi 
 
 Lacedaemonii et sdptingenti Thespienses Persarum impetum sus- 
 
 tinuerunt, et cum diti fortissimo ptignavjssent, multosque hostes 
 
 interfecissent, omnes ceciderunt. IV v * ; 
 
 N.— 1. bellamt the last attempt of Persia to conquer GflBW!jB,«in 480 B.C5(,; ^,; /i 
 qaantae i "what small" ; literally, "of what size," ^4 generally*, Irom the con- 
 text, meaning "how great." 10. itaque : "in that case." 17. esse i "that there 
 was." 
 
 '15. Pyrrhos and the Bomans. ' « 
 
 Bello indicto, TarentinI Pyrrhum, Epiri tegem, contra Rorhapos.. 
 
 auxilium poposcerunt. Is mox- ad Italian! venit, tumq\e primum 
 
 Komani cum transmarine hoste dimicaverunt. PubliusN^alerius 
 
 Laevinus consul, qui contra eum missus est, cum exploratSres 
 
 Pyrrhl cepisset, jusait eos per castra duel. Cum omnem exercitum 5 
 
 vidissent, eos dimisit ut renuntiarent Pyrrho quae a Romanis 
 
 agerentur. Commissa mox pugna, Pyrrhus elephantorum auxilio 
 
 vicit, qui incogniti Romanis erant. Sed nox proelio finem dedit ; 
 
 Laevinus per noctem fugit, Pyrrhus Komanos mille octingentos 
 
 cepit et occisos sepeliyit. Hos cum adverso vulnere et truci vultu 10 
 
 etiam mortuos jace're vidisset, sustulit ad caelum manus et dixit : 
 
 "Totius orbis dominus esse potui, si tales nmites habuissem."- , _ - 
 
 N,— 1. Bello I an unsuccessful attempt from 282-27^ B.C., to prevent Rome 
 from becoming mistress of Southern Italy. 2. poposoorunt i takSs two accusa- 
 tives, of the person asked and the thjjng asked for. 10. adverso vnlnOT^,!^ 
 
 " with thyir wounds In front." 11. mortuos i "in death.'* 12. esse potul, si 
 liablilMeni I " I might have been, if I had hod." 
 
PART II. — i»REPARATORY «Leaping. 
 
 121 
 
 . , 16. The Story of Ctqbsus. <■• 
 
 Croesus, rSx Lydorum, magna» sibi dlvitias paraverat. Itaque - 
 fama divitiaxum ejus non solum Asiam sed eti^ Europam perva- 
 serat, multique venerunt ut regem'videreiit. filter eos fuit Solon 
 Atheniensis, qui inter, septem sapientes numerabatur. Turn ex eo 
 Croesus quaesivit nonne ipse omnium hominiim felicissimus esset. 5 
 Solon autem respondit : "Nemo ante mortem beatus est jtidican-' 
 dus." , Hoc ^ responsum regi turn displicuit ; sed posted sensit 
 quam verum eisset. 
 
 Illis enim temporibus Cyrus Medorunv et PersSrum rSgnum 
 
 ^ obtinebat, et gentes propinquae victoriis ejus terreb'alitup. UtlO 
 
 hunc impedlret et coerceret, Croesus bellum contra eum pfiravit. 
 
 ' Eodem tempore oraculum Delphicum per legatos d§ exitil ^elli 
 
 - interrogavit: Respondit deus : "Croesus transitu flumihis quod 
 
 interest inter Persas*et Lydos, magnum regnum delebit."- , 
 
 Croesus, cum h3c responsum comperlsset, vietoriam c^rtliml^ 
 sperabat, et copiis suls in Cyri rSgnum invasit. Is autem popiis > 
 magnigfasoactis Lydos superavit et Croesum ipsum cepit. ' 
 
 Tum Croesus a'Cyro damnatus est ut igni crettiaretur. <Pum • 
 magna copia ilignorum coacervata esset, et Croesus, in rogum ^. 
 impositus, jam mortem exspeotaret, magna voce clamavit : "'O'20 
 Solon, Solon, Solon !" Cyrus autem, cum hoc audivisset, quaesivit 
 quid illis verbis significare^t. Tum Croesus narraVit quid Solon ' ■ 
 Atheniensis de forttirta- humana docuisset. His verbis Cyrus itsi \ 
 commotus est ut Croesum liberaret et amicum appellaret. 
 
 N.— 1. Croesus : see note jon 4, 1. 5. Ipse t that is, Crosus. 6. est Jiidl- 
 oandust "should be considered." 7. taint "at the time." 12. oraoolam.' 
 Delplilciini » at Delphi in Greece was the famous temple of Apollo, who through 
 his pr^stess was believed to foretell the future to those who came to consult the .-c 
 ora^. The answers were often, as' on this occasion, ambiguous. l8. ut ore> 
 lareturt "to be burned." 
 
 ...at-. 
 
 wo acGjisa-, 
 
 17. The Story of Begolns. 
 
 ^ 
 
 Hoc proelio superati, Carthaginienses auxiliuni a Lacedaemoniis 
 petierunt. Xanthippus S. Lacedaemoniis missus est, et RomH- 
 norum dux Regulus victus est magna cum caede. Nam vix duo 
 millia ex omnI Romano exercitti refiigerunt ; quingenti cum im- 
 peratere Regttlo eaptt Mtttit ; t rtgT n ta m flKa^^?ccisa snnt^ et-Regnl 
 ipse in catenas conjectus est. Sed post quinque annos CarthSgini- 
 
 '^ 
 
: ill 
 
 J 
 
 122 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 m^ .^ 
 
 
 enses, mS.gnIs calamitatibu^acceptis, a'Regulo petierunt ut Romam 
 proficisceretur, et. pacem a Eqmanis iitipetraret. Atque jureju- • 
 rando eum obstrinxerunfc, riisi reddit; essent Carthaginiensibus ' 
 . captlvl nobiles quldam, sese ipsum Carthaginem rediturum. lUe 10 
 Bomam cum vemsset, senatuin hortatus est ne pacem cum Poenis 
 facerent. Dixit enim illos, tot vasibu» fractos, nullanTjgpem 
 habere ; neque debere tot millia capt^vorum reddi propter unum 
 se ' et paucos qui ex Romanis capti essent. Itaque Jegatl-C^tha- 
 ginienses dimissi sunt inf ecta pace. Regulum a^ci I^omae tenere 15 
 conati sunt. Sed ille uxorem a complexu i^emovit, dixitque se illo , 
 die, quoin potestatem-Aftorum venisset, I^omanum esse desiisse ; 
 neque in ea urbe mansurura in qua, poStquaitt Afris serviisset, 
 dignitatem honesti civis habere hon posset. flegreiS'sus igitur ad 
 Africam, omnibus supplicils necatua est. Neque vero ign6rabat20 
 se ad crudeli&simum hostem et ad exquisita supplicia profioisci; 
 sed jusjurandum conservandum esse putabat. 
 
 ' N.— I. proelio i this was in 255 B.C., in the first war between Rome and Car- 
 thage. 7. petierunt t "asked Regulus to proceed to Rome." 8. jure^nrandos 
 from jusjurandum (see Part III., section 9). 9. redditi essent t " should be (or 
 were) restored ;" literally, "should have been restored." Notice that rediturum, in 
 line 10, is from a different verb.' 11. hortatus est ne t "urged the senate jiot 
 to," etc. 14. ex Bomanls t see note on 1, 2 ; in translation connect it with " 
 pauoos, not with qui. 15, Bomae t the so-called locative case ; "at Rome." 17. 
 quot "when"; literally, "on which." 20. omnibus i "all manner of." 22. 
 oons^rTandnm esse i see note on 16. 6. 
 
 18. Roman Discipline. . ; 
 
 Discipllna mllitaris diu et acriter retenta principatum Italiae 
 Romano populo peperit ; inultas urbes, magnos reges, validissimas 
 gentes in dicionera redegit ; urbemque Romam, ortam e paryula 
 Romull casa, totlus terrarum orbis fecit dominam. 
 
 N.— 2. populo t dative; render by "for." 8. ortam t "which sprang.". 
 / \ 19. Victory and Shipwreck. ." ■' ■ 
 
 _Mart5us Aemilius Paulus, Servius Fulvius Nobilior consules ad 
 
 'Africam profecti sunt cum trecentarum navium class^ Primum 
 
 Poenos nSvall certamine superant. Aemilius consul centum et 
 
 quattuor naves hostium dSmersit, tnginta cum nautis cepit, quin- 
 
 decim millia hostium aut occidit aut cepit, exercitum suum ingenti 5 
 
 praeda dKavit.~^El su^b^ta Africa turn esset, nisi tanta" famgs 
 
 -..^-. 
 
 
PART II.T-PRlftKlTORY READINQ. ' 123 • 
 
 fuisset ut diatius manSre exercitUs n6n posset. Consules cum 
 VictricI classe redeuntes circa Sicilian! naufragium passi sunt. Et 
 tanta tempestSa f uit, ut ex qiiadringentls sexaginta quattuor navi-; 
 bus, vix octoginta servarl possent ; neque 0115 tempore tanta lO 
 maritima tempestas audita est. ' RomanI tamen statim ducentas 
 nav§8 reparaverunt, neque animus infractus f uit. 
 
 If .— 1. consoles i in 25fi| B.C. (the year when ReguluB was taken prisoner), 
 during the First Punic war. 6. snbaota esset, nisi fuisset s "would have 
 been subdued had there nob been"; compare note on 15, 12.' 8. redeuntes | 
 present pwticiple of re(f«o, 10. ullo t that is, " any other." 
 
 ' » ' 20. An Honorable Foe. ""~~"~" ■ '_ \ [y 
 
 Cum rex Pyrrhus populo Romano bellum intulisset, atque bis 
 prospers pugnavisset, tum medicus Pyrrhi ad Caium Fabricium 
 consulem clam nocte venit, eique est pollicitus, si praemium sibi 
 dedisset, se in Pyrrhi castra rediturum, et eum veneno necaturum. 
 Hunc Fabricius vinctum reduci jussit ad Pyrrhum, et monuit 5 
 regem ut insidias caveret. Tum r.ex,° admiratus eum, dixit : "Fa- 
 bricius difficilius ab honest^e, quam sol a cursa suo, avert! potest. " 
 
 N.— 1. bellum t see note on 15, 1. 4. dedisset » " gave " or " should give" ; 
 seenQteon 17,9. 5. viiiiDtumt "in chains." 7. dlffioillus t compar. adverb. 
 
 21. A Dishonorable Trick. 
 
 Post Cannensem pugnam Hannibal ex captivis decent Romam" 
 ad senatum misit ut permutatio captivorum fieret. Omnes, prius- 
 tiuata proficiscerentur, jurati sunt se^ in castra Poena redittiros, * 
 nisi de captivis impetravissent. Cum Romam venissen^ res sena- 
 tui non placuit. Tum ex decem illls novem statim ad Hanmbalem 5 
 reverterunt ; unus Ron?ae remanet. Nam pauft postquam egres- * 
 sus erat'e castris, tedierat, quasi aliquid esset oblltus. Itaque 
 reditu in castra liberatum se esse religione dixit. ' Haec fraus et 
 calliditas tam esse turpis existimata est, ut ab omnibus civibus 
 contemptus sit j atque senatus decrevit ut vinctus ad Hannibalem 10 
 reduceretur. r --a 
 
 WV-l- Cannensem pugrnam : in 216 B.C., the third year of Hannibal's inva- 
 sion of Italy, he inflicted on the Romans atCannse the most crushing defeat they ever 
 suffered. It was his last important success, however. 1. Romam t see note on • 
 10, 4. 4. Impetravissent i see note on 20, 4. 4. rest "the proposal." 6. 
 ^<>'»%g UigJQte on JJ, 16 . . 9 . ,extattniat ft o s ti thn w ingiilar v e rb is oftou 
 
 used in Latin with two subjects which form one notion. 
 
 "-■^X 
 
 "•■•,E" 
 
* . 
 
 124 
 
 ^^_ 
 
 •■"■i*^ 
 
 m- 
 
 .—■ > 
 
 \*. 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 22. Haimibal's First Campaigns in Italy. 
 
 Bum haec geruntur, ntintius victoriae ad Cannas Carthaginem J 
 vSnerat M3>go I^amilcaris filius. Is res gestas in Italia a fratte 
 Hannibale exponit ; cum*8ex imperatoribus, quorum quattuor con- 
 sules, duo dictator ac magister equitum fuerint, eum conflixisse ; 
 occldii^se supra ducenta milliarhostium, supra quinquaginta miUia 5 
 cSpisse. Ex quattuor consulibus duos occidisse ; ex duobus reli- , 
 quis saucium esse'alterum, alterum totS amisso exercitti vix cum 
 quinquaginta hominibus efFugisse. Magistrum equitum* filsum ' 
 fugSitumque esse ; cdictatorem, quia se in aciem numquam commi- 
 serit, unicum haberi imperatorem. Bruttios Apulosque et partem 10 
 Samnitium ac Lucanorum defecisse ad Poenos ; Capuam, quod 
 caput non Campaniae modo sed post Cannensem pugnam Xtaliae 
 sit, Hannibal! se trSdidisse. 
 
 N. — 1. nnntlnst predicate nom., agreeing with Jlfojjo ; literally, "as messent^^er 
 or announcer" ; trahslale freely, "had coino with news." 1. Cannas: see note 
 on 2 1, 1. 2. res gfestas i before Canneo had come the victories at the Ticinus, 
 •Trebia and Lake Trosimenus. 5. oootdlsse t notice the difference in the quantity 
 of bccidiitse, line 6. 7. amisso i abl. absolute; render freely "after the loss." 
 10. haberi': "was considered." 10. IJruttios, etc. : these tribes comprised prac- 
 tically all southern Italy. 11. quod i, the relative, taking its gender from caput. . 
 
 23. Hannibal Defeated at ITola. 
 
 Eadem aestSte Marcellus, qui Nolam praesidio obtin€bat, crSbrSs 
 excursiones in agrum Samnitium f gcit, omniaque f erro atque Igni 
 vastavit. Itaque extemplo legatl ad Hannibalem missi sunt a 
 Samnltibus. Hannibal partem copiarum in agrum Nolan um misit. 
 Marcellus, ubi hoc animadvertit, extemplo in aciem copias Sdilxit ; 6 
 neque Hannibal certamen detrectavit. Mille fere passuum inter 
 urbem erant castraque*; eo spatio concurrerunt. Proelium ditlj- 
 erat anceps ; suntma vl et duces hortabantur et milites pagiiab«riL 
 , Tandem terga Poeni dederunt atque in castra oompulsl sunt. Hos- 
 tiuin quinque mlllia caesa eo die, vivl capti sescenti et sIgnalO 
 mllitaria OndSvIginti et duo elephantl ; Rdmanorum vix mllle 
 inter f ec^. * • 
 
 W,— 1. a6Mta€<ftt this Wft» in 216 B.C., the yeiir after Qannm, when the war 
 was beginning to turn in favor of the Romans. 6. Mllle passuum t for the more 
 usual mUl* pagatu. «. et. . . .et i " both. ■ . .>nd" ; but It la often more oonveniant, 
 
 y\ 
 
 aa here, to omit " both " in translating, 
 with inUr/toti, line lit. 
 
 1 
 
 4. 
 
 10. oaesa, oaptlt fupply «tmt, as also 
 
PART II.— PREPARATORY READING. 
 
 126 
 
 lint, M also 
 
 24. Babylon Taken by Cynu. .«^ 
 
 " Erat autem Babylon urbs opulentissima et potentissima, ad 
 Euphratem flumen sita. Ante miiros proelio commisso, Cyrus/ 
 BabylSnios primo impeta fugavifc. Sed qum urbem obsidere 
 coepisset, propter copiam ciborum quam incolae providerant et 
 propter ingentes muros, magna erat difficultaa. Itaque Cyrus 5 
 dolum adhibult. Fossam enim ab eo loco ubi flumen ad urbem 
 accedebat ad earn partem dflxit ubi flflmen ex urbe veniSbat. Id 
 fecit nocta ne Babylonii sentirent. Itaque cum fossa completa 
 esset, aqua in flumine ipsd deerat, et per alveum vacuum militibus — 
 Cyrl via in urbem parata est. Ita mllites in urbem nocte ingressi 10 
 sunt, et mtlros portasque occupaverunt. Tanta autem urbs erat, 
 ut, cum "jam partes miiris propinquae a Cyri militibus expOgnatae 
 essential qui in media urbe habitabant de ilia re nuntium nondum 
 acQ^issent. Cum urbem expflgnavisset Cyrus,, Jadaeos qui ft ' 
 regibus Babyloniorum capti et abducti erant, in patriam remisit. is 
 
 N.— 1. antem j " now." 1. ad : "on." 8. ne sentirent t " that they might 
 not," etc.; subjunctive of purpose. 8. completa: does not mean "completed," 
 which would be "confecta." 9. deerat i from desum. 9. milltlbas t dative; 
 render by " for." 13. media urbe « see note on 12, 6. 
 
 25. Soipio's Answer. 
 
 "^Marcus Naevius, tribilnus plsbis, accOsSvit Scipionem ad popu- 
 lum ; dixitque eum accepisse a rege Antiocho pecOniam ut condi- 
 ciOnibus moUibus pax cum eo fieret. Tum Scipio "Memorifi," ' 
 inquit, ♦♦QdiritSs, repet5 diem esse hodiemum, quo Hannibalem 
 Poeuum magno proelio in Africa vIcL, pacemque et victoriam v6bls 5 
 peperi praeclaram. Non igitur debgmus in deos ingrati esse. 
 Rellcto igitur nebulSne h6o, Ire hino debemus ad deos gratulan- 
 dds." Id cum dixisset avertit, et Ire ad Capitolium coepit. Tum 
 contio ani versa, quae ad sententiam d6 Sclpione ferendam con- 
 venerat, rellctS tribano, Scipionem in Capitolium comitata est ; lO 
 atcjue inde ad aedfis ejus cum laetitia et gratulatiSne pi^Ssecflta est. 
 
 N.— 1, Scipionem i who ended the Second Punic war by defeating Hannibal at 
 Zama, in Africa, 202 B.C. 2. Antiocho i kinjf of Syria, who, after two years' wi%~^~ 
 was conquered by the Romans In 190 B.C., and compelled to sue for peace. Scipio 
 was one of the oominissloners sent to fix the terms of peace. This accusation was 4 
 brouRht by his political enemies at Rome five years later. 4. diem, etc.: "that 
 
 rttrertay-rtttBWTy,"matTn8lo:aay7^7. nebulone^ 
 t- «d gratulandos 1 the gerundive construction, expressing |id^pose : so list 9, 
 
 v; 25i-.-» ' • .' ' - .^ 
 
126 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 ■?' 
 
 '\' 
 
 ^T 86. The Defeat and Death of Fompey. 
 
 PompSius, cum equitatura suum pulsum vidisset, aliis quoque 
 diffisus, acie excessit, protinusque s& in castra contulit. Gastrs &* 
 cohortibus, quae ibi praesidio erant relictae, industriS d€fendSban- 
 tur. Neque did multitudinem telorum sustinere potuerunt, sed 
 c5nfecti vulneribus, in altissimos montes, qui ad castra pertinS- 5 
 bant, conftigerunt. Pompeius equum nactus decumana portS> bS ^ 
 ex castrls Sjecit, protinusque equo citato Larissam contendit. 
 Neque ibi constitit, sed nocturno itinere ad mare pervSnit, n3,yem- 
 que friimentfixiam conscendit. — ^~~^ — " ^^?^~ - — ' ^- 
 
 Caesar omnibus rebus rellctis persequi PompSium constituit, 10 
 n§ rursus cdpi§,s comparS-re alias et bellum renovlLre posset. Pom- 
 peius biduum tempestate retentus, tandem in Aegyptum pervSnit. 
 Ibi ad regem Ptolemaeu^m misit ut AlexandriS, reciperStur atque 
 in calamitate tegergtur ; sed amlci regis, timore adducti, ils qui 
 erant S, Pomp€io mi^I palam llberSiiter respondSrunt, eumque ad 15 
 rSgem venire jussSrunt ; ipsi clam Achillam, singulfirl hominem 
 audSiCiS,, et Lilcium Septimium, tribdnum mllitum, ad interfici- 
 endum PompSium mls@runt. Ab his llberaliter appell&tus, nfiri- 
 culam parvulam conscendit cum paucis suls : ibi ab Achillft et 
 Septimid interficitur. 20 
 
 N.— 1. Pompeius t Osasar and Pompey were the two foremost men of their 
 day in Rdine. Each aimed at supreme power in the staWi and mutual Jealousy * 
 led to civil war in 49 B.C. The following year Pompey was defeated at Pharsalia^ in 
 . northern Greece. 1. allls i " the others," tha^ is, the infantry. 2. aole exoesslt i 
 "left the battle-fleld." 3. praesldtot "oh guard"; literally, "for a gruard," dative 
 case. 7. Littrissain f see note on 10, 4. 13. Ptolemaenm t it was largely 
 through Pom{iey's influence that Ptolemy's father, seven years before, had been 
 restored to the throne of Egypt, after, a rebellion. Pompey, therefore, confidently 
 appealed to the son for aid. IS. Alexandria i "in Alexandria." 17. aadaola i 
 see note on 13, 2. 17. ad interflflenduui t see note on 25,7. 
 
 «7. A Skirmiih for a HiU. '^ 
 
 Inter oppidum Ilerdam et proximum collem, ubi castra Afrftnius 
 habSbat, tumulus erat. Hunc si super&viss^t Caesar, ab oppid5 
 •t oommeftta omnI se interolflsarum hostSs odnfldebat. Hde^ 
 sp6r&ns legi^nSs trSs ex castrls Sddcit, et flnam Tegidnem prSour- 
 rere atque eum tumulum occupilre jubet. AirS,nI c6hort6s bre* 
 v iOr e tt in e r e ad o und o m oc c upa ndtmr Itwrntn nntttmtttrr 
 oommiitunt, et quod pi4||| in tumulum hostSs vSnerant, nostrl 
 
 * 
 
PART II. — PREPARATORY READING. 
 
 m 
 
 repelluntur atque terga vertere sgque ad signa legionum recipere 
 coguntiKr. Caesar, cohortatua suos, legionem nonam subsidiS 
 ducit ; hostem supprimit seque ad oppidum Ilerdam recipere et 10 
 sub mfiro conaistere cogit. 
 
 N.— 1. Ilerdam i in Spain, wiiere Ctesar in 49 BO. defeated Pompey's lieuten- 
 ant, Afranius, before following Pompey himself to Qreece. 2. si superavlaset t 
 "if he could gain"; literally, "if he should have gained." See note on 17, 9. 
 3. Hoc sperans t " with this hope (or idea)." 6. Afranl t proper names in -ttM 
 have the genitive -ii contracted to -t. 7. quod i the conjunction. 9, anbsidio t 
 "to their support"; literally, "for a support"; compare 2 6, 8. ' 
 
 28. How Horatius Kept the Bridge. 
 
 Tarquinius, ab Romania exSctus, ad Lartem Porsenam, Cltfel- 
 num regem, perfflgerart, Srftbatque nS aS in exsilio vivere paterStur. 
 Porsena igitur Romam magno cum exercitfl vgnit. Cum hoatSs 
 adessent, omnSs in urbem ex agria dSmigrSvSrunt ; urbem ipaam 
 praeaidiis flrmavSrunt. Pona Subliciua iter paene hostibua dedit ; 6 
 sed Onus vir, Horatiua Coclea, qui forte in atatione pontia poaitus 
 erat, cum Janiculum repentlnS impeta captum esae vidiaaet, 
 admonuit ut pontem ferro atque Ignl interriimperent. Promlait 
 8g, quantum vir tintls posset, hoatSa austentOrum eaae. Vadit inde 
 ad priraum aditum pontig^ duos tamen ex RSmanls pudor cum e6 10 
 tenuit, Spurium Lartium Sc Titum Herminium. Cum hia hoatSa 
 parumper auatinuit. Deinde eoa quoque ipaSs, exigua parte 
 pontia rellcta, ill tatum cSdere coSgit. CircumferSna inde oculfla 
 * ad procerea Etrascorum, nunc ainguloa prSvocabat, nunc omn6a 
 increpabat. Aliquamdia cunctati aunt; pudor deinde commovitW 
 aciem, ^et clamore aublatS undique in eum tela conjiciunt. Cum 
 nihilominua obstinatua ille pontem obtinSret, jam impeta factO 
 4 virum dfitrfldere cSnabantur cum fragor rupti pontia clamorque 
 Romanorum pavSre aubito impetum auatinuit. Tum Horatiua^ 
 " Tiberlne pater, " inquit, * * tS precor ut haec arma et hunc mllitem 90 
 propitiS flfimine accipiaa." Inde annatua in Tiberim dSailuit, 
 . multls(iue auperinc5dentibu8 tella, incolumia ad auSa tranavit. 
 
 ^^*~^' Torqnlnlu» « the last king of Rome, banished in 510 B.C., because .of 
 \ 1» tyranny and the cruel misdeeds of hii» fanjily. 2. lie puteretur i "not to 
 suffer." 6. forte i " as It happened." 8. admonuit ut i " advised them to," eta ^ 
 0. qnantnmi "so far as." 12. exlffuai "only (or but) a small." 14. provo- 
 <^«l>ft*ti ll i!rgpalmt t B Boxiot i um-Xa^^--18. oonabaiitui'i^lHMiHliHe the Vttm 
 
 carefully. 20. pater i the Romans believed that each river had its god or guardlMI 
 ^irit, 22. miatl*qia»,.«to. : Umnslata the abl. abw>lute by " although." 
 
128 
 
 -. PRIMA.RY LATIN BOOK. 
 29. An Extraordinary .Diiaiter. 
 
 -AJr- 
 
 w^"*»" »». - 1 
 
 Cum eae res agerentur, nova clS<des ntlnti§,ta est, Lacium Postu- 
 * mium in Gallia ipsum atque exercitum dSlgtos esse. Silva brat 
 vasta, qua exercitum' traducttirus erat. Ejus silvae arbores circ§i' 
 viam Galli ita inclderunt ut immotae star^nt, momento levi^i- 
 . piiisae conciderent. Legioijes duas RomanS^s habebat Postumius i 
 et quindecim mlllia sociorum. Galll dram silvae circum^sedebaiit ; ' 
 attjue ubi intra vit agmen saltum, turn extremSs arborum suc<ji- 
 sarum impellunt. Hae, alia in aliam incidentes, tanta strSge arma", 
 virSs, equd^Qbruerunt, ut vix decern homines pffugerent. Nam ' 
 exanimati plerique sunt arborum truncis ramlsque ; et ceteros, 10 ' 
 inopinato malo treprdos, Gdlll interfecerunt ; pauci qui pontem, 
 fluminis petebant, intercltisi captlque sunt. Ibi Postumius omnl^ 
 vl, ne caper§tur, dimicans occubuit. 
 
 *•■■*. 
 
 -"^ _ -N.— 2. (Pallia I the northern part of Italy, having been settled by Gauls (sfee 
 " - note on 9, l),,wa8 <herefore called Gallia Cisalpima ("Gaul on this side o( the 
 .1" ttAliii"). Their descendants Joined Hannibal when he invaded Italy, and the incfdent 
 ;l(>4 her0"ftported occurred in 215 B.C., a^ew months i^fter the defeat at Cannae. 3. qua, 
 , ^V tf^lMlnotaras erat t " through which he was intending to lead." 4. linmotae i, 
 vw^ifhile untouched." 4. Impulsae i " but if pushed." 7. Bucolsaruni i '"which 
 "§ hil been cut" 8. alia in allamr "one against another"; in apposition with 
 .' ''i Xoe. 11. trepldoB % " who were-pahic-stribken. 12. flnmluls i " over the river." 
 ''!.. 12. «e oaperetur t " to avoid capture. 
 
 ; ^;v. 
 
 80. 
 
 void cwture. 
 
 d tUe Stytbimup. 
 
 ;.,.. 
 
 Darius Persarum rex bellum Scythls'intUlitjfet cum omnibus 
 cSpils in Europam profectus est. Scythae autehi proelium com- 
 mittere nolebant,. Tandem Darius, misso l6gat6 ad Scytharum 
 regem, dixit debSre eum aut pilgnare aut tterram et aquam feren- 
 tem in colloquium venire. Ad haec Scythariim r6x respondit, 5 
 nSUe fee pilgnare, quod oppida non habSret quae dSfenderet; 
 pro autem terra et'aciua, quas Darius postulavisset, dona alia 
 missQrum. Posters diS Scythae ICgatum mls6runt qui dona ferS- 
 bat, avem et milrem et ranam et quinque sagittas. Dixitque 
 l^gatus Persas, si sapientCs essent, posse cognSscere, quid haecio 
 dona significarent. DSxIus quidem putabat Scythas sijse et terram 
 et aquam tradere ; quod mOs in terra viverot, rftna in aqua, avis 
 
PART II. — PREPARATORY READING. 
 
 120 
 
 )ver the river.'* 
 
 sScum habebat Darius, putabat dona haec significare ; hisi avSslfi 
 facti Persae evolarent, aufc in mares conversi terram subirent, aut 
 ranarum modo in palades insilirent, sagittas Scytharum non effu- ^' 
 gere posse. 
 
 N.— I. Darius t becan»^ king of Persia eight years after the death 4|tf Cyrus the 
 Great. The unsuccessful invasion of Scjthia (now southern Russia) about 608 B.C., 
 was a prelude to the invasion of Greece, which was repelled at Marathon, 490 B.O.' 
 4. terram et aqnani i these the Persians used tq demand as a token of submis- 
 sion. 6. oppida....defenderott "hehadno towns to defend." 11. qnidem t 
 " for his part." 13. equo i the Scythians, like the modern Cossacks, were aU expert 
 .Norsemen. ■_ ;^ '__ : , : ^ ■ ■ ■ ■ . 
 
 . 31. Borne Taken by the Gaols. 
 
 [Romanl a Brenno, rege Gallorum, ad flumen AUiam superfttf ' 
 erant, et maxima pars exercifcfls Veios fugerat.] 
 - Gain haud multo ante solis occasum ad urbem Romam per- 
 veniunt. Equites praegressl nop portas clausas esse, non stati- 
 onem pVo portis excubare, non armStds esse in mtiro rettul§runt. ft 
 Itaque insidias veriti, extra Romain consedorunt, et exploratores 
 misecjijjt circa moenia. Roraanl interim totam paene urbem lamen- 
 tis complebant, et cum defendl urbs non posset, tam parvS relicts 
 mana, ciim conjugibus ac llberis in arcom concessgrunt. Galll, 
 ingress! postero die urbem, in forum perveniunt. Inde, modicoio 
 relicts praesidio, dilabuntur ad praedam. RomSni interim ex ' » 
 arce plSnam hostium urbem cemSbant. Galli, incensa urbe, impe- 
 tum facere in arcem statuunt. Prllna luce, signo dato, multitado 
 omnia in foro Instsruitur ; inde, clamore sublato ac testadine facta, 
 subeunt. Romanl, ad omnes aditus stationibus firmatft, scandere 16 
 sinunt hostem. Medio ferS cllvo restitCrunt, atque inde ex supe- 
 jriSre loco, impetti facto, Gallos magna strage fad6runt. 
 
 N.— 1. Oalloram I see note on 9, 1. 1. Alllam i the defeat at the Allia, ia 
 390 B.C., leading' to the capture of Rome, was always re^rd«<l as the blackest day 
 in Roman history. 4. non portas, etc. : the accusative and infinitive construction 
 depending on rettuierunt. 6. Instdla* i the real cause was the panic among the 
 survivor» in Rome. 9. aroem t on the Capitoline hill. 11. ad i "in quest of"; 
 literally, "for." 15. adi "at.'.' 16. Medio olivoi "half way up the WU": «m 
 note on 12,4 -r— — ^^— — -^-^^c, ■ .■■r--:^ ~-~- — ^^^ ^^ 
 
 82. The Capitdl Bayed l)y 066M. , 
 
 Interim tkn Rgumo, Oapifcfllium, iit IngeiiU pwrloulo f uitrr^ Kam« ^ 
 que GalB, qui arcem obsidfibant, yest^pium notftyerunt hamS&tti% 
 
 m ■ 
 
'■• r# 
 
 ' !r 
 
 ii M 
 
 i30 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 qua nOniius a VSils perySnerat. Itaque nocte sublOs'trl inermem 
 Galium, qui tentSret viam, praemlserunt ; inde reli'qui tanto silentio 
 in summum evaserunt, ut non custodes solum fallereut, sed ne 5 
 canSs quidem excitarent.„ Ans^resnon fefellerunj;, qui Jflnoni 
 sacri erant. Namque clamore eorum alarumqud crepittL excitus 
 est Marcus Mftnlius, vir b^llo ggregius. Is, armis arreptls, Galium 
 qui jam in sjimmo constiterat, deturbat. Ejus casus, proxjmos 
 Gallorum stemit j trepidantes alios, qui,- omissis a^rmia, sjixa mHni- 10 
 bus amplecfcebantur, trucldat Manlius. Jamque alii congregati 
 tells saxisque proturbant hostSs. Luce oi^ta,. vocatls ad concilium • - " 
 mllititus,, Manlius prlmum ob virtutem laudatus est-; turn vigilSs 
 •citS-tl sunt. His omnibus culpam in ttnum vigilem conjicientibus, ' 
 ilium Quintus Sulpicius, tribunus mtlitum, approbantibus cOnctis, is 
 d§ saxo dejecit. . -^ . 
 
 N.— 1. Interim t the Gauls, foiled in their first attempt (see 31), laid siege to 
 the citadel, while the greater number roamed about the country, pillaging it! 8. 
 nantias : he had come, from the Romans who had escaped after Allia to Veil, to 
 concert measures with the Romans in the citadel. 4. qui tentaret t "to make 
 trial of." 6. evaserunt t " made their way." 6. Junonl t whose temple was on 
 the Capitoline hill. 8. bellot see note on 9,^2.^10. omtssls armtst freely, 
 "had dropped their arms and." 14. His oonjloientlbus t " as tfiese lai4."- 16. 
 approbantibtis cnnotis i '^with the Approval of all." 
 
 " 83. A Tonng Roman Oirl. '> 
 
 , (Fropi a letter of -Pliny's.) • 
 
 TrKttssmius haec tibi scribo. Fundaril nostrl filia minor d§- 
 fOnota est. Qua puella pihil umquam erat festiyius, nihil amabiliuq 
 nee longa vita dignius. Nondum annos quattuordecim impl6verat, • 
 et jam pradeptiam matronalem gravitatemque piaestabat, et tamen 
 Buavitatein puellarem cum virgi/iali verecundia. Ut ilia patris 5 
 .TOrvTcI irihaerebat ! Ut nos amico» paternos et araanter et modestS 
 coihplectSbatur ! , Ut ndtricSs, ut praeceptores diliggbat ! Qua 
 ilia temperantia, qua , patientia, qilS etiam constantia novissimam '^ 
 valStadinem tulit ! Medicis obsequ6batur, sororem patrem adhor- 
 tabatur. Dar4vit vigor animi illi flsqfie ad extrSmum, nee autio 
 spatiS.valStadinisaut meta mortis Infractus est. Itaque plOrimaa 
 gravissimasque nobis causas rellquit et dSsideril et dolSris. . 6 
 trlste acerbumtjue fQnus ! Jam dSstinata erat 6gregi5 juvefil, jam 
 Blectus nflptiarum di6s, jam nos vocatl. H5c gaudium maergre 
 
 iuuUluui BBi. NOn powum expnmere verbis quwt'umftSm^^ 
 
 7W 
 
 10 
 
:5 
 
 on anim5i5 
 
 ^ /". / PART II.— PREPARATORY READIXa 131 
 
 vulnusacceperim. cum audlvl Fundanium ipsum praecipiente«, 
 ut quod in veste^, margarlta, gemma^ fuer^t erogatflrus, hoc in t^ 
 et unguenta et Qdores impenderetur. . 
 
 ' A ^' r'"J' ^^^ T^* *^*' "'^* th^following letter. liv^ from ei A.D. to about 113 
 Qua, "M-ith what." 10. Uli, "with her" ; lilerally "forher ° 14^ 
 
 34. An Ezemplaiy Old Age. 
 
 ' a^W ^??^"' "°"'" oontinetur, h8rf secunda cake™ poscit,- 
 . ^'"^ ";■"■» Pas'-;umtria,„eo minus aniraumquamcorpuaeter: 
 cet. Si adsunt «mici, honeBtissiml sermonSs explioantur ; si non 
 hber legituP. Dainde co„,Idit, et liber rfl«„, aut se^i ZxH 
 vehioulum a«,end.t, adsflmit «xorem vel aliquem «micorum. Pe" | 
 achs^septem mfllibus pas,„um, iterum «mbulat mlUe, iter™, 
 res.d,t, vel se oubioulo ac stas reddit. Scrlbit enim, et „uIZ 
 . utraque hngua, d<«tiaaime. Ubi W balinel nOntikto ^" («" 
 autem h,e„,e nona, aesMte octava), in sole, si caret vents^ ambuUt ' 
 nudus Deu,de movetur pita vehementer et dia ; nam hCuo^u' 
 exerctationis genere pagnat cum senectQte. Lit™ iZ?"! 
 paulisper oibum differt ; intcHm audit logentem remLt atuM 
 et duteus. Apppnitu* c6na non-minus nitida quam frtlgl in alenM 
 poro et antique. Hanc r.gulam SpOrinna c' nstantis' ". C 
 Inde Ul. post septimum. et septuSgSsin.um annum a^itT '; 
 ooulorum v,gor integer, inde agile et vividum corpu" Tare^o 
 vnam u^r«i,ar avidissime ; interim mffle labBribus contemr q^ 
 rtTfflL?'"'^"' ''.«"»P>-«» -' Spflrimu., „a™ i„e q;^, 
 
 h<>iie.li„iml, d.v„ld, th,t fe „ >^3;i\ , • """^ "1 «««cUon. l. 
 vl,orou, e,.„l„ .t fnni;" n. remlMU.. . th^l'^f' "•''•■»«"«•■• ■ " takM 
 
 10 
 
 u 
 
 " ■ nmmlm-M "itunr. * 
 
 wiU be the .ub,«,t fr^'d^rf^y "e^r-J^trl';' "''°' T*"^""^ "'^) 
 
 J, ue possesses. 17. quorum t "in which." 
 
 •4; 
 
. 
 
 132 
 
 PRtMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 86. The Helvetian War. 
 
 Helvetii proximi. sunt Germanis, qui trans RhSnum incolunt ; 
 reliquos Gallos virttito praecedunt, quod fere cotidianls proelils 
 cum Germanis contendunt. Sed undique loci natura continentur : 
 Qna ex parte est flumen Rhenus altissimus et latissimus ; altera 
 ex parte mons Jura altissimus ; tertia ex parte flumen Rhodanus 
 nostram provinciam ab Helvetils dividit. His de causis Helvetii 
 non late vagari potuerunt, nee facile finitimis bcUum inferre. 
 Itaque, cum essent homines bellandi cupidi, angustos se fines 
 habere arbitrabantur. His, rebus adducti, de finibus suis cum 
 omnibus copiis exire c6iistitijtBrunt,et optimam partem totius Galliae 
 oocupare. Itineribus omnino duobus domo exire poterant ; quorum 
 tlnum erat per Sequanos, angustum et difficile ; alterum per pro- 
 vinciam nostram, multo facilius. Caesar, cui pi;6vincia Gallia e5 
 anno decreta erat, audivit Helvetios per provinciam nostram iter 
 facere conari. Statirti ab urbe proficiscitur et in Galliam pervenit. 
 Ubi.de ejus adventu Helvetii certiores facti sunt, legates ad eum 
 mittunt ; sed Caesar negat se posse iter ulH per provinciam dare. 
 Relinquebatur una per Sequanos via. Mox Cfaesari rentlntiatur 
 Helvetios per agrum Sequanorum iter in Santonum fines facere, 
 qui non longe a provincia nostra absunt. , Intellegebat periculo 
 sum provinciao fore,' si homines bellicosi, populi Romani inimici, 
 provinciae fiuitimi essent. Ob eas causas in Italiam contendit; 
 duas ibi legiones conscribit, et tres ex hiberais educit ; cum .his 
 quinque legionibus in Galliam per AlpSs ire contendit. Helvetii 
 jam per foies Sequanorum suas copias tradflxerant, et in Aedu- 
 orum fin§s perVenerant, eorumque agrSs populabantur. Itaque 
 n§ omnes fortiinae sociorum consdijierentur, Caesar a castris pro- 
 fectus ad HelvStios pervSni^ Tres jam partes Helvetiorum fltlmen 
 Ararim transierant ; reliquos aggressus, magnam partem eorum 
 concidit, reliqui sese in proximas silvas abdiderunt. Hoc proelio 
 facto', ut reliquas copias consequi posset, pontem facit, atque ita 
 exercitum jpradQcit." Tum per multos dies Caesar Helv6ti6s inse- 
 quitui', novissimuraque agmen lacessit. ^.^_...^._^.:^^.^^^.^.^l^^^^^.^^^ 
 Tandem ut rei frilmentariae prospiceret^ iter Ab B[elv6ta& iter* 
 tit, atque ad bppidum Aeduorum maximum et cQpiosissimum Ire 
 -contendit. Helvetia Roman^a^ timoro p o rtorritoa^eaae efc '" 
 
 10 
 
 15 
 
 5-20 
 
 25 
 
 90 
 
 35 
 
 -ft sS' etistimabant. 
 
 Itaque, itinera converso, nostros Insequl fto 
 
 I • 
 
HRf it.— iRfepARAtORY REAfeiNCJ. 
 
 i3§ 
 
 laces^ro coeperunt. Post^pfei id animadvertit, Caesar copias 
 suas fei ;proxiinuni collem subducit, acieniquo instruit. Helvetii 
 iinped|tnl9iita in unum locum contulerunt ; ipsi sub primam nostram 10 
 aciem i?U6cesserunt. • Caesar, cohortatus suos, proeliuni commisit. 
 Bifli atqite acriter pugnaverunt. Sed cum diutius sustinere nds- 
 tro|um impetus non possent, 'Helvetii legates de deditione ad 
 CaepajF^m miserunt. Caesar Helvejliios in fines suos, unde profecti • 
 crirtti^ reverti jussit, et oppida vibSsque restituere. Helvetiorum 45 
 treeenta et sexaginta octo millia d«m6 exierant ; vix centuiu et 
 decern millia domum redierunt. ^/^^ — — — .-..-^^-..^:^-^-^--,-.^^-.:-..-^-::-,^^^- 
 
 N«— 1- Helvetii : Helvetia (the modem Switzerland) was reckoned part of GauL 
 '2. vlrtute t see note on 9, 2. 4. una ex parte t "on one side;" 4. altera t 
 "a second," but in line 12, alterum is " the othef;'' 6. provlnelam t since 118 
 B.C. the southern part of Gaul had been a Roman province. (Hence the modem name 
 Provense.) 8. cum esseilt i "being." 13, eo anx^ot 59 B.C. 14. deoreta 
 erat » see note on 6, 2. 15. urbe : that is, Rome. '%i. ulll t dative ; see Part 
 in., section 14. 18. rellnqnebatur : "there was left." 18. renuntlatur t 
 " word is brought" ; literally, "it is reported." 21. f ore i from mm; see Part HI , 
 section 41. 22. elsent i "should (or were to) be." 2^ ne consntnerentur i 
 see note on 24, 8. 28. pervenlt ad i "came up with." 80. In: takes the 
 accus., because motion int(f is implied. English would say " in." Compare line 40. 
 45. restltuere ; for they had burnt them down on leaving home. 
 
 36. The Fox and the Grapes. 
 
 Fame coacta vulpes alta in vinea 
 Uvam appetebat, summis saliens viribus ; - 
 
 Quam tangere ut non potuit, discedens ait : 
 . ** Nondum matOra est, nolo acerbam sQmere." ■" r 
 
 N.-2. summU, "all its" ; literally, "its greatest." 3. Quam: see note on 
 1, 5. 3. ut I "when," in which sense it is followed by the indicative.'' 4. acer- 
 bam : understand uvam. 
 
 ■/' -' 
 
 37. Sabstanoe and Shadow. 
 
 Per pontem frastum carnis, cum ferret canis, 
 Jjympharum in s|)ecul6 vidit simulacrum suum ; 
 Aliamque praedam ab altero ferri putans, 
 Eripere voluit ; verum docepta aviditas, "^ ^ 
 ^Et quern tenebat ore dimlsit cibum, 
 "Nee quem petSbat potuit ade5 attingere. 
 
 cedent cibum should be translated first ,' '«''■«• «» ««»• 
 
 / 
 
 .yjs 
 
. . 
 
 I|4 
 
 r.\ 
 
 ;; PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 38. The Fox and the Goat. 
 
 Cujn decidisset vulpSs in puteum Inscia, 
 Et altibre clauderetur raargine, 
 " Devenit hircus sitiens in eiftidem lt)cum ; 
 Simul rogavit, esset an dulcis li<iuor 
 Efecopiosus? Ilia fraudem moJieiTs : 
 -Descende, amice; tanta bonitas est aquae 
 Volup^ ut satiari non possit mea. 
 Immisit se barbatus'. Turn vulpecula 
 — r EvSsit puteo, nixa celsiS^cornibus, — - 
 
 , Hircumque clause liquib haerentem vado. 
 "" «* a 
 
 N.— 9. altlore margine « "by the aides^wh'ich were too high for her." The 
 
 Latin comparative often means " too." irTTTTi \ "U Mil l. Understand reapony 
 
 dii or dixii, which are often omitted in Latin. 10. clausd vado t " the deep- 
 f|enced pool." 
 
 ^ 39. Cupboard-Cove. 
 
 Donee eris felTx, multosnumerabis amicos ; 
 I Tempera si fuerint nubila, «olus eris. , 
 
 I Aspicis, ut veniant ad cattdida tecta columbae, 
 
 . Accipiat nuUSs sordida turris aves ? 
 
 Horrea Cormicae tendunt ad inania numquam ; 
 Ntlllus ad amissas ibit amicus opes. 1. 
 
 N.— 1. erlsi "you are"; literally, "you shall be.'i JSo, /wcriMt, "are"; liter- 
 ally, "• shall have been." Latin is far more exact than English in indicating the 
 relation in time of a principal and a dependent clause. 3. ut t "how"; with 
 the subjunctive of indirect question. 6. Iblt i "will come"; from co (Part IIL, 
 section 45). 
 
 40. The Circle of the Tear. 
 
 i, DiffQgere nives, redeunt jam grftmina campis 
 
 ■* . Arboribusque comag, 
 
 Frigora mitescijnfe-ZSphyris, y6r pr^rit aestas 
 
 Interitura, simul 
 Pomifer Autumnus frtlges effuderit, et mox 
 _^.^ „._ - gj.^jj^jj^ j.g(jm.j.it ijjers. ~r7-^"^*^^^ ^ ^ 
 
 N.— 1. DllTugere I for diyMflf«run«. (See Part IIL, section 2V, footnote 1.) 2. 
 comae I aJao aubject of fwtoiinf. 8. ver t ocous. 4. Interitura i " itself 
 
 \ 
 
 Jtf 
 
 doomed to perish"; literally, "about to perish." 4. slirtulT for «^ttf atq»*. 
 6. effuderit i futurt perfect; freely, " has," etc. ; see note on 39, 1. 
 
 M- 
 
 M^ 
 
 ■JtiEr- 
 

 \ • 
 
 
 ■ < ^: 
 
 
 ■ ,1» 
 
 er 
 
 .■• The 
 
 d 
 
 respon- 
 
 e"; liter- 
 ating the 
 n"; with 
 Part III., 
 
 M^ 
 
 )te 1.) 2. 
 t "itself 
 
 \ul atque. 
 
 PART II.— PREPARATORY RJEADINQ. 
 
 41. The Joys of Conntry life. 
 
 Beatus ille qui procul negotils, 
 
 Ufc prisca gens morfcalium, 
 Patema rura bSbus exercet suls, 
 , Solutus o^ni faenore, 
 Neque excitatur classico miles trucl 
 NequeHhorret iratum mare, • 
 
 Forumque vltat et superba civium 
 Potentiorum llniina. 
 
 136 
 
 ?; lu u ' '^^^ ^°'"'"' P°*'« °"«" '^<'^ o' the early simple ages of the 
 
 world as the happiest. 4. faenore . he has nothingto do with the money-lenders • 
 arf we might say with the stock-market. 6. excitatur ,, the subject is still qui. with 
 which miles, "as a soldier," is in apposition. 6. horret, etc. : he is no trader by 
 sea in search of wealth. 7. Forum, etc. : he is no politician or office-seeker. 
 
 42. The Death of the Pet Sparrow. 
 
 »«.4 
 
 *^^. 
 
 Lflgete, 6 Venergs CupTdingsque ; 
 Passer niortuus est meae jjuellae, 
 Passer, deliciae meae puellae, 
 Quem pliis ilia oculls suis amabat. 
 Nam mellltus erat, suamque norat 
 Ipsam tarn bene quam puella matrem ; 
 Nee scse a gremio illius movebat. 
 Sed circumsiliens modo hue, modo illQc, 
 Ad solani dominam usque pipilabat ; 
 Qui nunc it. per iter ten'ebricosum 
 lUuc unde negant redire quemquam. 
 At vobls male sit, malae tenebrae 
 Orel, .quad omnia bella devoratis ; 
 Tam bellum niihi passerem absti^listis. 
 O factum male, io miselle passer, 
 Tua nunc opera, meae puellae 
 Flendo turgiduli rubent ocelli. 
 
 10 
 
 15 
 
 "US' 
 
 N.-2. meae pueUae i "my ladj's.» 4. 111« i "she." 4. oculls i abl of 
 
 6. puella t the reference is general, not to the puellae of line 2. Understand novU 
 fK,m „o^«e. 10 per. "along." 11. negant quemquam. "they sa^o 
 one. m Att now ; mtrkmg ft midden outburat^iHWHioB. Hh faellaT from" 
 5e«t«.adJ. 17. turgiduli rubent. "are swollen and red." Notice theTr^uZ 
 
 diminutives m the concluding lines, to indicate tender sympathy. . . 
 
 "-:■■■ .•■ ■ f/'" ... . . 
 
/ 
 
 136 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 e%.. 
 
 PART III. 
 
 INFLECTION. 
 
 I. PARADIGMS OF INFLECTION. 
 
 (A) THE N(>UN.^ 
 
 
 1. First 
 
 Declenglon. 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 PLUBAL. 
 
 Nominative. 
 
 mensa, r. 
 
 raensao 
 
 Genitive. 
 
 mensae 
 
 , mensarum 
 
 Dative. 
 
 mensae 
 
 Miensis 
 
 Acciisative. 
 
 mensanr 
 
 mSnsas 
 
 Vocative. 
 
 mensa 
 
 mensae 
 
 Ablative. 
 
 mensa 
 
 - Bxensis 
 
 2. Second Doolenslon. 
 
 f-i 
 
 1 •'-;;^ 
 
 ■^. 
 
 A 
 
 Nominative. 
 
 Genitive. 
 
 Dative.: 
 
 Accusative. 
 
 Vocative. 
 
 Ablative. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 servus,- M. 
 
 servi 
 
 servo . 
 
 servuni" 
 
 serve 
 
 servo 
 
 PLURAL." 
 
 servi 
 
 servorum 
 
 servis 
 
 servos 
 
 servi 
 
 servis 
 
 1. Generally speakinfr, the nominative represents a noun as subject, the accusative 
 as direct object ; the Kcnitive denotes the relation expressed by of; the dative (the 
 cttse of the indirect object) denotes the relation expressed by to or for, and the abla- 
 ' ' rt-tto"v t)oali»ii in «9edtn<t«peotftddreflgr- — 
 
3. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Nora, puer, m. 
 Gen. piieii 
 Dat. puero 
 Ace. puerum 
 Voc. puer 
 -AM. puero 
 
 PLURAL. ^_1^ _ 
 
 iV^w». puerl 
 Oen. puerorum 
 Dat. pueife 
 Ace. pueroa 
 Voc. puert 
 Ahl. pueris 
 
 PAHT IIL—PARADIOMS. 
 Seconi^ Dteolenslon {continued). 
 
 ' ,i-^^^T#. ., 
 
 vir, M. 
 
 viri 
 " viro 
 
 virum 
 
 vir 
 . viro 
 
 ager, m. 
 agri 
 .Agro 
 agrum 
 ager 
 agro 
 
 templum, n. 
 templi 
 templd 
 templum ^ 
 templum 
 templo ^ 
 
 viri 
 
 virorum 
 
 viria 
 
 viroa 
 
 viil 
 
 viils 
 
 agil 
 
 agrorum 
 
 agrw 
 
 agroa 
 
 agrI 
 
 agria 
 
 templa 
 
 templorum 
 
 templia 
 
 templa 
 
 templa 
 
 templls 
 
 4. TliJrd 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Nom. rex, m. 
 Gen. regia 
 Dot. regi 
 Ace. regem 
 Voc. rSx 
 . Ahl. rgge 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nom. regSa 
 Gen. regum 
 Dat. regibua 
 Ace. regea 
 Voe. regea 
 AU. rSgibua 
 
 Declension-Masculine and Feminine Nonn^ 
 
 ISUI, M. 
 
 consulia 
 
 conauli 
 
 conaulem 
 
 consul 
 
 consule 
 
 consulea 
 
 conaulum 
 
 consulibua 
 
 consulea 
 
 consulea 
 
 consulibua 
 
 'v 
 * ' 
 
 milea, u. 
 
 militia 
 
 mllitl 
 
 militem 
 
 milea 
 
 milite 
 
 militia 
 
 militum 
 
 militibus 
 
 militea 
 
 militSa 
 
 rnilitibiuf 
 
 pater, m. 
 
 patris 
 
 patri 
 
 patrem 
 
 pater 
 
 patrti 
 
 patrSs 
 patrum 
 patribua , 
 patrea / 
 patrSei 
 patribus 
 
 m. 
 
&-' 
 
^Hk 
 ^*%, 
 
 % 
 
tCi 
 
 138 
 
 ■ ^ ■' \ 
 
 SINOULAB. \ 
 
 Nom. hom5, m. 
 
 Oen. hpminis 
 
 Da*.' homini 
 
 A(x. hominem 
 
 Vqc. homo 
 
 Abl. homine 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nam. homines 
 
 Oen. homjinum 
 
 Dat. homhiibus 
 
 Ace. homines , 
 
 Voc. homines 
 
 AU. hominibus 
 
 > 
 
 PKIMAKY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 hiems, f. 
 hiemis 
 \hieml, 
 liiemem 
 kiems 
 Hieme 
 1,;^" ■■■-.. 
 
 f. 
 
 Memes 
 
 hiemum _ 
 
 hiemibus 
 
 hiemes 
 
 hiemes 
 
 hiemibus 
 
 virttis, p. 
 
 virttltis 
 
 virtati 
 
 virtutem 
 
 virttis 
 
 virtute - 
 
 virtutes 
 
 virttitum 
 
 virtutibus 
 
 virtHbes 
 
 virtatSs 
 
 virtutibus 
 
 regie, V.' 
 regionis 
 regioni ' 
 regioneoi 
 regis ■' 
 regione 
 
 regionSs 
 
 regionum 
 
 regionibus 
 
 regiones 
 
 regiones 
 
 regionibus 
 
 Thir^ Dieolenalon — Kenter Nouns. 
 
 I 
 
 SIITOULAB. 
 
 Nom. noihen, N. 
 (}en^ nominis 
 Dat^ nomini 
 Ae$. nomen 
 Voc. nSmen 
 Abl* nomine 
 
 PXURAL. • 
 
 Nom. ndmina 
 Oen. ndminum 
 nSminibus 
 
 cotpus, N. 
 
 corporis 
 
 eorpori 
 
 corpus 
 
 corpus 
 
 corpore 
 
 opus, N. 
 operis 
 operi ^ 
 opus /* 
 opus V 
 
 ^ z 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 Dot. 
 Ace; nomina 
 ndmina 
 
 nominibus 
 
 8IN0ULAB. 
 
 Nom. urbs, f i 
 
 Dat. urbl 
 Ace. urbem 
 Voc. uvhs 
 
 corpora i; opera 
 
 corpKru^ijir' • operum 
 
 corpori^us openbus 
 
 corpora opera 
 
 cof^ra opera 
 
 co'rporiBus operibus 
 
 6. ThljBd Deolenilon— I-K«ma. 
 
 !l^is, w. 
 Ign^ :„ 
 Ignl 
 Ignem 
 Tgnin 
 
 ntlbSs, F. 
 nflbis |tl 
 ndbl 
 ndbem 
 nflbBa :. 
 
 iter, N, 
 
 Mneris 
 
 itinerl 
 
 iter 
 
 iter 
 
 itinere 
 
 itinera 
 
 itinerum 
 
 itineribus 
 
 itinera 
 
 itinera 
 
 itineribus 
 
 mare, N. 
 maris i__ 
 marl 
 ihare 
 
 \ . 
 
 AU. urbe 
 
 Ignl« 
 
 nabe 
 
 mail 
 
PLUHAJti. 
 
 Nmn. 1^68 
 Gen. urbium 
 I^' urbibus 
 
 Foe. urbgs 
 ^Wv urbibus 
 
 : - __i, SINGULAR. 
 
 Nom: 'ftHctuByM. 
 e'en., J frflctas 
 -Oaf. frQctulS 
 ^cCi frilctum 
 ypGf ;?fructu8 
 •4W. fracta 
 
 SINOUl^. 
 
 Nam. rgs, f. 
 
 Ccn. rel 
 
 Dat. rel :,>^ 
 
 i-em 
 
 r6s «I 
 
 re 
 
 -4cc. 
 Toe. 
 
 PABT IIL— PAHADIQMS. 
 
 IgnS» 
 
 Ignium 
 
 ignibus 
 
 Ignes* 
 
 Ignes 
 
 ignibus 
 
 nabSs M 
 
 niibium > 
 
 nubibus 
 
 «Qbes^ 
 
 nabgs 
 
 nubibus 
 
 7, Fourth Declension, 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 frttctOs 
 
 frClctuum 
 
 frtictibus 
 
 frttcttla 
 
 frflctOs 
 
 fractibus 
 
 SINOULAB. 
 
 conja, N. 
 
 comus 
 
 cpriia 
 
 comti 
 
 co^Tia 
 
 coma 
 
 8. Fifth Declension, 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 rSrum 
 
 rSbua 
 
 rSs 
 
 ■res""^' 
 
 rebus 
 
 SINOULAB. 
 
 diss, M. 
 diSI 
 diSI 
 -0 diem 
 digs 
 
 maria ' 
 
 marium 
 
 maribus 
 
 maria 
 
 maria 
 
 maribus 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 comua 
 
 comuum 
 
 comibus 
 
 comua 
 
 cornua 
 
 comibus 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 digs 
 
 digrum 
 
 digbus 
 
 dito 
 
 digs 
 digbus 
 
 9. Nouns Irregular In Declension. 
 
 139 
 
 '-vC<r^'»'>i- 
 
 (The form, in parentheses sh^dd be avoided in roriting Latin; the 
 fonns tn xtalics are scarcely cla'mcal.) ' 
 
 SINGULAR. " 
 
 Norn, vis, F. 
 ^en. , (vU) 
 Bat. (vi) ' 
 ^ce. viip 
 Voc. » 
 
 AH. n ' 
 
 - PLURAL. 
 
 virgs 
 vlriuiu 
 vlribus ^ 
 ylrfis v" 
 Mrgs 
 viribuH 
 
 1. Tht amiMtlvo plural of t^teni. i. alw wrltt.n urbU. nQbf,, 
 
 ^nii. 
 
 fi 
 
 -^ 
 
 •^- 
 
» /: 
 
 m 
 
 8IN0ULAB. 
 
 Nom. deus, M. » 
 
 Oen. dei -^ 
 
 Da*. de6 V v 
 
 ^cc. deum 
 
 Voc. deuflt 
 
 ^61. deft 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 JSTowi. di (del, dil) 
 
 Otn, . deorum, detlm 
 Dot, dis (dels, diia) 
 
 Foe. dl (del, dil) 
 AU. dl8 (dels, dils) 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Nom. domus, f. * 
 
 Oen. domtls {locative domi) 
 
 Dot. domul (domo) 
 
 Ace. domum 
 
 Voc. domus 
 
 Ahl. domo (domfl) 
 
 ftltMART LATIN BOOfc 
 
 -i'y 
 
 boves - > «f 
 
 bourn (bovuiri) 
 
 bubus (bobus) 
 
 boves 
 
 boves 
 
 bflbus (bobus) 
 
 Juppiter, M. 
 Jovis 
 , Jovl * 
 Jovem 
 Juppiter 
 Jove 
 
 .t?y 
 
 '^ 
 
 r 
 
 PLTJRAL. 
 
 Nom. domtls 
 
 Oen. domuum (domSrum) 
 
 JJat. domibus 
 
 Jta* domos (domtls) 
 
 Voc. domtlB 
 
 AU. domibus 
 
 BispHUica, gen; reifrilhlicae, and jHsjHrwndum, gen. jfln*)flrcwuif, 
 are really compound words, consisting of a noun and an adjective 
 in agreement, both of which are declined. UeapfcUica is often, 
 and ju^urandiim sometimes, written as two words. 
 
 Pater/amiliaa or paterfamUitui, and mdteifamilids or mat&^ 
 famUiae, (literally, the father, or mother, of a household), have 
 ftnly fh a fity». p arf., jwiIm- and mdter. declined. Oocaaionall» 
 
 famUuli^im Th found in the plural The form familiO» is an o 
 genitiyo singular. 
 
 ^ 
 
PART HI.— PARADIGMS. 
 
 (B) THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 10. First and Second Deolenalona. 
 
 141 
 
 f^ 
 
 SINOULAK. aiASCULINB. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nom. 
 Gen. 
 
 Voei 
 
 Hber 
 
 llberl 
 
 llbero 
 
 llberum 
 
 liber 
 
 libera 
 
 llberi 
 
 llberorum 
 
 llberls 
 
 llberos 
 
 llberl 
 
 llberls 
 
 FBMININB. 
 
 b^na 
 
 I* 
 
 bonae 
 bonae 
 bonam 
 bona 
 bon& - 
 
 bonae 
 
 bonHnun 
 
 bonllB 
 
 bonfis 
 
 bonae 
 
 bonis 
 
 libera 
 llberae 
 llberae 
 llberam 
 
 z^ * 
 
 llberae 
 
 llberftrum 
 
 llberis 
 
 llberfts 
 
 llberae 
 
 libera 
 
 NEUTER. 
 
 bonum 
 
 boni > 
 
 boi^iS 
 
 bonui^ 
 
 bonuii\ 
 
 bond*' 
 
 bona 
 
 bonSrum 
 
 bonis 
 
 bona 
 
 bona 
 
 bonis 
 
 llberum 
 
 )ert 
 llbero 
 Uberum 
 llberum 
 llbero 
 
 libera 
 
 llberOrum 
 
 llberis 
 
 libera / 
 
 libera 
 
 llberls 
 
■■"■■•'.■■." 
 
 t 
 
 142 • PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 # 
 
 
 ■mi "" 
 
 PLURAL. ' , - • :; 
 
 ^ 
 
 , Nom. ae^ aegrae 
 
 aegra . . * , 
 
 Qm. aegrCrum^" aegi-arum 
 
 aegrorum * \ 
 
 iX»*. aegris #* _' . aegns 
 ;* Aootf aegros ' " aegrSs -. 
 
 a^gris 
 
 aegra " • ; 
 
 :lrr -/.TodA ae^ri , aegrae 
 
 aegra " . • 
 
 ' 4W* * aegris^ , ' aegns 
 
 ■..■."■■,..-*■' .'■»■■-*■' 
 
 aegrls 
 
 ^> ,11. TMrd Declension.' 
 
 
 ■ SINQULA». MASCULINK. Jf'EMININB. , 
 
 NEUTER. 
 
 '' 'AT'jn.MiA'" it.AA«t BiViHn 
 
 acre ', — - — 
 
 -jfici^ aoer «on» 
 
 ? ^%n. :. ftcria ftcris V • 
 
 ficris 
 
 JDtt*.^ ftcri • fieri ^' ,. 
 
 fieri, ' > 
 
 • i4cc, ftcrem . ^ ficrem 
 
 ficre ; ' ' 
 
 - ' ' Foe. acer ^ Sens 
 
 ficr^ . . |s. • ..■■'''; 
 
 •AM. sm ' '' ' fieri ", 
 
 * • % - ' ■ - 
 
 fieri • ■' 
 
 * • 
 
 * ■■ PLURAL. ■'•;-'' 
 
 
 ^ Nom. Seres ficr§8 n 
 
 «• -. ■ . • . - "^ 
 \ . WW. ftcrium ftcrium 
 
 ficria , r . > 
 &crium ._ - 
 
 >» f Dflrf. , ftcribus ficribus •* 
 
 ftcribus " ' ^ , 
 
 i4cc» J ilcres^ - ftcresV . 
 
 ftcria ''^ , ^ ' f 
 
 Fbc»\ 'v ftcrgs » acres-* 
 
 acriar 
 ftcribus ^ 
 
 ^ ilfti. *^ ftcribus . ■ ficribus 
 
 • *BINO. MAS, AND FKM. NEUTER. MAS. AND PBM. NEOtBR. 
 
 Nom. fortis forte felix 
 
 
 fSlix . ■ ^■■, 
 
 * Citl.. fortis fortis 1 fglicis* 
 
 
 fSUcis . . ,, p. ' 
 
 Da*, fortl iorti * ffillcl 
 
 ■ 
 
 fSl^cI , * 
 
 Jfoji fortem, forte ", ffillcend 
 
 i 
 
 i* 
 
 faix 
 
 lii» fQrtis * forte . fsllx" 
 
 
 -*f6ll» • . 
 
 Jik, lorH . ♦ fortt ffillcl 
 
 ^fsnci 
 
 ■;v.^.;'^:/ -PLURAL.. 
 
 • 
 
 ' Noni, fortSs fortia ' fellcBB 
 
 ftllcia • • , . 
 
 (Jen. fortium fortium ffilicilim 
 
 4. felicium > 
 
 Jh$, fortibua . fortibus felloibus 
 
 • fsllcibus J- 
 
 '-'V'^-r -ili^" idrtli^T ^ fortia' • ;■ ,_fSlloes ' . 
 
 -^J'^ ffillcia ■ ^ - ^ :^ • . 
 fellcia * .♦ *V 
 
 > AM. fortil^tw }. lortibuB ffillcibus 
 
 fellcibus 
 
 .1. The «oooMtive pluml ia »1m written deryi, /ortit, etc., 
 
 (oompAre Motion 6). 
 
 . ^ ■ * , ■:--, y^ - -p . .■'^ 
 
 -r-; i% ,. > ■ ---; 
 
 j - " -. . ,-. - "^ ^ f^ , _ ^ 
 
 ■ ' .\l-"" ' " i."'*''-'^'. ^* "" '''■"^""• 
 
 ! ' ' ' — • ""T — "^ — 
 
 ii 
 
 1 
 
 
PART IIL— PARADIGMS, 
 
 .12. Declension of «omparatlTes and Sape'riattve.. 
 
 BOrO. MAS. AND FEM. NEUTER. 
 
 Norn, fortior fortius 
 
 Gen. f ortioris J fortioris 
 
 I>at. fortiori f fortiori 
 
 Ace. fortiorem t fortius v 
 
 Voc. fortior fortius 
 
 AU. fortiore 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 fortior© 
 
 MAS. AND FBM. NEUTER. 
 ^ r ^- pliis 
 
 *,|)luris . * 
 
 -■-■■' v • . ' 
 
 pltls . ■ 
 
 i ■ ■ ' ■ ^ 
 
 (plUre) 
 
 143 
 
 ■> 1 
 
 Norn. fortiSrSs' fortiora \ plOrSs 
 
 Gen. forti^ruiQ fortiorum ' pl|irium 
 
 Dat. fortioribus V fortioribus plttribus 
 
 'Ace.^ fdrtiofSs . fortiSra plflrS^ 
 
 <•, 
 
 ? 
 
 plOra 
 
 pltiriura 
 
 pliiribus 
 
 Fo., fortiar^ • forti^;; ^ ^, ^V ^ 
 Abl. fortionbus fprtioribus plOriWSv -|laribl 
 
 <^Pi^res,^ compoiind of pirns, is dedined^^^ ^ 
 
 (setSri^v'''" "' " "^' ?• ""' '^"^ ^*" decli,,ed like f^us 
 
 • *: 
 
 \. . 
 
 13. Comparison iof kiyeetlT^g. 
 
 1 »? 
 
 fi^;r*S'Z'"*r°*"'^^5'?'"»t»'«'~'>y «hanging the endiiur 
 rimus. ' *''9'f "*^^r,ac$rnmus ; miaer, mtaer- 
 
 rVV^me foUo^g adj^v« >« «^rteiguU, in their oom- 'l 
 
 ■.V ■■■, t .'.r* ,•■■:♦ . , A . - , 
 
 ""•"^— * . : ■.,''■'.■.:■■, . ..' » . 
 
 parison 
 
 1. See further, section eo. 
 
 I * ' l ii g i I ■ » ■ 
 
 T*- 
 
 •^' 
 
 «^' 
 
 ^- 
 
 • < - 
 
 
 fw 
 
sy* 
 
 ■ f- ' 
 
 144 
 
 PfelMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 ■■•■ ■ ,■» 
 
 ■ -.,1 (*„.'tk-*| .. 
 
 |x>nus 
 
 idlvea ' 
 
 mSgnus 
 
 parvus 
 
 malus 
 
 multus 
 
 juvenis 
 
 fgnex . 
 
 mattirus 
 
 > a. 
 
 JLc^ extern» 
 
 - Am^t Inf^tus 
 
 '..l-r^^ posterns 
 
 <4^WiC superus* 
 
 melipp - 
 divitior, ditioc 
 major • 
 liiinop' 
 pejor 
 
 plus (neut.) ' 
 jQnior 
 . senior 
 
 citerior / 
 
 deterior ♦ 
 
 i^iterior 
 
 prior 
 
 propior 
 
 Glterior 
 
 exterior 
 
 Inferior 
 
 posterior 
 
 srfperior 
 
 optlnius * ~ jk 
 divitissimus, .dlti»lni 
 maximus 
 
 minimus * ' 
 
 pessimus 
 pliirimus ( \ 
 (minimus nattl) 
 ' (maximus n^tu) 
 maturrimus i^ > 
 citimu9 ' '_ V 
 deterritj^sfi ^^ 
 
 intunus 1 * 
 primus 
 proximus 
 ultimus 
 
 extremus, extimus 
 Infimiis, imus 
 postrSmHS, postumus 
 supremus, summus 
 
 lUS 
 
 14. Irregralar Declension. 
 
 SING. MASC. 
 
 Nom. unus 
 
 Otn, tlnlud 
 
 Dot. tfol 
 
 A^ Unum 
 
 1^ toe 
 
 and 
 
 FEM. NEUT. MA8C. FIM. NEUT.' 
 
 una linum neuter 'neutra neutrum 
 
 flnlus tlniiJis neutrfus neutrius neutrius, 
 
 tlnl tlnl neutrl neutri neutrl 
 
 anam flnum neutrum neutram neutrum 
 
 .to|k_ . , finum , -^ ■ ■- - . ■,■■■■ '—■-,■ -' 
 
 tlnft tlno neutrS neutrft ^il*^!^ 
 
 JVom. tlnl ' flnae tlna neutrl neutrae neutra 
 
 flbn. dnarum flnftrum flnorum neutrorum neutrftrum neutrdrum 
 J^erf. Onls flnis tlnls neutris neutris neutrfa 
 —-Jim*-^-- toos ttnfts Una neutrSs neutrfis necrtsH , : 
 /;■ Vtt6. Onl ■ (Inae tlna ' \ ■/ ■■■M'-*^* '" 
 
 AUT Unfa tlnto tinfa neutris \ netttrli ifttrta 
 
 The following adjeotivee of the first and sei^ond deelensions have 
 
 ■"*>"*. 
 
 L^ 
 
PART III.— PARADIGMS. 
 
 145 
 
 their genitive singular in -?t*»,i and their dative sinffular in f. in all 
 genders. „^Jj^*^ . 
 
 [«-tUt^«/*.4vtralius, a, ud r^^ tSftfs, a, um Mi^ alter, em, eni4 '^ 
 y»drrU^ nOllus, a, um (^ alius, a, um.AW^^'neuter, tra, trum * 
 crvvi2^ solus, a, um (^-^.jl^ .tinus, a, um uter, tra, trum iX^ ^ 
 
 (N.K—AUm has m the genitive singular, alhui; in the dative 
 singular,- oZm. The genitive alius is, however, seldom found 
 altering, ot m tl^e possessive sense, cUiemis, a, um, being used'- 
 instead.) ' > ***6 ""^^ , 
 
 ^ 15. lilst of Numerals. # 
 
 ^ 
 
 CARDINAIS. 
 
 1. tinus, a, Um, orie 
 
 2. du-o, -ae, -o, ttvo 
 
 3. tres, tria, three 
 ' 4../<jtiattuor, /oifrr 
 
 .5: quinque, etc.-, 
 6. sex . •• , 
 
 7;-septein \' 
 
 8. octo 
 
 9. noveh/ '. 
 
 10. decem- 
 
 11. undecim^ ' 
 / 1^. duodecim 
 
 13. tredecim 
 
 14. ijuattuordecim 
 
 15. qimidecim 
 
 16. sedecim ...) 
 
 17. septeWecim -1' ' 
 
 18. duodevJtointI» "' 
 i^%. flndgviga^tl^ 
 
 " 20. viginti 
 ' „j f Onus et vlfehitl 
 •ivlgihtl ClnusX 
 ,28. duodetrtgintft' 
 V 29. dndStrlgintft* 
 
 ORDINALS. ' ., 
 
 "primua, Jirst 
 
 secundus, second (also alter) 
 tertius, third . . 
 
 quartus, /oitrffe -. 
 quintus, etc. 
 
 s« 
 
 sextUa . '• 
 
 Septimus . fc 
 Qctavus , ;;v 
 
 nonus 
 decimus 
 "undecimus 
 duodocimus 
 tertius decimus ' 
 _ quartus decimus ' 
 quintus decimus 
 sextus decimus 
 
 7 septindus decimus 
 duodSvIcSsimUs * ^ 
 tlndfivIcSeimuS" • ' • 
 
 ,:' vlcSsimnfl -- , 
 
 ■ primus et vToisimjoia' 
 • vIcSsimus primus 
 ' duodgtiicSsimus ■ -. 
 ' tind6ti1c6simuai 
 
 '5 
 
 1. In poetry the grenitlve often ^ „ 
 
 iuier thu seema to have beeiKthe rule in 
 
 With 
 
 mt in -ttM, not in -lut, with nUmy of these 
 *""""'" aswBll 
 
 WHJds. 
 
 
 r 
 
 ^. 
 
 4f» » 
 
 » » 
 
 » .. 
 
1*46 
 
 PRlMABY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 •-/" 
 
 » ^-— J*"" 
 
 J^ 
 
 30, 
 40, 
 50, 
 60. 
 
 70. 
 
 80. 
 
 90, 
 
 100, 
 
 401. 
 
 .200, 
 300, 
 400. 
 500. 
 600. 
 700. 
 
 . 800. 
 900. 
 
 nooo. 
 
 2000. 
 
 CARDINALS. J 
 
 ti^gintar 
 qutuk^gintS. 
 qulnquaginta 
 sexaginta 
 septuagintll • 
 octoginta 
 
 nonaginta J 
 
 centum 9 
 
 /centum tinus 
 I centum fet tinus 
 ducenti, ae, a 
 trecenti, ae,a . 
 quadringenti, ae, a" 
 quingentl, ae, a 
 sescenti, ae, a 
 septmgenti, ae, a 
 octingenti, ap, a 
 nongenti, ae, a 
 mllle 
 duo millia (milia) 
 
 ORDINALS. 
 
 tilcSsimus 
 
 quadragesimus 
 
 quinquagesimus 
 
 sexagesimuB 
 
 septuagesimus 
 
 octotfeshnus 
 
 ^<l 
 
 ''"\. 
 
 ^nonagesimus 
 centesimus , • 
 
 centesimi^ primus 
 cenfesimus et piimiis 
 ducentesimuB 
 trecentesimus 
 quadringentesimus 
 quingentesimus 
 sescentesimus ' t 
 septingentesiniua 
 octingentesimus 
 nongentesimus 
 mlllesimus •> 
 bis mlllesimus 
 
 16. Deolenslon of Numerals. 
 
 .5:-. ■,--., 
 
 s. 
 
 '» 
 
 MASO. ^ 
 
 FEM» 
 
 NBU^. 
 
 Ml AND F. 
 
 NEW. 
 
 NEUT. ' 
 
 N&m. 
 
 duo 
 
 duae 
 
 duo 
 
 trgs 
 
 tria' 
 
 miUia . 
 
 Gen. 
 
 duSrum 
 
 duarum 
 
 duorum 
 
 trium 
 
 trium 
 
 millium- 
 
 * Dat. 
 
 duobus 
 
 duabus 
 
 duobus 
 
 tribus 
 
 tribus 
 
 mlllibus 
 
 ,« Ace. 
 
 duos, duo 
 
 duas 
 
 duo 
 
 tres 
 
 tria 
 
 milliii 
 
 Voo. 
 
 duo 
 
 tluao 
 
 duo 
 
 tres 
 
 tria 
 
 millia 
 
 .--Aih- 
 
 "^duobus 
 
 duabus 
 
 duobus 
 
 tribus 
 
 tribus 
 
 mlllibus 
 
 .6 declension of tlntt;}, see section 14. 
 
 e hundreds, from dticentl to ndngentl, are declined' like the 
 of bonua, section 10. ^ \ 
 
 AH the other cardinal numerals afe indeclinable. 
 
 The ordinal numerals are all declined like> bonus, section 10, 
 
 %f 
 
 uxuuptTitfef, for wmon fiee s66tion 14, 
 
 y 
 
 ■6S"; 
 
 -'■ ''SS^, 
 
 :X- 
 
 ,'?^ 
 ^ 
 
V 
 
 PART III. — PARADIGMS. 
 
 147 
 
 '■'' '■..■> •'■■ ■'•;■';:■; ■■:'.;' (O) the adverb. - - ''-'r/f\'yX---^-... 
 
 17. Formation from Adjjictlvos, and Comparison. ^ 
 
 I. Adverbs are regularly formed from adjectives in the foUowinff 
 
 (a) In the positive, by changing the ending of the Renitive 
 Buigular of adjectives of the first anA second declensions to Tof 
 adjectives of the third declension to -iier (or, in a few «^es? to, 
 
 «/S ^" *^^ comparative, by taking the neuter accusative singular 
 of the comparative of the adjective, ihat is, by changing -(yr of the 
 comparative of th^ adjective to ^: ^ ^ ? 
 
 (c) In the superlative, by changing -m of the superlative of the 
 adjective to -e. ., <• - ,\ 
 
 For examples, see Lesson JjII., page 76. 
 
 4,,.\- 
 
 "^^^^ 
 
 «,«^J;,i? ^^'^y ,^^«^« the accusative singular neutor, or the ablative 
 singular, IS used .as an adverb ; e.^. ; * 
 
 ADJECTIVE. 
 
 ' multus , 
 facilis 
 subitum 
 cr§ber 
 
 ADVERB. 
 
 multuiji 
 facile 'U 
 subito 
 crebrS 
 
 ADJECTIVE. 
 
 plarimus 
 primus .-' 
 certus ' 
 Gnus 
 
 ADVERB. 
 
 plurimum 
 pnmum 
 certo 
 tins, 
 
 ,111. The following are irregular in formation or comparison : ' 
 
 bene 
 
 parum • 
 
 [magnopere] 
 din 
 
 soepe 
 
 18. First Person. 
 
 SINOUIiAE. 
 
 N<ym,. ego 
 * Qen. mei 
 Z>a*. mihi 
 
 Vot. 
 
 V 
 
 melius 
 v\ minus 
 
 magis 
 
 diatius . V ? 
 saepius "'^ ^ 
 
 (P) THE PRONOUN. 
 19. Second Porson* 
 
 "??• 
 
 ^W. me 
 
 
 ■\;:' 
 
 optimS 
 
 minime 
 
 maxime 
 
 diutissimS 
 
 saepissimg 
 
 20. Third 
 Person Befleicivo. 
 
 sibi 
 se (sSsS) 
 
 sS (s6s6) 
 
 ijgr 
 
il 
 
 148 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 PLUBAL. . . - !. 
 
 . '^ - ■' ) ■ : ' r. 
 
 N\m- nos v6s 
 
 Oen. nostrdm, nostn vestrum, yestri- sui 
 
 'Dot. nobis vobis - ^ sibi 
 
 Ace. nos i ^ Mr®8i ^e (sese) 
 
 Abl. nobis , ^ ' vobis | sS (sese) 
 
 :-i: 
 
 i^ 
 
 21. Possessive Pi^ononns. 
 
 :*: 
 
 ._„meus, a, um, my, mine noster, nostra, nostrum, oiir, ours-. 
 
 tuus, a, um, your, yours vester, vestra, vestrum, your, yours 
 , suus, a, um, his, her, . suus, a, um, their^ tJieirs 
 ' hers, its 
 
 Tliese are all declined like adjectives of the first and second 
 , declensions, section 10, except that the vocative singular masculine 
 of m£us is ml, rarely meus. , 
 
 A- 
 
 22. Tlilrd Personal» and Oemonstrative Pronoan. 
 
 la, he, she, it, etc. ; that. " 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 MASCULINE. 
 
 FEMININE. 
 
 NEXTTER. Vl ^ 
 
 Nom. 
 
 is 
 
 ea 
 
 id ; 
 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 
 ejus 
 ei 
 
 ejus 
 ei 
 
 ejus 
 ei ^ - 
 
 Ace. ' 
 
 eum 
 
 earn 
 
 idf ■ ^'^: 
 
 Abl. 
 
 • 
 
 eo , •. 
 
 ea 
 
 eo 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 Nam. 
 
 ei, ii 
 
 eae 
 
 ea '. - M 
 
 Gen. 
 
 eorum 
 
 earum * 
 
 eorum 1 
 
 Dat. 
 
 " eis, iis ; 
 
 eis, iis 
 
 eis, iis • 1 
 
 Ace: 
 Abl. 
 
 eos 
 eis, iis 
 
 eas * 
 
 ■Mk 
 
 eis, lis '^• 
 
 e» ' •- - ii 
 eis, iis ; 1 
 
 c? 
 
 #- 
 
 % 
 
 ^ ~- 
 
 -tl 
 
''■ PART III. — PARADlGMa 
 23. Demongtratlve Pronouns. 
 
 Ulc, this, nie, that. 
 
 149 
 
 SING. MASC. 
 
 Norn, hic 
 Gen. . htijus 
 
 'Dat.^ huic 
 Ace. hunc 
 
 .AU. ||6c 
 
 FEM. 
 
 haec 
 
 hujus 
 
 huic 
 
 hanc 
 
 hac 
 
 NEUT. 
 
 Iioc 
 hujus 
 huic 
 hoc 
 h8o _ 
 
 MASC. 
 
 ille 
 illiUs 
 illi 
 ilium 
 
 ma 
 
 FEM. 
 
 ilia 
 
 illlus 
 
 iUl 
 
 illani 
 
 ilia 
 
 f 
 
 na( 
 
 NEUT. 
 
 illud 
 
 illius 
 
 illi 
 
 illud 
 
 Old 
 
 PLUBAL. 
 
 Norn, hi , ^'' hae Haec illi fllfte ilia 
 
 Gen. horum harum horum illorum illarum illorum 
 
 Dat. his his his illis illis ilUs 
 
 Ace. hos . , ha» /haec illos illas ilia 
 
 Abl. his hisr ~'Yhia illis iUis illfc 
 
 ^The pronoun iste, a, tid, that of yours, is declined exactly like 
 
 Ipse, -self. 
 
 Idem, the same. 
 
 SING. MASC. 
 
 Norn-, ipse 
 
 Cfen. ipsius 
 
 -Dorf. ipsi . 
 
 Ace. ipsum ipsam 
 
 Abl. ipso ipsa 
 
 FEM. 
 
 ipsa 
 
 ipsius 
 
 ipsi 
 
 NEUT. 1|asc. 
 ipsum idem 
 
 FEM. NEUT. 
 
 eadem idem 
 
 ipsius ejusdem ejusdem ejusdem 
 
 ipsi eidem , eidem eidem 
 
 ipsum eundem eandem idem 
 
 ipso modern eadem eodem 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nom. ipsi 
 
 ipsae ipsa \^^^^ eaedem eadem 
 Gen. ipsSrum ipsSxum ipsorum eorundem earundem eorundem 
 Dat. ipsis 
 
 AMi ipsos 
 
 ■^ Ahl. ipsJB 
 
 ipsis 
 ipsas^ 
 ipsis ' 
 
 ipsis |^^s<lem, eisdem, eisdem, 
 
 liisdem^ iisdem^ iisdem^ 
 
 ip% eosdem easdem eadem 
 
 ipsis /®^8<iem, eisdem, eisdem, 
 
 1 For iiedem we often find Udem. 
 
r<*\ 
 
 150 
 
 f*i SINGULAR. 
 
 ■ Nom. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 Abl. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nam. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ape. 
 
 AU. 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 24. Relative Pronoun. 
 
 
 MASCULINE. 
 tfUl > 2 
 
 cujus 
 cui 
 quetn 
 quo 
 
 '■W>>" 
 
 quorum 
 quibus 
 quos 
 quibus 
 
 FEMININE. 
 
 quae 
 
 cujus 
 
 cui 
 
 quam 
 
 qua 
 
 quae 
 
 quarum 
 quibus 
 quas 
 quibus 
 
 NEUTER. 
 
 quod 
 
 cujus 
 
 cui 
 
 quod 
 
 quo 
 
 ■' ^ 
 quae 
 
 quorum 
 
 quibu%|L 
 
 quae 
 
 quibus 
 
 .1" 
 
 w 
 
 25. tlhterrogratlve Prononn. 
 
 The Interroga|)ive Pronoun diflfers from the relativ&> pronoun ^n 
 having quia in Nbm. Sing. Masc, and quid in Nom. and Ace. Sikg. 
 Neut. There is also the Interrogative Pronominal Adjective ^l, 
 qxiaey quod^ declined exactly like the Relative Pronoun. 
 
 20. Indefinite Prononns. 
 
 
 The Indefinite Pronouns are compounds of quis or quH and .are 
 for the most part declined like them."^ . ^ .- 
 
 
 j_>, MASCULINE. FEMININE. 
 
 '^/^^*^^*^»liqui8, aliqui aliqua 
 
 S*.* 
 
 v^y- 
 
 NEUTER. 
 
 aliqiiid, aliquod ' 
 
 (The neuter pluraval^ well as the feminine singular, has -qua tot 
 quae.) ■. v , - 
 
 ^*. 
 
 quis, qui, 
 
 qua 
 
 quid, quod 
 
 (The neuter plural, as well as the feminine singular, has gtta for 
 
 i^j^r "^*^' V^ quisque quaeque^ quicque or quidq^e, quodque 
 
 OijM^if'^'b /Quisquam "" quicquam or qiiidquam 
 
 i(The plural and the feminine singular are not used.) *" 
 
 " ■■-" — ' "— --— -M. .»--,-— ■ .;- ..^ .. - -.--. ^ .... » -, „. ..— -~-.p.., : .. . . ... ...- » . » ^ » ^ „ .. „ ,.,-^,^^.,. — ~,^^., V ^fSsISS 
 
 1. In this list where a word has both ^^^ and quiy or both quid and qwid^ the 
 forms in gut and quod are generally used aajectively» the others substantively. 
 
 /■ 
 
 *■ 
 
 \ : 
 
PAUr III. — i»ARADiGMS. 
 
 151 
 
 MASODLINE. FEMININE. NEUTER. 
 
 quisquia (quaeque) quicquid or quidquid ; 
 
 (Only quisquis, quicquid or qmdquid and qudqud are in cpm^ion 
 
 US6. ^ 
 
 ^Qji^i^ ^ quidam quaedan^^ quiddam, quoddam V 
 
 '^^^^^"'"^ (Quidam changes w to n before -tZam.) 
 
 quicunquo quaecunque quodcunque^ ■ ■ ' 6 f 
 
 quivis . quaex& quidvis, quodvis (^^^. *^ tAjJ^*^^ 
 
 - quispiartr -^^r~ Wp^!i^ q«idpi.«n or quippiam, quod- 
 
 > quiubet . ^ .MJIIfefcW quidlibet, quodlibet > 
 
 . uterque ', iitjjjp^'' utrumque louUiff^ ^^*^ 
 
 Uterque has the first ^art declined' like w^er, section Mi? 
 
 ,i> / - , 26a. Correlatives. ' ' > 
 
 Of the pron^ins which haye corresponding forms, the conK - 
 .monest are the following :. y ' 
 
 INTERBOOAkvE. DEMONSTRATIVE. RELATIVE. INDEFINITE. 
 
 ^ 
 
 7 
 
 / 
 
 /■■ ■ 
 
 quw, «^/" 
 
 IS 
 
 (hic, ille, iste) 
 
 ^ "^: 
 
 qualis, * 
 » of what sort? 
 quantus, "■■■' ■■'-'■ 
 
 hiftv grettj; ? 
 quofc, : 
 
 hoio'hnany? 
 uter, xohich 
 
 of the two? 
 
 ■'•3 
 
 *^«>H>^ ■ . ^ quSlis^, 
 
 t^ntusa*^^ quantus 
 
 ^P- &o'-Ai.x^ ; quot 
 ifcerque,2.ft«ii|t*^ ■•(">^ 
 
 qui ,1 4? aliquis ^ i-^^'^Jj;^^*'^*-^ 
 l^uis, quisquam,^^^ _-^ 
 
 lulvis, quidam ^ ' "'^«* , 
 
 -V 
 
 aliquantus i-trv>v^ 
 
 ', ■■ ^ 
 
 aliquot <i.>*Jt.A/*^ V«sva- 
 
 ■::.;6; 
 
152 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 .ste 
 
 • . (^) THE verb:- ; " : 
 
 • ■ " '■■'-■■'.. '';■'* ■' ' ""^ ' - 
 
 27. IndloatiTe Mood, Active Voioe. 
 
 ■ ■ ■ ■ . i .. ■■ ■■ , ■ 
 
 ) Present Tense. ' 
 
 SlNaULAR. ^ / , 
 
 » ,' . ■ 
 
 ^irst Conjttg. Secorvd Conjug. Third Conjng. FouHh Cmjug. 
 nioneo. rego audio 
 
 mones. ; regis audfe 
 
 monot/ "—"-regit t~^ -^^^j. - — ~- 
 
 1. amo 
 
 2. amas 
 
 3. amat 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 l* amamus 
 
 2. amatis 
 
 3. amant 
 
 SINCHJLAR. 
 
 1. amabam 
 
 2. ama.bas 
 
 3. amflbat 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. amfibftmuG 
 
 2. amabatis 
 3« ^mabant 
 
 sInoular. 
 . 1. amfibd 
 
 2. am^bis ' 
 
 3. amkbit v 
 
 plural: 
 ^ amAbimiui 
 
 2. aWbitis ' 
 
 3. ainftbunt 
 
 7 
 
 ibonSmus 
 
 mongtis 
 
 monent 
 
 reginaus 
 
 regitis 
 
 regunt 
 
 -**j- 
 
 Imperfect Ten^e. \ 
 
 monSbarfi- • 
 mongbas 1 
 monSbat 
 
 monSbftmus 
 mongbfitis 
 ' monebant 
 
 regSbam 
 
 re^ebas 
 
 regebat 
 
 reggbamus 
 
 regebatis 
 
 regebanfc 
 
 audXmus 
 
 auditis 
 
 audiunt 
 
 audiSbam 
 
 andigbas 
 
 audiebat 
 
 audigbamu» 
 
 audigbatia 
 
 audigbant 
 
 i> 
 
 Future -Tense. 
 
 -V. 
 
 mbngbo- 
 monebis 
 inoi^bit 
 
 , regam 
 ' reggs 
 reget 
 
 - nu^bimus reggmiv, 
 
 mongbiti» reggtis 
 
 inoilgbun| regent 
 
 audiam 
 
 
 " audiet' "* ' ^ 
 
 audigmua 
 
 audigt»B 
 
 audieiA 
 
 ^ 
 
 -^ 
 
PART IIL— FABADIOM& 
 
 *■;»"', 
 
 153 
 
 28. 
 
 SINGUIiAE. 
 
 First Gonjug. 
 
 1. amor 
 
 2. anid,ris^ 
 
 3. amatur t^ 
 
 PLUEAL. 
 
 1. amS,inur 
 
 2. amamini 
 
 3. alnantur 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 '■/' 1. am&bar 
 • 2. aniabfiris^ 
 3. amUbgitur 
 
 PLUEAL. 
 
 1. amab&mur 
 
 2. amabftmini 
 
 3. amftbantur 
 
 SINGULAB. 
 
 1. ate&bo^ 
 
 2. ain&bfiris^ 
 
 3. am&bilur 
 
 f . 
 
 PLUEAL. \ 
 
 1. amftbimur"^ 
 
 2. am&bimini 
 
 3. anx&buntur 
 
 {Ej THE VERB. 
 Indicative Mood, PasBlve Voice. 
 
 Peesent Tekse. 
 
 '^■ 
 
 \ Second Oonjug. - Third GomiOf. FauHh Canjug. 
 
 ttioneor ■ i«egor w andinr 
 
 mongris^ \^ regeris^ 
 
 monStur regitur 
 
 audior 
 
 audlria ^ 
 
 auditur 
 
 monSmur 
 monemini 
 moijentur 
 
 regimur 
 regimini 
 reguntur 
 
 Imperpect Tense. 
 
 monSbar 
 
 monSbapis^ 
 
 mbngbatur 
 
 monSbftmur 
 monebftmiiTl 
 inunebantur 
 
 regSbar 
 
 reggbaria* 
 
 regebfitur 
 
 regSbamur 
 reggbamini 
 regebantur 
 
 monSbor 
 
 monSberis* 
 
 monSbitu^ 
 
 Future Tense. 
 regar 
 
 . regSris* 
 
 monfibimttr ~ regSmur 
 monfibiminl regBHIhil 
 
 monebuntur regdnTur 
 
 a udimu r 
 a udimin i 
 audiuntur 
 
 audiSbar 
 
 audiSbarisV 
 
 audiebatur 
 
 audiebamuv 
 audiebamini 
 audiebantur 
 
 audiar 
 audieris^ 
 audietur . 
 
 audienntr 
 audieminl 
 
 L- For -rU, r$ tiK Is (muMl* MpwiAlIy in the Iminirfeot «nd future teneet. 
 
 ~^fa> 
 
l^^ PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 » ';■-■:■■■■ ■' *• 
 
 •T. Indicative Sfood, Active Voice (continued), 
 
 ■ /' 
 
 * Peefect Tense. - 
 singular. 
 
 First Conjtig. 
 
 1. amavi 
 
 2. amavisti 
 
 3. amavit ( 
 
 Second Conjug: Third Conjug. Fourth Conjug. 
 
 nionui 
 
 monuisti 
 
 mohuit* 
 
 rexi 
 
 rexisti 
 
 rexlt 
 
 audlvl 
 
 audivisti ^ 
 audlvit 
 
 PLURAL. • 
 
 1. am9,vimus 
 
 2. amavistis 
 
 3. amaverunt* 
 
 singular'. 
 /1. amaveram 
 
 $ monuimuai 
 
 monuistis 
 monuerunt^ 
 
 rSximus 
 
 rexistis 
 
 rexerunfc^ 
 
 i->»* 
 
 Pluperfect Tense. 
 
 /2. amftveras 
 ^ 3. ani&yerat 
 
 monueratrt 
 
 monueras 
 
 monuerat 
 
 
 PLURAL.V 
 
 1. amaveramua monueramus 
 
 2. amaveratis monueratis 
 inonuerant 
 
 3. amfivciraut 
 
 'r5*ram 
 
 rexeras 
 
 rgxerat 
 
 rSxeramus 
 
 rgxeratis 
 
 rSxerant 
 
 ' SINGULAR. 
 
 1. amaverO 
 
 2. ainaveris 
 
 3. am&verit ^ 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. amaveriinus 
 
 2. aiiraveritia 
 *l- 3. MQAvorint"^ 
 
 Future Perfect Tense. 
 
 monuel 
 
 moriueris 
 
 tf|onuerit 
 
 monueriinuB 
 momieriti^ ' 
 monueiint 
 
 rfixerd 
 
 rCxeris 
 rexerifc 
 
 r6xerimQs 
 rSxeritifl 
 ^iBxerint"" 
 
 audlvimus 
 
 audlvistis 
 
 audivgrunt* 
 
 audlveram 
 
 audiver&s 
 
 audlverat 
 
 audlverainus 
 audlVeratis ; 
 audlverant 
 
 au4lver6~ 
 
 audlveris 
 
 audlverifc 
 
 audlverimui 
 audlveritii > 
 audlverinl , 
 
 v.. 
 
 1. For Srunt, -{rt also i» found, MpaoUlly in pnoirv 
 
 A. 
 
 # 
 
 '«r- 
 
 
 i • 
 
c 
 
 f 
 
 ■S^ 
 
 PART m.— PARADIGMS. f * 1-55 
 
 28. Indicative Mood, Passive Voice {continued)» 
 
 ' r ■• < ■ ■ ■■ 
 
 «' :,. -■'^, /". Pbefbot Tensb.. •'•■■■'. --vV^^-^v 
 
 Im- 
 
 First Gonjug. Second Conjug. Third Conjug. Fourth Conjiig. 
 
 1. aniatus^ sum monitusi sum rgctus^ sum auditus^ sum 
 
 2. II es n es n e0 ' n ^j 
 8. u est n est 4i est f^ ilfe^ 
 
 PLURAL. ■ ■ ■' iB, ■ ' .■■■■'■ «". ■ ^"'•■-■"^' 
 
 1 v ■ . . . 
 
 1; amatl^ sumus monitl^ smmis recti* sumus audltl* sumus 
 
 2. II estis „ estir n estis i» estis 
 
 a 
 
 II sunt It * sunt 
 
 * - ' . 
 
 9. 
 
 sunt 
 
 sunt 
 
 Pluperfect TENSiE'. 
 
 ; SINGULAR. ' . 
 
 1. amatus* eram nfemiitus* eram rectus* eram audltus* eram 
 
 2. 11 eras nff eras »n erfts m eras 
 
 3. II erat ti erat ' n erat n erafc 
 
 PLURAL. 'T" 
 
 .1. amatl^eramus moniti* er^pius rSctl* eramus audita* eramua 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 11 oratis 
 II erant 
 
 11 eratis 
 fi er^t 
 
 II eratis 
 II erant 
 
 II eratis 
 V ti erant 
 
 i 
 
 Future Per At Tense. 
 
 BINGULAB. 
 
 X' amatus* erS 
 
 2. « eria 
 
 3. M erit 
 
 mbnitus* erO 
 
 u eris 
 
 M erit 
 
 rSituB* erS 
 II eris 
 ^1 erit '' 
 
 audltus* erS 
 II eris 
 M erit 
 
 • 1. amatl*erimu8 moniti' erimus rSotl* erimua audltJ* erimus 
 — -^ _j|__eriti8 — »_ — ^f^_^„^j„_^ eritis i—^ -ir eritia 
 •• M «runt lit: enint /*n* erunt- ,m erunt 
 
 
 «— .Ii»-.« j"^'" "■••♦•♦* «WW»*», ariMta or ainacuin «nr imn tit tlis tlniniiW And 
 
 il. 
 
 
! 
 
 156 
 
 
 % 
 
 V 
 
 7 T 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 aft. Sabjunotlve Mood. Aiotive Voloe,^' 
 
 •i: .. f * Present, Tbnsb.^ 
 
 ^. 
 
 Mnt Gon^ugJ SecoiU (htijug. ThirdConjug: touHh Conjug. 
 
 1.; amem 
 
 2. amSs v^ 
 
 3. amet^ 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. amSmtis 
 
 2. amStis 
 
 3. ament > 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 1. amarem 
 
 2. amfirSs 
 
 3. amftret 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. amftrgmui 
 i. am&rStis 
 3. amSj'ent 
 
 '> 
 
 SINGlOiLR. 
 
 li am&verim 
 2. amftveris 
 ^. aiQftv«ijrit 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. am&verimuii 
 
 2. am&veritis 
 & unftverint 
 
 ,-t. ; :. 
 
 moheam' 
 
 -^jliOneHs 
 
 moneat 
 
 jnoueSmus 
 moneHtis 
 moneant 
 
 regam 
 
 regas 
 
 regat 
 
 regSlmus 
 reg&tis 
 regant * 
 
 audiam 
 ,' audiat' 
 
 audiamus ^-' 
 
 audiHtis 
 
 aiidiant 
 
 Imperfect T^nse. 
 
 moner6s 
 monSret 
 
 monerSmus 
 
 monSrStis 
 
 monSrent 
 
 regerem ' 
 ' regergs . 
 regeret ' 
 
 . regerSmus 
 , regeretis 
 regerent 
 
 Perfect Tense. 
 
 monuerim 
 
 monueris 
 
 monuerit 
 
 raonuerimus 
 
 monueritis 
 
 japim«rint 
 
 rSxerim 
 
 rSxeris 
 
 rSxerit 
 
 rSxerimus 
 r6xeritis 
 _r6xerint 
 
 audlrem 
 
 aud|res 
 
 aildiret 
 
 audlrSmuS' 
 
 audicStis 
 
 audirent 
 
 audlverim 
 
 audTveris 
 
 au4lvent 
 
 ^ 
 
 pP' 
 
 
 ¥ 
 
 J-..* 
 
 \, . .-• 
 
 audlverimuB 
 audlteritis 
 audlverint ^ 
 
 1«^ 
 
 .^ 
 
 
 
 « 
 
f PART IIL-^PARADIGMS. 
 
 80. Sabjanotlve Mopd, PassWe Voice. 
 
 . SINGULAB. 
 
 First Conj-ug. 
 1. ainer 
 ja. ameria^ 
 3. amStur , 
 
 . PLURAL. 
 
 1. amemur 
 
 2. amSminI 
 
 ■ . #^ 
 
 3. amentur 
 
 MNGULAE. 
 
 1. aniarer '^ 
 
 2. ^margris^ 
 »3. aiMretilr 
 
 . PLtmAL. 
 1. an>ar6mur 
 ' 2. amftrgmini 
 . 3. amarentur 
 
 SINQULAR. 
 
 1. amatus^Bun 
 
 2. II eSa 
 
 3. *ii ait 
 
 PLURAL. . • 
 
 1., amatl'^ slmus 
 2. H Bitis 
 
 Prbsent TbNBJBv 
 
 157 
 
 f . 
 
 Second Conjng. Thh-d Conjiuj. Fourth (hnjug. 
 
 nionear 
 
 'monearis^ 
 
 moneatwfr 
 
 moneamur 
 monejamini 
 moneantur 
 
 regar 
 regaris*' 
 regSiuir , 
 
 regamur 
 regamiril 
 regantup 
 
 aud^i^r 
 
 audiaris* 
 
 audiatuTili 
 
 ^ audiamur 
 
 * audiamini 
 
 audiantur 
 
 i Imperfect Tens*. • 
 regerer , 
 
 monSrer -^ 
 monSreris* 
 monereitur 
 
 monarSmur 
 monSrgminI 
 monSrentur 
 
 regereris* 
 regerStur 
 
 regertmup 
 regerSmini 
 regerentur 
 
 Perfect Teitoe. ' 
 
 ^:0 ~^^'^^■-^,'^'^^ 
 ^us* sim \^ rectus" sitii ^ 
 
 _ H ■ 8lB . -*^%i/ Bto- • 
 
 ■ _.H . ; JHfe. ■ -.1 .'.ilt f 
 
 monitl' BimuB rSctl' iliHF 
 « Bltia " • (fltia , 
 
 .* ♦ 
 
 audlrer 
 
 audlrgris* 
 
 AudlrStur 
 
 audlrSmur 
 audii;6minl 
 audlrentur 
 
 idltuB^ sim 
 If iOm 
 
 II 
 
 ■it 
 
 •uditt» 8lm 
 II tftis 
 
 •A# 
 
 *t -iart . ■ *" 
 
 t For JKi, ^« Also !• found, 2, Se^ footnote 1, PH« 156. 
 
 

 '1 ' 
 
 ^1 \ 
 
 r 
 
 'primary lItin book. 
 
 '^ 
 
 ao. SnigBlnotive Mo^, Acil^p Tol«so (contimted). 
 
 Ha 
 
 .V 
 
 *LUf*B3ttrEi|p Tense 
 SINGULAR. ' « • ' . 
 
 First Qmjug. ' Second ^ijiigj^ Third Con^^. :P^th 
 
 l.^amavissom " monuissem 
 
 /2. amavisses -^, ihonuissea 
 
 3- am^^set ^ moi|uisset 
 
 '^'% 
 
 ■ i-f^s^t'V^audi^fe ^ ' "- . 
 
 ^' / ■ ' ' « 4. ■ III ^ -^r ■" * g^'sm 
 
 |6^8B^nt ' ' aud!VissiJar*^^ 
 
 \ ■>'^ '/ ' "■ " ■ ■■-^•. ■ ^ * » 
 
 
 ♦ Active Voice. 
 
 
 reg^re ' 'audlram. , 
 
 imSviase ^monuisse ^ - r^isse - audlvisse. 
 
 
 .m\ 
 
 us e^e^ monitflrus ess^i' i^tOrus esseV audltttrus esse* 
 
 4' 
 
 9^*,^ Participle, 4<jtl ve Voice. \ 
 
 aniililfi .< 
 
 ifion^ns 
 
 \ 
 
 FtTTURB. 
 
 amatttrus . ' monitflrus 
 
 regSns 
 
 * - ■ '- 
 
 ■I 
 
 rSctflrus 
 
 audiSns 
 auditflrus 
 
 t » 
 
 -4- 
 
 1. S«« footnote 2, panre'^t. 
 
 > 
 
 ^^^:'^7-:x 
 
 *-% 
 
'/<■'>>' 
 
 v 
 
 80. ^abjanotiye m6o4. Passive Volooj^onWnjied)» 
 PLUpiiRFBCT Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. V 
 
 ■:,.J^r.*Cbniw^. Secmd Conjng. Third Conjug. kttHh Conp^. 
 
 1. amatusiessem monitusi essem reptus^ essem auditusi essem 
 
 2. . „ .essgs „ essgs-; ,r esses A essSs 
 J. ^^ M esset . , „ esset „ esset „ \ ©ss^t 
 
 ^^^atii essemus monitii essemUs rectli essemus auditli eLmus 
 ^.w.essetis „ essetis „ essetis ,, es^tis 
 
 ^. ,» essenfc „ essent „ essent „ «ssL^ 
 
 32. Infinitive Mood. «Passive Voice. 
 
 PRESENT, 
 
 amari . 
 
 /i - 1 
 
 mbnerl 
 
 , : regl 
 
 audlrl 
 
 PERFECT. ' . * * 
 
 amatus esse" ' monitus esse" rectus esse" audL;us esse» 
 
 ' < 
 
 
 PUTiTRB. "•.•■' ] ,,. . j 
 
 amatumW monitum ^1'' reetuin M audltum Irl 
 34. Participles, Passive Voice. 
 
 PERFECT. 
 
 amatus 
 
 t moniius 
 
 flRUNDiVE. ' '; 
 
 amaudua monendus 
 
 ,:..i'l 
 
 "^4 
 
 rectus auditus 
 
 '.....■.■■ ■ ■■ ''^^ 
 
 regendus audiendus 
 
 -[ 
 
 
 
 1. See footnote 1, page 1,66 
 
 2. The perfect inflnrtive is 
 
 ' I i' > « . 4 
 
 lnflnitSlT;;!mfwhSir^^^^^ participle «««.ive in .«.«nd t^e 
 
 gendw. numbeTC^ *'li^^l*!?'*! °'"J*-*!l-... The participfe wlTfTof coun.e, m^\1 
 
 » r 
 
 S 
 
 1» 
 
 \*' 
 
^o 
 
 .n 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 35. Geriindt Aotlve Voloe. 
 
 
 .^^rst GonQ. ' Second Conj.. Third Gon^. Fourth Conj.^ 
 Oert.. a-ipandi monendi regendl ' audiendl 
 
 Doit. ahiando Tnonendo regendo 
 
 « Ace. amandum monendum regendum 
 > AU. amando. monendo regendo - 
 
 36. Saplne. Active Voloe. 
 
 'Am^^ am^um 
 ^W. . amatuv' 
 
 monitum tectum 
 
 monita rgctil 
 
 audiendd 
 
 audienduin 
 
 audiendo 
 
 auditum 
 auditu 
 
 C 
 
 y 
 
 «■ ■■' 
 
 r .. 
 
 «' ' 
 
 37. Imperative Stood, Active Voice. 
 
 . • Present Tense. 
 
 Sing. 2. amS, 
 Flur. 2. amate 
 
 monS 
 monSte 
 
 rege 
 regite 
 
 I^utube Tense. 
 
 Sing. 2. amUto 
 3. amato 
 
 Flur. 2. amatot^ 
 3. amanto 
 
 monSt5 
 moneto 
 monStote 
 monento 
 
 regitS 
 regito 
 regitote ' 
 regunto 
 
 audi 
 audlte 
 
 Hudito 
 audlto 
 audltotfif^ 
 audiuDtd 
 
 88. Imperative Mood, Passive Voloe* 
 
 Sing.2.amSire 
 PZttr.2. amftmini 
 
 ^ing. 2. am&tor ~^- 
 3. am&tor f 
 Flur.3u amantor/ 
 
 1 Present Tense. 
 
 monSre regere 
 
 monSminI regimini 
 
 ' FuTullB Tense. 
 
 monStor fegitor 
 
 monitor regitor 
 
 monentor xB^ntor, 
 
 fe; 
 
 audire 
 audlxninl 
 
 auditor ;^,^^ 
 Auditor » « : 
 i^udiunfcor 
 
 'Kr 
 
 
 'ta& 
 
' 
 
 
 thCkmj.^ 
 ndi 
 nd6 
 ndura 
 
 ndo ' 
 
 PABT IIL— -PARADIGMS. 
 89. Verbs In Id of Third Co: 
 
 Indicative Mood. Su 
 
 iesbnt.Tensb. ' , I 
 
 16X 
 
 Siltg. 1. capid 
 
 2. capis 
 
 3. capit 
 Plur.l. ca^imus 
 
 2. capitis-^ 
 
 3. capiunt 
 
 Active Voice. Passhe Voice. Active Voice. Passive Voke, 
 
 capior / 
 
 caperis 
 
 capitur 
 
 capimur 
 
 capimini ~ 
 
 capiuntur 
 
 capiam 
 
 capias 
 
 capiat 
 
 capiamus 
 
 capiatis 
 
 capiant 
 
 Imperfect Tense. 
 
 capiebar caperem 
 
 capiebaris caperes 
 
 ^bifeftpiebatur caperet 
 
 PZttr. 1, capiebamus capi§bamur caperemus 
 
 2. capiebatis capiebamini caperetis 
 
 capiebantur c^erent 
 
 Future Tense. 
 
 Sing. 1. capigbam 
 
 2. capiebas 
 
 3. capiebat 
 
 3. capiebant 
 
 capiar | 
 
 capiaris t 
 capiatur ' 
 capilmur fi,. 
 capiamini T?' 
 capiantur / 
 
 caperer 
 
 capereids 
 
 caperetur 
 
 caperenmr 
 
 capergi^ll 
 
 caperentur 
 
 t>: 
 
 iSifiig. 1. capiam 
 
 2. eapies 
 
 3. capieb^ 
 Plw.l. capiemus 
 
 2. capietis 
 
 3. capient 
 
 Sitig. 1. c5pl 
 
 '. 1. cSperam 
 Sing, i: 
 
 ■^ 
 
 capiar 
 capieris / 
 capietur 
 capiemur 
 capieminl 
 capientur / 
 
 Perfect Tense.' 
 captus sum ceperim 
 
 Pluperfect Tense.' 
 C|aptu8 eram oSpisapi 
 
 Future Perfect Tense.» 
 1^ captus er6 
 
 i^ 
 
 captus G^m 
 
 Mptus essem 
 
 m- 
 
 ft 
 
 !' r**'*^'** '?*'""' ''-'^ belonging to thJB class, aee nt^Mnn ^ y, ^ 
 
 ^^^wp«t8« tenM, capiQ i, ftflected exactly Uke the verbs of the four 
 
 
h 
 
 ;♦■ 
 
 162 
 
 A 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 Infinitiye Mood. 
 
 AeU 
 Pre», capere 
 Pel/. cepiss^ *i 
 J^. capturii^^Qsse 
 
 - a>r 
 
 JPamve Fbice. 
 
 capl 
 
 captus eSse 
 ^ captum iri 
 
 * ».* 
 
 '-V 
 
 Par^ici 
 
 Per/, captus 
 Gerun. capiendus 
 
 .* Gerund. " 
 
 .jHip-' ^ ". 
 
 * ►! 
 
 r-^t- 
 
 
 Gen. ; dapiendl 
 
 'Da<. capiendo 
 
 ilcc. ' ' capiendu: 
 
 -AU. capi6ndd| 
 
 » .., 
 
 
 ■.*>- 
 
 ,_;-•,. Ji». 
 
 
 Supine. 
 
 
 iMPEfeATi^HSft Mood. 
 
 ^*'-' 
 
 iSVn^. 2. cape 
 4i|glKr.2. capite 
 
 ra T; 
 
 *fe» 
 
 .•#''' 
 
 ■-{^ 
 
 capere 
 capimmi 
 
 'n « 
 
 . rf^ 
 
 
 Sif^;:% capitd 
 %!ca;pito 
 Flv/r, S^ipip^te 
 
 Ecaun^r ^ >« 
 
 ar '^' , 
 
 ^ ■*. ^ • • ft ^ 
 
fW 'M 
 
 ^ 
 
 w 
 
 40. 
 
 PABT III. — PARADIGMS. 
 Synopsis of Deponent Verbs. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 163 
 
 First Con. 
 Pres. hbrtor 
 Imp/, hortabar 
 Fut. hortabor 
 Ferf. hortatus 
 
 sum 
 Flup. hor|;atus 
 
 eram 
 Fttt. P. hortatus 
 • ero 
 
 Fres. ' horler 
 Imp/, l^prtarer 
 Ferf. htrtatus 
 
 aim - 
 ^ Flup. horta'tus 
 
 essem 
 
 Fte8. hortari 
 ^^Vff: hortatus 
 
 esse 
 Fut. hortaturus 
 
 esse 
 
 Second Con. 
 
 vereor 
 
 verebar 
 
 yerebor 
 
 veritus 
 
 sum 
 veritus 
 
 eram 
 verjiis 
 
 ero 
 
 Third Con. 
 
 loquor 
 
 loquebar 
 
 loquar 
 
 locatus 
 
 sum 
 locutus 
 
 eram 
 locfltus 
 
 ero 
 
 Foxwth Con. Verba in itf. 
 potior patior 
 
 potiebar 
 
 potiar 
 
 potitus 
 
 sum 
 potitus 
 
 eram ■ 
 potitus 
 
 er6 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 verear 
 
 vererer 
 
 veritus 
 
 sim 
 veritus 
 
 essem 
 
 loquar 
 
 loquerer 
 
 locutus 
 
 sim 
 locutus 
 
 essem 
 
 potiar 
 
 potirer 
 
 potitus 
 
 sim 
 potitus 
 
 essem 
 
 patiebar 
 patiar 
 passus 
 sum 
 passus 
 eram 
 passus 
 "erS 
 
 patiar 
 
 paterer 
 
 passus 
 
 sim 
 passus 
 
 esseni 
 
 Infinitivb. - 
 
 vergrf loqul , potiri pati 
 
 veritus loctitu», . potitus passus 
 
 esse esse V^^l^ esse 
 
 veritQrus locutflrus poftiirul^passarus 
 
 A ■,r.,->.«c- - 
 
 Qssm£^i:r esse 
 
 esse . esse 
 
 y 
 
 Participle. 
 
 :*^ 
 
 ,^' 
 
 Pre».' hortans 
 Fut. ^. hortaturus 
 Ferf. hortatus 
 Qtr. hortandus 
 
 verSns loquSns potiSns patiSns 
 
 veritOrus locGtOrus potitOrus passOrus 
 
 veritus locfttus potitus passus 
 
 verendus loquendus potiendus patiendua 
 
 Gbeund. 
 
 Om^ hortandl verendt loquendl potiendl patiendl 
 
d': 
 
 !l 
 
 164 ^ P&IMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 '^f''-'-f:''v->;,-#>:^"v:"-' ..: Supine. ■■ .t.:-,:.;'.- 
 
 rf'ii 
 
 ::?.0:,-- 
 
 ^;.i^/;• 
 
 ly I 
 
 First Con., Second Con. Third Con. Fourth Con. terbs in iO^ 
 Ace» hortatum veritum locutum • potltum passum 
 
 ■-. ;'/■'/;.' '• ■ '.';-;;;^ ■ IMPEKATIVB. ^7 
 
 Pm. hortare verere loquere potlre patere 
 
 FiU. hortator veretot loquitor potitor patiWr 
 
 v: tRUEGULAB VERBS.I ! 
 
 41. Sum. esse, ful. toJ>e. 
 
 ■s 
 
 Sing. 1. sum 
 2. es 
 S. est 
 
 PZwr. 1. sumus 
 2. estis 
 
 ^ff 
 
 -4*' 
 
 3. sunt 
 
 42. Possa)ii, posse^ potnl» 
 
 to he ableycan. If /- 
 
 Indicative. Subjunctive. Indicative. Sirfe;uNCTivE. 
 
 'Present. ',.^-^ / ■• ,, . ' ■- 
 
 possum possim 
 
 potes / possis 
 
 potest possit 
 
 possumus ( possimus 
 
 potestis :- ,possitis 
 possunt possint 
 
 it •« » 
 
 Sing. 1. eram 
 2. eras 
 „3. erat 
 Flur.l. eramus 
 
 2. eratis 
 
 3. erant • 
 
 Sing. 1. efd 
 
 2. eria 
 
 3. erifc . 
 Plw.l. erimus 
 
 ■M. 2. eritis 
 
 • Imperfect. 
 
 essem poteram 
 
 esses pot eras 
 
 esset poterat 
 
 essemus 
 
 essetis 
 
 essent poterant 
 
 i / 
 
 possem 
 posses 
 posset 
 poteramus possSmus 
 poterSitis possetis ^ 
 
 // 
 
 ^possent 
 
 Future. 
 
 poter5 
 .poteris 
 poterit 
 poterimus 
 
Indicative. 
 
 *»■■ 
 
 .*,-;. 
 
 Siiig. 1. fill 
 
 2. fuistii 
 
 3. fuit 
 Plv/r. 1, fuiihus 
 
 • 2. fuistis 
 
 3. feigrunt 
 
 Sirig. 1. fueram' ' 
 
 2. fuerSa 
 
 3. fuerat 
 Plur. 1. fueramus 
 
 2, flieratis 
 3.^erant 
 
 Sing. 1. fiiero 
 
 2. fueris 
 
 3. fuerit 
 Plur. 1. fuerirhtis 
 
 I 2. fueritis 
 3. fueriut 
 
 pART IIL-^PARADIGMS. 
 
 SuBjuNCTiv^, Indicative. 
 ■\\ ■•/ •■ IPerfect. 
 
 V fuerim / y potui 
 / Mfueris , pbtuistt 
 
 tX.^. iuerifc '■''/-/■ ;potuit" ''''^■■:' 
 fuerimus potuimus 
 
 ' tfueritis potuistis 
 
 fuerint^ ; ; potu^runfc 
 •_■■ ■' ■ • 'Plupbrfect. .-, X . 
 
 16«^ 
 
 SuBjyjJClTVE. 
 
 potuerim • .. 
 potueris V 
 potuerit 
 potuerimufl 
 t)otueritis ; 
 potuerint 
 
 '"fuissem / potueram 
 
 fuisses :j,..' potueras 
 
 fuisset / potuerat 
 
 fuiasemiis potueramus 
 
 ^uissetis potueratis 
 
 fuissent potuerant 
 '■Future Perfect. — 
 
 :/ii/ potuero 
 
 potueris 
 
 , , potuerit 
 
 . potuerimus 
 potueritis 
 ^ ^ ^potuerint 
 
 "INFINITIVE. . . 
 
 potuissem 
 
 potuisses 
 
 potuisset 
 
 potuissSmus 
 
 potuissetis 
 
 potuissent 
 
 A 
 
 Prei. esse 
 
 Per/. fuisse 
 
 Ptli* __ f uturus esse or 
 
 Pres. 
 
 ^Vi» futtirus , *^ 
 
 Pres. Sing. 2. es 
 Plur. 2. este 
 
 Put Sing. 2. esto ' 
 3. esto* 
 Ttier. 2. o atote — 
 ^ 3. sUnto 
 
 posse 
 , potuisse 
 
 -* 
 
 Participle. 
 yf potgns 
 
 MPERATIV^ 
 
^ 
 
 \ 
 
 166 
 
 PRIMARY LAXm BOOK. 
 43. Void, N5I5. Miild.^ 
 
 Volo, ' velle, Volul, 
 Nolo, nolle, nolul. 
 Halo, malle, malal, ' 
 
 , he toUling, wUl, vnsh. '• 
 he unwilling^ will not. 
 he move wiUing, prefer» . 
 
 J?w». 
 
 1^ - 
 
 j-.-C- 
 
 ^- • 
 
 Imp/. 
 \' Fut. 
 Perf. 
 
 Fres. 
 
 volff" 
 
 ■'▼**•■>, 
 
 vult 
 
 ^volumus 
 vultis 
 
 • volunt 
 volebam 
 volam 
 volul 
 
 ; volueram 
 
 • voluero 
 
 f. 
 
 Indicative.' 
 
 nolo ' 
 
 non vis 
 
 non vult 
 
 nolumus > 
 
 n6n .vultis 
 
 nolunt 
 
 nolebam 
 
 nolam 
 
 nolul' 
 
 nolueram 
 
 noluero 
 
 .Imp/. 
 
 ■■■■ ^' 
 •-■'it 
 
 I^erf: 
 Phip. 
 
 Prei. 
 Per/. 
 
 .velim 
 
 veils 
 
 velit 
 
 Vellmus 
 
 velTtis 
 
 velint 
 
 vellei» 
 
 vellei^», 
 
 vellet .' 
 ' vellenid^ 
 
 vellSli& 
 . vellent 
 
 voluerim 
 
 voluissem 
 
 ..■'Ml/. 
 ▼eUe *•. . 
 voliticwe 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 n5lim , 
 
 nolJs • 
 
 nSlit' 
 
 nolimus 
 
 nolltis 
 
 nSlint , , 
 
 nollem 
 
 nollSs ■ 
 
 nollet 
 
 nollSmus 
 
 ndllgtis 
 
 nollent 
 
 nQluerim 
 
 ndluissem ' 
 
 Infinitive. 
 nOll^ : 
 nOluisse - 
 
 ihSrlo 
 
 mavis 
 
 rnavult 
 ^ malumus 
 
 mavulti^ 
 i m^lunt 
 -•• mS.l§bai]i^< 
 
 malam , 
 • malui 
 "'toalueram 
 
 mSJuerO'' 
 
 maljs 
 
 n\alit 
 ^ ^i$,lftnus 
 
 mSlItis 
 '^^maliht ' ' 
 . . n^lem 
 
 milles 
 
 mdJlet 
 
 mSllSmus 
 
 m&llQtis 
 . mfiJleftt, 
 
 mSrluerim 
 , mAJuissera 
 
 ^•^»-. 
 
 s ' 
 
 .^ 
 
 \* 
 
 •#., 
 
 .f' 
 
 m&lle 
 
 Jk;- 
 
 
 . , . J. '," 
 
 ^1. 8m footnote 8, p«|« M. 
 
 \ 
 
 -s — ► 
 
 
 *' 
 ,.■••*'■ .- 
 
 'Ap 
 
 f mi 
 
 ir 
 
 A 
 
 
 »" .. 
 
PA&^^aitT^PARADIGMS. 
 
 Pre». volSns 
 
 Pres. 
 Fid. 
 
 ^ 
 
 Participlb. 
 nolens • 
 
 Impei;ativb. 
 
 noli jj 
 
 nolite f 
 
 nOlltd 
 
 nolitS 
 
 nolltote ' 
 ndlunUS 
 
 mt 
 
 .^ k 
 
 ^if 
 
 / 
 
 M- 
 
 * ' . ^ f 44. Pero.* 
 V .PerS, ferre, tiUI, latiiiu, bear, carry, endwr^ 
 
 (< 
 
 v.r. 
 
 '' Pres.^ fero. . : ^ -f iB^l^lua ' 
 
 r».' ^-- iers. .\ ■"■' 
 
 r- V ?: ftfrt 
 
 ,Impf: fergbam 
 
 **'*y^wt. feram 
 
 ^, •■ Plup. tuldrj5im 
 
 JT-ut. P. tulefo ^ 
 
 .■■.'" ., ■ ' * 
 
 ^^L. > „■ ; ■■ 
 
 .. 'h^'^''^'- feram " 
 
 Imj^. ferrem 
 
 P&i'f. tulerim 
 
 Plup. tulissem' 
 
 Jktf. ferre" , 
 \t^. tulissie 
 
 I * fk>,-;JV*.l:, ^li^tlrus esse * 
 „, .All. ^j IfttOruA 
 
 tetot ' ferimur 
 
 fertis feyria ferimini 
 
 feninfc . > fertur Igruntur 
 
 , ferebaij . *< 
 
 •■ .. ■; teru ":" s^ " . 
 \ ^(. Ifttussunt. •' . *■ 
 Ifttus eftam "*-' '• . 
 l&tus er6 ^ 
 
 Subjunctive, , ^ ^\ 
 
 .ferv' ,; . 
 . . ferrer v • 
 
 • .* latus slra 
 
 , l&tus essem . 
 
 Infinitivi. 
 
 tent 
 'i 1ft tiis esse 
 
 
 ■•av 
 
 : -* 
 v.? . 
 
 .1* > 
 
 ->.,■■ 
 
 ^#s* . 
 
 f 
 
 
 n 
 
 
 lAtum III 
 
 .»•- 
 
 -*-A 
 
 ,. 011». ferendiis 
 
 :;*■: 
 
 ;»^^.^ ■%• 
 
l«i 
 
 'Ti*'»- 
 
 . ;■♦■ 
 
 1 : 11, 
 
 fi^* :ierend! ' ^ 
 
 J5lo^. ferendo * 
 
 A^i^ ferendum 
 
 > il&Pi ferendo 
 
 iiil». , ' latum 
 Abl, lata 
 
 '^ .. '^ Active. 
 
 ^J*rfs, Sing, 2. fer 
 
 I»Ri^tABY LATIN fipOi^ 
 Gbeund. • 
 
 .-V 
 
 
 P?Mj?. 2. ferte a, 
 ^tt*. 8ing.i2, fert§ 
 
 3. ferto . 
 Blur. 2. fertote 
 3. ferunto \ 
 
 45. Bo.i 
 
 Supine. 
 
 Imperative.' 
 
 Passive. 
 
 — ferre • — 
 
 f eriminl . - ., 
 ' fertor 
 fertor 
 
 feruntor 
 
 . * ^ 
 
 ■J' ' t ' 
 
 
 -•«^ 
 
 
 :'^ 
 
 »* 
 
 
 
 — ;*-"v 
 
 * 
 
 > 
 
 "? 
 
 
 
 ':5-- 
 
 :■■* 
 
 
 V^^t 
 
 Eo. Ire, II. (Ivl). Itum, go. FI6. fieri, r«otu. .«m. 6<J «uwy 
 
 become, happen. ^***^ 
 Indicative. 
 
 Imu6 £16 flmus 
 
 , Itis ; fto fitis . 
 
 ^»»?*^ . fit ««1^, 
 
 ftSbam ' . 
 
 faetus sum ^' 
 factus eram ■' t 
 
 \ factus erO . ' ' 
 
 Pres. ei^ 
 
 Is 
 V it 
 
 Ifnpf.^ Ibam 
 .FW. Ib6 
 Perf. il 
 PItip. ienuQ)^ 
 -FW. P. ier6 
 
 ./- 
 
 11 
 
 i*»w. earn, efis, etc. 
 
 Imp/. Irem 
 
 Per/. ierim^— "^ — r^- 
 
 I^p. iisBem 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVB. 
 
 -**- 
 
 flam 
 fiereoi 
 factus siSr*^ 
 
 •r 
 
 : I 
 
 ^, 
 
 ' ^ faottis es^em^ '" * 
 
 1 flu f riii t iiii ii i B. pimxmi. 
 
 :-* * 
 
 \: S 
 

 l-V... 
 
 1': 
 ^ Pres. Ire 
 - '^ Per/. iisse 
 
 Fut. ittirus esse 
 
 PAKT IIL — PARAI^IQMS, , 
 
 ^ I \fierl :'--/■ 
 f actus esse 
 factum Irt 
 
 • ' - Participle., 
 
 Pres. iens, GenMf^iMa Per/. factus 
 Fid. itflrus Ger, faciendus 
 
 GERfTND. 
 
 Oen. eundr , 
 
 I^at. eundS , 
 
 A .4<c. eundum ■ 
 
 ^ Abl. eundo 
 
 .'„ -Oi^cc. itiim 
 
 "^'y ^w. - ita ■ "%-. 
 
 ,Prea. /Stn^. 2. I 
 ^ Piitr. 2. Ite 
 
 FtU. Sing. 2. Ito 
 3. Its 
 Plur. 2. Itote 
 •^ 3. euntd 
 
 Supine. 
 
 Imperativb. 
 
 Pres. 8tng. 2. ft' 
 Pk»f. 2. ftte 
 
 
 
 ^ 169 
 
 ^*>. 
 
 \ 
 
 f '• 
 
 \% 
 
 *<.'.■'" ^- 
 
 ' / 
 
 .. ' / 
 
 • 1% *' 
 
 • .. 
 
 
 ^ • o 
 
 • * . 
 
 ' » 
 
 90^< 
 
170 
 
 .ik 
 
 'pK 
 
 PRIMARY, LATIK BOOK. 
 
 M» 
 
 II. INFLECTION.: EPITOME OF RULES AND 
 
 PECULIAR ITIE:^ 
 
 .'i ° '■ 
 
 "W Raia^f' 
 
 
 pi: • 
 
 i: 
 
 47. General Bales for Gender. ' 
 
 ^^.(«) Names of males are masculine ; names of females, feminine. 
 
 (6) The gender of other words is to be determined not from 
 their meaning, but by the rules for gender (according to the end- 
 ing of the nominative singular) given under each declension. 
 
 (c) But as a rule, irrespective of endings, names of rivers, vnnds 
 and months are masculine ; names of cities, islands, countries, trees, 
 plants and abitract qualities are feminine ; and indeclinable nouns 
 are neuter. 
 
 48. Nouns of the First Declension. (See also section 1.) 
 
 , (a) The Stem' ends in a, and is like the nominative singular. 
 
 (6) IRREOULA.R Case Endings.—, . 1 
 
 Genitive singular in -al, archaic and found in poetry. 
 «Genitive singular in -as, in familias (see section 9), 
 
 Genitive plural in -um, in words of Greek origin and in poetry. 
 
 Dative and ablative plural in -&bus, often in dedbus and fllidhus. 
 
 (c) GBNDKR.r— Nouns of this declension are feminine. Excep 
 TiONs: nouns denoting males are masculine, e.g., nanta ;*' Belgae 
 (name of a tribe) ; Gotta (a man'srname) ; so, also, Hadria. 
 
 {d) Declension of Greek Notms.— These end in.# feminine 
 «« or es- masculine. In the plural the regular Latin endings are 
 used ; m the singqlar,. either the Latin' endings or the followina 
 borrowed from the Greel^ : ' . . 
 
 Nom. 6, Gen. es, Aoc. 6n, Voc. «, . Abl. «. 
 
 ■'■/■"..*•?■;,. .■•, 'M. 1^ in't . M «, A, y ,,, *: -'-^ 
 A :(«> llie liOOATiTE* case ends in -mm, e.g. , K6mm,mUmae; -^ 
 
 •"■..' ' ' -: . -^ ^ -...'• -:^.^ • ,'■'. • ' 1 " , : 
 
 l^Thft Irftofttiyy ii ft a urvlvai fram wbtt wm gnc s a « B p 
 
 pUaa where. 
 
 deuuUiig -tfa»- 
 
 
 « ;•. 
 
 ''^•" 
 
 'V* . 
 
 •*♦ 
 
^&. 
 
 * 
 
 PART HI.— INFLECTION. 
 
 .' .-1 
 
 171 
 
 49. Noun. aft^€leoond Declension. (See also sections 2,"3.) 
 
 dative^^uk/ Tht " • "' ^"^S,^^*^«Pt ^^ q»ah«ity, is like the 
 aative smgular. This o is generally either weakened to u or lost. 
 
 - (6) Irijegular Case Endings — N 
 
 in^l^^^- ' ^ " '^^y contracted to i {without affect- 
 
 Vocative singular of fUiiis and proper names in -ius regularly 
 contracted from -le to -i (without affecting the accent).^ ^ ^ 
 
 . ^®^'i*^%Pj"^ '" :^'"' ^" words denoting money aid measures 
 in words of Greek origin, and in poetry. ««» aiBasures, 
 
 For the declension of dens see section 9, 
 
 (c) Gender. -Nouns ending in us, er, Ir, are masculine, in urn 
 neuter. ExcEprioNa : Feminine in us ate names of cities, islands, 
 trees, e.g., Lortrdhm, fagus; also dormis, humm, almm, carbarns: 
 neuter are vtdgus, pelag^is, virus. A 
 
 (d) Declension op Greek NouNa-These end in os or 6« mas 
 culine, on neuter. In the pluraPthe regular Latin endings are 
 used; m the singular either the Latiij endings or the foUowinar, 
 borrowed from the Greek : * .-' ' / .-"'"' 
 
 Nbm. 6., Gen. 6, Ace. on, 6, *Voc 6./ 
 
 •• OS, 
 
 OD, 
 
 ron. 
 
 n pa^ 
 
 Hi 
 
 OB. 
 
 {e) The LocATivn^cMe ends in -1,-etgf. , Oorinthl, huml,'dorm/ 
 
 SO. Noun; of the Third DeolonsVon. (See also sections 4-6.) 
 
 ; (a) The Stem ends either in a consonant or in l.» Ip most cases 
 it may be obtained hy dVopping -urn from the genitive plural. 
 
 (6) Irregular Cask ^dings.-No exceptional endings occur, 
 but a variation, m cerUincaseB is often found, due chiefly to con- 
 tusion between the conHona^it-atems and the i-stems." The latter 
 originally had in the singula^ accusative -l,«, ablative -i ; in the 
 plural, genitive -Inni, accusative -i», and, in neuter^, nbminative ' 
 and accusative .,„. For -is in the" accusative, -e- may always he 
 used, and j8 generally printed in l^tin. books, the other endings 
 ot the t-stems (Hmr-U -Inm, -|W are regular in (a) vU, sitis, 
 /e6rw, pnppt,, semlns, tvrris* ; (b) neuters in. -e, -of, ar; (c) some 
 names of rivers. a?Mi towns, e,g., TatM^s, Tibdri^Nedj^ii, 
 
 ~^~''\ '-■ ■' -. ■ • ; ■ ■ .-^--^r^^— r^^^- > Ar----^f , --- --;;; -■^^- r - --..«fc:^^ - 
 
 i# ih in»ny Utin texts -ii is retained except injdim atyl proper nunes In '-ittf. 
 2. There are tiao t^ro words whose stem endii in i#, #tM and ?/«!« 
 
 9 
 
 4. These. ox*i^»t rut and nHi^f «ouawooaUy tiavf •stu aIim 
 
 ! 
 
 
 r^ 
 
 % 
 
 'J 
 
'jtK^ 
 
 t ■ 
 
 ■1 
 
 i y 
 
 172 
 
 PRIMARY LATlIf B00K| 
 
 The following have -I and -lum only : Igiiis, navis and continem ^ 
 (which also has -e). 
 
 The following have -inm only: (a) nouns in -is or -es^ not \ 
 increasing in the genitive (except cawis, juvenis, arid often mensis) ; 
 (6) nouns in -s or -a;' preceded by a consonant (except parens and 
 nouns in -ps) ; (c) nox, card, imher, linter. - -^^^ 
 
 For the declension of vis, bos and Jnppiter, see section 9. » ■ • ^ 
 
 (c) fiENDBRv—TChe Gender endings and chief exceptions are as '^ 
 follows; -".gf ''''*'■ 
 
 MASCULINE. 
 
 FEMININE. 
 
 
 r 
 
 «I* 
 
 es increasing in gen. 
 
 pis, vas (vadis) 
 
 nouns in -ni*, also 
 edits, lapis, orbis, 
 mensis, pidvis, san- 
 gnit 
 
 ^ns, fdns, mons, pdns 
 
 most nouns in -ex 
 j[«xcept lex, nex) 
 
 kpua, mm tellH» 
 
 $dl, s6l , ^ ^ 
 
 hxr, vultuTtft^ \ 
 
 card, and nouns in 
 : -do, -oo and -to 
 
 (except'^ordo) 
 arbor 
 
 dos < . ,, ■ 
 
 linter ' *. 
 
 segre« 
 
 abies, quies, merces 
 
 OS, an 
 
 ^8 not increasing in 
 
 gen. 
 Is . . 
 
 8 preceded by a con- 
 sonant 
 
 NM7ER. V 
 
 t^' 
 
 aegwor, cor 
 OS (or^\ also oa 
 (o«l») • 
 
 iter, also «er 
 aes 
 
 /<l*, nefds, vas 
 (Vasis) 
 
 M or as, with gen. 
 in -dis or -tls . 
 
 ■r 
 
 
 
 us 6r As, with gen. 
 
 in.jl. 
 4H*% t» t, men 
 
 "v .." 
 
 
 ,:-;i.,v: 
 
 ^) Beolbnsion of Greek NorNS.- These fipwiuently have th« v 
 regular Latin endings ; of the endings borrowetl from the Greek», 
 th<' commonest are Singular, Gon. os, Ace. n ; Phiral, Nom. •% 
 
 ^fs4 
 
■■r. 
 
 PART III. — INFLECTION. 
 
 173 
 
 \ ' 
 
 i ■- 
 
 I' 
 
 Noung in is have Ace. in, as well as the Latin endinif im 
 , « y« II Ace. yn. * 
 
 " /' ? " ^«^^ »«. I>at.. Ace, Voc. ajid Abl. 6. ^ 
 H «68 .1 Gen..i8orl, Ace. emoreni 
 _ ; ; ^"" '' ^^^- «««' I>«fc- el or I, Ace. eum, Voc. ou. but 
 these last more often take the endings of the second declension, 
 (e) The Locative case ends in -i, e.g., run, Oarthaqim. 
 
 5t. Nonn. of the Fourth Declension. (See also section 7.) 
 
 - -- (6) Irregular Case Endings.— '^^^~~^ — -^ — -- 
 
 Dative singular in -ik, contracted for -ul 
 
 in >w^ *"1 ^H**^^^ ^^"""^^ "^ ■"*"«' found in dissyllabic words 
 m -ct« (e.gr iacu.), also in artus, trihm, partus, genu 
 
 if or the declension of doma«. see section 9. : 
 
 (c) GENDER.-Nouns ending in «« are masculiiie, in u neuter. 
 ExcEPTiON8.-Feminine in us are names of trees, e.g., luurm; also 
 aomus, manus, tribus, Idus (plural only). 
 
 62. Nouns of the Fifth pecliwiBion. (See also section 8) 
 (a) The Sti^m endl in -e, and is like the ablative singular. 
 (6) Irregular Case Endings.— 
 
 Genitive singular in -< or -e for -el.^ * ' 1 • 
 
 (c) Gender. -All nouns end in -es, and are regularly feminine 
 ExcEmoN8.-Maseuline are die..» and its compound mTrS 
 
 63. Nouns Defective OP Peoultar in Number. 
 
 . (a) The singrdm- only oi the following nouns is ordinarily found • 
 
 1. Proper names of places or persons,' e.g., BSma, JUppuT ' 
 
 2. Single natural objects, e. g. , luna, telhls. . ^ 
 
 r,'L *^"*^' ^"""^ ordinarily counted), e.g., aur^ - 
 
 4. Names of abstract qualities, e.g., ira, mcitds. 
 
 5. Collective nouns, e.g„ equUdtus, vulgm. 
 
 (b) The plural only of the following nouns is ordinarily found ■ 
 1. CerUm names of places, e.g., Athmae, F^p^^ *_ '. 
 
 % Names of classes or groups, e.g. , liheri^ mdjdres, po$tm 
 ■4. Names of certain parts oFthe body, e.^., fl^,\ '^^ia. 
 
 1. In the irenltive and d*tiye ■inirular tha mruUr »»«.» a. i u _ ^ 
 «ftor ft Romwrnant. ■"■»"'■«• wia regular widlng ^i ig ahortaniid to la- 
 
 S^,%DU,i» «ometlme* feminine In the Blng ular, chlufl^ i« th« »eow o( a m *i^ 
 
 ■''- - . -.- -A . .. - ■ ' 
 
 
 «B».M>lblt^iU 
 
 fi" 
 
174 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 ,K- 
 
 >■ 
 
 5. Many other words, e.g., angxistiae, arma, castra, deliciae, 
 dlvitiae, indutiae, msidiae, moenia, nuptiae, reliquiae, 
 tenehrae. . • ' ^ , 
 
 (c) Many nouns Jound ordinarily in the singular only are used 
 in a special sense in the, plural : 
 
 1. Names of persons, to denote the family or individuals of 
 
 the same type< e.g., Catoms, the Catos, or men like Cato. 
 
 2. Names of ^ngle natural objects, in a transferred sense, 
 
 e.g., soles, «ays. , ,; 
 
 3. Names of materials, to denote objects made of them, e.g., 
 
 aera, bronzes, coppersi - » 
 
 4. Abstract nouns, to denote various manifestations of the 
 -^— quality, e.g., «rae, • bursts of passion; siccitdtes, droughts.^ 
 
 {dj Some nouns have, a different meaning in the singular and 
 plural, e.g.; 
 
 \ 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 aedes, temple ; 
 aiixilium, a.id ; " 
 
 copia, abundance % 
 finis, end ; 
 impedimentnm, hindrance 
 
 PLURAL. , 
 
 hedes, house, palace. 
 auxilid, auxiliary troops. 
 copiae, troops, stores. 
 fines, territory. 
 impedimenta, baggage. 
 
 littera, letter (of the alphabet) ; litterae, letter (of correspond- 
 ence), literature, 
 mos, habit, custom ; more», character. 
 
 A- * 
 
 64. Nouns Defective lu Case. > 
 
 (o-) tfeed in but one case : Noctfi, jussii, injtissu, ndtU. 
 
 (b) Used in but two cases : Fors^ forte ; fas, nefds, instar, nilvSi, 
 opus (need), in nom. and ace. singular. , -■ v 
 
 {c) Used in but three cases : Nemo, nSminl, neminem . 
 
 (d) Defective in both singular and plural : Impettis (^und in 
 
 nom., ace. arid abl. singular, and nom. and ace. plural) ; 
 [diao] (lacking the nom. singular and all the plural); - 
 
 (e) Defective in singular, regular in plural : Vis (see section 9) ; 
 
 [ops] (lacking the nom. and dat. singular). 
 
 (/) Defective in plural, regular in singular : All words of the 
 
 y fifth declension except dies and res (many of these have 
 
 ncr plural ; acies, spes, and a few others have the nom. 
 
 and ace. plural); rws, jus hav« in the pluraj only nom. 
 
 __ 1 and ace. ; lUx, ds (Oris), pax, sOl, and many other morio- 
 
 . syllables of the third declension lack the gen. plural, 
 
 1. Sometimes the sin^ar of a concrete noun is used as a colleotire, chiefly in 
 poetry, c-g^ jato.^ the aoldiery. 'Agaiiu the poata oUiffl \im thff i plnral tor the 
 singulwr in order to heighten the effect (the ' p^uul of majesty '). 
 
 ■^- 
 
PART III.r-INFLECTION. 
 
 y- ^ 
 
 176 
 
 .- 56. H^terogeneoiis/Nouns. '■'-,n ■':■■.;■■', .. :!■<;■ ^ ■ ''\^ ''^^vyr:,: ' 
 
 Some nouns have^ same stem, but vary in genderf " - ^ 1 
 
 -JandTfrl!^''""/- ''^ the second declension have forms in feoth. 
 -^ B,na -um, e.g., chpeus, chpeum. 
 
 plural^^? "^r Z ?^ ^^^''""^ ^T^^^ ^" '^' «i"g"l*^ *»d the 
 ZocmV M ' T^' T^''"^-'^ N-; Plur- «Pttiae, «mm, F. ; sing. 
 J0CW8, «, M ; plur, ioca,,, onm, n.. (also loci, orum, m. chieflv in 
 the sense of passages or topics in a book). ' ^ 
 
 56. Heteroolite /Nouns. , " 
 
 ■ p.^tSi"'- ""*■''"" P*'*'^ °^ "- decleiaion and 
 (?) Maiiy nouns which foUow the first declension have a1»„ 
 
 (6) Many names of trees, .generally of the second declensibn 
 have also forms of the fourth declension (chiefly the ablsnSulS' 
 and nom. and ace plural), e.g., laurus, pLus. For c^mu. also oj 
 both second and fourth declensions, see section 9. 
 
 (c) Fames and requies of the third declension kave 'resoectivelv 
 the^abl. smgular and the ace. and abl. singular of the SIS 
 
 (d) Jti^enm, 1, has in the plural geBBrallv* hiaera urn of n,. ' 
 third declension ; while va,,J^, h^1%eyS^r^rwi. 
 
 ^"J^t^Zl^oZi^LT"'""""' ""'•"■"• Oeclen,.o«.., (See • 
 
 ar^ec^^fe^'''^' ""^ ^ declension ending in -er, the riiajority 
 f^Lt ^! ''^^'*'' ^^^ exceptions are asperBadr, liber miser '^^ 
 
 W compounds m-/er and -ger, and Bomethnes dexter ' ' : 
 
 Adjectives m -lus do not contract the genitive ending -u or f li« " 
 vocative ending -ie, as do the nouns. ^' ' *^® 
 
 ': ■- •. ; '•■,-■' -■ :■-■''■'■. ■ .; .'•■ : ■' ■ ■-; .' ' : 
 
 ll'^a^dlfr"''^'' *»^ **« T*»*?"* »f«>«MiPn: (See also sec^ns * 
 
 (o.) T^e are commonly divided into adjectives of one («» or^ ' 
 **m_teAilnat,om. according t^e numl J of forms uZ' frthe ' 
 
 dinerenf ' ' ' " 
 
 cerminations^nd m ^r, -m,>-re; thige of two terminations in -is 
 •ty or.-ior, -txis (ef)mparative«) ; ^'™*-^ , ""«tions m ta, 
 
 (uinBily -ns), -I or -r. - 
 
 ^^■■^■■^^' 
 
 (ino termination in- tp, -a 
 

 ■4- 
 
 '\ 
 
 4o)"'As ■ a rul6 all ac 
 
 176 > ", PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. v,/ 
 
 . * ' , ,. ■ ■ ' " "' ■ 
 
 Ivei^rof this declBTision haye ^ in the 
 ablatives singuiaff -iitm in the genitive plural, and -taJnaB^ nomi- 
 native an'd a«6tisative plural. The foUovjfing are except^^: 
 
 i. All comparatives ; these have -«, -um, -a (except |)i5Ms). Jfc. 
 
 ii. Many adjectives of one termination, viz. : • W ' 
 
 With -um : all those which in the genitive singu]|^r hayig^ -w 
 preceded by a short vowel aiid a single consonant ; as Miopif, 
 veteris, but no^ ferocis or prildetltis. 
 
 With -e : veins, jpawjper, and adjectives iti -es, gen. -itis or -idi»t 
 e.g„ dives. ' ' {■• " '' • 
 
 With -a: vettis. • , ' ' .. ' 
 
 (c) Present participles have -ta and -ittm ; when used as adje<v-- 
 tives they have -» in the abl. sing. ; wh^n used as participles, -e. 
 
 59. Defective an» Indeollnajble Adjeetl^^ ^ ^' 
 
 lt« s 
 
 %^)ll^ 
 
 Because of their meaning arnjid,^ compluresy paiicl and plerlque 
 are not in use in the singula?. PtureSj too, is found as air adjective 
 only in the' plural, plm, the singular^ being a substantive. 
 
 The following adjtectives are indeclinable : frugl, tieqiianiy necesse, 
 hotf quot, aliqvot, and most cardinal nuiherals. (See section 16.) ' 
 
 \ 
 
 * 60. Comparl 
 tions 13 and 
 
 To the insi ^ 
 17 the followin 
 
 Adjeottves^ and Adverbs. (See also sec- 
 
 ■■^f 
 
 rregular comparison' given in sections 13 and 
 be added : y .. - 
 
 (a) Cases where deficiencies are supplied from other adjectives : 
 
 - senex senior or major ndtfr Toidximtis ndtu^ 
 
 juvenis 
 
 vetua 
 novus 
 
 junior or minor ndtu^ 
 
 vetiistior 
 
 recentior 
 
 m^tmmiik natv? 
 
 vetertimus 
 
 noi)issim,us 
 
 (h) Comparison can be expressed with woAls not themselves com- 
 pared, by adding the adverbs magia (more) and maxitne {most). 
 
 • ^ ■ ' ■ ' 
 
 (c) male » 
 
 prope 
 m,ultnm 
 
 maturW 
 
 nuper 
 'secus 
 
 pejus 
 
 propius 
 
 plus . ♦ 
 
 maturiuls ., 
 
 potiiis 
 prius. ' 
 
 secius or setiiis 
 
 pessvm^ 
 
 proxims 
 
 plurim,um 
 
 .Mr i (* ^ 
 
 (maturissims 
 \maturrim^ 
 potissxmum 
 prlm,um 
 nup€rrim£ 
 
 1. Ambo is declined like dtio, aection 16. 
 
 2. Niiiw (literally by birth) id also often omiftefjl, 
 
 -- »- 
 

 , ,,, — ■ „ - , m ill 
 
 PART III. — INFLECTION. 
 
 177 
 
 61. Numera^./ (See also sections 15 and 16.) 
 
 nr^?L^urS?'^^!i!'T numerala up to 100, either the ten without e^ , 
 or the unit with e^ precedes.^ But the forms expressing subtrac- 
 tion, e.g duodevigmtt, are more common than those expressing 
 . ai'Z..t,\''T T^ numerals above 100, the order is thousand! 
 iiS^LS^S'"'^' "^^^^ -th three numerals, e^i. 
 
 (6) In compound ordinals alter is preferred^ta «ccwne^iw. 
 
 fe) The distributive numerals are : l^^||feuli. 2. bim, 3. term, 
 
 10. denl, 20 vioeni 100. oentenl. e^They are declined like 
 * Sth^e^nitive section 10), but often have -umior -drwni 
 
 The distributives are numeral adjectives used (1) to signify (.o 
 nmn^ each. or ap^e,e (2) in multiplication (bis septet, tv^e siven, 
 onL ? ''^ ' tfu^^ ^^\Poetry), (3) with nouns used in the plura 
 Zfj^ n/r^- .^^^.ri'^/'ll' (*^^°«Pt that tint is.used for oJ, and 
 trnu, not term ior three), (4) to express pairs or groups of objects; 
 (5) m poetry often for the cardinal/ ^? uv^t\ieccs, 
 
 U (d) The nunieral adverbs are: 1. semei. once, 2. bl«, <mc6, 
 d. ter, 4. quater. 5, quinqules, 6. sexles. 7. soptles, 8. ootle* 
 9. novtes. 10. dedes. 20. vXcle«,.^00. centles. 1000. mUlllg 
 For the forms m -es, -ens is also fou^ ' «^""es^ 
 
 . ^1^"* i" ^ singular is regularly an indeclinable adjective 
 in agreement with its substantive; rarely (generally .in the nomi- 
 native or accusative) a neuter noun, followed by the genitiVe 
 
 Mlllla (or Mllla), the plural, is a neuter noun, followed by the 
 genitive If to mUlia is added some smaller number, a nounpre! 
 ceding the combination is in the genitive, but a noun following the 
 combination is m the same case. ""^*"», ^® 
 
 ^ „ ^*^ ^"i^^- P'Vjitive sense, the genitives nostrum and vestrum 
 are used; in the objective sense, the genitives mel. t«l. «u^ 
 
 Xo'^vt^^ ''*'*'^ '"^ *^^ possessive and subjective senses, the . 
 adjectives meus, tuu», sua», noster and v^ste^. ^ . t 
 
 ^u^^^t^w*^ ^.^^» ^^' *^"» *^^® preposition cum is regularly suffixed to 
 the ablative It governs, the accent being on thelyllaWe^;S> 
 
 «nusS^SS;^'^^^ 
 
 It 
 
 vigmti is g^ood prose Latin. 
 
.' 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 ^^^^^H 
 
 ^^^^^pir .'. 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 ^^^^r 
 
 
 [^^^MHIMH^H^M^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 
 
 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^H 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 ■'fi^J ' ■ ' ''^^i-'j ' ''■'.^■i '( 
 
 ' ' , ' "'7' 
 
 
 1 . • 
 
 ^^^^^^^^^^V 
 
 \ 
 
 ■ » ■,/, '- -, ' :5C :.'"-' ^ 
 
 
 -" 
 
 
 ^^HPP^': 
 
 * \ 
 
 ^ f 
 
 ■■..-■ . ^, ". 
 
 
 1 
 
 "■'■■ '^^^,:.., -. - -' ,;"; ■ -..^ '■ ■ ; . 
 
 ^^^^B!^''' ■ ' 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^^^^HP^'-?i' 
 
 
 1 - * - . ■ \ - ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ \:? ".:■ /• • ■ 
 
 ' ' . 
 
 '' " " 
 
 ' - "■" • % »'■-,'.. 
 
 Pf^'^^ , •■^'v.' ■■ 
 
 ♦ 
 
 .-'»»''* ■ .', :; .- ■ - [ 
 
 >j» ' . 
 
 
 
 "^ - 
 
 : "V ■"■'■'•■ ."":i - / 
 
 > 
 
 * 
 
 
 .*■■-■ - ■ ■ ;-'■ ■ ■' . v- .^ 
 
 ' 
 
 ■ '--v " ■ 
 
 t 
 
 ■ ^^ 
 
 - ' » . . . ■ . 
 
 * 
 
 ■ - 4 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 * ■ '■■■.■■ 1 ' . ' ■ 
 
 
 
 -■■■-■ ' ,'■■)'"■ 
 
 
 
 - *■ ,'. ■ " .'-■.,.*./. ■■- ",- 
 
 V, 
 
 
 ■' •* ' ..- ■'■,-* „ 
 
 ■*p 
 
 
 
 ■■ ; * ''. ■ ^ " ■ ^^ ' 
 
 
 
 1 . .', ' ■ — .. '^ 
 
 
 ' \\ , ' '■ ' '. '.. _ • "\- ^ . 
 
 ",'■•• ■ ■ .V .. ' ', V - 
 
 ■■ »•• ^ '. . > 
 
 ,^ * i^ ■ ''",-''-■.■■ 
 
 
 
 ' '*■" ^- i^- - 
 
 ■" • ■ ■ ' ^ * « ■ 
 
 ■ ■>' ; ■;.'■, 5-» :.v~-' 
 
 
 ■■.'-■ ' . " ' . ■'."-. -.. 'l ■ 
 
 - {^'n --.--■■ ^ '' '^^^^- -^''■-" 
 
 ;■'■ ""I ' , 
 
 - ■ .^ ' » ,.■■ ■ , 
 
 ^ 
 
 ./ , ; ■■'" " ■' ^ ,. - -„,,-.■. ,. " -^ 
 
 ,,;■-/ .;(|^'^^"7v 
 
 ^i:--:.' ,v '•,-'.--■ 
 
 •;.: '■-" -•• „ ^<'-' "■•<-^' 
 
 - 
 
 ."* "-.■' , \ .■ • ■ > . - ■ ; 
 
 '::.». ■' ■ -r-'^r '-^p, 
 
 '■:-„.. • 'f :■ 
 
 .1 .^. ■ T ,, 
 
 
 
 ' '"'^ '' wP': 
 
 
 
 
 . ■ ■ ■ - . i ^,- 
 
 "-, .---■.,. 
 
 
 • , -. ' " > <,' 
 
 
 ' -■" " ■ ■■'■■. -■ ' i ' '■■ * 
 
 ■«. ■.■-'"'( 
 
 L' "•',-■• 
 
 
 
 '..- '-. ' ■^- - ,*..■•'„ ■ ' . 
 
 
 ::--■ , ■ •* 
 
 -'•-.■■*■, 
 
 
 ■• " ^ ■ '\ \'lj. • ■■ *■ ■'■' "■■_ , , ' ■ ' 
 
 "■ ■ -• 
 
 ' r ' _ ' ' >, " 
 
 "3; ; ■'• - ' ■:!',' ■ - . '' ■■ 
 
 
 
 -h . ■ " ■.." '' ■ 
 
 
 \' * ■«'. u* ■ ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 . ,1 ■* "■. ' . 
 
 
 
 
 * .' ■ " .'•■ 
 
 
 
 •' 'j . " ".i' ' ', . '■ '"^ 
 
 • • ' .'■ ".■-.'." 
 
 ' . ■"*"■■;■ J'"' ' * ";■ 
 
 ' \ ' •• ■ * t 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ ^- .. ,V' •• •*.-.: ^^» 
 
 
 .■■_■-,.„'. f 
 
 y'/- " '''■-?;,":;;• ; 
 
 ^'-■-'^-:-y>-—-^-'- 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 ,. ' :.v' ■ ' ■ '"'K;'^- " ■ 
 
 ' ':■..■ • -s^ ■ ^' ' .. v^ 
 
 
 
 ' .' ■■ ' ■" ' ■ " ' " . 
 
 '•' •■ ■ ' ' I- .•.' ".;.'f-" - -" 
 
 
 -■" . 
 
 
 
 ■ ■.-■ ■ ' -* . I ■ 
 
 
 
 
 ' '■'■' '■ ' ^r '" II. >i 1 III 1. .1 .. . .- 
 
 
 
 • ;-■ ** 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • * 
 
 
 ■■■-■• ■ ■ .-,.. 
 
 ^* ' ... 
 
 
 * ' -r ^ ' i " ' , 
 
 .1 . ' .. " '' " .'•" ■ 
 
 f-,i ; ■ I- . 
 
 .«-.-- ,-- . . 
 
 
 I - '-.-■'*■" 
 
 * * 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 'j jc,.- . ■■ , 
 
 »■.-"■-, -■ ' ' . 
 
 
 . ■ - . - " ' ^ .''■'■■ ""'">'■"■ ! ■ 
 
 '■ . . ■ ■■ " --" ■ ■ 
 
 
 
 
 ■;.... , ^ .. - ,1 ;- ;.., .., * 
 
 
 ■ ';. . ■• -, . -■ :> • . •• 
 
 ' i, '■ ( ■,' ■•'"' 
 
 
 X- ■ --.v^^.^ ■■ .-■ \ ■■ 
 
 , ■ ^v- '■-': - ■ '^ -,'' 
 
 > ■■■ - > ., ., 
 
 '■■:■■■■ ;. ■", 
 
 
 ■•■■-;. ■■■■',■-■.■■■■■ • ■■. *.. 
 
 ■■ -^ y ■ t- „ 
 
 
 • "■' , - ■ ' ■ ''v*^'. 
 
 
 ''- ■■ * . ."-^'^ *> ■ ,:|-v . *■ ,■■•■,"'■■ ^' 
 
 >.; , ' ri. .-■; ... 
 
 - . ■ . . ^ -.■■'■ _- ■ .',' ■ 
 
 
 :■ ",. 
 
 '■ ,-■ ■"■.- , '*.- '^ : ^y./:. "'•^ ■ . . > ■ -, ■;. 1 ■ 
 
 -' ■ '<«■''." "' *' "■""-'. l";* 
 
 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . . . .;' . ■• . 
 
 ^V^f''^* -■'■:'-:^ '"■',: >. ' - / '■ 
 
 J ■ 
 
 . ■>■- :" •: '■'' ■ ' -,;■" ^ ■ ■ Ji^-; ;.•■ 
 
 ' "■-.' . ■ .■ '^ ■ . 
 
 ■" -■■ '■■'-''■:.■ ■ : ■ ■-.'■'- .'■ NV"' 
 
 ^,^* / ■■■ '..-^: :-' ."'^ . ■ ;■■;..•:, ■' . . ■. •: , 
 
 " ■':' 
 
 ,-'■■■*■■-' ■-,■■■ - ^ ■ \ ■■ ■ 
 
 
 . ■ ^ ; -■ 
 
 
 
 *" ' ' ■ ■, " . # Ml * ■ 
 
 
« 
 
 
 tw.1^ 
 
 IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 \ 
 
 ■A- 
 
 1.0 ^vil^ 
 
 ■V lU 12.2 
 
 K 144 ■" 
 110 12.0 
 
 t.l 
 
 n 
 
 1^ 1^ ^ 
 
 ^T 
 
 
 t 
 
 /> 
 
 ^ J^ii.. 
 
 
 ^^ 
 
 /- 
 
 I.. 
 
 
 4^ 
 
 "■"^i^ 
 
 -#! 
 
 Riotographic 
 
 Sdences 
 Corporation 
 
 ^^<\T^^ 
 
 ' ^ r v^ 
 
 M WMT MAM STMIt 
 
 WIMTM,N.Y. MSM 
 
 ( n*) •73-4S03 
 
 ^^^ 
 ^ 
 
 -•« 
 
 «•^' 
 
 \ 
 
 
 ^, 
 
. '**;. 
 
 
 ' . „. . * ■ " ■ , ' 
 
 J " *#■ '' ■*■■ 
 
 «V 
 
 >• '' ' ■... ■ ■, -■' 
 
 . .,. .... .. .- ■ ... • , ■ ^ ■ 
 
 f . # ■ ' 
 
 ■» 
 
 
 : • 
 
 # ■ ■; 
 
 :^ ■ ■. ■ V..- ' ' : 
 
 .,, ' v- "" " 
 ■ . ir . ■ ■ ' \ 
 
 4 " . , • ' 
 
 . • ■ ■ ■ ■■'■ . . - -.vi^ .■ ■ 
 
 \ 
 ft 
 
 
 ■ , " ■ • • ■ , . 
 
 1 ; ' 
 
 ■'■■ • ■""./ ■"'- ^ ■ ^ 
 
 ^ ■ 
 * ■ ■ 
 
 .... . - . ' ^ 
 
 • 
 
 ^''^' ;:. 
 
 * 
 
 . A 
 
 ^. 
 
 * * . ■ * 
 
 a 
 
 • 
 
 ^^w 
 
 • '""■" '. • ' ' • ■ ., ■ . 
 
 « 
 
 ^ 
 
 . ■ . ■ ■ ■■■>'■ 
 
 
 ^* .■■ 
 
 ■" ■■ • ^ ■' 
 
 f 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
178 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 k' 
 
 (c) For mifUf the contracted form nil also occurs. These 
 pronouns are emphasized by the addition of certain particles, 
 especially -met (added to all forms of ego, tU and sut, except ^2« and 
 the genitive plural)' and -pte (added to the ablative singular'of, the v 
 possessives). SesS in usage is intej^angeable with se ; reduplica- 
 tion in dthier pronouns indicates em^asis. 
 
 (d) In the first and second persons^ the personal pronouns mrve 
 also as the reflexive pronouns. i 
 
 (e), Thia reflexive pronouns with inter are equivalent to the 
 reciprocal each oilier or one another (including often the preposition 
 governing these words), e. 9., inter nd» amaimuy intil''' se pugnunt. 
 
 63. Demonstrative Pronoans. (See also sections 22 and 23. ) 
 
 (a) Hie, Hie and iste are often emphasized by the addition of -ce 
 (sometimes shortened to -c) to the various cases. ^ Of these forms, 
 istuc is commoner than istud. 
 
 (6) For the dative singular and nominative plural of Ule, olll is 
 found (from an archaic ollus). 
 
 (c) Often in poetry the genitive singular of Ule and iste is illiiu 
 
 and istius, not ^liua and isti^M ; and the dative singular of ta, «i, 
 
 not e{. :;...- -,-•',;;■.>•. '■'■ -0 
 
 • ■_ .,: .• _ , -.,■■-- — _ .^ -r 
 
 . (d) Of the alternative forms given for the nominative, dative 
 
 and ablative plural of is and idem, those in ei are the rarer. Jidem 
 
 and iisdem are often, and with greater correctness, written idem 
 
 and iM^em. "H * 
 
 64. Relative. InterroiTAtive and Indefinite Prononna. (See 
 also sections 24-26.) 
 
 (a) An ablative singular - form qal occurs ; as a relative it is 
 used chiefly with cunt? ; as an ititerrogative it is an adverb, mean- 
 ing how f Qnla occurs for the dative and ablative plurat^ — 73?f;~ 
 
 (h) With the relative and interrogative pronouns, the preposition 
 cum is (except very rarely) suffixed to the ablative it governs, the 
 accent being on the syllable preceding -cum. 
 
 1 (c) In the interrogative and indefinite pronotthi,- the distinction 
 . between adjective and substantive forms (sections 26 and 26) is 
 less carefully observed in the masculine than in the neuter. . 
 
 Quia indefinite lias sometimes qxiae in the feminine singular and 
 neuter plural. i 
 
 mmiitm>im 
 
 -L- Thcj;(U)f Afc» hunc^Miuhaecth awmnnni o f ttili ! 
 
 ♦ 
 
 |. Otowo prilwt fitwmm to quoaum or ^ttoown, 
 
 ii^'''.y 
 
 ^t 
 
PART III. — INFLECTION. 
 
 179 
 
 The two parts of qulmmqiui are often divided by another word. 
 
 (d) The interrogative is often strengthened by the addition of 
 ec-^ or -ruim; ec^ts ^cqut), etc., and qti^nmn (quinam), etc. . I 
 
 65. 'V'erb Stems and Principal Parte. 
 
 _ The Principal Parts o{ a Latin verb are the present indica- 
 tive, pesent mfinitive. perfect indicative and (except in deponent' 
 verbs) the supine.' These give the main stems from which, as 
 starting points, aU parts of a verb aVe formed, according to a fixed 
 system. . , . ® "ao«, 
 
 The stems of an active verb may be found' by omittinir -re. -f 
 and -urn respectively in the present infinitive, perfect indicative 
 and supine of the principal parts. These stems are called respec- 
 tively the present, perfect and supine stems. 
 
 The stems of -a deponent verb may be found by omitting -rl of 
 
 tJie present infimtive (but in the third conjugatipn by cl^nginb 
 
 i to -e) for the present stem ; and by omitting -us mm of the 
 
 perfect indicative for the siipine stem. The perfect stem does not 
 
 OCCUf • 
 
 ,.ip''- 
 
 66. Irregular Pbrm» 1^. t|e eonjugatlon of the Re^lar 
 Vero. ..--■Ir'" - 
 
 An^S^^S ^ w'' ■^^•'- *"^ ^^^"^ "^"^-^ ^""^ »«^* (f^m ^^ 
 
 anr^sc5 often, before -m-, -er- or -er> drop v and contract the 
 'rZir^O^l '""^'^ ^^^^'^^ ^ ^' ^ .^respectively; e.,: 
 Perfects in -ivl also drop v before .«-, -er- or -ir- but the 
 vowels thus brought together are contracted (to I) only before -«- 
 before -er- and -gr-^ I is shortened to i. 
 
 a^^ !f .1""^^'^ compounds also vetd and deinnd, drop v «Isq ia the 
 first and third singular and first plural of the perfect indic5&3». 
 
 in^^^ fr^ "^*^"* ""^ ^^^ ^^^""^ indicative -fire is used, especially 
 
 For -ria of the second singular pa8«v« -w, is used, but tarely 
 m the present indicative. ^ 
 
 The gerund and gerundive of the third and fourth conjugations 
 have sometimes, especially after t, -«ndl and -andn. for-endl 
 and -endns. 
 
 ^iJ^ V^l imperative, second singular present active, of dted,dnci 
 ^i(J,/er5, IS die. duo. fao. fer. These forms are retained in com' 
 poun^ except in those cftmpounds of/act«J, which change to -Jlcid 
 
 7^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^'^^^'i^ 
 
ISO 
 
 3 
 
 FBIHARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 \ 
 
 • ■ 
 
 
 (d) The archaic 
 used by the poets. 
 
 •lor for -» of the present iii6nitive passive is 
 
 Someti^les in poetry -ia-, -tJte- or -«'«- is dropped in forms froi^ 
 perfectain '8l or -xl; e.g., dixit ioT dixistl. 
 
 An archaic future perfect indicative in -go and perfect si^bjunc- 
 tive in -slm are found in poetry ', e.g., fancd (for /ac55), a^^-» 
 
 (e) In the \compound tenses of the regular verb, e«se is very 
 often omittecl'y especially in the future infinitive active ; so also eat 
 and *»mt, but \chiefly in poetry. 
 
 07. Verbs In -l5 of th6 Third Conjagration. (See also sec- 
 tion 39.) \ V - 
 
 In the teni^esl formed from the present stem> these verbs retain 
 -» of ^ the "stem ^wherever in the foiirth -conjugation we have two 
 successive vtfw^ls, -e.g., capiunt; in other cases (that is, before 
 - », I or er) they dVop'-i of the stem, e.g., capere. 
 
 The verbs so Conjugated are : capio, cnpi5. faolo. fodld, fagld, 
 Jaolot pario. qiiatld, sapid t morlor, t>atlor ; and compounds (of 
 rare or obsolete verbs) ending in •flrredlor,vliol6, -spioid. 
 
 Orlor also, though regiilarly of the fourth conjugation, has very 
 commonly i^^ theipreselit indicative and imperfect subjunctive the 
 forms of the third coiijugation. ^ ««^ 
 
 lajjylie 
 
 m 
 
 6S*-^ D^poneiit Verbs. 
 
 *" A synopsis of the conjugation of deponent verbs (which m^ 
 defined as verbs which no longer retain the active forms, bul 
 the passive forms with an active meai^ng), is given in sectioid^ 
 
 (a) The Principal Parts of deponents necessarily differ from 
 those of the regular active verb. (See section 66.) 
 
 v' (h) The forms of the. ordinaiy deponent are nott^^U passive, nor 
 is the meaning of all ks parts alctive. The deponent verb has 
 
 ^gularly from the active voice the present and future paHicipleSy 
 the future m^ntiw^r^ha^^jgrn^d alnd the supine ; while again the 
 gerundive is regularly passive in mcbaning. 
 
 • (c) Sbmi-deponbnits are certain verbs which are deponent in the-; 
 
 perfect tenses only, Wiz. : auded, fife, ansas sum s g^anded, fire» 
 , ipftvlsns sum t Hdo, ere, fisns sam (and compounds) ; soled, 
 
 ftre, solttns sum. 1 ^,,---.^, 
 Fid, fieri, factm aiirn (section 46) is practically a semi-deponent ; 
 
 while reverter, revertl, perfect revertl (not reterav^ sum) is tl 
 
 converse. 
 
 /^ 
 
 - ^ 
 
assive IS 
 
 PART III.— IKFLECJTION. IgJ 
 
 Certain alslof the impersonal verba have iii the n«rf«A«t i^^u 
 
 In a very few other verbs both active and denonfinf f«i^o — „ 
 
 69. 
 
 V 
 
 The t*J|riplira8tlo Coajngatlons. 
 
 AU compould forms of the verb might strictly be called n«r.- 
 phrastic. but tie term is usually limited to tw" sets of f^r^:^'": 
 
 cipri I^l^ll P«"P^^*?«c conjugation, viz,, the future parti- 
 (i.) The posaile periphrastic conjugation, viz., the Kerundive in 
 
 70. The Verl 
 41 and 42.) 
 
 SUM and its Compoanda. 
 
 (See also se^tioi|s 
 
 Sum 18 compoT|nded with many of the DreDositions in r»^.*. 
 
 sonal, It concerns)| obsum, I am against, hinder : «roeattm T am 
 
 nrrnHSv' t"""' V"^ ?>/ benefit ,^l;.^T^und:r™ 
 near (no perf.) ; auhermm, I am left over, survive 
 
 ^Prosum has prSM-, not pro-, before all forn^ of sum beginning 
 
 <^^n^^^^ -<» --' * of IK^^ being 
 
 fn^s^JZl^'t ^^'^'''T ^*;'" Z^'^y ^ **»« compounds ahs^m, and 
 praesum (ab.en.. prU-en.). Possum has poten. used adjeotively 
 
 71. (a) The Verb e5 and Its Compound..' (^ee also s^. 46.) 
 _lS^^ the compJL of e6 (e.g., ade&, cireumeO, ineO^rmd 
 a w^vTmmTX""^ ^r^ P««aiVe forms, formed ^Thi 
 
 Ss Jeor ^ti, tr ""?-^"««' *•?•' the Preeent indicative of 
 qoeo 18 odeor. gdirw, Mihi,r, adimnr, adiminl, adeuntur. Kn \tm^yi 
 
 I. Qwo, nLuM ami vfneo are conjugated Uk« 
 
 to. 
 
r 
 
 'I 
 
 18^ / PJtlMARY .LATIN BOOK. 
 
 also has'fjassi/e fonns in the tliix;4 person used int^^i 
 itwr, fr*, iunawm.. / j • .1 
 
 "In the pisrfect tenses ii is far commoner^ than /^v», a?ld in tn^^ 
 compound» is the almost invariable form. / ./ ' 
 
 (6) Tl^ Verb FEBO and it» Compounds^ (See also sec. 44.) 
 
 . The/prepositioris with which ferd is compounded often undelreo 
 chapgfes.to harmonize their final sound with; the letters /, t and h 
 
 of ti^ three stems of fero 
 
 ex 
 In 
 Ob 
 re 
 
 mtb 
 
 &a-fer6 
 
 af-fert _ 
 
 oon'-ferd 
 
 dif-ferd 
 
 ef-fero 
 
 In-fero 
 
 of- fero 
 
 re-fero^ 
 
 8af-fep<>5 
 
 aa-ferre 
 
 af-ferre 
 
 o6n-ferre 
 
 dif-ferre 
 
 ef-ferre 
 
 In-ferro 
 
 of-ferre 
 
 re-ferro 
 
 Buf-ferre 
 
 aW-tolI 
 
 at-tiill 
 
 oon-tall 
 
 dis-tnll 
 
 ox-tall 
 
 in-tull 
 
 ob-tnlt 
 
 ret-tnll 
 
 sns-tull 
 
 ab-l&tnm 
 al-latain i. _ 
 ool-latani « 
 dl-latum 
 e-latam 
 11-latam 
 ob-latnm ~ 
 * re-latmm ' 
 sab-Iatam^ 
 
 (c) The Verb FI(5 and it» Compounds. (See also section 46.) 
 •JPW is compounded with isterbal stems or with adverbs, «.gf., 
 paUjles-l (patefacid) ; aatisjierl (satisfacid) ; very rar.ely, and onlym* 
 isolat^i forms, with prepositions, as CQnfierl, dejit, infit The 
 passive of compounds of facid with prepositions is formed regu- 
 larly from the active, e.g., interficior, interjUl; cdnjuiior, cdnficl. / 
 
 72. Defective Vorbfi ^ 
 
 i (a) CoEPi, I began, is used in the perfect, pluperfect and future 
 perfect tenses only. (The other tenses are supplied bytnctptS.) 
 A passive form, coepkis sum, is used with the same force as coepJ, 
 when a passive infinitive follows. There is also a future parti- 
 ciple, coepturu», ' ^ ^ 
 
 (6) MBm»r, fremember, and odi, I hat^ are used in the perfect, 
 pluperfect and future perfect tenses only, Vith the meaning ^of the. 
 present, imperfect and future, respectively. Meminl has also the 
 imperative second singular mementd, plural mewWuigte; 5di has a 
 perfect participle 6sm, and a future participle dsUrua. 
 
 (c) Aio, I say, is scarcely found except in the forms, present 
 indicative, aid, aia, ait, dinnt; imperfect indicative, diibam, etc. 
 
 
 I. Sv^rdi, mUatum, however, on the «core M nManlaff, h« uilgnwl in tfaa 
 .vooaliiiliMiM to taUo. not to «H^ero. 
 
o. 
 
 
 PART III.— INPLECTlON: 
 
 183 
 
 •{d) iNQtrAM, I say, is scarcely found excepfc iii'the forma first 
 person tn^wam, third pei:8on injiti*. ' ^ .^^?« lorms, nrst 
 
 »}^l^^^^' to speak, a deponent of the first conjugation, has in' 
 ^^t.'^'T'^y '""^f^^fP^^ the future indicati^ fcMtn^Z 
 perfect and pluperfect dndicala?^. and subjunctive, the infinitive 
 /arz, the imperative yare, the^Srund fartil, etc/the paSlIS 
 fatvs,fandm &ndi{ faiis)Jantia.^ , "i« parucipiea 
 
 JP^^'^f^^' ^ ^^^' '® "^®*^ '"^ *^« firat/person singular quaeaO 
 and plural ^ttacswwMM. .^ ; ^ «»* ««»ew, 
 
 ■'!: 
 
 73. Impersonal Verba. 
 
 (a) Many verba haymg no definite subject, and hence called 
 Impersorud, are found only in the third petin singular and in 
 the infinitive. Of these, some refer to the weather (C., Xt S 
 raim) and some express the- existence of certaiii feefcT^^ « 
 mxseretypam,itet, pndet, piget, taedet), ««*"^eeung8, {e.g., 
 
 ,J^ Manr other verbs are said to be xxaed impersonaUy in the 
 third singidar when a clause or phrase fumishefa subject (eT 
 licet haec facere, %t w permissiUe to do this). So licet OD^tet 
 mces^ est, accidifc (and other verbs of happen^), cSmtai.'fSZ' 
 reatat, superest, interest, rSfert, juvat " prwisim, 
 
 ; (c) The passive of many intransitive verbs is used in the third 
 smgular impersonally, the Subject being contained in the veS 
 
 Lt!L:tJ.lTr;;/^^^^^^^^ '^"^ -'• ^^^'* <^^^ 
 
 neute/" *^^ ^°"*^°"°^ ^^^^ **' impersonal verbs the participle is 
 
 k 
 
 Inoeptlvea, PreqaenilatWea and'Deslderativea. 
 
 (a) iNOKPTivBs or Inchoatives are verbs of the third conjuffa- 
 tion, ending in -ao6, which denote the beginning of an action, or 
 the entrance into a condition ; as, odn,u#aod, I become cJSLd 
 They are formed chiefly froin the present stem of verbs,TiXre 
 themselves used only in the present stem. ■ ^ • 
 
 (6) FRfcQUBNTATiVBS, Intb^sivbs or Itekativbs are verbs of the 
 first conjugation, endmg in Ho or -.6, which denote repeated or 
 wgon>m action j aa jaot6, I hrmviish, from Jaold, I hvH. Thev 
 are formed generally from the supine stem of verbs. 
 
 (c) Dbsidebat ivbs are verbs of the fourth Conjugation, ending 
 Jii-=w4«vwl»efr4enot« tkikmre ho do Bomething; o;^; knurioVT 
 
 deaire to eat, I am hungry. They are for^ned from the sipi^e'stem 
 
 _¥_,_.. 
 
<*? 
 
 V 
 
 \ 
 
 .M 
 
 \ 
 
 ^' 
 
 u. 
 
 X 
 
 '0' 
 
 t\, »f ^ 
 
NEPOS,. tHEMlSTOCLES. 
 
 185 
 
 ■ "t 
 
 PART IV. 
 
 SELECTIONS FROM'. NEP6s AND 
 
 WITH, ANNOTATIONa 
 
 CiESAR, 
 
 .^|> CORNELli NEPOTIS 
 
 • t » ' ' VFTAE. 
 
 I. 
 
 TffEMISTOCLES. 
 
 1 1. Themistoclss, Natelis fiii,,. in,- •. . 
 
 camassiam clven/daiit «i n„s «^ . ™ " uiorem Hali- 
 
 n«n fwgit earn, eed sriit K^TT ■} Q°« «""tumslia 
 diligent .„4 fto^Ztl^nsZ,;' ''''*■' ^ 
 
 "'factum esFutbrowl^^^^^SS^^f*»^ 
 
186 
 
 |»RIMARY, LATIN BOOK. 
 
 k 
 
 By his advice the Athmia/ns buUd a fleet and became a naval jxnoef 
 To these 'wooden walla ' thej/ retire in the Persian war. 
 t 2. Primus autem gradus fuit capessendae rel pQblicae beUo Oo#- 
 cyra.e6: ad quod gerendum praetor a populo factu» non solum" 
 . praesenti beUo, sed etiam reliquo tempore ferocTorem reddidit 
 2cmtatem. Nam cum pecflnia ptiblica, quae ex metalUs redibat 
 
 largitione n^gistratuum quotannis interiret, ille persuaait popul^ 6 
 8ut ea figpOitiS^lassia centum navium aedificaretur. Qua celeriter 
 eflFecta prim^n^ Corc^raeos fregit, deinde^maritimos praedones con- ^ 
 sectando mare^atum reddidit. In quo cum dlvitiis ornavit turn 
 4etiam peritissimOs bdH navalis fecit Athenienses. Id ^uLnta» 
 salati fuerit tiniversae Graeciae, beUo cognitum "est Porsico 10 
 Nam cum Xerxes |t mari" et terra beUum universae inferret ' 
 Euyopae, cum tantis copils quantas neque ante nee postea habuit 
 Sqmsquam ; htljus enim classis mlUe et ducentarum navium longS- 
 rum fuit, quam duo miUia onerariarum sequebantur, terrestris 
 autem exercitus sepftngenta peditum, equitum quadringenta mfllia 16 
 6 fuerunt. Ctijus de adventu cum fama in Graeciam esset perlfita et 
 maxime Athgnienses peti dicerentur propter pugAam MarathS- 
 mam, n^Srunt Delphos consultura, quidnam facerent d5 rSbus 
 suis. D6h-berantibu8 Pythia respondit, ut moenibus Hgneis s5 
 7manirent. Id responsum quo valeret cum intellegeret nSmo, ao 
 Themistocles persuasit consiUum esse Apollinis, ut in navgs sS- 
 suaque conferrent : eum enin^ a deo significari murum Hgneum. ^ 
 Slallconsihoprobatoaddunt ad superiores totidem naves triremes 
 .suaqud omnia, quae moveri poterant, partim Salamlna, partim 
 TroezSna deportant : arcem sacerdotibus paucisque majoribus natii 25 
 ad sacra procuranda tr^unt, reliquum oppidum relinquuut. ) 
 
 Jr*e^e* Tani/brces are defeated at Thermopylce. The fleet engages 
 ^ the enemy^al Artemisium, and then mthdraws to abetter position 
 at Stdamis. 
 
 1 3. Hiijus cSnsiKum plSrtequ© clvitatibns displicSbat et in terra 
 (^micari magis plaoSbat. Itaque missi sunt delecti cum LeSnida, 
 Lacedaemoniorum rege, qui Thermopylas oocuparent longiusque 
 barbaros progredi non paterentur. li vim hostium non sustinuS- 30 
 
 2 runt eoque loco omnSs interigrunt. At classis coramanis Graeciae 
 ^geentarum naviu m , i n guA ducentaflflra^t Ath6ai§awii 
 
PART IV.— NBPOS, THEMISTOCLES. 
 
 Ar 
 
 mum apud Artemisium inter Euboeam cohfcinentemque .terram' 
 ^cumclassianlsregilsconflixit. Angustias enini ThemistoclSs quae. 
 Srgbat, ne multitGdine circumlretur. Hie etsi part-prdelio dia- ' 
 
 cesserant, tamen eodem loco non sunt ausi manSre, quod ewt ■ 
 
 penculum, ne, sT pars nayiunrddversariorum Euboeam superSaset 5 
 4ancipiti premerentur pericido. Quo factum est ut ab" Artemisis" 
 
 discederent et exadversum Athenaa apud Salamlna classem suam 
 
 Constituerent. • ^ 
 
 -■:■'■■■.'■: ■■ • -:' ..'■■n.-y ...■ ■■•■ ' . , ■ , 
 
 terxes takes Athens, themistocles, /euHng the other Cheeks rvqiUd 
 -- return to defend their oion cities, hy a stratagem brings onTm 
 
 immediate engagement, in which the Greeks -win. \ ^ 
 
 %t 'l^l?^?! Thermopyto exp^gnatls protiiius acce^sit astu 
 2 nvL' 1 ^'^^i^^^f ^"«^ i^t^rfectls sacerdotibus, quoa in arcelO 
 2mvenerat, mcendio delevit. Caju^ flamma pe^rritJclassiaril 
 cum manere non auderent et plurimi hortarentur ut domos suaa 
 chscederent moenibusque se defenderent. Themistocles unus re- 
 stitit et muversos pares esse posse aiebat, disperses testabatur 
 penturos, idque Eurybiadi, regr I^ced^emoritSrumr^urisfiriu^ri^ 
 3mae impenl praeerat, fore arirmabat. Quern cum minus quam / 
 veUet moveret, noctu de servis suls quern habuit fidelissimum ad ' 
 regem mlsit, ut ei nuntiaret sufe" verbis, adversarios ejus in fuga ' 
 4 esse : qui si discessissent, m^jore cum labore et longinquiore tem- 
 pore beUum confectOrum, x;um singulos consectart cSgeretur ; quosar 
 SI statim aggrederetur, brevi tiniversos oppressurum. ,Hoc eo 
 6valebat,ut^ingratilsaddepu^|Wumomnesc6gerentur. Hac re ' 
 audita barbarus, nihil doll su^e credpns, postridiS alienissimo » 
 sibi loco, contra opportOnissimo hostibus adeo angusto mart con- 
 iiixit, ut ejus multitudo navium exph&i non potuerit. Victus25 
 ergp est magis etiam cSnsilio Themistoclis quam armis Graeciae. 
 
 ffe then by a second stratdgem induces Xerxes to retreat with his land 
 army to Asia, and. thus Themistodes saves Greece. 
 1 6. Hie etsi male rem gesserat, tameri tantSs habebat reliquifis 
 cSpiarum, ut etiamtum ils opprimere posset Koat6s. Iterum ab 
 eSdem gradii dSpulsus est., Nam ThemistoclSs, verSna nS bellfire 
 peraeverSret, certiorem eum fSeit id 
 
? V 
 
 188^ 
 
 tMMAinr LATIN. BOOK. 
 
 I 
 
 rt. 
 
 aidque el persuSsit. Itaque qu5 sex mSnsibus iter fScerat, eiSdem 
 minus diSbus trlginta in ^^^m revpraus est s§que S. Themistode 
 
 8n6n superStum; sed conservatum jildicavifc. Sic flnlutf viri prtt- v 
 dentia Graeci& liberata.est Europaeque succubuit Asia. Paec est 
 altera victoria, quae cum Marathonio possit comparari ttopaeS. 6 
 Nam parlmodo apud Salamina parvo numero navium maxima post 
 hominum «lemoriam classis est devicta. '^^':'cc^.-, 
 
 " • ■•; ■ - . ' '- /'■v;:-'V-'"/^^'.M •■'.'■' ■■:''''^--"":'^'- ■ T: ■ 
 
 The jealous Spartam teek to prtevent ike rebuUding of the city xpalls. 
 ^. , . Themistodes undertakes an embassy to Sparta. 
 
 - 1. 6. Magnus hoc bello Themistocles fuit neque minor in pkce. 
 
 Cum enira Phal§ric6 porta neque magno^^jfieque bono Athgnienses 
 
 titerentur, hQjjis consilio triplex Rraei portus constitutus est iisque 10 
 
 moenibu» circumdatus, .ut ipsara urbem dighitatfe aequiperaret,- 
 
 ^ 2titmt^tesuperaret. Idem miiros AthSniensium restituit praepiptio 
 
 suo periculS. Namque Lacedae'monilcausam idSneam nacti prop- 
 
 ; te* barbaroruto excursionSs, qua negarent oportere extra Pel6pon- 
 
 ., nesum allam urbem miiros habere, "n§ essent loca mflnita,* quae 15 
 
 hostgs p6s8iderent, Athenienses aedificantes prohibere sunt conatl. 
 3 Hoc longs alio speotabatatqueviderivolebant. Athenignsgs enim , 
 duabus vietorils, Marathonia et Sadamlnia, tantam gloriam apud 
 omngs gentgs erarit consecutl, ut intellegerent Lac^daemonii dg 
 4pnncipata sibi cum iis certamen fore. Quaxg eos quam mfin|iis- 20 
 siftos -esse volgbanfe. Postquam autem audierunt mOros strul, 
 Iggatos Athgnas misgrunt, qui id fieri vetarent. His praesentibus" 
 • 6 dg^igrunt ac sg de ea rg legates ad eqs missiiros dixgrunt. Hanc 
 legatipnem suscepit Tlxemistocles et solus prtmo profectus est: 
 ■ ^ reliqul Iggati ut turn exirent, cum satis alti tuendo muri exstructl25 
 ^ ' vidgrentur, praecgpit : interim omngs, servi atque- liberi, opus 
 facerenti. neque tilli loc5 parce¥6nt, sive sacer, sive privatus esset 
 ^ sive publicus, et undiqiie, quod idoneum ad muniendum pu- 
 tSxent, congererent. Quo factum est ut AthSnignsium mflri ex 
 sacellis SQpulcr|j||ue constaijent. ' * 30 
 
 ^ By playing a bold gdih^ he suQceedsin outwitting the Spartans. 
 
 , 1 7« Themistoclgs autem, utijLaceilaemonem vgnit, adire «d magi- 
 " BtrataiB noluit et dedit dperam, ut quam l^ngissiihg tempus dflceyet, 
 
 
 y 
 
 lei^-se-udiBgas exapiBCtSife. Cuih Lacedaemonii 
 
1 
 
 t t 
 
 ♦ PART. IV.— NEPOS, THEMIS-rOCLES." ' 189 
 
 : quererentu; opus^ mhilo miniis fieri eumgue in e5 r§ cSnSri faH^' 
 multum Buper^sse munitao^is, ad ephoroa LacedaemSrum accesl' 
 
 falpaii^esse delata : quare aequum esse iUos-yiros bonos n5bi- ^ 
 ' /;^*l-.t^^-«<JUibus fides hab.r.tur,q 
 ^ ^sS obsidem retmerent. G^tus est el mos, tresqaie IggatI fun<^i 
 
 . Thenx^st^clgB jtiss.t proficiscl^iisque praedixit. ut ne prius Ledae- . 
 
 P^stqAanx Athena« pervemsse ratua^est, ad m^gistrSttis-^enatumque 
 Lacedaemomorum adyi^t apud eO, iTberrimg professus est : Athe- 
 mSnses suo consilio, quo^ commOnl jure gentium facer^possent, 
 deos pubhcos suosque patrios ac penates, quo faciUus ab hoste 
 
 . 5Graeciae fecxsse.. Nam illorum urbem ut p^opflguaculum opposi- , 
 . tum esse barbaris,.apud quam jam bis classes regiaa fecisse naufra- 
 egium. Lacedaemonios autem male et injflste facere, qui id potii^ " 
 mtuSrentur, quod ipsorum domination! quam quod Oniversae Grae- 
 ciae Utile esset. Quare, si suos lelat^s recipere veDent, quosi» 
 Athena^ miserant, ^e remitterent, «urn ^Kter.iUos numquaih in 
 patnam essent recepturi. 3 -^ 
 
 Thernistode» becomes unpiPpvlar and is ostracized and afUrward^ ron^ 
 
 demnedfortreal^on. After many wanderii^a he comes to Ephesm, ' 
 an Asia Mtnor. ^ . i» ' 
 
 I 8: Tam^n non eflfiigit civium suorum invidiam. Namqueob- " 
 • eundem ti^orem, quo damnatus erat MUtiades, testularum suffra- 
 2gns e civitate gjectus Argos habitatum feoncgssit. Hic cuirf prop-25 
 ter multas virtates magna c«m>dignitate viver;t, Lacedaemonil 
 legatos Athenas miserunt, qui euik:^bsentem accOsarent,. quod 
 . societai^m cum Tgge Perse ad Gra^eciam opprimendam fecisset 
 3 Hoc crimme-abseri6pr6diti9ni8 damnatus est. Id ut audlvit quod • 
 non satis tatum sS Argis videjJat, Corcyram d§mlgravit. Ibi cumso 
 ejus pnncipes animadvertiss^t timere, ne propter se^bellum ils 
 'Latfedaemonii et ^Athenienses i^dIcerent, ad AdmStum, Moldssflm 
 Irlgem, cunf quo ei hospitium erat, coitfagit. gflo cnm van,,,- 
 
 y 
 
 ^ 
 
 -Wt.e.t in ppwsentia r§x abesset, quo majore religione s§ receptum 
 
 .. 4- 
 
 rj 
 
 j-y 
 
190 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 1 
 
 
 tuSrSfcur, ffliam ejus parvulaiii arripuit et ^m ei se in sacrarium, . 
 quod summa colebatur caorimonia, cbnjgcit. Inde non prius 
 ^r^sau^est, quart! rgx eum data dexkra in fidem rdciperct ; quan^ v 
 
 5 praestitit. Nam cum ab Atheniensibus ei Lacedaemoniis exposce- * 
 rStur pablice, suppliceta non prodidit monuitque ut cSnsuleret 5 
 sibi: difficile enim esse in tam ptopinquo loco tuto eum versarl. 
 Itaque Pydnam eum dSjJucI jussit eb quod satis esset praesidii 
 
 ededit. Hic in navem omnibus Ignotus ► nautis escendit. Quae 
 cum tempestate maxima Naxura ferretur, ubi tum AthjSniensium 
 erat exercjtus, s^sit Themistocles, si eo pervenisset, sibi esse 10 
 pcreundum. Hftc necessitate coactus domino navi8,''qui8 sit, aperit,, 
 
 7multa poUicSns, si se conservSsset. ^t ille clarissiml virl captus 
 misericordia diem nootemque procul ab Insula in salo navem ienuit 
 . ; in ancorls neque quemquam ex ea exire passus est. Inde Ephesum ' 
 / pervenit ibique Themistoclera exponit ; cui illo pro liieritls posteft 15 
 gratiam rottulit. - - , . 
 
 ' . ... \y I V ^ . . . ■ ^ -•■ ■ ■.■^■0 - ^■--■-^. ■ 
 
 -^* writes (o Artaxerxcs recounting hia services to his father, Xerxei, 
 v' and asking for the Persian king's friendship. 
 
 , «■ . ■"'■;.-, . ■ ■;;,., ./.-■; ..•■ .;,,.V' . '" .- ■■■■ 
 
 * 0. Sci6 plSrOsque ita scrfpsisse/Themistoclem Xerxe rggnante ' 
 "^ in Asiam tranalsse. Sed ego potissiwiura Thflcydidl credo, quod et 
 • ' aetate proximus de ils, qui illorum temporum historiam relique- 
 runt, et Sjusdem civitatis fuit. Is autem ait ad Artaxerxen eum 20 
 •S v§niase atque his verbis epistulam misisse : "Themistocles v6ni ad 
 te, qui plarima mala omnium Graiorum in domurri tuam intull, 
 quAmdia mihi necesse fuit adversunv-patrem tuum bellare patriam- 
 ^ Ique raeam dgfendere. Idem multS pliira bona fScI, postquam in 
 tats ipse et ille in perlculo esse coepit. Nam cum in Asiam 28 
 ^evertl vellet proeliS apud Salamlna facto, litterls eum certiorem 
 f6cl id agl, ut p6ns, quem in Hellosponto fecerat, dissolverStur 
 ■ atque' ab hostibus circumlr6tur : qu6 nQntiS ille porlculS est 
 lllberatus. Nunc autem cSnfflgl ad t6 exagitatiis a cflncta Graecia, 
 tuam pj^Sna amicitiam : quam si cro adoptua, n6n minus m0 30 
 I. boni^m nmlcum habpbis, quam fortem inimlcum ille expertus esW-^ 
 Te autem rogb, ut de»iis robus, quas tScum colloqui volo, annuum 
 ndihi tempua d$9 edque trans&otd ad te venire patiaris." 
 
 ry 
 
 '}: 
 
 •X 
 
 Tl 
 i tr 
 
 el 
 
 au 
 So6: 
 
 :a.4- 
 
 .■*:;a;i«. 
 
3rarium,. 
 
 
 n prius 
 
 
 ,; quarai^ '^ 
 
 
 axposce- 
 
 
 nsuleret 6 . 
 
 
 versaxl. 
 
 
 jraesidii 
 
 
 . Quae» 
 
 ^ 
 
 iSnsiuin « 
 
 
 ibi esse 10 ' - 
 
 
 , aperit,. 
 
 
 I oaptus 
 
 
 a tenuit 
 
 
 phesuni ', ,_-ye 
 
 
 8 po8teftl5 
 
 , . " 
 
 PART IV.— -NEPOs" ARISTIDE& 
 
 191 
 
 ■\- 
 
 Xerxei, 
 
 ggnante 
 quod et 
 relique- 
 en eum 20 
 v§nl ad 
 i iiitull, 
 latriam- 
 uam in * 
 Asiam2S 
 rtiorem 
 Iveretuf 
 uld est 
 jrraecia, 
 nus mSao 
 tus est,— - 
 bimuum 
 
 i 
 
 The king deceives him with kindness and grants him three cities for his 
 support. Jle die^ some say by lUs orvn hand. ^'-^^^^^^ 
 1 10. Hajus r6x animl mSgnitudinem admlrfins cupiSnsque talem * 
 nrumsxbiconciliarlveniamdedit. Ille o^ne illud teZriitt^ 
 emoxuque Person, dedidit : quibus adeS eruditus esfut ' uS' 
 commodxus dicatur a^ud regem verba fecisse, quam il po eint q^ 
 2m Peraide erant nati. Hie cum multa rogi esset pom^citusTrfitr 5 
 - jBimumque mud, SI suls m c5„silils vellel mnrnZ^^r^'Zn6 
 
 ^rtl^T i-"^^": Magnesiae sibi constituit. Namque hane 
 urbem ei rex dooarat, his quidem verbis, quae el panem praebgrei 
 (ex quftregiSne quInquagSna talenta quotannis redlbant), I^m-lO 
 ps^ autem, unde vlnu^. sOmeret^yunU, ex qua oblonium 
 
 HQjus ad.nostram meniiriam monument mansSrunt duo • se- 
 . ^"^;';"™ P:«P^«PPid"«^. ^n <l^o est sepultus, statua in for5 MSg- 
 sedT«« '''r'"T^"'^^^^«"-^^*P«dpl.r5squescnptume^,15 
 1 um^rMr/ "r '^^^«y^^^^- --^-m probLus, qu 
 lUum ait MSgnSsiae morbo mortuum neque negat fuisse fSi^am, 
 
 5oppnmenda^polhcitus esset, praestSre posse dgspgrftret. Ideia 
 ossa ejus clam in Attica ab amicis sepulte, quoniam l^gibus n6nl» 
 conc6der6tur, quod prSditionis esset damnfttus, memoriae prCdidit 
 
 II ^IS'ftDES. 
 
 I^^»piU o/Aristides' reptUationjor uprightness, his rival, Themis. ' 
 tocles, succeeds in having him banished /or ten years. 
 
 1 ^' ^'i'^des, Lysimachi fllius, AtheniSnsis,' aequftlis ferS fuit 
 
 Themistoclr, atque cum e5 dS prMcipata contendit ; namque ob- 
 it ectirunt mter s8. In his autem cognitum est, quanta anLuret 
 
 eloquentia innocentiae. Quamquam enim ad«5excell6bat AristldSsas 
 >V abstinentzfi, ut llnus post hominum- memoriam, quern quidem not 
 
 audienmus, cCgmlnune Jastus sit appelUtus. Umen ft Themistocle 
 Scollabefactus testulft illft exsilifl decern annfirum multfttu. est. Qui 
 
 guidflT" ""•" .'-t~n ^ • - '«'" 
 
 cum 
 
 po«|^6dan8que anuuiKivertiawt ^i«md«« scrlbentem ut patrift» 
 
 1 
 
 .#•:: 
 
192 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 P» 
 
 V; 
 
 \ 
 
 A' 
 
 pellerStur, quaesisse ab eo dicitur, quare id faceret aut quid Ari- 
 Istldes commisisset, cur tanta poena dlgnus dtlcerStur. Cui ille 
 
 respondit s§ ignorftre Aristiden, sed sibi non placere quod tam^ 
 ficupide laborasset ut praeter cgteros Justus appellarStur. Hie 
 
 Tdecem annorum legitimam poenam non pertulit. Nam postquam 5 
 ^ Xerxes in Graeciam dSscendit, sexto fere anno «quam erat expul- 
 
 8U8, populi scito in patriam restittitus est. ; 
 
 ffe returns to take part in the Persian tear, and ia instrumental in 
 having the leadership in naval matters trans/erred from Spwrta 
 to Athens. . 
 
 1 2. Interfuit autem pugnae nav32iapud Salamina, quae facta ost 
 prius quam poena liberaretur. Idem praetor fuit Ath3ni€nsiui]i 
 apud Plataeas in proelio, quo filsus barbarorum exercitus Mardo- 10 
 
 2niu8que interfectus est. Neque aliud est Ullum hfljus in r§ 
 militari illustre factum quam hujus imperii memoria, jOstitiae v§r6 
 et aequitS.tis et ihnocentiae multa, in primis quod gjus aequitSte 
 ' factum est, cum in commOnl classe esset Graeciae simul cum 
 PausaniS, (quo duce Mardonius erat fugatus), ut summa imperii 15 
 maritimi ab Lacedaemoniis transferretur ad AthenignsSs : namque 
 
 Sai^te id tempus et marl et terra duces erant Lacedaemoni!. Turn 
 autem et intemperantia Pausaniae et jiistitia factum est Aristldis, 
 ut omnSs ferS cIvitS,t@s Graeciae ad AthSniSnsium jpociet&tem b6 
 
 y applic&rent et adversus barbaros h5s duc§s deligerent sibi. 20 
 
 He Jiice» the amount of tribute to he paidJa^^tM several members of the 
 
 Ddian Confederacy, He dies poor» ., ..j^. 
 
 ri 8. Qu5b quo faciliua repellerent, si forte bellum renovSre o3nii»- -^ 
 rentur, ad classSs aedificandS^ exercitilsqUe comparandSs quantum * 
 pecuniae quaeque civiIRs darot, Aristldes d@l6ctus est qui constitu- 
 eret, @j usque arbitrio quadringSna et sexligena talenta quotannis 
 
 •* D3lum sunt coU&ta : id enim commdne aerS.rium esse vblufirupt. 26 
 
 2 Quae omnia pecOnia postero tempore A thSnils tr&nslata est. Hlo 
 quft fuerit abstinentift, ntlllum est certius indicium quam quod, 
 cum tantis rSbus praefuisset, in tant& paupert&te dScessit, ut qui 
 
 lefferrStur vix rellqueiHt. Qu5 factum eat ut flliae 6jua pQblioS 
 alerentur et dS cdtnmOnl aer&riS d(3tibu8 datia collocftrentur. 80 
 
 Deceasit ^autem fere poat annum qu&rtum quam Th»tniii^oolftr 
 Ath^nla er»t expukua. 
 
 \ 
 
 8c 
 c 
 
 n 
 
 d 
 
 IP 
 
y- 
 
 quidAri- 
 Cui iUe 
 [uod tarn, 
 iur. Hie 
 3ostquam 5 
 Ekt expul- 
 
 '.mentcU in 
 m Sparta 
 
 facta est 
 niSnsiuiji 
 s Mardo-10 
 us in r@ 
 itiae vero 
 aequit&te 
 mul cum 
 a imperil 15 
 : namque 
 il. Tum ' 
 Aristldis, 
 st&tem bS 
 • 20 
 
 hers of tJie 
 
 • . ■ ■ :;;' ■ ■"tr; 
 
 'fire 65n&- - 
 quantum ' 
 constitu- 
 quotannls 
 oluSrupt. 26 
 est. Hlo 
 %m quod, 
 ut, ut qui 
 8 publics 
 K?flrentur. 80 
 mustoolla 
 
 4: 
 
 t— NEPOS, HANNIBAL. 
 
 HI. HANNIBAL. 
 
 193 
 
 I ■• 
 
 n^'. Jealous, ^ ^mne^rJ^UtO,'" "'^• 
 i 1. Hannibal, HamilcarU filius, CarthaeiniSnsi» " «rl , 
 quod nsma dubitat, ut doduI,,, p^™- SiTSrum Mt, 
 
 ■ -«s imperSeBrts pradentia^™^- , ^ P^^estW^e oste- . 
 
 «ortitaine otoct£ n^^,^r^„P»P.".'"» ««"-Snus Vtecedat 
 
 , olnum suorum inyidis dsbUitstus esaet 1^ - -1^ T "*"""' 
 n«™,u«nd^ti..Hta^in,abeZelt^ "^™ »'^'"*' 
 
 Ramsm, ^u, d8 sjua voluntite e„la«rer" Z" ''"' '""^^ 
 aUils clandeatrnla ut Hannihal.I ; . • ^"° °I*™° "«n- 
 
 .canaili. s.greg^'^^Mf^r^^rdaTlim'r'.'"''"'''''"'» 
 cum multa d5 fid5 suft Af «^.v; l^^« oaco adut ad rggem, elque 
 
 ;.j«.....Arra;ir;r..t^rp=-jj^^ 
 
 caat^profioiaol H cun. Ube^r^^JLrat^tT i^l" 
 ooepiaaem nS dubitiret dOoere turn mI^Tv- . • J***" 
 
mKs^mamKmmmmmmi^^ 
 
 IH 
 
 PRIltARY LATIN BOOK^ 
 
 6 tern j1ir§xe jussit numquam m5 in amIcitiS cum RdmSi^ fore. Id 
 ^go jtlfljiirandum patii datum tlsque ad hanc aetatem it» conser- 
 vftvl, ut nSminI dubium esse d§beat, quin reliquo tempore e3dem ^ 
 
 emente sim futOrus. QuSrS si quid amice de Romanis cogitabis, 
 
 ■ n6n imprfldenter f Sceris, si mS celaris ; cum quidem bellum par§r 5 
 bis, te ipsum frOstraberis, si n6n me in eo principem posueris." 
 
 ■ Becoming commavder-in-ehie/ b^ore twerUyfivfb, he subdues ail Spain, , 
 
 and marches through Oavl and over the- Alps into Italy. 
 
 1 3. Hftc igitur qua diximus aetate cum patre in Hispaniam pronr-r 
 fectus est; cajus post obitum, Hasdrubale imperatore suffectS, 
 equitatui omnI praefuit. Hoc quoque interfecto exercitus sum- 
 mam imperil ad eum dstnlit. Id Carthaginem delatum pablicSlO 
 
 2comprobatum est. . Sic Hannibal, minor quinque et viginti annis 
 
 ~ natus imperator factus, proximo triennio omngs gentes Hispaniae. 
 bello BubSgit, Saguntum, foederatam civitatem, vl expOgnavit, trSs 
 
 SexeroitOs maximos comparavit. Ex his tlnum in Africam misit, 
 alteram cum Hasdrubale fratre in ^ispania rellquit, tertium in 16^ 
 Italiam s6cum dOxit. Saltum • Pytenaeum transiit ; quacumque 
 iter fecit, cum omnibus incolis isonflixit ; neminem nisi victum 
 
 i dimlsit. Ad Alpes posteaquam vjenit^ quae Italiam ab Gallia sejun- 
 gunt, quaa nSmo umquam cum fexercita ante eum praeter Hercu- 
 lem Grton transierat(qu6 facts iahodiS saltus Grains appellatur), 20 
 AlpicSs cSnantSs prohibere transita concldit, loca patefecit, itinera 
 mflniit, eflfecit'ut ea elephantus Srnatiis Ire posset, qua antea tinus 
 hom6 inermis vix poterat rSpere. Hao copias tradOxit in Italiam- 
 
 ■ que porvfinit. ,,: ; .,, ( :-.,- . ;:_.. .y, .- . . ■ :___^ _ ..; ,_;'_; ' , . ■'^j /■/;■■:-, jt: ^:'' 
 
 '■'-'■< - Me d^mU the Romans in a aerie» qf baUU$t _ 
 
 t 4. OSnfllxerat apud Rhodanum cum P. Comsli5 SclpiOne cfln-25 
 Bule eumque pepulerat.. Cum hoc eckiem Clastidil apud Padum 
 
 SdScemit sauciumque inde ac fugatum dimittit. Tertio Idem SoIpiS 
 cum collega Ti. LongS apud Trebianl adversus eum vSnit. Cum 
 ilB manum cOnserait, utrSsque prSfllgavit. Inde per LigurBs 
 
 SAppennlnum transiit, petens EtrQriam.f H6o itin«re »de6 gravlao 
 pinrV^ affifiitMT ^'.'l^rnm, ut posteft n um quam dextr5 aequ6 b ene 
 
 Hum Bit. Quft vatettldine cum etiamtum premerStur lectloaque 
 
 .y\ 
 
 
PART i.-~NEPOS, HAlAflBAL. 
 
 .v«f 
 
 I 196 
 
 L. AemiZi„, u^u^^ ;~ d"» ««-«I^ C. Te«„L et 
 
 Hu» Ge»i„„„., ,^ 3upS;f r^ter:^'^" " '^ <^- *-■ 
 
 •ff. o«tman.^mre. the Bo„^„ oicKUor, a«d mm s^A „ ^ . 
 
 hab«ia<»t et Cap™™ „,™TSto SS '?,""''" *^ '»*™ 
 
 «nguaMis nootfl sine tma dBtrlmenW „ \. '^'""' ^»"*™' 
 
 ■ que, oalHdiaaim, impe^^tS XX"^*^.^^ o^^"' F.bi^ 
 
 •amenta in eomibM juvencirum dIlT„«' • T^ °""""* ""*« 
 
 «extra vSUum nSmS sit ana„« *^*""'"' """toorum. ut Sgredl 
 
 diotSMrem imperii d„^rp^'r' "^''""» •'•^'"■» I»« «• 
 
 >-idi«s induotun. s„st^,^^M ^11^ ^n"*^ "^"' »■» 
 «c^neulem, ap„d Venuaia» V^f^l^^l^ZT'^i^T'"'"". 
 omnia Snumerare proelia OuHtr Ka. ^ "^*"®*^"- -Longum est 
 
 q-ein^Uegr poa.it «Ju^tu^T f'^Tritr^a^dr^ fe '' 
 n6m3 el in acis reHfif if ««^« j • quamma m Italift fuit. 
 
 ■ . • '. ', ■"■'■■■ -■..:"■*■",■. ; ," . ' 
 
 \»pud Rhodanum; iteruri^ anld pS." ^'P!"""^ "I"»™ ^P» Prtms 
 
 "' oonwownfi» n«B oonvfinSrunt. «Post id 
 
r 
 
 196 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 factum paucis diSbus apud Zamam cum eodem confllxit ; pulsus 
 (incrSdibilJl dicta) biduo et duabus noctibus Hadram§tum pervS- 
 ^nit, quod abest ab Zam3> circiter mlllia passuum trecenta. In hS« ^ 
 f uga Numidae, qui simul cum eo ex acie excesserant, Insidi&tl sunt i 
 el ; quos non solum effugit, sed etiam ipsos oppressit. Hadrvlmeti 5 
 reliquds e fuga coUegit ; no vis delectibus paucis diSbus multos 
 contraxit. ;/ . >* ■■.'' ,'-:':'^ -■'-■- ':i- :'-,/'' ^-■:>-- y':" -[i- ■;'-'■-'■.-•'■-■ 
 
 Soon, afier peace %a concluded, he is deposed from the military command 
 and made a chief ^rm^gistrate. .Some years later, fearing Roman 
 ., designs, he flees to Aniiochus, king of Syria. 
 
 1 7. Cum in apparandd acerrime esset occupatus, CarthaginiensSs 
 beUum^cum Romanis composuSrunt. Ille nihilo sScius exepcitul , 
 posted praefuit resque in Africa gessit tlsque ad P. Sulpicium 0. 10 
 
 2 Aur§lium consules. His enim magistratibus legati Carthaginienses 
 Romam venerunt, qui i^enatul populoque Romano gratias agerent, 
 quod cum ils pacem fecissent, ob eamque rem corona aurea eos 
 d5nSxent simulque peterent, ut 'obsides eorum Fregellls essent 
 
 3 captlvlque redderentur. His ex senatljs consulto responsum est : 15 
 mtlnus eorum gratum acceptumque esse ; obsides, quo loco rogarent, ] 
 futdiros ; captives non remissuros, quod Hannibalem, cfljus opera 
 susceptum bellum foret, inimicissimum nomini Romano, etiamnunc 
 cum imperio apud exercitum haberent itemque fratrem ejus Mago- 
 
 4 nem. Hoc responsS CarthSginignses cognito Hannibalem domum 20 
 et Magonem revocarunt. Hue ut rediit, rex f actus est, postquam 
 impetfttor fuerat, anno secundo et vicesimo ; ut enim Romae con- -^^ 
 
 SsulSs, slo Carthagine quotannis annul bini rSges creabantur. In 
 e6 magistrate paij diligentia s5 Hannibal praebuit, ao fuerat in ■ 
 bells. Namque eflEScit ex novis vectlgalibus jion solum ut esset 25 
 pectbiia, quae Romanis ex foedere penderStur, sed etiam super- 
 
 6 esset, quae in aerario reponeretur. Deinde ann5 post M. Claudi5 
 L. FOriS cSnsulibus' Roma legati Carthaginem vSnSrunt. Hos 
 Hannibal ratus sul exposcendj gratia missos, priusquam ils senatua^ 
 darStur, Ihavem ascendit clam atque in Syriapi ad AntiochumSd] 
 
 7 profflgit. Hac rS palam facta PoenI navSs duas, quae eum compre- 
 henderent, sipossent consequi, mlsSrunt ; bona Sjus pablicftrunt, 
 ^ ^|.r,»m g . fiindfimentT H dJHjeofirunt. jpsum ex sule» jadioftrunt. 
 
 
 ./.,^„. 
 
 ^ 
 
 551 
 
 a 
 
 I 
 
 iel 
 ci 
 
 — fcj] 
 
*•■■ 
 
 PART IV.- 
 
 -NEPOS, HANNIBAL. 
 
 197 
 
 4-: 
 
 ^e i^^ AnUocHus to ^^^ ^^^/^ _^^ ^^ ^ 
 
 Lanhctge also. / 
 
 niTibuB, quSs ei Syria iu«„. .„* • . . , ' "««£«" paucb 
 g»«it, m «uperir^- " ™P«'^"'--. ipse, qua comfl „„ 
 
 - i^r Me (^eat o/ Aniiochus he Aees to rr.f, % 1 ^. " 
 
 'dilf:;'':**,^s?'p:rr''r'''5"' '^'^ •^" ^-wa aooi.' - 
 
 »ibi. quas8oaZ:rr„aM^t ■''e.T «f ««''^^ ^^"C"'» 
 
 avaritiam CrsSum "»^1: '• """ ''""' P'"'"'"^'' P«>P'«' 
 
 »d. qua aoi^bat e.r fatS^'^:™ rrjerT '"'**'^'' 
 phoras oomplarEs conmlefc nl,™l,- P ««n«ilium. Am- 
 
 Has p™e«,„' ibus S bu T.^^itT? "Tn""" ■=' '^™''- » 
 •S suss fortflnaa Ulflrum fide, o^d 1 H^ ^ '''^' ^"""»" 
 
 'e^utinp^^trdrijsr^rtrf r r"^ """-i""" 
 
 
 / 
 
198 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 I- 
 
 i'! 
 
 i 
 
 He proceeds to the court o/Prusias, king of Bithynia. There he plans 
 to crmh E'fSmenea o/ Pergamum, an ally of Rome» . 
 
 1 10. Sic conservatis suis rgbus Poenus, illiisls (JretSnsibus omni- 
 bus, ad Priisiam in Pontum pervenit. Apud quem eodem animo 
 f uit ei^a Italiam neque aliud quicquam egii? quam regem arm&vit 
 
 2et exeircuit adversus Romanos. Quem cum vid§ret domesticls 
 opibus minus esse robust um, conciliabat ceteros reges, adjungebat 6 
 bellicosSs nStiones. Dissidebat ab eo PergahiSnus rex EumenSs, . 
 RomSnIS amicissimus, bellumque inter eos gerebatur et maif et 
 
 SterrS.. Sed utroblque Eumenes plus valebat propter Romanorum 
 Bocietfttem. Qu5 magis cupiebat eum Hannibal opprimi, quem si 
 removisset, faciliora sibi cetera fore arbitrabatur. Ad hunc inter- 10 
 
 1 ficiendum talem iniit rationem. Classe paucis diebus erant decrS- 
 tti;ri. Superabatur navium . m«J[titudine ; dolo erat pt^nandum, 
 cum par non esset armis. linperavit quam, pliirimas venenatSs 
 
 6 serpentSs vIvSs coUigl Basque in vasa ^ctilia conjicl. Hanun cum 
 efiiScisset mSgnam multittldinem, diS ips6 quo facturus erat nftvfile lo 
 proelium, classiSrios conyocat iisque praecipit, omnSs ut in Qnam 
 Eumenis rSgis concurrant navem, a ceteris tantum satis habeant sS 
 dSfendere. Id illoS facile serpentium multitHdine cSnseotitiiros. t 
 
 6R5x auteminqua liavi veheretur, ut sclrent, se facturum ; quem 
 bI aut cepis6ent aut iaterfecisaent, magno iis pollicetur praemio^ 
 
 ■ fore. '-"'-\ --/:'-- 
 
 \ Hie stratagem results in the d^eat of Eumene^ fleet, though Eumenes 
 .> himself escapes. , . ,, , 
 
 1 11. Tali cohortatione mllitum facta classis ab utrtsque in proe- 
 
 - lium dedacitur. Quarum aci§ constitflta, priusquam signum ptig- -" 
 nae dargtur, Hannibal, ut palam faceret suis quo loco EumenSs 
 
 2 esset, tabellarium in scapha cum cadttceo mittit. Qui ubi ad navSs 25 
 adversariorum pervSnit epistulamque ostendens sS rggem professus 
 est quaerere, statim ad Eumenem deductus est, quod nSmS dubita- 
 bat qiiln aliquid d§ pace esset scriptum. Tabellarius, ducis navl 
 
 ■ SdSclaratS suis, eodem unde erat Sgressus sS recSpit. At EumenSs 
 soldta epistula nihU in ea repperit nisi quae ad iri^dendumSO 
 eum pertinSrent. Ciijus etsi causam mirabatur neque reperiSbat, 
 Ataman p roelium- statim iiommitt>er e n on d ub i tavlL- Hjorum in_ 
 
 %■ 
 
 ooncurstl Bithynii Hannibalis praecepto Oniversi navem Eumbnis 
 
 \ 
 
 M- 
 
'dana 
 
 -■' '" \ 
 mn^ 
 
 limo 
 
 lavib 
 
 iticis 
 
 Sbat 6 
 
 tnSs, . 
 
 rl et 
 
 irum 
 
 m bI 
 
 iter- 10 
 
 3cre- 
 
 lum, 
 
 latSs 
 
 cum 
 
 IvSle 1^ 
 
 [nam 
 
 at s@ 
 
 iros. ■ 
 
 [uem 
 
 emio 20 
 
 nenea 
 
 aroei 
 
 lenSs 
 iS,vSb 25 
 
 3SSUS 
 
 bit». 
 
 nftvl 
 
 lenSs 
 
 idumSO 
 
 Sbat, 
 
 xL-in 
 
 PART IV.— NEPOS, HANNIBAL. I99 
 
 ^salatem petit, quam Sonsecutus non esset, nisi intrS sua praesidia 
 5SS recepxsset, quae in proximo litore erLnt collocSta. LCe 
 
 Tnl (V ' ?' ^"'^"^ '"P^^ mentionem fScimus, conjici coepta 6 
 6n^,f- -^T ^f ' "'^'^' '"^""^ Pflgnantibus cone tSrui^ neque 
 6quare,d'fieretpoteratinteIlegI. Postquam autem nfivS, ^^ 
 
 oppletas conspexerunt serpentibus, nova r, perterriti, cum, q^ 
 7 ir"""'. vltarent, non viderent, puppea ve^runt s que ad sua 
 7castr.naut.carettul.runt. Sic Hamribal consilio arma'p^-lO 
 
 norum superavxt, neque tum solum, Bed saepe alifia pedeBtob^ 
 
 copus pan prQdentia pepuUt adveWios. P««eBi3iDUfl 
 
 The Itomans demand his surrender from Prusias. Hannibai, Jibing 
 ^^"^^f^urrounded hy an armed force, takes poism 
 1^12. Quae dum in Asia geruntur, accidit cSsQ ut ISgSti PrOsiae 
 
 i^rn' Z; '^"'"''"" ^^a^inmum cansularem c.nLntf^ue 
 ^ ibi de Hamnbale mentione facta ex iis Gnus diceret eum inPr(S^ei5 
 2regno esse. Id posters die Flamininus senStui d.tulit ^'• 
 . ^^nscrxptl, qui Hannibale. VIVO numquam sS sine Insidils fuZ^ • 
 existimarent, legatos in Blth^iam miserunt, in ils Flami^mT 
 X^tji'^T'vT-^' inih^cissimum suums.cum hab.r.t sibiqu; 
 3dederet. His Prusaa^ negari ausus non est ; iUud recflsfivit, n§ id ao 
 a se fi^n postularent. quod adversus jOs hospitil esset : i^sl S 
 ^ssen^, comprehenderent; locum ubi esset, Me in;eSS5^ 
 Hamnbal enim tinS loco s§ tengbat in casteUS quod ellvL 
 
 .t! Ti^ Romanorum vSnissent ac multitadine domum Sjus 
 cu.cumdedxsBent, puer ab janua prospiciens Hamnball dixit plS^ 
 
 Tnlrf "'^^'".'""''''"PP^^^^- Qui imperuvit ;i, ut 
 «rr T- '1-^'" '^''"""■'^' ac propers sibi ntotiaret, num 
 «eodem modo undique obsiderStur. Puer cum celeriter quid es^ao 
 renontiasset omnSsque exitOs occupEtSs bstendisset, '"11^ 
 non fortuito factum, sod sS petl neque sibi diatius vltam ea^ 
 retmendam. Quam ne aliSnS arbitriS rfimitteret, memor^^ 
 
 ncttiiii' 
 
 nariim virttltum, vonBuum, quu^ 
 aOmpsit. . 
 
 Wjjroei-iScum KabSre cSiSto^ 
 
 -»- 
 
m 
 
 V 
 
 /^' 
 
 200 
 
 PRiitARY LATlIf BOOK. 
 
 The date of his death is disputed. He had found time 'to devote 
 
 to literature. 
 
 1 13. Sic vir fortissimus, multls varilsque perftlnctus laboribus, 
 anno acquievit septuagSsimo. Quibus consulibus interierifc non 
 
 • convenit. Namque Atti(^ M. Claudio Marcello Q. Fabio Labeone 
 considibus mortuum in amfc^H^^uo scrlptum reliquit, at Polybius 
 L. Aemilio Paulo Cn? Baebio TamphilS, Sulpicius autem BlithS P. 6 
 
 2 GornSlio CethSg5 M. Baebio Tamphilo. Atque hlc tantus vir tan- 
 tisque b^Uis districtus nonnihil temporis tribuit litteris. Katnque' 
 aliquot Sjus libri sunt, Graeco sermone confecfci, in iis ad Rhodios 
 
 8d§ Cn. Manlii Volsonis in Asia rebus gestis. Htljus belli gesta ., 
 multi memoriae prodiderunt, sed ex his duo, qui cum e5 in castrls 10 
 fuSrunt simulque vlaorunt, quamditi fortuna passa est, Sllenus et 
 Sosilus Lacedaemonius. Atque hoc Sosilo Hannibal litt«OD^(!ram 
 Graec5xum tisus est doctore. . /^ 
 
 &' 
 
 :sit 
 
 #. 
 
 / 
 
 .1** 
 
 =^ 
 
■.•^' 
 
 m-- 
 
 PA&t IV.-CAESAR, DE BELLO GALmco; IV. 
 
 2(& 
 
 te 
 
 )US, 
 
 Qon 
 one 
 >ius 
 iP. 6 
 Cli- 
 que' 
 iios 
 3sta .. 
 trislO 
 i et 
 
 
 C. J 
 
 I CAESA^IS 
 COMMENTARII 
 
 ' I^E BELLo GALLICO. ' 
 
 J 
 
 LIBER QUARTUS* 
 
 T 
 
 -jif- 
 
 # 
 
 v \ 
 
 r-J' 
 
 Certain German tribes, the Vsimt^- arul 7V«-/ • i . 
 . theK^v^, cross ir^a QcZ^ ! "^^"^' ^'"^ ^^«^ ^ 
 
 -«AeX^ft^ -^ 7^ ^ orsramzo^ion and hardihood of 
 ' ■ < * 
 
 I 1. ES, quae seoata eat, hieme, qui fnit annua fti P„« J- « " 
 . Cra«5 canauKbus, UaipeMs-GemL T^Z^:^-'^r^.' "• 
 
 6 anne p<it in amis a^nt, ilU do^ «^a^e^ ^ '^'" """"^ »• 
 
 i separSH agri apud eos nihil est, neque Ionriuaa„f.fl^ " 
 i^inlcK^incoleudloausSUoet. Neql^ZT^^ J«^ 
 
 ,; IjWtSt^ vltae, cum a puerts hallo offlcis aut disciplIna^SL» ' 
 
 nihil omnlnS contra Toluntitem faciant «f ,t,- , i^ !^ 
 .lOcoiporum mSgnit«di„e homincTJS \tri^«' L"™*»' 
 
 ^^h^«^„.„ q„ „,, q„t.„.„ p.»pte..Bi ^gumt«nml ^^ 
 ««pons I«™ .porta, et lavareptur in flfllnibuf ^ ^ 
 
 / 
 
 * 
 
 V 
 
 9 
 
( 
 
 t 
 
 '202 * ItRImIrYLATIM BOOK. , 
 
 T^mir iaeib o/ intei-course with other tr%$» mtd their aJeill in 
 ' ■ -, . ' Jiorsemanship. 
 
 i Ht. IfiwcStoribus est ftditus magis e6, ut, quae bellS cSperint, ^ 
 quibus v^^iril^ habeant, quam quo ulWuni rem ad se importSji 
 
 2 desiderent. (^ulu etiam jtimentis, quibus maxime Gall! delectan- 
 w tur, qiiaeque impenso parant pretio, GermanI import&tis non 
 Muntur, Bed quae sunt apud eos n&ta, parva atque dSformia, haec 5 
 
 3cotidi§.n§i exercitatione summl ut sint. l^boris effieiunt. Equestri- 
 bus proeliis saepe ex'equis dSsiliunt ac pedibus proeliantur, equos- 
 que eodem remaiigre vestigio assuefecSrunt, ad quos se celeriter, 
 
 4 c\im usus est, recipiunt; neque eoruni moribus turpius quicquam 
 
 6aut inertius habetur, quam' ephippiis titi. Itaque ad quemvis 10 
 nuiherum, ephippiatoruni equitum quamvis pauci adire audent. 
 
 6 Vinum ad sS omnino importarl non siQunt, quod'ea r§ ad lab5rem 
 •ferend]iim rejnollescere homines atque eflfeminan arbitrantur. ^ v 
 
 ■■'..■ . --. . . -. .. , - - . . -, -. ■-' ■ ;^'-." 
 
 Tlieir suhjiigcUion of their more civilized mighhora, the Vhii. ' :- 
 
 1~ 3. Pilblice maximam putant esse lauden^^^am latissime & suis 
 finibus vacare agrgs : h5<j re significari n^gnum numerum civita- 15 
 
 2 turn suam vim sustinere non posse. Itaque una ex parte a Suebis 
 
 8 circiter millia passuum sescenti» agri vacare dicuntuf. Ad alteram * 
 .partem succedunt Ubii, quorum fuit civitas ampla atque florens, ut 
 est captus Germanorum, et. paulo sunt ^jusdem generis ceteris 
 humaniSres, propterea quod Rhenum attingunt, multumque ad'eos ao 
 mercatores^^en,titant^ et ipsi propter propinquitatengi Gallicis suiit\ 
 
 4 moribus aswfefacti. Hoscum Siiebi multis saepe bellis expertl/ 
 propter amplitjidinem gravitatemque civitatis tinibus expellc 
 potuissent, tamen vectlgales sibi fecerun^^c multo hur 
 infinniore^ue redegerunt. £ ' ' '■ ■ 
 
 -•■'.. ' '> " „ •, 
 
 . Forced ontt «j/» Germany^ the JJ^petes and Tencteri attack the Menapii 
 "'''' ^ * ^Wt ftd seize their lands on the Bhine. 
 
 1 4. In eade^jP[JpH|uimtot tJsipetes et Tencteil, quos suprS. 
 
 2 diximus, qui <^^^Hm|iil^os ^eborum vim sustinu@runt ; ad 
 extr@mun^ tam^i^^|9K^l|>ulsI et raPl^ locis Germaniae triennium 
 vagS,ti ad RhSniM' pei'rSnerunt ; qu^s regiones Menapii incolebanfc 
 
 
 
 V >■ 
 
 le ripam^nftminis agrds~,"ftedmctft^ vicoilqne 
 
 ^<;5.' 
 
 - •! 
 
 
 2r 
 
 3c 
 
 li 
 
 u 
 
I 
 
 
 ,.' ' ! ! 
 
 «J^ 9 !l 
 
 A 
 
 Pi|T IV.— CAESAK, DE BELLO GAILICO, IV. / 203 
 4 sea tanbw multltadin» adyenta pertMria ex il» Wi« •. 
 'pr««,idil, Germsnas tnlns^^SCt im ^ — "^P^'"* 
 
 '880 per eiploratores oertiSrSs fact! sine n,«t.i f,- ^. 
 «»iiDU8, quod sunt m consilns capiendis, mobile^ fif n/.^io ix 
 
 'L.^ cr h;^— xs«;L?' srr'- •"■*^^ ^ 
 
 8«epe rtbu». cSnsilia ineunt, quorum 2Z T^- '- ^ ™"'™" 
 necesae est, cum mcortis rOmoribrTnZt Z. IS *'° 'T'",""' ' 
 tStem eorum Acta respondeant ' P''""»"* "* "^'-f" 
 
 * war on the i^w-comers 
 
 enerant. Pnncipibus GaHiae Svocatis Caesuri^,,- - '^'/«^®- 
 .Jisdmulanda .jhf oTTntimavit ouir;! ^im^ If , ^^"^^"^^' ' 
 
 1 
 
 r - 
 
 «««seq„iUt«quoi.per.«beU„™rjG:™ir^S«:l- 
 
'*? 
 
 r 
 
 204 
 
 I 
 
 Primary latin book. 
 
 ^^ .» 
 
 II t 
 
 
 10 
 
 , . ',-4« Cfemr' a forces. draw near, Ihe Qerma^ send envoys insolently 
 f^ , ' ' . , ' justifying themselves. 
 
 1 7. B§ ^lrumentari^ com|iarata equitibusque delectis iter in ea 
 
 . 2 loca facere coepit, qioibus in locis esse Germanos audiebat. A qui- 
 
 bus cum paucSrum (iierum iter abesset, legatl ab his venBrunt, 
 
 ai quorum liaec f uit oratio : Germ,an68 neque priorgs populo Romano 
 bellum inferre neque tamen recusare,'Sl lacessantujr, quin armis 
 contendant, quod Germfinorum consuebtido sit §. majoribus tradita, 
 - 4 quicumque bellum inferant, resistere neque deprecari. Hafec 
 tameji dicere, vSnisse invltos, gjectos domo; si suam gratiam 
 RomanI velint, pOsse iis utiles esse amicos ; Vel sibi agros attribu- 
 
 5 ant vel patiantur eos tenere, quos amlis possederint: sesS- tlnis 
 Sugbis concedere, quibus ne dil quidem immortSJgs pares esse 
 possint; reliquum quidem in terris esse neminem, quem n5n 
 
 ' superax© possint. . " , ; 
 
 Ccesctr declines to cUldio them to remain in OaiU, hvi offers to settle 
 ^ . them in the land of. the Uhii. 
 
 'i '8. Ad haeo quae visum est Caesar respondit ;-sed exitus fuifc 
 
 • ' 6r5,ti6£is : Sibi nilllam cum his amicitiam esse posse, si in Gallia 15 
 
 jir* 2 remaiMrent ; neque verum esse, qui suos fines tu§rl non potuerint, 
 
 ali§n6| occupSre ; i?eque Olios in Gallia vacare agros, qui dari tan- 
 
 3tae praesertim multilfldinl sine injarift possint ; sed lic6re, si 
 
 ^Velint, in tJbiorum tinibus considere, quorum sint lega,tl apud sg, 
 
 et dS SuSborum injariis querantur et S. sg auxilium petant :,h6c20 
 
 ' sS UbilB imperatOrum. "* 
 
 ^ . <■ "• ■• . ■ .^ " - ' ^. . . 
 
 -^ _ ' r '_ • _ ■ , . ' _ ■ - ' ■ • _ _ - ' 
 
 ; '■.,'■ -^ i/ " "^ .^ ^. ^- - - -- .-.-^ ' ■ . ; ■ ■ ;■; *': "- ■ ' 
 
 The Germans, expecting reinforcemenis, ash ttoo days to toimder 
 
 his proposed,' S' 
 
 _ 1 §. LSgatl haeo sS ad suSs relatOrSs dIxSrunt et rS dsllberata 
 post diem tertium ad Caesarem reversOrSs : interea ns' propius sS 
 
 . Scastra movBret, petifirunt. N5 id quidem Caesar ab sS impetrari. 
 8p088o dixit. CognOverat enim magnam partem e<iuitatfls ab iis 25 
 aliquot diSbus ante praedandl fnlmentandlque causa a<l Ambivari- * 
 tSs trans Mosam missam ; hos exspect&rl eqUltSs atque Sjus rel 
 
 *.;■<' 
 
 <ftuaa mor a» iutaip Gi ii Aibi U abalur. 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 3 
 
 ,., ■'■, 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 ' .* 
 
 « 
 
 
 6c 
 
 . * * 
 
 - ^-~-~~-r4 
 
 
 88 
 
 
 8 
 
 
 • 
 
 a< 
 
 
 pia^ 
 
 
 m ■-; '. " . 
 
 I 
 
 "■"-i : 
 
 TU 
 
 ge 
 
 "a-«* 
 
V 
 
 ea 
 
 ijui- 
 
 int, 
 
 and 
 
 mis 5 
 
 ita, 
 
 [atec 
 
 iam - 
 
 bu- 
 
 Inisio . 
 
 )sse 
 
 Q5n ';^;^^ 
 
 tie 
 
 Fuit 
 Ilia 16 
 nt, 
 an- 
 al 
 86, 
 hoc 20 
 
 ftt& 
 
 83 
 
 "ftri. 
 
 iifl ar 
 ill- '^ 
 
 ii^~ 
 
 PAKT IV._CAESAE. DE BELLO OALLICO, IV. 206 
 
 q«I Alp., i„„o,„„t. Tt ol" ; J^'rr 'V"'" "^ ^P°"«^. 
 «oitatu, fertur et, ubi OceanTZ • ^*^"'-™- Trtveroram 
 
 Oceanum influit. ^ «^tupantur, multteque capitibus inio 
 
 , in itinera <J,ngreJ,r^o!^^'°'f ™.™ '^8«« revertunto, q« 
 anteceMiMeni. praeraittei^- eZ?,!' \ '^""*°' <••" «8™«" " 
 
 4 B.T>i trldm apatium daret Ha.rr • ^ • »d hfa re» oSnflciendta 
 «bit«bst„r ut tolT„,„S'°, f"°*'''^''■"'"«P«rti■>«^» 
 
 «n^ «verterentur- IZril'''^'^"''*''*''^"'-"' "!««>««- 
 
 ~ d,S q„am frequentisaimi oonvenlrenT „t d= - ' ^'"> V^ 
 
 ^^^^^^^^^^^^ stmsront, quoad .pse cum oxercita p«pi„ , 
 
 -jThe Otrrmm make An ^^nwarra^^d aUc^k ^ ri^ 
 
 cavalry a,nd rout th,^ " ""'**^* <»» C4»wr»« orfmnce 
 r 1^ 1 I. considerable loss. 
 
 »«»ti, quod II, qui frttmentandl oausft ienm^ 
 
 -^*it 
 
■* f . 
 
 \"~i/ 
 
 206 
 
 / 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 trSns Mosam, nondum rediersnt, nihil timentibus nostris, quod 
 ISg&tl eorum paulo ante S. Oaesare discesserant atque is diSs 
 indutiis erat ab his petltus, impetu facto celeriter ;iostrQ9 pertur- ^ 
 
 2bllverunt; rursu|3 resistentibus consuetudine sua ad pedes d€silu- 
 erunt, subfossls equis complflribusque nostris dejectis reliquos in 6 
 fugam conjecerunt atque ita perterritos egerunt, ut non prius fuga 
 
 Sdesisterent, quam in conspectumagminis nostri venissent. In eo 
 proelio ex equitibus nostris interficiudfcr quattuor et septuaginta, 
 
 4 in his vir fortissimus, Piso Aquitanus, amplissimo geriere natus, 
 
 ciljus avus in civitate b\i5, regnum obtinuerat amicus ab senataiO 
 -8 nostrS appellatus. Hie cum frStrl intercluso ab hostibus auxUium 
 ferret, ilium ex perlculo eripuit, ipse equo vulnerato dejectus, 
 
 equoad potuit, fortissimS restitit : cum circumventus multls vulne- 
 ribus acceptis cecidisset, atque id frater, qui jam proelio excesserat, 
 procul animadvertisset, incitato equo s5 hostibus obtulit atque 15 
 
 interfectus est. 
 
 ■ |- . -.■■;■ -■. ^ v-.- v.v :.; 
 
 CcBftar determines to show no further conaideration, and when the 
 * leading men of the Germans return to treat untk Atwi, he seizes 
 them all. 
 
 1 13. H5c facto proelid Caesar neque jam sibi legatos audiendos 
 neque condiciones accipiendas arbitrabatur ab iis, qui per dolum 
 
 2 atque Insidias petlta pace ultro bellum intulissent : exspectare 
 v5r6, dum hostium copiae augerentur equitatusque reverterStur, 20 
 
 ssummae dSmentiae esse jadicabat, et cognita Gallorum Inflrmitate, 
 quantum jam apud eos hostSs Und pr6eli5 auctoritatis essent con- 
 secHtJ, sentiSbat; quibus ad c5nsilia capienda nihil spatil dandum 
 
 I existimabat. His cdnatitdtls rSbus et consilio cum Iggatis et 
 quaestdre oommtlnicatd, nS quem diem pflgnae praetermitteret, 25 
 opportOnissima rgs accidit, quod postridiS Sjus diSI mane eadem et 
 perfidia et simulatiSne tLsI GermanI frequentSs omnibus principi- 
 
 6 bus majdribusque natd adhibitis ad eum in castra vSnSrunt, simul, 
 ut dlo6batur, sul pflcgandl causa, quod contra atque esset dictum 
 et ipsl petlssent, proelium pridiS commlsissent, simul ut, si quid SO 
 
 Q{K)ssefit, d6 inddtils fallendd impetrarent. Qu5s sibi Caesar 
 oblatds gftvlsus illSs retinSri jussit, ipse omnSs copias castrls 
 fidflxit equitfttumque, quod recentJ proeUS perterritum eaae exlati- 
 
 i 
 H 
 
 5] 
 
 ^t 
 
 I 
 
 m 
 
 :■■:« 
 
 2et 
 
 et 
 
 BU 
 
 nibftt» aipoaeii tubftequ! juMit. 
 
 
• 17 
 
 I 
 
 w^ 
 
 ■m': 
 
 PART ly.-CAESAR, DE BELLO OALLICO. IV. 
 
 207 
 
 ^"^ '^ <^X^h, and c^ptur^ the Oerman ca«^ 
 ^Germtol, entire potent O^T """v"'' '»'""^' '»'"'' '«»'«'". 
 
 Spetere Draestarpf n.,;^„. i.- ^«^«"uere, an fuga saliitem 
 
 ic^^TS-n^rprrari'siT " >""""" ^''■ 
 
 «irraperunt. Quo locfl am J! "J "^ mctSB. in cast™ ■ 
 
 .» %e„ ccp. , ad ,n. relit cZT;sr:Lr 
 
 ; ^ Oen«an. are .omp^e^ »-« «»<i ™.„j, p^i <„ «, ^^, " 
 
 wdtntar:aCXiiu:tmtr -r n --'^ '-'«*' 
 
 2,j5e5rnnt, et oun,'ad caJuXm Mole «"* Kh ? '' "' "'^'*" 
 quadringeatorumtngint».mlli„;fuLt s5 ,^ T™ **''"''"""' 
 
 s. ■ ' ■. ■ ■.- ',-.■- . ■ .a 
 
 t 16. Germanics bellS conffipf/j *vi.,i^t„ j« 
 «bi Rh5n„™ esae trtn«un^m ,X'"° 'f. H*, ?'^' """" 
 «um vid8«,t Ge™»nl tarn Me'iCm tt f'.^t'"'™' '""^• 
 
 »et aud,:: popn,, «««.^"eTeJi'-RhTHnrtrr' 1 ^ 
 .tiam quod ma i»„ equitsto. UalhTret Te^ "" ''~'^"° 
 
 , """ "" " tn o rnvt r n . . d «. dl r. am„,.u>nd lque curt Mc«.m t^ 
 I«o neque prCi» interf„i..e, p^t fugan. .uLrTS^ 
 
. ^ 
 
 208 
 
 r^ 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 8 in Tfros Sugambrorum receperat seque cum iis conjflnxehti. Ad 
 quds cum Caesar ntlntios misisset, qui postulSxent, eos, qui sibi 
 
 iGalliaeque bellum intulissent, sibi ^ederent, respondSrqtit ; Populi v 
 Komani imperium RhSnum finite : si se invito Gem^nSs in Gal- 
 liam transire non aequum existimaret, cilr sui qiiicquam esse 5 
 
 imperii aut potestafcis trans Rhenum postulaxet? Ubii autem, 
 ■qui tini ex Transrhenai^ ad Caesafem leg£ltos miserant, amicitiam 
 Ifeceriant, obsides dederant, magnopere orabant, ut sibi auxilium 
 
 ^ferret, quod graviter ab Suebis premerentur; vel, si id facere 
 occupStionibus rei pUblicae prohiberetur, 6xercitum modo Khenum 10 
 transportSxet : id sibi ad auxilium spemque reliqui temporis satis - 
 
 7futtlrum. Tantum esse nomen atque opinionem ejus exercittls 
 Ariovist5 pulso et hoc novissimo prbelio facto etiam ad ultimas ' 
 Germ§.norum nationes, uti opinione eti amicitiS populi Rpmani 
 
 Sttiti! esse possint. Navium mSgnam cSpiam ad transportandum U 
 exercitum poUicebantur. 
 
 ■■■■--- .■:.': ■ ■■■' , ■ '■■ ••';^'' ^ ■ • > ■ 
 
 ;- , ^JjTe igracfx.ds to build a bridge ov^r th§ 'Rhine. 
 
 1 [17. Oaa»r his dS causis, qijitls commemoravi, Bhgnum trSlnsIre 
 decreveratf sed navibus trariSIre neque satis tutum esse arbitrft- 
 b&tur, neque suae neque populi Romani dignitatis esse statuSbat. 
 
 2 Itaque, etsi summa difficultas faciendi pontis proponebatur propter 20 
 IfttitHdinera, rapiditatem altitjadinemque flaminis, ' tamen id sibi 
 contendendum aut aliter n6n trS^dilcendum exercitum existim9>bat.] 
 
 
 He then leads his army against the Sudambri, who at onc^ fitt 
 
 ■ ',;■. .;'i^5n,;i|' :. ./ ' iitto the foTeatsA I 
 
 
 1 18. DiSbus decern, qiliblis materia coepta erat oomport&rl, omnI 
 
 2 opere eflfecto exercitus tradClcitur. vaeiar ad utramque partem 
 pontis firmd praesidio rellctd in fln€s Sugambrorum contendit. 25 
 
 3 Interim S. complOribus clvit&tibus ad eum ISg&tl veniunt ; quibus 
 p&cem atque amicitiam petentibus llberlUiter respondit obsidSsque 
 
 4 ad sS addilcl jubet. At SugambrI ex e5 tempore, qu5 pons InstituI 
 coeptus est, fug& compar9,t& hortantibus iis, qu5B ex Tenoteris 
 atque Usipetibus apud sS habSbant, flnibus suls e^ccesserant sua- ao 
 que omriia. «*pr>r«iaverant s6que in sglittldinem ftQ silvga abdiderant^^ 
 
 T-\ 
 
 — i 
 
 r I 
 
 I U'l- T _: ' 
 
H' 
 
 ^ 
 
 4 
 
 m- 
 
 3ri8 > , 
 
 ua-90 
 
 At, 
 
 1 
 
 JETe leami 
 
 PARt\ IV.— CAESAR, DE BELLO GALLICO, IV. 209 
 i tkdt 
 
 the Swhi aho have fled into the interior. Having 
 hieved hts end8, Cmar retttms to Oqul. " ; 
 
 ^H^fi ..^*".P+^^« ^^^ ^ eorum finibus moratus omnibus vicis 
 •echficu^ue inc4nsi8 frOxnen^Isque succlsls sS in fings Ubiorum 
 rec6pit,^tquen8lauxilium>Buum pollicitufl, si ab Su6bis premeren- 
 W.rr^ ^«pgnSvit: Su§bos, posteaquam per eiplSratSrgs 
 ponteni fieri comUrissent, more suo concilia habito ntintSs in 6 
 omnes partes dlml^,sse, uti dS oppidls demigrSrent, liberos, uxorSS 
 snnVr* "^ n' <J^P-erent, atque omnSs, qui arma ferre 
 3 potent, anum m iocum convenient : hunc esse del6ctum medimh 
 fers regiSnum ^^m, quS« , Su§bl obtinSrent: hic RSmftnorum 
 iadventum exspectire atqt^e ibi decertSre constosse. Quod ubiio 
 Caesai^comperit, omnibus rebus iis confectls. qu^m rSrum causa 
 t^acere exercitur. cSnstituerat, ut Germanis metum injiceret, 
 ut Sugambros ulcu<5eretur, ut Ubios obsidione llberaret, di§bus 
 omnmo decem et ocno trans- Rhenum constimptis satis et ad laudem 
 et ad utihtatem prSfectum arbitratus se in Galliam recSpit pon- 15 
 temque rescidit. . ^ . r t- ^ 
 
 Saving decided oiH' 
 "^ get i^formation 
 
 t 2d. Elxigua parte 
 onuiis Gallia ad sep 
 
 %n expedition to Britain, Ccemr tHes in vain to 
 — ahovi the island from Gallic traders. 
 
 aestStis reUqua Caesar, etsi in his locis, quod 
 _ ^ lentnpnes vergit, matOrae sunt hiemSs, tamen 
 
 '2l!l,if'u^'*"' P'T'^""^ contenait, quod omnibus ferg GalHcIs 
 ZbelHs hoshbus nostrks inde subministrata auxilia intelleggbat et. si 20 
 tempus annr ad behum. gerendum deficeret, tamen mSgnS sibi 
 asul fore arbitrabfttfc si ^odo Insulam adisset et genus lK,minum 
 perspexisset, Mca. ^a^; aditOs cognpvisset ; quae omnia fer6 
 3GallIs^erant mcSgrifte. • Neque enim temerS praeter merc&tor6s 
 lUo adit quisquam,Jneque.iIs ipsis quicquam praeter 6r4m mariti- 26 
 mam a^ue e|s3*e^i6n68, quae sunt contra Gallias, nStum est 
 
 ^lal L7r:.H^ '' ""''^"' merca«5ribus neque quanta essei 
 toiUlae mSgriitfldS, neque quae aut quantee natifings incolerent 
 neque quem tlsum belllhabgrent aut quibus Institatis aterentur' 
 neque qui essent ad majSrum navium multitttdinem idSn^I portfla' ao 
 repertre poterat. ' portua, so 
 
 "... 4 . .1 ... ,. .. . - t , : 
 
 •»•,■■'. ' ■ - ■■"/, ■' ' , 
 
 M- .. ''^ V ^ /.■:..;...:: ..Ixr^^ ■•■.,, ,:,.,• ,,■;.,., 
 
 ., -I. :.-,-,:-- .: - ^ H-t.- . .- ■- ;„^-. ^ A - ; •■■■■■ .-..- -.. "v; :,'■ . ," ^x.' : .;.*:- . .^fiv 
 
 
 :•■■■'/ 
 
 
 ,s.». 
 
 4 
 
•I -, 
 
 210 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOR. 
 
 ^CiBmr sends Voluaenua to reconnoitre. Meanwhile he receives offers 
 of submission from several states qf BrUain. Voluaenus returns- 
 
 with hvi little infprmcUiin. 
 
 .-'■■' ■ V 
 
 1 21. Ad haec cSgnoscenda, priusquam periculum faceret, ido- 
 neum esse arbitratus C. Voluseniim cum nftvl longa praemittit. 
 2Huic mandat, ut exploratis omnibus rebus ad sS quam priinum 
 Srevertetur. Ipse cum omnibus copiis in' Morinos proficiscitur, 
 . 4 quod inde erat brevissimus in Britanniam trajectus. Hue navSs 5 
 undique ex flnifcimls regionibua et quam superiore aestate ad 
 SVeneticum beUum effecer^t classem jubet convenire. InteS^i . 
 cSnsiUo ejus cognito et per mercatores perlato ad Britannos, a comX ' 
 p pltiribus Insulae civitfitibus ad eum ISgati veniunt, qui polliceantur \ 
 6 <3bsid68 dare atque imperio populi Romani obten^perare. Quibus 10 
 • audltis llberaliter poUiqtus hortStusque, ut lA ea sententia per- 
 >-7manerent, eos domum j-emittit et cum iis tina Commium, quern' 
 ipse Atrebatibus suj)eratls regem ibi constituerat, oujus et virtu- 
 teih et consilium probabat et q«em sibi fidelem esse arbitrabatur, 
 cajusque auctoritas in his regionibus magni habebatur, mittit.'w 
 8 Huio imperat, quas possit, adeat civitates horteturque, ut populi 
 RomSnl fidem sequantur, seque celeriter eo venttirum nuntiet. 
 SVoIusgnus pprspeetis regionibus omnibus, (juantun^ ei facultatis 
 darl^tuit, qui navl egredi ac se barbaris committere non auderet, 
 quinto die ad Caesarem revertitur quaeque ibi perspexisset re- 20 
 
 ndntiat. 
 
 r-- 
 
 4/ler receiving the svhmission of certain of {he Morini, Ccesar collects 
 , • his fleet and makes his fiit/al arrangements. 
 
 1 22. Dum in his locis Caesar nSvium parandarum causa moratur, -^ 
 , ex magna parte Morinorum ad eum Iggati v6nerunt qui se^ct^ * 
 ,»uperi6ris temporis consilio excOsarent, quod homines barbarl et 
 nostrae c5nsu6tadinis impertti bellum populo Romano fecissent, 25 
 2s6que ea, quae imperasset, factQros pollicerentur. Hoc sibi Caesar " 
 - , jstifl opporttlnS accidisse arbitratus^ quod neque post tergum 
 hostem reUnquere volSbat neque belli gerendi proper anni tempus 
 facultatem habSbat neque Bas tantolariini rgrum occupati6n6s Bri- 
 tanniae anteponenda* jfldicabat, magnum lis iiumerum obsidum» 
 irimperat. Quibus adductis eo^n fidem ^?ec5pit. Navibus circiter 
 
 lytgglnta nngrffriTfl-^oactlg contrftctlHquu, quofc aatis esse ad (lufl# 
 
 
Ters 
 
 it. 
 
 bis 
 
 •e-20 
 
 ts 
 
 Is 
 
 Bt 
 
 t, 25 
 IT ' 
 
 not 
 
 18 
 
 i- 
 tnso 
 
 PART m-CMESAK, DE BEIiO GALLIOO, IV. ' 211 
 
 acoedSbMt duodSTigmti oneririae naySs, ,„»« ei eO Ioc6 «b 
 
 oitum y. Tituno Sabino et L. Auruncul5i6 Cottae l5»stls in 
 
 Me„ap.oa .tq„e i„ e8s pSgg, Moriacirua., ab q„ib„s aT e™f L" 
 
 «non venerant, da«end»m dedit ; P. Sulpicium RofumTJS 
 
 . . ffe reaches Britain, hUhasdiffiadty in getting a mit^e 
 ,, ^ io.nding-place. 
 
 y 23 His constitutis rebus nactus idoneam ad navigandum f^m 
 pestatem tertia fere vigilia solvit equitgsque in uS^^T 1 
 
 2pr6gredl et naves conscendere e^ se seTl iu Jj A u^ "* 
 paul5 t^^ius esset ad.inistr.tuLn;rKM It ^TrS 
 cum primis navibus Britanniam atHmf af«, vy- circiter qufirta 
 
 emt naWxa, atque ita montibus anguste ™a« eontoteto Ja ~ 
 pore «act™ aeoundum, dW^Tet suiter '""""'^' '«>»- » 
 
 ^^.sep^ab. :o.p.4:r^^;^x:s:^ - ■ 
 
 1 84. At barbarloansUioRomtaorumcSmiiM ■>».„! - 
 obhfiaca viMfiBuniTn^r1tffin.,u^- . .^. »^^°^ P^^^^bebant. Erafc 
 
 s iimm a diffi euh 
 
 ni» in alts c6nsfif,,T«A/"'7°*^T^"*^^P^P^®'™^**^*^©m 
 m alto csnstituinon poterant, mlUtibus autom IgnStfa locto, 
 
 r' 
 
^ 
 
 il 
 
 212 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 impedltls manibus, magno et gravl onere armorum oppressis simul 
 et d§ nayibus desiliendum et in fluctibus consistendum et cum 
 
 Shostibus erat pflgnaAdum, cum illl aut ex ^do aut paulum in 
 aquam progressi omnibus membris expedltis, notissimis locis au- 
 
 4dacter tSla conjicerent et equos msuefactos incitarent. Quibus 
 rebus nostrl pertemji atque htijus omnino generis ptignae imperiti 
 n5n eadem alacritate ac studio, quo in pedestribus titi proelils 
 consuerant, atebantur. 
 
 f*. ' ' ■'■■ ■.,"■..■-.. 
 
 ■■.■■■■■ ■ ■ .-■■■' {'■■■''''[-:.: -■.{:■'-, , ^Hi • ■ ■ . -^ ■"■,./■,- ^ 
 
 Coisar maticetivrea to didodge the enemy, while a brave standard- 
 bearer gallanUy heads a rush tdtmrds the sliore. 
 
 I 25. Quod ubi Caesar animadvertit, navgs longSs quSrum et 
 species erat barbarls iniisitatior et motus ad tisum expeditior, 10 
 paulum removeri ab onerariis nSvibus et remis inoitari et ad latus 
 apertum hostium congtitui atque inde fundls, sagittls, tormentis 
 hostes prSpelH ac-submovSrl jussit j quae res magno ilsul nostris 
 
 2fuit. ' Nam et navium figiira elt remorum motii et inusitato genere 
 » tormentorum permoti barbart constiterunt ac paulum modo pedem W 
 
 3 rettulerunt. Atque nostris mllitibus cunctantibus, maxime propter 
 altitadinem maris, qui decimae legionfs aquilam ferSbat, contes- ' 
 tatus de6s, ut ea rSs.legioni f§liciter evenljet : "Des^llte," inquit, 
 , "mlUtSs, nisi vultis aquilam hostibus prodere : ego certe meum 
 
 i rel piiblicae atque imperatorl offieium praestitero. " Hoc cum voce 20 
 magna dixisset, sS ex navi projecit atque in hostSs aquilam ferre 
 
 * coepit Tum nostri cohortati inter se, ne tantum dgdecus admit- 
 
 IterStur, tiniversl ex navl desilueriint. Hos item ex proximis 
 navibus cum conspexissent subsecuti hostibus appropinquSrunt. 
 
 The Romans, afi^ much fighting, gain the shore and put the 
 , Britons to flight. 
 
 aS. PflgnStum est.ab utrlsque acriter. Nostrl tamen, quod 25 
 
 X. 
 
 C0 
 
 neque 6rdin$8 elervare neque firmiter insistere «eque sigMsubse 
 
 vJJ'fc^SteSlt^^ef/fe^i.?? navI,^qS*u8cur^5re ^^^o^cc^r' 
 .2"™!^» .8^. aggregabat, "^^^^pere^ nerturbabw^ J^ 
 
 ^!M.^^^A 
 
 
 ,'- -t^ 
 
 ijiciebantr t^od^imnr animadvertissefc OMsar, soaphas Ion- 
 
 :^ 
 
 
 ■C" *<-•< / 
 
 y^>jcx4^^ 
 
 I 
 
 '\, ^ 
 
^X7 
 
 tap 
 
 
 =^ 
 
 PART IV.— CAESAR, DE BELLO GALLICO, IV. 213 
 
 garum nS^um, ^t^m^^diia^ria ifivigia miUtiW cpmplS^ ju^t 
 Set, qu5s laborantes cb^vexer^Khls suh^di^snhn^&^t. NoZ i 
 
 simul in ando constfterunt, aula omnibus consecQtIa in hoatSe -/ J^j'^ 
 
 proa^55f«i,otu6runt. quod equitga cujsum tenure atque InauL 5 ^^' 
 
 capere non notuemnf its« «« j^„_,_^. . . _ _ . 
 
 " ^-,. — --~.>-~..« vv*u>AD abuuo uiauxam 
 
 canere non potuerant. gjc Jnum ad priatinam forfctoam Caeaart 
 
 
 -/ 
 
 7 
 -/- 
 
 >JUCJt4'*'«'^i 
 
 ' ^^ Britom sue for peace. 
 
 IMJ7. Hbst&s proeliS auperai^I, aimul atque ^e ex fuga rec§p5runt, 
 stetim ad tlaesarem legatoa de pice miaerunt; obaides datiirOs 
 2qaaeque "«pera^et facttiros polliciti aunt.. tJn^ cum his ISgattalO 
 
 ^orato™ mods Caesaris mandftt. dsf arret, -comprehende.»nt ata™ 
 « in vmou]» oonjscerant, turn proelia facto remlMrunt. In petendi 
 
 pace ejus rel culpam in multitadinem cofltulSruS, et V"PterI5 
 
 ..mpradent«.m ut Ign«scer5tur petlvSmnt. Caesar questuaZT 
 
 cam ultro m continentem ISgStis misab pjcem ab s8 pei„„ 
 
 Mum sme causS mtuBssent, !g„«scere imprfldentiae cLt oW- 
 
 edesque impertvit; quSrum illi partem atatim dedSrunt, partem 
 
 7dWrunt., IntereS 8u6s remigrtoe in agros juaaSrunt, prIncipCue 
 
 ^ portion o/ C««ar'. sMps crossing laikr is dispersed by a storm 
 ^ ^ «»»<^ «''^«'c»» ftac* <o^<Ae mainland. 
 
 • \^' ^^^ '«^"Jpjceconfirmata poat diem quartum nuAm ^h i« 
 
 nere posset, mT, aliae eSdem, unde erant Mo- 
 ^^.l^Z^^'^:,!^!:^'' partem' rnsuiae,^*::»» 
 
 L-"-*! 
 
 ' in dltom p] 
 
 wnenWmpetiSrunt. 
 
 leoee 
 
 'advei 
 
 ■c 
 
 ^.K^^'W^'^V^^', 
 
 i:^ 
 
 -A 
 
214 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 The same stohn does great damage t^\the vessels 'which had crossed 
 with C(Bsar, and causes mtich alarm in the-camp. 
 
 29. Eadem nocte accidit, ut esset liina*pl6na, qv^^il^^ariti-' yCL^ 
 
 f 
 
 inos ^^stQs maiitnos in OceanQ effic 
 erab incognitum. Ita uno temp-^- -^*- 
 
 ;atae. HemDestas^ affllcBsbatTnei 
 
 re 
 
 •e consuSjdt, nostr 
 Qos naV|s, ^ 
 uasg«fe in^n 
 
 f^> 
 
 \ SaaminiStrail 
 
 ,aut. 
 
 neque 
 
 _ iae, quibus reporfcarl poss^ tt omnia alerant, quae' aS J 
 
 reficiendSfl naves eraut u^^fi,^etqu6i 6mnibus conltattl'iemart" 
 in Gallia oportSre, fnlmentum his in locis in hiemem provisum 
 non erat. ^ o ^ 
 
 Learning of these misfortunes, the Britons who 'had ^stSmited decide 
 
 }t€ 
 
 ,/o renew the war, and secretly gather forces: 
 
 1^^-*^ 
 
 3f . Quibus rebus co^nitls principes Br; 
 
 ritanniae, qui p^t proe- 
 MJloqSkijr !cum'equil:es' eb 
 
 . 16 'Jt^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^lium ad Caes^krem convenerant, inter s§ «^IIqcSim/ icum eauii«H «d -^ 
 "■^^efi frOmenium K^manlg ^e^gse^mteUsgereii-^lt^^auclt^Um ' ? Vv' 
 
 ,tHx»tiam angustiora, quo^ sine imfuidlriientis Pac«ar legfenes vfa-ans- ■(>>^'^ 
 / 2portaverat. ojitiMiliai ictur esse duie^ ^-^-^ 
 
 y^ '^mmeak^'ue nost^o^ ^r^iKeVe ef^epS ^ehhm, ^r^^ere,^ "'] '^'^^'^ 
 his superatls aufc redita in'terclusTs nemili|in ' postea belli tn^ereridr'^''^^*^^"''^ 
 1^*^^ 3"^ ■^if*^^^^'^ ^'^^f^*^^"]» «^n^JdSjtont. iea<|fte"rto^i3on^"*^^' ■^''"' 
 ^rfitlSne facta ^aulatim 'ex castrS di^c6(iere ef su6& clam 'ex agiis'" ^ ^ ^ 
 dedtlcere coeperunt. «s '' 
 
 <: 
 
 »1. 
 
 6( 
 
 J,-.. 
 
 r7<e«ar, becoming suspicious, collects provisions in the camp, and 
 
 /^J{ aJW^''^ %,«Aa«ererf Jleet, ' 
 
 AM^ 
 
 w 
 
/ 
 
 PART IV.— CAteSAR, DE BELL(^ dALtlCO, IV. 
 
 amissis, rehqula ut naTig5n-&iMmod5 po^Jet; efiSoir*^ -^A-^- 
 
 materia atmie aere a<f rehqu'as reficiendas HtSl^m efc quae ad eSa 
 ^I^.S'^^S^'^^^ I^-. cum 
 
 
 "■*• 
 
 .<^f;' 
 
 A legion oui foraging is surprised and mrrtmnded hy th^ BriUma. ^'' 
 - I # : - :- Ofpsar goes to its relief. 
 
 1 32. Dum ea genintur, Jegione ex consuStfldme ' tlnS^ feS^n- 6 
 ta urn missa quae ap^ellabatur septima, neqiie klSa^'ldl^"^]^-^ 
 .__. _ _ J,elll ^uspicxone iri^r^d^, cum pars.hominum inag^ remanS^ 
 
 pa^btiam m castra ventitaret, ^I qui pro portly ' c^trorum i^ . 
 statione erant, Caesan ntintiaverunt pulvereiri majgrem, duam 
 
 ^l««fi8et, Caesar id^ (^53 erat, s'u^cStus, al^quid Hovi S barbaris ^^ 
 mitum consJifi^ cohortes, quae in stationibus erant, 'rig^iW in e«m 
 /partem pro^iacl. ex reliouis d^as in stationem cohortes succSdt^re, ' 
 C-*rMiqua^ armari et conlSSlim sese subsequi ii^it. Cum baulS 
 
 iQXlglUS a castles nroofiHBiaaof oi,;;., »1. 1 i.'i-_ * ~ _ *^^ 
 
 ■( 
 
 I^gius a <»«fcn\P^oce88i88^^ ab hostibuTpS^i atque 
 sutoere et coSf^^^^eg^-ez omnibu3 ©JiBHB- t^ 
 
 «n.re et c^ril^»~ez omnibu3^ ^a^ Sa ^M 
 ' ?4^ ^C^^^ t^ reliJulrf-|,ar^U?'-'^ 
 
 15 
 
 
 arm! 
 
 
 
 4 animad 
 
 in V ij^etei] 
 
 ,_»»«*»filtoha^nrmuf^itttd ^de e^s^dla 
 circumdederant. ^^J-~. , v»iuo cssww 
 
 ^ description of the British modeoffghti^.toith cilumots^ ' ^J\ 
 . Genus hoc est ex esaedia nil ««« « ■D^iv^^^^^'i**-^' •fTf'^.*^ * - 
 
 a 30 ■/; 
 
 .^^C"*?re er 
 
 recipere 
 
 ^ 
 
^ 
 
 I- 
 
 ^16 
 
 
 \ ■ 
 
 PRIMARY LAM BOOK. 
 
 C 
 
 On CW... a,,^roach ,he Briton, mlhdrau,, dnd .p^ ,U «rt , 
 few daya i» coUecting larger /orca. 
 
 1 ,34- QuilxM rSbus pertutbstls nostrts noyitsto pOgn«e temoore '' 
 3^^«^^ *rb.te»tus su5*5 Iocs contmUitfet brfiyf , l«&p„r; . 
 
 barban ijantios in omnes partes diriiiserunt paucitatemque nos 10 
 iTe'in ""I "'^ P-f csvsrunt, et quanta' ^r^eiri endae 
 atque m perpetutim sul liberandr facultaa daretur, bI Romfinos 
 
 t^^U'^r^'T' ^^"^-«^^^---t- HIS rebus ceieriteTT^n" 
 toultitadihe pedit^tOs *quitatusque coacta ad castra venerunt 
 
 • When the BrUcn. eon^ again» ku camp, C^sar meet, then, and 
 
 routs them with great slaughter. 
 
 \i^,:l?T'-^' *"'' '»"'"* «"P^riSribus tobus «oiderat, fore 
 vdSbat, ^t. el essent hosts, puto, celeriWte pertculum eCrlr 
 
 I quo ante dictum est, sScum trttosportaverat, legiobSs in J^^ 
 
 3.mpet„m hostSsier^j^Sn potueAint So terga vem™"t 11™ 
 tonto spatiasecotl, quantum cum et vWbus effl<^e potuSrunt 
 oimpteea ex IS oooIdSrunt, delude omnibus longS S^ue ^.^^ 
 oils incenas SB in castra reccpBrunt. 
 
 Having received the enemj^^s submission, Cmar returns to Cfaul 
 Jne summer being now over. ' * 
 
 
 "Av 
 
 3 A.1V* ' \ «T 
 
 15 . 
 
 >VI*» 
 
 20 
 
 
 J 
 
 M^i™a*- . HlFCaesar numerum obsidnrrt n,,^ *- :_cx-uM7^ 
 
 ,4^'iA,i^»-»A- 
 
 ( l^Br..«/^>Y. • *^ ^'''*'^"' "^^^ ^'l Caesarem dg pace 
 ^^S^c.|S^!!S""™^^™ obsidum quem ante in$s|^S 
 »"^3pli^a^ eosquy^continentem ife^Shr^'^..,^ ?!zL^:^ ^ ,, 
 
 minoctil Ini^ 
 
 aie aequmoctil li 
 
 fci-^- 
 
I 
 
 «ore 
 
 \ct6 
 um ' 
 ore 5 
 
 da- 
 
 'im 
 
 os-lo 
 
 lae 
 
 ios 
 
 na 
 
 » 
 
 ■y^y 
 
 re IS . 
 is 
 
 5s 20 
 
 '^" '■ f 
 
 l**^ 
 
 '25 ^ 
 
 PART IV.-CAESART^E BELLO GALLICO, IV. 217 
 im^m;;^"» naves T^^uae.omnes incogs ^cpntinei,. 
 
 <i-ii*-^ 
 
 ^_ A defachme^ <ifihe Jfomans, after landing, is attacked by the 
 
 ^onm, hut is rescued by Cmar. " 
 
 cen« aS!! "' ""^ f '' '"' '""^ '^""* ^^P^«^« «^'^^^^ <^ir<'iter tre-^ 
 centi atque m castra dontenderent, Morinl, quos Caesar in Briten 5 
 liiam proficscgns pacatos rellquerat, spe pLdae adducti prlo 
 
 non ita m^n, s«5rum numera .ircu^s^tVun^^^^^^^ 
 
 nollent, ar^a p5nere^jusseru^, ^u^li^e^YS^^t^^ ^ Y 
 
 derenB, celeriter «<t *m5^em h'^titum 
 
 -er a<^ crmorem ^^^^)^r%li^ sex con- 
 
 x-vrw, li4 
 
 itatum 10 
 sua- 
 
 mh^^ 
 
 :'osteft 
 
 ■^ 
 
 armiat6J^vertenmtmag^u*quee6rumnumeruse8toS&.'^ 15^''^. 
 
 4/5!er crt«A.«^ this uprimig Caesar arranges his, tl'i^^^'^ps. 
 38. Caesar 
 quas ex Brii 
 2mii8it. (^i^'cum 
 
 T^--.:™!^ j?aladi^,^^ ^u^ reciperent, **^ ^ 
 perfugiy fuerant Wmv^A^t^^' 
 
 reciperjent, **^ <7 
 
 UglQ 
 
 /P 7 'M v^xii»co lore (7 
 
 'tJ2!?S^«;» ^«n«^«f ma« silvas abdidemnfc, se ad Ca^sarem recg-- 
 *P|^",^^c>m.^B-'g- omnium legiSnui-h'itt coK. 
 
 «Mkl" Wt^^'^'^ .^^ PA^f «b-^- mlser4t;^eliqua^25 
 6n6gI6xerfant. His rebus gesks ex ift&ris Caesans dierum vi^nti 
 supphcatio a senata decreta eflt» " /^ ^ 
 
 t^ J^X^^r^^X^ 
 
^. 
 
 2J8 
 
 ^RIMA 
 
 RY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 . '}'^t '■ 
 
 1, , "i« 
 
 ■*s-- 
 
 V 
 
 XIBER QUINTUS. 
 
 <««««<.„, ,„ Me »/a.„ 0/ M, t^ otkerproviZ "^ *" 
 
 SRras^fi„lt.ma™ partem provinoiae incursisJabu, vSaMrt audt 
 . mifctunt, qui doceant nihil earum rerum DflbH^^l f '^ 
 
 «noMer expedUion Id Brilain. then ■»«« (n ,l!^ <»<«'»'"« /or 
 . Tr.^. u,HoH loyaUy ^ ^IT^ *"" "' .'*' ""»'■'"* "T <*« 
 
 > 2. Hl8 oSnfectls rsbus conventibusque Deribtte ,„ „;» • 
 .GaUiam revertitur at<,„e indo a<f exeXm p,^ ^ie"/"^"""" 
 V8n»~t, cimiitte „„,„ib„ hlbernl, sing J" nX^^"' .i™'" "^ 
 summ. omnium return i„„pi. oi^iter .ea^nu^ s"u7g»eri" ai^^ 
 »P« dsmanawvimus, n»v.s et longta vIgi„t/„orinv,m?r 
 
 .1 ■ ' ** 
 
 6 
 
 .1 
 
• s. 
 
 ^ART IV.— CAESAR, DE BELLO GALLICO, V. 
 
 219 
 
 ♦ 
 
 • quid fieri velit ost^ndifc, atque omnes ad portum Itiuni convenire 
 jubet, quo ex porta ^ommodisaimum in Britanniam trajectum'esse 
 cognoverat, circiter mlUium passuum t^ginta a continenti ;• huic 
 I rel quod satis esse visum est mllitum rellquit. Ipse cum legiSnibus 
 . expeditisquattuor et equitibus octingentis in fings TrSverSrum 5 
 • ' proficiscitur, quod hi neque ad concilia venigbant, neque imperio 
 parebant, GermanSsque Transrhenanos soUicitfire dic6bantur 
 V.-,-. .':. :y:yr':;-y\-:: ^ ,_ : ' '. * ' • 
 
 Two rival chiefs of the Trevei-i appeal to Cceaar. 
 5:^"^ 3. Haec civitas longe plOrimum totlus Galliae equitata valefc 
 magnasque habet copiaa peditum, Rhenumque, ut supra demon- 
 J Zstraviraus, tangit. In ea civitate duo dg principatil inter sg con- 10 
 3^«utebant, Indutiomarus et Cingetorix; g quibus alter, simul 
 atque de Caesaris legionumque adventfl cagnitum est, ad eum 
 venit; sg sudsque omnes in officiS futOros, neque ab amicitia 
 populi Romani defectiiros conflrmavit, quaeque in Trgveris gere- "* 
 4 f entur, ostendit. At Indutiomarus equitatum peditatumque cogere, 16 
 Usque, qui per aetatem in armis esse non poterant, in silvam 
 Arduennam abditis, quae ingenti magnitQdine per medios fings 
 Trgverorum a flftmine Rhgno ad initium RgmSrum pertinet, bellum 
 /-S parare Instituit. Sed posteaquam nSnnQlU prIncipSs ex ea civitate 
 tfc famUiaritate Cingetorigis adducti et adventfl nostri eiercitflsM 
 pertorriti ad Caesarem vgngrunt, et dg suls privatim rgbus ab e5 
 petere coepgrunt, quoniam olvitati consulere non possent, veritus ' 
 ng ab omnibus dgserergtUr, Indutiomarus IggatSs ad Caesarem 
 
 6 mittit : sgsg idcircS ab suis discgdere atque ad eum venire nSluisse, 
 quo facilius civitatem in officio contingrot, ng omnia nobilitatis 25 
 
 7 discessfl plgbs propter imprfldentiam labergtur ; itaque esse civi. 
 tatem in sua i)ote8tate, 8g86(]|ue si Caesar permitteret, ad eum in 
 oaatra vontOrum, bu&h civitatisque fortOnas gjus fidel permissOrum. 
 
 Cassar decides in favor of Cingetorix, while requiring the 
 aubminsion of Indutiomarus. 
 
 -^ 4. Caesar, etsi intelleggbat quft dg causa ea dloerentur,- quaeque 
 eum rgg ab Institfltfl cGnsiliO dgterfgret, tamen, ng aestatem in» 
 Trgverl» ognsflmer» oSgergtur, omnibus ad Britannioum hAlhi,» 
 
 ," . ° ' v^»».i»ug m* prirannioum rwilnwi 
 
 TgbuB comparatls, lii^litlomarum ad sg cum ducentis obsidibus 
 avenlra juaait. Htoadduott», a jit filia propinqufeque gjus omni- 
 
 ^\ 
 
220 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 bus, quos nomihatim Svocaverat, consolatus Indutiomarum horta- 
 3tu8que est, uti in officio m^Heret : njm tamen ^m» principibua 
 TrSverorum ad se convocatls hos siiJmatmrcSgetorigi concili- 
 avit: quod cum merito ejus a s§ fieri intelleggbat, turn mStoil 
 interesse arbitrabatur ejus auctoritStem inter suos quam plQrimum 
 ivalere, cfljus trfm egregiam in sS voluntatem perspexisset. Id 
 tulit factum grayiter Indutiomarus, suam gratiam inter suSs minul, 
 et qui jam ante inimico in nos animS fuisset, multo gravius hoc 
 dolOre exarsit. ' 
 
 Coming to the seaport Cwsar /nda the fleet and army ready, 
 
 t 6. His rebus constitatis Caesar ad portum Itium cum legiSnibuslO 
 
 Zpervenit. Ibi cognoscit sexaginta naves, quae in Meldls factae 
 
 erant, tempestate rejectSs cursum tenere non potuisse a^ue 
 
 eodem,. unde erant profectae, revertisse ; reliquSs paratas ad 
 
 snavigandum atque 'omnibus rebus instrtictas invenit. Eodem 
 
 equitatus totius Galliae convenit numerS miUium quattuor, prin-l*-- 
 4cipgsque ex omnibus civitatibus ; ex quibus perpaucSs, quorum in 
 s§ fidem perspexerat, relinquere in Gallia, reliquos obsidum loc5 
 secum dacere deorevbrat, quod, cum ipse abesset, mStum Galliae 
 verebatur. 
 
 Dumnorix, a dimfected 'and ambitious Oavl, causes trouble. 
 1 e. Erat ana cum cgterts Dumnorix Aeduus, dS quo ante abao 
 nobis dictum- est. . Hunc s6cum liabSre in primis constituerat 
 quod eum cupidum r6rum novarum, cupidum imperil, magnl 
 ^samral, magnae inter GallSs auctSritatis c<5gn6verat. AccSdSbat 
 hac, quod in concilio AeduSrum Dumnorix dixerat sibi a Caesare 
 , ^ rSgnum civitatis deferrl; quod dictum Aedul graviter ferSbant 28 
 
 -neque recilsandl aut dfiprecandl causa legatos ad Caesarem mittere * 
 SaudSbant. Id factum ex suls hospitibus Caesar cSgnSverat. Ill© 
 omnibus prtmo precibus peterecontendit, ut in Gallia relinquerS- 
 tur ; partim quod InsuStus navigandl mare timSret ; partim quod 
 Arehgionibus impedlrl s6b6 diceret. Posteaquam M obstinate sibi» 
 negarl vidit, omnI spS impetrandl adfimpta prlncipSs Galliae 
 soUicitare, sSvocare singulflg hortarique coepit, utI in continenti 
 5reman6rent ; mettt territare: nfin «inn 
 
 __„._..,___ _ lUIL, — — 
 
 €ftya&^ 
 
 ndbUitate Bpolifafifcur ; id^se consilium Caesarii^ ut, quCw in 
 
:-# 
 
 PART IV.— ?t!AESAR, DE BELLO GALLICO, V. 221 
 
 cdnapecta Galliae interficere verSretur, hos omnes in Britanniam 
 etraductos necaret; fidem reliqula interponere, jOsjurandum pos- 
 cere, ut, quod esse ex tisu Galliae intellexissent, communi consilio 
 administrarent. Haec a compluribus ad Caesarem defergbantur. 
 
 Cxsar delays hia departure in order to check disaffection. 
 Dumnorix flees, btU is overtaken and slain. 
 
 1 7. Qua rS c6gnit(fi, Caesar, quod tantum civitati Aeduae dlgnita- 6 
 
 tis tribuebat, coercendum atque deterrendum, quibuscumque rgbus 
 1^,2 posset, Dumnorigem statuebafc; quod longius ejus amentiam prS- 
 
 gredl videbat prSspiciendum, nS quid sibi ac rei pilblicae nocgre 
 3 posset. Itaque digs circiter vigintl quinque in eo loco commo- 
 
 ratus, quod Corus ventus navigationem impedigbat, qui mggnamlO 
 
 partem omnia temporis in his locls flare consuevit, dabat operam, 
 
 ut in oflSdo Dumnorigem contineret, nihilC tamen secius omnia 
 *gju8 co^a cognosceret; tandem Moneam nactus tempestatem 
 SmllifcS^quitgsque conscendere in naves jubet. At omnium im- 
 
 I>eJ*fs animis, Dumnorix cum equitibus Aeduorum a castrlsis 
 6 Ini»6iente Caesare domum discgdere coepit. Qua rg nuntiata Caesar 
 irmissa profectione^atque omnibus rSbus postpositis mfignam 
 
 partem equitattls ad eum Insequendum mittit, retrahlque imperat ; 
 781 vim faciat neque pareat, interfici jubet, nihil hunc sg absente 
 
 pr6 sftnS factflrum arbitratus, qui praesentis imperium neglgxisset. 20 
 8llle enim wvocatus resistere ac sg mantl dgfendere suSrumque 
 
 fidem implSrftre coepit saepe clamitans llberum sg llberaeque esse 
 9clvitati8. Ell, ut erat imperatum, circumsistunt hominem atque 
 
 interficiunt ; at equitgs Aedul ad Caesarem onmgs revertuntur. 
 
 Cofsar crosses over to Britain and lands unopposed. 
 
 1 8. His rSbus ij^s Lab'iglis'm'continente cum tribus Iegi6nibu8 25 
 et equitum mlllibus duSbus relicts, ut porttls tugrgtur et rem 
 frttmentariam prSvidgret, quaeque in Gallia gererentur cSgnS- 
 
 «sceret, cSnwliuijique pr6 tempore et pr5 rg caperet, ippe cum quli- 
 que legiSnibus U part numero ecjuitum, quern in continent! rell- 
 querat, ad solis occftsum nftvgs solvit, et Ignl AfricS prfivectus» 
 media circiter nocte ventS intermissfi cursum n«n tenuit, et longius 
 delatufl ttogtaT4»rta4flw^mb8i i >iHfei-ft BAanniam relTgtam cOni|wut. ^ 
 
 J Turn rarsua ftestOa commatfttiOnera secQtus rgmis contendit, ut 
 
 .'H*^:.% 
 
222 
 
 ^IMARY LATIN BOd 
 
 ?OOK. 
 
 earn partem Insulae caperet, qua optimum esse egressum superioro ' 
 iaestate cognoverat. Qua in re admodum fuifc miUfcum virtus 
 laucknda qxa vectpriis gravibusque navigils non intermisso remi. 
 5gandi kbore longSrum navium cursum adaequarunt. Accessum 
 
 est ad Britanniam omnibus navibus merldiano f^re tempore, neque 5 
 6in eo ,loc6 hostis est visua; sed. ut postea Caesar ex captLs 
 cSgnovit, cum mSgnae manus eo convenissent, multitQdine navium 
 perterritae quae cum annotinis privatlsque, quas sul quisque 
 commodi fecerat, amplius octingentae tlnS erant visaei tempore, a ^ 
 ntore discesserant ao se in superiSra loca abdiderani \ 
 
 '\ 
 
 f*^ «■ y 
 
 
 f.i 
 
 
 '*: 
 
 \ 
 
 J^ngTa^ons gnarcTunth ike ^h^e deuces W^]he inierior 
 and drives the cn^my from one of their atrongholdk 
 
 -*- 0. Caesar ^xposito exercita efe loco mstrls idoneo capj ubi ex ' 
 ^^^tivte cognovit, quo in loco hostium popiae consedissenfc, cohor- 
 .^tibjij decern ad mare reUctls et equitibus trecentls, qui presidio 
 ..navibus essent, ^ i^rtia vigilia ad bosses contendit. eo minus ' 
 ^y^rilus j^vibus, quod in lltore molli a^ue' aperto .deligataa ad 15 
 , . _artcpram relmquebat; et praesidio navibuS^ue Q. Atrium prae. 
 .....^ieoit.- apse nocta progressus mlllia passuum circiter duodpcim 
 ^.^^tHim c6pia« conspicatusest, im, «quitata atque essedls ad ' 
 :'i^-i^T^J^'^' «^ loc^%i6re nostros pr^hibere et proelium 
 ^ ^ ^^committere coepSrunt^ ^^jjij^quit^ta se in silvSs abdi-20 
 ^;,.;d6runt locum nacti gg^eg^^ et JK et opere mOnltum, quem 
 . domesticI«belll, ut vidsti^ntur, W^ jam ante pra^paraverant ; 
 '.^nam crebrls arboribus succMs omn6s introitOs «rant praeclilsl. 
 elpsi ex Silvia ran propQgnabant nostrosque intra mtoltiSngs in- • 
 7 gredl prohibgbant. At mllitgs legionis septimae testadine facta et 25 
 
 aggere ad mOnltiSngs adjecto locum c§p6runt eOsque ex silvls 
 
 SexpulSrunt panels vulneribus acceptls. Sed eSs fugientSs longius 
 
 Caesar prSsequI vetuit, efc quod loci natOram IgnOrabat, et quod 
 
 To^U ^""^^ ^^^ constopta monition! castrOrum tompus jelinqul 
 
 A» trwjpa artmting out in purmfy, mm comes of serioJ damage 
 earned to the Jleet by a storm, s 
 1. 10. Postrldie ejus difil mftne tripertltc mllitSs equitfisque ^ ' 
 
 T¥ 
 
 .|^^,.,: 
 
 fi>iJ^ 
 
•: PART IV.— CAESAR, DE BELLO GALLICO, V. 223 
 
 2aliquantuin itineris progressis, cum jam extrgml e^enfc in pro- 
 spectu, equites a Q. Atrio ad Caesarem venerunt.qui nuntiarent 
 supenorenocte maxima coorta tempestate pr(^pe omnes naves 
 a^ctas atque m lltore gj^cta^ esse, quod neque ancorae fungsque 
 - ^subgisterent, neque nautae gubematoresque vim tempestatis patl.6 
 3 possent ; itaque e^^eo concursH navium magnum esse incommodum 
 acceptum. 
 
 Ca^aar returns, arranges for the repairing, of these losses, and again 
 . sets out against the enemy, now under Cassivdlaunus. 
 
 l-^ttr Bis rebus cognit^ Caesar legiones equitatumque revocarl 
 2atq_ue m itinere resistere jubet, ipse ad naves revertitur; eadem 
 fere, quae ex nuntils littensque c6gn6veratT>oram perspicit, sic ut 10 
 amissis circiter quadraginta navibus reliqua^stamen refici posse 
 amagno negotio viderentur. Itaque ex legionibiSWs d6lil 
 4ex contmenti^lios arcessi jubet; Labieno scrlbifc, utTmJairSia- 
 nmas posset, iis legiSnibus, quae sunt apud eum. nSv^s Instituat. 
 5 Ipse, etsi res erat multae operae ac laboris, tamen commodissimum 15 
 
 ess^stateuit omnes^naves subdflcl «t cum castris una mOnltione 
 econjungi, In his rebus circiter dies decem cSnsflMit, n§ noctumis 
 Tquidem temponbus ad laborem mllitum intermissls. Subductis 
 navibus castrlsque 6gregig mamtls easdem copiSs, quas ante, prae- " 
 sidio navibus rellquit: ipse eodem, unde redierat, proficiscitur;' aoV 
 8Eo cum vemsset, mSjorSs jam nndique in eum locum copiae ^ 
 BntannSrum convgnerant, summa imperil belllque administrundl , 
 cpmmflni c^nsiliS permissS Cassivellauno, cfljus fings a maritimis > 
 cIvUAtibus fltlmen dividit, quod appellntur Tamesis, ft marl circiter 
 jmlllia passuum octoginta. Huic superiore tempore cum reliquls26 
 -clvitatibus continentia bella intercesserant : seVnostro advent^ 
 permoti Bjitonnl hunc toti bello imperiSque praefScerant. 
 
 A description of the people, product» and dimate qf Britain 
 
 L *?; ^^^^^^^i'^^ P'»" interior ab ils incolitur, qu5s nfttfls in 
 . ^P«I menioria proditum dipunt; maritima pars ab i^ qu^ 
 
 ferlr^am V^'Tf ""^ ^^ ^''^«^^ tra„Bi.Lt(c^uIoL\ 30- 
 fere ifa nommibus clviWtum appeUtotur, quibus orti ex dvitA- 
 tibus eg pervsner unt) et bellC illat<^ jbi remftnB6runt at.„. ..1 
 »oulu ..u.peiunt . H omi iiumestlnftnltamamdaerelXL^^ 
 
 ■r%-" 
 
I -■■".-■ 
 
 .224 
 
 ■•>(- 
 
 f 
 
 I 
 r- 
 
 ' » " 
 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 tur [aut aere] aut numte «ireo aut talels ferrete ad certum pondua' 
 
 aere Otuntur importaW. MSteria ottjusque generis, ut in a£i» 5 
 ..est praeter f^m a^ne abietem. ^ Leporem et g^mZT^. 
 au^ r*? '*»»«■' P-"»"'; l»e"=-tama.val„»ta^m,v„lupttS, 
 togoriU '^,«'"'''«■"1«««««' 1»^ in GaUis, remissiLbua ' 
 
 ■, •^.. "/;:,; T*e geography ij/^ &^tti»,;_ • ; ; , V 
 
 I 13. Ihsula natflrt {riquetra, cflju, flnum latus ert contr&Gal-M 
 bam Huju. kten» alter angvdus. qui est «1 Cantium, q„8 fert 
 
 . Jies ex. GalbS navss^appelluntur. ^. orientem soIe« , WeSr ■' 
 ■ «d mendiem speotat. Hae pertinet eirciter mlUia passu™ qX- 
 
 jgenta. Alterum vergit ad Hisptaiam a^ue oocid^m .solem • 
 qus ez ^iarte est Hibemia, dimidio minor, ut aestimMur. "»»' « 
 Br. ann|a: aed pari spati« transmissfls atque oz Galli» est in 
 
 3B„tanmam. In hoc mediS "cur^ est Insula, quae appeUit" 
 Mona; oomplflrss pratorea minSres subjectae Insulae eZw 
 
 .!l'J^ T """""^ sortpstant dies continues trfcinti 
 
 bL ^'"»r°"""- ^"^ ""•" ^' -^ P'^oonationibus ^per^» 
 
 « menti noctes vidSbSmus. Hajua est longitada lateris, ut fert 
 
 eUlorum opmio, septingentorum mflliura. Tertiim, est eontrt sep- 
 
 tentnanss ; cul parti nfllla est. object» ten», sed Sjus angulus 
 
 Uteris mtams ad GermSniam speotat. Hoc mlllia passuum «,tia- 35 
 
 Jgenta in longitlldmem psse eastimitur. Ita omnia Insula oat ia 
 
 oircuita vIciSs centum mlllium passuum. T^T^^^v "^ ^ ' ■ 
 
 S- 
 
 , ,> • ^t manner» and cudom» qf the Britant. "■'■'•" 
 
 1 14. Ex his omnibus longg stint hQm^ssiml, iur-Gantium incb^ 
 
 lunt, quae regis, est maritima omnis, neque multum a GaUicft 
 
 ^^ Sdifferunt c6nsu6tadine. InteriorSs plSrtque frflmonta n6n serunt ao 
 
 sed l«cte et came vivunt pellibusque sunt vestltl. Omnfis vSrC s6 
 
 Bntannl vitrO Inficiunt, quod caeruleum efficit colorem, atque h(5c 
 
 ahomdiarca ^t i« ptlpia a^peotfl ; oapin^qim nunt prSuuuug, 
 
 
* ««-^''j-^liTtl^ 
 
 -■awWaBisaicsi-i 
 
 T 
 
 riumerus. tJtun- 
 «i certum pondus 
 klbunji in medifcer- 
 3xigua, est copia ; 
 iris, ut in Gallia, 6 
 gallinam et fin- 
 animl voluptatia-; 
 lia, remissioribus ' 
 
 I est contra Gal- 10 
 intium, quo fere . 
 
 soleni, inferior 
 ' passuum quln- 
 identem .solem ; 
 sstimatur, quamis 
 X Gallia est in 
 luae appellatur 
 3ulae exlstiman- 
 ntinuos tiiginta 
 bionibus reperi-20 
 3e quam in con- 
 lateris, ut fert 
 est contra sep- 
 i §jus angulus 
 passuum octin- 25 
 a insula est ia 
 
 Cantium inobi 
 turn & Gallicft 
 » n6n serunt, 30 
 )mne8 vSrO s6 
 em, atque h(5c 
 ■tot prgmiflBg^ 
 
 "tt. -> 
 
 
 >» ■ X.* 
 
 »-"s 
 
 Ts- 
 
 *•*< {/ 
 
 ^ 
 
 f,'-- 
 
 
 '::J-^''K. 
 
 iCJ 
 
 j.: 
 
 ' ls„ « • 
 
 
 
 
 •« 
 
 
 
 t -^ 
 
 '"'^•si^'i. 
 
 
 ■ ."' 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■\> 
 
 4: 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 ■'-J 
 
 
 *■ 
 
 ''^ 
 
»>i'>"«'v[''''m^f>wfmtmmmgffmmmii 
 
 ■K 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 ^. 
 
 'Vi;. 
 
 1^^ '^', 
 
 
 >■ •:■>: 
 
 «-i- A 
 
 
 'l^^Sfe- 
 
 ,>• ■>/ 
 
 « 
 
 » 
 
 
 a 
 
 V . . "flSI '; 
 
 
 
 
 , ^ 
 
 
 \! 
 
 ^ 
 
 " •'■v„ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -^; 
 
 m^f-'SM 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ( 4 ■ „ 
 
 
 , 
 
 
 -' "1 
 
 JT— 
 
 
 . ■'<•• 1. 
 
 * 
 
 " ''■..■ ■!"■ 
 
 
 ' t-t 
 
 
 ■ ' :h ^ ■ ^ -^ 
 
 
 i. 
 
 • •' •" ' 
 
 
 J ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ri 
 
 ^^M&NtWlfMriMtax^ 
 
I 
 
 "V 
 
 PAST IV.— CAfiSAK, DE BELLO WlU^ICO, V. 225 
 
 atqueonui, parte corporis r»s« praeter caput et labrum superius 
 'Uxores habent dtol duod5mq,e inter s5 commllnSs. et .STi 
 «frntrea cum fratabus parente,q„e cum llbarls ; „d, a qui ^l 
 
 durl"'-"" "t"'" '"""' ■^"^ P''»- ^« q^ue d5- 
 
 \ The Hormm-are mrprmd wUU huUdmg a cwmp^hut'orive 
 
 off the enemy. 
 
 n^tro m .toere confllxSrunt, tomen ut nosW omnibus pLZ 
 supenores fuennt atque e«, in silvSs ooUSsque comp^erint 
 
 samlserunt At ,Ui intermisso spatio. imprfldentibus nostrts atque lo 
 occupat« m munltione castrBrum subito s5 ex sUvb SfeSnTt 
 
 ^etflque in e3s facta, qui erai^t in sMSne p^ castrcru.:^^' . 
 
 ^.ter pugnaverunt; duabusque missis subsidia cohortibua S 
 
 ^esare, atque his. primis legianum duSrum, cam hae perexigu8 
 mt«rm«so loci spatia inter se constitissent, novo genere pS,, 
 perterr..s nostrts, per medios audScissime perrflp^r^nt .5quS 
 
 5 ncolunies recepsrunt. Ea die Q. Laberius DoL, tribflnu, S 
 tarn, .nteracitur. nil ploribus submissis coh<^bu; repelZtlT 
 
 Th^ disadvantages^ under which the Romans lay in fighting 
 ' ' ' with the Briton». . - 
 
 1 16. Tota hoc in genere pognae, cum sub ocull. omnium So nra 
 
 armorum, quod neque msequi cMentes possent neque ab flgni. 
 
 d«cedere auderent, minus apWs esse ad hajus generis hosteT 
 requites autem magna cum perlcula p.«,lia dln^cSre, pZ^Zi 
 
 quod .UI et.am cansUlM plerumque oMerent et, cum pTZm "b 
 Jeg,„n.bus n<«tras remavissent, ex essedls desillrent, ^Tpe^busJS 
 l^tZ^r^ «on'ond-nt. Equestris autem proLlil imZ 
 
 AooS^bat hue, ut numquam conferti, sed rSrl mjgnlsque intorrUlIS 
 proelarentur statianiSsque dispositSs ha b;renr.taue ali^ am 
 
 m uAiJip..,«L, xxitegrtqud et wcoites defat^atia Buccederent. » 
 
 16 
 
(Tf 
 
 226 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN b50K. 
 
 1 i 
 
 The JRoTnans are again attached, but inflict such a defeat on the 
 
 Britona that a large part of them disband. 
 '■'-." ' ■ * ' ^_^_ •■'^ '. ' 
 
 1 17. Posters di§ procul S. castris hostes m collibus constitSrunt, 
 
 rSrlque se ostendere et lenius quam pndie nostros equites proeli5 
 
 2laoessere coeperunt. Sed meridie cum Caesar pabulandi causa 
 trSs legiones atque omnem equitatum cum C. Trebonio legato 
 misisset> repente ex omnibus partibus ad pabulatores advola- 
 
 3v§runt,_ SIC uti ab signis legionibusque non absistereht. Nostri 
 9<criter in eos impetil facto reppulerunt, neque finem sequendi 
 fecerunt, quoad subsidio confisi equites, cum post se legiones 
 
 4 vidSrent, praecipites hostes egerunt ; magnoque eorum numero in- 
 terfectd neque sul coUigendl neque consistendl aut ex essedis 
 
 6 dSsiliendl facultatem dederunt. Ex hac f uga protinus, quae undi- 
 que convenerant, auxilia discesserunt, neque post id tempus um- 
 quam summis nobisqum copiiji hostes contenderunt. 
 
 ^ ■• -."-■'.. : ■^''V ---.■-" 
 
 ^"■■,. ■ ' ■'-' ■'-■;. ■ . -»" .- ■ . . 
 
 v,,v,V, ,. Gcesar forces a passage across the Thames. 
 
 - ■ # 
 
 1 18. Caesar qognito consilio eorum ad fltimen Tamesim in Hnes 
 CassivellaunI exercitum duxit ; quod flumen uno omnino loco 
 
 2pedibus, atque hoc aegre, translrl potest. Ed cum veuiaset, 
 animum advertit ad alteram fltlminis ripam magnas esse copias 
 
 3 hostium instructas. Rlpa autem erat acutis sudibus praefixis 
 mtlnita, Sjusdemque generis sub aqua defixae..sudes flumiue tege- 
 
 4bantur. His rebus cognitis a captivis perfug^que Caesar prae- 
 
 6 misso equitatu confestim legiones subsequi jussit. Sed ea celeri- 
 tate atque eo impettl militgs ierunt, cum capite solo ex aqua 
 exstSrent, ut hostes impetum legion um atque ^quitum sustinere 
 nqin possent, i^pS^sque dimitterent ac se fugae mandarent. 
 
 10 
 
 15 
 
 20 
 
 ' Cassivdlaunus, avoiding a pitched battle, harasses Caesar's 
 
 line of march. 
 
 1 19. Cassivellaunus, ut supra dSmonstrS<vimus, omni deposits. 25 
 sp§ contentiSnis, dimissis amplioribus copiis, mlllibus circiter quat- 
 tuor essedariorum relictis, itinera nostra servabat, paulumquo ex 
 vi& «zcSdebat loclsque impeditis &o silvestribus sese occultiLbat 
 atque ils regiSnibus, quibus nds iter facturds cognoverat, pecora 
 
 2 atque hoaifoes ex agrte in «TvSs coES^U^bftt 9t, cum equitfttusso 
 
,-•/■■?■** 
 
 i PARp IV.— CAESAR^ DE BELLO QALLICO, V. ^27 
 
 noflter Ilberius pVaedandi vastandlque causa s5 in agrSs gigceiat 
 
 .^cum penculo noatrorum equitum cum iisconfligebat I^l^e 
 3 metu lat.us vagarl prohib.bat. Relinqu.batur, ut nequeXngl 
 ab agmine legxonum disced! Caesar pateretur. et tantum m3s 5 
 vastandxB zncendilsque faciendls hostibus noceretur, quanrum lab^ 
 atque itmere legionaril milites efficere poterant 
 
 ijnit TrimharUes, a powerM British tribe, submit to Cc 
 
 '.r. 
 
 20. Intenm Trinobantes, prope tivmism^ earum re<ri6num 
 «vitas, ex qui Mandubracius ad„l5so5„s Caeaari. fidemS^Z 
 .ad eum m conh„e„t«m Galliari, vtoerat, cfljus pater in a ^«te.o 
 regnum „bt.nue«.t, interfeotu,q„e e^t a cLsivellauns.Tp^ W '" 
 
 mortem vIMveraUsgStas ad Oaesarem mittnnt pomoe„t„re ssS 
 3« dediturp^atque imperata facturos ; petunt. 'ut Mandub^^m 
 
 4,.raesrt.mpe„umqueobtineat. Hb "Caesar imperat obsidesouT „ 
 ragmta,fr«ment«™j„e exeroitul Mandubraciumque ad ^^^^ 
 
 45. 
 
 ^ > ifa»y o^Aer «Wfie. «ou; submit, and Ccesar captures the Houm* 
 
 of Cassivellaunus. . 
 
 'hibif- '^™''.'»"«''U8 defense atque ab omnI mflitum inMri» nro- 
 ib.t«, Cenimsgia, Segontiaol, Ancalitta, Bibrool Q^M W^I^ » 
 
 .mbusm.ss,sa^, Caesar, dMunt. Ab h,; oagn^' , Z l^^:;, " 
 eo loco oppxdum CassiyeUaunI abessesUvIs palQdibusque mS™ 
 
 squo safs magnus hominum pecorisque numeru. oTvLT S^' 
 pidum autem Britanm vocant, cum silv» impedllZ viHs' f 
 
 giS n»Z at„!l r*°'""*" '"'"' "S'™"'»^ ! '««^ "Perit Sgre- 
 
 £^ nan t^nt'^^s r-;^-!;;^^;^^^ 
 
 ^J> 
 
 ,«? 
 
A.. 
 
228 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 <•, 
 
 t-^iM» 
 
 ■h 
 
 i-. 
 
 A avdden attack on the camp by the sea i3 repulsed, and Cassivellgkv^us- 
 i^ "'' sues /or peace. ^^^^^i^ 
 
 1 22. Dum haec in his locis geruntur Cassivellaunus ad Cantium, 
 quod esse ad mare supra demonstravimus, (]tuibus regionibus quat- 
 tuor rSges praeerant, Cingetorix, Carvilius, Taximagulus, Segovax, 
 ntlntios mittit atque his imperat, uti coactis omnibus copiis castra 
 
 2 navalia d§ improvisS adoriantur atque opptignent. li cum ad 6 
 castra venissent, nostri eruptione facta multls eorum interf ectis, 
 •capto etiam hobili duce Lugofcorige, suos incolumes rediixerunt. 
 
 ? Cassivellaunus hoc proelio ntintiato, tot detrimentis acceptis, 
 vastatis finibus, maxime etiam permStus defectione clvitS-tum, 
 llgatos per Atrebatem Oommium de deditione ad Caesarem mittit. lo 
 
 4 Caesar, cjim constituisset hifemare in continenti propter repentinos 
 Galliae'mottls, heque multum aestatis superesset, atque id facile 
 extrahl posse intellegeret, obsidSs imperat, et quid in annos sin- 
 gulds vectigalis • populo Romano Britannia penderet constituit ; 
 
 .5 interdlcit atque imperat Casaivellauno, ne jMai\dubracio neu Trino- 16 
 
 bantibus noceat. - * -t t ' ■" 
 
 '. f ' ' 
 
 CcBsar retuma^Ao tf^' mainland. 
 
 1 23. Obsidibus acceptis exej^i'^m redflcit ad mare, navSs invenit 
 2refecta8. His deductis, quc^ et captivorum magnum numerum j 
 habSbat, et nonndllae ten)|pestate deperierant navSs, duSbus com-* ' 
 
 3 meatibus exercitum reptirtare Instituit. Ac sic accidit, uti ex 20 
 tanto navium njjmero Jot navigatf^Btbus, neque hoc neque supe* ^ 
 riSre anno alia omnino navis, quae milite^ portaret, dSsiderargtur ; . 
 
 t^x iis, quae ii^tUigs.ex continenti ad eum remitterentur, et 
 5pri5ris commeatils expositis mllitibus, et quas postoS, Labignus 
 faciendas oaraVerat numero sexaginta, porpaucae locum caperent ; 25 
 
 5 reliquae fer5 onii^Ss^rojicerentur. Quas cum aliquamdiQ Caesar 
 frOstra oxspect&sset, n5 anni tempore a navigatione exclflde- 
 rStur, quod aequinoctium suberat, necessario angustius militSs 
 
 eoollocarit, ac summa tranquilUtate oensecata, secunda initi cum 
 Bolvisset vigilia, prima iQce torrara aitigit omnSsque incolumSsao 
 n&v6B perddxit. t . 
 
 ■ h. 
 -'%. 
 
 ri- 
 
 :Mk :•.-■•■:- 
 
PART IV.— COKNELIUS NEPO& 
 
 229 
 
 / 
 
 ANNOTATIONS ON THE SELECTIONS. 
 
 CORNELIUS NEPOS. 
 
 Cornelius Nepos was born aWt the year 100 B.C., in Ci.: 
 
 alpme Gau^. north of the Po. His birthplace has been ^rioudy 
 
 pvon a, Verona and Tioinum (the modem Pavia). theSrty 
 
 he German h.sto„a„ Mommsen. There is also an old tradition 
 
 that names Hostilia, now OstigUa, as the favored place and he 
 
 Nepos probably removed to Rome in his youth, anfsLt the 
 
 ■ Swerfl"' i*^ " """ ""^ «" ™ the^^XpL^ 
 • ^atulir B r^/ '""°"''- ^"^ """"' CiceH. and the pZ 
 
 |: action,i,e took no part in military or poUtical aflairs. HU dltt 
 oceurrad probably about 26 B.C.. d«ru,g the reign of Anf-ti 
 
 He wrote several works, of which there still remain Lives of 
 Atticus and Cato the Censor, and a work entitled VUae eZTuZ 
 «mm In^^rat^m. or mo™ fully, D, B^ceUenf»^ D^^^^ 
 «rum Oe„ .um, from which the three selectionT^ntaineTin thu 
 ^.LXr' '? "" '"^ "«'""'^"P'»' '•— ". this ll work 
 
 «Throdits ^t"tr '." f "f "° *'">'""• *■>" «'«• '» "-0 time* 
 Iheodostus, at the end of the fourth century of the Christian em 
 
 But the ge„e™l opinion among the schola™ of the p«>sent davT. ' 
 
 iiXlr&r ""'""'■'"^'^ "■o -""- '•'»!'*'-«::.': 
 
 imt^cUontT] ft"' """• '" "" V^^^^^y- to oonvey moral 
 «strucfon to his follow-Countrymen, not much reliance can be • 
 ^aced upon h.m as an historian. Hi. biographies, howevercon! 
 tam a oondderable amount of human interest, although he sTt 
 ^obetoo^e^s^dedi^^ 
 
 ■ ■_„,. _^^' ' ■ J ^ ,. 
 
:l 
 
 Y 
 
 230 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 They are, as a rule, either models of excellence or examples of 
 unredeemed baseness. Th§ gray light of history seems to have 
 nothing to recommend it in his eyes. 
 
 In style he is generally simple, elegant and lively, and in con- 
 struction commonly pure; but sometimes lie grows careless, and 
 falls into anacolutha, that is, broken orj^inished constructions, or 
 into construfctions riot strictly classioelr At times, too, he indulges 
 in certain syntactical mannerisms, and in the disagreeable repe-. 
 tition of the same words, "where a change of expression would be 
 quite practicable without injury to the sense. In his choice of 
 single words, Nepbs is, in the main, classical, but occasionally we 
 th colloquial and archaic forms which are not found in the 
 prose writers of the Augustan age. > ' ; / , 
 
 NOTES 01^ THEMISTOCLES. 
 
 CHRONOLOGICAL TABLE. 
 
 Themistocles is born . 
 
 Is Archon Eponymua 
 
 Takes part at Salamis 
 
 Is expelled from Athens 
 
 Flees to Asia 
 
 Dies' at Magnesia . . 
 
 B.C. 
 
 514 (?) 
 
 II 
 
 481 
 
 II 
 
 480 > 
 
 It 
 
 471 
 
 /|^ 
 
 466 
 
 II 
 
 449 (?) 
 
 CHAP.vl. 
 
 I 
 
 m 
 
 1. Hnjna : governed by the phrtiBe vitia inemntis adtdescentiae, 
 trans. * his faults in early youth,' 'his youthful excesses.' tente- 
 feratnr : subjunctive of result, so putentur (V. 29). hulo : in- 
 direct object after anteferatur (V. 78, v. c). The hpiic is rather 
 awkward after hujiis. pares : for case se'e V. 12, 6. /. 
 
 '2. ab Initio eiit ordlendum : ' we nlust start a| thb beginning,' 
 lit. ? For impeirsonal use of gerundive see V. i20i ii. duxlt : 
 ♦married,' lit. 'led home or into matrimony,' sc. aomum or in 
 matrimonium. Qui cum : * when ho ' ; to indicate more clearly 
 the connection with the preceding words, Latin constantly uses qui 
 fpr hie or is (V. 172). parentlbns : dat. of refei"ence, 'found 
 'approval in the eyes gf (V..80, 6, ii.). It is also explained as 
 dat. of the agent, 'was approved by ' (V. 80, d). 
 
 3. Qnae : 'this' ; see note on Qui citm, preceding section, jw 
 iHfUfPH^ t : "^ judicaviMMfit (TIT. 66. a), totnin : adj.. 'wholly.' 
 
 f.<., contiimeliftm, subject of jToAe. Mrvlen»: *deTOtiiig 
 
PART IV.— NOTES ON THEMISTOCLES. 
 
 231 
 
 ,h 
 
 himself Jndiolls prlvatls: either (a) * private arbitrations ' as 
 opposed to ordinary law-suits, or, perhaps better, (6) «law^suits.* 
 
 cases in the courts,' where private interests only are concerned 
 as opposed to contio populi, where affairs of state are discussed' 
 prodlbat: from prodeo.s major: "of unusual importance,' lit 
 
 of more consequence (than uSual)' (V. 98, vi.). opjig : pred. 
 
 rS^' Q • • \ ™°^^ "®"** construction would be quibtis (abl.) opus erat 
 (V. 99, 11.). . ■ 
 
 4. In rebus grerendls : gerundive construction (V, 119), «x- 
 'oogrltandig : i.e. {inrehis) excogitandis. Instantibns : 'the pres- 
 ent.' Notice the imperfect teniSes in this sentence and the 
 preceding one, to describe the course of conduct pursued by 
 Theraistoclesfora series of years (V. 180, 6). quotaoinm est: 
 the result of this was,' lit. 'from which (or whereby) it was 
 brought about, abl. of cause, ut . . . Ulnstraretur : a substan- 
 wve dause of result, formmg the subject of factum est (V. 31). 
 
 CHAP. 2. 
 
 "^-ti- *^*"®?**® '«* pnblloae : ' in (lit of) the management of 
 public affairs, gerundive construction with gradus (V. 11«). bello 
 
 I? Coroyraeo : this is a mistake, the war was with ^gina. Bello is 
 abl. of time (V. 130). ferooloi;em : pred. ace, goes wj^h praesenti 
 bello a,nd rehqiio tempore; *more higb-spintGd, not only in the war 
 which was then being waged, but for all time to come.' For case 
 of tempore see V. 131, i. 
 
 2. mettfUls : the silver mines at LauriunT, in the south-eastern 
 part of Attica. They were very valuable and belonged to the 
 btate. redlbat: 'was derived,' «came in.' lar^itione ma«l- 
 stratuum: 'distribution made by the magistrates' out of the 
 public treasury, maslstrataam : subjective gen. (V. 84). at 
 • '• •.,»«**«««»•«*«»»• : substantive clause of purpose, object of per- 
 awutt{Y. «7), trans, by ac*tW infinitive with 'to.' 
 
 ^l<u**°1^' ^** *"<^ecedent,is cioasw. marltlltios praedonea • 
 another historical error, oonsectando : see V. 114, d. In qi|o • 
 by this means,' lit. 'in which (proceeding).' cum . . . titm : 
 both . , . and.' belli-: for case see V. 90. 
 
 4. Id : what is the antecedent? saluti, Oraeolae : for those 
 datives see V. 81. fuerit : subjunctive in indirect question (V, 
 39). eoflrnltnm : with what does this word agree ? Persloo ; the 
 second Persian war, in which Salamis was fought, 480 B.C. Nam 
 cam, etc. : this sentence is never finished, a parenthetical clause 
 comes m at hnjm enim, and a fresh start is made at Cnjxis de 
 adventu, the author forgetting to complete his original conatruo- 
 trion > n a g| m t o fftt ! ut^ual ly ferrtr tmir w / w ; . For UiS WUmTr^ 
 
 -\ 
 
 1»7. Beqae . . . neo ... quUquum : ' no OM » . . either . 
 
 or. 
 
232* 
 
 PRIMARY LATIK BOOK. 
 
 -''■* 
 
 ■-'i . 
 
 6. Jbnjns : * his,' navlam : gen. of characteristic in pred. (V. 
 
 t- 87, iii:). fnlt : *was composed.' fuernnt : the subject is exer- 
 
 citus, bat the verb is attracted to the number of th6 pred. lioun 
 
 mUlia. M^- ' ' *' ' . ' 
 
 ■ W- . - " ^ - » • »■< 
 
 6. advenfte: 'advance/ * approach,' ^ not 'arrival.' peti : 'to-' 
 be tho»objects of attack.' dloerentar :" observe the personal con- 
 
 , struction, which is the -usual one. For mood see V. 151. con- 
 snltam : supine in um, denoting purpose (V. 116). faoerent : 
 'what they were to do.' For subjunctive see V. 186, 1, 6, i. , 
 dollberantlt>ik'8 : 'to the inquirers,' the participle is here used> 
 
 , Bubsfeantively (V. 44, i, a), mnnlrent : '.thati they must (or 
 should) defend ' ; for mood see V. 186, 1, c, i. ' ^ 
 
 7. quovaleret: 'what it meant,' lit. ' in what direction it had 
 _. force.' perhnaslt : sc. iis. esse: for the construction with per- 
 ^sxiadeo, see V. 28, v., and note on section 2 above, ut . . . ' 
 
 oonferrent : substantive clause of purpose in apposition with coii- 
 . silium (V. 196). enm enim, etc. : ,' for that was the wooden wall 
 which .4;he god meant,' lit. 'for that was meant by th^ god. as the 
 wooden wall.' eiini : has for its antecedent naves, but is.attracted' 
 from eas to gender and number of murvm (V. 13, i.). slgulfl'* , 
 oarl : governedby notion of saying in permasit (V. 191). 
 
 8. Tall: TiGKlj = hoc. superl«;(s<»s : 'those which they had 
 before.' ^ sua omnia : 'all their belongings,' here including women 
 
 :.and children. Balamlna : a.Greek ace., bo Troezena (III. 50, d);' 
 ^for case see Vr-iSS. majorllms natu : 'elders,^' lit. 'greater in 
 
 respect of birth.' rellqaam oppldnm : 'the rest of the town'; 
 
 reliqnia, like mmihmy medius, etc., regularly agrees with its noun 
 
 (V»^86, iv. 6). 
 
 ■..-,- -'-■ '-- -'■ ■ '■':-■■ ■ ':-fc-'' CHAP. 3; ■■^■■"-' -'■■ '■■..'"•^ '"- ' M-- 
 
 "■* ' • ,' ■ 
 
 1. sHuJ us: 'his,' i.e., Themistocles's. His plan was to make the 
 war a nav^l one. dlmloari : impersonal infin., Subject of placebat 
 .(V. 66), Trans, 'they were rather in favor of having^ the battle ' 
 fought.' qui . . . ooouparent : 'to" seize' (V. 26). non pateren-^^ 
 ' — • *to puevent,' '-*■ '' -* ' 
 
 l«ir 
 
 . . lit. ? non sustlnnernnt : trans. ^ could not 
 
 withstand. omnes : can refer only to the Spartans and Thes- 
 . V plans, the others having been sent away. ' ^ 
 
 ' 2. olassis: this word governs Oraeciae and nahnmn. 'frarm. 
 * the common fleet of Greece, consisting of three huhdred ships.' 
 ap«d: 'off".' oontlnentem terram: 'the mainland.' quaerebat: 
 
 _ notice the tense. . „. _ ' „ _i„_' 
 
 3. pari proello : 'after a drawn battle,* lit. Hhe battle being 
 equal' (V. 49). adversarlornm : here>=/t<>«tmm. Ad/versa/rius is 
 ptoperly * an opponent in a court of justioft.' .«ipe rw^^ ; 
 
 mtperax 
 
 opponent 
 
 •doubled/, ««ailed around? iThis is 
 
 a 
 
 
 1 Sjf- 
 
m 
 
 .•^■ 
 
 PABT IV.—^^OTES ON THEMtSTOCLES. 283 
 
 '"f&^" IS"'"^^' r^*%<^- "7)- »■"» "P'««n'« 
 » luture peri. mdic. of the dirnef fV la^r i. :\ ujL,.^ j|. 
 
 »-^j««vyiv« aa vircuai.mairect nArration (V. 1771 and ren™ 
 'shouS^ha^'; iS""" "'^"^ '•''^' (I- 1«" *• "' ^^ Ht. 
 
 ciUum, an expression of ^eamig (V. 1^). ' 
 
 *over1Sain8t''^r!;!.r^^* ' «^^?°.*«« «^ «»»• 1. 4: '^exadversum r^ 
 over against, «n archaic and colloquial form found in cotoedy. ' 
 
 ; \V ■'CHAP. 4.- - ■ ■'■ ^ ■/•■, ■• ':'■' 
 
 •* ■ .. ' .■■,., 
 
 1. Thermoprlh expngnatls: 'after- caityinir ThermoOTl»' 
 
 h^itoWi Sie ..r,! ° ''f' Pr<«.*ritef>. »nd should not "b, 
 iinic^tea Xhe usual construction is od with the aco. n-iifl 
 aetendentlbn. : 'since it had nodefenders7iiu!(Y 46). *• 
 
 «n^^ation when the' nts7aXr«h?rhl\.^^^^^^ 
 
 ^rr/.'^e^'rtrtt^^inTE': 
 
 position oftliis word see V. 1^3» c,iii. re,em 
 l^^^'' '^ memisScles-^ ^T" 
 
 See V. 177, i. de 
 fldellMtmnm : for 
 : the Persian king. 
 in tnga: *on the 
 
 »te Tnarted ■'°*'3;'"*'"' ^ l""* "' 'W departed,' lit. 'should 
 
 indicative in direct speech (V iw M "'P"««"« '«tuto 
 
 2,?. above, e. .'LTa^^-g .' l^^-^l^hrj CthT °" "- 
 
 6fe 
 
Is 
 
 <.■ 
 
 284 
 
 PitlMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 / r~ 
 
 ijfdll: partitive gen. with mM (V. 86, i.). opportunlsskno : goes 
 with Zoco.' aif irasto juiarl : 'narrow part of the sea.' ^I^nerlt : 
 we should look loif an 'imperfect here,^but Nepos is fond of ^e 
 perfect, as being more vivid (V. 33, iii.), oousilio : * clpvemess,! 
 •'sagacity.' .-.,.,. , 
 
 .CHAP. 5. . ' 
 
 
 1. Hio : adverb, 'her6,' *in this instance.' mftl^ . 'unsuccess- 
 ifully.' tantas I'eliqalas oopiartun : *so many tro^s left,* lit.? 
 
 uS^ * with them,' abl. of means (V. 99, i.). eodei9 : Themistocles. 
 grada depnlaus : 'compelled to give way,' 'forced from his posi-^ 
 tion,' i.e., the position of «^vantage which his numbers gave" him. 
 ne : 'that,' ^lest' (V. 138). ^- oertlorem fecit: 'informeii,' followed 
 by Lnfin. o^ (V. 18, ii.). Id agl . .. . exoluderetur : trans, 'a 
 
 Elan was on foot* to destroy the bridge ^ . „ . and cut oflF his retreat, ' 
 t. ? ut . . . disBolveretur : substantive clause of purpose in 
 apposition with id. feoerat : for mood see V. 17B, i. In A8iam : 
 the preposition here connects t^o substantives, a construction 
 seldom met with in Latin (Y. 85, v. fn.). Idque ei persnastt : 
 *and convinced h^m of the truth of this,' lit.? (V.'65, i.). id: 
 cognate ace. (V. 72). .J ' l 
 
 2. qua . . ', reversaa est : trans, 'in less* than thirty Jays he 
 reached Asia by^he same route 'by which it haii taken him six 
 months to make the march (into Greece)..' qua . . . «adem : as 
 often in Latin, the rel. comes first ; vm (abl. of means) m^y be 
 supplied with each of these words, dlebas : not governed by 
 mtnttj, but abl. of 'time within which ' ; gtwim is omitted (V. ^8, 
 iv.). i^e versus est: the perfect of this verb is usually reverti. 
 ■e : subject of superatutn (esse) and comervatum (esse)* , 
 
 3. Earopae : dat., governed by sitccttbwtt (V. 78, v. c). Mara A 
 thonlp:, 'of (or at) Marathon.* Latin regularly uses a proper 
 adjective where English has a preposition and a pro^r noun<- 
 posslt : subjunctive in a relative clause of characteristic (y. 32), 
 tropaeo : lit. ' trophy,' here tfsod poetically for xtictoria. ' It is an 
 example of the figure metonymy, the sign being used for the thing 
 signined. pari mode : abl. of manner (V. 103). . nam»ro : abl. of 
 meane(j(V. 99). post homlnt/m mempriam ' 'within the memory 
 of man,* or perhaps 'of which history has left any record.' The 
 comparison in this clause is somewhat defective. The sentence 
 might be completed thus : Nam, [quo modo apiid Marathoyia parvQ 
 numero militnm mouctmiM exercitus devictu$ eat], pari modo, etc. 
 
 ^.^. . . ^ ^..... _ . ,;CHAP. e. - . ■::^- ■-^■ 
 
 1. bello : for case see V. 130. minor : 'less greats Phalerloo : 
 the harbor of Phalerum was the one first used by the Athenians. 
 
 bora or basins, Pireeus proper, Munychia and Zea. Plrael : 
 
 .•ifi». 
 

 PART IV.—NOTES ON THEMISTOCLES. 
 
 235 
 
 ^ ?^'^^^ (l^^^^^ ^-5-.'- perhaps loca- 
 
 in 
 
 ■ delr,?rn^ by ^^^tj^ J/' "1 -•"">":«•.»«»«, their 
 special risk to him»wlf • .^? . '""""P"» ■<■« perionlo-: 'at 
 «0 see V 85 iii ^^' *"• "f.»™»" »■• oeoompaniment. For 
 .Z.Te~4w. '°n '"■<"? """^?' Y""" «the antecedent? 
 ^Lus^TSi^t^ristio rT<19^°''*^'"«''^'.- • • "»•' Kel»«™ 
 
 - wl^t Th^/wiskerraZUr''^^' m'A'J"? different object from- 
 
 .-i^quam Inflrmlggimos : • as weak as possible' (Y 174. n 
 stpul : note the tense rV ]5^ «.,! ^ i"™"^® vv. 174, i.). 
 that beihg done' ?V lfi\ W' ^ ' * "• V^**»»'*»»* •• 'to forbid 
 were^prefenV ab ab^ite v'^^fir*"^^^ '*' ^^"8 *« *h««« 
 Forfo?.seeni\ttlV?T;efL^^^^ ^^^ ^•- 
 
 186)- or iMtPRrl nf f jf^ ^ ^.^ *""*, ''^^^«^*^ respectively (V. 
 
 i' 
 
 ': ■ CBAP. 7. 
 

 236 
 
 PRlMAtt¥ LATIN BOOK. 
 
 ,2. Cum: *\^iler^^^qnererentur : for mood see V. 151. nlhllo 
 mliiiis : 'all the same,' lit. 'the less by nothing * (V. 101). non 
 maltnm : ' but little. ' , mnnltionis : ' of the work of fortifica- 
 tion' (V. 86). superesse : 'remained unfinished.' Imperlam : 
 here =potestas,A.ef^ /civil jurisdiction,' and not the military com^ . 
 mand, which belohged to the Spartan ' kings, falsa ils esse 
 delata : ' that false reports kad been brought to th^m ' (V. 203, d). 
 aequam esse^/for infinitive see V. 191. lllos : subject of mU- 
 terCf of which viroa is the object, qulbus : dative (V. 55, iv.). 
 haberettir* explcurarent, retinerent : what forms would these ^ 
 verbs have respectively in direct speech ? (V. 32 ; 26; 186, 1, c). 
 obsldeip : ' as a hostage ' : pred. aitc. (Y. 1^, c). rotlnerent : 
 'let them detain.' 
 
 3.' Oestns est ei mos : 'his advice was followed.' el : dat. of 
 interest with force of possessive (V. 80, 6). praedlxit : ^prae- 
 ccpii, 'enjoined.' nt ne : 'not to,' 'that . . . not, ' for the usual 
 ti« (V. 28, vii. ). prlus : copnect closely with miam. esset re- 
 missus : for mood and tense see V. 156, a ; 187, o, i , 
 
 4. sena^bm : the ^Senate at Sparta was called the 'GerusiaJ/ 
 and was composed of thirty members, including the two kings. 
 They held office for life, but had no great influence, ilberrime 
 professus est : *mad(§!a clean breast of the matter,' 'avowed his 
 trickery with the Utmost frankness.' boo: 'his,' i.e., Themisto- 
 des's. quod: has for its antecedent the clause deos . . . saepsisse. 
 In the English translation of this sentence the antecedent clause 
 
 ■ yrill come first ; 'they had enclosed, etc., a thing which, etc.' quo 
 faolllns: see V. 28, iii. In eo: 'therein,' 'in so doing'; eo is 
 not the antecedent of quod, esset : subjunctive in subordinate 
 clausenn indirect narration, shoeing that the clause is part of the 
 
 'speech of Themistocles (V. 175). ' ' » v . 
 
 5. Nam .' . . barbarls : either (a) ' their city was a rampart 
 thrown up in the way of the barbarians, ' or better, (6) ' their city 
 "was opposed to the barbarians as a bulwark.' If (b) is the proper 
 reisdering, then oppositum is attracted from the gender of whem 
 to that of propugnacidum. apud : 'in the neighborhood of.' 
 Jtfarathon was twenty-five miles from Athens, regias : ' of the 
 (Persian) king.' feclsse naufrasinm : 'had suffered defeat.' 
 The expression is used figuratively, as the battle of Marathon 
 
 as fought on land. Por infin. fecisse, see on aequum esse in sec- 
 n 2 above. 
 
 6. qui,.'. . Intuorentnr: 'inasmuch as' they were regarding,' 
 relative clause* expressing cause. The present subjunctive woiild 
 be used in the direct speech (V. 171). Ipsorum : indirect reflexive, 
 referring to a subject not that of the principal verb, universao : 
 
 *a8a whole.' miwsrant rTor iMicative see T. 175,17 soT JfefBT- 
 ring to the subject of the principal verb, i.e., Themistocles. 
 
 ktB 
 
PART IV.—NOTES ON" THEMISTOCLES. 
 
 237 
 
 remttterent: * let them (or they must) send back, ' for mood see 
 ^Jiop, 1, c. cum : for. essent reoepturi : ' would get (them) 
 
 '• *'■ CHAP. 8. - 
 
 feij*!*""* • ?;^f ^^*^^^ een. (V. 84). enndem timorem : they 
 IT^^, ! '"''"^'^ ^^''''™^ ^^'^ powerful, and establish himself as a 
 r!^Jt?'^f**x?rl"''*™ *."?'"«"*= 'by ostracism,' lit. «votes of the 
 poteherds When an Athenian citizen became so powerful that he 
 was considered a danger to the safety of the state, he might be 
 
 InTa'^?'^^ ' *?>* ^'' ^"^'^^^ ^«' * *«^"^ «^ <^ years wShou? 
 loss of citizenship or properf^y. The votes of the citizens were 
 given in on shells or small potsherds (ostraka), and six thousand 
 votes given against a nian ensured his banishment. Argo* : ace 
 of limit of motion (V. 125). babltatnm: «to reside,' the suprne ' 
 expressing purpose (V. 116). _ , x ue, i;ne supine, 
 
 his^' XS^a '*'"" dl«nltate : < in gr^ honor. ' «bsentem : ' in' 
 nis absence. acousarent : subjunctive of purpose (V. 26). 
 feclgset : subjunctive in virtual indirect narration The accusa- 
 this oT^L '"^ ^'* f *^" ""^'^^^ (^- 177). Hoc crimlhe : 'on 
 gen see V 91, c *^^°™P^°^«^«^<^ (^' ^^)- Prodltlonls : for 
 
 «1,LJ*U ''^^®'*' *"*.?"! • P.'*®^' ^°' «**»• videbat : the indicative , 
 shows the reason IS that given by Nepos (V. 146). Corovram • ^V 
 for case see V 125. propter nJ. «on hisamjunt.' li;7I= the 
 Corcyreans, indirect object ^of indicereni. MoTossam : = Molos- 
 aorum, see III. 49, b. e't : dat. of possessor (V. 80, e). 
 
 xyuJl fvTft^""V **^ *^^ *^"^' *»"«= introduces clause of 
 
 pu^SQ (V. 28, m.) majore rellglone : *by a stronger obliga- 
 
 tion. reoeptam: 'vrhenieoeived,' = cum receptus esset (V. 43). 
 
 . «««rlmonla: 'veneration.' m fldem : 'under his protection.' 
 
 translate freely « and he kept his word. ' y 
 
 r?ifi:.„*""™ • **l*^o"g5,v'i. ®^P®"*'«'**"= * «demand for hislstra-" 
 ditlon was made.' What is the subject of expo>^eretnr ? -^: 
 
 m^tv' /v'Vq^'*'^* • ' ™««d /f V. 27. «ibl : «for his own 
 
 ' Tv 1 Qi ^ : ^' *"* * K^^e™^^ by notion of ♦ saying, ' in monuit 
 
 ^ . ii* **"* P'?.P*»<1«»«: *f^ near (Athens).' tato earn ver- 
 
 ESli^^^^'fi^-? *^ ^" ^"u ^^^^*' . The introductory «for^Vthe 
 ^nfehsh infinitive clause has no equivalent in Latin (Y. 110, fn.) 
 
288 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 
 the ship, perrenlsset : Themisk>cles's thought would be ai eo 
 pervenero (V. 187, b, i.). slbl esse perenndnm : 'that he must 
 perish.' gibi:'dat. of apparent agent (V. 80, d). esse pere- 
 nndam : Used impersonally (Y. 120, ii.). quia sit aperlt : 
 'reveals his identity.' sit: subjunctive in indirect question (V. 
 35 ; 37). malta pollioens : ' making many promises. ' midta is 
 a cognate ace. (V. 72) ; see also V. 203, d. oonservasset : in virtual 
 indirect narration, representing fut. perf. indie, of direct (V. 177). 
 
 7. olarissiml virl : * for so distinguished a man,' objective gen.' 
 (V. 85). dienf nootemqne t 'a day and a night.' neqae . . . 
 qnemqaam : 'and ... no one.' ezponlt : historical present (Y. 
 179, c). oal : i.e., the captain, gratlam rettallt : 'bestowed a 
 ''rewarded.' * /^ ,»• 
 
 recompense, 
 
 CHAP. 0. 
 
 1. Ita : 'as follows.' Xerxe regrnante : 'it was in the reign 
 of Xerxes that, ' see Y. 205, a. Xerxes reigned from 485 to 465 B.^. 
 et . . . et 
 102). de lig 
 
 'both . . .and.' aetate : 'in point of time' (Y. 
 ' of those,' i.e.y he was nearest to the times of which 
 
 he wrote, .fult : ''belonged to.' antem : 'now,' indicating tran- 
 sition. Artaxerxen : surnamed Longimanus ; for form of ace. see 
 III. 48, d. atque : 'and also.' his verbis: 'couched in these 
 terms,' a peculiar example of the abl. of characteristic (Y. 105); it 
 modifies episttUam. 
 
 2) Themistooles : for case see Y. 10, ii. Oraioram : partitive 
 gen. vrith qui. domam : ' house '=' family.' 
 
 3. Idem: 'but I also,' 'I however,' introducing a. contrast. 
 mnlto pinra : ' many more,' lit ? (Y. 101). ipse : understand esse 
 coepi. in tuto : ' in a position of safety;' proelio . . . facto : 
 'after the battle,' lit. ? litteris : ' by a letter,' of. the meaning of 
 litteris in eh. 10, 1. littera in the sing, means a letter of the alpha- 
 bet, feoerat ; see on eh. 5, 1, above, oironmiretar : subject is 
 ipse, i.e. Xerxes, understood, qao nantio : 'and by this mes- 
 sage,' abl. of means, perioalo : abl. of separation (Y. 93). 
 
 4. a : 'from,' 'out of.' Qaam si ero adeptas : 'and if I win 
 it'; for tense see Y. 62. babebls : 'will find,' 'will have in.' 
 iii^ : Xerxes.- de : 'with regard to.' qnas: in the best writers 
 de quibusy and not the direct object, would be used with coUoq;tii. 
 annnom -tempns : 'a year's time.' des : from do, tor mood see 
 Y.'27. - eoqae transaoto : 'and when this time has elapsed.' 
 For future time denoted by perfect participle see Y. 41. venire : 
 subjeet is me, understood from mihi (Y. 18, x.). 
 
 CHAP. 10. 
 
 nUvdinem. Tirum , 
 
 - Th e g e n. ig-go v o med b y mvimi mag- 
 oonciliari : for construction see Y, 21. 
 
PART IV.— NOTES ON THEMISTOOLES. 
 
 239 
 
 venlam 4edlt : 'complied with his request/ 'granted the favor 
 sought' iitterl,: 'literature. ' c/. th7meani„| of^is woS in 
 en y, d. It here refers to reading, serm<mi to speaking, I*ersian. 
 qnlbiw: instrumental abl. (V. 99); translate 'In which.' adeo 
 erndltus est: 'he became so well versed.' dloatnr • nersonal 
 construction (V. 18, vii.). but trans, 'it is said that h"*eS The 
 present tenle indicates a result continuing to the writer's time 
 SrA^atic'*G?'k"* ' *" ^^"^'^^^^ exaggeration, unless he is referring 
 
 f»,!'* n "M®® °''''^- ^' ?• 8rr»«Mimumq„e lUud : 'and 
 the following the most acceptable,' more freely, 'of which the fol- 
 lowmg was the most welcome of all.' Uludis in the same con- 
 struction as mvlta^nd is explained by the infin. clause ilium 
 oppressururrpJfY. 195). utl : 'foUow,' 'adopt.' vellet «^pre^ 
 ' Z^Z^ ^^'^ra^ ^^""^ speech these verbs would be wZes and 
 I m^mea{Ye^ -Ulam : *.e., Artaxerxes. donatas : for con 
 structions with dmio see V. 78. vi. Aslam : Asia Minor. Ma«- 
 nerfae : for case see V. 127, i. slbi : dat. of reference here 
 nearly = possessive 'hi8'(V. 80, 6, i.). * 
 
 3. donarat : for the form see HI. 66, a. Wg quldem verbis • 
 
 m^t ?V Zl """0% "" 'T'^^ *H" *^"^«'' *^^- «f ^oom^nil 
 ment (V. 103) gmdem emphasizes the word it foUows. «uae • 
 
 the antecedent is urbem. praeberet : representing praebe<S in a 
 
 rel. clause of purpose; so mrmzt and hdeatCV.m redtbanf 
 
 indicative because in an explanatory note of the author. For force 
 
 of the tense see V. 180, 6. ad nostram memorlam : 'to our 
 
 «r- fhrL'i*''J5™ ; -^"^^f^y^ * ^""^•' «PPW«m: Magnesia. 
 quo . tne antecedent is sepulct-um. "^ 
 
 4. cnjas: 'his.' sorlptam est: best turned by the active 
 many writers vary in their accounts' (V. 56). nos • 'I^the 
 
 ^editorial we,' which is commoner in Utin than in EnSish 
 eundem: agrees mth JThtccydidem, trans, 'on this point also ' 
 
 Seath""::'^'^^ ""?T.*^y; . ™"''»*» mortunm : 'died a natural 
 aeatn. neque negat : 'hut does not deny, "though he admits ' 
 sumpslsse : fpr^ construction see V. 18. ii. ^„™ : '^because. '.e 
 ... po88e. of Ijemg able.' quae :' what, ' for ea attoe ««l- 
 lloltus esset : would be pollicitus sum in the mind of TTSstodes" 
 %t^L^l%: ^"-*- ^-* --y ^ briefly tranrtet^hS 
 
 rJ^J***™; • • ?®™,**.'**„® prodidlt: «he also has left it on 
 record, 'informed us,' lit.? ossa . . . «epnlta (esse)- the direct 
 object of prodm. leglbus : 'by law/ abl. of accoi^niment^L 
 accordance with the kws.' rather than abl. of m^^ eokoe^ 
 ^^^^'l^^J^ «^««^a tMl mhj.! lH ctiveai i L virtual JndJgeot 
 
 nftj tq wt- 
 
 if"SrXe°ffi«*«? "^" • ' ^T.!? ^y Th»«y<iides. The subject 
 Pt eoneed^etur la ut ossa ejus tn Attica sepdirentm- understood. 
 
240 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 I--. 
 
 NOTES ON ARISTIDES. 
 
 CHRONOLOGICAJi TABLE. 
 
 Aristides commands his tribe at Marathon. B.C. 490 
 
 Is Archon Eponymus 
 
 Is ostracized . . . , . 
 
 Returns to fight at Salamis it. , 
 
 Is recalled from banishment , 
 
 Acts as general at Plat{«a . . , 
 Organizes the Athenian confederaoy^T 
 
 x-'ies • a -• •■• . . 
 
 It 
 If 
 II 
 II 
 
 M 
 M 
 11 
 
 '* 
 
 489 
 483 
 
 480 
 480 
 479 
 
 477 
 468 (?) 
 
 AlVl. 
 
 1. aeqnalis : 'contemporary.' Thenilstooll : gen. or dat., 
 according &skiequalis is noun or adjective. For form see III. 60, 
 d. obtreotarant inter se : 'proved (or became) rivals.' For the 
 fprm of obtrectarunt see III. 66, a. liiter se : Latin has no con- 
 venient form for ' each other ' (III. 62, e). 
 
 2. In his : 'in the case of these men.' qaanto : abl. of differ- 
 ence, modifying the comparative notion in qnteataret. antestaret : 
 for mood see v . 35 ; for tense see V. 36, fn. 1, 6. innboentiae: 
 f6r case see V. 78, v. c. unus : * aloii^,'" aadterlmns : ' have 
 heard of,' subjunctive in a restrictive rela|;ive clause of character- 
 istic (V. 32, ii.). For form of andierifrtm^e III. 66, a. sit 
 appellatns : ' has been called ' ; the perfe^TO^^fcending down to 
 the writer's time, testula : referring to the "^^0 of ostracism. 
 See note on Themistocles, ch. 8, T. exgllio f ^1. of means. 
 annornm : for gen. see V. 87. Translate 'was condemned to ienj 
 years' exile.' > 1 / 
 
 3. Intellegreret : *felt.' oedens : 'as he was retiring/ t.e/, 
 going away from the place where the votes were being cast. 
 animadvertlsset : distinguish force of tense from that of intd- 
 legeret. qnendam : from qiiidam. ut . . . pelleretar : the 
 object of scrihentem.^ For mood of peUeretur see V. 28, v. Plu- 
 tarch's version has more point; that an illiterate voter asked a 
 bystander to w«ite Aristides' name on hia shell. The bystander 
 was Aristides lymself, who, on asking the man what harm AristideS 
 had done him, was told that he was simply tired of hearing him 
 called 'The Just.' bur: 'that,' lit.? dnoeretur : 'should be 
 thought,' aubjaactive, Boi in-^^n-ilidireGt^quesfeiot 
 
 tive clause of charfKJterisUc (V. 32). 
 
 r-^M^'* 
 
PART IV. — NOTES ON ARISTIDEsi 
 
 241 
 
 1. Inte 
 pngnae : 
 
 expect the i.. 
 time (V.'lSa, 
 Athens ten 
 apnd : * near 
 
 4. laboraBset : for mood see V. 175 ; for form, III. 66, a. Th^ 
 Clause quod . . . laborasaet forms the snbject of diacere (V. 198) 
 appellaretur : for mood see V. 24. < 
 
 ^ 5. lesrltlmam: 'legal.' pertnllt : what is the force of per 
 here? poatquam : 'as soon as.' In . . . .desoendlt : 'came 
 down upon,' t.e., from the interior of Asia, sexto fere : 'about 
 the sixth,' really the fourth, as he was banished in 483, and' 
 returned m 480 B.C. quam : = postqxiam, as often, the omission 
 here bemg probably partly due to the presence of postquam in the 
 precednig line, although Nepos is not always so particular, «rat 
 expnlsus: PjjJ^^ct, a definite interval Ijeing specified (V. 152, 
 
 CHAP. ,2. . _ ■ V '■■■ ■.,■" 
 
 ;ith the Athenian fleet, but as a free-lance. 
 j^je V. 78, v.^ c. llbei<aretnr : We should 
 ire, as the clause denotes tUMq priority of 
 *dem^ 'also.' praetor: 'a general.' At 
 
 ere chosen every year, one from each tribe, 
 goes with /Ms»ts also. ■ . ■ ' ^,^ 
 
 2. hojas: i.e., Aristides. re mllltarl : *war.' factum- a 
 noun^here.' allnd . ; . quam :,« except, ' lit. 'other thkn.' 
 hnJiJa Imperil memorla : 'record of this, commaifd,' for the 
 deeds performed d^iring the command, res gestae in imperio. Jus- 
 ^ftiae, aequltatls, Innpoontlao : depend on Uhistria facta (un- 
 «ietstood with multa), but translate freely 'many instances of ' 
 quod: conjunction, 'that,' 'the fact that.' The subject of fac- 
 tum est 18 the result clause ut . . . Wan^erretur (V. 197). ^«pm- 
 muni : ' united, ' ' joint. ' quo duoe : abl. absolute (V. 49), toms. 
 
 under whose leadership.' erat fugratus : note mood, summa 
 Imperil maritimi: ' leaderahi^jtoL naval matters. ' See note on 
 Ihemistocles, ch. 4, 2. duc^^e.^f., Eurybiades at Salamis, 
 i:'au8anias at Platsea, Leotychides at Mycale. 
 
 3. intemperantla: 'arrogance' (V.r96). dvltates : i.e., the 
 maritime states engaged in the war, except the Peloponnesians 
 hos duces sibl: ' these (as) their leaders,' dwces is in predicative 
 agreement with hos (V. 69, v. ). slbl : for cape see V. 80, 6, i. 
 
 ■■■ CHAP. 3. ,'-■'■ 
 
 ,—*• flf^® * ^®^ y* 28, iii. conarentur : virtual indirect discourse 
 ( V . 177). quantum pecuniae : ' how much money,' lit. ? (V. 86, 
 h • \^^f^^^' ^^^^ qnisque. daret : 'should give' (V. 186, 1, 
 o, li). The clause quantum . . . £aret is governed by constitueret. 
 quadrlngrena et sexaflrena : for the distributives see III. 61, e. 
 D e lum ; race, owing ta idea^f^ — '^ — jml. . .. 
 
 ed to gender of aerarium(V. 13, i.) 
 16 
 
 coUata^ 
 bliierunt ; 
 
 fa : iSttrac6-~ 
 'determined,' 
 
 ^>#, 
 
^^ 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 242 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK, 
 
 K 
 
 *appoii}ted. ' Qaae omnlg peounla : i.e., the accumulated amount. 
 postero tempore : ' at a later date. ' * 
 
 2. Hlc : Aristides. qua . .\ abstlnenttu : alST. of chkracter- 
 istic; freely, «how disinterested he was' (V. 105, i.). fnerlt : 
 subjunctive in indir. question governed by est indicium which is 
 equivalent to a transitive verb, 'shows.' See V. 18, ii. quod: 
 • the fact that ' ; qrtod decessit is a noun clause subject of est indicium 
 understood, cum: concessive 'although' (J. 66, a), tantls 
 rebus: 'such immense resources.** For case see V. 78, v. c. 
 praefnis^et: 'had cqntrolled,' 'administered,' qui efferreftur • 
 'the therewithal to bury him,' lit. '(that) wherewith he might 
 be buried., qui : abl. case (III. 64, a), efferretur : final sub^ 
 junctjVTB (V. 26). rellquerlt : for tense see V. 33, iii. 
 
 3. publico: • at the expense ofithe state.' do oommuni ... 
 oollooarentur : ' were married off by dowries being provided from 
 thejpjjfolic treasury.' dbfibus datls : abl. absolute. The dos was 
 a^ry necessary considei'atioh in arranging an Athenian marriage. 
 post annum quartum quam : 'three years after, '= anno miarto 
 postquam; po9t coming before anno quarto is felt to have the force 
 of a preposition, and governs the "ace. Observe that the Romans 
 in reckoning from one date to another counted in both extremes, 
 where we include but one. erat expulsus : for tense see last 
 note on ch. 1, 5^ above. 
 
 \ 
 
 NOTES ON HANNIBAL. 
 
 , ' ' OHRONOLOaiCAL TABLE. 
 
 V Hannibal is bom ... 
 
 fi Is talf en to Spain . . . . 
 
 Becomes commander-in-chief 
 
 Lays siege to Sagi^tum J'. , 
 
 Crosses the Alps . ,. . 
 
 Wins a victory^t Trasymene . 
 
 Ct-ushes the Roma^is at CanheB . 
 
 Withdraws to Africa . * ; . 
 
 Is defeated at Zama . . » . 
 
 Qo0 to the Court of Antiochufl 
 
 Commits suicide 
 
 s 
 
 
 B.C. 
 
 II 
 
 » 
 
 ri 
 II 
 11 
 
 #:^ 
 
 11 
 
 II 
 
 247 
 
 238 
 
 221 
 
 219 
 
 218 
 
 217 
 
 216 
 
 203^ 
 
 202 
 
 103 
 
 183 (?) 
 
 ■*;^c. 
 
 A ^ ^ 
 
 CHAP. 1. 
 
 ?:aZ*rw*^.;jllf^"'^^'' ^^" ^ ^^^ ^ ^"irk-^-f v-f^ ^ thing 
 wmo^- (V. 17dr«). gpit . . . aaperartt: a substHutiye clause of 
 
 4 
 
 %■ 
 
PART IV.— NOTES ON HANNIBAL. 
 
 243 
 
 
 result, subject of verum est, for the regular ace. and inf. (V 197 
 fn.). tanto . . quanto:,'as much as' (V. IQi).- anteoedat: 
 formood see V. 176. . .^\ . ,^ 
 
 2. «o: i.e., populo ifomano. dtsoeMlt superior : 'came off 
 victor. Qaod nisi: «and if«. . . not,' 'unless, then.' Quod • 
 a conjunction here, but originally a rel. pronoun, mea^iiHifewith. 
 respect to which. ' olvlum : subjective gen. : so multimimj see V. 
 84. Tldetur: sc. Hannibal as subject» Latin prefers the per- 
 sonal construction (V. 18^ vii.). Translate «it seems that he ' 
 potulsse: represents potuU (V. 64,^.). Translate «could (or 
 might) have conquered. ' il* 
 
 3. Velut ~^T . paternum : Hhe Ha^^red inhei^ed froiri his siVe * 
 So ' V ^***^^®^ o^ his father, left as it were by inheritance' (Y 
 7?u'^V' , J-L^r^dUate : abl. of manner, ut . . . deposuerlt: 
 that he laid it aside only with his life,' lit. (somewhat illogicallv) 
 that he laid down his life before belaid that aside. ' deposuerlt • 
 this verb, by a figure called zejjgma, is used with both animam and 
 Mt (sc. odinm\ in a slightly different sense. For tense see V. 33 
 "?• ,. ^"* quldem : ' since (in fact) he. ' pulsus esset, indlirerot : 
 distinguish these tenses. For mood, see V. 65, a. opum • for 
 case see V. 91, /. destlterlt : subj. in a causal rel. clause (V. 
 171). animo : * in his heart. ' ' . ; 
 
 ■' ■ -•. . ■. CHAP. a. '''■'/'-■-..:,."'■'■'''-.:- 
 
 1. ut omlttom : «to say nothing of.' PhiUppnm : PhUip V.,. 
 king of Macedon. absens : 'without meeting him in pereon ' 
 Hannibal neyer^saw the king, but arranged an alliance with him 
 by ambassadors ia B.C. 216. Antloohus : the Gr^t, king of 
 Syria, fnlt : we should expect Nam Antiochum, qui potentissimtis 
 fmt, incemiit. bellandl : obj. gen. rubro marl : by Red Sea 
 th« Greeks meant also the Persian Gulf and the Indian Ocean. 
 arm» .- ^ . inferre Itallae : ' to carry the war into Italy.' 
 
 2. oonfiUls oiandestlnls : ' by intrigues, ' lit. 'secret communi- 
 cations, regl: dat. of reference, 'in the eyes of the kini? ' 
 adduoerent : ^bjunctive of purpose after darent operam. tam- 
 qua,m: » on the ground that,' lit. 'just as if,' with comtpiuw (V. 
 ,44, HI.), oorruptum : sc. eim (i.e,, Hannibalem), subject of aen- 
 ttfy. alia atquo antea aentire : * held different views from* 
 formerly' (V. 168, i^. the infinitive depends on the idea of 
 thinking in siutpi^.u,nem (V. 191). feolssent. comperUset, vldl.- 
 ■et J with CMm, 1. 16. Megrrefari : 'was being excluded.' 
 
 . 3. tempore dato: 'when opportunity offered.' tnqult : repeafc- 
 ^^ l\^^^-i^^ K^^^^^^^y "^"" pHrentUotically as here, pueraio 
 .iiw 1 abl. absolute, mjidt» . . . nato t "To? T was not more than 
 nme years of age ' ; for ^dpote see V. 44, iil »nno. : for case see 
 
244 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 i»y 
 
 M 
 
 i^' 
 
 Jovl : I.e., to Baal, 
 
 V . 129 and 98, iv. nato : agrees with me. 
 the great divinity of t^ie Carthaginians. 
 
 /AT^iKof ^®*®'***'*' * ^^^ ^®^^ writers would use the'pres. ind. here 
 (V 15d). vellemne : see V. 36, i. dubitaret : ' to hesitate ' (V. 
 27). dederls : for tense see V. 62. earn : obj. of tenentem, which 
 agrees with me. numqaam : emphatic position, in amloltla 
 . . 4 fore: 'befriends.' fore: see V. 17. 
 
 qaln 
 
 5. nemini .V. . quin :>'#io one should doubt thaib. ,,„.„ 
 fntarns : substantive clause, subject of deheat (V. 139, b). re- 
 llquo tempore: * for the rest of my life' (V. 131, i.). eadem 
 see V. 105, i. i ...,.-':■- ■ ...':': .- ./ - ^ 
 
 meiite 
 
 6. quid 
 
 .wards,' etc., 
 
 . cosrltabls: *liave any friendly intentions to- 
 
 ^ you will act not unwisely in concealing them from me,' lit. ? (V,. 
 184, 1.). m© : ace. after celaris, the ace. of the thing (id) boiiri 
 understood (V. 69» vi.). , celarU i^^elaveris. in eo: = m bello 
 para)ido. mo prinolpem posuerls : 'put me in the chief place ' 
 
 ''■ ■'■^'>- ■■■■;; .1^.,. ■■>■"■ 
 
 .^/V 'y--''r'''-:' %■■■. ■ .;■ CHAP. 3. ,; / -^ ' . 
 
 ^1. qua dIxImnR : freely' ' which I have mentioneJ^ ; complete 
 * the sentence thus, qiia (aetate) diximm (eum profectnm esse) 
 
 obltnm : in 229 B.C. praefuit : ' was placed in comn^^nd of ' 
 ' IV ^'\ o '^PPO^n^nient- Carthafirlnem : see on Delum, Aris- 
 
 tides, «J)u 3, 1. delatum: * when reported ' (V. 43). ^ 
 
 2. annla : after minor (V. 98) ; with natns, the ace. as in ch. 2, 
 3, 18 usual, trlennio : see V. 131. Sa«rantum : a' corruption of 
 the Greek Zacynthus (Zante), now Murviedro, a corruption of mun 
 veteres. foederatam oivltatem : ' a city.in «Uiance (with Rome).' 
 Notice the absence of connectives > (asyncfeiotO in this sentence, 
 and, indeed, m the whole chapter. 
 
 8. Ex hli: «of these'; see V. 80, ill. omntbttt J setltjely dor 
 rect, as many M the Gauls were friendly. «1.1 vlotum : • without 
 having first delated him,' lit. ? (V. 44, iii.). ^ ., e^ / v, 
 % , ~ '■"■ ■■ "'" " '■■■■ 
 
 4. Heroalem : referring to the story that Hercules brought the 
 oxen of the triple-lKxiiod monster Geryon from some distant island 
 111 the west, o»Ver the Pyrenees and the Alps, quo facto : ' from 
 ^ which exploit,' causal abl. The name was really of local origin. 
 conantes ;. « when (or who were) endeavoring.' trannltu : see V 
 93. looa: 'district,' 'qountry.^ n^nnilt : 'built,' 'constructed.' 
 vf * • •; Po""»*: substantive clause of result, object of effecit: 
 trans. *made it possible for.' oa . . . qua : '(there) . . . where ' 
 
 Jtctticfr th<^^}oHtyaHfe b u Lw uu u ekpfumfita aud anw i nmno[ oma^ 
 
 Wifi 
 
 and inermisy ire and repere. 
 
 *. 'm^ ' 
 
 t 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 m 
 
f 
 
 PABT IV.^NOTES ON HANNIBAL. 
 
 245 
 
 • CHAP. 4. ■ " ■ 
 
 1. Oonfllxerat, pepalerat : pluperfect because Nepoa looks 
 . forward to the more important action denoted by decemU. ^aoU 
 
 pione : father of the great Scipio. Scipio was really not present . 
 at this skirmish. Clastldll : locative (V. 127, i,), 
 
 2. Tertlo : *a third time,' adv. utrosqae : for ,the usual 
 , ntrumque. Indj : * after that.', peten«|i < on his way towards.' 
 
 3. Hoc itlnere : see V. 130. #Aextro : sc. ocvlo. According to 
 Livy he lost She eye altogether, oironmventnm ocoldlt : best 
 translated by two co-ordinate verbs, 'surrounded and killed,' lit.? 
 (V. 43). post : adv. booapautem : * while (ar who was) attempt- 
 ing to seize.' 3S" 
 
 4. Hulo : from hye'to ch. 5,4^, there is great confusion in the 
 order of events, ei : for dat. see V. 62. atrinsqne : 'of both.' 
 proello : the battle of Cannae, the most signal defeat ev6r sus- 
 tained by tl|e ]^oman arms.^ Panlam^: i.e., L. Aemilium Pavium. 
 
 :"■-■. <, : ' ■ / ,■• ■■ V ' , CtBlAP, U» '" \ 
 
 1. pngna !T^^es6nts a cognate accusative in the active, pro- 
 feotns est : it wa*1teally not untili five years later, nallo rest- 
 ate nte : 'without anyone offering resistance,' lit.? habnlsset. 
 reverteretur : distinguish the tenses. 
 
 2. Hlo : adverb, exeroltns : ' to his army, ' objective gen. See 
 y. 86. oallldlsslmo Imperatori : 'shrewd commander as he was,' 
 lit.? dedit verba: a colloquial expression, 'fooled,' 'tricked,' 
 lit. ' gave words (only). '^ obdaota noote : 'under cover of night,' 
 
 viit."? dellfcata Incendit : 'he fastened . . . and set fire to' (V, 
 43). ejus irenerls: 'thcked out in this fashion,' or 'of thes^.^, 
 lit.? dlspalatam Itnmlstt : 'Jet loose to straggle in all direction^i^ 
 •sent straggling *bff' (V. 44,*^ii.). Quo . . . vlsu : 'by the un- 
 expected appearance of this &ifO}ir or 'by causing this unexpected 
 Bight to be presented to them,' abl. absolute, terrorem Injeoit 
 exeroltal: s^e V. 78, v. c, <P v 
 
 3. rem ireatam : 'exploit.' Ita : 'so very.' mafflstram «qnl- 
 tnm: 'master of the horse.' |P*hi8 officer was usually next in 
 command to the Dictator, pari ao diotatorem Imperlo : ' with 
 an authority equal to that of the Dictator' (V. 105). dlotatorem : 
 attracted to the case of magistnim. dol«r . . . fmravlt : 'lured 
 into an engageinont and routed.' Iterum eonsnleni : for 6w con- 
 sidem; 'who had been twice consul,' lit? absens : 'though hsi , 
 himself was not there.' pawl niodo : i.e., by an ambuscade. 
 
 4. Lionirain est: see V. 136, a, i. siRtts : predica£e"adjoctive. 
 Olfltiun: *BtAt6ac^t:i' rvdwtingUtquamdiu . . . poaiiiL posslt : 
 
 « 
 
N»^ . V 
 
 ^46 
 
 .i>ftIMARY LATIN 
 
 V 
 
 ^ 
 
 If ' .. 
 
 ^p 
 
 .see V. 32. restltit: «successfully apposed.' ,in oAinpd' 'in 
 
 V J ^. .deftengjim : see V. 116. Solpionem : th« Neatest of * the 
 Scipios, afterwards-called Africanus - greatest. or the 
 
 On!r.*«ilTo« •••• • f««""«"«>«^«-'abl. absdute, denoting caused 
 Quo see V 28 m. valentlor : .-with stronger forces. ' l« ool- 
 loqalam, etc. : a conference was agreed on : the terms wet- p nnf 
 agreed upon/ or freely, Hhey could n6t comedo tem^^^^^ 
 
 perslna uL V''^"^ '^? change from th*. impersonal to the 
 pergonal use oi conyemo, unless, as is possible, the first clause 
 means ' he met him in conference ' (V. 127, iii.). ^«»"86 
 
 r«^^^**lw **""*' ' after that^wasdtie.' Inoredlblle dl«;tu ; ' 
 
 JfllL §1 • ^^'"^ V; • ■P^^^^^»^- ^or iictu, see V. 117. The feat 
 18 absurdly impossible. ^ . - • *:*" 
 
 i«f>»^vT*-*-£V ^«>^,f nder sei III. 48, ci aole : 'the field.' 
 Ih^' i^-'^t^8tead of being crushed by the Numidians, he crushed 
 them, Hadrumeti :. locative, 
 
 F , CHAP. T. ■ ■ -*^\. ■■■ •,^.~ ' 
 
 ' l- ^»»»»^ 'affchough.' ocoupatug : 'adj\|ihilo : see Y. 101. 
 «ewit: what IS the force of the. tense? (V\ 182, 6.) usque «d 
 date "^*"""*^' • "^*"^" ^^'^ t^« consulship of,' merely to mark the 
 
 trat;«^ ;,' .' ^»»;;*'»;"*«« •. aW. absolute, 'under thero magis- 
 ?rrl J • *■*•' ^^ Carthaginians ; secum might have been used 
 (as mos for eomm, h 14), since the iegati represented the cTr 
 thaginians. feol»,ent : for the subjunctive Bee V. 147, ii. c-o/- 
 theRomans. Fregelli. : see V. m. e..ent, redd^reutur : see 
 
 3. Hia : indirect object of responmm est Trans * this answi»^ 
 was given th^m.' For the direcT form of the answer s6^V 19^ 
 acoeptmn*^ adj., 'welcome,' because (/rniKm, 'pleasing.' reml.l 
 -uro.: BO se toTet: = esset (III. 70). „omlui : here-«omi^. 
 cum imperio haberent : ' kept in command.' j i'»»^ 
 
 4. doinum: see V. 125. ut : 'when.' (V. 162,6). ,^x the 
 usual term is ' sutfete. ' f „er«t : ' had^ become.'^ ' had been 
 chosen' (V. 162, 6, ii.). Uomae : locative, «nnn! : pred adT 
 jith creabantnr, ' were elected (to hold office) for a yeax. ' blnl * ' 
 for the force of the distributive see III. 61, c, 1 and 4 ' ' 
 
 6^ pugidllig 
 
 :^. 
 
 force of an ace. pred. adj. (V. 106, i.) ; f 
 
 or ac see V. 174. 
 1 
 
 qaa« 
 
 
 m 
 
PA-RT IV.— NOTES ON HANNIBAL. 
 
 ipenile|*e«nr : ' to pay/ lit. ? 
 repOneretur (Y. 26). foedere 
 ihe second Punic war. 
 
 247 
 
 relative, clause of purpose, so qutie 
 ; the treaty concluded at the end of 
 
 atest.of the 
 
 ;>-! 
 
 6. anno post 5 * a year after,' lit. ? (V. 101). oonsalll^ng : *in 
 the consulship of,' lit. ? (V. 49). Boma : abl. of place from whic^ 
 (V. 126). ratus: * thinking' (V. 44, ii.). sal exposoendl gvM- 
 tia : ' to demand his surrender, ' gerundive expression de|ioting 
 purpose (V. 119). mlssos : sc. esse (V. 18, ii^.). senatns: *an 
 audience with the senate;' daretar : 'could be. given,' for the 
 mood see V. 166, 6, in Syriam, etc«: 'to Antiochus in Syria'. 
 (V.126,iv.> ^^ .^^ . ^ 
 
 ^ 7. possent V virtual indirect narratioQ^ (^V. 177), fpr quae com- 
 j^ehenderent miserunt implies a command, in direct speech compre- 
 netidite. ipsum : contrasted with bona and domum. exialem, : 
 pred. ace. * « , 
 
 ♦ . ■ • " • CHAP,.8i' 
 
 1. domo : see V. 126. profngerat : for tense see V. 152, 6, ii. 
 >. oonsullbus : in 193 B.C. Afrioam : see on Themistocles, ch. 4, 
 
 1. In flnlbns: we should expect in Jmes. ■! . '..,„. Indaoeren- 
 
 tur": 'in hopes of the Carthaginians being incited,' etc.; virtual 
 K indirect narration (V. 177). Antioohl : ' in Antiochus,' objective 
 
 gen. (V. 85). persn^serat : as a matter of^ fact Antiochus did 
 
 not invade' Italy. Hno: to Cyrene. 
 
 « 2. qaa r * as ' (V. 174). absentem : with Magonem. lilt : the 
 two brothers. despVratls rebus: 'in despair of success,' lit.! 
 ■olvlssent . . . dedUsent : ' had weighed anchor and set sail.* 
 duplex memorla: 'two accounts.' Interfeotum : strictly only 
 with a serv^dis (a case of zeUgma) : with naufragio supply peHiase. 
 aorlptuin rellquerunt : 'have left Won record'; acriptum is a 
 pred. ace, modifying interfectum (esse) «um^^ ' 
 
 3^> antem; Afi^w.' tam , .. . voluUsetf^uam : 'had been as 
 ready . . . a^ for mood and t^nse see V. 61. eju«: =Hanni- 
 balisy passirig over the sortiewhat careless parenthesis about Mago. 
 snnolplendo : sc. beM. Inntituerat : 'had been at the qjatset,' sc.^ 
 parere. Tlberl: xiat. Mjer prdpina (V. 78, ii.). Th«rmopyll« : 
 as a rule, the same corisSuction fo\\o\mumam as precedes it. This 
 battle of ThermopyljB was fought irtqfl B.C. de ««1^1 im- 
 peril: 'for the world's supremadfy,' litT? Qnem : i.e., i^^chust 
 et*l vldebat : see V. 65. a. multa ntnlte oonarl : ' forir^ ma 
 foolish projects' (V. 203, d). vldebat. desernlt: sc. Hanni^ 
 The change of tense is due to the negative (= 'in no single case 
 
 A 
 
 4.^ Aala'm : Asia Minor. 11» : abl. 
 ■ babfelc'; Bu. p r velio^ from eof^iOBtt, 
 
 of 
 
 •nl 
 
 onm 
 
 means. 
 "while 
 
 Quo: 'in thja 
 (V..161. fh.).== 
 
 ««•■' 
 
 'his troops'; mua by no means -always refers to the sub^ 
 
*f1 
 
 
 I' PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 '^re, (V. 173, c, 1.).*' rem sressit : 'comm 
 
 . i -,;' ■ ' .C, 'CHAP. 9. ^ 
 
 Jrans. 'Haipbal %ring.' ne 0'thMor lei 
 .which ;%the&ntement isfio'aM irmederd^ 
 
 •totem: ^tad put Il^elf in^M^oweiMlit. ?. 
 y- 85). Cretam : *m,€reteWi 126 % 
 '* whith4 to retreat ' J#lg6, 1^^.) '• ^* * 
 
 «L • 
 
 the wiog 
 ' charge.' ' 
 
 ml 
 
 ;f • 
 
 ; objefctive ^^f^ 
 l^no se confer|rc^| 
 
 < 
 
 '^'S^^i^^i^^ ''*he follo^d;^^-';;,»™^;:; 'the' 
 
 'v' ' 
 
 >I1Z0J 
 
 '?! t«#™* • * at his house,' locM 
 
 ive. 
 
 :\:-:^^^'i§'[ *^ainst/ ne: "that! . . Mi CV 24^ 
 ^X m ^^^Cr '^'^' ^^o^ledge ' (V. S| ^ier^. 
 
 
 Insolen- 
 dnoeret : 
 
 ... •»» 
 
 CHAP. 10. 
 
 % Poena.. 0#eten.U,u8 : both races had AVeputationfor cun 
 ing. in Pontum r 'in Pontus' (V. 125, ii^Tap^d oLm 
 18 court.' ilnlmo : see V; 105, t neaie «^u 1„ ' 
 
 T^i *-^!^ -? ^^- aim i^^^/ keeTT^Z::^:;^ 
 
 iji^ :::;:^!f^*:^V.!^Slte^r- nomanor^m; see V. 84. 
 ,;foHfl.eonc,hadhim,^ 
 
 w«\t'*"* ?«<"«*«»•»: see V. 124. Saperabatur : «Hannibal 
 was the weaker, ' w^ overmatched. ' irtultt<;Wdlne; arm^^ see 
 V. 102. erat pugnandnm : 'he had to fichiM^ 190 I^^ ' !^ 
 11.1 : for the infinitive passive with Z^rofsF^''--'--^' ^***^ 
 for declension se« III. 56, d. r- » a 
 
 6. elfeotgge Ba had got together.' l 
 navem : * thf 1|H of Eumenes only ' ; 
 phatic position (V. 3, g). g; «against.' 
 mi lka«ean<r! • to be content,^ Hir^ 
 
 '22, vii. vaaik i 
 
 [ery> unat^ . . ,, 
 like omnes, in em* 
 - ■ with di'fpntlorcl 
 
 -rd it sufficient.'* 
 
* 
 
 £ PART IV. — NOTES ON HANNIBAL. 
 
 249 
 
 les, in em- 
 
 m 
 
 
 *4>*'^*» *^6"* defence, lllos : see V. l'88. bonseoutaros, fac- 
 tnif'ain r sc. esse; the notion of saying i^ supplied from praecipit 
 \\ .\ i.\fl), ... I J ^' 
 
 6:^ at scirent faotnrnm : 5 would see! thaft tljey kn^w ' j for sub- 
 junctive see V. 33, v. cepisgent, Inter^ecisseut rsee V. 187; 6, i; 
 lls.li^aeinlo fore: see V. 81; freely, 'they should be well re- 
 warded ' ; the subject of /ore is the notion of capturing or slaying. . 
 
 On this whole passage see V. 193. • ^ ,* 
 
 CHAP. 11^ ''[' '' . -^ 
 
 1. mliltum: see V, 85. .ntrUque: 'both sides'; note the 
 
 -force of the plural. .Qiiarum : i.e., classium. ^pngnae : 'forren- 
 gaging' ; objective gen. daretnr : for mood see V. 156, 6. pa- 
 '1am faoer^ : *make it clear' ; palam with the force of a pred. 
 adj. oadac^o : equiv^erit to a modern flag of truce, nt^aoeret,^ 
 mittlt : for sequence'of tenses with historical pres., ^ee V. 28, iv., 
 and cf . concurrant, ch. 10, 5. * » • 
 
 2. qnin ... sorlptam : * that there was soH^e written propo- 
 sal,' lit. ? For ^quin with subjunctive see Y. 1^9, 6. aula : dat. 
 eodem : adverb. : I? , v 
 
 '^ . ' ■.'■-- ■' ■ ■ ■„ ' ' 
 
 3. qaae^ ., ; . pertlnerent : * such remarks as served to make 
 sport of him.' For mood see V. 32. neqne reperiebat : 'aiMi 
 failed td discover it ' ; cf. last note on ch. 8, 3. " oommlHere 
 dabltavlt : cf. construction f^fter dubitabat in section 2. 
 
 4; -Horam : the opposing fleets, praeoepto ; for the abl. = *in 
 accordance with/ see Y. 103, iii. «mlvjefal adorlnntur : «con- 
 centrate their attack, on.* qnam: «but . . .it,' i.e., salutem. 
 .oonaeoatua eaaet, reoeplaiiet : see V. 61. praealdia : the qastra 
 nanh'ca of section 6. proximo: 'neighboring.' 
 
 ' 5. aorlita : 'with considerable vigor,' lit. ? (V. 98, vi.). ooepta 
 •unt : 'began ' ; for tl^e passive form.^ee V. 22, iii. Quae J acta : 
 *the throwing of these,^ more lit. 'these when thrown.' pu«- 
 nantlbuar 'in the combatants' (Y. 44, i. a); for. dat. see V. 80, 
 0. pdterat intellegl : trans, freely by active (V. 56). K 
 
 ft nova re: 'novel device,' 'unusual spectacle.' vltarent : 
 ^ ejee'V.. 186, 1, !>,^i. pnppea verterant : after the analogy of terga 
 *vertere. Cf. .'to tur,n, tail.* oaatra naatloa : formed by drawing 
 the ships up on shore and throwing ramparts about them. ' ^^ 
 
 •7. ooifallio: 'strategy.' altaa: adverb, pari prudentla : 
 
 ' with a like cunning, 'see V. 103. Note the alliteration in the last 
 line»^ ^ ■ . 
 
 The fact of hii^ dealing at such length with the -silly episode 
 pcnta, whiW diwnitwing in tt^fwvliww Hrtnnibal'a famous 
 
 campaign^ in Italy, goes to show that Nepos was singularly lacking* 
 IDi Che sense of, historical perspective. - ^ 
 
 .<^ 
 
 perspective. 
 
 V. 
 
 <, 
 
^x 
 
 ' f: \ 
 
 250 
 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 CHAP. J12. 
 
 ^ V V*'"^*r •«^^'^i^T^ ^^^ 1; ^^^- ««««'«»*. dloerijnt : see 
 ' \\ ^ • **^* «P*** = * at the house of, ' id : what is the antecedent ? 
 
 \ so^fT^^'S^l "**?**"*?** ■ *^^.^g^^ar name ftv 'members of the 
 W^nH ^1T '* conjci'tpii, *.e., the heads of patrician fami- 
 ly, and the plebeians afterward^ enrolled. HaiJnIbale vivo: 
 asdo^g as danmbal was alive' .(V.^ 49). sine: "free from' 
 exHtWrent : causal subj. (V. 171). In : 'among.' «Vum. 
 
 'bl^' fn?^^'''^''^^-^^^- »«<'«'-: direct reflexL. T^^\ 
 but ; sc. wi, from ne. ^ 
 
 3. His negare 
 III. 68, c. lllnd 
 
 ' to refuse their request,' lit. ? ausus e«t : see 
 postQiarent : 'but this he did object to, 
 
 .u •■ , . ," — , i'"n«'M»€»»cMi, . uuiy WU8 ne aia oDiect to 
 
 their asking him to do '^; for the use of ne and subj. (here ii apb^I 
 
 sition with -dlx^), see V. 139, fn. ewet : see V. 175. ipsi com- 
 
 prehenderent : 'let them seize him themselves ' (V 186 1 c) 
 
 fniwl"****' • ^*'-' -f ^""^ '^^'•. J°'' cdmprehenderent arid inienturL 
 following recusam«, see V. 191. munerl : 'as a gift' (V 81) 
 Idqne: 'andi which '; for id, not quod, see V. 170, iv. aedlfl. 
 carat :* had arranged. ,, . ' . »=»»"» 
 
 . ». ?"®!^ ! ^""^; ^"^ "" ^°"*^ Af rica« native servant is called 
 ^boy without reference to age. plnre* praeter consuetudt* 
 
 »k2/ 1 ""^ ^^^"^ "^"*^. '''' ^" linusual number.' lit. ? A some- 
 -mbat' pleonastic expression. Qui: 'Hannibal.* nnm . . ob- 
 •Ideretar: indirect question ; for force of num. see V. 35, i. 
 
 5. quid ewet: 'how matters stood. ' oooupato«. factum: sc. 
 esse ne pet! : he was the person they were seeking,' lit. ? (V. 
 205, a), slbl: see y..80, d. . retlnendam : trans, by 'could,' as 
 often m the case- of a gerundive with a negative or mx. quam 
 
 K,-:i^-**™*"*'l*- ^\^^^« ^}?^^ n«fc give thik up at another's 
 bidding, t e., he wished to die free, and not \o be dragged in 
 triumph through the streets of Rome and theb put to death 
 arbltrlo : see V 103, iii. consuerat : for the fWce of the plu- 
 perfect see V. 182, e. V ^ 
 
 \ ■ ' • ■ ■. y-' 
 
 • — ■-— : -...-~;-^;-;..-.. .--^-.^CHAP. 13. .....^. ... , >, 
 
 1. -que: omit in trans. (V. 205, /.) laborlbus : see V. 64. .- 
 
 acqulevlt : a very appropriate word after perfunctus lahoribm, **' 
 
 ^^r^^ ***■ -w*«»tr- ututButsmp, 111 wnat year ^IT 
 
 49); notice the indirect question introduced by abl. absolute! 
 
PART IV.— NOTES ON HANNIBAL 
 
 251 
 
 ier«nt : see ■ 
 
 
 iecedent? ^ 
 
 
 bers of the . H 
 
 
 ician fami- H 
 
 
 »ale vivo: '^m\ 
 
 > " 
 
 free from.' H 
 
 
 snnin, H 
 
 
 ve. -que : H 
 
 
 IS e«t : see ^B 
 
 
 object to, H 
 
 
 re in appo- H 
 
 < 
 
 Ipsloom- ^M 
 
 
 1B6, 1, c). ■ 
 
 
 inventuros H 
 
 
 ' (V. 81).' ■ 
 
 
 r. aedlil. ■ 
 
 
 [lould hap- H 
 
 • 
 
 I venlret : H 
 
 •' 
 
 iisui (III. H 
 
 
 mg abl. of ■ 
 
 •• 
 
 t is called ■ 
 
 « 
 
 asnetadl- H 
 
 
 A some- 1 
 
 
 • • . Ol>a '^1 
 
 
 5, i. ■ 
 
 
 Btnm : sc. ■ 
 
 
 ' lit.? (V. : ■ 
 
 
 could,' as ■ 
 
 
 K. quam < H 
 
 
 another's 1 
 
 
 ragged in m 
 
 
 to death. B 
 
 
 ' the plu- ^ fl 
 
 
 The dates are 183, 182 and 181 
 cannot be correct, mortnam . 
 
 respectively, so septuagesimo 
 nit : cf. on ch. 8, ^i 
 
 : regularly used instead of 
 distriotus : * though busy ' 
 
 2. Atqiie : 'I may add.' hi 
 hie imagnus. -que : omit in trims 
 
 (V. 42). nonniliil . . . litteris : ' devoted considerskl)le time 
 to literary pursuits.' temporis : for gen. see V. 86, i. oonfeoti : 
 'written.' ad Blio^o«: the title of the work ; sc. liber ad Wu>- 
 dios scriptus. Trans. ' among them one dedicated to the Bhodians. ' 
 
 3. Hujns . . . iiiresta : 'Hannibal's achievements in war.' duo ; 
 8C. prodiderunt^ but trans, freely 'there were two.' slmnl : nofc= 
 eodem tempore, but =cwm eo' of the preceding line, jbsus est doo- 
 t)ore : ' had as his teacher ' (V. 55, Vy). 
 
 ■■«>: 
 
 w. 
 
 ■ r" 
 
 
 -::.^^ 
 
 
 
 
 is'- 
 
 »^-^~^'"'-*- 
 
 m^\. 
 
 
252 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 JULIUS jd^sar: 
 
 
 ^^^^ "IWISiP^ ^** ^^"^ ^^ ^"^® ^^ *^® ^2th of July, 
 ^^ ?-^«*5®^"*s^omm8en holds, in 102, B,C.), of one of the 
 oldest p^cian families of that city. Although of aristocratic 
 birth.lje espoused the cause of the popular party, and after barely 
 escapihg with his life on %l^gufi^i that party by Sulla in 82 
 ^'£' ^^ withdrew frontWR^^rtics^r tever^l years. By 
 ^f3*^ * however, he had become a favorite of the people, and onei« 
 most influential leaders. He rose rapidly througji the various 
 les of office, being made in succession quaestor, aedile, pontifex 
 lii^|imu8 (a life-office), praetor, and finally consul in B.C. 59, The 
 l^ree leading men of Rome at this time were Pompey, represent- 
 J^.ing the nobles; Csesar, the kader of the popular party; and 
 * -^ ^.X!ras8U8, whose influence was largely due to his immense wealth. 
 ^ V On Cee^6 suggention they formed a coaUtion (the ao-caUed First 
 Triumvif^te), the result of wh^h was to place the praj^cal suprem- , 
 ^ acy of the state in the hands of these throe men. ^e powerful 
 
 influence of this coalition secured for him, after his consulship, the 
 fl^dmmistrltipn for five years of the three provinqes, lUyricum and^ 
 . t Pisalpilie a# Transalpine Gaul. -In 55 B.C., by an agreement 
 with Pompey and Cyassus^this command was extended*^ another 
 '"-' ^:]'- period of five years, j^*^- .• ^ ■ 
 
 After the conque^ of clnil, which^ngaged the attention of 
 > Caesar from «^ %B.C.V civilwaf* arose between him and 
 Pompey, his so^remiaining rival, CrassUs "having fallen in battle 
 .^: , in the Easfe/^BvUie overthrow of the Pbmpeian party Cjesar 
 ^^ecame practioalfl|,reme rul^f th^ R||an world. He showed 
 unexpected qleme^jy to his ioi&TKr ^ponents, j^^ b%an& brill- 
 
 % iant career as "Mminiatrator an||pi«iier:' But twj£man aria 
 
 *' tocracy, alai'med at^iis grgftpowei: ai^, popularity and their own 
 'lo8S of prestige, formed &^^mP7 to remov^ him, being actuated 
 
 
 '^Mae cases by»^ealousy Ji otBirs by an honest but short-sighted 
 d^gire to bring back repu'^lican freedom; and on the Ides (the 
 15th) of^March, 44 B.C., «The foremost man of all this world' 
 fell beneath the daggers of the conspirators, at the base of Pom- 
 pey's statug. Saddest of all, one of his many wounds was d^fc by 
 the hand .of his intimate friend Brutus. ^^ 
 

 PART IV.— CAIUS JULIUS CAESAR. 
 
 253 
 
 \^ 
 
 We are told that in personal appearance Cflesar was noble and 
 commanding. He was tall of stature and of slender build» his 
 complexion was pale, his nose prominent and decidedly * Roman,' 
 his eyes were black, keen and full of expression. In later life he 
 had a tendency to baldness. His constitution was naturally deli- 
 cate, and he was subject to attacks of epilepsy, but by constant 
 „Bxercise and temperate living he managed , to acquire vigorous 
 health, so that he could endure the most prolonged toil and most 
 arduous exertion». 
 
 The genius of C?esar was many-sided, and he excelled in every- 
 thing he undertook. Not only was he one of the greatest generals 
 of all time, biit he was pre-eminent as a law-giver, a jurist and a 
 statesman, mreover, he has lefb>behind him a reputatiolr as an 
 orator, a poet, a mathematician, an architect and engineer, while 
 as an historian he will ever rank with the highest. He was the 
 author of numerous -literary works, on many different subjects, 
 but of these all that have come down to us are his Commentarii Be 
 ;peao Gallico (from which the selections contained in this book are 
 taken), and his Commentarii De Bello Civili (in three books), a, 
 history of the war between himself and Pompey. 
 
 Tfhe Commentaries' of Caesar are memoirs written by himself, 
 desdriptive of his different campaigns. It is uncertain whether the 
 work was written as the war went on, and issued book by book, or 
 whether it was composed towards the end of the war. Each book 
 of the Commentaries on the Gallic War contains the account of a 
 single year's campaign. There are seven books in all, the history 
 of thp eighth year's operations having been composed after Cesar's 
 death by Aulus Hirtius, one of his lieutenants. 
 
 The Commentarii, by universal cons^b, ■ M written in the purest 
 Latin, in a style marked by great sim^!(3f;y and conciseness, and, 
 in spite of its condensation, by singular ease and elegance. The 
 best judges among Caesar's contemporaries praise his literary .style 
 for its purity of diction, and its business-like directness of expres- 
 sion. Cicero, the best l^rary critic of his day, has this to say of 
 Caesar's Commentaries : "I pronounce them to be, in fact, entirely 
 commendable ; for they are simple, straightforward, of a charming 
 elegance, stripped of all rhetorical adornments." . 
 
 \S^''n^?^^^T' '*'9',,™®*"*"J? "fetches, jottings, is used as the title of a book 
 wiy subject, but especially an historical one. whlc" " * . « » ««~«. 
 
 written without careful revi«ion. 
 
 tlich is only sketched down or 
 
254 
 
 ^^RIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 In the choice of single words Csesar is pure and classical, as we 
 should expect that writer to be, who, according to Aulus Grelliusj 
 the Roman grammarian, has left us the invaluable advice " to shun 
 an un<|)mmon or out of the way word as a ship would a rock." 
 
 NOTES ON C^SAR, BOOK IJ. 
 
 CHAP. 1. ■ . ' 
 
 1. qui fult, etc. : 'which was the year when . . . wei'e consuls/ 
 lit. ' Porapey and Crassus (being) consuls ' (V. 49). The consuls 
 are named merely to fix the date, 55 B.C. For the agreement of 
 qui see V. 13, i. Germani : the larger division to which Usi- 
 petes and Tencteri both belonged, mnltltndlne : almost abl. 
 of manner (= 'in large numbers '), as it is really included in the 
 subject, mari : ' that part of the sea. ' quo : adverb, ' into which. ' 
 
 2. Causa trans^undl : ' the reason for crossing '; contrast with 
 the meaning and order of bellandi cmisa in section 4. quod : 
 'that,' lit. 'because' (V. 198). annos : with exagitati (V. 129). 
 
 ^bello : with premebantiir. premebaptur : Coesar's reason (V, 
 146)* agrlonltura: see V. 93. - V' 
 
 3. omnium : in emphatic position ("\ . 3, a). 
 
 4. HI: the Suebi. ox quibus singrnla millla : 'from each 
 of which a thousand'; lit. 'from which . .. . one thousand each.' 
 For the distributive see III. 61, c. 
 
 5. 'manserant : 'remain, '.lit. ? For tense see V. 182, c. 
 
 , -- lllos. 
 
 Hi : refers to relxqui. anno post : ' the next 
 
 'the others.' 
 ' (V. 101). 
 
 agrl . . . nihil est: 'there is no . . . land' (V. 86, i.). 
 
 (V. 98). licet : ' they are 
 
 till : 
 
 year 
 
 . 7. 
 
 longriug anno : * longer than a year 
 allowed,' lit. ? (V. 143). 
 
 8.. mnltum : adverb, frumento : trans, by 'on,' lit. 'by means 
 of.' maximam partem: 'for the most part' (V. 72, i.). sunt 
 in venatlonlbus : 'are engaged in hunting,' lit. 'hunts.' ^ 
 
 - 9. quae res: 'this fact,' i.e., the frequent hunting; subject 
 of alit. Td indicate more clearly the connection with the preced- 
 ing words, Latin constantly uses qui for hie ovis{Y. 172), ge- 
 nere: 'from (or 'because of) the character' (Y. 96). cum . . . 
 faoiant : explaining libertate vitae ; trans, by a parenthetic clause 
 
 with 'for': , lit, 'since. ' nnllo 
 
 ifactl: 'as they-ar e-4M>t- 
 
 aocuBtojndi to any obedience or discipline ' ; for the abl. see V. 99, 
 
PART IV -^NOTES ON C^SAR, BOOK IV. 
 
 faolant : for mood see V. 148. allt : 'increases.' immanl. etc. ; 
 ' of huge stature,' l^t. ? Understand eos, homines being a factitive 
 pred. ace. magnitadine : see V. 105. 
 
 10. Atque : • moreover ' In earn . . . addnxerant : lit. ' have 
 brought themselves to that (=such a) custom/ freely, 'have so 
 accustomed themselves.' tools frlgidisslmls : * although thecli-' 
 mate is very cold,' lit. ? (V. 49). neqne vestltns qaloqnam : 'no 
 'clothing,' lit.? (Y. 86, i.). halberent: for the mood see V. 29. 
 Here to be translated exceptionally by the present tense, so lava- 
 rentnr. See V, 36, fii. 1, 6. qaarnm : trans. &tter exiguitatem, 
 lavarentur : for* the Voice see V. 203, /. i. 
 
 u-^- 
 
 .. /: 
 
 ';.:■•■'/'■'■.■■'■■■■■■.'.:'' // „. ./' "■ ..-CHAP. 
 
 1. MerQatorlbna ©*t aditns : * tradeW^(B admitted, ' lit. ? eo 
 adv., *for this purpose,' explained by nt . . . haheant; omit in 
 trans, qnibns verdant: '(persons) to whom to sell,' freely, 
 
 , * purchasers for' (V. 26). The object of the verb is (ea)quae hello 
 ceperint. For the omissipn of the antecedents see V. 173, a. 
 habeant : see V. 24.» ceperint : fbr the mood see V. 177. qno : 
 'that or because.* ^d : 'among.' deslderent : for mood see V. 
 147, iii. 
 
 2. Qnlnetlam: 'nay even,' Jnmentis : here 'horses,' gener- 
 ally beasts of burden. Jumentis importatis is governed by utuntur 
 (V. 54) ; to keep the Latin order, trans, freely, 'as for horses . . . 
 use imported ones.' qulbns, etc.: 'in which . . . take particu- 
 lar pleasure,' * for which, . . . have a special fancy'; lit. 'with 
 which.' qnaeque : two words ; trans., 'and for which they pay a 
 b%h price,' lit.? -pretlo : for case see V. 100. quae .'. . baeo : 
 'iXH.TiH.haec before the relative clause (V. 5, i.). haeo quae ... 
 parva : may be freely rendered 'the native ones, which are small,.* 
 etc. sntnmi . . . efflclnnt : trans. ' they make capable of the 
 utmost toil,' lit. « render so that they are of the utmost endurance ' 
 XV. 87, iii.). .at Bint: for construction see V. 33, v. 
 
 U 
 
 3. pedlb.ns : 
 (V. 127, ii.). 
 qnos : 'and . 
 for mooc 
 
 4.^ moi^ 
 ,piug : pre 
 
 *on foot.' eodem vestlglo : ' on thei same spot' 
 assnefeoerant : trans, by the present perfect. 
 . them.' . omn usus est : ' when there is need^ ; 
 Lse see V. 149, ^,^ 
 
 abl. ; trans, by 'according to ' (V. 103, iii.). tnr- 
 -^ lOTfi., agreeiiig with quicquqm. habetnr : 'is re- 
 
 garded.' ephippiis: governed by uti. The saddle proper was a 
 much later invention. 
 
 0- quemvlH : -from quivlsf with nu/nerum. adlre ad : 'advance 
 ft^ftiQf*^ - qaamvl H pnticl : 'howevnr Hmftll their numberg,' Np. 
 
 face the case ofpauci(Y. 66, ii.). 
 
256 
 
 PRIMARY LTATIN BOOK. 
 
 I .V-v ' . 
 
 
 ■% 
 
 6. • qnpd : conjunction. 
 homines : %cc. 
 
 ea re: 'by it,' 'by that means,' lit? 
 
 CHAP* 3. 
 
 .1 Pablloe: not 'publiqly,: biit 'as a state,' *as a community.' ' 
 qnam latlsslme : -'as far as possible ' (V. 174, i.), vacare agros : 
 '•io'r the country to be unoccupied, '^subject of esse (V 195). hao 
 re slgrniflcari : ' that this indicates,' lit. ? The clause magnum 
 vmm^rum . . ..posse forms the subject of stgfm^ari. ' ':^.. ' >. 
 
 2.' ex : 'on* (V. 127, v.). a Sn^ebls : with th©^iollowing Wrda ? 
 'mlllla r'see V. 128. a;gri : nom., not gen. - h » !- ^ • • 
 
 3. Ad alteram, etc. r^ * on the o^er side the Ubii adjoin them/ 
 lit.? T3iere would doubtless be some unocpupied country between 
 them, fult : 'ha&been,' not ""was'^ seft section^4. utregt dap- 
 tns O-ermanorum: freely, 'i^cording to German standards-' lit. ' 
 'as.the capacity of the Germans is,' i.e., S»» far as German id^tf ~ 
 go." Gaptw is a noiin et sunt : contrasted with /ui>, ' and who 
 even now are.' ceteris :* than tjie rest' (V. 9^). ^iultnm-ven- 
 titantad: '^ often, visit. ' Both «enitian^, and ^imt depend on (/ttdd.,** 
 For the frequentative form ventUant see III. 7U, ,6, morlbu»^"'" 
 for the case cf. on ch. 1, 9. sunt assuefa^ti : ' have beoij+brouHht 
 upaccordin^to,' etc. > -•• " ' *. 
 
 li 
 
 . 4. Hos;: with expellere. cum: * although.' HHftilbas : se6 V". 
 93. potQlssent : for mood see V. 65, a. • veotlirales : pred. ace. / 
 witl^ CO» understood, multb : see V.* 101. hamtllores iiifl<*nW<^^ 
 oresque :' less impoftant and powerftil, ' lit. v. ' .^ 
 
 ,**"'^:| 
 
 (., 
 
 • . CHAip.,4. 
 
 ' ■ 'o J, f 
 
 1. 'oWasa :' situation.' annds : fbr case see V. l^yBo^^r^^i^ 
 ^iMm," section 2. ^ ^. , v^ ,« * ' ' / Mi^^i 
 
 ,/e, kd extremnm: *at last,' 'wi% pcrvenerwHi only, not with '^ 
 ^mii^. or vagati. »tgrl» : ot on Jimbua, .ch. 3, 4 multU lools : • 
 - ' tl^rpugh many parts,' lit. 'in many districts ' (V. 127,41.): 
 
 'ihbise ; meaning the districts near the Rhine. 
 
 •qaas^c 
 Inoolebant 
 
 : * « J. 
 
 JamoB. here, by past indefinite, 'inhabited'; ^ l^abehaht by 'had." * '^ 
 
 ,^ 'Ml *XH|i*, ;--'■■. -,•.-■■■- •-- f .■■#,,'*■'■*'* • '■/■■ 
 
 ^ 3. atfventa: 'by,' not ♦on.'" Hs : 'the.' trans, «Is?' from 
 
 Ceesar's pomt of view, disposltls praesldUs : abl. absolute ; ^ 
 iffcrans. ' by placing, ' etc. (V. ' :48), ; transire i • < from crtjtasing.' " 
 jlf^ollibebant ^ for f orce^ |igperf eot see Y . 18(X et • .^ - -'■ 
 
 * 4» 1111^ * the lat^r,' marking a change of subject, omnia 
 expiBirtl cum : 'tried every device, but nd^n,' etc. possent :.for . ? 
 mood • see V. 161. -»1 contendere: ' ferce a. Iiahaage. ' lit '— "'— 
 
 .•'■#^ 
 
 
 ; moog-see v. 101. irl contendere : 'ferce a. patoage.' lit. 'ta»kft > 
 
 "TITelf way^y fofceT I revfcrtli»: 'toreturn,' itt-lfyT^ ^ 
 
 •. • - # » ■ -. .' >. ' •, , >- J * , *k •■•- * ^ -' - . 
 
 ■■ •■* ' ^-^ 
 
PART IV.— NOTES ON C^SAR, BOOK " IV. 
 
 257 
 
 6. trldui vlHm : «a three days' journey,' lit? for the gen. see 
 V. ,87, for the ace. V. 128. ttlnere . . . -.oanfeoto : ♦ havW cov- 
 
 eqoituta: trans, by * with, ' lit. *by means of.' 
 
 er^ . 
 
 . distance ' 
 
 f. .*"?* • • ; '"""• .'^<>'^hen these learned . . . they'; more 
 lit. wh<^ on learning, per exploratore. : see V. 99^i. 
 
 't ^' P'f"*«"»™ • • • certlor fleret : ' before . . . could be in- 
 ^ formed, depending on. troAaierwnt (V. 156, b). partem : for case 
 , see V. 1^. eornm opplis : ' on their stdres,' lit. * by means of.' 
 
 %: 
 
 OHAi. 
 
 *. 
 
 /- 
 
 5.' 
 
 / 
 
 b?. 
 
 .. 1. verttu8;^*fearingr(V,44,ii.). oaplendl. : 'fo^ing.^ n,i 
 xl» rebus : political changes, ' changes in the government, ' lit. ? 
 For dat. see T 52. Nihil committendum : sc. esse: impersonal 
 
 Irans, that no confidence should be put in them ' lit } 
 ■' What C^sar feared was that the Gaulfe, soon wearying of Roman 
 tuje, would combine with these new-comers and revolt. 
 
 2. Est enim, ^:T lit. 'for this is of (i.e., belongs to) Gailio 
 - custonx ; trfcns. 'for it is a Gallic custom.' ati . . oogant : in 
 
 apposition with hoc (Y. 197)f trans, by infin. with 'to.' SoS 
 gitftcran/, etc et . . /«t: in trans, omit 'both.' «ndierit:» 
 midxvertt (lU..6b, a). For the mood see V.^^ ; so veniant et 
 . t. . . vnlgnn oiroamalstat . . . oogrant : 'and for a crowd to' 
 surround . . . and cbmpel.' For the change of number see V. 
 .4^, ff.B. qulbu«que : two words» so (jua*^. — . ^r 
 
 3. tfebu8 • V5tat»menfia.' •ammiB : «most ImporiAnt.*' qnornm 
 eo., Qte.: 'which they have to repenl> of at once.' paoiiit*r« : ; 
 with object, not subject, eos(Y. 91, d). ne«e..e e*t : lit. «it fi;^ 
 DL^essary, with mfin. as subject (V. 141, 6). cam: 'sinee.'' 
 •ervi^nt: iollow >lindly, " are «slaves to ' (V. 148). *lerique: 
 t.e^ of the traders and travellers, ad volnntatom eornm : i.e., 
 oftheGauls, 'iosujt(ht. with a view to) their- pleasure,' ♦.«., 'to 
 please them, iiota reapondeant : 'invent answers,' more lit. 
 'give answers mverited.' • ' «». *^ «i*. 
 
 ' -' CHAP. e. ■■ :'. ■ ■ ■' ■ " 
 
 
 mt.^l*^7,^ J^ sorious,' ht, ' more serious (i.«.t^Mi heloaf» 
 manage ) (Y. 9«, vi.). ne . .. . «ooarreret : see V. 24. eon*, 
 
 :^^:J»r** -^consiieverat (III. 66, a). - For force of tertse ^e V. 182 
 
 « fk^t**.?*****!? '■ }^ *P"y ^^ ^*^" stationed during the wiriter iii 
 - .th£f nqrth- west of Gaul. ^- ^^ , . \ s,, ' ^ , . 
 
 '^in£ "'^^^«^^ i "^ ^'*^^ 5P«e >^ word isi^ubject'df an 
 Minnn. Trans, 'what.' fnr« -rAt^i.^^ ^..^ \ * >."».«'. i 
 
 ■ # 
 
 ^ 
 
 f" 
 
 * 
 
 
 ^:^'^l'--^^y^\ imf^ ib. e^. 'W happened.' " 
 
 ^t J* 
 
 '*'. 
 
 "f . 
 
\ 
 
 258 
 
 %% 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN book; 
 
 ^' 
 
 iN 
 
 3< missas, Invitatos : sc. ease, depending on cognovit^ And ex- 
 ^ plaining ea . . . facta, uti . . . dlsoederent : 'to leave the 
 ^Khine/ i.e,, to come farther into Gaul. For ^lood see V. 27. 
 poatnlAanent :=postulavissent (III. 66, a); * they ^sked, ' lit. 'they,- 
 should have asked,' not 'they had already asked.' For the mood 
 see V. 176 ; for the tense (in the original words int. perf.) see V. 
 187, b, i. fopo parata : depending on an ideaio.! promising easily 
 supplied from invitatos ; * with .the prom^ th^it^veqrthing would 
 be made ready.' ; >^ v^* 
 
 4. Qn» spe : strictly a condensed Expression for ciijxui ret ape. 
 " j(V. 205, c.) The English has the same idiom .^ vagabaiitnr, 
 -.pervenerant : i.e., at the time of Osssar'a ariiyaj. 0))serve the; 
 -^-difference in tensed — - --1-— -— _---^ -„1 - ,; ; V 
 
 "^ 5. dlsslmiilanda albl : sc. esse (V. 120, i.). animia*? etc. : ^' 
 
 ' having calmed and reassure4 their hearts.' imperato : this verb, 
 ^ when used transitively means ' demand. ' ooastltuit : the context 
 requires the meaniog 'aooounced his resolve»' not simply 'xe.- 
 solved.* ,j. . - ' 
 
 ^ CHAP. f. ..;. ',:;-:^-v 
 
 1. in ea looa . . . qnlbiia in lo«ls : * towards the district 
 where,' lit. ? se& V. 173, 6. andieb^ : 'heard'; the imperfect 
 implies that he continued to .hear this duri^ his march. 
 
 2. Aqnlbna: Bk. locis. ab hia : sc. Germanis. panooram 
 dlernm Iter : 't>ut a few days' journey,' cf. on M^ viam, ch. 4, 
 5. qaorum haeo, etc. : * who spoke as follows, ' jlit. ? , haeo : ^ 
 feminine sing. (V. 13, i.). 
 
 3. For all the subjunctives in sections 3, 4 and 5, excepts those 
 specially mentioned, see V. 186, 2. For the primary tenses (to be , 
 translated as though secondary), see V. 187^ b ; see also V. 193. 
 'neqne priorea, etc. : 'were not the aggres8r>rs in making war,' 
 •tc., lit. 'were not making war the former (of the two parties).'- 
 ikeqae . . . neqne : here, as often, trans, 'not . . . and not.' 
 reonaare qnin . . . eontendant * 'object (or refuse) to,' etc. 
 For qnin and subjunctive, see Y. 139, a. qaioaniqa« : bo. iu as 
 antecedent (governed by resUtere) ; trans. * if any,' lit. ? ,.;■ 
 
 4. Haeo: * this much.' dioere : sc. «e. yenlaae, poaae : sc,Ji/ 
 in apm>8ition with Im^c (Y. 195). al;trlb«ant, patlantnr : trans^ 
 
 ^ *let them (i.e., the Romans),' etc. The imperative (or jussive 
 > Bubjunctiye) would -have beeii used by the speakers themselves 
 (V. 186, 1, cY.' eoa : %.«., agros. armia : 'in war,' lit. ? 
 
 5. dU: from deiu (TIL 9). rMlqanm : 'besides,' 'else,' lit. 
 'remaining.' quldem : adding emphasis, but, as oft«n, untrans- 
 latable by any word. In terrla : 'in the world,' or 'on earth.' 
 
 pMi|pifl I iof tne mood h<h» V . ^87 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 Vi -■ \v 
 
 • »■ 
 
- PAR^ IV.— NOTES ON CESAR, BOOK; IV. * 259 
 
 . ^. ■ ..■ CHAP. 8. ■ 
 
 vimm est. SIM „SL «;/• f '!. '"«'eretooa M*subject with 
 chapter cf. on™ 7 3 For t), k ^" •™''^ " *« "«' °* 'he 
 ary^te primary sequence ll V m "vf '".1?"™ ^' ^■™" ^'"^■ 
 ' to him withThem^ . ; tranT .Ll^eJhtotd -them't^ SJ' k'"" 
 
 those who* . to 8e°z^?- /v' nn •,• r*""^"»- «"• eo,, 'for 
 other,-; nnderet^d^r. Zj^uthn:!^^ '*"" "' 
 
 . ^i.Z'c!^7^ fc't'^'^f *•' "'•' (^- 1«> «P-*: 'with.' „:. J 
 themtoMttk^mongThe™: " «'™ ""«""l".' viz., todUow .f 
 
 ■■r^/-> '--■'. -r^.:.;;^- vV;-: CHAP. 9. '. , ' ' ' /" ■'■"'' 
 
 1. post diem tertlnm : * two davs latpr ' lif ? in,A t> ' 
 . reckoning from one date to another counted in Wh ^^^ "* 
 wj^^^e incMe but one. • ^^ 
 
 tr.rl: trans, by the active voice. .. rljKsar v ' *".«^ 
 west. exBDentnri i«#.«x -^- /"^»"» Mo»ttih : I.e., towards th« 
 
 -■-■■...•' CHAP* lofr' ;•:•;-■ - 1 ,:;-...v. ::. ^:^ ■ :«■ - ;,' 
 
 i.th„. formed by the fe£™«, ^^1^ anTt!:» o'otn''^»'' 
 
 etc^' mmC "1" V w ' If. "A" .t'r" ,"' r' ■"»■•'' ">•"•• 
 
 the Meuse). ■•••*■••'""' ^'«'^•'«('''•«re it enteii • ^ 
 
 >."»r ; '/owe raprd'y/^j" J ^^^ f'^ "■"« °<""*'' •"•»■• 
 
 1.^enr-:°^:r'^.!yi»- "■°-^-'n«. En,...h Jould u^ the 
 
 trans. (V. 205, /) 
 
 ?iui>io(Uiaji uiib;.' .q., . omit in " 
 
 W^i 
 
 .^ 
 
 t';,'^''. 
 
r 
 
 .!/ ' 
 
 
 ^h 
 
 jr 
 
 it 
 
 
 260 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 5 exqulbu* .nnt qui: 'among whom are the people who.' 
 pisdbu. : for abl. cf ch. 1, 8. capltlbus : ' mouth8,^HU Capti 
 18 generally the source, just as we say 'head-wat^s.' * 
 
 ■'chap. 11. ^>-:-' '.„■• :;^ -V 'v-- "■'s^-'-4 
 
 1. mUlibas : may be abl. of comparison (of. ch. id 2\ or ahl nf 
 measure of^ difference (V. 101, i.) uninfluUed b^ai^^I^ (V^ 
 
 IN 'L .u r Tf* ««"""t»*»™*: 'as had been arranged ' (ch. 9, 
 1) ; with the following words, m itlnere: i.e., whiKhe was on 
 his march towards them ne pro^rederetnr : of." on ch. 9, 1. 
 OFttbaat: for tense see V. 180, 6. Hopetebant. ^ 
 
 2 impetruMent : see III. 66, a. petebant nti . . . prae- 
 mltteret : * asked him to send on ' (V. 27). antece^lssent : see 
 V. 176. pugrna : for case see V. 93. -«bl . . . mittendl : «and 
 to give them permission to send,' etc. 
 
 3. fldem feoisset : * pledged their word,' lit. ' should have made 
 a pledge. The verb agrees in number with the nearer of its two 
 subject». For the mood • see V. 187, b; i. ea condldone . : . 
 u.uro.: «woujd agree to the terms which were (being) offered ' 
 see ch 8, 3. For the abl. see V. 54. daret : cf.' on attrib^u^ni, 
 
 ?v ,'q«' t ^\^ ^^^ ^""^ 8'''^' ^^ '(^^«y asked) him to give' 
 ( V, loo, 1, c). 
 
 . 4. eodem lllo pertlnere : 'looked in that same direction,' more 
 freely had the same object,' i.e., as that mentioned in ch. 9, 3 
 This object is explamed more fully by the ttt clause. Eodem and itto 
 are both adverbs, at Interposlta ... reverterentur : freely 
 
 tnat a delay might intervene and their cavalry return ' (V 48) ' 
 qui : refers to equitea, not to eorum. abesaent : for mood see V 
 i'7« mllllbu. : cf. on d». 10, 1. ■ 
 
 qui 
 
 175. 
 
 /v iS'^*^ freqnentlRsIml : *in aa large numbers as possible' 
 (V. 174. I), ooiiveniront : 'they were to corrife ' (V, 136 L c). 
 oognosoeret de : ' inquire into. ' '.,■'* 
 
 6. mittlt qui nnnilarent: 'he sends (men) to" tell* (V* 
 173, a) ; for seciuence #)e V. 28, iv. ne laoesRerent : see V. 28, v 
 
 proello : 'to (lit. bv) battle.' Frqelio laeemre, to take the offen' 
 sive; aruttin^re, to keep on the defensive, to hold one's ground. 
 •« : * but."' exeroltu : often of the legiops only (the regular army) 
 as, opposed to the cavalry (native auxiliaries) ; so also milites. 
 aooeatiiiBet : 'approached'; lit. 'should have»' etc ^iM 4tM^ 
 ^rm wpuld be acceaaem (Y. 187, 6. i.). • ■■'..■ j * ''■ ■ - ('; -^ ^^^'. 
 
 m 
 
 
 7^ 
 
 ;,. ' " .-■'"'■.„■ ■■'-/'■ -■'.'• ' . 'A'^'- •"^■'^.\ .- •: ,.■,.'■■■ 
 
 1. tobi primnm ; ^a» mkm bj^' life.! ^4«iwitti, ct^; ^ wfirt mm- 
 uen»d,' etc., liui miuiaw: see vv 87j^ iu. ««» : ^Wffi^ 
 
 
 1 
 
 \ 
 
 If 
 
 -T——W- 
 
 .^ ,-U^ 
 
 
 • ^ 
 
 n" ^ X 
 
 r 
 
 
 i 
 
1- 
 
 PART IV.— NOTES OK CJESAn, BOOK IV. 
 
 261 
 
 Ci^^H' ^'^'^ **™P"«" o«"n»ento8 : «more than .eight hun- 
 
 ttmentlbti, no«trl« : «while our men felt no fear/ explained by 
 (T^o^ . . . petitus (V. 48). NlhU : cf. on ch. 5, 1. uaie». 7 
 
 m ? For f'ilJ f * wT ^«^- thffc day J^ad been asked by them,' 
 ^t.^ Jp or the dat. twdwiiw see V. 81. % ^„ *"» 
 
 ,2. rursus: t.e after the first confusion. resLtentlbug • 
 
 •aa for abl. = « accordmg to,^ see V. 103, iii. complurlbu* 
 nostrl. : 'several of our men.' lt« : with p^rterritos. Lllnnt 
 ^droye them before them.' faga : see V. 93. prlus . . qu»m • 
 
 V. 1J7, ui. venlssent: see V. 156, iv. 
 > • 
 
 4. in: «among.' Aquitaati. : not part of the man's name 
 irener*„ata-:« belonging to (lit. bom^from^ etc. For thTabl". 
 SlJ' A- f™**'"!^ ^'i honorary title bestowed by the Roman 
 b^tS^^ ^""^ "^ foreigner^:) appellate.: freely "anSS 
 
 Before tratislating septions 5 and 6, study carefully V. 43 and 48 
 
 nnf' fh"™ ' 'r^^y ^I- ^^^^' *""•» = *^i™'' emphatic ; to bring 
 out the contrast with tpse trana 'whila he himself e^^ 
 Tolnerato : the cause of dejects. 
 
 •; Id: «tkis,' referringi to ceciditset. 
 tullt: scfrater. atqi^e : ^ and so.' 
 
 ' . ■ ■ - * 
 
 proello : see V. 93. o1»- 
 
 * /CHAP. 13. 
 
 * l'^»eque J»«i^ , ,, neque '^ ' no longer either . 
 V.32. 
 
 9 
 
 or. 
 
 ■IM: 
 
 see t. 80, 4.^ ab li. qaf; *frora merwho7''\ntuU.wnt'r^ 
 
 2. ex.peetare tto : 'while to wait'; ex««;c<ar6 is subject of 
 M^-- a-^"* ■ :. •"«•'««t»'' : ' until . . . sKould/ etc. {i. 156, 
 
 of f oSy. ' * ^ ■'^' ''• ^' ^' ""^ «^P^-ession, ' was a piece 
 
 .?■'•' ■, 'V .■■>";■., ^ . ^ ' 1 
 
 8. «insiitiim aaetorltibtfii : «hoW much prestige * (V 86 i i • so 
 
 h^wT'im^ ^*''*^ "^. «8h*f8''J'h *l^ over any day 8f 
 «iL /y-.^^)- '"•*= 'namely that'; the clause qLd . . 
 ^rnnt b^ m g ^n >. piu., it i nn u iiU Vi» (V. 198). ^^^iSi^U^J^^ 
 PH: on tt« veqr next d^,' l^i^^ th^Zrvp^ot^Tt Zy^ 
 
 ^H*i ^--^ 
 
 -i'' ■ 
 
 
 ■f,--i- 
 
 - 'J 
 I" V 
 

 "^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 W 
 
 262 
 
 \ 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 Wem: i,e., as narrated m ch. 12, 1. usl: * displayhig ' ; for 
 tense see V, 44, li. majoribns natu: ' elders '.(V. 102). , 
 
 5. Bimnl .• . . 8lmal: 'both . . . and at the same time^' lit.? 
 nt dloebatar : 'as was alleged. ' sut purgandl causa : 'to clear 
 themselves, see V. 119, iv. quod . . . commmssent : 'from the 
 charge of havmg,' etc.; for mood see V. 147. contra .. .dictum: 
 
 contrary to what hatd been agreed upon'; more lit. «otherwise 
 V ^^4^ ' ^'^' ®*«®*' petlBsent, possent : for mx)od see 
 
 '/^ 1 \ Pe"«8ent:=;)e«mse»i^(III. 66, a), gf quid possent: 
 freely, whatever they could,' lit. 'if they could (obtain) any- 
 tning ; quid depends on impetrare understood, de : 'in the 
 matter of, with' impetrarent. fallendo :, ^ by deceit' (V. 114, d). 
 
 6. Quos : 'these' ; subject of. oblatod Wsf) (V. 22, ii.). gavt- 
 
 44, ii.); for semi-deponents see III. 68, c. 
 «juod : conjunction, pert^i^tom esse : sc. 
 
 sns : ' rejoicing ' ( V. 
 castrls : see V. 93. 
 equitatumt 
 
 CHAP. I4w 
 
 1. tHpllol : the legion was usually drllwn up for batile in three 
 . Imps, four cohbrts in ^h© first and three in each of the others 
 
 mllllum : sc. pasmum (V. 105). prlus . . . quam : as in ch. 
 
 * ir *l^*d ageretur: «what was going on,' lit.? possent: 
 see v. 166, b. 
 
 ^ ■ , ■ ■' ... ■■. ^, ■■ ■ • " :*.■ ;■■• ■' "> ■■/ ' 
 
 2. omnibus rebus: *by the whole state of affairs'; explained 
 by the a^positive phrases et . , . siwrum. dlscessu : freely, 
 
 absence. suorum : referring, to the principibtM majoribimpie 
 natu of ch. 13, 4. nequ^ . . . dato : freely 'and having no time.? 
 
 • consllli babendl: 'for holding a council.' Notice the change 
 from gerundive to gerund,' probably due to desire for euphonV.^ 
 perturbantui': 'are at a loss/ lit. 'are (so) confused (as to be m 
 doubt), -we . . . an . . . an : 'whether . . . or . ^ . or*"' (V. 38). 
 
 * The three infinitjves.are skhjecta of prciestaret. ^^ . 
 
 3. o^w-js^as. • prlstlni dlel ; ' of the day before 'ff. 1^1^ JL 
 
 ^ j*. Quo loco : ♦ tihi8He,'*elerrirwr6o casern (V. Tm, «irt : 'tkwe 
 who'(V.473,rf): nistrls : for dat. see V. 52. 
 
 u WT? • ,^Jf** 3®"*. ^^^Wi^"- ' dome e^ceesseran^ : ' had left 
 
 .« home (V. 126). Thid showed that it vt&s not an inrwid for plun- 
 
 ^der, but a migrAtion. ^PlutAPch tells i\ja that this treachery on 
 
 ;:CaB8ar s parb was severely oensurbd at flome. 
 
 1 .■ .. . ," % " . * ■ 
 
 .. .^* ....,:.. . 'chap.. 
 
 Before tnmslftfclng sections 1 and 2, stu% oarefully V. 43 and 48. . 
 1. Germanl : ilios^ of, ch. .14, 4. audito, com rWrcat ; 
 ' wUuu Clw^.hoaid-. . . and BHW.' . ' 
 
 l( 
 
lying'; for 
 
 2). . ^^^^-_ 
 
 timei'lit.? 
 : ' to clear * 
 'from the -r 
 
 «;«iictuin: * ^ 
 
 'otherwise 
 mood see 
 
 possent: 
 
 »tain) any-. , 
 : 'in the 
 V. 114,d). • 
 
 i.). gravi- 
 [II. 68, c. ; 
 
 lease : sc. 
 
 e in three 
 h^ others. j 
 as in ch. 
 
 possent : 
 
 explained 
 i: freely, " 
 ijorily>is(]iie 
 : no time.' 
 le change , 
 
 euphony. ' 
 w to be in 
 
 87X L- . 
 
 1: 'those 
 
 'had left 
 for plun- 
 kchery on 
 
 PART IV. — NOTES ON CiESAR, BOOK IV. 
 
 263 
 
 ''3. ad nnnm : 'to a man,' lit.? ex 
 their dread of a formidable war, ' 
 
 2. rellqna : 'further,' lit.? Interfeoto : giving the reason for 
 »fiiga desperata (V. 50, vi.). timore. iassitndlne, vl : with oppreasi. 
 perlernnt : from pereo. < 
 
 ? ex . *. . timore : * after all 
 lit.? Explained by cum . . . 
 fuisset. nnmerns . . . mUlium : . c/. on, ch. 12, 1. cam, etc.: 
 trans, by a parenthetic clause beginning with 'for.' 
 
 4. iis: the envoys of ch. 13, 4-6. discedendi . ^ . fecit : 
 
 ' gave permission to depart. ' 
 
 5. supplicia crnciatnsque : 'vengeance and cruelty,' or hiore 
 freely 'a cruel punishment.' veriti : 'fearing' (V. 44, ii.). li^ 
 bertatem concessit 
 as prisoners. 
 
 i.e., he kept them with him, but no longer 
 
 * 
 
 CHAP. 16, 
 
 1. sibi ... transenndnm : 'that he would have to,' etc. Ula 
 fult Jnstissima : 'this was the most cogent,^ or 'the strongeat 
 was.' quod: 'that'; quod . . . vcluit is in apposition wit^ t<2a. 
 cum Tideret : ' seeing.'* u(; . . . venirent : (V. 27). rebus . . . 
 timere: 'be anxious for . . . safety (interests)' (V. 79). onm 
 intellegrerent : 'if Jihey understood,' lit. 'when they should un- 
 derstand'; for fut. indie, of Csesar's own thought (V. 160; 176). 
 et posse ^et and^re : ' was both powerful and daring enough^' 
 • had both the power and the courage.' 
 
 2. Aooessit etiam quod: 'besides bhis,' lit. Hbere was added 
 the fact that' (V. 198). quam commemoravi : ' which, as I have 
 stated, had crossed,' lit,? (V. 18, vi.). translsse :^ irarwitMe 
 (III. 66, a), proello : fordat. see V. 78, v. c. ie «am lis con- 
 Junxerat: 'had joined fhem,' lit. ? " 
 
 3. quos : the Sugambri. Intnllssent : see V. 175. slbl de- 
 •erent : ' that th^y should surrender to him ' ; for mood see V. 
 186, 1, c i. 
 
 '4. «e invito: 'i^ainst his wish,' 'without his leave,' lit. *he 
 (bemg) unwilling ' (V. 49). Oermanos . . , t ran sire : subject of 
 eautf underst(H)d with aequum. existimaret : for an original pres. 
 indie. (V. 60). our «ni . . . pont.niaret : ' why did he claim 
 that anything beyond the Rhine was under (lit. belonged to) his 
 sway or powar?' For the subjunctive siae V. 186, 1, b; for the 
 
 6^ «1^ wit^^Nrim-iUoneT' subject of all three plupcorfeots. -4iiiti 
 ■•e V. 86, iii. |»r«merentur : for mood see V. 147. 
 
 6. id facer» 'from doing so' (V. 22,. i.). occnpatlonibus 
 
 distinguish f rota mods» .fafpMaportHMjt ; 
 
 < 
 
I' 
 
 ;264 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 . !■■' 
 
 I 
 
 Met Kim take across' (V. 186, 1, c). For the two accusatives 
 see V. 69, IV. ud : lit. 'with a view to'; trans, 'to give assist- 
 ance, and hop^ for the future.' temporis : see V. 85, ii. 
 
 * '-/^ ««:*•«•. Caesar's, ad: 'among.' posslnt : 'they could'; 
 tor the change to primary sequence see V. 190, vi. 
 
 CCHAP. 17. . 
 
 ^1. neqae : . . stutaebttt : 'nor did he regard it consistent with 
 his own digmty or that of the Roman people ' (V. 83, ii.). 
 
 2. proponebatnr : « presented itself. ' l^ gibi oontendendam : 
 
 he must devote all his energies to that end. 'J . : 
 
 ii_ 
 
 '• ■ — ■ : '■"' ■ CHAP. 18*: ^-' ■■ '■ - ■i:'''^'- '' 
 
 .x.^\ '^*®'**^'* df««»n. qulbus : ' within ten days after,' lit. ' within 
 
 /t? oo" ^T "^^^"^ ^^'?^ ' <^- l^l)- *">*P*» «>•«* ■ * had begun ' 
 < V . 22, 111. ). opere : tlje bridge described in ch. 17. opere . . . 
 tradnoltar : ^jhe work is finished and the army is led across.' 
 2a ttd ntramqiie jpartem : 'at each end? 
 
 - 3. qaibus . . . peteiktlbus: 'on their asking for,' 'to their 
 request for, etc. This may be dat. of indirect object or .abl 
 absolute..^ ' ^ ■ :,. -v-;... ,.'■■:'■'<-' 
 
 4 ex eo tempore quo : ' ever since, ' lit. ? faija comparata : 
 
 had prepared for flight,' ht. ? hortantlbus lis ; modifying fiiqa 
 
 comparata (V.^, vi.) ; 'at the instigation of thosfe-gf the Tencteri 
 
 whom, etc., lit. ? ex Tenoteris : with qiioa (V. 'J^% iii ) in 
 
 V ;«S">'?*- '™ *^® solitude of the forests,' UtVl" Forciwe see 
 V. 127, m. 
 
 '"•-■■■,.,.- ■ ■, CHAP. 10. Iv ■'?•'"'■ . '' ■' ' '' '" . 
 
 1. f rnmentls : ' the crops. ' si : * in case. ' premerentur : for 
 an original fut. indic. (V. 62; 175). haecl 'as follows': with 
 naec sections 2 and 3 are in apposition. . 1 _ 
 
 2. fieri : ' was being built. ' more sao ,* «e "^. lOSE, ffi. ; wiOi 
 concUto hitfnto. In . . .partes: 'in . . . cfirectiona,' Ut.? utl 
 . •. . demlirrarent : following on the idea of telling ii^plied in 
 nunttos dtmisme (V. 191). Trans, 'instructing them to remove ' 
 possent : see V. 32. 
 
 • 3. hnno : sc. tdcum. medium : ' in the centre ' ; predicate adi. 
 agreeing with hunc (ioctim), and govemin^regionum (V. 86) ex- 
 speotare : depending on constitnuse. ibl :=hic of line 9 • omit 
 in trans. . 
 
 4. oonfeotls, oonsomptls, arbltratnii : titins. fnr aotiTA VOrbg 
 
 4i— ^ - J »* * * ■** ! 1 * > W i--mr-wm ■ > T^ ■ . . l . . - /t f - ft *■ -— _^ t ^ r ■■ ■ ■ ■■ _" ■■■■■ . ■■■■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■■. ■■■■ — 
 
 intiuJuoul b > ^ i w.' Iiinicot\/wit, tu alUlu BaiTb^ecr~qwagttm 
 
♦, 
 
 PART IV.— NOTES ON CiESAR, BOOK IV. 
 
 265 
 
 jf. 
 
 reram oanaa : «for which* (V. 173, 6). nt . . . injloeret f 
 
 namely^^ inspire the Germans with fear ' j for dafc. see V. 78, v. 
 %T TJS» clauses are in apposition with and explanatory of rebus 
 <V. 196^^profeotain : distinguish prOfectum horn prof ectum. et 
 «d landem. etc.: 'for (lit. with a view to) both prestige and 
 actual advantage.' , 
 
 CHAP. 20. 
 
 */ 1. exlgrna : emphatic from position, parte reUqna : equiva- 
 lent to a^ etd clause (V. 48) ; trans, 'although only a small part 
 . . . &nd although ... yet Caesar made an effort.' omnia: 'as 
 
 .* whok.' ad septentriones . vergrlt : 'lies towards the north. 
 hostibus snlbminlstrata : sc. esse; 'had been furnished to the 
 «nemy.' ' ^^ 
 
 2. «l: 'even if.' defloeret : 'did not enable him,' lit.? u»ul : 
 see V. 81. fore : the subject is contained in the clause si modo 
 cognovtsset: adlsset : for adiisset (III. 66, a). For the mood and 
 tense see V. 187, 6,^ i. genua homlnam : «the character of the 
 mhabitants.' qn^e bmnld: 'all of which,>lit. ? (V, 86, iv. a). 
 fere : with omnia. 
 
 . I' . 
 
 3. neqae . . . quisqnam : 'no : . . one,' lit.? Ulo : adverb. 
 lis : sc. mercatorihus. Gallias : ' GauL' The plural with reference 
 to the division of Gaul among the Belgse, Oalh and Aquitani, with 
 which Caesar begins his Commentaries on the ^alHo War : GdLlia 
 ^st omnis divisa in partes tres. * 
 
 4. vooatls: trahs. by 'although.' qaantaesaet . . . portns : 
 depending on reperire poterat. belli : 'in, war ' (V. 86). uteren- . 
 tup : 'they had.' qnl e#ta|t . . . portna : '.what harbors suit- , 
 able for . . exibted.' nlSSprnm : ' larger than usual ' ; the war- 
 galley^ and transports being, larger than the coasting vessels of 
 those regions, poterat : for the pperfect see V. 180, b. 
 
 *V :'' . •.'*-■ ■■ CHAP. 21. . - ..:. '.■,:i;^ .. • " 
 
 1. Ad hafeo oo^ikoaoenda : with, praemittit, not ^ith idoneuWi 
 prluaqaam face ret ; 'before making' (V. 156, 6). Idoneam : 
 
 ' a suitable person. ';■'.'"' ■■■■"^■ ■'<"- '7- ■.■:.'_' /■■''-'i-]:.i- ' " 
 
 Jrevertatar : ' to find outf 
 
 and re- 
 
 person. 
 
 2. xt% exiij^oratla 
 turn '(^.48). v 
 
 8. tm&i I tKe straits of D|per are meant >sf 
 
 4.'qiiam . . . olaaaem : 'tjhe fleet which.' ad: *^or.' Tene* 
 ticnm belitam : the year before (66 B.C.) the tribes on the north- 
 west coast of Gjwl^eaded bv thje Veneti, combined to redover 
 their liberty, but were def eatea by the Romans in a sea-fight. 
 
 fi dnre': irrogul 
 
 yi,^V.:08.« 
 
 35^ 
 
 ■# 
 
■" ,.'"' 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 :,■ /'S^ 
 
 "■,■ ' . 
 
 .#,- 
 
 
 » 
 
 ' 
 
 i- 
 
 
 ■, 
 
 
 
 
 i. 
 
 % 
 
 ' 
 
 '1 .. 
 
 ^ 
 
 •.... 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 ■ • 
 
 ! 
 
 t * 
 
 i 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 # 
 
 ^•m&f^'" 
 
 6. Qul»«ap^s:; Wfi. referring to legatifV. 50, iii. fn.). lHbe- 
 ^iiier pdllleltu» : '(and) having made li«^ promises,' lit. 1 (V. 
 
 ;^2€o, d). domam : see V. 126. una : a<i«fiP^ . 
 
 , ■ / ... ^ 
 
 7. superatls : referring to 'That day he overcame theNervii' 
 (57 B.C.), with which 'people the Atrebates w.ere allied, con- 
 stitaerut: 'had made.' Ibi : i.e., among th6 Atrebates. his: 
 of Gaul, not Britajin. magrnl liabebatar : 'waS valued highly' ; 
 for rna^m see Y. 88, i. , ; 
 
 . 8. qnas . . . otvitflttes: ' all the states he can, ' lit. 'the states 
 which h€fc can ' ; sc. adire. possit : see V . 175. udeut : with the 
 sam^ force -as ut adeat; so hortetur and nuntiet (Y . 186, 1, c, i.). 
 fldem sequantur i 'embrace the alliance,' depending on hortetur. 
 
 9. regrionibns: 'country.' qaantum, etc.: * so far as one 
 could who,' etc. ; more lit. ' so fajp/l^ppportunity could be given to 
 one ' ; for tantum factdtatis qxiantmn, ' according to such measure 
 of opportunity as cbuld be given.' aader«t : for mood see V. 32. 
 
 moratnr 
 
 CHAP. 22* 
 
 for tense see V. 153. de 
 
 oonslllo : ' for 
 
 gyious' conduct,' lit. ' with regard to the policy of previous 
 
 ley had joined the Belgian confederacy against Coesar 
 
 |;before, and the next year had been jn alliance with the 
 
 luod, etc. : 'in t^Hat, being uncivilized,' etc. consuetn- 
 
 Jee V. 90. . The 'custom' wa§, as Virgil, the Rom,an poet, 
 
 " 'The ways of pAce to proclaim, ^ • 
 
 > Meroy to show to the fallen, tl^ proud wi A battle to tame.' 
 
 fecissent: for mood' see V. 147\ -quel: joins exoiisareiit and 
 pollicerent^ir. Imperasset : see on pb^v0ssenty ch, G, 3. 
 
 2. satis: 'quite.' , post tergum : 'behind him.' has tantn- 
 larum, etc : 'atteijtion to such*trifling matters' (V. 85). Britan- 
 nltie : dat. (V. 78, v. c) ; meaning the expedition against Britan. 
 lisimperat : 'requires (or demands) of them' (V. 55, iii.). Qui-" 
 bus : "the hostages, eos : the Morini. in fldem : ' under his. 
 protection. ' " ' 
 
 3; ooa^tis ooptractfoque : ther former oi impressing into ser- 
 vice, the lat^ter of gathering to one place, qijot : 'the -number 
 which, ''lit. fas maifiy as.' quod, etc.: 'all the ships of war he 
 had besides, riit.-? (V. 86, i.).' This clause furnishes the object of 
 " dijttribuit. v : '' - ■ J- ' ; -: ■ ' .7 v» ; , - - : V ■ 
 
 . ' ' ( ■ ■■■» ■ ' ■ ■ ,.» • ■< 
 
 4. Hue aooedebant : * besides this there were,^ lit. * to this were 
 added, ab : 'at a distance of,' with millibus; or used adverbially 
 
 \ 
 
 ss'aw^y.' «euvbuntar quo ralnni, -Btc^iT 'wor^- d^tAittfid . v . 
 
 *4- 
 
PART IV.-— NOTES ON CAESAR, BOOK IV. 267 
 
 and prevented from being able,' lit.?' Q^u> mmt«, may also be 
 imtten as one word, possent : see V. 139, a. 
 
 J^«t~"t:";m.""' «°™""*'™ ^"^ *' ••»" ««™«ng with 
 
 CHAP. 23. , ' , . , 
 
 \JL /*'"* vlgrUl» : the time from sunset to sunrise was divided 
 into four equal watches {mgiliae), and the time from sunrise to sun- 
 set into twelve equal hours (Wae), the length of each varying with 
 the season «olvlt: sc. naves, nlterlorem : 'farther,' k?., up 
 the coast. The eiactleca^es are unknown. V \2J^ 
 
 ;r.?f^l^ •*""*'*?' • ; • ,»^Bp«*»"at«m : 'as these carried out their 
 mstrubtiona^too slowly^^fl. ? For tardius see V. 98, vi. The 
 result, was that Caesar reached Britain cum primis (not ctcm omni- 
 di^pkyed.'"^' *^P*»«**^« «»P*«« «'™^*a8: 'the armed forces 
 
 S^haec : 'as follows '; more fully explained by atqiie . : .'con- 
 hnebqtur. ita anguste. etc.: 'so closely bordered.' FManv 
 editipns read angmtis (with montibm), meaning ' steep,' or 'close 
 to tne sea. J * 
 
 4. dam oonvenirent 
 
 phould,'etc. (V. 155, b). 
 
 6. quae flerl vellet : 'what he wished done' (V. 21) 
 nult . . admlnlstrftrentnr : 'instructed them to do everything 
 (promptly) at the signal and at the (proper) moment, as the science 
 ot warfare, and especially naval warfare, required, seeing that this 
 (latter) was subject to rapid and uncertain changes.' ut ratio 
 . . . ut Tea : vt= 'as,' and is repeated with each subiect. nostti- 
 
 trr"*iniZT^ '^t7- V^' ^-.^"^ 17^- «t quae. sc. mJmmae 
 m, inasmuch, as these'; ut might be omitted, and merely 
 Heightens the causal force of quae and the subjunctive (V 171 i ) 
 ftionult admlnlgtrarentur : with the same force as montik ut 
 admv^mtrarentur -ct. ch. 21, 8 (V. 186, 1, c. i.). ad nutum It 
 ftSew*™**"* '' referring to celerem, the latter to imta- 
 
 6. lltore :. abl. absolute ; trans, by 'off/ , 
 ■■.'•,-•; .'■':• CHAP. 24. 
 
 ^ 1. quogrenere: 'the sort of force that,' lit. 'which kind (i.e., 
 of ^ wamors), referring to both equitatu and essedarm (V. 173 -^ 
 n.). oonsuerunt: cf. on ch. 6, 1. «opll. : see V. 103, 'u! 
 egredi prohlbebant : see on ch. 4, 3. ' "* 
 
 : depending on 
 ad: 'until.' 
 
 exspectavit; * till' 
 
 Ino- 
 
 2. hag : referrfog to what foHowa. »t,i 
 
 Vs, 
 
 lit.? multibus autelta 
 
 nnn 
 
 «i^* 
 
 detUiend^m erat : ' while the sol- 
 

 • 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 «r. 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 -> 
 
 
 
 ^" ,-v 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 • 
 
 V 
 
 f 
 
 « 
 
 
 '• 
 
 « 
 
 
 1 / 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 '-■; . ■''■-, . > 
 
 
 4 
 
 ^ ■■■ 
 
 
 .""■>_."" 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 >«• 
 
 «J t 
 
 ^ « 
 
 
 * 
 
 ^:;-# 
 
 » 
 
 - , 
 
 
 1. 
 
 ' 
 
 • 
 
 •! . O 
 
 *: 
 
 ■ilSsj.' 
 

 
 ■ 
 
 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^1 
 
 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^r^ / 
 
 1 
 
 I ■ 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 BHHHHJI^ 
 
 ^^^^^^ ' 
 
 
 ■■-■•/ ■ /■ . >> '.'•*..■ -■, - " 
 
 
 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 ^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 ■ . ■' i '.! ,v "' '.''■'. ^ . i . ' 
 
 
 :■ ' ■■: :• .::''^-'^ :.".:•..;-.■ '■•■..r^.v' "/ 
 
 ^^^^^^^^^^^^r 
 
 ' ' -. '.'"«■' •■'ifj'-'i'l ■' .' '"'W'-.. "■ . l... ■■, ,■>■'. : '. ' 
 
 
 !■■ !-,*'■ ■ ' '■ ■: ■ ■■' ,-■*■'' *■.',■'■'" 
 
 ^^^^^^r^ 
 
 '" '■, '■■-■• ' -. . '' " •. y 
 
 
 '■■ -'^^^^*'- '•*■■' 'v'ii''.' ■■'," ■.'■'""". .. ". ■ ■, 
 
 ^^^^^^v^ 
 
 
 
 .;: ^'^E*V'..3i' ,- :'■ ■' ' '■■:-■ '" ■: " :,. 
 
 pp^'^'" :■'-■'- 
 
 " : ■■' *■■,■; • --'^ -J.'^ 
 
 ■ « 
 
 
 * <* ' ' - ' - ■' ' 
 
 
 L ' " ,-■.■•■■■ ' ■ ■ „ 
 
 "•,..*.'■ ; " . ' ■ ■■ 
 
 
 ■ •■ . ' : ' ■ '■ ' 'I 
 
 :. '^ "*'."■ '^^■'' ■ '^ " ^ ■'- 
 
 
 t . 
 
 * * 
 
 -■ 
 
 
 
 
 ..-■"■•■■ ' ^ 
 
 ■ ■- '-; -*j^ - % ■■■ ' '■> .- .-^ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 
 
 
 ■ , . . . ...,..,, ,^- ' , * ■ .: 1 — - ■ 
 
 ,. ■■//■■■: . ..■■.:■' .■ «i 
 
 
 *, . - 
 
 ■ ' ■ t ■ ■ - 
 
 
 ..■■ ' . ^ §, 
 
 . ■■-■ '■ ".-•■ ..■-■" .- > ■ - ■^-. 
 
 
 
 ■■■,■•--,* . • ■ . . ' , 
 
 V 
 
 ■*,■■.■■ ■ " 1 
 
 ♦ '_^ 
 
 
 .-'■.■,• 
 
 - . . , ■•-■ - . , - . ■ ■ • - "^ 
 
 
 f « 
 
 ■• * ■ 1 ^ . - 
 
 
 ■ • - - „■ !» 
 
 :; .''.-■, ">^--; ■ ■ ■■:'..'■■ ■ ' . ',■:■'■ 
 
 
 ■^ .;■':■- -v.'-" ■:; ■■ •' „■■ ,.. . / '• t 
 
 
 
 ■-■■"■■■ .',. • ' ;. , ■' ■ • / '' -^ ' 
 
 ■ ■ " ■ ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 • \ ■ ■■,■■,. ..,.,., , , , _, ^ 
 
 "■^- ■ ■. -> .■■ .. ■■:' "■ ■•■■ .'■/ 
 
 
 ,'■ -.-. ■ ■ ■■ ■■ . ■ ..-t.'^ 
 
 * 
 
 ' 
 
 ■ - •• '.■ ■"■ ■'.■■. - -:■ ■ -1, ./ 
 
 '--' ' t ^ :"'.■■ 
 
 r 
 
 ,'■■•:'•' '". "'■■ ■'■ . 4 ,. ' ■. ' i 
 
 
 ■-%', .■ 
 
 

 IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 / 
 
 // 
 
 5^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 /. 
 
 o 
 
 4^. 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ,>, ' 
 
 r 
 
 ■ A 
 
 
 MMMlHnMliiM 
 
 lb Sia 
 
 1.1 
 
 11.25 
 
 125 
 
 Itt 
 
 US 
 
 s; 1^ 110 
 
 u mil 1.6 
 
 II 
 
 
 rs-'"*^ 
 
 /- 
 
 '^ 
 
 ■-^ 
 
 
 .■^->^.- 
 
 ^W'-:^' 
 
 "Hiotographic 
 
 Sciences 
 
 ^ Ccporatta • 
 
 " jpi^" 
 
 M^TMAINStRMt 
 
 WIUm.N.Y 14SM 
 
 (71*)I73'4S03 
 
 ''^ I\ ^ 
 
 ^^A 
 
 

 
 
 'i^ 
 
 •'■"-:■ V^- 
 
 ■^ . 
 
 ^**-, 
 
 «» 
 
 .1 . 
 
 y 
 
 M 
 
 V-VV- 
 
 y 
 
268 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 t2^. , ^^F ^'^ (^•^^>' ^«' *^« <J»«^« «e« V. 120. i. 
 IffnoWg lools: 'who were unacquainted with the ground'; iifc. 
 ♦the ground (being) unflcnown' ; abl. absolute (V. 49^ So W 
 dttumantbus, «ppre..!. : d»t. agreeing with tniit^iftSa. . ^ 
 
 3. cum mi: 'whereas the«lnemy.' ex arldo : modifies con- 
 
 ground, lit ? Cf. on tgnotu locu, section 2. In.aefaotos : 'who 
 were trained (to this).' oonjloerent, Inoltarent : see V 151, fa 
 
 4. arenerls: see V. 90 eadem . . . quo : for agreement see 
 ^shiw!' ^= »« ««« V. 174. utl, «tebiHitur :' display 'Z 
 
 ■ ' ■ *• ■'"'.■, 
 
 i I. n»ve. : subject of remmH, incUari and con«*i^Mi. qaaram • 
 whose, inusltatlor : ' less familiar,' i.e., than that of th?n<M«; 
 oneranae. et motus, etc. : ' and (whose) movements were qui^ 
 nlflfT-K ''V l?""- •P«'*™™ l.«t«- : i-e., the right side, un 
 Cif^ !l -^ «t'^^^- *'*•• ""''• '* «»«»*«uvre which/ Ufc.? 
 
 2. remornm mota : the Britons used sails only with their lanz» 
 vessels, paulum modo : 'but only a little.' 'J"*^/"!?. 
 
 fS^ n-.^ A 3 «)• «* • . . «venlret: see V. 27. ea re.' 
 his (^it that) undertaking.' ,egumt : see V. 79. • ZJ^ 
 
 vultl. see III. 4S. praestltero : trans, freely by future : for 
 force of future |)erfect see V.184j.i. «-t*™, lor 
 
 4. voce niatrna : *in a loiid voice' (V. 103). 
 
 5. inter .e: 'one another,' lit.? (HI. 62, e). ne .*. . admit- 
 teretur : 'not to incur 'lit.? (V. 27). dedeoi. : i.e., ihebS^, 
 the eagle, «nlver.l: 'ma body'; section 6 shows that he i» 
 
 -^)eakmg only of those on the same ship as the standard-bearer. 
 
 f».!; ^"' "t™' !^- *. * r^®** ^^"^ '"* *^® "^*''®»*^ 8^»P8 saw them, 
 theL* ' ***® "^^*'^*' ^^^^P* they saw 
 
 . 1. P9«natum e«t : see V. 56. alln; «Ha ex navl:' «tl^ 
 teen from the different ships,' lit. '[one man from one ship and! 
 another from another ship.' For tliis idiom see V. 168, a auU - 
 buMamque . . . oeoarrerat : ' whatever . . . they fell in with.' 
 
 .rrtrif, Hoction 3, and nu<M i jwu!tTaf, aectiou i. - 
 
 ~»ff* 
 
 ^% 
 
 >■ 
 
 ^ 
 
V. 120, i. 
 nd'; lit 
 So impe- 
 
 ifies con- 
 with the 
 *b: 'who 
 . 151, fn. 
 
 ment see 
 splay' <»• 
 
 nt^nm : 
 
 (hen^Mjg* 
 » quicker 
 side, un- 
 *»' liM 
 
 ,eir,lai||^ 
 
 f 
 e eagle- 
 
 ea re« : 
 Inqalt : 
 III. 37. 
 are; for 
 
 admlt- 
 
 i loss of 
 at he is 
 krer. 
 
 w them» 
 (ley saw 
 
 i: 'thV 
 
 . qui- 
 1 with.' , 
 
 PAET IV.— NOTI^S ON CESAR, BOOK IV. 261) 
 
 plure. "St *-more.^' ^' ^"^ ''^<=^»^^^ebant and conjtciefc^n*. 
 3. nnlver«o. : ' the main body ' ; bpposed to singvlares. 
 
 raL'Sw^^ ^O'l) •^—fj^ti.: 'with^ their com- 
 'aV distence' (V 98 vi" "f^'** ' '^"* • • • «of longln« : 
 Cis usual gild LS,'' l5f, '^F'of SaT-t ^O^.^^ "^^^^^^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 CHAP. 27. 
 
 -^ 
 
 1. proello : see T. 99. dataros • sc WV 1« ^ \ 
 ^ two words. ImperaBset-: cf. ch 22, 1 ^ " ' ^* «"*«««• ' 
 
 lit^* erSi'in """h' '""^^;"" ^ «^fced before, was\ent,' eto., 
 freely, 'as.' ^ ^ ' ^' "******= *" ^*^® capacity of; or^ 
 
 ranVn:""""*" ""^ "«■? -" " ■ «nTeo„#ru•(V• 
 for"-. ""Tn'd g"e UP' l1u".?i: ' ^' "^i '""""■«' "<"■" "»<• 
 datura, (V 41) '^' : ^*" •*"" »1 «"«««am ia relative to 
 
 thlirZjVoJtrl"' ""^™"- -.'- Hh, country,; .•..., 
 
 y^. HlMrebna: *by this means,' lit.? post diem 
 •Tliree days after he came' ^die qluirl 
 
 ^vj r 'i£ I^ gg g^l-^ ^? 
 
 "tiwT0K6"dl 
 see on ch. 9, 1. 
 
 yentam : 
 
 ^omini 
 
 ••t v«iitam : see 
 
 si -I 
 
 ^ 
 
^ 
 
 270 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 ■ 
 
 * v 
 
 V.' 66. naves : subject of aolverunt^ a rare use. demonBtratum 
 est : * mention has been made.' snperiore : in ch. 23, 1, called 
 ulteriorem. Tento : see "V. 103. v 
 
 2. vlderentur: *were in sight.' posset: see V. 29. So 
 referrentur and dejicerentur. Inferlorem : i.e., towards the S.W. 
 propiu« oocasnm : of. on ch. 9, 1. sul : ' to themselves ' (V. 86). 
 
 • 3. quae tamen, etc.: 'and as these had nevertheless (i.e., in 
 spite of the danger) cast anchor, and were filling,' etc.; or tamen 
 may apply to the whole sentence, and be opposed to the words just ^ 
 preceding, 'however as these.' neoessario . . . profeotae . . . ^^ 
 petierunt : *they were compelled to put out . . . and make for,' -, 
 lit.? ad versa noote : *in spite of the darkness,' lit. 'the night 
 meeting tbeni ' (V. 46). - ■ 
 
 "-:■'''- ■ , /;- ■ - CHAP. 20.:-" 
 
 ' 1, noflte : that of August 30-31, 65 B.C., according to astronom- 
 ical calculations, ^sset : ' there was ' (V. 31). qui dies : 'a time 
 which. ' marltlmos : 'on the sea.' aestus maxlmos : 'very 
 high tides ' ; our sjiring-tides. oonsuevlt : ' is wont,' or trans, hf 
 > usually.' Inoogrnltnm : the tides at the straits of Dover are 20 
 or 30 feet high, tho^ in the Mediterranean insignificant 
 
 2. uno : 'one and the same.' naves . . . oomplebat: to 
 ke^p the Latin order trans, by the passive voice. So onerarww 
 . . . ajliciabat. qulbus : 'in (lit. with) ^hich.' transportan- 
 dum . . . curaverat: ^he had had . . . brought over'<^y21). 
 ad: 'at.' neqne ulla : 'and no,' lit.? ^dmlnlstrandl^^pil- 
 andl : the former referring to thqse on board, the lftttei|||p.ose 
 onshore, admlnlstrandl : Bc. naves. ' 
 
 8. maffnii, etc. ; * great alarm inevitably (or as was inevitable) 
 . arose throughout,' etc. ; lit.? ' Id quod : lit. 'a thing which ' ; id is 
 in apposition with the clause rhagna . . . /odfte eat, and quod i»? 
 subject of occtdei* (V. 173, d). exeroltus: for case see V. 85. i 
 
 4. neqne allae : trans, by 'no other.' possent : see V. 32. 
 omnibus oonstabat : ' it was generally agreed ' ; mor^ lit. ' agreed 
 among all'; for dat. see V. 80, 6, ii. .Iilemarl oportero : 'that 
 they must winter' (V. 66X. 4n hlemem : 'for the winter.' r 
 
 :>Ui^--. 
 
 CHAP. 304 
 
 4. This long sentence may be conveniently broken into four iii^ 
 English, viz., at collocuti, transportaverat and producers ; tran^jkS^ 
 if the Latin reeA collocnti mnt; intelkgebant et cognoscebant ; ittiqw 
 dxixer^mt; nam co'r\/ideba/nt. prlnolpes : subject of dttacenint, seo»i 
 tioft tf . im*yae: 'w i t h o n e an o Ui e r. ' «oi>w»nt» d e esse ; frooly, 
 •that the Romans were withouVJit-? ««ifce; referring to caitro*) 
 
 ^M^ 
 
 C 
 
tratam 
 
 L, called 
 
 V 
 
 29. So 
 leS.W. 
 (V. 85). 
 
 (t.e., in 
 r tamen 
 •rds just 
 
 rao • • • 
 
 ike for/ 
 
 itronom- 
 * a tim« 
 : 'very 
 
 TKDB.hj 
 
 )rare 20 
 
 evitable) 
 li ' ; id is 
 quod is* 
 r.86. 
 
 e V. 32. 
 , 'agreed 
 ^: ^that 
 
 o four in 
 trans, as 
 U; tMgtte 
 runt, 860- 
 n-frtBoly,- 
 
 ■\1%- 
 
 . UL\: 
 
 PART IV.— NOTES ON C^SAB, BOOK IV. ^ 
 
 rtim. hie aniriiBtiora: «all the smaUer': 
 tracted for thw reason ' (V. 101, ii- c). 
 
 more lit. *more con- 
 
 2 opti^^ faotu: 'the best thing to do'; for supine see 
 
 Jeotsof^ TJ^: .^.T^»»^^- PrbWbere, produceJe : sub- 
 jects ot ««««-Jem- .the campaign.' superatU : trans, by 'if' 
 { V . 4»;. bo tnterdwns. oonfldebant : see V. 146. 
 
 ^ * atdiuS^^^r^r^'i^rSI^^T' ""I'l^'^'^ ,^ «!^ 'Change of 
 i.e., to the cSist ^*^ ' • ^^«''-«•'^ = **^ briDg down,' 
 
 ■ CHAP. 3t. ' , 
 
 ^-^liih ** «^**»*" ^*^»»"» : 'from what had happened to his shins ' 
 lit.? ex eo, quddrr^'from the fact that' (V^ im\ r^L S^* 
 
 resources, comparabat : • he proceeded to secure ' (V. l&^), 
 
 8hfp8*'Xch''.;eeT"Wr'"'"'''"'^'**^^^^^*^^^^^ «^** 'Of the 
 «or?ir ! ' f .' "^' ^ ****»••• ^- «« «« subject Of cixm. 
 
 jp<yrtmk. re. : 'purpose.' erant : for mood see V. 176, ^ ^ """^ 
 
 -€f^ch 2?2 :.*^r*"*"*' ^r^' = 'asthe soldiersworiced,'lit.f 
 see V. 33, V. effoclt : notice the change of tense (V 180 c) 
 
 ■^ '''''■■ CHAP, 32U * , ,:;;,; 
 
 1. gernntur: see V. 163.* ' e, «msuelttdUie • «as usual • 
 frumentatum: the supine (V. 116). ad- "un'f^" w ' 
 
 Lr^=a^^^*^r''"*V^^«^.f theU^^nder aSdlprrn': 
 *Tfi,n «.• f°'' ^''P^*'"'"» ^*'^ P»^«ding words, homlnum • 
 of the natives.' ventltaret :' kept coming ' (III 74 6?«-^ 
 eonsnetudo ferret: 'thAn usua^ ' than was cu^toma^^^^ 
 •than custom brought' (V. 175) in «« customary, ht. 
 
 visible iytS^recti^Uici'Tw'A^^^ ™ 
 
 2. Id, qno^erat! 'as was actually the case,' lit? Id U ar 
 
 loZi^'i^v^l^ru''^^^ "^- • • ^^" '"^-"«^" 
 
 auanl'.'fKfV" fu' «"»*«"»: 8c. «Me. In .tatlonlbn.: «on 
 guard ; the plural because of the four gates of a Roman camo ?n 
 
 -n^fh«r™ 7T**r^= 'tot^ketheirplaceonguardVthTXular 
 
 iVate'*^ar'*1«".r^*"«- .u'*"^V'^ thSiwe^tercK. 
 in a legion, armarl : ♦ to arm themselves ' (V. 164, iv.) 
 
 3. panlo 
 
 JLangl 
 
 JUL 
 
 ferta : trans, by • as, ' giving the rea«m for 
 
 Homa Ut il e d iatanon* fV — Oft — —■.v 
 
 
 ^:. 
 
 I ' 
 
i 
 
 I 
 
 f-.. 
 
 272 
 
 PBIHAR7 LATIN BOOS. 
 
 '-,;"»»■" ■ ' ■. -■/■■■■ 
 
 ' ' ■ "■ ■ ^*' --' ■' 
 
 5. dlspersoB : sc. noatroi; trans, by a • when ' clause ; so depositis, 
 
 occvpcUos. InoertlB ordlnlbas ; giving the reason for »eriMr6d- 
 
 vera/nt. The pluperfects in sections 4 and 5 tell what had happened 
 
 prior to Caesar's «rrival in section 3. 
 
 CHAP. 83. 
 
 c 
 
 ^ 
 
 :»'"■% 
 
 _ 1. hoc: *as follows.' ex easedli pngnae : 'of chariot fight- 
 iiig'; see V. 85, iv. fn. per omnes partes : 'in all directions.' 
 Ipso terrore eqaltam : ' by the very (or mere) terror caused by 
 their horses'; for gen. see V. 84. ordines : i.e., of their oppo- 
 nents, eqaltam: i.e., their own. Osssar had no cavalry with 
 him. Inainaaverant : see V. 182, c. * 
 
 2. ita : 'in such a way.' liii : i.e., those who had dismounted 
 to fight on foot. -^ habei^nt : see V. 29, 
 
 3. tanttlnd efflotupt : * become so expert,^ lit. 1 loco : 'ground.' 
 per : 'along.' *^ 
 
 ■'' . .' ■■'"'■■'-'■ .1 • , ■ ■ CHAP. 84. ■ ■ - ' '"■■■'-■■:''--■■ ■ V-:"-'-' - 
 
 1. qaibas rebaa: abl. of means, perturbatla noatrls: may 
 
 be dative with OAixUiwn Mit, or abl. absolute, kiovltate : trans, 
 by ' because of ' (V. 96). adventn : see V. 130. 
 
 2. qao facto :' in spite of this,' more lit., 'although this was 
 done ' (V. 48). ad : ' for,' depending on cUiewm,. «uo loco : ' on 
 his own ground ' (V. 127, ii.). brevi.. . . IntermUso : 'after a 
 short interval,' lit. ? * . ? ; ' < 
 
 ,3. haeo: referring td the whole incident. oooupatU: ibmis. 
 by 'while.' qui erant reltqal : 'those who remained,' i.e., the 
 Britons spoken of in ch.^32, It'pa/ra . . . renumeret (V. 173, a). 
 dlsoeaserant : i,e. , from their jiomes to their strongholds, 
 
 4. secatae aant : * there followed ' (V. 12, iv,), . oontlnerent,. 
 prohlberent: for mood see V. 32, 
 
 5. qaanta : 'what' or ' how favorable. ' aal Ilberandl: see on 
 oh. 13, 5. expullaaent : cf. on adiaaei. ch. 20. 2. .. / 
 
 expullaaent : cf. on aditafit^ ch. 20, 2, 
 CHAP. 85. 
 
 
 1. Idem . . . fore: 'that the same thing would happen.' at 
 , . . efragrerent: 'namely, that . , . wpuld escape,' in apposi- 
 fion with i(km (V. 197). «1 : * even [f eaaent palal : for mood 
 and tense cf. on adiaaet^ oh. 20, 2. dlotam eat : see Y . ,66. 
 
 2. dlatlaa ; 'an^ longer.' i.e.. than the baginnin g of the hk.ttla. 
 
 ?T. ; ■ 
 
 «■' 
 
Oc 
 
 ^l 
 
 'PART IV.— NOTBS ON C^SiB, BOOK IV. 273 
 
 '^^'f^T^ : . . .o«olderunt : sc. nostn. turito spatlo: freely, 
 as far, lit. ',within (t.e. , over) as great a spac^ ' (V.JL271 anmil 
 tarn . . . effloere : 'as their sped and strength aUowed,' or ♦as 
 their rumimg. jpo^^ers^ out^(a case of hendiadys), lit. ? Omms 
 -raie oijauuu«»nfJMli^T»««MM of endurance. , 
 
 2. Hlg numerum duplloavlt : * from these he required double 
 the number,' lit., «for these he doubled,' etc. die -^the time ' or 
 • the season ' ; for gender see III. 62, c. fn. 2 propJnqi» 1 
 navlbns: trans, by 'as.' «pmqua . . . 
 
 ^3- 
 
 mediam nootem : ♦ midnight ' (V: 86, iv. 6)." 
 
 :ii 
 
 ,4. quae : the ships, ex . . . duae : we should say * two of 
 toe transports, lit.? qnos rellqul: 'as the others,' lit. «which 
 toe other (crews reached)'; r^itgttt, masc., by sense construction 
 
 (V. 13,. N.B.). tnft.»:t.c., towards the S.W, i 
 
 - .' ' ■ ' .'■ - 
 
 nf ^«.,?J?*^"" ^*^**°l- S® ^^"^ J""^* mentioned, ea.tra : that 
 of Sulpicius Rufus, ch. 22, 6. prc^pwl«»ng: 'on setting 6ut' 
 
 1L« ' iV f T ''^'*^- "*»» /*A ™»»»o : 'with not a vbry 
 V^iVkI I •«-••. nollent : 'if they did not wish to be killed ' ' 
 (V, 176) J for iese, see V. 22, v. 
 
 ; \*?o*^f "**'*"* • *i«ans^rtotheshouting.' -liomliium: as 
 in en. J^, 1. 8ai8 an^Uio : ' to aid his men, ' lit. ? (V. 81. ) 
 
 * 3. ampiias hori» : «more than,' etc. JTorw may be the »bl 
 
 H,r,«°2Sr^\Ti^rH"J;v*^ «^**? ^^(^' 98), or the abl. of 
 time withm which (V. 131), uninfluenced by amp«tt«;.cf. on ch. 
 11,1. panels: 'but a few." " 
 
 t^ PoBtea qnaih: answering to. primo, section 1; ireneiwllv 
 imtten as one word, 
 
 '/'■■' -CHAP. -38. ■■ ■^'■^^ ''.-c; ■"■-■■■" y- '■r;; , 
 
 T !*. ■*««"»*«■.: trans, by singular ; the plural if, accordinff to 
 lAtin idiom, due to the plural miwdwrn (III. 53, c, 4) quo 
 haberent: * had no place to which to retreat, ' more lit., 'hadiiot 
 whither to retreat (V 26, i.). quo . . . u.l : trans, immediately 
 After jxUudnm, to which. qw> refers. For the agreement of quo see 
 V. 13, 1. perfngio : ' as a place of refuge ' (V. 66, v.). faerant 
 UBI. see Y. 182, i. In poteatatem vehernnt : 'fell into the 
 hands,' lit.?. , " 
 
 3. «Annea: noirii In silvaa : cf. on ch. 18. 4. •- 
 
fe^d 
 
 .■a^.v 
 
 ■ 
 
 1 
 
 
 I 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 
 
 l 
 
 t—^ 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 !*• I 
 
 
 .J 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 - 
 
 ! 
 
 J 
 
 .1 
 
 274 
 
 PRIMAKY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 *^.« 
 
 5. His rebus : referring 
 paign. ex litterls Caes» 
 
 the whole of the summer's cam- 
 
 thanksgi^ng' celebrated b/ solemn ; tecrifice in the temples at 
 Kome. At the end of th»^mpaign two years before, Ceesar had 
 written. for these acts a thanksgiving for fifteen days was d©-> 
 creedi an honor, which up to that time no one had received " 
 
 A, 
 
 X*\ 
 
 V 1. oonsiiUfcus : see V. 49. dlsoe^ens ab : «on leaving.' ital- 
 lam. the province ^of Cisalpine Gaul (GaUia dterior), in which 
 Cwsar spent each wmter, attending to its administration, quam 
 plnrimas possent : sc. aedificare ; «as many as they could' (V 
 174, 1.). For mood of possent see V. 175. utl a^Oifloandas 
 oarai'ent : * ^ have built ' (V. 121). «eoinoandas 
 
 2. Ad: 'for.' onerandl: trans, by *m.' ft»olt hnmlliores : 
 sc. eas. quam qaibns : 'than those which'; sc. eas(V. 98 iii ) 
 nostro marl: the name Mediterranean was not then in use 
 id eo magls: 'all the more so'; Ut. *(he does) that the more 
 because of this.' mtniis magrnos : 'smaller.' transportan- 
 dam: for agreementsee V. 12, 6, ii. reliquls marlbSs : the 
 various parts of the Mediterranean were given separate names bv 
 the KOmans. ^ 
 
 ; 3. aotuarlas: pred. adj.; naves actuariae were swift gallevs. ' 
 impelled by oars as well as by sails, fieri : for infin. pass, with 
 
 'TwhiclTeld.? ' ''"• "^"""^ "* '""" '• '^^' ""^^^ P"^^««'' «*• 
 
 Hispania : Spain waf rich 
 
 4. Ea quae sunt: 'what is.' 
 iron and material for ropes. 
 
 5. Ipse : ir( contrast with the doings of the legati of sectioii I 
 oouventibus : the governor of a province was also its supreme 
 judge. Iiiyrioum : another of Ceesar's three provinces, flniti. 
 mam: t.c., to the.Pmwte. audlebat : 'he heard'; the tenso 
 implies that the news came more than once. 
 
 6. imperat: cf . on Bk. IV, 82, 2, — , -^ - 
 
 t. nihil: 'none,' lit.? publico oonsillo : fts opposed to the 
 work of irresponsible individuals, demonstrant : coordinate with 
 mirttmt, not with duwuml. »iiiuibus ratl onib nt ; *W~merfW^^ 
 
 \ _-■ 
 
 
 -■:■-;":.; 
 
 • 
 
 -: ■ - = - 
 
 
 
 ■JX"-- . •.. -■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "• . 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 ' «^ 
 
 'l 
 
 ' , 
 
 
 ■ ■ 
 
miner's cam- 
 
 4 i 
 
 PART ly.— NpTES ON C^SAR, BOOK V. 276 
 
 -,^1*^:J^^\ .***"*= ^"^^ gender see on Bk. IV. 36, 2. 
 rtnt : they do,' lit.? For mood and tense see V. 192. ; 
 
 9. ad diem : * by the day (specified), ' dat : * he. appoints. ' 
 
 feoe- 
 
 . . and finds.' Btndlo: 
 •(although) amidst/ or 
 sc. generis naves ; trans. 
 
 '■■ ^--' :' ^'-^- ''-CHAP, a..- ■ 
 
 v 2. olronitls . . . inveolt : 'he visits 
 with instnictas. in gnmma Inopla ' 
 freely * although thei;e was/ etc. onjng . «;. yencT^ na 
 freely which, as though the object of demomtravimus. lonira. • 
 80. naw». neque muitnm, etc.: ' and that they are almost ready 
 to be launch^'; lit. «and that it is not far from this thJt.' etc 
 ^V. W», c). dlebaa: see V. 131. .^ 
 
 3.^Colla«datI« : more emphatiTtKan Zatwiaiw. ne^otlo : see 
 V. 78, V. c. qnld fieri vellt : cf. on Bk. IV. 23, 5. omnes : so/ 
 naves, portum Itlam; the exact locality is unknown. mU- 
 JlumrseeV 87. hwlcrel: 'for this purpose,' i.e., for bringing 
 
 . ^4. «onollla: Caesar regularly established these councils or assem- 
 blies among the conquered tribes, whom he thus kept in official 
 relations with himself, venlebant, parebant : see V. 180. h 
 imperlo : ^ see V. 52. 
 
 -'"',.■■■■■■;'*-■■ ■.'■■■.. Chap. 3. ■ ; ■ • '■■;^'-'^ " , •" .■ 
 
 i. plarlmnm: adverb, supra: Bk. III. speaks of 'the IVe- 
 veri, who are next to the river Rhine. ' The last words of chap. 2 
 show why he dwells on) their jposition here. ^y ^*^ 
 
 2. Inter se : 'with each other,' lit.? (III. 62, e.)^* , , ^**^ 
 
 3. alter : here ' the latter,' lit. ? coynltam est : see V." 56. 
 •e . . . futaros: with confirmavit. in officio: 'true to their 
 ^^"^t l^V J*"P°^ :=: objective gei^ (V. 85) ; trans, by 
 
 4. cohere : depending on instituit, and connected by (iis)mie 
 with pamre. per: 'by reason of . ' Ingentl ma«nltudlne : modi- 
 
 v^«S^.^r'/^ 5 ^^! ^°'^''^ ""^ ''^ appositive adj. ; freely ' which is of 
 vast extent and,' etc. medics : see V. 86, iv. 6; 
 
 6. Olngetorlgls : cf. on populi, section 3. de snls prlvatlm 
 rebus petere : «to seek their own private advantage,' lit. ? prl- 
 vatlm : the position makes it almost equal to the adj. pnvatis. 
 oivltatl : see V. 79 ; m contrast with sitis privatim rehus. pos- 
 •ent : for mood see V. 147. -^. > 
 
 ^ - jjeie noli 
 
 m«(V.191), l4elreo: explained by ^w /. . laberetnr. quo ^ 
 
276 
 
 PRIMART^ LATIN BOOK. 
 
 ^; 
 
 ■•V 
 
 ingkirreT^: '""^: ^»-"*-' <".«.— «bl. of time,;«gge»t- 
 
 /ort«;i'' ' ■""' i^^'"^-»- -..^ .mt..!. : both modifytog 
 
 CHAF. 4. ■ ^k 
 
 the clause aru^toriltefn . ie ej«f ' ''L\ """^^^^ '' 
 omit In Cs'^^^- •"«»«•• '«fe"-"»g to eit..(V. 165, ii.). tam: 
 
 f^'^^T^sh^^i^ in apposition with irf 
 
 (or whiL) he had 'been WV ly^^^^^ '^»»«'«*« 
 
 Colore : «at thirgrievance ' Vv ^^ '"'"rT'' ' '^^ ^" ^^^" ^»*»*» 
 6,4. grievance (V. 96). Cf. on qna ape, Bk. IV. 
 
 •.:■.'.:•-. /■■■'/■ ,;--■ .^ CHAP. 5... .-, " ' _ ■ 
 
 2. facta© ew»nt, ©rant profecta© : for mood see V ^*7R i " 
 
 3. nunnero: modifying miZZmm : f or abl see^ im An. 
 »Jod^,.„,g ^,f^^(V. §7); t^nsV-th:'^^^^^^ 
 
 ^watabsenf "^^nr'fT •• '*%^f<^ge«-' cum ab©„©t : 'while he • 
 _Jiras absent, for fut. ind. of the actual thought (V. 187, 6 ;m,ill 
 
 ■'.;' -.V"" ■.-■:■,:.■■- CHAP. 6.'--:-. - ,-J. ■-■,■■.. 
 
 1. ant© . . . diotnm est: * we have snoken before ' Tiv t i. n 
 
 I 
 
%■ 
 
 PART JV.— NOTES ox CiESAR, poOK V. 277 \ 
 
 3. factum: sc. esse, in©: •Dumnorix.' omnibus: '»U man- 
 ner of . peter© oontondit: 'sought earnestly,' lit ?' quod . . 
 tlmer«rt : on the ground that he was unaccustomed ... and ^ 
 dreaded ; for mood see V. 177. dloeret : for mobd see ^. 177, U. 
 
 6V' t*' ^^^ request t^be left behind, ribl : »him'; indirect 
 
 ''■■■-., ' '■ •*,■••"■ f 
 
 , 5. terrltare : historical infin. (V. 112) ; for form see III. 74, 6. 
 fieri : in trans, supply ♦ saying ' from tertitare (V. 191), ut 
 "'^^'iJ^'nS*'"' °* • • • '>®«»'«*: see V. 197 and 196. nobllltite": 
 3eeV.5J3. quo» : trans, after its antecedent Ao» (V. 5, i.). ut 
 Itraduotos neoaret : 'to carry over . . . and kUl them ' /V. 43).' 
 
 ; ^ 6. interponere, pogoere : cf. on lerritare, aec^ba ,C. -* quAd • 
 f, whatever. IntellexiBsent : for mood and tense isee V. 187 Ti ' 
 I «dmlnlstrarent : see T. 196. def^rebantur : iK>t once 'axdy^ 
 ; hence imperf. • *^ ^ '* 
 
 CHAP. 7. ^ / 
 
 1. tantum dlgrnltatls : see V. 86, i. ooeroendum : sc. esse. 
 qnlbnsoninqne . . . posset : * by whatever means he Could ' : for 
 mood see V. 175. 
 
 2. loiJlfftt»: 'still farther,"' i.e., than at preseAt. prosplel. 
 endum: sc. esse statuehat (V. 56). quid nooere : 'to do any * 
 harm ; foracc. see V. 72. sibl: i.e., Caesar. ♦ 
 
 3. oommoratns: ' while waitmg,' or «as he was waiting '-for 
 the tense see V. 44, ii. • ftmnis : omit in,tran8. nt ; . Toontl- 
 neret : see V. 27 ; so cognosceret, 
 
 4. mllites : i.e., belonging to the legions ; cf. on Bk. IV. iT 6. 
 
 . 6. Impedltis: 'while Jl^ were occupied.' insoiente Oaestfre: ^ 
 «without Caesars kno^^e' (V. 49). domum : 'for home' 
 
 • 
 
 6. omnibus rebus: ' everythlhg else.' retrabi : cf. on Jieri, 
 
 7. faeiat : 'oflTers '; for fut; indie, of direct discourse (V. 187 6) 
 leabsente: * in his (i.e., Caesar's) absence.' qui . . . neyle^»! 
 set : 'seeing that he,' etc. ; for subj. cf. on perapexisset, cb. 4, 3. 
 praesentls : * m his presence '; lit. ' (of him) while -present. ' 
 
 8. ©nim: * in fact.' olamltans : for form see IIL 74, 6. Hbe- 
 rum, liberae olvltutls : both predicates of se esse ; trans, 'a free 
 man and a citizfen of a free state ' (V. 86, v.). * 
 
 9. uit : 'as.' Imperatum erat : see V, 57. 
 
 *# 
 
fti 
 
 .y^ 
 
 /: , 
 
 ■f 
 
 278 
 
 r I 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 CHAP. 8. 
 
 2. pari quern; 'the same as' (V., 174) ad- »uT.An/'' 
 could not keep/ etc. lonffins : 'too far '7V qa . v""*"* ^«^^ • • • 
 
 3. qua :♦ where ': adv. See Bk TV 9<l ft L.-. * a 
 
 '' *3«e J3K. A,v. i:j, d egressuiii^^A noun. 
 
 ^.-admodam laudanda; * deserving o^great praise *^rV llftf 
 
 jiottvuy ia(^en. non Intermlsso : ' without relaYmor ' /^^ <* 
 by-principal clause coordinate with adc^^uanmr^ ^' "^' *'*°'- 
 " 5." Aoce«8um est navlbus : 'ithe shim reached ' lit ? /v Kfti 
 i^atnftu. IS abl. of iheans. >eque ho.tl, V ' but no^neto^^^^^^ ^•' 
 
 6 cum: 'arthough.' qtiae cum annotlnis etc • «of ^»\^\.\. 
 including those of the previous, year . . . eight hundred wlS ' 
 sight'; for the nom. auae. seo V «ft* «r « """urea were in^ 
 
 oonfinod to rich officorindGSiio^lioile" .'„r:rlS°'''S 
 hi» own convenience '; a predicate possessive gen ( V S ? V he™ 
 l^^ssmg purpose, «mpnu, .cWent». ?f„r U^ cf. oi Bk ' 
 
 ■ "^ ■ ' ■> ■■ CHAP. 9. ',' •'^ ^ ■■■;•■•.■:■;, J>:-, ' 
 
 1. oaMrts: for dat. see V. 78. ii.. or 81 «xi t , " • 
 
 tojorotect the ship^' lit.? (V.'si) 'drtertla^.uu- 'ili^Jhe ' 
 
 f^rt,.*^^**!**'',' ^^^^- ^^3, ii. ex loco «uperfore : beldmrinir ' 
 ^^^^^''^^^^'^^^^^'^toprohiberel the north bank wLhSf 
 ou^men ' — *-" P-Mbere : 'to check the ad^aS^e o? 
 
 • v.'**/£'«*'l munltum : «well protected. '• opei* ■ «bv art ' lit 
 
 6. Ingrredi prohlbeb^t : «f. oh Bk: IV.,4, 3. 
 thL :^t^r ^'^J:f^:f ^.T^..f°^ "L-V-o Hdiors holding - ' 
 
 ^ 
 
■ \ 
 
 PART ly,— NOTES ON CiESlR, BOOK V. 
 
 m 
 
 ^ 'continuous cover, which deceived its jiame from its resemblance to • 
 
 a 'tortoil^e she]!. ' Aggeve^;- this was to" .put them , on a level yith 
 
 those defending the walls, '.ad : .'elose to.' pairel* : 'but a fdw/ 
 
 '.' '' . . . ^ . ' ■■ r 
 
 '78. eoB : Le., milites^ subject of prosequi, tngienteu : object of 
 
 pro^qui; see V. 44, i. a. longins,: cf. on ch. 9, 2. maniUoiii: 
 
 see^V. 81. ^ • < . . 
 
 , ' - ^ . .CHAP. 10. 
 
 y ■ ■ . . , *■■•■■';.•■ 
 
 ^ 1. postpidie, etc.: cf. on Bk. IV. 13, 4r im: 'on,' lit. *,^(nth a' 
 view to.' exttedition^m : strictly, a rapid niarch^of a flying 
 column of exj^dUi (ch. 2,' 4)^ • . "* — . "^ 
 
 2. allqnantnm ItlneriM : >'some distance/ lit.? extreml: 
 *only the last (o)'««ttftrguard),' t.el, «f the troops sent out. neqne, , 
 I sabsisterent : * wou^d (lit. did) not hold '", for mood see V. 175'; 
 for tense see V. 180, 6.' « ^ . A 
 
 ^' 3. eo oonoarsu : ' th§ 'collision thus resulting'; eo refers to 
 what is implied in the preceding lines. ^, ^ 
 
 '■%■ 
 
 V-* 
 
 .■■,■■:' - "■ *» ■' ' ■ 
 
 1. reTooart : t.e., from pursuing the enemy. 
 
 ■•/^■■- 
 
 V 
 
 / 
 
 ,^. quae: ' as ' (V. 174)., sic: * tor the extent,' limiting the pre- 
 vious words eadem . . . perapimt. amlstflR, etc. : * with the loss 
 of,' etc. rellqnae posse vMerq^ntar : Hhe rest, it seemed, 
 coul4'life.?(V. 29; 18,viir) ^ ? ' ' 
 
 4. sorlbit i^ Institnat : see ^V.. 28, v. lis legionlbas : '^ith 
 the aid of,' etc". (V. 99, i.). poBset, sunt : for the m«od see V. 
 17^, i'\ For the change of tense see V. 190, vi. " 
 
 ^ ' ' ' . ■ , , ' -P' "'^ 
 
 6. miiltae : for the agreement see V. 11. operae ae laborls : 
 
 see T. 87, iii. oommodiiiiiiiiiim ; 'the best plan,' naves: see 
 
 .V. 110, fn. \ ■.'■■-.m.-^;'' / ■ • ■ 
 
 ■> 6. no nooturnls, etc.^: fifeely 'not allowing the soldiers' ivork to 
 cease ev-en at night, ' lit. ? T^d. ; ^^with respect to. ' 
 
 I 7. q^uas ante : sc. reliquerat. - '- 
 
 8. snmma imperil', e^. : '-t^e chief command and oversight of 
 
 the war.' lit.' 'the chief part of the command and^of the direction 
 
 of the war.'- , Biimma :« noun.' dlvtait': Sran8.^by qjian^ng the 
 
 voice, a n/aM : i.e.\ from Jbhe south shore where Oeesar bad landed. 
 
 ♦ f^~ - ' . -' 
 
 9i Hoto enm jfellqnl a <ilYltatlbnB : 'betiee e n thia man And^fib 
 
 other states ' ; for dat. see. V. 78, v. c ; sifhilarly belh imperioq;tie, 
 
 . J*. 
 
 - >/■ 
 
 r-J 
 
 
 ^- 
 
/ 
 
 
 H:^ 
 
 ^*1 ■ 
 
 aso 
 
 PRIMABy MTIK BOOK. 
 
 CHAP. 12. / 
 
 ■Tram, freely, ™ofXmth«»^« . ™''J"" «uo» notetewi 
 that they wiie C' Z "T^'STblf "^f^^S " ••*™'^" 
 
 *. «4« ...BBt; .partly ... partly,- " 
 
 inUnd district. ^marltimU- C w^ "^i""" "?* 5»? !>«»■«, for m 
 I^gU»d, now chiefly inThe nZlZlT,Tti:^ '5? r.*- «^ 
 » hard metal to work hiu i,onon.li„ i, ^ . ' '"'"' which, being 
 even where h rabu^S^'^i.'i'T» "»«1««''^ bX native tribe^. 
 •the bronze they ufe ij ta^rt^^vfj, » «mp^tic iK»ia„„.' 
 prater, etc. : an error on Ses^'s l«rt ' '' '"^•^'"> = ' «"n-' 
 
 -.sT- 
 
 mentioned"-:Sn.!'?:Lr:nr^x::^'Sg]i«^^ 
 
 1. tiatara : 
 *ofit.' oiler 
 adverb. 
 
 2. alteram 
 
 CHAl»; 13. 
 
 ; in shape ' (V. 102).' trlquetr» : sc. est 
 . one, corresponding to inferior. 
 
 ad 
 
 onjas : 
 *at.' quo: 
 
 -. — «.ri.,1, ere. Za^tw; «the second side' an 111.».^« 
 the ancients had no comr>aasfis>NinH 0^1^ .•« «I«l»»nlam : as 
 
 land. '«."r/Vi^rme' wrafte™!*''? P»r««/ •■'•• »» I- 
 P«>bafeljr the We of Ma„Thf,l me»? «'™...'° ^«'^' >«' 
 
 
 O- 
 
PART IV.— NOTES ON CESAR, BOOK V. 
 
 281 
 
 yrodittmi 
 'raditibn 
 
 . 86, iy. . 
 n which 
 see V. 
 
 licative, ' 
 
 '-■ t -■ 
 
 • ■ ■ ■ 
 
 Ted to, 
 
 
 for an 
 
 
 outh of ^" ' 
 
 
 , being 
 
 
 tribes,. 
 
 ' ■* " 
 
 >Bition, 
 
 ' ■ . ■ ■ 
 
 every.* 
 
 
 % . 
 
 ■-■■-1 
 
 f&fnat .• 
 
 « 
 
 remlf. 
 
 ■",;.. -■"' 
 
 ojat : "* 
 
 • .■/':'" 
 
 quo: 
 
 • 
 
 n : as 
 
 
 jhtof 
 
 
 istant ^ 
 
 
 lot. 
 
 
 from . 
 
 
 as IS 
 
 ' Ipe- 
 
 but 
 
 esae. 
 
 ilii: 
 
 been 
 ct ii 
 
 bp 
 
 , * could ' ; the tense implies frequent attempts during Ccesar's stay 
 nUl: «except that.ii. ex aqua: ^by water,' i.e„ with a waterl 
 clock or depsydm, which worked on the principle of the hour-glass. 
 
 5. ut j . . opinio: «as their belief goes'; freely *as they 
 believe, llioram : referring to nonmdli of section 3. miUimn • 
 sc. pasmum; for case see V. 87, iii. , ', 
 
 6. Tertinm : sc. lotus, angrnlns : the same as alter anautus, 
 section 1. In : *in' ; the ace. because of the notion of extending 
 over space. ' t-^ ,^^ 
 
 7. violes oentnm : 'two thousand.' mliunm : for case cf on 
 section 5. 
 
 ■ CHAP, 14. 
 
 # 
 
 -v 
 
 qu^^d^io : see V. 173, c. 11 omnfv: 
 
 1. qui : see V. 173, a. 
 
 * entirely.' ; , 
 
 2. Interlpre» plWiqne : < most of those in the interior'; pU- 
 rt^ an adj. modifying interiores used as a substantive, laoto : cf. 
 
 V ^h - ' ®- ^*** • ' ***"^' ^^^ (^- ^^1' "• ^^)- •••lM»«t« : see 
 V . JLUii. 
 
 1^ 3. aunt : freely «they have.' oaplUo, parte : see V. 105, i. 
 
 - 4. Uxopea oommnnea : ace. ■ Ctesar is probably in error on this 
 point, deni duodenlque : * in groups of ten or twelve ' ; see III. 
 61, Cy 4. -que : lit. *and (in other cases).' Cf. in English 'tiire© 
 and four times a day. ' - ^* . 
 
 6. alqul: sc. liheH; «if any'(V. 166, a), habentnr : 'th«y 
 are regaled, '^ with pred. nom. libeH (V. 12, c). quo : adv. =*aS 
 ^t«o«; 'to whom.' * ^ 
 
 ■r ■■:^^ .CHAP. 15. ^ 
 
 1. tatnen ut : *yet so that/ otnnlbna partlbna : 'everywhere.* 
 fuerint, oompulerlut : for tense see V . 33, jij. 
 
 2. oompluribua : i.e.,of theBritoni. ovpldtna: see V. 98 vi. 
 
 8. apatlo: i.e., of time; cf. section 4, oaatrorum : a cai^p 
 was made at the end of each day's inarch. 
 
 _4. duabnaqne: trans, by 'when.' aubaldlo : 'to their aid' 
 (Y. 81). atqne hla : 'and these too.' prlmla : apparently the 
 first cohort of a legion was its best oum : 'although.' intar- 
 nilaao Ipol apatlo: 'leaving an interval.' inter ae : with irUerr 
 mtMO. perterrltla: trans, by 'as.' per medloa : 'between 
 them^ i.e., through the perexigunm apatium. aoque . . . r«oe- 
 pernnt : not meaning ' they got away,' as the last word* of eectiaii 
 
 pernnt : not meaning * they got away,' as the last word» of eection 
 ft Bhuw, but thai ihey cluwrea Djcragain £B3roiigh ihm op^ «Ti ffit 
 to their original position. -. ^^ •'"" 
 
"f. 
 
 282 
 
 ■s . 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 CHAP. 16. 
 
 i.o* **"*'«*'®*»' : see V. 56. no.tro. : the legionary soldiew. 
 as Contrasted with equttes, section 2 ; subject of esse, oodenter: 
 ace.; see y. 44, i a. pc.ent : see V. 175. ab nlgnl» dl«. 
 oedero; they had been trained to fight in solid ranks only, 
 mlnu»: 'not well.' • ' 
 
 2. autem: 'while.' proello : see V. 99. 'lui : «the enemy.' 
 oederent: see V. 175. cum :* whenever. ' removlMent : for 
 the mood and tense see V. 149 and 186, 2. nostro. : here = 
 entires» 
 
 3. EqueatrlB : with proelii. rotlo : ^» regular method,' or 'ordi- 
 nary style ; in opposition to the unfamiliar tactics described in 
 section 2. oedentlbas : either dat. of the participle used sub- 
 stantively, as in sectiop 1, yid refiarring to the Romans, or perhaps 
 TV *'^S^"<*_Flt^,-on*annM understood ; cf. on resistentibm, Bk. 
 1 V. IJ, ^. In either case Caesar is thinking of the danger to his 
 own men. inferebat : ' brought ' (V. 180, fc). 
 
 4. Aooedebat hao nt . . . proellarentar : of. on ch. 6, 2; 
 for mood see V 197^ Intepvalll» : see V. 103. ^allo. alii : ' one 
 another' (V. 168, o). -que :* and thus. ' 
 
 : 1. »«H:* here and there.' lenlu» :* with less vigor. ' s.. 
 
 ^.2. tpe«: an unusually large force; of. Bk. IV. 32, 1. «am: 
 under. ad . . . advolavernnt-: see V. 78, v. h. «lo utt . 
 absuterent: «so as to attack even the standards,' etc.; lit.*? 
 They were not afraid to attack even the main body escorting the 
 actual foragers. ' ' 
 
 3. ■nbsidlo : for abl. (= * in ') with fonfisi see V. 107, ii. prae- 
 «Ipltet: ace. egrerunt : see Y. 155, a. 
 
 4. sni oolllffendl : see V. 119, iv. ' : 
 
 6. Ex: 'after.' quae . . anxllla 
 ch. 11, 8. dlaoesaernnt : 'disbanded.' 
 their full force ' (V. Ite). 
 
 -o ,■ ' ■ 'V CHAP. 18. ■ ■ , 
 
 1. oonalllo: that, apparently, which is described in ch. 19. 
 Tameaim : for form see III. 50, 6. in fines : see V. 127, iv. 
 hoe: 'here,' 'at this'; so. loco. 
 
 2. aniiriiim lulTertH : also mi^mcmimadwrHt~M^n^^7fV 
 32, 3. ad: 'on.' * 
 
 3. praeflxla ; driven into the face of the bank, deflxae : driven 
 
 i^p» fc a il — ■■■■■■ mn S ^ \ i m —■■■■■i 
 
 the niajores copiae of 
 anmmia oopila : ' with 
 
 
 )* 
 

 )•« 
 
 6. 
 
 -i^OTES ON CJESAR, BOOK V. 288 
 
 ea, eo 
 
 ' although 
 but.' 
 
 nnWfK.,- I, 1«"°^**^(\^ 161)- «nm . . . e«tHi<ent: 'a 
 only thdur heads were above water,' lit. ? (V. 101). -que : 
 
 CHAP. 10. 
 1. nt . . . demongtravimuB: with depoaita ape. tnwa- ch 
 17,5. «mpllorlbu, eopii,: Hhegreater^rtofhis forces ''lit? 
 reliotl. : trans freely by ♦ keep.' .ervabat < for the force if this 
 and the succeeding imperfects see V. 180, 6. qutbu.' where" 
 more lit. ' through which ' (V. 99, ii. a). ' ' 
 
 li' ZZLlZ^ZV^'-' ■ «JT?*- ^°' ""««^^ *«d *«"«« «ee V. 
 AW. iitmrins with ejeoerai; for meaning see V. 98 vi • so 
 
 lahna and longiua, section 3. vU. : see ^ 99, ii « V',' ' ,^ 
 equltum : «danger to cavalry': for cen me V 85^ «' P^^cnla 
 * through fear of this/ lit. ? (V. 205, c) "* ' 
 
 wat for'cr«?r w''f '"n* * •.»«*«»•«*«': 'the only course left 
 was tor Cajsar not to allow his men to leave,' etc. For ut 
 pateretur as subject clause see V. 197, fn. ; for diacedi see v! 56. 
 tantxim nooeretupj freely Ho do as much harm' (V. 72^; 57) 
 
 1^' /hJSLT*? °^' . labore atque Itlnere : ^Uborious^nL- 
 ing (hendiadys), contrasted with the dashing cavalry raids. 
 
 . CHAP. 20. 
 
 1. Tplnobante.: with mt««n<, section 2. ^ex ana .i. . »ita. 
 Terat: this parenthesis may be translated after legator. . mit. 
 ^nt section 2, and broken at cujua pater, thus : «The Trinobantea 
 «end. etc.; from this state, ete. ; hiT father, etc.; they proSS^/ 
 •to fldem «eoutu. : «attaching himself to.' lit. ? oontinentem 
 Oalllam: 'the mainland of Gaul' (V. 69. i.). obtlnuera™ 
 Mneo does not mean * obtain ' (V. 203, /, iii.). ln,e • " whUe h^ 
 himself,' or 'but who himself (t. 170, iv.) * ' / 
 
 2. sese dedituros : sc. ae as subject, aeae here being object. 
 
 rv^'ftfN*"'^"*"*"** '^** *^® P*"^"^ ^' "^ *at the hands of C 
 il'cmk:^" n,T ^*'"*'*^ *^ send (some one) to govern ' ; 
 
 4.^«xepoitiil: see V. 79. ad namernm : 'to the reouired 
 
 r"';^/;- ^^''J? ^^^ asyndeton in the last sentence, and also ^T 
 eos and tilt of the same persons. ' 
 
 ;>■■■"■. ;5*----''oi,: :i-v.--s= ;-; CHwAP. 21. ■ ':: .• ■■•' 
 
 1. defensU: t.e., against Cassivellaunus. 
 iveUauni, ch. 20, 3. 
 
 2. hU; so. legatia, from legationihmr qnoV ftdrerbr matU 
 V.*186'*2 ' fg^*'"^"'*^***^^' r"^«"«'" = ^"«^ n»ood and tense see 
 
 ♦J://***/?"",* •"«•"''• '*»? «ft tow»'; the object of vacant is 
 ^^ % !*»« ok««e cum . ^iMnimienint The Gauls, on the othe^ 
 
 mllitnin : of. on 
 
mmm 
 
 28# 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN" BOOK. 
 
 k 
 
 hand, had regular iovma in .whi«h they dwelt. . stlTas Impedltaa : 
 ' a piece of woods difl&cult of access. ' mnnlerant : see V. 149. 
 
 4. opere : cf. «n ch. 9, 4. ex : * on * (V. 205, 6). hnno ; *it\: 
 lit. Hhis (place).' / 
 
 '^ 5. moratt: ' after holding out.' non tolerunt :* could not 
 
 withstand.' . . , 
 
 6. repertn» : ^, est: maltt : * many (of the enemy). ' 
 
 CHAP. 22. ' 
 
 1. qal1)%is regrionlbaa . . . praeerant : 'over which . . . ruled' 
 (V. 79, V. c). his : i.e.,^the kings, na valla oaatra : see ch. 11, 5. 
 
 2. inoQlames : ace. with sttos, which is identical with nogtri. 
 
 3. jper: 'through the mediation of (V. 99, i.). . ' 
 
 4. repentlnos motns : see Bk. IV. 5. neqae maltnin : 'and, 
 little.' in annoa alngolos : 'yearly,' lit. 'for the years one by 
 one.' veotli^alla: see V. 86, i. penderet : 'should pay'; for 
 mood see V. 186, 1, 6, i 
 
 0. Interdlolt atque Impejrat : emphatic repetition ; * he abso- 
 lutely forbids . . . to harm,' or ' he expressly orders , . , not to 
 ham.' ne»: 'or.'lit.? <V. 28, ii.) 
 
 CHAP. 23. ■ o^.;, , 
 
 2. oommeatibna : for abl. see Y. 103. ^,* ' | 
 
 3. tanto namero i see Bk. IV. 22, 3 and 4, and Bk. V. 2, 2, 
 and 8, 6. tot navlgratlonlbaa : * although there were so many 
 mssages' (V. 49). portaret : 'had on board ' ; the subj. may be 
 by attraction (V, 177, i.) (so remitterentur, section 4, but not 
 •citraverat, which is not so essential a part of the sentence) or may 
 jperhaps be Characteristic (V. 32). 
 
 4. et . . . et: dividing these empty vessels into two classes, to 
 the latter of which mitterentur, not remitterentnr, would more 
 «triotly apply ; trans. ' both those which had made the first trip . . . 
 «nd those which,' etc. . jprloris oommeatua : sc. navibus (V. 87). 
 poatea : i.e., after Csesar had set out for Britain with the fleet 
 built during the winter, faolendaa ouraverat': cf. on ch. 1, 1. 
 numero : for abl. see V. 102. aexaglnta : aco.« agreeing with 
 qitas. looum oaperelit: 'reached their destination.' oapereat, 
 r«Jloerentar : bo. sic accidit iiti. 
 
 6. quod : ^for.' neoefaiirlo «oUooavIt : cf. on Bk. IV. 28, 3. 
 
 6. oonaeoota: see V. 60, ii. onm folvltaet ; freely, 'he Mt 
 sail . . . and.' Inlt* vlffUla : ' at th4 beginning of the watch.* - 
 
 t 
 
 
 f 
 
 
 
■»iir 
 
 - ♦ 
 
 PABT v.— SYNTAX AND^COMPOSITION. 28$ 
 
 Ul.'-: 
 
 <i 
 
 /">^^^ ' PART V. • v. '■ 
 
 LATIN HiOSE .COMPOSITION AND TEANS / 
 ' ^ , LATION AT SIGHT. . 
 
 IN PROSE COMPOSITION. 
 
 1 ' 
 
 INTRODUCTORY CHAPTER. 
 • I. Order op Words. 
 
 1. Because of its wealth of inflections, Latin admits much 
 gi«ater freedom of order than English does, without a corre- 
 sponding loss of clearness. 
 
 The order of words in Latin is not, however, purely hap- 
 hazard although no invariable rules exist for their position 
 m a sentence ; there are certain arrangements which are 
 normal or usual, and which should b^ varied only for some 
 definite purpose, such as to secure emphasis or to prbmote 
 euphony. ^ ^^ ' . * # 
 
 1 tii «he normal arrangement o! a simple sentence, the 
 subject, followed by its attributes, comes first; the verb 
 comes last, preceded by its modifiers or objects ; as, 
 
 Mifuae differ from one another in langmge .• Hi omnfi. llngulL 
 Inter «e differant. ••■•■ 
 
 .8. This order ia often changed, especially in the base of : 
 
 ■^S^^^^iSrSSlSSS-. -•"o «"<• <^ 
 
 I baaed upon it. 
 
 
 r 
 
 I. RULES OF SYNTAX AND EXERCISES 
 
 ■ 
 
 
286 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 (a) Emphasis.— This WNoften secured by putting words 
 other^ than the subject at the beginning of a sentence, or 
 ;Words other than the verb at the end ; as, 
 
 ,^j 
 
 Greece was freed by^i^e sagacity of one num : ftntu* vlrl nrft. 
 depti& Oraeoia llber&ta est. 
 
 Other route had they none: Aliud Iter habdbant nullum. 
 
 Often, too, emphasis % secured by separating two words in 
 agreement. Antithesis (or emphatic opposition) is generally ex- 
 pressed by reversing in the second 'clause the order of the first 
 {Chtasmv^). 
 
 (6) Connection OF SENxkNOES.— At the beginning ot a 
 
 ^sentence, are regularly placed words or phrases which refer 
 
 to the previous sentence or some part of it, and which thus 
 
 serve as a connecting link, leading from the known to the 
 
 unknown j*^s, . > ^ ' - V 
 
 Within those loodd* (just menttoned) the enemy kept themselves in 
 htdmg: intra e&a Bllv&a faostda In ooonlt6 ■«•« oontlnebant. 
 
 Tfie same day envoys came to Ocesar: Bddem di6 l^g&tl ad 
 Oaesarem v6n£runt. 
 
 4. (a) The modifiers of a nonn.^i. Cardinal numerajtis, adjec- 
 tives denoting size and weight, and pronominal adjectives com- 
 monly precede; as, Four days: Quattuor dl«s. Large forces: 
 M&grnae oopiae. This part: Haee pars. After their cusUm,: 
 8uo more. 
 
 ii. Ordinal numerals, other adjectives (unless emphatic), geni- 
 tives and words in apposition commonly follow; as. The third 
 year: Annus tertlus. The Boman people: Populns Rdm&nus. 
 Fart of the summer : Pars aest&tls. 
 
 iii. Where a noun is modified both by an adjective and by a 
 
 femtive, the preferred order is adjective^ genitive, noun ; as, 
 mmense size of framp: Ingina oorporum mAgnltfiidS. This 
 does not apply to the partitive genitive, however; as, A large paH 
 ofOaul: MAgrna pars Oalllae. 
 
 - iv. When two adjectives or two genitives connected by a con- 
 junction modify a jioun, it is commonly placed either before both 
 or after both. 
 
 When an adjective or genitive modifies two nouns connected by 
 a couj^nctiori, it commonly precedes both. 
 
 (6) The modifiers of a verb.— Either the direct object or an 
 adverb directly qualifying the action of the verb is, as a rule, 
 
 . €. 
 
 / 
 
 -N 
 
 fdatlve) for hie or ia; see Motion 172. «v — »»» \vm .w«mi«« oaaqioNs 
 
, Vi 
 
 ■% 
 
 PART V.-SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 ^ 287 
 
 Wd (if used «dJecfivBlrW^. "iP""^'"» «"en a coninnotH». 
 clause they ^ gene^lly^pCS SS """ ^^" ■»»« 
 
 -iffiSrre'tXlf ri'^'wET'?"' *» ''''"'» '*hey govern 
 . U; A prepos tion is often «.,1.»,?^ J*'"'"'» pr<«iouii8. 
 
 Ui. A monosyllabic preoo^on i^^f. V '" Aedaornm nn«,/ 
 
 t.« «d its „o„„ : as, w:x"^n7t:i ^'r« ""^ 
 
 w5,iit?e*XkZ;^„^f?s'';lP!««d before the word Ic^lified ^ 
 nected with the verb/or moreXj"*- ""^ "^«™ « eit^SSl 
 
 «.e^,5"„?'iu ct^l^^il'^e^lr» "". k "'''''<'» Pl««d at 
 jord or words belonrine LTa ^.S- '"I'""** by some important 
 
 i^depe„dsratslt?;^':;1:rJri?r'''■•*--b„„-whioh 
 
 ?=™es^'„S7r M^'^"?"'«^4t:^lt':e'^r™ 
 _ 11. Autem. enifn an^ -.j„= ^ . 
 
 J^i^Z>S. «"^ ^' -«-. «d i^*„. .ery seldo», come 
 
 1, Th » .- — - I. t . _i___Zm!:=^==____^ , : 
 
 ■^ *PP«"°e<* to »ome other woid. 
 
288 
 
 PRIBfclRY LATIN BOOK. 
 II. Order of Clauses. 
 
 5. Noun and' Adjecilve clauses are, as a rule, in the position 
 a noun or adjective of similar value would have. 
 
 i. A relative clause however very frequently, especially when 
 emphatic, precedes a general antecedent, such as is or hie ; as, Ba 
 spcnls what he alters : Quae mutat, ea oorrampit. 
 
 ii. Indirect questions generally follow the verb on which they 
 depend. So also does the accusative and infinitive construction 
 when extended to any length. 
 
 6. Adverbial olauses are placed, as a rule, as corresponding 
 adverbial phrases would be, J__ 
 
 i. Adverbial clauses that are preparatory to the thought of the 
 
 Erincipid clause, or express some, attending circumstance, regu- 
 irly either precede the principal clause, or very frequently are 
 inserted in it. Such are the temporal, conditional, causal and 
 concessive clauses. ^ 
 
 ii. Adverbial clauses th«S are explanatory of, or complementary 
 to, the thought of the principal clause regularly follow. Such are 
 the consecutive clauses, and causal sentences where the emphasis 
 'lies on the reason advanced. 
 
 Final or purpose clauses, on th? whole, more frequently follow 
 than precede, the general principle being to place last the clause 
 on wMch the emphasis falls. 
 
 7. Participial clauses generally precede, oi" are inserted in, the 
 principal sentence, and very seldom follow it as in English ; as. 
 After settling fhis affair, he set sail, having vnet with suitable 
 weather: His oontsUtaUs rebus, nactu^s Idoneam tempestatem, 
 solvit. - ,■■,■■- ■''..•; ,:-''^ \: . -::^;.\-' rA- , 
 
 8. In narrative prose the order of time is almost invariably 
 observed in the arrangement of the various ckuses of a sen-. 
 
 _tence; as, " . v'-.:---".--' '■-"■^^ .:;;.. z;' :-■,■■',-.;■-■ .■■.;■.:: ■. - 
 
 The Oermans threw aioay their arms when they saw that their 
 comrades were being slain, and rushed out of the camp : Germani, 
 cum suos Interflol vlderent, armis abjeotis »6 ex oastrls 
 ^6o6runt. 
 
 9. The periodic struotrtre is much commoner in Latin than in 
 English. A period is a complex sentence, whose subordinate 
 clauses are inserted in the principal clause in such a way that the 
 sense afid grammatical construction of the whole are incomplete 
 without the final words, upon which also the chief emphasis rests. 
 
 —Tlw ex amplfr given in BP f i t i inn R a bove is ft pfflod \n the TAtin, b ^ 
 
 \- 
 
 not in the English^ . 
 
 -^ 
 
PART V,~SYNTAX ^ND COMPOSITION. 289" 
 
 diiSi^j^^^P^Jj^^^ principal and; subor- 
 
 It should be placed at the heiZS^^^t'^'^^:^ In such cases 
 
 duty for both clauses • as. WhlTrt^ j penod, and thus do 
 
 ^ retired to the forestThe7ete^ne^, ^"^"^ *^^ ^^ ^^^ 
 
 non progrredl longlus. " '"''*'' '«««P'we. o6n.tltalt 
 
 ^Aen Owar feam«rf thisJhevnS^L.i n^^ *^® ^"^* Pla^e ; as, 
 oomperlt. ,e In G.lliam recTpJf ^^ *'.^"^^-' ^«»* "^ Ca:.^i 
 
 iiK Concords. 
 The following «„ the gene^l rules of «greom^ti ^ 
 
 ^ <^'*y of Borne : vrl^n noma. ' ,, ^ 
 
 peda|;;s-:7Lr:^t:Aa^^^ 
 
 "• The appositive Wdmav SI' JSr '**■'"•• ""'pa- 
 ■ as. J, rA.n.t.^ocfe,, Aa.e c JeTS • Them^Jr?-^''''^^ «"^J^ ' 
 ,, . ^"^- TA®n»*»to<Ble8vgnIailt«. 
 
 nu^iatnx::!^:^^^ ^^-^^- ^^-^-^^^-^ the 
 
 ^^^rLY^sTitlr:-^^^^^^^ ' 
 
 erat m„it«e operae ao /aboHr ^ ^'i^»* «#or* and ^«ftor ; rj. 
 
 12. The Predicate!. _(«) The verb agrees with if« «, k- . 
 Iff number and person. - *^^ subject 
 
 thep!^i3;:^t,^Slsf^i^Ti^^^^ -d, 
 
 /i. Where there is morrthin Kf'^^^ 
 P ural, or niay agree wiTh The n^Ct' betr'' i^^^^? ^^^ »>« 
 others ; as, !Z%« Matrona a^id S,m S^rff'^^ ^^^^ *^« 
 
 ^ The verb may also be siJ Jular w^t %* ®^«°»»»dlTMlt. 
 Tfemltusque origbatur. (CfS^. u *^ «'g^e .' CUmo, 
 
 ( 
 
:\ 
 
 290 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK, i^ 
 
 iii. Where the subjects are of different persons afid the plural is 
 used, the firs? person takes precedence, then" the second ; as, 
 Oicero and I ot^ well : Ego et Cioerd va'lemns. 
 
 iv. For the unemphatic introductory word there, and also for it 
 when used a6 an impersonal or representative -subject, Latin has 
 no equivalent ; as, Aiid there were no other sKipa.: Neqne naves 
 •rant aliae. It ii dangerous to enter : Intrare est perXonlosaih. 
 
 (6) A predicts adjective (or a participle in the compound 
 tefises of the verb) agree3 with the subject .of the verb iij 
 gender, number and case; as, ' 
 
 The supply ia small : ISxigua e»t ebpisk. 
 Everyming toas unknown : Omnia erant incognita. 
 He was informed that tlie aaeetU vxm easy : Oert'lor f actus est 
 faellem esse asoensum. ^ ■ . 
 
 i Predicate adjectives are used with, the verb swww'^rbs of 
 seeming, becoming, and passive verbs of making, thivMi^, calliiM. 
 
 ii. Where theqe is more than one subject, the predicate adjec- 
 tive may be either singulai; or plural, following the numl:ter of the 
 verb (see a, ii.). ' 
 
 If it be singular, it will agreq in gender with the nearest sub- 
 ject ; as, The cavalry and charioteers were -sent forward : Praemis- 
 sns est e'qnltatas et essedaril. 
 
 If it be plural, with subjects pf different genders, it will be 
 masculine when the subjects refer to livirtg beings, otherwise neu- 
 ter ; as, Fathir and momer are dead : Pater et mater mortal snnt. 
 The city and temple ivere taken: Urbs templnmqae oapta sunt. 
 
 V (c) A predicq,te noun agrees with its subject in case ; as. 
 
 He found that no^o Oalha was king S Beperlebat nnuo esse 
 regem Galbam. 
 
 Ariovistria had been called king and friend by the senate : Arlo- 
 vistns rex atqne amXoas a senatu appellatus erat. 
 
 i. Predicate nouns &te used with the verb sum, verbs of seerfiing, 
 becoming, and passive verbs oi tnakir^g, thinking, calling. 
 
 ii. The dative of purpose is used with much the force of a predi- 
 cate noun (see section 81). "^ . ''\ 
 
 13. Pronoun and Antecedent.^ — A, relative or demonstra- 
 tive pronoun agrees in gender, number and person with the 
 word (termed the antecedent) to which in sense it refers ; as. 
 
 For many reasons, of which this was^ the strongest : Bfnltls d6 
 cansls» qnynm Ilia fnlt Jasti sslm». 
 
 t»?]But these pronoiius by preferettoe i^;ree with a pr^cHoate 
 
t 
 
 V. 
 
 PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. ^291 
 
 v/' 
 
 J 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 I» 
 
 ,■■.-■■■.- » '«- 
 
 _TB»,Accn8ATITp AKD lupISITIVR 
 
 ««H /« , and such like {verba .entierub ee decla^J^ilZ- 
 .«» the .nfinitive with a subject aco„sative,.where?^^" 
 we have a noun clause introduced by th<U ; A ^ 
 
 15. kulesfortheUsEOFTBNSEsareasJpUow»- * ' 
 
 (c) When the. time of the ihfiniUve ia «,6«»„e„« to that lf\. ' 
 prmcipal verb. Use pHe future inBmtiVe ; «i, ' T ' *"' ("^ 
 
 ..«t»::!' pT.^ir' *^.'^ « '«••'« '« i»w; ™.m. 
 
 .gum 
 
. f 
 
 \f 
 
 ^' 
 
 f^ 
 
 A 
 
 ) 
 
 291 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 Hewisvjered that fhtmr would make peace : Respohcllt Caesarem 
 plliwa» esa« fdctfiritm. „^ 
 
 O», If pat. the rule in another w%y : let the student imngine 
 himself asuig \he very words uttered or thought, and then use the 
 corresponding tense of the infijaitive (the perfect infinitive doing 
 duty for the imperfect,* perfect or pluperfect of the original words). 
 
 In the above examples, for instance, the words actually uttered 
 or thought would be : (a) The legion is being hard pressed: Leglo 
 premlturi (6) The Helvetians have moved their camp: Helvetll 
 ^astra moverunt ; (c) Ccesar will make peace: Caesar paoem 
 faoiet. ^ 
 
 16. (tt) As the infinitive is without personal endings, the sub- ' 
 ject accusatives we, nos^ te, v5s, will be used for J, we, you. 
 
 •For he, she, they, when denoting the same person -as the 
 .subject of the terb of saying, thinking, eUi., se will be used; 
 but when denoting a different person- the accusative of is, or 
 for greater emphasis ille / as, ijik- v 
 
 They answered thttt they woidd mJute peace 'ifiith him: Bespon- 
 derant sese cum e5 paoem esse, faoturds. 
 
 GcBsar had decided to ke^p Dumnarix ivith }iim, because he had 
 discovered that he was eager for poiver: Caesar Dnmnorlgrem secum 
 habere c6ni»tituerat, quod eum eupldum esse imperil o6- 
 gnoverat. 
 
 (6) in the compound forma of the infinitive containing esse, care, 
 must .^lilEaken tt> have agreement with the subject accusatiw in 
 gender, number and case. (See superdtas in section 14 a^^ 
 
 -1» JH 
 
 17. After verbs signifying to A^, promise, thr^ 
 i^chiike, EngUsh generally us^s the simple infinitip^ 
 of a-nouh 'clause introduced by that. In Latin the subject 
 acousp-ti^ Svilh the- /ut,ure infinitive is used in accordance 
 with t%^Biw.rule§ (15, c); ^ 
 
 give -postages: Hae natlones s3 obsldfis 
 lihtar, 
 
 .■f 
 
 m 
 
 iMt 
 
 These t 
 datur 
 
 ur'bem obsessam esse, / tell you th<U the eity vxu being 
 
 aaggi nal ofeaideftfltU i E 
 
 TT 
 
 2. This distinction applies to all uses of the words him, t/kem, etb.; «or Aw and 
 tAeir, «tttM or «j^u» and coruwi respectively are usW. ' , ^ , 
 
marine 
 ise the 
 ) doing > 
 jrpids). 
 
 ittered 
 Legrfd " 
 elvetil " 
 paoenpf _ 
 
 I PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. / 
 
 if w:./" English «/.a* is often omitted ; as, Be mys hetuOlao 
 odbur^as "ZZetT^' but^so phrases. LntieJi eT^^arZli 
 iU 'p1 Pf '^*^^'^^ V«cw, memona teneo, farm eat, spem f^abed. 
 
 io^^s ortVe^Si,t:." ^™^^*^" '"^ ^^^ ^^^^^^^ ^r perif,hrastic 
 iJT'- I®^.^^ of pretending are regularly foUowed by the accusatk* 
 wtitTXtf "' T"" '^ E»«l-h%y the simpLTnfinTtiv"'^ 
 
 L tad o? 7l'-7l^'i ^^*""™ '«^«'" «/simulant. ' 
 
 instead of rfwo followed by a negative, Latin prefers mad- aa. 
 
 i?tnce. Negrat «e posse Iter uUI pep proTinolam d«w.« 
 
 not usea parenthetically in Latin as in Enclish • as Ymt. nL r 
 
 Caesarem venturum fulsse. ' ** 
 
 pr^nUu&i;r«"oom™i^'« '^'^' '*'•" °' *<^"' '»-.-*" «•« 
 ^/i ■'''H ^?j®^^ ^*'^"^**^^^® *s not infrequently omitted when 
 
 s 
 
 EXERCISE 1. 
 
 flff* ^W 
 
 r 
 
 A. 
 
 \ 
 
 f/: .?^^^^^'^** **'''* ^^^"^ ^^'^ conquered ^aul/ 2..He thliks^ 
 that the Roman leader will easily vanquish the Belgians 3 We 
 saw that the nights were shorter in Britain than on the contin«it. 
 4. ihe enemy sent ambassadors to Caesar, and promised to give 
 hostages 5. Word was brought to C«esar thai the hill was hdd 
 by the Roman soldiers^G. To these envoys C^sar repUed tl«t 
 the «auls had been conquered by the Roman army. 7. The 
 general hears that the enemy ^re hurlingkv^lins at the soldiers. 
 3 ye enemy , he annwerfld , ha d boo n h iflli g javel ins at CcBsar^ 
 cavalry. 9. ^e learned from the scouts that all the Belgians had 
 
 r 
 
 ijA 
 
 \ 
 
2^4* 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 '^¥^^ 
 
 
 
 
 :.%- 
 
 encamped on '^te other side' of that river. 10. It is said that 
 Geesar set out fqr Cktul, and defeated the Helvetians on the other 
 sidei of the riVear Rhone;' 11. To that embassy he replied that he 
 would come to 'the enemy's -camp. 12. Some even reported to 
 Caasar that the soldiers would not advance. " 
 
 .;, B. {Themifttocles, 1, 2.) 
 
 1. He Baid tliat he was aiming at the magistrates especially. 2* 
 The answer was given that he would speedily crHsh the pirates and* 
 ^nder the rest of Europe safe. 3. 4 report is brought that the 
 Athenians are goifl^ to abandon their leet and betake themselves ~ 
 to their walls. 4. They promised to make war by land and sea. 
 5. It is said that they devoted themselves wholly to naval 
 warfare.y^6. They thought that no one was (their) equal. 7. Pb 
 had learned that a thousand war vessels were following t^ese 
 transports. 8. Qe was informed that the Athenians had not been 
 crushed, but would build a fleet of four hundred vessels. 9. They, 
 perceived that the citadel had been handed over to a few magis- 
 trates, and that the rest of the town was being abandoned. . 
 
 ' . - - - ' , - 
 
 f C. iCIoesar, Bk. IV. t) ' / ' 
 
 1. Caesar said that a large number of men had crossed that river. 
 
 It is said^^at this tribe leads forth a thousand armed men 
 every year. 3. These promise to remain at home in their turn. 
 4 We were informed that there was no interruption in the prac- 
 tice of war that year, 5. The Suebi said they had been harassed , 
 for a large part of the winter^/' 6. The Germans hoped to cross the 
 Rhine the year after. 7- We understand that the character of the 
 food and the daily exercise make, the Germans" very warlike. 8. 
 He hears that the children had milk and corn. 9. He answered 
 that this tribe was the largest, but that the Suebt had been th« 
 most warlike. ' 
 
 "^S^' 
 
PART v.— SYNTAX ANP COMPOSITIOlf. 
 
 29d 
 
 tj^ese 
 
 4 
 
 /- 
 
 CHAPTER IT. ^ ^ . 
 
 Complementary Infinitivb. ' 
 
 19. The present inenitive (active or passive) is often used likd' 
 
 the infinitive with to in English, to complete the meaning of certain 
 
 ▼ef bs, whose reference would otherwise be incomplete. These 
 
 .verbs are often called modal verbs, and the infinitive when so used 
 
 _:_the cornpZcmcnfari/ infinitive. ___,_^„-., 
 
 * 20. (a) With modal verba the simple infinitive {i.e., with- 
 -out any subject expressed) is used to denote another action 
 or condition of the *ame jsubject ; as, 
 
 "They attempt to cross the Hver: Plubien tran.Ire oonantor. 
 
 .. rje t«tnd 6e^«n <o 6e im>fen^- Saevlre ventu. coeplt. 
 Th^y are able to defend themselves : Se defendere pos.unt. 
 Ihe nver can be crossed : Plumen tpansin pote.t. 
 ^was unwilling to leave: Dlncederenolehat. 
 27u5i|f^,-« compelled to give hostages : Obslde. dare oo&oti sont. 
 
 i. A predicate vmiior adjective with the complementary infini- 
 tive agrees with the subject of the modal verb ; as, wlcanL 
 useful frtends: roMunm. utile» ew© amiol. '' '^ can oe 
 
 21. (b) With modal v6rba the infinitive iMth a subjeet 
 accusative is used to denote the action or condition of a 
 different subject ; as, 
 
 ^^ (Mow the Helvetians to go : Helvetic» Ire patlnntur. 
 He ordered thegaies to be closed; Porta» olaadl Jn«»lt. "^ 
 
 He un^dth4i Germans to be alarmed: Germand» tl.nere Volult 
 He did rwt wish that place to be y.noccupied : Nolnlt earn locum 
 
 » ftCftPC 
 
 22. i. Profcto takes th^ accusative and oomplettientary infini. 
 tive; as, They prevent the Qermam from crossing : QermAnd. 
 tr&n«Ire prohlbent. ■ «««o» 
 
 ««":7??"^ -^T^! expressing emo«ton, such as doUS (grieve) and 
 gaudeS (rejovceyoften take the accusative and complementary infini- 
 (oee also sectioH 147, ii.) 
 
 ^/^I^wLv^.?^. .''!?'. ^'^^ ^" sailiiTTSS^; as, JaveUn» began 
 
 to be hurled: T«la ooqJIoX ooepta auat. 
 
 ^•tfjk- 
 
V 
 
 m 
 
 MiMARt LATIN teOOK. 
 
 #■ 
 
 iv. With jubeo the subject accusative is sometimes omitted, 
 when obvious from the context ; as. He gives orders to fortify a 
 camp: Castr» munlre jubet. 
 
 V. Void, rf,6ld and mdlo often take the accusative and infinitive 
 even when the subject is the same, chiefly with esse or a passive 
 infinitive ; as, They did not wish to be put to death: Bene Interflol 
 nolebant. 
 
 vi. Pdliceor and sperd are -sometimes treated as modal verbs. 
 
 vii. Many of the verbs of will JId desire are followed by nt and 
 the subjunctive ; so regularly the verbs of oreieringf, except jiiheO. 
 Impero also may be used with the passive infinitive ; as, He orders' 
 him to be brought back: Earn retrahl Imperat. (See section 27.) 
 
 viii. This construction is more restricted in Latin than in Eng- 
 lish. (See especially sections 23 and 27.) But in poetry Latin 
 more nearly approaches English usage. 
 
 Verbs which Take the Complementary Infinitive. 
 
 ^•>,r 
 
 AlloWf jiutlor, slijo. 
 
 Forbid, veto. / 
 
 
 •"'■, 
 
 Am able (can)y potanm. 
 
 Hasten, oontendo, maturo. 
 
 
 ,, .;« 
 
 Am accustomedt am wont, con- 
 
 properd.r . 
 
 
 
 sue vl, 8ole5. 
 
 Hest^a^e, dablt5. , 
 
 
 
 Am nnwilling, nold. 
 
 Order, Jubeo. 
 
 
 
 Am willing, void. 
 
 Ought, debed. 
 
 
 
 Attempt, oonor. 
 
 Permit, patior, «Ino. 
 
 . ■ ' i 
 
 4 
 
 Begin, Inelpio, Institnd. 
 
 Prefer, maid. \ 
 
 
 
 Began, ooepl. 
 
 Prepare, paro. 
 
 ■ ;/■', 
 
 
 Gea^', desind, dSslstd. 
 
 Pf event, prohlbedl 
 
 
 
 Compel, obgd. 
 
 Resolve, Bee decide. 
 
 
 
 Dare, andou. 
 
 Strive, oontendo, nltor. 
 
 
 
 Decide, determine, oonstitnd. 
 
 Try, Conor. > 
 
 , . 
 
 - 
 
 deoernd. atatad. 
 
 Feniurc, audeo. 
 
 
 # 
 
 Desire f oapio. 
 
 Wish, volo. 
 
 
 
 EXERCISE 2. 
 A* 
 
 •j*ti^*'- 
 
 ' 1. The troops began to storm the town. 2. The Helvetians are _ 
 accustomed to receive, not give, hostages. 3. Stones had begun 
 to be hurled from all sides against the raftijmrt. 4. Ciesar will 
 mt permi t thft Qniilw ^r >^»"r" "^Hi ^ ""^«^ «mftmywnre nnwil- - 
 . ling to depart from the Rhine. 6. The cavalry had prevented fires 
 
• J'ART V.—SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 297 
 
 from being made. 7. They wUl not attempt to cross the rivers. 
 8. The Germans did not hesitate to engage in battle.; 9. The 
 soldiers were ordered to return to the camp. 10. The Romans 
 compelled the enemy to give hostages. 11. He determined to 
 pass the winter there. 12. The Britons wiU not dare to make 
 war. 13. Csesar w^ not able to set out. 14. The soldiers were 
 compelled to make a promise to remain at home. 15. We wish 
 him to be a soldier, but he prefers to be a merchant. 
 
 , ^; -ff. (Themistodes, 3, 4.) > - 
 
 i. The king will permit them to attack immediately. 2. The 
 Spartans were unable to withstand the double peril. 3. The sea- 
 men wished to engage off Euboea, but Themistodes prevented 
 them from being surroimded in the narrow strait. 4. Xerxes will 
 not dare to put the priests to death and burn the citadel. 5. We 
 shall attempt to seize Thermopylae and quickly crush the bar- 
 barians. 6. They were compelled to prepare to defend the walls. 
 7. He resolved to leave for home by night. 8. Most of the states 
 were unwilling to be conquered one at a time., 9. He hesitates to 
 compel the seamen to look for a more suitable place. 
 
 ^ O. (Ca;aar, Bk. IV. 2.) V - ; 
 
 1. They prefer to use small and scrubby beasts. 2. He will not 
 permit the merchant to sell wine at all. 3. By daily practice the 
 cavalry are able to leap down and fight on foot. 4. They begin to 
 train these horses to endure toil. 5. He will order the Germans 
 to betake themselves to their horses with all speed. 6. They are 
 unwilling to be captured. 7. Wine cannot be sold nor beasts of 
 burden im,port<3d. 8. Thoy are wont to consider this base and 
 unmanly. 9. He does not wish this merchant t<:> Imj admitted. 
 

 ^♦> 
 
 it 
 
 11 
 a.. 
 
 H 
 
 298 , ^ PRIMARY LATIN BOOK* 
 
 ■ • ' ■ , . «^ I . - > . 
 
 CHAPTER III: 
 
 r • i 
 
 FiNAti Clauses (Clauses op Purpose). 
 
 23. In Englfsh the purpose or end of an action is commonly 
 expressed either by the infinitive with to, or by a clause introduced 
 by that or lest ; las, They remained to avoid suspicion, or They 
 remained that th^y might avoid suspicion. ' ; '^ 
 
 But in Latin prose the infiiiitiye should never be used to 
 express purpose, . 
 
 24. Pure Final Claijwbs.— One of the commonest modes 
 of expressing purpose in Latin is by ut (or utt) with the 
 subjunctive — in negative clauses ne; as, ■ 
 
 TViiy remained in order to avoid siispicion: Ut «uRploldnem 
 vlt&rent, remayieblEmt. 
 
 He is setting out to attack the enemy's camp: Proaoisoltnr %t 
 oaatra hostlam oppuifnet. i 
 
 In order that they may not he (or in order not to be) surrounded by 
 the enemy, they will make a sally : Ne ab bogtlbuf olroumvenian- 
 tar, eraptldnem faolent. , / ' , 
 
 Outposts are stationed lest a sally be mnde : Stattdnea ponnntur 
 n6 imptld flat. 
 
 :: 26. Rules for the Skquench olp TBKSEs.are as follows : . 
 
 (a) Primary tenses— viz., present, future, future perfect, and 
 perfect (when translated by English present perfect, with*;u»w)~^ 
 pure followed by the present subj unctive. '^ 
 
 0) Secondary (or historical) tenses—viz., imperfect, pluperfect, 
 «nd perfect (when translated by English past indefinite)— are fol- 
 lowed by the impet^e<;£ subjunctive. .V 
 
 Thus the present subjunctive is xjised where English could use 
 ihai , t J Unay, the imperfect subjunctive where English could 
 use thaiK f , might. ^! : ( '\ '' ■ ^V 
 
 (For examples see the sentence given in section 24 a^^eJ_ 
 26. Relative Clauses op ^uhpbsE.— After certain verbs, 
 especially those of sending and appointing^ relative clauses of 
 
 /'•. 
 
 purpose arerfouna7**fT5^ingrejpTa(^ as, 
 
 ^ 
 
 V ^ V' 
 
^ 
 
 monly 
 >duced 
 • They 
 
 led to 
 
 nodes 
 
 h the ' 
 
 I 
 
 onem 
 
 nr \it 
 
 ied by / 
 nlan- 
 
 intnr ^ 
 
 , and 
 ive) — 
 
 irfecfc, 
 "^ fol- 
 
 i use 
 cuuld 
 
 «t 
 
 -^-.;:/ 
 
 erba, 
 les of 
 
 •.H. ' 
 
 > 
 
 PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 299 
 
 ^If^nds »couts in advance to hlmose a suitable place /or the camp : 
 iut^tally who are to choose). »wr|8 aeiiir»nt 
 
 «»^ti^^'^^®-^T®^ n^ay b6 introduced' also by relative adverbs 
 letaT N^'' '*^«':«' a«V JVTor W 7Aey an/ place towh^lto 
 r^^eat: Neqae quo se reciperent habebant. 
 
 ; ; ^7. Substantive Final Clauses;— After verbs of urging, 
 asking, commanding, advising, persuading, striving (verba of 
 iviU and aim), Latin does not use the infinitive; it regards 
 the following clause as expressive of the end desired, and 
 therefore uses the subjunctive of purpose with ut (utl) and 
 
 . ne; as,:.,-..,,-,...' ■._:..,.,. .,.. ■,:-i,^.„ ... .■-;..■■/:....' ■ ■ 
 
 > Hi ^irges fern to tahenp arms: Hortatur ut arma caplant. 
 He xruimed Casticua to seize tiie chief pmoer: Per.uarit eagHod 
 wt regnum ooouparet. 
 
 . They begged of htm not to do that: Ab eo petgbaut u6 id 
 laoopoc» '-•■ ^ .-■■■-■ ,. 
 
 Jubed and c5»|rare^lmportant regular exceptions to this rule ; so 
 also verbs of striving and resolving, when the subject of both verbs 
 is the same (where English also has the infinitive). 
 
 28. i. In clauses of purpose ut is not followed by a n^ative 
 ne being uaed instead. Hence where not, ,w one, notlZg/ni 
 (adjectival) and never occur, use ne. ne quia, n6 quid, ng qui (or 
 qulB) and ne umquiyn, as, He ordered tlie gates closed that the 
 totmspeople might receive no hurt : Portas <*laudl Jus.lt n6 quam 
 
 7r^f,?t'*'/";'."'A*"l***'*'*'*^'*"*- ^' '^'^ ^^"^ ^ <»^<^ none to 
 cross; Postul&vlt n6 quog tranglro pateretur. 
 
 u. A seconS firial clause, if negative, is connected by n6ve (or ' 
 -neu}, not by peque , as. He issfiies orders tluit they are to hurl their 
 loeapons from a distame, and not approach nearer: Prdnuntlat ut 
 ^'"""wu** «onJ**!»»* n«« proplns aooedant. 
 
 111. When.the clause of purpose contains a- comparative «uo is 
 .commojly^sedinplaceoftat, as, They ask for reihforcem^nts, that 
 I theymdy more easily .mthstand, the enemy: Sub.ldlum roiant. 
 •quo faoillus hostes sustipere posslnt. 
 
 ',^«i!; *'^ historical present either primary or secondary 
 
 ?«equenoe may be Used.. ^ . -^^^-U-^^-. - C-._ ^^^^^^^^ 
 
 \^i\^^^^^'\T'^^ T ?^? ^^ **« constiHiction given in 
 l»otion.27, ahd as verba didarandl with the accusative and infini- 
 IZ :^, i ^^^'^ to Lcdmnus to b nUdthe iH -Hs e h': r.aMono 
 
 vjirofeotum eue. bo olao moned Kud persuOdtO* 
 
 _^^_]__j ^_l. ^ ^ ^ ::_ JL. _: 
 
 
300 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 
 vi. With verbs of asking and cornmanding the subjunctive some- 
 times occurs without ut. This should not be imitated by the 
 beginner in prose, ,^ 
 
 vii. Sometimes ut nS is found for nS, but not in OsBsar. 
 
 viii. Other modes of expressing purpose exist in Latin, the most 
 .important being by means of the gerund and gerundive. (See 
 sections 114 and 119.) • . 
 
 ix. For verbs of cavsmg^ see seotipn 33, ▼* ' 
 
 Verbs which Take Substantive Final Claitses. 
 
 Advise^ inoned, ^dmoned. 
 Ask, peto, rogd. 
 
 ;i 
 
 r-"^ 
 
 V ■ 
 
 Beg J beseech, dro, tilbMecr6i ' 
 tmmand, Imperd» pmeolpl&t 
 
 Commission, mMi&d5. 
 Determine, eon^tltno, d^oerno» 
 
 statuo. 
 Exhort, hortor, ndhortor, co- 
 ' '■; .' hoctor/ ■.; .; '.^ 
 
 Incite, instigate, Impelld. 
 
 Inntrwt, praeotpid. 
 ^Perm/itf oono6d5» permittd. * — 
 Termade, snibdeo» persuaded. 
 Prevail on, Impetro. 
 Bequest, require, peto, ro^d, 
 
 poitnI6. 
 Mesolve, see determine. 
 Strive, contends, nttor ; so Id 
 
 affdf operum dd. 
 Urge, hortor, adhortor. 
 Wa/m, mbne6, udmoneft. 
 
 V 
 
 EXERCISE 3. 
 A. 
 
 1. They sent Oe^sar iijto Gaul to carry on war with the Helve- 
 titans. 2. The Gauls had sent envoys to Oeesar to ask for peace 
 and to beg him not to storm their town. 3. He instructed the 
 cavalry to take possession of the camp, and not to pursue the 
 enemy. 4. In order to defeat the enemy, he sent forwiard the 
 cavalry and the slingers to attack them in the rear. 6. Caesar 
 exhorted the soldiers to fight valiantly, lest they should suffer the . 
 enemy to cross the river. 6. «The Gauls sent a messenger to warn 
 their allies that the Roman troops had built a bridge over the river 
 in order to pursue the enemy more easily. 7. He persuaded the 
 Helvetians to go forth from their territories ^th all their forces. 
 8. They ordered the bridge to be destroyed in order that no oifie, 
 might be able to cross th^ river. 9. He warned the soldiers that 
 the Gauls jrere at hand, and advised them not to leave the camp. 
 JO. flirtpipliodrthat Oiesarliarpraisod^e soldiera that theyTnight 
 
 \ 
 
 «>■ 
 
P^RT V.^SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 3ai 
 
 fight the more valiantly.i 11. Ho sent messengers to announce 
 that Caesar had determined that Labienus should not return J 12. 
 CflBsar ordered (imperd) his soldiers to press forward and not to 
 hurl any weapon whatever at the enemy. ,. 
 
 B, {The^iatodes, 6^6.) \ 
 1. He did this, not to skve the king, but to free Greece. 1^, En- 
 voys were sent to advise the Athenians not to restore their Walls 
 or defend thefr^ city. 3. In order to crush the Athenians he in- 
 structs his forces to build a bridge. 4. And there will bo no forti- 
 fied cities -for them to defend. 5. He urges them to destroy the 
 bridge in order that Xerxes may be un&ble to return to Asia. G. 
 That they might gain greater glory, they resolved that an embassy 
 should set out for Asia. 7. In order that the Athenians may be 
 as weak as possible, the Spartans will send envoys to forbid their 
 constructing a harbor. 8. He will persuade the king to return, 
 that Greece may hot submit to Asia. 9. Lest the enemy should be 
 informed that they were cut off from returning, he declared that 
 the bridges had not been destroyed. , 
 
 \ * * C (Gcesar, Bk. IV. 3.) , 
 
 1. They drive out the Ubii that the country may be'unoccupied. 
 2. They strove to be more civilized than the Germans. 3. The 
 Ubii were made tributaries that they might be rendered weaker. 
 4. They begged not to be driven from their lands. 5. He urged 
 
 'them to withstand the power of the Suebi. 6. These lands lie 
 waste that the Germans may not become accustomed to the man- 
 ners of this state. 7. He exhorted them not to think the state 
 insignificant or weak. 8. The others were sent to advise the same 
 merchants to come often. 9. We shall drive out the traders, lest 
 
 .we become ( = be made) refined. . / . 
 
 "^v, 
 
802 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 .-.iL 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 
 ,\i' 
 
 Consecutive Clauses (Clauses of Result). 
 
 29. Pure «Qjinsecutive Clauses. — Dependent clauses ex- 
 pressing result are in English introduced by that or as to, 
 following sa or such. In Latin result or consequence is 
 expressed by ut (or utl) with the subjunctive — in negative 
 clauses, utnon; as, ....... . ■ ■.;. ,. ,. , - . . .■ . ; .;../.. 
 
 They advanced with siich svnftness that thu enemy took to flight : 
 Ba oeleritate lernnt vt hostes se tngae mandarent. 
 
 I am not so uncivilized a^ jnpt toknmvthis: Non tam bar bar as 
 flnm at non haeo soiatn. 
 
 • 30. Rules for the Usi» of Tenses are as follows : " 
 
 The rules for the sequence of tenses in final clauses (section 26) 
 do not apply to sentences of result. As a rul6 the English tense 
 will be a sufficient guide ; the Latin imperfect, however, is gener- 
 ally used for the English past (indefinite) tense, as in the first 
 example in section 29. 
 
 31. Substantive Consecutive Clauses. — After certain verbs, 
 chiefly those of happening and resulting, clauses introduced by that 
 are rendered by Latin consecutive clauses with ut or ut nOn and 
 the subjunctive ; as, _ , ^ 
 
 It happened that there was a full moon : Aooldit at esset luna 
 pl6na. 
 „ The result ivas thai the Oenlnans ivere stimmoned : Faotum est 
 
 i ntl GerinanI aroesserentar. • , >. 
 
 32. Relative Clauses of Characteristic. — The sub- 
 junctive of result is often found in clauses introduced by the 
 relative pronoun. In these clauses the antecedent is referred 
 to as belonging (or not belonging) to a class characterized by 
 a certain quality, and the relative may generally be replaced 
 by the phrase such cts or such that ; as, ."V ., : n ' ' f 
 
 Nor vxM there anyone who was intent on looting : Negne fntt 
 qnltqa&in qut praedae atudiret. 
 

 PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 303 
 
 i 
 
 But lam not the man to be frightened by danger : NWque 1. •«& 
 
 There were two roads by which th^y cmM have iome: Brant 
 Itinera duo qnibns aomd exire poAsent. ' ' 
 
 i. This subjunctive of characteristic is especially common after 
 such general phrases of existence as mnt %il, Jn^TZ, tZ 
 
 aJso after dtgnus tndtgnm and idoneua; and after comparati^s 
 w^th ^mm; as, He wUl not be a Jit person to be «en*; Xn TrU 
 Idoneus qui mittatur. Th^ stonss are too Iwi'ge to be movX 
 Majoi^ sunt gax» quam quae moverl posslnt. 
 
 u. The relative clause of characteristic has sometimes a re«*m«i»e 
 force ; as, 80 far as I know : Quod solam. ra^w^ctwe 
 
 33. i. As </ia« noHn clauses of result is w* n(5n, so where no one 
 nothing, na (adjectival) and never occur, use ut nemQ, ut ni^i^ut 
 nuttm, ut numqiuim ; as, He put the enemy so speedUyto fliaht that 
 n^on^ h.ld his ground at ail : Tam oelerlter hltes L figlm dat 
 ntl omnind resisteret nemo. , " * 
 
 ^ ii. <?t«n is often found instead of g^*? n5n in relative clauses of 
 ?» ^5 w /f*'/^'' "^g»*^^« phrases ; as. No one is so brave as not 
 to be duturbed: Nemo est tam fortl» quin perturbetur 
 
 m. Sometimes the perfect subjunctive instead of the imperfect is 
 «T«r °^"J?P«"d.f 8 to our past (indefinite) tense. In sSch cases 
 ^nZiil *^^® ^,?.*^' ^« f^W attention to the independent fact 
 rather than dwelling on the relation of cause and effect ; or (2) the 
 action is summed up as a single whole, and not regarded as con- 
 S"^J *^' ^'*'' ^^'^ ^'^'''^^'^ *^ ^«*^*' ^ *''«* ««»1/ Mo reached 
 e^ererto'* ^*''^'* ^''P"»"*^®'""*' ^* P^rpauoae ad terram 
 
 iv. A common use of the consecutive, clause is to form with 
 a preceding fore (or M^rum esse) ,a substitute for the future 
 inbnitive passive, and sometimes also for the future infinitive 
 active, especially with verbs that lack the supine stem ; as. He 
 Poped that Arwvistus ivould abandon his obstinacy: Spdr&bat fore 
 uti Arlovlstus pertlnaola deslsteret. > 
 
 V. Verbs of coming are followed sometimes by a clause of 
 purpose sometimes by one of result. Hence the ne^tive is some- 
 tunes ne, sometimes ut nOn. , 
 
 '-■'-■ :-;.-.: :;...-: ■.■'.#- -EXERCISE 4.-- '■ '■ ;■••■'"; '';'-■; 
 
 1. So great a panic seized oUr soldiers that we did not dare to 
 JTi ^^^^^*'^ ^^^ ^."^"^y- ^- ^^ happened that no ship reached 
 
 the Roman people can be conquered by our forces. U. There is 
 
 /4' 
 
 13 
 
 '<. 
 
304 
 
 V 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.. 
 
 no one but knows that the comniander was 'worthy of being loved 
 by the soldjefs.J 5. Such was the valor- of th'e soldiers that not a 
 man withdrew from the ramparts. 6. We have been so taught by 
 quj: ancestors that we are accustomed to receive, not to give, 
 hostages. 7. Csesar said that from these circumstances it had > 
 resulted that they roamed about less wid^y. 8. He was the oiily 
 man who had not been induced to take the oath! '9. He had 
 judged this cavalryman a suitable person to send to/Cfesar to adc , 
 assistance. 10. There are some who say that the Helvetians ^ 
 are too braveto be conquered bj__the Romans. .11. The roesi^n- 
 gers made answer to Csesar that the bridge had been so bra^y 
 defended by the enemy that no portion of the army had beei|^,^le 
 to cross. 12. There followed such storms as prevented the ^cmay 
 from attempting to attack the camp. . . 
 
 -: B. {Themistodes, 7t 8.) 
 
 1. So greatVasthe storm that he was compelled to land all the 
 sailors. 2. It happened- that they were^ awaiting the king, and 
 were unwilling to keep their promise. ^ 3. There i%no one in whom 
 we feel confidence. 4. He is acting so unjustly ,^at the rest of» 
 his colleagues complain that they are being deceived, and are 
 taking thought for their own safety. 5. The result was that he. 
 was driven from the state and condemned in his absence. 6. Ther^, 
 are three ship^ on which they can send' back the hostages to^, 
 Athens. 7. Athens was so near that he saw he could easily re4ch 
 it. 8. It is /so difficult to defend the city that it is i^eless to 
 declare war. on the king. , ' 
 
 j'^ . C. {Ccesar, Bk IV. 4.) -* 
 
 1. "They advanced so rapidly that they ppmpleted the whole 
 march in three days. 2. It happened that they were returning to 
 the same parts of Germany. 3. He is not the man to cross the 
 river secretly and retium to his own village. 4. So vast was the 
 host of the Usipetes . that the Menapii were driven out from the 
 rest of the district. 5. So great is the scarcity of boats that we 
 cannot cross.- 6. Who is there who has not been informed of 
 both matters (res)! 7. He brought it abo^t that no one was 
 prevented from wandering on this side of the river. 8. He crdtsed 
 
 
 a/'-" 
 
 
 
 
 ': ■ ■-,. V 
 
 
 
 *»■ 
 
 '■■"A. 
 
 * 
 
 * , ■ 
 
 
 .„■ .-. ' .;. 
 
 ^ ,. 
 
 wete^ 
 
 ^ 
 
ag loved 
 lat not a 
 ,ught by 
 to give, 
 3 it had 
 the diily 
 He had 
 ir to adc 
 ilv^tians 
 ine8g(^ii- 
 brayiSy 
 
 1 all the 
 ng, and 
 nwhora 
 » rest oi?^ 
 and are 
 that he 
 5. Ther^ 
 bages to,^ 
 ly reach 
 eless to 
 
 3 whole 
 ming to 
 ross the 
 was the 
 roirt the 
 bhat we 
 rmed of 
 >ne was 
 crossed 
 ns weffr- 
 
 ^ 
 
 305 
 
 ./ 
 
 '■ (:"'!" 
 
 PART V.i-SYNTAX ANb COMPOSITION. 
 
 * ■ ■ , ^ . 
 
 ■■rtvr--'--'-'.: CHAPTER V. '' ^.^K,'^:'^-\ -f,- Vv', 
 Questions, Dijiect and I5(tdirect. . 
 
 34. A DiKECT Question is a principal clause introduced *y 
 (a) An interrogative pronoun, pronominal adjective or adverb, or 
 (6) One of the interrogative particles : ne, niyiine, ornum; m, 
 What do they seek f Quid petant? 
 Whither are we setting out? Quo proflolgolmur? 
 —. no you not see? Ndnne Tides? . ^ ^^ 
 
 nwfJ^^:.^*"r\'^"'"~;"^* '^ *," enclitic, appWded "to an em- 
 phatic word which IS regularly at the beginning of the *uestion. 
 
 r//.>* V -^ / information,' and is impartial or non-committal ; as, 
 18 he writing ? Sorlbltne ? . " ' ' 
 
 ,,..^^'*"* **^^ ^^^ confirmation of belief, and expect^, the answer 
 
 ycs, as, ■ * ^ 
 
 . Ish^ not wriUn^ f {ov He is wrtting, ia he not ?) Nonne- «orlbir? 
 ^jx^ asks for confirmation of disbeUef, and expects the answer 
 
 mrdyhe ia not writing? ipr.He is not toriting, is he?) Nurt 
 
 35. InWct Questions— a subordinate clause i»tr<;.' 
 duced by any of the interrogative words mentfOnea above is 
 called a dependent or indirect question, and always has its, 
 verb in the subjunctive; as, : \ v , v^ 
 
 Be asked what they sought : Quaeslvlt quid peterent. 
 Me wonders what the reason is : Quae causa sit, mlra^nr. 
 
 In English we do not usually consider the clause a* a 
 de^ndent question unless the principal verb is of an interro- 
 ktive nature, but in Latin it may be a verb meaning to learn, 
 find out, know, tell, point out, see or decide; as, 
 
 Be learns what is bein^ done: Cdfirndsolt quae «erantur. 
 
 Ue reported wh<it he had seen: Quae perspexlsset reniintlavlt. 
 ^1 ney cannot decide tn which direction it flows : in utram partem 
 llnat, Judloare non possunt. 
 
 „ *' A^^ ^^^ ^*^*"* ^^ dependent questions express whether without 
 any difterence of meaning ; as, He asked whether they were happv 
 
 % 
 
 nnm beAtl easent (or be&tla» egaeg t^ 
 
 v? 
 
 N' "^^ 
 
 1. -y» must not be used when the sentence contains some other interrogative word, 
 
 - 2Q ^ . -. . ' 
 
 ■^ 
 
r- 
 
 306, 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 36. Rules for the Use of Tenses are as follows J 
 
 In indirect questions as ar rule the English tenses will be a . 
 sufficient guide.* The futilre is represented by the subjunctivj^ of 
 the active periphrastic conjugation (see Part III. 69, a). 
 
 • ^ 
 
 ' Sequence of Tenses in Indieeqt Questions.. 
 
 ft 
 
 Primary Sequence. 
 
 He asks, lenms,* V 
 He ivill ask, learn, ') 
 
 {what they are <iping : 
 what they have don^ T 
 what they tvill do: 
 
 etj 
 
 Qnaerit, cognoscit 
 Quaeret, cogndscet 
 
 (4uld faciant. 
 quid, feoerlnt, 
 quid factnri slnt. 
 
 ^ ^ Secondary Sequence 
 
 ^fY^df'P He was atking, learning, 
 b^O He asked, learned, 
 JitA-U^-^^ ^^ osfced^ learned, 
 \ \ ' iwhat they were doing 
 
 \ what they did : 
 
 I what they had done ; 
 
 \what they would do : 
 
 ) 
 
 "1 
 
 »t. J 
 
 ./ 
 
 Qaaerebat, oognosoebat* 
 Quaeslvit,. oogrndvlt, 
 Qaaeslverat, oogrndve'rat, 
 
 Tquid faoerent. 
 ' , J quid fedssent. _^ . 
 
 I quid fecissent. 
 Vqnld facturl essent. 
 
 37. After the verbs mentioned in section 35, English abstract' 
 nouns such as size, number, character, reason, time, place, and many 
 verbal nouns such as opinion, intention, are best rendered into 
 Latin by dependent interrogative clauses ; as, '^: 
 
 You, see the extent of the danger : Videtls quantum sit perl- 
 'onlnm. ^^ ^ 
 
 He could not discover their intentions: Quae faoturl essentt 
 odgndioere non poterat. 
 
 38. Disjunctive Questions. — Where two questions are conr 
 nected by or, involving an alternative choice, we have a disjunc- 
 pive, altemc^tive or double question as opposed to a simple question. 
 
 /The first alternative is in Latin regularly introduced by utrum 
 (whether) or -ne, the second by an (or): Such questions^ when 
 dependent are of course in the subjunctive ; as, 01 
 
 1. The chief exceptions are : (a) Afler a primary tense the perfect subjunctive talies 
 ]the place of the imperfect ; as, / know what he was doing : Scio quid fecerit. 
 / (6) After the perfect tetise secondary tenses are used, even where'We should expect 
 primary tenses; as, I have shown what resources you have: Quae tubsidia 
 h«bf r« 8 | j»xpo»H ' ' (Thi 8=4a»t p e oaKMri tjf i»-4oyn4 y>m»thpe» 4ti»9 
 
 result*). 
 
 'ft' 
 
 i*::jr: 
 
 ■Jj, . ^ 
 
^ill be a <° 
 nctive of 
 
 vr« 
 
 int. 
 
 at. 
 Vat 
 
 It. j 
 
 )88ent. 
 
 abstract 
 nd many 
 red into 
 
 lit perl- 
 [ essent. 
 
 are ccmr 
 
 |uestion. 
 ^ ntram 
 ns when 
 
 ictive takes 
 erit. 
 
 )uld expect 
 I subsidia 
 
 
 PART v.— 1^ 
 
 AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 307 
 
 Utruni' apad ed« 
 
 Does duty or fear ^veigh more vnth them? 
 offlolum an timor plus valet ^ ^ 
 
 th!!^mZlt&ii'^^'''^ *« l^<^th^ir forces agaM 
 
 - «on! i!?^ o^toj^fend the camp. Dellberabant ooplasne adver- 
 8um hostem ducere. an castra deferiderc praestaret. 
 
 theinL^ri^ ''' ^"'^' ''^J""^^^^^ question, is ann.n; in 
 u. Utrum is often omitted in disjunctive questions in which 
 case -ne is sometimes used for an in indirect questSr ' iS sSe 
 SlTeSs!^^^""^ ^^ «^"^^*^-- omittld.esp^iall'/in-^^i^ 
 ^ ni. yc« and wo in answers are usually expressed bv reDeatinir 
 fn^ratto'^^. ^"^^*^^" <^^*^ ^^ -^^-' -^')' oAyl^^^ef 
 qimerl!" '''^'''^^ questions, n5nne, «;;,e<;i«r not, is used only after 
 
 fk^'j^*^ ^^i'^ ?^^**^ importance, but.not always easy, to distincuish 
 the dependent interrogative from the dependent ^^lativrEe 
 the latter being regularly in the indicative For instance in S 
 could not prevent what bad been done, and I can gou^^etLlZ 
 go ^vh^t^nd where are to be taken as relatives ; in ThZ coTMnot 
 
 A^Zt^f T ^n^^"" th^,Awbs mentioned in section 35, howei^er 
 ^lt1:S:'^ gene^lly be^in WgatiVe ; If ter otLr v^^^^; 
 
 EXERCISE 6. 
 
 H , 
 
 A 
 
 •^ - * 
 
 1. He asks who is leading the army into our territories and" 
 
 what he wishes to accomplish. 2. He told the gener^ who had 
 
 persuaded the soldiers to leave the camp.« 3. C«sar had sent 
 
 hors^en m advance to observe in what direction the enemy were 
 
 marching. 4. . Did yoU not know that he had asked whether the 
 
 Koman people would make geace with the enemy? 5. Of whom 
 
 shall I ask the date of his return to the city? 6. He sent scouts 
 
 across the river to ascertain what was going on in th^enemy's 
 
 camp. 7. Are you a Roman soldier or not ? What is your reason 
 
 for coming into our territories ? 8. Surely he did not ask whether 
 
 the Roman people had made peace with the Helvetians or not ? 
 
 9. He could not find out what villages the Gauls had beyond the 
 
 Jvnone. or the — -— *« "« .... 
 
 strength a^= 
 
 the ppsition of the enemy's forces. IX. Did C«esar inquire why 
 
4 
 
 308 
 
 E.* 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 the officers had not led the troops against the enemy to prevent 
 thdr crossing the river? 12. He sent ispies in order that he might 
 be able to know with whom the leader of the Gauls held com- 
 munication. 
 
 B.iThemistoclea; 9, 10.) '^ 
 
 1. They asked why he did not believe you. 2. Surely they 
 did not bury him secretly near the market-place?. 3. We know 
 what city will provide him with bread and whence he ^U obtain 
 wine. ^4. He e^lained the character and extent of the bridge he 
 had constyucted. 6^ Did he wish to do evil or good to the 
 Persians? 6. He asked whether they were promising to crush 
 Greece. 7. Did they not fight a battle with me off Salamis? 
 
 8. I believe what Thucydides has written concerning those times. 
 
 9. To whom has the king presented these gift»? 10. We wished 
 to knoF whether or not the bridges had been broken down. 
 
 O. {Ccemr, BL IV. 5.) •; V^ 
 
 1. Prom what districts do you come and what have you heard 
 or learned there about these matters? 2. He ajsked what plans 
 they were adopting. 3. The merchants were compeUed against 
 their will to declare whether they favored a change of government. 
 4. Is he the slave of a doubtful rumor or has he been compelled to 
 co.me ? 5. Surely they do not fear this custom, do they^ 6. We 
 shall ascertain the reason for the Gauls' eagerness for political 
 changes. 7. We asked wheth^^^ qpt they had mformed Csesar. 
 of this/ruinoi^ 8. Ccesar qpri^le<^^ the Gauls to declare what' 
 plans ffley would adopt. 9. Do not most people fear the mob ? 
 
 I '',^'^~ 
 
 "i ' 
 
 m^-- 
 
 «I 
 
 7 
 
PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 S09 
 
 . CHAPTER VI. ' 
 
 The Present and Perfect Participles. 
 
 40. The participle is a verbal adjective. In Latin, like the 
 adjective, it is inflected to agree with its substantive, while, like 
 the verb, it has distinctions of voice and tense, and has the same 
 case relations as the verb from which it is formed. 
 
 The Present Participle has active force, whether formed from 
 active or deponent verbs ; the Perfect Participle when formed 
 from active v6rbs has passive force, but when from deponents, 
 active force. _ . . 
 
 >^1. The time of the participle is in Latin relative to that of 
 its principal verb. .;-,\/\_, J- ■■)-■:-■■]:):. .is. * 
 
 ^ (a) The Present Participle denotes the same time.aa that of 
 its verb. : «^ 
 
 (b) The P«»/ec< Participle denotes time jo»-»or to that of its 
 „ verb. ... ''-.:- 
 
 Hence whenever the English, as is so often the case, uses 
 the present participle to denote something that takes place 
 be/ore the action expressed by its main Verb, the present par- 
 ticiple must not l^ used in Latin, but either the perfect 
 participle or some equivalent ; as, ., 
 
 Betuming to the harbor, he found th» ships ready: Ad portnm 
 TOvergu» (or cum ad portnm redilsset), nhv6H parAtas Inventt. 
 
 Bexng defeated m batUe, tfiey sent envoys.: Proello «uperAtl, 
 Mgatos mlaArnnt. 
 
 42. The Appositivb or Circumstantial Participle^— The 
 most important use of the participle in Latin is its use in the 
 appositive relation to its substantive to define the circum- 
 stances of an action, expressing the relation of time or cause 
 or (less frequently) of condition or concession; as, 
 
 (o) Present Participle i—He is dain whUeftghting bravely : rat' 
 tlMlmfl pugniinB Interflcltnr. 
 
 They dew Husovus whiU fillifftfnjl^dmi; Dtfmum red^ntiir" 
 Roaolnm oooIdAruntt 
 
 C 
 
 ■v 
 
310 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 
 (6) Perfect Participle "PasBive:— Being repulsed hy the cavalry^ 
 they hid in the woods: Repalsl ab eqnitatu, se In sllvas abdi- 
 derant. ' ' ' 
 
 Hti brought aid to his brother, when hemmed in by the enemy: 
 Fratrl Intercluso ab hojstibns auxlliam tnllt. 
 
 Though thrown into confusion, they did not retreat: Perturbatl» 
 tamen pedem non rettnlernnt. ■ * ^> 
 
 He ujill come if asked : VLogsktvLs yreini«>t. - 
 
 (c) Perfect Participle Deponent :—HaiHnsF encouraged the sol- 
 diers, he leaped down : Gobortatns mllltes, deslluit. 
 
 Fearing a' scarcity of provisions, he returned: Inoplam frumontl 
 Veritas, redlit. - 
 
 n.v 
 
 Notice that although the EnglisBT participle is frequently^pre ' 
 ceded by such words as while, when, if though, the corresponding 
 Latin words are not used. - > 
 
 43. It is generally advisable to render this Latin participle more 
 freely into English, using either (a) a dependent clause introduced 
 by while, whkn, after, as, because, if, although; or (b) the preposi^ 
 tions on, after, with a verbal noun, especially the gerund in -ing; 
 or (c) a coordinate sentence followed by and or but; or (d) a, rela- 
 tive clause. 
 
 And conversely All such expressions are commonly best rendered 
 into Latin (where possible) by the circumstantial participle, 
 
 Foi} instance, in place of the English sentences given in secticH 
 42, we may have; corresponding to the same Latin sentences : 
 
 They dew Roscius while he was retumitig home, ovt They dew 
 Roacius, toho tvas returning home. 
 
 On being remdsed by the cavalry (or. After their repulse by the 
 cavalry), they hid in the woods. 
 
 JSe brought aid to his brother when he had- been hemmed in by the „ 
 enemy, or, who had been hemmed in by the enemy. 
 
 Though they were thrown into confusion, they did not retreat, or, ' 
 They loere thrown into confusion but did not retreat, > ' 
 
 He ioUl come if he is asked. t, • " • i 
 
 After he fuid e/neouraged f,he «kdiers (or, After encouraging the 
 soldiers) he kaj^ dovm, or, He enccet^raged the ai^diera auk leaped 
 
 0vm*'' \ ' "* .^ ^. -m^ ■'.:■-■'. • 
 
 ^e returned, hecauae he feared a scarcity of provisions, or, Aahe 
 ~^red a scarcity of provision^, he retwnytd, , ^ 
 
 ■'■„' ' ■ ■ \ ■ < :■ ; ■ ' .If. ■; •.•v.-";'.. - • 
 
 44. i. Other uses of the Participle are : ^ 
 
 ' (g) As a sf^tbstantiw^ olfcie Hy in the ohlique fwiwM linrf .iyipmf^iilty — 
 In the plural; as, lie, fdlvtved up the fugitives: fngUant^m pr»»- 
 
 
PART V.—SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 811 
 
 e cavalry, 
 TAs ubdi- 
 
 t« eiiemy : 
 
 rturbatl, 
 
 I the s<A- 
 'rumontl S 
 
 »ntly pre- 
 sponding 
 
 iple more 
 itroduced 
 preposi^ 
 L in -ing; 
 d) a rela- 
 
 rendered 
 le. 
 
 n section 
 
 oes ;' 
 
 ^1/ deto 
 Ise by the 
 in by the 
 Wmt, or,, 
 
 V 
 
 .■:■ I 
 
 ging the 
 
 § leaped 
 
 ^ ifif hi 
 
 ipBdft]!y_ 
 
 ■eoutns est. OppoHunity for resting is givm to the vmmded: 
 Valhei atls facnitas qnietis datar. ' ' 
 
 Note that those fleeing, those wounded is not in Latin II Wvleiites 
 or II ynlneratL 
 
 (6) As an adjective; as, This state was large and flourishing: 
 Haeo civltas fult ampla ^tqne florena. They thought they were 
 ready : Se paratds esse arbltrati sunt. 
 
 Paratus and many other participles are in fact compared like 
 adjectives. 
 
 (c) As a predicative complement of certain verbs, especially (a) 
 the present participle with video, audid^ facio, ana other verbs of 
 perceiving ov representing; as, He noticed a ceHain man meriting: 
 Animadvertit quendam scrlbenteni ; and (6) the perfect par- 
 ticiple passive with habed, very like the English perfect with have; 
 as, He sends forward the cavalry which he had collected from the 
 whole province : Equltatum, quem ex omnl provinola coaotnm 
 babebat, praemlttlt. (See section 182, e. ii.) 
 
 ii. The perfect participle of many deponent verbs appears often 
 to have the force of the present ; for instance, there is no appre- 
 ciable diflFerence between arbitratus and existimuns. Other words 
 so used Are veritus, difflsus, suspiccttus, u»iis; as, Stuspecting that 
 this would happen, Labienus uns advancing, employing the sam^ 
 pretence: Qiyae fore snsplc&tns, Lablgnns eftdem usus slmnlg^- 
 tldne progredleba$ar. In most cases the perfect is defensible 
 as specifying the cause which leads to subsequent action. 
 
 iii. The participle occasionally has its force defined more exactly 
 by the use of nisi {except), ut or tamqmm {aa if), etal or quamquam 
 {althomh), utt)ote (inasmuch as). 
 
 iv. The lack of a present participle passive is supplied by a sub- 
 ordinate clause with dum, cum, or giti; that of the perfect participle 
 active (where a deponent verb is not available) by a subordinate 
 verb with cum, si, etsl, etc., or by the ablative absolute construc- 
 tion (see Chapter VII.), 
 
 EXERCISE 6. 
 
 ■M>^. 
 
 1. They threw the ambassador into chains while he was attempt- 
 ing to speak. 2. The envoys, after being dismissed, returned 
 home. 3. The cavalry made an attack upon the Gauls, who were 
 spattered and in despair. 4. Thinking the ambassadors would not 
 return, Cassar crossed the river. 5. After encouraging the cavalry 
 the tribunes returned to Caasar. 6. He replied that the Germans 
 mmld ijomo if ask e d. 7. .Our iiiou Hltaoked th^ ettenky tod aiew 
 a groat number of them. 8. Promising to return in a short time. 
 
m 
 
 PRIMARy LATIN BOOK. 
 
 I -. 
 
 I 
 
 he follojed «p the fuahves. 9. He comes upon the soldiers, who 
 «re fightmg^b„vely. 10. On his return he found the so dTer^ 
 engaged .nthe work. 11. The <».val.y, being ovAerJt\^Z 
 
 ^^iTwo^ ^:r:ir '"^ '^™"^- '"r "-■'™ ">'» - 
 
 ■ ■ ■ ■■■ • . ■ ■ \ ■;■■'■ 
 
 B. (Aristides, l-S.) \ . ' 
 
 wi' ^it^f ^«~ withdrBwing. they inquired of him what ho~ 
 
 I!^.Y *'sJ' ^^' '""°« """"I "■» J"»' t» "»ny years' 
 Aristides wal>„ished by an excited mob. a:jUthough fS 
 . from th.s penalty they wiU be driven from their 'ooun^ 
 ^ 4. Feanng (vermr) the l^rbarians, the states tmnsferred the mS 
 
 •^"'■■■"'- ^^/"''"."T^ the' Athenians, ff. He will be restored to h"s 
 \- ... ^ I"»""*'? «nd chosen general of the Athenians. 6. BeiuB repelled 
 • , >e-barbanans attempted to buUd a fleet. 7. They sl^ ^Z^^ ' 
 T»nwho was «tempting to get together an" army.' 8. ^^1 
 .(f«P*»-)m the fourth year to Greece, he routed the army of tSe 
 Sy^venlS '"^"■^"■'^ ^" '-■"' » <'^- o" ^His siaJe. t£ 
 _-|''.V' '■ Oj {Gmar^lBk. ir. e.) ' ^ '" i'. 
 
 WL^ <W was^ setting out for.the «miy he' learned of this 
 Eb^n'^1 ■"""«.""' "-«y »»«W,»«"d:embassies to the 
 fnvZr ^ p """"T* *fr leading men to him. 3. On the ■ 
 mv^t*n of CaE«ar, he wiU carry on war a^nst the Treveri 
 4. Havmg set out eaiUer than usual, they learned that someX^ 
 were not ready 6. After wandering far (io,^) ^nd ^de tt 
 Germans reached the Rhine. 6. Thinking th»t the cavaliy wh^^ 
 
 ^se^o'utTru '' T^r "'""^"™«' *= -^^^ 
 
 to set out. 7. Embassies have been sent by this state, and are • 
 oommg to c«sar with .11 the leading men. 8. While tJey a^ 
 w«g.ng war with the Eburones, they will reach the territorfes ~ 
 the Germans. ^9 This vassal, suspecting, that 0«^ would ,L« 
 h« departure, had determined to arouse their spirit* • " "" , 
 
 
PART V.—SfNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 313 
 
 ^ X , .>■■ 
 
 CHAITER VII. • j 
 
 1 The 'Ablative Absolute. 
 
 * 
 
 45. In translating into Latin participial phrases (or their equiv- 
 alents), such as have been described in Chapter VI., two difficul- 
 ties often arise : 
 
 ^ (a) The participle required is a perfect participle ac<m„ which 
 r^s not ejcist in Latin (except in the case of deponente) ; as, 
 Hamng heard this, he departed. After receiving hostages, he made 
 peace. They made art attack and drove the enemy back. 
 
 (b) Thesubject of the verb in the English subordinate clause 
 cannot be brought into direct relation with an/single word in the 
 main sentence ; as. When the arms had been surrendered, he made 
 peace, Althcyugh the defenders w^re but few, he crnddnot take the 
 
 46. In such cases recourse toay generally be had to the 
 ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE Construction, in which a substantive (or 
 pronoun) and a participle in agreement are used, in the 
 ablative case ; as, , ' ' • 
 
 Having heard this, h^ departed : m. r«bu> «udltl», dlwegBlt i 
 
 ' They made an attack and d^ove the enemy ba^ik : Impetu f aotfi ' 
 lioatga reppnlerant. ««wto. 
 
 When the arms had been surrendered, he made peace: Tr&dlti. 
 
 ^ ^«/wugfA- the defenders were but few, he coitld not take the iovm: 
 Puaols ddfendenttbus. oppldam expaRn4re non pptnlt. 
 
 47. There is a sipiUar nominative absolute construction in Enff- 
 J_«w» ^** o'^WM having been surrendered, M made peace. But 
 Jflnglish construction is of comparatively rare occurrence, and 
 !.!ff """"kT'^u ^^5 ""^^^^^ translation for the Latin ablative ibso- 
 su^'eTt^dlnS^^ "^ ''^"'^"''^ '^'^^'^^ *« ^^ ^^^^>^ 
 
 ■f: L" ^t ^f^:A''r^. ^" .'^"^^l^ ^^ ^- "^ay also have in 
 
 ft of thfl ft bl ft tivo 4aMw>kfee, ilept i iukfU tfftmaer expreaaing tim4^ 
 
 eatufe, etc.; for inatanoe, in place of the present participle, 
 
 cum 
 
 * . 
 
314 
 
 
 ■I 
 
 PRIMikV LATIN BOOK; 
 
 -k 
 
 rTloHnnlTS^i^i*"^^!!"?*'''^^ *umrwith the pMseiit indicative 
 
 iThX i 'i^}' ^u^ ''l.P^^ f ^^« P^'^^^''^ participle, cum 
 with the pIuperfec|Bubjunctive or uU or postmmm mth the perfect 
 indicative (sectionasi ;452^ 6) ;.^b, OniaAing thisXl^rted: 
 Cum haeo audlvl..et, dl«o«Mit. Being unaUe' to orossAhey re- 
 turned: Cum tran.Ire non possent. revertftriint. . 
 
 49. Instead of the" participle in the absolute cdnstpuct^pn.. we 
 often find a predicate noun or adjective, without any copula, as 
 the verb ^ae has no present or perfect participle ; as, . , 
 
 . They attempt to cross agcnnst his tuUl: B5'inTlto tranaire o6- 
 nantur. ' ■ 
 
 He foTTMd a conspiracy ip, the conmdship ofMessalaand Pisd: 
 Messala atque PU6ne odnsalibiii oonjur&tlonem fecit. ^ 
 
 50. i. The ablative absolute construction is not used with the 
 perfect participle passive of intransitive verbs, th^t is, of verbs 
 
 Z^fhJ'ij, p,.^ 7. ^"^ /"^* 5''^®''" *" accusative ; as, Havin6 
 reached the Rhine, they plunged into the river: Cum ad Bhenum 
 
 pervenlMent.l§ln liaraen praeotpltavfipunt. HatnnoDardawcd 
 theprwomrs, he returned: Cum oaptlvl. Ignfivlgget, re.mt. 
 
 u. In. the case of the perfect partic^e-of deponent verbs with 
 activarforce, the ablative absolute, is somewhafc sparingly used, and 
 Qhiefly with intransitive verbs ; a«, A great storm aro^ and 2most 
 ,aU the 8htp8 xoera wrecked: M^ximh. ooort& tempestate, prope 
 omne. 11&V6. aflllotae «unt. So also mcrtvm, profectus, secutns 
 •-w ':• -^^^l^ojitrary to Latin usage to have the substantive in the 
 ablative absolute dehote the same person or thing as is mentioned 
 in thepnncipal clause ;^s. When Commius landed they seized him 
 18 not Commld « n&vl «grets6, earn oomprehenderubt. but 
 Commlum 6 nftyl «ffreMum oompreliendArunt.* * 
 
 IV. For msi, nt, etc., with the abl. absolute see section 44 iil 
 ^hLa - ».'*^*»VV^^^"S "^^^ the nepiative is often equivalent to a 
 £ t-"»"*''*"^^ by ^^'^^^^^'«' '^^.^mthout losing any time he sets 
 out. iVniio tempore Intermlaad proflolaoltur. 
 
 ..wi, ^^^^^'''X *b«V^"*^^ "?*y define -the circumstances of 
 
 i^n Z ' ^'h I ^ '^""t 'T* *"* (X»ifu»ionfrom heaHng the shouf- 
 tng tl^ rest took to Jtufht: kellqnl, e«udlt6 olftmore pertur- 
 !!f„ ««•*»«»«>«•. tergra yertftpunt. An ablative absolute may be 
 
 ZS^ h,^?„\°''T"°*''''l».^*'^;' **' "2^"'> with another ablative 
 absolute, but not with any other (even an equivalent) construction 
 
 '•^&. 
 
 1. Literally Be (^%) wnwitling ; M«$iala and Pi»o {being) wntvts. 
 
 2. Yet Offlsar has geveral inaUncM of the ablative alxolute In such a oaM nft^n 
 parent y to secure emphasis ; e.g., B. G., III. 14. 4 ; IV 12 1 • 21 «• vV^'i? « 
 [. 4. 4 ; 48. 1 : VII. 4. l*! 27.8'; jS.'l; 78. 8. Iftt IhouM nV 6« Imftofad*' ' "' *' 
 
PART V. — SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 315 
 
 EXERCISE 7. V 
 
 A, 
 
 .,f:f 
 
 
 1. Having settled these matters, he returned.** 2. After encour- 
 aging the soldiers and giving the signal, he ordered an attack to 
 . be made. .3. He set out against Caesar's will, after promising to 
 return shortly. 4. As no enemy prevented (him), he led the 
 legion back in safety. 5. On this being done, the Roman soldiers, 
 drawing their swftrds, made an attack upon the enemy. 6. In the 
 consulship of Marius many were put to death without a hearing. 
 7» After that assembly had been dismissed, the chief men returned 
 to Ciesar. 8. After he heard the prisoner, he dismissed him. 
 9. When this battle was fought, the enemy, being impressed by 
 the bravery of out soldiers, sent envoys to Csesar. 10. Having 
 reached their territories, he set fire to all their villages and then 
 returned to the camp. 
 
 . ' B. (Hannibal, 1^ 2.) 
 
 1. After Hannibal was banished the Romans ceased to carry on 
 war with the Carthaginians. 2. Leading the son to the altar, 
 .the father bade him swear to "conquer the Romans. 3. While the 
 citizens were sacrificing, he was attempting to bribe the general. 
 4. When Hannibal was a little boy, Hamilcar was making war on 
 Spain. 5. When Hannibal was a little boy, Hamilcar took him 
 with him to the camp. 6. Af te» the victims are sacrificed he will 
 set out* 7. "^ While Philip was absent, the others/ began to act 
 unwisely. 8. They bribed the king and inflamed ^iiin with hatred 
 towards the Romans. * 
 
 O. (Catmr, Bk. IV. 7.) 
 ^. While the Romans were offering resistance, the cavalry 
 secured a supply of corn. 2. After conquering the Germans he 
 heard that ambassadors were coraing'from i^ Suebi. ^ 3. Ho drove 
 out the Suebi, and assigned lands to the Gennans. 4. Without 
 anyone offering resistance, they will set out against Ctesar's wish. 
 5. Being unable to' conquer the Suebi, they made war on the 
 Germans. 6.* Although they be^ed for mercy, he nevertheless 
 drove the Suebi from their lands. 7. As we have secured cavalry, 
 we sh^ll be a match for the Romatis. 8. After making war 
 
316 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 ■*,< 
 
 CHAPTER VIIL ., 
 
 Verbs Completed by 'the Dative, Genitive or Ablative 
 —The Impersonal Passive. 
 
 51. Many verbs followed By a direct object in English are 
 represented in Latin by verbs that take, not the accusative, 
 but some other of the oblique cases ; as, C 
 
 !niey forget the disagreement: Dissensldnis obllvlsonntav. - 
 
 irUepersxiadesthestcde: ClvUhtlperanhdet. 
 
 lie used the timber ai\d bronze : Materia atque aere utebatar. 
 Thus while the English verb is transitive, the Latin equiva- 
 lent is intransitive. . 
 
 , 52. Yerbs WHICH TAKE THE Dative. - 
 
 Many verbs, cJiiefly denoting advantage or disadvantage or dis- 
 position towards, are {oUowed by the dative. Of these the most 
 important are : * 
 
 Aid, assist, snbventd, snconrro. "Harry (a man), nubo 
 sBeitere oredo." Wee^ oocurro ; so obvlam e6. 
 
 H^brnmand ( = order), imperd, -^Oppose, reslstd. repuKno, ob- 
 mando. slsto, ocourrd. 
 
 Ctommawd {=am xn charge of), ^Pardon, I^nosoo. 
 
 praesam. 
 
 ^Displease, dlsplloed. 
 -^Distrust, aittldo. 
 •^Envy, lnvlde6.r 
 
 ^avor, faved, studeo. 
 
 J Heal, medeor. 
 . Indidge, Indulged. 
 
 Injure, nooed, obsam. 
 -J Interrupt, Intervenid. 
 
 ^I*ersuade, persuaded, anftdeo. 
 "Please, placed. . 
 
 Helieve, succeed, snooAdA. . 
 
 Satisfy, satlsfaolo. 
 
 Serve, gervio. , , » * 
 
 ^■Spate, pared. 
 '^ Surpass, praestd. 
 ^Threaten, minor. 
 •. Trust, f Idd, odnf Idd. . ' 
 
 63. Verbs WHICH TAKE THE Genitive. 
 
 (a) Some vtrbs meaning to pity, remember or forget are followed 
 by the genitive; namely : .^ _^, : »_!__ 
 
 Pity, mlsereor, and mlseret (for which see section 91, d)i 
 Bear in mind, tem^mber, memlnl. , 
 
 ^tU to mind, recollect, remlnlwor. 
 
 Jf'iMyef, obllvliwor. 
 
I. 
 
 TIVE 
 
 L are 
 tive, 
 
 ^1 
 
 PART %. — SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 317 
 
 nr. 
 
 liva- 
 
 dis- 
 aostr 
 
 eo. 
 ob- 
 
 
 
 red 
 
 ^; (6) Two impersonalP^bs, Interest and (rarely) rgfert. mean- 
 
 %ig itconcemSf it interests (it its of importance to% take the genitive 
 
 ^Tjfthe person interested ; as, * 
 
 *"■ It concerns the state : Bel publioae interest. > 
 
 ^i. But instead of the genitive of the personal and reflexive pro- 
 nbuns, the ablative feminine of the possessives is used, namely, 
 mea, tna, nostra, vestra, gna ; as, This concerns me : Hoc me& 
 
 -Interest (or refert).. In this usage refert is common. 
 
 ii. The thing which is of "importance is expressed by a neuter 
 
 ^ pronoun, an infinitive (with or without a subject accusative) or a 
 clause. The degree of importance is expressed by an adverb or by 
 the genitive of price (see section 88) ; as, Your safety is of great 
 importance to me : Magnl me& ifntereatnt B&lvu» »U. 
 
 64 Verbs WHICH TAKE THB;ij^BLATIVB. ' 
 
 The following verbp (with their «ppapounds) are followed by the 
 ablative : 
 
 JSatf vesoor. 
 
 fangor. 
 
 UsCy utor. Enjoy, fraor. 
 
 Gain, obtain^ potior. 
 
 Also verbs of lacking^ ege5, cared. V 
 
 55. i. That in the case of such verbs the irregularity is only 
 apparent may be seen by observing the exact meaning of the verb ; 
 for instance,. semd, am a slave (to); persuaded, make it acceptable 
 (to) ; satisfacio, do enough (for) ; pared, am at hand (for) ; resistd, 
 stand in opposition (to) ; praesum, am at the head (tvith reference to); 
 Utor, benefit myself Qty means of) ; potior^ become powerfid (by means 
 of); cared, be cui off (from); obliviscor, become dark (as regards) 
 i.e., become forgetfid (of). 
 
 ii. Accordingly it is not necessary that all verbs having the same 
 English equivalent should take the same case. Thus jubeO (com- 
 «land, order), s^iblevo, juvd (aid), laedo (injure), delectd (please), 
 offendd (disease), miseror (pity), and recordor (recoUect), regularly 
 take the accusative. 
 
 iii. Some of the verbs given in sections 52-54 are sometimes fol- 
 lowed by a different case, especially when used in a different sense. 
 Thus imperS (command) takes the dative, but imperd (denuind, 
 require) t&kea the accusative, both being united in,, He demands 
 hostages of the enemy, Hostibns imperat obsldds. Meminl, of re- 
 calling a person one has knoum, takes the accusative. Potior, gain 
 sovereignty over, takes the ^[enitive, chiefly in the phrase rerum 
 potlrl, to obtain control of affairs. And the verbs of remembering 
 &nd forgetting regularly have the accusative in the case of ileuter 
 pronouns or neuter adjectives used substantively. 
 
 iv.t5ertaair phrases, having the^iTiiire or ■verbs which take tR5" 
 
 dative, have thQ aano construction, e.g.,fidem habeO—cdnfido, 
 
\m 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 V. ^ppr may take a second ablative used predicativelv •- as He 
 
 VI. /n<er(/fc5 takes 4 dative (or sometimes an accusative) of the 
 person -debarred, the ablative of the thing forbidden. ®^ *'' ^"® 
 
 56. Tkk Impersonal Passive. -In English only the active voice 
 of an mtrai^itive verb may be used. But in Latin even with 
 intransitive -Verbs (He., such as do not govern a direct object in the 
 accusative), the passive may be used impersonally, that is, in the 
 third person singtlar, and (in.the compound tenses) in the neuter.' 
 The impersonal passive denotes n^rely the occurrence of an action 
 without reference to the doer; as, Puirnatur: Fighthuf takes place ' 
 . or there- IS a fight Ventum eat i Coming took place. The u^ual 
 English equivalent is the activejroioe/the subject being obtained 
 from the context ; as, Ventnm ertTSeXor -TPl ui </iiij, etc.) im/t<j. 
 67. In Latin all intransitive verbs, if used ip the passive, 
 must be used impersonally, and this impersonal passive con- 
 struction is used to render into Latin the passive of the verbs 
 which take the dative^» (section 52); -as, 
 
 CkBsar is obeyed: Oaesarl p&retar (i.e., obedience is rendered t^ 
 .OcMor). , 
 
 They aslfdto be spared: drftbant ut stbl paroeretur (t.c., that 
 mercy mtght be shomi to them). 
 
 I had not been pardoned: Mlhl non erat Ignatnm (il-ibr(fwe- 
 ness had not been granted to me). ^ ^j j 
 
 Thus where a verb takes the dative in the active voice, that 
 dative is retained in the passive, and canijot become the subject. 
 
 .^,:i...^i^.,._:.^: .::_i.__: :: ::^ ' EXERCISE a.'---'---— ■-■---— -*---r--. 
 
 1. Cffisar commanded the soldiers) of the tentH legion, which he 
 most trusted, to remember their former valoi/ 2. He answered 
 thatDumnorix was always «pposing Ccesar's' plans and assisting 
 the enemy. 3. These resources he is using in order to gain the 
 sovereign power. 4. He says that the senate distrusted the (kute 
 
 -— — jr — ^ 
 
 1. On the translation of a verb by means of a verbal noun, see section 203, d. 
 *i„!-,?^g."!f.°* the impersonal passiv e oonst n iction witb verbs which take'the gent. 
 is^ gv*"^^^* OOCU .. 4 ^refty m the pB88tw pef iphraatiu fuiljugiuon. (See 1^ ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
PART V. — SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 319 
 
 ■■ i- 
 
 r. 
 
 >■ 
 
 ■% 
 
 and ordered them to obey Cffisar's commands. 5. Exercising his 
 usual (mus) clemency, he promised to spare the If ervii, and 
 demanded a Kirge number of hostages from the other states. 6. 
 To this embassy the answer was given that the Roman people could 
 forget the old insultibut not the recent wrongs. 7. It is your 
 interest, and the interest of all the citizens to obey the laws, 8. 
 AVord was brought^ that these tribes eat com and flesh. 9. The 
 soldiers whom Labienus commanded were persuaded not to injure 
 the prisoners. 10. We are accustomed to pity those who obey our 
 rule, but the states which oppose the Roman people cannot be 
 pardoned. 11. All whom we met said that they lacked food. 12. 
 Using this bridge, Caesar made a sudden attack and became master 
 of the enemy's camp. ,^v , 
 
 B. {Hannibal, S, 4.) 
 
 1. While making for Etruria i^e shall meet the two consuls with 
 th% whole army. 2. He uses both eyes equally well. 3. After 
 SAguntum was taken Hannibal commanded three very large armies. 
 4.*^ltt-the.next year he gained Saguntum, an allied state. 5. No 
 one was spared. 6. After routing the consuls, Hamilcar was com- 
 manded to seize the pass. 7. It is of great importance to the 
 State that the chief command should be bestowed on Hannibal. 
 8. He obeys the consul's authority. 9. We shall never forget that 
 ambuscade. 10. He could not be persuaded to assist his wounded 
 colleague. \- '" 
 
 " 1. They do not trust even Csesar, 2. He has commanded the 
 cavalry not to injure the ambassadors. 3.- 1 cannot forget the 
 outrages of the Suebi, 4. Answer was made that this concerned 
 a large part of Gaul. 6. He says that a large part of the cavalry 
 IS being resisted. 6. They wish to obtain the lands of others. 7. 
 This speech displeased the ambassadors. 8. They thought that 
 they needed aid, and persuaded Caesar to assist them. 9. This 
 friendship will benefit Ceesar, 10- A large part of the Ubii envy 
 the !$uebi, 
 

 k_K 
 
 \ ] 
 
 320 ^^ l^ LATIN BOOK. 
 
 . ^ J CHAPTER IX. . *? 
 
 Conditional Sentences. 
 
 58. Conditional sentences consist regularly oip two dauses • (a) a 
 subordinate clause containing some assumption and iSuced b? 
 ri^y *'"*"'^"!^.'',^'*^' *"^ ^^> * principal clause containing the 
 P^I^TZYh ^-^^r^J'^-^-P^rnption.'^The former is called the 
 folSScS^cw' "^^^'^' ^^ P-^-« - often called the 
 
 59. One obvious distinction of conditions is that of (l)^^^mror' 
 pad, m which the question of fulfilment has already been decided 
 &nd (2) future, in which a possibility of fulfilment is always con' 
 ceivable. In each of these, two forms of statement are in common 
 use, making four main classes of conditional sentences. 
 
 60. I. In PRESENT OR PAST conditions, where no hint is 
 given of the accordance of the supposed case with fact, but 
 where it is merely stated that, granting the assumption, the 
 conclusion logically follows, the indicative is used in both 
 clauses, the tenses being those which would be used for the 
 same words if occurring in simple sentences ; as, 
 
 ■If he thinks this, he is mistaken: SI hoc exUtlmat. errat. 
 tA^ Tr?^-^ f^ tiWHtm^^ingrZj/; 81 peooavl. Insdens feci. 
 ^ ij they dtcl this, they are not enemies.- si bdo feoerant nan 
 . Inimlol sunt. 
 
 61. II. In PRESENT OR PAST Conditions, where we wish to 
 represent the assumption (and consequently the conclusion 
 also) as contrary to/act, the subjunctive is used in both clauses, * 
 the imperfect subjunctive ipr present time, and the pluperfect 
 subjunctive for past time 7 as, fe 
 
 If he th<AMiht this (but he does not), h^i vxnild be mistaken : SI hoc 
 ezlstlniaret, erraret. «« 
 
 ^^Jf^had said this (but he did not), he would have b^en mistaken : 
 SI hoo dixisset. erravisset. ^^ 
 
 If he were alive, t«j sh^dd have found him long aqo: inveniaiiii. 
 mnajamdlu, «I vlveret. ^ ^ ^nvemsse 
 
 Had my advice prevailed, we should to-day be frep..- at m ^nm 
 «onsiuuiu vulUM^I. &<Ktle Ubert «ssemat/ "i "«nm 
 
^ 1 
 
 rf - ■ I 
 
 PART V.-srNTAX AND COMPOSITION. ^ 
 
 »i»d. The Buglfah h^ ii' Th. ^ ^^ *"»" " «"P»»- 
 
 i -Je^ «-^^^«r.^ r *; "^ ;?'"' "»* ^^ » -»«1«"- 
 point of tim<( (pC"f r?„!T.^f "^ ^ i°dic.tu,r4««B the 
 
 ^C'Ae doe, thca, he vM tStT^T ^:!^^^'*- ''"''^'*- 
 W'e shall attaint S tyTZ/T* ^'^'^^ *^« receivSgO 
 
 63^ ^V. In the other class of FUTURE cnnHifi^« 
 
 protasis ahouid or Lr« to 21 ^ '^ ^^*^ ^^ *^« 
 
 apodosis Wrf J iTlhe W ""'* «"bjunctive; in the 
 
 ci^y oi^^^^ are found, espe- 
 
 w vaned, the most important i^n«n«^-.^® "^^ ^*'^'® <^he m^ 
 tion 61) where pos^^l ITr-S^iS**?? "^'^*^ *^ ^* (^- 
 gations (sections 120 and muTe ^^nl^l *** Periphrastic conju. 
 instead of in the subjunctive .^?/^LT! ""/^^ »n<ii«,«t« 
 
 gards mood aiid tense * J^ '/S /''"'''" ^^^ '^^ ^o' «« ^ re- 
 MAnAn. *«wJM«erit re», sen nHAnAKn.^. __„ _ ' 
 
 •oentur. •om.erit re., sea BMndbunt »en profle^. 
 
 21 
 
 -v^ 
 
^ 
 
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 .|i 
 
 V 
 
 /i^»-., 
 
 ■ /- 
 
 Whether . . . or in this sense should be carefully distinguished 
 from whether . . . or represented by utrum . . . an (section 38). 
 In the former case we can always add in e^ker toMt or change to 
 no maMer whether . , . or. 
 
 iii. For if not, al ndn, •! minus and nisi are found. Nisi 
 {unless) is used to mark an exception, or after negatives. <Si minm 
 is used where the verb is to be supplied from* the context. 
 
 iv. Two mutually exclusive conditions are introduced by si . . . 
 •In» if . . . hit if. For but if not, where the verb is omitted, 
 sin mintis or sin aliter is used. 
 
 V. An important particular case of the present or past Ic^cal 
 condition (section 60) is thie so-called general condition, which, 
 in connection With any one of a series of recurrent actions, states 
 what is habitual. For present time the perfect^ indicative is usual 
 in the protasis, the present indicative in the apo^osis ; for past 
 time the pluperfect^ indicative' in the protasis and the imperfect 
 indicative in the apodosis ; as, If (ever) any crime is committed, the 
 Jhuids fix Ahe penalty : SI quod est admlssum faolBUs, Draldds 
 fkoenam «lonstltaant. 
 
 vi. For si^meaning in the liope that, to see whether, see sec. 177. 
 
 vii. Participles .and adjectives may be used in place of the 
 
 regular protasis to express condition; as, ffe wUl come, if asked: 
 
 Boff&tns venlet. If we keep together toe shall b& a match for them: 
 
 ^niversl pards lis erimns. i^ < ' 
 
 % viii. Another favorite classification (^ tjie conditional clauses it 
 
 "threefold: , , -V-^^^i^/ ' 
 
 €. Logical conditions (past, |)re8^0l> future) combining classes 
 ^. and III. above. Indicative4l^«M^ clauses. 
 
 II. Ideal or contingent condi|tomxfuture)— the same as class IV. 
 . above. Present subjunctive in both clauses. 
 i iji. Unreal conditions (present or past)— tlVe same as class II. 
 Bbove. Imperfect or plupt^ect. subjunctive in both clauseSf 
 
 ■••.■■v.. ■ ,'■'■■ . .. ' .. . i;-- 
 
 •■.;,:.;■ ^^ •" "■-. V , Exercise i9( : :.-:..:,: :i,^::^■''- 
 
 .. ., ■■ - ■ .ti..-J. — r-^r-, i-,^--^-^......-.- ^. . , .- _ ,,„ — hr - -' " T^- ~T ■'■ " - ■; ■ — r- ~- - -'- ~ 
 
 1. If Oftstious should seize the supreme power in his stete, Osesar 
 irould wage war against him. 2. If our troops defeat the enemy, 
 the Belgians will *b ontoe send ambassadors to Cwsar. 3. If the 
 Gauls had been conquered by Ceesar they would have immediately 
 ient ambassadors to him concerning peace. 4. If a murder has 
 i>een committed, or there is a dispute about an inheritance, the 
 Druids decide (the matter). 6. The Germans would not now be 
 
 UPn pfrtMl Mid pl^B ii 
 
 UiMoUon 
 
 8! 
 
 Inoipls M tbs lutaw pitliQt_ 
 
 
 V 
 
PART V.-STNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 323 
 
 had not sent fonrord three enhnrt. "°™8«- 7. If the general 
 the victory .„d ourl. Z^ ^tlf^o JT"*^ '""" '"™ 8»»'^ 
 TheHelvetiana would r„mttr-/°"'*«™"'**P«"'- »• 
 
 people were to conclude ^rjTh, hi T n f V"' """■'" 
 two legion» in that place, he will nofS' k?' y»'«» ^«sar enrol, 
 successfully with the Gauls 10 ^t^ "" '".'=!?' °" ">»."» 
 their towns and villages and bit uo .11 T?"^ ''"'""° «" 
 not have been able to return "^' "P. ""•">»" <»">. they would 
 
 dn!wn°UraXr%' "-O-'. >-> -«'not been 
 he would defeat thelttor 3 If T" ? """*«' » »- "-y. 
 «™y, he will be put t» dTh • 4 „ "^T' "'"""" » l^» 
 Hannibal in th^eld. fh^tt r!ut^ T J' '=°"»"'» "PP<-^ 
 •"iQng the mountains, he would nTl» Ibi . ^'J "*" 'o «^'i»? 
 Hannibal was defeated in TtoW he di^w ^ °""'' """"• ?• " 
 his native land. 7 If thev^ •"e did not return unconque«d to 
 
 8. "theWu^io" trnCe;n„rx7•'L°''"'''"'~•P'• 
 venture to resist the Romans a Hh.!.' "" ""' "o"" 
 ."called by the master of ZhoL" " '™"*' '"' "^ "««" 
 
 C. iCasar, Bk. IV, 10, 11.) 
 
 t4'^td"Tr the^r^r ^" *«'''• *'''^'-'^'>»" 
 
 begged him not to return 3* im. "*!"*"• """^ "'"'" •»'« 
 they have not gained their reque^ TlVZST '"« """"• 
 C»sar, he wiU ask them to ad^ncTno tohe ' b^Jh "Ti" 
 into several branches, they form islair « « ""™"*"<"e 
 they were Serce and savage tribTh!.!:. 1 Y *^'^ "'""'«'^ 
 «dors to them. 7 If X T'k u-.f.""" "^ ""* ^ ""^^ •">'»»• 
 nU far distant from the Al« "«""inhf r f'tT"' "■»' '"* 
 in adTKnee, w. should IiTT. Jl/. ? ""'^ "^ '^ ' 
 
 b«""Ttn> 
 
 .«.«them permission thTy'ad';;::^?*"'^»- *•"•'* *« 
 
 #■ 
 
^-r 
 
 9U 
 
 PEIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 ft- 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 Clauses op Concession— Clauses op Proviso — 
 Conditional Clauses op Comparison. 
 
 66. Clauses' op Concession are subordinate clauses which con- 
 cede or admit something in spite of which the staijament in the 
 pfinicipal clause ^ill holds good. > 
 
 (a) Clauses introduced by although, meaning in spUe of the fact 
 thhtf or whereas, are rendered into Latin by qitMnqtuim, etstot 
 wmeta with the indicative, or by cum with the subjunctive; as, 
 
 Al^ugh the difficulty uxis very great, he determined to lead his 
 army across: EtsI •amma erat difBoaltas, tamen trftdaoere- 
 •xeroitam oonstltait. 
 
 The Romans, in spite of being weary with fighting, yet advanc^^ 
 Bom&nl, qnamqaam proelid feasl erant, tamen prooSdnnt. 
 
 Jffe kept himself in camp, although the enemy every day gave him 
 ttn opportunity to fight: Castrlg sead ten^bat* oiuii hoatfis ootldlfr 
 pCigrnandl potestatem faoerent. 
 
 He was poor, whereas he might have been very rich : Fait pauper» 
 oam divltlulmas ease poaaet. 
 
 . ?fr> 
 
 I 
 
 (6) Clauses introduced by even though, even if, even granting, are 
 rendered into Latin . by etsi or etiamsi with the indicative or sub- 
 junctive, according to the rules for the^protasis of conditional sen- 
 tences (Chapter IX.), or hy ut or ni with the sul^urietive ; as, 
 
 Even if he cannot show graiitude, he at least can feel it : Ettam>il 
 refer re gratlam non poteat, habere oertd'poteat. 
 ^ Even if my di^sition ^id not bid nte, 'pMcsaity compels me to 
 speak the truth: V£ra loqnl, etal meam Ingenlam non-moviret, 
 neoeaalt&a coi^lC. ji 
 
 Even supposing everything i^iwdd turn out contrary^to ipcpectation, 
 toe are very powerful in ships : Ut omnia oontr& oplnl£>nem aool'» 
 dantt plftrlmnm n&Vlbna poaanmna. 
 
 (c) Clauses introduced by although, meaning Ko^mf m\Uihlno 
 jtebAter hou), are rendered into Latin by qtmmvis wii>k t^9 subjunS' 
 Mve (usuiilly in the present tense) ; as, . « 
 
 Howtikr gr^at expectation may he (or Although expectation be 
 
 J- QnitmvfB alt mAyna <i»apeotA^i& r- 
 
 -^ 
 
 
 tamen earn vlnoia. 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "' 
 
 •' . " 
 
 
 ^fe. 
 
 
 • 
 
 . ., . -, .■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 _... 
 
 
 
 
 
 ""'^^^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ff 
 
 * 
 
 • 
 
 * 
 
 k 
 
 
 - ' -^jiJ- 
 
 k 
 
 
 
 •' . 
 
 ■'P 
 
 
 J/, 
 
 
.^?: 
 
 PART V.-SITNTAX AND OOWOSITION. 826 
 
 .^.v^nly mcto(„) ia it always certain that what i, conceded 
 
 With th« ir^ 7' ? ,, commonly by dum. dtm^modo or mJo 
 with the .i^junchre (usually in the present tense) ; as 
 
 ^^m ^^, ^^,ec£ (or so long as) they fear : oaerint auu. 
 ^e negative in clauses of proviso is n# 1, 
 
 «r. f„iiA J u .1 ' ' " ''y ''™'4»«™ or »rf«« alone. These 
 
 oDsorvea (»,e., present or perfect subiunctire Aff^i. fk^ 
 
 een^s. imperfect o, p,„p„,ect suMuicUrXf ^f ZZ^ 
 
 ■";;\^ .' ' :::■"; -/-^l;- .exercise lo. ^',. ,■ ;..;--> 
 
 j; ^vided that the enemy do not lea rn our numbem, 
 
 M>- 
 
326 
 
 PBIMARY LATIN BOO?:. 
 
 Hi 
 
 <F' 
 
 «* 
 
 ); 
 
 we shall ajbtack them to-morrow. 4. Many remain in Ceesar's camp^ 
 as if they , were unwilling to return to Gaul. 5. If Caesar comes up 
 with the enemgiiK he wiU easily defeat them, nc*' matter how brave 
 • and numerous»hey may be. "6. In' spite oi their having taken up 
 their pomtion oil the higher ground, the eii&my could not withstand 
 the attacks of oiir men. 7: If only Labienus can, cross the river, 
 he will surround the enemy. 8. The cavalry quickly crossed the 
 river, just as if they had been instructed to do so. % Though you 
 can persuade these men to send ambassadors, you cannot make 
 them friends. 10. Even though he should have met with suitable 
 weather, he would not have sailed for Britain. 11. Whereas they 
 might returii without danger, they are unwilling to set out. .12. 
 Tne enepy sent hostages at once, as if afraid of Ceesar's vengeance. 
 
 . ' V B. {Hunnibal, 7, 8.) f " '. ' 
 
 1. No'jnatt^r how welcome these gifts may be, the Romans will 
 not send back the prisoners. 2. Hannibal- will be declared an 
 exile, in his absence, just as if he were thie gr^test enemy of the 
 Carthaginians. 3. Provided they make peace with the Romans,. 
 Hannibal will be put to death. 4. Although they paid the money 
 i^ accordance with the treaty, the hostages were not restored^. 5. 
 Kvdu if they send vessels to. seize him, they will r|ot be able to 
 overtake him. 6. Whereas he might have been made consul, he was 
 persuaded to flee from Rome. 7. He was recalled, just as if he had 
 not carried on the war with great vigor. . 8. Even if envoys had not 
 been sent to demand Hannibal's surrender, he would have fled. .9.. 
 Even though this answer were to be given, an audience of the Sen- 
 ate would not be granted., . ' 
 
 ^5 C {Ccesar, Bk. IV. IS.) ":' 
 
 1. Provided he resist bravely, he will not be surrounded. 2. 
 In spite of the fact that they were cut oflF by the enemy, our men 
 had no fear. 3. Even if several of our men are unhorsed, the rest 
 will not be put to flight. 4. Although he had come in sight of the 
 enemy, he did not cease from his flight. 5. The enemy ^exff put 
 to flight, as if panic-stricken. 6. Even if we had lent aid, we 
 should not have rescued him from peril. • 7. However brave an 
 opposition they may offer, they will be slain. 8. Although he him- 
 aeir hasirot muro tiuimrchnniBmtoAVAiry, he wtll T&tum. 9. £veii 
 though we were to leave the field, Piso would not be at all alarmed. 
 
 
IMW 
 
 PABt v.— SYNTAX AND QOMPOSITION. 
 
 827 
 
 .\\ 
 
 CHAPTER XI. 
 
 ' ■ ■ * 
 
 Uses op the AccusAtivB. 
 
 * 
 
 -^- 
 
 •69. The DIBEC3T Object of a transitive verb (whether active 
 or deponent) is put in the accusative; as, * 
 
 * !gey day the man: Homlnem Ihterflolnnt. ' ' 
 
 Mebmldaabridge: Pontem faolt. , !»«»»«■•«. 
 
 -^iv^®^*?^"^®^^ ^^j®*'*^ ^ *^** w^ich is (a) affected dr aDorehended 
 or (6) Drod^ded, by the action of the verb. apprenend^,, 
 
 ^n'irn^iTv r""^^ ^""^'^^. T.^^ ^^ emotion) which are iiitiansitive . 
 mi^hsh are represented by transitive verbs m, Latin suchas 
 horr&re (to shudder at), ddere (to grieve over\ rtM (to^unhn!\ 
 ^reito flPPefor)L^^ 
 
 iii. Many intransitive verbs (chiefly verbs of motion) become 
 transiUve when cpmpomjded with prepositions (espedTny ST 
 
 The Hdvettans nuet Camr : Helvet^ Caewtrem ebnTenlnnt - 
 feimilarly m Enghsh overrun, undergo. (See section !^8 v cTv 
 
 nJi^.^ilThl'^'T^'^^ v«.bs compounded with «t^rw tike two accu- 
 satives In the active, one^goverhed by the verb and the other by 
 the preposition ; as, He Imds his army across the river: m^mel 
 ^f?^*"" trftduolt. (The preposition may, however, heZ 
 peated , as^ Tr&n» llumen exeroltam trftduott.) In the oaaaiva 
 ^ the accusative governed by the preposition may be retained 
 ^iJ.W^^f u .*^*'^' '^f'^'^ff. cqUin^, electing, cmsidering and 
 w 7». ^^-^ two accusatives of the same per^n or thing, one 
 ^ ^mg the direct dbject,^nd the other a predicate nounoridjec- 
 <f^J/^'j?'' joii^ i/ie ^dut brothers: Aeduo. fr&tr6. appellat: 
 r?Lt /'^^ **^^ ^"™ oermrem faolant- They cW thes6 
 ^Jhe^r leaders : Ho, duofe. drngnnt .Ibl. They consider this a 
 ^« Kn-flT^^' .^? proprlntn vlctutl. «I.tlmant. Ip the pas- 
 ^L ?!? "IS''^*?^^ *"^ predicate become nominative ; as, ^Z- 
 
 tRWA fwh l^„*'\,- "^^l ^*^"f ^. <«acAtngr and coneedling may 
 
 £a .r^r"^''^^' ***^ r* ^'^ ^^« ?«""» •^"d ^« other of the 
 thmg, as, tasar demands com of the jEdni: Caijwr Aednd. 
 
 ■^»3trr 1? '!' * % {'"^"^i ^^ »^y o p i i^ ivn / i Z him. E um 
 ^,W ml^ ?' J'' *'h^ ^'""^ °"^ accusative, usually of th« 
 thing, may be retained. All these verbs, however, ikay take a pre- 
 
^ 
 
 <^ 
 
 m 
 
 ^BIHiRT LATIN SOQK. 
 
 / r 
 
 J 
 
 4 
 
 \\\' 
 
 positional phrase in place of dne of the aoouaatives, as jpe^, J^tiZd' 
 and qtuierd regularly do. . ^^ 
 
 vii. In poetry, the passive of verba of dd^hmg^ as also the perfect ' 
 participle passive- of some other verbs, is used, with a reflexive or 
 * middle' force, and takes a direct object ; as, Galeam indnitur : 
 He pids on (Mmaelf) the helmet. ■ If ddd slnaa oolieota : Having 
 the folds gathered m a knot, . , ' i\ 
 
 70.j|The apcusative is used with the f ollowiiig pbepositionb : ' 
 
 ad, to; adversas, adveriiam, agcUnst; ante, before; apnd, near^ 
 ap^ f4Foht olrojun, a/ro%md; olrelter, ahout; oli, olilfr&, on this sidi of; 
 contra, oppoeitf to^ against; erg&, towa,rda; «xtrift, outside ; intrSi^ 
 b^PfU}; inter, betweep,, among; IntrA, toithin; Juzt&, near; ob, on 
 account of; penes, in the power of; per, through ; pone, post, 
 hehindf after; praeter, past; prope, near; propter, on Oiccount 
 cf; seonndam, after, following; ■np]r&, above; trans, ocrow; 
 ultra, beyond; versus, towa/rda. 
 
 The accusative is also used with In, into or in, and sub, under, 
 when they express motion towar48, and usually with subter, beneath 
 and super, a^ove. These four also ta]f:e the ablative (section 108). 
 
 i. The adverbs propius and proximi, jtridiS Skud postr^ldig, and 
 the adjectives propior and proxim/us sometimes take t^e accusative. 
 
 71. The SuBJKOT of the Infinitive (except the historical 
 infinitive, section 112) is put in the acdusative ; as. 
 
 He ansxoered that Ocesar vm doing vmmg : Bespondlt Caesarein 
 Injurium faoere. 
 
 It is dangerous for the Qehnant to cross the Bhine : Germftnos 
 BbAnnm tr&nsire est perIoul6tum. 
 
 72. OooNATB AoousATiVK. — Intnnsitive verbs often take an 
 accusative to define more clearlv their meaning. Thii^s either a 
 subeta^tive (generally modified by an adjective) of kindred jneaning 
 fi^d often t>f kindred derivation, or more' frequently a neutes pro- 
 ^Qun or adjective used substantively ; as, 
 
 WeshoM live a safer life : TatlArem vltam vIvAmns. 
 He makes tdmost the same mistakes : Badem ferft peooal^ 
 
 Tlua is the origin of the a4verbial use of mvitum, n^t/U, ^piid, 
 et^. ; as, He has very great power : Plikrlmnm potest. |v 
 
 i There^«re also a few isolated phrases used adverlnally, which 
 ' wtfn6ot i ed with-tha cognate a ocuBative,jauch a s mdximam 
 
:»' 
 
 PABT v.— SYKTAX AND COMPOSmON., 32p 
 
 G "kfSS::''th":4^:^™^f ««-In poetry. Urgel, though 
 body affecte5?MTS^r«"^'? ''*?,""* *» t«^ »« 'he 
 
 intettobn'^r^lr ^" "frl" E«'""™»». with or without » 
 
 ^-''r^^-' EXERCISE 11. ■ ■'^l '^''^■■■-^"- :-:■■''■ 
 
 « S If 7.7 . *'"'"'8 *" *« «PProiwh of the Romans 
 
 d«tr.ot8 4. m.e ships were cairied down towards the lower nT 
 of the i8]»nd,.which is nearer the west B Ti.^ tTZ ?• r, ■ 
 •on this side the Rhine have be': Zde Wb^ t H^' ''"? 
 
 8 R.f « ^ T '^'«ken, if they hope for aid from the Romans 
 
 they concealed everything fr^m^^' in ^™*°' '':'""*"'' 
 comrades had been^put tTZhr^v i^" ^^'T' ""' *''"'' 
 withdrew into the to™ " 11 OnV 5 ^Tf "' ""^"^ »°* 
 made no answer 12 F„,7m^ "* '^*' "•"' "P"»'»"' 'W 
 the Gal mZ; ^"'^*''^ """^ "^^' '"' '«'' not trust 
 
 • ^- (ffannibal, 9, 10.) \ ' ' 
 
 1. They said he had entrusted att the gold to the Cretans 2 
 
 ^n9 pretends to fill the earthen vessel with live sernentfl 4. 
 
 » — .: h^ 1 ■ •. 
 
 1. Hence thU i. often called the Greek aocuntiTt. 
 
330 
 
 PRIMARY^ LATIN BOOK. 
 
 formed another plan. 8. He regards it sufficient for all the others • 
 to attack ,the king alone. 9. After the other nations have been won 
 over, we shall easily deceive the Carthaginians, with Hannibal's 
 knowledge / - • , 
 
 ' ' G. (C<Bsar, Bk. IV. IS.) , ^ 
 
 1. He was of the opinion that the Gauls, after accepting thes^ 
 . terms, would not make war. 2. Before th6 recent battle he had 
 ordered the forces to be increased. 3. He was glad thajb they had 
 attained very great prestige among the ^auls, 4. On account of the 
 treiichery of the enemy, he did not wait at all for the leading men. , 
 6. After the battle was begun, he thought it was the height of folly 
 for the cavalry to return into the camp. 6. Ccesar believed that 
 th(^ Gauls had treacherously taken the bflfensive in the battle the 
 day before. 7. He perceived ht>w much power they had. 8. AH* 
 the troops, a^ter foUowing up the enemy, were l6d across the river. 
 9. Although he had not been made quceetor, he considered this cit-y^ 
 «umstance inost opportune. 
 
 / 
 
 V . 
 
 ^ 
 
 m-.- 
 
\ ■ ■ 1 
 
 PART V.~STNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 SSI 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 Uses op the Dative. 
 
 I, 
 
 expressed by a verb or ^Se Th?l ''^Tu' '^^^^«' *>' <1"»1% 
 express (1) the indirJc?^hi^r'(2)^trr^^ ***^. "*^ '^'' ^ 
 purpose served. Thedativ^^^Agi^^r^Iirr^^n^^JS^i^^^^^ 
 
 W^ thing indir^I, afi.cted,l put 
 
 .tJ^tive vtrtal'TiT) "^tt't^l.r"' '^^ ." f»»-» W with in- 
 direct object." ^' * '«««">™ verbs in oonneotion with » 
 
 whfcl, the feeling'or ZSiSTd^d ?'5^'"«' *-' O»»""» th.t to . 
 
 ^ l^ friendly to he BelvetmmTiiwita. ., . . 
 Such adiectives aro fh«oz» *«, • "®*^®»"« «'at amlons. 
 
 jver «imit „tker const^li^S^". P^tiJTS' ""-^ 
 ««^e aocusafve. The <Utive «'sl^Lli'^T^I^^J^ ^'^l 
 
 >.f «IS;? ^h^^^^JeK'^ttld™*^ 
 
 » m form indi8t&.gSsh.ble fromTheTrMt "L 5?, ™ T* "fei?^ 
 
 w^tK the indirect obS^ZSL^n^ ^'?- "'"■«iti™ verb 
 with «,e direct objecr' (Sel^tt'^iTlf "«'""• '""""^™ '«'' 
 
 1 - Thin divirion fat 
 
 ^ J i lVC! o 'h!" ' f /''"^""^.^^t i« convenient for pm,tk ml punK>H.. 
 Pl«l,?E|„'2^*;.^i««» <" «ou- become, toe «iy«ct 1« the S^M^^Z^uilr^ 
 
332 
 
 PBIMART LATIN BOOK. 
 
 ^ in determining the case of the Latin noun. Three diflFerent con- 
 structions are found, for the use of which no invariable rules 
 can be given; the student must depend upon observation and 
 authority. 
 
 (a) The compound is sometimes followed by the same case as 
 the preposition would take. (For the accusative see section 69, 
 iii. and iv.; for the ablative, section 93.) 
 
 (6) More often (and especially in the literal local sense) the pre- 
 fixed preposition is repeated with the noun; as, They sally out fi-om 
 the camp: Ex oastrls c^rampunt. He came up to the camp: Ad 
 «astra aooegslt. He converses with him: Cum ed oolloqaltar. 
 2^ey p\d everything into the fire : Omnia lu Igrnem Infernnt. 
 _ (c) But very often also, in ^lace of the preposition and noun, 
 Xatin has the dative (to which in the case of transitive compounds 
 may be added an accusative of the direct object). This dative 
 means literally vnth reference to^ as^ 
 
 He comes beneath the roof: Tecto aaceedit (literally, He com^ 
 beneath, tvith reference to the roof). 
 
 He puts friendship before everything: Amiolttam omnibus 
 rebus anteponft (literally, He ptits friendship in front, with 
 reference to everything). 
 
 This usage is especially common with compounds of ad, ante, 
 con-, in, inter, ob, post, prae, sub, super ; generally where the com- 
 pound is not used in a literal sense ; as, EquitatuI praeerat ;* 
 He commanded the cavalry (more literally. He was at the head 
 of the cavalry). He inured the soldiers with hope: Spem in- J 
 tulit mllitibns (more literally, He ptit hope intb the soldiers). *>, 
 
 vi. A few verbs, such as ddnd and circuntdd, admit a double con- 
 struction : (1) dative and accusative, (2) accusative and ablative ; 
 as, He presented the plunder to the soldiers: Praiedam mllitibns 
 ddnavit. They presented him tvith the citizefimip : Enm olvt- 
 tAto ddn&vernnt. | 
 
 vii. In the poets the dative of indi^ject object is extended to 
 include the idea of niotion towards' (see section^ 125), and is also 
 used with verbs of nearness, union, difference and contention. 
 
 79. The Dative ois' lNTEREST\|enotes the person or thing 
 concerned (especially benefited or haiimed). It is really iden- 
 tical with the dative of the indirect objbct, but the connection 
 is looser ajki the dative complement not so essential to the 
 verb; as, \ 
 __ ____ k, ___ : ^ _^^ 
 
 1. In no case should this dative be regarded as depending on the prispositioa, but 
 rather on the whole verb. « - 
 
 2. Most of the compounds of sum are used in a similar wa^ ^ 
 
 8. This, some grammarians contend, was the original force of the dkUra. 
 
rent con- 
 t)le rules 
 :ion and 
 
 » case as 
 ;tion 69, 
 
 the pre- 
 outfrom 
 mp: Ad 
 »q altar. 
 »rant. 
 id noun, 
 npounds 
 s dative 
 
 ^e comes 
 
 mnlbas 
 
 %tt with 
 
 d, ante^ 
 he com- 
 teerat ;' 
 he head 
 em in- J 
 iiers). '>, 
 ble con- 
 blative ; 
 nitiban 
 n olvt- 
 
 aded to 
 [ is also 
 tion. 
 
 T thing 
 
 ly iden- 
 
 aectioh 
 
 to the 
 
 ;- 
 
 ^UoQ, but 
 
 sentence as a 
 rather than 
 
 4 
 
 PART V.^STNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 883 
 
 ■ I^fwiaAfhUM mj^/.- N«,« „,„ k„, „„„. , 
 
 !•*«%.■ MlIU llbertatem *^ta^;.^ "" talung Jnm me my 
 wh^oL^'d^ir;- ^' «"«^^NOi!;, modifying the a 
 
 fiplrs. -optriM. Oppldnm prlmnm Tenlentlku» »b 
 
 •Mwers to the EieUsS^ S^""!? °' «""«"n. «"d often 
 
 ^^i^^^^^^^^^^^^ With 
 EI a m? ^.re„,L «i™;i.r ' "' ^^ """* «^ '^^ '^«'•"«*«-- 
 
 deSte'^tSe^'p^n il^tT^^'o^Jlilf^rVi'' Jf^rr- '» 
 We m.«Ai«i,: D*mon.tr.nt ."l^u'.^e.^^ '"^" 
 
 _ 81 Se Dativk of Purpose is a predicative dative, denot- 
 mg the purpose served (that which aomething tenda or is 
 
 1: *•»•, moulng („ Ajfew < I, expr««Kl b, pro with the .blMlve. 
 
834 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 intended to be), and is fEsuallj^vaccompanied by another dative 
 of the person interested ; as, 
 
 It was a great hindrance to the Gauls: Oallls magno erat 
 Impedlmentd. 
 
 Whey were coming to the aid of the Nervii : Aazlll5~ Nervila 
 Teniebant. 
 
 He leaves Jive cohorta for i^e defence of the camp : Qjainque oo* 
 liortda oastria praesidio rellnqnlt. ^ ^ • 
 
 L This dative is especially common With the verb sum (after 
 which it has almost the force of the ordinary predicate noun), 
 and is found also with /15, venidy mittd^ relinqud, do. The nouns 
 so used are generally of a semi-abstract nature, and are always in 
 the singular, some of the commonest being aitxilio, praesidio, sfiib- 
 Mdidy usutf impedimentdy curae, saluti, odid. .^ / 
 
 EXERCISE 12.<' / V 
 
 -. 'A : ; . - ,\. ■ ,.;- 
 
 'I- A. . ■•-:■ 
 
 1. He consulted the welfare of the troops whom Labienus com- 
 manded. 2v He said all these matters would be an object of 
 concern to him. 3. It is well known to all that the departure of 
 the Belgians was like a rout. 4. The soldiers told Labienus that 
 Offisar had always shown special indulgence to this legion. 5. Woxd 
 -was brought to the lieutenant that the general had left two cohorts 
 as a protection to the ships. „ 6. They said iiHt^ preferred 
 death to slavery and that they would oppose thetav^F^ to the 
 enemy. 7. He found that traders have no access tof^a^l^fibes. 
 8. He asked what Caesar meant, and why he.had demah4i|i, of 
 them such a great number of hostages.' 9. To these envoys C^e^r 
 made answer that he could have no friendship with the Germans. 
 10. A centurion, who had participated in many engagements, was 
 in command of>the troops. 11. He ordered (imperd) the soldiers 
 not to surround the camp with a trench nor to go to the assis- 
 tance of Labienus. 12. Perceiving that they had become suspected 
 in our eyes, they threw themselves at Caesat's feet. 
 
 » ' - . .'» . -■■.■-.■ 
 
 B. {^annibai, ll-lS^) ' 
 
 1. The fortress which had been bestowed on Hannibal as a gift, 
 they surrounded with armed men. 2. It has been handed down to 
 tradition that Hannib a l wos hittoriy hontil o to the Romans. 3. 
 
*' 
 
 PART V—STOTAX AND COMPOSITION. 386 
 
 to the «ldie„ whl° /Zt" TZy^' ?"!!." ^ "^^ «^» 
 friendship between hi™ a J^„ib.f t*^,.*^,!,»'". ™ 
 begun they all at once sought safety for it . **'>'"« ^^^ 
 The senators consider^ tl^t ^m" Z^T m f"'- *' 
 sources»! safety t^^jfceniT «rat^^ wouM»lirays bea 
 
 1 iT.«-i J|^P%^' ■**• ^"^ ^^^) ". ■ ■ 
 
 I. Hastily seiab3|ffioii^-™o ^\ A " ' 
 
 resisted our oa,.a%^CT3!L 'f ^»™»™ 'of a *hgrt time 
 
 women and «huZ^ d^fend^tl "" T"' ^* ^™ «>» 
 is better for tte Ger.L«^^ c^t^ RV '*"'!.'"" '"^<'- ^' » ^ 
 0>™«^«o„menrt^b^S^^f*' *•?«»" ™*™<*^ 
 dismay, the women began to ^^™ -? ^ ^""^' ""P- «• »" 
 %ht of the Genians 6 He J »^o.t.on to our troop. ^ the 
 neither arl noT^.^ °l l^ZT, ^ «^™"» "«i 
 
 pn.vedthesafety„fth?^^ry rinTf ^" ''""'''' W"-»' 
 rtore quiridy, the ca^aT™^ Jw f 1'1*° P™"' *« "«"y ' 
 findsoutwhattheenemvI~T*^T •^*;'*'""- »• H C»sar 
 «inforcements'l^S^^trten^ "'" '*'°' »" '^' «'"^ «- 
 
 • ■/■■] 
 
 i# 
 

 MlilARY LATIN BOo£' ' 
 
 ( 
 
 CHAPTER XIII. . 
 
 tTsEs OF THE Genitive. 
 
 
 82. The. Genitive case is used for the more exact limiting of 
 nouns, and has thus an adjectival force. It is also used to lunit 
 certain adjectives, and (by analogy) t© complete certain verbs." 
 The genitive is regularly translated (a) by the English possessive 
 case, (6) -by means of the preposition of, or (c) by means of the 
 
 I j * phrase CM regrarcb, or some equivalent preposition. 
 
 83. The PossiissiVB Genitive is used with a noun to denote' 
 i tiieowner^as, ""> > * .v 
 
 «^ I* Thelandsof the Helvetian»: tteivetl6rnin agrt» • „ 
 
 jv i. The possessive genitive may ba used in the predicate with 
 «Mm, fid, etc.; as, Ckvul does not belong to the Eoman people: 
 Neqae OfUIia est popnll RomanL 
 ^ ii. This predicative use is often found denoting the person whose • 
 
 j property, duty, or custom the subject is, especially when the sub- 
 
 1 ject is an infinitive or a clause ; as, It is the part (orduty) of a wise 
 
 man to obey the laws : jSlaplentIa e^t leslbna p»r«re. So Saplen- 
 • ' **"* «■* • -ft *« a mark of wisdom. But instead of the genitive of 
 , the personal pronouns the neuter possessivfts are used; as, It'i» 
 iJ my duty (oT my woAf) : M^nm e»t. 
 
 iii. The word on which the genitive depends is frequently 
 omitted, regularly so il it has been used previously in the sen- 
 tence ; aG(, Me had been in the amiyofSidla, and afterwards.An that 
 o/ OroMU»; In ex4^roltuSaIlae et posted In OrassI faerat; 
 
 84. The Subjective Genitive is used with nouns express- 
 ing action or feeling, to denote tlje person who kcts of feels ; 
 
 TheflightoftheOnidsf^ngtkQMlbrnm. - 
 
 Ckuar's anxiety : BolUeltuiHt Ctu>»arl: ♦ ' .r 
 
 i. Jn all such cases, if the action or feeling were expressed by A 
 verb, the noun in the genitive would be its subject ; «k, The C^avl» 
 .^; OaIIIfdqr«rnnt. \ 
 
 86. The Objective Genitive is used with nouns denoting 
 actjon or felling, to denote that to which the action orieel- 
 ing is directed^ aj^ ---~-^- -^-,-_^ ■ ^ ^ 
 
 The d%ming of We cytp; BatpngnAtl6 oa«tr6rnm. 
 
 Th»fm/r of death: n^tns mort^ • ' ^ 
 
m to denote ' 
 
 PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 887 
 
 i. In such oases, if the action or feelin» were eTnrA«m<i u- 
 verb, the noun in the genitive would l^fte^obl^ •"^'S^^ 
 t?Ui camp: Bzpfi^nant oastra. ^ ' ' ^^ *'*'*^ 
 
 li. This construction is often used when f.hnw» w»»u ui 
 corresponding Utin verb with the «SaTti™ bu^^h^tt^S 
 expect a ditive or ablative or prepositional nhrM^'^drin^S 
 c«»s It wiU constantly be foj that thfSr&ei.Sie^fta^ 
 phrase contaming some other prepo«tion thZo/bX^S^t «J 
 
 fi,i"«o *^® Objective and the subjective genitive may modify 
 
 i>eopte . Helvetlorum InJ&riae popall Bdm&nl. 
 
 y IV. Prepositional phrases* and possessive pronominal adieotives 
 
 86. The Partitivb Genitive is used to denote the whole 
 of which a part is taken. 
 
 The genitive is used with nouns/pronouns, numerals VesDeciallv 
 . ordinals and mUlia), adiectives (espTciaUy compaSs H^ 
 latives), and occasionally with a few ad verbs ; ^^"'^^ *"** ^^P®'" 
 
 -^w^ of the soldiers: Par» mUItmu. 
 
 Which of yoii? 4ai8 vestrnm ? '>• , v * "' 
 
 wtt ^-^ *^ states: Daae olvlt&tam. ^ V f • N 
 
 Th€ bravest of aU these : Horum omniam fortUrtmL 
 
 i. The partitive genitive often depends on neuter pronouns or 
 
 adjectives used substantively (but only in the nominStiveT the 
 
 accusative without a preposition) ; e.g., nihU, tantum, ^^ntZ, 
 
 J^^, rmnus, qu^, W, aliquid, id, fcJc, and also the adverbs S 
 
 S ^ni^SZr "^ «">t»ntively. In most of these cases the English 
 
 FrZlin» ^*^"*;- ^^ ''^*'^ ^-^ "^^ "^ ^cmM: 
 latum: Hoc .oi^ptl. ^^ um< protection: Satl. pr.Jl«i/ 
 
388 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 M 
 
 ii. In other cases an adjective used substantively reeularly 
 agrees m gender with the partitive genitive depending on it : as 
 -Ma»M/ o^ </w ships : Mnltae navinm. 
 
 iii. With adjectives and pronouns the partitive idea is often 
 expressed by prepositions, chiefly ex or de, but also inter, ante, 
 (^pud and tn. EspeciaUy is this the tiim with unm, pauci and 
 quMam; as, One of his sons: vnus « fliiia. 'A few of (Aurmm- 
 Panel dd noatrls. 
 
 iv. The partitive genitive should not be used in the foUowinc 
 cases : ° 
 
 (a) When, though English uses o/, not a part but the whole is 
 taken ; as. To aU of m.- Omnibas ndbl». Three hundred of w 
 
 V have conspired: Treoentl oonjuf&vlmaa. 
 
 (b) To denote the whole, the remainder, or any local part of any- 
 tmng, as the top. middle, bottom, beginning. Here Latin idiom 
 plrefers an adjective in agrieeraent, which regularly precedes the 
 substantive ; as, The who^ of Oavl : Tdta CJiaiia. I%e rest of the. 
 
 V strv^: Bellquiim oert&men. Th^ top of the hill: Sammn. 
 oollU. The mtddle of. the river: Medium flamen. At the be- 
 gtnnvngi o/'apnngr .P^imd v6re. 
 
 87. the Genitive of Cha6acteriStio» is used to ^enot^ 
 some character or quality of the substantive modified, includ- 
 ing vidue, mjBasure, time, etc.; as, 
 
 A man of great prtidsnce :Vlr oonsiUi mftgnl,^ 
 , «tone» of great weight: M&gnl ponderls saxa. « 
 
 ,4 /«w> days' march: Paaodrnm dl«ram Iter. ' * - - 
 /■ tA six-foot wall: Murns «ex pednm. ' 
 
 ? i- There Viust be someadjectival modifier of this genitive; eg 
 A nian of bravery is not vlr fortltudlnl*, but vlr fortU. * 
 
 11. The modifiers most commonly used are numerals and such 
 adjectives as mdgnm, maximm, parvus, tantvs, summus, pawM. 
 1 lie genitive of characteristic should not be used with pdr, inmilis, 
 dtmrnUu, aeqwis, m with pronouns except in such phrases as 
 nu^usmodi, ijicamodl. 
 
 ^m.'^j genitive of characteristic may be used M a predicate ; 
 as. The depth of the river was three feet : Fiuqpinls erat altltddd 
 trlum pedam. v 
 
 ^^\F^^ **** relation to the ablative of characteristic see section 
 1,^00, lii. 
 
 ■--,-■ ...■■.'■.,"•,.. ■ ■ , • ■ * 
 
 S8. The QiNinvr or pBrfftt denotes the value, but only in 
 getMtel, not definite, terms ; as. His ir\fluence wxw valued highly • 
 AaotdrttA* iiJa* mAsnl hab«bAtar. tf. ^^ *' 
 
 J» M^i oHM tta OMlUrt of OtmHfHon or Oeoitive of Quolttv 
 
 IB» 
 
 .^■' 
 
f 
 
 PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 33^ 
 
 .i».f 
 
 ■^Zt^^^^^^r- """^ ""* '^'"* "" '»™d only tern, .• 
 
 
 m. j< or the ablative of price see section 100. 
 
 
 B4ni», not Urb. ifemiw!' ' *" ^ "''" "/-Bo"" « Crb. 
 
 ■ «ouL^*' ^r'T» T™ ^^"^""«-MMy adjective, 
 _re3uire a gemtave -(usually objective) to complete their mean- 
 iDg ; as,. 
 
 |W« of tonfid^'n^: Plduelaa pl6nwi^; *-^ 
 
 ^er for power : Cupldu. Imperil. 
 
 AA;t/fed tn tmr.^orlt«8 belli. 
 
 Unaccustomed to toi^^ In.ufttas labork ' 
 
 .■JAS'SSiT"'"" '«"'•-'■"•■w.i».... 
 
 ^(o) For verb, of p.Vn!7, m«mi,W„y „d /«^eKin, see sectioi 
 ' cai^il".^n°d. "™''^'"* •°"""""' ^''« ">»■««"«'« of the thing 
 
 him of trtamm • Hn« ««^.*. -^f onarged , as, Fou ar« acciwna 
 (tQ Tliw • — ^ — " 
 
 j&* 
 
 Po^xUllnrnrrf'i,''''!?' **' emotion, m^f**, «,«f«t, w^ 
 IwenO.* and taedet take the accusative of the peio? who ^' 
 
840 
 
 ERIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 ^ 
 
 and the genitive of that whicli causes the,Jfeeling;* iw, I am 
 «M^wie^ o^my/oWy: Me «toltltliMi pudot.. 
 {^) ¥t>T the genitive, with interest &nd refert see section ^3, bj* 
 
 (/') Tbe genitive as sometimes found with verbs of j^nty and 
 «*tnt; with potior (see section 55, iii.), and in poetry (after the 
 analogy of the Greek) with verbs denoting separaiion. 
 
 r^ - EXERCISE la/ 
 
 A. 
 
 V 
 
 
 , 1. He said that this circumstance had dispelled all 'doubt as to 
 the arrival Qf the legfons. 2. He was a man of consummate ability, 
 and had ve^ great experience in military aflEaii». 3. He believed 
 that the soldiers of Ariovistus were wholly inexperienced in this 
 mode of fighting. 4. In the middle of this^-course is the islalid 
 of Mona. 5. Hd reminds the soldiew of their old disaster, and 
 urges thenfbot to forget the valor of the enemy. 6. He distributed 
 three months' provisions of ground qorn among the soldiers. 7. It 
 is a consul's duty to be of service to the rest of^ the citizens. 8. 
 The top of the hill was held by a few of our men. 9. Your 
 influence is of great value, your friendship is of greater. 10. He 
 was aipquitted of treachery, but found guilty of carelessness. 11.' 
 The/compelled the -^Edui to give them part of their land and to 
 ^ undertake to form no project against the Sequani, 12. He says 
 he is ashamed of his ti^aphery, and sorry for haijring attempted 
 to revolt. ' 
 
 /^ B. (Thtmiatodea, Ariatidest ManrUhai.) 
 
 *1. They built a fleet of two hundred ships, of which one hun- 
 dred were the Spartans'. 2. He asked how much money had been 
 given by the states/ 3. He was a man of such integrity that he 
 alone, within the memory of man, was called the Just. 4. They 
 are incited by the hope of victory and by confidence in Hannibal. 
 
 6. Being accused of treason, he was punished with three years' 
 exile. 6. The result was that they became skilled in naval warfare. 
 
 7. He gave instructions to the rest of the ambassadors to set out 
 with these. 8. Thucydides, w ho was the nearest of those who have 
 
 1 ThM« TerlNi («xoeptmiwret) tometimM h»ve instMd of the nhitive wi inflniUv* 
 or ■utwtMtlye oUuw m ■ubjeot, or » iwufr pronoun In tha « mn»»^ «, v«.«^»i„. ■ .. 
 i mm wny fvr Aun w g tto ne thu : W haw rtietWl^piiinn 
 
;«".*.' 
 
 . ,; PART V.-STNTAX -A^ COMPOSmON. 8« 
 
 ' l^lf Pf t^ '™"''' "^ "»» '«^Wed f» this State. 9 
 
 ■■-■'■ ■ V ■ " , '^ . - ■ ' 
 
 1 T1, V, , ^- (Oosmr, M. ir. 15.) 
 
 with ^:?Thu'„^°~:Lz:rr ' '^-^^^ 
 
 jivei*' Q q^ ,««.o^ It wicnarew to the confluence of the 
 
 •' ■-^^■:-/ 
 
 •m ■•■ 
 
 KAK 
 
 m 
 
 
 t ,'. 
 
 ^.::-.4;.-;--:2ps- 
 
 
 "■» ., ';■"-." 
 
 # 
 
hi 
 
 'a 
 
 Cn 
 
 I 
 
 PBim^Y LATIN BOOK. 
 
 OHijAlPTER XIV. 
 
 rSBsBF THE AbLATIV: 
 
 «ircumsk^oes attending uriL sZe^ffiLn V '^*^»* *^e 
 ^i|s ojigirrepr^senting thr^^ «poBite Jn 
 
 ^*e, meaning in or oT^I!^^™^ "" 
 
 , s 
 
 
 tteparation is opmmonly expressed bH the ablafi™ 
 ^ ^ & «bl.tiy.l'lsee .«tZ tIaT) """"«»' »P"P<»i«o„ with 
 
 '■■ !'"•??• y™ "«B'.AbIATITI of TBI Puo« «BOK WBlim -^tl, . 
 
 ^ wjthQut prepMitions, see uotibn 126. ™' ■ > "' 
 
 fi;^* TbB Ablative op Source tells that from whiejh some- 
 
 A^ A. preposition is ^MBiilarlv used (a\ in »h^ .«^u B^. , 
 (6).with pronouns, anM to Senote remote oriSMF^^ ^"'^^ 
 
 11. Here belongs ^^pblative donotina theHKR U# i,- u 
 ^^f "^8 » «««ie; wiTthi. ablati^i li%^5Ky u-^ t 
 
 
■-■? 
 
 * 
 
 I^ART V.^YNTAX AND COMPOSITION?. 
 
 343 
 
 5^. The ABLATIVE OP Causb^ is used to denote the motive 
 from which some act proceeds, more i^arely the cikuse of somer 
 
 In that hope he sought our friendship.: Amioitlam e& spfi 
 pettvlt. ■ • \ 
 
 . .' ' ' ♦ \ ' ' ' " 'i 
 
 . il" In place of this ahlatite we find more f Fluently prepositional; 
 phrases with ea, de, 06, per^ propter ^ jwoe, the genitive with cmtSa 
 or gratidy or, especially to indicate the moving cause, an ablfitive 
 of means with a participle such as adductm, permdtus. 
 
 97. The Personal Agent with passive verbs is denoted by 
 ' the ablative with a or «6 ; as, 
 
 Their lands are lq,id waste hy the enemy: AgrI eoram ab 
 hoBtibng vasta^ntar. 
 
 i. For the dative of apparent igent see section 80, d. 
 ii. For the so-called secondary agent with per i?ee section 99, i. 
 
 ^8. The Ablative qf Comparison (trg,nslated by means of 
 ih(m)\B used aftet» comparatives to denote that -with which 
 something is compared j as, 
 
 The tfhii are more GivUized than the rest: Ubll oeterb bu- 
 
 m&nidr6s sunt. ^ ■-,-.'.■■■'.' •%■■-■ ; 
 
 i. -This ablative is most often useid in negative sentences or their 
 equivalent, and is rarer after adverbs than after adjectives. 
 
 ii«. As a rule the ablative of comparison is used only when the 
 first of the Words compared is in the nominative or is a subject 
 accusative. But the ablative of the relative pronoun is (^Ften used 
 when the first of the words compared is an object accusative. 
 
 iii. In other cases, as well as often where the ablative mi^ht be 
 used, than is expressed by gttam, and-a noun or pronoun following 
 takes the case pf the word with which it is comp|tred ;* as, Ivela/nd 
 is smoUer than Britain : Hibernia minor est qnam Britannia. 
 
 iv. The comparatives flUs^ minusy Umgius and amjdius are regu- 
 larly used without quam, yet without affecting the case of the fol- 
 lowing word f as. Move than eight hundred ships had been seen: 
 Ampllaa o^tlngent^ n&v^a erant vlaae. 
 
 V. The ablative of comparison of some abstract words such as 
 opinio apd spe&Aa used in place of a comparative clause ; as, Sooner 
 than anyone expected; Celerlaa omnI opinldne. 
 
 1. T||ii«^e may also be^dassed under %he Instrumental Ablative. 
 
 2. Aa a g^eneral rule, unlike English idiom, the aame oomtrucUon whether of 
 M or o( verbf follows qruam as preoedaa j " " 
 
 e fw thmi Hjahe v t vpaiMw i u jo r wa r : p m tt fpi nf 
 pamrai. • " " 
 
 robstantives or of verbf' follows gttom aa preoeiiaa it ; aa. He taJd th»tf didnoikiiia 
 iiuOmv t v i niatwntjwwa r : p m tt fpi nim i a i tui t u»h HMW b^ l u wi 
 
 See abo aaoUon 98, Til. , ^ ' y 
 
344 
 
 PRtMART LATIN BOOK. 
 
 »■■ : 
 
 ■•1} 
 
 VI. Latin often omits the standard of comparison <e.g., 'than is 
 natwtal, than is lusuod, thorn is dedrcMe, than that just menti&ned) 
 when It is easily gathered from' the context. In such ea^s the 
 wmparative may generally be translated by unumally or too with 
 the positive. . ~ 
 
 vh. When two qualities in the same object are compared with 
 each other, Latin has qmm with magft* and the positive, or with 
 the comparative in both clauses ; as, Ht. is mpre brave than ivise: 
 Magis forttrest qaam sapiens, or Fortlor est qnam saplentior. 
 So, too, with the adverbs. ' 
 
 ,5. Thk Instrumental and Comitative Ablative. 
 
 • 99. The Ablative op Means or Instrument is used to 
 denote that by means of which something is effected ; as, 
 
 It oaamot be determined by the eyes : Oonlls J udloarl ndn potest. 
 They live on flesh and are clad in skins : Carne Tlvant, pelll- ' 
 basque snpt vestltl. 
 
 i A personal instrument is occasionally in the ablative, but is 
 more often expressed by per and the accusative ; as, He learns by 
 means of scotUs: ^Cdgnoaeit per expldratores. 
 
 ii. The. ablative -^means is used (a) to denote the route or 
 m^ns of conveyance><6) with utor, fnuyr, etc.; (c) with opus est 
 and Umis est; (d) with verbs oi filing and abounding and adjec- 
 tives of |72ent|/; r 
 
 - , 100. The Ablative op Price is used with verbs of buying, 
 selling, exchanging and costing ; as, ^ j^^ 
 
 It was purchased for a small price: Parvo pretio redemptnm 
 est. ' 
 
 They exchange wyr for agriculture : Bellnm a«rloiUtar& eom- 
 
 mutant. ; . .- - : .' 
 
 i. For the genitive of indefinite price see section 88. ■ i " 
 
 lOL The Ablative op Measure op Dipperence is used' 
 with comparatives and words implying comparison to denote 
 the amount by which two persons or things differ ; as, \ 
 
 The oth^ road is much easier : Alteram Iter est malto fa^Ulas. 
 Irdand\s considered a half smaller than Britain: Hibernla 
 dimldlo minor qnam Britannia ezistlm&tur. " ■. v' ^ 
 
 A few days after : Panels post dlebas. * 
 
 Three years before : Trlbas ante annls. 
 
 j» Thw ablative is used also in designations of distanoa. <; »., wi»,h 
 ^^^^S31^m^X^hOTelBF^cui»iKve^^T^^^^^*^^^M4 
 
345 
 
 PART V. — SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 T^fiilariy in the case of the words spdti/Hm and intervdllum; ap, 
 He halt» at a great distance : Magrnd latoniftH^ oonsistlt. ' 
 
 ^ii.' To this usage belong (o) qu^ . ,J. \^i_Mtquant6 . . . tank) 
 with Comparatives, as, The sooner the hetterT^wib oitins eo mellnb; 
 (6) qa6 and quominus with the subjunctive (sections 28, iii. aM 
 139) ; and (c) ed or ^c with a comparative. ' j 
 
 ' 102. The Ablative of/ Specification is used to dei^oteiin 
 what respect a statement or term is to be taken as true ; ks, 
 
 They excel the rest of the Oavls in valor: Bellquds Oallda virt j^te 
 praeoMunt. 
 
 103., The Ablative of Manner and AccoMPANiHikNT jex- 
 presses manner or the attendant circumstances of an actidn ; 
 
 «, , . ' : .- -■--:^-v->--v:; :...'- 4 : , j ■ 
 
 The news is carried with incredible speed: Inor6dib|lI oelerl<kte 
 f Ama perfertnr. 1 
 
 They began to mount the rampart with loud sfiouts: M&xim5 
 «lamdre vallam asoendere ooepernnt. 
 
 i. As a rule the ablative of manner and accompanimi^ requjires 
 the preposition mm when not mollified by an adjectivPor a geni- 
 tive, and even when so modified it often has ctim; as, He '^^Lto 
 death with torture: Cum ornoiAtu necatnr. ,JIe did this wfl^he 
 greatest care: SammA (onm) dUlgrentia hoc f§elt. SomeSbla- 
 tives, however («.gr., vi, jure, cdsa)y never take cttm, being usedj vir- 
 tually as adverbs. -. 1 , 
 
 ii. Literal accompaniment is always expressed by cum- andl the 
 ablative ; except that in certain military phrases (chiefly of! the 
 troops with which a march is made) cum may be omitted if; the 
 ablative has a modifier; as, They hastened tcith all their fotws: 
 (jCnm) omnibiis o&plla oontend§raiit. 1 
 
 iii. The ablative of manner denotes that in a^xardanee with imich 
 something is done ; as. He did this in accordance t^^MB9|r> in- 
 
 Structions : Prsteeeptu Caenari» tide tielt. ^ %^il^^ j 
 
 ■ ' ~- I 
 
 104. For the Ablative Absolute, which is perhaps locativja in 
 origin, but which in use resembles the ablative * of aooompanin^ent 
 in expressing the .attendant circumstances of an action, see Oliap- 
 ter Yll. 
 
 e Ablative of Oharagtbristic' is used todeiliote 
 aracter or quality of the houn or pronoun modified ; as, 
 
 1. This lut usatre is, however, oomplioated with the abUtive of oauf^, eeptdiallr 
 b e fore -gwxt clau— ■■ — ^ ^ J^^ =^ 
 
 Wf^ called the AbUttre of DmripHm or AUatirfl of QualUg. 
 
 %4, 
 
 i 
 
846 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 '-I 
 
 A y<ymg mm. of great valor ; Ma^rna vlrtate adnlfiioeii*. 
 
 i. This ablative "MsH^Hlot only attributively but also in 
 (literally, Th^y arfm^^^^th long hair). 
 «•7*^- wi^ ^^® ^T^ '® genitive of characteristic (see section 
 
 ••• '''Tiru .!?^^® ®®'^® adjectival modifier of thia ablative. 
 
 m. When *he description refers to number the gelitive of char- 
 acteristic should be used To deno te phjusi cal characteristics or 
 e^<W appearand the ablative «^^^ other descrip- 
 
 tions.eitb|f case may be used, wiirSpfefetence f?r thfe genitive to 
 expresB permanent pr inherent qualitie^^ ' 
 
 '* 
 
 C. The Locative Ablative.' 
 
 ::«k 
 
 the Ablative OF the Place where see section 127. 
 ij Ablative of K»e when or within mtoch see sections 
 
 ,. 107:*The ablative is used with many special verbs ai^d adjec- 
 tives, really banging to the classes already mentioned but not 
 always easy «to <aassify. 
 
 i. Forthe ablative with utor, frvSr, fungor, potior, W5«A.and 
 V With verbs of lacking^ see section 54. ^^ 
 
 -?• ^^® *^^**^^^ ^* "^^^ ^^*^^ glori^r, laetor, gauded; ftdd, c^indd; 
 ntt(m^mssfU£sc6y1^mefaici6. j y j * 
 
 iii.j The ablative i« used with %nt«, indignus ; contentus, laetiis : 
 tretii^. 
 
 • 108. The ablative is used i^^e following prepo8i*ions : ^ 
 A, ab (ab«), /rom, by; a^Mue, Wiihout; ol^am, in the presence 
 
 Wn^"' "^ ' *^' fe #«*^%/ e, f>x, hit of from ; prue, - 
 before %n companson^mh, manse of; pro, bef<m, in pCace of, in 
 accordance with ; alufy' ivithout ; tennu, as far as, , 
 
 ^hftt^^t"^ '^ ^^^ ""M^^^ ^**.' ^SJ'"^ •Pl».^'^*-, expressing 
 the pl^ where, and serines with ^UKtMith^iindunpe^ 
 above, concerning, f heserioiir also tak^ the ^eeusative ^tioifVO)/ 
 
 
 .||X^11C||E^ 
 
 4 'it' ■ ' 
 
 1. %e|%engthene^tHe plac^thlFrall, and filled the trench 
 ^K water. 2. ^e was a man of 'the highest merfib.and worthy of 
 praise ; relyipg on the friendship of the ^mans he had col- 
 lefted all his retainers, two hundred in numW. 3. If they had 
 been able to keep pur men > from supplies; they would have cut 
 them off frfun rfttuming^. 4. Thoy all a t »iu themselves with woitd, 
 
 m 
 
 :/■ 
 

 PART V. — SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 847 
 
 and thus are of more frightful appearance in battle. 6. In order 
 that the soldiers, influenced by the hope of plunder, might not 
 wander too extensively, he did not suffer them to go farther than 
 usual from the camp. 6. He was informed by scouts that the 
 enemy had encamped at the foot of a mountain two days brfore. 
 7. If they are of an unfriendly disposition, they will be incensed at 
 this grievance. 8. With such swiftness and vehemence did our 
 soldiers advance that more than six hundred of the e^emy were 
 slain. 9. Advancing with the charioteers, whom they are accus> 
 tomed to use in all their battled, they prevent our men frqm land- 
 ing from the ship. 10. In accordance with their custom, they were 
 boasting insultingly ^ then: victory. 11. Whether, by chance or 
 design they had been led out of thftcamp without bag^^. 12. 
 The Helvetians were much braver than the rest of the Gauls. 
 
 ■B. {TJiemistocles, Aristt&es, ffannibcU.) ^ '' 
 
 1. In the same manner he defeated Antiofchus t^oygars later by 
 strategy. 2. He was informed by letter that the Greeks would 
 cut him off from returning. 3. If the harbor is surrounded with 
 walls, it wJAl surpass the city in usefulness. 4. It happened by 
 chance that the master of the horse was of equal authority. 5. 
 Terrified by this strange circuihstance they took poison of their 
 |ttta accord. 6. More than two hundred cities were taken by force. 
 tWh Accordance with the common law of nations, he was banished 
 from his country. 8. Through the instrumentality of Sosilus, whom 
 he employed as teacher, he became versed in Greek literature. 
 
 O. {Ccemr, Bh. IV. 16.) |p|^^ 
 
 1. For these reasons after the hostages w^i|pfln up, he took 
 his army across the Rhine by means of boats. $^ The Suebi pressed 
 them harder th^n did the Usipetes. 3. Impelled by this hope 
 tb^y gave up less than thirty hostages to Caesar. 4. Against 
 Ceaaar's will they had returned to join the Germans. 5. Cajsar 
 many years before had been presented from crossing by the press- 
 ure of public business. 6. Messengers have come concerning pub- 
 lic business from the nations which are under the sway of the 
 Roman people. 7. They are considered by''the other nations to 
 
 sengers thi^ they had been kept by the envoys from fleeing. 
 
348 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 
 CHAPTER XV. 
 
 - ; - i ■ \ ' , 
 
 Vbbbal Nouns— Infinitive, Gebund, Supihe. / 
 
 A. The Infinitive. ' ' ^ 
 
 , 109. The Infinitive is a verbal noun. As a verb it is modified 
 by an adverb, not by an adjective ; it governs the same case as 
 other parts of the verb ; it has the distinction of tense, and it has 
 a subject. As a noun it is used as a subject or object of verbs 
 or as an appositive, and is always neuter.^ * 
 
 110. The Infinitive as Subject.— The infinitive, wither 
 without a subject accusative, may be used as the stihject of a 
 verb; as, ' ,, . 
 
 It M best to defend the camp : Oastra def^dere praestat. 
 It is not right for the Germans to crossover: Oermands tranglre 
 Hon aequnip est.' 
 
 It was reported that the cavalry was approaching: Ifunttatnm 
 «at eqaltea aooedere. 
 
 He shows that carrying out their plans is an easy matter: Per- 
 faolle «Tsse probat oonata perfloere. 
 
 i. This usage is found chiefly with (o) certain impersonal verbs, 
 e.g.y oportety licet, juvat, placet r (6) est and neuter adjectives, 
 such as aequum, turpe, utile, necesse ; (c) passive verbs sentiendi et 
 decldrandi. 
 
 ii. Except with passive verbs sentiendi et decldrandt, the tense of 
 the infinitive used is almost invariably the present, the perfect 
 ' occurring but seldom, and the future never. 
 
 111. The Infinitive as Object.— The infinitive, with or without 
 a subject accusative, is used as the object of a verb ; as. 
 
 He says Coisar has come: DIolt Caesarem venlsse. 
 He wished to depart : Disoftdere volebat. 
 
 i. For the'accusative and infinitive construction see Chapter I., 
 for the complementary infinitive, Chapter II. For the infinitive as 
 an appositiye see section 195. 
 
 112. The Historical Infinitive.— In lively description the 
 present infinitive, with its subject in the nominative case, is often 
 
 1. In the case of the historical infinitive, however, the infinitive has the value of a 
 verb, not of a noun. 
 
 8. Notige that neither Ihe IntrQductQcit ^ /hr n ft r t h e reprfti i «nt > tlv « f .ihj ^ w' t it Ir — 
 
 i"GiyaiUr separate word. 
 
 ; 
 
 \ '. 
 
(/ 
 
 "^B 
 
 PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 349 
 
 found instead ojF the impeiiect indicative; generally several suck 
 infinitives are found together ; as, ; 
 
 Casar every day kept dunning the ^dui ; ^y after day the JEdui 
 kept putting him off: Cotldle Caeswr Aednos fl&flrlt&re; diem 
 e:( die duoere Aedal. 
 
 ; ' ' B, The Gerund. 
 
 11^ The Gerund is a verbal noun found only in the genitive, 
 dative, accusative and ablative singular. like the infinitive, it is 
 modified bj an adverb, and governs the same case as the other 
 _^ parts of the v&bw 
 
 _^^.In use the gerund cori-esponds pretty closely to the English 
 ; imperfect gerund in -ingii but often also, especially with arf, it 
 
 may be translated by the English (gerundial) infimitive with <o. 
 
 " , ■ » 
 
 114. (a) The Gknitive of the gerund is used chiefly as an 
 objective genitive with nouns and adjectives, and with causa ; as, 
 Desirous of making war : Bellandl cnpldns. For the purpose of 
 foraging : Frumentandl oansa. 
 
 (6) The Dative of the gerund is rarely found, and is used chiefly 
 : with adjectives denoting fitness (for which ad and the accusative is 
 more common), and in some official phrases ; as, A wall sufficiently 
 high for defence: SatlaaltnutuenddmuTvi». 
 
 (c) The Accusative of the gerund is used only with prepositions, 
 chiefly ad and in; as, Beady to fight (or Beady for fighting) : Para- 
 tas ad dlmioandnm. -^ 
 
 (d) The Ablative of the gerund is used to denote means and with 
 prepositions, chiefly in, ab, de 'axkA eau; a6, Occupied in reaping: 
 
 \ In metendo oooupatl. , - 
 
 i. The use of the gerund with an accusative object is, on the 
 whole, rare. See^apit^^ 119. r ' ; ^^..i— - 
 
 ' ^ ■' -^:-' ^^ ^jp. Tee Supimb. •■■ 
 
 115. The Supine is a verbal noun found only in the accusative 
 and ablative singular, in both cases with adverbial force. It is 
 .translated by the English infinitive with to.^ f 
 
 1. The supine in -umcorrMponiila to the English (fferundiai) 
 a» ; the supine in -u to the English infinitive with adjectives a 
 
 Teribs 
 
 infinite with to after 
 and nouns. 
 
.1 ♦, 
 
 > ll*i 
 
 m 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOKi 
 
 116. The AccusATivB supine, or supine in -ttm, is uspd to 
 denote pur^se, Ispecially after verbs of. motion, and if tmnsitiye 
 . may take an accusative object ; as,, . , 
 
 ' They send envoys to^ Cmsfir to ask aU: U^htbn ad Caewrem 
 mittnnt rog&tam aaxilium. ^ •» «m 
 
 i. The construction is not common in classical Latin, which ore- 
 fers to express purpose by the final subjunctive, or by the gerund '^ 
 and^rundlve with adotcausd. It is 'used most fr^uentily wS 
 . «a-^d wma, and also in the phrase nuptum dare (or cdlocdr}) ' ' 
 , a. The rore future infinitive passive is formed by means of fri 
 
 2'irl^ .T*'''! P^?;? ""} f "'^ impersonally) and this supinei 
 as He says th^ city will he taken : Dlolt urbem oaptum in ftter> • 
 
 iLf^'' "."^ ^^^^. t ^'J^ '^y^- Here url^^ni is reaUy theT 
 object of captmn; not the subject of cap*w» frf. 
 
 '^^^.ll^-'The Ablative SUPINE, or supine in -w, is used to define 
 the apphcation of certam adjectives andfof the noun* f^l^l - 
 
 '^,^' « ,v -. -/ . '^ ■ 
 
 ' '^^ i» difficult todo: B6e eat dlfflelle facta. *» '" ' '-^^ " -, 
 
 * , -pi^edible to narrate .f>>Inor«dibiIe dlctu. , " > 
 
 It is a sin to say so : Hdo nef&s est dicta.. •;• w r^ 
 
 i. 'Hie adjectives so used are chiefly those meaning e<»«/, diffietUt, 
 ^eamiU, strange, best. The supines so used are ch^y aS 
 dtctil, facta, visa, nata. « , ' «*i#«»i'», 
 
 ii. The ablative supine does not take an accusative object 
 
 -'-■". ViT'T-; 
 
 /•• 
 
 
 :' EXERCISE 16. , * V 
 
 •^ .^1. The Ueute4nfe brouglit word to Oajsar thai he had foundthe 
 ships ready fer saUing. 2. They saw that 9W men were not 
 advancing for the purpose of fighting. 3. After making a bridge 
 Cffisar at^Bjpted to cross the river and pursue the enemy. 4. H» 
 proves to them that it is a very easy thing to do, to seize the 
 supreme pbweV. 6. For quickness in loading, £he ships were made 
 lower. 6, If messengers hwl come to Oeesar to ask help, he ^ould 
 have sent three legions to their ^Issistance. ; 7. Answer wi^s' made 
 that it was better to be slain in WUe thtm not to recover theur 
 freedom. 8. By making enquily, CaDsar found that ^e rest of the 
 cavalry had been.thrown into a panic. 9. They hurjthei^ weaponi 
 4t the enemy and >|tive tham n«> ^ ' * ^ 
 
 J^' 
 
 VJ. \ 
 
 t 
 
 r^ 
 
 u 
 
 :'%^ 
 
 \ 
 
 
 .viu<-:- i 
 
 « )t>■■i^ 
 
 '•*»»". 
 
 Ik' "''' 
 
 
 
 V" 
 
 
 » 
 
 - ' 
 
 
 •i....-_^ 
 
 >^t)portnnity. of retiring.^ ^lOil Tlioy 
 
 '<■• 
 
 (/. 
 
 « 1 
 
 ;|^s.- 
 
 
 
 ,^. 
 
 **■:. 
 
MBfid to 
 
 a:%nsidre 
 
 aesarem 
 
 hich pre- 
 ) gerund ' 
 iljly with , 
 lre% *, 
 ne offrl 
 supine; 
 rlOiter-l; 
 «lly the V 
 
 d^ne 
 fd« and ' 
 
 .J. - 
 
 
 .*» 
 
 .-. * 
 
 M''^ 
 
 %. 
 
 PART V.-l-8yifT:AI ANP COMKBITIQN. ^ : S^^ 
 
 thought the best thing to do was to cut off our men from supplies," 
 and protract the affair into the winter. 11. He learned froin thl' 
 soldiers that ^h% ships weire useless for sailing, and althougli he was 
 ready to set^ut, he thought it would be extremely dangerais for 
 the soldiers to embark. 12. So fierce an onset did the enemy 
 make that there was no possibility tol keeping one's position oH the 
 
 W»ll. . •■ .■,■'. . ; ■■■'^.' .■ -^ ,:■.'■ V '.:- ' 
 
 1. The leading men came to Caesar to seek peace and to comphim / 
 of the «discretion of the common people. 2/ It has been pointed / 
 out above that the eneiny had surrendered part .of the hostages. 4 ^ 
 He pointed out what was there^on for disemliarking. 4. He had .' 
 brought to them CaBSalffe instrub^ioiis regarding returning tio their^ 
 l^nds. , 5. They kept laying ^ihe blame on the common people, and ^ 
 
 saying they would surrender the hostages at once, and commending 
 themselves to Oa^sar. '6. He said that the ships would be carried back 
 by the.storm to the mainland. 7. He ordered the soldiers to send 
 back the hostages when thiey were given ^p. 8. A d«%y was 
 appointed (dtc6) fot assembUng. 9, By setting o^ fey the x>pen ' 
 M ~V '.sea they escaped (ejft^<5) a greater dMi^er. '' . *^ . 
 
 /" 
 
 V/ 
 
 *:^ 
 
 i 
 
 ■0. 
 
 V^V^. 
 
 ind'the 
 
 )re ncMb 
 
 Ibridg^e 
 
 ize the ' 
 e made" 
 t^ ifould 
 i made 
 r their 
 of the 
 oapons . 
 
 
 '\ 
 
 *"*-y* 
 
 C. (Ccesar, BklV. 18\. - '^ :rf 
 ^^1. CcBsar beganio get timber together aiyd Ijuildi ^ dge." 'i f v 
 m^i ' ;^»«*®TiU be left the Sugambri for withdrawing from their terri'- ' 
 [\K tories, • 3. He will order a strong gui^rd to be left at the bridge. ' 
 r 4. The envoys jinswered Caesar that the hostages vould be brought- ' ' 
 
 5. Sevdr^l envoys came to Cajsar to seek peace and friendshiu.^.6. 
 He^answered that k was best {opH^fMis) for all to^jrepare fdflligtifc* ■ ' 
 7. The ansHrer was given that the Sugambri had conceal^ them^ 
 jSeWes in the forest. 8. The Usipetes answered that a.day had' .* ' 
 I „ i;:^«^« fi»«l (dfc5)jfor leaving their territories. 9. It iir^iffioulft ^V 
 t . ^lAdiffi^ilu) to say.why !he artuy has-been led across the bridae. 
 
 i». v/^ 
 
 :< 
 
 ■ M 
 
 •%■ 
 
 4-* 
 
 i 
 
 Tho> 
 
 it'. 
 
 p 
 
 
 A • < < • 
 
 J< 
 
 t ' 
 
 
 
 
 } 
 
 I» 
 
 •a- 
 
 
 tr^.""-^ 
 
 'Map"'" 
 
 »v 
 
 #-i» 
 
 »;-.--1^-. 
 
 & 
 
''■,H 
 
 362 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK, 
 
 \ ■ 
 
 CHAPTER XVI. 
 
 1. ^ 
 
 v\^ 
 
 Verbal Adjectiveis— Gerundivej Participles. 
 
 A. Thb Gerundivb. 
 
 
 118. The Gerundive (sometimes called th» future participle pas- 
 sive) is a verbal adjective of the first and second declensions, 
 and agrees with its substantive. 
 
 ii^ll9. The Gerundive Construction. — Instead of th^ ^et^ 
 imd governing a direct object in the accusative, we oftenf 
 find the substantive put in the case required hy the context- 
 and the gertmdive in agreement with it. This is the regular 
 "usage after prepositions and in the dative case, and is p^fer- 
 able in t^e genitive and the ablative of means ; as, ^ 
 
 He sets mt to harcu^ the enemy: Ad hoat|s vexandds profleii- 
 «Itur (in place of ttd vexandum lioBt««). 
 
 They lose time in seeking their coinrades: fn q«aeMiidli inlt 
 tempu» dlmlttunt (in place of In qu»«rend6 «uo»). J . ^ 
 
 An opportunity is afforded of marching through UiAfT^onnee: 
 Paonlt&a d»tur per |>rdvlnolam Itinerls ftwslendl (in place of 
 Itfcr faolendl). 
 
 i. The various cases are used in the same way in the geru6div«i 
 construction as in the gerund. (See section 114.) 
 
 ii. The Rerundive construction cannot be used with intransitiv* 
 verbs; ab. For the purpose of resisting the enemy: Hoatibui real- 
 ptendi oaaa& (never Hoatlnin realstenddrnm oanaft). But «tor, 
 fnuyTf fangor and potior, which governed the accusative in old Latin, 
 4egularly take the gerundive construction.; aa^J'M Jw^ ^tqkiM' 
 the camp: Sp^a potlunddrum oaatrorum. 
 
 iii. -K the case of neuter pronouns and neuter adjectives used 
 substantively, the gerund with an object accusative is regular, even 
 after prepopitions ; as, For i/uB puijtose of doing something : Allquld, 
 
 rv. With mel, ^^\, ml, nostrl^^vestrl, the gerund or gerundive in 
 .ruft is used, without regard to eit^her gender or number; as, For 
 the purpose of cka/ring Ut^mselves (or herself) : Bnl p&f gandf oauaA. 
 
 1 If p^iraamH ii the gerund, mii may either \^ the pronoinfn»! wf JectJve modifylnf 
 theKru«l^ni«*l m » eubrtwitlve. or be the pronoun depending wan obJe<'tiva 
 
 the neuter •Tngular poeaeerive, twum- iMr (or A#r) ptnonaliiy. 
 
 . n 
 
 run* 
 
 
 i 
 
 ■%^ 
 
 / 
 
 M- 
 
»i^ 
 
 rendu IWit 
 
 PABT v.— SYNTAX ANp C6llH)sinOW. dIS 
 
 .. 120. The ^Passive I^briphrastio CoHjuQA-noir. — The 
 gerundive is used in th^ noxqinative and accusatAee as a 
 predicate adjective with sum, to denote duty or necesHty; as 
 ^^^hinghad to be d^e hy Quart Oae«ri omnl* e««t 
 
 ..l\ttL^ ^"^ '' --.c?: Statuit H,..nu^ 
 
 Je s^tioXl^''kf J^i^?-^^"^^' *?^ *8ent being in the dative 
 jsee section 80, d). The Ei^ghsh equivalent is, however, constantlv 
 
 u. In this construction intransitive verbs are used imn«r«n«»iw 
 
 rsee sect on 56), the gerundive staking ThT^J^r^Tth^^rS 
 
 . Irom which It IS formed ;|a8,/2%ere m^t be no dTy N6„e.t 
 
 thtngs ought to be used.' ^» r*bu. utendttml.t . 
 
 Il 121. The accusative of the oerundive in iia<wi {«^.^li- ,ii 
 agreement with the object of cerSSTver'^ (chieSf v Z^^S' 
 amSJMn^, imdertoAtVu/ and coring /or) to express «^Z^. 21% 
 
 ;«»« *,5' ^^f -^"^ ^^ transportation of the o^ Set 
 
 ;.' .'^^-^''■- '\-"'''B. The Pa»tic|plis8. ' ■':-'y^ --y"^'' y ■'•.,;''.- 
 
 '♦i,f^^' -^T *'^^™?™******^*^"®«^*^e participle aiid the use <^ 
 the i>re«!ne and i>p»/w* participles se^ChaptwVI^ «la me use of 
 
 .123. The future participle denotes an adSoii as about to hanoen 
 at a time s,,hse^mitto that of its .pmncipal verb. Its chief ^£^ 
 ,»te (a) to form with e^) the future infinitive active in the ^SJT 
 nh^^ """^^'"'l' construction, and (b) to form th^activrr^l 
 phmstic coniugation. It is but rarely used as an adiectivVri. 
 substantive (f^UHru^ being the chiei iitance) ; in^^^d i»?! 
 
 " ,.' .?■;■'. ■' '■.■'''•■■'■'; ■ ' y. ' 
 
 124. Twi AxmvB Prri^rastio OoHjuoATioN. ^ TW 
 future participle is used as a predicate adjective with iUm 
 to express intention^ likelihood, or imminmce /as, 
 
 rw*ar«<ifcow«<o/^Ae; PuvnAtfirl «wtia. "* 
 
 -^ *^y^ ^^^ ^ /t(ftrf 6een on f/te fii^jnt qf 
 
 ^<# 
 
 Jf^ 
 
854 
 
 V f 
 
 
 ? .< 
 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 EXERCISE 16L 
 
 >:a 
 
 1. Ceesar is about to lead out his forces with the object of 
 crashing the enemy. 2. He answered that the soldiers must not 
 waste the time for fighting in searching^ for their comrades. 3. He 
 caused two bridge^ to be built for the puppose of following up th6 
 enemy. 4. All hope of gaining possession of the town has van- 
 ished. 5. The enemy was on the point of making an attack on 
 the cavalry. 0. He perceived that he would have to set out at 
 I'oiWft. 7. We should not let slip the oggortuuity of freeing 
 ourselves for evear. 8. He will give this legion to Lal^enus to lead 
 back. 9. They did not think that so large a number of hostages 
 should have been required. . XQ. They were assembling from all 
 sides to defend the camp. .^ 
 
 ' ' B. (Coesar, Book ir. 1S9-S1.) -i> 
 
 1. An opportunity had been given our men to bring in com. 2. 
 They were about to form a conspiracy for the purpose of renewing 
 the war. 3. He had caused com to be provided and timber Inrought 
 from Gaul. 4. Caesar had to cross over into Britain. 5. The ships 
 are useless for carrying back the legion. 6. We shall have to make 
 use of bronze for refMiiring this ship, 7. Com must be brought in 
 dirily. 8. The. Britons should have shut the Romans out froi^ 
 supplies. 9. The legio;is are going to winter in Britain. 
 
 "■■..".•■ ■ i ., •' " ^ ■ ' • ' 
 
 V ■■>■ ,-?.-^'v"-;:'V 0' t€cB$ar, Sk. ly. 19.) -■ . V:- *^ ■ 
 
 . i. ^JUl ought to a^sejmble with a view to holding a'counoil. 2. lA* 
 discovered that they w6re going to bUm their towBS. 3. A lew 
 days were spent in achieving these objects. 4. He provided for 
 the construction of a bridge. 5. The Gemians shoulZniave brokm 
 down the bridge for the purpose of freeing themselves. 6. Think- 
 ing that the Bugambri would break down the bridge, theyintended 
 to Withdraw into Gaul. 7. The'crops must be cut doVn in,of<|er tHi 
 ftrike terror into th^ Germuis. 8,, Caesar had to l^ad his arml^: 
 agroos Tor the purpose, of- taking vengeance on the Gei^^oans. % 
 They had ieamcM fqr ^hat purjxme he wa« ;»biQut to build tl|li 
 
 
 «■ ■■■S-f/V, 
 
 4^. 
 
 
 «■ . • 
 
 3',\ J» 
 
 
 
 
 I •«■••^' >, 
 
 .1 ■'k 
 
 
 tl. 
 
 "^, *, 
 
 ■'•■^ 
 
\ 
 
 PART V»-H3YNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 fsi^ 
 
 CHAPTER XVII. , J^ ' 
 Expressions of Place anA Time. ' 
 
 f > 125. PLAiDB TO WHICH (limit of motion) is denoted by the 
 Accusative with ad or tn, except that with names of towns 
 
 And small islands, and with cfowwm, rfomo* (Aome), and rite («a - 
 „ ^ the country), the preposition is omitted ^«s, 
 
 __. ney hasten to the camp: Ad «R.tra oontendunt. - 
 He sets oxit for mtain: In Brit» nulam profloI«>itur. 
 
 2Vi«|/ reiwmerf Aome.- Domum redlerunt. 
 
 n«ia/iWW T»^H Ir' "^i^ "^ ^ ^ denote'mto (or in) the 
 mtgnooTtwod of and (6) sometimes in contrast with 06 in exorea- 
 
 ' ««;«/dnrection;a8,ifecamem*oe/tenei9A6orW^ 
 
 Oenftvm pervinit. He pitched his camp near Alexia Ad 
 
 126. Place prom which is denoted by the ablative with 
 ab, ex or dSf except that with* names of towns and smaU • 
 isUnds, and with dom5..(/rom home) and rQre {from iht 
 country), the preposition is omitted ; as, ^' '•■ *^ c--. 
 
 • ^y withdraw from tJ^ shore: 2: lltore dl«,e#.6runt. ^ . 
 wi^STl''^'^ ^«i^tm/ Ex B«I»I6 trftn.l6rant. ^ / 
 ■^ Jtn Jtom Cprxnth : Corlntho tugit 
 They had gone atoay from, home: Domd dlMe..e»»nt. 
 
 6or/iood o/ (6) sometimes in contrast with ad in exoressions of 
 direction, and (c) with longi and verbs of distant ; STSX^e 
 Wrerfm^ie-Aom^ma; i Z««.a, «best iftliu; Vi«t«^ 1^- ! 
 
 . ,M27. Place where is denoted by tl,e ablative i*rith in, 
 
 , except^that with names of towns and stoall islands, And wi^ 
 
 . a few common nouns the preposition is omitted ; %»f, 
 
 ^ Me stood on tha waU : m mar« ednstltlt. / ^ r^- 
 
 ' SilLSf^f %,«^'"*«*' ♦»* ^«^ • »n «111» l»l.m«nt. 
 •y Mealed at Athens : Athtalmmortun^mu^ 
 
 r^wW^, su^ular,^ th# luoatir^ ^ntk»l. m t^Zm^ 
 
 I 
 
 -•a 
 
 ti 
 
 t 
 
 
 
m 
 
 PBIMART LATIN BOOK. 
 
 genitive) is used, not the ablative; as, At Rome: Romae/ At 
 Corinth : CorintU. So oooasionallv in the third declension singu- 
 lar (vrherid the locative is identical in form with the dative, as 
 Ckvrthdgini)^ and regularly in the words <iomi, rHrif htiml, hellly 
 mtlUio/ft. 
 
 .■on 
 
 
 ii. 'nie words loeiis and parf, and other nouns when modified hf^ 
 t(^tts (and sometimes by nCecUwt^ ovnms or cUncty^), may be used in 
 the ablative without a preposition ; as, On mitaUe ground: Iddne% 
 ' -I^Nei* Throughout the whole camp : T5tls oastrls. 
 
 iii. Often where English uses tn, motion iotoord* is» implied,' 
 ^H^td Latin consequently uses the accusative ; as. They concedkd 
 "memselves in the wood» (that is, went into thewocda and^ hid): la^ 
 
 1::<^.^IJ^ CoRocd and pOnd, however, take the ablative with in. 
 
 ^ iv. For such expressions as He came to the senatSat i2d»it (where 
 
 '' at Borne is an adjectival phrase modifyiiig senate^ ^tin has 
 
 Bdmam ad ■enAtnm vAnlt (where both expressions', modify the^ 
 
 ^verb). Similarly, He came fropi the senate at JSkme is Rdn^A !(- 
 
 - aen&ta v«nit'/ ■' i.-^ ';',;", • -;■'"•'■■ 
 
 ' y. With jiar«, latm, agmen, ccyrnH, tergumffions, the direction in 
 
 which or the side on which is expressed by the ablative with «^ 
 
 .(and in the case of para, also with eiii)i as, In front: A f^pnte.. 
 
 On one aide: fn& ex parte. . ., ; '-^ • ' . 
 
 i28i. Extent of Sq^cb is expressed ^y the accusative, with; 
 verbs and witljithe adjectives longua^ alius and Idius.; as,V . ' 
 
 He advances three miles: Tria mlllla paHsnnm prooMlt. 
 
 A trench Jive feet deep : FosfM qnlnqn^ ped6^ alta. ' ' ^ 
 
 i. With absfim and distd either this accusative or the ablative b£ 
 measure of diflference may be used. (Sectiop 101, i) 
 
 i-- 
 
 #■■.' 
 
 I'-. . «I 
 
 »« 
 
 f ;■■ 
 
 
 . "..^W''-' ■ 
 
 ',■¥;-.', 
 
 ■ * \ 
 
 129. Duration opTiShi isexrpressed by the accusative; a% 
 
 He waits there a few dtiys : Pano5* difta Ibl morfttwr. 
 
 Me was twenty ymrs old: Vlglntl^nnbmnMnmermM,* ' '; ,^^ 
 i. How long agoh expressed by abhinc and the accusative ; hov$^ 
 long b^ore and liow long^after \fy.ante Bad post with (a) th^.acousa» 
 
 ' '' 'IS — -• — '— ' — '■ "-^ r— ' 
 
 1. On » lomcwhAt ilmUar pilnoipU, wh«M EnfUsh haa a dotntn^n noun, like tmvn 09 
 •oitj/ (modifled by ftn MlJ«otiv« ori^ji •qnivslMit), in appoaition with th« nam^of feplaafe, 
 witii the corraipondiiif nouiw lAtia fwi^Hmy uaM « pMpoaition to (^xpeen motto» 
 toward», motion frmti^ oi plae» whtn, taStts/t of having uri$ or bffidwn in appMUon 
 with the proper namt ; aa, Thsf/ haHfd at Jtlba, a otmmnimt eUff: MIim cenatlt»* 
 runt in uro* op|i«rtuii«. / eam« to Ath«m, a moat fmttoui eU^ : wih»nam in 
 urbam praaclarjiwimam vani. Bi tet out /rmn Cwrt», a town qf tA« JSaMiiM : 
 OMglbua a» amW •afcinopum praihmUm Mt. 
 
 fc il|i i any , g» * <i < »Nw from Hmiit mm 
 
 J -.-4- » 
 
mae. At I 
 
 S/ _ ■ ' ■ -^ j-, .- ■; 
 
 ion singu- 1 
 dative, as 1 
 imi, bdlly ' I 
 
 
 odified by ^ 1 
 ie used in ; ■ 
 
 -1 ■ " ■... 
 
 iMdoneo 1 
 
 " ^. 
 
 • implied, < I 
 concedted v ■ 
 
 1 ■ , 
 
 ^ (where ■ 
 Hiatin has i» ,1 
 todify the '■ 
 
 
 Taction in c * H 
 e with (tb \ ' * 1 
 
 '? ' 
 
 H 
 
 
 ;iVe, witfe ' I 
 
 - 1 ■ 
 
 
 
 '.^^ 
 
 f . . , 
 
 kUative of ^ % ''^m 
 
 
 
 , 1 
 
 PAKT V.—STNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 367 
 
 tive.or (6) the ablative of measure of difference ; ss, A few days 
 after: Port p»uo6. die. or Pawl. po.t tUihnu. - /«^ <K»y» 
 
 130. Time when is expressed by the ablative; as, 
 m returns <m the fifthday: Quiato die revcrtltnr. 
 
 duxit*" feocfc Ai» /orcea; Sdll. oooA.u sua. popla. ro- 
 
 131. Time WITHIN which is expressed by the ablative ; as, 
 
 ^Sehas been put to death vnthin the last few days: HI« pauol. 
 diebas Interfeotus eat. -^ *«••«»• 
 
 i. Occasionally, by inference, the ablative of the time within 
 which, especially with tdtus may be equivalent to the accusative of 
 ti^e time how long; as. They matched all that night: £!& tdt& 
 
 -' V . . EXERCISE 17. 
 
 1. After waiting in Italy three month» he returned from 
 Kpme to Athens. 2. The enemy took up their position on wooded 
 ground eight mifes from Caesar's camp. 3.- Four yeaTs ago a battle 
 was fought hi th? neighborhood of Massllia. 4. This river, he 
 replied; was sixty fbet wide and aboMt five feet deep. 5. Setting 
 out from the army'te Gaul, he qaiAe a' few days later to the river 
 Thames m the enemy's countrit. 6. They were drdered t6 leave 
 horn* within three days and hide in the nearest woods. 7. He 
 set out «or the'-^untry at the beginiXing of spring and returned 
 home.thfr next year. 8. ,'J»fie' btfttle was begun on the right wing. 
 9. Hecamefroni GeneVa in the consulship of Crassus and Pom- 
 l»y, and»Ji%ed for awreral years at Rome and Atiens. 10. On the 
 same day, he was informed th?* tKe.enemy's forces were three miles 
 ^tant from Bibmcte. 11. He siid that he was nine years old. 
 12, After eoippleting a march of .twenty miles, they remained in 
 ovAp for fevQvai suoptNuvtf:dg|;8. 
 
 1. For aefreacal day^ the resfr oJF the «Wfalry remained in the camp. 
 
 2. Ob the seventh day €»«r set out from Rome for Britain. 3. A 
 few day»-kt «- tha Rmrmn w wft r a driven out of. 
 
 rthey iudt Oi^ 
 
 
 groundrw» 
 
 of the oainp. 4H tf= 
 
 jf^fefMddenly attack them by 
 
 
 V ' \.. 
 
358 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.^ 
 
 night on two sides. 5. At an opportune moment they cama to ' 
 steep ground. 6. After several days had ehjpsed the barbariana 
 betook themselves to their forests. 7. For a larger part of that 
 day Ceesar remained in the neighborhood of Rome. 8. Four years 
 ago Caesar departed for home. 9. Several days beforb Csesar's 
 arrival the legions had marched in that direction. 1,0. They lay 
 concealed in the forest six miles from the enemy's camp. 
 
 > \ C. {CcBmr, Bk. IV. ^.y /: ; 
 
 1. He found that the harSor was suitable for a lai^e part;, of the 
 winter. 2. In the war with the Gaul's he summoned the leaders - 
 .Irom every side. 3. On the north was an island. 4. Two days 
 later the forces will set out |or the harbor. 5. The winter is earUer 
 in Gaul than at Rome. 6. Waj had been waged in those regions 
 for many years. 7. Caesar set oilt from Britain for home. 8. Set- , 
 ting out ioj^ the island they concealed themselves in a suitable 
 place.. 9. During all that time the Gauls were five miles distant. 
 10. Within that year he had examined all the coast. 
 ■ • ■ :■/ :■ r -■-■' ■■- ^ ..":.'■:' ^ ■ ' :■■■ # 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
 ■*" 
 
 
 i ' " -■ 
 
 
 1 -: 
 
 > 
 
 
 J 
 
 |:.'v--; 
 
 .'■' '- , 
 
 . ri .' 
 
 
 ■^ 
 
 /' 
 
 
 . 1- 
 
 4' 
 

 
 PART V. — SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 cama to ' 
 arbarians 
 •iot that 
 
 
 our years 
 > Caesar's 
 They lay 
 
 - 
 
 rliof the 
 B leaders - 
 Pwo days 
 IS earner 
 
 n 
 
 
 3 regions 
 8. Set- , ' 
 suitable 
 distant. 
 
 
 
 CHAPTER XVIII. 
 
 "'■■■■■ " ■ , i 
 
 Imperative — Independent TJsbs op the Subjunotivb.1 
 
 "132. Commands.— The present imperative iJs regularly 
 to express cominands and entreaties; as, 
 
 Ckmsider Oatd : neaplelte Galllam. ' 
 
 i. As in English, there are many substitutes for the imperative} 
 e.g., (a) periphrases with ji*6e5, petO, dtd, etc. ; (6) vdim (I should lik^ 
 and/ac or cwm (see to ity be sure) with the present subjunctive (wit' 
 or without ut). 
 
 ii. The future* imperative expresses. rather a contingent commant 
 than one to be immediately obeyed. Hence it is used in laws and^, 
 precepts, and in distinct reference to the f uturef 
 
 133. Prohibition^' are usually expressed by nolif ndlUe (Jbii 
 unwiUing) with the present infinitive ; as, , 
 Do not suppose : Notllte existlm&re. 
 
 i. Prohibitions are also expressed (a) by ca/o8y tav9 nl, vidi ni, or 
 fac ne, and the present subjunctive ; -(b) by ng and the present ot 
 
 Eerfect subjunctive, but chiefly ih familiar discourse ; (c) in poetry 
 y ne and the present imperative '' ^ 
 
 134. The subjunctive is used independently to represent • 
 /action as willed. The following varieties exist: v 
 
 ■ (a) Hortative.' — The first person of the present subjunctive is 
 used to exhort, or; with ne, to dissuade ; as. Let us consider^Oavi : 
 . Oalliam respiol&mus. Let u^^w>t despokr .' N6 ddspftrimns. 
 
 (6) Jussive.— The third person of the present subjunctive is' 
 used to command, or, with nS^ to for|>id ; as. Let the eonsids see to 
 ^: Videant odnsnlgs^. ' ' 
 
 • L, So too tlie second person of the present or perfect subjdnotive 
 is used with n9 to express prdhibiifon (section 133, i. 6^ 
 
 ^(c) Concessive.— The present and' perfect subjunctive are used 
 
 #o concede for the sakeoT argument, the negative being ng; as, 
 5tn is tioc ^ greatest evUf'stiU it certaifU]f w an evil : 
 
 0ra/nting that padn 
 Ii% stt snininuiu malum 
 
 =^^ 
 
 imperfect -subjunctive^ 
 
 -4. 
 
 % 
 
 malum oert£ est. 
 
 •T l ie first p e reea' t f th e pn 
 
 ilrfor du-ection (though withoqib 
 
 
"^MtP! 
 
 u 
 
 JRUiURr LATIN BOOK, 
 
 "■^■-i, 
 
 8«0 
 
 ext)ecting an answer), ^if\i;bitt comte tb express r^*T^fi|j*^ or in- 
 dignatibn ; a^yWhat ain I to dof Qntd faolam ? "'wm^'^o* I ^o 
 dpt Qaid tu^Utem 7 Afe we to ytdd fo him? HaiiM^ftmas ? 
 
 195. The «ttbjunctive is used , independently to represent 
 action as c^itmiL "r ■ ' 
 
 This is ci^ed the Optativb subjunctive or the subjunctive of 
 Dksirk. The negative is n«. The present tense is used to express 
 wishes viewed as practicable; the ^np6rfect and pluperfect to 
 express wishes viewed as impossible of fulfilment ih present and 
 |)«Mt time respeictively. Such clauses are frequently introduced by 
 KMfMim, regularly so in the case of the imp^ect and pluperfect 
 tenses; as, May they be happy: sint beatL Would that he were . 
 present: tJtlnfim adesset. Wotdd that I had never been born.' 
 ^tlawm n6 n&tna eaaem. j(^(t^ 
 
 136. The subjunctive is used independent, t^ represent 
 
 actionlus conceivable. 
 
 
 
 Modest expressions of wish or regret with 
 
 heir compounds, followed often by another 
 
 as, I snovld Wee to know: Vellm scire. 
 
 e present :_J)llsdlein xadesset. 
 
 ■ one) woidd 
 as. It would 
 
 With the 
 
 thought : 
 
 rcely seem 
 
 V 
 
 ubjunctive 
 
 This is the so-called Potentiai. subjunctive, used of present and 
 past time. It is generally to be translated by coula, would or 
 thatddf and takeSu^|v i^egative ^^> The following varieties exist 
 
 (a) SxAtE: 
 vdim or vel 
 ^^bjunctiye 
 I would rather 
 
 'indefinite second person ; as, You ( 
 Put&res. (3) In softened assertions ; 
 proikMe: Vix verislmlle videatnr. 
 
 This last usage is found chiefly in the pro 
 conditional sentences (see sections 61 and 63). 
 
 i. Latin, however, often has the indicative where w«i iuigh^ 
 expect the potential subjimctive. So regulllrly with possum^ dehedy 
 etc., with the passive periphrastic conjugation, and with est and 
 
 ?redicate adjectives such as aegtet«m, melius, satis, facile, etc.; as, 
 might have said more: Pl^ra poteram dioere. It io&idd be 
 tedious to teU everything: Lihnguth est omnia n&rr&re. (See 
 section 64, i.) . i - " » i * 
 
 (b) Rhetorical appeals, asking whether something is conceiv- 
 able ; as, Whocould doubt f Qnls dnbitet ? Who wmUd ever have 
 thought? Unim-nmquamarhitrkritnr? 
 
 ' 187." Notice the values of tvould in the following sent^oqes, and 
 the different ways of translating it into Latin ! 
 
 • <\n), I thought he wquld come: Arbltr&lmr earn venliuriiin 
 
 ^ 
 
PART y.~STNTAX AND COMPOSmON. 801 
 
 (b) laMwhat theywaulddo: Bo»»vIqald faturl e.^nt (36) 
 U^ltZtr'''''^' ^^""^ l^aec f«ee,e or X.^^vtt .^ 
 
 - (d) If he were alive he wcndd he pre^nt : si vl voret, «de wet (61) 
 (63? ^^^ "^"^ ^ *^^' ^ ^^^ '^ •• SI haeo faclft., veniat 
 , (/) TTomW that he woyld come / Utinam veniat i (136) 
 (g) Would that he had come/ PtlMP» venl«et i (135X ' 
 "^ ^^BwoM^ better to do ^igpti» e.t haec facere (136, 
 
 ^Jt) mowauld ve^^ure todomsr^u^^^ faeere aadeat? 
 
 • (i) I tm« a/ratd he would corn^: Verebar »6 venlret (138) 
 
 » ^ EXERCISE 18. 
 
 ■ , ' ■ . it. • • ' •■ 
 
 _ 1. Letusnotfeartheenemy^however numerous, nor return to 
 
 • the camjt,, unless victorious. 2. Would that C^sar had not been 
 unwilling to send two legions to the assistence of Labieniis. 3 
 Who can endure that his freedom should be taken away from him ? 
 4 Remember the former valor of the Helvetians, soldiers. 5. Let 
 the Gauls send envoys to Caesar to seek peace. 6. Do not let sUp 
 this opportunity of waging warC 7. What was I to say ? It would 
 
 ^ have been ^sy to make many promises; but who would have 
 believed me ? .a^ I should like you to inform me at once of his 
 departure. »• Would that C»sar would aUow us to march through 
 the projnnce 10. Advance towards the shore and do not betray 
 the eagle to the enemy. 11. He would not announce to the soldie,; 
 when.he would set out. 12. One would have supposed that the 
 envoys would not return the next day. 
 
 -7 - B- (Geernr, Bk. IV. S5-S8.) . » 
 
 fliihf^^'f w' ^f «^«'^d t»»«^t*««k of the enemy; do not teke to 
 
 -fch^otner states not omit to send hostages, 4. I should not like 
 

 • 
 
 • 
 
 
 r 
 
 ■■ '-■- t.., \. ■ -.. 
 
 .■. .• ■. 
 
 * 
 
 • „ . 
 
 
 \»«-- 
 
 
 : ' , ^■ 
 
 * 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 ■ H7. 
 
 * ' * ' ■-, 
 
 . . .. : '.i,a^. ■-.':■ 
 
 m 
 
 y 
 
 *«^ . 
 
 ■" .-,■ 
 
 
 '■ - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 • 
 
 « 
 
 ■ ' '^ . 
 
 '■' - :■ '^si-. ;■ ■ "■' ■ 
 - '■ „ 
 
 
 
 ;«': 
 
 
 "^V^ .- ■ ■ 
 
 r> 
 
 
 
 i ;;', ' 
 
 
 -Sift» 
 
 
 A ■ f- .. . V,' ■ ^ i" 
 
 % 
 
 % ■ 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 /-[■r 
 
 
 
 . Y - ■ ■ - _ V ■ 
 
 ■<■ ♦ 
 
 . 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 «, 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ■ ■ i.wi--- 
 
 
 y ; ■ 
 
 * • 
 
 1 «• - 
 
 /.' ■- 
 
 ■i;l'-^-::: 
 
 r 
 t 
 
 
 - *■ 
 
 
 1 
 
 « 
 
 < 
 
 *■- 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 ^ 
 
y 
 
 
 A^ 
 
 IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 "^ 
 
 ?i> 
 
 *■»•■ '■■ 
 
 • -.''■^- 
 
 1.0 v^^^ 
 
 t 
 
 I.I 
 
 US 
 
 Itt lU i2.2 
 
 Wwu 
 
 // 
 
 ^^. 
 
 i 
 
 1, 
 
 
 ^■«' 
 
 #5^ 
 
 -^; 
 
 ^ 
 
 1» -S^fSS'W 
 
 # 
 
 III ^^ II ^s 
 
 1 1-<^ 
 
 ■^■^- :'■■■■ 
 
 > 
 
 4-— 
 
 
 
 — 6" - 
 
 
 ♦ • 
 
 ». 
 
 • # 
 
 
 
 y 
 
 <:<:■ 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Somces 
 
 Coiporation 
 
 c ■, 
 
 n WIST MAM STRHT 
 
 WntTli.N.Y. USM 
 
 (7U)47a-4»0l 
 

 
 ^ 
 
 r 
 
 vt^ 
 
 r. 
 
 > *•■: 
 
 ■"^^ 
 
 .#-■*■■■ 
 
 ' * 
 
 * 
 
 .«"•- > 
 
 v.. , 
 
 « _ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^.. 
 
 ■»*■ 
 /-** 
 
 • f 
 
362 
 
 ^RIMABY LATIN BOOK.' 
 
 to tise the Tnarshes «s a pkoe of refuge. 6. One would have 
 thought that the Senate would decree a thanksgiving. 6. Lay 
 down your arms if you do not want to be put to death. 7. It would 
 not have been easy to escape tms danger. 8. After routing the 
 enemy, let us bum all the buildings. 9. Where are we to betake 
 ourselves {nds) ? Are we to conceal ourselves in the marshes 7 
 
 f G, {Ccemr, Bk IV. gl). ' 
 
 ' 1. Let us send the envoys home and set out ^ soon as possible 
 with all the fleet. 2. Land from the vessel, solfUers, and find out 
 these matters. 3. Would that an opportunity might be giv6i^of 
 making the attempt. 4. What was he to do ? Was he to report to 
 Gassar that he dared not return home ? 5. I should have preferred 
 that he had visited these states. 6. Ijet all the states give hos- 
 tages and be faithful to the-Boman people. 7. Return to thetfhip, 
 Yolusenus, do not entrust yourself to the Britons. 8. Who would 
 embrace an i^Iiance with Csesar ? It would be better to make trial 
 of war. 9. Thinking they would discover his design, he would not 
 announce what states he would visit. x^i m- 
 
 ^ 
 
 f^i... 
 
 •■ t. 
 
 ii' 
 
 f 
 
 
 »1 . - =w * 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 Si" * \ • « 
 
old hare 
 6. Lbj 
 It would 
 iting the 
 o betake 
 hes ? 
 
 possible 
 find out 
 givei^of 
 report to 
 preferred 
 give hos- 
 theiihipf 
 ho would 
 ake trial 
 rould not 
 
 
 t» » 
 
 'H-, 
 
 I 
 
 PABT V.-^YNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 ■ ^ ■ .■-.;■■■""-. • ' ; -' ' . . 
 
 CHAPTER XtX. 
 
 Vbbbs of FjtAMWG^VJMMS OF Quin AND Quominui. 
 
 138 After verba of fearing and such phriisea as metus esL 
 
 perxculum eat, thu and le%t a.re translated by ne,^ and that not 
 
 by ut, with the present subjunctive after the primary tenses. 
 
 thvmperfectsubjunctive after the secondary tenses ; as, 
 
 -^J&S:!^ '^^^'^(o'lfearlesthedcihis)': Vereor 
 
 ^ i^ that he wainotdo this: Vereor ut hoc faoUt 
 
 •rat nft olroamvenlrontur. "«^««««««i 
 
 ^^or ut, nirUhiiB very commonly u«ed, regularly «a after n5,i 
 
 fKaJr,!®'*^ °/ '^""* may be used as modarverbs, foUowed bv 
 ^ I^r2 ^7^"'^' * corresponding infinitive in the En^ish^; 
 »8, i Jear to do this : Fereor haeo faoere. 
 
 139. y4>rb8 and phrases ,of hindering and' oJ^^tni^, and 
 ■ negative verbs and phraserof doubtinff, failure or omission, 
 are regularly followed by the subjunctive with the intro- 
 ductory particles quin, guOminus or n5,» according to the 
 following rules ; the present subjunctive being used after the 
 primary tenses, the imperfect subjunctive after the secondary 
 tenses.' . ' , j 
 
 N.K—Quin is used only after negatives or virtual n^a^ive^ * 
 
 ^i?V ?'*?°! ^fj^"^: «•«•. diterreO, impediO, retitL, and also 
 ree^, I object (if negatived), take ^Uhni^u, oi mtfJv *or% nSt 
 negatived) qxUiminus orn«; as, . ^ / 
 
 ^ I^ did not object to coming: Ndii i^sAbant qain "(or 
 qaomlnns) veiilr«nft. h««" v"*^ 
 
 , They hinder the Mui from bringing in com: Aedads d«- 
 terf nt ^nominn. (or ni,) fr umentam cdnferant. • 
 
 that they may not fr^iri^^^Iijr^EnXi. unS*--' r.^i^.?»1^_ tA4..«d«i i„ oni»r 
 
 uaderinr. 
 
 tAot IA4»j/ may not bnnff in «torn. "Enrilih uniikm I^ti^'tM^^X^^ J^iT"?"* "* '"^**^ 
 -- the result, not the |.uW,^th« hfSin" ""' **"**■ *° '*"'' •^ P«»«ntlon 
 
 
 to tk» ^Uph gwmMi fovniMil i 
 
 ■ ^>jy|* ggg^^a^^JgtSiobJaBoUy» oi^ 
 

 1 
 
 "S, 
 
 PRIMARY hAXlX BOOK. 
 
 • i. ProfUbed reffularlj fakes the aoQuaatiye and infinitive (section 
 22, 1.x while nd^ reeHsd also may take the infinitive. 
 
 (h) Negative verbs and phrases of cUnibting, e.g., n9n duim, nOn 
 m avimm^ tak« dptin ; as, ' ^ 
 
 There was no ^M)t thttt they had (or of their hating) very great 
 power: Ndn erat dablain qain .plarlmam poasent. 
 
 1. J[[>u5ifd, J AeMto^, r^^afly takes the infinitive. 
 
 ((5) Negative verbs and phrases of faUnre or omuMon, such as 
 nihil praetermim (I, leave nothing undone), ha^id midtum abrnwi 
 (I am within a little^ facere niinjiotmm (I eaniwt but or J cannot 
 help), take quin ; as, ■ 
 
 And a mepieion i» fiol wanting that he committed mieide: 
 ^^a** ***** ■'**P'®*® «"'«» Ipse «Ibl mortem oftnselYerlt. 
 
 They' let no time go by without /stirring up the etates : NiUlam 
 tfinpns intermbAnant^qaln olvtt&tfta aolll«lt4rent. 
 
 i For quin after such expressions as n9nid eiH: see section 33, ii 
 
 / 
 
 EXERCISE 19. 
 ' A. 
 
 1. I fear the soldiers wiUfinot be able to take the city by storm. 
 2. Who could doubt that the Romans are going to take our freedom 
 »w*y from us ? 3, They promised to raise no objections to being 
 for ever «nd6r the sway o<( the enemy. 4. There was great danger 
 of the enemy's crossing the river and maki]pg an attack udflKie 
 camp. 6. Geesar could not but suspect that they were ^Km to 
 renew the war. 6. They believed that Cissar bylliis influe«ce could 
 hinder the Germans from being brought across the Rhine. 7; He 
 feared that the«oldiers would not be able to ero«i(i the bridge and 
 attack the enemy Ini the rear. 8. There was no, dou^t that the 
 JEdui were hesitating to declare war. 9. Several vdasels were pre- 
 vented by the storms from being able to reach the same port. 10. 
 There is iio one who. does not know th^t he feared to disembark. 
 11^ We fear that the soldiers will be unwilling to defend the oamfi»» 
 12. Not even at the, conference could the Gauls be deterred from 
 hurling weapons ajb our men. 
 
 \ B. (Caear, Bk. r. 1, M) 
 
 I. The Gauls feared that C»sar would leave hither Gaul for the 
 winter quarters of the army. «. He prevented the Germans from 
 
 There was no doubt tltfiiF! 
 
 '•^ 
 
 " ^ 
 
 '\m^i^^' 
 
, PART y.--OTNTAX ^ND itXMMOSITION. MS 
 
 they used lower shipa inthat sea. 4. The soldiers did not object to 
 repairing the old vesseR 6. Oaeaar was wifckhi a Uttle of having the 
 ships launched. 6. There is danger tha^ the Gauls wiU not assemble 
 nor obey Cnear's ai^Jiority. 7. Csesar did not hentate to place a 
 lieutenant in charge of this business. 8. There was no one but 
 knew that-CiBsar was in command of the legion. 9. TEey promised 
 to leave nothing undone to make amends to C«8ar. 
 
 a (Cceaar.Bk. IV. ££.), ' 
 
 1. Thinking that they were afraid of being, left behmd, he 
 ordered them to come to him. 2. He could not help preferring 
 Britain to these trifling matters. 3. He will be prevented from 
 havmg an opportunity of taking the legion across. 4. There 
 «danger of this happening. 5. The Morini did not object to 
 bnngmg a hirger number of hostages. 6. No one <|pubted that 
 they were staying in Britain for the purpc^ of guarding the harbor. 
 7. They fear they will not be able to carry on war. 8. He did nflt 
 hesitate to promise to take them under his protection. 9. Thfere 
 is no one who dpes not think that he will assign these vessehi to 
 the cavalry. ' . • 
 
 •■''*■%*»- 
 ■«,■€•• 
 
 A. . -i :: 
 
 i,.. 
 
 
 fHk--::X. . <»' 
 
 
 V ■•■...: 'iX >. 
 
 
 ^"' *■ 
 
 > ■• 
 
 
 .^^Z'. 
 
 '■tv::-s 
 
 « 
 
366 
 
 •it 
 
 "A 
 
 PBIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 ^>^ 
 
 CHAPTER XXv 
 
 DUTT, WiBCBSSITY, FOSSIBILITT, PsBMUBIOK. 
 
 140. DoTT. or OBLiOATiON is expressed most frequeDliy by. 
 iki%geTwndvoe with ««m, also by debeo and oportet. 
 
 (a) For the gerundive with esse (the passive periphrastic eonja- 
 ' gation) see section 120. 
 
 . (6) Dih«0 takes the present infinitive, and the impenionil verb 
 oportetUkea the accusative and the present infinitive ;* as, 
 
 Ccuar ou^ to come to me: OaesHr ad mi venire dAl^et, or 
 Caeaarem »d mA venire oportet. ^ 
 
 i, The infinitive remaini in the j>rMent tense with all forms of, 
 ^ these verbs, while the verbs themselves change aocordLing tOLthe 
 
 <»me of th«^tion ; as, Oasar ought to have come .*. Oae'sar vjpi^re 
 ' diMbat, OT Oaesarem venire oportnit. Comt ought to come 
 
 to-morrow : daesar venire or&s dfibd^blt, or Oae«arem~ venire 
 
 «r&a oport^blt. / 
 
 , 141.? Necessity is expressed most frequently by the gerun- 
 
 diva toith esse^ also by necease e8t. i, 
 
 (a; For the gerundive with esse (the passive periphrastic conju- 
 gation) see section 120. 
 
 (b) Necesse est ia used with the dative and the present infinitive 
 to- express what is inevUaMe rather than what is obligatory or bind- 
 ing ; as, * 
 
 All men must die: Omnlbna neoesM est morl 
 
 142. Possibility or abIlit^ is expressed by po88Wm and 
 the present infinitive ; as, * . * ' ' /^ 
 
 The river can he crossed : Flftmen tr&nslrl potest. 
 
 They were uncMe to defend themsdves : Sp d6f endere n6n 
 poterant. *.'■* : ' ; :;■ :" ' ' ■ ■ 
 
 It is impossible for us to cross : "rraastre n5n possnmns. 
 
 We could (or might) have been useful friends: Poteramos esse 
 atUAs amiol. 
 
 143. Permission is expressed by /«c«r with the dative and 
 the present infinitive;^ as, / v 
 
 1. Ths I pmtson*. Ywbt lioet, n»e»»t$ «H wad oporttt may >lto tsks tlw «iBliino. 
 
 A. SO» i ppetsoiMu yww tymt, n»M»t$ «n tata oporut may wto ulkn th 
 U f f V ss, Vmmuuht to xta thitr w—gnwt as opwf t . Wlta mtd^ ^ 
 
 1 
 
 .'^W-'' 
 
 /• 
 
 jQDotire often hM ut. 
 
 X 
 
PART V.r-SYNTAX AN» OWIPOSITION. 
 
 367 
 
 Tou may remain: . Lle«t ▼6Ua reinan«re. i 
 They were not aUowed to depart: DIseMer^ llUa aAn, Ue«1m«. 
 i. A predicate noun or adjective referring to 'the datiie agreed 
 with It m case ; as» We may be free : N5bb licet erne llberla. 
 
 
 DIzI m€ statlm redl- 
 
 H«eo f£elt n6 
 
 ^L».^^..*^****®® *^® values of ahould in the following sidqtences and 
 (be different ways of translating it into Latin : 
 
 (g) I aaid I tAmdd return at once: 
 V taram esse (15, c). 
 
 (6) He did this ao that I ahoul(f not return : 
 redlrem (24). 
 
 (c) If he had done Oiia I tlhwdd not be returning: SI haee 
 fiolsset n6n redlrem (61^ 
 
 id)Ifhe ahould do this (or Should he do this), I ^wdd return 
 at once: SI baeo jTaolat, statlm redeam (63). i 
 
 (e) It M bed that He ahould return at once: Optimum est* 
 earn statim redire (110, i.). . ., 
 
 '(/) You ahotdd return at once: Statlm vdbls est redenn- 
 dnm (120). /^ 
 
 (g) I ahotdd like you to, return: Vellm reflefts (136^*^»). - - ^ 
 
 "* W ^ feared that I ahouid not return: Veritas sam nt (or 
 ^«Bon) redlrem (138). v ,; * 
 
 (t) Be waited until they ahould retjAm : Dam redlrent exsnee- 
 
 •ti^vit (165, 6). , "^ 
 
 0') -^« promiaed great rewards to anyone that ahmdd return t 
 81 qals redUsset, m&irn» praemla pQllloitas est (177). 
 
 "* ■ ' " ■"■■ -'j,\- .' '- . ' 
 
 ^ ^ V EXERCISE 20. 
 
 » . 
 1. You should have replied that you were unable to leave the 
 «ity. 2. The soldiers had to advance into the waves. 3. He 
 -answered that Gaul ought to be free, and that he could not allow 
 the Germans to cross the Rhine. 4. They asked to be allowed to 
 march through the province. 5. We must not wait longer ; we 
 must set out for home at once. 6. OsBsar should have ordered that 
 state to furnish hostages. 7. He was afraid this would ineviUbly 
 happen. 8. They could not be persuaded to stay longer. 9. The 
 Gauls may be uowards if they wish, but 
 
 
V. 
 
 ««i-»£, 
 
 ^ mm ART LAtnr BOOK. 
 
 the camp yesterday, so far u I waa oonoeni^ 12. Our fi«Ida 
 ought not to have been laid waste in sight el the enemy, Mid 
 our towns taken by storm. 
 
 B, {Ccuar, BU. r. 3, 4.) ■; I 
 
 1. The oommoc people ought not to be compelled to revolt from 
 the Romans. 2. He cannot point out what is going on among the 
 Bemi. 3. He could easily have kept his kinsmen true to their 
 allegiance. 4. If they have revolted, we must begin to collect . 
 forces of infantry and cavalry. 6. They feared they should not 
 be allowed to take thought for themselves. 6. All had to conceal 
 themselves in the woods. 7. It is very important that Ctesar 
 should be able to win over the Treveri. 8. Caesar ought to have 
 urged them to come to him in the camp. 9. He thought everything 
 should have been made ready. * 
 
 t , a (CiMor, Bk. IV. gS.) 
 
 1. Thinking that it was quite impossible for them to land, they 
 weighed anchor. 2. The ship ought to be anchored in order that 
 the trpops may land. 3. Ceeaar hadto advance a mile and wait 
 till the fourth watch in the further harbor. 4. He could not get 
 suitable weather for embarking. 5. He pointed out that after the 
 troops had been drawn up on the shore, the lieutenants must 
 execute everything promptly. 6. They can hurl their weapons 
 from the hill into the sea. 7. If you wish to find out what is the 
 character of the mountains, you may land in a suitable spot 8. 
 He points out that the cavalry should have set saU tod followed 
 Mm, 0. He will point out whai they have been allowed to do. 
 
 
PART Vv— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 ^ 
 
 369 
 
 ♦ . CHAPTER XXI. r*^ 
 
 > Causal Sentence? — Uses of Cum. > 
 
 ^35' j.^*"**^ sentences are introduced hyquod,or (leas frequently) 
 quui, because, for the reason that; qtumiam, seeing that: am 
 nwx, as; and qui, »mqe he. n/ "««"^ "«w, 
 
 }.' J<^' ?"* with the causal subjunctive see section 171: 
 . }}.' 5P' «**?«» meaning the fact that, see section 198. 
 r.^A?x, "?®*. ^*f ^'''"*8 attendant circumstances) regularly 
 
 S^«f„ Pn''???^ ^^*"'^' «^*^ ^'^*^^^ (»« emphisisdSg the 
 reason) generally follow. * ^ 
 
 *► „ 
 
 ' 146. Quod, quia and ^uontam take the indicative to ex- 
 J)re8s a reason advanced by the writer or speaker himself ; as, 
 
 Se set out for Mlyriciim, because he wished to become acouamtMt 
 irnth that district: In Illyrioum profeota. e.t. quod e&> re«i- 
 ones odgndsoere vol€bat. 
 
 i. Frequently a sort of antecedent (such as propterea, eO, hde, ed 
 dg causa) is found preparing the way for the quod clause. 
 
 147. Quod^ quia and quoniam take the subjunctive to quote 
 some other person's reason ;^ as, * 
 
 Tfiey begged him to lend them aid, because (as they saiMUiev wertt 
 hard pressed by th^ Suebi : Sr&bant at sibl auxUlnm f«fcb?auod 
 irraviter ab Sndbla premerentnr. ^W^ ^ 
 
 Arigtidea was banished from his country on the ground that he vxu 
 xmreasonably just : Arl«tld«* expalsiii est patrlA quod praetM 
 modam J ustas eiset. - 
 
 i. It should not be supposed that the iubjunctive casts doubt 
 upon the reason ^ven, or refuses to vouch for its accuracy It 
 «mpljy quotes without expressing any opinion, and is, in fact. 
 1^^\ **^ J *^® subjunctive of virtual indirect narration (section 
 177;. Quod with the indicative tells why something was said or 
 done ; quod with the subjunctive tells on iohat grounds somsthinff 
 was said or done. » -i- """• 
 
 ii. Quod is very commonly used after verbs of oMusation, praise, 
 eomjOamt, tfuinks, joy, anger, and the like ; the indicative and s^ 
 lunotive being used according to the distinction just drawn : as^ 
 I thank you for setting me free :'Tlhl grAtlAs a«4. qaod mi 
 
 84 
 
 1. Or «ven to quote one's own previously e]a>re««d reMK». 
 
i I 
 
 f 
 
 # 
 
 370 
 
 'm. 
 
 FBIMAR7 LATIN BOOK. 
 
 llber&vl»ti. aocrate» was ace^uted of corrupting the ymHh : Soora- 
 t6«aoou«&tu« est quod oorrumporet Juventutem. ^ 
 
 m. N^ quod or ndn quo is used with the subjunctive of a 
 
 ^ ISZLr^^^!? ^"^^ *^ ^ rejected.=noe hecavJiJT^!gU 
 
 iv. For the illogical quod diceret see section 177, ii. 
 
 I 148. Cum, with causal force, meaning since or oa, takes 
 :^e sttbjunctive 'f^ as, 
 
 fl^nw «Jey c<mW no* defend themsehesy they sent envoys to Cassar : 
 Cum .6 fldfendere n5ii posgent. 16g&t5> ad Gaesarem mlttnnt. 
 
 149. Cum, meaning whenever, in clauseis denoting indefi- 
 nitely recurring action, takes the* indicaiive. ■ 
 
 ■"Si 
 
 When, as is usually the case, the cum clause denotes an action 
 prec^ that of the main verb, the perfect and pluperfect tenses 
 ^^^rS^f ""tI? ** 4«"«*«« r^^ is simultan^uTthe present 
 S^<iti?l "^" "* regularly present or im^perfect 
 
 ^ IFfcenewr wtr men aitack, the enemy fcdl hack: Cam nostrl 
 
 ^ Whenever there is need, the enemy fall back: Cum u.u. est, 
 ]iost«a pedem r^ferunt. ' 
 
 ^ Wh^ver our men attacked, the enemy fell back: Vnm nostrt 
 Impetum feoer^nt. host^s pedem referebant. 
 
 i. With the same force and with the same construction are used 
 ^iao quotigns, quot^nscumqxie, ut, ubi, si quandd. ^ , 
 ^ 150. Cum, meaning when, referring to present or to future 
 time, takes the indicative / as, 
 
 ' When T find put, I shall inform you ; Cum oogndverd. faolam 
 te oertiorem. 
 
 (siti^^eiT"" ^^ ^^^^ ^'^^^ "^ ""^ ^**^ ''^'^ *® ^ •* 
 
 161. Cum, meaning when (or while), referring td past time, 
 regularly takes the subjunctive; the imperfect of contempo^ 
 raneous. adfcion, the pluperfect of antecedent action ; as, 
 
 When iihey were approaching BHtain, a storm arose : Cum Bri: 
 tanniae approplnqu&rent, tempest&s ooorta eat 
 
 1 . For (7WH , with coi 
 
 \tifs nttnouffhi fm sflulluu' OS, K^ 
 
 ^i. i «l»n H i m wirtiMmlM 
 
u^.' SoorA- 
 
 [motive of a 
 <w one might 
 lal or virtual 
 
 r aSj takes 
 
 /« to Ccesar : 
 m nilttant. 
 
 ing indefi- 
 
 B an action 
 rfect tenses 
 the present 
 r imperfect 
 
 am nostrl 
 
 US11S est» 
 
 am noBtrl 
 
 mare used 
 
 .»■■. 
 
 ' to future 
 
 >dt faolam 
 as with a 
 
 [Mtst time, 
 :ontempo- 
 as, 
 
 [Jam Brl- 
 
 06, «. = 
 
 PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSmON. 371 
 
 «n!^ '^ />«»'c«it«i Xhi^, he sent reinforcemmtl : Quod cam 
 anlmadvertl««et, «absldta Babmlttlt. , 
 
 «, /"^* ^**^* cww with the subjunctive denoterthe ctm«wMtonc« 
 
 ::u::itrth;7.^i^^^^ ^'^ "-^ exa.p,e, combiS^Z 
 
 reS^rif^ except^ns to this use of m«i with, the subjunbtivo 
 
 thei5l^':iv:rs2Sn1r9^^^ «^P'«^ »>y «-* «»d 
 
 1 Jlv Sr-!?'^^.?*^*?!'^ «"'^ *>' coincidence of time regu- 
 hTm ^^J^^^'^'^i*'''?' ""^^^ ^^^"^ the m;incipal clause conSs 
 Jri» r.S^T'''ww.*^P'^"'*°" ; as, fl^n Uey remain ^? 
 (or »» rematntwgr mmO, thex^ appnyte : Cam qalewant. p^oilnt 
 
 llmSr^*""" *" Oalllam v6nlt. la e4 dvl^te daaeera^ 
 
 iii. p»tm, meaning «j/ien or «7A«n *Mdderai/,in a clause which ia 
 
 ^^^5^..**^^^"°'^?*^ ^^«' ^*'^^^ the indli^tive. S principS 
 
 clause often has jam, vix or nOndum; as, 2%ey were^rF^y^. 
 
 pan^ig to depart, i^^n mddeiUy it was ankou^ed^t ?S Zd 
 
 |em c«pW; Jam dLcedere paralmat, cam repeaTe nL«- 
 
 fttam est urbem oaptam esse. f «««*- 
 
 IV. ^t^p%»Mm, oa «oon a», takes the indicative 
 . y. Uum . twm, meaning both . . . and, has regularly jio 
 influence on the mood of the verb. . *^s««»rjijr jio 
 
 ..:-■• - < ■ ..-"'■■■'•- 
 
 ^- ., ■.,■■.. -^ - 
 
 . ' EXERCISE 21.' ' ^ 
 
 1. Caesar complained ^gpe the enemy were laying waste the ' 
 temtones of the^dui. ^ When the ships were drawing near 
 the island, so great a tempest arose that they could with difficulty 
 hold then: course. 3. As they th%ht the ^nemy was within the 
 gates, they rushed out of the town. 4. Ctesar feared an ambush 
 Wuse he had not yet leamo^ why they were trithdrawing. 5 
 Whenever our men began to return to the place from which they 
 had started, they were surrounded by the enemy. 6. They asked 
 to be allowed to remain in our camp, on the ground that they- 
 dreaded the vengeance of the Gauls. 7. Since this is the case, I 
 
 Sntos hsbSJirll! ^ """ "**"~^' "^ TOitrl 1,6« «mpTlu. oclft^ _, 
 
372 
 
 y^ 
 
 
 # 
 
 
 11 
 
 PEIirAHY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 . shall ffet out at once. 8. The soldiers were proceediig with the 
 greatest cautionthrough the territories of the enemy, when the 
 Helvetians suddenly attackeid them in. the rear. <?. When our 
 meA saw that the camp was being fill^ with gr^at numbers of the 
 
 - enemy, .they immediately took to flight. 10. When Crosar returns 
 .to the camp, he will find the ships repaired. 11. At the time 
 .when.the enemy were prepariilgjo storfia the , camp, Csesar was 
 leading the soldiers across the bridge. 12.' When Csesar discovered 
 what had been done, he reproved' the rashness ojf the sol(!iers 
 .because they had not halted on the signal feeing giv«»/ ' * 
 
 ._ . .^^i^ L ._„^, , B. {Caesar, BJk. V. S, 6.) *-^ _ . _ 
 
 J; 1. They begged to be left in Gaul, on the ground that they were 
 not iis^ to sai^ng. 2. Since he has discovered that the vessel is 
 not ready for jailing, he has determined to return. 3. When Ceesar 
 finds out what is the -design of Dumnorix, he wUl send him as a 
 
 r 'hostage V) the' mainland. 4. Caesar, whenever heis absent from 
 : the mainhind, fears an uprising, not because the ^Edui ar6 jeager for 
 
 . .a change of government, but because Gaul has been stripped of aU 
 . it» nobles. 5. Whenever the ships set out, they are driven back 
 
 . by the, storm. 6. The ^Jdui were on the point of setting out ^ 
 when Cffisar returned. 7. Csesar is taking the leading men over t6 
 Britain, because he is afraid to leave them in Gaul. '8. When this 
 
 . was reported to Dumnorix, he perceived that aU hope Had vanished. 
 9. He accused Dumnorix of being eager for supreme power. ^ 
 
 a (Ccemr, M. IV. SA:) 
 
 1. When they were fighting with the enemy they leap^ down" 
 into the waves. 2. Since they are tlhacquainted with thsToimtry ' 
 they cannot advance boldly. 3, There will be very great difficulty 
 
 • because our men are "unaccustomed to fight in the waves. 4. As 
 soon as they got a footing in the waves, they began to huri their ' 
 weapons. 5. When they have discovered the Romans' plans, 
 they ^ follow them up with all their forces. 6. As they wpre ^ 
 weighed down/with their armor, they could not get a footing in the 
 waves. 7. Our men were landing from the ship, when suddenly 
 weapons were hurlQ(^ at them. 8. He accused them of not show--' 
 
 ,ing the same 'zeal in this battle. 9. Whenever our , men ^ped 
 
 ' down, the enemy would spur on their horHfta. 
 
 - ♦ . 
 
 "«i 
 
 y 
 
 
 -/■ *■ . 
 
 \ ' 
 
 v- 
 
t . 
 
 ■ '\ 
 
 \ 
 
 PART Y.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION» 373 
 
 Y 
 
 <^HAPTER X'XII. ^' 
 
 ■■■-./•- 
 
 'Temporal Clauses.* 
 
 
 S?V'~- 
 
 ~^M53. When, after, as soof» as,» mtroducing causes of 
 I time, are translated Dj 
 
 , (a) Cum or cumprlmum (sections 149-151)/ - , ' ^ 
 (6) PoiOquam, posmqimm, ut.ubi, sinml de (or atquef^th 
 ^^He indici«ive, in narrative; chiefly. t^p perfect indicative ; as, 
 
 ^ft«r Catsar vmtl^d that jpla^e^ hetktermined to cross the Rhin^'.: 
 Eo portquam Caeiiar pervenlt. Bhenun, translr* con.tltult. 
 
 _ Wh^n he heard that, he removed to Corcyra : Id ut audlvlt C 
 eyram d^mlgrrATlt. x * 
 
 WTien they ivere informBdjof his approach, thty sent envoys : Ubt 
 dfi ^ as adventa oertlores f^tl «ant, Ug&to» my;tiint. 
 
 As soon a^they perceived thvi, theyjbegan to take up arm: Quae 
 slmal atqne oonspexerant, arma oaper« coepernnt. '^ - 
 
 i. To indicate indefinitely recurring action the perfkt and pRi. 
 perfect tenses would be used as^ith cum (section. 149). 
 
 u. With postquam the pluperfect indicative is usedwhena defil 
 Jite mterval is specified Tas, Me was kUled in the ninth year aftei 
 he came to Spam: Ndno ann^Jostquam In Hlsp&nlam Vfenerati 
 ^oolsag est. * r. -^ ' •! 
 
 iii^Pos^gitaman^d pqste^qmmare often written as two words, ij 
 which case po^ is sometimes treated as a preposition : somelimesi 
 ^fMom IS usedlFor/wse^taw. . *- f »^ 
 
 •153» While, meaning within- the time that, is expressed by 
 dum with the ^ggenl indicative : as, * 
 
 ^ ^^^ *f^ii^i>ingdone^ithe Tfeveri had gathered large forces i 
 ©urn liaeo geruntar, treVerl m&gnas capias ooe^rant. . 
 
 \ i. This idea may alsO be expressed by cum and the imperfect 
 subjunctive (section 151), ^peciaUy if there .be any idea of con- 
 trast (section 161, fn.). ' 
 
 154. While, meanijig as long as, is ;expressed„ by rfitw^ 
 quoad or quamdiw^ with the indicative. 
 
 178^'if **' ** '^°' **** *""** °' ^*"* indioAtive see Chapter XXVIL, e^iaUy aectioi} 
 
 .5s3H*?: introducecTby when, whUe, after, an aiao often expreaaed In Latin b» 
 UT i cipi al p a r aa e a. ero e ci ft llv in 4he ablative^ MoluU^^iae ohfcptere VI. and VII.X =^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 8. DoMc also ia uaed in poetry tad late proae, often with the aubjunctii^e. 
 
 k. 
 
 ^^ 
 
 jy 
 
274 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOR 
 
 / 
 
 I K 
 
 .-I;. 
 
 rot* shM stvdy as long as you wish : Dl*o6.. qu»mdl "Vol*.; " 
 
 rw.lw°' <^wm, meaning so long as, provided that, where the tem 
 po]^ force no longer appears, see section 67. ^"'" 
 
 ■^ 155. IjNTiL, introducing clauses of time, is «pressed by 
 
 aum or quoad.^ , . ^^ ^ 
 
 * ... .*■■ 
 
 {a) To denote mere limit of timeml^idiea^ is used, 
 chiefly with g-Moarf/ as, * ', 
 
 , (0-To denote expectation, purpose or enrf tn t;t«i,, thdprec- 
 
 enfr or imperfect subjunctive is used, generally with c^J; as, 
 
 ' ^^t^d until ths other ships shordd assemble: Du«ifiiiiau»e 
 
 i. ^orno* mtti, meaning nof6e/b«, see section 156 iii v " .. 
 
 ^^«w^ * >K^' *^*'^",^ '•^^«"^"e <^ *h^ future may be^Siarded as 
 denotmg either mere limit of time or expectation. ^''^^'^^ *« 
 
 _ 156. Before is expressed by anteq.iam or priusquam. 
 
 (o) To denote mere priority or limit of time the indicative 
 IS used; as,^ 
 
 Bhftnam pervdnerunt. «in»m Ml flumen 
 
 -.>5)To denote purpi^e ot anticipation or premnHori i^^^ 
 presentor im^^fect subjunctive is used ; as, ._,_ .___ .1 _ 
 ^'^BefoTeiheyommreco^rfrom their panic, he led his army across i 
 
 "V 
 
 /^ 
 
PARt V.^-SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION/ 
 
 375 
 
 i. Antequam and jpiusquam are often written as two words, 
 especially after a negative. 
 
 ii. Priusquqm is commoner than cmteqttamy esp^aaliy witii the 
 subjunctiye. v ' 
 
 iii. To express riot before, meaning not untU, both indicative and 
 subjunctive are found, but after secondly tenses the perfect 
 indicative is preferred. ^ ., 
 
 iv. When the pluperfect subjunctive is found after jmtM^uom or 
 (mtequamy it is regularly either in indirect narration (actual or 
 virtual) for the perfect or future'perfect indicative of the direct, or 
 it is due to attraction. (See section 177, i.) 
 
 EXERCISE 22. 
 
 1. The Oauls decided they ot^K not to wait until Geesar reached 
 their borden^. 2. Before be should paake an attack on the enemy, 
 he sent forward a scoui to find out;what their numbers were. 3. 
 While these things were going on, the envoys who were in the 
 «temp took their departure. 4. As soon as they recovered from 
 their panic, they sent envoys to Caesar to sue for peace. 6. For 
 that reason I shall keep silent as long as I can. 6. -He did not set 
 out for the army until he learned that the enemy were ^hering 
 their forces tb one place. 7. Before he reached the hi^r, the 
 cavaby had set sail. 8. We shall hold our ground unt^ 
 Csasar sends reinforcements. 9. After tAey had been informed of 
 our advftpice, they withdrew into their remotest forests. 10. 
 While our men were'gMting the ships ready, it was reported that 
 the camp had been attacked. 11. Before these could learn of his 
 departure, he crossed the rit^er. 12. Theienemy resisted bravely 
 until they s%9^;6urcavalry approaching in the rear. 
 
 » * A {Cofsar, Bk. V, 7,8.) 
 
 1.x After Bumnorix had taken liis departure for home, Ceesar 
 ordered the cavalry to bring him back. 2. So long as he disre- 
 gards Ceesar's authority, I shall take measures to prevent him from 
 -doing harm to the state. 3. While this was going on in Britain, 
 two thousand cavaby were guarding the harbor. 4. We shall not 
 embark until supplies are provided. 6. Before Caesar reached 
 iTiie^lesmed t^ist hn^fe roroei nan MStimnigitr^li. Thej 
 held on their course until the wind fell at sunset. 7. As often m 
 
 #"' 
 
876 
 
 
 PBIMAKr LAMN BOOK. 
 
 ^™toSl7 J"'"" ■°'*''"' "■«'•«•'«'y would conoe»! them. 
 
 «irtTTK^i ^ " "."' "^*^ """P^"" «nt" he found ^t 
 P«rt o( the uland w» the best landing pU«». 
 
 C. (Cfesar, ^jfe. Ijr. SS.) 
 
 enlyuntayo::^ Ju4t?oUow T'^.^" ^^ '"" 
 of the soldier before ho ^ ne^ tie shif T\! ""''^ "«^ 
 ships were urged forwaH f h. .„ u *" ^' ■*« «»n M the 
 
 h^uted h rc:rrtifr:d:z XTr^ \r r 
 
 ;^r W-^unghinu^lf ,^^ »tip. t,^ ,::S„ Llj;:^ j^t 
 
 01 
 
 H 
 
 f 
 
 ? 
 
PAKT 
 
 m 
 
 W ' 
 
 YNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 8^ 
 
 ""CHAPTER XXIII. 
 
 Personal, Demonstrative, Reflexive and Possessive 
 
 Pronouns.^ 
 
 16t. As the pronominal subject is reidly diantained in the per- 
 sonal ending of the finite verb, the nominative of the personal 
 pronouns is nqt, as a rule, expressed except for emphana or can- 
 ifost; as, _ . : ■■■: ...,:. ^ - :;,-. ■■ :" - . ■ ,._...„_:_:_:_ :._.„:: 
 
 ^ I drove ovi kings, you bHng in tyrants: Ego reses eJ«oi. vds 
 tyrannos Intrdduoltls. ^ '- 
 
 ^ J- The third^personal pronoun is supplied by m, hie or quu or if 
 emphatic by tZZe. '^*^ ^ ^ » ^ » ■^ " 
 
 ii.i^«5a is often used for ego (compare our 'editorial we 'X but 
 vds should never be used for tu. ^ ■ 
 
 Ti\\F°^ *^® "^® ^* ^^^ diflTerent forms of the genitive see Part 
 111. oz, a. 
 
 168. Etc, this (the demonstrative of the ftrst person), de- 
 notes something near (in place, time or thought), Hence it 
 is used of something just mentioned or something just about 
 to be mentioned ; as, v 
 
 ^ This present war : H6e hellntn. 
 
 " All these (the tribes just mentioned) differ from one another in 
 language : Hi omnia lln(ra& Inter »6 dlffernnt. 
 
 The character o/ the ground was as follows : Loci n&t Ara erat 
 baeo. 
 
 169. Is, that, thia, the, refers without emphasis to something 
 named in the preceding context, and also serves as the ante- 
 cedent of the relative. It is thus also used as the unemphar 
 sized third personal pronoun ; as, 
 
 They wder Lutetia to he burnt and the bridges of that toum to be 
 aestroyed: Latdtlam Inoendl pont«iqa« «ja. oppldl rMcladl 
 Jnb^nt. i_ : •■ ." _'' - '* 
 
 miyumwhmhihad^M him: 3^ ,^^ ^^^^ ^^^^^ 
 
 _\ 
 
 T 
 
 
378 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 They send envoys to Mm: I^egato. «d enm mittan^ 
 
 peaM or mideretood (Zs^t?™°^™i\"' ''°"'' " *"*""- 
 
 160. /K,, «Ao« (the demonstrative of the' third person^ de^ 
 notes something „^^ u. place, time or thought^ «" 'ft 
 St"tT*''rf*"° ^'''"^ I^rsonal pronoV: t 
 person or thing; ite, 
 
 . IVoineti W tn «^ customs of former days hut n/f^^ . o^ 
 /oa^iOtt; Von antland in a «.a-I ^ ^^^ ' **"**^ ^"^ modern - 
 
 In such cases it maVte ~nd^ k!™^ "^ 'l"'? P«<*ding clause.- 
 
 fo|.|^tteprs.^s,„X"i'^%«'^- ^^ w ^int • 
 
 m. ific . . , Ule often meiin «Ae latter . ! . «^jf^»rm«r. ,|^ :^;- 
 
 •Iso at tunes a oontemptuoOs forcT^ '^^'»<>^- '•*»•'«■• |t has 
 
 J^'J^'^.T^' expresses identity, and is often to beren^^ 
 dered hy also ov likeunse; aa» . ^ ., - ^ ^ 
 
 . ' The same dayhs movei^ his camp: Eddem dlA ea.*r^ «. .* " 
 
 Whatever is fionorabk is abo exoedui^alt ?^ movlt. 
 Idem est dtU». — ^^r^*' <»«*««»««» ««t hone.tum* 
 
 • «» .' ■" ■'■. ^ 
 
 1. For Vie same as see section 174. 
 
 M 
 
 n. Am Wemis a Compound of is, Ka* .am. is i^i. «em. not « «^ . 
 
 ..s^ii 
 
 ^ 
 
 M 
 
i'V 
 
 1 ' 
 
 PAUT V,Tr-SYNTAX AND (fciMPOSlTION. 
 
 379 
 
 * qui domam 
 
 
 
 
 hthefoftjeof 
 
 
 ' 0na oohors 
 
 
 d repeating a 
 is either re- .^' 
 
 
 person), de- 
 
 
 b- It isfre- 
 
 ' ; 
 
 aronoun, in 
 
 v.;r 
 
 iion to some 
 
 « 
 
 
 our modern; ■ 
 
 
 idltn«> „ 
 
 >;• 
 
 armls sai^t»' /" 
 
 
 zander. 
 
 
 for himself} \ 
 alt. 
 
 
 » of subject, 
 
 ding clauBe.' 
 
 th^y, or by 
 
 ' , 
 
 ■"■ ./ 
 
 
 Qtuidm. 
 
 -v.f. :■ 
 
 • 
 
 - !•'['.-■: 
 
 163. Ipset -^If, is used for emphatic contrast, not as a re- 
 flexive pronoun. It may be used with nouns or with any of 
 the personal pronouns, or may be used independently, meaning 
 he himself; as. 
 
 They slew Dumnorix himself: Ipsnm Dumnorlffem Interfe'. 
 eirnnt. 
 
 Leaving LcOnemts on the mainland, he himself set sail : tja.hl6n6 
 In oontinenti rellotdt ipse naves solvit. 
 
 i, The emphatic force of ipse is often best rendered by very or 
 m^re; as. They were fighting on (he very banks of the river .'In ipsis 
 fluminis ripis proeli&bantnr. 
 
 ii. The genitive of ipse with or without the possessive pronom. 
 inal adjectives may be used as the equivalent of own; as, My own 
 faidt : Mea ipslns culpa. Their .men tongue : Ipsorum lini^ua. 
 
 iii..l»se, when used to emphasize a reflexive pronoun, threes 
 WiW» the, subject, unless very strong emphasis is to lie on the 
 Ijpfl^xive; as. They kiU themselves : Se ipsi interfloinnt. 
 
 w. Occasionally in indirect narration ipse is used as a reflexive 
 for the sake of emphatic contrast, or where se might be ambiguous 
 
 164. Se, himself, him, the reflexive pronoun of the third 
 person, refers back to the subject of the verb. It should be 
 carefully distinguished from (a) the emphatic pronoun ipse, 
 and (b) the personal pronouns referring to others than the 
 subject; as, :.-•;. 
 
 They camnot defend themselves: S6 j^efendere non possunf. 
 * Com,mius took the cavalry over toith him: Commius s£oum 
 Suites tr&nsport&vit. 
 
 i. When sS refers to the subject of the clause to wl^ich it belongs, 
 it is called the 'direct reflexive'; but when, as often, a^ belongs 
 to a subordinate clause and refers to the subject of the principal 
 clause, it is called the 'indirect reflexive.' As a rule, in subordi- 
 nate clauses expressing a thought, statement, wish, command or 
 ouestion, the reflexive is indirect, refenring to the person who 
 thinks, commands, etc. The direct and the indirect uSf may be 
 found together ; as, They asked the kiiuj not to keep Hanni^l with 
 him, but to surrender him to them : Ab rdge petftbant m^ ttanni* 
 1>alem sAoum hab^ret slbiqne dMeret. • 1^^ 
 
 ii. For inter si, used as a reciprocal pronoun, see Partlll.N^J}, e. 
 
 iii. For the reflexives of the first and second persons, the Wr> 
 BonaVpronouns are used. _ " _ ^ __ \ 
 
 V. The passive voice of some verbs Is used wiUi reflexive for^ » 
 m. They exercise them^lves : Bzeroentnr or S« ezereent. 
 
Jill 
 
 380 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 p.. 
 
 UF 
 
 J!!i/ ' ^^' ^«•. Nost^r, Vester, the possessive pronouns, 
 
 are seldom expressed except for tKe sake of emphasis o4eames8 ' 
 in other cases the context gives a sufficient indication ;%a ' 
 
 pe^-^V^s'^eln^ "^^-^'^"^^ ^^-y ^^^ disregardU their ovm^ 
 pern . Vegtrae salutlg causa suum perloulum ne^Uxertf nt 
 
 (J^B^^ ^^""•°^*^«,^^P''««« ^hat is characteristic of a 
 person , as, ^y hu otm pecvluir methods : guj. artibus 
 
 .:-;■•"■ : ■■■' - . EXERCISE 23. -;■ ■" ' '' —■;■"? ■ ', 
 
 1. After these matters had been settled, a war suddenly broke 
 outm the province itself. The cause of this war was as foUows. : 
 
 ?!™"^"^^P^*««<ly««inchargeof us. 3. The enemy had con- 
 cealed thmr own forces in the same woods. 4. For the same 
 reason he feared our men would inflict injury upon themselves. " 
 6. I remamed wxthyouallthat time ; he returned to his own home. 
 6.,C»sarhad ttiese two legions and those of Croesus with him. : 
 J. They slew themselves m the very gates of the camp. 8. He 
 also thought this present war itself was dangerous to aU of us. 
 a Our cavalry, after encouraging one another, joined battle with 
 the enemy s horsemen. These latter at once betook themselves to 
 thenr comrades. 10. This muoh'he promised, that he would .give 
 them a safe passage through your province. 11. After their usual 
 
 former had taken up their position on the other side of the rivw 
 8»bw ; the latter were fortifying th^jr own t^wn. 
 
PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 B. (Cassar, Bk. V. 9, 10.) 
 
 38 1 
 
 1. These messengers came fipm those who were purtuing the 
 cavahy. 2 . On that same 'day they found out that their own vSssel 
 had been wrecked. 3. These reputed to him that the nature of that 
 place was as follows. 4. He himself forbadfe my advancing with 
 him. 6. He also has put you in charge of that'famous legion. 6. 
 We repulsed the enemy; you fled. 7. He learned that they had, 
 according to their custom, hidden thfemselvea in the woods. 8. I 
 wished you to advance to that river with ajfl your forces. 9. In 
 that place we caught sight of the Enemy's cimp. 10. These latter 
 had begun to blockade the very entrances./ ' , ___-^ ^ 
 
 V C. {Coesar, Bk. IV. S6.) 
 
 1. He sent«aid to his comrades. 2, This alone i%^cking to you. 
 3. When he saw that these were putting our men tb flight, he was 
 himself alarmed. 4. These made an attack on those who had 
 landed from that ship. 5. He also ordered them to follow him. 
 6. He ordered our cavalry to attach themselves to t^at same stan- 
 dard. 7. We held our course ; they could not make the island. 
 
 8. Perceiving that the cavalry themselves were being thrown into'' 
 confusion, he ordered the soldiers to follow their own standards. 
 
 9. The former hurl their weapons ; the latter man the boats, 10. 
 He perceived' that the enemy were in distress, and that our own 
 ranks were gaining a footing on tl^e shore. / 
 
 i^ 
 
 
 .'-■■'.■■ • 
 
 , . .1 
 
 
 ;-'--^^--: 
 
 S-, 
 
 ; . .' '.-■.■' ■■'*::; ■■/ !^ . 
 
 , w 
 
 ■ '■''•-. 
 
 
 ■ ^. .. , ' ■ 
 
 
 
 
 V'-" 
 
 * . - 
 
 '^ '":.-■' 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 » 
 
 
 r 
 
 • 
 
 
 « 
 
 
w 
 
 d82 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 ^ ii; 
 
 
 CHAPTER XXIV. 
 Ct Indepinite Pbonouns. 
 
 i ' Ant,- ^ '• 
 
 166. («) Quis (qui) means any, anyone, after «», nc, nttm» 
 and «om«, someone, after nm/ as, 
 
 ^ any <me has heard anything he reports it to the magistrate : SI 
 qnls quid aooeipit, ad magiatr&tnm il6tert. 
 
 He ordered the soldiers not to hurl back any weapon : Multibus 
 Imper&vit neqnod t§lain rejicereut. * 
 
 (b) Qdisquam (substantival) means any one, and ullus 
 (adjectival) means t^iy, when all are excluded, that is, when 
 any has the force of any, even one, suggesting the idea of no 
 one or none. They are used in negative, or practically nega- 
 tive sentences ;^ as. 
 
 Nor was a/ny one found : Neqne repertns esi qalMiaam 
 
 The battle was without any danger: sine uIIq perloolo «r«t 
 
 proelium. '-,■>■ ■■ ■; . . -i (■'■ ' o, ■/'' 
 
 i. Instead of non followed by quisquam or alius, Latin prefers 
 
 imnd, nihil and nullus; but wqae followed hy' quisquam or alius is 
 
 preferred to c« followed by imnS, nihil or nOXlus : as, They do not 
 
 expect any disaster ; Nullam o&sam ezspeotant. And nothing is 
 
 ,^onsidered more disgraceful : Neqae turplns qaioqnam habgtnr. 
 
 (c) Quivis, QuiLiBET mean any, any one, when all are included, 
 that is, when any has the force of any you please, suggesting4he 
 idea of every one, all; 9», 
 
 The vessels are buUt to withstand any vioience: ITftTSs faotae 
 •ant ad qaamvls vim perferendam. 
 
 .■.', -,,^,.- ''-' Some. 
 
 ' 167. (a) Aliquis (aliqui) means some, some one (or other)^ 
 wholjly indefinite ; as. 
 
 He bade them send some one : Jassit eon allqaem mlttere. '^'^'T 
 They are devising some new plan : Allqnld novl o5nBllll IneuAt. 
 
 1. For tmUiioa. rhetorical quMtiong, comt 
 
 WOll WWII MMfi) «fie, d^fi 
 
 MM nnnU iaiaf^ 
 
 m'- 
 
PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 883 
 
 Even if some portion be sitrrtmndedy the rest can he saved: SI 
 p%r« aliqna oiroamventa erit, rellqnl serT&rl poMunt. 
 
 i. ^Mp*aw» has the force of oZijMM, but is much rarer. 
 ^ (6) NoNNULii meajns some, some few, suggesting the idea some, 
 hdnot many; as, They lost some (or a few) of their men : Nonl 
 nulloB ex sals amiserant. 
 
 (c) IJbscio quis means some one or other unknown to the speaker ; 
 often, through an aflfectation of ignorance, it implies contempt : as. 
 Me fuia raised some rumor or other (or same tnAing nmor) : B4- 
 morls nesoio quid afflaverat. 
 
 i. Nesci^quis in this sense is treated as a single word, and as 
 such IS not followed by the subjunctive of indwect question. Simi- 
 larly nescid quo modd or nesciO qud pdctd, in stm^ toay or other. 
 
 (i) Sunt qui with the subjunctive (section 32) means some 
 (emphatic) or there are some who; as, /Some «aid; Brant onl 
 dioerent. f ^ 
 
 (e) QuiDAM means o certain orui, a certain, of what one has in 
 mind, but is not anxious or able to specify further. Hence it is 
 often -used in vague deswriptions, meanihg a saH of; as, 
 
 ^ of the soldiers said : Qnldam ex mlUtlbaa dixit. 
 The Romans have defeated us not by valor but by a sort of trick' 
 Non vlrtute vloerunt Bom&nl sed artlllold qaddam.' 
 
 (/) For (dim repeated, meaning some . . . other, see section 
 le», a, and for quu, meahmg some, see section 166, o. f 
 
 Other. 
 
 A-h^' ?• ,^"^® ^^^^^ ^*'^» another. When it is repeatel- in 
 different clauses, the meaning in the singular is one . . ^another: 
 m the plural «^ . . . others. When, in the same clause, it i 
 repeated in a different case, or is accompanied by a derivative 
 adverb, the meanmgjis, m the singular one . . . one, another . . . 
 anofW, in the plural «ome . , , one, others, . . ari>ther: as, 
 
 They fled in another direction: AUam in partem fugfirunt. 
 
 Home were filing the trenches, others were hurling weapons: Alii 
 fo»s&« oomplSbant. alii tela oonjioi«bant. 
 
 Some were carried in one direction, others in another ; All! aliam 
 
 in partem ferSbantnr. " «««m 
 
 >■ They believe one thing one moment, another another ; AlUa aUnd 
 
 «oL '^^¥',«'»;« or «^»**»- (and similarly after contra) Oe or atqw is 
 
 -g ma$mer w^y i^ff*iren^ frtm^^ far other tfm^^^ 
 Gauls: Long* ali& ratlone 4i|kliqal Galll ^nm gerwit 
 
S84 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BQDK. 
 
 
 «u;.r 
 
 Venetl 
 
 u. Sometimes ahua repeated m the same clause is to be rendered 
 by one another; as, They lend aid to one another (or one to another) • 
 Alias alii sabsldinm fernnt. , 
 
 . ^^j.J-Y^^^ ™^^s *^ <>*'^*"» the second (of two). When repeated 
 m different clauses, the meaning ift the singular is (the) om 1 . . 
 the other, m the plural (the) one paHy . . . the other paHy; as, 
 
 2%c one paH he gave up to the Ga^ds, the other he assigned to the 
 cohorts: Alteram partem Gallia concessit, alteram cohortibas 
 attribnit. 
 
 One division fled to the mountain, the other to the baggage : Alter! 
 se in montum receperant, alterl ad impedimenta. 
 
 (c) CixBEi and bbliqui mean the others, the rest, the remainder:'' 
 
 as, "■ ■ , :/ ■ ". .^'" ""' ■;" • i- . ■ 
 
 They differ from the others: Differant a ceteris. 
 The Vene^ and the other states also prepare fdr 
 reliquaequMtem civitates bellnm parant. 
 
 .Each. 
 
 169. (a) QuisQyis taeans each (of more than tujo),^ "every, and is 
 especially frequent with the iwflexive ;" as, 
 
 It is best for each to return to his home : Optlmmn est domnm 
 saam qnemque revertl. 
 
 i. With superlatives and ordinal numerals quisqne has the force 
 of c«en/ (or ott the); as, JSvery «law df noble birth: Ndbllissbnns 
 qoisque.- Every tenth man : Deoimus qaisqae. Primus quisoue 
 vaeaxiB the very first, the jWst possible. » -^ 
 
 (6) Utbeqdk means each (of two), freely both; the plural utrlque 
 meaning both sides or both parties; as, 
 
 On each bank (or on both banks) they had viUages : Ad ntramqne 
 Vipam Ticds babebant. 
 
 That day both armies keep within their oum lines : Ed dl6 utrl- 
 q,ne sese sad loco >$iontlnent. 
 
 -.A^■■:-■^'■::^■■ ..;.:- V^EXERCISE 24. ■ 'v ■■•"■-■•: ,-■;./: 
 
 ■; ', .,--■'-■■''■ I, - .;>:."■■■" -'A' , •-■•»- ■'■■*;■ ^' . 
 
 ■' •/■^-v>' "'■ '■*•- -• •■■:'--!■■■';_ ' ^ ■ : ;- ■ -At ■■;,■■ .■'■■--'..■ .■ .. ■ '.« 
 
 I: They beheld certain of our men leaping down from the other 
 vessel. 2. They used to inquire what every one had heard con- 
 oeming e^ch matter. 3. Befor e he should make any answer, 
 
 1. For Hie agreement of eefm and re^tgui see fection 86, ivt &. 
 2; Wit4?ronounB quisque and wterq'te are used stibstantivel' 
 
 l i iifjuii; u>il,h ■iiliat-jMtln.j th^» *». .1.. I i i 1 1,— i— i- .-„. J 
 
 takjt^s th6 partltlvs 
 
PART V.—SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. ^86 
 
 ' he Qi^ered the others to be summonedto him.- 4. gome thought 
 - they could gain^the victory ^without a (=miy) wouii4. 5. It 
 would be bettor to puffer any fat^ at the hands of the Romans. 
 6. They will not makW»eace on any other terms. 7. The enemy 
 were advancing, some fr]^ onrdirectionyDthers froro^another. 8. ' 
 When he saw that the enemy was pres^g him on each flank, he 
 suspected some new de^ had been formed. 9. If any pf the^ 
 Gauls are captured, the r^t will soon surrender. 10. H« trusted 
 both the^dui and theReini, the one because of their ancient loyalty, 
 the other because of their recent services. 11. Scarcely any one ' 
 perceived that some other plan must be devised than (tljey had 
 formed) jireviously. 12. Lest the flight of the Gfeuls should alarm 
 any, he pointed out that the Germans^ad woh by some trick or 
 6ther, rather thSiTBy their valqiK. . . 
 
 \y' 
 
 .S 
 
 B, '{OcBsar, Bh V. 11, 12.) 
 
 1. Labienussaid that he could build any number of fthips. 2. 
 There are some who say» that there is timber ii^ every ^rt of the 
 island. 3, If any workmen are summoned, they will be ordered to 
 repair thither vessels. 4. He put a certain Labienus in charge 
 of the oth^ legion. 5. Some were^born id the island ; others had 
 crossed over from the mainland. 6. Scarcely any one had discov- 
 ered that CfsBsar was leaving a garrison for both camps.. 7. ^me 
 think that the cold fs less intense in tljo-4iiterior ; others on the 
 -coast. 8. Others said that some place or othe»* should be dhosen. 
 9. Scarcely any ships have been lost j but some few miA't be 
 repaired^ ' - f 1 
 
 * 1. Killing some, they drove the rest from their ^ands. 2. ^o^ 
 one said that the .Suebi" could withstand the power of any state. 
 3. la each state some think this a merit, others regard it as un- 
 manly. 4. If we wish anything imported, certain traders will be 
 given access. 5. We take pleasure some in one thing, others in 
 another. 6. Others thought that scarcely ^y state was more 
 civilized. 7. And they do not permit any' one to use wine. 8. 
 Lest they seize anvvessel, guards should be stationed on both 
 banks. 9. There ii|^ i»ntir|«. y^/. - - 
 
 reach another river. 
 2o « 
 
 •«i 
 
 V. 
 
 # 
 

 PRUfART LATIN BOOK. 
 
 lil 
 
 'M' 
 
 V^ 
 
 CHAPTER XXV. 
 The RELArfvE Pronoun. 
 
 
 f 
 
 y 
 
 
 170. Qui, whOf wkich^ the relative or conjunotiye pronouii, is 
 regularly followed by the indicative; as, 
 
 The bridge whi^h was at Oetieva he orders to be destroyed: Ppn- 
 tem, qol'erat ad Gen&Tam, Jubet resolndl. / 
 
 i. The indicative is regularly found also after relative Hidvorbl,' 
 such as unde^ tt6i, gw5, ut^ relative adjectives such as qnMis, quan- ' 
 tuSj and indefinite-relatives siuch as quisquis and qutcumqtte. ' 
 - ii. For the agreement of the relative with its antecedent see 
 
 ' section 13. > ' , . , 
 
 . iii In. Latin, unlike the-^Ehglish usf^e, the relative is always 
 expressed ; as. The l'^)erty tve have received from pur fbref others : 
 Ba, llbertas, qiiam ^ majorlbas aoteptmng. 
 
 I iv. In the case of two relative . clauses coordinate with each 
 other, the second relative is generally omitted if the two relatives 
 would have the same case ; as, Mg prevails upon Dvmnorix, who 
 held the chief axUhority^ and i^Wvery popular with the common 
 people: 'Dtfmdbrlgrl, qnl prlnoip&tnio' obttnebat ao maxime 
 plebl aooeptut erat, pergaadet.- When the two relatives would 
 be in different cases,, as a rule both are expressed ; but sometimes 
 the .second is replaced by a demonstrative, or (if it would be in -the 
 nominative or accusative) is omitted ; a^, He has sent a man whom 
 we neither fear nor obey: Hominem,, qnem noqno tlmemna neque 
 61 par6mas, mlsit. , 
 
 ly^,. Where the same preposition woiild be used with *bpth ante- 
 cMpBnt and rela^iver it is regularly omitted with the relative. 
 
 vi. The relative is often found in the ablative, absc^ut^ con- 
 struction. il 
 
 171. Th,e relative is usejl w^ the stihjunct'lmmahmim^ i j 1 1 1 1 1 
 clausesf of purpose (section 26), clauses of charactens^^ection 32), 
 and also clauses of concession and cause or reason ;' as, 
 
 Z ^lgg^^^O tcgro during all the previous days had kept the soldiers 
 *** ^^rllS^Sfct^ *^ «ewn</i dny he sent five cohorts to forage : 
 ^*"^%^lBSr'?il^ wppiBrioreg digg mlllteg In oagtrig oontl- 
 ■*"*f*^||^H»|»^«l*^|aInque oohorteg frumentatmn mlttlt. 
 
 • >J^!P^^F^^ ^^liM'***^ ^^^ *^ ^o'KMi'n^ cq^rry on, uvir, 
 'wnce^MlpJPn^l ofeie to W^ forward such mighty engines': N6n 
 
 f: 
 
 y. 
 
 or wtpote. 
 
 Th« OMtad tvIr^Iyq oentonoQ i^ ofteq introdxiceit iwa l^pl){^lI2e<l t»^ ^%»» t^ 
 
aronou^, is 
 
 lurf 
 
 I PABT v.— SYNTAX AKD COMPOSITION. ^ 367 
 
 oAtlonSa promovere posslnt/ ' 
 
 172. The Coordinating Rilative.-^j is often used at 
 the beginning ofa sentence to introduce, not a, suboi^in^t© 
 " l!f ' ^"^ ^* ^*^"' ind'jpendent sentence, which it thiM, connects 
 m clearly with the preceding words than a personal or 
 r« (^onstrative pronoun, such as English uses, would do. The 
 m relative may belong either to a principal or to a subbrdinate 
 'Clause in the new seutenceV as, 
 
 y'or this reason the Helvetians mr^ss\he other Qaids: Qa& 
 
 de causa HeIvetlI*ell<m68.Gall6.praecedunt. ^ *"•«»* 
 
 Mamng completed this business Ccesar set out f(yr Gfodrf • Onibn- 
 
 '^^; «6»'«««« Cao8«P m Galllam profectn/e.t. * '*''*'*"• 
 
 JVh^ they peroeived them, they began to close. the gates: Quo. 
 cum oon»pexl8«ent, porta» olaudere ooeperuut. % 
 
 'occ^SeS.!- *''"°''J^^ peculiarities in the aneecedent are of common 
 
 (a) The antecedent is frequently omitted ; as, They do what thev 
 
 out : Allait qui dogndsoerent. "^ 
 
 (6), The antecedent is often repeated in the relative clause, espe- 
 cially^the vords ««r., res, locus, diis; as. Dust ,ms seen inth^ 
 direction, tn which the legion had marphed : PnlvU In ea parte 
 vldebatur qnam In partem leglo Iter fecerat. 
 
 ^'^^Am!® antecedent is often incorporated into the relative dkuse • 
 . *• Where the relative clause precedes, an antecedept substantive 
 w often put in the relative clatise ; as, puit part which had cmtsed 
 the^jMster paid the penalty; Quae pars oalamltatem Intulwat 
 ea poen&8 persolvlt. /" •' 
 
 ii. Where the anteced^ftt is an appositive, it is Ks a rule pafc in^ ' 
 the relative clause ; as, They hifutbit Kent, a country which lies 
 entirely on the coast: Cantlum Incolunt, quae reirld onwis 
 .marltlma est. 
 
 Jii. Somewhat similar is the transference of the -superlative or 
 other modifier of the antecedent to the relative «lause; as^ He 
 Ztli *^ * ^*^*™' «"»™ maxlmam habul^ 
 
 (d) The substance of a sentence or phrase may be referred to *v 
 parenthetically by quod or id^quod; as, miMd them that after the 
 IT^ XlFL ^ fj^-^^'^^ ^^ ^ *^'^ i^xm^rfHWie case) they n^^on 
 
 f; 
 
 ^ 
 
 , «*«WCfc *^ Aw^TFraecgpit hostibug^n fugam conJectIs 
 Vqnod fore vid^bat) omnes peterent regem. 
 
 r<y 
 
 /■ 
 
388 
 
 ^v 
 
 
 ; 
 
 i 
 » 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 1'74, Thefirelative pronoun cw ill correlative sentences is repre- 
 sented ijy different words, according to the demonstrative in the 
 antecedent ckuse. . Jd!em is followed by qui, or by dc (atque). 
 (So also 2>a»* when used with the force .of idem.) Talis^ tantm 
 -and tot are followed by qiuUuy quantus and quot respectively ; as, 
 
 Our men resist in the same manner as on the prevums day : 
 ^adem ratidne, qa& prldie, ab nostrlg reslstitar. 
 
 He was the same kind of wmn as I perceive yoM to he: T&lis 
 erat qai^em te esse video. 
 
 As (many, large, etc.) as possible is expressed hjqnam and the 
 
 1. 
 
 superlative, with or without the proper form of possiim; as, They 
 gaiher as vtuiny sh^ips as possible: N&vea qaam plurlmaa (pos- 
 •unt) cognnt. ' ., 
 
 ii. The antecedents talis, tantus, tot are often omitted ; as, They 
 assign them as much land as seems best: Attribaaut qaajfiliaiu 
 visum eat agrl. > ¥" 
 
 ^ EXERCISE 25. ' 
 
 ":^V'-''-'rVV^'-^^^ A. ■ - ' - - V 
 
 1. The ships which he had built in the previous summer, were 
 ordered to assemble at once. 2. Nor could any vessels- be found 
 on which the cavalry could be brought- over. 3. Having made 
 these preparations, they fixed a day on which all were to assemble 
 at the banks of the river. 4. When they heard this, they with- 
 drew to tli^camp whence they had set out. 5. The same thing 
 will happen as has happened on previous days. 6. Thiis legion he 
 left to guard the camp, seeing that it was wearied with marching. 
 7. The number of those whe set out from^the country of the Hel- 
 vetians was three hundred and sixty-eight thousand. Of these, 
 those who xould bear arms were ninety-two thousand.! 8. Dis- 
 mayed by his advance, the enemy took to flight, although they 
 had gathered large forces. 9. These do not strive with as great 
 eagerness as they atfe accustomed to exhibit in battles on land. 
 10. The enemy suddenly came in sight of the cavalry Ceesar 
 had sent to the assistance of the JE^ui. 11. These are allowed 
 to go in safety in whatever direction they wish. J.2. He sent the 
 bravest horsemen he had with him to Vesoiitio, which is the 
 largest town of the Sequanfc 
 
 A {C(raar,Bk 1^.13,14.) ^ ^ 
 
 .!■ Thoio who inhabit the diuli ' iot along the 
 
 oiviliced. 2. Ireland is not considered to be so large as Britain. 3. 
 
PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 889 
 
 imer, were 
 
 This island the Britons inhabit. These, seeing that they dye them- 
 selves blue, are of a hideous appearance. 4. When the ship was 
 ^^ght to land at this place, we saw that most of the people were 
 ^-Sladm skins. 5. The region which is called Kent is on the sea. 
 6. In this island they have nothing on which to live except milk 
 and flesh. 7. Although they are more civilized than the Britons, 
 they do not Uve on grain. 8. By these inquiries we foundthat the 
 nights are the same as in Britain. 9. The woad with which the 
 Britons used to dye themselves is thought to have produced a blue 
 
 ; >; „ ;,- ■ '•(■"..' • , • 
 
 ^ (Ccemr, Bh TV. 6-10.) 
 1. The islands which the river forms are inhabited by tribes 
 which live on birds. 2. When they heard this, they sent envoys 
 to Ceesar to ask him into what district- he was marching. 3. As 
 he suspected that they had formed some new resolve, Crosar deter- 
 mined not to move his camp nearer the Rhine. 4. There was no 
 tribe fer whom they were not a match. 5. The lands Caesar aUowed 
 the Germans to settle in were not of the same character as those 
 they had seized in^XJaul. 6. Being driven from home, these 
 tnbes had come to the Rhine, where the Ubii had lands. 7. If 
 these settle in Gaul, I shall assign them whatever lands they wish 
 to hold. 8. The Germans, although they cannot protect their own 
 territories, are asking to be allowed to drive out the Treveri from 
 their lands. 9. When he discovered their design, he made them 
 the same answer as he had given to the envoys of the Ubii some 
 days before. * 
 
 -d4- 
 
 '^ 
 
 \ AN imw^ 
 
 ' . r 
 
 
 . - 
 
 *..-- 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 k 
 
 
 ':■■-'./■-''':': 
 
 t 
 
 V* 
 
 
 ■_* - 
 
 
 \ ■ 
 
 . . - ■ 
 
 
 
 
390 " PRIMARY LATIN ItOOK. . / 
 
 CHAPTEK XXVI. - 
 
 "I : - 
 
 - SUBOBDINATE CLAUSES IN INDIRECT NARRATION. / 
 
 175. In many of the preceding chapters rules have been given 
 for using, now the indicative^lRow the subjunctive, in subordinate 
 Glauses introduced by a relative or conjunction. 
 
 But all such subordinate clauses are put in the subjunctive 
 when dependent on a clause in indirect narration, that is, 
 on a clause which is itself dependent on some verb of stating 
 thinking^ perceiving, ordering or asking. The indicative 
 should never be used to express any portion of this quoted 
 words or thoughts of another ; as, , ^ 
 
 Tie ansioers that he has been sUent as long as he has been able: 
 Bespondet qnatndiu potuerlt se taoalase. 
 
 They thought they UH>uld recover the hostages that they Jiad given 
 to Crassns: Sd obstdes qnds Crassd dedisgent reoiper&taros 
 exlatim&bant. 
 
 It ivas observed tltat our men were scarcely suited to an enemy of 
 this sort becaiise they could not follow up a retreating force : Intel- 
 leotum est nostrds, quod Inseqnl oedentes non possent, 
 minus aptos esse ad hujns flrenoris hostem. 
 .He ordered them to avxiit his arrival in the place cohere they 
 then were: Eios In ed loco quo tniu essent sunm adventnm 
 exspeotare Jnssit. 
 
 He asked why Ctesar demanded this if he did not think it right: 
 RoK&vit our Caesar, si non aoqnum existim&ret, hoc postu- 
 l&ret. 
 
 i. An apparent exception is found in the use of the indicative in 
 subordinate clauses that really form no part of the quoted words 
 or thoughts, but either are parenthetic or explanatory additions 
 made by the writer himself, or are the writer's substitute for some- 
 thing actually said or thought ; as. 
 
 He ordered the cohorts wfiich were on guard to set out unth 
 him: Cohort^s quae In statldnlbns erant s^cum prolloisol 
 Jnsstt. 
 
 Cce$ar suspected that that nnmld happen which did 
 fore id> quod aooldlt, susptoAbAtur. 
 
 / . 
 
 
 ■mmt DMiMw 
 
 Here qtme in stationihus erant formed no part of the order given, 
 while a»-«uch^ clauao aa q%tod accidU oould possibly have boon in 
 Cttjaar's mind. 
 
i^ltlf V,— SYNTAX A^P COMPOSITION. 
 
 Mi 
 
 V 176. The sequence of tenses ia observed ui these subjunctive 
 clauses, primary tenses following primary and secondary following 
 secondary. In narrative, secondary sequence is the rule, the 
 present and future indicative becoming the iinperfect subjunctive, 
 the perfect and future perfect indicative becoming the pluperfect 
 subjunctive (see section 187, b). 
 
 But sometimes for^the sake of vividness the primary sequence is 
 used in narrative, the present and future indicative becoming the 
 present subjunctive, the p^tfect and future perfect in<ficative 
 becoming jfche perfect sulljjunctive. (See also section 190, vi.) 
 
 177. ViftTUAL Indirect Narration.— The subjunctive is 
 
 used in any subordinate clause which is conceived as ezpress- 
 iing the words or thoughts of another, without any formal or 
 explicit statement to that eflfect. This is called the subjunc- 
 tive oi virtual (informal or implied) indirect narration; as, 
 
 He offered great' reuxirds if they succeeded in carrying the de- 
 spatches through: Magna proposait praemla al litteras por- 
 (alissent. (Here propo^uit is equivalent to se daturum esse poUi- 
 citus est.) 
 
 They led part of their troops across, in order* if possiUe, to storm 
 the fortress: Partem «aarum odpl&rnm tr&duxirant ut, at 
 possent, oa8tellam expugrnarent. (This represents the original 
 thought si puterim^is, casteUnm expHgnabimus) 
 
 The enemy we^-k waiting^ in case our men should cross the marsh : 
 Paludem al no^trl tranalrent hoatSa ex|peot&bant.* (This 
 represents some such thought as si trdnnlytmt,^adoriemur.) 
 
 He gave vie aU W books that (as he said) his father had left : 
 Omnea llbroa qaoW pater aaaa rellqaiaaet mlhl don&vlt. 
 
 For other examptes compare the subjunctive with quod, dum 
 and priusqnam (sections 147, 155 and 156). 
 
 i. A cladse. dependent oh a subjunotive, and forming a 'close 
 connection with it, is sometimes itself put in the subjunctive by 
 attraction, without in any way being in virtual indirect narration ; 
 as. So profound an impression ttxis produced by this war anumg 
 the barbarians, tluit envois u^ere sent to Ccesa/r by those tribes 
 which dwelt beyond the Khii^: Tanta hujaa belli ad barbarda 
 opinio perl&tu eat, ntl ab lla n&tlonlbaa qaae tr&na Rhinuin 
 Inoolerent, mittejrentur l^gAtl- ad Oaeaarem. Th^ drove the 
 : cavalry before them in such a^panic that they ditt not cease from 
 their Jli^ht until they came insight of our army: Bqnliia Ita 
 perterrltoa igdrikht^ at non j^lna tngh dftaUier*nt qnam In 
 
 ^ 
 
 1. Bodi a clahaa tMina to have (Iw vali 
 protaait in virfcuM indirect norrfiUoa. 
 
 of -Ml indirect queation, but it realljr a 
 
 > I 
 
 .t 
 
392 
 
 PHIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 n 
 
 eonspeotam affmlni. no«trI venUsent. Whm Jui failed to 
 tnjluence him aa he de»ired, he sent by night to the king the most 
 trusty slave Ae had : Quem cam mWas qu»m velleft moveret. 
 nootu d« aervU «ula quem habult fldellsslmum ad re<rem 
 
 d«oi* '''^wfu™®*!"?®® "^""^ *** illogical extension (by mistaken 
 analogy) of the subjunctive of virtual indirect narration, in which 
 the verb of saytng or thinking is expressed, and is itself put in the 
 subjunctive ; as, He begged to be left in Gaul because, as he said, he 
 \was prevented by reli^tmis scruptea: Pet^bat «t in Gallia relln- 
 ^qaeretur, quod rellgrldntbas impedlrl dioeret (for quod reli- 
 t^ibus tmpediretu/r), i ^ ^ «- /«» 
 
 EXERCISE 26. " 
 
 t He promised to send all the cavaliy he had with him. 2. He 
 believes that if the ^dui are crushed, the rest of the Gauls will ' 
 disperse to their homes. 3. Cffisar feared that the same thing would 
 happen as had occurred on the previous day. 4. We were waiting 
 in case the Gauls should attempt to break down the bridge. 6. 
 Having offered rewards to those who should first mount the wall 
 he gave the signal. 6. He order«id Labienus. whom he had put in 
 charge of the damp, to hinder, by whatever Veans he could, the 
 enemy from crossing that river. 7. Ccesar complains because the" 
 j^ui have not lent him aid. 8. The enemy swarmed around in 
 hopes of finding some means of approach. 9. Word was brought 
 that Offisar would send the cavalry by the sftme road by which the*" 
 enemy had gone. 10. He inquire^ how many miles the to^ in 
 which they dwelt was from the <^mp. 11. Driven by hunger, " 
 they secretly went out from the «|imp to see whether tliey could 
 'find any grain or^tfcle in the field^. 12. They gave reasons which 
 (they held) were perfectly vali^ 
 
 Ir 
 
 V. IS, 16.) 
 
 :m 
 
 (B, Cassar, Bi. 
 
 1. He observed that when our men had an engagement with the 
 «hemy, the cavalry never fought in close oni^r. 2. He feared that 
 if the enemy were driven back our men would pursue them too 
 closely. 3. The two cohorts which Caasar M sent to reinforce 
 
 — — ■■—•-■ ■ ■ _ '■ ■ , ■■- ■ ■ ■ • ■■• . i 
 
 ' ; ^ • ' - ' ' " ■ ' t i ' ■ , ^ - 
 
 ,L.w*/!;!^^°^fir*,?P°g> ^* fifeofwmf, tynfa/wnt Mid w/ fet. tnato^d of incol,banL 
 
 
 ^4- 
 
«>• 
 
 PART v.— SVNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 3^3 
 
 our men,; he ordered to drive back the chftrioteer» who were boldly 
 breaking through the cavalry. 4. They were waiting to see whether 
 ,our men would foUov those» who were designedly retreating into 
 the woods/ 6. He thinks that our men will not dare to attack the 
 charioteers, because they are not suited for this kind of fighting. 
 6. They asked w|iat brought the same danger to the «avalry and to 
 . those who had leaped down from their chariots. 7. He had not 
 posted guards, on the grciund that all the soldiers were busy fortify, 
 ing the camp. 8. He perceived that if our men left the standards, 
 . the enemy rushed out of th^ woods aiid slew them. 9. They gen- 
 erally fall back towards, the hills until they have withdrawn our 
 cavalry from the legions. ". 
 
 : C. (Cceaar.^h. IV. 11-14.) 
 
 1. He ordered his men to defend the camp as long As they could. 
 2. They begged him to give no time for employing treachery, to 
 .those who the day b^re had put our cavalry to flight. 3. They 
 thought that the ene^ would not join battle until their cavalry, 
 who had gone across the Meuse, returned. 4. He waited in hopes 
 that they would accept the terms he had offered. 5. He perceived how ' 
 much prestige he would gain if he forced his way into the enemy's 
 camp. C. He intends to put to death all who deceive him. 7. 
 They said that they had brought all their leading men and soldiers,' 
 as had been arranged. 8. Enraged at the thought of {quod) the 
 enemy having treacherously slain our cavalry the day before, he 
 ordered the env6ys who had come to the camp to be detained. 9. 
 They brought wordHihat? several of our men had been slain, among 
 them Piso, whoso grandfather had been called friend by our senate. 
 
 . ■ ■■-^,;-.-> .' »'■ ■. .: ■ ..... - ...... ■, -•■ ■ 
 
 * 
 
 / 
 
 .■■■■.,: . -^ , ♦... ■ . ■■>■- ■ « 
 
 « 
 
 
 — i- "• . 
 
 < - , • V . ■ - 
 
 - - :S ■*,-,'/-' ^ 
 
 
 < • 
 
 < ■. - M . ...... 
 
 
 
r 
 
 
 394 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 CHAPTER XX VIi; ^ 
 
 Tenses" of the Indicative. 
 
 178. In the general use of the tenses Latin differs from English 
 in two respects : "^ 
 
 i. There is no distinction in form corresponding to the English 
 Progressive,^Indefinite^and Emphatic tenses, except that the Latin 
 imperfect and perfect nearly correspond to the English past pro- 
 gressive and past indefinite respectively. . 
 
 ii. Especially in subordinate clauses Latin is more exact than 
 English in indicating both the point* of time (present, past or 
 fqture),' an^'alsopriority of action in relation to the main verb ; as, 
 Whenlj^ndoutyl shall inform you^ if lean: Cum odgrnoverd, 
 f aolam te *oertl6reni, si poterd. (Literally, Wfien I shall have' 
 found out, I ahaU inform yon, if I shall be able.) . ; ^;^^^^ v '.- 
 
 ; 179. The present tense is used ■ -^ ' "■ 
 
 * ' (a) Of what is going on now at the present moment ; &a. They 
 . are iweparingr /or tyar; Bellum parant. ^ ^, 
 
 . (b) Of general truths, and of continued, repeated or habitual 
 
 ' actions or states ; as. Fortune favors the brave : Fortuna forte» 
 
 adjuvat. Those jin the interior dp not sow grain : Ihterlores fru-^ 
 
 menta non 8erai|t. > ' 
 
 (c) As an historical pi'esent,. in animated narrative; as, When 
 ^ the news vxus brought, he makes haste to set out : Cum Id ii€intl&-'' 
 turn esaet» xnaturat profloisol.' V* * * Y 
 
 - (rf) To express an action attempted or intended in present time 
 
 (the conative present) ; as. They are trying to avoid danger : Perl- 
 
 ;: _ 5 . oulam vltant. ''^^^' 
 
 •\ . (e) With jam and its compounds to express actions continued 
 
 from the past into the present, where we should expect the per- 
 
 • feet; as. He has long bee» collectiiuj troops: Jamdlu odplas com- 
 
 parat. 
 
 if) With dum (whiU), where wq. should expect the imperfect 
 (see seption 163). ^ w' 
 
 * -*J.^: 1 180. The imperfect tense is used ' _ „, _i^ ^ ^" : l '^:^:^:^ 
 
 Mil 
 
 f 
 
 (a) Of wliat was g<yng on in past time ; As, He was uHutering in 
 Oaul : * In Gallia hiemabat. r 
 
 .J* 
 
 l.?1[n l»tU r » th» Writw r often t r awirfwmhlm M lf in thought to- < 
 
 and uses th« imiterfcrt and plu|i(!rfccl itmtcad of the present and perfect ; aa, / AaM 
 nothing to write : Nihil habebam quod acriberem. * . 
 
oplas com" 
 
 » ol the readefr 
 
 r - ^ 
 
 ^AKT V.__sYNTAX AND CPMPOSITION. 395 
 
 (6) Of continued, repeated, or habitual actions or state» in n.».f 
 time, like the Englkh past indefinite; as, ^^"^S wSv 
 lead hutropps dut daily: Cotldlfe pr^aiebat o^J. /TS 
 the greatest confidence in this ^e^n ; Tuto lei^aSi '"onfld^w 
 maxlme. He coxdd not discover amithino-^tf^i oonndgbat 
 
 gestingrepeated faUures^^;^^^^^^ ^«17^/^^*, 7a 
 concilia uon venlebant (implying repeated refusals)/ 
 ,•«„ ^ T® appropriately i. to express one's usual way of think 
 
 l^'n^fr?*"^ ^^rf^^ or feelings which accompany ^onsSeS 
 (while the perfect is used of coming to a dfecisiimV |^""f^^®^5»?n 
 
 , Situation of aflairs; iii. to give ^hTc^iS^S^^^li^,:^ 
 
 ^ describe the process as opposed to summing up the reTiSt • iv f^ 
 
 men ion the natural featur^ of the scene ^^t o^^, '" "^ 
 
 ii^Ju^ ^^P'^ *? ^*'*^^'*^ «attempted or i^tended or begun in oast 
 fame ( he conative imperfect) ; as, They tried to preven!^Z^ 
 
 ^ lZ\'^\o!S:Z^r^''-'^' ^^ proceeded trstiruptLTly 
 
 Af) In the case of possum, oportet, tfefrea and such verbs 
 express lack of correspondence with fact. ' 
 
 . ^181. The PiUTURB is used to denote' what will take ulace at sn£« 
 
 J^trii. "' ^""^ "^' '"^ ''' ^"^^ 'y »^:%tT.:i:t: 
 
 rir!; J!^^T ^"!"'^ ^T*^ ^^^ P^^««"*^ i" » subordinate claiise refer 
 ring to future fame, Latin uses the future when ^ho l^f ; 
 
 contemporaneous (section 178. ii.). Sn^rTlSion JM, T •"" 
 ^ 182. The PERFECT is used 
 
 r:io%^'^!i,*^®^"^^'^^ present perfect, to denote an action com. 
 
 ' The perfect narrates; the imperfect describes. The nerfect 
 («) In 8uborfinat« clauses to denote an indeflnitelv reoeated 
 
396 
 
 . PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 S 
 
 (e) T;b denote the present state resulting from completed action ; 
 as, He is dead: Mortnus est. They are gone: Dlsoesserant. 
 We are surrounded : Circnm ventl aumns. This is especially the 
 case with c6nsu^i% I am accustomed ; meminl,, I remember ; and 
 ndvly I know (literally I have become acciistomed, I have called to 
 mindy I hgj» learned). 
 
 Similarly the pluperfect of these verbs has the value of^the 
 imperfect, and the future perfect the value of the future. 
 
 i. The perfect tenses of the passive have sometimeis ful, fueram^ 
 fueroy instead of «wm, eram^ erd. The form with fui generally 
 implies that the condition spoken of has ceased to exist. 
 
 ii. A sort of perfect is formed by habeo and the perfect participle 
 passive,* emphasizing the continuance of the result of a past action ; 
 as, He has large forces collected : Magna» odpias ooaotaa hubet 
 Similarly for the pluperfect fca6e6am is used. 
 
 183. The PLUPBRFECT is used '* 
 
 (a) To' mark an act as completed or taking place before some 
 
 point in pkst time mentioned or implied : as, TJiey had by this time 
 
 reached the territoi-ies of the uMdui : Jam in.Aedadram flues per- 
 
 'Venerant. !,--*. 
 
 ■ rf- ■ 
 
 (6) In subordinate clauses to denote an indefinitely repeated 
 action, preceding that of the main verb, which is in the imperfect. 
 ^Section 149.) 
 
 i. Sometimes Ceesar uses the pluperfect instead of the perfect in 
 referring to previous passages in his Commentaries. ,, , 
 
 134. The FUTURE perfeot is used to express something com- 
 |>leted or attained by some point in the future ; as» Meanwhile they 
 will have gone : Interim dlsoesserlnt. 
 
 i. Where English has the present or present perfect in a sub- 
 ordinate clause referring to future time, Latin uses the future 
 perfect when , the action of the subordinate verb is prior to that ofi 
 the principal yerb (section 178, ii.). Sometimeii where two future 
 . actions are regarded as identical, one involving the other, the 
 future perfect is found in bbth clauses ; as, He who crtishes Antony 
 will {thereby) finish the tear: Qui Antonlum oppresserit, is b^l*^ 
 lum odnfeoerit. 
 
 ii. The future perfect is sometimes used to emphasize -the com- 
 pletion of a future act ; as, J at least shaU have my duty done (or I 
 at least shall be foiind to have done m.y duty) : Ego oerte mouni 
 offlotnm praestitero. It thus may come to give «issuraiice of 
 rapidity of action ; as. The first attack wUl carry the camp forth- 
 wiJth: Prlmn» Impetna ca»tra cfiperlt. '/ , ^ 
 
 '1. Oompare in English / haw the Utter imt(«n, with 7 have vnriUen the letter. 
 
PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 EXERCISE 27. „ " 
 A, 
 
 397 
 
 1. To.this legion he always showed especial indulgence.' g/lf 
 you assist the enemy, I shall bum your villages. 3. The Druids' 
 are accustomed to hold aloof from war, and do not pay taxes. 4. 
 Afteriie had learned this, he thought he ought not to wait longer. 
 5. If Cee^r IS at the head of the army, we shaU easily conquer the 
 
 . ", A "^*"'^^^ *^'^"8^ the forest of Ardennes, which 
 
 extended from the Rhine to the Nervii. 7. By this means they 
 
 ^sought to temfy the others. 8. While this was going on, the 
 
 enemy had already reached the territories of the ^ui, and were 
 
 laying waste their lands. 9. On the following day they move their 
 
 camp two miles. 10. Whenever he saw his men in distress, he 
 
 gcrnld send reinforcements. 11. For tha reasons which I have 
 
 Pientioned, Ciesar wished to set out for Britain. 12. Before mid- 
 
 fliignt the enemy will be gone. 
 
 ■ - ■ .■■ '^" ■ ■■-'■-",.■ ■-■-"'.-'." 1 ^ ■■ ' .-'.-. 
 
 . 1. The enemy are rallying. 2. When Cfflsar learns this he will 
 send forward the legions. 3. Whenever our meii make an attack, 
 the enemy betake themselves to flight. 4. They were accustomed 
 to leap down from their chariots. 5. For a long time they had 
 been contending with their fuU force. 6. Whenever they began 
 to forage, the enemy would suddenly show themselves. 7. As 
 soon as all the forces had assembled, he proceeded to cross the 
 river. 8. The enemy's forces are drawn up on the hill. % While 
 the cavalry was foraging the enemy had v^ithdrawn. 
 
 ^^^,, ,_ _.^ , „ C. {Ooesar, Bk. IV. 16-19.) -^ >--^ - f-^- 
 1. He did not think it right to give them permission to cross! 2. 
 After the army had begun to be led across, they held a council. 3 
 If they lay waste these lands, I shall detain the envoys who are 
 with me. 4. They were afraid of punishment, because they 
 remembered what they had done. 5. They sought to keep Csesar 
 from lending aid to the Ubii. 6. When the Romans have the 
 courage to cross the Rhine, we shall assemble. 7. He gave a 
 kindly answer to whatsoever envoys came to him. 8. Whenever 
 he punishes the Germans, he inspi res fear in the f^^^til. o w^n^ 
 
 Tie^was staying there, the cavalry was burning the enemy's build 
 mgs, cutting down their crops and breaking down their bridges. 
 
 •V 
 
398 
 
 I'i 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 \ 
 
 CHAPTER XXVIII. 
 
 ^ ' iNDraECT NaUration — Oratio Obliqua. 
 
 186. Direct Narration {Oratio Becta) gives in thejr original lForm 
 the words or thoughts of any person. ' 
 
 Indirect Narration (Oratio Obliqua) gives (in depAidence upon 
 isome verb of stating, thinking, perceiving, ordering or asking) the\ 
 substance of the words or thoughts of another person, and even of 
 the writer or speaker when quoting himself. .'•*,; 
 
 This indirect mode of reporting speech is more usual il^iil^in 
 than the direct, and is much more common in that langiisi^^ithan 
 it is in English. -«V 
 
 The rules for changing Direct into Indirect Narration •ifiw as 
 
 follows: / " . 
 
 • ^. Changes IN MooD.^ . 
 
 \ •-■ . "..-,.• -^ ".,■■' ■ . ■ . 
 
 186. 1. Principal Clauses. 
 
 ° . -'ft wi. ,. ■ • 
 
 (a) Clauses containing a statement (assertiv^ «sentences) have " 
 their verb in the infinitive with subject accusati^' .(Section, J.4u) 
 
 (6) Clauses containing a question (interrogative "sentencel^ have 
 their verb in the sTtftjnwctii'e. (Section 36.) 
 
 i. Indirect deliberative questions (section 134, (2) retain the' sub- 
 junctive. 
 
 (c) Clauses containing a command or request (in^erative sen- 
 tences) have their verb in the subjunctive. >v 
 
 i. This use of the subjunctive is closely related to the substan- 
 tival final clause (section 27), both being developments of the inde- 
 pendent jussive subjunctive (section 134, 6). It is thus sometimes 
 difficult, if not impossible, to distinguish the reported command 
 and the substantival final clause, especially after ne or when \d is 
 omitted (section 28, vi.) ; as for instance in the sentences, Nuntll 
 postalabant bos slbl ddderent : The messengers demanded that 
 they sJix)uld surrender these m^n to them. Multibus Imperatnm 
 est nA hostSs aggrederontar : The soldiers were given orders thai 
 i^y ^undd not attack the enemy. 
 
 a. Subordinate Clauses. .. :,;.... . . . 
 
 All kinds of subordinate clauses (relative,^ temporal, conditional» 
 causal, etc.) are put in the svhjuru^tive mood. (Sectioi^ 175.) 
 
 ). IQ no 01^ 1$ th« indiofttive rotaitied. 
 
. ■ / 
 
 PART V.--SYNTAX AND COMl>pSITION. 
 
 399 
 
 ^ . ^- C^GEs IN Tense/ . ,^ 
 
 187.* (aXXJlauses put in <|he infiniti^ ch&n^B» follows ! 
 
 ;^ ^ DIRECT NARRATION. r / lyniRfcL NARRATION. 
 
 Present Ind. ^ 7 ' becomes Present Infin 
 
 Imperfect, Perfect- : ) 
 
 or Pluperfect Ind. | 
 
 Future Ind. S 
 
 Presenter Imperf. Subj.^ | 
 
 Future Perf. Ind. V 
 
 Imperf. or Pluperf. Subj.V jl 
 
 ye; 
 
 (I 
 
 Perfect 
 Future 
 Inf. in arum fuis8e\ 
 
 »f» 
 
 II 
 
 DIRECT NARRATION. ^ INDIRECT NARRATION: \ 
 
 FXure ^' ''' - ^J- ^"'^'""^ ^'"«"^^^"^i- Imperfectla]^. ^ 
 
 M 
 M 
 
 II 
 II 
 
 II 
 
 -II 
 II 
 II 
 II 
 
 Imperfect 
 Perfect 
 
 II 
 II 
 
 M 
 II 
 
 II 
 
 II II 
 
 II : „' 
 
 Pluperfect n 
 
 ^11 II 
 
 M 
 
 'ii 
 
 Future n 
 Imperfect n 
 * Perfect „ 
 Fut.lferf. „ 
 Pluperfect,, „ .• „ Pluperfect,, „ 
 
 Th^t,^u^^^''T ^«^'"^^^«^ever, in indirect q^mtims : , . , 
 Ihe future indicative becomes (according & sequence) the 
 
 • pe^^t^^S^tc^^Stte?^ 11 '^"^-^ ^^^ 
 
 fJ:^^^^'^ importance is the use of the pluperfect subjunctive 
 for the future perfect mdicative of direct narration. The difficult 
 fnf,^rl ri^T"^ T '? ^"^ ^"l^^^y- ^ t^« ^a«t <^hat the o7i3 
 Thr//f 'i ^' ^TT 5^„*\" .^^8*^«^ idiom (section nsfi?.) 
 \ ;1^' .{-I-^"^ ?^\ ^ '^^'^ f>^ word: Bl cognoieri 
 
 M anemia bnng back word: ttespondlt 8l odirnovisset hA r« 
 nuntlaturum e«.e. The pluperfect subjunctive £ such «^e^ 
 means hteraUy shmdd have, not had already. 
 
 * 
 
 V* G Changes IN Pronot^ 
 
 188. When, as is generaUy the case,» the first and second per^ 
 
 '\ 
 
 .5: 
 
 r 
 1, 
 
 0' *^.\ 
 
 '■ \ ■ 
 
 
 V _ ^ 
 
 In the apodosis of a conditional sentence, 
 
 ^^'^T^T^ss^^r^^.rs^^ 
 
 -lo whonV t ig",;;^;t6d3rUkrFCiri^ ""^ ^t!^-" reporting or the ^emolT 
 indirect narration! ^ ' ^" "^.^^^ *"* ^' «^"^* Pe"»"» in 
 
 
 >■ 
 
 
r 
 
 
 400 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 sons of the original words are changed in indirect narration to 
 
 the third person : ' .„ , 
 
 Ego, nos, become se (or if emphatic in the nominative, ipae, ipA). 
 
 Mens, noster, n suits. . . ' , 
 
 tilt vo«, - II illBy iUl (of sometimes is, et). ^ 
 
 tuus, vesier, n illltis, illdnim. '. .. ', 
 
 hiCy^istey ' ii ille (or is). -^ * "^ '» 
 
 i . D. Changes in Adverbs, y * ' 
 
 189. Adverbs which are relative to the time or place of the 
 speaker are, as a rule, adapted,, to the; time and place of the re- 
 porter. Thus nufic, hodie, hlc^ hinc, heri would become respec- 
 tiv§ly turn or time, Uld' die, ibi, itide, prldis. 
 
 * 190. The following real or apparent exceptions are found : 
 
 i. Clauses introduced by the coordinating relative, which are only 
 apparently subordinate, are put in the accusative and infinitive. 
 
 u. Because of the tendency in Latin to use the same construc- 
 tion aftef gttam {than) as before it, the accusative and infinitive 
 sometimes occurs in qxuim clauses instead of the subjunctive. ■, 
 
 iii. For the indicative in parenthetic clauses in indirect narra- 
 tion see section 175, i. 
 
 iv. The hortative subjunctive (section 134, a) is usually changed 
 into the infinitive of the passive periphrastic conjugation. 
 
 Rhetorical questions which are virtual denials are of ten put 
 
 V. 
 
 in the accusative and infinitive. _ ,. 
 
 ' vi. Instead of the. i?egular secondary sequence the more vivid 
 primary is often found aft;er historical tenses ; and sometimes also 
 a passage may begin with secondary sequence and suddenly change 
 to primary sequence. ; . . ^ ^^ 
 
 vii. The pronoun hlc f^nd the adverbs mentioned in section 189 
 are often retained unchatiged in indirect narration. , /. 
 
 tiii. The regular rules for the use of se, Ule and is in indirect 
 ' narration are not always rigidly followed, especially where no 
 ambiguity arises. See particularly the use of se and siiiis in sec- 
 tions 164 and 165. . 
 
 191. ^The verb of saying, thinking, etc., on which the indirect 
 narration depends, is not always expressed, being often sufficiently 
 suggested by the context. ' , "*. 
 
 Further, where the indirect narratiai includei0nore than one 
 variety of reported utterance (statements, commands, questions, 
 requests) it is not Latin usage to change the verb introducing 
 the various indirect clauses, as English,Q|jben does. 
 
 t;Mort vivid beq»wej>w8«a^°8S*<»>*^^*"'^^y ^^^ original tgrnHf i H nf the diraot 
 
 muration 
 
 / 
 
pration to 
 ipsfi^ ipal). 
 
 ce of the 
 of the re- 
 le respec- 
 
 nd: 
 
 h are only 
 
 nitive. 
 construb- 
 infinitiye 
 
 bive. 
 
 act narra- 
 
 y changed 
 
 often "put 
 
 ore vivid^ 
 bimes also 
 ily change 
 
 ection 189 
 •If 
 
 n indirect 
 where no 
 ,iis in sec- 
 
 ii 
 
 Le indirect 
 jufficiently 
 
 than one 
 questions, 
 itroducing 
 
 of tti fl dirg ^ 
 
 PART V. — SY 
 
 AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 401 
 
 ,m^*Tr*%*'?^/'''"*'''* ^^^ <^«^^ ,^ying thai he wufi^ td treat 
 «nJV/|tm ahmd thsse matters , . .' and mking him to appJnta 
 
 *' lowing fo^ms'^r'^''^ narration conditional sentences assume the fol- 
 
 SI quid habeo do, rdldt se. si qold habeat, dare. 
 
 becomes \cHxlt se, 8l quid haberet. dare, ' 
 
 ' ®^**^*** '?*''«'».»™idlclt 8e, 81 quid haberet; dedUso. 
 ^ dabam. become \dlxlt se, 8l.quld baberet, dedlsse 
 
 SI quid babul dedl fdlcfit 8e, 81 quid babuerit. dedlsse. 
 becomes ^d&lt 8e. 8l quid habul8.et, dedl88e. 
 
 . dabo. becomes \dlxlt «e. 8l quid baberet. daturum e88e, 
 SI quid babeam fdldt se. si 4nld habeat, daturum esse, 
 dem, becomes \aUclt ne, si quid haberet, daturum e»se, 
 
 SI quid haberem/dlclt\8e, 81 quid haberet. daturum ful«.o 
 
 darem, 6ecom€5 (dixit/ (or ease). 
 
 ®^^«Hf ''"^f''*"'l*'*'"lf!L^' ^"** Habuisset, daturum 
 
 . dedls8em,6ecome«\dIx|*jr — fulsse. 
 
 ^ 193 Thj following examples illustrate the rules for changine 
 from durect to mdirect narration • ^'"««ging 
 
 (1) Direct.— Your gift is pleasing 
 j and welcome ; the hos- 
 tages will be in the place 
 you ask; the prisoners 
 • we shall not send back, 
 
 because Hannibal, through 
 whose agency the war was' 
 -r undertaken, you keep even 
 
 now in .command. 
 
 Indirect.— -(ThiB answer was 
 given them:) that their 
 gift was pleasing and wel- 
 . come; the hostages would • 
 be in the place they asked ; 
 the prisoners they should 
 not send back, because 
 Hannibal, through whose 
 agency the war had been 
 • undertaken^- thoy Jcepfc— 
 
 Munus vestrum gratum a?- 
 ceptunique est ; obsides, 
 quo loco rogratls, erunt ; - 
 captivos noQ^emlttemus, 
 quod Hannibalwn, ciijus 
 operf susceptum bellum 
 eSt, «tiam nunc cum im- 
 perio h^betls. ' 
 
 (His respSnsum est:) mflnus 
 llldrum gratum accep- 
 tumque esse ;n)bside8, 
 quo loco rograrent, futa- 
 ros ; captivos non remls- 
 «uros, quod Hannibalem, 
 
 ■ cujus opera susceptum 
 bellum esset, etiam nunc 
 cum imperio baberent. 
 
 even then in .command. 
 26 
 
JIL 
 
402 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 ■M-"- 
 
 (2) Direct. — All of you make your 
 attack on the ship of Eu- 
 menes alone, against the 
 rest be content merely to 
 4efend yourselves. You 
 - will easily accomplish this. 
 I shall see that you know 
 in which ves&el the king is 
 sailing ; if you capture or 
 
 ^ slay him, you shall be well 
 
 j^warded. 
 
 Indirect. — (He gives instruc- 
 tions) that they are all to 
 make their attack on the 
 ship of Eunienes alone, 
 and against the rest are to 
 be content merely to de- 
 fend themselves. They 
 : wyuld easily accomplish 
 that. He should see that 
 they knew in which vessel 
 ' the king was sailing; if 
 
 ' they captured or slew him, 
 they should be well re- 
 warded.. 
 
 (3) IMrect. — We are not th« ag- 
 gressors in making war on 
 the Roman pe6ple, but yet 
 we do not refuse to fight 
 y" in case we are attacked. 
 
 . > 'I'f. yo," desireufiui: good- 
 ,A will, ^we can be useful 
 
 J ' friends to you ; either as- 
 sign us lands or permit us 
 to hold 'thSStar^-wUjcb^ we 
 have acquired by our arms. 
 
 Indirect. — (They said) they 
 were not the aggressors in 
 ^making war on the'Roman 
 :": people, but yet they did 
 not refuse to fight in,i»se 
 they were attacked. If 
 the Romans desired their 
 good-will, they could be 
 
 OmnSs in tlnam Eum^emis r6gis 
 
 oononrrite n&vem, S. c3- 
 
 tetia tantura s^tis habete 
 
 ■ Tos def endere. Hoc facile 
 
 .: odnseqaetninX.^ Rex au- 
 
 ' tem in qua navl vehatnr, 
 
 ut solatls, ego faolam ; 
 
 quem si aut oeperltls aut 
 
 lAterfecerItls,mSgno vo- 
 
 bls praemio erit,^ 
 
 (Praeoipit) omngs ut in Onam 
 Eumenis rSgis oonoar- 
 rant navem, fi c6terls tan- 
 turn satis babeunt «e dS- 
 f endere. Id 11 ids facile 
 o6nseoaturo8. Rex au- 
 tem in quS, Mvl veherd- 
 tnr, ut Bolrent, »6 fao-/ 
 
 * turam ; quem si aut oft* 
 /'plssent aut Inter fftols- 
 aent, mSgno iu praemiG 
 fore. 
 
 N6» noque priflrBs populS R5- 
 mftno bellum Inferlmns, 
 Deque tamen reoan&mns^r. 
 si laoessemar, quin armis 
 oontend&mna. , Si nos- 
 tramgratiam vnltlrf, poa- 
 ■nmaa Vdbla AtilSs esse 
 Htnlol ; vel ndbia agrSs) ■ 
 attrlbnlte vel pat4i^ua 
 eOs tenSre quQs armIs poa- 
 aedlmut.. ,, 
 
 (DixSrunt) «ft neque priOrSs 
 populO Rdm&nS bellum 
 Inferre, neque tamen re- 
 oua&re, si laoeHantar, 
 quIn armiR contendant. 
 Si ■aam gr&tiam Rom&nl 
 vellnt, poaae Ua tltilSf 
 eWHft a mt«ft « f v a l «tlit- 
 
 a- 
 
 7 
 
 •v 
 
 useful mtads tdihem; tot agrOs iittrtl»iiiiat, vel m 
 
P^to v.— SYNtAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 403 
 
 '-iM 
 
 /^ 
 
 
 y 
 
 tiML. 
 
 them . either assign them 
 lands, or -permit them to 
 hold those^which they had 
 acquired by their arms. 
 
 (i) Direct.— I c.an Jiave no friend- 
 ship with you, if you re- 
 main in Gaul; there are no 
 lands vacant in Gaul ; but 
 if you wish, you may settle 
 ^^ in the lands of the Ubii^ 
 whose envoys «re with me, 
 jj—^'-'- and are asking aid of me ; 
 'fe ' I shall give this order to 
 
 * theUbii.. 
 
 Indirect. — (Cassar answered) 
 that he could have no 
 ' . friendship with them, if 
 *:_ they remained in Gaul; 
 ;^ there were.no lands va- 
 cant in Gaul ; but if they 
 ^ wished, they might settle 
 
 in the lands of the Ubii, 
 whose envoys were now 
 with him,, and were asking 
 - aid of him ; he should give 
 this order to the Ubii. 
 
 (5) Direct. — Let them not provoke 
 the enemy to battle, but 
 if thev are themselves at- 
 tacked, let,them hold their 
 ground, until I myself 
 come up. 
 
 Indirect. — (He sent men to tell 
 them) not to provoke the 
 
 . enemy to battle, but if 
 they were themselves at- 
 tacked, they were to hold 
 their ground, until he him- 
 self came up. 
 
 ^6) Dirtct. — Surrender to me those 
 
 who have made war on me 
 
 and on Gaul. 
 
 . The Rhine ia the limit of the 
 
 ilbtttatt p«6|3le'R authority: 
 
 tiantdr eds tenSre, qu5s 
 armls possedorlnt. 
 
 Mlht nulla voblsonm aml- 
 oltlu esse potest, si in 
 Gallia, reman^bltlg; 
 nequeulllinGalliS, vacant 
 airri ; sed licet, si valtis, 
 in Ubiorum finibus con- 
 /■ sidere, quSrum sunt IS- 
 gfttl apud me, et S. me 
 auxilium petnnt ; hoc 
 Ubiis Imperabd. J 
 
 (Oaef^r respondit) slbl nullam 
 wtMW his amioltlam esse 
 posse, si in Gallia rema- 
 n§rent ;' neqvie ullos in 
 GalliS, vaoare agrros ; sed 
 Iio§re, si vellnt, in Ubi- 
 6rura finibus consldere, 
 quorum sint IggatI apud 
 •e, et a 86 auxilium po- 
 tant ; hoc se Ubiis im- 
 peraturam. 
 
 NS TiostSs proeliS laoessant, 
 et si ipsi lacessontnr/. 
 •ustlneant, quoad ipse 
 
 V Mcoesserd. 
 
 (Mittit qui ntlntiftrent) nS 
 V hostSs proelia laoesse- 
 
 rent, et si ipsi lacesse- 
 - rentnr, snstlnerent, 
 
 quoad ipse aooesslaset. 
 
 Eds, qui mlhl Galliaeque hel- 
 ium Intolerant, mlht 
 dMlte. 
 
 Popqll RjSmftnl impi 
 Rh«niia flnlfe. m 
 
 erium 
 
 ti in- 
 
 If you think it wrong for vltC GermftnOs in Galliam 
 
404 
 
 PBIMABT LATIN b6oE. 
 
 the Grermans to cross into 
 Gaul against your wish, 
 why do you claim that any- 
 thing beyond the Rhine is 
 under your sway or power ? 
 
 Indirect, — (Caesar called on 
 
 them) to surrender to him 
 
 those who had made war 
 ^- on him and on Gaul. - 
 
 (They answered) that the (Besponderunt :) Populi R5- 
 
 Bhine was the limit of the man! imperium Bhennm 
 
 Roman people's authority'. r fXnIre ; si se invito Ger 
 
 transire non aequum ex- 
 Istimas, ctirtalquicquam 
 esse imperii aut .potestatis 
 trans Rhenum poatulas ? 
 
 (Oaesar postul3vit) eos, qui 
 slbl Galliaeque bellum In- 
 tullssent, sibl dederent. 
 
 If he thought it wrong for 
 the Germans to cross into 
 Gaul against his wish, why 
 did he claim thi^t anything 
 beyond the Rhine was un- 
 der his sway or power? 
 
 (7.) Direct.r-Do no harm to the 
 Trinobantes, Cassivellau- 
 
 manos in (ralliam trtosire' 
 non a6quum exlstlmaret, 
 ciir 9al,quicquam esse im- 
 perii aut potestatis trluxs 
 Khenmn po9tal&ret ? 
 
 Noll, Oasslvellaane, Trino> 
 bantibus noo6re. 
 
 ■ ■ ■ '-.i- ■ ■-■,"■ ■ . . . , ■ - - -^y t 
 
 Indirect. — He orders Cassivel- (Tmperat Oassivellaand) ni 
 
 launus to do no harm to Triuobantibus nooeat. .^^ 
 
 the Trinobantes. 'I^ 
 
 (Observe how the vocative may be turned in the indirect speech.) ; 
 
 EXERCISE 2S. 1 
 
 . ■ • * ■■ - ',. ■ 
 
 1. To those ambassadors he replied : ** I will come now, if you 
 are ready to follow." 2. Thfey sent ambassadors to Ceesar saying - 
 that they were ready lo op«n the gates they had closed the day ^--^ 
 before. 3. He told them not to forget the former valor of th«; - • ' 
 Helvetians, nor the wrongs done by them to the Roman people.'; 
 4. ** I," answered he, "have spared the citizens, you the Gauls."! V 
 6. He began to urge them liot to set out ; Ceesar did not dare toj 
 leave them in Gaul ; but if they crossed over to Britain, he would» 
 kill them all. 0. "Leap down," he said, "fettow-soldiers, unless ^ 
 you wish to abandon the eagle to the enemy. Let us not incur 
 such disgrace. I at any rate will do my duty." 7. They replied 
 that if these prooeediny u»r ero reported^to Arioyiatug, thej did not 
 douH thtl'lie would inflict the Mvenat puaistuoent on all iM 
 
 I 
 
 ^ g 
 
 £ 
 
PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 405 
 
 ?he 
 and 
 
 
 I 
 
 I' 
 \ 
 
 •1. 
 
 
 hostages who were in his power. 8. Whit were they to do 
 asked ; it was impossible to defend the camp any longer^ 
 Caesar would have been annoyed if they had set out withou. 
 orders. 9. In his consulship (he said) the Germans" had m. 
 eagerly sought the friendship of Rome. Why shoMd anyo 
 imagine that they would forsake their allegiance? 10. Woul^ 
 they have sent Commius back, he asked, if he had not led his 
 ftrmy across? , 
 
 B. {Cceaar, Bh V. 19-Si,) > 
 
 _j !♦ He pointed out that if the cavalry wa-iidered too extensively, 
 the enemy would rush out from the woods and seize them. 2. 
 • ♦♦ We shaU send you all the corn we have," they answered Csesar! 
 •• Why are you setting out with the legions ? Do not make an 
 attack on our town." 3. He said that ^this young man would have 
 ' had suprejne power if he had not been slain by Cassivellaunus. 4. 
 " Let us cross the river," they answered. " Who can harm us if 
 we are able to conceal ourselves in the marshes ? " 5. The Trino- 
 
 . bantes sent envoys to Caesar, saying that they would surrender to 
 him aU tho' hostages he demanded and begging him not to suffer 
 the soldiers to lay* waste their lands. 6. They feared that if 
 Caesar allowed the legions to leave the line of march, the enemy 
 would seize many bf the soldiers. 7. They said they were accus- 
 
 V tomed to assemble in these towns, wheneveithe enemy made a raid. 
 ^ 0. (Ccuar, Bh TV. gO-gg.) 
 
 1. He said that this had happened very opportunely ; for if he 
 had set out for Brita[in, he would not have found suitable harbors 
 2. "What was I to do ?" he asked. " Was I to trust myself to 
 barbarians t" 3. He ordered him to explore whatever isUnds he 
 visited and bring Jlim back word of the size of their harbors. 4. 
 He was aware that Commius, who had been made king there, had 
 
 ' , discovered his design and would report it to the Atrebates. 5. 
 ' * Do not land from the vessel, " he urged Volusenus, « * We have 
 done All tVt C&sar ordered. Lot us return to Gaul." 61 " How 
 
 - many legions," he asked, "were sufficient last year to make war 
 on Britain?" 7. Envoys came from Britain to Ceosar, saying that 
 
 - they wished to attach themselves to his alliance, promising to be 
 
 faithful to thu Ronum peuplo and nut t o f urnis h aiettoT^Gi^ 
 and asking him to visit tho island at his first opjwrtunity. 
 
PRIMARY lATIN BOOK. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIX.^ . 
 Different Forms op the Noun Clause. 
 
 \ - 
 
 'A^' 
 
 194. A noun (or substantive) clause is one that takes the place 
 and discharges the functions of a substantive, whether as subject 
 or object of a verb or equivalent phrase, or as Vkti appositive^ to some 
 other word in the sentence. . ^ 
 
 N.B. — ^The accusative and infinitive construction is here treated 
 as a noun clause because it represents the English noun sentence 
 ntroduced hy the conjunction that. Similarly in substantival 
 clauses of result, and in clauses with quln and quominm, the'' 
 erbial notion of result or purpo^ has become so weakened that 
 the^are properly treated as noun clauses like their English equiva- 
 lents^ 
 
 1. CWses, like infinitive phrases, fwe always regarded as n^euter. 
 
 .|'# j».^ ••,;i05. After verbs of saying and t/iiWaiw/, many so-called imper-> 
 * Z ^^'yX^naX verVf^ and many expressions corajjiosed of a neuter adjective , . 
 '■,V'''-1 'li|nd «^^ EMlish noun clauses with that alte expressed by the accu- 
 
 
 
 gftlive and infinitive. 
 
 ''1<^, 
 
 •* .u 
 
 '. 
 
 
 ''<a) Subject\--Jt is not riffht' that the Oei-mdm sihorild cross *the. 
 ^itl^ : Non aeqaum est Oerin&nos Ilhenuin translre. 
 ' (6) Object. — Theythmight they posaes^d limited territories: An» 
 ^ <-'.p>' \ Vu*t5s sS flh^s habere arbltrabantur, 
 
 *' " (c^ Appositive. — This report was bronght to Cceaary that they wefe 
 
 attempting to march through our iprovince :• Caesuk^ Id nuntlAtam 
 est, eos per prdvlnolaiu oogtrain iter faoe^e o&narl. 
 
 196. After verbs of ordering, asking, dderminin^, and verbs of 
 fearing, English nouit clauses with tMt are expressed by clauses 
 with nt or ne and the subjunctive. This subjunctive is akin to the 
 subjunctive of purpose, and like it is in its origin the subjunctive 
 oxiK-essing will or wish. (See section 186, 1, c. i.) ' . 
 
 (a) Subjeqt. — The soldiers /wiiy been given orders that they are to ^ 
 ^tack the enemy : MUltibua iinperatum est at |]io«fi§s aggredt- 
 .antur. " ' ■ ■• .'.;■ *".-" " 
 
 (b) Object.— T fear that Tmay be deikrted hy oR : Vereor nA ab . 
 omnibus deserar. 
 
 (c) Appositive.— Their aim is thai they may recover thsir liberty : 
 Id agunt at llbert&tom reoiplant. V ; - 
 
 •1. A noun clause \» oocMtonally uwed aa n reltfictive appoaitlTO to nn lioouaattve ol 
 
 ipoai 
 
 MtiClpHton ; M. *'»H k t u n v Mat'imUm, hvw kI d w fa r-wr . Ho»tl M « r e all u m t q u» n*- 
 tardus tit. They/eand that auppli49 could not be broxight in ; Rsm f rumentftriam 
 ut Bupportari posast timsnti ; i ' , • 
 
 m 
 
 *. 
 
St^M 
 
 ) place 
 subject , ' 
 
 PART V. — SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 407 
 
 imjSer-v 
 j active /. 
 e accu- 
 
 197> After verbs of ha/ppening and caiisttujr,' English noun clauses 
 with that are expressed by clauses with ut and the subjunctive, 
 which is a weakened subjunctive of result.' 
 
 .(a) Subject. — It happened that tliere toas a full moon: Aooldlt 
 ut esset plena luna. 
 
 (ft) Object. — He brought it about that supplies could be conveyed 
 unthout danger: Commeatua ut sine perXotilo portarX posgent, 
 efflolebat. 
 
 (c) Appositive. — TTie day had this res^dt, that a very great num- 
 ber of the enemy were wounded : Die» hnno habult eventum ut 
 maxltnns tiostlum numerus vulner&retnr. 
 
 198. English noun clauses with that hiteT verbs expressing 
 emotion, and clauses with that = th^ fa^t thalj are expressed by 
 clauses with gnoci and either the indicative, or the subjunctive of 
 virtual indirect narration. , 
 
 (a) Subject. -^T/iere iwm also the fact that he had stated this in 
 th^ assembly of the ^dui .* AooMebat huo quod In oonollio Aedn- 
 drnm haeo dixerat. • • 
 
 ■^^ (ft) Object. — He comptainsr that he has, been ahandotied: Qiiod 
 ■It d^atltutns qnerltur.^ 
 
 (c) Appositive. — A most fortunate thing happened, that the n^xt 
 day the Germans cam^ into tJie camp: OpportunUalma res aool- 
 dlt, quod postrldle Germanl in oastra v£n£runt. , 
 
 (d) Adverbial Accusative. — As to the fact that you threaten me 
 ymi urill not disregard the wrongs of the ^dui^ no one has contended 
 loith me, except to his oivn destruction : Quod mlhl denuntl&a t£ 
 
 » Aoduorum Injuriaa non negrleoturum, ngnio m§oum alne aa4 
 pernfcjle contondlt., . • , - < 
 
 199. After verb& of asking, learning, hnoivirig, telling, etc., Eng- 
 lish noun clauses introduced by an interrogative are expressed by 
 an interrogative clause with the subjunctive of indirect question. 
 
 (o) Subject. — It cannot be determined with t)te eyes in lohieh 
 direction U flows: Oonlfa In utrakn partem flnat Judlo&rl ndn 
 poteat. .,■■■,'.» 
 
 (ft) Object. — We found out what was being done .'t^dgnSvlt quid 
 yfrerStur. , ^ 
 
 1. Substantive clauses of result with «fare also found as subjects of such verb» and "«.^ 
 phrases as nequitur, regiat, relinquitur, reliquum e»t, jtu e»t, mon eat, eunituetudo eat. >. 
 
 2. The BubstJintlve notion became so much more prominent than the notion of*. 
 ^b■^ll^ thnt this rn nitnifitlon name to ba luad in caaw whera not evan tho faintwt 
 
 trace of result can be dlaoerned. 
 
 8. Hera, aa often, the substantival and causal notions an combined. 
 
 ,f .' 
 
 ■:* , 
 
• 'l 
 
 408 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 (c) Appositive. — This is tJie real queatiouy whether he Jias returned: 
 Iliad qnaeritor nnni,. redlerit. 
 
 - ■ " I:'"'" *■'**--■' ■- \ \ ■- 
 
 200. The same verb may have more >than one construction, the 
 difference of construction in most cases representing a difference of 
 meaning:^ ' ■,;- ••■■■:/-;■••■ '- - *;■ ■ V S- :'''-- : 
 
 - (o) Thty determine that these should leave the tov}n : Comftltannt 
 at hi oppldd exoedant. % 
 
 They determine that it is best to, return: Cdnatltnont Oiptlmnm 
 
 esse revertL * - ,.-;'';,,* • ■. '■ '-d-'--^ i 
 
 He determined what tribute Britctin skotild pay : Quid veotXgaits 
 
 Britannia penderet; oonstltnit. 
 
 ' • ' ■■■•■■»' ^ 
 
 (b) Word was brought that they were not to dtfack the enemy/ 
 Kuntiatnm «st'ne liostes proelio laoesgerent. (Compare sec-. 
 tion 196, c.) ;; •' ,. ' 
 
 " (c) There wds also the fact that they fought in small groups :.Ae- 
 o&dibat li4o at rarl proeli&rentar. (Compare section 198. a.) 
 
 N.B.— Itjls itnportant to^distinguish carefully (a) between sub- 
 stantival clauses with thai and the purely adverbial clauses of 
 purpose and result also introduced hy,^that, and (6) between sub- 
 stantival interrogative clauses and relative 'clauses with omitted 
 antecedent (section 39, v.). \ 
 
 » EXERCISE 29. "'' 
 
 ^" •■. ^ , ■•■•■•.■ ■ -*' . ■-. 
 
 1. It is bes|; that w» should announce to th^ soldiers that they 
 are not to provoke the enemy^ to battle. ,2. They madf the com- • 
 plaint that, the enemy were laying waste their lands. 3. The 
 result was that it was quickly ascertained what tribes inhabited the 
 island. 4. There was a danger ttiat it would be difficult to deter- 
 mine what should be done. 5. There wds added the fact that he 
 •had stated that Caesar had confefred the chief power upon him. 
 6. It happened that some. of the soldiers were intercepted by the 
 sudden approach of the cavalry. 7. It was reported that Cresar 
 had given orders to the soldiers to storm the enemy's camp. 8. 
 By means of messengers he informs Ceasar what he thinks should 
 be done. 9. He answered that he did not know why the soldiers 
 had received orders that they were to attack the town. 10. There 
 
 =4f=0 
 
 lfaMrra1ttHi1^^i;lKiua wliiubtOlldwrVerui ui vmmrmmmg, annownnng, teumg, 
 111 Ite in the ipflnitive or subjunctive, aooordlng to the rules of indirect narra- 
 
 •to.,wHl _ 
 
 tion (section 186^ a). 
 
 Wiig;mn6uncing, ieUviig~ 
 
 \l 
 
PART .V.-^IyNTAX aWd COMPOSITION. 
 
 40a 
 
 8. 
 
 \i 
 
 ■i*': 
 
 isnO/douM thatth^elvetians' ar^ the most powerful; 11. He 
 w)^ of the opinion thit ifc would be dangerous to the provincje that 
 the enemy should bedome accustome dj to cross the Rhine. 12. This 
 report had been bro|4ght, that the Germans had betaken themselves 
 ■ tp the woods. / , '■'■^ , : '; /Ij- ■ ■■■ ■ ^' ■ ' ' - ^ 
 
 •1. There waft ad^ed the fact that some ships had been driven 
 bick. 2. TMs report had been biSught to Cassivellaynus that . 
 CsBsar had determined to lead his forces back to the mainland. 3. , 
 When he Md determined what to do, he announced that they were 
 to wait forf the vessels. 4. There is danger that Ccesar will deter- 
 mine that/ all the legions shall winter in Gaul., 5. It happened 
 that the^hips in which he had ordered that the enemy should be 
 taken bick had been lost in the storm. 6. Ceesar complained that 
 they ha|a. not paid the tribute. 7. He announced that the best 
 -(optimis) thing was for the envoys to fritter away, the rest of the 
 summtr. 8. The result was (qud factum est) that Csesar was not 
 •aware how many losses had been sustained. 9. As to the fact that 
 you ai inounce that the equinox is at hand, I am aware that the 
 army fiust be taken back at one tVip. 
 
 a {C(Bsar,_Bk. ir:s3-26:f' ^^^^^^^^^^^' 
 
 1. Ill happened that he perceived that some were in distress. ,2. 
 He praW the^ods that aid might be sent him. 3. Csesar had 
 warnedlthem that they were not to land from the Jship. 4. He 
 warned ihe soldiers that the country was perfectly jfemiliai* to the 
 enemy bk unknown to them. 5. There is added the fact that he 
 perceived this would be of great service to him. 6. They had 
 learfied what Csesar had pointed out should be done. 7.. He com- 
 plained that the men were doing their work too-slowly. 8. This 
 has been determined^ that the lieutenants iRall point out to the 
 soldiers what Ceesar wishes done. 9. The science of warfare de- - 
 mands that all should do their duty. 
 
 —^ r-- -r,*p ,-• — - - - ...... 
 
 * - 
 
410 ^ PRIMARY LATIN BOOK." * 
 
 ■A» 
 
 , ' CHAPTER XXX." 
 
 \ , Continuous Narrative Prose. 
 
 201. Passages of continuous narrative set for translation into 
 
 Latin prose may conveniently be arranged in three divisions of 
 
 increasing complexity : Jirst, those passages in. which little njore is 
 
 V required than in the detached sentences heretofore given for 
 
 translation, namely proper choice of words, correct inflection and 
 
 observance of the rules of Latin syntax ; second, those passages 
 
 T"^^^ ' ^^ in addition, the phraseology requires alteration, either to 
 
 adapt the passage to Latin idiom or to avoid difficulties arising 
 
 ' from a limited vocabulary ; and third, those passages in which- 
 
 some alteration is necessary or desirable not merely in phraseology 
 
 but also in the structure or relation of sentences. 
 
 The three following sections discuss the chief points to be ob- 
 served in each of these divisions. 
 
 ^. ' Connection of Thought. ? » 
 
 f' 202. Even in the simplest kind of narrative passage it will not 
 
 do to treat the component sentences as 6o many independent units. . 
 Latin differs very markedly from English in regard to the connec- 
 tion of sentences. If a modern book or newspaper^ be compared 
 with such an author as Ceesar, it will be found that in narrative 
 English it is the exception rather than the rule to give, formal 
 expression to the connection of thought, while in narrative Latin 
 
 "~ th6 reverse holds true. * 
 
 . Hence the general rule that ajf the fceginning of each new sen- 
 tence care should be taken to nritke plain the conneption in thought 
 
 ' , (a) The usual means of expressing the connection between son- 
 
 . tences are as follows : 
 , . i. Particles such as atqne, nnd moreover; neque, and not; at, but; 
 
 autem, hoivever; verd, hut indeed; itaque, therefore; nam or enim, 
 for. , ■ ' ' 
 
 ii. Pronouns, especially the coordinating relative qtii (section 
 
 ^ 172) and the demonstratives hiSt^Js^ iUe, ipse and idem (sections 
 
 168-163).. 
 
 iii. Words or phrases whose meaning suggests a reference to th» 
 
 . preceding context, such as interim, meanv^iile; ita, in this way; 
 
 i ^m,, 4heii upon t t^, it^ thal^^^ 
 
 . ■ 1 '* 
 
 ,' \ ■■?<& 
 
 as cattadf for the same reason ; accedit quod or ut, besides this. 
 
 ■i 
 
i'K 
 
 
 % 
 
 V, 
 
 PART V. — SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 411 
 
 et^sl 
 
 '^ (6) Where the sceS^shifts and a new actor comes upon the 
 
 . ^'Sfcage, Latin is generally careful to inalrk the change of subject corii/ 
 
 '.viA the sentence. If the new subject has been mentioned in the 
 
 preceding sentence, qui, hlc, is or (for emphatic contrast), ille are 
 
 ^ -generally used; if it has not been mentioned, a substantive is 
 
 ufied, as, for instance, Ccesar, hostes or nostri. In the latter case 
 
 f ' yery often none of the (Connecting lintcs mentioned above is used ; 
 
 ■^•- -^iapparently the contrast afforded by the change of subject .is in 
 
 /^ ^ such cases felt to be a sufficient mark of connection. 
 
 '\ *' On the other hand, where there is no change, the subject is 
 
 seldom indicated in Latin except by the persona^ ending of the 
 
 main verb of the new sentence. 
 
 '"" I' ' ■ : ---..----.---^ . „ ,- 
 
 (c) It may be noticed here ^hat Latin prefers as a connective 
 neque (or nee) to et followed by »t5n; and similarly nee qiUsquamt 
 nee HUva, nee un^fiMm are preferred to et nimOf et nUllits, et nMm' 
 
 - . ♦ PHRASEOLOdT. : v 
 
 '. ' '■ 1 - .•-.■■- ^ _ ■'■ , 
 
 » ' ■ -'- . '■■■-.'■' 
 
 , 203.0 Before an' English sentence can be turned into idiomatic 
 
 Latin, it often requires remodelling and adaptation (in whole or 
 
 part) because 6f differences in the form of expression preferred by 
 
 . each language. In our own language, as we know, the same 
 
 thought may be expressed in many different ways, and of these 
 
 some are sure\ to be more, some less, like the form of expression 
 
 a Roman woula>dioose. So it often happens that when at first it 
 
 would seem impossible to turn some English sentence into Latin 
 
 because it conta^s some words for lyhich the student knows no 
 
 Latin equivftWt, the whole difficulty is easily solved by expressing 
 
 the thought of the sentence in some other way. But again, even 
 
 when the student does know aLaUn equivalent for each individvud 
 
 ^oord in au English sentence, he may yet fail to get a tolerable 
 
 * rendering, for the, reason tluix Latin may put the whole thought 
 
 ' into a f^m quite unlike th^English. 
 
 To a certain extent diff^enc6s of phraseology between Latin and 
 
 English are matters of detail that the inost complete vocabulary 
 
 could not fully treat, but certain general rules may be given which 
 
 —r^~- have a very wide a^pplicatiop. These rules are really illustrations 
 
 ' of one great principle : that the genius of the Latin language is 
 
 above all things direct^ definite and concrete^ like the Boman char- 
 
 ac fco r i ta^ff^ 
 
 «««*«*««*■ 
 
 atiye. 
 
 -./ 
 
/i 
 
 412 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 ;^ Hence the general rule for narrative prose, first to see clearly 
 what is th^ exact meaning of the English phrase, and then «to 
 express that meaning in the simplest and most direct manner. 
 Some important special applications of this rule are as follows : 
 
 (a) Awid' metaphorical or picturesque expreMons. Very little 
 moderp English prose is as simple arid direct as Ceesar's style; 
 much even of our everyday language is in fact highly metaphorical. 
 In narrativa prose, the best plan is to avoid figurative Language 
 altogether ; translate thj9 thoughts and not the words. So, for 
 example: 
 
 He left no stone unturned .-^Nlhil praetermlsit. 
 
 He turned a deaf ear to this advice : Quod odnsiliam ndn Dro- 
 bavit. ' 
 
 He sacrificed friendship ^njhe alta/r of patriotism: Amioltiam 
 reX publloae posthabult. ""■ — — w , 
 
 Where figurative language is found in Latin (as in Cicero's ora- 
 tory and Lfvy's semi-poetical prose) .we cotistantly find either that 
 a simile is referred to the metaphor or that the metaphor is quite 
 different frcfcn the English one, and even then is apt to be toned 
 down by taniquam, quasi, quidam, etc. 
 
 (h) Avoid abstract forms of expression. Latin has fewer a^bstract 
 words than English, and those it does possess it uses much^ 
 sparingly than we do, many of them being found only in 
 sophical writings. The number of abstract words which can «.x^x v 
 be ventured upon, in narrative prose is very limited, such as ami- 
 c^ia, auctdritas, cHeritas, magnitudd, studium. Almost invariably 
 the English abstract expression should be turned by a concrete 
 Latin phrase ; as, j 
 
 On the conclusion of this tvar ; H66 bollo oonf eotd. 
 
 On the receipt of this information: Quod cum nuntlatum esset. 
 
 They promised submission to his authority : Ea quae imperasget 
 •e fact ur OS poll ioltl sunt. _ T 
 
 L^ InCcesar'sconstdship: Caesare odn«nle* 
 
 His measures: Ea quae» faolebat. 
 
 Ifipursxiance of his annwil ciustom :^Vt qnotannU oonsno^erat. 
 
 So the indirect question furnishes an equivalent for many ab- 
 stract words (sefe section 37) and the vagtfe word res often affords » 
 convenient translation for various wofds such as circumstances, 
 situations, measures, etc. 
 
 Similarly Latin is very deficient in class names which express 
 the doer of an action, such aa fugitive, defender, coml)^tdnt, dis- 
 coverer, believer. These can generally be expressed by the verb • 
 ^•g-y f'ugientes or el qui fugiebant. * 
 
 (c) -^^^j^ ^^ personification of t'nommate 
 
 I»" ' 
 
 things or of qiMlities, 
 
 Latin Betdom represehfe 4ny thin^ "But a living thing as the doer of 
 some action, while English so constantly makes inanimate objects 
 
 # 
 
/••->? 
 
 PART V.—SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 413 
 
 or abstract n6uns the subject of a verb of action that we scarcely 
 notice the personification. 
 
 Casar'a sitdden approach frightened them into sufmdaai<m: Cae- 
 saris repentlno adventu oommotl, legratos de deditlone mit- 
 tant. 
 
 The darkness of i^ night hid us from the enemy : Propter tene- 
 bras* hostes nostros non oonsplcatl sant. 
 
 ^ed (done v^l save tis : fjn» est liji oelorltate posita salus. 
 His dying vxnxls : Ejna morientlH verba. 
 
 (d) The chief weight of the sentence falls in Latin Upon the verb, 
 whereas in English there is a tendency to make the noun the sig- 
 nificant word. So for English phrases consisting of some Anem- 
 phatic verb, such as make, have, take, do, etc., followed by a verbal 
 noun which is the really significant word, Latin often has a verb 
 which contains the meaning of the English noun within itself ; as, 
 JBe made reply to me: Mlhl respondit. 
 He funs no hesitation: Non dubttat. 
 He took his depoHure : Dlsoessit. 
 
 This verb is often accompanied by a cognate accusative (see seo- 
 ion 72) in the form of a neuter pronoun or adjective ; as, ^ 
 
 '**^ Hiey can do no harm to us : NlhU nobis nooere possant. 
 X'^--^e made mxiny promdses : Malta pollioltns est. 
 They make the same attempt: Idem cdnantnr. 
 This idiom is especially noticeable in the impersonal use of the 
 passive voice of intransitive verbs (section 56) ; as, 
 ' , Mention has been made of him : De illd dictum est. 
 There must he no delay : Non ounotandnm est. 
 
 (e) The active voice is preferred to the passive in the leading verbs 
 in narrative prose, because of the desire to state exactly and natur- 
 ally w*hat takes place. But as Latin prefers to keep the same 
 subject throughout a period, the verbs in the subordinate clauses 
 and In participial phrases will often be passive while the main 
 verb is, according to rule, in the active voice. Two important and 
 frequent examples of the use of the passive are the ablative abso- 
 lute construction, ^nd the impersonal passive construction. 
 
 (/) ^f^ precise n%eaning of both English and Latin words must be 
 dosdy watched. It will seldom happen that a word in one language 
 corresponds exactly in all it« uses to any one word in the other. 
 
 i. For instance, in English very many transitive verbs may be 
 
 used intransitively also, whereas in Latin this much less frequently 
 
 ^ occurs. L» such cases the intlransitive use is expressed sometimes 
 
 ~ by the passive voice, sometimes by the active with the reflexive 
 
 pronoun, and sometimes by a quite diflFerent verb; as, 
 
 move (transitive), moTftre ; (intransitive), movgrl. 
 
 . J^rremfer (fapBmsitive)» dfid e ro4- ji^tranm 
 
 increase (traniaitive), aagire ; (intransitive), orSsoere or 
 *^ angrerl. 
 
r" 
 
 414 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 ii. Again, many English words have widely different meanings,' 
 according to the context ; as, 
 
 'M;et^£ (burden), onus ; (influenc^^^uotorlt&s. 
 Rome (the city), Boma ; (the nation^T popnlns Bdmanns. ' 
 ./{e2c{ (piece of land) ager ; (battle), acies or proellnm. 
 ask (make a request), peto ; (put a question), qnaerd. 
 commcmd (give an order), Imperd ; (have authority over), 
 praeitnin. 
 ; iii. An entirely different source of mistakes is the fact that many 
 English words derived from Latin originals have in the course of 
 time taken on a very different meaning. For instance : 
 
 obtineo =holdy possess; 
 oooapd = seize; 
 otBLoinm =dAity; 
 reoipto =' recover, regain; 
 ■Scurns = free from anxiety; 
 
 obtain =odn8eqaor, adlplscor. 
 
 occupy =oht\ntib. ^ 
 
 office = maglstratas. 
 receive =aooiplo. 
 secure =tutas. 
 
 (gr) Omit unnecessary and m^dy ornamental epithets. Some . 
 English writers are fond of heightening the effect by adding words 
 or phrases that may adorn tU^ style, but add nothing to the mean- 
 ing. Thesia may safely be omitted ; as, The enemy uhxs awaiting the 
 approach of our {gaUa/nt) leader. They aim^ their weapons par- 
 ticularly at the horses {of the enem,y^s cavalry). 
 
 (h) Here also it may be in place to call attention again to the 
 precision shown in the Latin use of the tenses, especially i. in sub- . 
 ordinate clauses referring to an action prior to that of the main i^ 
 verb (sections 178, ii. and 187, b, i.);«ii. in the tenses of the par- 
 ticiple (section^ 41) ; iii. after verbs of p'ommngf and hoping, etc 
 (section 17). In one important respect only is Latin less exact 
 than English,,, namely, in the frequent use of primary sequence 
 , after secondary tenses (section 190, vi.). , ^ 
 
 „ Structure. ^ 
 
 : 204. It may happen, however, that all the preceding rules about' 
 syntax, connection and phraseology have been carefully observed, 
 and yet that the result is far from being good Latin prose. For it 
 may be that the English passage is constructed in a way that is 
 very unlike Latin usage. 
 
 Modem English narrative is apt to consist of a series of detached 
 sentences, each comparatively simple in its structure, generally 
 short, and containing very few terbs. "^ Classical Latin narrative is 
 more apt to group several of these crisp sentences into a longer 
 and more complex sentence, making the ve^ which expresses the 
 main idea the principal verb, and putting the others in various 
 Itubordiiuie relations. ~- ~ 
 
1 
 
 J, 
 
 
 
 
 saningsj : " '^^ 
 
 ^ . ■'' ' ^ ■ 
 
 nns.' 
 
 r 
 
 ». 
 er), 
 
 • 
 
 1" * 
 
 it many 
 ourse of 
 
 . ■ .' . 
 
 plsoor. 
 
 ■■■■■* >■ "' 
 
 J., "■.■'--. "* 
 
 ■ - - : 
 
 Some -.- 
 g words 
 
 V 
 
 e mean- " " . 
 itmg the 
 yns par- 
 
 
 i to the 
 in sub- . 
 le main ^ 
 he par- 
 ',ng, etc. 
 )s exact 
 
 ;'■'■ ' i. - ' ' 
 
 equence 
 
 
 )s about' 
 
 " , 
 
 )8erved, ^^^^ 
 
 
 For it 
 
 
 that is 
 
 
 PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION 
 
 415 
 
 -* Again, even when English does have a long complex sentence, 
 it is more loosely constructed than the Latin, period (section 9). 
 In the Latin" period (as in the Latin short sentence) the main 
 thought is, as a rule, not complete until the final words are given ; 
 the period Is intended to be grasped as a whole ; grammatically it 
 may appear very involved, but the thoughts are marshalled in a 
 perfectly logical order. While in the English long sentence (as 
 often in the short sentence also) we seldom find the main thought 
 left in susiJense until the very end of the sentence ; £he final words 
 are not th6 emphatic ones ; the thought is intended to be grasped 
 in detaiL ' ' ; — «c- wr" 
 
 Gontraat the following passages : „ 
 
 Our men thin marched back to camp. Not a mnn had been 
 killed, and very few wounded. Yet they had expected a formidable 
 ' campaign, for the enemy nuftibered four hundred and thiHy thousand 
 men. Nostrl ad unnin onines inoolames perpanels valneratig 
 ox tanti belli timdre, cum hostinm nnmertis oapltam qnad- 
 ringrentdrom triglnta mUliam faisset, se In oastra recene- 
 runt. *^ 
 
 In the elementary stages of the writing of continuous Latin 
 prose. It IS not necessary to study very closely the formation of the 
 Latin period» which, after all, is by no means invariably employed 
 by even the most careful Latin prose authors ; the following sug- ^ 
 gestions, howeveiw will be found of importance for even the be- 
 ginner, ^v 
 
 ^(o) Arrange the various clauses of a sentence in the logical order " 
 of thought, which in narrative commonly means the order of time. 
 Put all clauses or phrases expressing attendant circumstances before 
 the mam verb, and put last the clause on which the emphasis falls. ' 
 Ihis will generally be the principal clause, but see section 6, ii. 
 
 (6) Reduce the number of principal verbs by grouping short 
 independent sentences that relate to a common topic into a com- 
 plex sentence. 
 
 (c) Within this complex sentence or period, avoid as far as pos- 
 sible changes of subject. The subject of the main verb should, if 
 exprefwed at all (section 202, 6), appear early in the sentence and 
 be made, where possible, the subjept of the dependent clauses also. 
 
 ffli^?**,^^® ^^ ^^"^ °^ inserting a subordinate clause in the 
 middle of the clause on which it depends, but the loosely joined 
 parenthesis should be carefully avoided. 
 
 ^ Even^ whew-t h e r e i a n o need for -f rog 
 
 '»(»> 
 
 into a period, it may often be convenient to readjust some of the 
 
 sentMices 
 
> 
 
•*w>iiM«jiir 
 
 
 416 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 1 
 
 
 clauses or phrases in the passage for translation, shifting them 
 from one part ht the sentence to another"^ even transferring them 
 t<^the preceding or the following sentence. For instance, in the 
 passage : On receiving this news he led his forces against the enemy. 
 His marchy thmtgh rapid, was so conducted as to save the troops from, 
 all fatigue, the translation is simplified by 'transferring the idea of 
 marching rapidly to the preceding clause : Quae cum aadlvisset, 
 odplas udv«r»ui^ hostes quam oelerrime duxit; Itk tanien at 
 mllltes labdre et itlnere non defatlgatl slnt. similarly, in- 
 stead of representing one action as the result of some preceding 
 action it may bo more convenient to represent the/ latter as the 
 cause jof the former. 
 
 2d5. Some miscellaneous differences of idiom also deserve notice 
 (a) English often expresses emphasjs by means of the verb to 
 generally followed by the relative pronoun or adverb ; as, It was'I 
 who did it. '" Piso was thefitst to readi the camp. Latin has nothing 
 corresponding to this, but expresses emphasis by otjher nieanaj as, 
 Ego feoL Primus ad oastra pervenlt PXao. 
 
 (fc) Latin constantly tends to look upon an actio|ri as proceeding 
 
 ^rom a certain source or quarter, where in'^nglish it is considered 
 
 as happening Mt>* that quarter ; as, He fought on Jwrsiback : Ex eqao 
 
 pugnabat. They attack our troopsi^ httth flanks: Nostros ab 
 
 utroqne latere agrgredlantar. ^e^also section 128, v.) 
 
 (c) In Latin, demonstrative and ^ative pronoun s (especially hlc) 
 referring to some previouA n^ffl^OT the substanc^ of a previous 
 clause are put in agreement^;Jl^^^^ noun, instead lof in the objec- 
 tive genitive depending on It; iWlish has frequently this same 
 condensed form of expression ; as, TKrau^hfear of mis circumstance 
 (or through this fear) : B^'ineta { = Hujus ret nietn). 
 
 (d) In such, expressiona as Th&^rewd Vabhisl Tour 'excellent 
 father. So brave a manias you, Latin usfjs an appc^^itive with the 
 superlative in agreeinent ; as, Fablus oailidlaalmas Imper&tor, 
 ^ater tnaa vlr o,ptinvuH, Ta vlr fortlaaimna. When, however, 
 such euifehets have no bearing on- the context they should oe 
 
 -tMnitted altogether (see section 203, g). \ ^ ' 
 
 (e) This jjfreat ^i^lr^ularly in Latin hlo tantaa notWio m&gnas. 
 
 ^ (/) Latin freJ^uently uses et or -quo to join adjeWives, where 
 ''^Einglish omits the connective ; so especially with mvll^ ; as, Many 
 greiU contests : Multae et m&gnae ooutentlon^a. \ 
 
 (g) The Latin adjective or participle frequently has the value of 
 a noun; as, noatrl, oitr nun; omnia aua, all their property; 
 •aplentea, unse men, philosophers ; fuglentfta, the r^etrekttng force. 
 
 ..r" 
 
ng them 
 ing them 
 e, in the 
 e enemy. 
 Hyps from 
 e idea of 
 llvlgset, 
 kiuen at 
 arly, in- 
 treceding 
 ir as the 
 
 'e notice, 
 erb to 6( 
 It waa'I 
 I nothing 
 iansj as, 
 
 oceeding 
 nsidered 
 Bx eqnd 
 itros ab 
 
 ) . 
 
 ially hlc) 
 previous 
 lie objec- 
 his same 
 ximstance 
 
 'excellent 
 with the 
 perator, 
 bowever, 
 lould 1l>e 
 
 n&gnns. 
 
 )8, where 
 bs, Many 
 
 I value of 
 wroperty; 
 ng forc«» 
 
 PART v.— SYNTAX AND POMPOSITION. 
 
 417 
 
 / 
 
 ' EXERCISE 30. 
 
 (Based on Ccemr, Bl\ IV. 1-^.) ^^ 
 
 In the foUowinf year a large number of Gauls crossed the Rhine 
 
 for the purpose of harassing the Ubii and keeping them from tilling 
 
 their landa They thought that by this means they would make 
 
 the Ubu tributary to them, and that theumen and boys whom they 
 
 captured in war they would sell at a high price to the SuebL These 
 latter were desirous of making the Ubii as weak as pcisible, because 
 they thought it disgraceful to permit any tribe to become accua- 
 tomed to dwell not far from their territories, andljelieved that if 
 the Ubn were driven out, thfrTencteri, who adjoined them oh the 
 other side, would not venture to remain. The Suebi have large 
 experience in war ; they are able to endure any toil, and they use 
 r skins for (pro) clothing. Prom childhood they are not allowed to 
 do anything contrary to custom, and to be refined is considered 
 unmanly. On account of (propter) the character q| their food and 
 their daily training under arms tkey ^e men of immense strength, 
 and are said to be the most warlike of aU the Germans. 
 
 ^ EXERCISE 31. 
 
 {Based on Cassar, Bk. 7V. 4, S.) . ' 
 
 The tracers were compelled against their wilNo halt and Btatd 
 what they had learned in the districts through which they had been 
 wanderihg. At first (pnmoy they pretended to have heard rtothing. 
 
 , At last they informed Ceesar'^at the Menapii whom he had driven 
 out of Germany had returned secretly to their villages, that a largo 
 part of their cavalry had crossed the Rhine and Were putting to * 
 death those who dwelt on this side the river. Knowing the fickle- 
 ness of the Gauls, and fearing they would be anxious for a change, 
 ho thought he ought to cross the Rhine and, after crushing the 
 
 : Menapii, seiae their boats. Before he could reach the river, how- * 
 ever, they had been informed of his approachjand had placed guards 
 •Jong the banks. Being unable to advance, he halted for three 
 days, in order to discover what plans the Gauls were forming. 
 
 «T 
 
 ^ 
 
••MPipfinififaf^PfPii 
 
 418 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 .EXERCISE 32. 
 ^ {Based on Cceaar, Bk. IV. 6-8.) . 
 
 Hearing that tho Germans, after seizing the lands of others, had 
 begun to wander far and wide, and were but a few days' march 
 from him, he determined to set out for the army. The leading 
 men of the Suebi, who were with him, suspecting what he was 
 going to do, asked to be allowed to remain in Gaul. To these 
 Caesar made answer as follows : " I hav^ set out unwillingly earlier 
 than I am accustomed, in order that the Suebi and their depen- 
 dants may not begin a more serious war than I wish to meet. I 
 shall not allow the Suebi to drive out the friends of the Roman 
 people fron» their homes, and I shall assign no lands to those who 
 have invited th^ Germans to make war upon the Treveri. No 
 one can be more useful to you than the Romans ; some think that 
 we are no match for the Gei'mans, but there is no ono wh^m we 
 are nob reAdy to resist. If you ask aid from us, we shall protect 
 your territories ; if you should wish to settle in Gaul, we should 
 give you lands. But it is not right for tljose who have been the 
 aggressors in doing wrong, to complain and beg for mercy. This 
 was not the custom of your ancestors. " 
 
 * EXERCISE 33. ' ' 
 
 / ' {BcHied on ae«ar, Bk. IV. 9-lI.) I 
 
 When these^ ambassadors returned* to Cresar they said they had 
 reported his demands to their friendi^ arid that the next day the 
 leading men of the tribes which inhabited the Vosges range would 
 assemble to discuss these matters. Meanwhile, they said, envoys 
 were being sent to beg the Helvetiananofe to cause delay, but to 
 accept these terms, and that if he should give them lan opportunity 
 of returning beyond the Rhine they would keep the Sequani from 
 fighting. . ij 
 
 • Thinking that he ought to wait until all his amy should assemble, 
 Caesar said that he would not move his camp that day, but that on 
 the da.y following they must all meet (comjredior) him four miles 
 from the camp, as had been agreed. Having arranged this matter, 
 he announced to the officers whom ho was sending in advance for 
 the purpose of foraging, that the Helvetians had been advancing 
 for Bovoral day s t and wore di ' nwiug near th w= 
 
 
 'k 
 
 V-;-V'- 
 
 
 f '■■' . .V 
 
 ,"y 
 
 -J- - 
 
 
 caiiip ; and that hii 
 ha4 given a pledge to the senate not to hanws their lino of march, 
 
era, had 
 3' march 
 leading 
 he was 
 ?o these 
 y earlier 
 ' depen- 
 iieet, I 
 
 Roman 
 ose who 
 sri. No 
 ink that 
 hom we, 
 
 protect 
 I should 
 )een the 
 ', This 
 
 hoy had 
 day the 
 e would 
 envoys 
 , but to 
 jrtunity 
 ni from 
 
 isemble, 
 that on 
 ir miles 
 matter, 
 inco for 
 vancing 
 
 that he 
 march, 
 
 PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 419 
 
 EXERCISE 34. 
 
 {Based on Cceaar, Bk., IV. 1-12.) ^^ 
 The Ubii had Wn bverpowered by the Treveri three days 
 before ma cavalry engagement, and after many had been skT 
 
 b/thTRh 'T:r ^^^--^^-^othe islands'which are foted 
 by the Rhme and Meuse, not far from the sea, and inhabited by 
 many savage tnbes. .Impelled by their lack of provision^ these 
 send ambassadors to C«,sar, U> beg him not to suffer any stote to 
 
 !th? ?? ^ .^ r ^*'""' "'^ ^"'^^"^"g «f '^^^^ thought that he 
 
 ought not to wait for the remaining portion of his army, which wa! 
 
 ^^ <^-^nt and , out as early as possible for the'^I.tC 
 
 J^w near he islands, he was informed by those who were pre 
 
 JBPg ^'^ ^f^"!"^^ *h«*the Gauls had ntoved their camp fearer 
 
 ■Ptver, and with their cavalry, who are accustomed to leaj down 
 
 apurpose of securmg forage and plunder. 
 
 •*f 
 
 EXERCISE 35. 
 
 (Based on Oceaar, Bk. IV. J-il.) 
 
 Although (etH) he h«d not yet discovered their phvne, yet, know- 
 
 ng the,r oueto™ he suapeoted that thi, would h«pp;„, LZZ, 
 
 th. they would ,„v.te the Suobi to seize .11 the toCna belorX 
 
 muld gather supplies »„d post g.„is6ns. He was also .faud of 
 
 Gaufs "rdThol tri'^r'" ■^ "-"^ ""»'*'"'' «- 'heot;: 
 
 new plans. So he decided to summon all the leading men and the 
 senate to him. and pretended to have hoard that no one~uita: 
 to remain ,n the lands which he had assigned them. When he 
 asked what was their reason for complaining, or why (c„r) thev 
 J^ented their ,«th, they mado.no answer, i; last s„m ^^ ^ 
 
 ^ LZ7r^ ""' """ ""«^ «'"'''' «"""^' ""thing : they had 
 hought that If they drove out the Romans, they would oitainfrTm 
 the Sucbi whatever they asked for. C«H«r thought hecouldpu 
 
 .V . .u "'t """" *h " if "m, disnicl,, uvtiii 11 they gkVe a phj„ 
 ttat the, wo«M sot be the slave, of untrustworthy rumors. bSJ 
 
I til l I I I 'm MS 
 
 SSBBRB 
 
 420 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 ii: 
 
 m 
 
 in order to calm and reassure their hearts, he announced that it 
 seemed "best ^oV them to remain with him for some days ; after |ie 
 had inquired Jito thj& outrages of the Suebj, t%y might depart. 
 
 ^ EXERCISE 36;" . - ; 
 
 {Baaed on Ccesar, Bl\ IV. 12, IS.) 
 
 After listening to the ambassadors, he said that they could not 
 obtainf their request for a truce until all their leading men came to 
 him to clear themselves ; that they had without provocation sur-. 
 rounded and put to death sevei^l of our men the day before, 
 
 jamong them* the brotber of Pisb the Aquitanian. Osesar was 
 aware that the Gauls Jiad deceived Him, and that their forces were 
 being increased, and, knowing their treachery, he. thought he 
 ought ^ detain the envoys as long as he could. He gave orders 
 next d^y thfit all the cavalry bo led out of the camp, and that after - 
 the battle had begun, the rest of the f9rces should bring aid, if 
 they perceived that our men were being thrown into confusioti. 
 The enemy did'^ot wait for an attagk to be made ; putting spurs 
 to their horses, they did not cease from their flight until they 
 caught sight of-th^ Mouse. More than eight hu;idred were slain 
 in this battle, and Csesar gained such {tantus) prestige that the 
 Germans thought it would be the height of madpess to make war 
 on those who had so {tarn) quickly put to flight five thousand 
 •Gauls, • ' ./ / ■ 
 
 * : ' , .; EXERCISE 37* T^* 
 
 ♦ , /'' ' (BoMd jon CceMr, Bk. jy. 14-16.) ' ,, 
 
 ^As theirlands had* been laid waste by the Suebi, the Ubii weipft 
 
 easily induced to leave hon\e with their women and children. 
 
 . After holding a council, they began to beg the Gauls^to give them 
 
 ' lands ; if they were prevented from lending ai^, le^ them merely 
 
 give them permission to cross. As the Gauls had given hostages 
 
 to Ceesar, they did not venture to do so without Ceesar's consent. 
 
 Besides which they wore aware that it was better to be sate in the 
 
 friendship of^he Roman people than to-be afraid of the treachery 
 
 of the Germans. Acc( )rdingly (tYcu/i<«) they quickly sent messengers 
 
 t Q_flp »y ftr te b«K him to load his forces j^^^^^ the 
 
 Bhioe. and del<|»4 them frpm the cruel vengeance of the Ubii. 
 
 III 
 
l/ 
 
 .1»ART v.— SVNTAX AND ..COMPOSITION. 4il 
 
 >- . ft ' ^ -■..■•■ 
 
 ' Csesar, for these reasons, thought he ought to join battle before 
 the Ubii could join the forces of ^Tioviaftus. The enemy, alarmed 
 at his approach, speedily took, up «rm» and began to offer re- 
 sistance ; but when they saw they col^ld not prevent our me^ 
 bursting into their camp, they despaired of safety and threw away* 
 their arms. Four hundred of them rushing out of the' camp sought 
 safety in flight. These reached the Rhine in safety, but being- 
 unable to cross on account of (pi'opter)Mi6 force of the current, 
 
 - they were killed to a man by our cavalry. The rei^t surrendered 
 to Oaepar. On that day Ctesar captured (dapw) thirty-eight mili- 
 tary standards, and a large amount ot baggage. On hearing of th« 
 battle the most distant tribes of Germany sent envoys to Csesj^r to 
 
 ^promise that they would not n^o war on the Roman people/ : ' 
 
 ^ • •• EXERCISE"38. -g -1, 'y'-:^['-' 
 
 ; « ' {Based on Cixsar, Bin! Jl^.vJB, 19.) . . 
 
 On ^scovering that the bridge had been §nish§d and that the ' 
 ^army had be^un to be led across, the Suebi removed from their 
 towns and burned al^ th^ir dwellings. All who could not feeir 
 arms were ordered aclj'ordingto their custom t<xhidelin the woods. 
 Meanwhile they sent out, messengers to several spates telling them 
 > prepare for flight and to remoye all their possessions into the 
 midst of their territoriea Gaesar had decided to spend eighteen 
 days in the districts in which, the enemy had collected, in ordot 
 that he might cut down the drops and fight a decisive battle with 
 the Germans, but aftdr heleamed that the garrison which he had. 
 left at the bridge was beiijg hard prbssed, he left their territories 
 
 • within ten days after he had brought his army across. He broke 
 
 |A)wn the bridge and withdrew to the country ^f the Treveri. 
 
 ^ere he learned .that the Suebi had returned to their villages, had 
 set free the hostages which Were being l)i»ught to him, and were 
 taking vengAnce on the states which had sought peace from the 
 Romans ; and that these wer^ awaiting the assistance he had 
 promised.. * ? ^ \ 
 
 :": ; .— ---^-^-' -^ 'EXERCISE 3©.'^^- ..^^, ...-,.. .. 
 
 {Based on Cemir, Bk. IV. SO, */.) » 
 • Befni 
 
 mBetting^ut Jiimsolt fog Britfti»^, CH/sai had l lw previow 
 wmter sent in advance Caius Voluwnus, whom iie considered to 
 
 ■ « •'•* 
 
c,: 
 
 422 
 
 PRlMAttf LATIJl fiOOK. 
 
 / r- 
 
 %■ 
 
 be (a man) of great worth and discretion ; he had giveAjiim in- 
 sfcruction;^ to get aequiwnted with the country, as far as ne coul4, 
 and find out what "states would ally themselves with tlie Roman 
 people. Volusenus had not ventured to approach the island that 
 year, as he understood that the winters are early in that region 
 and that there are no suitable harbors,; he had, however^discov- 
 er^ from certain (qnidam) traders what was the character of the 
 inhabitants and from what place was the shortest passage. As 
 soon as (tibi) the time of year was suitable he set out, and landing 
 from his shji), examined the whole sea-coast. He visiled several 
 states and made liberal promises if the Britons" would give hostages 
 to Ccesar and promise riot to furnish «&id- to our enemies ; he an- 
 nounced that a large number of ships of war had ' been ordered to 
 assemble, and that, if opportunity bffered, Ccesar would set out for 
 Britain that summer. On discovering that Cwsar was building a 
 fleet and wad going to visit the island, several traders who had 
 been of great .assistance to us in the former wars, came to him 
 and urged- him net to venture on making the attempt, because he 
 could not conquer the island, a large part of which wa? inhabited ' 
 by barbarians ; these had great experience in war, and would not 
 obey the authority" of anyone. Although Ccesar knew that these 
 traders were loyal to him, he yet did not think highly ot their 
 ' opinion, and gave orders that tho {orces should set out as quickly 
 
 >pos8ible. ^ EXERCISE40.^ - \ - 
 
 i' (Bcued oh Goisar, Bk. IV. IS-Sl.) . '" /- 
 
 When lie had formed this plan, Ciesar sent out messengers to 
 all the states that had promised him vessels, to announce that* 
 as (cum) he had accomplished everything for whiclffie had crossed 
 th^llitine, he- was going to visit Britain, and would spend the rest 
 of th^ summer in that island i accordingly they were to assemble 
 with all their vessels as soon as possible, for the purpose of making 
 war. As- soon as this plan was communicated to Commius, the 
 Atrebatian; who was soverieign over the states which Ceosar had 
 ^* conquered in the war with the ^eneti, he decided that he ought 
 for several reasons to go to Cwsair in order to urge him not to cross 
 over unttl%e surveyed the whole situation. He thought that even 
 
I^ART v.— SYNTAX ANt> COJlPOSlTIOif. 
 
 m 
 
 . i, 
 
 this war, and would inspire fear in no one ; that the Roman, people 
 had no good reason for demanding supreme power ii^^Britain, while 
 the Britons resist most valiantly those who make war on them ; 
 and that if Ceesar should be hard pressed by the Britons, he him- 
 self wo'uld have reason to fear for his own safety. Csesar, however, 
 answered that if anyone was alarmed by the enemy's renown in 
 war, and did not dare to make the attempt, but wished to remain 
 in Gaul, he would grant him permission, but that on his return 
 he would, according to his custom, punish all who urged the leading 
 men of Gaul liot to t{iko part iii the war. . 
 
 EXERCISE 41. 
 
 {Baaed on Ocemr, Bk. IV. IS-Sl.) 
 ;— After the flight of the Morini, Csesar determined that he ought 
 not to wait for the bridge to be finished, but should take- his men 
 over in boats. He ha4 no fekrs for the ciyalry who were pursuing 
 thd enemy, although they had not yet returned, 'as he had ordered 
 them to stay for a few days in the country of the Morini to secure 
 forage. .Crossing the river with the rest of his army, he «ent 
 Labienus in advance to find out what were the numbers of the 
 ,*^enemy and in what direction they had rptired. The enemy, on 
 learning of Caesar's advance, were rejoicing that he was giving 
 them, an opportunity of freeing th^nselves. they thought that if 
 they could surround our column iLd prevent our men from re- 
 ■ turning to Gaul, they should be safbsfor th^ future, and no one 
 would venture to lead his forces against them. Accordingly under 
 the pretext of surrendering, their leading men and elders came in 
 Ij^Y-ge numbers to Cupsar to promise to'acdept his terms and to beg 
 him not to make war on them. , Such Was the reputation of his 
 army, they said, that they considered "it the height of folly to 
 resist the Romans, and for this reason they sought peace and 
 friendship. Crosiir thought that a most fortunate thing had hap- 
 pened, and answered them in kindly terms, promising to make 
 peace with them, if they should istirrender to him them6n who, in 
 the war with the Veneti w^ich ho had finished a shortJiime before, 
 had treacherously put to death the king of the AquitanJ^ns. They 
 promised to brjng them within a few days, and urged him to vJiiit 
 their villaget. The next day Caasar setting out in the misiiiing 
 
 .-fe: 
 
4^4 
 
 PRliiART^ LAtlN BOOK. 
 
 reached the cbnfluence of two rivers. Suddenly the Germaits 
 rushed out of the woods, and confronted our men. Befpre OsBsar 
 could draw up the triple line of battle, the enemy made their 
 attack. Several of our men, panic-stricken by the confusion, . 
 ■I^rew themselves into the river; the rest Csesar ordered to put 
 the baggage in one place, and quickly taking thdir arms to join 
 
 battle. V ' 
 
 ', g:; EXERCISE 42. v^ . ' 
 
 {BMed on C(X8ar, Bij^ IV. SSf $S.) * . ' ^ 
 
 ETaving pointed out what he thought should be done in order to 
 
 settle these af&irs, Caesar gave two legions to Cotta to lead against 
 
 the Morini, who had hot done, what they had promised ; the 
 
 i^maining legion, with all the cavalr^, was ordered to occupy the 
 
 harbors. While he was carrying out these measures, the Moririi, 
 
 thinking it by no means a favorable time for waging war, sent 
 
 ambassadors to Csestur. He .demanded of the envoys eighty meh-^>f^ 
 
 war and sev6n transports, and ordered a large number of hostages 
 
 to be brought to him. "" When the vessels had been collected, he 
 
 warned the lieutenants to wait until they got a suitable wind, and 
 
 .. meanwhile to anchor their vessels in the farther harbor. After 
 
 • waiting eig^t days, on the ninth he ordered the signal to be given 
 
 and the anchors raised. The cavalry, to whom the transports had 
 
 been assigned, were prevented by the wind- from embarking ; the 
 
 .rest of the forces advanced about eighteen miilesy and having found 
 
 an unobstructed and level shore, waited at anchor for the* cjbvalry 
 
 to follow. When all the vessels had assembled, and the troops 
 
 had been ordered to land, Ceesar learned that the^ higher groui^d 
 
 '* and all the hills were held by the enemy, '.^sM. 
 
 • , EXERCISE 43. 
 
 ^ ' {Based on Casaar, Bk Iv/g4-S6.) ' « 
 
 Terrified by the unusual appearance of the ships of war and the 
 motion of the oars, which they are not accustomed to use on their 
 larger vessels, the barbarians hesitated a little, while our men, 
 leaping down into the waves, began to advance towards the shore. 
 As soon, however, as they perceived that our men wore impeded 
 Jbeoause of the heavy burdens they were carrying, the enemy, en- 
 
 couraging each other not to retreat, tried to keep our men front 
 
 - fc"?-* 
 
1:1 
 
 ^ARt v.— SYNTAX ANt> COM^SlTlON. 425 
 
 gaining a footing on solid ground, and whenever some would draw 
 
 near the shore, they would advance with the utmost bblduesa into 
 
 .th6 water, and, making an attack, throw them into great confusion. 
 
 CcBKir perceived that there would be very great difficulty, chiefly 
 
 because the ships, on account of the shoals, were anchored in deep 
 
 water, a^d that unless he sent aid to those who were in distress, 
 
 he would incur very great disgrace. Having prayed, in a loud 
 
 voice to aU the gods that his former good fortune might not fail 
 
 , him he cried out, -We must not abandon the eagle ; fight vigor- 
 
 i TV ?^"' """l^^^ y*''' "^^^ ^^^ ^''^^«^ ^ turn out favorably for 
 
 Vfche barbarians.'^ He then ordered the soldiers to i|\an the small 
 
 boats of the nearest transports and hurl their weapons at those 
 
 who were surrounding and attacking our men. ^ When the enemy 
 
 had been dislodged and driven off. C^sar sent forward the cavalry 
 
 . m order to follow them up. ' , 
 
 EXERCISE 44. : 
 
 / {Based on Ccesar, Bh. IV. S2-26.) , 
 
 While CsBsar was procuring vessels for carrymg the army across 
 to Untain, envoys came from the nearest canton of the Morini to' 
 apologize for not having doii^ their duty in time past, and to 
 reveal what was the policy of the Menapii. Ceesar, after demand- 
 ing eighty hostages and promising to take the Morim under his 
 protection, dismissed the envoys. When all the forces had 
 gathered, he assigned the ships, some to one legion, others to 
 another, and leaving Labienus with two legions by {ad) the sea to 
 hold the harbors, he ordered the rest of the troops to set sail iA a 
 body about the third hour. As the soldiers promptly executeiFall 
 his commands, the foremost ships reached Britain in a few hours • 
 but the transport vessels, whicl^foHowed the men-of-war, sailed so' 
 8l6wly that they did not make the island that day. 
 _ Th^re was very great difficulty in {im sremfm) landing, because 
 the cavalry and charioteers of the enemy were drawn up on the 
 shore and sought to prevent our men getting a footing on the 
 island. Both sides were unskilled in naval affairs, but the ground 
 was perfectly familiar to the natives. Ceesar ordered the ei^les to 
 
 boniaagainat the^iMHny. A few^ our nren-WBFS disrnayeri^ 
 the depth of the water and, hung back, but. the rest with the 
 
* » 
 
 426 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 utmost zeal and alacrity leaped down from the vessels, though im- 
 peded hy their anus. They advanced rather (magis) as thenature 
 of the place than (quam) as the science of war required, and being 
 unable to keep their rankB, they followed whatever standards were 
 nearest, and making an attack on the enemy, quickly put them to 
 flight. 
 
 , EXERCISE 46. , 
 
 {Based on Cceaar, Bh. I^. 1-19.) 
 
 The Suebi, who were the most warlike of all the Germans, used 
 to think it was greatly to their craiit as a community, that the 
 merchant» to whom they sold iike/nsh and eggs which they could 
 not use themselves, should ha^e access to their territories. These 
 merchants, however, all of/whom came from the districts beyond 
 the Rhine, they would comp^ to halt, even i^ainst their will, and 
 to inforn^ them what th^ had severally learned about the 
 war, and what was going on across the river I have mentioned 
 above. On that qceasion, after receiving information on these 
 
 points, the Suebi, fearing the merchants would not go back the 
 ^me way they came, refused them permission to depart unless 
 they promised not to approach the ocean, into which the Rhine, . 
 which rises in the Alps, flows, after forming several island». On 
 this account the merchants, fearing a conspiracy, as no time was 
 allowed for forming a plan, began to entreat Csesar to lend them 
 aid on the ground that they were sorely afflicted by the Suebi. On 
 hearing this Ceesar ordered a bridge to be built over the Rhine, 
 and leaving forces at each end as a guard, conducted the merchants 
 back {reduco) to their homes in Germany in safety, before the Suebi 
 could learn of the bridge being built. 
 
 ^ <" EXERCISE 46. * 
 
 (Based on Ccesar, ^k. IV. 1-19.) 
 
 ^ In the meantime, Caesar, having proceeded a three days' journey, 
 fell in with the enemy on the march about four miles from the 
 Rhine, and earnestly besought them to advance no further ; the 
 Ubii were friends of the Roman people ; why did the Suebi claim 
 any power or authority on this side of the Rhine? he did riot 
 
 think it was fair for the Gauls to cross into Germany, nor for the 
 
PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 427 
 
 ^ 
 
 Germans to cross into Gaul ; they must return to their own lands 
 if they, wished friendly relations to exist between him and them. 
 To these remarks, the Suebi made answer as they thought fit. 
 They were willing, jirovided they might, to settle in the territory of 
 the Ubii, but^they were not willing to become tributary to them, 
 even if they were much more civilized than the Germans; if this 
 were not granted them, let Cajsar'as speedily as possible lead his 
 army against them ; they were prepared to offer a brave resistance, 
 and would not beg off. Ciesar feared he would be prevented from 
 setting out for Britain, and that his forces might be crushed by 
 the superior nornbers of the enemy, and in order to secure a few 
 days' delay, hjtold them to go back at once to their own town 
 and return to hin*i on the following day. This they promised to 
 do on the condition that Caesar should not take his departure 
 ui^ they returned at the date specified. * . ^ n 
 
 EXERCISE 47. 
 
 {Baaed on Cmar, Bk. IV. 1-19.) " 
 
 ^ In the winter of Pompey's consulship, the Ubii attempted to 
 '^-reduce to subjection the Suebi, a very powerful tribe, who had 
 crossed the Rhine for the purpose of carrying on war against the 
 Romans. These Suebi were a race of giants, who from boyhood 
 followed their Own caprice, accustomed to no system of instruction 
 and recognizing no obligation. Their diet was composed mainly of 
 animal food, and their apparel was confined to skins, which they 
 profcured by the chase, in which much of their time was spent, 
 while (et) their bath was taken in the coldest rivers. As the Ubii,' 
 who were much more refined than the rest of the Germans, were un- 
 able to make headway against the violence of the Suebi, they sent 
 envoys to Caesar to ask aid on the ground that, owing to the 
 proximity of the enemy, there was a complete cessation of agricul- 
 tural operations. Caesar made reply to them as follows : That as 
 he regarded it.the height of folly for the Roman people to aUow 
 the Suebi to grow too powerful» he would send the two legions he 
 had with him to the assistance of the Ubii ; they themselves were 
 to l^main in the place where they had encamped, until he should 
 _-g°°^g JQ IhggLA jew Jm^ latflr, in oftftp h ft ww r w n ot for ced to tako 
 
 his arftiy across into the country of the Sugambri. After waiting 
 
428 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 a few days, they heard that envoys from the Suebi were with 
 Goesar ; so thinking no confidence ought to be placed in him, the 
 envoys returned to their own countrymen and informed them what 
 the Roman leader had stated were his intentions, and what they 
 had learned was going on in the camp. -^ 
 
 \EXERC1SE 48. 
 ' {Based on Cceaar, Bk. IV. 20-S6.) 
 
 9 
 
 On reaching Britain with the larger vessels, Cftjsar learned from 
 Yolusenus what was the nature of the hills which bordered so closely 
 on the sea that there was groat difficulty in finding a suitable 
 harbor. Yolusenus advised him to disembark and give two legions 
 to the lieutenants to lead against the state from which no enf oy had 
 come, but he thought that if he waited at anchor until the first 
 watch, all the'rest of the men of war would assemble there, and that 
 he would meet with suitableT'weather for drawing near the shore. 
 The natives learned of this plan of Caesar's and said that our men 
 must liot disembark ; they wished to keep the Romans from visiting 
 the islands, and they would advance into the water if the Romans 
 were to leap down from their vessels, and would hurl their weaponsf 
 at the horses, a mode of fighting they are accustoihed to pi^ctiso 
 very successfully. In the meanwhile the eagle-bearers of the first 
 and the third legion called the boldest soldiei^ |ioge^er from the 
 nearest ships, and in a loud voice bade them liauG^^m, unless they 
 were minded to let the eagle fall into the hands llJnfl^i3^«iny ; they 
 for their part would not hesitate to do their duty to tlllsp?* country. 
 They thought that when a few had venture! to trust themselves to 
 the waves,, the rest would leap down in a body and attack the 
 enemy. But they foun^ that Cfesar's old luck had forsaken him, 
 for although the Roman soldiers generally display the greatest 
 zeal in battle, the barbarians attacked tlhiem so vigorously that they 
 quickly put them to flight,^and the Romans had to draw off their 
 vessel^ and anchor them in the deep, water a mile f^om the shore. ' 
 
 c^ 
 
 EXERCISE 49. 
 
 (Bas€d on Ccemr, Bk. IV. 1-26.) 
 Certain traders, to whom the natives were- wont to sfeU such 
 
 / 
 
 things as were taken in war, brought word to CiBsar that the 
 
PART V. — SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 429 
 
 / 
 
 G^nnans, however few, would have the courage to advance against 
 any number of more civilized men, because they had been accus- 
 tomed to military discipline from boyhood. On these merchants, 
 however, Csesar considered he could place no reliance, since they 
 for the most part blindly followed untrustworthy rumors, and too 
 often made use of the wine which, on the ground that men were 
 rendered effeminate thereby, the Germans thought should not be 
 brought into the country. On learning that Ctesar kad determined 
 to make war on thfe Germans, several states sent ambassadors to 
 hi»J». ^8gi"8 hM|^*' to form the plan of crossing the river Rhine. 
 Ceesar, afterj|p^||l to their statement, thought it best to make 
 a kindly an^*^ to calm and reassure their hearts; but 
 
 the end of 1^I^^|<^|^as about as follows : .That th% must not 
 remain in Gi|iS|pliSy wished to be on friendly l^tos with the 
 state (res ptihlica) ; Re had learned that their cavalry had been jsent 
 across the Rhine for the purpose of laying waste the lands of the 
 Gauls and burning their villages ; he would not allow them to 
 harass the (xauls, who had embraced the alliance of the Roman 
 people many years before and had remained faithful i the Gauls 
 were complaining a^nd asking aid of him, and he had promised to 
 sebd three legions to their assistance. After these envoys were 
 ^is^iasedby Oeeisar, who also ordered the Germans to bring him 
 a large number of. hostages, they retimed to their own country, 
 where they reported to the leading men of the cantons the aSiwer 
 Cf«sar had made. - 
 
 £X£iR< 
 
 50.* 
 
 While CsBsar was attending to these liiattera, the Bituriges sent 
 envoys to him to ask his assistance agaim^t the Camutes, who, they 
 comj^ii^j^^ad made war on them. On receiving this informa- 
 ^ionf he led out of the camp the third and the sixth legion, |rhich,; 
 as has already been stated, had been sent across the riverro get 
 supplies. Thus with two legions he set out to punish thia Car- 
 nutes, who, on learning of Cjesar's approach, left the towns and 
 villages they were inhabiting and betook themselves to flight. 
 
 the 
 
 '^ The 8X6i'Live>^ which follow Are nlf 
 
 Wofds and phraseg required are ^ivei; iir tb^ foo(i 
 
^ 
 
 430 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 EXERCISE 61. 
 
 Having decided upon this plan, Caesar sent the ba^age belong- 
 ing to the whole army to Labienus, in the country of the Tteveri, 
 and gave orders for two legions to set out for the same destination: 
 he himself taking five legions withbut baggage,' began his march 
 against the Menapii. These latter did not gather any forces, but 
 took refuge in the forests, where they collected" all their belong- 
 ings. Cfeesar before very long had burned many of their villages, 
 and had captuf'JBd a large number of both people and cattle/ These^ 
 measures compelled the Menapii to send and sue for peace. He 
 demanded of them two bundled hostages, and declared that he 
 would take vei^geaoce upon them if they gave any aid to Ambiorix 
 or his officers. ' ^ ^^^ 
 
 1. expMUus, adj. 2. eorkfero. ' 3. peeu$. 
 
 « 
 
 EXERCISE 52. 
 
 When all the troops had mustered, he sets out against the Bello- 
 vaci, and establishes' his camp in their country. Cavalry is sent 
 out in all directions to capture some people from whom he may 
 discover the enemy's projects. The report these bring back is that 
 but few were found in the houses, and these not men who had 
 stayed behind to till ihe land, but men who had been sent back to 
 reconnoitre. Cwsar questioned these to find where the- main body* 
 of the Bellovaci was posted, and what were their intentions, .and: 
 leamigl that all the Bellovaci capable of bearing arms had colleis^d 
 imone ^lace, as well as the Aulerci'^and Atrebates ; *that the placo 
 ^ they had chosen for their cJfKip was in a wood surrounded' by i, 
 marsh,* »nd th»t all theiyMtggage the^ had placed in more^ dJAtani 
 parts. ' •- •■■•'■•. '/ -■ .■, -' V; ♦' - ' , ■'/;'-^' 
 
 * ■'■■■'■■■"■"' 'Si •■ .' 
 
 L fMMk %. multitudo. ». eircrtmdo. i. paltu. ■ v '\; .i ^ »-■ 
 
 ^ 
 
 "*<h 
 
 ■\ 
 
 EXERCISE 53. 
 
 Ho soon gathered a large army by ^'is means, and sent Luc- 
 terius, a mm possessed of great daring,' with a portion of the 
 force against the I^eni ; Vercingetorix himself .went against^the 
 Biturig^ As he^prew near, the Bituriges sunt to the i4<3dui, 
 under wnoao protectionyhuy- w e re, and bosought thoir aSBistanoot- 
 in order to be able to hold out against the invaders. On the 
 
 c 
 
 » 
 
 %.' 
 
 
!,! 
 
 PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 431 
 
 r" 
 
 li- 
 
 N^ 
 
 vice of the lieutenants whom Caesar had left with his army, the 
 ^dui sent a detachment of both infantry and cavalry to reinforce 
 the Bituriges. The auxiliary forcqs, on reaching the river «which 
 separates" the Bituriges from the ^dui, remained there jj^ few 
 days, and then returned home without having ventured Wctoaa 
 the river. They told our lieutenants that they had returned because 
 they were afraid of treachery on the part of the Bituriges ; they 
 had discovered that it was their intentioj( in case they crossed the 
 river, to surround them and put them to death. The Bituriges, 
 on their departure, at once joined Vercingetorix._ 
 1. aitdaeia. 2. divido^ 
 
 EXERCISi; 54. ' 
 
 As soon as the natives caught sight of our men they set upon 
 them from every side. Our troops were thrown into confusion 
 at first ;' some advised making a rush and breaking through," 
 seeing that the camp was close by ;' even if some portion should 
 be surrounded and slain, they were sure* the rest could be saved ;* 
 to others it seemed best to make a stand on the hill. This plan 
 the veteran' soldiers did not approve.^ Accordingly with mutual 
 exhortations to remember* their old-time valor, thoy forced their ' 
 way through th§ midst of the enemy and reached the camp in 
 safety to a man. Those who had taken up their position on the 
 hill were unable to abide by their resolve to defend themselves 
 on the higher ground, and at the same time could not display 
 the 8am§ energy» and quickness as the rest; they tried to make 
 their way back to the camp, and got on unfavorable"* ground, 
 where a largo number of them were surrounded by the natives and 
 perished. i» ', . . 
 
 \. pnmo. i. p^rrrmpo. 9. pvopinqum. 4. conftdo. 6. gervo. 6. «thw, -«ri». 7. 
 fW^. a reminiseor(vr. gen.). 9. ril. 10. iniqwu, ^ 
 
 ■ *- .^' '- ^ . ■ tT 
 
 u , *;. « "! EXERCISE 56. ' 
 
 1 When the news came, Crosar sent Labienus with six cohorts' to aid 
 the hard-pressed troops ; he gives him instructicms to withdraw* the 
 garrison, if he cannot hojd his ground, and niftko a sally ;' but^not 
 do so unless it is unav(>idable.* Finding the fortifications» 
 
 . iiiunpuble ttF withstanding ttio onemy'fl fierce 6ttSot,~^ifif)ieniii" 
 I , gathered together all th« cohorts, und inforraod Cfiesar by mei- 
 
.» •• 
 
 
 ^^ 
 
 J«f> 
 
 432 
 
 % 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 sengers what in his opinion should be -clone. Oresat made all 
 haste^bo the point to which he had dispatched Labienus, withdraw- 
 ing four cohorts from the nearest fort," and ordering part of the 
 cavalry to accompany him, while the others were to tak6 the 
 enemy in^ the rear. When they perceived him approaching, and 
 saw the cavtdry and cohorts which he had ordered to follow him, 
 our men, raising^ a cheer, beg4n the attack. Suddenly, while the 
 fight is racing fiercely on both sides, the cavalry is seen in the rear, 
 the en<^my take to flight, the cavalry meets the fugitives and a 
 great slaughter" follows. 
 
 1. eoJiors. 2. deduco. 8. «ruptio. L nmmirio,adv. i. mmitip, ft. caHel{if^ 
 1. a, 8. toUo. 0. caede». « -'r. • ^ 
 
 ■ ■■■ ■ ' ^i . - t- ■■■•-■■ ■• - -■ -J .- ,v,. .- ■, , 
 
 V ■ . - -■- ■ ■ .♦ ■:.■-- ' :- "'■:.' ■ :'.y ..-.'":'- ■ ■ _. 
 
 ^'■^^- . EXERCISE B^ ■ :v ;• C-,- -^:- :^i ■■''■-■* ■;:.:„■ 
 ' He surprised and overwhelmed the Arvemi, and then told the 
 cavi^ry' to range over as wid%,a tract of country as possible, and 
 inspire as much alarm in the Snemy as they could. WKwi news of 
 this occurrence was brought;, the rest of the Arvemi in terror 
 crowded about Vercingetorix and besought him to take tKought' 
 for them, and not' allow them to be plundered' by the Romans. 
 Influenced by their entreaties* he shifted his camp from the 
 country of the Bituriges towards the Arvemi. Ceosar after 
 two days' stay in this neighborhood, started oflf from the army to 
 * levy cavalry, leaving Bmtus in charge of the troops and tellinc him 
 that he would take care* not to be more than three days absent Iroia 
 fchecamp. ^^^. .^ 
 
 EXERCISE 57. ' \ ' ^ 
 
 At the iame time representatives of both the ./Edui and the 
 Trevori came to Cresar ; the former to complain thjit the Harudes, 
 #ho had recently' crossed over frqm Germany, were laying waste' 
 their lands^^ they had found it impossible, they said, to purchase* 
 neaoe even by giving hosfeges '; the Treveri to state that a hundred 
 Sntons of the Suebi had encamped* by the bank of the Rhine, and 
 werd attempting to cross over ; these were under the leadership of 
 
 H^d broihw» Nwwa ftoJ^ Oimboriii w Thi n n ewH d wply 
 
 
 CiBMr i bo dQoid«4 tJiiaVh^ ntust^ mall4) liaste" lost resistance be lm« 
 
 -**n- 
 
PART V. — SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 433 
 
 easy in case of a coiQbination of thie new band' of tlie.Suebi with 
 thp old® forces of Ariovistus, He got together suppli^ witb the 
 utmost expedition* and by forced" marches hastened aghast 
 Ariovistus. " •' 
 
 W 
 
 - 1. nuper. 2. popuior. 3. redimo. 4. consido. 
 7. manm. 8. vetm. '9. magnvi». 
 
 5. vehementer commoveo. 6. matt»ro« 
 
 M 
 
 EXERCISE 
 
 58. 
 
 Cffisar with ai^,. inferior force was besieging' trdops which had 
 not yet suffered defeat ; they were supplied with an abundance of 
 everything: every day* a treat number of ships arrived from all 
 parts to bring* provlfiohs. CcBsib on the other hand had consumed^ '. 
 ■all the com wljich he had been able to procure, and was in great 
 cfistreds ; yet^^is men bore theseipijivations*. with extraordinary 
 patience.' In the meantime Labienus, whom Coosar at his de- 
 parture had left in command of the camp, received information of 
 this state of amirh-s, and came to the assistance of the investing 
 army with two legi(^i!k. This movement was mqst .effectual ; for 
 within three days after Labienus arrived, the town of the enemy 
 was captured witho#, the loss of even one man on th6 side of. the 
 
 Romans. 
 1. obndeo. 
 
 2. cotidie. 8. t^^porto. 4. eon$umo. H. re$. 6. singtUdri» patient^, 
 
 ■•**■•, 
 
 ;-y^;^^ 
 
 ^"^ ,;• r ■■*'■: ■ ' .■ ^XERCISB 59." ^: .* ;•■;''- .^ ],^'::\ "' 
 
 The news of Caesar's advaiipe caused Vercingetorix at once 
 give up' this desi^ and- set Stt to mealfthe Roman commander. 
 The latter had got r«ady' to mfl*e an ' attack? on Noviodunum, a 
 town of the Bituriges,- Envoys l|iul come out to clear themselves 
 of the charge of having made war on Rome, and to suer for peace, 
 and CsBsar, in order to carry outthe rest of his purposeH iritK the 
 same speed with. which he ha4 soooeeded jn* most of his uhdertak- 
 ings, gave orders that th^ilr arma^ere to be brought in* and host- 
 ages given. Some of pho hostages had already been delivered up, 
 and the other matters were r>oing attended to, a few of the soldiers 
 having been admitted' to cgl^bt^ the arms, when in the distance 
 there was seeii Uie enemy's cavalry, which had gone in advance of 
 the main column of Vercingetorix. N o soon er did Jha oitizgns'. 
 
 Cftt«|{i sight of this body of cavalry than the proepect of ani 
 
 .^r» 
 
 .;f 
 
 ■<* 
 
 V. 
 
I M 
 
 434 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 led them to seize their arms. Our troops, in the town perceived 
 
 - that some new scheme was on foot among the G^auls. They 
 
 m/Byd&^ ru8h,;took possession of the gates,* and got aWay without 
 
 vloas. , - ' \ ■■:■■ .. -":,, ' ' ■ m .. • .;. 
 
 . ;■■. ■■ , - , i> . ■ . . . «...,*> --- 
 
 1. dMWto (with '{abl.). 2. iTUtituo. ^.' oppugno. 4. cov»equor. b. eonfero. 6. tn- 
 .^gi^omitto. 7. conquiro. 8. oppidanua. 9, porta. > ■ 
 
 
 •^'-•^' 
 
 e^ 
 
 EXERCISE 60. 
 
 Before the army was jready to march, two Irbqubis warriors 
 came to the fort pretending friendship, but more probably in the? 
 hope of" retarding the expedition until the approaching wint^r^ 
 should make it impossible to proceed. They represented the 
 numbers of the enemy and the extreme difficulty of penetrating so 
 rough a countl^ ; and affirmed thai if the troops refrained " from 
 hostilitf^s, the hostile tribes, who were already collecting their 
 prisoners, would soon send to mak^' their submission. Bouquet 
 turned a deaf ear to their advice and sent them to inform the 
 I)ela wares and Shawanoes that he was on his way to chastise them, 
 unless they made ppeedy atonement for their perfidious and wrong- 
 Macts. « (V ^ , • ' 
 
 ,#- . ^^- V : .■ ' . ■,-; ♦ • , ■• 
 
 \ [ To show hmo a pcMsage from inodern English may he dealt vnth^ 
 djid especially how nuidern proper names may he handled, the foUoxo- 
 1% adaptation is givetvi] ' '* « , i ' 
 
 •^j Before the army wasVeady to n^arclk two of the Morini came to 
 /the camp, pretending that they were friends, but, what is nioro 
 
 /probable,' hoping' to be able to hinder our men from marching" 
 until, on account of the winter which was at hand,* they should 
 not be able to set out. T|iese pointed out how great was the 
 number of the enemy, and how great the difficulty of marching 
 through country so rough ;' that if our men Would not make war 
 on them, the enemy, who were collecting their prisoners,* would 
 soon send envoys about surrendering,'' Ciesar did not «pprove" 
 this plan, and sent them to inform the Usipotes and Tonct/Ori that 
 he was setting out^o punish them unless they quickly made repac-' 
 ation for* their poiifidy and wrong-doing. * '' - -■< '^'■''' :■■-■■ 
 
 3 
 
 » 
 » 
 
 • 
 
 4 
 
 ' V 
 
 T 
 
 ♦ 
 
 i. ' ■ 
 
 ft 
 
 r -. 
 
 ^' 
 
 1. " • 
 
 d If 
 
 'V 
 
 • 
 « 
 
 * 
 t 
 
 ■ ^1- " 
 
 
 f. dtditio. 6. ynbo. 9. aati^facio d«; ^ : i; ■'»•' '".■■■:''. 
 
 * 
 
 ':f¥ 
 
6. ifi- 
 
 
 PART, v.— SYNT^X^^ND CpMPOSITION. 
 
 435 
 
 * - EXERCJSE^ei. 
 
 Between the town of Ilerda and the neaarest mil, on' whicK" 
 
 - Afranius was ehcampedi there lay some h'al f mile of level ground,* 
 
 and about half way* was a slight eminence.^ IfvCjBsar could get 
 
 possession ^f this, hp felt sure* he could cut oflF His opponents firom 
 
 the town and the supplies they had gathered* there. With this 
 
 idea, he proceeded to lestd out a*fbrce of three legions, which he 
 
 drew up" in a suitable position, and then ordered the front rank to 
 
 hasten forward' and seize the desired positioir. However, Afranius 
 
 perceived his design and speedily sient the troops oji guard* before* 
 
 ' the camp by a shorter route to forestall*" him. The other side 
 
 having reached the place first, our troops were forced back, and 
 
 on,fre8h" fortes of the enemy coming, up, were compelled to make 
 
 their way back to their comrades. " , j, 
 
 1. jflanicies. 2. Say ' in about the middle of this interval ' (apatium). 8. tumU' 
 his. 4. confido. 6. confero. 0. instrtio. 7. proeurro. 8. utatio. 9. pro. 10. prtu- 
 oc«ujw (' seize beforehand '). 11. Say 'other.' 
 
 •■ _ EXERCISE 62.' J ;>: /-.V/ ^'-9 
 
 Caesar determined tb come over to Britain because the Belgians*' 
 
 * of South Britain' had sent help to their kinsmen^ in Qaul, with 
 whom he waB at war. So he set sail for Britain With a small army. 
 When the Britons, who were watching for him, saw his. fleet draw 
 near the shore, they advanced into the waves and Kept the Romans 
 from landing, till a brave standarfl-bearer^ leapt from the galley 
 into the water and advanced against t^^ Britons. When the 
 Roftian sol(}^i» saw him in the midst of^^eir foes, they followed 
 him to saye^^he standard, and ^at last made good their landing and 
 drove the Britong^i^yup into the country.* Then Caesar, marched 
 through K(^t,V fou(j^j|^ several battles, and forced Jhe nearest 
 tribes to give hostaf^and sue for ijie&ce. 
 
 1. Belgae. 
 
 4i aquUifer. 
 
 2. Say ' who inhabited the lo' 
 5. ^eroo. . 6. Say ' from the coast 
 
 rt of the island.' 
 7. CatUium. 8. /( 
 
 EXERCISE 63. 
 
 ' The next night, ILisdrubal led his men silently* out of tneir 
 ■^ camp, and moved towards the Metaurus, in the hope of placing 
 that rivar hatwuan' himwelf and. the Ro mftna before hirf fatfaat waa 
 
 ..* 
 
 discovered. The Roman cavalry, liowever, was soon* seen coming 
 
 i-:^^ 
 
A- 
 
 ■um or 4}^rt>i 
 sentence. ©, 
 
 umu 6. ^y «da- 
 ►y ' drew them ud^^ 
 
 i^^ ' .. *^. - ■ ■. ^ ■ 
 
 l^ Pi^MARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 up>m pursu^, followe<|.i||^ no great distapce* by 
 
 «larch^ in readinesstlor an engagement. lb? 
 
 Hasdfubaltothial^of cqa|tinuing his retreat.* He 
 
 his men to prepwre for ^iion, and o^de t^! be; 
 
 thehi that'thelfiature of'4he grou)fd',^f>uId%yrmit 
 
 1. Mntio. 2. Say ' cross.' i^^revi. ^^ 
 apairlng of fiiglSl,' and connect clo^ic|Jir with tfifl* 
 {imtfuQi ajs advantageously (cot^iim^) as poasib}^, conaiderinc: (»r«f tik nat 
 
 %EXiROISE-M I ^■ 
 
 husual^'ableV lelkder,^hdftii L«|!l|^hi8£(p*i!an^ 
 * |iad vferought a great host dfxj^aUldT ^to attack 
 5 city, and the inhabitants jeni Uf Rome to 
 ambassadors were ft^t 'fronL. Rome to'. 
 <l3l\|i|*ns.* They asked Bren^us i^hat harm the 
 men of Qlusium had done the Gauls, that the;|^ :^hus made war'' on 
 Uiem.. firiBil^us made answer that the injury wSlthat the Clusians 
 poqiiHased k^d/jbl^at the Gauls wanted,' remar|u^{, that it was 
 exacibl|i the way^ in which the Romans themlhel\|^ treated* their 
 .ghb|r- - ■ -'■ " ' ':^^- ■ 
 
 neii 
 
 »r8. 
 
 •\ 1. Say 'of exceptional khpwledge {»inguliiri$ feierUia) of )|ie scienos of war.* 
 2. Romanm teriptor. 3. Say ,' of the Etruscans (Ein^ciy 4. Say ,' to urge BrenQus 
 to do no harm (noeeo) to theCIusians (Clusini}.'' 6. Say ' provoked by what wrongs 
 
 ^ were they making war.' 6. Say • that the Olusians were doing wrong in that (qtiod).i 
 
 v' 7. app^o. 8. modtu ot ratio. , it. tract o.> 
 
 . ^'^ ' \;^;;::V. EXERCISE 66. : 
 
 , The cKie^, when they; «aw that our men were ^e8i9ting so 
 
 biavely, and that there was no hope^ of the speedy capture of thu 
 
 catnp,. sent ambassadors to Cicero to say that tbey desired a 
 
 parley.' When leave was granted, they told the same story that 
 
 ^the king had told Tituriue^, that the Germans had qrossed the river 
 
 and all Gaul .was in arms. They add' that Tit 
 
 with his whole army ; but they had no wish to 
 
 mep ; their sole^^ire was to prevent the 
 
 their legions poHWiently' in their cou 
 
 to leave his caif^p^e was free to go witho 
 
 1. Say 'all hope having been lost (adimoy 2. Use 
 B . ^ etinm.Vaimi^ — i . noceo (witVdat.). S. 
 remiUn ( 
 
 {ver$ory 
 
 had perished 
 
 Cicero or his 
 
 m quartering' 
 
 he^were vailing 
 
 here he pleased. 
 
 lave a confereno^). 
 y 4tee»g tow«| to - 
 
PART V. — SYNTAX AND OOMPOSITION. 
 
 437 
 
 g so 
 
 )fthe 
 
 •ed a . 
 
 r that V 
 
 nver 
 
 ished 
 
 ar hie • 
 
 «ring' 
 
 filing ^^ 
 
 lased. , '^ . 
 
 renoA*). • 
 
 BlQCl PV 
 
 
 -^ EXERCISE 66. ' 
 
 ■;.: . ■ ■ ■ . ■" ■. -•■ ■■*-:'■ ' . ■'■>■■■. V, 
 
 After making all preparations, Ceesar quickly caMed the greater 
 
 paf t of his forces' over to Britain without the loss of a' single man. 
 
 Within a few days he marched against the enemy, Who, he learned, 
 
 ^had mustered in great nunlbers and now held a very stroiig^ V^' 
 
 tion. Since his arriyal the previous summef , the Britons, with the 
 
 object of offering as strong opposition as possible^to the ^mans 
 
 whein they should return, and of driving them more quickly from 
 
 the island, had decided to entrust the entire conduct of the war' to 
 
 one of their chiefs, Cassivelaunus. But it was soon clear* to the 
 
 latter that he could not defeat Ctesar in battle, nor even prevent 
 
 him from laying waste the country ; and so he setit envoys t9-the 
 
 Roman cohimander to treat for peace. 
 
 1. Say 'well fortified ' (egregie munitus). 2. mntmam ^mptrii permUtere. 3. Use 
 animadoerto. . > 
 
 \«, . V.' ■'//■:■■-: vi*3XERCISE^M' ' 
 
 G8esar„ on coming up to the tenth legion, exhorted the soldiers 
 tb sustain with courjige the assault of the enemy and 'not' to be 
 thrown into confusion by a few savages. The army was drawn up' 
 as the mature of the ground demanded ; for the legions, being 
 aieparated,' were resisting the enemy, some in one quarter, dthers 
 in another. It could not be foreseen* what needed to , be done in 
 each direction, and it was impossible for one man to attend to every- 
 thing. The men of two legions, the eighth and the ninthr^ Mid not 
 hesitstfe'' to cross the river, on the other side of which 'the enemy 
 were drawn up in great force und^r the direction" of Boduogpatus, 
 / whdm the Nervii had piit in command of the whole army.: At the 
 •same time our horse, who, as I stated, had been routed at the 
 first onset of the Nervii, met the enemy face to face' while retroftt 
 
 »tne 
 
 A **■' 
 
 ,.«. 
 
 ixig to the^cf^mp, and', thrown into a panfc, sought flight in anotner 
 direction. Caesar, on perceiving his men hard pressed, sent four . 
 cohorts to the assistance of the cavalry, who had already lost many* 
 of their number at the hands of the pursuing enemy. In the 
 meantime, two other legions, which had been acting as an escort" 
 thr the baggage, were observed on the top of the hill* by the 
 enemy, who immediately took to flight with the loss of one hundred 
 and eighty kUl^ and more than eight hundred wounded. 
 
 1. neu. 2. inHruo. 8. diwrstu. 4. provideo. 6. dubUo. 6. Say ' 
 ,]^ing leader .(du«X' 7. <«|p«r«u<. 8. fra^idi^tm. 9. tummm atUii. 
 
 BoduoffnaAt» 
 
438 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 EXERCISE'68. .' > i 
 
 Css^T, who was at a great distance at last getting intelligence 
 of their danger, returned with all expedition; and having- collected 
 a body of men, which did not excised seven thousand, hastened to 
 the relief of Cicero. The Gauls, who were not ignorant of his move- 
 mentSf raised the si^ge^ and went to me^t him with their entire 
 strength. Ceesar, to deceive' them, niade a feint as if he fled, till 
 he came' to a convenient place, and there he fortified'* his camp. 
 The instructions he issued to his men were not to fight, but to 
 barricade the gates, ^ continuing by these mancBuvres to increase 
 the impression'^ of fear. It- succeeded as he wished ; the Gauls 
 came up in great disorder" to attack his entrenchments. Then 
 . Caesar, making a sally,' defeated them and destroyed the greatest 
 >, ^part of them. This success laid the spirit of revolt^ in those parts. 
 
 t. Say ' left the siege (obsuito) .' 2. decipio. 3. munio. 4. portas obstruo. 6. 
 opinio. 0. Say ' their ranks being in great confusion.' 7. eruptio. S. Vae dejieio {I 
 revolt). 
 
 ■^i" 
 
 EXERCISE 69. 
 
 When spring was almost come,^ a considerable company of jWr- 
 ginians, under Captaiji Trent, hastened across the mountains and 
 began to build a fort' at the confluence of the Monongahela and 
 Alleghany, when suddenlyVthefr f^und themselv^ invested by a 
 host of French and Indians, who, with sixty bsi^aux and three 
 hundred canoes, had descended from Le Boeuf. The English 
 were, ordered to evacuate the spot ; and being quite unable to 
 resist, they obeyed the summons and withdrew to Virginia. 
 Meanwhile, Washington with ;another party was advancing from 
 the borders ; and hearing of Trent's disaster,* he resolved to 
 fortify himself^ on the Monongahela and hold hift ground, if pos- 
 sible, until troops could arrive to support him. The French sent 
 out a scouting party under M. Junonville, with the design of 
 watching his movements ; but a few nights afterwards Washington 
 surprised them not far from his camp, killed thei officer and cap- 
 tured the whole detachment. . \ #' ^ f 
 
 1. Say ' when but a small part of the w!nt«r remained.' 2. eastellum. 8. «ufrtto, 
 4. Say .' what had happened ta' 6.. ccutra munio (' fortify a camp '). 
 
 ■.f 
 
 ^f' 
 
ible to 
 
 '■.''..- ■ " 
 
 rginia. 
 ; from 
 
 '■--' ■■ : 
 
 ved to 
 
 W -.■"'■»' 
 
 if pos- 
 h sent 
 
 
 sign of 
 
 -,'.■■.•'' 
 
 ington 
 d cap- 
 
 *, 
 
 :. .. .. - ?■ 
 
 ■ ■ ■ ■ ^ 
 
 . «uWto, . 
 
 
 
 f" 
 
 
 
 .s 
 
 PART v.— SyNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 EXERCISE 70. 
 
 439 
 
 Finding great difl&culty in nfetflT^^r^he Soudan, the Govern- 
 ment'' reisolved to send some famonsNnilitary leader* to drive out 
 the barbarian chief, and rescue the garrisons which -were be- 
 sieged* in several towns. They asked Gordon, a man of the 
 utmost skill and bravery, to do what he could in that country, 
 which a few years previously he had' ruled with great uprightness 
 and wisdom. He consented" to try ; and travelling as fast as pos- 
 \ sible, he arrived at the capital,^ Khartoum, which was many nicies 
 distant from the sea. Holding it for many montjhs* against the 
 •«warms of barbarians, he repeatedly sent messages home to ask for 
 ihelp ; but the Government for a long time' refused to send rein- 
 forcements. At last, however, thinking that he was in danger, 
 they carefully^" organized an army and entrusted the command to 
 the best general they had. 
 
 1. paco. 2. Say * the senate.' 8. Say ' of great reputation for {gtnitive) merit in 
 wax (bellims).' i. obsideo. 5. jxistitia pruderUiaqus. 6. Say 'promised.' 7. Say 
 • largest town.' 8. menais. 9. diu. 10. Say 'with great cai;£<;d«iflrentia).' 
 
 :: :■ ^ EXERCISE 71. , . ^ _^ 
 
 Before the task^ was completed a ^putation of ^p^s arrived, 
 bringing word that fJlteir warriors were encamped in great^numbers 
 about eight miles distant, and desiring our general to appoint' the 
 tjime and place for a council. He ordered them to meet him on 
 the next day „ near his camp. In the morning the little army 
 moved in battle order to the place of council, and at the appointed 
 hour* the deputation appeared. Their orator* declared that the 
 war had arisen without any fault of theirs ; they desired that there 
 slfuld be peace between us and his peopl€|jai|^^k> show th.eir 
 good- will,* ^ once* delivered eighteen prisortiSWK^ had brought 
 With themj'promising that we should receive ,the rest as soon as 
 they cpitld collect them. . 
 
 1. negotium. 2. con8tituo. S. ad eertam haram. 4. Say 'he who «poke f<» 
 {ioguor.jpro)theeavoy8.' 5. beneoolentiam praestQ. 6. «tattm. 7. oopMi>t«. 
 
 7-'— •■""-■'■*•• EXERCISE 72. ■ '■-;.^----v; :-^v,-- , -I 
 
 • ■> r ■■ ■ .*.■■■. 
 
 The English army began. to cross the bridge, Oressingham lead- 
 
■ 1- 'il 
 
 I III 
 
 440 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 % 
 
 u 
 
 1^v. 
 
 
 the bridge, without oflTering any opposition ;' but when about one- 
 *^*^* ^ere ^ M^llllpljll^ ridge - was, crowd. d with those who were 
 foUowiiM|j|a^||Hp^tJiose who had crossed with his whole 
 streng^^feplrvery great number, and drove the rest into the 
 river ^P^, where the greater nurnbet wete drowned. The 
 ren^ainder of the English army, who wer# left on the southern'' 
 bank of the river, Aed in greatcoi^sion, having first set fire to 
 the wooden bridge that^<|iljpiH^hfeaot|iursue them. Cres- 
 lingham was killed.in the very beginning of the battle.^ 
 
 i.>^- i^«*«nt agmen. 2. Say • had suspected would happen.' 3. Omit because %i 
 ;61ved in • suffered.' 4. dimidia pars. 6. Say ' and tfie rest were, following in dense 
 y (amferti).' 6. Say ' the other.' 7. Say • the batt'.e having sqarcely (vix) be6n 
 in.' ;;,»,, 
 
 .■i\ ■ ^^ ■ : ■: .*:v '■'--'' EXERCISE 73. ^ ;:. ,' 
 
 ^ Soon after their arrival, a party of Indian chiefs and warriors 
 
 enter^4 the camp. They proclaimed themselves an embassy from 
 
 Pontil^ ruler of all that country, and directed in his name' that the 
 
 English should advance no farther until they hadj|^ an interview^ 
 
 with the great chief, who was already close at hM. Before th_ 
 
 day cl^ed», Pontiac himself appeared. He greeted Rogers with 
 
 the haiig^ y^mand,* what was his business in that country, and 
 
 how he dare^enter it without his permission/ Rogers informed 
 
 him that tBe French y^e defeated, that Canada ha%urrendered, 
 
 and that he was oil^*il;way to taj^e possession of Detrpit, and 
 
 restore a g^ral|^eace." ^Ppntiac replied that he wOuld stand in 
 
 the path o^||e K(j|lish vmH momiiigj Having inquired if the 
 
 strangers were in need of anything, he withdrew with his chiefs at 
 
 nightfall to hjjL^wn encanmment ; ^Ue the English, dreadin" 
 
 treachery, st^^ell on thdpgua^^^ tWlughotft the night. " - 
 
 1. Say 'said that he cpmmana'ed.'^^Jfo^ttor,- S.^eoc(i^m'soli8, «before 
 sunset.' 4. Say 'he haughtily foupefgp^riianded.' 5. injusmMoi 6. Say 'establish 
 (eonftrmo) peace an* friend^j|^th all the^ states.' ' 7. Say ' «Sder from marching 
 (iter) until the next day.' -^^^"'- *- * 
 
 Uiaey 
 
 9. Say, « spent the whole night in watching 
 
 
 p"^: ■ ; "^ '*^- ■■ ^^l^CISE 74. ^^^ 
 
 A deputation of the Wyandots came to thefort, and begge^Sr 
 peac^, which was granted them; but when the Pottawattamies 
 came on the same^errand, they insisted as a preliminary» that some 
 (>f their jmnplfl. who were dfltainf^d in th e English fort, ohot d#^ 
 
 t»e given up. Gladwyn demanded, on his part,» that the English 
 
PART V. — SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 V 
 
 441 
 
 captives* known to be in their villages should be brought to the 
 fort, and three of them were accordingly produced. As these were 
 but a small part of the whole, the deputies were sharply rebuked 
 for their duplicity, and told to go back for the rest. On the 
 following day, a fresh deputation of chiefs made their appear- 
 ance, bringing with them six prisoners. The Indians detained in 
 the fort were about to be given up and a treaty concluded, when 
 one of the prisoners declared that there were several others still' 
 remaining in the Pottawattamie village. Upon this the conference 
 was broken off" a^nd the deputies ordered instantly^ to depart. 
 
 I. VBe'prittsquam. 2. eftpseC himself also'). S. captivus. 4. Say ' he complained 
 bitterly (^ramssime), because they displayed such perfidj'.' 5, etiamnune. 6. collo- 
 guium dirimo. ^ statim. ^ 
 
 EXERCISE 75. ^J-" 
 
 The British general, whose forces had now S'^lled to sixteen 
 Jiundred, retreated to a new position at Beaver Dam, about twelve 
 i miles from Niagara. The Americans pursuing him with a force of 
 '4 twenty-five hundred' men, he continued his retreat to Burlington 
 Heights. The enemy advanced to a stream known as Stoney Creek, 
 w%ere they encamped for the night. Relieved from immediate^ 
 pressure, Vincent sent out a strong reconnoitring party under 
 Colonel Harvey, to examine the enemy's position. Finding the 
 entrenchnients carelessly' guarded, Harvey made a daring attack in 
 the darkness. The American soldiers, rudely awakened, sprang 
 up from their glimmering camp-fires* and stood their ground 
 bravely for a time. But they were bewildered and without disci- 
 pline.' After a brief struggle, theyjp|,9re routed at the point of 
 the bayonet, and their two generals. Winder and ChancHer, with 
 one hundred other prisoners, fell int«^^||^ey's hands. Vincent at 
 once followed up the retreat of thF^ invaders, and" sent a small 
 advance party to reoccupy the position of Beaver Dam. This 
 dangerous duty,' which was entrusted to Lieutenant James 
 FitzGibbon, with but thirty British regulars and tljirty Mohawk 
 Indians, was successfuUy performed. 
 
 "^ 1. Use quinffenti (' five hundred '). 2. Use in praetentia (' for the present'). 8. in- 
 
 diligenter, or nay 'by no means carefully (di^^enfer) defended.' 4. Say 'being sur- 
 prised when off their guard and taken unawares, quickly seissed their arms.' 5. Say 
 ' unski^d in warfare.' 6. Say ' this task (negotium), although dangerous (periculosu$), 
 waSquio'kly'flnisfiSt.'™ ~ ~~~ ~ ~ " 
 
 ^%- 
 
 
il 
 
 4 i 
 
 v> 
 
 i42 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES. 
 
 {Baaed on Ccesar, BTc. IV. 1-26.) ' /* 
 
 .1.— 1. They had crossed in that year. 2. They had been 
 Wassed for several winters. . 3. A large number of Germans 
 c^sed the rivers in the following year. 4. All the other tribes 
 wfere staying at home. 5. This canton is the largest, that the 
 most warlike. 6. Several years after, they were led out of this 
 place. 7. With a hundred thousand Germans hie was making war. 
 8. On account of their huge size they do none (lit. nothing) of 
 those things. 9. The country' was very cold. 10. The milk and 
 com make the Germans very warlike. 11. They used to bathe in 
 the river. 
 
 ^.'2,— 1. The merchants do not desire beasts of burden to be im- 
 ported. 2. They used to use small and scrubby beasts. 3. They 
 sell what they have taken to the Gauls. 4. The merchants have 
 right of entry. 5. They had not ventured to leap down. 6. They 
 betook themselves to the cavalry. 7. He betook himself to them. 
 8. It used to be considered disgraceful. 9. He leaps down on 
 foot (lit. to the feet) because the cavalry are approaching. 
 10. They think it is disgraceful to use imported horses. 
 
 3.— 1. On {ex) the other side, the country is unoccupied for six 
 hundred paces. 2- The Suebi could not withstand the power of 
 the state. 3. The same merchants used to come often to the Gauls 
 them'selves. 4, They think their state is large and flourishing. 
 
 5. It is the greatest possible glory to be more civilized than the 
 Germans. 6. This state is said to be insignificant and weak. 
 7. They cannot be driven out because they are tributary to this 
 state. 8. They are more civilized than the Germans themselves. 
 
 • *•— 1- Terrified by so great a number, they station guards. 
 2. The Germans drove the Menapii from their lands. 3. They 
 keep the Menapii from wandering. 4. They had removed from 
 both banks of the Rhine. 5. They pretend to cross the river. 
 
 6. He was informed of their arrival. 7. Being unable to maintain 
 themselves they had returned to the river. 8. The whole journey 
 had been finislied in three days. 9. Having, crushed the Menapii, 
 they advanced for the rest of this night. . 10. As the Germans had 
 
■(/ 
 
 / 
 
 PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 5,_-l. Influenced by this report, he asked what plans they were 
 adopting. 2. He' compelled the Gauk to answer. 3. He asked 
 What they had heard or learned. 4. He repents of the plans 
 which he has adopted. 6. No answer should be given to those 
 who yield to these runtors, 6. The merchants, against their will, 
 were compelled to come from each town. . 
 
 6.-1. Having sent embassies to the leading men, they deter- 
 mined to set out for the Rhine. 2. They were invited to come. 
 
 3. Having determined to wage war they s|nt embassies to sdVBral 
 states. 4. Some wander farther than usual. 5. On learning this 
 he thought he ought to summon the leading men and demand an 
 army. 6. When everything vhich he had demanded had been 
 prepared, they thought that embassies should be sent. 
 
 7,-1. As amttassadors had hot come from the Germans, he 
 began to pick ^ut cavalry. 2. Our ancestors have handed down 
 this custom. i^3, He had heard that the Roman people had made 
 war on the Germans., 4. He began to attack the Germans from 
 whom ambassadors had not come. 5. We wish to be friends to 
 the Romans. ' 6. They said that the Suebi alone had been driven 
 from their lands. 7. The Suebi do not yield even to the immoi:tal 
 gods. 8. As they have come against their will, having been 
 driven from home, he assigns them lands. . 
 
 / 8.— 1. He answered that he could not give any lands to those 
 who were seeking aid. 2. There cannot be friendship between : 
 Csesar and the Ubii. 3, They may remain in their own lands. 
 
 4. It seems best to ask aid of Caesar. 5. They are complaining of 
 the outrages of the Ubii, w*ho have settled in lands not their own. 
 6. So great a multitude cannot remain without wrong. 
 
 0»— 1.' The ambassadors said the^ would send the cavalry some 
 days after. . 2. They thought that the camp had been moved 
 nearei*( ^^%iving reported this to their friends they returned to 
 him. 'f^\^S^8aid he would move the camp. 5. He learned that 
 some horsemfeii had not retur«ed^-^nd that the Ambivariti were 
 awaiting him. 6. They thought they could gain their request, 
 frotn Ceesaf . ^>»-_i--^ 
 
 ' 10.— 1. The ishind used to "be Inhabited by the Batavi. 2. A 
 -^^f-^v^f^ l^^caired Mom is thoughr^^^ me in ^€x)~thi5pAlps. 
 
444 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 :«^ 
 
 
 ■ •■ ;t 
 
 3. The Alps are inhabited by ar fierce nation whi6h lives on birds.: 
 
 4. After forming the island, it repeives a branch from the Vacalus. 
 
 5. Many barbarous nations inhabit^ large part of the ishinds. . * 
 
 11-— l''*VVhen the ambassadors were returning to Csesar, the 
 cavaliy whjwn he had sent in advance were twelve, miles distant. 
 2. e«jsar, meeting the leadihg men on the way,* gave therathre^ 
 days' time to send ambassadors. 3. As he had ndt given them an 
 opportunity of advancing, they begged him not to e^rry out these' 
 pfaris. 4. They sent ambassadors to say that the tfft»y was ap- 
 proaching nearer. 5. He thought they would not- return the 
 same day. 6. They said that as many as possible would asaeitable, ' 
 and that as all the cavalry wer^ apprdachiqig, be would gkia hi» 
 request, --^vv;-^- --..;■*.:., ..V--^ ;■■ '■';.; ^' '^ ' .■>;.^-...>, 
 
 12.— 1. As soon as the cavalry returned, the a|nbaBsado^ left 
 the enemy. 2. Our m*en have no fear, becaufle not ijiore than^ - 
 eight hfindred horsemen have returned. 3. Having pu|; the cav^' 
 airy to flight, a^d thrown ^he rest into confusion, they return to * . 
 Cftjsar. 4. He did not cease until his brother was saved from all j^ i- 
 danger. 5. When he had risscued his bother, he Sought aid to * ' 
 his grandfather. 6. While resisting bj^vely, he was surroimdec^^t /^ ** 
 by the cjivalry, and reciived many wouiids. .7. As soon as they --^ 
 could, they brought aid to Piso, vhom ei^r senate had caUed friend f^ 
 
 •^ 13.— 1. No time was given to tke'Went^ for seeking peac^'^ . 
 2. After. these ajubassadors had b^n heard,, he waited till thej^^^^^' 
 shotijd adopt the plan. *.' He though^ that the enemy had gained 
 no prfestige by these ternis. 4t He pe^peived that, after accepting 
 these terms, they were making war. 6. Cmsar is glad.tha<r t;he . 
 tjhief Aien and the ambassadors have been detained. * 6; No timft. .^ 
 sh(*uld be given for arranging these matters. 7. The cavali:|r,i^'i 
 having followed up the enemy, had begun, bi^ttle. 8. diesar, |;hd* 
 next day, after leadiiig out all the Oavalry, ordered the batUe (« be *' 
 
 i%*al. He began to draw up a triple line df |»ttW. , i. the 
 «iviajy had J)een sent^to defend the camp. 3. Terrified by the 
 •rrival.of our cavalry, he had i»ought safety in flight. 4. Th^ 
 forces, alhrmed by all this, perceived that they (Sd\M riot cross th» 
 Rhipoi 6i Tokiug ormH they gave the ^ ' — ~ — — 
 
 .«-•: 
 
 >.*;.-V'; 
 
 m: 
 
 'i\% 
 
 m 
 
 Ji. 
 
 I ' 
 
 »r« 
 
 gave the enemy «6 Utaie to draw up!^ 
 
 : **— k * --^ *♦♦, ^ -' — : 
 
 «r!j 
 
 ' '^- *.l 
 
 .1 
 
 '<' 
 
on birds. I 
 
 Vacalufl. 
 
 nds., 
 
 3sar, the 
 distant, 
 jrathre^ 
 bheih an 
 ut these' 
 was ap- 
 urn the 
 jaeitible, 
 gain his 
 
 loi» left 
 
 Te thfua^ ^'. 
 
 ihe car-^' ' 
 
 (turn to V .. ■■■*■' -"i 
 
 wm «U ^ '\" 
 
 b aid to 
 
 'oimde4|i(./' 
 
 as theVv, ■.^t|-*a 
 
 ifrieni t 
 
 peac^'";!^' 
 '" the/ .^^Sm' 
 
 gained - .■. 
 cepting * 
 lat.the ^ 
 Fo time... . , „ 
 «valqf^: ; 
 
 »r,^hti ^ 
 e to be ' 
 
 ^. the 
 
 1. V 
 
 by the 
 
 
 4. Th^ 
 
 088 th(6 > /. 
 
 
 nyrup. . 
 
 i^* -: 
 
 .•".?• ; 
 
 KJ 
 
 I ; 
 
 PART V. — SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 445 
 
 •IS- 
 
 
 the line of battle. 6. With the rest of the women and children 
 they fled to their friends. : ,. ." >• 
 
 16. — 1. Seeing that a large number of t)ur men ha^ Ibeen killed, 
 he threw away his arms. 2., Thirty thousand Germans had per- 
 ished in that flight. 3. As they wished to depart, he said ho 
 would allow them their freedom. 4. Caesar reached the river 
 Rhine in safety. 5. They said, that thirty military standards had 
 been left. 0^. Hearing the shouts of -his men*, and fearing the Gauls, 
 he rushed out , of the camp. *: J* \ / 
 
 16»— rl. The Germans had been very easily induced to cross- the 
 Rhine and make war on the Roman people. 2. Messengers were 
 ■sent to promise vessels for crossing the Rhine. S. After sending 
 ambassadorip and%iving tip hostages, , ihey be1«ook themselves to 
 their friends. 4. As tl^e Suebi had joined the Usipetes, he had, 
 against his will, lent aid to> these tribcp. 6. Against Caesar's will 
 they had vnntured to carry over the army. 6. He resolved that 
 *the war must be finished. 7;. Perceiving that they were hard 
 pressed by the Germans, they were alarmed. 8. They answered 
 that they would prevent diesar from ctmveyi^g his army, across the 
 Rhine; 9. They thought that they could not be safe without his 
 ,f^\oonsent. 10.' He besought Ctesar to take paVt in the bftttie. H. 
 Th6 Germans who had made war on Ctesar, were surrendered to 
 himv 12. S^ great was Ceesar's reputi|tion that the fartht»tt|:i]bes 
 "sent ambassadors and ^ve hostages. . ■, •' * '..(j^ 
 
 18.~lk Ceestir began to lea4, the afmy Across. 2. The army 
 began to be led across. 3. For several days they were bringing 
 in timber. 4. He ordered ambassadors to come to him from both 
 statcMS. ^, He ordered s^ garrison to be", left at the bridge^. 6. 
 They began to concq^l themselves in the woods. . 7, Meanwhile, 
 all the timber having been collected and the arniy ]«wi across, {|ioy 
 |H)gan to, prepv© for flight,- • - j^V. '.. f 
 
 f|;l©.~l. Ctesar learned that their wives and childiten had beim 
 {4soed in tihe woods, and that they weiw gathering to ode* place. 
 2. As the bridge had been torn down, CjosaiMjesolvud to punish 
 the Germans. 3. Who**thft Ubii learned thatall the btiildinga 
 ^ • had been burned, and a bridge«biiilt| they, l)ettH)k themselves to 
 
 ■.■* 
 
 
 » CI 
 
 I. 
 
 ;.V t^^'i^o^ij»- 4. ^^J^n b«»r ftrms» 0. For ten days they Mkdl. 
 
 } .*- 
 
 . .»f' 
 
 %: 
 
 i^ 
 
I 
 
 « 446 
 
 /<t' 
 
 •^' 
 
 ... i 
 
 .M- 
 
 - ». < ■ 
 
 iV. 
 
 MI- 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. , 
 
 awaited his arrival. 6. He thought that everything, for which 
 he had led the army across, had been a«M;oinpIiahe4. 7. TheSuebi, 
 after learning this through scoots, had ^^etermmedljo burn all their 
 villages and buildings. 8. Ei|ht dayfl in all had been spent in the 
 districts which the Suebi held. 9. They bet0o]£ themselves to 
 their own territories. 'i\:* ' 
 
 '^^ 
 
 20. — 1. He found out that the tyaders did ndF yisifc these 
 
 u islands. 2. Almost all the harbors are suitable. S^. He found out 
 
 'to whom they had furnished auxiliaries. 4. He thought that the 
 
 fccaders could find out how large the harbor was. 5. AUhough the 
 
 . harbors were not suitable, he set out for the island. 6. He j|£ne^^ 
 
 tliafcthe winters were early. .7,., All this will be of great servic?. 
 
 '81. He found out that all the tribes had these dustoms. . .-- 
 
 »* 21:'— 1. He instructs Volusenus to find out -these things. 2.' 
 .At'mbassadors caine from the states which he had conq.iiered that 
 summer. 3. Commius, who was faithful to dtesar, had visited 
 •th^se states on the previous days. 4[ They themselves, with all 
 "the fleet, assembled as quickly as possible. S. Him he orders 
 ' (jiibeo) to visit the States. 6. He orders (impefo) the traders to 
 come to him. 7. Having given hostages, they ^j|,yi<<n home. 8. 
 JBtd tti^ea VoluBenus to leave the ship. ^9. He rep'^rted what they 
 hud promised. 10. Commius had been made kingl ' '. 
 
 22. — 1. He ordered about eight ships of war and a large number 
 of translJoWs! 2. They promised to make re^dy the ships which 
 he had requited. 3. While they were collecting the ships, atnbas- 
 sadors came fnnn the Morini. 4. The rest of the ships could not 
 catry over the legion. 6. A|ter the two legions had been taken 
 over,' he gave the rest to B'Ufus to lead against the Morini. 6. 
 When the hostages had been brought, he promised to receive 
 them under his protection. 7. He left a garrison of two legions. 
 8i Hee^oes not .wish either to wage w»ir or to delay fot the purpoia 
 of collecting cavalry. 0. In the previoudi year he had had an 
 opportunity of ^ taking over th6 legiyns. 10. 'I'his happened very 
 opportunely.. :_:__^ ^' ..^.^^.^._^:...:^..:..^^ 
 
 23.— 1. As the cavalry had advanced to the higher ground, he 
 drdered iho rest of the soldier» to follow them. • -2. He ordered 
 
 the anulior i i to bu ralaod» 3. Wu wunot thfuw wcauuns fwm jLhy 
 
 ^' 
 
 ^ 
 
 •^ . . 
 
 . «* 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ; 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 >, - 
 
 "' 
 
 %^ v.-r4k 
 
 i 1*--' 
 
 ^ # ' 
 
 4 , " 
 
 • « 
 
 ' ^ *.'. "- t 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 ) 
 
 * ^ 
 
 * 
 
 
 I ... 
 it ' 
 
 «^ ■ 
 
*.. 
 
 I : 
 
 PART V. — SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 447 
 
 ship to iAie shore. 4. Thinking the shore suitable, they landed. 
 5. On the signal being given, they embarked and followed him. 6. 
 ^e waited until he foifnd a suitable tide for sailing, ^t. At)out the 
 nin^ih hour of the day he found out what was being done. 8. On 
 the ninth day he ordered the tribunes to set sail fropi the farther 
 harbor, \ ;. . : - >^, , .,.' , ■ •: , 
 
 ♦ 
 
 -]J|jP\9y kept our men from leapaig down. 2 Sending 
 i^^rs in advance, they hurled their weapons more boldly. 
 
 4 
 
 24.—] 
 the charioWBrs in advance, they hurled their weapons more boldly. 
 8. The soldiers, burdened by their arms, leaped down from the 
 ^hip. 4. The locality wjLs unknown to our men, who did not show 
 the same zeal as the enemy. 5. They had to advance into the ' 
 water. 6. On account of the great difficulty, the rest of the forces rff" * , 
 cannot follow up the ca airy. 7. They were wont to use horses in^ " 
 their battles, 8. The enemy, dismayed by the size of the vessels, 
 could not hurl their weapons, . - ' 
 
 '25. — 1. The soldiers were^OTdered to leAp down. 2. ah 
 soldier was leaping down, Cseskr noticed that the enemy 
 halted. 3. On the ships of war being removed a short dists 
 
 As the 
 had 
 ships of war being removed a short distance, 
 the enemy began to retreat. 4. He urged the soldiers not to 
 betray the eagles to the barbarians. 5. He cried with a loud 
 voice that he was willing to do his duty. 6. On account of the 
 unusual kind of vessels, the ma^r turned oujb most favorably for 
 Oeasar. 7. "Leap down, Ca^r," he said, •.^iinless you wish to 
 incur disgrace." 8 Our solflSters eiho^|,ed one another not to 
 hesitate on account of the appearance of the barbarians. 
 
 . ,. 26.— 1. On the vessels h^i^ filled, he ordered aid to be sent to 
 
 those who were in difficulty. i''S^. Whenever the, enemy made an 
 
 'ittack, Cffisar would- order our men to keep their ranks. 3. Both 
 
 sides were, unable to leave their ships. 4. Whomsoever they 
 
 • attacked they put to flight. 5. Making an attack, they sur- 
 rounded the enemy. 6. Having reached the island, the cavalry * 
 landed from the ship. 7. Having attacked the enemy, thejjiii» 
 fought fiercely. 8. "This alone is lacking. 9. He ha^ manned 
 
 ,-lihe ships of war with the okvalry,^ _ . i : i„ 1 _^ ^„_.i^^,^^v;^ _, 
 
 T 
 
 ■ ¥ 
 
 * ' 
 
 
 y 
 
44a 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. . 
 
 % 
 
 II. EXERCISES IIST TRANSLATION 
 
 AT SIGHT.* 
 
 ft. 
 
 ■ — #* 
 
 1. Gaul and Its XKyinons. ' ' J 
 
 Gallia est omnia divisa in partes tres, quarum unam incolunfc 
 .. Belgae, aliam Aquitani, tertiam qui ipsoruin lingua Celtae, m^tra 
 Galli appellantur. Hi omnes lingua, institutis, legibus, inter se 
 differunt. GaUos ab Aquitanis Garumna flumen, a Belgis Matfona 
 et Sequana dividit. Horum omnium fortissimi sunt Belgae, 5 
 propterea quod a cultu atque humanitate provinciae longissime 
 absUnt, minimeque ad eos mercatores saepe commeant atijue ea^> 
 quae ad effeminandos animos pertinent, important, proximique 
 sunt Germanis, qui trans Rhenum incolunt, quibuscum continenter 
 bcllum gerunt. Qua ^e causa Helveftii quoque reliquos Gallos 10 
 virtute praecedunt, quod fere cotidianis proeliis cum Germanis 
 ' contendunt, cum aut suis finibus eos prohibent, aut ipsi in eoruiA 
 finibuB bellum gerunt. Eorum una patis, quam Gallos obtinere* 
 dictum est, initium capit a fiumine Rhodano ; continetur Garumna 
 flumine, Oceano, finibus Belgarum ; attingit etiam ab ^equanis et 15 
 Helvetiis flumen Rhenum ; vei^t ad septentriones. Belgae ab 
 extremis Galliae finibus oriuntur ; pfertinent ad inferiorem partes» 
 fluminis Rheni ; spectant in septentrionem e^^ orientem solem. 
 r .Aquitania a Garumna flumine ad Pyrenaeos montes et eam partem 
 Ooeani, quae est ad Hispaniain, pertinet ; j^^tat inter oecasun^ao.' 
 8olii3 et septentrionea. . -^ . , 
 
 . ffc Umi*! Bewmd layt^m ^ Otmutny, B.0.;8tf"^ ^ 
 
 CaeAai*, postquam'ex Menapiis in Treveros venit, diiabus de munf 
 Rhenum transire constituit ; quarum una\erat qiu)d Gerntftni auiUiik 
 
 * AU th^ words not tftven 111 the fooinoiet ocot}# «Httt Uie mbw me»niiif in t^ 
 Mlaotiona fronk NepoH and C'i|)Bar in Part IV. \ , 
 
 1,— 2. Hnirua, tenofH<w/c. 6. puUub, cinUixatiati 4,J)uniftnitM|, rffinrment. f.- 
 miriime, by no meafu. J. ronimco, vuit. 8. pertifte ), Itnd. 9. oontlnefnter, ooiii 
 tinruUly. 11. praeoyio, «nrpgwx. II. oontineo,,^ (wHti4. \16. mh, on the xidfi q/. 
 
 W ii, mi, nniU m^ 
 
 T^~T"^ 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 %■■' 
 
 ♦ \ 
 
 ::V ' ■ ] 
 
 
 , <• 
 
 ^au^ 
 
ncolunt 
 
 nter se • " 
 
 latrona 
 
 Belgae, 6 
 
 gissime 
 
 que ea, ^ 
 
 cunique , 
 linenter 
 
 GalloBlO 
 
 3rmani8 
 
 eorurtl 
 
 btinerev 
 
 arumna 
 
 lanis eti5 v 
 
 Igae ab 
 
 partem 
 solem. ^ 
 
 parteiri ^ 
 
 •ccasun^ao* 
 
 PART Y.--^TBANSLATION AT SIGHT. 
 
 449 
 
 contra se Treyeris miserant ; altera, ne ad eos Ambiorix receptum 
 haberet. xHis constitutis rebus, paulo supra euiu locum quo ante 
 exercifcora traduxerat facere pontem instiiuit. Mi^no militum 
 studio, paucis diebus opus efficitur. Firatto in Treveris ad pontem 
 ptaesidio relicto, ne quis ab his subito motus oreretur, reliquas 6 
 copias equitatumquetraducit. Ubii, qui ante obsides dederant atque 
 in deditionem venerant, purgandi sui causa ad eum legates mittunt, 
 qui doceant auxilia ex sua'^vitate in Treveros non missa esse ; 
 petunt a€que orant ut sibi parcat ; si amplius obsidum yelit dari, ~t- 
 fpollicentur. Cognita Caesar causa repent ab Suebis auxilia missa lo 
 jene. Ubiorum satisfactionem accipit ;• aditus viasque in Suebos 
 
 peniuirit. 
 
 Interim paucis post diebus fit ab Ubiis certior Suebos omfies in 
 linum locum copias cogere, atque eis nationibus quae sub eorum 
 sint imperio, denuntiare, ut auxilil^'^ifeditatu8 equitatusque mittant. is 
 His cognitis rebus rem frumentariam providet, castris idoneum 
 locum deligit, Ubiis imperat Ut pecora deducant, suaque omnia ex 
 .j-nr^i^is in oppida conferant (sperans hostes inopia cibariorum ad- ' 
 '^uctosad iniquam pugnandi condicionem ppsse deduci) ; mandat 
 ut crebroe exploratotes in Siebos mittant, quaeque apud eos 20 
 l^erantur, cognoscant. . ' ' 
 
 Illi imperata faciunt, et paucis diebus intermissis re^erunt:. 
 Suebos omnes, posteaquam certiores nunfti'de exercitu Romi^orum 
 fen€ftint, cum omnibus suis copiis quas coegisseht, ad extremof fines 
 se recepisse; «ilvam esse ibi infinita magnitudine ; ad ejuspilvaefS 
 initium Suebo/ls adv«ntum Komanorum exspectare constitiiisse. 
 
 Caesar, postquam per Ubios cixploratores comperit l^uebos sese 
 in silvas recepisse, inopiam frumenti veritus (qilod, ut supra 
 demonstravimus, mtnime omnes Germani agricul^urae student), 
 oonstituit non progredi longius ; sed, ne omnina metum reditus sui SO 
 bar'baris tolleret, reducto exercitu- partem ,ultim^m pontis, qiiae 
 s, ripiKs Ubiorum wmtingit, resciudit, atqu£ in extremo ponte" turrim 
 ooHtitituit, praesidiumque coh6rtium duodecim pontis tuendi causa 
 • ponit, magnisque eum locum munitionibus firmat ; ipse ad bellum 
 Affibiorigis profioiacitur. . • ^ 
 
 i.—l. Anil>lorix wM t\w leader of a levmldable revolt In north-eaatern OaXil. 
 
 • W, cogno«?o cauMuii, invttiiigaU <t etue. 11. «atisfactlo, exeutfg. 12. (t«rqulro, 
 
 fn<juirf t^mit. IS (ienurifcio, fftiy n^itv l». «p^ro, hofic. 18. cibaria. priwiaimi, 
 
 1». irtiquus, unit(fitml. 24. extrptwua. retnoh»( .^Vi. nilnime wtudeo. jwi/ wry (ittU . 
 
 uUten^ 
 
 
 .\.l 
 
 •4 
 
4D0 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN 'BOOK. ^ 
 
 [1|A] 
 
 
 age» 
 
 
 8. The Campaign against the Belgee, B.C. 67f ^ •, 
 
 ' Cum esset Caesar in citeriore Gallia, in hibernis, litteris Labieni 
 oertior factus est, omnes Belgas contra popiilum Romanum con- ' 
 jurare, quod vererent.ur ne, omni (jallia pacata, ad eos , exercitus 
 noster adduceretur. His nuntiis commotus, Caesar duasJegiones 
 in citeriore Gallia novas conscripsit, et inita aestate ad exercitum 6 
 venit. Imperat Senonibiis, qui finiUmi Belgis erarit, uti ea, quae 
 apud eos' gerantur, cognoscant, seque de his 'rebus certiorem' 
 faciant. Hi omnes nuntiayerunt manus ^t^jgi, exercitum in unum 
 locum conffnci/ Turn Caesar re frutaicfcria comp^rata castrt» 
 movet, diebusque circiter quindecim ad fines Belprum per\'enit. 10 
 
 Posteaquam omnes Belgarum copias in unum iflfjim coactas esse, 
 et ad se venire vidit, neque jam longe abesiib ab exploratoribu» 
 cognovit, flumen Axonam,quod est in Hgmorum finibus, exercitum 
 traducef e maturavit, atque ibi castra posuit. In eo flumirie pons 
 erat. Ibi praesidium poiiit, atque in altera parte flu^linis Q. Titu- 15 
 rium Sabinum legatum cum sex cohortibus reliquit. At» his 
 
 ■ cajstria oppidum Remorum, nomine Bibrax, aberat millia passuum 
 octo. Id magno impetu Belgae oppugnare coeperunt. Aegre eo die 
 Bustentatum e^. Cum fitiem oppugnan4i nox fecisset, Iccius, qui 
 turn oppido praeerat, i^unt^m ad Caesarem mittit : nidi subsidium 20 
 sibi submittatur, sese diutius sustinere non posse. Eo media nocte 
 Caesar ^uas cohortes subsidio oppidanis mittit: quorum advent» 
 hostes discesserunt, agrosque Remorum depopulati, omnibus vicis 
 
 4 atque aedificiis quos adire potuerant incensis, omnibus copiis ad • 
 flumen Amonam contenderunt, quod esse post nostra castr» demon- sa 
 
 stratum est. 
 
 Ibi vadis r^]^i», parttBi suarum copiamm transducere conati 
 sunt, eo consilio, ut, si possont, castellum, cui praeerat Q. Titurius 
 legatus, expugnarent; fi minus potuissent, agros Remorum popit- 
 larentur, comii|featti4ue nostros prohiberent 30 
 
 Caesar, certior^f actus ab Titurio, omnem equitatum pontem 
 traducit, atq'^ue ad eos contendit. Acritor in eo loco pugnatum eat. 
 Hostes iropeditosnostri in flumino aggressi, magnun^ eorura nan^e-^ 
 
 roiSf . ». oonrtnco, ffaflirr 14. iwrturo, ha^itn. 17. ^ml, there wore olhe» of the 
 
 •^ 
 
 i- 
 
 il^'iiiluaa, not. 2». populor, lag 
 

 ■• -i , 
 
 nonacribo, 
 lie» of ttm 
 
 - 
 
 i. 
 
 . * -l 
 
 PART v.— TRANSLATION AT SIGHT. 45I 
 
 . rum occiderunt. Per eorum corpora reliqui audacissime transire 
 Z^'^T"^ ^^r^ -pulsisuntl^ primi. ^ transit:: 
 jqoitatu cu^uMventMnterfectique sunt. ' Hoc p^^elio superati . 
 ftostes conciho convocato constituerunt optimum esse domum suam 
 l^emque reverti et quorum ip fi.es prhuum Romani exerc tu" 5 
 introduxifisent, ad eos defendendos undique convenireitt ■ 
 
 , «u castns egressx sur.t ; ita ut consimHis fugae proLtio vL. 
 retur. Hac ro statmi Caesar pet speculatores cognita insidias 
 
 ^jentus. quod qu.de causa discederenr„ondum perspex^U extr'lO 
 citum equitatumque castris continuit. Prima luce confirmata re 
 ab exploratonbus, omnem equitatum qui f ugientes persequeretur, 
 
 2lf ^'Z"'"'"""'^''" '^'''^ ™"^"""^ multitudinem eorum conci! 
 derunt subque occasum solis ^titerunt, seque in castraAut erat 
 imperatum, receperunt. > \ 
 
 Postridie ejus diei Caesar, priusqua^sehostes ex terrc^lie aJ fu<.a "" 
 reciperent xn fines Suessionum.^qui proximi Remis erant, exe'r 
 citum duxit et ad oppidum Noviodunum contendit. Id oppugnare 
 
 Znd!' rP'" ''''"'"'" '^^^^^ """^"^ altitudinemf p'auci! 
 defendent.bus,.expugnare non potuit. Castris munitis, \L ad20 
 
 multitudo m oppidum proxima^ nocte convenit. Celeriter aggere 
 jacto, magnitudine operum, quae neque viderant ante.Galli neque 
 audjerant. et ce entate R<«„anorum permoti, legatos ad Caesarem 
 
 His rebu. ge8tis,>nta huju, belli ad bsrbaros Opinio perlaf»*' 
 «^«t. ab ™ nationibus quae trana Rhe„u,„ in^Mun^r^,,^ 
 
 X^ntu™" "" """-''•" -^'u^^i^pe^U factum. 
 - j| i- The 'Gauls and the Oemuot. 
 
 p^issedp^nem smguhs domibus factiones sunt; a^ue e.>dem 
 m^o *;^ Ga^Kdiv^sa est in duas part«s. Cum Caesar in GalHam 
 vm^, >lt«riu8 fe«^»«iiB pr incipe^^ g^quani. F" "^ 
 
 «•^-«l. lirtMwrf jr, *»d«. 82. pur.. 1»,^. »- "» -^ 
 
 A-^ 
 
 M 
 
45^ 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 , I 
 
 w 
 
 In omni Gallia eorum hominum qui aliquo sunt honore genera 
 sunt duo; nam plebspaeneBervorumhabetur loco. r>«hi«d"«^"^ 
 «eneribus alterum est druidum, alterum equitum. Drmdes rebus . 
 divinis intersunt; sacrificiis publica atque privata pto<mrant ; de , 
 omnibus controversiis publicis privatisque constiiuunt. His autem 
 omnibus druidibus praeest unus, qui summam inter eos habet 
 auctoritatem. Druides a belle abesse consuerunt, neque tnbuta 
 una cum reliquis pendunt. Tantis excitati praemiis, et suasponte 
 multi in disciplUn conveniunt et a par^ntibus mittuntur Mag- 
 num ibi numerum versuum ediscere dicuntur. Multa praeterea de 10^ 
 sideribus atque eorum motu, de mundi ac terrarum magmtudme,- 
 de rerum natura, de deokm immortalium vi ac potestate ^^Pf^ 
 Alterum genus est equrt^m. Hi, cum aliquod bell^m incidit (quod 
 fere ante Caesaris adventum quptannis accidere solebat) omnes in ^ 
 ; bello versantur, plurimosqiie clientes habent . 
 ^ Nat\o est omnis Gallorum admodum' dedita religionibus ; atque 
 ob eam causam qui iii proeliis periculisqu^ versantur, aut pro vic- 
 timis homines immolant aut se immolaturos vovent ; jubhceque 
 eiusdem generis habent institute sacrificia. . ' 
 
 Germani multum ab hac consuetudine diflferunt. nam neque» 
 druides habent qui rebus divinis praesii^t, nequ6 s^crificiis student. 
 Vita omnis in venationibus atque in studiis rei militans consistit ; 
 a parvis labori ac duritiae student^ Pellibus utuntur, magna 
 corporis parte nuda. Agriculturae non student, majorque pars 
 feorum victus in lacte', caseo, came consistit. Neque quisquam 26 
 auri modum certum aut fines habet proprios ; sed magistratus ac 
 principes in annos singulos quantum visum efit attribuunt, atque 
 aano post alio transire cogunt. _ 1 ^ 
 
 Civitatibus maxima laus est quam latkrime cireiim se ▼»»»«» ^ 
 finibus solitudines habere. Hoc prbpnum virtutis existmxant, 80 
 expulsos ag*i8 finitimos. cede re, neque quemquam prope se auder» 
 
 \. t ».«.,«- ««,!##. rft««MW!<ton 2. poene. olmout. S. druidea, the dniids. 
 3 iul S^. Tfe^dl^^l^TnaUerslfreUoion*. J"te«um «^ co«.«^^ 
 3 eques, KTt^«i. oacrifioe 5. controvereia, duptUe. 7. tributum. wo!. 
 
 r'*- u*' .JJ^tS s^X^inm rewardr 9. In disciplinam, for tmtrwiwn. 
 8.excito. gtxmviaie. s. P™*™\"'"' ,',!," _^ „ mAoA ^ar 11. mundug, 
 
 the unii'erm.^ ^^j "''Ti^; i7^kima rS iT^^^ 21,28.24. itudeo. 
 
 90 propnum, a mark. 
 
 1 
 
i;i 
 
 genera 
 iuobus 
 1 rebus 
 nt; de 
 
 autem ^ 
 
 habet 
 tributa 
 
 sponte 
 Mag- 
 ;ereadelO 
 itudine} 
 iputant. : 
 it (qiiod 
 nnes in 
 15 
 
 ; atque 
 pro vic- 
 bliceque 
 
 1 neque20 
 student, 
 ansistit; 
 , magna 
 [ue pars 
 ui8quam26 
 Tatus ac 
 it, atqae 
 
 I vastfttiB 
 istimant, 30 
 e audere 
 
 the druid». 
 I concerned 
 Litum, tax. 
 irwtnuiion. 
 I. mundys, 
 wotU. 16. 
 ,24. itudeo, 
 1, ednitist ef. 
 cheeae. 26. 
 m. armmd. 
 
 PART v.— TRANSLATION AT SIGHT. 
 
 453 
 
 consistere; simul hoc se fore tutiores arbitrantur, repentinae 
 ^"^•'^^'^^ timore sublato. Cum bellum civitas geyit, magistratus 
 qui Wbello praesint deliguntur. In pace nuUus est communis (" 
 magistratus sed principes regionum atque pagorum inter suos jus 
 
 : dicunt. Hospitem violare fas non putant ; qui quacumque de causa 5 
 -ad eos venerunt ab injuria prohibent sahctosque habent. 
 ^ Ac fuit antea tempus cum Germanos Galli virtute superarent, 
 ultro bella inferrent, propter hominum multitudinem agrique 
 
 ' inopiam trans Rhenum colonijis mitterent. Nunc quidem in 
 
 ^eaderainopia atque egestate Germani permanent, eodem victu etlO 
 vestitu utuntur ; Gallos autem provinciarum propinquitas ettrans- 
 marinarum rerum notitia humaniore? eflfecit. Paulatim assuefacti 
 superari, multisque victi proeliis, ne se quidem ipsi cum iUis virtute 
 
 ■; comparant.,,^,, :.■■;, :...c<,;V',—\, .,^^., ;,:.'.■. .;^.-,, .. . ■' .^. 
 
 5- the Battle of Marathon. ' 
 
 Darius autem, cum ex Europa in Asiam redisset, hortantibus 16 
 amicis i|^t Graeciam redigoret in suam potestatem, classem quingen- 
 
 . tarum mvium comparavit, eique Datim praefecit et Artaphernem, 
 usque ducenta peditum, decem equitum millia dedit, causam inter- 
 ^oneris se hostom es.se Atheniensibus, quod eorum auxilio lones 
 Sardes expugnassent suaqup praesidia interfecissent. Illi,'classe20 
 ad Euboeam appulsa, ^^riter Eretriam ceperunt omnesque'ejus 
 gentis cives aWeptos inl^am ad regetn mise'runt. 
 
 Inde ad Atticam accesserunt ac suas copias in campuiii Mara- 
 ttiona deduxerunt. Is est ab oppido circiter millia passuum decem. ' 
 
 . Hoc tumultu Athenienses tarn propinquo tamqu'e magno permoti 25 
 auxilmmnusquamnisia Laceda^mohiispetiverunt. Domi autem' 
 croant decem praetores^qui exertitui pra^essent, in iis Miltiadem 
 Inter quos magna fuit contentio, utrum moenibus se defenderent* ' 
 an obviam, irenfc hostibus acieque decernerent. Unus Miltia'des 
 max<me hortabatur ut castra fiereilt : id si factum isset, et civibusso' 
 ammmn acces8uium,.cuii||griderent de ^rum vftttute nx>n desperari. 
 
 
 TO. Tones, the ioniaiin. 
 nuaqxiam,'^ nowhere: <> 
 o«8fci"» lacip", "hereiirea 
 
 abrlpio, carri/ off. 
 contriiverMu. 
 
 ^ 
 
 zOv mmuhua, mdden attak. 20 
 ,,89. (leBfirnn, fight, cowtowd. 8o! 
 
 81. »«jed'orcoTfte, am'j/uien. 
 
 ■/' 
 
iPiPiiii 
 
 'i% : * 
 
 ^5^4 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 # 
 
 ;,2?z)^^^ 
 
 efc host^^Jem ye fc*e tardiores, si anijj^dvert^rent auderi ad- 
 J^rsus se tarn exiguis copiis dimicaid. .. »» 
 . Hoc in tempore nulla ciVitas Atheniensioua auxilio fuit praeter 
 Plataeenses. Ea mille misit milites. Itaqwe horurn adventu 
 decern millia armatorum oompleta sunt, quae manus mirabili fla- 5 
 grabat pugnandi cupiditate. Quo factum est ftij plus quam collegae . 
 Miltiadea 'Valeret. Ejus ergo auctoritate in^pulsi Atheni^nses 
 copias ex iirbe eduxeyunt, locoque idpneo castra f ecerunt.' Deindc 
 postero -die syib montis radicibus acle instructa (atque ftrbores . 
 multis locis'erant rarae) proelium commiserunt hoc consilio ut etio 
 montium altitudine tegerentur et arborum.tracta^quitatushostium -» 
 
 impediretur; '> ■■■;.„ ,'= ■;.'■'■ '■%.^,'.-; ■■■*;■'' 
 
 Datis, etsi rion aequum locum videlkt suis, taraen fretus numero 
 copiarum suarum confligere c.upiebat, eoque magis, quod prius- 
 quam Lacedaemonii subsidio venirent, jjj^icare utile arbitrabatur. 15 
 ibaque iij^ aciem peditum centum, equitum decem millia produxit, 
 groeliumque commisit. Jn quo tanto plus virtute valuerunt Athe- 
 nienties ut decemplicem numerum hdstium profligarint, adeoque eoa 
 "^ lerunt ut Persae non castra sed naves petierint. 
 
 6. ^anI^bal'9 Father, Hamilcar. 
 
 lilcar, Carthaginiensia, primo Pimico bello, admodum adu- 20 
 lescentulus in Sicilia praeesse coepit M:ereitui. Cum ante ejus 
 adventu m et mari et terra male res gererentur Carthaginiensium, v 
 ipse, ubi adfuit, numquam hosti ccissit n|eque locum 'nocendi dedit, 
 saepeque e contrario, occasione data^4«rcessivit semperque superior 
 discessit. Quo facto, cum paene omnia in Sicilia Poeni amisissent, 25 
 • ille Erycem sic defchdit ut bellum eo loco gestum non videretur. 
 ' Interim Carthaginienses, clause j^pud insulas Aegates a C. Lu- 
 tatio, consule Romanorum, superati, 8ta,tuerunt belli facere finem. 
 Paucis post annis, quo facilius causam bellandi cum Romania 
 reperiret,^ effecit- ut imperator cum ex6^bitu in Hispaniam mit- 30 
 teret^ur, eoque secura duxit filium Hahnibalem annorum novem. 
 
 5.-5. compleo, make up. 6. mirabiliR, wonderhU. 6. iflagro, be inflamed xintk. 
 6. coHega, colleague. 7. impello, lead. 9- sub raaicibus. at the foot. 11. altiiudo, 
 heufht. 11. tego, protect. 11. tractus, nm. 13. aequus, favorable. 13. fretus, 
 rel'i/hvj on. 15. utile, a good thing. 16. produce, /m<i om<. 18. d&cemT^lex, tenfold, 
 
 ' O,— 20. admodum odulescentulus, a mere youth. 23. adaum, dm preMnt. 23. 
 loouH, Opportunity. _24^ e contrario, on t/ie cjmtrari/. 24. occaaio, opportunity. 
 
 '"S 
 
 w 
 
 iu IMene, dlimisl. ZQ: Ecyv, & lowjQ In sidiy. 29. causa, pretext. 
 
 \.- ^■. 
 
 -»•-■• 
 
# 
 
 iri ad- 
 
 tn adu-20 
 te ejus 
 insium, 
 
 dedit, 
 uperior 
 sissent, 25 
 etur. 
 C. Lu- 
 
 finem. 
 omanis 
 m mit- 30 
 novem. 
 
 altitudo, 
 3. fretus, 
 :, tei\fidd. 
 
 Kent. 23. 
 turtunity. 
 
 PART V. — TRANSLATION AT SIGHT. 
 
 455 
 
 % - ■ 
 
 * 
 
 if 
 
 )raeter 
 
 
 
 Iventu 
 
 
 
 »ili fla- 5 
 
 ' 
 
 
 oUegae • 
 
 
 
 ii^nses 
 
 
 
 Deindo 
 
 
 
 ubores 
 
 
 
 ) ut etio 
 
 w 
 
 ' 
 
 ostium ^- 
 
 - 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 'l 
 
 lumero 
 
 
 
 prius- 
 
 
 
 ibatur. 15 
 
 
 
 oduxit, 
 
 
 
 b Athe- 
 
 
 f 
 
 c[ue eos 
 
 
 
 «^ Erat praeterea cum eo adulesoens Hasdrubal, qui, Hamilcare 
 occiso, exercitui praefuit resque magnas geasit. Ejus post 
 mortem Hannibal ab exercitu accepit imperium. 
 
 At Hamilcar, posteaquam mare transiit in Hispaniamque venit, 
 magnas res secunda gessit fortuna ; maximas bellicosissimaaque 6 
 gentes subegit, equis, armis, viris, pecunia totam locupletavit 
 Africam. Hie cum in Italiam bellum inferre meditaretur, noi^ 
 anno postquam in Hispaniam venerat, in proelio pugnafas advepsu^ 
 Vettones occisus est. ^^ ^^- — -^ 
 
 Hujus perpetuum a^Ri erga Romanos maxime concitasse vide- 10 
 tur secundum bellumTunicum. Namque Hannibal, filius ejus, 
 assiduis patris obtestationibus eo est perductus ut .interire quam 
 Romanos non experiri mallet. 
 
 7. Batamedi Captnrea Aspii. ^ 
 
 . Datames cum maximo studio compararet exercitum, Aegyp- 
 
 tumque proficisci pararet, subito a rege littierae sunt ei missae, ut 15 
 ' Aspim aggrederetur, qui Cataoniam tenebat, quae jacet supra 
 ' Ciliciam. Namque Aspis, saltuosam regionem castellisque muni, 
 tain incolens, non solum imperio regis non parebat sed etiam 
 f fiuitimas regiones vexabat, et ^uae regi portarentur abripiebat. 
 Datames, etsi longe aberat ab iis regionibus et a majore re abstra- 20 
 hebatur, tamen regis voluntati morem gerendum putavit. 
 
 Itaque cum paucis sed viris fortibus navem conscendit,» exis- 
 timans, quod accidit, facilius se imprudentem parva manu oppros- 
 surum, quam paratum quamvis magno exercitu. Hac delatus in 
 Ciliciam, egressus inde, dies noctesque iter faciens, Taurum trans- 25 
 iit^, Quaerit quibus locis sit Aspis ; cognoscit haud longe abesse, 
 profectumque venatum. Interim, adventus ejus causa cognoscitur. 
 Pisidas, cum iis qdos secum habebat, ad resistendum Aspis com- 
 parat. Id Datames ubi audivit, arma sumit, suos sequi jubet ; 
 ipse equo concitato ad hostem vehitur. Quem procul Aspis con- 30 
 spiciens ad se lerentem pertimescit atque a conatu resistendi 
 
 6.-;6. secundus, good. 6. locupletd, enrich. 7. meditor, plan. 10. pernetxius 
 unceaamg. 10. concito, provoke. 12. assiduus, constant. 12. obtestatio, akmrationl 
 12. perduco, lead. 13. experior, try conclusions vkth. 13. malo, choose rather. ^ 
 
 7.— 14. Datamea, a Persian general of Artoxerxes II. 16. jaceo. lie. 16. suura. 
 beyond. 17 Baitximua, full of forests. 19. abripio, carrj/ off. 20. abitraho. draw 
 ^*""'^;^ - • ^*^"' «c. navi. 27. \enor, hunt . 28. Pi sidno.-^^^^ Pi sidianH. a p. 
 
 
 
 -vmrm) Jipipr rmr TJOr vetiai-,, «W terror r'^c. 31. fero (hen» Intransitivts se^dnT 
 omitted), advance. 31. pertinicsco, become frightened. 31. conatus, attempt. J; 
 
 ^™.^' 
 

 .**:- 
 
 IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARC^ET (MT-S) 
 
 *i ii 
 
 "V. ■ -^ 
 
 
 
 
 1.0 
 
 IttlM 125 
 
 lis ^^^ ■■■ 
 
 ■» IM ' ■2.2 
 £ us 12.0 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sciences 
 
 CorporatiDn 
 
 93 WMT MAIN STMn 
 
 WIMTfR.N.Y. t4SM 
 
 (71«)t71-4>0S 
 

 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 fc 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 ' 
 
 . ' . **r 
 
 , 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 . * * ' 1 
 
 "■ . * * "•.^■■■■.-. ^ 
 
 • 
 
 V 
 
 ) : 
 
 
 • 
 
 » 
 
 
 ^ . * 
 
 • 
 
 . 
 
 "( '■--.■•• 
 
 "' .■■ 
 
 ■ «1 - 
 
 
 If 
 
 /• 
 
 'V "(' 
 
 » « 
 
 =^^ 
 
 </ 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 , 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 , _ 
 
 
 • 
 • 
 
 ■ ■ . #, 
 
 r 
 
 • 
 
 « 
 • 
 
 « 
 
 » 
 
 1 ■? 
 
 
 ' ■ 
 
 •^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 • 
 
 - 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 , 
 
 ., 
 
 * " • 
 
 
 - . _^ 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■■• 
 
 * «. 
 
 ' 
 
 • 
 
 
 » 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 •_ 
 
 ' 
 
 
 m 
 
 , ■■'W*^^^ 
 
 
 .; % 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 % 
 
 
 ■~ 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
456 
 
 .PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 y 
 
 detemtus seae dedidit. 
 dum dedit Mithridati. 
 
 Huiic Batames vinctum ad regem traden- 
 
 % - / 8. The Military Oeniui of IphioratM. ^ ?'* . 
 
 ipffirates Atheniensis non tam magaitudine rerum gestarum '■ 
 quam disciplina militari nobilitatus est. Fuifi enira talis dux, ut 
 non solum aetatis suae cum primis compararetur, sed ne de ma jo- 8 
 ribus natu quidem quisquam anteponeretur. Multuih vero in bello 
 ost versatuB, saepe exercitibus praefuit, tantumque eo valuit, ut 
 multa in re militari ^rtim nova attulerit, partim melLora fecerit. . 
 Namque ille pedestria arma mutavit. Cum ante ilium maximis - 
 olipeis, brevibus hastis, minutis gladiia nterentur, ille, e contrario 10 
 peltam pro clipeo fecit, ut ad motus concursusque essent leviores ; 
 hastae moduni duplicavit, gladios longiores fecit. Idem genus 
 loricarum novum instituit, et pro aeneis linteas dedit. Quo fActo . 
 expeditiores milites reddidit. 
 
 Apud Corinthum tanta severitate exercitui praefuit, ut nuUae 15 
 umquam in Graecia neque exercitatiores copiae neque magia dicto 
 audientes fuerint duci ; in eamque consuetudinem adduxit, ut 
 cum proelii signum ab imperator/esset datum, sine ducis opera 
 aio ordinatae donsiaterent, ut ainguli a peritissimo imperatore 
 diapositi viderentur. Hoc exercitu mowm Lacedaemoniorum^ 
 interfecit, quod maxime tota celebratum eat^ Qtaecia. Iterum 
 eodem bello omnea copias eorum fugavit, quo facto magnam 
 adeptus est gloriam. ■ - 
 
 8. The Honesty end Foreiight of Epaminondu. 
 
 - Biomedon, rogatu Artaxerxia regis, ut Epaminondam pecunia 
 cbrrumperet, magno cum pondere auri Thebas venit et Micy-25 
 thum adulescentem, quern Epaminondaa plurimum diligebat, quin- 
 que talentia ^d auara perduxit voluntatem. , lilicythua Epaminon- 
 
 7.— 1. vlnclo, pu* in ehaim. 
 
 8.— 4. disciplina, nkill. 4. nobilito, make fammt». 0. vero, in fact. 8. alTero, 
 introdw». 8. inelior, helUr. ». pedetter, (tf infantry. ». muto, ohange. 10. olipeua, 
 ■AMd. 10. hasU, Kpear. 10. minutus, wn/ $hort. 10. Rladiiw, guxtrd. 10. e con- 
 tnwrio, on the eontrah- H- P«lt*. lufht tthield. 11. pro, it^dacf qf. 11. levUi. li^ht. 
 12. modus, tiunMHrr, length. 18. lorlc», cuirtuM. IS. Instimo, introdttce. 18, llnteui, 
 oflintn. 16. severiUa, ntrietnu: 16. exercitatua, well trained. 16. dloto audieni, 
 ci)edient. 18. opera, a»in$tam». 19. ordino, net in irrder. 19. peritua, exjMi^iem^ 
 20. mora, a dlviiiion of the- Spartan army, regimtnt. 21. oelebro, talkqf, praine. 
 
 _^ ^ __ _ ^ _ _ JIgOt Iw /wM> qjfi 
 
 , tr.'ptidooo^'^riiv'otfr. 
 
PART V.-T-TRANSLiirriON AT SIGHT. 
 
 457 
 
 dam convenit, et causam adveutus Diomedontis ostendit. At ille, 
 Diomedohtis coKwn : "Nihil," inquit, '* opus pecunia «st ; nam si 
 rex ea vulb quae Thebanis sunt uj)ilia, gratiis facere sum^paratus ;» 
 sin autetn contraria, non habet auri atque argenti satis. Namque 
 Qirbis terrarum divitias accipere nolo pro patriae caritate.. Tu quod 6 
 me incognitum tentasti, tuique similem existimasti, non miror, 
 tibique ignosco ; sed egredere propelre, ne alios coirumpas, cum. 
 me, non potueris. Et tu, Micythe, argentum huic redde, aut, nisi 
 idconfestim facip, ego te tradam magistratui." Hunc Diomedon 
 cum rogaret ut tuto dxire suaque liceret eflerre : "Istud quidem" 10 
 inquit "faciam, neque tua causa, sed mea, nor^i jbibi si^j)ecunia 
 adompta, aliquis dicat id ad me pervenisss." ^A" quo cumquaesi- 
 visset quo se deduci vellet, et ille Athenas, dipdsset, praesidium 
 dedit, ut tuto perveniret. 1 ' 
 
 Atque Meneclides quidam, adversarius Epaminondae, quod in 15 
 re militari^ 4orere ilium videW, hortari solebafe Thebanos ut pacem . 
 bello anteferre&t, n^ illius imperatoris opera desideraretur. Huio ' 
 ille, "Fallis," inquit, •♦ verbo cives tuos, quod eos a bello avocas ; 
 otii enim nomine. servitutem concilias. Nam paritur pax bello. 
 It^ue qui pace diutina volunt frui, bello exeroil^ti esse debent. 20 
 Quare si principes Graeciae vultis esse, oastris est vobis utendum, 
 non palaestra." ^^ 
 
 10. The Story of UlyuM. 
 
 The Lotus- Eaters. 
 
 Cum urbs Troja, a Graecis decem annos obsessa, tandem per 
 insidias capta esset, Graeci,tpngo bello fessi domum redire matura- 
 verunt. Omnibus igitur iSl^ profectidtiem paratis naves deduxerunt 25 
 et tempestatem idoneam' nacti magno cum gaudio solverunt. 
 Erat inter primos Graecorum Ulixes quidam, vir^summae virtutis 
 ac prudentlae. ■ Hie regnum insulae Ithaoae obtinuerat et, paulo 
 antequam cum reliquis Graecis ad bellum profectus est, puellam 
 
 9.-^1. oonvento, go to. 2. conm, in th$ prMence qf. 2. opus, need qf (w. »bl.) 
 8. grntiis, /or nothing. 4. sin, but if. 4. oontrarius, opposite. 5. orb!» terrarum, 
 the whole world. 6. carita», love. «. tento, eeek to bribe. 6. jimili», like. 8. reddo, 
 give bank, 10. efPero, oarr?/ ouwy. 10. intuA, what yon aOi. 11. cauia, /or ... «a*?. 
 16. floreo, am eonsjrifniom. 16. «oleo, am wmt. 17. opera, HerviceM. 18. avoco, 
 dienuide. 19. otium, prone. 19. «ervituB, elavery. 19. connillo, brxiig atmut. 1». 
 pario, ofttain. 20. dlutinu», /ojiWnj;. 20. friior, (r»yoj/(w. abl.). 20. exwvilatus, uW/- 
 irained. 22. palacwtra, «. y( a<<m y^ jwj^<w< <»» t,ypH»t<>l poatit.) 
 
 10.-28. ohBideo, ftr«trt/c. 24. feBsiw, «««oricd, 84. 
 joy. 29. anUqiiam, b^ore, 20. puella, maidm.. 
 
 \ 
 
^ 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 formosissimam, nomine Pehelopen, in, matrimonium duxerat. 
 Nunc igitur, cum jam decern ann9s quasi in exsilid consumpsisset, ^ 
 magna 6upiditato patriae et uxoris videndae incensus est. 
 
 Poatquamtamen pauca millia passuum a litore Trojae progressi 
 sunt, tanta tempestas sqbito coorta est'ut nulla navium cursum 6 
 tenere pusset, sed aliae alias in partes disjicerentur. Navis autem 
 qua ipse Ulixes vehebatur, vi tqmpestatis ad meridiem delata, 
 decimo die ad litus Libyae appulsa. est. Ancoris jactis Ulixbs 
 constituit nonnullos e suis iti terram exponere, qui aquam ad 
 navom referrent et qualis esset natura ejus regionis cognoscerent. 10 
 Hi igitur e navi egressi imperata faoere parabant. Dum tamen t~ 
 funtem quaerunt, quibusdam ex incolis obviam facti ab eis hospitio 
 accepti sunt. Accidit autem ut maximam partem niiro quodam 
 fructu, quem lotum appellabant, hi homines viverent. Quern cum 
 Oraeci gustassent, patriae et sociorum' statim obliti, se confirmave- 15 
 runt semper in ea terra mansuros, ut dulci illo cibo in perpetuum 
 fruerentur. 
 
 At . Ulixes, cuiii ab . hora septima ad vesperttm exspectasset, 
 
 veritu^. ne socii siii in periculo versaren^f, nonnullos o reli<][uiB 
 
 misit, ut quae causa esset morae cognoscerlent. Hi igitur in terram 20 
 
 expositi, cum ad vigum qui non l^nge al^crat pervenissent, socios 
 
 suos quasi vino ebrios reppererUi^iil^quo oid persuadere conabantur 
 
 ut secum ad navem rcdirent^^^B tamen resistere ac manu se 
 
 defendel-e coeperunt, sacrpe- clamTOlntes se numquam ex eo Ioqo 
 
 discessuros. Quae cum ita tfisent, nuntii re infocta ad Ulixem25 
 
 redierunt. His r6bu8 cognitis Ulixes ipse cum omnibus qui in 
 
 nayi relicti sunt ad loiaum vonit ; et socios suos iFrustra hortatus ut 
 
 sponte sua redirent, manibus eoruin post terga vinctis, invitos ad 
 
 navem reportavit. Tum ancoris sublatis quam. celerrime e portu 
 
 solvit. ; , • , 80 
 
 , . . ■ ■■ -' A '• ■' . ■» ~ 
 
 '.' . The OiarU, Polyphemus. 
 
 Postridie ejus djei postquam totam noctem r^mis contendeirant, 
 ad terram ignotam navem appulerunt. Tum, quod natu^am ejus 
 
 10.— I. formom», btaiUifiU. I. niairlmonhiiti, nHtrn'offe. 2. axmni, a» it wrr», 
 '6. disjlcio, matter. 10. refero, brituj hack. 12. fon», itprrng. 12. obviam flo, fall in 
 with. 12. hospitlum, hospitaliti/. 13. minis, wimtlerfitl. 14. (nictUB, fruit. U. 
 lotus, the Intun. 16. ob\iv'iacor,fi»yet (w. gen.). 1«. dulcis, eieeet, pleatant. 17. fruor, 
 jnpy [vf. a.b\.). IS. vtuper^ evening. 19. mMiiua, einnrade. 22. tihriun^ ilnmk. M^ ig^ 
 
 enjo 
 Tnte 
 
 egpe: 
 
 / 
 
 m 
 ■( 
 
 'ecfca, tMKbulaooomjHtehivg tSeir pUrpuHe. &. vincio, &tnJ. 
 
 =Mt 
 
 8; 
 
 :^ . 
 
^ ■.■ V_.. . -^' ■..:•■: ■■:•:■'■■ ■./:'•■ 
 /; ; . • - /^«T V--TRAKSUTI6N AT S;/5hT. ' 459 
 
 . regioms ignorabat, ipie Ulixes cum duodecim t ^- ■ . 
 
 egreasu» locum Mplorare oonstitiiit p , l^'" '" ^*™"» 
 
 -Bpecum ingentem ler.lZT'^.m ^t:^"^,""',!^"'^' «O 
 
 P«riculo id facturos, intravem," llf """"^»"»»' "o" «»« 
 
 - qui. eum locum inooleret «MtZ ?' . ^™" n»™»'»' « 
 ^n, humana quid::tere ' ;u~- ^^^^ 
 
 yC.c.opi.„..ae';rtrmtmrrnr '•^"^^ """•" » 
 ., «uod monslrum aimul atque vidernnt « . '" 
 
 interiorompartcm.pdu„caeSuJteur P^ 7 """^™" '" 
 
 •nim giganti, nomenemt) pecom^!™ :, .^"'wtemus autom (id 
 
 saxo ingcnti portam ob,fr, ,,!!? ° «P»''"»™» egit f turn cum 
 
 (Hoc faL, cC^Sl^^ " "VT" '" "'"''" "Pecu accendit 
 
 V'Qui esti; homin'rri^e^^rrarplaresr^ T °'*r " '' 
 
 o«am ut Sibil:: L^srrirer^iTrr^ "-''" ^ 
 
 dato responso duo « P.„ ' ■»•""» Polyphemus, nuUo 
 
 divu.,israr;devo;^r;r"' """*""".'" "■«""•-, — » 
 
 »et Ulixcs, tanUm occL,i„nem r.i Ze «Hi ^ ""'" "*'■ 
 FW'atus, in animo habcbat ^iwrCtTd"""''""/**"''""'^ 
 cum saxnm animadverUsset n,„; 1, •! «Wio occdere. At 
 
 - e,ua ...i m^„,„,„. „, „, ,_ quidltml!^"!^ 
 
 i£"^i, '«: Cyclops . ibiilou, kftf^UV'Tj"- J!- "•'""• "''">■ "1^ 
 Ktone. 14. obstnio, ba*ric<uif u i.t„u ^i*""- '^- ■pelunca, caoern. U uxum 
 
 i-. 
 
■/ 
 
 460 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOlL. 
 
 N 
 
 
 ' pecore suo progressus est, atque postquam ^omnes oves exierunt 
 saxum in locum restituit. ""^"^-^-.^ 
 
 Sub vesperUm Polyphemus ad specum rediit et eodem modo qU<j^ 
 ante cenavit. Turn Ulfxes utrem vini prompsit, quam forte secum 
 habebat, et giganti praebuit. Polyphem% qui numquam antea 6 
 vinum gustaverat, statim hausii^quod cu^ fecisset, quaesivit quc^ ; 
 nomine Ulixes appellaretur. Hie respondit se Neminem appellari| 
 Quod cum audivisaet, Polyphemus, **Hano tibi gratiam," inquit, 
 "pro tanto beneficio referam ; te ultimura omnium devorabo." 
 Ilisdictis, cibo vinoque gravatud, breAT tempore somno oppressuM© 
 est. Turn Ulixes sociis con vocatis, "Habemus," inquit, **»q"»«| 
 petimus facultatem." Tum postquam quid fieri vellet ostenditi 
 Budem praeacutam conquirebat. Quam cum repperisset, igni 
 calefecit, atque oculum Polyphemi diam dorrait transfodit ; qu<!) 
 facto omnes in ultimas speljuncae partes se abdiderunt. ' W 
 
 AtilleBubito illo dolore, quod nfecesse fuit,e. somno excitatus, 
 olamorem .ingentem sustulit, et dum per speluncam errat, Ulixem 
 manu comprehendere conatur ; cum tamen jam omnino caecus 
 e^et, nullo modo hoc efficere potuit. Interea reliqui Cyclopes - 
 clamore audito undique ad speluncam convenenint et quid ^rere- 20 
 tur quaesiverunt. Hie respondit Bo graviter vulneyatum esse. 
 Cum tamen cpteri quaesivissent quis ei vim intulisset, respondit 
 ilfe Neminem id fecisse. Quibus auditis unus e Cyclopibus 
 •'At si nemo," inquit, '*te vwlneravit, non dubium est quin con- 
 silio* deorum, quibus i-esistere nee possumus nee volumus, hoc 25 
 supplicio aflSoiaris." His dictis, arbitrati eumin insaniam inoidisse, 
 discesserunt Cyclopes. , 
 
 I At Polyphemus, , ubi socios suos abiisse sensit, furore atque 
 amentia impulsus Ulixem iterum quaerere coepit; tandem cum 
 portam invenisset, saxum amovit tit pecus ad agros exiret. Tum 30 
 ipse in'introftli sedit, et ut quaeque ovis ad locum venerat, tergum 
 ejus manibus tractabat, ne Graeci inter oves efifiigere possent. 
 Quod cum animadvertisset Ulixes, hoc iniit consilium : intellexit ' 
 enim* omnem spem salutis in dolo^ mt^'s quam in virtute ppni. 
 
 10._1. ovis, 8keep. 2. restltuo, ptit fta.-Jfc. 8. mib, totmrda. 4. uter, ftcini 
 4. promo, brinff mit. 4. forte, by chance. 6. haurio, drink off. 9. beiieflcium, 
 Bervice 9. uUi'mus, /flwt. 10. gravatus, A«atw. 18. \ttax»a\ii\\a, sharpened at the end. 
 18 conayxSro, look ab<nU for. 14. calefacio, heat. 14. dormio, deep. 14. transfodio, 
 i. '^ ^a Ar.\nr, «u»i«i 17 arm, \iiivader 1H omH^iia tMnd. «ft. In iniiaiilam 
 
 tedo, Jnwcwm «iai' 28^^^» 
 
 "" tncto,/Ml. ■ ■ , ' -^ • ■ ■ :^^ - . , -! 
 
 f 
 
 
 

 '/*'*'"' "''•'— TRANSLATION AT SI^HT. , 461 
 Primum tre. quas' yidit pmgu«8ia.a8 ove» delegit ; qm«cum inter 
 
 o»ju„o la^ret; daindo ove, honunem aeoum ferent*, adpH' 
 egit. H aocidit quod fore suspictus etttt. Polyph^nius enim 
 
 Eodem modo omne. suos eocio, emWt , ipie iltimu8 eyZt. 
 _ H.8 rebue .ta oonfectis, CUxes cum eooiia magnopere verito „o 
 PolyphemuB dolum eenUret,- «d litus eontendit (£<kI oum vem/ 
 se^ „„n satis tutum esse arbitratus si i„ eo W _t qZ" ^ 
 oeteuneproaoi^ioonstituit. Jus«tigit„r«mne,„.vemlr„ .0 
 dere, et »„co™ sublat» p.„l„„ . iit„re ia altum provectus est 
 
 JZ^IT"^"'- "^"•P<"^P'"'»«.'!"J".h^pitU.pe™t 
 «Tdl ^^^ ^^T.""'™"-" HaovJ audita Polyphen* , 
 ™ ct doWre moensus ad mare seoontulit, et ubi inteUerit navem 
 
 nuUo accepto damno, oursum tenuerunt. < , , 
 
 . • •■> Omx, tilt Hnclumtre»». 'i V.t' '' ; : 
 
 KeW intfflmisso spatio insulae ouidam appi6^i.^*averunt,qu.m 
 Circe, fiba Sobs, mcolebat. Ibi cum navem appufisset, Uliil in 
 teram frumeatandi causa egrediendum esse statuit rcognTe™"» 
 emm frumentum quod i„ „.vi haberet jam deficore. Soclk°Zr 
 
 Cum tamenomnesmemonatenerentquamcrudelem mortem ocou. " 
 bu^sent ei qu. m fine, Cyclopum egresri essent, nemo repertuZt 
 qu^oo Mgotium euscipere vellet. Tandem res ad sortem revoo» 2is 
 tu^aWue Eurjlochus cum duobus et viginti sociis ^«,80!^^ 
 
 credebant emm se socios suos numouam iterum visuros. 
 
 IIU autom aliquMitum itineris progpessi ad villam quandam • 
 pervenerunt eumma magnifioentii aedificat^n. Cuius villao d"» 
 mm», cm nomen erat Circe, Graeco. invitavit ui apud se dever- 
 ■arentur. Emrylochua autem imidJM su spicatu. fori, exspectare 
 
 8- venter, btUy 
 Ijm, damage. 81. defloio. ff „ut. i^o^Z\r L.}^- '^' ''"^'^ 
 
 2. subjioio, 
 17. damnum. 
 
 834 occumbo, ' wwafe ^ 
 
 ou(«id« (tbe door). ""«««d», mwrfw. gi. devoreor, Ktat/. 82. fori*, 
 
V • 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK; 
 
 constituit ; reliqui rei novitate adducti introierunt atque convivium 
 magnificum invenerunt omnibus rebus instructum. At ♦Circe 
 vinum medicamento quodam miscuerat ; Ijupd cum illi bibissent, 
 gravi sopore omnes subito oppressi sunt. Tum^^irce baculo aureo 
 quem gerebat capita eorum tttigit ; quo facto oinnes in porcos 6 
 statim conversi sunt. Interea Eurylochus ignarus quidx^ereretur, 
 ad ostium sedebat ; postquam tauien ad solis occasuiit^rustra 
 "exspectavit, solus ad navem reverti constituit. At UlixesKcum 
 iptellexiaset socios buos in pcriculo versari, Eurylocho imper^it 
 ut^^sine liora viam ad istam domum monstraret. Ille tamen multis.10 
 cum lacrimia Ulixem complexus obsecrare coopit tie in tantum "^ 
 periculum se committeret ; si quid gravius ei accidisdet, omnium 
 salutem in summo discrimine fore. Ulixos autenti respondit se 
 neminem inyitum secum adducturum ; ei lic6re, si mallet, in navi 
 manere; se ipsum sine uUo auxHio rem suscepturum. HI|K5 cum 16 
 voce magtia dixisset, e navi desiluit. 
 
 Aliquantum itineris progressus, subito adulescentem quendam 
 conspicatus est, forma pulcherrima, aureum baculum manu geren- 
 tem. Hie "Quo proficisceris ? " inquit, **Nonne scis amicos tuos 
 in Circes domu inclasos <esse, in porcoa. con versos ? Num vis ipse 20 
 in eandem calamitatcm venire?" Ulixes, simul atque vocem 
 .audivit, deum Mercurium agnovit ; nuUis tamen precibus ab insti- 
 tute consilio deterreri potuit. Quod cum Mercurius sensisset, 
 herbam quandam ei dedit, quam contra carmina plurimum valere 
 
 dicebat. ' ■. / ^ 
 
 Brevi intermisso spatio, Ulixes ad omnia pericula sul^unda 
 ,paratusad villam pervenit atque ab ipsa Circe benigne ej^tceptus 
 1 est, Omnia eodem mode atque antea facta sunt. Servi panem et 
 obsonia ei apposuerunt. Mox, ubi cenasset, Circe poculum aureum 
 vino repletum dedit. Ille, etsi suspicatus est venenun^sibi para- 30 
 tum esse, poculum exhausit. Quo facto Circe, poslj4u^ caput • 
 ejus baculo tetigit, ea verba locuta est quibus socios ijus antca in 
 
 , ___ ; ., ; f r ' .;■ ' , -. '■ f 
 
 10.— 1. introeo, enter. 1. convivium, banquet. 2. mapfiin-us, auwptuMU. 
 8. niedicainentum, drtifj. 8. misceo, mix. 8. l)i»)o, drink. 4, sopor, deep. 4. bacu- 
 lum, wand. 6. porcuB, pig, gwine. 6. converto, tum. 6. ignarus, not knowing. . 
 7. ostium, door. 10. monstro, point otd. 11. complector, embrace. 11. obsecro, 
 beg, beseech. 12. conimitto, pM. 12. ffravius, «criot«. 13. discrimen, pwri. 14. 
 nialo «re^er. 18. pulcher, co»»<rfj/, AaruMOMic. 19. acio, know, 20. include, tmj/mon. 
 21. cammitaa, misnap. 22. Merouriiis, 3/frcMr//, the nibssertKCir of the pods. 22. 
 ttfnowo, nHWffniaer-^Hrhiirba, plant. 24. uarmcn, i ne antat i utu i2(Laub c o, undergo, 
 encounter. 27. benigfne, cordially. 27. ex^io. welcome. 29. appono, set before^ 
 ^. poculum, 0oMet. 80. repleo,/i«. 81. «xhautu^ drain. 82i loquor, «peo*. 
 
f^0l 
 
 PART v.— TRANSI.ATION AT SIGHt" 
 
 463 
 
 nisrtd factum essot ostonr . !?^'"° P™'"»"> reduceret ; . 
 
 IX. Hannibal's Youth. 
 
 Romano ge^erunt. Nu.nSm^^^t^^"""'^' ™"" ?"?"'" 
 
 bus oertarunb quam viribua. fI™; eth^ ^" ^P """^o"- 
 
 duoe^tur in His^ir™ :^h'Jratl? '"''' '''"""^'' "'» 
 «dactam, se cum primum „„Mw , ^ ^" J'^oJ^ndo 
 
 >«nt; sed mors Himilcar rTn„ m """' It^l^oiUaturi 
 
 obtinuit, a^ue. pluraconaih^^:'^ "tn T oT '""""""" ^» 
 auxit. Is Hannibalem adul Jen^m iS I «arthaginiensem 
 
 Missus Hannibal in vZT **"" ^ ^ arcessivit. 
 
 vetores milites credeC' ^u "l^r™ . J"™-"' -dditum sibi 
 
 V 
 
 ■IK 
 
464 f 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. «-^ ^ 
 
 haud facile discemeres, utrum imperatori an exercitui carior esset, 
 neque Hasdfubal alium queraquam praeficere malebat, ubi quid 
 fortifcer ac strenue agendum esset, neque miUtes aUt>^ duce plus 
 confidebant aut audebant. ' ^ .,./ 
 
 Plurimum audaciae ad pericula capessenda, plurimum consiln fi 
 inter ipsa pericula eyat. NuUo labore aut corpus fatigari aut 
 animus vinci poterat. Equitum peditumque idem longe primus 
 erat ; princeps in proelium ibat, ultimus conserto proelio excede- 
 bat. Has tantas viri virtutes ingentia vitia aequabant, inhumana 
 crudelitas, perfidia plus quam Punica, nihil veri, nuUus deorumlO 
 metus, nulla religio. _ ^_^^ > 1. 
 
 /j 
 
 il — 1 haud. not. 1. discerno, decide. 1. utrum, whet?ier. 1. can», dear. 
 2 malo prSfer 8 B renue, v<oormu,ly. 5. audacia. boldness.^ 6. tati«o, weary. 
 S S^Si,%ermd. . 9. t^^n^ e^ual. 9. inhumanu», aavoife, inhuman. - 10. cru- 
 deSiaa, cruelty ' Wy^hinicua, Punw, Carthagi 
 
 pinion. 
 
 
 Supplementary CHAPTER. 
 
 The Roman Mod* of Reckoning Time. 
 
 1. After the reform of the calendar by Julius Caesar, in 
 B.C. 46, the Roman year consisted of 365 days (in leap year, 
 366), the months containing the same number of days respec- 
 tively as the English months. 
 
 2. The day of the m«ith was calculated Jn the following 
 
 manner : Three points were taken in* the month, the Calendis 
 
 (K(dendae\ the Ides (jdm\ and the Nones (Ndnde\ which the 
 names* of the months qualified adjectively, and from these three 
 point» respectively the date was calculated backuxird. •- . ' 
 
 3. The Calends fell in every case on the first of the month ; 
 in March, May, July and October, the Ides were on the fifteenth 
 and the Nones on the^seventh ; in the other months, thp Ides came 
 on the thirteenth anclthe Nones on the fifth. Any day between 
 the Calends and the Irenes was reckoned such and such a day ^ 
 before the Nones ; any'^^ay between the Nones and the Ides such 
 and such a day before the Ides, and any day after the Ides such; 
 and such a day before the Calends of the following month. 
 
 1 These names are J&nu&rius, Pebru&rius, Mlrtius, Aprtlls, Maius, JQnius, QulntHis 
 <or Julius^. Sextnis (or Augustus), September, October, November and December. The 
 names QuintUU, Afth month, SextUin, sixth month, September, jeventh motUh, etc., 
 Wexplaiw i dVth c f a ct that thflJtolUMU^ ft rJttigin al lyhfganwtt^ 
 
vf< 
 
 PART v.— TBB BOMAN CALENDAR. 
 
 'Ci 
 
 465 
 
 vLf K T^ «f 'he Calends faH withiri the next monih if tKv 
 5 The Romans had no second day befafe any of these thro« 
 
 S? I^d^^'*^ ^^ ^''"^'' ^^^"f the .eco^ui according to ^vI^S 
 : ^ 6. The following examples wilUll^tratiTthBie calculations ; "~— 
 
 _ . Feb. i5^=(28 + 2-15)=xv. Kal. Mart. 
 
 June5r<i=(5 + l-3)=iii. Non. Jan. T ^ 
 
 •' -f«]/{f^^ = (l^ + l-U) = PrIdle Id. Mai. . 
 ^pt. ^3th=^Idlhna Septemhrlhn». 
 7. The Roman dates giyen , in the above 'section are anm« 
 what contracted. For example, VI. Id. Jit/.ls Swie^W 
 aueidus Julias, die and anfe- being omitted, the numeral Tj 
 being substituted for sexto^and the other words abbreviJJJed ' 
 
 Frequently we find it in the fo^ni a.rf. T^I. Id Jul that i«\t«<* ' 
 
 diem sexfnrn. Mas Julias, where Si>^o^ coming b^tween^^^^^ 
 
 proposition and its object, is attract Jinto tlTe fccusltiri^ ' • 
 
 §extM.m. Such expressions are lookd^ Upon as single Words and 
 
 Z%': fm ^?'/'/ other prepositions ; ^; Th^/^Z^dlXture 
 
 "Smant "^ '^'*^^* I*'of«oM6aem.ln a.d.. IV. Id. Jjil. con;. 
 
 & >h! ?1SH^^»^ ^y '2-^?*?/^^ I™ ^"«?'^d ^ter'Vebruary 
 ■d, the 24th {x.e VL Kcd. %[art.) being reckoned twice and ii " 
 Jfe second pase of occurrence called bis sexttut; whence the year ' 
 -Itself was called bisextilts, from which we have our wor4 bissexke 
 
 oifWP^ N T"5 f^^^.^n^d. their time frpm the building of the: * 
 city (Rome) the date of which is fixed at 753 B.C., and tS reduce ^ 
 the Roman date to the corresponding year before Christ, the y^ar 
 of the city IS to be subtracted from 754, and nee v^rsa; as, Cicero ' 
 delivered an oratton against Catiline on Ifovember 8th, BXi 63- 
 Oloopo in CHtlllnam VI. Id. Nov. A.U.C DCXCI. orAtldnem 
 babuil^.r (A. U.O. =ab ulbe conditd, or annd urbis conditae.) If the 
 year specified is written out in full, the ordinal numerals ««peeinir 
 with anno are used ; as, Anno sesoente.lind noTn^geglmo prlmd;. 
 10. Any date in our era may be calculated from the birth of 
 Chnst withor wi^out^^nnJi>omtm ; as, Queen Victoria (Qsse^ed 
 
 ',./ 
 
 ^ 
 
-n '. 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 "V... 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 T ♦ 
 
 K 
 
 (. 
 
 . < 
 
 :i. 
 
 .> '. 
 
 EXPLANATORY NOTES TO THE J 
 
 * f 
 
 ' Tha quantity of all vowel» lonjr by nature ha» been marked. Vow^pls ndt marked 
 
 9 
 
 are to be com 
 
 lidered stiorc i>y nai 
 
 
 The following abbreviation» are used*: 
 
 ■ k "_ 
 
 - «bl. . . . 
 •oe. .. 
 
 adj.,. *V \ 
 adv. . 
 
 • 
 
 . ablative. 
 
 aceunative. 
 
 adjective. 
 . adverb. 
 
 eonjuncti^m. 
 
 dat. . . . . . dative. » 
 
 F. or Jem. .... feminine. 
 
 gen. . ' . , . . • genitive. 
 
 ' indecl. - .' . • ' . . indeclinable. 
 
 InterJ. . ... interjection. 
 
 M. ormosc. .•'• . . ' nuuctUine. 
 
 H. or neut, v • • .' neuter. 
 
 |)«rt. .... participle. . < 
 
 pass. . • , • • • passive. 
 
 peST ., . , . . perfe&t. 
 
 phir. , . . . ." plural. 
 
 prep. . . . • prepositi^. ^ 
 
 pre». J . ." . . Regent. 
 
 'pron. . .' . • pronmin. 
 
 sing. . . >; . Si^ular. ' 
 
 subst. . • *. -.-.. . j»uh8tanti,ve. 
 
 w. . . • . w . wUh. V. 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 a 
 
 / 
 
 a 
 
 a] 
 
 a1 
 
,•* 
 
 PART Vr.~VObABULAHY. 
 
 ■■i t'- 
 
 467 
 
 ^ J- 
 
 irked 
 
 er. 
 
 iciple. r 
 ive. 
 )H. 
 al. 
 
 ent. 
 ■oun. 
 ular, ' 
 tantive. 
 
 ^ ..^': 
 
 
 : . t 
 
 VOCABULARIES ANB^ INDEX.' ' 
 I. MTIN-ENOLiSH^VOCABULARY! r * 
 
 ---Jt- 
 
 .>^- 
 
 A, an^a^hreviation for Aniti^ 
 a, j»b, 1. jn-ep. ^dth abl. (a he-. 
 ' fore consonants ; ahbefofe.mtv. 
 
 els and some consonants),' a,wa.y 
 : from, from, at a distance of : 
 
 by ; on the side of, at, on, in,, 
 
 agamst. 2. adv. off. 
 abr-d6, ere, -dldl, -dltam, hide, 
 
 acoeptntiti^irTiM; arfj. (reo/^y 
 - perf.pdrt. pass, of aool|>l6), 
 
 welcome, acceptable. -. 
 ao-cl^, «re, -bldl, befall,'hap. 
 
 peWj occur ; turn oiii. ^ 
 Ho-clpld, ere, -oepi, -oeptvm, 
 receive, ,tak« ; ^suffer', . meet 
 "with; accept; hear. 
 aQ«abd, ;Are, avl, atairi, re- 
 ^ cluie at table. 
 
 ■r 
 
 ■n' 
 
 ■— V 
 
 conceal. • - ciuie at table. 
 
 ab-du^ ere, -duxl, -duotum, 7»«-cn"6, ere, -olirrl (-oaenr^ 
 
 lead oflL remove ; carry off **')> rjin up. ^^^ - „, 
 
 abl-es, -ells, F.. fin u<3>cuso, are. a vt. &«:»<». nlta*»*^ 
 
 , carry 
 
 abl-es, -ells, F., fir. 
 
 "'lO*®' ®'®' •'^*'*' -Jeotuiii, 
 
 throw away, thro\^ to one side 
 --(as of^no valiie). * 
 absens, -eii.tl8, absent, away, 
 
 being away. . ^ 
 absiniiiig, e, unlike. ^* 
 
 ab-8i8t6,.ere, -«tltl, keep away 
 
 (from). . "^ 
 
 abstinentla, ae, p., self -re-' 
 
 straijifcj ^unselfishnMs, integ- 
 ritv. i«: •» 
 
 1 
 
 aWstuH,„/Vw»^ufer& » ■'..' 
 absanvi'abesse, afnl, be absent, 
 
 be Wanting ; be far,' be distant ; 
 
 be away, lack, be lacking. 
 Ac (shorter form for atqae, ^ised 
 ' only before consonants), and, 
 
 and furtheii;, in -comparisons^ 
 
 as, th^n. 
 ao-oedd, ere, -oesrf, -oessam,. 
 
 app roach;' draw near, coma 
 —up, go toi be added. ' 
 
 U60USO, are, avl, atnm, charge, 
 ,, accuse. . , 
 4«j«r, oris, ere, sharp, shrewd! 
 . ^eagSr. • 
 aperbns, a; iim,, soujr. • 
 acerrlme, from aorlter. 
 AohiUas, ae, M., Achillas, an 
 Egyptian officer. 
 
 "«*«*'«*».*■•. edge, line, line 'of 
 
 -\ tjattle ; pitched battle, battle, 
 Vthe field. - • ' 
 
 uo-qalesco, ere, -qnlevl, -qnl- 
 
 ' etum, die, Kr *<Jon»e^o rcai'; 
 cf. our expressions, ^rest frofn 
 his labors, ^pass to his rest. ' 
 
 aoriter, adv^ (acrlns, acer- 
 rlme), fiercely^ hotly, deeper- ' 
 ately ; eagerly ; actively ; rig- * " 
 orously, 
 
 aotaarim, a, urn, light^ swift. ' 
 
 actuM, a, nirt, from ago. . 
 
 Ap i i inw, a ^ njco, sharp, point e d. 
 
 ad, prep, with acb., tp, towards, 
 
 -w 
 
 X 
 
468 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 1 against; ^th a view to, for; 
 accordibgito ; neai", by, in, 
 > among ; before ; until. 
 
 adaequo, are, avi, atniii, 
 
 equal. , ' „ 
 
 ad-do, ere, -dfdl, -dituni, add. 
 ud-duco, ore, -daxi, -dUctuiii, 
 lead, bring ; bring in, conduct ; 
 induce, iuQuence, promi)t, 
 force. 
 ad£niptas,- a, am, /mm adlnio. 
 ttdeo, adv.; to such a degree, 
 so, so much, so v^ry, such a, 
 so . . . a, so much asi 
 ad-eoV^re, -U (-Ivl), -ltum,'go 
 to, advance ; attack ; visil ; 
 approach. 
 adeptulB, a, ani,/romadipi8eor. 
 ~ adequlto, are, avt, atuni, ride 
 up. 1 . % 
 
 I i V adhibed, ere? ul, Itum, call in, 
 
 I " ./l^ bring along, bring in ; use, 
 
 ' ' employ. 
 
 adhortor, arl, atus sum, eh- 
 ^ courage, cheer. 
 -, ad-lK^o, ere, -egl, -actum jjiurl, 
 ^;. I. " 'cast;- ■._. ■ .. 
 
 "-^J ad-lmo, ere, -emi, -emptam, 
 _ ' take away, destroy, f 
 
 ad-ipiscor, I, -eptus gum, ob- 
 tain, gain, acquire. 
 ^ adItuH, uH, M., approach, ad- 
 vance, access, means of ap- 
 '- proach, right of approaching, 
 admittance. 
 ad-Jic'io, ere, -J6oI, -Jeotum, 
 
 throw up. • 
 
 ad-Jungo, ere, -Junxl, -Juno- 
 tnm, join to, unite, add. 
 ud-Javo, Are, -Juvl, -Jutum, 
 assist, help ; aid ; bo of a&sist- 
 ./■ anc4 to, further. 
 .;_ .AdmetuB, I, M.^Admetus, a king 
 • of the^Molomans in EpiriM. 
 .)y lidmlnWr6, Are, Avl, Atum, 
 • " carry out, executi^, attend to. 
 
 \^ 
 
 ,,.^.,.. 
 
 •dmlror, Arl, "fttu^ sum, wbn- 
 
 -^---.-^iv :- 
 
 der, wonder at, admire, be» 
 
 astonished, bo surprised. 
 i\d-mitt6, ere, -nil8l, -migsum, 
 
 ailow, incur ; commit ; let go. 
 adnioduni, adv., very, very 
 
 inuch, exceedingly, in a high 
 
 degree. 
 admoned, ere, ul^itam, advise,'' 
 
 WtU-n. , 
 
 ad-o^or, Irl, -ortu«- snmj at- 
 tack, assault. 
 ad-8uni, -^sg^ -fnl, be near at 
 
 hand, be present. . 
 ati-sunio, ere, -sumpal, -sump- 
 
 tum, take with {one's self), 
 adalesceus, -entis, M., young 
 
 man ; the younger. 
 udulescentiav ae, F., youth. 
 advQntas, us, M., aiTival, ap- 
 proach, coming. 
 adversarlanj I, M., opponent, 
 " -enemy. - 
 
 adversum Or adversas, prep. 
 
 with acc.f against. 
 ^dvergas, u, am, opposite, 
 
 facing, in front ; unsucceas- 
 . ful ; proeliam udversum, 
 
 defeat^ repulse. 
 ud-verto, ere^ -verti, -versani, 
 
 turn towards ; adimam ad- 
 
 verto, observe, notice. 
 advoco, are, avl, Atam, call to, 
 
 summon to. 
 advold. Are, Avl, Atam, fly to, 
 
 fly up ; rush upon, fall upon. 
 aedes, 1b, . F. (sing.), temple; 
 
 (pint:), house. 
 aedlflolam, I, N., building. 
 aedlflco, are, Avl, Atum, bi^ud, 
 
 construct, arrange. 
 AeduuB, I, M. , an ^duan ; in 
 
 plur., the iEdui, a tribe in the 
 
 centre of Oaul. 
 aegr6, adv. (aegriaft, aeger- 
 
 rlm^), scarcely, with difficulty. 
 AeffyptuB, I, F., Egypt. 
 A e i ii iUa ti j t^ -t?^ i MHrcU B JRmu 
 
 ->. 
 
 wi 
 
 UuH Paulus, consul in 256 B.C.; 
 
 -^-'^K:- 
 
 .■ \ 
 
PART .Vl.~VOCABULARt. 
 
 |:j ' ^ 
 
 469- 
 
 -^ 
 
 2. Lucius ^milius Paulus, 
 cotisid in 216 B. C; 3. Lucius 
 ^milius Paulus, comrd in 182 
 B.(J. -> 
 
 aeneaH, a, «m, bronze, of 
 
 bronze, copper, 
 aeqaaiis, .e, of the same age, 
 cpntempdrary ; as nmm, ae- 
 quaUls, 1«, M., contemporary, 
 coeval. t-^ 
 
 aeque, adv., equally. ' 
 aequinoctluni, 1, n., equinox. 
 aeqnlperd, are, avi, atnin, 
 
 equal, rival. 
 aequl'tas, -tatlg, f., fairness, 
 
 j^ice, sense of justice. 
 *»®<8^8> «1 «m, fair, just, right, 
 ressonable, proper ; level, fa- 
 vorable. 
 aerarlfim, I, N., treasury. 
 aes, aerig, N., bronze, copper ; 
 
 money. 
 aestas, -tatis, F., summer. 
 aestinio, are, avI, atam, esti- 
 mate, assess ; reckon; regard. 
 aestas, ug, m., tide. 
 aetag, ia,tl», v., age, -years'*, 
 
 time. 
 Afer, Afrir M., an African. 
 affero, afferre, attull, al la- 
 tum, bring, ^use. 
 of-flold, ere, -feci, -fectnm, 
 visit with ; affect (often to be 
 rendered by cause, inflict, im- 
 pose); in pimf.,' ho troubled, 
 be attacked. 
 «irirmd, are, avI, atuni, assert, 
 
 declare. 
 affllctro, are, avI, atum, bufl'ot, 
 
 toss alxjut ; damage, wreck. 
 nffllotng,, a, uni, from aflllj^o. 
 af-fllgd, ere, -lllxl, •fliotum, 
 itriko down, shatter, damage, 
 wreck. 
 afrore,^*^. inf. of admnm. 
 Afr&ning, I, m., Lucius Afra 
 
 Afrl<ja,-ae, F., Africa, imiaily 
 
 of the mcmity of Carthage onlii 
 
 Libya, • 
 Afrlcug, I, M., Africus, th4! 
 
 south west wind. 
 aiper, agri, M., field, land, coun- 
 
 try, territory. 
 ak«ror, -erig, m., mound, iam- 
 
 pai t, earthwork, agger. 
 a^-Srredior, I, -grregsug gum, 
 
 attack. 
 
 aggreKo, are, ay l, at um. at- 
 tach, join./ \^ 
 
 afirilig, e, active. 
 
 agmen, -minig, n., army on the 
 
 march, iline of march, column, 
 
 Hrmy; prlhium airmen, the 
 
 van; tt<|vigglmum agmen, 
 
 . , the roar. ^ - 
 
 a«o, ere, e^t; aietum, drive; 
 
 do, plan, carry on ; confer ; 
 
 grratlag a^d, thank ; id aird, 
 
 strive^ 
 affriooin^ »e, ^i., husbandman, 
 
 a»rrIeMta|»i,\ae, F., agriculture, 
 ' taiing tht^fendjfarming. 
 aid, defective verb, say, affirm, 
 
 declare. 
 ala, ae, P., wing. 
 alaorltag, -tatlg. P., eagerness, 
 
 ardor. 
 
 albug, a, nm, white. 
 
 Alexander, dri, M., Alexander 
 the Great, king of Macedonia. 
 
 ^Jo^andrla, ae, F., Alexandria, 
 fa city on the north coast of 
 Egypt. ^ 
 
 aliag, adv., on other occasions. 
 
 allenug, a, urn, of another, of 
 others, another's ; unfavor- 
 able, unsuitable, disadvan- 
 tageous. 
 
 alia, adv., in a different direc 
 
 tion, to a different object. 
 altqnaiudl n. f>r/r., forwrnno fimn 
 
 Ctn ^ ""^ "^^'•^ '"^ «llqu«nd«,rirfu. at some time ; 
 
 Spain. 
 
 at last, at length. 
 
470 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 allqaantufl, a, nin, some ; neut. 
 as snbst. , some portion, a con- 
 siderable part. 
 
 allqui, qua, quod, some. 
 
 allquls, qald, some one, some- 
 thing. , 
 , aliquot, adj. indeclinable, sev- 
 eral, some, a few. 
 
 ullter, adv., otherwise. 
 
 alius, a, nd, other, another ; 
 different^ alius . . . alius^ 
 one . . . another ; alii . . . alii, 
 some . . .others.' 
 ^ all&tus, a, uni, from affero. 
 
 Alliu, ae, F., the Allia, a river 
 north of Rome. 
 
 Altobroges, tini, M. <plnr., the 
 Allobroges, a tribe near the 
 Rhone. " 
 
 aid, ere, alul, altum (alitnni), 
 nourish, «Support, feed ; main- 
 tain, keep ; strengthen, in- 
 crease, foster. 
 
 Alpes, ium, F. plnr., the Alps. 
 
 Alplcl, drum, M. pZw»*, dwell - 
 ■ ers in the Alps, Alpine tribes. 
 
 alter, era, eruiii, the other ; 
 the one, another {of two) ; sec- 
 ond ; alter . . . alter, the 
 one . . . the other. 
 
 altltiidd, -dinifl, F., depth ; 
 height. 
 
 altns, a, urn, high, lofty ; deep ; 
 neut. as subd., altmn, I, the 
 deep, deep Water, the sea. 
 
 alvons, I, M., channel, bed (o/ 
 
 nver). ^* 
 
 • aniiibllis, e, lovable. 
 
 ainanter, adv., lovingly, affec- 
 tionately. \ 
 
 Amblvarltl, drum, M. plnr., 
 
 the Ambivariti, a tribe ith^ihe 
 
 ^ north-east of Oaiil. -N: 
 
 ambal6, ftre, ftvl, &tum, walk. 
 
 ftmentla, ae, F., madness, folly. 
 
 ami«<A. adv., in a friendly man- 
 
 anilcltia, ae, F., friendship, al- 
 
 • liaiicA 
 
 amicus, a, um, friendly. 
 
 amicus, 1, M., friend, ally. 
 
 aniissns, a, um, from amitto. 
 
 a-mitto, er«», -mlsl, -niissum, 
 lose. >* 
 
 amo, are, avi, atam, love. 
 
 amphora, ae, F., wine-jar, two- 
 handled jar, amphora. 
 
 am-plector, I, -plexus sum, 
 embrace, grasp. 
 
 amplitudd, -dinis, F., size, ex- 
 tent, greatnessr. 
 
 a^mplius, adv., comparative of 
 amplje, more, further ; more 
 than. 
 
 am plus; a, um, lai^e, g^reat, 
 numei'ous ; illustrious, noble. 
 
 an, conj., or, introducing the 
 second part of a double question; 
 whether. 
 
 Anoalites, um, M. plur., tT 
 Apcalites, a tribe in Britain. 
 
 an-««p8, -dpitis, double, two- 
 fold ; doubtful. 
 
 anoiUa, ae, F., maidservant. 
 
 ancora, ao, F., anchor. 
 
 aoffulus, I, M., corner, angle. 
 
 anguste, cidv., closely. 
 
 angfustiae, arum, F. jdur., nar- 
 rows, straits; narrow defile. 
 
 ang^nstus, a, um, narrow, small, 
 confined, contracted, steep. 
 
 anliiia, ae, F., life. 
 
 auimndver-to, ere, -tl, -sum, 
 notice, observe, perceive. 
 
 animal, -alls, N., animal. 
 
 ^niinus, I, M., soul, mind, heart, 
 Spirit, will, feelings, courage, 
 character, ability, dispositicm ; 
 consciousness ; pride, ambi- 
 
 i tion ; pleasure, amusement. 
 
 annftlls, in, m., sc. liber, his- 
 torical work, chronicles. 
 
 an not! HUB, a, nm". of the year 
 
 ner. ' 
 
 bef(tfe. 
 
 N, 
 
PART VI. — ^VOCABULARY. 
 
 471 
 
 
 annng, 1, M. , year. 
 
 annnus, a, niii, a year'»; for a 
 year. ' 
 
 anser, -erlg, M., goose. ^^ 
 
 ante, 1. adv., before, formerly, 
 previously ; above. 2. prep, 
 with acc.y before. 
 
 antea, adv., before, previously. 
 
 ante-cedd, ere, -oessi, -cossuni, 
 go before, go in advance, 'pre- 
 cede ; surpass, excel. 
 
 ante-ferd, -ferre, -tull, -l&tniii, 
 place before, consider supe- 
 rior. 
 
 ante-pond, ere, -posnl, -posl- 
 tnm, place before, regard of 
 more importance than. 
 
 ante-8td, -stare, -stctl, stand 
 before, surimss, be superior 
 to, excel. 
 
 Antioohan, I, M., Antiochus, 
 Ung of Syria, 223*187 R G. 
 
 antlquna, a, uin, old, ancient. 
 
 Ap., aw abbreviation for Appias. 
 
 aper-lo, Ire, -ul,"^uin, open ; 
 
 ' disclose, reveal. 
 
 apertna, a, urn, adj. (really 
 perf. part. jmss. of nperlo), 
 open, unprotected, uncovered, 
 exposed; clear, unobstructed.' 
 
 ApoU-d, -Inta, M., Apollo, the 
 god of the aun, propheaj, hml- 
 ingand music; his chief shi]ine 
 ifcw at Delphi. 
 
 appareo, ere, ul, Itum, corne 
 in sight, appear. 
 
 apparo, &re, &vl, Atuin, mftke 
 ready, prepare. 
 
 appello. Are, AvI, fttuin, call, 
 name ; accost, address. 
 
 ap-pell6, ere, -pull, •p^liiam, 
 bring to land ; |nu«., laoid, j^ufc 
 in. "^" -"^— -y-^-- 
 
 Appennlnns, I, M., the Appe- 
 ninos, a range of mountains in 
 
 . I^dy . 
 
 pet-6, «re, -I%'I, -Itvim, striire 
 
 ft©^, seek, try to get. 
 
 Applns, I, M., Appius, a Roman 
 
 pnenomen. 
 applied, are, avi, atom, At- 
 tach. 
 ap-pono, ere, -posul, -posltam, 
 
 set before one, serve. 
 apporto, are, avI, atnni, bring, 
 approbo, are, avI, atnm, ap- 
 prove. 
 approplnqnd, are, avI, ^tnni, 
 
 approach, draw near, be near 
 
 (ivith dat.). , 
 
 aptns, a, um, suited, suitable, 
 
 fitted. 
 apnd, jwep. <\vith ace, at, with, 
 
 among, near, before, in the 
 
 presence of ; at the house of ; 
 
 in the writings of ; on. 
 Apulia, ae, F., Apulia, a district 
 
 in sovth-eastcm Italy. 
 Apulus, I, M., an Apulian, 
 aqnn, ae, F., water. 
 aquatlo, -onU, F., getting of 
 
 fetching wate^. 
 aqulla, ae, F., eagle, the ensigri 
 
 or standard of a Roman legion. 
 Aqnltanla, ae, F., Aquftania, 
 
 the south-western part ofOaid. 
 Aqnlt&nuA, I, M., an Aquita- 
 
 nian ; in pliir. the Aquitani. 
 &ra, ae, F., altar. :_^ 
 
 Ar-ar, -aria, M., the Arar, U 
 
 river in Oanl. 
 Arbiter, tri, M., arbitrator. 
 arbltrlntn, I, N., pleasure, will, 
 
 judgment. 
 nl'bltror, Arl, &tna aum, think, 
 
 consider, judge. . 
 
 arbor, -orla, F., tree. 
 arceaa-o, ero, -Ivl, -Itni 
 
 mon, send for, 
 A^dnonna, aie, 7., Ard^ 
 
 forest in the north-east ' 
 arduaa, a, um, steep, dif 
 arirentnm, I, N., silver. 
 
 -M^ vlnr. ,8eeA\ 
 
 Argl , <>rn 
 
 uu 
 
 y£Cfi& 
 
 Arii^i, N. (otUy nom. and ace.), 
 nmally in me form Arri 
 
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 "V 
 
 I 
 
 6mm, u. ijinr.,,'ArgoSj a city in at, conj., but, but yet. .' 
 the twrth-eastei'ti Peloponnesus. Athenae, arum, f. phir.^ Ath- 
 &ridas, a, am, dry; nent., arl- ens, the capital oJ[ Attica a'nd 
 
 ^ 1: 
 
 dam, I, as snhst , dry land, solid 
 
 grouad. 
 Ariovlstas, 1, M., Ariovistus,' d 
 
 chief of the Germans. 
 Aristldes, ig, M., AristideSj afa- 
 
 moris Atlieniati. 
 
 chief city of Greece. 
 
 Athenieiisls, e, ruij., Athenian ; 
 masc. as snbst., an Athenian. 
 
 atqae, couj^, and, and further, 
 and I mj^ say ; in compari- 
 sons, than, as. 
 
 arma, dram, N. plur., arms; Atre-bas, -batls, M., an Atreba- 
 
 force of arms ; war. tian ; in film\, the Atrebates, 
 
 aMnamentaj dram, N. plnr., a tribe in the nortJiern part of 
 
 tackling, tackle, riggihg. Gafd. 
 
 armatl, orifm, M. plur. of perf. Atrias, X, M., Quintus Atrius, ■ 
 
 part, paiis. o/armd, armed men. an officer of Casar's. 
 
 Arminlad, I, M., Arminius, a Attica, ae, f., Attica, the di<t- 
 
 German prince. trict of Greece of which Athens 
 
 armp, are, ayl, atam, arm, toas the capitaL 
 
 equip; rouse, incite; perf. Attloa8,l,M., Titus Pomponius 
 
 part, jpcws. , armed, in arms, Atticus, a Roman historian, a 
 
 . with one's eCrms. great friend of Okero and Ne- 
 
 ar-rlpi5, ere, -rlpal, -reptam, pos. 
 
 seize, catch up. - at-tln^o, ere, -tlgl, -taotam, 
 
 arg, artlg, F., art, skill. touch ; border on ; reach. 
 
 Artaxer'keg, ig, M., Artaxerxes,' attrlb-a5, ei*fe, -al, -utam, as- 
 
 SMmamed Longimanns {^ Long- sign, give. 
 
 hand '), king of Persia 465-425 aactor, -oris, m., leader, adviser ; 
 
 B.C. an authority, author, histo- 
 
 Artemlglam, X, N., Artemisium, rian. . 
 
 a promontory at the northern aaotdrltag, -tatia, f., influence, 
 
 '^nd of the island of Eiibced. "weight, prestige } power. 
 
 arx, arolg, F., citadel ; in Ath- aadaola, «io, f., danng. 
 
 ew«, the Acropolis ; in Rome, aadaoter, adv., boldly, f ear- 
 ths Capitol. . lessly.' 
 a-soendo, ere, -goendl, -goSn- aaded, ere, ausag gam, dare, 
 
 gam, mount, climb, ascend ; venture, attempt. 
 
 embark upon, go on board ; audld. Ire, ivl, Itam, hoar, lis- 
 
 (of a cannage) get into. • ten to ; hear of. 
 
 sgoengag, ug, M., ascent. aadltld, -onlg, f., hearsay, ru- 
 
 Agla, ae, F., Asia, Asia Minor. mor. 
 
 .agpeotag, Ag, M., appearance. aaferA, aaferre, abHtall, nblA- 
 
 asper, era, eram, rugged, rough. tarn, take away, carry off. 
 
 a-gploid, ere, -gpexl, -gpeotom, aaffoo, 6re,' aaxi, aaotam,' in> 
 
 see. .^,---^-.-r--—^-^---^^--^.^~.-^ crease, strengthen, ^-y *- 
 
 aggnd'^aofd, ere, -f*oI. -fao- AaffUHtag, I, M., Augustus, the 
 
 tarn, aolDustoni, train. first emperor of Rome. 
 
 J nd Miimhle . mtyi tun- ■ A nln «, l . m., Anbia, 'fi Rnmnn 
 
 —t'n . Jfe. 
 
 ally Athens. . 
 
 jmvnnmen. 
 
 ..^. 
 
 »■ 
 
 
Tr-" 
 
 ^ . t>ART VI.— VOCABULARY. 
 
 
 473 
 
 Zli^l' ^l T' .^^ ^'-^f' ^''^'^^"' '^«'^^*"*^ *> «™, bearded ; masc. 
 
 anrum, IN., gold, money. Batavl, drum, Si. plnr., the 
 . Aurunculeius Cotta, one of. of the Rhine. 
 
 an^lTJ T""^'- beat»., «, up., fortunate, happy. 
 
 aujug, a, „m, /rom audeo. Bol^ae, arum, M. plnr., the 
 
 a,it, con;, or, or else ; ailt . . . Belgian^ a people ^oe^pZg ' 
 
 aut, either . . or theloHjleastofGa.a. ^"^ ^ ' 
 
 whni . "'"''•^" ^"^' whereas, BeHrlmn, i, n., Belgium, the 
 
 while; moreover, now,, how- country of the Belq J 
 
 ever, furthermore, again. bellloosu*, a, urt., Varlike. 
 
 a«xro7\r, V''"'""'"' • »>«"»' *'e. avi, atum, make ^ 
 
 «1i SIV- • -^ *""*' 8^^® ^*''' «««"ry on war, fight. 
 
 ^ aid help assist Bellovaol, orum, M. plnr., t'he 
 
 ■auxlllum, i,N., aid, help, assist- Bellovaci, a tribe in Gmd. ^ 
 
 ance ; in plnr., auxiliaries, re- bellum, i, n., war. 
 
 mforcements. Melius, », um, pretty, lovely. 
 
 7J^J*' ^*'®' "*'' '*"*"' *^"™ Blbulus, I, M., Lucius Bibulus, 
 
 ^^^^- , , consul in 59 JS.a 
 
 «V dr^i.'^'';-?^'^ ^^^*!"'"^' '' ^' *^»^« «p««« of two 
 
 \*!*."*'' ■*""■♦ *^' eagerness, days, two days' time 
 
 bltil, ae, a, two by two, two at 
 
 "a time, two each. 
 bis, adv., twice. 
 
 \^ greed. 
 
 »vl8, ig. P., bird. 
 
 ^vu«, 1, M., grandfather. „„, aav., twice. 
 
 MTon^r' ^" ^''''"*' " '"''^*' BIthynIa, ae, F., Bithynia. a 
 
 %n vfam. country on the north-west coast 
 
 <f fjj! ^j^ Minor. ' ,, 
 
 ® • Bithynll, drum, M. plnr., the 
 
 •n i.Li- T> Bithynians. 
 
 Babylon, -onU, p., Babylon, a Blltho,' -6nU, M., Publius Sul- 
 
 ntk on the Euphrates pjcius Blitho, a Roman his- 
 
 BabyhonluB, I, M„ a Babylonian. toi'ian. 
 
 Tamj\hiU8 ajtd M. Biebius a tribeof Qerman oriqin. 
 
 *?ftrr\^ ' '^'^'t^r^V" ^^^ **^ bonltft., -t&tl., P/vgoodness, ex- 
 
 , 181 B.V. respectively. collonco. 
 
 ballneniii^, I, n., bath. tonus, «, um (meUor, optl^ 
 
 btorbaru.,, », «„., fo reign ; un- mn»), good ; safe i k pUtr. 
 
 oiv i liHtH l, i ^ttde, b arlMimTr 
 
 barbarna, \,m., a Iwrbarian, a 
 
 as snbst, honn., drum, goods, 
 property; services. 
 
sssss 
 
 .... i. 
 
 474 
 
 «.PRIMARY LATIN BOO^. 
 
 i H- 
 
 boB, bovls, M. and F. , ox, cow. 
 
 Brennns, I, M., Brennus, alead- 
 \ er .of the Gauls. 
 
 brevls, e, short ; as adv. brevi 
 (for brovl tempore), in h 
 short time, shortly, presently, 
 quickly. 
 
 Britannia, ae, F., Britain. 
 
 callidns, a, am, skilful, shrewd, 
 cunning, sagacious. 
 
 Campania, ae, F., Campania,, a 
 district in Italy y south of Monte. 
 
 campns, I, M., field, plain; the 
 open. 
 
 Candidas, a, am, bright, shin- 
 ing, white. 
 
 Britannioas, a, um, of Britain, canis, i6, M. and F., dog. 
 
 of or with the Britons. Cannae, aram, F. plur.y Cannae, 
 
 Brltannag, 1, M., a Briton. a town of Apulia. 
 
 bruma, ae, F., the winter sol- Cannensis, e, of Cannee. 
 
 Btice ; winter. " Cantiam, I, N. , Kent, in the 
 
 Bruttil, drum, M. plur., the south-east of England. ^ 
 
 Bruttii, a people in the south caper, pri, M., goat. 
 
 of Italy. cape88-6, ere, -Ivl, -Itam, take 
 
 Bucephala, ae, F., Bucephala, * part in, undertake. 
 
 a town in India. oaplllas, I, m., hair. 
 
 Bucephalus, I, M., Bucephalus, oapio, ere, oepi, oaptum, take, 
 
 Alexdnder the Great's war- catch, seize, capture, take pri- 
 
 horse. 
 
 
 
 C, an abbreviation for Cains, 
 oado, ere, ceoldl, casnm, fall, 
 be slain.< 
 
 soner ; get, occupy, reach ; 
 move, aflfect ; form, adopt ; 
 select. 
 Capitolium, I, N., the Capitol,- 
 ~-tb^ temple of Jvpiter on the 
 Capitoline hill at Rome. 
 
 oaduceus, 1, M., a herald's stj^ oaptXvus, I, M., captive, prison- 
 oaedes, is, F., slaughter. 
 oaedd, ere, ceqidi, caesum, 
 
 slay, kill. 
 caelum, 1, N., heaven. 
 oaeriinonia, ae, F., religious 
 
 observance, reverence. \ 
 oaeruleus, a, am, blue, dark 
 
 blue. 
 
 er. 
 captus, us, M., capacity, nature, 
 
 standard, notions. / 
 Capvia, ae, F., Capua, thechiej^ 
 
 city of Campania in Italy. 
 cap-ut, -itis, N., head ; person ; 
 
 capital, chief city ; of a river^ 
 
 mouth. 
 
 Caesar, aris, M., 1. Caius Julius cared, ere, ul, itum, be with- 
 
 Ciesar, a Roman general. 2. out, be free from, loith abl. 
 
 Lucius Cresar, a lieutenant card, earnis, F. , flesh, meat.' 
 
 with Ctesar. carrus, I, M., cart, wagon. 
 
 C&iuB, I, M., Caius, a Roman Carth&grinlensis, Is'^'^., a Car- 
 
 pi'ianomen. thaginian. 
 
 oalumitas, -tatis, F., disaster, Carthago, -Inls, F., Carthage, 
 
 . reverse. a city in northern Africa, on 
 
 oalceus, I, M., shoo. • 'W the Meditemmean. 
 
 oallide, adv., skilfully, cleverly, ciir'iis, a, am, dear ; valuable. 
 
 shrewdly; Carvilius, 1, m.^ Carvilius, a 
 
 oalllditfts, -t&tiB, F., cuni|ing, kmg^rtilMgTn KsnT. 
 
 trickery 
 
 casa, ae, F., hut. 
 
 l^ 
 
PART VI. — ^VOCABULARY. 
 
 476 
 
 CaasI, Oram, M. piwr., the Cassi, 
 a tribe in Britain. 
 
 GasslVellaanns. I, m., Cassivel- 
 
 ■' launus (also written Cassive- 
 launus), a British chief. 
 
 oastellam, 1, N.,^ fortress, fort, 
 stronghold ; fortified dwelling. 
 
 Castloas, I, M., Casticus, a chief 
 of the Sequani. 
 
 «*^'». drum, N. plur.^ camp, 
 encampment. 
 
 oasas, us, M., fall; accident, 
 chance ; emergency ; misfor- 
 tune, disaster. 
 . catena, ae, P., chain. < 
 
 oanga, ae, F., cause, reason; 
 / pretext, excuse ; position, situ- 
 ation ; w the ahl. siifb. ioith 
 a gen. preceding, for t'he sake 
 of, for the purpose of. 
 
 caved, ere, oavl, oantuQi, be 
 
 on on^'ti guard against, beware 
 of. . ^. 
 
 ceddl, /roTTf^oadd. 
 
 cedo, ere, cessi, cessam, re- 
 treat, give way, retire ; yield. 
 
 oeler, erls, ere, swift, speedy, 
 rapid, sudden. 
 
 celerltas, -t&tl8, P. ^ swiftness, 
 speed, rapidity, quickness. 
 
 oeleriter, adv. (oelerlirg, celer- 
 rlm6), swiftly, quickly, rapid- 
 ly- ' ' 
 
 c616, are, &vl, atam, hide, con- 
 ceal. 
 
 celsns, a, am, tall. 
 
 oena, ae. P., dinner. • 
 
 Genim&grnI, dram, M. plur., the 
 Cenimagni, a tribe of Bntain. 
 
 oeno, are, &vl, ataivk, dine. 
 
 OentenioR, I, M., Caius Cente- 
 nius, a Roman general, 
 
 oentam, a hundred. . >, 
 
 eentarto, -onl«, M., centuri^^n, 
 an officer in the Roman^rmy. 
 
 c6pl. /rom capto. 
 
 cert&men,, -minis, N., contest, 
 
 struggle, battle. 
 eerte, adv., certainly ; it least. 
 o^taa, a, Tim, certain, sure, 
 fixed, .specified, exact ; certi- 
 drem faoere, inform. 
 cervix, -Ids, P., neck. 
 oessl, from cedo. 
 ceterl, ae, a, the other, the 
 
 others, the rest of. 
 Cethegaa, I, M., P. Cornelius 
 Cethegus, consul in 181 B.G. , 
 cibas, I, M., food, provisions ; 
 
 m6al. 
 Cicero, -dnis, M., Cicero, a Bo- 
 man name. 
 Clngretorix, -lyig, m., Cingetorix, 
 1. a chief of the Treveri; 2. a 
 king of Kent. 
 dngd, ere, olnxl, clnctam, sur- 
 round. 
 clro&, prep, with ace., around, 
 
 near. 
 clrdter, adv., about, nearly, 
 droaitas, ia, am, perfi pari*. 
 
 pass, o/ dreamed, 
 oircaltas, us, M., circumference. 
 drcam-do, -dare, -dedl, -da- 
 
 tam, surround, invest. 
 drcam-duco, ere, -duxl, -dac- 
 
 tam, lead around. 
 drcam-eo. -Ire, -II (-Ivl), -Itam, 
 or droaitam, go around, sur- 
 . round ; make a tour of, visit, 
 
 joake the round of. 
 clfcam-fcro, -ferre, -tall, -I&- 
 
 tam, cast around. 
 droijim-seded, ere, rsSdl, -aet- 
 
 aani, encamp about. 
 drcamallld, Ire, hop aboiit. 
 droam-aiato, ere, -stetl, su'r-' 
 , round, crowd around. 
 drcam-ato, atare, -atetl, stand 
 
 around, surround. 
 dream- venlo, Ire, -v6nl, -ven* 
 L tnni. aangMind^ autflflnk.^,_-. ..^ 
 
 y A 
 
 oerno, ere, crftvl, cr§tani, jper- 
 
 ceive, behold, see. 
 
 da, prep. k». ace, on this side 
 of. ' 
 
TV. 
 
 /V 
 
 476 
 
 "N»' 
 
 PRIMAftYX^TlN BOOK. 
 
 .■* . 
 
 ' oiterior, las, adj. (comparatim)^ 
 hither, nearer. ' 
 
 oito, fidv. (oltlns, oltiflsime), 
 quickly, swiftly, rapidly. 
 
 olto, are, avi, atnm, hasten ; sum- 
 mon ;pef/. jt)ar£. pcu»., cltatns, 
 as adj., swift, at full speed. 
 
 eltra.,prep. w. ace, on this side of. 
 
 civ is, is, M. or p., citizen, fellow- 
 H citizen. 
 
 «Ivitas, -tatis, F., state, country. 
 
 olades, is, F., defeat, disaster. 
 
 ^olam, adv.y secretly. 
 
 ' olamitd, are, avI, atam, cry 
 out, keep shouting. 
 
 Olanid, are, avI, atam, cry, 
 call out. 
 Ii^olamor, >drig, M., shouting, out- 
 ■'- cry. ' 
 
 , olande^tlnas, a, am, secret. 
 /~elariis, a, am, celebrated. 
 
 olassiaril, dram, M. jilur., sea- 
 men ; sailors, naval forces. 
 
 olussicum, I, N., trunipet-call 
 (for battle). " / 
 
 «lassis, Is, F., fleelf, 
 
 Clastidiam, I, N., Olastidium, a 
 
 I town of CHs(dpine GoaU. 
 
 Olaadius, I, M., 1. Marcus Clau- 
 dius Mfircellus, consul in 208 
 B.C. 2. Marcus Claudius 
 Marcellus, son of the preceding, 
 consid in 196 B. G. 3. Appius 
 Claudius, consrd in 64 B. C. 
 
 olaadd, ere, ol.aasi, olaasam, 
 close ; surround, hem in, en- 
 close ; shut in, imprison. 
 
 olava, ae, F., club. 
 
 cliens, -entis, M., vassal, de- 
 pendant, retainer. 
 
 cllvos,*!, M., hill, slope. 
 
 Oiuslnus, a, um, of Clusium, n 
 __ city in Etmriti. 
 
 ,Cn., an aJbhreviaUmi for Onaeus. 
 
 Gnaeas, I, M., Cnaeus, a Roman 
 prmiomen. 
 
 'v^r a*»T ftvi, atam, heftfi ^^ 
 
 coaotas, a, am» /rom oogd. 
 Codes, -itis, M., Codes, Hora- 
 
 tius Codes, a fammis Uoman 
 
 hero. 
 
 coegfl, /rom cogo. o- 
 
 ooepl, isse, codptas som, be- 
 gan, ^aye begun. 
 
 ooerced, ere, nl, itam, restrain, 
 check. 
 
 oogitd, are, &vl, atam, con- 
 sider, think. 
 
 edgrnatid, -onis, F., relation- 
 ship, connections. 
 
 cognomen, -minis, N., Sur- 
 name, family name. 
 
 oo-gndso6, ere, -gndvl, -gnl- 
 tum, perceive, learn, find out, 
 discover, ascertain, become 
 acquainted with ; inquire in- 
 to ; in perf. tenses, know, ^be 
 aware. 
 
 odgd, ere, ooegX, coactam, col- 
 lect, gather, get together ; com- 
 pel, force, constrain. 
 
 oo-liors, -hortis, F., cohort, 
 "Tcompany, one-tenth of a legion. 
 
 Qoliortatid, -Gnis, F., encourage- 
 ment ; speech, harangue. 
 
 ooliortor, arl, atas sam, en- 
 courage, urge. 
 
 4;olIai>e-fld, -fieri, -faotas sam, 
 be ruined, be overthrown. 
 
 coUatds, a, am, from confero. 
 
 oollaado, &re, avt, &tam, 
 praise, commend highly. 
 
 ooliega, ae, M., associate, col- 
 league. & 
 
 eol-llgo, ere, -l!§gl, -leotam, 
 collect ; 8e colligere, rally. 
 
 oollis, is, M., hill. - 
 
 oollood, are, avI, atam, place, 
 station ; arrange, stow ; give 
 in marriage. 
 
 oolloqaiam, I, N., conference, 
 interview^ 
 
 ool-loqaor/^ I, "lobutas ■nih, 
 ^wmvera a f confer, diacuM r^ 
 
 #■ 
 
 up, collect. 
 
 oolla'm,y1, N., neck. 
 
PART VI. — VOCABULARY. 
 
 477 
 
 oolo, ere, oolnl, oaltum, till, 
 cultivate ; cherish, regard, 
 venerate, reverence, esteem. 
 
 oolor, -dris, M., color. 
 
 oolumba, ae, F., dove.»i 
 
 coma, ae, F., hair; foliage, 
 leaves. 
 
 oom-edo, ere, -edi, -esnm, eat. 
 
 ooiiiitor, arl, atns snm, accom- 
 pany, follow. 
 
 oomme&tns, us, M., supplies, 
 provisions ; passage, trip^ 
 
 ooniniemoro, are, avi, atum, 
 mention, relate, state, tell. 
 
 oominendo, are, avI, atum, 
 commend, commit, entrust. 
 
 (Oom-mlttd, ere, -mlsl, -mlssum, 
 join ; do ; trust, entrust, put 
 trust in ; vnth proeliam, be- 
 gin, engage. 
 
 Commlas, I, M., Commius, a 
 kitig of the Atrebates. 
 
 eommode, adv., satisfactorily, 
 easily, to advantage; well, 
 fluently, efiectively. 
 
 oommodiis, a, am, suitable, fa- 
 vorable ; neut. as svbst., com- 
 modam, I, advantage, con- 
 venience. 
 otnmoror, art, atus sum, stay, 
 delay, wait. 
 
 oom-moTed, ere, -niovl, -mo- 
 tum, disturb, alarm, agitate, 
 stir, affect, arouse. 
 
 oommuniod, are, avI,' atam, 
 communicate, share ; an- 
 nounce. 
 
 oommunlo. Ire, IvI, Itam, for- 
 tify. 
 
 oommunls, e, common, general, 
 concerted ; joint, united, of 
 all. 
 
 oonimutj&tl&, -dnls, F., change, 
 turn. 
 
 oomparo, &re, &vl, atam, pre- 
 pare, provide, procure, get, 
 ■■ nmka 
 
 -i 
 
 coio^ire. 
 
 > ll c ct ; - 
 
 com-pelld", ere, -pall, -palsam, 
 
 drive, gather. 
 oom-perlo, Ire, -perf, -pertam, 
 
 learn, find out, discover, hear 
 
 of. «J,. 
 
 oom-pleotor, I, -piexas sum; 
 
 embrace. 
 oompl-eo, -ere,-evl, -etam, fill, 
 
 fill up ; man. ' . 
 
 comploxas, us, ^., embrace, 
 complures, a (gen. -iam), sev- 
 eral, many, a great many. 
 com-pdno, ere, -posal, posl- 
 
 tam, settle, conclude ; bel- 
 
 l^m compdnere, end a war 
 
 byStreaty, make peace. 
 compVp^o, are, avl, tttam,' 
 
 bring in, collect. ' ' 
 4lk>mpre-liendd, ere, -hendl, 
 
 -hensam, sei^e, catch, cap- 
 ture. 
 oomprobd, are, avl, atam, 
 
 ratify, sanction, approve. 
 oomipalX, ooihpalsas, jfrom t om- 
 
 pelld. 
 odnatam, 1, N., attempty-uhder- 
 
 taking. 
 con-oedo, ere, -cessi, -oessam, 
 
 grant, allow, permit ; yield ; 
 
 depart, withdraw. 
 ooA-eldo, ere, -cldl, fall ; fall 
 
 dead, bq slain. ' 
 
 oon-6Idd, ere, -oldl, -olsam, 
 
 cut down, cut to pieces, kill, 
 
 slay. , ; \^ 
 
 conollid, are, Avl, Atam, win 
 
 over, make friendly, join; 
 
 gain. ," .-'-,' 
 oonolliam, X, N., meeting, as- ■ 
 
 sembly, council. 
 eonoito, are, avl, atam, rouse, ' ' 
 
 excite ; spur on, urge on. 
 oonoordia, ae, F;, harmony, 
 
 union, concord. 
 oon-oarr6, ere, -oarri (-oa- 
 
 oprrl), -oaraiam, hurry, flock ; 
 
 ffl e et, ^ oin battle ; mako t»«oaFi 
 
 raon attack. 
 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
478 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 V- 
 
 «ononrauB, us, M. ,^ running tg- 
 gether ; collision; oh&rge, at- 
 
 , tack ; conflict. 
 
 oondipid, -ohla, F., terms, pro- 
 posal, agreement, condition. 
 
 oon-do, ere-, -did^, -dltam, . 
 found. ' . 
 
 oo^ddno, &re, &vl, Atom, over- 
 look. 
 
 CondrusI, drum, M. |){i(r., the 
 ^ Condrusi, a tribe in tJie noi'th- 
 easfof Oaul. 
 
 oon-ferold, Ire, -fersi, -fer- 
 tum, pack closely ;per/. part, 
 pass., odnfertns, a, nni, 
 crowded, in close array, in 
 
 . close order. " . 
 
 oonferd, odnferre, oontqlt^ 
 ooll&tnin, collect, ganfer, 
 convey ; compare ; se 'cbn- 
 terr^y betake one's self, go; 
 " toith oulpam, lay, put. 
 
 oonfertus, a, um, from oon^ 
 fef>old. 
 
 odnfestim, adv., immediately, 
 at once. 
 
 oon-flolo, ere, -f§oI, -feotiim, 
 finish, carry out, complete, 
 
 , accomplish, perform ; exhaust, 
 spend»; write, compose. 
 
 oon-fldo, ere, -flsus sum, trust, 
 rely on, have confidence in ; 
 be confident. 
 
 oonflrnid, &re, &tI, fttum, 
 arouse ; establish ; declare, 
 give pledge; encourage, re- 
 assure. 
 
 odnflsns, a, nm, from o5nfId5. 
 
 oon-fllgrd, ere, -flixl, -fliotum, 
 contend, engage, fight. 
 
 •«dnflp^ns) ' -entls, 
 ence, junction. 
 
 odn-fngid, ere, -fugl, flee, flee 
 for refuge, take refuge. - 
 
 oon-gperd, ere, -gessX, gestani, 
 collect. 
 
 con-gredtor, I, -gressiis sum. 
 
 H., conflu- 
 
 oongrego, &re, ftvl, fttnm, 
 
 bring together ; in pass.^ come 
 together, assemble. '"^ 
 
 oon-Jiol6,< ere, -J*oI, -Jeotum, 
 hurl, cast, throw, throw to- 
 gether ; infer, conjecture ; tmifc 
 in fugram, drive, put ; s6 qon- 
 Jloere, throw or betake one's 
 self. " - 
 
 oon-Jnngro, ere, -Junxl, -Jvino- 
 tnni, join, connect, unite ; «e 
 
 ' oonjangere, join. ' /^, 
 
 cen-Jnnx, -Jugls, P., wife. 
 
 oonj ur&tio, -onls, F., conspir- 
 acy, league. - 
 
 oonor, arl, &tns sum, try, at--« 
 tempt, endeavor, undertake. 
 
 oon-soendo, ere, -soendl, -ao6n- 
 snm, mount ; embark on, so 
 
 • on board. ^ \ 
 
 oon-sorlbo, ere, -sorXpsI,^soHp- 
 tum, enlist, levy, enroll ; pa- 
 tres odnsorlpti, senators. 
 
 oonseotor, arl,^ Atuf sum, fol- '. 
 low up, pursue, hunt down. 
 
 eonseoutus, a, nifi, from oon- 
 seqnor. 
 
 oousedl, from odnsldd. \ 
 
 consensus, us, M., consent. 
 
 odn-sequor, I, -sboutna^ •!»», 
 iollow ; arrive'; overtake ;' ob- 
 tain, gain, secure ; sticc6ed ; 
 accomplish. 
 
 oon-serd, ere, -serni, -sertntn, 
 
 i'oin ; mannm oonserere,^ join 
 »attle. 
 cdnservo, &re, &vl, fttum^keep, 
 ** save ; presei:ve, keep alive. 
 odnsXdero, &re,' fbvV&tnm, cdn- 
 
 SM|er, reflec^. 
 odn-sXd6, ere, -sedl, -sessum, 
 
 sit down ; encamp, take up a 
 
 position ; settle. - 
 odnslUnm, X, N., plan, design, 
 
 intention, resok^e, purpose ; 
 
 prudence, dij|cretion ; ,coun- 
 
 sel, advice, strategy; intrigue; 
 
 ooun<»i J «dnslUnm oapere. 
 
 ■■^ 
 
 \ 
 
 S- 
 
 ci 
 
 •c< 
 
 CO 
 
 g 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 1 
 oo: 
 
 » 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 odi 
 
 : t 
 J 
 
 OOI 
 
 M 
 

 form (adopt) a plan ; oonimu- 
 ni odnsnid, ,by common con- 
 sent, according to a common 
 course of action. 
 
 NoonslmllU, e, very similar, like. 
 oon-8lsto, ere, -stltl, take up 
 l^posi^ion; get afootiiig; Iwlt, 
 y- stop, make ^^stond. 
 ^dnsolor, arl, atns gam, con- 
 |8ole. 
 
 conspectus, iis, M., sight, view. 
 . 0on-spiolo, «re, -spexl, -spec- 
 '■••,. turn, catch sigjit of, see, ob- 
 ; serve, behold. 
 cginsplcor, &pI, atus sum, come 
 in sight of, catch sigKof, ob- 
 serve, see. * 
 cdnsp^, are,'avl, atam, com- 
 bine, «onspire. 
 -constanter (cdnstadltlas, con- 
 stantisslmeX adv., steadfast- 
 ly, uniformly. '" j 
 constantla, ae, F., firmness,/ 
 
 heroism. ' t 
 
 constlpo, are, avi, atam, 
 
 crowd, press. > ^y 
 
 constltl, frovii oonlBistoi "^ 
 oonstit-uo, ere, -ul, -atam, es- 
 tablish, arrange, Inake, ap- 
 point, fix, settle J decide, re- 
 solve, determiireT; place, sta- 
 . ' tion, draw up. ^ 
 
 odit-st^', are, -stiti, -statam, 
 consist ; stand firm^ constat, 
 ' impers(^ial, it is agreed, it is 
 understood. 
 oon-saesco, ere, -saevl, -sne- 
 tum, becdme abcustonJbd ; in 
 perf. tenses, am accustomed, 
 • am. wont. 
 consaetudd, -dinls, F., cfUEf- 
 tom, habit. 
 •^oonsal, -sails, M., consul, one 
 of ttoo chief magistrates at 
 Mome, elected anniuiUly. 
 oonsalarls, e, 6f consular rank ; 
 H. as at ' ' 
 
 PART yi.— VOCABULARY. 
 
 V 
 
 .479^ 
 
 consal-o, ere, -uI, -tuni, con- 
 sult, ask advice," enquire ; pro- 
 vide for, talie thought for, with 
 dat. ,..- 
 
 odnsalto, are, avI, atam/ de- 
 liberate, take counsel. "" 
 odnsalto^ adv., purposely. " 
 odnsaltom, 1, n.,. resolution, 
 
 decree. - " . 
 
 c6n-sum6, ere, -sumpsi, -sump- 
 tam.^pend ; expend ; exhaust. 
 oon-temno, ere, -tempsXj-ttomp- 
 tohi, despise. "_ - ' __ 
 
 conten-do,-er^, -Af, ^nm, has- 
 ** ►ten, make one's way, push on ; 
 strive, exert one';^ self ; have a 
 contest, struggle, fight, con- 
 tend ;.a88ert, affirm, ma^tain, 
 oontentld, -onls, F.,* contest. ' 
 con-terd, ere, -trivl, -tritam, " 
 
 exhaust, harass. 
 contestor,, arl, atas sam, call 
 
 upon, invoke. 
 continens, -entls, F., mainland, 
 
 continent. 
 oon-tineo, *%re, -tlnal, -ten- 
 tam, restrain, hem in, keep, 
 hold; border, bound ; pres. part, 
 as adj. , continens, -entls, con- 
 tinual, incessant, contiguous ; 
 continens terra, maimand, 
 Ncontinent. . ' ' 
 
 continnas, &', am, successive. 
 c6i\tl6, -onls, F., Assembly. 
 contra, 1. adv., otherwise ; on 
 contrary ; oontr^ atqae, 
 ontipary to what,^ otherwise 
 thaW^. prep, with ace, op- 
 posite, over against ; against. 
 con-traho, ere, -traxi, -trao- 
 tam, collect, g8tt;her together, 
 assemble ; reduce, contract. 
 oontall, from cdnferd. 
 contamella, ae, F., 'reproach, 
 • disgrace. . " 
 
 oon-venlo, Ire, -v'eni, -ven- 
 
 
 oonsul. 
 
 bam, come togeth«ir, meet, *s-~ 
 semble together j be agree<fo^ ; 
 
 v; 
 
 m 
 
480 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 oonvoiiit, ^mpemonaX^ it is leius Oojita, ow of Ccemr's lieu- 
 
 agreed. i^no^^M^ ft , 
 
 ^jonventiis, Ag, M., meeting ; Cotn», 1^ M.,^^Cotup, a Omil*i 
 
 assizes, court.' name. ' 
 
 conver-to, «trej^-tl, -sam, turn, draMUii, I, M., Marcus Licinius 
 
 change. . „ CrasaaByaliomang^nei-alyCgn- 
 
 Con^totolitavis, la, m,, Convic- sul 55 B.C. 
 
 tolitavis, a Omd's name. orSber, bra, brum, ir 
 
 oonvood, Are, avl, &tani, call numerous, many. 
 
 ^together, call, summon, as- ore-dd, ere, -didi, 
 
 >-'Bemble. trust ; " believe,,*. 
 
 oo-orlor, Xrl, -o'rtas •am, arise. dot. ) ; ' thipk. a '| [v 
 
 oopia, ae, F., supply, abun- «i»4»«i.%a a^J ^^IJb||^*--". ^"*'" \_ 
 
 dance, plenty, amount, quan- oreo, are, &T^^&]tii^, choose,' 
 
 tity; in |>ittr., resources, stores; elect.*^- ' < , '* f. " 
 
 forces, troops. crepitus, fis, M., noise, flapping; - 
 
 cdpiosas, a, am, well supplied, Cr§ta$ ae, F., Crete, a large 
 
 rich ; "Ubundajit. island, south of the mgean. 
 ooram, adv., in person, face to ' Cretenses, lum, m. plur., the 
 
 face, "urith one's oWn eyes. Cretans, inhabitants of Crete. 
 
 Ooroyra, ae,',-F.. Corcyra, an crimen, -minis, N.,chai^o^ accu- 
 
 idatid west of northern Oriece. sation. > 
 
 Corey raeasJ^, am, Corcyrean, Croesus, I, m., Cfoesua, khig of 
 
 o£ Corcyj|iPM. phlf. as sf^st., Lydiafrom 560 tp 546 B.C. 
 
 Corey raci, orurii, the* Cor- craoi&tas;.bs, jn., torture, cru- 
 
 cyreans. - ^Ity. , 
 
 Corneliuri, I, M., 1. P. Cornelius oruddlls, e, cruel, bai'barous. 
 
 Scipio, cons^din 218 B.C. 2. . cubicnlumt I, n:^ (bed) cham- 
 
 C. Cornelius Cethegus, consul ber. 
 
 in 197 B.C. ,3. Lucius Come-, calmen, -minis, n,, Summit. 
 
 lius Merula, consul in 193 B. G. cuipa,^ ae j f. ,« blame, fault. 
 
 oornu, us, N., hom^ wing (o/ coitus, us, M., civilization. 
 
 an afmy). .'"'■, cum, prep, loith ahl., with, to- 
 corona, ae, F., garland, wreatly^ .j;ether with ; againikt. 
 
 crown. ^ 
 corpus, -oii^lN., body, pergi 
 cor-ruglpo, ere, -rupl, -r 
 turn, bribe, win over. , 
 . Corns, 1, M. (unth ventus), the 
 I north-west wind, 
 Corvlnus, I, M., Corvinus, a 
 ■^famous IU)man. 
 
 [ cofij., ifhen, whfineve^ 
 e ; asfMyj|fce ;'^aitnough ; 
 prXmnm, as soon as ; '^ 
 cunft . . .' tuhi, both ... and, 
 not only . . . but also. 
 ounctor, &ri, atus sum, hesi- 
 tate, hold biftck. 
 cunotus, a, um, all, all together. 
 onpidj^, adv., eagerly. 
 
 oorirus, I, M., raven. 
 
 ' oo^^Uanus, a, um, daily ; regu- onpiditas, -tatis, f., eagerness, 
 
 Hj^"**" fondness. 
 
 ootidiS, adv., daily, every day. Cupldo, -dinls, M;.;^Cupid, Love 
 
 C9ttft , a», Ml , li\\<im Aqrnncu- jpetsorvifj^) : 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 
 W: 
 
I 1 
 
 /^ 
 
 c<> 
 
 PART VI.-^OCABULARY. 
 
 ^ 481 
 
 ' *"^JIr"i^k;?"* ®*^'' desirouB, decide, determine, decMe, or- 
 
 fond, «nbifcious. . dbr, amign ; firirt; doUttir 
 
 eup-io er6, -ivl, -itnm, be ea- dieert*, ftleJivfLal^Se 
 
 ger, desire desire earnestly. the isiue, fight * 
 
 eur, odt,., why ; fredy, that d6-eid5, ere, %m; m down 
 
 ' car6 lr« *^t ** .* \3 Deolma., I, M.rD^cinnJs, a ifo. 
 
 coro, are, &vl, ^tam, attend md?i p»wnom«n. 
 
 - to, take care; wiih gerundive, de-olpld, ere, -c^pi, -ceptum 
 
 causeto be (cfon«), have (Ame), disappknt, btf?, dtli* 
 
 «^rl"'' ^"' ''^' *'i*"''*- ***^*'*' *'«' ^^ *tl«. Show, 
 
 cnrsus, us, M., rUnmng, run- make clear. 
 
 _ hmg powers, speed, pace; deciiTlg, e, slopii 
 
 ^urse, passage. deeoro, 4,., iXlJtnm, jdom. 
 
 cn«todla, ae. P., guard, picket, deoretus, a, umV and d«!»itu 
 
 eastos, -todl»5 M. ', guard, sentry, deonm&nas, a, am dkjb nor*» 
 Cyrenael, drum, m. jdlw.. the rear ^ ^^ "^ ^ 
 
 CyreneanB, inhabitants of 'Gy- de-ourro, ere, -earn {-cueur- 
 
 rey, a town m the north oj ri), -cnrsum, run d^te. 
 ^/nca. , dfidecu., -orl., n., Tf^ 
 
 Cyrus I, M., Cyrus (i^e eZdcirX reproach. 
 fownder of the Persian empire ; dodi, from do 
 retted from 659 fo 529 AO. d6didi,/rom dedo 
 
 [race, 
 
 ft 
 
 D., on abbrevicUion for Deoi- 
 
 * mug. ■ ;■ ■ ,,;■ ..;' 
 
 damno, Are, avl, atnm, cbn- 
 
 demn. 
 Darius, I, m., Darius, king of 
 
 fr^Tf T • f ; ' ^ u'™'. ^*""^ ««atlR^.are, avi, atum, weary, 
 
 f^m ; of, out of; about, con- exhaust. ' ^' 
 
 ^ cernmg, of, in regard t© ; with d«fectl6, -onig, p., revolt.. 
 pax, dedttio, to treat of ; with de-fendo, ere, -fendl -f ensum 
 nox, ylirllla, m ; tmth causa, defend; protect. ^ '*'»•'*"' 
 
 dMitlo, -onts, F., 8urreL__. 
 de-do, ere, -dldl, -dltai», sur- 
 render, give up ; devote. 
 de-duc6, ere, -d&xl, -duotini, 
 
 lead off, withdraw; lauw^, 
 
 lead out; leAd (home), wed, 
 
 marry ; conduct. . 
 
 4k«i't^ni, de^sse, /rom desum. 
 
 for. 
 
 debeo, «re, uT, ttnm, pwe; with, 
 tnjin., ought, should, , <»nnot 
 -^help; in pass., be due. 
 
 deblllto, &re, avI, &tum, weak- 
 en. " 
 
 «bI« -oesspm/ 
 — ^ ^ ====•.—=-----== 
 
 d£-o§do, ere, 
 
 die. 
 
 d«-oern6, ere, -cr«Tl, -«r«tam, sake. 
 
 de-fero, -ferre, -tull, -l&tnm, 
 
 carry, bring, convey ; report j 
 confer upon (ad). 
 
 defeaisns, a, urn, perf. paai. of 
 dffCetlsoor, exhausted. 
 
 d6-fe*ls«or, I, -fessus sum, be- 
 come ^khausted> 
 
 d^^old, ere, -feci, -feetum, 
 -iaih, be wanting ; revolt, for^ 
 
 f 
 
 I 
 
m. 
 
 i 
 
 V 
 
 482^ 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 d(ft^l^<&t. f '•» -^Ixl) -flxum, fix, demdnstro, &re, &vl, fttank^ 
 
 
 dd-flup, 'ere, -fla'zT, -flnxam, 
 
 flow off, divide. 
 
 ddfdrmls, e^ ill-shaped, un- 
 shapely. '- 
 
 d§fal, from desnin. 
 
 dA-fangor, I, -functus sum, 
 have 4one, complete ; die. 
 
 delrioeps, culv. , in turn. 
 
 delude, cuiv.^ then, thereupon, 
 thereafter, next. 
 
 d6-Jloid, ere, -J60I, -Jeotnm, 
 throw down, haul down ; carry 
 down, drive ashore ; dismount, 
 uilhorse. 
 
 del&tas, a, am, from dgfero. 
 
 deleotd, &re, avi, atuin, de- 
 
 point out, explain, state, men*- 
 
 tion. 
 deni, ae, a^ ten each, in groups 
 
 of ten, by tens. 
 densus, a, um, dense, thick. 
 de-pello, ere, -pull, £j>ulanm, 
 
 drive out, dri# from, force 
 , from. , / 
 
 deper-eo, -Ire, -II, PN^h, be 
 
 lost. ' «^sr 
 
 de-pond, ere, -posnl, -p<Mi- 
 
 tani, lay down, lay aside ; 
 
 store away, deposit, place ; 
 
 give up. 
 dgporto, &re, avI, &tam, jce- 
 
 mote, carry, convey. 
 depi»altti»,-af um^frotii ddpono. 
 
 
 ^> 
 
 light; in pass., take pleasure, depreoor, arl, &tuB sum, peti-' 
 
 dMiotu^, us, M., levy. 
 
 delectus, a, nm, from dSUgd, 
 •re; as adj.^ picked, chosen.' 
 
 dftl-ed^ ere, -§vl, -etuni, de^ 
 stroy, annihilate. 
 
 dftllberd, are, &v1, atum, dis- 
 
 ' CUSS, consider ; question, con- 
 sult oracle. 
 
 dUiolae, arnni, F. plUr.^ de- 
 light ; darling, beloved. 
 
 dillgd, &re, avI, atum, bind 
 fast, fasten; moor. 
 
 d6-llffd, ore,. -16gl, -Iftotum» 
 pick out, choose, select, levy. 
 
 d61lt-^sod, ere, -nl, conceal 
 
 tion against ; ask meroy, ask 
 quainter. 
 
 (depugno, &re, &vl, atum, fight 
 it out, fight to. the end. 
 
 depulsus, a, nmj from, d§pelld. 
 
 .de-soendo, ere, -soendl, -so6n- 
 •um, come down, descend. 
 
 d6ser-6, ere, -ul,, -turn, desert, 
 abandon. 
 
 deslderium, I, N.^ longing, re- 
 gret. 
 
 deslderd, are, ftvl, &tum, de- 
 sire, wish for ; lose, miss. 
 
 disil, /com d^slnd. 
 
 d^-slllo, Ire, -sllul, -snltam, 
 leap down. 
 
 
 
 one's self. 
 
 D6I0S, I, F., Delos, mv island in dS-slno,' ere, -sll(8lvl), -situm, 
 
 the Mgtan. cease, desist. 
 
 Delphi, drum, MT., Delphi, a di-slsto, ere,. -stltl, -stltnm, 
 
 cihj in northern Greece, famous cease, leave off ; give up, do- 
 
 for its oracle of Apollo. sist from. 
 
 Delphlous, a, am, Delphic, of dispird, are, ftvl, &tam, give 
 
 Delphi. . up hope ; despair of , be in de- 
 dementia,»*, F., madness, folly, spair. 
 I** d6mer-gd, ere, -si, -sum, sink. d£stln6, &re,&vl,&tamt choose, 
 dft-metd, ere, -messul, -mes- "betroth. 
 
 sam, cut do'#n, reap. d^stltl, from dAslstA. 
 
 dd i nlgi^ **Ot *y>t **«"»» fft' d t -strliH ip ^4MP»y-strlaKl,»t>to 
 
 A\ 
 
 move, withdraw. 
 
 tam, unsheat.he, draw. 
 
 «k 
 

 '» 
 
 iff 
 
 ' --, 
 
 PART VI.— VOCABULARY. 
 
 483 
 
 desam, deease, defal, be want- 
 ing, be lacking. 
 
 deterred, ere, ul, Itum, deter, 
 discourage, i>revent. 
 
 detineo. ere,, ul, detentam, 
 detain. ■ 
 
 de-traho, ei-e.-traxlj-tractuni, 
 
 take off, remove. 
 
 detreoto, &re, avi, atum, de- 
 cline, refuse. 
 
 detrlmentdaus, a, uni, hurtful. 
 
 detrlmentum, 1, n„ loss, de- 
 feat. -— — 
 
 detra-do, ere, -»1, -gum, dis- 
 lodge. 
 ■^ ;f etall, from defero. 
 ^d^turbo, are, avI, &tain, haul 
 
 qown. 
 den», 1, M.,^od. 
 dd-venid, Ire, -v«nl, -ventam, 
 
 come,, come down. 
 devlnoo, ere, -viol, -vlotatn, 
 conquer thoroughly, overcome. 
 devord, are, &vl, 4tum, de- 
 vour, destroy. . 
 dexter, tra, trum, right, on the 
 right ; fevi. deztra, as snbst. 
 (sc. manas), right hand; 
 pledge. 
 dl OK dll, from dens. 
 Diana, ae, F., Diana, the goddess 
 
 of hunting. 
 dlbio, -dnl«, p., rule, sway. 
 died, ere, dlxi, diet am, say, 
 
 state, mehluiif ; call. 
 dlot&tor, -orU, M., dictator, an 
 officer appointed at Rome with 
 absobae potoer, when great 
 danger threatened the state. 
 dl6«, *i, M. (rarely ¥.), day, time, 
 
 period. 
 dlfferd, dllTerre, dlstall, dI14- 
 tum, defer, postpone ; differ,- 
 be different. 
 dlfflollU, e, difficult. 
 dimcalMkB, -t4tU, F., difficulty. 
 
 airaoniMr, am. (dlflRuInt; 
 dlffloUiim«), with difficulty. 
 
 dlf-fld6, ere, -flsan sam, dis 
 
 trust, w. dat. 
 dlf-fagld, ere, fugl, flee, van- 
 ish, disappear." > 
 digrnitas, -tati», F., esteem, re- 
 spect ; reputation ; rank, dig- 
 nity ; splendor, magnificence ; 
 digrnltatem trlbaere, have 
 respect for. 
 dlgnns, a, um, worthy, deserv- 
 ing, with ahl. 
 dl-labor, I, -14^aiis sum, scatter,' 
 
 dispense. ^t 
 dlllgrenter, a(2v., carefully. 
 dlllirentla, ae, F., care, watch- 
 /ulnesB ; diligence, earnestness. 
 dl-llgrd, erer-lexl, -l^otam, love^ 
 
 esteem. 
 diniloo, are, avI, atom, fight, 
 
 struggle, contend, engage. 
 dlnildlam, I, n., half. 
 dl-mlttd, ere, -mlsl, -mlssain/ 
 send out, despatch ; dismiss, 
 send away, send in different 
 directions; 'lose; let go away; 
 abandon. 
 dla-eedo, ere, -oe«*I, -oessnni, 
 go away, withdraw, depart; 
 retire, come off ; scatter ; dls- 
 oedere ab, leave. » 
 dlsoeasna, u», m., departure, 
 
 withdrawal. 
 dlaolplina, ae, F., training, dis- 
 cipline, 
 dlaoo, ere, dldlol, leamT ~" 
 dlTOordla, ae, F., dissension, 
 disunion. \ 
 
 dlsoordd, &re, 4vl, jktam, 
 
 quarrel. 
 dU-Jloi5, ere, -J4oI, -jeotani, 
 
 break, scatter ; raze. 
 
 dlspalatus, a, nm, part, o/dit- 
 p4lor, as adj., straggling, scat- 
 tered. 
 
 dls-p&r, -parls, unequal-. 
 
 1^ 
 
 Jl>«^rgl»» arc, -n^friit, -ipr 
 
 •um, scatter, separate. 
 dl»-|iUo«6, «M, -pit**!, .]dto|. 
 
'-> 
 
 484 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 )' 
 
 «5 
 
 tnm, find no favor with, be 
 distasteful to, displeiase, with 
 dat. •* .' 
 
 dis-pond, ere, -posnl, -posi- 
 tumy place at intervals, post, 
 station. 
 
 dls-flldeo, ere, -sedl, with ah, 
 
 , have a quarrel with, be at 
 varianca^ith. 
 
 disstmald, are, avi, &tnin, 
 conceal. 
 
 dlR-Rolvo, ere, -solvl, -aolu- 
 - - turn, destroy, break up. - 
 
 dlg-tlned, ere, -tinai, -telitnin, 
 keep apart ; keep at a distance. 
 
 dlstrib-nd, ere, -nl, -utam, as- 
 sign, distribute. 
 
 di-stringo, ere, -strlnxl, 
 •atrlotnm, busy, occupy. 
 
 dltd, are, ahrl, .enrich. 
 
 diu, adv., (dlutlns, dtutisstme), 
 long, for a long time. 
 
 dl-yido, ere, -vl«l, -vlsnm, di- 
 vide,''separate. , ' , 
 
 divlnaa, a, nm, divine, sacred. 
 
 divltlae, arum, F. jjinr. , riches, 
 wealth. 
 
 do, dare, dedl, datum, give, 
 graht, allow, afford, bestow, 
 furnish ; appoint; with flnein, 
 or In fugani, put ; operam 
 dure, take pains, see to it, 
 
 • give attention to, pu^t forth 
 efforts ; verl>u dare, cheat, 
 deceive ; tergru dare, flee. 
 
 doo-eo, #re, -ul, -turn, teach, 
 tell, inform, explain. 
 
 docte, (wii?.. skilfully, well. 
 
 doctor, -oris, M. , teacher, in- 
 structor. 
 
 dolor, -oris, M., pain, grief, 
 sorrow, distress ; indignation, 
 resentment ; grievance. ' 
 
 doIuN, 1, M , deceit, deception ; 
 craft, cunning ; artifice, trick, 
 
 strategy. 
 
 doine a tico i , », nm, at home, 
 
 personal, private ; with t>el- 
 lum, intestine, civil. 
 domi, adv. (really locative of 
 
 domns), at home. 
 domiclllnm, 1, n., home, resi- 
 dence, dwelling. 
 
 domina:,'ae, F., mistress, 
 dominatio, onis, F., -sway, su- 
 premacy, rule. ' 
 
 domlnng, I, master, ruler, cap- 
 tain. 
 
 DomItIt|8, I, M., Lucius Domi- 
 - tius Ahenobarbus, conmd 54 
 B.C. 
 
 dom-d, are, -ul, -itum, subdue, 
 conquer. _#^ 
 
 domus, uB, F.j-lfippe, home, 
 dwelling pl^'; .'|iousehold, 
 family, house»; 4||inl, locative^ 
 at home. 
 
 doneo, conj., so long as, while. 
 
 dono, are, avI, atnm, present,, 
 give, grant, bestow. 
 
 donnm, 1, N., gift. 
 
 dos, d^tis, F., dowry, marriage 
 portion. 
 
 Druldes, um, M*. vlur.. the 
 Druids, priests of the Gauls. 
 
 dnbitd, are, avI, atnm, doubt, 
 hesitate ; have doubts. 
 
 dublam, I, N., doubt ; line du- 
 blo, undoubtedly. 
 
 dublns, a, um, doubtful. 
 
 dnoenti, ae, a, two hundred. 
 
 duco, ere, du:]n, ductnm, lead, 
 bring ; take ; carry oflf ; run. 
 . make, prolong, spin out ; con- 
 sider ; marry, 
 
 dnlolfl, e, pleasant, agreeable. 
 
 dum, conj.y while, until. 
 
 Duninorlx, -IgrI*, M., Dumno- 
 rix, a leader of the jEdui. 
 
 duo, -acf -o, two» i " - -^ 
 
 dnoflerim, twelve. 
 
 duodeul, ae, a, twelve each ; ■ 
 in groups of twelve, by twelves. 
 
 duod^vlglntl, indeed., eighteenl' 
 
PART FL— VOCABULARY. 
 
 485 
 
 da-plex, -plicis, twofold, 
 
 double. 
 daplloo, are, avl, atam, 
 
 double. 
 durd, are, avl, atam,' endure, 
 
 remain. 
 Duras, I, m., Quintus Liiberius 
 P Durus, tt military tribune with 
 
 Gcesar. 
 dux, duels, M., leader, general ; 
 
 guide/ 
 
 *, prep, with aU., see ex. 
 
 ea, adv. (abl. fern, of I»; sc. via), 
 by that way j there. 
 
 Eburdnes, uiii, M. phir., the 
 Eburones, a tribe in the ex- 
 treme north-east of Gaul. 
 
 ecoe, interjection, look ! see ! be- 
 hold! 
 
 e-duco, ere, -duxl, -dadtuin, 
 Iriad out, lead forth. 
 
 effemlnd, are, avl, htnvll, ener- 
 vate, make effeminate; in 
 jMiss., become effeminate. 
 
 efTerd, ferre, extull, elatum, 
 bear out, carry away, bury. 
 
 ef-flolo, ere, -fed, -feotum, 
 make, cause, produce, form, 
 construct; bring about, ac- 
 complish, bring to pass; make 
 up, complete. 
 
 of-fugrlo, ©re, -fugl, -rugltum, 
 escape. 
 
 ef-fundd^ ere, -fudl, -fuauni, 
 pour out, bring forth. 
 
 igh from afro. 
 
 effo, met, I. 
 
 «-«redlor, I, -tire»un» sum, de- 
 part, go forth, leave ; land, 
 disembark ; come; set out. 
 , ,*»r«»U, odt)., excellently, ex- 
 tremely well, admirably. 
 *»'«»rlu», a,\ um, exceptional, 
 marked, remarkable, eminent. 
 
 dgressus, us, M., landing. ^ 
 
 ejloio, ©re, -Jeol, -Jeotnin, 
 flmg out, cast out; banish; 
 with se, rush, dash, rush out. 
 
 e-Ugo, ©p©, -legrl, -leotnm, 
 choose, pick. 
 
 elephantus, 1, M., elephant. 
 
 eloquentla, a©, F., eloquence, 
 ability to speak. 
 
 emendo, ar©, avl, atuni, cor- 
 rect, amend, make good. 
 
 e-mltto, ©re, -mia« -^lissain, 
 send out. 
 
 ©nlm, conj., for, now, in fact, 
 indeed. 
 
 Ennlns, I, M., Ennius, a Roman 
 poet. 
 
 ennmero, ar©, avl, Htnin, re- 
 count, relate, tell of. 
 
 enuntld, &ro, avl, *atum, dis- 
 close. 
 
 eo, ir©, II (ivl), Itam, go, 
 march, proceed; advance. 
 
 e6, adv., thither, there, to that 
 place, to them (it, etc. ). 
 
 eo, adv., with comparatives or 
 before quod cMuse, the, all 
 the ; on this account. 
 
 eddeni, adv., to the same place, 
 to the same thing, in the same 
 direction. 
 
 Epamlaondas, ae, M., Epami- 
 nondas, o famous Theban gen- 
 eral. 
 
 Bphesus, I, F., Ephesus, a city 
 of Ionia in Ana Mimtr. 
 
 Bphlaltes, ae, M., Ephialtes, a 
 Greek. 
 
 •phlpplatus, a, pm, using sad- 
 dles. 
 
 ephlppiutn, I, N., horse-cloth ; 
 (freely) saddle. 
 
 ephorus. I, m., ephor, 4% Spar- 
 tan moffistrate. 
 
 £plrns, i, M., Epirus, a district 
 of northern Greece, on the Adri- 
 
 •* 
 
 — excoHent; q^jg^ ■ -- .^^^j. 
 
 «tressn», imiin./rom «gredior. «plstula, ae, F., letter, epistle. 
 
486 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 :* 
 
 
 /^ 
 
 eqn-eH, -Itts, M., horseman, 
 horse-soldier, cavalryman ; in 
 plnr., caivalry. 
 
 eqnester, trls, tre, of cavalry, 
 cavalry. 
 
 equltatas, us, M., cavalry. 
 
 equns, Xj, M., horse. 
 
 «rga, prep, vnth ace, towards. 
 
 ergo, (idv.^ therefore, accord- 
 ingly. 
 
 6-rigo, ei*e, -r§xl, -reotam, 
 arouse, raise up. 
 
 £-rlpi6, ere, -ripul, -reptnin, 
 
 ' seize, snatch away ; rescue. 
 
 erogo, &re,'.avl, atum, expend, 
 
 > pay out.i ' - ■ 
 
 error, -oris,^ M., mistake, delu- 
 sion, blunder. 
 
 grndto. Ire, IvI (ll), Itnm, train, 
 educate, tdach. 
 
 6-rampd, ere, -rupl, -raptani, 
 make a sally. 
 
 ftrnptid, -dnl8, F., sally, soi-tie. 
 -aoendo, ere, -soendl, -scen- 
 ■nm, embark. 
 
 esNped&rlaB, I, M., charioteer, 
 c1)ariot-fighter. 
 
 efsei^ai», I, N., chariot, war- 
 chariot. \ \ ■ 
 
 'et, com.., an^, but; et . . . et, 
 both .\. . and. 
 
 ettlum, cd^tij. Ofnd adv., also, fur- 
 ther ; e\^n, ^till, besides ; non' 
 ./ sdlatn . . . ^ed etlani, not on- 
 ly . . . but ajlso. 
 
 'etiamnono, eVen then. 
 
 etlMintaii||; odjj., even then, still. 
 
 Etruria, ae, IF., Etruria, a dis- 
 trict in It(uy(, north of Rome. 
 
 Gtra«ca(i, I, M., ah Etrurian. 
 
 etal, conj., eyep if, although. 
 
 Eaboea, \«#t >*•« Bubgaa, an 
 island hjing ea«i of Ore^^e. 
 
 Bamenf ■, la, M., Eumenes^ king 
 ofPergamum, 198-158. B.C. 
 
 Bnpljr&t^a, la, M., Euphrates, 
 
 — a, river in Pernin , 
 
 Snrdpa, ae, F., Europe. 
 
 Earybladea, la, M., Eurybiades, 
 a Spartan admiral. 
 
 Earyatheaa, el, M., Eurystheus, 
 the king who imposed upon Her- 
 cules his ttvelve labors. 
 
 eva-dd, ere, -al, -aam, make 
 one's way, climb ; escape. 
 
 e-venlo. Ire, -veni, -ventam, 
 turn out, result. 
 
 eventna, ua, H., outcome, ex- 
 perience, fate. 
 
 evoed, are, avi, atam, call out, 
 summon, challenge. "^ , 
 
 evolo, ari, avi, atum, fly away ; 
 rush out. 
 
 ex (sometim.es § before conso- 
 • nants), prep, vnth a6i., from, 
 out of ; of, belonging to ; af- 
 ter, upon ; in accordance with ; 
 of direction, \x\., on. . 
 
 exaotua, a, u m, /rom exlg6. 
 
 exadveranm, prept^ ivith ace, 
 ov<er against, opposite. 
 
 exagltp, are, ft-vl, &tain, harass, 
 - drivg^uty expel. 
 
 exanilno, kfe, &vl, &tam, weighs 
 test. 
 
 exanlmd, &re, avI, atam, kill ; 
 in pass., be^killed, die. 
 
 ex-ardeaod. ere, -aral, -arsum, 
 blaze forwi; become enraged, 
 becoAie incensed. 
 
 ex-oed6, ere, -oeaal, -oeaaani, 
 go out, go away, withdraw, 
 depart, leavje,^ quit. ^ 
 
 exoelld, ere, exoellfal, excel, 
 surpass'. 
 
 exolo, Ire, Ivl, Itam or Itum, 
 sutnmon ; arouse. 
 
 ex-olpio, ere, -oipl, -oeptn^, 
 follow, succeed, relieve. 
 
 eifoitd, &re, Avl, &tain, awake. 
 
 ^' rouse ; stimulate, arouse^ . 
 
 exoltna, a, um, from exolA. 
 
 excl&mo. Are, AvI, Atam, call 
 out, cry out. 
 
 yr^ett«ir~-oiaiiii», ' 
 
 shut off", cut off, hinder. 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 \m 
 
 . \ 
 
!i^ 
 
 ■<;^' 
 
 > * 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 PART ViiXvOCABULARY. 
 
 437 
 
 exo5irito, aVe, ftvt, atam, de-\,esf»lorator, -orl», M., scout 
 
 vise, plan 
 exoubo, are, avl,.atnin, sleep 
 
 out ;. keep watch. v 
 
 exctiirslo, -dills, jp», "invasion, 
 ^ raid. 
 exoAso, are, ivl, atnin, ex 
 
 exploro, are, avi, atom, ex- 
 amine, investigate, reco|inoi- 
 tre ; endeavor to learn. ' ' 
 
 e^pond, ere, -posal, -posltnm, 
 
 isplay; array, land, disem- 
 tk ; set forth, relate. 
 
 cuse; se oxouBare, apologize, exp^to, are, avI, atuni, carry 
 exem plum, I, N., Example. oflP,yemove. 
 ex-eo, -Ire, -II, (-Ivl), -ltum,^o ex-po^d, ere, -poposol, de- 
 out ; set out ; start; leave, mand,\ ask earnestly from, re- 
 
 disembark;o/ a rejjort, spread, quire the surrender of. 
 
 go abroad. '^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ ex-prlinfl^ ©re, -preasi, pr«»* 
 
 , ex^roeo^ ere, nl, itam, exer- 80111, describe, express. 
 
 cise ; work, till ; arouse to ac. expugnd, 4te, avI, atam, take 
 
 -tion; exasperat^. by storm, 6arry. 
 
 exeroltatio, -6nl«,\F., training, expnlsas, a, km, /rom expelld. 
 
 exercise, practice.\ exqul.ltn», a\ um, carefully 
 
 ^xeroltus, ug, m., arniy, forces. chosen ; excruciating. 
 
 ex-banrio, Ire, -haai^I, -haua- ex-seqnor, 1, -ae^utna anm, en- 
 
 tntn, exhaust. force. \ 
 
 exheredo, are, avl, fttum, dis- eJcaUinni, I, N., exile 
 
 inhent. exapeotd, are, *yi; atam, 
 
 ex-igo, ere, -«gi, -&otam, ^rive await, wait for ; wa^t. 
 
 out, expel. ex-atlnari*6, ©re, -atinicl, -atlno- 
 
 exlflrnitaa, tatla, F., scantiness, tarn, blot out, extinguish. 
 
 smallness shortness, small exato, are, stand out, be above. 
 
 size, small extent. ^ ex-atrao, ere, -atruxl, -XtrAo" 
 
 exlgaaa, a, am, small, scajjty, tom, raise, erect, build 
 
 iimited, meagre. exaal, -aalla, M., exile. v 
 
 exiatlmd, &re, ftvl, fttam, think, extempid, adv., at once, imn 
 
 believe, consider ; estimate. 4iately. 
 
 exltaa, iha, M., way out, exit; extir&, prep, with ace., outsid^ 
 
 conclusion ; issue, result. of , beyond ; out of reach of. 
 
 expedtd, Ire, Ivl, Itum, free, e!s-tr4|id,ere,-tr&xI,-tr&otam; 
 
 • extricate; perf. part pass., draw out, extract ; waste by 
 
 expedltua, a, am, as adj., delay, fritter away. 
 
 unin9umbered, free; easy; in extr^maa, a, am (superlative of 
 
 light marching order. exteraa, exterior), farthest, 
 
 expedltlo, ^nl a, F., expedition. " last, outermost; «d extr«- 
 
 ex-pelld, ere, -pall, -palaam, mam, at last; to the last. . 
 
 . dnveput; banish. extall, ^rom efferd. 
 
 •^IMV-Ior, Irl, -taa aont, tiy, ex-fiirA, ere, -aaal, -oatam, 
 
 prove, make an attempt ; ex- bum up. «^ , 
 
 perience, find by experienpe. , ^ ^ 
 
 •**?^^"*' <^re, AvI, fttam, set " 
 
 forth, ItaleT unfold, carry on ; ttAmr, bri, M., artisan, work- 
 extend, deploy, move freely. man, engineer. 
 
 
 V 
 
 ■Jiff. 
 
4»d 
 
 -"^ 
 
 Primary latin book» 
 
 FablaR, I, M,, 1. Quinttis Fabius 
 Mazimus, coimxU and dictator 
 in the second Punic war. 2. 
 Quintus Fabius LAbeo, conMil 
 in 183 B.a 
 
 Vttbrlolns, 1, M., Caius Fabricius 
 Luscinus, consfid in 278 B. G. 
 
 f««lle, adv.t easily, readily. 
 
 fiftollis, e, easy. 
 
 fnolo, ere, f£oI, faotum, pass. 
 flo, ^erl, faetns «am, make ; 
 do, act ; form, build, con- 
 L iHfcruct ; render ; bring about ; 
 ^ith ppoellam, fight; with 
 Tim, offer, use ; with poteat&- 
 teiu, give ; with praedam, 
 « . obtain ; verba faoere, speak, 
 }rfe4d ; oerttorem aliqaem 
 faoere, inform one ; in vasa. 
 
 , oflxn^ beoofne ; take place, 
 come to pass, happen, result; 
 qno faotum est, the result 
 was. 
 
 faotto, -oni«, F., party, faction. 
 
 fiMttam, I, N., deed, act, action ; 
 occurrence. 
 
 fAoalta«, -tatis, F.^ opportu- 
 nity, chance, power ; in plnr., 
 ' wealth, means, resources. 
 
 faenns, -ori«,N., interest, usuVy. 
 
 thgu», I, F., bieech. 
 
 Falernus, a, am, Fnlemian, of 
 Falernus,^ a district in C^m- 
 
 falld, ere, fefelll, faianm, de- 
 ceive ; elude,, esoapei discovery 
 
 • by. ■ ■ ''-■.■■■'-''■ ^ 
 
 falans, a, am, Wse, Untrue. 
 
 f&ma, ae, f., ispmor, report, 
 news ; fame, reputation: 
 
 fam^ !■, F. (oM., famd), hun- 
 ger, ?fomine. ^ 
 
 ItaMllla, ae, F.,'hou|Mhold, fam- 
 
 flamy l&rln, e, private ; r#« fa- 
 mlilftrU, property, eatate. 
 
 fa ii iUIA i iltfc a , 'tfctU, y., lafa 
 
 f&s, K., irideclinahle, right (&y» 
 divine law). 
 
 fasois, is,.H., bundle. 
 
 faveo, ere, favl, faatam, fa- 
 vor {with dat.). 
 
 fefelll, from fallo. 
 
 fellolter, adv., happily, pros- 
 perously, successfully. 
 
 fdllx, -iols, happy ; prosperous. 
 
 fer£, adv., almost, nearly ; about; 
 for the most part. . * 
 
 fero, ferre, tail, latum, bear, 
 carry, bring ; endure ; with* 
 stand ; in pass., rush, go, 
 flow; with auxilium, lend; 
 imt^ oondloidnem, offer ; with 
 '•ententlam, give ; gpraTlter' 
 ferre, be annoyed at, feel 
 keenly ; opinio fert, bpinion 
 goes; ednauetudo fert, it id 
 customary. ' , ' 
 
 ferdz, -dels, warlike, fierce. 
 
 ferreus, a, um, of iron« iron. 
 
 ferrum, I. N., iron; sword; 
 ferro at<iti,e IgnX, with fire 
 and swbrd^ 
 
 fertilla; e, fertile. 
 
 ferua, a, um, fierce, saVage. . 
 
 featlvua, a, um, joyous, chaihn- 
 ing. 
 
 flotilla, e, made of clay, earthen. 
 
 flotua, a, am, from flngo. . 
 
 fldSlia, e, faithful, loyal, trusty. 
 
 fldSa, el, F., trust, faith, confi- 
 dence, belief; pledge, word, ' 
 oath, prohiise, honor ; loyalty, 
 J&delity ; protection, depend- 
 ence, allegiance, alliance ; 11- 
 dem faoere, give a pledge ; 
 fldem' interpooere, pledge 
 one's honor ; fldem prae- 
 it&re, keep faith ; fldem ae- 
 
 . qui, embrace alliance, ajbtflboh 
 one's self .to, 
 
 fIdCi.ola, ae, F., donfiden<Nk 
 
 flfTHra, a«, shape. 
 
 fUiai au; F>; daughter. . 
 
 i 
 
 macy, friendship»^ 
 
 flllna, I, M., son. 
 
 .-»»■. 
 
 ;/■.. 
 
f:t 
 
 PAKT irt^j-VOCABTJtARY. 
 
 48» 
 
 >U8. • 
 
 ut; 
 
 ity.- 
 ttfi- 
 rd, ' 
 
 Qd- ; 
 fl- • 
 
 ?e ; ) 
 km- * * 
 
 ilnffd, ere, finxl, flotum, make 
 
 up, invent. 
 flnld, Ire, ItI, Itnin, limit, 
 
 bound. 
 finis, Is, M., end, limit ; inpltir.t 
 
 fortls, e, brave, courageous. 
 
 fortlter/ odr,, bravely, gallant- 
 ly, stoutly. .J. I 
 
 fortitudo, -dints, F., bravery, 
 courage, valor. 
 
 borders, territory, land, dis- fortaito, adv.y by chance, acci- 
 
 tnct. dentally. 
 
 nnitlinns, a, am, neighboring, fortana, ae, F., chance, for- 
 
 adjoinmg, adjacent ; m. plur.y tune, luck ; good fortune, sue- 
 
 as «M6«ton*we, neighbors. cess; lot; inplnr., property, 
 
 fid, fieri, f actus smu, pass, of possessions, fortunes. 
 
 faolo, be made, be done ; be- forum, i, n., market-place, 
 
 come ; be brought about, be forum. 
 
 eflfected, take place, come to fossa, ae, F., trench, ditch, 
 
 pass, happen, result ; quo fao- moat. 
 
 turn est, the result was. 
 
 firmtter, adv.y firmly, steadily. 
 
 flrmo, &re, &vl, &tum, strength- 
 en! 
 
 firmus, a, wm, strong, powerful. 
 
 Fl&mlnlnns; I, M., T. Quintius 
 Flaminius, con»id in 198 B.C. 
 
 Flamintus, I, M., Caius Fla- 
 minius, consxd in 217 B.C. 
 
 Ilamma, ae, F., blaze, flame, 
 burning. 
 
 fleoto ere, flezi, flexum, turn, 
 
 ' guide, direct. 
 
 fled, 6ve^ flevi, fletum, weep, 
 be in tears. 
 
 Up, are, &vl, &tum, blow. 
 
 fldreo, §re, ul, bloom ; pros- 
 per ; pres. part., florins, -en- 
 ti; a^ adj., Nourishing, pros- 
 perous, influential, i-^- — ^^ 
 
 fluotns, As, M., wave. 
 
 flumen, -minis, N., river. ' 
 
 fluo, ere, fluxl, fluxnm, flow. 
 
 foederatus, a, um, in league 
 with, allied. 
 
 foedus, -eris, N., treaty, league. 
 
 fore, fui. tr^n. q/snm. ■ 
 
 fbrem, «essem. r^--^^ 
 
 f oris, Is, F., door. 
 
 fdrma, ae, F., shape, form. 
 
 fon|i1ea, ae, F., ant. 
 
 .-'^ .J ji-.-.».i. 
 
 frairor, -oris, M., crash, 
 frangro, ere, fregl, fr&otum, 
 
 break, shatter, wreck ; crush. 
 
 f rater, -tris, M., brother. 
 
 frunif, fraudis, F., trick, eva- 
 sion. 
 
 Preffellae, &mm, F. jdur.y Fre- 
 gellae, a city in Latium. 
 
 tregl, from frangro. 
 
 fremitus, us, M., din, confused 
 noise. , 
 
 frequ6ns, -entls, in large num- 
 bers. 
 
 frlg^idus, M, um, cold. 
 
 trlfpa; -oris, cold; frosti CoW 
 season. 
 
 frugr^a, um, F. plur., fruits. 
 
 frugl, adj. indecL, temperate, 
 frugal, moderate. 
 
 friMnent&rius, a, um, of grain, 
 pertaining to grain ; rfts fru- 
 ment&ria, supply of com, 
 grain, provisions ; n&vis fru- 
 ment&ria, corn-ship. 
 
 frumentor, &rl, fttns sum, get 
 grain, get provisions, forage. 
 
 frAmentum, I, N., grain, com, 
 provisions ; in plur., crops. 
 
 fFfiistrA, adv., in vain. 
 
 friistror, &rl, Atus sum, de- 
 otire, diiappoint. 
 
 ^rwnwrmmr, by ohanoe; m tt^ frftstvin, i, v., piece, bit. 
 happened. f&dl, ^/rom fnnddu " 
 
 r 
 
490 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK 
 
 ^ 
 
 #; 
 
 ; tnga, ae, F,, flight, rout; la 
 
 #. f again oonjicere or dare, 
 
 put to flight. 
 
 . fugrlo, ere, fugl, fagituni, flee, 
 
 escape. 
 
 tngd^ are, avi, atam, put to 
 
 . flight, rout. 
 
 tv^; from mnm^ 
 
 Palvlas, I, M., Servius Fulvirs 
 Nobilior, constd in 265 B.C. 
 fund», ae, F., sling. 
 f andamentam, I, N. , foifiida- 
 — J^ tion. 
 
 Fandanlns, I, M., I* uiidanius, a 
 
 friend of Pliny. > 
 fando, ere, fudi, fusnni, rout, 
 
 overthrow. 
 fdngror, I, functus sum, hold, 
 
 fill, 'loith cfhl. 
 funis, is, M.i rope, cable. 
 funus, -erl8,N., death. 
 Furlus, I, M., Lucius Furius 
 Purpureo, cormd in 196 B.C. 
 f usus, from fundo. 
 futurus, a, um, from, sum ; N. 
 • plur. as subst.y fntura, drum, 
 
 the future. 
 
 G 
 
 Galba, ae, M., Galba, a Roman's 
 
 name. 
 iralea, ae, F., helmet. 
 Oallia, ae, F. Gaul. 
 
 1. The Roman provinces of 
 __._ Oatd, Grallia Cisalpina or Ci- 
 terior, the northern part cf 
 Italy; anc2 Gallia Transalpina 
 or Ultejrior, the south-eastern 
 part of France. 
 
 ,2. The coimtry west of the 
 
 JRhine and the Alps and north 
 
 ofthePyrfnees, thus including 
 
 ^^_; France^ Sivitzerlandy Belgium 
 
 and part of Holland and Ger- 
 
 '"* . ■ ■• man/g. .'■■■•.■■;,. 
 
 3. The centred and largtst of 
 4h« three part» into v^hieh-^hml- 
 
 t 
 
 .in the previous sense is divided, and 213 B. C. 
 
 tKe Belg86 and the Aquitani 
 holding the other tvx). 
 
 Galllcns, a. um, of Graul, of the 
 Gaulfii, Gallic. 
 
 gralllnai ae, F. , hen. 
 
 gallus, i. M., cock. 
 
 Gallu8,.l\ M., a Gaul. 
 
 graudeo, ere, gavlsus sum, re- 
 joice. V 
 
 fraudlum, Ik N., joy, rejoicing. 
 
 GeminuR, l\ M., Cn. Servilius. 
 Geminus, (X^nsid in 217 B.C. 
 
 gemma, ae, f*., pt'ecious stone, 
 jewel. 
 
 gener, erl, M., son-in-law. 
 
 generosus, a, um, of noble 
 birth. ' - 
 
 gens, gentls, F., tribe, race 
 nation. 
 
 genus, -erls, N., race; family' 
 kind, sort, class. 
 
 Germanla, ae, F. , Germany, the 
 region east of the Rhine. 
 
 Germanicus, a, um, German; 
 of otjwith the Germans. 
 
 Germanus, I, M., a German. 
 
 gerd, ere, gessi, gestuni, carry 
 on, wage ; do, perform, con- 
 duct ; in pass., be done, go 
 on, happen ; rem or res ge-' 
 rere, carry on operations ; r^s 
 gesta, exploit, deed ; morem 
 gerere, humor, comply with 
 (one's) wish ; magisf ratuni 
 gerere, hold office. 
 
 gesta, drum, N. plur. (perf. 
 part. pa^s. of gero, itsed sitb- 
 stantively), events, operations. 
 
 glaOilns, I, M., sword. 
 
 gloria, ae, F. , glory, fame. 
 
 Gobryas, ae, M., Gobryas, a 
 noble Persian. 
 
 GortynlX, ornm, H. p^wr., the 
 * Gortynians, citizens of Oor- 
 
 tyna^ a'city in Crete,, 
 Graoohus, I, M., Tiberius Sera- 
 Tmtt3cnuH| consW) axv 
 
 <i 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 
»:! 
 
 ^W 
 
 a 
 
 1 
 
 PART VI.— VOCABULARY. 
 
 491 
 
 Oraeoia, ae, f., Greece. ■> ^ 
 
 Graeons, a, am, Greek. 
 
 Oraeons, I, M., a Greek. J ; 
 
 srradns, us, M., step ; position. 
 
 Grain*, a, urn, Greek, Grecian ; 
 Graian; m. plur. as mbd., 
 GratI, dram, the Greeks. 
 
 gramen, -minis, N., grass. 
 
 gratia, ae, F., favor, good- will ; 
 influence ; favor, service, kind- 
 ness ; «rratlas agrere, thank ; 
 tn abl. preceded by gen.y gra- 
 tia, for the sake oJF.: 
 
 gratalatlo, -dnls, F., rejoicing; 
 thanksgiving. 
 
 gratalor, arl, atus sam, 
 thank, give thanks to. 
 
 gratns, a, um, agreeable, pleas- 
 ing ; welcome, acceptable. 
 
 gravis, e, heavy, severe, seri- 
 ous ; hard, bitter, difficult ; 
 weighty, strong. 
 
 gravitas, -tatls, F., weight; 
 strength, power, importance ; 
 dignity. 
 
 gravlter, adv., severely, bitter- 
 ly, seriously ; gravlter ferre, 
 be annoyed, feel keenly. 
 
 gremlnm, I, n., lap, bpsom. 
 
 gabernator, -oris, M., pilot, 
 helmsman. 
 
 gasto, are, avi, attim, taste, 
 eat. 
 
 habed, 6re, ul, itum, have, 
 
 possess, occupy ; keep ; hold ; 
 
 find ; treat, regard, consider ; 
 
 with or&tld, deliver, make ; 
 
 ivith per/, part, pass., have. 
 Aabltd, are, avI, atum, dwell, 
 , live, reside. 
 Radrumetam, 1, N., Hadrume- 
 
 tum, a town on the coast of 
 
 Africa. 
 hacred, 6re, haesl, haesttm 
 
 -BtidrtaBt, am ImprTsbned: 
 
 carnassian, of Halicamassus, 
 a city of Asia Minor. . ^' 
 
 Hamllcar, -arls, M., Hamilcar, 
 
 the father of Hannibal. 
 Hanntbal, -alls, M., Hannibal, 
 the famtnis Carthaginian gen- 
 eral, son of Hamilcar. 
 Hasdrnbal, -alls, M., Hasdru^ 
 bal, the name of the brother-in- 
 law and also of the brother of 
 Hannibal. 
 hand, adv., not. 
 Hellespontns, X. , M. , the Helles- 
 pont (now the Dardanelles). 
 Helvetlns, a, nm, Helvetian, 
 of the Helvetii; in plur., Hol- 
 yetll, ornm, M., the Helve- 
 tians, a tribe of Oavl, dwelling 
 in the modern Switzerland. 
 Heronles, Is, M., Hercules, son 
 of Jupiter; g. Greek national 
 hero, who, after his death, 
 was worshipped, as the god of 
 strength. 
 heredltas, -tatls, F., inheri- 
 tance. 
 
 Hermlnlns, I, m., Herminius, a • 
 Roman. 
 
 biberna, drnm, N. plur., win- 
 ter camp, winter-quarters. 
 
 Hlbernla, ae, r., Ireland. 
 
 Mo, haeo, hoc, pron., this ; he ; 
 the following ; the present ; 
 often loosely, that; hoc, N. aU. 
 as adv., in this way, on thi» 
 account, and with compara- 
 tives, the. 
 
 hio, adv. , here, herein ; upon 
 this, hereupon, now. 
 
 hlemo, &re, avI, atnm, win- 
 ter, pass the winter. 
 
 hlems, hlemls, F., winter^ 
 stormy weather. ^ -- 
 
 hlnc, adv., hence,from this place» 
 
 hlrons, I, M., goat. / 
 
 ? Hl spft nia, a e, F» jS p a ii j, iadu ds= 
 
 { 
 
 ing Portugal. 
 
 Halloarnassln., a, am, HaU- bUtoria, ae, F., hUtory. 
 
 ^P^ 
 
■•■ A. 
 
 492 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 
 m 
 
 bodle, adv. , to-day. 
 
 hodlernua, a, una, to-day's, of 
 this day. 
 
 bom-d, -Inls, M. awi ¥., man, 
 person ; m plur., inaxi, man- 
 kind, people. 
 
 bonestas, -tatIs,'F., honor^ in- 
 tegrity, f 
 
 bonestua, a, nm, upright, hon- 
 orable, worthy ; becoming, re- 
 fined. 
 
 bonor (or bonds), -oris, M., 
 honor, repCKS ; office, official 
 position. 
 
 born, ae. P., hour. 
 
 Hor&tlns, I, M., Horatius, a 
 Human liero. 
 
 borreo, 6re, nl, tremble at, 
 dread. 
 
 borream, 1, N., storehouse, 
 
 , granary, barn. 
 
 borrldas; n, nm, terrible, fright 
 ful, horrible. 
 
 bortor, &rl, &tn8 sum, Urgdv 
 encourage, exhort, cheer on^ 
 
 bosp-es, -Itis, M., guest, friend. 
 
 bospltlnni, I, N., guest-friend- 
 ship, hospitality. , • 
 
 bostla,,ae, F., animal tor sacri- 
 fice, victim. 
 
 b^tis, l#, M., enemy, public 
 foe. 
 
 buo, adv., to'this, to this point, 
 to this place, hither, here. 
 
 bumanlt&H, -t&tis, F., refine- 
 ment^, culture. 
 
 bum&nus, a, nm, of a man, 
 human ; civilized, refined. 
 
 bnml, adv. (really locative of 
 bnmns), on the ground. 
 
 <bnmlliR, o, low, lowly, of little 
 importance, obscure 
 
 bnmlllt&B, -t&tls, F., loVness 
 
 loVn 
 
 Ibani, tb6,/>:otnc6.^ 
 -tlyr, cwfer., the re , iff tha t pla cgr^ 
 
 Idem, eadem. Idem, the Bftin6 1 
 
 also, likewise. - « 
 Idonena, a, nm, suitable, fit> 
 ieram, from «o. 
 Igitnr, coiij. accordingly, there- 
 
 fore ; ta resume, then. • 
 Xicnis, is, ^., fire. 
 Igrnoro, are, avi, &tnm, not 
 know, be unacquainted with, 
 « be ighoraftt. 
 Ilirnosco, ere, I^ovl, Ignotnm, 
 
 forgive, pardon, vriih dapive. 
 Xirnotns,i^aj^ nmi, unknown. 
 lierdnj ai^ r,t Ilerda, a citjr^ in 
 
 ■ Spain,^;;!^--' . - . ■ 
 lllatusf IK nm, /rdm Inforo. 
 llle, illrt, Jllud, that, he, she, 
 
 it,' the other, the former. 
 1115, adv.y to that point, thither, 
 
 there. 
 
 illfie, adv. f to that place, thither. 
 
 il-ludd, ere, -lusl, -lusniti, de- 
 
 ; ceive, mock at, make sport of. 
 
 lljlastrls, <^, /distinguished. 
 
 "iiluHtxo, &re, avX, fttum^ make 
 
 famous ; pass, becbme «famous. 
 illyricnm, I, N., lUyricum, a 
 
 district along the eUatem coast 
 
 of the Adriatic. 
 lAabeolllis, e, weak, feeble. 
 liriHmnis, e, huge, enormous. 
 im-mltto, ere, -misl, >missnm, 
 
 let loose; »& Immlttere, to 
 
 leap in. ' 
 immolo, are, avl, &tnm, offer, 
 
 sacrifice, immolate! 
 -Immort&lis, e, immortal.N. 
 immdtns, a, nm, undisturi 
 
 untouched. 
 impedlmentnm, I, N., hin- 
 drance, obstacle ; in plur.t 
 
 baggage, baggage-train. 
 * impedlo. Ire, IvI, Itinn, hinder, 
 
 hamper, obstruct, check, pre- 
 ' vent, interfere with ; perf. 
 
 part. pass, as adj.^ impedltns, 
 
 a; nnr, hamper e d , t>e cupi e d -r 
 
 idolroo, adv., for this reason. 
 
 difficult, impassable. 
 
 - *. 
 
 ■^ 
 
a 
 
 'J 
 
 PA|IT VI.— VOCABULARY. 
 
 493 
 
 push ; instigate^ incite. «^ 
 Im-pendo, er^, -peiiai, -pen- 
 sum, expend, devqte, apply. 
 Imp^naiia, a,«um, ^ eu>ensive, 
 
 high. : _ 
 
 tinperator, -orlg, M., comman- 
 der, leader, general. 
 Imperatnni, I, n., order, com- 
 mand, bidding. 
 imperltns,. a, um, inexperi- 
 enced, unacquainted, with gen. 
 Imperiam, I, ST., command, 
 order; power, supreme powers 
 control, rule, supremacy, sway, 
 authority; generally with the 
 notion of military power. 
 tmperd, are, &vl, atam, de- 
 mand, require, order to fur- 
 nish, levy,, requisition ; order, 
 ' command. 
 
 Impetro, are, avl, atum, ob- 
 tain, t)btain one's requgst, ac- 
 complish, prevail on. 
 impetus, us, M., attack, chaige, 
 / rush, onset; fury, impetuosity. 
 Impl-eo, ere, -evi, -etum, fill 
 
 up, complete. 
 Imploro, are, ivi, atum, beg, 
 
 beseech , entreat. 
 ttii-pdno, ere, -posul, -posl- 
 
 Jium, place on. 
 importd, are, avi, atum, bring 
 
 in, introduce, import. 
 lmp)>aesentlarnni, a rare cdlo^i^ 
 qiirial adv. ( = ln pruesentla 
 rerum), for the present, for 
 the time being, under the 
 (present) circumstances. 
 tmprovlsus, a, um, unfore- 
 seeh ; imprpvlso or dg impro- 
 vlso, unexpectedly, unaware. 
 Imprudens, -entls. Unsuspect- 
 ing, oflf one's guard. 
 Imprndenter, adv.^ unwisely, 
 imprudently 
 
 Jessness, indiscretion '; igno- 
 rance» inadVe|tonce. 
 lmpud§ns, -entls, shan^eless. 
 impi|lsu8, from impello. 
 - In, prep., 1. wUh ace. into, to ; 
 at, towards, against, iipon, on ; 
 Hntil ; for, with a view to, ac- 
 cording to ; in (where there tr 
 the notion of rest, as ivdl as of 
 '' motion). 2. ivith abl, in, &t, 
 within, oji ; among, in the 
 , country of ; over ; considering, 
 . m view oi ; in the case of, in 
 regard to. 
 4nanls, e, empty. 
 inoendlum, 1, n., fire, burning. 
 in-cendo, ere, -oendl, -oen- 
 , sumi set on fire, ,set fire to, 
 btirji ; inflame, arouse. 
 inoertn», a, um, uncertain, un- ' 
 , trustworthy, groundless ; con- 
 fused, ih disorder. 
 In-eidd, ^i^, rroldl, -o&snm, 
 fall ; fall in with, come upon. 
 In-cldo, ^re, '-oldl, -olsnm, cut 
 
 into,' cut through, 
 Inoiio, aire, avI. attim, urgd^^ ' 
 on, impel., excite,- , spur on ;> 
 irritate;' in pass., go at full 
 speed: 1"^^ V • ' 
 
 Incogrnltus,' a, um; unknown ; 
 
 strange. • . ', ' 
 
 ^noola^-ae, m and P.; inhabitant, 
 ^col-o, ere,»^-ui, inhabit; dwell, 
 live. ■ ■ \ r'v 
 
 Incolumls, e, safe,- unharmed ;*' . 
 in safety, without lpssr-l4 "' . -■ 
 
 Incommode, adv., dis^trously, " ' 
 unfortunately, badly. - ^ -l 
 
 Incommodnm, I, s^, n^i^oj^.' ? 
 tune, loss. ' , .>' 
 
 Inoredtbills, e, incredible. ? ' '- 
 
 Inorep.d, are, -ul, -Itum, up- 
 braid, taunt. 
 
 inoursid, -onls, 1"., raid, inroad. 
 
 tnde , ffld».» froia that plac » , 
 
 
 Imprudentia, ae, P., thought- thence ; then, next 
 
 *. 
 
494 
 
 \v 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 
 ' . 
 
 
 Indioiani, I, N., inai:k, sign, 
 indication, proof. ' 
 
 in-dloo, ere, -dixl, -41otiini, 
 declare, proclaim, declare pub- 
 licly. , • 
 
 Indloas, a, nm, 6f or. with In- 
 dia. -■] 
 
 Indigedj §re, al,'^e dependent 
 upon, with gen. , 
 
 indlffnor, &rl, ata« •nmT^be 
 indignant, be angry. 
 
 in-duc5, ere, -duxf, •^notam, 
 Ibad into, di»w into^ lure. 
 
 Indnl-'iroo, ere, -•!, -tain, favor, 
 vnth dat. ' / 
 
 Ind-ap, ere, -«I, -fitnin, put on. 
 
 Indnstrlu, ae, F., diligence, in- 
 . dustry, activity. 
 
 Industrie, adv.^ strenuously, 
 vigorousfy. 
 
 Indutiae, &rani,^ F. plu/r.^ truce. 
 
 IndatiomaruB, J,M., Indutioroa- 
 ru8, a chief of the Treveri. 
 
 In-e5, Ire, -II (-Ivl), -itnm, en- 
 ter upon, adopt, form, devise ; 
 
 „ . begin (trans, or intrana.). 
 
 Inermis, e, unarmed. 
 
 lu-et-s, -ertla, dull, lifeless; 
 lazy, unmanly. 
 
 Infeotna, a, um, not done, un- 
 accomplished ; Infeota p&oe, 
 without having effected peace; 
 Infeota r^, without accom- 
 . plishing his purpose. 
 
 Inferior, las, comparative of 
 Inferus, a, am, lower., 
 
 Infero, Inferre, Intall, 1I1&- 
 fikin, bring; bring upon; 
 cause ; bell am Inferre, vnth 
 dat, make or wage war on. 
 
 In-floio, ere, -ffeol, -feotam, 
 
 ^ stain. 
 
 Inflnltas, a, am, endles^ couat- 
 less, boundless, vast. 
 
 Inflrmitas, -tatls, F., fickleness, 
 inconstancy. 
 
 laflrma», a, am, weak, power i 
 
 Infltior,.&rI, &tas sam, deny; 
 In- Had, ere, -llazi, -flaxam, 
 
 . flow (into), empty (into). 
 
 Iiifr&, adv., below, farther down. 
 
 Ih-frlngo, er«i, -fregl, -fr&o^ 
 tain, break, crush, weaken. 
 
 Ingink, -entis, large, huge, great, 
 vast, enormous. 
 
 infgf&tllls, adif., against one's 
 will. 
 
 ingr&taa, a, am, ungrateful. 
 
 in-gredior, I,' -gresms «am, 
 enter ; enter upon, begin. ^ - 
 
 In-haered,- £re, -haesl, -hae- 
 •am, ding to, hang upon. 
 
 Inlmloas, a, am, unfriendly, 
 hostile ; ob avhst., Inlmloas, 
 I, M., enemy^ personal enemy ; 
 aij^rl.f Inlmlolssfmas, I, M., 
 bitterest enemy. 
 
 inltiam, I, N., beginning ; edge, 
 frontier, borders ; a&2., initio, 
 at first. 
 
 initas, a, am, from lileo. 
 
 in-Jlfilp, ere, -J^ol, -Jeotam^ 
 cast, put into ; inspire, strike 
 into. 
 
 injuria, ae, F., wrong, injury, in- 
 justice, wrong-doing, violence. 
 
 injusti, cu^v.," unjustly. 
 
 Innooentia, ae, F., innocence, 
 integrity. 
 
 Inopla, ae, F., want, scarcity, 
 lack, dearth. 
 
 Inopln&na, •antis, not expect- 
 ing, contrary to ex|)ectation. 
 Unawares. 
 
 Inopln&taa, a, am, unexpected. 
 
 Ihquam, inqalt, defective, say. 
 
 Inaoiftns, •entis, not knowing, 
 
 (being) Unaware. 
 ^aolua, ^ a, nin, ignorant,^ un- 
 awares! 
 
 In-aequor, I, -aeoutua aum, fol- 
 low pp, pursue. 
 
 In-aided, *re, -aftdl, -aea^am, 
 iak» poaawaion of» (joiger-ef- 
 
 ' 
 
 ij 
 in 
 
 
un- 
 
 . PART VI.— VOCABULARY. 
 . Insldlor &i.r' &^ v • *"**'<>«">. sometimes. 
 
 in slsto, ere, -gtltl, stand on, Inter-flold «re -fe«i r«A*« 
 mggecto, are, avi, atam, look Interim, orfi,,, meanwhile. 
 
 * Inrtftblli;, e, unsteady change ^"^n^t'' w *' • '^^^^«**'^« «<0'm 
 Able ""»"«»«7, cnange- mner, intenor, more secret ; 
 
 '" '"de'i^Tke *l^:n"n'''' -"*""?'T *»*«''««•. u«. M., death. 
 
 r Institutam,. I, n., custom, prac- 
 tice. , ■ 
 
 „ Inst^rfare, -stltl, -ftatom, 
 
 press forward. 
 In-8trad, ere, -struxl, -struo- 
 tum, draw up, arrange ; build, , 
 equip. 
 
 Insue-facio, ere, -feci, -fao- 
 tum, train, accustom. 
 
 InNuetas, a, um, unaccustomed^ 
 
 Insula, ae, F., island. "^ 
 
 intesr^r, grra, «rrum^i uiiim- 
 ^ paired ; fresh, unweaned. 
 
 Intel.legro, ere, -lexl, -leotum, 
 understand, be aware, per- 
 ceive, see, know, learn, feel, 
 
 Intemperavitla, ae, F., excess, 
 arrogance, haughtiness. noncerns. 
 
 amonrdur^f.'^nte''''"''"' I«t^rvM,um, ,,^ k.. interval, 
 «« ^k^L T^ V*"*®' **' *^"« distance. 
 
 ^"n^tSh:^:^'^"-^^^*^ ^^l^P^f' -^^ -. within, 
 
 *"::«:i^e,^t,irSis;r i^^^^^^^^^^r^^- 
 
 tween. ^ > or ^^ be- Intro-ttuco ere, -duxl, -^uo- 
 
 tf ififi , lead in. 
 
 discontinue ; delay, postpone; 
 
 let pass, leave between; in 
 
 tpass. be left, intervene, elai 
 
 'cease. 
 
 Inter.pdnd, ere, -poi 
 
 tarn, interpose ; j^lj 
 
 forward, allege ; in[ 
 
 vene, arise (to prev 
 
 Inter-pres, -pretis, 
 
 preter. _ 
 InterrojEird, are, ftvl, 
 ^ask, question. 
 mter-rnmpo, ere, -rupl, -rup- 
 
 tum, breakdown, destroy. 
 Inter-sum, -esa^ -ful, be be- 
 tween; be engaged in, take 
 part in ; as impersmial verb, 
 interest, it is of importance, it 
 J5pncerns. 
 
 ^"iur 'cTt V*V '*"*?' •*''*■ *'»*'»*i««> «».'M., entrance, ap- 
 sum, cut ott, intercept. proach. ^ » "F 
 
 V 
 
 s 
 

 -t' 
 
 
 
 -A: 
 
 49Q 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 In-tneor, 6rl, tnltus .nnvlook lter«m, oM., again, a second 
 
 upon, regard, consider. 
 Intull, /rom Infer© . 
 intu», adu., within, in the 
 
 house. 
 Inusltatns, a, nrti, Unusual, 
 
 strange, novel, unfamiliar. 
 Inutllll e, useless, unservice- Jaoeo, ere, «I, Itum, lie. 
 
 time. A 
 
 Itlna, od2-> PO'^»» Itt^«, Portus 
 Itius, a harbor on the coast of 
 Oaid, near the modem Calaia. 
 
 able, harmful. 
 inva-dd, eTe, -»l, -sum, enter ; 
 
 InVado In, invade, attaick. 
 In-venlo, Ire, -Venl, -veBtuni, 
 
 come upon, find. 
 Invloem, adv., in turn. 
 invlotns, a, am, unconquered. 
 Invidla, ae,r., envy, jealousy, 
 
 hatred. 
 Invltd, . are, &vl, atum, in- 
 vite. « .1,. 
 InvltnH, a, nm, unwilling, 
 
 against one's will. 
 16, inter j., ah ! oh ! 
 Ipse, a, nm, himself, he him 
 
 Jaoid, ere, Jeel, Jaotnm, throw, 
 
 «ast, hurl. 
 
 Jam, adv., now, at length, by 
 this time ; already ; with nega- 
 tives, any more, longer. "^" 
 
 J&nlonlnni, I, N., the Janicu- 
 lum, a fortress across tlie Tiber . 
 from Rome. 
 
 J anna, ae, F., door, entranCe^/V, 
 
 Jovls, from Jnppiter 
 J abed, ere, J nasi, Jastam, or- 
 der, bid, command. 
 Judaeas, I, M., a Jew. 
 judlclam, 1, N., trial, lawsuit; 
 ,ge, a, am, mm«eii, «« »..»- judgment, opinion. ^ 
 
 self, itself, etc.; in person; Judioo, are, &vl, atain, judge, 
 ^*^ ' ' ' ^ ^cide, consider, think ; de- 
 
 clare, proclaim, adjudge^; pass 
 judgment "^ 
 
 very. 
 IratuH, a, am, angry, raging 
 
 Ire, framed. j — o--^ , - 
 
 tr-rldeo. ere, -rl«I,-rlBam, make Jasrum, 1, N., yoKe. 
 
 sirt ofjeer at.' Ju»-. «. *»., Julius, a Roman 
 
 U-ramp6, ere, -r,upl, -rap- prmnomen. 
 
 Itn.^ break into, storm, rush Jamentam I, n., beast of bur- 
 
 i^into 4en, ox, horse, etc. 
 
 U ea,ld, that, this; he, she, it, Jango, ere, Junxl, Junetam, 
 
 thev • the ; such ; abl. eo as join, unite. . 
 
 '^.,'Bomnch, the, on that Jano^^fci.^F.,^^^^^ « B<man 
 
 account. • -rjMrf^M. T.i^fpr 
 ita adv 80, thus, in this way,. Jnppiter, Jnmfn, M, ^"P»^.'^' 
 
 In such a ;ay, ai follows. Jove, the J^f god a,m^^g the 
 
 _ ,- w Tfjilv RomxvM. 
 
 «,«i"*;' and «..therefore, 46«.. «e, «■■ . J"". " ">»»« 
 
 "•^tT^^Vur^-"-'; iao'tH.,».. right. Uw^pri. 
 
 pttHBugu» ftdmiaainn -right of vtlege. 
 
 fafsere, march. N.fBatn. 
 
 If 
 
PART VI. — VOCABULARY. 
 
 497 
 
 lecond 
 
 Portus 
 
 oast of 
 Oalavi. 
 
 throw, 
 
 th, by 
 h nega- 
 
 Fanicu- 
 
 e Tiher . 
 
 im, or- 
 
 kwsuit ; 
 
 judge, 
 k ; de- 
 ;e ; pass 
 
 Roman 
 of bur- 
 inctnm, 
 
 I Roman 
 
 Jupiter, 
 noit,y the 
 
 a range 
 
 r Juror, 
 
 «r, tak© 
 
 ftw ; pri- 
 
 Ju88l and Juggns, a, um, from lamentam, 1, n., wailing," la- 
 
 Jubeo. mentation. 
 
 J ngg^, abl. rased as adv., by order. Lampsacng, I, f. (or um. If tS. ), 
 Jugtitia, ae, F,, justice, fair Lampsacus, a totm in Aina 
 
 dealing, upriglftness. Minor, m the Hellespont. 
 
 J u stag, a, uiii, just, rightful, lanlo, are, avi, atum, tear, 
 
 fair; Jugtus, I, M., the Just. lacerate. 
 Juvencuii, I, M., btfUock, young largrXtlo, -onlg, F., distribution, 
 
 ***• bribery. ^ 
 
 Juvenlg, tg, M., a youth, young L&rigga, ae, f., Larissa, a citJ 
 
 in»n- in Thesaaly. 
 
 >uv6, are, J«^vl, Jutun|^aid, Larg, Lartlg, M.,Lars, «m JfriM- 
 keep, assist. canpr(enom£n. 
 
 I^ liartluig, I, M., Lartius, a Ro- 
 
 man. 
 L>., an abbreviaUon for IjucIuh. Ii^ggitudd, -dlnlg, f., fatigue, 
 Labeo, -onlg, M., Quintus Fa-\ ^exhaustion. % 
 
 bius Labeo, consul i» 183 B. C. iat6, adv. , widely, extensively. 
 Laberlng, I, M., Quintus . La- latltudo, -dlnlg, f., width, 
 benus Durus, a military tri- breadth, extent. 
 hune with C'cpsar. latug, a, ttm, broad, wide, ex- 
 
 Lablenug, I, M. , Titus Labienus, tensive. 
 
 one of Cmaar's lienteriants. latns, -erlg, n., side, flank. . 
 
 labor, -6 rig, M,, toil, hardship, landandag, a, um, re<dlygerim- 
 labor, exertion, occupation ; rftve o/laudo, praiseworthy, 
 iandurance, hardihood ; diffi- lando, &ro, avi, atum, praise, 
 Gulty. commend. 
 
 labor, 1, l&pgng gum, slip; do laug, laudlg, F., praise, glory, 
 
 wrong, fall away. credit. 
 
 laboro, Are, avi, &tum, toil, lav6, &re, &vl, &tum, or l&vl, 
 strive ; be in difficulty, be hard lautum or idtum, wash; in 
 pressed, be in distijess. prtsa., Imthe. 
 
 , labrum, I, N., lip. leotloa^, «e, F.,. litter, sedan.A 
 
 l&o, laiotlg,, N., milk. leotulng, I, M., couch. * 
 
 lAoedaemqn, -onlg, F., Sparta, l«g&tld, onlg, F., embassy. 
 the chieficity of the Feloponne- leg&tug, I, m., ambassador, en- 
 ^"*- voy ; lieutenant, a staff officer 
 
 Laoedaemonlug, X, M., a Spar- next in rank to the comman- 
 
 tan» der-in chief . 
 
 Iaoeg«.5, ere, -Ivl, -Itum, pro- Ieirl6, onlg, F., legion, a body 
 voke, harass, attack, assail. of soldiers of the nomimd 
 
 laorlma, ae, F., tear. strength of six ttwujmuit di- 
 
 laoug, f|g, M., lake. — ^ ; videdinto ten cohort»* 
 laetltln, a<», F., joyfulness, re- Ieirl6nftrlng, a, um, of a legion, 
 
 joicing. legionary. 
 
 Lae vlnug , I, M.. Publius Vale- l#>ttlmng , a, um, Iwgal 
 rius Laevmus, consid'in 280 lejrd, ere, iftfl, l«otam, choose ; 
 
 B,a 
 
 
 t t 
 
 .T- 
 
 '%■ 
 
498 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 
 & 
 
 Lemannas, 1, M., Lemannus, a llnquo, ere, llqui, llotum, 
 
 iafce noto coXUd Geneva. 
 lenip, e, gentle, light. 
 lenlter, adv., gently, with little 
 
 vigor. 
 led, -onig, M., lion. 
 tied n Idas, ae, M., Leonidas, a 
 
 leave. 
 linteum, I, N., linen cloth, cur- 
 tain. 
 Itqnor^ -oris, M., fluid, water, 
 lis, litis, F., law suit ; damages, 
 ... , penalty. 
 
 Spartan king, dain at Ther- Lltavlccus, I, m., Litaviccus, a 
 mopyht, ^80 B.C. ' leading man of the ^dui. r 
 
 Lepontll, drum, M. plur., the llttera, ae, F., letter (of the 
 Lepontn, an Alpine tribe. alphabet), character; in plnr., 
 
 lepas, -oris, M., hare. . letter, despatch; literature, 
 
 levls, e, light, shgnt, trifling,^ _ literary pursuits. ^ 
 
 lex, legrls, F., law. ntu., -oris, K., shore. ^' 
 
 llbenter, adv., gladly, with locus, I, m. (pZwr., iboa, drum, 
 pleasure. ^ n.), place, spot, point, posi- 
 
 llber, bpl, M., book. ' tion, ground, situation, destin- 
 
 IXber, era, ernm, free, inde- ation, country; in /)/w., space, 
 pendent. ground, district, region, coun- 
 
 llberallter, adv., generously, try, place, 
 graciously, kindly, courteous-, longre, adv., far, long, by far. 
 y* . , longlnquus, a, um, distant, re- 
 
 llbere, adv., freely, unrestrain- mote ; long, protracted, 
 edly, frankly. longltudo, -dlnls, f., length. ' 
 
 ^ ll^rl, -ornm, M, phir., chil- lonsrns, a, um,,Jipng; tedious. 
 
 °''®"" -^avls longa,il!»war-8hip, war 
 
 llbero, are, &vl, &tnm, free, galley. 
 
 set free, release. 
 llbeiglis, -tatls, f., l^t»erty, 
 
 freedgm, independence. 
 Hoot, 6re, lleult, it is permit- 
 
 Liongus, i,,M., Ti. Sempronius 
 
 Longus, consid in 218 B. G. 
 loqnor, I, looutus 8um,'sp^k, 
 
 . . , 4 say. 
 
 ted, it is allowable; freely lotus, a, nm, /rom lavo. 
 
 may, might. Lucanl, drum, M. plnr., the 
 
 Ilffneus, a, am, of wood, wood- Lucanians, a people duxslling in 
 
 •"^ji. amUhem Italy. 
 
 Itflrniifl^, I, N., l6g; in plnr., Luolus, I, M., Lucius, a iJoman 
 
 fare wood. prcenomen. 
 
 Llvar«», am, M. plur., the Li- luged, «ro, Iftxi, lactam, la- 
 
 gunans, a peitjtle hmna'on the ment, mourn, weep. 
 
 wed coast of northern Italy. Lagotorlx, -IrIs, m., Lugptorix, 
 
 llmen, -mlnls^ N., threshold, a BHton of rank. 
 
 door. , », ■■ luna, ae, F., moon. 
 
 Lln^on«i, urn, M. piwr.,^ the Lut^tla, ae, F., Lutetia, a town 
 
 Lingones, a tribe in the eaatern in OatU. 
 
 paH of central Gaul, t la^, lads, p., light, dawn; 
 
 lingua, ae, F., tongue, Ian- prlni& luoe or ort4 lAoe, at 
 
 m^ daybroftk, fttdttwu. 'i ^ 
 
 £pi,-.,. i!.--..^r 
 
 m. 
 
. ,■■■.,■ 
 
 
 
 
 ': '» 
 
 
 stum, 
 
 o.nv. 
 
 .• 
 
 I 
 
 PART VI.— VOCABULARY. 
 
 499 
 
 M 
 
 liydl, drum, M; plnr., the Lyd- 
 ians, a people living in Asia 
 Minor. 
 
 lympha, ae, F., water. 
 
 Lyslmaohus, I, m., Lysimachus, 
 father of Ariatides. 
 
 ' ■ M 
 
 M., an abbreviation for Marcus. 
 
 maeror, -oris, M., grief, sorrow. 
 
 inagls, comparative adv. (see 
 magrnopere), more, rather. 
 
 maglster, trl, M., master,. com- 
 mander ; magister eqnltnm, 
 master of the horse, chief mb- 
 ordinate of the Dictator. 
 
 magistratas, ug, M., magistrate; 
 office, magistracy; in plur., 
 authorities, chief officials. 
 
 Magnesia, ae, F., Magnesia, 
 a city of aonth-westem Asia 
 Minor. 
 
 magnltudd, -dlnls, F., great- 
 ness, great size ; size, extent ; 
 » stature. 
 
 magnopere, adv. (magis, max- 
 *">«)» greatly, exceedingly,, 
 very much, earnestly, urgent- 
 
 mj^gnns, a, nm (m&Jo^, m&zl- 
 nius, great, large, important ; 
 eminent ; loud, extensive ; 
 m&gnl a» adv. , highly, greatly. 
 
 M&g5, -onls, M., Mago, brother 
 of Hannibal. 
 
 m&Jor, us, comparative of mhg- 
 nas ; niAJor tiatq;, elder ; in 
 M. plur. CM «ti&«^., «aiders, an- 
 cestors. 
 
 nale, adv., ill, badly, wrongly, 
 unsuccessfully, cruelly ; vobls 
 male sit, cursos upon you. 
 
 maleflolnm, I, w., mischief, 
 outrage. 
 
 m&lo, mAlIe, mftlal, prefer, 
 had rather, be more willing. 
 
 mains, a, urn, evil, accursed. 
 mandatum, I, n., order, in- 
 struction, message. 
 mando, are, avi, atnm, in- 
 struct, order; give up, betake. 
 Mandubracius, I, m., Mandu- 
 
 bracius, a Briton of rank. 
 mane, adv., in the morning. 
 maneo, ere, mansi, mansam, 
 
 stay, remain; abide. 
 Manllus, 1, m., 1. Titus Man- 
 lius Torquatus, a famms Bo- 
 man. 2. Marcus Manlius, con- 
 sidin392B.C. 3. Cn. Manlius 
 V olso, consrd in 189 B.C. ' 
 manns, u,s, f., hand; band, 
 force; manu, by force, or, 
 with munXtns, by art ; ma- 
 num oonserere, join battle, y 
 Marathonias, a, nm, of ofj 
 at Marathon. ' 
 
 Maroellns, 1, M., Marcus Clau- 
 dius Marcellus, |1. a famous 
 Boman general; 2. consid in 
 183 B.C. 
 Marcus, I, M., Marcus, a Bo- 
 
 WMn prcenomen., 
 Mardonlus, 1, m., Mardonius, a , 
 
 Btraian general. ^ 
 
 mare, is, N., sea. ^» 
 margarltum, 1, N. (of a, ae, 
 
 F.), pearl. 
 margo, -inis, M., edge, margin, 
 side. • 
 
 marltlmns, a, urn, on or of the 
 sea, at sea, oi^ the coast, mari- 
 time, naval. 
 m&ter, -trls, F., mother. , 
 m&terla, ae, F., timber, wood, 
 m&tr6n&lts, e, of a matron, wo- 
 manly. ' J 
 m&'tar«, adv. (mAtfirtni, m4- 
 
 tikrrlmg), early, soon. 
 mfttarns, a, uni, early, ripe. ' 
 in&xlm«, superlative adv. (see 
 irtftgnop ie re)» vary grea ^ 
 
 nuAlaBi, I, H., evil, ill, harmful 
 deed ; calamity. 
 
 yeiy much, mwt, especially ; 
 in the highest degree. 
 
600 
 
 r 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 \ '. 
 
 m 
 
 Maximns, 1, M., Quihtus Fabius 
 Maximus (see Fabius). 
 
 maxiinns, a, um, superlative of 
 magrnns. \ 
 
 Medl, drum, M. plur., the 
 Medes, a people of \cestern 
 Asia. 
 
 iiiedlons, I, M., physician.' 
 
 Mediomatrices, um, M. pliir., 
 the Mediomatrices, a tribe in 
 the north-east of Ganl. 
 
 niedlterraneus, a, um, inland. 
 
 medlns, a, um, middle, cen- 
 tral ; generhlly . rendered by 
 hiiddle or midst of. : | - 
 
 Meldl, - -drum, M. phir., Wi'e 
 Meldi, a trihe in northern 
 Gaid. 
 
 melior, us, comparative ■ of bo- 
 - hus. ,' .1 . '' 
 
 mellltus, a, um, honoy.-sweet. 
 
 membrnin, I, N., limb. 
 
 memor, -oris, mindiiil, remem- 
 beting, With gen. 
 
 memor ia,, jae, F., memory, re- 
 collection, tradition, account ; 
 
 ; time ; inemoriae prdflere, re- 
 
 ■ cord, recount, descaribo. ' 
 
 MenaplI,* drum, ' M. 'phi/rl^ the 
 Menapii, a tribe in the extrepie 
 north-eoM of Oaid. ' \ 
 
 mSns, mentis, F., mindr intelr 
 lect, feeling, way ol M^i^ikl 
 
 ' ing. %^ \ (\.. t^' 
 
 minsls, is, M., month. '■ ;\ V|' 
 
 m.6n«ura, ae, F., measurement. 
 
 mentio, -onis, F., mention. 
 
 ineroator,. -drla, M., trader, 
 merchant. 
 
 tnereo, £re, nl, Itum, deserve, 
 earn. 
 
 merldi&nna, a, um, of mid-day ; 
 
 ..merldi&num tempna, noon^.^^ 
 
 meridian, 61, M., mid-day, noon; 
 the south. 
 
 meritnm, I, N., s^vice ; desert, 
 
 TnBTtt; 
 metaiiiukij t, N., mine. 
 
 metd, ere, messnl, measum, 
 
 reap, cut grain. 
 
 meti^s, us, M., fear. \ 
 
 mens, a, nm, my, mine. 
 
 mll'es, -itis, M., soldier, man. 
 
 militaris, e, military, of war. 
 
 mllle, -indeclinable adj., a thou- 
 sand -j subst. in, plnr., mlilia, 
 i um,^ k. , thousand,, thousands. 
 
 Miltiades, is, M., Miltiades, a 
 famoiis Athenian general. 
 
 minimc,. adv., superlative of pa- 
 rum, by no means, very little, - 
 least. 
 
 minor, us, comparative of par- 
 vus, less, smaller ; younger ; 
 '^ "less great, less eminent. 
 
 Minucius, 1, M., 1. M. Miniicius 
 Rufus, muster of the horse in 
 217 ^.0. 2. Quintus Minu- \ 
 cius, coristdin 193 B.G. 
 
 mih-u6, ere, tuI, -utnm, lessen, 
 
 '^lliminish, decrease. n^ 
 
 minus, adv., comparative of pa- 
 rttm, less, not . . . enough ; 
 
 ^^-wmetimes nearly = non, pcarce- 
 ly, not. 
 
 miror, arl, atvn sum, wonder, 
 wonder at, be surprised at. 
 
 mirus, a, vim, wonderful. 
 
 miselius, a, um, diniiniitive of 
 miaor, poor, hapless. 
 
 miser, era, ernm, wretched, 
 unhappy, pitiable. 
 
 miserlcordla, ae, F., compas- 
 sion, pity. 
 
 mitesoo, ore, grow mild, relax. 
 
 mltto, ere, mlal, mlsskim, send, 
 despatch. 
 
 mobllia, o, fickle, changea'blo, 
 capricious, uncertain. 
 
 mobillt&s, -tatla, F., activity, 
 mobility. i^-_, ,^^=, — — 
 
 moderor, hrt, fttni sum, man- 
 age, check, control. ■ . " 
 
 modest^, adv., modestly. 
 
 \: 
 
 - 
 
 niodicna, m, am, moderate ; 
 small. 
 
 TP- 
 
 t:' 
 
 ■»* <ij^ 
 
».' 
 
 PART VI.— VOCABULARY. 
 
 601 
 
 X:--. 
 
 
 » 
 
 , 
 
 
 « 
 
 ' 
 
 -" 
 
 .♦, . 
 
 • 
 
 
 ' ■ -v- 
 
 
 "» 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •"• 
 
 •• ., 
 
 ^ 
 
 N . , 
 
 /> ■ 
 
 ^ ,■' ■■■* 
 
 -^ 
 
 
 . \ 
 
 \ 
 
 
 . « 
 
 
 .• 
 
 modo, adv. , only, but, merely ; 
 mo^o . . . modo, now . . . 
 now. 
 modns, i, m., mi usure, fashion, 
 style, way. manner, kind, sort ; 
 ahl., modo, in the manner or 
 character (of), like, as. 
 moenla. l«m, ^. plur., walls. 
 nidllor, ipi, itag gum, meditate, 
 
 plan. 
 mollis, e, easy ; gently sloping; 
 
 favorable. ' , 
 
 MolossI, um, M. plnr., the Mo- 
 • lossians, a people in the eastern 
 part of Epims. 
 momentum, I, n., movement, 
 
 impulse. 
 Mona, ae, F., Mona, an Hsiand 
 
 in the Irish Sea. 
 moneo, ere, ul, itum, warn, 
 advise, remin'd, admonish. . ♦ 
 mong, montlg, M., mountain, 
 
 hill, clifF ; mountaifi range. 
 monnmentum, I, n., monu- 
 ment -y memorial. 
 mora, ae, F., delay. 
 morbug, 1, M., illness, disease,. 
 
 sickness. 
 morlbnndng, a, nm, dying, at 
 
 the point of death. 
 Moplnl, drum, M. plur., the 
 Morini, a tribe in the north of 
 Oaid. 
 morlor, morl, mortnng gum, 
 : die ; per/, part, as adj., mor- 
 tnufi, a, um, dead. 
 moror, arl, atug. gum, delay, 
 
 wait, stay, linger. 
 morg, mortig,F., death, 
 moriallg, e, mortal ; m. assnbst.y 
 
 man. 
 mortuug, a, um, from morlor. 
 m6g, morlg, M., manner, cus- 
 tohi, habit, usage ; in plur. . 
 oflert, character ; will, humor ; 
 mort-m yerere. with dnt.. du 
 
 a person's will, humor, obey. jS« 
 
 Mosa, ae, M., the Meuse, a river 
 
 in north-eastern Ganl. 
 motus, ug, M., movement, mo- 
 tion, change ; uprising, dis- 
 turbance, revolt. 
 moved, ere, movl, motiim, 
 move, set in motion; influ- 
 ence; se movere, stir; ivith 
 cagtra, move, break up. 
 mox, adv.y soon, presently ; soon 
 
 afterwards, then, next. 
 muller, -erls, F., woman. 
 multitude, -dl-hlg, f., great 
 number, great numbers, large 
 body, multitude, host, num- 
 ber ; the crowd, the multi- 
 , tude, the common people: 
 multd, are, avi, atum, punish, 
 
 fine. 
 multo, adv., by far, by much, 
 
 much, far, long,. * *./^ 
 
 multam, adv. (plug, pliirl- 
 mnm), much, often, frequent- 
 ly, yery. 
 multiig, a, um (plug, pluri- 
 mng), much ; n. jdnr. as 
 snbst.j, multa, drum, many 
 things. 
 munlo, Irp, IvI, Ititm, fortify, 
 protect, defend, 8ec^re ; build, 
 construct» 
 munltlo, -inlg, F., work of for- 
 tification, fortifying, construc- 
 tion ; fortification, line of de- 
 fence ; fortified works, de- 
 fences. . 
 munltus,' a, um, perf. part, 
 pass, o/ munlo, as adj., forti- 
 fied. 
 mnnng, -erlg, n., present, gift. 
 murug, I, M., wall. 
 mug, m&rlg, m., mouse. 
 mutd, are, ftvl, &tani, change, 
 
 exchange. . 
 Myug, untig (are. Myunta), F., 
 Myu H , a city of Cnrin^ in J.»ia == 
 
 ^ 
 
 Me] — ^ 
 
 tnor. 
 
 w' " :S^ 
 
 "rrr 
 
 -^ 
 
 ■*,. 
 
 fcSs 
 
 ■ :!v^ . 
 
602 
 
 PmMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 
 - not to ; 'tvith verbs of feetriiigf 
 
 nactniB, a, pm,/nomiianoisoor. that, lesfc. \ 
 
 Naeviasy I, M.,"Mar<ms Naevius, »«» adv., hot ; ta* . . «^qnidem, 
 
 a Boman.\ 
 nam, conj., for. 
 
 namqae, conj., fo^ indeed,, for.. 
 tianotsoor, |, liaotas ornaiiotiis 
 sam, find, get, meet with,, ob- 
 tain. • * i V 
 Niintia&tgft, lam, M. fiur., the 
 
 not even. 
 no. enclitic interrogative ^r'\ 
 
 ticle, in direct questions un- ^ 
 ; trmidated ; • in indii-ect ques- 
 : . tyi^ns^ whether. , 
 nebalo, -onis, M., Worthless 
 
 fellow, wretch. _^ ■ 
 
 "Nahtuates, a tr^ , in the ned, see neq^uo. 
 
 Alps. 
 narrd, are, &vl, atnm, tell, 
 
 relate. , 
 
 n&8oor, I, natas gam, be -bom, 
 
 be sprung from, derive (H'igin ; 
 ' o/ me^a^s, be found. 
 .Nasloa, ae, M., Scipio Nasica, 
 
 an eminent Boman. 
 
 neoessario, adv., of 'necessity, 
 unavoidably. 
 
 neoes8|ti^ia9,'a, nm, critical. 
 
 neoesse, indeclinable adj., neces- 
 sary, inevitable; neoesgia est, 
 often to be rendered by must, 
 inevitably. 
 
 neceasitas, -tatls, F., necessity. 
 
 n&tto, -ohIb, f., ra«e, tribe, need, are, avi, atam, kill, put 
 
 nation. to death. 
 
 natura, ae, F., nature, character; neg-lego, ere, -lexl, -leotnm,. 
 
 shape. " '■* . neglect, slight, disregard, be 
 
 n&tas, a, lim, from naaoor. indifferent to. 
 nitu», u«, M., birth. ■ ' nego, hjte, avI, atam, * deny, 
 
 naufragriam, I, N., shipwreck, ^^-say .^. . , not; refuse, say 
 
 literal and figurative. '*no. ' 
 
 nau^a, ae, M., sailor, mariner, hegrotlam, I, n., business afiair. 
 
 seaman. . 
 
 ndntlens, a, am, liaval, naini- 
 cal, pertaining to the s^a ; lea 
 naatloae, seamanship. t 
 
 n&T&Us, e, naval. -. 
 
 n&yioala,, ^, F., boat. 
 
 n&vlgatio,, -onis, F., sailing, 
 voyage. 
 
 n&vlfflnm, VN., ship, vessel,- 
 - boat. 
 
 n&vlgo, are, AvI, &tam, sail. 
 
 n&vls, in, F., ship, boat, vessel; 
 nayU longa, warship, man-of- 
 war ; n&via oner&ria, trans- 
 port ; n&vis frument&ria, 
 corn-ship. 
 
 Naxoa, I, F., Naxus, an idand 
 in the jEgean 
 
 matter; trouble, difficulty. ' 
 Nemea, ae, F., Nemea, a city ii^ 
 
 the Peloponnesus. 
 nemo (nemfnls), M., gen. and 
 
 abt. not in use, nulllas and 
 
 nullo being used instead, no 
 
 one, nobody. 
 NeoolSs, 1« and I, M., Neoclei, 
 
 the father of Themistodes. 
 neqaaqaam, adv., by no mleans. 
 neqae, or sometimes neo before 
 
 consonants, adv. and conj., 
 
 and not, nor ; ivken repeated, 
 
 neither . . . nor, not-. . . nor. . 
 Nervlf, dram, M. pltir.,- the 
 
 Nervii, a tribe in the, north-east 
 
 ofOaiU. 
 nea« conj. and not, nor. 
 
 \ 
 
 ggTcor^rrtttst not, leat, in onfe r-iiginrci', tT»,~yrinn, iimthor i^ ^ 
 that not; <^ten best rendered pinr., neither side. 
 
PAKT VI.— VOCABULARY. 
 
 603 
 
 nihil, N. indecl.^ ^thing ; with 
 gen., no; ace. as adv., not at 
 all. 
 
 Blhllomlnns, adv., , none the 
 less. 
 
 iilhllain,I,N., nothing; nlhilo, 
 abl. as adv. vnth comparatives, 
 
 ■ none, no ; nlhUd mlnns, ni- 
 hil© seolus, nevertheless, 
 none the less, all the same. 
 
 nisi, conj., if not, unless, except. 
 altldns, a, tun, neat, elegant. 
 ^Bltor, I, nlaus and nlxns sum, 
 
 ■ rest upon, mount; strive; 
 j^\ depend upon, rely upon. 
 
 iilx, nlvls, F.r mow. 
 
 NobUlbr, -drlg,iM.,Serviu8Ful- 
 
 vius Nobilior, constd in 255 
 
 B.C. 
 
 i^blUg, e, noble, of high birth ; 
 
 all-known, famotis, promip- 
 
 ., - --ifc. ■ ■> - -•".'■• 
 
 XidbllHitH, thti». P., high birth ; 
 
 the nbbility, the nobles. 
 aooeo, 6i^al, Itum, do harm 
 §-: to, molest, injure, with dot. 
 
 nootu, ahl. ds^adv., by night. 
 nootarnns, a,>m, of the nigl^. 
 
 by night. V ^ 
 
 Kola, ae, P., Nola, a city in 
 
 Campania, south dfBpme. , 
 Kol&nns, a, nm, of l^la. / 
 
 nolo, nolle, nolnl, am unwill- 
 ing, do not wish, do notx^aznb, 
 ^ refuse. 
 ndmen, -minis, N., name;\^* 
 
 putation, prestige ; people. 
 Ii6nilnfttlm, adv., by name. "- 
 ndn, adv., not, no. , 4t ' 
 ndndnm, adv. , not yet. 
 ndnne, interrogative particle, 
 
 not ; whether not. 
 ^^onnlhll, N., vnded., somewha*-, 
 
 something; ynth g^., some, 
 
 considerable. 
 ndnn&llg», a, iftm, gome. 
 
 
 ndsod, ere, novl» notam, be- 
 come acquainted with ; in 
 per/., know ; per/, part. pass. 
 notus, a, um, as adj., known, 
 well-known, familiar. 
 
 noster, tra, tram, our ; M. 
 p^ur. as subst., our men, out 
 forces. - 
 
 noto, are, avi, atam, observe. 
 
 notus, from ndsod. ^ 
 
 nove^, nine; 
 
 novi^ /rpm ndsod. •■ - 
 
 novltas, -tatls, P. , novelty .'un- 
 familiar character. 
 
 novas, a, am, new, fresh ; 
 stratage; novlsslnms, latest, 
 last, rear; novae r£s, change 
 of government, revolution. 
 
 nox, nootls, P., night. 
 
 nubilas, a, am, «loudy, gloomy. 
 
 nudas, a, am, naked, without 
 clothing, unprotected, bare. 
 
 nullas, a, um, no, none ; in 
 gen. and ahl. sing, stipplies. 
 case» of n§md, no one. 
 
 nam, an interrogative particle, 
 expecting (in direct qiiestions) 
 a negative answer; in indirect 
 
 ■\ questions, whe>ther. 
 
 nnmerd, &re, &vl, atum, count, 
 reckon; consider; possess. 
 
 iaumerns, I, m., number; 
 amount. ^ : 
 
 Numldae, arum, M. plnr., the 
 Numidians, a people of rtorth- 
 ern Africa. 
 
 nummus, 1, M., coin, money. 
 lumquam oy nanquam, <xdv., 
 \neVer. 
 
 nunc, ach.,novr, at this time, at 
 th^time ; nuno . . . nuno, 
 now\, . now, at one time .. . . 
 at ano^er. 
 
 nCintld, Ax«. ftvl, &tam, an- 
 nounce, r(&port, bring word, 
 
 V 
 
 ikdnai,,a, am, ninth. 
 
 no 
 
 a&ntlni, 1, m\ 
 ^ news, report. 
 
 messenger ; 
 ;e, tidmgs. 
 
\ 
 
 i^ 
 
 504 
 
 PRIMAftY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 ndptlae, arum, F. plur.^ mar- 
 riage, wedding. .^ 
 nu(trlxj -Ids, F., nurse. ' 
 nutas^ us, M., nod, beck, sign. 
 
 O ' 
 
 6, intefjectiony oh 
 
 <, 
 
 ob-tined, ere, -tinnl, -tentam, ^ 
 
 hold, possess, occupy, keep, 4 
 
 maintain. ^ s| 
 
 obtreotatid, -onls, F., jealousy, * 
 
 detraction. 
 obtreoto, are, avi, atam, ft© 
 
 opposed, thwart 
 
 "V 
 
 ob, prep, ivith ace, on account obtuIX, from offerb. " « * 
 of, because of, for ;.ob earn obviam, adv., in the ¥^y, trf, 
 caasam, on tliat account, obviam Ire or venire {xJbiih 
 
 therefore 
 ob-duo6, ere, -d&xX, -ductaiti, 
 
 — bring over, draw over, over- 
 spread. . • 
 
 ob-ed, -Ire, -II (-Ivl), -Itum, 
 meet ; discharge, perform., 
 
 obitns, us, Mt, death. 
 
 dat.\ go {or come) to meet, 
 . meet. 
 
 ocoaslo, -onis, F., opportunity. 
 oocasns, us, M., setting; sdlis 
 
 ^ooasns, sunset, the west. 
 oc-cldd, ere, -cidi, -oasum, 
 
 set ; fall, be slain, 
 
 ob-Jiclo, ere, -Jeol, -J'ectnm, o«-oldd, ere, -cidl, -cisnm, slay, 
 
 place in the way of, throw in kill ; m. plur. as svhst.y ooolsl^ 
 
 the way of, present, cause to 
 appear ; pass, lie opposite. 
 
 oblatns, a, urn, from ofTero. 
 
 ob-llvlsoor, I, -lltns sum, for- 
 get, with gen. 
 
 the slain. 
 ocoultd, are» ayl> atum, 
 ' CQnc&a^. 
 oo-cnmbo, ere, -onbo^ -oubi- 
 
 tnm, fall, be slain. 
 
 ob-rno, ere, -rul, -ratnm, ooonpatlo, -onls^i"., engage- 
 
 overwhelm, bury. 
 
 Obsouro, are, a vl, atum, dark- 
 en, hide. 
 
 obseord, aire, avI, atttm,"<<b/^/- 
 
 seech, implore. ^^ "^ ' 
 
 ob-sequor. I, -seoutus sum,' 
 
 obey, submit to, withdat. ^ 
 ob-ses, -sidts, M., hostage. 
 ob-sldeo, ere, -sedl, -sessum, 
 
 blockade, besiege, beset; tofa- 
 
 cupy. 
 obsidlfi, •^nla, F., siege block- 
 -^ade, pressure, besetment. 
 obsdnttrm, I, N., that which is 
 
 ment, occupation. 
 oocnpo, are, &vl, atam, seize, 
 
 get possesion of f perf. part. 
 . jMMS. ^ocupatus, a, um, as^ 
 
 adj., busy, occupied, engaged. 
 f>e-carrd, ere^-currj^ (-clWitrrl), 
 
 -our«am, meet, fall infwith, 
 
 come upon, find ; opp<^ie, 
 
 check, nnth dot. 
 Ooeanns, I, M., the ocean. 
 ocellus, I, M., diminutive jpf 
 
 ocnlus, (poor) eye. 
 Ooelum, I, N., Ocelum, a town 
 
 near th^ Alps. 
 
 ea^enttn^/i&reiMi, relish, viands, ootavus, a, am, eighth. 
 
 meat, fish. ' * ootlngenti, ae, a, eight hun- 
 
 obstin&tg, adv.y steadily, firmly. dred. 
 
 obstin&tas, % „»9», resolute, ootd, eight. .--. "' ■ ." ,■ -^-V;- - 
 
 steadfast.' ootodecim, eighteen* 
 
 ob-atringriP», «'©» -strinxl, ootd^inta, eighty. • 
 
 -■triotam, bind. ooulua, 1, M., eye. 
 
 DlftPiiipg roT"*' ^? » y '» fttum, u atnin,i^'Trr7 hatred, enm ity . 
 
 obey, submit to, with dat. odor, -orla, M., perfume ; spices. 
 
 -ft-i 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 .-• •< 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 M' 
 
■XI 
 
 'p. 
 
 :eep, $ r. 
 
 'within 
 aeet, 
 
 
 !.! 
 
 *IP^» 
 
 PART VI.— VOCABULARY. 
 
 605 
 
 "^rT:.^ *^^!^??^-' --' opportune, 
 
 ' tmn, present; se offerre, 
 
 > come forwartf; confront, throw 
 / vones self upon; in pass, t&n 
 
 , into one's hands. 
 
 offloium, I, N. , service (especially 
 pubhc or official), duty; alle- 
 . .gianpe, obligation. 
 ollm, d^v.f once, once upon a 
 time, : '^ 
 
 • ' let tall, drop; pass over, omit, 
 ^ f say nothiit^ of. t -«^ 7- * 
 
 «mnino, ot^k, altogether, .en- 
 tirely, malVpnly; withnega- 
 twesy at all, whatever. 
 . , omuls, e, all, *^very, whole ; 
 new^. _p^rtr. , omnia, everything. 
 onerarlas, a, urn, for burdens ; 
 . navlg onerarla, a transport. 
 , ^ onerd, are, avi, atum, load. 
 
 onus -eriB, N., burden, weight: 
 *. load, cargo, freight. 
 
 oper^, ae, F., effort, exertion; 
 
 services, assistance agency ; 
 
 ^4, *"* ?P®'a» through your fault, 
 
 / \ thinks to you ; operam dare, 
 
 \ take pains, take measures, see 
 
 I to it, bestow care on, give at- 
 
 i tention to. 
 
 operrlo. Ire, -ul, -turn, cover, 
 
 cover over. 
 opgg, from ops. 
 
 opinio, -ouls, F,, opinion, be- 
 lief ; reputation, prestige. 
 oportet, ere, oportuit, im'per- 
 sonal verb, it behoves, it is 
 necessary; render freely by 
 ought, should, must. 
 < oppidnm, I, N., town. v 
 
 ®P:P*«o» «'«, -Plevi, -Stum, 
 fall ; per/, part. pass, oppietus, 
 "- ». nm, filled, swarming. '^ 
 op-p6ud, ore, -posul, -post- 
 turn, set against, oppose, put 
 m the way LQ£ 
 
 fortunate; fitting, suitable, 
 advantageous. 
 op-prlmo, ere, -pressi, -pres- 
 8um, overwhelm, crush, over- 
 power, surprise ; burden, 
 weigh down, belir down. 
 oppugno, are, avI, atum, 
 
 attack, assault, storm, 
 (ops), opis, F., power, aid ; gen- 
 eraUy in plur., opes, opum, 
 riches, resources; power, 
 forces ; support, assistance. 
 optlmus, a, um, superlative of 
 
 bonus, best. ]- 
 
 opulentus, a, um, rich, wealthy. 
 opus, -erls, N., work; fortifi- 
 cation, structure ; , opere, with 
 munltus, by art. 
 opus, N., fotind only in nom. 
 , and ace. dn^.y need; with 
 esse, a necessity, freely, neces- 
 sary. 7 
 
 ora, ae, F., edge, border; sAore, 
 
 coast. , 
 
 oraoulum, I, n., oracle. ^ 
 
 oratlo, -onls, f,, speechi ad- 
 dress, words, statement./ 
 orator, -oris, M., ambassailor. 
 orbls, is, F., circle; w^th or 
 
 tvtthout terr&rum, the world. 
 Orcus, I, M., Orcus, the abode of 
 
 the dead. 
 ordior, Irl, drsus sum, befi 
 
 make a start. 
 ordo, -dinis, M., rajv< line; 
 
 arrangement, 01' 
 orlor, Irl, ortus sum, rise, 
 
 ^rise, begin ; spring, be bom ; 
 
 'oriens sol, sunrise, the east, 
 orno, are, ft vl, atum, supply, 
 
 furnish, equip, prepare; 6r- 
 
 natus, a, um, perf. part. pass. 
 
 as adj., with all (its) trap- 
 pings. 
 
 ^^^oK^tfSr^^ssr^^l^^ 
 
 conveniently. 
 
 entreat. 
 ortus, a, um, from orior. ' 
 
 A-ii 
 
 ',> 
 
506 
 
 Xnr' 
 
 m 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 6g, 6rl», N., moyth ; face. 
 oa, omIs, n.^ bone. . 
 oHten^do, .«po, -dl, -tnin, or 
 oatenHxtfn, show, display; 
 point put^ declare, state ; dis- 
 ■ close, unmask. 
 ostium, 1, N., doof. 
 otiuni, I, N., leisure, rest. 
 ovum, I, N., egg. 
 
 p., an (f^brevirttion for PObllus. 
 
 p&bnl&tor, -oris, M., forager. 
 
 pabulor, &pl, atus sum, forage. 
 
 p&o5, are, a,vl, &tum, subdue; 
 
 > pr£ pg.ri:. ptixa pacatns, u, 
 ' nm, aa adj., pi 
 
 Padns, I, M., the Po, a rii^er in 
 Cisalpine Gaid (northern Italy). 
 
 paenoykidv.f almost, nearly. 
 
 paenltet, • -ere, puenltult, m- 
 personal verb, it repents, i£ 
 causes to r8f>ent ; render freely 
 by he sorry, r^ret. 
 
 pagus, X, M., district, canton. 
 
 palam, adv., .openly, publicly^ 
 ivith force: of pred. adj. in 
 palam falQere, make clear, 
 disclose, make known. 
 
 pal-us, -udis, F., marsh, swamp, 
 fen. • ^ 
 
 Pamphyllns, a, um, Pamphy- 
 lian, «f Pamphylia, a district 
 in Asia Minor. 
 
 p&nls, is, M., bread. 
 
 p&p, parts, equal, similar, like, 
 the same ; of battles, drawn, 
 indecisive ; a match. 
 
 pared, ere, pepenpl (parsl), 
 parsum (or puroRum), spare, 
 withdat. 
 
 parens, -entls, M. and P., pa- 
 rent. 
 
 p&red, fire, -ul, Itum, be obe- 
 dient, obey, submit ; listen 
 to, follow, comply with ; with 
 
 imrio, ©re, peperl, partnm,' 
 
 produce ; wi^, gain,- secure, 
 pard, are, avi, &tttm, prepare, 
 
 get ready, have in view ; pro- 
 cure, get, acquire ; perf. part. 
 
 pass, paratns, a, um, cm adj., 
 
 ready, prepared. 
 Parrhasin», I, m., Parrhasius, 
 
 a famous Greek painter*, 
 pars, partis, F., part, portion, 
 
 number, sharojwsome ; quarter, 
 
 direction, side. ^ 
 
 partim, odn., partly ; when re- 
 
 peated, often rendered by ^nome 
 
 » . . others.* 
 partus, from pa rld.. 
 1)Uf Umper, " adv., for a short 
 
 time, for a while. 
 parvulus, a,° um, little, small, 
 
 tiny. 
 parvus, a, um, (minor, mlnisd 
 
 mus), small,- trifling. > 
 
 passer, -erls, M., sparrow. 
 passlhn, adv. An all directions. 
 passusXa, ullk,./rom patior. 
 ' passus, us, M., pace (about five 
 
 feet); one thousand pa4;e8 mads 
 
 one Roman mile. 
 ^ate-faold, er«f, -fiol, -factum, 
 
 open, throw open, keep open, 
 
 open up. 
 pate-flo, -fieri, -faotus sum, 
 
 IXMS. o/patefacl6. 
 pated, 6r&, ul, extend. ^ 
 pater, -tris, h., father ; patrSs 
 
 oonsorlpti, senators, 
 pat^nus, a, um, of a father, 
 
 father's^ paternal. 
 patlentia,'ae, F., patience, en- 
 durance. 
 patior, I, passus sum, suffer, 
 
 allow, permit, endure, with- 
 ^stand. 
 patrta, ae,'P., native country, 
 
 native land, (one's) country. 
 patrius, a, um, - ancestral, of 
 
 mi e 'a fath er s ; o f ona ' a no BP 
 
 /. 
 
 I 
 I 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 
 F 
 
 P 
 P 
 P 
 
 P< 
 P< 
 pc 
 
m 
 
 pro- 
 
 ■um. 
 
 PART VI.— VOCABULARY. 
 
 "607 
 
 ^ ' rJ"^- 1; ^' ^*^ P»*'". ' Pepnn, /ivm polio. 
 
 the^gods of the atete (i.e.. per. pr4,.,nYA <Jc., through;" 
 
 panel, ae, a (sing, vertj rare). 
 
 few, but few. ^' 
 
 P^uoltas, -tatis, F., small num- 
 
 oer, fewness. 
 panlatlm, adv., gradually, by 
 
 degrees. 
 paoligper, adv., for a short 
 
 time, for a while 
 
 during ; by means of, by ; by 
 way of, over, along ; by reason 
 of. 
 
 peivago, ere, -egl, -aotam, fin- 
 ish, complete. " 
 per-olpio, ere, -cepl, -oeptUm, 
 
 hear. 
 
 percontatid, -onlg, p., inquiry. 
 peroontor, arl, atna sum, ask. 
 
 = A-^i'^i ^««'^^.-^^^ - - j-:^-: 
 
 pauinm, adv., a little ; a short 
 distance. 
 ' I*aalii8, I., M., see Aemlllas. 
 panpertas, -tatls, f., poverty. 
 Pausanias, ne, M., PaUsanias, a 
 
 Spartan general. 
 pavor, -oris, m., fear, panic, 
 
 alarm. 
 pax, pacts, F."i peace. 
 pecunia, ae, F., money, sym' of 
 
 money. 
 peons, -oris, N., cattle, herd ; 
 
 flesh, meat. 
 pod-OS, -Itis, M., foot-soldier, in- 
 fantry-man ; inplnr., infantry. 
 pedestor, tris, trt^, on or by 
 land;,;^f infantry; ooplae 
 ' ifedostrt^, land forces; in- 
 fantry, jg^ 
 podltatns, Ss^.; infantry. 
 peilis. Is, F., skin, hide. . 
 polio, ©re, pepnil, plnlsnm, de- 
 feat, rout, dr^^^ back ; banish, 
 drive out. 
 
 Peloponnesns, I, F., the Pelo- 
 ponnesus, that part of Greece 
 lying south of the isthmus and 
 g^df of Corinth. 
 
 penates, Inm, M. plw., house- 
 hold gods, Penates. 
 
 pendo, ore, pependl, pensnm, 
 weigh, pay. 
 
 P«p^»r prep, with ace., with^ in 
 
 the iiatids of. 
 pe||M)rI, frcm parld. 
 
 rl), -onrsnm, run along. 
 
 por-duco, ore, -duxl, -dnotnm, 
 bring over, bring ; carry, car- 
 ry along ; lead safely. 
 
 per-oo, -Ire, -11 (-ivl), -itnm, 
 perish, bo killed. 
 
 pereqnlto, are, avi, atnni, 
 ride about. % , • 
 
 peroxiffnns, a, nm,,very small. 
 
 perfaollls, o, very easy. 
 
 por-ford, -forre, -tnll, -l&tn»n, 
 carry, report, bring ; bear to 
 the end, endure, submit to.' 
 
 por-floid, ere, -feci, -fectnm,' 
 finish, carry out. 
 
 perfldla, ae, F., faithlessness, 
 treachery. 
 
 P©r-fodl6, ere, -fddl, fossnm, 
 
 pierce. 
 perfngra, ae, M., deserter. 
 por-fagio, ere, -fugl, flee for 
 
 refuge, flee. 
 perfngrlam, I, n., refuge, place 
 
 of refuge. 
 per-fnngfor, I, -functus snm, 
 
 perform, endure, undergo, fin-» 
 
 ish. 
 
 Pergram6nl, -drum, M. plur.,' 
 the Pergamenians, inhabitants 
 ofPergamum in Asia Minor. 
 
 Pergramenus, a, nm, of or be- 
 longing to Pergamum, Perga- 
 nienian. 
 
 p^irionlQS^f , h , nm , dftngormn i . = 
 
 r 
 
 porlonlnni, 1, N., danger, peril, 
 risk ; attempt, experiment. 
 
^08 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 porltns, a, nm, skilled, expert, pertnll, from perfero. 
 perlatas, a, nin, from, perferd. perturbatlo, -dnls, . F. , 
 
 per-maneo, ere, -hi4nsl, -m&n- 
 
 «nm, cuntinue, remain, abide, 
 
 persist. 
 per-iflit*5, ere, -mlal, -mla- 
 
 snm, give up, entrust ; allow, 
 
 . permit. . ■::;:•■■■ ■^''■''^'■• 
 
 per-nioveo, §ro, -ni5vt, -mS- 
 
 tani, move, influence ; alarm, 
 
 excite, dismay. 
 per-muloeo, ere, -mnlal, -mnl- 
 
 sum wnd -lualotnni, soothe, 
 
 calm. 
 permultl, ae, a, very many, 
 pernmtatid, -onli, F., ex- 
 change. 
 perpanol, ae, a, very few. 
 perpetuus, a, nm, continuous, 
 
 lasting; in perpetanin, for 
 
 ever. 
 per-ramp6, ere, -riipl, -mp- 
 
 tum,, break through, force 
 
 one's way through. 
 Persae, arum, M. pZwr., tlwPhlllppus, 1,*M., Philip, fctngr o/ 
 
 alarm, 
 panic, confusioi\k 
 pertnrbo, &re, avi, atntn, 
 
 thrown into confusion, dis- 
 turb, disconcert, alarm. 
 
 perva-dd, ere, -si, -auiii, spread 
 through, penetrate. 
 
 pervagror, arl, atas stiin, roam 
 about, range, scour the coun- 
 try. :. ■ii,;.:-.^:^» 
 
 per-venlo. Ire, -vfeni, -Ten- 
 turn, come j^iceach, arrive at. 
 
 p6a, pedis, M., rpot ; pedibits, 
 on foot ; pedem referre, fall 
 back, retire, retreat. 
 
 pet-d, ere, -IvI (-il), -Xtam, ask> 
 request ; seek, ask for, beg, 
 sue for ; make for, seek to 
 reach ; aim at, attack. 
 
 phal-anx, -angis, F., phalanx, 
 solid column. 
 
 Plialgrlcns, a, um, Phalerian, 
 of Phalerum. — —-' — 
 
 seontns sum, 
 
 follow up ; attack ; 
 
 Persians 
 per-sequor, ' I, 
 
 pursue, 
 
 punish. ' 
 Perses, ae {aihl. Pers£,), M., a 
 
 P^ian ; ow «dj. , Persian, 
 perseverd, &re, ftvX, &tnm, 
 
 persist, persevere. ^ 
 Persioas, a, um, Persian. 
 Persls, -tdts, P., Persia. 
 perfsplcld, ere, -spexl, -speo- 
 
 titim, sjbe, observe, e:^amine, 
 
 reconnoitre ; ascertain, find 
 
 Macedoniay 220-179 B.C. 
 plotor, -oris, M., painter. 
 pletura, ae, F., picture. 
 pUa,. ae, F., ball, game of ball, 
 
 tennis. 
 pUum, i, K., javelin, spear. 
 pingo, ere,' pinxX, plotum, 
 
 paint. 
 plpilo, are, peep, chirp. 
 Piraeus, X, M., Piraeus, the cW^ 
 
 port of Athens. 
 PIrustae, arum, M. plur., the 
 
 Pirustae, a tribe in Illyricum. 
 
 out, become acquainted with. ' > plsols. Is, m., fish. 
 
 per-suadeo, Sre, -su&sl, -sn&- 
 sum, persuade, convince ; pre- 
 vail upon, induce ; ivithdat. 
 
 perterre6, gre, ul, itum, ter- 
 rify, frighten, alarm ; discon- 
 cert, dismaji ; in pa»»., be 
 panic-stricken. 
 
 PIso, -onls, M., Piso, an Aqiii- 
 
 tanian of rmik. 
 placed, £re, ul, Itnm, please. 
 pl&n'us, a, um, level. 
 Plataeae, &rum, F. plur.^ 
 
 «»Plat8Ba, a town in Bcmtia. 
 plibN, pl^bls, F., plebs, the 
 
 pBr-ilue o, 6 r e , ■t lnnl, e xtend, -eonwwm p e opl e, 
 reach, stretch ; tend, serve. ' plenns, a, nm, full. 
 
 v~.. 
 
 r 
 
 F 
 
 
 \ 
 
 P 
 
 p 
 p 
 
 p< 
 p< 
 
 pc 
 
 ' p< 
 
 > , pc 
 
 PC 
 
 -pe 
 
^ 
 
 
 y\ 
 
 PART VI.— VOdABULARY. 
 
 509 
 
 \ 
 
 t>16rlqae, pleraeqne, plera- 
 que, the most, most persons. 
 pleramqne, adv., generally, 
 
 for the mo^t part. ' 
 plumbum, I, n., lead; pinm- 
 
 bum aljbnm, tin. 
 plurlmnm, adv., s^iperlative of 
 
 multnm, most, very much. 
 plurlmngf, », um, superlative of 
 mnltns, most, very much ; in 
 plur., very man;y^ quam piu- 
 rimi, as many as possible. 
 plus, piurls, comparative of 
 multus, more ; inplur., more, 
 several, many. 
 poena, ae, F., penalfy, punish- 
 ment. 
 poenitet, see paenltet. • 
 
 Poenn8,.a, um, Carthaginian. 
 Poenns, 1, M., a Carthaginian, 
 , an inhabitant of Carthage, es- 
 ; pecially the Carthaginian, i.e., 
 Hannibal. 
 loeta, ae, M., poet. 
 <^iceor, erl, ltu« sum, prom- 
 ise, make a promise. 
 PoIybiuB, I, M., Polybius, a 
 
 Ghreek historian. 
 pomifer, era, erum, fruit-bear- 
 ing, fruitful. 
 Pompeins, I, M., Pompey, Qneiua 
 Pompeius, the triumvir, consul 
 in 55 B.C. 
 pondus, -erls, N,, weight. 
 pono, ere, posnl, positum, 
 place, station, post ; depend, 
 rest ; with oastra, pitch ; tuith 
 arma, lay down ; in pass.j be 
 situated, lie. ,^ 
 
 pons, pontls, M., bridge. 
 Pontug, I, M., Pontus, a country 
 ^^ in Asia Minor, on the southern 
 W shore of the Euxine Sea. 
 poposel, from posed. 
 Ipopulor, art, atus sum, devas 
 
 tate, ravage. 
 
 iPvpuAaa, I, M., peo|to, nation. 
 
 Porsena, ae, M., Lars Porsena, 
 an Etruscan king^ , & ' 
 
 porta, ae, F., gate. ;: ^J : 
 
 porto, are, avi, a turn, carry, 
 bear. 
 
 pbrtns, us, M., harbor, port. 
 
 poseo, ere, poposci, demand, 
 ask, request, call for; 
 
 pos-sldo, ere, -sedl, -sessum, 
 . seize, occupy, take possession 
 
 .of. 
 
 possum, posse, potui, be able, 
 ««aap*B possible ; be ppwerfijd, 
 be strong, have weigfit or in- 
 fluence. \ 
 post, 1. adv., afterwards, after. 
 2. prep, with ace, after, be-^^ 
 
 hind. > . 
 
 postea, adv., afterwards, later. 
 potfteaqoam, conj., after, when. 
 posterns, a, um, next, follow- 
 ing ; later, subsequent; m. 
 plur. as suhst., poster!, de- 
 scendants. 
 post-pond, ere, -posnl, -posi- 
 tum, set aside^^isregard. 
 postquam (&ften written poit 
 . . . quam), co^ij., after, wh^n, 
 as soon as. 
 postridle, adv., next day, on 
 the morrow, on the following 
 day- 
 postulatnm, I, n., demand. 
 postnlo, are, avl, atum, de- 
 mand, require, ask, 
 Postumins, I, M., L. Postumius 
 Albinus, cormd in 215 B.G. 
 potens, -entls, pari, o/ possum, 
 
 powerful, influential. 
 potentla, ae, F., power, influ- 
 ence. 
 potestas, -tatis, F., power, con- 
 trol ; opportunity, <3hance, per- 
 mission. 
 potisslmum, adv., especially, 
 ch i efl yj i m ost, in profflrftno o to . 
 all others. 
 
510 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 potlas, adv., rather, more, in 
 
 preference. 
 potnl, from posgnin. 
 * praebeo, ere, uI, Itani, show ; 
 * furnish, supply. , te 
 
 prae-oedd, ere, -oessl, -ceB- 
 
 auni, surpass. 
 prae-oeps, -olpltis, headlong ; 
 I abrupt, steep. 
 
 praeoeptor, -oris, M., teacher. 
 prtte,ceptaiii, X, N., direction, 
 
 instruction, command. 
 _- .prae-olplo, ero, -oepi, -oep- 
 
 tum, instruct, give instruc- 
 tions, order, direct. 
 praeoipltd, are, aylf atnm, 
 
 fling, throw headlong. 
 praeoipue, adv., especially, pAr- 
 
 ticularly. \ . 
 
 praeolpans, a, nin, especial, 
 
 particular. 
 praeol&ras, a» nn^ glorious, 
 
 noble, distinguished, famous. 
 prae-oludQ, eitft, -c^sl, -olu- 
 ' nam, close, barricade. 
 
 praeda, ae, iVjj^ plunder, booty, 
 
 prvLed^loa^miey -avX, -&tnm, an- 
 nouBjre, declare, give out, pub- 
 lish,tproclaim, state. 
 prafv^Ico, ere, -dixl, -diotuin, 
 
 il^truct, charge. 
 ^aedo, -di»ft«rM., robber ; ma- 
 ' ritlmus praodo,^ pirate. 
 ^ ^.jpraedor, &rl, htn» sain, plun- 
 .der, pillage, raid. 
 praefeotuH, 1, .M , officer, Com- 
 mander {especially of cdvalry). f 
 y^\ prae-flolo, ere, -ffeol, -feotam, 
 . set over, place in command 
 ^ of, give control qf, voiiK ace. 
 and dat, 
 ^_ . j^r»e-flg5, ©re, -Wxl, -flxutn, 
 fix before, plant in front. 
 prae-gredlor, I, -greasiis siim, 
 
 go in advance. 
 pg ao mtttd» e w» - mlil» - mil 
 
 sum, send in advance, send 
 on, send forward. . ; '^ 
 
 praemium, I, N., reward. 
 
 praeparo, are, avi, atam, pre- 
 pare or get ready beforehand. 
 
 praeseng, -entis, part, of prae- 
 8um, present, on hand. 
 
 praesentla, ae, F., the present 
 moment ; in praesentia, for 
 the moment, for the time be- 
 ing. 
 
 praesertln^ adv., especially, 
 particul 
 
 praesldiqy^^X, N., guard, garri- 
 son, (prnecting) force : protec- 
 tion, support, escort ; in plur., 
 entrenchments, defences. 
 
 prae-sto, are, -stitl, statnm 
 or -stltnm, show, display ; per- 
 form, do ; excel, surpass ; ful- 
 fil, make good ; keep ; prae- 
 8tat, impersonal, it is better, 
 it is preferable. 
 
 prae-sum, -esse, -ful, be over, 
 be at head of,^ have comniand 
 of, be in charge of, rule over, 
 ivith dat. 
 
 praeter, prep, with ace, ex- 
 cept ; beyond. 
 
 praeterea, adv., besides, more- 
 over. 
 
 praeter-mitto, ere, -ml«1, -mia- 
 Rum, pass over, let pass. 
 
 praetor, -oris, M., general, com- 
 mander ; praetor, a Boman 
 magisi^ate ranking juat below 
 a consul. 
 
 precis, am, F. (singf. defective 
 and very rare), prayers, en- 
 treaties. 
 
 preoor, &rl, &tas sam, pray, 
 entreat. 
 
 prenio, ere, presst, pressam, 
 
 {)ress, press hard, attack fierce- 
 y, harass, beset, overwhelm ; 
 boar down upon ; in pau,, be 
 ftffliotod, be aifeqt wtr^ 
 
 J 
 
^ 
 
 36, send 
 
 fd: 
 
 am, pre- 
 
 jrehand. 
 
 of prae- 
 
 i. 
 
 ) present 
 
 itia, for 
 
 time be- 
 
 pecially, 
 
 'd, garri- 
 : proteo- 
 tn plur.j 
 ces. 
 
 statnin 
 lay; per- 
 oss ; f ul- 
 
 ; prae- 
 i better, 
 
 / 
 
 over. 
 
 be 
 ominand 
 lie over, 
 
 ICC, ex- 
 
 58, more- 
 
 [•I, -mla- 
 
 ral, com- 
 
 Monum 
 
 ist below 
 
 defective 
 rers, en- 
 
 n» pr*y» 
 
 irenaani, 
 
 ck tierco- 
 rwhel^ ; 
 paM.f be 
 
 PART VI.— VOCABULARY. 
 
 611 
 
 e;4f: 
 
 i 
 
 pretinm, I, n., price. 
 prldie^od»., the day before, on 
 
 the previous day. !» 
 primo, adv., at first, in the first 
 
 place, first. 
 prlmnm, adv., first, in the first 
 
 place ; cum or ubi prim am, 
 
 as soon as; qaam prlmum, 
 
 as soon as possible. 
 primus, a, mn, superlative of 
 
 prior, firsj^oremost ; in prl- 
 
 mls, espci^ially, in particular. 
 prlnoepi, -olpla, first, chief ; m. 
 
 as snbk. , leading or chief man, 
 
 leader,'! chief. 
 
 ""■sfe^-- Sf'- =^^^^:^ 
 
 prdcruro^ &re, avi, atnm, at-" 
 
 tend to, take care of. -' 
 pro-ourro, ere, -onrri (-ou- 
 currl), -our 8am, run forward. 
 proded, -Ire, -II (ivl), -Itum, 
 
 come forward, appear. 
 prodltld, -onlH, f., treason. 
 prodltor, -oris, m., traitor. . 
 pro do, ere, -dldl, -dlttam, be- 
 tray, abandon, give up j hand 
 down. ' , ^, 
 
 pro-duod, ere, -dQxI, -duetam, 
 lead forth; prolong, protjwct; 
 . draw out, lure, entice. 
 proellor, arl, atus sam, 6ght. 
 
 chief position, sovereignty. 
 prior, lug, comparative, former, 
 
 earlier; first (o/^w). 
 prigons, a, um, early, ancient, 
 
 old-tim^. 
 prigttnug, a, um, former, pre- 
 
 ment, fighting, fight. 
 prafeotlo, -6nlg, F., departure. 
 profeotuf, a, am, from profl- 
 
 olgoor. 
 
 profectug, ft, um, from pro- 
 7 — , — J .>^»...N/j.,.|jio- field. 
 .V10U8; of former days, old- profeg.u.,a.um,/rom profiteer. 
 
 ,pH«i,Waht.«<f... earlier, '*Xl:;c:rmpHsh:'' "'*'''""' 
 «ooner, first; see also prlu.- pro-fielgoor, i, -feetug gum, 
 
 «Ji«r« / *^ ■:. set out, depart, start, go, pro* 
 
 prlugquam (often written prlng ceed ■ i »", piu- 
 
 prlyatlm, adv., privately, as iir- 
 
 — r 
 
 dividuals. 
 
 prlv&tn^H», um, private, indi- 
 vidual, personal. 
 
 pr6, prep, vnth abl, before, in 
 front of; instead of, in place 
 of, as ; in defence of, for ; in 
 accordance with ; for, in ^. 
 turn for. m 
 
 probd, Are, Avi, Atum, approve ; 
 favor ; recognize. 
 
 pr5-o«d6, ere, -oegsl, -oegtfum, 
 go forward, qome forward, 
 advance. ' 
 
 prooer, -erU, m., noble, chief. 
 
 pr6e*rt4Ae, -tAtlj. F.. height 
 
 confess, declare one's self; 
 state. " 
 
 profllg5. Are, AvI, Atum, rout 
 
 prd-flu6, ere, -fluxl, -fluzum, 
 flow forth, rise. " ____ _ 
 
 pro-fugrl6, «ire, ^fft|fl, iee, 
 escape. 
 
 prd-|irredl6r, 1, -frreggng gum, go 
 forward, advance, proceed, go. 
 
 prohlbed, 6re, ul, Itam, re- 
 strain, keep,, prevent, check, 
 out off"; protect. ;...,' 
 
 prA-JIcld, ere, -J*oI, -JeeCnnt,:: 
 throw down, throw; ad prd- 
 Jloere, leap down. «»• 
 
 prO-mlttd, ere, -migl, -mitaam. 
 
 
 A digtanoe, far, 
 
 > 
 
 .-"V 
 
 pass. i>rdmiggag, a, 
 adj.f long, flowing. 
 
 am, Of. 
 
 ±. 
 
612 
 
 ■•%i; 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 i 
 
 *ii' 
 
 Piromptas, a, am, ready, quick. 
 
 pronuntid, are, avi, atam, 
 declare, tell. 
 
 prdpatuluni, X, N., open, court. 
 
 prope, adv. (proplus, proxime), 
 near ; nearly^ almost ; as prep, 
 with ace, near. 
 
 pro-pello, ere, -pnll, -pnUnm, 
 dislodge, force back. 
 
 propere, adv., quickly, speedily. 
 
 propero, are,^' avX, atuni, 
 
 . hasten» v %/ 
 
 propInqatt&8, -ta'tis, F., neaC' 
 ness, proximity. 
 
 propinqnus, a, um, near, close 
 at hand, neighboring, at hand ; 
 M. as snbst., relative, kinsman. 
 
 propior, ins, comparative, near- 
 er ; "see proxlinus. 
 
 proplhns, a, urn, gracious, be- 
 nign. 
 
 proplas, adv , comparative of 
 prope, nearer. ^ 
 
 pro-pono, ©re, -poanl, -poal- 
 tuni, set forth ; present ; dis- 
 
 propter, prep, xnth occ, on 
 account of, because of. 
 
 proptere&, adv., on this ac-. 
 count, for this reason ; pjirop- 
 ter«& quod, for the rdason 
 that, because. 
 
 prdpugn&cnlain, |, N., bul- 
 wark, rampart, defence. 
 
 prdp&f(n5, &re, &vl, . &taai«i 
 • rush out (to fight) ; make |flor^* 
 ties. !: 
 
 prd-aeqaor, I, -BeofitaM «ani| 
 attend, accompany; pursue, 
 follow. 
 
 prospectas, fi», M., sight, a^ 
 
 prdsperA, adv., successfully. 
 
 pr6-spt«16, ore, -spexl, -speo- 
 tuin, look out, watch ; take 
 precautions, take care, pro- 
 vide. 
 
 prdtlnns, adv., at once,j|gime- 
 diately, right onward. 
 
 proturbo, are, ' avI, atam, 
 drive back, rdpel. 
 
 pro-vehd, ere, -vexl, -vectani, 
 carry forward; in pass., be 
 carried, be driven, sail. 
 
 pro-video, ere, -vIdX, -vlBam, 
 provide, procure, make pro- 
 vision for, arrange for ; guard 
 against, take precautions. 
 
 prdvtriola, ae, F., province ; 
 especially 'the Province' o/ 
 Gallia Transalpi'na. 
 
 prdvooo, are, avX, atam, call 
 out, challenge. 
 
 proximos, a, am,^earest, next, 
 close by ; supeH. of propior 
 
 prudontia, ae, F., discretio: 
 sagapity, shrewdness, c 
 ning. 
 
 PrusLaa (or Frusta), ae. If», 
 Prusias, king of Bithynia, to 
 whom Hannibal fled for refuge. 
 
 t*tolemaeafl, X, iL, Ptolemy, 
 king of Egypt from 51-47 B.C. 
 
 pultlloe, adv., officially, in. the 
 name of the state, as a state, 
 at the public expense. 
 
 publico, are, avX, atam, con- 
 fiscate. 
 
 publioos, a, am, official, of the 
 state, public ; r^s publloa, 
 state ; public affiiirs, public 
 interests; in Them,. 7, 4, deX 
 publloX, the gods of the na- 
 tion (i.e., of Qrce<e\ 
 
 PAbllaa, X, M., Publius, a Ro- 
 man prrenom^n. 
 
 pad or, -drla, M., sense of shamg, 
 shame. 
 
 paella, ae, F., girl, maiden,» 
 lass ; sweetheart, mistress. 
 
 paell&rla, e, of a girl, a girl's. 
 
 paer, orl, M., boy, child, lad; 
 servant, slave ; 4 poerXa, from 
 
 
 # 
 
 pro-t cr o, c f» , - t r X v X, - tri HHWr 
 
 trample upon, supplant. 
 
 ohildhoo dr 
 
 paei^ttlns, I, M., a little boy ; 
 
vectnni, 
 
 oass., be 
 il. 
 
 -visum, 
 kke pro-' 
 • ; guard 
 ons. 
 
 rovince ; 
 ince ' o/ 
 
 am, call 
 
 PART VI.— VOCABULARY. 
 
 613 
 
 )st, next^ 
 ropior. 
 
 scretiy 
 3, c 
 
 4Pi 
 
 ae, ^,f 
 
 1/nta, io 
 >r refiige. 
 ^tolemy, 
 -4:7 B.C. 
 , in' the 
 I a state, 
 
 Afu, coia- 
 
 A, of the 
 mblloa, 
 , public 
 r, 4, del 
 the na- 
 il a Eo- 
 >f shanifi, 
 
 maideir,» 
 itross. 
 a girl's, 
 tild, lad-; 
 rU, from 
 
 puoruld nie, when I was a 
 mere child. 
 
 pugrn*, apo, avl, atum, fight, 
 
 contend. .• 
 pulsus, a, um, from pelld. 
 pulv-ls, -erls, M„ dust, cloud 
 
 of dust. V 
 puppiN, Is, F., stern of a vessel. 
 purgo, are, avl, atum, excul- 
 
 pate, excuse, clear. 
 purus, a, um, plain. - "-— 
 putous, I, M., well. 
 
 puto, are, avl, atum, think, 
 believe, hold, consider. 
 
 '*y*^"a» ao. F., Pydna, a toum of 
 Macedonia, on the seashore. 
 
 P^enaeuB, a,um, of w over the 
 Pyrenees, the range of mouu- 
 tains between Gaul and Spain. 
 
 Pypphus, I, M., Pyrrhus, king 
 of Epirusfrom 295 to 272 B.C. 
 
 Pythla, ae, F. , ^^i^iUim, the 
 priestess of Apollo at Delphi, 
 where was heated the chief 
 oracle of that deity.' 
 
 ' ■ % 
 
 Q., an abbreviation for qnlntnn. 
 
 qua, adv., where, -by which 
 route. 
 
 quacumque, adv., wherever. 
 
 qaadrAgint&, forty. %- 
 
 quttdplnsrenl, ae, a, four hun- 
 dred (each). 
 
 quadrlngentl, ao, a, four hun- 
 dred. 
 
 quaerd, ero, qitaeslvl (-li), 
 
 quaesltum, ask, enquire ; 
 
 seek, look for ; qunerere ab 
 „ 6«t!6 or a Janu&, ask for (one) 
 
 ftt the door. 
 quROHtor, -oris, M., quaestor, 
 
 paymaster, one in charge of the 
 
 quam, adv., as ; how ; after con^ 
 paratioes, than ; with superla- 
 tives, as ... as possible, for 
 pogtqnani, after. 
 
 quamdlu, rel. adv., as long as. 
 
 qutunobrem, adv., wherefore. 
 
 quaiiivis, 1. adv., however. 2. 
 conj., although. 
 
 quantns, a, um, how great, how 
 much, what;* mth tantus, 
 expressed w understood, (as 
 great) as, (as much) as," su^h 
 as; nent. as subst., how much ; 
 tanto . . . quanto, as much 
 
 • • • AS* 
 
 qna.re, adv., wherefore, for which 
 reason ; consequently, there- 
 fore. 
 
 quartu|, a, um, fourth. 
 
 quasi, Conj.,, em if. ; 
 
 quttttuorjfour. 
 
 quattuordoclm, fourteen. 
 
 -que, enclitic conjt, and (to be 
 translated before the word to 
 which it is added). 
 
 ^**®,**^^hi'"®"*'*«' ■«>*>» com- 
 plain.-.'- ""-^^ ^ 
 
 qal, quae, quodprel. vron., who, 
 which, what, thAt ; he who ; cm • 
 coordinating reldtive, this, he ; 
 after Idem, as. \ 
 
 qui, quae, *iuf>A,\ interrogative 
 adj., what, whic^. ** 
 
 qui, qua or quae, quod, tncfc/J- 
 nite adj. or rarely pron., any; 
 anyone. 
 
 quia, conj., because. 
 
 quloquam, /rum quisqaam. 
 
 quioumque, quaooumque, 
 quodoumque, whoever, what- 
 ever, whichever. M 
 
 quid, N. o/quls, as adv., why. ^ 
 
 quidam, quaedam, qulddam or 
 quoddam, a certain, a certain 
 man, a, one. 
 
 qutdem, arft> . certainly. inHeed 
 
 ^^uct. of a pnm^mw^n—^o; but, honevZ; n*??^ 
 
 tie boy ; 
 
 army 
 
 39 
 
 quldem, not even. 
 
 ^. 
 
f 
 
 / 
 
 514 
 
 . PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 
 q«In, eonj.j but that, but, that ; 
 fredy, to, from. , 
 
 quin, adv., nay, in fac^ 
 qnlndeclm, fifteen» «< '* 
 qalnf(entl, ae, a^ five hundred. 
 
 I, fifty 
 
 ae. 
 
 IS, (tfiv., 
 
 qalnqa&g6nl, 
 
 (each). 
 qaXnqa&gint&, Mtf. 
 qalnqae, five. » 
 quInqniSs or 
 
 five times. 
 
 QalntUlas, 1, M., Publius Quin- 
 
 — tilius Varus, a Roman general. 
 
 Qnlntlas, X, M., Titus Quintius 
 
 Flamininus (see Flamlnlnus). 
 qnlntna^ a, nm, fifth. . 
 Qaintuf, I, M., Quintii», a Bq- 
 
 inan prcenomen. - 
 
 QuirXs. -itii, M., Roman citizen ; 
 
 in iXK. plur., fellow-citizens. 
 qals, quae, quid, interrogcttive 
 
 prpn.y who, which, what. 
 qals, qua, qnj^, inde/imfe proti. , 
 
 anyone, anything ; foith nisi, 
 
 something, someona. ^^ 
 
 qalsnam, quaenam, qnidnam, 
 •. interrogative pron.y (-nam ocW- 
 
 ing emphaaia) who pray, what 
 
 then, who, which, what. 
 qataqnatn, qaldqaam or quie- 
 
 qnam, anyqne, anything, aoy. 
 qalaqne, qaaeque, qnldqae or 
 . qnodqne, each, each one ; 
 ' • every, everyone. 
 qalvis, qnaevl», qaldvis or' 
 
 quodvli, any, any whatever. 
 quo, odt?i, 1. rei., wliither, 
 
 where, to or into which, ^ 
 
 Whom. 2. interrog,, where, 
 
 whither. 
 quo, abl. of qui, cm conj., that, 
 
 in order that ; because. 
 qu6> aU. of qui, cu ttdu., by 
 
 how much, |^.t|uB, on Ihis 
 
 account.. i---'' >'';SK-- 
 
 quoad, conj., until, as long as. 
 qasff; oonj. , bocause, that, -iir- 
 
 thatf the fact that; with ad- 
 
 vethial forcCf • wherefore, so 
 * that. 
 quomlnuB or ^qiid mlnns, conj., 
 
 so that not ; freeiy^ to, from. 
 quondam^ adv. , once. 
 quoniam, co?)j., since, seeing . 
 
 that. 
 qnpque, conj., also, too, as well. ' 
 quot, indecl. acLj:; how many, as 
 
 many as. . .- 
 
 quotakinis, ait'., pearly, every 
 
 year, annually;" 
 quotienscuinqne, adv., as often ^ 
 
 as, whenever. 
 
 rj&:d5, ere, '-si, -sum,^ shave. ^' 
 
 r&mi|8, 1, M., branch. 
 
 raaa, ae, F., frog. ' 
 
 rapidliaB, -t&tis, ¥., swiftne&s. 
 
 r&rus,,?»o nm, scattered; in 
 . fAur.'f in detached groups,. in 
 
 ' small parties^ -^ ,, « 
 
 rafus, a, nm,'from rliidd; 
 
 ratld,'-diila, F., method, system, 
 theory, science ; charticter ; 
 manner, yr^y; plan; consider- 
 ation, reason; calculation^, 
 strategy. • tt^ 
 
 rati 8, is, F., raft. ^^ 
 
 ratus, a, um, from reor. 
 
 rebellio, -dnis, F., renewal of 
 war ; rebellionem faoere, re-. ^ 
 new the war. * ' ' . 
 
 reo6ns, -entls, new, recent, ' 
 late ; fresh, unexhausted. 
 
 r«oeptus, lis, M., rejxeat, way 
 retreat. . . < 
 
 reoiperd, &re, &vl, &tam, re- 
 cover. 
 
 re-oipid, ere, -oepi, -eeptnm, , 
 .Regain, jjet back, recover; re- 
 ceive, admit, welcome ; s6 
 reoipere, 1.. reo6|i%r one's self, , 
 recover, rally ; 2. return, 
 retreat, betake on«'s self. 
 
 A\ 
 
 i^ 
 
 '^ 
 
 re^curru, erg, - wttrgl, 
 
 back, return, 
 
 
 
 •t/.. 
 

 
 ' ■■ . I ' . \ 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 'ore, so 
 
 
 18, conj.j ' \ 
 y fronv. 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 , seeing . 
 
 
 as well. 
 
 
 many, as 
 y, every 
 as often 
 
 have. ^ 
 
 riftnea». 
 red ; in 
 oups, . in 
 
 6t ■ ■• '^ 
 , sysfcem, 
 larjicter ; 
 jonsidor- 
 ilation^ 
 
 lewal of 
 
 «ere, re-. 
 
 # 
 
 recent, ' 
 jted. 
 b, way 
 
 ?uin, re- 
 
 eeptam, 
 •ver; re- 
 me ; «6 
 ne's self, 
 return, 
 self. 
 
 I - 
 
 '] 
 
 PARf VI.— -VOCABULAHY. 
 
 516 
 
 rea-L btT Ma^ J.. ' '«"«*«. -onlg,F., religious scfu- 
 
 'back' resto^^;f ""' ^J^ ^^^' ^^^«''«nce. conLienfeious- 
 renL .1 rf di^ ^? ' w *5^» "^^' «^ligation of an oath. 
 
 redeirT /r/LT^ i.' .^^'^' mamder, remnant. ♦ 
 
 \eaeo, ire, -n (-ivi), -itum, . leave, leave behind ; abandon ; 
 
 neglect ; irdpersonal in pass., 
 ,it remains. 
 rellquug, a, nm/ remaining, 
 other, left, else ; future, sub- 
 • sequent ; flignem«y to be ten- 
 dered by the rest of : m. plur.y 
 Tellqjil, oTuiii, as mbst., the 
 ^rest, the others; reliqaam \ 
 tern pn», the future. 
 rei^iyianeo^ ere, -manal, -ni&n- 
 
 som, remain, remain behind, 
 stay. ^ 
 
 r6m-ex,. -tgig, M., rower, oars- 
 man. 
 
 A pome back, return; come in, 
 be derived. \.~^ 
 
 red-lgo, ere, ^figrX, -a'otam, re- 
 duce, make, bring. . . 
 
 redltlo,' -onlB, F., fetuni. ' * 
 
 redltas, U8, M., return, return- 
 ing- \ 
 
 re-duco, ei^, -duxl, duotum, 
 lead back, bring back 
 
 refero, referi'e, rettoll, relA» 
 turn, bring back, carry back, 
 drive back; bnn^ bafck word, 
 report; pedem i^eferre, re- 
 treat, fall back ; sfi" re f^Pi^e, „mn. 
 t^r^ .r2«' ^"^^'/«*^«*^' f- ^^-^^ 0«-««. M. «?ur.,theRenii, 
 
 re-flMd «t*« ««1 * * V . "^"•'«o. are, avi, ^tnm, row. 
 
 , re-f«rglo, ere, -fugri, escape. '----.- * - • 
 
 re«rl6, bnin-f., region, district, 
 • country, part.* 
 
 reirlaa, a'^ um, roy&l, of the 
 ' king. 
 
 wgno, .ftpe, AvJ, Atum, be 
 
 *6|rn«,„, I, J^. kingdom ;r^l,e-move6,6;e,-..;6vir^t«m. 
 
 re-mltto, ere, -inl8l, -mlssnm, 
 
 send back,. release, give up; 
 relax ; perf. part, pau.y ro- 
 mtssns, a, uiii, cm ad4.. mild : 
 light, cheerful. 
 reniolieflco, ©re, beoome soft» or 
 enervated. 
 
 ' ,; power, supreme power, 
 ' throne. 
 
 «v'®K*. ere, pfexi, reotdtn, rule. 
 « .^govern. 
 re-irredlor, t^^ressna anm, re- 
 
 turn, go batk., \^ . • 
 regrnlfi, ^e, r.,^ul€f. 
 R«8rala8, I, m., Marou^ Atilius 
 
 Regulus, nfnmom Boirian, con- 
 
 B^ilin Ibii B.C. 
 
 move back, withdraw, draw 
 back, draw away ; put aside, 
 put away; remove, destroy, 
 put out of the way. 
 r«ma8, I, m., oar. * 
 
 reaovo, &re, AvI, &tain, renew., ' 
 renfintlo, Are, AvI, atam, re- 
 port, bring back word ; «s- 
 nftnti&tnr, word is brought jA 
 , (back). * ''^'. 
 
 ■Jftnlinm, > o ur, ffi r i, I ' atu» mm, Ihillk. "^ 
 
11 ' 
 
 m 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOO% 
 
 / n 
 
 re-pello, ero, reppnll (or po- 
 pall), -pulsuin. drive back, 
 •defeat. 
 
 repente, adv., suddenly. 
 
 repentrntis, -a, uiii, sudden, 
 hasty, unexpected. 
 
 peperldi Ipo, repperl (or te- 
 perl), -p^rtuiti, find, find 
 out, discover, ascertain. . 
 
 pe-peto, ere, -potlvl, -petltrim, 
 demand back; bring >, backj 
 renew ; pepetepe- memopla, 
 call to niindj.recollect..- 
 
 pepo, epe, repsi, peptuni, creep, 
 dtawl along. * ' 
 
 pe-pduo, ope, -posul, -posltum, 
 store up. V 
 
 pepopto, ape, avi, atum, carry 
 back, take back. 
 
 poppert, from, reperlo* 
 
 pe-ppimo, ere, -pressi, -ppes- 
 suin, 'restrain, check. 
 
 pepulsns, a,' «ni, from pepello, 
 
 pes, pel, F., thing, matter, affair, 
 circumstance, means, fact^ 
 act. object, interest, situation7 
 
 . if 
 i^gtitl, from-teaHto. 
 
 ratit-uo, ePe, --ul, -utam, re- 
 store ; 'rebuild. ^ 
 r.^-tined, epe, -ttnni, -tentum, 
 
 detain, keep ; preserve, main- 
 tain. » . ■ 
 pe-traho, ere, -tpaxi, -tpao- 
 tuni, bring back (by force). " 
 pettnil, from pefera. 
 pe-vello, orej -velll, -valsnm, 
 . teai? or wrest away, pvill up. 
 ^e-vertp, ere, -vertl, -versnm 
 -(chiefly inperf. Senses), return, 
 come back, go back. ' 
 pcj-vePtop,!, -verauHaiini(chiefly 
 in pres. imp^rf. and Jut. tenses), 
 return, come back, go back. 
 pevoco, ape, avI, atuui, recallr~~ 
 devoid, are, fly back. .' 
 pex, regris,- M., king; com- 
 mander, admiral. *^v>t 
 Rhenus, I, M., the Rhine. ^" ' i 
 Rhodanns, J, M., the Rhone. 
 
 RhodlX, oTuni, M. plur., the 
 Rhodians, the people ofRlwdeSy 
 <in island near Ana Minor. 
 deed, proposal, property ; res Pideo, ere, rlsf; plsani, laughV 
 publlc'a, pel ^&bllcae, F., rip», ao, F., bank. ' ^ 
 
 state, public affairs, public pIsus, u8, m., laughter, laugh, 
 interests; pes gestae, F.232t«r., roBustus, a, un». strong, pow- 
 
 ' 
 
 deeds, exploits. 
 pe-8clndd, ope, -scidl, -sclssnni, 
 break down, tear down, de- 
 stroy. 0; : ■- ■ - -, ■ 
 
 pe-soXsoo, epe, -soXvX, -scXtain, 
 
 ascertain, learn, find out. ^ 
 pe-gido, epe, -sedl, sit dowA. 
 pe-«i«td, epe, -stitX, hold one's 
 ground, halt ; roflist, with- 
 stand, oppose, make resist- 
 ance, uithdat. 
 pe-splolo, ere, -spexX, -speo- 
 
 tuin, regard. 
 pe-«pondeo,6pe,-BpondX,-8pon- 
 •nm, answer, make answer, 
 reply. c 
 
 r eipoiigu i ii, X, W., alia w ei ' , wplj l^ 
 res publlca (see, under pes). 
 
 erful. ■ ^-i^ 
 
 Pogo, &pe, ,&vX, atttin, ask, re-' 
 
 quest, entreat. ' 
 pogus, X, M., funeral^ pile. • 
 Roma, ae, F., Rome. « 
 
 Roinanus, a, uni, Roman ; M. 
 * as »nhst.y a Roman. 
 Romulus, X, M., 'Romulus, tJie 
 founder and first king of Rams. 
 rota, ae, F., wheel, . . " 
 
 rubeo, ere, be red. < 
 ruber, bra, bpuin, red. *' ,. 
 Riif'uH, X, M., 1. Marcus Mipu- 
 cius Ruf us, master of the horsef 
 217 B. a 2. Publius Sulpicius 
 Rufus, one of Ct£S(ir'8 lientcn- 
 t tnta. . , = 
 
 f,> 
 
 , ~'kf 
 
 runiop, -opis, M., rumor, report. 
 
 • s 
 
 JS 
 
i 
 
 4^. 
 
 am, re- 
 antum, 
 
 -trao- 
 
 )rce) * 
 
 PART VJ.— VOCABULARY. 
 
 elf 
 
 • 
 
 alsani) 
 
 1 up. 
 /ersnm! 
 
 rpt.iirn 
 
 
 (chiefly ( 
 tenses)^ V 
 jack, ^ ■-■' 
 recaUr~~ 
 
 * 
 
 com- 
 
 3. ■^"^■',- .::.:::.:.; 
 
 
 lone. 
 
 r., the . '> ; 
 Rlu)desy_ . . • 
 
 - 
 
 laughV 
 
 1 
 
 augh. 
 
 I 
 
 ^, pow- 
 ,sk, re-' ; 
 
 8" 
 
 an ; M. 
 
 [us, tlie 
 fRome. 
 
 ' Mipu- ^ 
 i^horsCf 
 ilpicius 
 lientcn- 
 
 riitnpS, ere, 
 
 break. 
 rursiK, adv., again, back again, 
 in turn. 
 
 ■^o*', 5"''**' N'» *^he country; 
 field, land. ^^ ' 
 
 ' '■::'■■' s ■■ ■•'■■ 
 
 Sablnna, I, m., Quintus Titurius 
 
 riTpI, ruptum, sanns, a, am, sound, sane ; pro 
 
 sano, like a discreet man, pru- 
 dently. ^ 
 
 sapiens, -entls,wise; VLoasub^, 
 wise man, sage. . ^ » ■ 
 
 sarmentum, l, n., twig, fagot, 
 brushwood. 
 
 satld,aro, avi, atum, satisfy, 
 sate. ^' 
 
 .a«ou„.. ,. ...chapel, serine. • «'^r^Xt o^ "gtS! 
 
 >.-feoI,-fafctam, 
 
 religious If orahip, sacred rites. .atis-f„ci6 ere 
 
 sh ' I, N,, sanctuary, ^apologize. ^ 
 
 a»«i.iA«- - I - -^ «»»clu8, a, um, wounded. 
 
 rifice ""^' *^'»>*?™' «^<^- ««-«-. l.^N., stone, rock. . 
 
 - *„''^, , .' ' * soalH, ao, F., ladder, 
 
 «aepe adt, (.aeplns saopli^ «cando, ere/ climb, mount as- 
 
 slme), often, frequently. c'end. «'"uut, as 
 
 suopio, Iro, saepsi, saeptum, soapha, ao, P;, skiff, small boat 
 
 hedge m, surround, enclose. solenti;, ao, L kn^wTedL 
 
 .agaoltas, -t^tls, F., shrewd- seUieet, W, e^idenUy,^ ' 
 
 sa^ltta, ao, K„ arrow. - ""down "^'"""^ -oi"»»»; te«^ 
 
 Sagruntum, 1, N. Sagun«*im,.a scio, Ire, IvI, Itnm know' ' 
 
 Sai«minT„r f Q 1 • ^ Comehus Scipio, cmml in 21S 
 
 Salamlnius, a, urn, of Salamis. . B.C. 2. HisZm, Publius Our 
 
 Salamls, -Inis (ace. Salftmlna), 
 I*., Salamis, (in island of the 
 pyest const of Attica. 
 
 saMo.^re, -ul, -turn', leap. 
 
 nehus Africanus Major, tfie 
 conqueror of Hannibal. 3. 
 Pubhus Cornelius Scipio Nas- 
 ica, consid in 191 B.G. 
 
 saitus, ug, M , pass, monntain «oltum, I, »., decree. 
 
 • >»«« ; woodlana. -^ ^ «orlbo, eie, iorlpsi «orlotum 
 
 . sttlu«,, f, N., open sea, high sea. ^ write, state. ''^"' 
 
 saia* -Otis, F., safety, welfare, scutum, ij n., shield, 
 
 grotc^tion; .ource of safety, Seythae, Vrim, m. plur., the 
 
 . ...I v«. - * Scythians\a people dwelling 
 
 sal vuj a, urn, safe. • , ^ noHh of th^^Line Sea. ^ 
 
 .Sitmnttes, lum, M. plnr., the 8#,/romiul. 
 
 c«*<ra« /Ml/. seteSidu., », um. second • fa 
 
 fl fintnn<^s, n m. M. /jfui., the vumblu. * *""' ^^^°^ 'fa- 
 
 report. 
 
 -■""'"■»■ < — wwT , jff i — pvwr.y Ta re- 
 
 
 .♦ • 
 
ip 
 
 mm 
 
 518 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 ( 
 
 otherwise ; nihii5 sScjlufl; none 
 the less, nevertheless. 
 
 ■eeuttis, a, nm, from seqaqr. 
 
 aed, conj., but, however. 
 
 Jldeoim, sixteen. , 
 
 »6d6»y is, F., seat ; al^ode, home, 
 settlement. 
 
 Segontiaol, ornin, M. plur.^ tAe' 
 Segontiaci, a tribe m Britain^ 
 
 Segov-ax, -aotis, U., S^ovaz, 
 a king ruling in Kent. 
 
 aegrreKo, are, 4|^I, &tain, shut 
 out, exclude. 
 
 se^Jangro, ere, -Junxl, -Juno- 
 trnn, separate, divide. 
 
 •enilta, ae, F., path, by-path. 
 
 semper, adv.^ always, at all 
 times, »ever. 
 
 SemprdniuB, I, M., Semp^onius, 
 see G^aoohus. 
 
 ■enatas, us, M., senate; jbm- 
 
 ' dience of the Senate. 
 
 ■9lieotu8, -tutls, F., old age. ^ 
 
 ■enex, senls, M., old man ; a» 
 adj.f old, aged. 
 
 •ententla, ae, ?., opinion, way~~ 
 of thinking ; decision ; sen- 
 tentlam ferre d§, to pass 
 judgment Ai. . 
 
 ■entlo. Ire, sensl, s^nsni», feel, 
 be aware, perceive, learn, dis- 
 cover; hold viewsj have opin- 
 ions. 
 
 •6pard, &re, &vl, &tuni, separ- 
 ate ; per/, part. pass, separac- 
 
 ' tii«, a, nm, as aiij., separate. 
 
 •epello. Ire, IvI (ll), sepal- 
 turn, bury, inter. 
 
 ■eptem, seven. a ^^ 
 
 •eptentrld, -dnis, H. {chi^y in 
 pinr.), the seven stars of the 
 constellation of the Great Bear; 
 hence the north. 
 
 Septiniias, I, u., Lucius Sep- 
 timius, an ojfficer who slew 
 I Pompey. 
 
 septlngenti, %e, a, seven hun- 
 dred. 
 
 septaaffesinins, a^ am, seven-' 
 tieth. 
 
 septoa9lnt&, seventy. ' 
 
 8epaloram,'l, N., tomb. 
 
 sepaltas, a, am, from sepelld. 
 
 Seqaanos, a, am, Sequanian, 
 
 of the Sequani ; m. as subst., 
 
 a Sequanian ; inplur., the Se- 
 
 , quani, a tribe in Oaid north of 
 
 ' the Frovince.' 
 
 seqaor, I, seoutas sam, follow, 
 pursue, attend. ^ 
 
 sermo, -dnis, M., conversation 7^. 
 language. 
 
 serd) ere, sevi, satam, sow, 
 plant. < 
 
 serpens, -entls, M. or F., ser- 
 pent, sna^e. 
 
 .Servlllu|i<''^l, M., Servilius, a 
 Bom^n family name. 
 
 servio. Ire, Iv|, Itam, be sub- 
 
 t'ect; be a slave to ; follow 
 >lindly ;. devote one's self to ; 
 ■ wUh dat. ' f, ' ' 
 
 servitus, -tutls, F.{ bondage, 
 
 slaiMny, subjection. 
 Servlas, I, M., Servius, a Soman 
 
 prcenomen. 
 servo, are, avl, &tam, sayeT — 
 
 keep, tnaintain, observe, watch. 
 ■erValas, I, M., diminutiiie of 
 
 servos, young slave, slave. ^ 
 •ervus, I,'M., slave. ii 
 
 sesoenti, ae, a, six hundred!» 
 sese, from sul. , • 
 
 sea, see sive. 
 •evood, are, &yl, atum, call 
 
 aside. 
 sex, six. .'• 
 
 sexageni, ae, a, sixty, (each)» 
 sex&glnt&, sixty. 
 s^xtus, a, nm, sixth. 
 si, eonj.f if, «ven if-; in case, to 
 
 see whethoi 
 
 • ^ ptlmas, », nm, s e venth. 
 
 ■till, /<'W>HHd l 
 
,; 
 
 , 
 
 ■*/- . • 
 
 ' 
 
 n hun- 
 
 
 seven- 
 
 
 * , 
 
 
 »pelid. 
 
 
 iianian, 
 
 snbst., 
 
 the Se- 
 
 mrth. ttf 
 
 \ 
 
 I! 
 
 savFT 
 
 .,i:. 
 
 PART VI»— VOCABULARY. 
 
 519 
 
 •lo, adv.^ thus, in this way ; so, 
 in such a way. 
 
 •looitas, -tatla, P., drying up. 
 
 Slellla, ae, P., Sicily. 
 
 fligrnlfloatio, -onls, P., intima- 
 tion, announcement, signal. 
 
 algnifloo, .are, avX, atam, indi- 
 cate, show ; mean, signify. 
 
 slArnum, I, N., signal ; standard. 
 
 ■Uentinm, I, N., (j[uiet, silence. 
 
 Sllenus, I, M., Silenus, a Cheek 
 historian. 
 
 •11 va, ae. P., wood, forest. 
 
 all vestHs, e, wooded. V^ 
 
 alnillis, e, like, similar. 
 
 simnl, adv., at. the same time-; 
 
 . also ; along with, in one's com- 
 pany or society; slmni . . . 
 sinial, both . . . and ; simal 
 at que, or sometimea slmal 
 alorie, as sooh as. 
 
 • Imul&orum, I» N., imi^e, 
 shadow, reflection. 
 
 ■Imulatld, -oulfl, P., pretence, 
 deceit. 
 
 ■iniulo, are, avl, atum, pre- 
 tend. 
 
 sine, pr^. with ahl., without, 
 free from. * 
 
 singiUatlm, adv., singly, one 
 by one. 
 
 •tngnlarta, e, extraordinary, 
 unparalleled, remarkable ; in 
 piur. , one. by one, in small de- 
 tachments, in scattered groups. 
 
 •In gall, ae, a, one each, one at 
 a time, one by one; often freely 
 severally, singly, individually. 
 
 ■Intster, tra, truni, left ; fern. 
 •InUtra, as a^ibat., left hand 
 {sc. manusX 
 
 •ino, ere, sivl, sitnni, allow, 
 permit. f° 
 
 •Itio, Ire, IvI, thirst, be thirsty. 
 
 •Itas, a, am, situated, lying. 
 
 ■Ive or «en, cottj., or if; rtve . . . 
 
 uve, wAcrtner . . . ^ngither 
 
 Booer, eri, M., fathen^in-law. 
 •oolet&8, -t&tis, /, alliance, 
 league. 
 
 soolus, X, M., ally. 
 
 sol, aollg, M., sun-; orl6ns tM, 
 the east ; oooldfina sol, the 
 west. 
 
 sdlaclnin, I, n., comfort, conso- 
 lation. 
 
 soleo, ere, solltus sum, be ac- 
 customed. 
 
 solitudp, -dlnls, F., solitude, 
 wilderness. 
 
 .solliclto, &re, &tI, &tam, stir 
 up, tempt, try to influence, 
 tamper with, bribe, try to win 
 over. 
 
 Solon, -dnla, M., Solon, a fa- 
 motis Athenian law-giver. 
 
 aJMLnin, adv., only, merely, alone. 
 
 «olua, a, -am, alone, only. 
 
 boIto, ere, aolvl, aolutam, • 
 loose, open ; free, exempt ; 
 toith or toithout navea, weigh 
 anchor, set sail. 
 
 aordldaa, a,- am, unclean, mean, 
 humble. 
 
 aoror, -5rla, P., sister. ' 
 
 Soallaa, X, M., Soailus, aBpartan 
 historian. 
 
 apatlam, X, N., space, extent, 
 distance ; interval {whether of 
 space or time) ; time, length, 
 duraticm. « 
 
 apeolea, el. P., appearance, form. 
 
 apeot&oHlam, X, N., sight. Spec- 
 tacle. 
 
 apeoto, &re, avX, &tam, look, 
 face, slope, lie ; have an aim 
 or object. 
 
 apeool&tdrlua, a, am, of a spy, 
 for spying, reconnoitring. 
 
 apeoulum, I, N., mirror. 
 
 apero, &re, &vX, atam, hope ; 
 hope for, expect. 
 
 ■pea, el. P., hope. 
 
 or. 
 
 apoTfS, ftre, & vi, &tam, strip, 
 deprive, despoil 
 
 _^ 
 
X' 
 
 520 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 spontld (fell.), aponte (ahl.\ de- 
 fective noun, F.; in all., of 
 one's own accord, voluntarily. 
 
 Snurinna, ae, M., Spurinnti, a 
 Jioman general. 
 
 Spuria*, I, M., Spurius, a Ro- 
 man prcenomen. 
 
 stabllld. Ire, Ivf, Ituni, make 
 steady or firm. 
 
 8tabllit&8, -tf&tis, F., steadiness, 
 firmness. 
 
 itatlm, adv., at once, imme- 
 diately, straightway. 
 
 statld, -&nlg, F., post, guard, 
 outpost. 
 
 •tatna, ae, F., (statue. 
 
 stat-ao,. ere, -nt, -utum, de- 
 cide, determine. 
 
 statura. ae, F., stature, size. 
 
 sternd, *ere, strAvI, «tratam, 
 scatter ; knock down, over- 
 throw. 
 
 •tllaa, X, M., style, pen. 
 
 ■tlpendi&rlns, a, uni, tributary. 
 
 ■t5, &re, stetX, «tatnm, stand^ 
 remain standing. 
 
 str&9$«, is, F., confusion, con- 
 fused mass ; slaughter, defeat. 
 
 •trepltus, us, M., noise, rattling. 
 
 struotura, ae, F., gallery, mine. 
 
 •trno, ere, struxX, struotum, 
 build, raise. 
 
 itndeo, ere, al,> strive, bo eager 
 for, pay attention. '' ^ 
 
 itndluni, I, N., zeal, eagerness, 
 enthusiasm. 
 
 stultd, adv., foolishly, stupidly. 
 
 •n&vlt&s, -t&tls, sweetness, at- 
 tractiveness. 
 
 ■ub, prep. 1. with abl., under, 
 beneath, near to, close to, at 
 the foot of ; at. 2. with ace, 
 
 1 close to, close Up to. 
 
 ■ubftotna, a, am, from aablgo. 
 
 ■ub-duod, ore, -duxl, -duo- 
 tum, draw off ; draw 'up, haul 
 — ap, beaoh. 
 
 aubduotld, -dnln, F., hauling on 
 shore,, beaching. . 
 
 8ub6gX, from aablg6. 
 
 8ub-eo, -Ire, -II (ivl), -Itum, 
 draw near, advance ; «go under, 
 enter ; undergo, encounter. 
 
 auberam, aubesae, from aub- 
 «uni. 
 
 aub-fodio, ere/ -fddl, -foaautti, 
 stab from beneath or in the 
 belly. ! J ; 
 
 anb-igo, ere, -egl, -&otnln, sub- 
 due, overcome, subjugate. 
 
 aublto, adv., suddenly. 
 
 anbitus, a, am, sudden. 
 
 Bub-Jicio, ere, -Jed, -Jeotum, 
 place beneath ; place close to ; 
 expose ; in pass., lie near, lie 
 close by. 
 
 aublatua, a, am, from tollo. 
 
 aublloiua, a, uin, built on piles ; 
 -* Pona Subllolua, a wooden 
 bridge over the Tiber, the oldest 
 of t}\A Roman bridges. 
 
 aubluatria, e, with a faint light, 
 dark. 
 
 aubmlniatrd, &re, &vX, &tam, 
 supply, furnish. 
 
 aubinittd, ere, -mlal, -mla- 
 aum, send (to aid), send to 
 one's aid. 
 
 aub-moveo, 6re, -m5vl, -m6- 
 tum, drive off or away. 
 
 •ub-aequor, I, -aeofitua aum, 
 follow (closely), follow up. 
 
 aubaldlum, I, N., aid, support, 
 relief ; reserves, reinforce- 
 ments ; aubaldta oomp»r&ro, 
 p!^ovide resources, make pro- 
 vision. 
 
 aub-alatd, ere, -atiti, stay ; hold. 
 
 aub-aum, -eaae, -ful, be near, 
 be close at hand ; be at the 
 bottom, lie concealed. 
 
 aub-venld. Ire, -vftiil, -ven- 
 tum, come to aid, aid {with 
 
 ■r. 
 
 datt). 
 
 M. 
 
 ■k^ 
 
1 f 
 
 r 
 
 PART VI.— VOCABULARY. 
 
 621 
 
 '^■ 
 
 ^T- t- 
 
 
 r-~?>;r 
 
 t 
 
 •no-oedo, ere, -oessi, -ceasnm, 
 
 succeed, take the place of, re- 
 lieve, with dat.; come close 
 up, approach, advance, come 
 next, adjoin. 
 SQc-cIdo, ere, -jbWI, -olsnni, cut 
 
 down, cut through. 
 sac-cnmbo, ere, -eubul, -onbl- 
 
 tmii, yield, submit. 
 «nc-ourro, ero^ -cnrrl^ -car- 
 sum, run to aid, runfto the 
 rescue' of (vnth dat). | 
 . idls, is, F., stake. 
 Saebi, drum, m. plur.^ the 
 Suebi, a German tribe on the 
 ' Bhine. 
 
 snf-fleld, ere, -feci, -feotnm, 
 choose as successor, elect in 
 one's stead. 
 •affrasrinm, I, HT., vote, voice, 
 
 suf&^ge. 
 SngambrX, ornm, M. ^wr., the 
 Sugambri, a German tribe on 
 the Rhine. 
 8ul, glbl, ae or Heae, reflex, pron., 
 himself, herself, itself, them- 
 selves; him, her, it, them; 
 Inter ge, one another, (to, 
 with, from, etc.), one another. 
 Salpiolns, I, M. 1. Publius Sul- 
 picius Galba, consul in 200 
 B.C. 2. Sulpicius Blitho, a 
 Roman historian. 3. Pub- 
 licius Sulpicius Rufus, one of 
 Caesar's lieutenants. 
 sum, esse, ful, be, exist, prove; 
 tvith gen., belong to, be the 
 part or mark of. 
 sniinna, ae, P., total; chief part; 
 chief control, chief command, 
 management, supremacy, chitf- 
 lytoith ImporlT. 
 •ummum, I, N., top. Summit. 
 snmnins, a, um, superlative of 
 superns, highest, greatest, 
 -JPhief, aupreme» very great, 
 
 portant, perfect, entire, ' all ; 
 highest port of, top of, top. 
 sumo, ere, sumpaX, sumptum, 
 
 take ; get, obtain. 
 superbns, a, nm, proud, 
 haughty. 
 
 snperlncldens, -entia, falhng 
 from above, falling on. 
 
 superior, lua, comparative of 
 superus, higher, i»pper; for- 
 mer, previous ; supferior, more 
 successful, victorious, stronger. 
 
 supero, are, avi, atum, ^n- 
 quer, defeat, overcome ;^ sur- 
 pass, excel, overmatch; sail 
 around, double. 
 
 super-ateg, -gtitig, surviving. 
 
 super-gum, -egge, -ful, be over, 
 remain, be left ; survive. 
 
 gnp-plex, -plicig, M., suppliant. 
 
 gnppiioatio, -onis, F., thanks- 
 giving. 
 
 suppiidum, 1, N., punishment 
 {nsnally of death) ; torture. 
 
 sup-prinid, ere, -pressi, pres- 
 "sum, check. 
 
 supra, adv. and prep, ivith ace, 
 above, before; upon:, over, 
 more than. .^ 
 
 sus-olplo, ere, -oepi, -oeptnm, 
 undertake, enter ujKin. 
 
 suspXcio, -onlg, p., suspicion ; 
 in sugf^olonem (allcui) ad- 
 dueere, freely, to make (one) 
 suspicious of. 
 
 gugpioor, arl, atug sum, sus- 
 pect. 
 
 sus-tineo, ere,-tlnal, -tentnm, 
 withstand, meet, endure, hold 
 out against, bear; hold one's 
 own, hold one's ground ; check, 
 rein in. 
 
 suatnll, from toUo. 
 
 auua, a, um, his, her, its, their; 
 his own etc, m. phir. assubst., 
 sui t o rnm, h i a ( t h e ix) frleuds, " 
 
 rt in> * I ■ ■■■» 1 1 I - 1 
 
 V017 high, extreme, most im- comrades, men, countrymen ; 
 
522 
 
 PBUfART LATIN BOOK. 
 
 :V 
 
 N. fitAvr. as subsL^ ana, dram, Taxlmagnlns, I, M., Taxima- 
 his (their) possessions, prop- gulus, a king ruling in Kent 
 
 erty, belongings. 
 Syria, ae, F., Syria, a country 
 in western Asia. 
 
 tdotnin, I, M., roof, abode, home, 
 
 quarters. 
 
 tegd, ere, texl, tgctam, cover, 
 
 _ . hide, conceal ; shelter, protect. 
 
 = * Tellns, I, M., Tellus, an Athe- 
 
 T., an abbreviation for Tltns. niam,. 
 
 tabellarlug, I, M., letter-carrier, t«Iani, I, jff., weapon, missile, 
 
 messenger. dart, javelin. 
 
 tabala, ae, F.^ tablet ; picture, tenier§, ado., rashly, without 
 
 painting. cause, without good reason. 
 
 t&lea, ae, F., bar, rod, t£md, -onig, m., pole, tongue (of 
 
 tulentuin, I, N., talent, a Greek a vehicle). 
 
 standard of value, varying in teinperantla, ae, F., self-con- 
 
 different states; especially the trol. 
 
 Attic talent, equal to about tempers, &re, avi, atnm, con- 
 
 81080. '•„. --,trol; refrain; perf. part. pass. 
 
 tails, «, of such a kind, such ; ^ temper&ta«, a, um, as adj., 
 
 this, ihe following ; this, the ' mild. 
 
 preceding. tempest&s, -tatlg, f., weath^; 
 
 tain, adv., so, so much ; tairi . . . storm, tempest. 
 
 quam, as or so (much) . . . as. templnm, I, N., temple, 
 tamen, ttdt>., still, however, yet, tempto, or tentd, are, avI, 
 
 nevertheless, for all that, ye<i,:_ Atum, try, test, tempt. 
 
 at the same time. " ,\iempn», lorlg, n., time, sea- 
 
 Tamegls, Ig, M., the Thames, » isOn; age, period; occasion, 
 TamphUug, I, M., Tamphiftj^f/ ofjportunity, circumstances ; 
 
 see Baebiag. ' 4^ i^**^'**''» emergency ; rellqnani 
 
 tamqnam, adv., as if, iust as uPj^tompus, the future. 
 
 tandem, adv., at length, atlas§« 
 tango, ere, tetlgl, t&etnm, 
 
 touch; reach ^, LK>rder on. 
 tantnlug, a, am, so small, so 
 
 trifling. 
 tantum, adv., only, merely. 
 tantus, a, am, so great, so 
 
 ^<Jit(prI (or Tenctgri), oram, 
 
 i^nr., the Tencteri, a Ger- 
 
 mdni tribe near ■ the nunith of 
 
 ^ the Rhine. I ' <■ 
 
 tendo, ere, tetendl, tiniam 
 
 or tentam, make one's way, 
 
 go- 
 
 kUbUM, a, UIII, mJ l^lVUV, BU gu« 
 
 large, so vast, so important, tenebrae, arum, ir. pittr., dark- 
 
 so much, such ; as great, as ness, the shades. 
 
 much ; N.. tantuih, as adv., tenebrloogag, a, am, dark, 
 
 so mucl^so ,far. v gloomy, 
 
 tardg, ad?., slowly. / tened, ere, al, tentam, hold, 
 
 TarentlBl, drum, M. plur., the grasp, keep,^ maintain ; retain, 
 
 Tarentines, the people of Tar- detain. 
 
 entum, a city im the south tentd, see tempt6. 
 
 coast pf Italy. _ . Terentlag, I, m., Caius Teren- 
 
 . 
 
 last king of Rome. 
 
 B.O. 
 
t'l 
 
 PART VI.— VOCABULARY. 
 
 523 
 
 # 
 
 tergam, i, n., back, rear ; 
 tergam vertere, or dare, 
 
 turn and flee, take to flight ; 
 a tergd, in the rear. 
 terra, ae, F,, earth, land ; In ter- 
 rlg, in the world, on earth ; 
 orbls terrarnni, the world. 
 terreo, ere, ul, Itum, alarm. 
 terrestrig, e, land, of the land. 
 territo, are, avi, atnui, 
 frighten, terrify, 
 por, -drlB, M., terror, alarm, 
 \ic. 
 
 L adv., for the third time. 
 tB, a, urn, third. 
 ^ p, arl, atus gum, declare, 
 ^i^sert. 
 
 tegtudo, -dlnls, p., tortoise, 
 
 testudo, shelter of overlapping 
 
 shields. , 
 
 tegtala, ae. P., small tile or 
 
 potsherd, voting-tablet, ballot. 
 
 ThebanX, ornni, U. plur., ^he 
 
 Thebans, the people of 
 
 Thebes, a famous city in 
 
 ' Greece. 
 
 Tbemlgtocles, Is or I, m., The- 
 mistocles, a celebrated Athe- 
 r^ -nian statesman arid gertercU. . 
 Thermopylae, arum, P. plur., 
 Thermopyles^^ufanums pass 
 in northern €^I^Spt'. 
 Tbegplengeg, lum, M. plur., the 
 people of Thespise, a town be- 
 tween Athens and TUehes! 
 Thuoydideg, Ig^ja., Thugydides, 
 tfie great Greek historitm of the 
 Peloponnesian tear. 
 Tl., an abbreviationforTllaerlua. 
 Tiberlung, a, um, of the Tiber; 
 . TIberXnng pater. Father Ti- 
 ber, as a river god. 
 Tlberlg, U, M., the Tiber, the 
 river ^<^n which. Rome is situ- 
 ated. - / 
 Tlbertng^ I, w., T 
 
 timor,terig, wf.', fear, alarm, 
 
 dread, panic. 
 TIryng, -ynthlg, p., Tiryns, a 
 
 cityin the Pdoponnesus. - 
 TlturKig, I, M., Quintus Tituri- 
 
 us Sabinus, wie of Gaatar's 
 
 lienteiuxnts. 
 Tltug, I, M., Titus, aJ^itmian 
 
 pr<Bnom£n. 
 tollo, ere, gngtall, gnblatnm, 
 
 raise, lift up ; take on board ; 
 
 take away, remove ; destroy, 
 
 kill, slay. 
 tormentnm, 1, N., engine, hurl- 
 
 ing-machimj(/or throwing large ' 
 
 Cissiles). 
 qnatug, I, M., Torquatus, ^ 
 the name of a famous Mom^i 
 family, * ' 
 
 torqulB, Ig, M. one? p., necklace, 
 collar. 
 
 toty indeclinahle, so many. 
 
 totMem, indeclinable, just as 
 many, the same number of. 
 
 totng, a, um, whole, entire, all ; 
 often rendered freely by en- 
 tirely, altogether. 
 
 tra-do, er©>^-dldl, -dltum, hand 
 over, give up, surrender ; hand 
 down. 
 
 tra-duco, ere, -duxl, -duc'tnm, 
 / lead across, bring over; lead 
 through, 
 
 traj ect its, u s, M. , crossing, pass- 
 age, route. ^^ 
 
 trand, are, avl, atum, swim 
 over, swim across. 
 
 tranquimtag, -tatig,. P., calm. 
 
 trang, |%p. ^vith ace, across, 
 over, beyond, on the other 
 side of, to the other side of. 
 
 traugactug, a, um, from trang- 
 
 Igo. 
 trans-duoo, ere, -duxX, -duo- 
 tuni, lead across. . 
 
 TZbwia*i prcenomen. 
 timed, ere, ul, fear, be afraid. 
 
 la .: ^€Oy^lrey-J4I44v^), -ttuni) 
 
 cross, cross over, go or come 
 ov6r. 
 
524 
 
 primary' LATIN BQOK. 
 
 
 
 & 
 
 *'f"«if?'**^®"®'*"*^"***"™' trlennlum, I, n., a space of 
 "*"""" three years, three years. 
 
 trigrlnta, thirty. 
 Trlhohantes, um, M. plur., the 
 Trinobantes, a tribe in Britain. 
 trlportltOj adv.y in three di- 
 visions. 
 tripl-ex, -lc<8, triple, threefold. 
 trlquetras, a, um, triangular. 
 triremis, Is, F., trireme, galley, 
 a vessel 1 mth three banks of oars. 
 trlstls, e, sad^ sorrowful ; trls- 
 tlsslmas.'with the saddest of 
 hearts. ' 
 Troeaen, -enis, f., Troezen, a 
 nu- / ' ° city in tJie Teloponnesns. 
 
 across the Khme {from Gaul) ; , tropuenm, I, n., trophy; victory. 
 M. ptur.assubst:, the people tracldd, are, avi, atum, cut 
 across the Rhine. down, slaughter, slay. 
 
 Trusuiiidnns, I,' W., Trasume: trunons, l, m., trunk. 
 
 nus, a lake in Etrnria. tpux, trnolg, fierce, grim, stem. 
 
 Trebla, ae,,M., Trebia, a river tu, tnl, thou, you. 
 
 transfer 
 trauH-lj^d, ere, -egt, -Return, 
 
 complete; in pass. ^ be com- 
 pleted, pass, go by. 
 transltus, us, M„ passing over, 
 crossing. > 
 
 translatus, /rom transfer^. 
 
 transiiiarlnns, a, um, from be- 
 yond the seiv. 
 
 transmlssus, iis, M., passage, 
 distance across. 
 ^^tr&nsporto, are, &vt, &'tnm, 
 carry, lead, bring, or tjike 
 over; convey ac'rbss. 
 
 Transrhcnahus, a, tim, living 
 
 in nortlievn Italy. 
 
 Ti^bonius, I, M., Caius Tro- 
 bonius, one of Caesar's liai(,en- 
 ants. 
 
 treoenti, ae, a, three hun- 
 dred."^ 
 
 trepldo, &re, avI, atum, be in 
 confusion, bo in a {mnic. -- 
 
 trepldus, a, um, alarmed, ter- 
 rified. 
 
 trSs, trla, throe. 
 
 tuba, ae, F., trumpet. ^ 
 taoor, erl, tutus (or tultus) 
 sum, protect, guard,» keep 
 safe, defend. " 
 
 tnll, fiom ferd. 
 
 turn, adv., then, at that time, 
 thereupon ; oum . v i turn, 
 •bothv. . . and, not only . . . 
 but also. 
 tumulus, I, M. hill. ^ • '^ 
 Ivffldulus, a, um, swollen. 
 
 Tr^erl, |rum,^M. plnr., the t'urma, ae, F.,'squadr<m, trWp. 
 
 Trevwi, a tribe tnrutrth-eastern turpis, e, disgraceful, unbecom- 
 
 Oaid^^lfm the Rhine. ing, base. 
 
 TrJ^bootT. drum, M. plur,, the #lir r Is, Is, F., tower; dove-cote!' 
 
 Triboci, a German tribe on the tus, to rls,^,, incense. • 
 
 '^^^ne. tiitd, advfy safely, without dan- 
 
 trlbunus, I, M., tribune; trl- "ger. 
 
 bunus mllltum, an officer in tutum, I, n., position of safety, 
 
 the Konum army; trtbiinus safety. ' - » 
 
 pl6bts, a civ^magUlrate oit tutus, a, nin, safe, secure. 
 
 ^""^" tttn», «, um, thy, your, 
 
 U 
 
 ti|U)-a5, ere, -nl, -ntnm, grantk 
 Ipustow, devote ; ascribe. ^' 
 tflriu |fc i, 1, w., a mwoo of throe. 
 
 dayfjf throe days. 
 
 ubi, uji ) ., yylmm UH HU6n ftf y 
 where. . 
 
 . I 
 
 1 
 
 ■.^^ 
 
PART V;.— VOCABULARY. 
 
 625 
 
 
 Cbll, drum, m. plvr., the Ubii, 
 a tribe in Germany on the 
 Johine. 
 
 aloJscor, I, ultus'suiiiV- punish, 
 
 avenge. 
 
 need, necessity ; usu venire/ 
 come about, hfippen ; ex usu, 
 ;of advantage, advanbigeous ; 
 usal esse, be of service, b6 an 
 advvintage, be useful. 
 
 '"ny'ino: """' '"^ ' "' "'"- »* *?*Cth»t in-^*.^ that, so 
 mo::tto.^""«P'^" *''"»« "t;, -"'. -"-■. which („, 
 
 farthest, most distant. 
 ultro, adv., voluntarily, without 
 . provocation. 
 
 umbra, ae, F., ijhadow, shade. 
 ninerus, I, m., shoulder. 
 umqnam, adv., ever, at any 
 
 time. ; . 
 
 una, adv., at the same time, to- 
 gether, along. • ^ 
 unde, orfv., whence, from M'hich. 
 OndevlglntI, nineteen. 
 
 each (of two), both ; u. plw., 
 
 .both sides; both. 
 utl, see ut. 
 
 utuig, e, useful, serviceable. 
 utuitag.-tatla, f., advantage, 
 
 usefulness, service, utility. 
 utor, I, ususuum, use, employ, 
 
 have, make use of ; ejtperience, 
 
 hnd; show, display; adopt, 
 
 follow, avail one's self of ; with 
 
 am. 
 
 "Terfume""' '' "• """"""'• "»'»•'?-••>•. «*•. m both w«^ 
 »».n... ..; M., nail ; okw, t«I„„^ Z.n^'' ''''"" ^ *"'"'«'«- 
 
 body. 'V * 
 
 T«;..f?' 1^ 1^' P^^«^^'^»'J; ^ cupied, lie waste, 
 tn pass, ho hard pressed. Vacuus, «, u.n, empty 
 
 U^te., «in. M. jjvr the Usi- vftdo, eVe, T^SvS. - « 
 
 . rsi^rsi::^^'^-''^^ ^tr^J ^^^^ ^^' -^^^ 
 
 Qsque, adv., all tlm way, even --»«•«»' i^ a* j 
 
 as far fts nil f it« 17. i ^^***»'» *"» **"" ■"">' wander, 
 astw: as, all the tuijo, al- roam about. 
 
 Aa^fn nil. from ft*,.- valgn., -entli, stronpf, powerful. 
 
 ^.»n, x,n, M., use, experience, Ims x.werf , W^TIfluehco 
 practice ; advantage, service, havi weight;h.vX!ce! Zuu 
 
526 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 Valerias, I, M., Marcus Vale- 
 rius Corvinus, a fatnotts Ro- 
 mam. ; 
 
 valetudo, -dlnls, '^F., state of 
 health ; illness. 
 
 valles, is, F., valley. # 
 
 vallum, I, N., rampart, en- 
 trenchment, wall. 
 
 venta, ae, F., pardon, favor, . 
 
 indulgenca; venlam dare, 
 
 consent. ; .\ 
 vetilo, Ird, veni, ventnm, come, 
 
 go. 
 Tentlto, are, avi, atum, come 
 
 often, resort, visit. 
 ventus, I, M., wind. 
 
 varlng,fi, u^|i, different, varied, TenaH, Veneris, F., the god 
 
 changing. 
 ^Varns, I, M., Publius Quintili- 
 
 us Varus, a Roman general. 
 vas, vasls, N. plur.f V&sa, 
 
 ornni, vessel, jar, 
 yasto, are, avi, atain, lay 
 
 wastej ravage. 
 v&stna, a, um, immense, vast 
 
 dess of love and beauty ; piitr., 
 
 Veneres, Gxaces. . 
 Venusla, ae, F., Venusia, a 
 
 town in Apidia, in Itcdy. 
 ver, veris, N., spring. 
 verbum, I, N., word ; verim {' 
 
 dare, cheat, deceive ; verba \ 
 
 face re, spealtT— t'T 
 
 yeotiual, -alls, jf.j taxi^tribute, Verolngretorlx, -igl», Vercin- 
 
 revenue. 
 veotlir&lls, o, tributary; 
 reotdrlus, lynm, for carrying ; 
 
 veotorlufm navlgrlum, 'a 
 
 transport ship. 
 vehenienter; adv., vigorously. 
 vehlcnlnm, I, N., Carriage. 
 
 getorix, king of the Arvemi. 
 vere, adv.j truly, accurately. 
 vereonndla, ae, F., reservdf 
 
 modesty. 
 voreor, 6rl, Itns sam, fear, be 
 
 apprehensive, be afraid of. 
 vergro, er«, lie, face, incline. 
 
 veho, ere, yexl, Teotmn, carry f^^vero, adv., in truth, indeed, in 
 
 in pass., ride, sail. 
 Veil, drum, M. ^^nr., Veii, ipll 
 
 ancient city of Mniria. ,. 
 vel, conj., or; vel . . . vol, 
 
 either ... or. .^ . 
 
 VAlle, from void. ♦> */* ' 
 vMox, -dels, swift, active. 
 -vilaiii, I, v., sail. 
 Telut or velatl, advi, just as if, 
 i just as though. 
 ▼ ftn&tld, -onls, F., hunting, 
 
 hunt, the chase. 
 v£n-do, ore, -dldf, -dltnni, sell. 
 oYenen&tas, a, urn, poisonous, 
 
 venomous. 
 vendnnm, 1, N., poison. 
 Venetl, dram, M. plur., the 
 ~ Veneti,*a tribe in the extreme 
 
 narth-ioest of.Oanl 
 
 fact; but, hc|wever, moreover; 
 t»/Xen untrandatable. 
 
 Ter«or, art, &tns •am, be en- 
 gaged in, live. • * 
 
 ver-to, ore, -tl, -sdm, turn ; 
 
 terga vertere, turn and flee, 
 
 ■ take to flight; papp§« vorr 
 
 tore, turn the ships, wheel 
 
 about. 
 
 T#ram, cory., however, but. ^ 
 
 vdras, a, uui, true ; real, gen- 
 uine ; accurate ; ri|^t, lair,, 
 just, reasonable, 
 
 vaster, tru, trafih, your. 
 
 vestlirlam, 1, N., footpriftt} 
 track ; spot. 
 
 vestld, fro, Ivl, Itam, clothe, 
 dress ; in pass, freely, wear. 
 
 vestltas, us,,M., clothing. 
 
 Vonetlous, a, jam, of or with vestis, Is, F. , clothing, clothes ; 
 thg Vgn«ti . garmont, rob o . 
 
 I. , 
 
 
 >;>'■ 
 
 ,•-* 
 
 -■ i 
 
 ^.#^ 
 
 .w* 
 
 \- . 
 
 •i('5>'»''->' 
 
 
PART VI.-^VOCABULARY. 
 
 627 
 
 ▼et-6, ftre, -ul, -Itnm, forbid, 
 
 Old or order . . . not. 
 vet-as, -©rig, old. 
 
 • je*'llo»»»» I, N., banner, flag(a red 
 
 banner was theaignnl for battle). 
 
 vexd, are, avi, atani, ravage, 
 
 overrun. 
 vl, from .vl«. ^ 
 
 . . ' via, ae, F., way, road, route, 
 ^ joUmey. # 
 
 viator, -oris, m., traveller. 
 ^ vloeslinus, a, unv, jiwentteth. 
 ^ viol», gen, (nom. not found) p., 
 
 changfi^ turn ; in vloem, in 
 turn. ^ 
 
 vibl, from vinoo. 
 ..' vloleB,adw., twenty times. 
 
 Victoria, ae, p., vigtory. , 
 vlotrlx, -loin, p., victorious. 
 flotns, a, um, from vlnoo. 
 1^, TlotuB, ^^, M., life, living, man- 
 . ^* ner of living. 
 
 "ipBhis, I, M., village. 
 fldeO, fire, vldl, visam, see, 
 perceive ; in pass. , be seen, be 
 tri sight, appear, seem, seem 
 good or best. 
 l^lffll, ^lU, M., watch, sentry? 
 ▼Iflrtlla, ae, p., watch (one- 
 ^ f mirth of tlie night time). 
 ▼Ifirlntf, twenty. 
 
 VtKor, -orlB. m., strength, ac- 
 • s.' • 4 tivitv.y ■§ 
 
 :tfnol6, Ire, vinxl, vlnotuni, . 
 
 bind, ' 
 
 » vinoo, ere, vlfli, vlotain, con- 
 quer, defeat. 
 
 vlnotaa, a, uin, from vlnolA. 
 
 ▼Inoalnni, I, 0., chain; often 
 in plnr. , prison. * :V 
 
 vinea, ae. P., vineyard ; l^ine. 
 
 vinum, I, N., wino, 
 
 '^*'» ^*rt» M., man. ^ _J^ _ 
 
 vlr«s, lain, /rom vl«. 
 
 vlrgra, ae, *•.', rod, stick. ' 
 V vlr»6, -«InU, p., maiden. 
 
 v^^|^l^&^l^^ n) m i uoiden's, nittid- 
 
 vlrtus, -tutlB, p., manliness, 
 valor, bravery, co^irage ; vir- 
 tue, eltcellence, gooSi quality ; 
 energy, apirit, conduct. 
 vl8. Vim, vl, plnr. vires, lum, 
 F., force, strength, power, 
 energy, might ; violence, fury, 
 attack, assault ; ;)inr. , strength, 
 might, jjowers, bodily vigor, 
 powers of endurance. 
 visas, a, um, /jow video, 
 visas, us, M., sight, appearance, 
 
 spectacle. 
 vita, ae. P., life, course of life. 
 vltlaiii, I, N., fault, failing. 
 vltd, are, AvI, &tum, avoid, 
 
 escape. 
 vitrum, I, N., woad (a plant 
 -tised for dyeing), dyer's weed. 
 «rividus, a, um, vigorous, full 
 
 of life or energy. - 
 vivo, ere, vixl, vlotum, live. 
 vivas, a, um, alive, live, living. 
 vIk, adv., scarcely, barely 
 vixl, /rom vivo, 
 vood, are, ^vl, &tam, call, 
 i summon, invite. 
 void, velle, volul, wish, bo 
 
 willing, desire, want, intend. 
 Volso, -onls, ^(aee Manilas), 
 voluntfts, -mm,i,y', wish, in- 
 clination; MUMriU ; disposi- 
 tion, attitude! 
 voluptas, -tatla, P., pleasure, 
 
 delight. 
 Volas«nas, 1, m.. Gains Volu- 
 senus, a militai-y tribune unth 
 Ckrsar. ' 
 
 Vprenus, t «m I^ucius^orenus, 
 « centuHon with Qeaar. '' 
 
 v6s, you, fdur. of tu. 
 
 Voseflras, I, m., the Voages 
 Mountains, in eastern Quid. 
 
 v6x, vdols, p., voice. 
 
 vulfrus, I, N., the common peo- 
 P^«» the crowd, the masses. 
 
 vainero, &re,4vl, 4t«m, wound, , 
 
 \ 
 
 »«■,. 
 
 ei#. 
 
52$ 
 
 PRIMA«Y LATIN book. 
 
 valnns, -eiiis, N., wound ^ blow. Xerxes, 1«, M., Xerxes, king of 
 valpeoala, ae, F. , littJ^ fiox, fox. i^Persia, from 485 to 46^ B.G. • 
 valpes, is, F., fox. \ • " v 
 
 vultafB, u8, M.f expressid^, look ; », * .^ > /^ ' 
 
 ' countenance, ™>e,. l Zama, ae, F.^Zam», a iowrt o/ 
 
 '^ Ij., Nurmdia, in northern Africa. 
 
 , ', -^ ' . ZephyruB, I» M. , the west wind. , 
 
 Xanthlppus, I, Bf., X^nthippus^^ ; Zeaxts, is, M., Zeuxis, o/tpele- 
 a Spartan general.. brated Greek painter. 
 
 / 
 
 i^0,tjef>S^ 
 
 i\ III ] 
 
 V"» 
 
 
 II. ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY. 
 
 V 
 
 r 
 
 ; I 
 
 Ad 
 
 *- 
 
 abftffcTdii» pi'' 
 
 Iditum. ■ ,. ^... 
 
 ability, ingemum; ^I, V. " 
 able, be— .possum, posse, potui. 
 abound In, abundS, are, avi, 
 
 atum, w. ahl. 
 
 1. about, { = con9eming)y d6j-x 
 ' pi'ep. w. ahl. 
 
 2. abouf, tvith numerals, cfrci- 
 teTj adv. 
 
 3. about, to be— to, tise the fat. 
 . pa/rt. active ivith sum. 
 
 absent, abs6ns, absentis. 
 aooepj;, ac-cipi6, ere|-c5pl, -cep- 
 
 tum. 
 aooess, aditus, As, M. * 
 aooomplUh. pr6-fici5, ere, -fScT, 
 
 -fectunl ; c6n-ficio, e^'e, -fScI, 
 
 .fectum. 
 aooompllabments, hflniJInitas, 
 
 -tatis, F. {in the sing.). 
 aooordanoe. In- with, prd,|>rej>. 
 
 w. ahl., or aU. alone. * «f • 
 aooount, on— of . propter, prfp. 
 
 w. ace. 
 1. aoouMtomodl, be-, c6n8U§vI, 
 
 isaeiperf. *enad^C(5n8u6sc6)^ 
 fl, a<<«wfftft«nwd. Income—» o5n- 
 
 aotinalnted, become— with, cd- 
 
 gnosco, ere, -gnovl, -gnituni,»^ 
 w. ace. 
 acquit, ab-solv6, ere, iiAlvI, -so^- 
 laturat. 'V 
 
 1. across , trftns, prep. to. ace. 
 
 2. across, lead—. trans-dtlo5, 
 ere^ -dUxI, -ductum. 
 
 action, conk>se of— , fSs, reT, F. 
 added, be—, third sing, active of 
 '] ac-c5dd, ere, -cessi, cessura. ^ 
 afljoceni, finitimus, a, um. 
 Aduatnol, AduatucI, orum,-*!. 
 
 1. advance, pr6-c6d6, ere,-ces8l, 
 •cessum ; pr6-gredior, I, -gres* 
 Stts Buni ; slgna fer6, ferre, 
 tull, latum. ^ 1 
 
 2. advfk'noe. »wntw, adventus, fls^r 
 
 M. 
 
 3. *'■■ 
 • advance, send In—, prae- 
 
 mitt5, ere, imM, -missura. 
 
 4. advance ffuard, primum ag- 
 
 men (agminis, v.). 
 
 1. advantage, tisus, tls, H. 
 
 2. advantage, take— of, tltor, I|.i 
 tlsuB sum, w. abl. 
 
 '3. advantage, to any—, satis 
 
 commodS, adv. 
 advice, ask-of. oCnsul-flt ajftr ' 
 
 i«%f >• 
 
 / ♦ 
 
 '^:^ - 
 
 «l9wd, ere, -suevL 
 
 -ul, -turn, to. dec. 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 .**. 
 
 1 
 
Icing o/ '' 
 B.a • ' 
 
 'own of ' 
 Africa, 
 i wind. , 
 qtpele- 
 
 fch, c6- 
 jnituni,»^ 
 
 iri, -spi: 
 
 PART VI. — VOCABULABT; 
 
 QSB^ 
 
 ace. 
 8-dflc6, 
 
 
 « 
 
 eT, F. * 
 >ctive of 
 ssum. 4 
 ai. 
 
 " . - -J 
 
 ■ • " ' ''^ , ,'■ 
 
 ,-ces8l, 
 
 • - 
 
 
 , -gres- 
 , ferre,. 
 
 
 .' tii 
 
 bus, tls^ r 
 
 , prae- 
 rnu. 
 urn ag- 
 
 u. 
 
 fltor, I, 
 
 , satis 
 B« ^ * 
 
 
 adrlse, admoneo, ^, ul, itum. 
 JKdal, Aedu!, drum,^M. 
 aJTslr, res, rel, f. 
 • I. after, prep. , post, to» oec. 
 2. af^, conj., postquam, cum ; 
 
 or use perfect partieiple, 
 afterwards posteft. T^ 
 
 afratd, be— of, vereor, Sri, itum ' 
 
 sum. 
 agatn, rOrsus. 
 ' against, in, prep, to.'oec.; with 
 
 contendo^ ad, w. ace.; ioith bei- 
 
 Ivm gerd, Qum, uq. ahl. ■ 
 mgeney, tliroagh the*— o^, per, 
 
 prep. to. ace. ■ ,. 
 
 aijgro, abhinc. 
 acpree, c5n-sentid, Ire, -sSnsI, 
 
 -sSnBum. 
 
 1. aid, wrft, ]Uv6, Sre, jflvl, 
 jtltum, to. cux.; suc-curr5, ere, 
 -<mrrl, -cursum, w. dat. 
 
 2. aid, noun^ auxilium, I, N.; 
 subsidium, I, N. 
 
 3. aid, oome to— of, ajixiliS ven- 
 i6, Venire, vSni, ventum, t«. dat. 
 
 : 4. aid, Ko'to-HDf, auxiliS eo. Ire, 
 
 ^.(ivl), itum, w. dat. 
 [/^. aid, send to -of, auxiliO 
 mitt5, ere, misl, missum, vi. 
 :^ dat. and occj. _ 
 ^«aarm, per-mov(B5,, 6re, -mflvl, 
 m5tum ; com - moved, 6re, 
 -mSyi, -m5tum. <^|^ ^ 
 
 alertness, dlligentia, ae, 1^ 
 AJesla, Alesia, ae, F. 
 all, omnia, e. ' ' » 
 
 al^gfianoe, officium, I, n. 
 AlloMrKes. AUobrogSs, um, M. 
 
 1. a^nv, patior, I,- Aj|88U8 sum. 
 
 2. atlowe4, be-, «pt, licSre, 
 licuit, impersonal w. dat. 
 
 Ally, Bocius, I, H. 
 
 lUmost, paene. 
 
 alone, sdlua, a, om ; ftnus, a, 
 
 um. 
 aloof, hold-,absum, esse, ftful. 
 itf r e ady, jam, nrfff = 
 
 althooflpi, etta ; qaamquam ; 
 
 quamn^* ^ 
 
 always, 8«mpe■^ i - 
 ambassador, legfttQS, I, M. 
 ambosh, InsidiM, ftriiQi, Fi, im, 
 
 piwrid oidy, 
 amongr» inter, prep. w. aec 1 
 ancestors, mftjdr^ um, m . . ^ 
 
 1. anobor, weiflrb— ,=M< «ail. 
 
 2. anebor, at—, in ancoris. 
 anoient, vetus, -eris. 
 and, et, «que, atque, fie. 
 angry, be— wltb, IrSaoor,I,IrjUiua 
 
 sum, w, dab. ,^ 
 annonnoe, nflnti^' fire, fivl, ' 
 
 fitum. 
 annoyed, be — , graviter fer5, 
 
 ferre, tull, Ifttum. 
 
 1. another, alius, a, Ud. 
 
 2. another, one—, inter J96. 
 
 !• answer, verb, re-8ponded,Sre, 
 -spondl, -spdnsum. 
 
 2. answer, fiotm, respdnsum, 
 
 I, N. 
 
 3. answer, give {or make) — , 
 
 = answer, verb. 
 
 1. any, tlllus, a, um ; after «i, 
 qui (quis), qua, quod ; =any 
 amount of, quIvHi^ quaevis, 
 
 4 quidvl% or qucwvls. 
 
 2. any one, quisquam ; wi^ a 
 negative use nSmp «no» one; 
 after «f, quis. 
 
 8. anything, Alia rSs, qiad- 
 
 quam ; after «i, quid, 
 •nxlety, without-,, aequo ani- 
 
 mC. * 
 J^Mtlt, keep—, dis-tine5, 4re, 
 
 -tinul, -tentuni. . 
 apolMn|^« catis-faci5, ere, -fSoI, 
 
 •ppe^^noei^^fiPHa, ae, F, 
 ' spedSs, ^Mk ; aspectus, 
 apprliied, Df^m^e— of, CO- 
 CO, ere, -guOvI, -gnitum,^ 
 ace. 
 
 84 
 
 ♦ 
 
 ■1# 
 
 * 
 
 **«. 
 
 A , 
 
'^ 11.-. ■"■■ 
 
 I^K,'"- 
 
 t V .. 
 
 % im 
 
 '^'.: ■ 
 
 KftA k' - 
 
 PRIMARY LATtS BOOK. ^ 
 
 t 
 
 . -oeaal, -«Bessum/j appropinquo, 
 
 2. dimroaoh, noun, adventi 
 
 ppi^ili^al, cdnsSnsus, fls,.M. (' 
 of i$^ral persorS) ; vmin 
 
 ?l turn—, -^ fi-yerfc6, ere^ 
 
 f^;«re,l|j|^M, petltum ; 
 «t jlra^ Mum. 4.- 
 >J>\^Hn^ a gri^tion)/ 
 , erllp^iiaeslvl, qxiaesl- 
 pm ; rbgo, are, ^yl, fttum.. 
 
 i| Ardenn^l^Tdpf g|| ae, i^^ ,3. l^k -ttor, 0^ er^, petavl, 
 
 ardor Jiiwl4ium,'^;i!^?, " ;■■ ^J^:,«|)etltui 
 
 Arlofistiis, Ariovis^, ]^i>^#| 4. aal^li^ K>f, ddhsul-o, ere 
 
 ..•jlRj^meA, ^rm&tus, a, um. g W"-t. *'|jtfl^llWii'.^/T['iri ''^'"i )/ con-, , 
 
 or.ai^, OrumfN.^ miJ^.V ^^fe^^lro,*-^ , 
 
 a, orum, n., in ;)Zwr. assigl;, sub-venid, Ire, -v^nl, 
 ', ' %^ ^ -yentum, v^ dat.;\juy6, are,. 
 mv«%, exercituB, lis, m. % '^V jjvl, jatum,;ia ace. ' .^m- 
 .lif^nd, circum, prep. w. f»c<m 1. «sslstanoe. auxiliunnJvK;: • 
 Hr^uJle) Qonfirmo, are, avi, ^iWHi,. 2. asslstanote, firo to— of, auxiliO , 
 
 ^ 
 
 / 
 
 \ '.<'ff 
 
 arrange, oonsiit-uo, ' ere 
 
 I'^'i c '^ 
 
 -fLtum. 
 
 i| jarrangement, rSs, rel, F. 
 
 eo. Ire, il (ivi), itum, w. dat. - 
 3. assistance, send to-of , auxrlid ' 
 mitto, ere, rolsl, missum, w, • 
 arrival,, ad ventua, fls, M. \ ^^^ dai. and ace. 
 
 frow, sagitta, ae, f. ^ ■* . ^.«iiat, of time when^ tmc abl. 
 as=^/ice, ctim. '^ ;'^2. at^ of place wkerey use locative^* 
 
 2. t^m( after «d<!m, qui, quad,% or in and abl. ^ 
 
 quod. - 3. atfOfteT'COnjicidf in, w. ace. 
 
 3. am^ while, dum, cuiq> or atae 4. at onoe, statim, odv. 
 
 ■ prejjei^ participle. ■ 5. at, in phrase throw one's self/^ 
 
 4. as, si^n of apposition, xm- at feet, ad, w. ace. 
 trandated; -use appoaitive or Athens, AthSnae, ftrum, I'.y in ; 
 daiive of purpose. plv/r. only. : f,- ; 
 
 6. as soon as, simul atque. 1.. attack, verb, (of places), op-. 
 
 6. as— as possible, quani toith pflgiiS, are, avI, atum ; (of 
 supetii , . men), ag-gredior, I, -gressus 
 
 7. SL» to, use the genitive. '"Sum ; ad-orior, Irl, -ortuB^sum; 
 ascend, ascendo, ere, ascendl, impetum facere in, w. ace. 
 
 ascS]^um._ _ 2. attaofc, nonn, impetus, tip, M. # 
 
 1. attempt, verb (=»=^ry, "w. in- 
 ^Jinitive), cSnor, arl, atus sum ; 
 
 (=mdke an attempt on), temp 
 to, are» &vl,<fttum. * 
 
 2. atteml^t, make an-:, cCnor, 
 
 ^^■:/'- 
 
 . 7.,-;,-,.. .-J 
 
 iasoertaln, c5-gno8c6, ere, -gn6y 
 
 -gnitum. 
 ashamed, be—, pudet, impj 
 stmal. . 
 
 aside, lay— , d6-p<5 
 posul, -positum. 
 
 • Ths Btiion who |t tiilwj U 
 
 wltli fUMtn ta ttw *»i. with «b or 
 
 arl, atus sum. ^ 
 
 — _i 
 
 jn ths soa^ trith'fwtffl in ths ib! 
 
 .^. 
 
5, ere, 
 
 equest), 
 )tltum ; 
 
 quaesl- 
 lum.. 
 petivl, 
 
 1-6, ere , 
 
 eon- 
 
 im. , 
 
 J. m 
 
 6, fire, , 
 
 auxilid 
 
 . dat. < 
 auxrliS 
 im, w, 
 
 te ahl. 
 ocativCf 
 
 l;'t 
 
 /. 
 
 PART yj. — VOCABULARY. 
 
 631 
 
 X. avengre, ulciscor, I, ultus sum. 
 
 -^. avenge one's sel/ on (or 
 
 upon), ulciscor, I, ultus sum, 
 
 ,1/7. ace. 
 
 await, exspect5, Ire, S.vi, fttum. 
 
 away, take— , tolld, ere, sustull, 
 
 ' subl^ttum. 
 
 1»aok, t^rgum, I, n. 
 
 Imgrgragre, trnggrage animals, im- 
 pedimenta, 5rum, N. plur. 
 
 1>and, manus, tis, f. 
 
 bank, rlpa, ae, F. 
 
 bar, tftlea, ae, F. 
 
 iMtrbarlan, barbarus, I, m. 
 ' 1. battle, proelium, i, n. ; ptig- 
 na, ae, f. ^ 
 
 2. battle array, lln« of battle, 
 acigs, SI, F. 
 
 be, sum, esse, ful; to express dis- 
 tance^ tt^absum, abesse, ftful. 
 
 1. bear, fer6, ferre, tull, Ifitum. 
 
 2. bear on, fer6, ferre, tull, la- 
 tum. » 
 
 beat a retreat, s8 re-cipi9, ere, 
 -cepr, -ceptum. 
 
 1. beoaase, quod. 
 
 2. because of, propter, jprep., 40. 
 ace. 
 
 beoome, fI5, fieri, faotus sum. 
 X. before, prep, (of time and 
 
 place), ante, 4ki, ace. ; (of 
 
 place) pr6, W7. ahl.\ ( = n«ar) 
 
 apud, w. a^c. ; (with summon} 
 
 ad, w. ace. 
 .2. befofe, conj.f antequam, pri- 
 
 usquam. 
 l^g» 6r5, &re, ftvT, fttum. 
 1.^ 1>egrln, incipid, ere; for the 
 
 perfect tenses^ use coepi, isse, ' 
 
 coepiEus sum. 
 2. beirln battle, proelium com- 
 , mitts, ere, -mlsl, -missum. 
 befflnnlnir, initium, I, n., or nse 
 
 Belgians, Belgae, Srum, m. pliir. 
 believe, crgiijlo, e]fe,-didl, ditum,,' 
 
 w. dat. * 
 
 \f9n\\ become—, s§ In;:flect5, ^e^ 
 
 -flexl, '-flexum. ' . 
 
 beseech,, oro, ftre, fivl, Stum ; 
 
 impiord, fire, fivl, fttum : ob- 
 
 secrS, fire, fiyj, fttum. 
 bc;set, pb-side6, Sre, -sSdl, -ses- 
 
 sum. . 
 
 !• best, optimu,8, a um. 
 2. best armed, omfitissimus, a, 
 
 um. 
 bestow upon, dSno, fire, fivl, 
 . fitun), w. dat. 
 
 1. betake, re-cipiO, ere, -cSpI, 
 -ceptum., 
 
 2. betake one's self to nigh$, sS 
 fugae mandfire, (mandd, fire, 
 fivl, fitum). 
 
 X. better, melior, ius. 
 2. better, Itls— , praestaty fire, 
 impersonal. 
 
 betray, pr6-d6, ©re, -didi, -di- 
 tumi 
 
 X. between, inter, priep. w. ace. 
 2. between, be— ,inter-ced6, ere,- 
 
 -cessi, -cessum, ti?. inter and occ. 
 beyond, trfins, prep. w. aco. 
 Bibraotd, Bibracte, is, n. 
 bind, vin-ci6, Ire, -xl, -ctum. 
 bitter, gravis, e. 
 boast of, glorior, fill, fitus sum, 
 
 to. abl. 
 
 Boll, Bdil, 6rum, m. piur. "[ ^ '~^ 
 boldly, a'udficter. 
 boldness, audficia, ae, J» 
 bondage, servittls, -tfltis, F. .;* 
 X. border, noun, initium, I, n. ; 
 
 finis, is, M. (^ 
 
 2. border (=hem tn), con^^tineS, 
 
 6re, -tinul, -tentum. 
 born, nfttusf'a, um. 
 X. both . . . and, et . . . et. 
 2. both.uterque,utraque,utrum- 
 
 que,==gg d!L 
 
 f; 
 
 beluaf, on-of , prO^p»^ ic. odl. 3. b^, on— «IdM, utrimque; 
 behold, vided, 6rS, vidl, visum, bongh^ rftmus, I, M. 
 
^ 
 
 PRIMARY LATIX BOOK. 
 
 bo#.arcu8, 08, M.; abl. plnr.j L hum, ia-cend5, ere, -cendl.' 
 
 arcubus. -cSnsum. * 
 
 boy. puer^ ert, m. <, 2. burn up. com-bflro, ere,-bu8. 
 
 branob, ramus, i, M. V si, -bflfitum. 
 
 ' Jw»ve, fortis, e. . ' burrtln. ir-rump6, ere, -rtipL 
 
 bravely, fortiter. ^ -ruptum. ' *^ 
 
 *'*!i^*'^*- ^.^^*^' '**^^^®' fortita- busineu. negStium, i, n.; rSs» 
 
 -a6, -dims, F. ,. rel f. ' ' ,' « »• 
 
 1. break down, re-scmdo, ere, 1. but. sed. 
 
 -scidl, -scissiim. 2. but. ^who-not, quin. 
 
 ^. break out. co-pnor, M, -ortus 3. but. cannot-, facerenon posse 
 
 sum. qyj^ 
 
 J. break up camp, castra moved, buy up. co-emo, ere, -5ral, -gmp- 
 
 ere, mSvI, motum. turn. 
 
 bridgre. pons, pontis, m. by. fi, *ab, prep. w. abl, 
 
 1. brlnar, tero» ferre, tull, latum. r . 
 
 ^' hving(follmvedbyaeromm),tT&' 'O > w 
 
 v^ dflco, ere, -duxi, -ductum. Cwsar, Caesar, ^aris, m. 
 
 - }*^-^ ^*^^ (f-iectd back), re- 1. call ( = mmmon), voco, are, avi 
 
 dttco,, ere, -dOxI, -ductum ; atum ; ( = name), appello, are, 
 
 {=^00^ back), refero, ferre, avI, atum. x-r , , 
 
 rettull, relatum. 2. call togetheri convoco, are, 
 
 4. bring word, ntlntia, ate, avT, avI, atum. 
 
 , atum. camp, castra, 6rum, n., in piur. ' 
 
 o> bring back word^ renOntio, ordy. . * . 
 
 ft ^®' S.VI, atum. \oamp-follower, cal6, -onis, M. 
 
 o. bring In C= coif ect), comportS, can, possum, posse, potul. 
 
 are, ayi, atum; (^import), capable, be-of, possum, posse, 
 
 miporto, are, avi, atum. - W^^^'^' , V^ 
 
 jS^*"i5 "^®**' ^^^'^^P**'*^^' ^®» o©;Ive, captlvus, I, M. ' 
 
 ^avi, atum. capture, capio, ere, cepi, capJ^m. 
 
 ^ 1 J ^^ *'*® '***'• agmen care {= carefulness), diligentia, 
 
 ^ Clauds, ere, clausl, clausum. ae, f.; (^object of concern), 
 
 ». bring together.comporto.are, ctlra, ae, f. 
 
 avI, attim ; ^ coufero, conferre, oarefnlly. diligenter. 
 
 contull^ollatum. ,, carelessness, mdlligentia, ae, F. 
 
 Britain, Britannia, ae, F. l.\carry, fero, ferre, tuli, latum 
 
 Briton. Britannus, I, m. 1 {of carrying a report), per-fero, 
 
 broad, latus, a, um. / • -ferre, -tuli, -latum. 
 
 bronze, aes, a^s, it. 2. Aarry down, d6- jiciC, * ere. 
 
 brother, rrater, -tns, M. -jfcl, -jectum. 
 
 Brutns. Brtltus, I, m. - 3., carry off, ab-dflcd, eii^'dtLxI." 
 
 buffeting, contumglia, ae, F. ductum. 
 
 bmid, aedificO, are, avi, atum j 4 carry on, gerS. «W.^WML 
 
 facio, ere, fed, factum. gestum. -j* V •^^ 
 
 building, aedificium, I, n. 6. carry out, c5h-ici^, ere, -fgcf. 
 
 burden, onus. QPeris, y. -fi^^^nm 
 
 V-i 
 
 i^^: 
 
PART VI. — VOCABULARY. 
 
 533 
 
 5. carry over, /transpbrto, Sre, 
 
 • avi, atum. ) /i^^^Ib 
 
 case, since (p^ ^nhwMsh) this is 
 
 the—, quae cum ita^int. 
 cast, { = throw headlong), prae- 
 
 cipito, Sxe, avi, S,tum. 
 Castlcns, Casticus, i, M. 
 catile, pecus, -oris, n. 
 !• cause, no^m, causa, ae, F. 
 . 2. cause, verb, ctlro, are, fivl, 
 
 atum, vnth gerundive. 
 caution, with—, caute; with th« 
 
 greatest—, iise aiiperlative cau- 
 
 tissim§. 
 
 1. cavalry, nonn, equitStus, fis, 
 M. (in sing.); equites, um, M. 
 {inplnr.). 
 
 2. cavalry, adj., equester, tris, 
 tre. 
 
 3. cavalry-man, equ-es, Htis, M. 
 centre, use adj. medius, a, um. 
 centurion, centurio, -onis, M 
 
 1. ce rtain e ( =some), quidam,' 
 quaedam,quiddam or quoddam. 
 
 2. certain (=Jixed), 9$rtus, a, 
 um. 
 
 chain, vinculum, I, N.;l»tSna, 
 
 ae, F. ,.. .\ i. 
 
 ohallenare, Svoco, Sxe, ftvlj Stum. 
 , chance, c38us, lis, M. 
 
 1. changre, commiltatio, -5nis, F. 
 
 2. change, political—, novae res, 
 F. plur. 
 
 character, of such a—, talis, 
 
 adj. ' p. 
 
 chargre, place (put) in — of, pr^i^ 
 
 ficiO, ere, -f 6cl, -fectum, t«| 
 
 ace. and dat. 
 charioteer, tosedarius, T, M,. 
 1. chief, prin-ceps, -cipis, m.; 
 
 rSgulus, I, M. • 
 
 *. chief man, prin-ceps, -cipis, m. 
 
 3. chief power, rSgnum, I, n.; 
 imperium, i, n. \ 
 
 chiefly, maxim6. V 
 
 children, llberi,,5rum, m. 
 
 chosen p dSlSctus, a, 'um ; 6l6o- 
 
 tus, a, um. 
 circumstance, rSs, rdl, F. 
 citizen, civis, is, M. . 
 citizenship, civitas, -t&tis, F. 
 city, urbs, urbis, F. 
 diemency, clSmentia, ae, F. ' 
 cliff, mons^ montis, m. 
 
 1. close, verb, claudd, ere, clausl^ 
 clausum. 
 
 2. dose, be-^^t hand, ad-sum, 
 -Qsse, -fui. 
 
 closely, angUste. 
 
 coast, ora, ae, F. " ^ ^ 
 
 cohort, co-hors, -hortis, f. 
 
 collect ( = get togeiher)^ cogo, ere, 
 co6gI, coactum ; col-ligo, ere, 
 -ISgi, -ISctum ; (=sumrnon to- 
 gether), cbnvocS, are, avi, 
 atum I (=ctirry to mie pkice\ 
 dp^feris, c6nferre,,contuiI, col- 
 latum. ' . 
 
 color, color, -oris', M. 
 
 l^Mttpe, venid, Ir^, vSni, ven- 
 
 ". obnke often, ventitd^ fire, 
 avi, atum. 
 
 3. come togrether, cop-veni5, Ir6, 
 -veni, -ventum. 
 
 4. come up with, cfftt-seqwor, I, 
 sectitus sum, w. ace*. 
 
 5. come upcin, oc-ciirr6, ere, 
 -curri, -cursum^ w. Hat. 
 
 IjjBommand ( = ord!er), verb, ira- 
 sro, are, avi, atum, w. dat. 
 <• command, nqun ( = miUtary 
 power), imperiuni, 4, N.; («* 
 oi'der given), imperatum, I, n. 
 
 3. command, have-.of , be in—» 
 be at head of—, prae - sum, 
 -esse, -fui, w. dat. 
 
 4. command, clbief— , Summa 
 (ae, F.) imperil. 
 
 Dommander, imjierator, -5ris, 
 M. 
 
 faciff. ere^ fBcT. factum. 
 
 commits 
 
 ^oEoose , cR^o, ere, -16^, -ISc- 
 tum. . « ^ 
 
 -■- .1« -■:-.-.- 
 
 Oommlus, CommiUB,%l[. 
 eommon, commflnlfl|jC 
 
 r 
 
 
 %*. 
 
ii: I 
 
 534 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 1^1 
 
 .1 
 
 \'f 
 
 I, .locotus sum tere.t. (welfare) of, cSnsulA 
 
 comp&rij, ^ are, ftvl, ere, -ul, -turn, w. dat. 
 
 ^ ''_ consummate, suihmus, a, um. ' 
 
 .c6g5, ere, coSgl, coftc- contest (^battle), certftmen, 
 
 , . ' ■ ' ' V* *' ;j;,^mini8, n., pQgna, ae, f. : ( = 
 
 complain, queror, I, "que^us tmr), bellum, I, n. , 
 
 *"^' , continent, continSns, -entis, P. 
 
 °T?^',^!^_ *!jmiSiffi> »q"^^»^> ^ continually, continenter. 
 
 questu^jP^iW^ ,^ > continue, maneS, 6re, mftnsl, 
 
 complete, verB, coij-ficio, ere, mftnsum. 
 
 -fecl^ -fecturm - ' - convenient, idSlteus, a, um. 
 
 comrade, their comrade., sul, conversation, seraiC, -dnis, M. 
 
 orum M., idur l. Converse, Joquor, I, loifltus 
 
 conceal, occults, fire, avl,atum; suih. ^ ' ' 
 
 cgl6, toe, avi, fttum. 2- convert,, hold-, loquor. I, 
 
 *-<'«J»o«»n«. It-, interest; r§- locfltus sum. -^ 
 
 a 1- corn, frflmentum,5iN.' 
 
 £. concern, ohject of— .cOra, ae, 2. corn, supplies of—, rSs frfl- 
 
 o ^* J ^ mentaria, F., (t«et;i€OTW). 
 
 o. conderned^so far as I was-, Coita, Cotta,^ae, m. 
 perms. ^ . ««||p"» conciliun^^ n. - 
 
 r,^ c^try (= Zand), ^|r, agri, m. ; 
 finSs, ium, M.,aKnr.; (=■ 
 ground), locus,'!, M^^=atoieW 
 r6s pflblica, rel pflhliflk; ( ^ 
 native coimtry), patM^^, f. ; 
 
 
 per mS. 
 4. concernlnflr, d6, prep. w. fMi c^tr'y (=iand), 
 conclude ( = majfce), facio, ere, " ~ 
 jf J f6cl, factum. 
 
 mdltlon, condiciS, 6nis, p. ^ 
 
 infer upon, d6-fet6, -ferre, -tu- 
 
 lli 'lAtwn, w. dat. 
 confe^|i% colloijuium, I, n. , 
 confldenoe,yidflcia, aef, f. 
 
 {=^^ral dutrieta^ rOs, rty^ 
 couraire» vittfls, -tfltis, F. '""^' 
 
 ^ te^ljim. « . -2. course of action, rfis, rel, F. 
 
 ^. confusion, tumultus, fls, M. covet (= complete), c5n-fici«, ereC 
 *V^nJ>»*on, throw Into-, per- -feci, -factum. 
 ^mi^hdy are, a||,^ atuun ;i(|rrow ,„coward, Ignavus, I, M. 
 
 ^»to ffwa| *!^f%|fn, mag. Crasiu», i^rassus, I, M. 
 ., noijerepertui^^ .. <roj^; cross over. 4rfe, trRns-eC, 
 eomnmr, jmcum^mlcn, vie- .«^, -il(-lvl), -itum. 
 
 tmin; sj||fr5| toe, avi, atum. cruelty, crfldslitas, -tatis, f. 
 oonslder»Sptend, &re, avi, crush, frangfl, ere, frSgl» frJJ^* 
 
 1 ^^^yrn^K- 'A' / *"™5 QpprimS, ere, -pressi, ,. 
 
 Oonsldlus^Onsidius, I, m. * ^ -pressum. 
 
 consplre,c0njtlr6, are, avI, atum. ^custom, cOnsuSttldC, -dinis, F.: 
 
 consul, c5nflul, cSnAuhs, m. mOs, mSris, M. 
 
 consulship. In the-of, ii«e c6n- cut otti-^ intercept or shut off), 
 
 Bulmtheabl. ahadute. inter-cladS, ere, -clOsI, -ola' 
 
 1. consult, cOnsul-g, ere , -ul, au m ; («fctm in ter-fioia. ere. 
 
 -Ium, w, wic. .tscl, -feaW^T^^ 
 
PART VI.— VOCABULAKY. 
 
 685 
 
 -^ 
 
 '» '• J 
 
 m'-^ 
 
 ^. 
 
 -cia' 
 
 danger, periculum, I, N. 
 dangeroua, peiiculosus, a, um. 
 dare, audeo, ere, ausus suui. 
 dark-blne, caeruleus, a, um. 
 dart, tSlum, i, N. 
 date, the-of, use clatiae with 
 
 quando (=ti'^«n). 
 daughter, Mia, ae, F. 
 day, dies, ei, M. 
 d^y before, the — , prldiS. 
 daybreak, prima lux, iQcis, F. 
 dear, carus, a, um. 
 1. death, mors, mortis, F^ 
 . death, put to-» inter-ficid, 
 
 ere, -fScI, -fectum. 
 deelde (form a resolve), c5nstit-y 
 
 uo, ere, -ui, -atum ; (=/oi 
 
 anoptwtwi), jtldico, S.re, avl 
 
 fitum; {= adjudicate) de-cemp, 
 
 ere, -crevi, -cretum. 
 declare (=aMert),c6nfirm6, ate, 
 
 avi, atum ; { — make knouln), 
 
 pron^Jitio, are, avi, atum ; 
 
 {of declaring vxir), in-dlc5,/^e, 
 
 -dixi, -dictum. 
 deed, factum, I, N. 
 deep, altus, a, um. 
 
 1. defeat, 'verh, repellS/ ere, 
 reppuli, repulsum. 
 
 2. defeat, nmm, proelium ad- 
 versum, n. ; calamitas, -tatis, f. 
 
 defend, de-fendo, erp^-fen^I, 
 
 -fsnsum. . MSL i 
 
 dejection, tristitia, 
 delay, moror, arl, aH 
 delightful, jticundus, a, um. 
 demand, impero, are, avi, atum; 
 
 po8c6, ere, poposci. 
 dense, dSnsus, a, um. 
 deny, iMgo, are, avi, atum. 
 depart, dis-cedo, ere, -cessi, 
 
 -cessum. 
 1. departure, discessus, tls, M.; 
 
 profectio, -finis, f. 
 8. dffpartm^^^i^e o»MB**~>-J^g^ 
 
 deprive, dSspoli5, fire, Svl, 
 atum ; (of, expressed by aM.). 
 
 depth, altittldo, -dinis, f. 
 
 desert, destit-ud, ere, -ul, -Atum. 
 
 design, cox^siUum, I, N. 
 
 desire, cup-i6, ere, -IvI, -Itum. 
 
 despair^ be in despair, dSspSrS, 
 are, avi, atum]; (of == d§ w. abl.). 
 
 destination, reach—, locum ca- 
 pio, capere, cSpi, captum. 
 
 destroy, re-scina5, ere, -scidi, 
 -scissum. 
 
 destruction, pemiciSs, 51, f. 
 
 detain, re-tineo, Sre, -tinul, -ten- 
 tum. 
 
 deter, dSterreS, Sre, ul, itum ; 
 ^npedio, ire, Ivi, itum. 
 
 determine, c5nstit-ud, ere, -Ul, 
 -tltum. 
 
 devise, capio, ere, cSpI, cap- 
 tum ; in-eo. Ire, -il, -itum. 
 
 die , morior, mori, mortuus sum ; 
 vita (or § vita) dS-cSdo, ere,' 
 -cessi, cessum. 
 
 differ, differs, differre, distull, 
 dilatum* 
 
 different, alius, a, ud; in dif- 
 ferent directions, = some in 
 one direction, others in an- 
 other. 
 
 difflonlt, difficilis, e. 
 
 1. difficulty, difficultas, tatis, F. 
 
 2. difficulty, with—, vix, aegrg, 
 adv. 
 
 3. difficulty, with the greatest— , 
 aegerrimgj adv. 
 
 direct (=^ order), impero, fire, 
 avi, atum, w. dot. 
 
 1. direction, pars, partis, F. 
 
 2. directions, from all — , undi- 
 que, adv. ; or use pars (= quar- 
 ter). 
 
 3. direction, in what — , quam 
 in partem. 
 
 •disappointed in, dSjectus, a, 
 um. w. ahl. ; repulaua, a, um, 
 
 ced5, ere, -cessi, -cessum ; 
 pro-ficiscor, I, «fectus sum. 
 
 w. s^ and dbV. 
 disaster, calamitas, -tatis, F. 
 

 mmmn 
 
 < 
 
 lim 
 
 WIIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 IftjSS^^t^^ I, ffla<^« <:;J^-)' «e^^ ere. ge^ 
 *'^^5!;; <»ten.da, ere, -dl, -fcum, double, duplex, dhplidB. 
 ^ljoo^rt,com-movea,«rre,.m«. atum. w, are, avi. 
 
 iliIL^'?. n-S!!L«^ . 2. doirtifi Vumn, dubit&tiS, ^Snia, 
 
 oM^Krtrer, co-gnosc5, ere, -gnOvI, » . * 
 
 repertum. dubium (=aMno<rfotz6«iii). 
 
 to.^acef«l, trtfpfc, e. - 2. drow near. -apprtoacfc. 
 
 %^lfttm^'^"^"^' ere, -pull, 3. draw out.VveC ere, -yelli, 
 i#. xoum. -vulaum. 
 
 X'nT'*' ' ^~' "™'^'' -*• *~^ «iNln-sfcruo, ere,.sfcrQxI, 
 
 ji / j. •11. -«trflotum. 
 
 ^S&m • "*' ■"'**' fWM». "'«". 5rt, ita» ram. 
 
 *..puy, pr«.st«. ito, -rtiH. 2.1^wr^'^S ere rep 
 
 -pucitum, M>. rfai. <i. i^ j»"". 
 
 1 ^t- .^. • - ^ drive oir, sub-move6« Sre. 
 
 1. dl.po. tion, ammus, I, M -m5vl, -mStum. " ' ■ 
 
 •mX?ae?; '"-*'"'^-'-'l«- ^. drlveout, S-jici6, er^, -jgcl, 
 
 1. dlgtanoe. spafcium, I, n Dr«ld.. DniidSs, um, m. 
 
 di-?i'^T'***T* P'^"^;«^^- Dumnorlx. Dumnorik, -igis, m. 
 dljtont. be-, absum, abesse, tlurlnir.,i«eacc. o/*tmJ^l:>^ 
 
 tUtre... be to-, labOrO, ftre, ^"officiumT n f;^ ^- ^?'^' 
 ftvl, atura. ' ?5J"^JI' ^*) P^ae-sto, fire, 
 
 flw"V^' di8tanb-u«, ere, -ul, dweU. in-colo, ere, -colul. 
 
 dlgtrlot, regis, -dnis, F. ( e 
 
 ^tmm «,. ^^ utrumque; (ofmSreihanZo): 
 
 dlgturb. perturbs, are, ftvl,atum; quisqul, qW^ue, quidauTci- 
 c6m-move3, 6re, -m«vl, m«tum. qut^que ^^^^' quiaque pr 
 
 ?y^!/ S ^'--- - - - • l' eoge»-. ftlaoer, ork. ore. ^ 
 
 r^ d^, facio, ere, fec5l, faptum 
 
 \ 
 
 III. 
 
 eo,€re,^ 
 
 
PAftT . VI,r— VjOCABULAR Y. 
 
 687 
 
 ■r .1 
 
 rt--, 
 
 «aflr^rly, cupidS. 
 eai^erness, alacrit&s, -t&tis, F. 
 eagrle, aquila, ae, F. 
 early, m&tOrus, a, um, 
 earnestly, mSgnopere. 
 easily, faoile. 
 
 •nqntre, make enquiry, quaer5, 
 ere, quaesTvI, quaesltum. 
 
 enrol, c6n-scrib5, ere, -scrTpel,^ 
 -scriptum. 
 
 enterprise, rgs, ref, f. 
 
 entirely, t^e tdtus, a, um, adj. 
 
 I ■ 
 
 easy, faoilis, e ; very easy, per- entrust, com-mittC, ere, -misi, 
 
 lacilis, e. -mlssum. 
 
 eat, vescor, I (withcM.). envey, iSj^tus, I, M. 
 
 ef|ge, the water's—, lltu», -oris, 1. equal, vei-b, adaequo, are, fivl^ 
 
 N.(t=8hore). atum. 
 
 eigrht.octo. 2. equal, adj., par, paris. 
 
 eighteen, duodSvTgintT; ootSde- equip, armo, are, avi, fttum ; 
 
 decim ; decern et octo. 6m6, are, avi, atum. 
 
 eiirbth, octavus, a, um. , escape, 6-labor, i, -lapsus sum; 
 
 eighty, octSginta. ef-fugio, ere, -filgT, -fugitum. 
 
 --elect, CTeo, are, avi, atum. escort, praesidium, I, n 
 eleventh, findecimus, a, um. 
 
 else, alius, la, udi 
 
 especial, um praecipuS 
 cially. 
 
 espe' 
 
 embark, navSs c6n-8cend6, ere, establish^ confirmo, are, ftvl, 
 
 -scendl, -scSnsum. _ atum ; of establishing a prece- 
 
 embassy, l6gati6, -onis, F. dent, Instit-uo, ere, -ul, -atum. 
 
 encamp, con-sido, ere, -s§dl, ses- even, etiam ; not oven, n6 . . . 
 
 sum. quidem; even if, etiam si. 
 
 enconragre, cohortor, Sri, Stus 1. ©ver (=alvxiy8), semper. 
 
 ^""ft ' • 2. ever, for— , in perpetuum. 
 
 end, flms, is, M. \ 1. every, omnis, e; quisque, 
 
 endure ( = tderat^), patior, I, quaeque, quidque or quodque 
 
 passus sum ; (=withstand), =each. 
 
 ' per-fero, -ferre, -tuli, -latum. 
 enemy, hostis, is, M. (vMiaUy 
 in tfie plHr.). 
 
 2. every one, omnes, plut, ; or 
 
 quisque, mig., =each. 
 every thin AT, omnia ; omnSs r§8. 
 
 \, 
 
 i. ei|gafife>com-mitt6, ere, -misi, example, exemplum, I, n. 
 
 -missum. : excel, prae-c5d6, ere, -cessi, 
 
 2. engagre In, 'verSor, Sri, atus ' -cessum. 
 
 sum, w. in and abl; engage excellently, egregiS. 
 
 In (battle), com-mitto, epe, exercise (=«Aau)), tltor, i, iisus 
 
 -misl, -missuin. sum. 
 
 engcige with, c6n-flig6, ere^lbxhibit, dtor, I, Osus sum. 
 
 -flixi, -llictum, w. cum and abl. exhort, hortor, Sri, fttw sum. 
 
 4. engaged, occupatus, a, um. expect, exspeoto, are, avi, atum. 
 
 1. engagement, proelium, I, n. experience, tisus, tis, M. 
 
 2. engagement, during the—, extend, pertineo, Sre, ul. / 
 - while Jighting. extensivelyrltt^ 
 
 eingine, tormentum, SJ n. extent, magnitadS, -dinis, F. 
 
 enjoy, fruor, i, frQctus gum (w. extrem el y, maxim6 ( nr use tkp. 
 abl,), — — -— - —————— g^pgj^i degree). 
 
 ^ -. 
 
 * % 
 
638' 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 
 . . ' ^ ikfthv quiiltua; a, um. ' 
 
 faM, d§-fici6, erei -fScI, -fectum. dfty, quinquagints. 
 faithful, fidelis, e; fidus, a, um. 1. fl«rht, piigno, are, Svl, Stum. 
 '""ij*'""^' ^^^^^*®^J sunamS 2. flffht a*battle, proelium facio, 
 . OdS. . ; ere, feci,, factum. 
 
 1. taiii ^er6,'cad5, gre, cecidi, 3. flfphtlnfir, piigna, ae, f.; or 
 
 casum ; ,con-cid6f ere, -cidX. use gerund of pugnor- 
 2.. fall, noun, wors, mortis, p. fill, fill iy|>, com-pleO, 6re, -plgvL 
 (=cfea</i); calamitas, -tatis,F/ -pletu'm. , «^ 
 
 '< finally, dgnique. 
 3^*^ fl^d, reperio, Ire, repperi» ■ 
 
 /fame, fSma, ae, f 
 famons, praeclSrus, a, um. 
 far, longe ; too far, longius; 
 
 1. farttibr, oc^v, longius. 
 
 2. farther, odj., ulterioy, ^iis. 
 farthest, ultimus, a, tim. 
 fate, fortflna, d(3, F. " 
 father, pater, patris, m.^ "*' 
 father-in-law, socer, eri, m. 
 fatliraed) dSfessus, a, um. -,...-, 
 favoi^, probo, are^ ftvl, atum ; « "tuln.; 
 
 faveo, 6ro, fftvl, fautum. («;. 1. ' lire, Jfenis,. ii^ m. 
 
 dat. ) 
 favorable, idoneus, a, um. 
 
 1. fear, verb, timeo, Sre, -ui ;, 
 pertim-esco, ere, -ul ; vereor, 
 6rl, veritus sum: ^^ ^" 
 
 2. fefft*, noun, timor, ' -firis^ m.; 
 metus, as, M 
 
 feel, intel-leg6, ^r0,>-t6xl^ -16c- tkx(=appomiir^dlc9, ere,-i 
 tum. . / -dictum ;(t<Miite,>, dice, 
 
 •(use 
 
 -• i^pertum ; iu-venio, IrQ, -vgnl, 
 
 -ventum. ^" 
 
 '2. findLbnt, co-gnosqo, er% -gnfl- 
 vl, -^tum ;vpon^-p,erip, 4re» 
 -perl, ,-pertum. , . ' - \ -^ -^ , ' . 
 fine, pulclier, chra, cl^um,*^ - 
 ^ fliilshr per-fici6, ere,' -fSor,- -fdc-. , 
 turn ; oon-ficjio, >ere, fS^I, -fee- * . 
 
 2. fire, set-to, . in-cfend6^ ere," 
 ^ -cendl," -cgnsym, to. aec. \^ 
 
 nr»t, prfmus, a, um ; at 4rstt 
 
 primo. ■^ i ^»^ V ■< . - 
 
 fish, piscis, ispk.' .'* \ ' 
 five, qumquej fl-i^'lhuliare^j, 
 quingenti, je, a.# ' 
 
 dixl, / 
 ere,," 
 
 
 fee|[lnffs, animu^f I^ > m 
 , sing^: , 
 
 fellow-oltiB<Qn, clVis^Js, M. 
 fertile, fertilis, e ; fOTfi,x,.-acis. 
 few.bat few, paucl,ae,a; afew, — ,, ...j,., 
 
 nonnOlll, ae, a; very fe»«, per- Heet, classis, is, f. 
 _ pauci, ae, a. ««,«, caro, carnis, F.' 
 
 1. Held, ager, agri, M. 1. lHnht, f^», »«, F. 
 
 2. nelAi^JUld of battle,, Ua^ve .2. fligrht, Vtake to-, 86' fugae 
 
 •dixl, dietuihSJI^i^^ 
 flag, v6xillum, I, K. «1^1» 
 flank, latus, -eris.N. 
 flee, c6n-fugi6, ere, -f Ogi ; fiigis, 
 
 ere; fflgl, fugitum. 
 
 y,f 
 
 iO 
 
 
 the fleld, proefi5^x-ggdo, ere, 
 -oessi, -cesau^ 
 3i fleld, take th«-, i^rma sQmS, *<iow, flu5, er0^, fluxl,%uxum.'! 
 
 , ere, mandftre, (mando, l^r^ ttvl, 
 * '■■^.^:fAtum).- - . ■ r ^!*- %« ■•>,; 
 Urns, flow, flu5. er0^. fluxl. fluxum. ^*'* "^* 
 
 
 ! ' i 
 
 ere, sQmpsr, sflmbturii; ad^ 1. follow, sequojw L «ecMu» .1 
 , bejlum pro-fioi8cdr,\r, -fectus ^^^^^-^ -^-.^--^^*.~^:---^^-..r^. ^ 
 
 *"™* .- , \ 4? -2. follow v»|]u per:»equor,T, #e- 
 flerpe, iw*" ftcntef . f ... V' dltus sunvf 
 7lf!rit,er. r : -'' w " 
 
 * '■' ■ 
 
 T • 
 
 
 flprgeliTi 
 
 8; fylluw»*H jf T 
 
 6djn pt 
 
 «tof Ui, hn^ ■■ 
 
 fifteen, <iuIndeoim. 
 
 IS' 
 
 "CE*! 
 
 ^< 
 
 ^1*' r^. umMnsequfin», -epti». *^^^ 
 
 
 t 
 
 it. : / -. ■ ■ , w V -.-■.. 
 
 
.vT, Stum, 
 ium facid, 
 
 le, F.; or 
 
 re, -plSvI, 
 
 ■ . > 
 
 repperi, * 
 [re. -vgnl, 
 
 9r% -,'g^d> :'- 
 
 Bcip, -Ire» 
 urn,*, ; 
 fsk -fee- ' 
 
 i5i erey '^ 
 
 tec. 
 
 at flrst» 
 
 jre, -dlxl, 
 die6, ere^.. 
 
 I; fiigiO, 
 
 }8' fugae 
 
 I" 
 
 ^ •i^: 
 
 xum. '• ** 
 
 .1: 
 
 PART VI.— VDCABULARlr. 
 
 580^ 
 
 4. follows, a»—, hic, haec, hoc. 
 follower, camp-, cSlo, -5nis, M. 
 folly, amentia, ae, f.; stultitia. 
 
 ae, F. 
 
 ^r, I, lie* : ' 
 
 
 «/ 
 
 < '.' 
 
 food, cibus, I, M. 
 
 Ik foot, pSs, pedis, m.; on foot, 
 
 pedibus. 
 
 ««: foot, at the— oi, sub, wUh abl. 
 
 footsoldier, ped-es, -itfis, m. 
 
 .1- for (of motion towardt)^ in, 
 
 ad, w. aec. ; (wiih reason), d6, 
 
 w. abl.; (of . purpose), ad and 
 
 . Qertindor gerutidive; (of time 
 
 ^ how long),'^ ace. mlly ; (with 
 
 infiniti^ clause) untranslated : 
 
 A ^"^ arrangements for the fn- 
 
 t tiire), in, w. acc,',(i=.on behalf 
 
 of), pro, m ahl. 
 2. foi^, conj., nam. 
 
 . 'forbearance, m&nsuSttld5, -di- 
 nis, F. 
 
 forbid, veto, p,re, vetui, vetitum. 
 
 1. foWe, verb, com-pell6, ere, 
 -pull, -pulsum. ^ 
 
 2. force, noun ( = violence), vis, f. ; 
 forces ( =5= troops), cdpiae, ^nim, 
 F. plur. ^ 
 
 3. forced (of a march), ihfignus, 
 a, um. ■ j^ 
 
 ford, vadum, I, n. >I 
 forest, silva, ae, F. tf . ' , ^ . 
 forever, in perpetuum. 
 «brgret, ob-llvis*or, J, -lltus sum, 
 
 to. gen. 
 h fotm ( = make), faciS, ere, 
 iSoi, factum ; ^vith cSnsilium, 
 , , capis, dre, c6pl, captum. 
 2. form («rfmt» itp), In-struC, 
 ere, -strflxl, -strQctuih. 
 , former, pristinus, a, um. 
 forsake, di8-c6d6, ere, -oessi, 
 ; -cessum, «?. ab atid aW. 
 jjbrt, castellum, I, n, ^ ' \ 
 rfortlfloattort, manltifi, -5niii, ir.j 
 I* opu8,>«ris, n; . , • 
 Ibrtlfir, mflnid; tn, fvHt fttmii. 
 foitty, qimdrilgirtUb- ^ ^ 
 
 «forward, send—, prae-mitt5, ere, 
 -misi, .-missum., ' 
 
 four, quattuor ; four hundiijd» 
 quadringentl, ae, a. * 
 
 fonrth, quftrtus, a, um ; three- 
 fourths, = three parts; " 
 
 1. free, verb, llberd, ire; ftyl» 
 fttum. 
 
 2. free, a^j., liber, era, erum* 
 .f|!eed, liberfitus, a, um. v V 
 freedom, lib^rtfis, -tfitis, », 
 freely, llberS. 
 
 frequent, c^gber, bra, brum. "-^ 
 fresh, mte^er, gra, grum. 
 friend,' amicus, I, Mi ; often ex- 
 pressed by possessive prgnounS^ 
 
 friendly, amicus, a, um. 
 flrlendshlp, am^itia, ae, F» ' 
 frigrhtful, horridus, a, um. 
 
 1. from, a, ab (=auwy from)^ 
 ex (= out of); from^ which, 
 unde ; (with ,verbs of taking 
 aivay), me themt.; (J/^^er- 
 und in -ing), ^uln, quominui, 
 i&. s^ibjunctive. 
 
 2. from* be — , absum, abessel 
 alul.< ^ 
 
 , front, In— of, pr6, w. aW. ; awte, 
 
 w. aM.\^^ ^^ . ; , , . .; -^ -'.,,.. * 
 fnflritive«f' »</bM fteeing. . , 
 full, plenus, aj um. 
 furnish, order to-^,imper5, are, 
 
 avi, atum (w. dat. cjf person» 
 
 %. 
 
 4 
 
 ordered, ace. of that io 6« jur- 
 ■ ntsMdy. — ,-'-^.,_r_--^-.^^- .' -.^^-_ 
 
 1, ffaln, pbtipr, Irl, Itus sura, 
 
 :*^. ahl.; ^-ipisc», I, -eptus 
 
 sum, w. aec. « 
 
 2. Drain a reql^st, i 
 
 AvI, atum. ,^ .» 
 Gallba, CaIba,^Ae, 
 irallaAtly, acriter. « 
 Gallic, l^alMlte^, utf» ; or use 
 
 Qalldrum. 
 
 itrd, &re» 
 
 C4 ■ ^ 
 
 garriwu, piacBidiun iTTpng 
 
 
 A»- 
 
 # ^Urtw^anh, quadraggnl, ae, a. „, gate, w»rta, ae.^. . m, ,, 
 
H 
 
 f 
 
 i: 
 •■/ 
 
 'A 
 
 if 
 
 If 
 
 % 
 
 540 
 
 P;|IMARr XATIN BOOl^ 
 
 \ 
 
 «ather, cogo, ere, CoggI, <jo-' Greek, Graecus, !, m. 
 actum. "^ 
 
 - ^ ^ - grievance, dolor, -oris, M. 
 
 il.Qanlt {the country)^ GSHiaV '^Ivj^ronnd {^position), locus, 
 
 2. Gaul (a na*ii;e o/ Gaul), Gal- 2". «rroand, stand (hold) one's-, 
 lus, I, M. % 4«? consists, ere, -stitl; sus-tineS, 
 
 - . lyeneral, imperator, -oris,^ m^ ' r* Sre, -tinui, -tentum. 
 
 Geneva, Genava, ae, F. ^ '8l «round, provisions of-born, 
 ««entleness. dementia, ae, f. i;molita cibftria, orum, n. 2^ur, 
 
 Oerman, Germanus, I, m.; or n4. grround, on the-that, quod. 
 a4j.y Germftnus, a, um. 1. «nard, verb, custodio, Ire, 
 
 . 1. gret, nanciscor, I, nactus or iy|,' itum. *« «^ ; 
 
 _^^^ ^^ J^nctussum. 2. guard, ?Wi% praesidium, 
 
 ' 2. fret ready, expedio, Ire, IvI, i, n. * ^ 
 
 -' Itum. . ., i^lde, dux, ducis, m. , 
 
 > 1. irlve, do, dare, dedl, datum. irntity, flnd^, condemns, fire, 
 
 2. give orders, impero, are, avi, avi, atung». . , 
 fitum. • ^ \ 
 
 3. give np ('^ hand over), trtk-dS, h 
 
 erk, -didi, -ditum ; (=aban- -^ ^ 
 
 ^» don), dS-sisto, ere,. -stiti, w. ha,\t a. mile = Jive h^tdred paces, 
 «W. I halt, con-sisto, ere, -stitl.' 
 
 florlotts, pulcber, chra, chrum. 1. hand, manus, Os, f.' 
 . go, e6. Ire, il (IvI), itum. 2! hand down, pr5-d6, ere, 
 
 2. iro forth, ex-e6, -Ire, -il^ ^ v ^dicll, -ditum. 
 ^ i*uiii. ^3. .hand, beat — ,^ ad-sum, -esse, 
 
 , 3. go out, ex-e5, -Ire, -il, -itum. f ul. 
 
 4. go outside, 5-gredior, I, -gres- 4. hf|nd over, "trft-do, ere, -didI, 
 BUS sum, IV. extra and ace. ditum. 
 
 6. going, to be-on, fI6, fieri, 5. hands, at the-H»r, ft, ab, w. 
 , factus sum ; geroi', I, gestus aU. 
 
 sum. hang out, pr6-p5n5, ere, -posul, 
 
 6. going, tobe-to,i'M/M^pai^. -pbsitum. 
 *^ X in .flrus aiwi sum. happen, aecid<5, ere,-!, ; flO, 
 
 _: gone, be — , discessi, isse. . ' fieri, factus aurti.v^^^^,^'/^^^^^^ 
 
 government, rds pablica, ref harass, lacess-(^, ere, -fyf, -Ttum. "^ 
 pflblicae, f. .' harbor, portuB, tls, M. * 
 
 ^ , irnOili frrtmentum, I, n. 1. hard, difficilis, •. 
 
 ! irrant, do, dare, dedl, datum. 2. hard pressed, to b©-^, pre- 
 
 «refit, mSgnuH, a, um; mor, I, pressus sum; urgeoir« 
 
 how great, quantus, a, umf HA» 
 
 '■'**' so groat, tantus, a, um ; harm, nocefl, 6i:e, ul, itum, w. 
 
 \ ■; very great, niAximus, a, ufltr dat. ; Isedfl^ erit, liws l, jaesmp, . . 
 v^ -grroatest, m&ximus, a, liim ; or to. ace.^ 
 / : 'iueadv., mftximS. haste, make— , mfttflrO, ftre, ftvl, 
 
 «reatly, mftgnopere, mftgnS' fttum ; oonten-dd, ere, -dl, 
 
 opere ; how greatjy, quant i o 
 
 itum. 
 
 pere ; quantu opere» 
 
 hasten, oonteA-d5, ere, •dl,-tuiii4 
 
 # 
 
 * 
 
 ..'"> ■ 
 
 ••■ M 
 
 :*^ ; 
 
 i " 
 
■u 
 
 PART VI. — VOCABULARY. 
 
 541 
 
 3, M. 
 
 %), locus, 
 
 d) one*»—', 
 sus-tineo, 
 
 I of— isorn, 
 
 I, N. 2)i^^^' 
 
 It, quod. 
 >di5. Ire, 
 
 aesidium. 
 
 \ »■■ 
 
 nnS, fire, 
 
 J* : 
 red pcicea. 
 
 d5, ere, 
 am, -esse, 
 are, -didi, 
 S, ab, w. 
 :«, -posuT, ' 
 
 -hi fl«. 
 
 •-»-, pre- 
 ; urgoo?, 
 
 itum, w. 
 [, la 6(wim.- 
 
 , ftre, ftvi, 
 w», -dl, 
 
 >dl,-tum« 
 
 #> 
 
 &. haT«, habed, Sre, uT, itum; 
 
 (=catMe), cflro, fire, fivl, &tum. 
 2. hav^B to ( — mtisty, vse geruri' 
 
 dive ivitk Aum» ,' 
 
 lie, is ; SB. ,■ - /,;^' ■ 
 
 1- head, cap-ut, -itis, m. 
 2. head, be at the— of, prae- 
 
 sum, -ease, -ful, txj. da*. 
 '-headlonflr, prae-ceps, -cipitis. 
 , health, be in fpood — , valed,§re, 
 
 ul, itum. 
 hear, hear of» audio. Ire, IvT, 
 
 ^ ^ Itum, w.acc. ^— — ^ 
 
 bearlnflTr without a—, indiictfi 
 
 causA. ' 
 
 1. heart, animus, I, m. 
 
 ^ 2. heart, lose — , animumi dS- 
 mitto, ere, -misl, -^lissum. 
 
 heavy, graviSj^eTV 
 
 h heiflrht (of mea^remeni)^ al- 
 titadS, -dinis, p. 
 
 2. 1ielfrht(=a high place), su- 
 perior locus, I, M.; (in plur., 
 superiora loca, N.). 
 
 3. helKht of madne^, summa 
 dSmentia, '^extreme madness. 
 
 help, auxilium, L N. 
 Helvetian» H«v6tius, |, pif*] 
 
 adj., HelvStius, a, um. / '# 
 Helvetil, Hel%«til, 6*um; M. 
 hem In, con-tineS, ire, -tinul, 
 
 •tentum. ^ J 
 hesitate, dubiro, Sre, fivl, fttum. 
 hesitation, cunctatio, -on is, f. 
 hide^ 86 abdere, (ab-dd, ere, 
 
 -didl, -ditum). 
 1' hijirh, altua, a, um; —^^at, 
 
 mdgnus, a, um. 
 2. hinher (of position), superiQi*, 
 
 lua. 
 
 
 3. hiffhest, summtis, a, um« 
 km, collis, is, M. ; np the hill, 
 
 . ■ adverso coUe. — 
 
 iiltnsolf, i{)su, a, um; s6. 
 .hinder, impedio^Ire^ IvI, Itum; 
 prohibeo, Pro, ul, ituin. 
 
 1. hold, <^e<$; gre, tenul, ten- 
 tum. , 
 
 2. hold a levy, dSlSctum 
 habed, gre, ul, itum. 
 
 3. hold out, sus-tined, Sre, 
 -tinul, -tentum. • 
 
 4. hold (of holding poioer), ob- 
 tinep, 6re, -tinuj, -tentum. 
 
 5. hold (== regard), habed, Sre, 
 ul, itum. 
 
 home, domus, fls, f.; domicili-v 
 um, I, N. ; at home, doml. 
 
 honor, omamentum, 1,1». ; hon- ^> 
 or, *6ri8, m. ; .^ \, 
 
 1. hope, verb, Spaftj, fivjB, -JBLv, 
 fttum; exspeoto, fire, fivl, 
 fttum ; (for express by acc^. . 
 
 2. hope, noun, spgs, spel, f. 
 horse, equus, I, m.; (=camjA/), . 
 
 equitfitus, as, M. 
 horseman, eqU-es, -itis, M* 
 hostage, ob-ses, -sidis, M. ''\ 
 hostile, inimlcus, a, um. . 
 
 hour, hdra, ae, f. 
 how (=«n what manner), iqud- 
 " modo ; (i=6y tvhat route),' q\i&;. . 
 how flrreat, how lar^e, quan- 
 tus, a, um ; how steatly, ' 
 quantopere, quanta opere ; 
 how many, quot (indeclinable^ ) 
 however, quamvls. 
 humanity, hdmfinitfis, -t&tis, V. 
 hundred, centum. , l ' , . 
 
 1. hurl, con-jioiC, MW, .Jirit| 
 -jectum. - - • •- 
 
 2. hurl back, rS-jici5, ere, -jSel, ' 
 -jectum. 
 
 hurt, of-fendd, ere, -fendl, •Ush 
 
 If ( « tn case that), si ; ( ^^.whetherjf 
 «um ; as If, quasi, velut? 
 
 
 «*-.;; 
 
 ■f'.. 
 
 Wtlwr, w^M citoriur, imi» 
 
 Mnafrihe, ixnU\ fire, fivl, fttuml 
 Itninudinteiy, statiui. « 
 
 imniensts JngSVis, -entJH. 
 
 *ry 
 
 .. *^i' 
 
 «i 
 
 ; '♦■ 
 
 » . 
 
 ipimlnent perii,ob8idio, >-oni8yF< 
 
 ••r 
 
 ^ 
 
 ,' r^- 
 
 ■'■ '''\" 
 
^^^^^^^^p^ 
 
 542 
 
 I^IMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 lmi>a««able, impedltus, a, urn. inform, xjertiSrem . (o^rtiSrSsi 
 
 Important, inSgnus, a, um ; facio, efe, fScI, factum ; of,=* 
 
 most important, summus, a, d@, w. (iM. 
 
 ""^' „. inhabit, in-col6, erie'i -colul. '/ 
 
 impossible, be, rise possum. I inlieritanoe, hgrtditfla, .-tfttis, F. 
 
 impress, com-moveo, ere, -mOvI, injure, noce6, 6re, ul, itum, to. ' 
 
 -mStum. ^ dat. , 
 
 in, m, prep. w. aU. injury, injOria, ae, r. 
 
 incensed, be ... at, exar-desco, inland, interior, ius. 
 
 ere, -si, -sum, tv. abl. inquire, qijiaejrd, ere, quaesIvT, 
 
 inclose, con-tine6, §re, -tinul,, quaesltum ; rog6, Are, ftvl, 
 
 -tentum. , fttum. 
 
 increase, ftug eo, 6re, ao xl, auc - inroad, incursio, -«nis, F^__' 
 
 *'"™* . it. "" instead of, pr5, w. aU. < 
 
 incredible, mcrSdibilis, e. instruct, prae-cipi3, ere, -c5pl, 
 
 incur, adimtto, ere, -misl, -mia- -ceptum, w. dat; jubeS,- ere, ' 
 
 ^"™- J J jussi, jussum, tf". occ. 
 
 induce, ad-dac6, ere, -dttxl, -due- insult, contumSlia, ae, F. 
 
 *^""^- . , insultingly,' Insolenter. 
 
 indulflre, indulxgeS, Sre, -si, intend (lute future paHic. in 
 
 -tumfW.dat. - «tlrus anc^ sum). - : 
 
 indnlilrenoe, shotv — ,. indul-geO, intercept, inter-cipio, ere, -<*pL 
 
 ere, -si, -tujn, w. da¥. -ceptum. 
 
 inevitably, me necesse est. interest, be of—, interest ; rS- 
 
 inexperlenced, imperltus, a, um. fert. , 
 
 infant, In-ffins, -fantis, M. ^ Interpreter, inter-pres, -pretis. 
 
 infantry, peditfttus, As, M, ; pe- 
 
 destrSs cdpiae, f. plnr. y 
 inferior, Interior, ius. 
 1. infliet {ofp{mi$hment\ sflmS, 
 
 H. 
 
 into, in, w. ctcc. 
 invade, in-gredior, T, -gteflsus 
 
 sum, w. intra arid ace. 
 
 ere, sflmps!, sttmptum ; (upon, invite, aroeas-S, ere, -IvI, -Itum. 
 
 d6, w. aW.); (of injury), l^- 1. iron, ferrum, I, N. 
 
 ferC, ferre, intull, illfttum ; 2. Iron, of—, ferreus, a, ura. 
 
 (wpon, expre»» by dat.). 
 
 'w* InlHct death upon oneself, 
 
 mortem con-scIscOi ^e, -i^AvI, 
 
 "Scltum, w. dat. - 
 
 island, Msulaj ae, r. 
 Italy, Italia, ae,.!*. 
 
 ■^1 
 
 Irt influence, verb, ad-dflcS, ere, »^„^,„ «ilnm V •» . fsi.,» » 
 
 -daxi, -ductum ; per-mive<); «^^J*""' P""™' ^' *i ^^""* V 
 
 «re, -mOvI, -mOtuni ; im-pelld, ^^ J »^**i. n*ru>ii..»i ^». ««;**« 
 
 ere, -pull, -uulsum. ' ^ JL ^.tat^Ti» ™^^'*^^^ 
 
 t* m 'I ^ \-Mi«t-A* ®**» -niM, -missum. 
 
 . influenoe, tryt«> — ,^mmumi, »«„-«-» it5«r i(^in»ria «r 
 
 &ra «vT* fttimi ' Journey,. Iter, itmens, W. 
 
 ye. ftvi, fttum. . Judire, jftdio<J, are, ftvl, mmi 
 
 -tatiH,^., gratia, aeir, indjrment, oOiisilium, I, k.- 
 
 Hlliuentlal.he-.vAled, e**iMiI. J^^^ j^^^ ^,^ ' ' . . 
 
 — y^ 
 
 • I 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 l4 
 1 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 , 1« 
 
 ' mi 
 
 2. 
 
 1« 
 la< 
 
 i 
 
 1. 
 
 -. V », 
 
 .«\ 
 
 i**-.' 
 
\. \ 
 
 QdrtidrSs) 
 n; of»:* 
 
 v-t&tis, r. 
 itum, to. 
 
 quaeslvf, 
 Ire, avi, 
 
 re, -cSpI, 
 be5, ere, 
 
 ». .- 
 
 irtic. in 
 
 re, -cepi, 
 
 •est ; r§-. 
 
 -pretis, 
 
 -gfeosus 
 ii -Itum. 
 um, 
 
 
 t. 
 
 I. 
 
 • I 
 
 PART Vr.— -VOCABULARY. 
 
 543 
 
 •" < II 
 
 ^ 1. lead, dac6, ere, dQxI, duc- 
 1. keep,'>^con-tme6, 6re,,s*tinul, *""*» ( = infltience), ad-dtlc5, 
 
 -tentum. ew, -dOxI, -ductum. 
 
 Z. keep apart, dis-tine5, Sre, ^' '««d «cross, trans-dilcS, effe^ 
 -tinul, -tentum. -dOxI, -ductum, often w. two 
 
 ^3, koepfrom, prohibeS, 5re, ul, accusatives. ' 
 
 itum, w?. t>^n., or m;. ab ond 3. lead back, re-dac6, ere, -dttxr, 
 abl. -ductum. 
 
 4. keep off, prohibeo, 6re, ul, ** ****** <>"*» 6-dilc6, ere, -daxli- 
 
 itum. " -ductum. 
 
 Kill, inter-ficio, ere, -f6cl, -fee- '««dor, dux, ducis, m. / 
 
 tum ; oc-cId6, ere, -cidi, -cisum . leadership, principatus, (Ig, m/ 
 
 kind, of what— , quftlis, e. *• leadlngr man, prin-ceps, 
 king, r6x, r€gis,^M. ' -cipis, m. / 
 
 know, scio, ire, IvI, Itum. - ^* loadlngr I»laoe, priDoipfttiii» . 
 
 ^ ^'^ "leap down, dS-siliS, Ire, -spidi 
 
 ' Lablenns, LabiSnus, I, M. i^ «a' ;^ - y 
 
 1. lack, car^; 5re, ul,\.. «W. '•"^t^^''''' ''"' t^ 
 
 dSfS!'^*^^' '^''"™' ^'^^' *«••*' red^mC, ere, -eW-Bmp. s 
 
 ladcfeif, scala, ae, f. ^ * t *!f*' / , , . . ° , 
 
 lake, iacus, fla, ii. 1- leave {^leave behtnd), ra- 
 
 tm^er), terra, ae, f ^^ *' '?^ ^1'; -««^^' -^'««^»™. ^- 
 
 na. on , pedester, tns, tre, i, -gressus sum^ w. ex mui aW. 
 
 . 4. ia„d, i«r6, S-gredior. L -ares 1*!^^ ""}**^^ '^ ^™"^" V * '^ 
 «68 aim 8™"»°'^» ^. gJ*e8- ^ legrlon, legij, -finis, p. l\ 
 
 lannaM Uniniit «*» - - lefirlonary, leglSnariu», I, M. ' 
 
 ^^Sr^ferum;- ' 'e^^/er5,fer„,..ulI,W 
 
 . how lar,e, quantus, a, uiftf .,..., minui; «if. 
 
 Tery large, mftximua, a, um. lest, nS. ^ ' ' , 
 
 ^. larger, maj-or, -us. .i^^^er, litterafe. llrum. p vlui • 
 
 ^U^^l^'^' '♦ >*% dS-mitt5j|^,.mI«; 
 
 B, ere, 
 
 1^».» : ,.pdo,. w! «« .;:;': u.^i^cri^i.. ^ » 
 
 f , 
 
 ». 
 
 •^K "^ 
 
 1-: 
 
I 
 
 111 t 
 
 r 
 
 t 
 
 I' . 
 
 1% 
 _i_ 
 
 544 
 
 PRIMARY L«TI*N BOOK. 
 
 life, vtt^ ae, F. 
 
 1.«- vtl». ae F magistrate, magist^tufl, Ob, M. / 
 
 . like, similis, e, w. dot. 
 likely, be-to, i«c /wfcure |)ar- 
 ttctjpie m -arus i/ntfe sum ; .or 
 vols, velle, volut 
 
 1. line, line of battle, aci§B, 
 
 6i, F. : 
 
 2. line of marob, agmen, -nun- 
 is, M.' 
 
 linger, moror, Sri, atus sum. 
 , 1. UtUe. a—, paulum ii^nte). 
 — r-- nRiiln. adv. *»1_1e!L_^ 
 
 2. make a malch, iter (gen, 
 itineris, n.) f*cio, ere, i6ci, 
 factum. ' > 
 
 3. make ready, compart, fire, 
 &V1, itum. 
 
 4. make use of, Ator, I, tisus 
 ' sum, w. abl. ' 
 
 5. make war, Oellura infero, in- 
 ferre, intull, lUatura ; (on, ex- 
 pressed by dm.). 
 
 I. man, vir,- viri; M.;, homS^ 
 
 '(on, expressed by abl). 
 load, onero, axe, avi, mm. 
 lofty, ^tus, a, urn. v^ . 
 
 1. long,' adj-^ longus, a, um. 
 
 2. long, ad»., dia ; longer, 
 
 diatius. '--' 
 
 3. long.aB-a», dum, «0»y. . 
 lose, a-mitto, ere, -ml8i,_-mi8- 
 
 possessive pronoun. 
 
 2. man, to a-f , ad ttnum omngs. 
 
 manner, ratio, -5ni8, F. 
 
 many, m«l^' »6' »•' t//oIiW' 
 by anoth&r adjective, supply et 
 or -qae^ —and; bow many» 
 quot, indeclinable; so many, 
 tot, indeclinable ; very many, 
 permultl, ae, a. 
 
 2. marob, noHW, iter, itineris, N. 
 
 3. marob. \ine of-, agmen, 
 
 minis, N. 
 
 Ml batUe), d6per-d6, ere, -didi, 
 
 -ditum, or amitto. 
 1. loss, detrimentum, I, N. 
 2 loss {= disaster), calaravtas, 
 
 ft 
 
 loss (^disaster), c»i»iuiw», -nni.xo, .,. 
 
 Sti! F ; ( = dwatiwntog^), 4. marobing, noun, itep, iti- 
 
 dStnraentum, I, N. ; (c>f io*. °«"*' ^ J.„. r m ' • 
 
 inbaUle), ly amitt6 = io^, or Mar.«^^««, t^_. ^^^^ 
 
 . interfici6=««ai/. ■ ""^'''^'ja aUhJit datum 
 
 loud, magnus, a, um. marsb,"paljtef Odi., F. 
 
 love ^W, ere, -l6xl, -l6cHi»; MassUl», Massiba, ae, F. ^^ 
 
 , Knmilia e i JtUB sum, w. oW. * n 
 
 SrX, M6B, er, P. w V - 1- »'-»"'. '«'•• "'• '• „v,|' • 
 
 **'^ ^ - - • • - . , 2. mirtiter, no— bow, quaravi* 
 
 may^ licet, impersonal w. fiat. 
 mean, volo, velle, volui, w. dahr 
 * of reJUadvB pronoun. , *«'. 
 
 "nuMle. be-^> fig, fieri, factus 1. means ("ti>e<i«nm), r§s, «a, 
 
 BMMln«Ml 1«»««. -*«%'*• , ^ -^ 
 
 •Luolas, Ltlcitts, i, M. 
 
 SST" -9 — ^ i - - 
 
 
 ~ paulo, «<*v. ^'i^^ .^. "-^ ' ^ I («««Zdier), mil- t 
 
 2. little, be wltbln a very- of. ^ 2^ S«' «]' or jLn bv the 
 minimum abesse, w. quin. ,^ es, -itis, m^, or o/wn oy 
 
 Uve, vivo, ere, vjxi, victiwi^ 
 
 
 ^-»- — 
 
 -^^ 
 
 •■ 
 
 1 
 
 t - -, 
 
 . >1 
 
 
 '■'^^ 
 
 ,"/ 
 
 ' ^ ,U^ 
 
 
 w- 
 
 
 ■ 11 
 
 ,i^ 
 
 
 ^^:- 
 
 \ 
 
 V - 
 
 n 
 
 ' 
 
 n 
 
 
 n 
 
 
 n 
 
 
 n 
 
 '■ 
 
 n 
 
 
 ni 
 
 
 ni 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 .■■« 
 
 ,. 
 
 M 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ,.. 
 
 
 
 ii 
 
 
 as 
 
 
 If 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 • k 
 
 
 ra( 
 
 
 - m< 
 
 
 m^i 
 
 .■^ 
 
, tlfl, M. *'■■- ' ' 
 
 
 factum. • 
 
 
 >r (gen, 
 
 *, f6cV ^ . 
 
 ^ 
 
 pB, are. 
 
 ; 
 
 i, tisus 
 
 r 
 
 fero, in- 
 
 ;' ;';^-.,-. 
 
 (on, ex- 
 
 
 hom^i 
 5r), mll- 
 i hy the 
 
 .1- -V, 
 
 I omnSs. 
 
 * 
 
 ■ ', ■, 
 
 followed' 
 upply et 
 
 '■'■- -. 
 
 many» 
 
 ' '\ 
 
 many* 
 
 . .■:. \ 
 
 y many. 
 
 ..*' 
 
 cio, ere, 
 X march $ 
 
 V ■ 
 
 turn. 
 
 
 ineris, N. 
 
 
 agmen, 
 
 ■ 
 
 itey, iti- 
 
 nflptum 
 I, datum. 
 
 F. 
 
 r<> 
 
 totior, M, 
 
 iiamvIiC 
 
 li, m. cM' 
 
 \ "■"*■«■ 
 ), r@Bf nit 
 
 .1' 
 
 ■ r PART VL—yOCABULARY. . ; 545 
 
 ..'.■/'.■■'■■-::. ';..^.v 7_- :^-, ■:<^'' '.''-' ^ ■•■■''„./.■■■')■■■'., ■'-^:^--' .: ■ '- 
 2. meang of approach, adittis, 1. move, moveS, 6re, movl, 
 
 us,.M. motum. 
 
 A means, t>y no, nec^uSquam, 2. ?move forward, pr5-move6, 
 ' *^** ere, -movi, -mStum. ,i 
 
 4^ means, by-^f, per; prep. w. ninoh, adv., multum ; multS. , 
 
 ^"^' ' . ' " -* multitude^ multiCfldo, -dinis, »; 
 
 meantime, in tlie-, intereS. mnrdep, caed^ is, v. 
 
 measure, consilium, I, n. 1, must, us^genindive pdMtive 
 
 1. meet, oc-curr5, ere, -currl, vnth anm. 
 
 -cursum. _ ,*> 2. must needs, necesse est, iu. 
 
 ^. meet with, naiiciBcor, I, nacfcus dat. 
 
 or nanctus sum, w. ace. my, meua, a, m»; ' " 
 
 - niemoryv memoria, ae, y^ -^-^^-p— ~^^— -^ — . 
 
 mention, commemoro, fire, fiVIi ' . MT 
 
 ; fitum. • ^x.v,«„ • • 
 
 _■ , ^ _ _, , . name, nom^n, -mims, n. 
 
 merehant. mercfitor, -Sris, m. „^«on, nati^, -onis, k 
 
 Xae, Fjac mansuStadS (-dims, nature, nStflrrae, f. 
 
 ^ ,1 «j-*« i.«i.- ' nearer, propius, odtJ. 
 
 mert, virtus, -tatis; F. ■ nearest, pro^dmus, a, um, 
 
 merited, merijus, a, um^ i.. «««^ ^^rb, use c^s est 
 
 ^message, nantius, f, M. _, {^ there is need), iw^rsor^, 
 
 lessenfirer, ntintms, I, M. w. a6i. /♦ ^ ««, 
 
 liddle, twe medius, a, urn, ai/j. 2. „eed, nmm, tisus, Qs, m. . ' 
 
 my„i|fht, media nox(nocti8F.). neirlect, neg-leg6, ere, -16x1, 
 
 midst, ?Me medius, a, um, adj. -Igctum- «. i«^, 
 
 mile, =a ^/.ouW pac«r. * neighbor, finitimus, I, m. / , 
 
 mistalcen, be-, «rro, Sre, avi, trum. 
 atum. i o ... » 
 
 , mode, «enus, -eris, ». . neque. '_■-' 
 
 ^ Jtona, Mona, ae, f. ^ Nervli, Nervif, Srum, m. ptw. ' 
 
 ^ ^TfV '?"' **' money, pecflnia, ne«t, posterus, a, um ; proxinmfc 
 
 . ae, F.; (=cOTn), nummus, I, M. a, um , **«»»«» 
 
 •ontb, msnsis, i^ M. ^ew. novM, a, um. 
 
 ,ii.orj,plfl8, ampMtis. night, no», noctis. r. 
 
 Morlnl, Monni, 5rum, M. "^Ine, novem. ; ^, * 
 
 ■lomlnir, on the followinir--, ninety. nCnfiinntft. *' ^ * 
 
 ^ .postridig ejus diSI mftne. «jnth, nonusTa, um. ^ . . 
 
 r,onthe-,po8tridi©,odt>. »0, nftllus, a, um. *^ 
 
 mftximS, or ti*!«itpeWattT«. no one, . n«m6 ; «en., ntflllus : 
 
 .*. a-8cend6, ero, -soendi, ace, n6minem j aW., nOllS 
 
 -scenaum. ^j^^^ ^^ ^^^ ^^ ^^ 
 
 I, mfliiB, iHuutlH, M, noMe, ««bills, «. , "^ 
 
 i--:_ 
 
 \ 
 
 .86 
 
 > 
 
 #- 
 
 * f 
 
 . 1» • 
 
 •^ ' 
 
f ■ 
 
 i 
 
 *.m :-l. 
 
 546 
 
 r 9 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 noise, strepitus, us, m. 
 none, nClUus, a, um. 
 nor, neque. 
 
 1. not, non (in final htid imper- 
 ative clauses, ne) ; and not, 
 neque (or *in Jinal claiises, 
 neve, neu). 
 
 2. not a man, =W^ one. 
 
 3. not yet, nondafn. 
 notMngri nihil, n., indeclinable. 
 now ( = by this time), . jam ; ( = at 
 
 this present time), nunc. 
 
 1. number, numerus, I, m.,' or 
 use clause with qyot = how 
 many, 
 
 2. nnmber, larnre— , multitfldo, 
 -(^inis, F, ; magnus numerus, 
 1, M.v - 
 
 3. numbers, «rreat^, = large 
 number (tise sing.). 
 
 numerous, creber, bra, brum ; 
 mult^^e, a. 
 
 oak, r6b-ur, -oris, n. 
 1. oath, jflsjOrandum, jOrisjClr- 
 andl, N. 
 
 ' 2. oath, take an— ^ jflro, are, 
 
 avi, Situm. 
 obedient, be—, pfireo, Sre,)*ul. 
 obey, pfireo, ere, ul, itum, w. 
 
 dat. ; obtempero,' are, avI, 
 
 fitum, w. dat. 
 o1]Jectlon8, raise—, recflso, ar6, 
 ' fivi, fttiim, w. quominus and 
 
 8Hbjiim;tive. 
 observe, video, 5re, vldl, visum. 
 obtain a request, impetro, fire, 
 
 avI, atum. ' 
 
 oocupy, ob-tine6, Sre,^ -tinul, 
 
 -ten turn. 
 ooour, fI5, fieri, factus sum. 
 ot( = about), d6, w. abl. 
 offer, pr5-p6n5> ere, -po8ttI,^po- 
 
 situm. 
 1. officer, liSgfttus, I, M. 
 , 2. officer, cavalry—, praefeotus 
 
 (T, M.) equitum; 
 
 old, vet-us, -e^is; (so m^my years) 
 
 old, natus, a, um. 
 on (of place where), in w. abl.; 
 
 (of time when), iise abl. only ; 
 
 (of making attack on), in w. 
 
 ace. ; (of direction), ab or ex w. 
 
 abl.; (=conceming),dew.abl. 
 on account of, propter, w. ace. 
 
 1. once, at—, statim, adv. 
 
 2. once more, = again. 
 
 1. one, unus, a, iftn; one hun- 
 dred, centum ; no one, nemo. 
 
 2. one another, inter s§. 
 
 3. one at a time, singularis, e, ' 
 adj. « ' 
 
 4. one, the one * . . the other, 
 
 alter . . . alter. 
 only, tlnus, a, um, adj. 
 onset, impetus, us, M. 
 open, pate-facio, ere, -feci, -fac- ^ 
 
 tuml ; passive pate-fio, -fieri* 
 
 -factus sum. 
 !• opinion, sententia, ae, f. ' 
 
 2. opinion,beof the— ,exIstimo, 
 
 are, avI, atum. 
 
 opportune, opporttinus, a, um. 
 
 opportunely, opportune. 
 
 !• opportunity, occaijio, , -onis, 
 
 F.; facultas, -tfitfs, f. ; potes- 
 
 tfis, -tatis, F. 
 2. opportunity, give — , facultfi- 
 
 tem dare, or potestatem facere. 
 
 1. oppo8e( = resist), repOgno, are, 
 fivl, atum ; re-sisto,' ere, -stitij 
 w. dat 
 
 2. oppeae (^aet in opposition); 
 op-pM», ere, -posul, -positum. 
 
 or, aut ; (in quest ions\ an ; or 
 not (in questions), anndn (di- 
 tect), necne (indirect). • /S 
 
 Oroynia, Orcynia, ae, F. . 
 
 1. order, jubeo, SrOf^uSit, jjis, 
 sum w. a4x. ; imperO, p/e, fivl, 
 atum, to. dat. * 
 
 2. orders, frive-, impwS; ftw, 
 fivl, atum. -: i . 
 
 3. orders, receive — ■; jubeor, Irlj ' 
 
 ' »> 
 
 
 ^MawwmiX^^m^m^rtd). 
 
 Vi' 
 
 '»■■ 4 
 
 
 
i:! 
 
 
 {di- 
 
 4 
 
 PABT VI.--yOCABULARY. 
 
 4. oMer, In— that, ut, n§. *' 
 
 5. order, in— to, uti" causa, ad. 
 
 6. orders, without .l||l|— * ^^' 
 ' jussQsuo. '' r . "•^■^\. 
 Orpretorix, Orgetorix, -igis, M. 
 1. otlier, another, alius, a, ud. 
 
 2. pass bej^ond, e-gredior, T, 
 „ -gressus sum, tvith extra and 
 Vi'cc. , - „ 
 
 3. pass the winter, hi^mo, fire, 
 avi, £ltum. 
 
 passage, iter, itiriSris, N. 
 
 2. other, the — , (of two), alter, pay, pendo, ere^ pependi, pen- 
 era, erum ; { = the remamin<j)y sfim. ^^ 
 
 reliquus, a, urn. peace, pax, plois, f. 
 
 3. others, the — , reliqui, ae, a ; people, populus, I, M. . 
 c§terl, ae, a.' perceive, con-spicio, ere, -sjUxi, 
 
 onjBrht, tise gernndire passive tvith -spectum ; intel-lego, ere, -lexl, 
 
 sum ; or debeo, ere, ul j opor 
 
 tet, ere, oportuit. ^ 
 our, noster, tra, trum. 
 out of, ex, e, w. ahl. 
 outer, exterior, ius, 
 outside, sro— of, e^gredior. T, 
 
 -gressus suiii, w. extra an<mcc. a. permit, poti or^ i^ p ; 
 ovpr (o/ bridges over riverif)^ in, 2. perniltted, be—, li 
 " w^ abt. 
 ov<Sfp\itJnplmy op-primo, ere, 
 
 -press!, -pjpBssuni. „ 
 own, usetiposaessive pronoims iitnth 
 
 or without ipeiuHy ipsorum. 
 
 -lectum. 
 
 perhaps, fortassS. 
 
 peril, perlculum, I, n. ; to the—, 
 
 cum perlculo. 
 permission, have — , licet, licere, 
 
 liciiit, imjyersonal, iv. dat. 
 1. permit, poti or^ i^ p asgusjum, 
 permitted, T» 
 
 sonaly VK dat. 
 
 icet, imj/er- 
 
 , ipse, a, um, 
 
 1* pace, passus, us, M, 
 
 1. person (=a man), generally 
 untranslated. 
 
 2. person, In- 
 — himself. - 
 
 persuade, persua-deo, §re, -sT, 
 
 ^sum, iv. dat/ 
 pillage, praedor, S.r!, atus sum. 
 
 2. ^ace, 8la^^^|n— , de celeritfite pitch (of a camp)^ pono, ere, 
 
 posui, positum. 
 pity, feel— foir, misereor, erl, 
 
 itus sum, ■?('. gen. > 
 !• place, verb, pono, ere, posui, 
 
 positum; colloco, are, avi, 
 
 Htum. 
 
 2. place, noun, locus, i, M. sing. I 
 loG&, Oram, jf. pliir. " 
 
 3. place, leadingy , piincip&tus, 
 
 as, M. 
 
 . 4. pl(|pe, in that — , ibi, oAv, 
 kH^ place", to that—-, eo, adv. - 
 plan, sponsilium, I, N. 
 pleasing, gratus, a, um. 
 plenty, copia, ae, V, 
 
 ri-nlittor, ^^issils sum 
 
 1. paui<5,,timor, -oris, m. 
 
 2. panic, throw into^a — ,perter- 
 reo, 6re, uI, itum. 
 
 1. pardon, verb, I-gnosc^, ere,- 
 -gnovi, w. dat. Q 
 
 2. pardon, noun, venlia;, ae, f. 
 
 rrent, parens, -entis, M. or F. 
 part, pars, partis, f. 
 S. .part, in — ,partim, adv: • ' 
 
 3. part, fof the most-^, mfixi- 
 msim partenjl^; , ^ 
 
 4. part, take— in, inter-sum, 
 -esse, -iful, to. (JJat. ; 
 
 p^rUclpate In, intec-Bum, -esse, 
 
 -fuTTlt'. dat. ',.. / 
 party, f^£tl.6, -^nis, F. 
 1. put* 
 
 , plunder, praeda, aOfF. 
 . - !• point out, doceo, Sre, uT ; os- 
 ); gfi, Tre , iI,(yYl). tiftndft, ftm, 4nndT, tontum or 
 ' , ostensum. 
 
 % 
 
 A- 
 
 "/•: 
 
 *?"?." 
 
 ■^^ 
 
 mk 
 

 "■«4fc, 
 
 548 
 
 # 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 
 paH. in ilrus ti>i*/i sum. .■ 
 ,3. pi>tnt, on tj^ait — , j=»f> 
 ,' tkOit, ''■■'■'"'. '■ -■.'■"' 
 
 political olianfire, noVae res, p. 
 
 plv,r. • ' 
 Fompey. Pompeius, i, ^, « 
 \> popular, acceptqii a, um. 
 .' port, portus, tls, M. 
 portion, pars, partis, F. ' „ . 
 1* position, locus, I, M.; or use 
 
 daiise with ubi or qud in loc6, 
 2» position, keep at—^ con-sistq, 
 
 ere, -stitl. -^ 
 
 possess, ob-tine5, 5re, -tinuT, 
 
 -tentum ; pos-sideo, ere, sSdi, 
 
 -ses^um. . 
 
 ,1», possessions, their — , ^0^y 
 
 orum, N. plvA'. 
 
 preparations, make—, comparS, 
 
 S.re, avi, &tum. 
 p repare , pare, are, fivT, fitum. 
 
 1. presen t, ddno, g,re, 3.vl, 9>tum. 
 
 2. present, be — , ad-sum, -esse, 
 -ful. 
 
 '^kpeserve, re-tine6, Sre, -tinul, 
 ;tentum. s 
 
 1« press, press hard, urgeS, Sre, 
 ursi ; premu, ere, press!, pres- 
 Bum. V . 
 
 2. pr^ss forward, In-stsf^ftre, 
 -stitl, st&tum. 
 
 p revai l, superd, Are, ftvT, Stum/ 
 
 preveht, prohibeo, §re, ul, itum. 
 
 prevTous, superior, ius. 
 
 pre vio usly, ante. ' 
 
 price, pretium, I, N. 
 
 priest, sacer^dos, -dotis, M. 
 
 2. podbession, gain— of, ^tior, prisoner, captlvus, I, M 
 
 Xrl, Itus sum, w. hiH. 
 
 3. possession, take -of, occUp5, 
 are, aviv fttum, w. ace. 
 
 .possibility, potestas, -tatis, F.^ 
 
 possible, as ; . as — , quam, 
 toUh sivperlhtive. 
 
 posterity, poster!, 6rum, m 
 
 1. powetfi,' royal—, chief—, 
 preme — , rSgnu 
 
 2. power, grain the doverei 
 ~ of, potior, iri, Itus 
 
 1. powerful, firmus, 
 potSns, -entis. 
 
 2. powerful, be fhost—, plari- 
 mum.possum, posse, potuT. 
 
 practice, consuetUdo, -dinis, f. 
 1. praise, verb, laudS, are, avi, 
 fttum. ', ' 
 u «I *t<Q. praise, noun, laus, laudis, f.' 
 pray for, dSprecor, ari, atus 
 sum, w. ace. 
 
 private, prlvfttus, a, um. 
 proceed, pro-gredior, I, -gressus 
 
 BOm ; pro-c3dd, ere, -cesslj 
 
 •cessum. .' "^ 
 
 prpceedings, —tMngs. 
 procure, paro, are, avi, atum ; < 
 
 comparo, are, ftyl, atum'. • 
 u- - produce, ef-ficio, ere, -fScI^ -fec- 
 
 tum. 
 project, form a, — cSnsilium (I, 
 
 N.) capio (ere, cSpI, captum) 
 
 or ineo (Ire, il, itum). 
 promise, malce a promise, pol- 
 
 liceor, eri, itus sum. ■, 
 
 prompt, hortor, arl, atus^sum ; 
 
 im-peilo, ere; -pull, -pulsum. 
 protect, mtlnioy Ire, Ivlj Itum. 
 projection, praesidium, I, N. 
 protract, . pro-dilc6, ,ere, -dttxl, 
 
 -ductum. . 
 provMo for, pr6-vide6, ^rO, 
 
 -vldi, -visum, 10. dat. or ace. 
 prove, probd, are, avi, atum. ' 
 
 precedent, exemplum, l^ M. \.^ 
 
 precedingr, superior, ius. 
 
 pry|er {ivith noiins), ante-pono, pro vl^p4 that^ dum. 
 
 «re, -posul, -positum ; {with province, prSvinoiai ae, F, 
 
 the irijlinitive) maid, malle, provisions, commeatus, tls, M. 
 
 I j i T. {iisTthesivufHlar). 
 
 jaiyj 
 
 r 
 
 ■;-• — '- ■» • ^-^.l 
 
'U 
 
 PART VI. — VOCABULARY. 
 
 649 
 
 mpard, 
 
 fttum. 
 , fttum. 
 , -jesse, 
 
 -tinul, _ 
 
 sS, 8re, 
 [, pres- 
 
 [, itum. ^ 
 
 M. 
 
 ^ressus 
 -cessij 
 
 3.tum ; 
 n . • 
 3l» -fec- 
 
 ium (I, 
 aptum) 
 
 .pol- 
 
 io 
 
 s^um ; 
 ilsuni. ' 
 turn. A 
 
 [, N. .-W 
 
 >daxi, ■ 
 
 •r ace. 
 bum., ' 
 
 •■;■' ■;^-. T " '""T 
 F,' 
 tlS, M. , 
 
 A^^ 
 
 - + 
 
 provoke to battle, proelio (a6?.) 
 Jacess-o, ere, -ivi, -Itum. 
 
 prowess, virtfls, -tfltis, F. 
 
 panigh, ulciscor, I, ultus sum. 
 
 panlshment, supplicium, i, n. 
 
 pnpii, discipulus, i, M. 
 
 !• purpose, res, rei, F. 
 
 2. purpose, for the— of, causa, 
 w. gen, preceding. 
 
 !• pursue, pro-sequor, I, -secii- 
 tus sum ; c^gequor, i, -secil- 
 tus sum ; |HPr>i', h secutus 
 sum. ^^ 
 
 2. pursue a| march, iter faci5 
 
 (ere, feci, factum). * 
 
 push forward {or onward). Con- 
 ten-do, ere, -dl, -tum. 
 ,1-. put, colloco, ate, ayl, atum ; 
 pono, ere, posul, positum. 
 
 2. |>ut (In chains), con-jicio; ' 
 ere, -jeci, -^nctxxvci^ vnth in and 
 
 3. p ut to d eath, inter-ficio, ei-e, 
 -feci, -fectum. 
 
 4. put spurs to a horse, equum 
 
 H admitto, ere, -misi, -missum. 
 •f B. p ut an end to,-rflnem facio, 
 ere, feci, factum, w. gen. 
 
 rashness, temeritfts, -tatis, F. fc 
 rate, at any — , certe. 
 
 1. rather, pptius, magis. 
 
 2. rather, had — , nisUo, mS,lle, 
 mS,luI. 
 
 reach, per-venio, Ire, -v6nT, 
 -ventum, tcith ad or in and 
 
 age. 
 
 roadUy(==jgithontcanse%temere. 
 
 1. readw^K»^U8, ^r, um ; (for 
 or to, ^^^rtZZgf). 
 
 2. ready, make — , comparo, are, 
 avi, atum. 
 
 3. ready, get, — (of arms), expe- 
 ^ dio, Ire, IvI, itum.; (of vessels), 
 
 paro, are, avI, atum. 
 
 rear, novissimumagmen (-minis), 
 N. ; In the rear, a tergo, or 
 aversuSj^a, um in agt cement i 
 to the rear, ad novissimos. 
 
 re ason , causa, ae, F. ; or use 
 claui 
 
 1. quarters* from all^ — , un- 
 
 ' dique, arfu. 
 
 2. 'quarters, winter—, hlberna, 
 
 orum, N. plnr. 
 qneoji, reglna, ae, f. r^- 
 
 qu estio n, quaero, ere, quaesTvI, 
 
 qGaesitum. , 
 
 qnlekly, celeriter. "^ 
 quickness, celeritas, -tatis, f. 
 
 ■ .< " ■ - ..." '"■,.- ■ ' ' 
 
 raflre, the Ibattle rages, piigna* 
 
 * tur, impersonal passive. * 
 
 tAiae(— collect), comparo, are, 
 
 TtVi, atum. 
 ramparfi. vftMiim. 
 
 B> ■ W l 
 
 ^ause with cur or quamobrem 
 rebuild, restit-u6, eye, -ul, 
 
 -iitum. 
 recall, reyoco, are, avI, atum. 
 
 1. receive, ac-cipio, ei^e, -cSpI, 
 . -ceptuiu. 
 
 2. receive orders — &eor(2ere(f. 
 r ecen t, rec6ns, -en^is. 
 recover (=win back), reciperfl, 
 
 are, avI, atum ; (=rega^i cour- 
 age), s§ re-cipio, ere, -cepi, 
 -ceptum. 
 
 'refrain, tempero, fire, avI, 
 ._:. atum. ^-i -'■::/,:■■.'■'.■:_..<..,,, I, :■::.., 
 refuse (=ohjeet% rectisS, are, 
 
 avi, atum. 
 resralu, recipero, fire, avT, atum. 
 regard, habeo, ere, ul, itum. 
 reglflto, regio, -onis, f. 
 regular (Of troops), legiSnarius, 
 a, um. 
 
 reinforcements, subsidiuni, i, n. 
 relationship, cognatio, ronu, f. 
 reliance, place -on, con-fldfli, 
 ere, -fisus sum, w. dat. 
 
 *el«et»HceF- withr^ itty ltua» n, 
 um, adj. in agreeinett$. 
 
 rank, 6rd6, -dinis, M. 
 

 ^ ' . ■ A* ■:- :■-•;..-■,/■:: ^.;SV'-^-. . • ^.::::--..v;,.'.. 
 
 ' ^ - -'■* . / ■■ ■' ■, ;•'■-;:■.::•■ 
 
 ' ^ ' . ' ■ ■ A'^ /■" ^::-:^',, ■:■'■■''.. "■'- ^ ;'-\ ■ ;. \ 
 
 I ■• -,s -■■ ■- %: . ' ^ /-v--:. ; ■- ;-. • ,:■ , ■■-■..:■ / 
 
 .« . ' . ■■-■-. . ■ .. . • ■ , ' 
 
 1 ■ ■ ,■"■■■.' .1 " .« ■ / :■■■"■■. 
 
 ,- ■ . ^-. . •' , '■'■'-''-■'' ."■■'"■.*- "'■'-■■ ' ■■•-'".■ '" . '.'■""'--■"■'- 
 
 
 
 ' - ' ' "^'~~-^ ■ "' ■ ■"■ ■ ■■ - '«'■"•■ ■■ ■ -' ,. •■•iaas-« ■ 
 
 •■'■■■■■- .^ -.■.''-^■:V-\^^ , ■ .■.■■■ :•.•■■■- .; . ".'^ ;:aB| 
 
 , * ,.■ .\ ^-^^^ J \ 'fi-- ■ . • ' * ,'. . ■ . - . I^Mf 
 
 /:- "^7- ,--■■---':---■-■:::•.-:■■;:- ■■-^~--^-.^V^ •. r -•:.-^:' ---:■ -;:^..,-- ■ --■■;-. ^.; ;-- ^v V r M ".-V^vIF 
 
 -^■■v.-t-.. -(*■ s- -^- ■• » :\ ' ■ ■ . ■ ■ ■ ^ •' '"^;- -. i^,' 
 
 
 , , „ .. ^ _, . ,, ,._, ..^._^ ,. ..^,.,..,. . 
 
 ' -^ "- *^ -■■"■" ^, ■■■/v.. 'V:- ■ __._„--.----Pv --—r"^ ^v:" " 
 
 1 ___- — "■ ' . ■ . • i^''!, ' -■--■ Vl-, 
 
 ^ -^ ^ - ' '■_ :■ 1 - . ' - • ■ ■ ^ ■ . ' . ■ » . • 
 
 ' — 1 « ' ■ : •'• ' " "' , -. ' - ' .. ' '. ." -'%(*•'''"'* ' 
 
 '; .^' ; - '-^B^ 
 
 '■ S ' . ■:.■,_, :; •.■ . .■ '■■-■.f.-.'f^, \ I 
 
 , ■ ■ - ■•■/■.■■■■ - ■■",. ^ .. ■ .:,-. ./ :-.-/■:.■%*'•■ : 
 
 .'■''„ ■: ■' ■ ■ 
 
 /: ''"'[. ' ' :y- '■■ /",./- " "' '•'■:,:; ■ <■. ' , t '- ^.,' ./; ■ ;. ■; „; -^ ■■'■,:':, 
 
 . 'v //■^v' .'-■•. v|^;. ,,■-,- '-":.-■■ \ »V ,; -vt' •,.;.■■-;■. » ; '. ■ '_ , ■■■.■';' ^,; ,V"Vi';'/=* ■i'''' ■"!"' .^^'"'^ 
 
 ', •■;■■■■, V. ■.•''• si^; - ■. ', ". ■."".-- : ■' K ..;•.■* \ -f'/- ;■■",.;' :'. -^■-' . ■"- ' ..,/.;. .v ./:".,;:.,;':.:?/. ^ ;,, ,:■.''... - ' \ y- f- 
 
 .'.'■'''■, ■■■■-'"■/■■'■ ^ ..■'.•'■•' ■ ■■.,■■■-." ~:-:';...v.- ■ '. ■.'"■:..■ '.i- •,..:; -•* , ■■..,>,; c»^/ .■;.,.•';■'.;.•■ ." ,;■■. J^ 
 
 ■■■;;^:, ,. :;;.-;-;:v;;: ;;>.::.::^/^ .- V' .'• ■'■;■-■■ ■-\"--" ' -' , • ■ .-V ■:■;•«'■,. 1 
 
 
 
 ^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 ■ .- „ ' ' ' ' . .,.' ■ •"' -,.,.. ■•. "^ 
 
 ^^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 -:;',,:''''. 1 ."''^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^. ^ 
 
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^1 
 
 in 
 
 
 ^^^F 
 
 / '■ -1; -.V: -: ,;.■;:;,■•;■■:;;■ . ^■^;^■/-:-v:;v:■^,;■^'^^:■.• ■■'•■■i';: • ' '■' /.. -:/ 
 
 ■' •.•,'" 
 
 ^^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 ^^^^^^^r-' "' 
 
 ' ■ ' \^ '■ \ '■■ ■'-,:■*;;;■■ v.- .y. '■--. ^ .', A . ,■ ' ■ . ■ ' ' .'i'. :;''-^ 
 
 
 
 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 
 1 ■. ■ ■ *'■ ' 
 
 ':-■'■ ^^ . ■ ' *'}" ' ' 
 
 ^^^^^^^^' 
 
 ^^^^^^^^^r 
 
 ■ "A. '■ ■', - -x T 
 
 • . "■" ' 
 
 , 'I . '■.■■: 
 
 HPr ^ <* 
 
 '■z ■■ ,.•:.•■■ ■.:■ .. \i 
 
 
 
 |P^ .'■■*'■'. 
 
 ■v, ., ' . ■< • ■ > . '•,■■., 
 
 
 -% ■' 
 
 
 
 
 ■•''■. . • ■ " . ■ ''*•■" 
 
 
 ■ ■ ■ , - t' ■ . -* '■.'■'. ''■• ■'■'^- ■ 
 
 ■.",.■ --.l! ■ *" ' ' ' ■ " ... 1 ■ ■ ■ ' 
 
 
 ' ■ • . » 
 
 ' , <, y ■ ' ' ' ^ ' ' 
 
 
 '■ ' ■ ■ ' . 
 
 ,■-':...:• v ■;^-'-" ■ • !',:' ■ -.■■ ' " - • , '■'■ 
 
 ■"l .' 
 
 ■ ■ " •■.. "• ' i''■ 
 
 . . % ■ , ' 
 
 
 . , ■ ■■ 
 
 . --.-■-- ■..-■■:■'■■-.■ ^-■.- ..■■i^ -■■ ^ . ,:.-::.-: . 
 
 . ,__ ' ■■ 
 
 »v, .-■■; .-- . 
 
 .^^ '■-- .■'" *■■ ■■ . ■ ■'- ■■ . ■ ■ ' ■ ' , 
 
 
 •■ . '„. i' 
 
 /^■•. ' '\ ^ ■ . >■•, ■' •■■■•. ■/ . 
 
 
 ,"•'■"' 
 
 ■■■■■ :" , . - ■ . , « " ' ' . ../' -, ■'! ■", 
 
 
 4 . f 
 
 '^; ■ '.1 ■ ' " ' . •, ■■ ." 
 
 
 ' 9 « 
 
 
 
 , - * • 
 
 
 
 • ■; 
 
 ^ » _ ■«■■-■.. 
 
 { 
 
 --■ - ^ ■ ■ ^*?-^, ■■■ r - -' ■"'^^t- 
 
 >•:■■. ■ . ■ , ' ' . •''' ■^■■^..^'"■■■---. ■;■■""- ' ' ' 
 
 
 ■' - '• ,' '•■ ■■ ■ ■ ' > ' 
 
 'r ■ ■ . . . ' '. T ■ , ■ '• ■ •.*;..••■.■ - :.-■ . 
 
 
 ' ' - ' ■ " ■ 
 
 • , ' 
 
 
 • (r 
 
 ■ ■ ^■-■.. ; . ' ,. ■■ '' J ' ," ' ■"•. " -■•• ■ ' ■■' " ■ ■"■■ 
 
 
 
 V. ^ . ; .,, - ■•■■ ...■■- - V ,,! ■ . .■ . ■; ■ .■ ... • . ■■•■ ■ ■ .■- 
 
 .^ _ , 
 
 .*.■.■.'■■-■ ■.■:■*■ 
 
 .. \ . _;, -.' ^ .'■ ■ ■ .' . ,• .- - , . "".' ■ '.;- - .. ' 
 
 
 : ■■ ■- ••■ ■■ " ' ■; ■ 1 ■ /'.r 
 
 ■•■,■•■ ■'■■,'■■-■■',■■■,■ ' » '■'.■ ■ ■-■,.- ' :'i . ' 
 
 ■■ :'..\ : 
 
 ■-:, -4 ■-..-■ ■ ■ .■ .^^jH" \Sf^ 
 
 •■ ' . ' V ■ -. ' - -,■'■"- ■ .'' 
 
 
 '■"''-■ -V ■ J^E'^^ '^^^'''* 
 
 • ' ./ •■, .■,''"■.'<; - " " ■ ..J,.' ?/'. ,■ . '■ "^ ,,, ■' '■ 
 
 
 ■ -^-^." > >;;■;,: ■:■^ ■■■ ".'■^■■^^■'^"' ■■'_■. :•* '^''^ ^ 
 
 ■'■.■■■■'■■■ " , ■ ■ . -^..■: ,' .■ '■ ' ' t 
 
 
 ";^.■-■.■"^.■'■'■iV.'>■■ .:v^'.- '^ , 
 
 
 
 

 **i?«i, 
 
 IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-S) 
 
 V- 
 
 // 
 
 
 /- 
 
 .*- A 
 
 
 
 .-^ 
 
 /► .• 
 
 Y^. 
 
 ■%v 
 
 
 I.I 
 
 11.25 
 
 
 1.0 ^Bim 
 
 £ 1^ |2.0 
 
 1.4 ■i:fc 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ..». v, 
 
 ^' 
 
 -.■J •^. 
 
 "t^ences 
 Corpordtion 
 
 .i 
 
 
 99 wht mam itmit 
 
 WiMTH.N.Y. USM 
 (7J«)179.4S01 
 
 ■ ' ^^ — 
 
41 
 
 
 
 ."' "H " 
 
 • ■ 
 
 
 
 e ' . * 
 
 
 ' '■ ■ , ' ' ■ ■ ' ' . " 
 
 K 
 
 ' ■ ■ ■ ^ 
 
 >^ 
 
 - . ' ' : ■'■"■^6 . ' . . . " ' '^ . . 
 
 4?j 
 
 
 ^Br 
 
 . ■ \ - ■ ■> ,'',.■ ■ •» ■ . ' . 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 y 
 
 
 ' ' 
 
 ■ - . ■ ■■■•"•■ ' ■ , ■ ' ■ ■ ■ , 
 
 .'■■■' 
 
 
 * ' ■", 
 
 ' ■ ■ "• ■ ■ ' . .■ " ■,■■'■■" * "^ " . ■ 
 
 :■ ' 
 
 '/.;..,.' ' . ■ ' ■. " ' : . ' .;■ . , ' * ^ ■ .■■ . ,: .■ ,■ '"■ ■ 
 
 ■ #" 
 
 ;/--. ^'y ; /" ,^ '■ : ■ ; , ■ r ^ ■ •- ' - , ' ■ , \\ -' . 
 
 
 ■■■■■,■'• ' • ■ - ■ ' ■• .w 
 
 ■ ■ '*'- ■ 
 
 • : ■ ■ ' ■' . V , 
 
 
 , » .... . . , - . -. . ■ " . «; 
 
 
 
 , 
 
 • * ^' - ' .•■'...■ ^. . . .. 
 
 ' 
 
 „ -v . . • • 
 
 
 * . ., ' 
 
 •■ 
 
 - * « •% •^'■' ' - ' 
 
 » 
 
 _ • ./'■'', / 
 
 
 , ' . . * .'■..' ' ' • ■ '■'^ 
 
 
 1 .. . ■ ■ 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 : ' ' .■'•/: i^ >■ - ■' 's'.; ' ■ ■ ^^- -. • .■•. '■ ' 
 
 
 J^ - * ' . . -•.„■■'. 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 ! ■ ' . . • ,..: • 
 
 
 
 
 
 -^ '^. 
 
 
 
 •*.' 1 ,•.'••'. ^ . ' •■ 
 
 r 
 
 k\ .','%, ^ . . _ . ^ ._ ■ ' 
 
 t 
 
 
 «, * 
 
 ' r ■« ' . •■». > . ■' ' ■ ' ' . . " 
 
 * 
 
 •> ' , - 
 
 fc 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 r '^ \- ' '■ '" ^ ' ' ' "^s^ 
 
 
 ■'"">•>., < ^**^ • , . ■ 
 
 *' 
 
 • ":■•'' ■- ' ■' ' ■ • 
 
 K ,■-■• 
 
 
 A. ' 
 
 *■-....■■■.- . . . ■ 1 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 :i:::.r. _..,.... ._.:::::::..i::.i:i::::,,::,:.l,,* . ■.,:::,_:......*.:■■ : :_. ' ': . . " 
 
 ?'^SSSS. 
 
 • '. - ^>* . ,'■--■•. 
 
 .\^N 
 
 
 ■^<^'> . ,. 
 
 
 •, i ■ . ■ ■ . ■ ■ * 
 
 • 
 
 I'l . .'*'..'■ ■■■■■■ ^ ^ . ' - 
 
 ' \-. . 
 
 *. • "^ S. vl 
 
 
 .,.♦.. 
 
 « 
 
 ... , , ^ 
 
 
 f ■■ . ' . 
 
 
 i , • . . 
 
 
 -^^HB '''^ ^ 
 
 
 , . . ■' ' ^ ^ 
 
 
 • ■ . .1 ' 
 
550 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 relytny on, frStus, a, urn, w. ahl. res^gnd, Ire-spondeo, gre, -gpoii^ 
 re ma in, re-mrtneo, ere, -man- di, -sponsum. , " 
 BlT -mfinsum ; nianep j per- 1. rest, verby pono^ eire, posul, 
 
 nianed. »1 
 
 remaining, reliquus, a, umT^ 
 remember, memoriam re-tined, 
 
 fire, -tinul, -tentum, to. gen. ; 
 
 meminl, isse (imperative^ me- 
 
 men-t6, -t6te); reminiscor, I. 
 Benkl, R4ml, drum, m. plur.~ 
 remind, commone-faoid, ere, 
 
 -fScI, -factum, 
 rehiotest, ultimus, a, um. 
 
 positum. " , V. 
 2. rest, itoun; use reliquus, a, 
 
 um, adj. . 
 restore,' red-dd, ere, -didi, -4i- 
 
 tum. 
 restrain, con-tineo, 5re, -tinul, 
 
 -tentum ; prohibeo, 6re, ul. 
 
 itum. 
 1. resnlt/ be the result, flo, 
 
 fieri, factus sum. 
 
 remove, re-move6, 6re, -movl, 2. reunlt in ( = be attended ivith\ 
 
 -mStum. sum, esse,- f ul, vHth cum and 
 
 re|iew, renovS, are, avi, atum. oW. 
 
 renown, fama, ad, f. ; glOria, ae, retainer, olifins, -entis, m. 
 
 Frnaus, laudis, f. retire, sS re-cipio, er<, -cSpI, 
 
 repair, reficid, ere, -f6cl, fetitum.. -ceptum ; sS con-fero, -ferr«, 
 
 repljr, re-spondefi, Sre, -spondl, 
 
 H8p5nsuhi. 
 I» report, wrft, nOntid, are, avT^ 
 
 ituripj ' renflntiS, are, avi, 
 
 contull, collatuAi. 
 1. retreat, verb^ pedem re ferfl 
 (-ferre, rettull, -latum) ; sd re- 
 cipiS, ere, -cSpI, -ceptum. 
 
 Itum ; re-fer6, ferre, rettull, 2. retreat, noun, receptua, tls, 
 
 relatum. m. ; f uga, ae, f. 
 
 «• report, noun, fama, ae, f. ^ retreat, beat a—, aS re-cipiO» 
 
 3. ^report, brlnif — , famam per- ere, -ofipl, -ceptum. 
 
 ferO, -ferre, -tyll, -latum, or 1.' return, verh, re-vertor, !, 
 
 • 14M nQntiS, '^annwinee. versus sum ; re-verto, • ere, ' 
 
 '^Sr*»!^*' *^^'^'**®"^*' ^"^» '^®'*' ^®'"' redeO, -Ire, -il (-ivl),. 
 
 ul, hSnsuni. *-ituiii* «' .. 
 
 reptile, rfis pflblioa, rel pnbli- 2. return, roturntnt, H<*»in, re- 
 
 oae, F. • - . dituB, Qs, m., or utte claune toith 
 
 4* request, pet-O, ere, -Ivl, verb. 
 
 -Itum, tmth ab and abl. 
 2. request, ffaln— , obtain — , im- 
 
 petrO, are, avI, atum. 
 r^inlre, imperO, are, avI, fttum. 
 reserve, subsidium, I, n. 
 r«»slst, re-Buta, ere, -stitl, uifdat. 
 reslstanoe,, UM the wrb resists. 
 resiftlntlon, cflnsilium, I, n. ; 
 
 revenue, vectTgal, -RUs, v. 
 revolt, de-ficid, ere, -feci, 
 
 turn, 
 rownwl, praemium, I,»H. 
 BlTine, RhCnus, I, m. 
 R^one, RhodanuB, I, m. 
 rltfcTup, adequitO, a^^^ 
 
 atum. 
 
 M-- 
 
 •▼T, 
 
 form m resolution, cflnailium 1. rlffbt, noun, jds, jnri», w. 
 
 lii-eO, Ire, -il, -itum. - ~ ^ 2. rl^t^ oMij.i-dexter, tra, trum. 
 r«solve, OdnatituO, er«, ' -ul, rl|ie, niltarus, a, um. 
 
 •fltum. river, flAmen, -minis, W. 
 
 faonrces, Op8a. Um. F. pi 
 
 % 
 
 ur. 
 
 !Hi* 
 
 rnag. via, aft, F r it , er, itineriii, ml 
 
 f 
 
 '• I 
 
 , j-^ 
 
M 
 
 PART VL— VOCABULARY. 
 
 551 
 
 romm aboyt, vagor, ftrl, fttua 
 sum. . - 
 
 Boman, noun, RSmftnui, I, m.; 
 
 't^dj.) Bdmftnus, a, urn. 
 !• Rome (as aplaee), RSma^ ae, 
 
 F.; at Borne, Ramae. 
 -2. Rome(fl^ a nation), populus 
 
 (I, M.) Rdm&nus=^Ae Boman 
 
 people. • 
 
 8. Rome, of— ( = jiSomanX ^^- 
 i/m&nua, a, utn. 
 I* roat, nov/n, fuga, ae, f. 
 2. rout, verb, fug6, ftre, ftvl, 
 
 Slmh ; f undd, ere, f adi, f daum. 
 route» itef, itineris, n. 
 rojral power^ rSgnum, I, n. 
 ruEBiib, aggor, aggeris, u. 
 r ugge d, asjier, era, eruiu. 
 rflleTimperium, I, n. 
 run down, d6-curr<J, ere, -ourrt 
 
 W -cucurrl» -curaum. 
 !• rush to arms, con^ourro, ere, 
 
 -ourrt or -cucurrl, -curaum. 
 2. rush out, sS S-jicid, ere, JjScI, 
 
 -jeotum ; (of, ex w. oW.). 
 "i •.,.•,■*■ 
 
 Sabla, Sabis, is/ M. V / • 
 •a$£fid, saoer, ora, orum. 
 safe, tatus, a, urn. 
 Mifeffufn-a. praesidium, I, n. 
 s«f<ty, salOs, -fltis, f. ; in Mfety, 
 
 UM incolumis, e, cidj., '=aafe. 
 •aU, nftvigfl, ftre, ftyl, fttum ; 
 
 Xior, in w. occ). 
 ■atlor, nauta, ae, m. 
 ■a]^, for the— of, oausft,- w. gen. 
 
 preceding. ^. 
 
 ■alljr, 6rupti6, -Snis, f. 
 same. Idem, eadem, idem. 
 •atlBfaetion, give—, satis-faoid, 
 
 ere, -feci, -factum. 
 ■aTe( "« retctie), 6-rh)i5,ere,-ripnI, 
 ir -reptum, with %x and aU.; 
 
 {" spare), cfinservS, ftre, ftvl, 
 
 itum. 
 
 foilowed by negative, use negji, 
 Are, ftvl, fttum, =cteni/, 
 
 ■ci^reely, vix. ,' ; 
 
 scatter, dis-pcrgo, ere, -si, -sum. 
 
 soarglty, inopia, ae, F. 
 
 soont, expldrfttor, -dris, m. 
 
 1. sea, mare, maris, N. 
 
 2. sea, on the—, maritimus, a, 
 um, adj. 
 
 3. seajos^st, 5ra (ae, f.) mari- 
 tima. 
 
 •earqlijicr, quaerS, ere, quaesl- 
 vi, quaesltum,- to. ace, 
 
 1. second, secundus, a, um. 
 
 2. second, a-»-t||^e, iterum, adv. 
 secretly, clam^'J*. 
 
 seoiDure, liitlnii^ Ire, Ivt, Itum. 
 se^Tvidefi, Sre, vidi; visum. 
 seek, pet-q, ere, -IvI, -itum ; 
 
 TSppet.fl,'ere, -Ivf, -Itum. 
 seem, videor,- 6rl, vtous sum, 
 
 "passive. , 
 seise ( = <aJfce possession of), oc- 
 
 Sup5, ftre, ftvl, fttum ; ('^with 
 ■ impedimenta), potior, Iri, Itus 
 
 sum; {'^take prisoner), oom- 
 
 pre-hendo, ere, ^^eijdl, -h6n- 
 V sum. 
 
 select, d6-lig(S, evfi, -Up, -ISotum. 
 senate, senfttus, CLs, M. 
 
 1. send, mittd, we. misl, mis- 
 sulB. , ^ ' 
 
 2. sepdlMMk, re-i^t^, ere, -mIsL 
 -missum. 
 
 -^^. Miid^orward, «end in ad- 
 vanee, prae-mittO, ero, -mlsI, 
 •missum. 
 
 sepacgte, dl-vidfi, ere, -visl, 
 -visum. 
 
 Sequanl, SfiquanI, drum, M. plur. 
 
 seriously, graviter. 
 
 1. servlee, offioium, I, H. 
 
 2. service, be of-, Usui esse. 
 
 !• set fire to, in-oendd, ere, cen- 
 
 dl, -cSnsum, w. ace. 
 2. set out, pro-flaiaoog, I, .Itttoi 
 
■laMIMM 
 
 662 
 
 PRIMARY XATIN BOOK. 
 
 U. * >' 
 
 ' ^' « «t f all, nflyes QolvS, ere, 
 soivl, aolatuxn, 'B'looae the 8hip$. 
 •etU'e (<pia/ce up p(mtion\ cGn- 
 eSdHf ere, -sfidl, -sessum ; ( » ^* 
 cide), odii8tit-u(J, ere, -ul, 
 Htum. " , 
 
 •eir«u, 8eptem. 
 •efeath, Septimus,. a, um. 
 x" soTenty, septufigintA. 
 '^ «eyjral. oomplOres, -imn ; ali- 
 quot, tn<{emna62«. 
 •evere, gravis, e. 
 ■hamefal, turpis, e. ' 
 •hatter, af-fl4[<S, ere, -flixl, 
 -fliotum. 
 '1* shli», nftvis,, is, w. 
 .2. «Qp of wlir, n&vis longa. 
 . slioiS^ lltus, -ozis, N. ' 
 1- sliort, brevis, e. \ 
 
 .^' *• short, ^ a -time, brevL j 
 3. short, (for) a— time, paulis- 
 
 per. * ' 
 
 shortly, brevi» 
 k should, —ougkiy use gerundive 
 
 ■ ^ wUh sum ; for o^^er value» me 
 
 V. 144 
 sh523t| olftmor, -Oris, it. 
 sh^i oBten-d5, ere, -dl, •tiim or 
 
 ostSnsum. <' 
 
 ■ shudder -at, hotreO, 6re, ul, w, 
 
 ace. 
 
 1. side, latus, -eris, N. | pars, 
 parCii, w. * 
 
 2. side, from all sides, undique, 
 adv. 
 
 3. side, on both sides, utrimque, 
 ckLv. - . 
 
 4. side, en this— of, ois w «itrft 
 • frtj^. w. ace. 
 
 6. -side, on the other— of, tr&ns, 
 
 prep. w. ace. 
 siffht, cOnspeotus, Us, KU. 
 signal, Blgnuin, I, N. 
 l.lSlent, taoitus, a, um. 
 8. sUent, he—, keep-, Ibaoed, 
 
 ere, ul, itum. - 
 
 six, sex ; six hundred, sescentl, 
 
 ae, a. ' ' 
 sixteenth, sextus (a^ um) de- 
 
 -cimus (a, um). 
 sl3^ty> sex&^ntft. 
 slse, mftgmttldS, -dinis, v.; or 
 
 use clauae with quantus, a, um, 
 sklr ffl4 »h, proelium (l, v.) leve 
 
 or parvufum, = alight haitU, 
 •laughter, caedSs, is, F. 
 •l^re, servus, I, m. v 
 
 •laverjr, servittlfi, -tfltis, »: 
 •lay, inter-ficie, ere, -feci, -feo- 
 
 "Vim ; oc-oidd, ere, -titdl, -olsum. 
 •ling, funds, ae, F. ^ 
 
 •ifn^er, funditor, -Oris, u. 
 •lo^&g, dSolIvis, e. ' ' < 
 •maOi; parvus, a, um. ' ^ 
 
 •n^^er, min-or, -us. ' 
 
 •natch ail'ay, 6-ripid, ere,-ripul,t 
 
 -reptum ; (from, uae doi). 
 ■o, {=to ^um an extent)^ tarn ; 
 " ( = ther^ore), itaque ; so great, 
 
 tantus, a, um. ' / > i; 
 •ffldler, mll-es, -itis, M. 
 >1< some i=8ome or oi 
 
 quis (aliqul), -q 
 ^ -quod; («a /et»; 
 'ae, a. o^ 
 3« some. . ..othersr^I . . . alii. 
 
 3. some one, aliquis. 
 
 4. some day, ediquandO. 
 'son, fllius;4, H. 
 
 son-^|n-law,rgener, eri, K. 
 
 1. soon, mox,'brevI. 
 
 2. sooner, ("» rather), potiuSi^ 
 
 •05^^, as-as, simul atque. 
 sorry, be — , paenitet, tmtMWsonoi. 
 
 1. sort, of what— , quAlis, e, adj. 
 
 2. sort, whst-of man, qul^s, e; 
 »=io/ whai sort. 
 
 sovereign power, imperium, I, 
 
 N., ; rfignum, I, n. 
 space, spatium, I, N. 
 spare, paroO, ere, peperol, par* 
 vL-daL \ ■• ■> - 
 
 .*( 
 
 ( V 
 
 ' > <j> 
 
 •Inee, cum. 
 
 •peak, dloO, ere, dbtl, didtum.^ 
 
.. I.! 
 
 PART yi.— VOCABULARY. 
 
 
 U 
 
 653 
 
 ■pear, hasta, ae, F. > 
 
 ■peoliied, certus, a, um. , 
 •peotaT, «how— lndalg«nce =in- 
 
 dtdye epeciaUy. 
 •peolalljr, praeqipuS. 
 •peeoh,^ orfitiS, -finis, f. 
 speed, celeritfis, -tatis, f.; cur- 
 
 BUS, Us, M. 
 speedily, celerit^rj , - 
 speHT, cdn-stlm5, i6re, -sarapsi, 
 
 -stlmptum. 
 spirit, animus, I, M. ; virttts, 
 
 ^tSfcis, F. 
 •P'iair, V6r, v6ris, k. 
 ■£y» speculator, -Sris, m. 
 aqaadron, turma, ae, F. 
 •tain, In-ficio, ere, -fScI, -fectum. 
 stand one's arronnd, coh-siatS, 
 
 ere, -stitl. 
 !• standard, slgnum, I, n. 
 2. BtanSard bearer, —he who 
 
 bore the standard. 
 st^, 6-gredior, I, -gressus aum, 
 
 1. state, noiwt, clvit^ -tatis, F, ; 
 r6s pablica, rel pQblicae, f. 
 
 2. state, verb, dIo6, ere, .dixl, 
 dictum. 
 
 statement, v6x, v^is, F. ; or use 
 died = say. % ; 
 
 statton, colloc5, ftre, ftvl, fttum. 
 
 stayT moror, ftrf, atus sum. 
 
 steep, prae-ceps, -cipitisj »r- 
 duus, a, um. 
 
 stimulate, exoitS, ftre, ftvl, atum. 
 
 stir^ incitfl, ftre, ftvl, fttum. 
 
 ■ton« (Jor 6titidt)wf),«8axum, I, 
 ^ (/orhuriing),J&p-iB, -idis, m. 
 
 st£p, odn-sistfi, ere, -atitl. 
 
 1. storm, verb, exptlgnfi, ftre, 
 ftvl, fttum. 
 
 2. storm, fumn, tempeatfts, -tftr 
 tis, F. 
 
 3. storm, take by—, ofform, 
 . (verb). , 
 stra^AKeni, cSnailium, I, n. ' 
 stream, rivus, I, m. ; flOnittn, 
 
 ■ minuty i»; 
 
 str^BSlth, ^rmittldO, -dinis; f.; 
 
 ortise cJaiMe with quot. 
 strengthen, firmo, ftre, ftvl, 
 
 fttum ; mflnio, ire, IvI, Ituni. 
 jtretoh, pertinefi, Sre, ul. 
 strive, conten-do, ere, -^, -tum ; 
 
 nltor, I, n!su8 sum. 
 stronflr» be — , valed, 6re, uL 
 
 1. stniflrKie, verby Iab$rd« ftre, 
 ftvl, fttum. 
 
 2. straggle, nmrn, certftmen, 
 , -minis, N. ; bellum, I, k. 
 
 snlijeotion, servitfls, -tfltis, r. - 
 submit, servio. Ire, IvI, Itum. * 
 successfully, bene ; fslloiter. 
 Recessive, continuus, a, um. 
 
 1. snob (ago 8rr«at), tantus, fL 
 um. 
 
 2. anoh, of— a oharaoter, tftlis, ©. 
 
 3. auoh . . . as, often qui w. »u6- 
 junctive. 
 
 !• sudden, k«pentlnus, a, um. 
 2* ■'^SHj?*»! make a -attack, use 
 
 BubiEo, adv., =s^iddenly. 
 suddenly, 8ubit5. 
 suT^or, pet-5, fere, -IvI, -Itum, 
 
 w. ace. 
 suffer (^receive), ao-cipi5, ere, 
 -cSpi, -ceptum; (=»<»«<m>), pa- 
 tior, I, paasus sum. 
 sulBcient, suffloiently, satis. 
 •nafffestlon, at tbe-of, use auc- 
 tor, -Sris,, M., 'Bisuggester^ in 
 (tbl. abaci. 
 sulteble, id5neus, a, um. 
 summer, aeatfts, -tfttJa^F. 
 summon {of several persona), con- 
 vo?Rr, ftre, ftvl, fttum ; (of one 
 person), vocfl, ftre, ftvi, atum. 
 superior, be — , prae-stfi, ftre, 
 -atW, -stfttum or -atitum. 
 
 1. suimliea, oommefttua, Oa, M. 
 
 2. sup^j^aofoom, rfia frOm^i- 
 tftna. 
 
 suppose, arbitror, ftri, fttua sum; 
 putg, ir^ ft vL fttum ; jfldi«wt^ 
 
 ■0 
 
 Wt* 
 
 ««» *?!, ftt^T 
 
554 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 N 
 
 raprenuB poWer, rSgnum, I, y. 
 
 " ^"'SSif^ prae-stQ, fire, -stitl, 
 
 seSCum or stitum, w. dot.; an- 
 
 te-cSd5, ere, -ceasl, -cessum. 
 
 • w, occ. * 
 
 1. sarrender, terh, transitive, dS- 
 
 d6, erBT-didl, -ditum; inimn*. 
 mw, s3d@dere. 
 
 2. snri^nder, rerft (o/ grtrtna ft» 
 ar»M),Tba.do, ere, -didi. -di- 
 turn. * 
 
 3> surrender, noun^ xlSditio 
 -6ni8,T: * 
 
 ' >iirroand, . oiroum-venid, «fre 
 -ySrflT- ventum ; ( =put nmndi 
 circum-do, -dare, -dedl, -da- 
 turn; i^ovenohdm)^ ciieum- 
 fundO, ere, -fildt, -fOfium. 
 X. raapeot, fluspicor, firl, fitua 
 sum. 
 
 2. snapeoted, become—, in sus- 
 piciSnem venio, (ire, v6ni. 
 ventum). ' 
 
 swamp, pal-tls, -ildis, ». 
 
 swarm around, circum-fundor, 
 
 I, -fOsus sum. 
 sWay, diciO, -flnis, w. 
 swiftness, celeritfis, -tfttis, f 
 •word, gladius, I, m. ; witli k^ 
 
 And sword, f errO et ^nl. 
 
 Tarentnm, Tarentum, i, >. 
 
 1. take, capio, ere, c6pl, cap- 
 tum; {of taking a census), ha- 
 bed, ere, ul, itum. 
 
 2. takeaway, fcoUo, ere, sustull, 
 
 : sublfttum ; S-ripifi, ere, -ripul, 
 
 -reptum ; (from, eonweaa by 
 dat.). '^ ^ 
 
 3- take np {^JUl up), oontineS, 
 ere, ul ; (o/ taking np arms), 
 capiS, ere, c5pl, captum. 
 
 4. take an a poaftlon, odn-s!d0, ' 
 ere, -sSdl, -sessuni. 
 
 tanffht, be—, discfl, ere, didici, 
 = learn. 
 
 tax, tribfltum, I, n. 
 tear, lacrima, ae, F. ' 
 teU* dlc5, erev dixi, dictum, w. 
 aat. of person. ' ^ 
 
 tein£«8t, tempestfia, -tfttis, f. 
 teji, decem. 
 
 tenlth, decimus, a, linLr 
 teuns, condicio, -6^8, f. (me 
 
 sing.^ . ^ 
 
 terrify, terreS, 6re, ul, itum. 
 territory, ager, a«^, m.j finSs. 
 
 'mm,fM. plur. 1 
 terct^, terror, -oi^, j^.j timor, 
 
 -oris, M. / - 
 
 teat, periclitor, an, fttus sum. 
 Thames, Tamesis, is, m.; (occ, 
 
 Tameeim). , - . 
 
 than, quam. 
 
 1. t&at, j^tronrnm, is, ea, id • 
 ewip^fw, ille, a, ud. ' * 
 
 2. that, conj., with <iumn clauses 
 untrandated; with claims of 
 purpose, ut, n6 ; with clauses 
 ofresidt, ut. 
 
 their, suus, a, um ; or eSrum. 
 thjen (^next), deinde. *^ 
 
 tliwre (=m that place), ibi ; 
 (==to that place), eo ; (a* in- 
 troductory adverb), untrans- 
 *«*«»• ■ V ^^y 
 
 thei genp on, turn, „ ( 
 
 they, ei, eae, eaj ':■ 
 thjn^, res, rel, r.; or in nom. '■ 
 and occ. use neuter of adj. or 
 pronoun. 
 tnink, exlstimfl, lire, ftvl, Atuiai 
 
 arbitror, ftrl, fttuB sum. 
 thlr^„ tertius, a, um. 
 thlrkW fcrtgintft. * 
 
 thla, hlo, haec, h5c. 
 tlEoaffh» '^although. « 
 
 thon^nd, mllle ; ji>lnr., mllli*. 
 , lum, N. *T^ 
 
 threfi^n, minor, ftrf, fttus sum. 
 th^e, trSs, tria ; three liaii* 
 
 dred, treoenti, ae, a. 
 throjiyh, per, to. occ. . ' 
 

 1»ART VI.— VOCABULABY. %' 
 
 656 
 
 id; 
 
 (• 
 
 * 
 
 ere, -egi. -Sctam ; con-jicio, trigjtri-plek, IpKck 
 
 . '^•^:^<^^!jSr^'^^"-^":^^^ *'^mmt.s,uS;.L;c5piae, 
 
 1^1' "•' fl'". -J^^^"^' throw tPa.t, <i6n-fld6, ere, -ftous Bum. 
 
 St^f ««I' l«to, ir-rumpS, ere, 1. tF^, cSnbr, in", fttus suTm™ a^ 
 
 throw one's self In front of, verb. ^ 
 
 86 offers, ferre, obfcull. obllL- 9 ♦ *^ * ^ -' 
 
 turn, «,. da*. ' ^- *'^i?;iV"."^"!r' *!'' *** ^*" 
 
 % 4 «-h.^ »u •• x ' ' overTsollicitS, fire, ftvl, atum. 
 
 -i?cT i^ILm' "^^-J^^^^ «*' 3.tryt^revent.prohilio.6re, 
 jeci, -jectum. tn pre*., twiper/, or/u*. W 
 
 th^s, itaque. 
 
 1. time,' tempus, -oris, n. 
 
 2. time, a seoondx-t iterum, 
 adv. 
 
 3. time, a short — ^ paulisper, 
 
 2. turn aside, ft-yert6, ere, -verti, 
 
 -versmir. i 
 
 twelve, duodecim. «^ 
 
 twenty, viginti ; twenty.flfth, 
 
 vicgsimus (a, um) qulntuis (a, 
 um). 
 
 ^ twice, bis. 
 
 adv. 
 4. time, «It that-, turn, adr.?%^^dUo, duae, duo ; two hun- 
 
 crlxterally. . ' ^ . — ^, ducenti, ae, i "^ 
 
 o. Itlnie.one at a — , smgulfiris, 
 
 e, adj. ^ • ' 
 
 to, |jrep, ad, to. ace.; in, to. oaJ. • ' 
 
 to-day, hodiS, adv. 
 to-morrow, crfis, ndv. 
 tog, itse summus, a, um, ad^, 
 tortoise, testadS, -dinis, F. 
 towards, ad, w. ace. 
 tower, turrisj.is, f. f{ace. turrim). 
 town, oppidiim, I, n. 
 trjnAer, mercfttor, -oris, m. 
 l.-'*tfa|isport, vcr6, trftnsportd, 
 .fire, S?t, fitum. 
 
 unable, be — ,ii6ll possum, posse, 
 potuL ' - 
 
 uncertain, incertus, a, <ttm. 
 
 under, sub, prep. to. aW. 
 
 undertake, sus-oipid, ere, -cSpI, 
 -ceptum. 
 
 undertaklnfr, cdn&tus, fls, ir. 
 <tnder{tand, intel-lego, ere, -l6xl, 
 
 -ISctum. 
 nnexlu^sted, recSns, -entis. 
 2. transport, adj., onerftrius, a, unfaTorable, aliSnus, a, um ; 
 ' "* inlquus, a um ; incommodus, 
 
 a, um. 
 unfrl^dly, inimlous, a, um. ' 
 nnkn^n, ino<}gnitus, a, um. 
 unless, nisi. 
 
 unoocjipled, bo—, vacfl, &re,ftvl, 
 
 Atum. ' 
 
 P»siicc essfu^r»5yer8\p, a, am. 
 2. nnBl, prep., ad to. ace. 
 
 um 
 
 traveller, vifttor, -5ris, m. 
 treacj^ery, perfidia, ae, F. 
 treat, ag6, ere, Sgl, Actum. 
 tr^, arbor, -oris, jj^ 
 treiMh, fossa, ae, fI 
 tribe, nftti5, -onis, i. 
 trll^^e, tribOnus, I, m. 
 
 tglbtttai ^r^^ 
 
 A 
 
 trick, artifioium, I, ir. 
 
 \-.^-1 
 
. • II II ■a.pnmpiippii 
 
 jmm 
 
 mmmm 
 
 65^ 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK; 
 
 nrne, hortor, firi, atus aum. , ll^^ee vTf 
 
 2. a.e.make-of, =««e. voluntarUy, ijltro. 
 
 3. ugetooome, ventito,are,ftvL ' • -fcr ^ 
 Stum. - ** . 
 
 1- «niu- l.u-,>esa„,,a,am. , «rK"^'"''"'''^'"' '^ 
 
 parative. \ 
 
 utmost, sun^mus, a, um 
 
 "camp), vallum, I, n. 
 wander, ,vagor, ftrl, atus sum. 
 ^' wA|)t, mopia, ae, f. 
 «. wantlnir. be — , dSsum, dees- 
 
 se, d^ul. 
 1- war, bellum, I, n, • 
 
 ^. w galley, wkr «hip, navis 
 
 ^, F.) longa. 
 waa», moneS, Sre, ul, itum. 
 
 1. warte, (=:lo8e% dl-mitt5,.ere, 
 -misi, -missum. ^ 
 
 2. waste, lay-, vast<5, are, av!, 
 fitum ; populor, ftri; atua sum. 
 
 wateb, vigilil» ae, F. ^^ 
 
 Talerlu», Valerius, I, m. 
 ▼all^tly, fortiter. 
 
 validT perfectly-, justissimus, 
 
 a, um. . . 
 
 valley, vallSs, is, f. 
 ▼a^, virtOs, -tatis, f. 
 v^ne, offfreat — , ma^. -; 
 vanish, dis-oSdo, ere, -cessT, 
 cessum. ^ , • .,.— 
 
 1, va„,aj.h, vi„c5, ere, vicl, ;:g^:5S^1e"; 
 vje^m; supers. are,^avl, ZaryjSrLXu. 
 
 2. vanqatahed, viotus a nm ^«y- *" ««y— ^^^^ «odS. 
 vehemeX^s, f. ' ' ^"^' Z"-""' t^^^ "^"^^ ^' P^^r. 
 vengeiSee, suppUcmm, In ' 3!!£?":i«*S?™: ^' ^* 
 venture. aude§, Sre, ausus sum Z 2* ^^!^^'^^^ ^^* ^'^' **«"»• 
 very, aamodum; ^eTiZ f^*^*'' fl^^^f"**^' '^^'^^ '■ 
 Vesontlo, VesontidT «^s!^.' 2 Z'^^^^^V.?^ ^^"'' A^*"»»- 
 ve..^, navis, is. f. i 17^*"«' ?^*^V«' ««. -• 
 
 viotoJty, «rpreiw 6y ,««„j, ab or a3 ' ^^*^*"^' *'^' *^'' 
 
 ad, Mn<;i name» o/<OTwia. 2. w«i«h - .. 
 
 victorious, victor, -firis, jl «7« *S:1^*'*'*T!.."*'^* ***^^*» 
 
 victory, Victoria, 'ae. f.' ^^^' ^^*^""»' ^^ 
 
 ■^ 
 
 ^^*^ 
 
 ^iji^a^iit>.4i 
 
1,1 
 
 - PART VI. — VOCABULARY. 
 
 567 
 
 wietgh down, op-primd, ere, 
 ; -^pressl, -pressum. 
 ^«Iiriit (=injhtence), auctoritfts, 
 -tStn, F. ; (^heaviness)^ onus, 
 oneris, N. 
 welfare, consult— of, c6n8ul-6, 
 ere, -ul, -turn, w. dab. 
 
 treU-merlted, ' meritissimus, a, 
 um. ' !. 
 
 ,. west, sdlis occSsus, tls, h.«> 
 
 ' w^t, quis, quae, quid. 
 
 1. whatever, {pron.\ qui, quae, 
 quod. , 
 
 2. whatever, adv. {=at' oK), 
 omnlno. 
 
 #heii (rrfa*i»e), ubi, cum ; (tnfer- 
 . Togatim)^ quando.* . 
 wheq^^, unde. 
 whenever, cum. 
 , whei^s, cum. 
 whether, num ; whether ... or, 
 utrum ... an ; sive . . . sive. 
 
 1. which (oftwo% uter, tra, trum; 
 
 2. which, ftrbm— , undo. 
 while, dum ; or use pres. part. 
 who (rdative)^ qui, quae, quod ; 
 
 Jtnterrogative), quia, quae, 
 
 quid. 
 whole, totus, a, nnu 
 wliolly, omnlno; penltuB. 
 why, oQr; quftrS. ■!. 
 
 w^,^ l&tus, a, um; ' 
 widely, Ifite. • . * 
 
 wl^, lfttitQd5, -dinis, f. ' 
 wife, con-junx, -jugis, w. 
 win; against the — , tue invltus, 
 
 a, um, ad;. (=Mnt/)i«tngr). 
 
 2. wUllnff, be more—, mftlO, 
 ' mftlle, m&lul. 
 !• win, v\j|p6, ere, vicl, victum. 
 2. win over, ooncilid,^ &re, fivl, 
 fttum. ** 
 
 «. win, try to-^over, SoIlicitSj 
 ftre, ftvl, fitum. 
 
 wlBf, <t^i^|{(l,^ibipirr 
 
 1* winter, verbj Iiiemo, Sre, &vl, 
 fttum. 
 
 2. winter, nouny hi^s, hiemis, 
 F. "~- ■ 
 
 3. winter, pass the — , hiemo, 
 ftre, a^l, fttum. 
 
 winter quarters, hibema, drum, 
 N. plur. 
 
 wlpeonf;, dSl-ed,€re, -§i^, -Stum. 
 
 wl^e, sapiens, -entis. 
 ' 1. wish, vols, velle^jrolui. 
 
 2. wlsS", not to — ,^ld, n5lle, 
 nSluTT 
 
 wlt|i, cum, w. aU. ; or use aU. 
 alone; (=among), apud, w. ace. 
 
 !• withdraw, withdraw one's 
 self, s6 re-cipio, -ere, -c6pl, , 
 -ceptum ; dis-cSdo, ere, -oesi^, 
 -cessutn ; (if from a rampart), 
 dS-cSd6, ere, -cessi, -cessum. 
 
 2. withdraw (=lead off), dS- 
 daca, ere, -daxi, -ductum. ^ 
 
 1« wlt]^ (of place), intrft, prep, 
 w. ace. 
 
 2. within (of time), i«c oW. 
 
 3. within, be-a very little, mi- 
 nimum abesse. 
 
 1. without, sine, '^ cM., 
 
 2. wltfiont, be— ^Ji^red, 5re, ul, 
 itum, w. aU. ^*« ' / 
 
 withstand, sus-tineo^ §re, -tinul, / 
 -tenfum ; (of storms), fero, 
 ferre, tull, Ifttum. 
 /oad, vitrum, I, n. / 
 
 woman, nyjlier, -eris, p. / 
 
 wont, be— to, i«e perfect tenses 0f 
 cdn-8ueBc5, ere, -suSvI. '■ 
 
 wood, sil^va, ae. f. 
 
 wooded, silvestris, e. 
 
 1. word, hring — , nOntiO, &re, 
 ftvl, fttum. -^ 
 
 2. word, brlngr back-:-, renfln- 
 tiC, ftre, ftvl,1ftum. 
 
 work, opus, -eris,. N. ' 
 wor&man, faber, bri, m. 
 wortiiy, d^us, a, um,w. obL^ 
 ~l^v). qui a«M( Mtl^vneitve. 
 
Hf^mmmmmm 
 
 558 
 
 • '^'^ ^" ■■■■■■ 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 "^onlA thM^tmavcif w. aubjiine- . Y 
 
 Uve. • • , ' 
 
 !• woniiJl, verb, vulnerS, Sre, ye^, annus, T, m. 
 
 avi, atom. yegterday, herl. \ 
 
 A wound, noMn, vulnus, -eris, 1. yeJTtamen. 
 
 ^* •. 2: yel, not— , n6ndum. 
 
 wretched, miser, era, erum. yon,*tfl, vos. ^ 
 
 wron^, injOria, ae, p.; wrongs yonnarman, adulSscSns, -entifl, 
 
 I done to ... by ..., 7Me o&;ec- M. . : '^ 
 
 -- Uve and infective genitive. • your, tuus, a, um ; vester, tea. 
 
 wrong-dplngT) injOria, M, v.* , &um. 
 
 ■S-iAX.. 
 
 ■<f--' 
 
 ^'■. ^ V- 
 
 
 sm, -^; 
 
 .\^^''' 
 
 ■ ',"«;; 
 
 -•s^V ■.„ „ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 ';■ . -^ ^' -.:'! -• ■ 
 
 
 ,"''•-, ■ 
 
 
 ■".,■, ■*■ 
 
 
 ■ "" ' "■. ■ . 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 V 
 
 - y-'"' '\ 
 
 r'. 
 :.'.. * '■■■'"/.■■ -. '■'■•. 
 
 ■/ V- 
 
 
 
 ':'*.. "k- 
 
 
 .k'/ ''''%^ -:■. ■„■:■ i'v 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 * 
 
 ■!■' ■, 
 
 
 ..L-_'*^l... 
 
 
 'j! 
 
 
 
 
 " / 
 
 Wi 
 
 ■J ' 
 
 — TT^r^r . < ,.,,. 
 
 4n-H*fe^^- 
 
PART VI.-r-INDEX, 
 
 669 
 
 in. INPEX. 
 
 (7%« r^ereneet 'are to the seetitms qf Part$ 
 , « otlierwue speciJUd. 
 
 . '* 
 
 »» 
 
 except where 
 
 Cardinal numerata, list <rf. III. 15: de- 
 clension of, III. 16. - 
 Cases, use of, see under OenitiTe, Accusa- 
 
 tlve, etc ' ■* lu. 
 
 Causal cU^ses, V. 146-148, 171. ^ 
 Cause, Ablative of, V. 96. " 
 Characteristic, abladve of, V. 106; geni- 
 ^ tive of, V. 87 ; relative clause of, V^ 82. 
 CAtofmiw, V. 8, i, 
 
 *^^*JSS!Sl^aiiti^ot, III. 72, a; 
 _^55»l»wrHimru8e of, V. 22, iU. 
 CMrnate accusative, V. 72. 
 Collective noun with plural verb, V. 18, 
 
 Commands, how expressed, V. 182 
 
 Comparatives, declension of. III. 12 : for- 
 wiul^V^ia"' '^'"' ^'' <'<"«*™<="on 
 
 Comparison, ablative of, V. 98 ; expreswid 
 hyjuam, V. wC iU. ; standak «if com- 
 pariBonomitted,y.,98, vi. ; ofcadjectives, 
 III. 13; of adverbs. III. 17; conditional 
 clauses of, V. 68. ■ f 
 
 Complementary inflnitive, V. 19-22. 
 
 Concessive clauses, V. 66, 66 : 171 
 
 Concords, V. 10-13. 
 
 Conditional sentences, V. 68-64^ In indi- 
 rect narration, V. 192; conditional 
 clauses of comparison, V. 68. 
 
 ConluKation of verbs. III. 27-46. * 
 Conjunctions, V. 4, A. 
 ■Connection of thought, how expressed 
 V . 3, 6 ; 202. ' 
 
 Antec^enVpeQuUariViM of'"v. 173 • umH^ Consecutive clauses, V. 29-88. 
 
 . ment of prVm^oun with. V U ' ^^^ n^S?J!T "•'™«^« Pro^. V. 201-204. 
 
 Anticipation, accusative of. V. 194 fn Coordinatmir reUtive. V. 179 ' 
 
 - Ablative absolute, V. 46-80 ; 104. - 
 Abtative case, various uses <rf, V. 92-108 : 
 
 46-60; 64, 66. 
 Accent, pi^e 8. 
 
 AccomiMniment, ablative <Sf, V. 103. 
 ^^ ® *"** infinitive construcUon, V. 
 
 Accusative case, various uses of, V. «B-76. 
 
 Adjectives, declension of, HI. 10-12; 14 • 
 67-69; comparion of. III. 18; eo' 
 •«««raent of, V. n, 12, ft; ui^d m 
 subrtantives, y. 206. g ; used' in a par- 
 titive sense V. 86, iv. ft ; genitive with, 
 
 witS?V.1S?;iii''**''^-^«'"-^''>^«- 
 Advantage, dative of, V. 79. 
 Adverbial accusative, V. 72, i. ; adverbial 
 
 clauses, position of, V. 6. 
 Adverbs, formation from adjectives. III. 
 
 1/; comparison of. III. 17; 60: 
 
 position of. V. 4, d. ; ' 
 
 Affent, ablative of, V. 97;. dslive of, V. 
 
 80, ««; the secondary agent, V. -99, i. 
 Agreement, forms of, V. 10-13. 
 Alp, conjugation of. III. 72, c. 
 allqalH, declension of, III. 26 ; uses of. 
 
 V. 167, a. ' 
 
 allns, d^lension of. III. U mafia Axt, V. 
 
 168, a. ''^iWi 
 
 alter, declension of, III. 14^|ftSes of, V 
 
 Answers, yea or no, V. 39, Hi. 
 
 Apodosis, V. 68. 
 
 Apposition, V. 10. 
 
 Appositive noun clauses, V. 194-199. 
 
 Arranffeiitent>of words and clauses, V. 1-9, 
 
 Attraction, subjunctive by, V. 177. i. 
 
 Attributive words, agreement of, V. 11. 
 
 bdSf, declension of. III. 9. 
 
 € 
 
 -gyflndMr, 
 
 r»BomanT - paga464r 
 
 eaplOi conjugation of, m* 89. 
 
 Coordinating relative, V. 172, 
 
 bT^? V*'i74*'"*°'' '"• **• *• • "'"<*«"«' 
 cum (conjunction), uses of, V. 148-161 
 cum (prepoeitionX appended to pro- 
 nouns, Ilf. 62, ft : 64, ft ; with ablative 
 Of manner and accompaniment, V. 108, 
 
 lay Ha 
 
 D 
 
 Dates, how expressed, page 464. 
 DaUve case, various uses of, V. '76-81 • 
 08, 66. ' 
 
 dfibed, use of, V. 140, 6. 
 Declension of nouns. III. 1-9 ; 48-66 ; of 
 «ijectives. III. 10-12 : .U : :j>7-«»^^-XL 
 
 •1^ III. 16, 16 ; 61. • ^^ 
 
 ^ 
 
n 
 
 5§P 
 
 PHIMAKY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 Defective noans, III. 68, 6i ; adjectives, 
 
 III. 69 ; compaiiipp, III. 18 ; .60 ; verbs, 
 
 III. 72. T^ 
 
 Deflqition, grenitive of, V. 89. 
 Deliberative questions, V. 134, d. 
 Demonstrative' pronouns, declension of, 
 
 III. 28, 28 ; 68 ; peculiar forms of. III. 
 
 68; uses of, V. 168^168. 
 Dependeift questions, V. 86-87; clauses 
 
 in indirect narration, V, 176, 176 ; 186;^ 
 
 187. 
 
 G 
 
 Deponent verbs. Hi. 68 : synopsis of con 
 luRaiion, III. 40 ; gerundive of. III. 68. 
 b ; peouliuities of. III. 68, d. 
 DenderaMve verbe,'III. 74, o. 
 Desire, subjundtive of, V. 136. . - " 
 - ddut» deolension of. III. 9. 
 Difference, ablative of measure of, v. 101. 
 Dir«!ct object, V. 69. ' 
 
 Direct question, V. 84, 88. 
 Disjunctive questions, V. 88. 
 
 Gender, general rolfes for, III; 47 ; gender 
 ending^ an9 exceptions in the five de- 
 («lensions. III. 48. e; 49, e; 60, c; 61, e-; 
 62, c. », ».■''. 
 
 Oenitive case, various uses of, V. 82-91 ; 
 68, 65. • • 
 
 aerund, forms of. III. 8&; uses of, Y. 118, 
 
 i 11*' 1 ' . ,» 
 
 ^ytJerundlVe, fojmjs of. III. 84 ; uses of, V. 
 
 118-121. , „ , ^, 
 
 Greek pouns, 48, d; 49» d ; 60, (fj- Griek 
 • accusative, V. 78. 
 
 babed, with pertebd participSC V. 182,*^ 
 
 e, ii. 
 Heteroclite nouns, III. 66i 
 Heterogeneous nouns, III. 66. 
 
 Blgr?'^=?3ro,:•v-m;,.H.^.. «r^^opr;.^^^^^^ 
 
 ofVV. 101, i. . , „, „ , 
 Distributive n^Anerals, III. 61, eH 
 domas, declension of, III. 9. 
 dam; uses of,„V. 67 ; 163-166. 
 Duration of time, V. 129. * 
 I>uty, how exprMsedii V. 140. 
 
 ' Bffeoting, construction with verbs of, V. < 
 
 88 V. 
 Empiuwis, in relation to the oiider of woids, 
 
 V; 8, «t. ^^ 
 
 EncUtic8,V. 84, i.,fn. 
 eo, ooigugation of. III. 46; 71. a; pas- 
 . «ive d{ III. 71, o ; compounds of, IIL 
 
 71, a. , ' o .. i " 
 
 Epistolary tenses, V. 178, ji., fn. • ^ 
 EfhicAl dative, V. 80, c. 
 Ezclam4tions, accusative in, V. 74. , 
 
 if, * n 
 
 f&rl, conjugation of. III. 72, e. 
 
 Fearing, construction with verba of, -v. 
 188. 
 
 fero, oonluiration ^, III. 44 ; -com- 
 pounds of, in. 71, 6. ' 
 
 Final clauses, V. 28-28^ 
 
 fid, conjugation of. III. 46 ; compounds 
 
 fmintroductoryi not translated in Latin, 
 
 V. 196, fn. 
 fore ut, -periphrasis with, V. 88, iv. 
 Frequentative verbs. III. 74, b ; tenses in 
 
 frequentative! clauses, V. 149. 
 fnX, faeram, faer5#) in Compound 
 
 tenses, V. 182, «,'f. . , . 
 
 Future infinitive, yiith verbe o! Afl|»»V, 
 
 nromMnff, etc., y. 17. t 
 
 Fiuure partid ple. V. 188. 124.1 
 
 
 Future partici ple. V. 188. im. 
 Futurii perfgcrtense, uiii df , 
 Future tense, uwi pf , Y, 181. 
 
 forms of. III. 68, a ; usee of,\Y. 168. 
 Bindering. verbe of, V. 189. / 
 llistoriaJ infinitive, Y. 112. - 
 Historical present, V. 179, c ; sequence of 
 
 tenses with, Y. 28, iv. , 
 
 Hortetor^ (or Hor}i»tive|, lubjunctiv*. Y. 
 184, o. , ^ 
 
 ■■ . '*■ <. ^* ■ ' 
 '■ ■€■■ 
 
 X-stems, declension of nouns, HI. 60, h. ' 
 Idem, declension of, III. 28 ; followed 
 
 by qui or de, V. 174 ; uses of. V. 162. • 
 
 Idiom, differences between English and . 
 
 Latin,«Y. 208;206. 
 ille, declension df. III. 23; peculiar 
 
 forms of, in. 68 ; uses of, Y. 160. 
 Imperative mood, ijnfiection of , III. 87, . 
 - 88 ; uses of, V. 132, 138 ; in indirect 
 discourse turned by subjunctive, Y. 
 186,1., c. ' ■ 
 
 , Imperfect tense, uses of, Y. 180. 
 Impersonal verbe. III. 78; impersonal WW- , 
 ' Mve, Y. 66, 67 ; impersonal verbs, with 
 ol»use or infinitive as subject, Y. 110, i. 
 • Inceptive or inchoative verbe, III. 74,*(». 
 Indeclinable nouns,' gender of,JII. 47. c ; 
 list of. III. 64, 6 ; indecUnable adjec- 
 tives. III. 69. „ , , ; „, 
 Indefinite pronouns, decysnsion of, HI. 
 26; usesof, Y. 166-169. ^ . „, ^ 
 Indicative mood, inflections of. III. '87, ', 
 
 28 ; 64, e ; tenses of, V. 178-1^. , 
 
 Indirect narration, Y. 186-198 ; principal 
 claused put in, V.^ 186, 1 : subordinate 
 clauses in, Y. 176 ; 1$6,2 ; virtual, V. 177 ; 
 tenses in, Y. 187 ; pifonouns in, Y. 188 ; 
 adverbs in, Y. 189 ; real or apparent ex- 
 ceptions to rules of, Y. 175, i. ; 190; 
 conditional sentences in, Y. 192. -y 
 Indirect object, V. 77, 78. 
 Indirect questions, Y. 86-89. 
 Indirect reflexive, Y. 194,1. _ 
 infinitive, ioHM of, HI. 81, 82 ; <W M of, i 
 
 V 
 
 \ 
 
 y,l(»-lW;M-18; 19.22} 196. 
 
9' 
 
 •*, 
 
 .47; gender 
 the nVe de-. 
 60, c; 61, «1 
 
 f, V. 82-91 ; 
 
 «of.V*. lis, 
 
 ; uses of J V. 
 
 9, iV Q>tMi 
 
 ip«f, V. 182,-^ 
 
 ; peculiar 
 t,vV.168. 
 
 sequence of 
 >Junc^vd, V. 
 
 III.50, &. 
 S; followed 
 of. V. 162. 
 English Mid ^ 
 
 !3; peculiar 
 
 ^ 160. 
 
 I of, lU. 37, . 
 
 in indirect 
 JuncaTe, V. 
 
 180. 
 
 renonalfMS- , 
 verbs, .with 
 Bct.V. llO.i. 
 Kill. 74, a. 
 of, III. 47,0 ; 
 inable «djec: 
 
 ision of. III. 
 
 ■ of. III. 27, 
 
 98 ; principal 
 ; suDordinate 
 [rtu«l,V.177; 
 IS in, V. 188; 
 apparent ex- 
 17B, i. ; 190; 
 M92.V 
 
 \'\ 
 
 \ 
 
 PART VI.— Mrt)EX. 
 
 -Ij 
 
 ' *• 
 
 561 
 
 *"7l'**'Si??f*'v*?«* ??»JS»»«<>°^i "I- .«food", "f Indicative, Subjwictlve. eta 
 -InIL1sJ^tlV.-«"i T^-^ot'.^ * ."*'?«°«J."'^t of, V. 126; motion /m 
 
 Instrumental al6lative, V.'os'; 9ft 
 
 Intensive^erb8,III.'74, ft. 
 
 Intvrest, oonstruotion ndth, V. 68, 6,1., 
 
 ( Interest, dative of, ^^, 8fr. 
 
 'PlfT^*,'^^* paTticle«C^n«, nflnn«, iMin, 
 
 jy. «4, i., 36, i., 89, iv. ; vArum . . . 
 -^ ^ an, Y. 88k J», U. ; omnfin, necne, V. 69, i. 
 
 *nw«*<«»tive prqpouns, declension of, 
 III. 26 : 64 ; uses of, V. 34; 86, 87. 
 
 '"""V!'"':* verbs, corresponding to 
 „ English transitive verbs, V. 61-66; 
 
 • used impersonally in the passive, y. 66- 
 
 67. " ^ , . I 
 
 v.iaa. 
 
 from, 
 
 Natural gencfer, rules for, HI, 47. ' 
 
 -no (encUtic), V. 84. fn.; used in' ques- 
 tions, V. 84, J ; 86, i. • . ^ , 
 ne, with negative purpose,^. 24, 28, 1 : , 
 with verbs pf fearing; V. 188 ; with dwm ' e 
 
 in clauses of proviso, V. 67 ; with im- 
 perative or subjunctive to express pro- 
 hibitions, .etc., v. 182-185 ; with clauses 
 of concession, V. 184- 
 ne . . . qaide^, y. 4^/. * . 
 
 ^ -'I', ir^y*^ «o-J-^'ition in. III. ^^^^^i.^'^ST}:::^*^ 
 
 lpVdicie„siono^III.28;uses,f,y. Sl^J^^.In'd'Sl'Sfv.Vii ' "* ^' 
 
 lea ^^^ 
 
 Irregular nouns, TRSIbnsion of, III. 9 ; 
 
 case-endings of nouns, III. 48, c ; 49, c ; 
 
 80, e ; 61, c ; 62, ,c ; ' c^ue-endings of 
 •^ adjectives of third declension. III. 68. 6 ; 
 
 verhU endings. III. 66. 
 Is, declension of, HI. 22 ; uaes'of, V. 169. 
 late, declension of. III. 23 ; uses of, V. 
 
 161. ^ ... 
 
 it, no eqiliv^lsnt in JLatin. when tised 'as xwumwuve cases, iii i m . 
 
 an impersonal or representative subject, non quod, ndn onto, with Mb* 
 
 V. i», in. Junctive. V. 147 iU- • '^ ^^ 
 
 Iterative verbs, III. 74, 6. ^- nonne, force of V 84 i '^ 
 
 "*in*iil*^ir'*''*' "^"^ *'^*'''* '*°*^'^ '^^ffV^' noatri, noatram, use of, 
 
 Neuter adieotives used substantively witfc 
 , the partitive genitive, V. 86; L ; as cog- 
 
 nate aocusatives, V. 72. 
 nisi, in conditional clauses, V. 64|ii|i. • ' 
 
 ablativtfAbsolute, V. 60, iv. ; withKie 
 . words, y. 44, m. ^ 
 
 noil Oaollte). with infinitive, to ez* 
 
 proM proUbitions, V. 188. 
 nolo, oonjugatimi of, III. O. " 
 Nominative cases. III. i., fn. 
 
 ^ 
 
 Jam, and its compounds, with pi 
 
 and imperfect, V. 179, e ; 180, e. 
 ^ Jiipplter, declension of. III. J. 
 Ju«rur«kndam, declension of. III. 9. » 
 Jusnve subjunctiy e, V? 184, "ft. 
 
 .■ . , ' ■ ■ ■ «■■-■■'.■ •~ » 
 
 III. 62, a. 
 woun clauses, different forma of the. V. 
 
 194199. 
 Nouns, declension of, 111^1-9 ; 46-66. <. 
 ,nttin, force of, V. 84, i. ; in dependent, 
 questions, /. 86, i. "^ . 
 
 Numeral adverbf. III, 61, d. ^ 
 Numerals, III. 16, 16 ; 61 ; method of 
 . c<Hnbining, III. 61, a. 
 
 lloett'-use of, y. 148 ; as'ooncessive par- 
 ticle, y. 66, i. *^ 
 Limit of motion, accusative of, y. 126. 
 Locfl^tive ablative, y. 92 ; 106. 
 Looative case.tiie. III. 48, e ; 49. e; 60, «. ; xM^ cases. III. 1. fn. 
 
 Object, direct, V. 69; indirect, y. 77, 78; 
 
 noun tilauses used as objects, y. 194-199. 
 
 Oyective genitive, y. 86 ; with adjectives, 
 
 S : 
 
 opoirtet, bses of, 140, 6] 
 Optative use of subjunctive, y. 136. * 
 drdti&obliqua, see Indirect narration. 
 Order of words, y. 1-4 J of clauses, y. 8-9 ; 
 
 Ordinal numerals! list of. III. 16; deolen- 
 slonof,III. 1«. . - 
 
 niAg^Sf comparison expressed by,, nt. 
 
 60,6. - 
 
 m&ld, conjugation of, III. 48. 
 Manner, ablative of ^ y. 103. 
 materfanilll&s, declension' of. III. 9. 
 m&xlme, comparison exprrabed by, III. 
 
 60, ft. ' • ' « , 
 
 Means.ablative(rf, y. 99. . * • .^ * -♦ V *^ . " 
 
 mendnl, conjugation -of,^in. 72, 6; Participial phrases, value 'of, t. 48, 48; 
 TOnstructidnwith, y. 63,o. . • position of^ y. 7. ?"».».».«». 
 
 Sin^ 'iZni^''%'Z- ^*.- ' . trr .. ^ticiples. formation of. III, 38, 34 ; use 
 
 ^!!: «/?fPi?*^* declension of, III. 16 ; of, yT 40-44 ; 46-60 ; 118-124 ; with force 
 
 use of, in. 61 . < ■ of B iib e tantiv e s. y. g 06. a : m 
 
 TonXhs, names of, page 464, fn. ^ present partioipleTlirsS. «• 
 
562 
 
 PRIMAKY LATIN BOOk. 
 
 If 
 
 -( -V, 
 
 gMlitive srenitive, V. 86. 
 
 8?M^*l™r:.!:i5'^^^°" <>'• "I- 28. «>. 82, 
 ' « *• ^J •'np«'w>nal use of. V. 66 H7 ^ 
 
 J'erfect tenafff uses of Vi ih9 . ^JL^ 
 ^riodks'stnicture, V, 9 ; 204 
 
 ^*iT2^£"*«<?"^"' «leclension of. IH. 18. 
 
 Pluperfeot tense, uses of, V. 188. • 
 
 g?-?,*'.<^'^'«"'io" of, III. 12. 
 Possesrion. dative of, V. 80. e. 
 Potie^ve genitive. V. 88. 
 
 *S*^''* pronouns (adjectives). Ill ^l • 
 <«, « ; uses of, V. lesr ' 
 
 4^amqaain, In ooncesrire clauses. V 
 / 66, a ; meaning and yet, V 66 ofrT 
 
 tei»^*?. with subJunctiCV •«„. 
 
 " joined with single word V «« « ' ' 
 
 inindirect discourse, V. 168 f fit ^J 
 liberaUve quesUons. V 134^ -lH^t^S 
 cal question, V. 188 b. ' ' '^^"^' 
 S«K «ee Relative Pronoun. ' 
 V ?67": '*««'^'^0'' o'. ni. 28 ; use. if, 
 
 qaIn>withwordsofdbuMMi0 nn>«^*,'^^ 
 
 etc.. y. 139; in rel3K3££^C! 
 
 > octeristic, V. 83, ij. *»•«'■«■ oi cnar- 
 
 ^^**:.'"**®^"i*®' declension of,' III. 26- 
 .64, c ; uses of, V. 166, a. ' 
 
 o/.Tl665? ***^*'"^*"' «'• "I- 26 : uses - 
 
 ^?mT'''* '''«'«'«•»0° <I"- 26 ; uses of, V. 
 qnd, with clauses of puroose V «« in 
 quod (conjunction),^". w^i^.i'Ji. 
 ducinsr noun oUus^i, V l" ' ^~ 
 
 qnomliius, use of, V. i 
 
 ^"Tv.l^S?"**''**" **'•'"•". 70; 
 
 Potentiai subjunctive, V. 186. 
 
 Predicate noun, V, 12, : adJectivA V i» 
 
 ™K?*4.?"; ****> accusative. V 70- 
 *JS.*^>*tf ve, V. 108 ; construction wi?h 
 
 J|'^«»npo«n<i«i with prepositions, V 
 Present tense, uses of, V. 179. 
 Price, genitive of, V. 88; ablative of, V. 
 
 pS-?-°^-^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 rroniMtlons, how expressed. V IM 
 
 Pronouns, see PersonVl, RelaWe,etdL 
 Pronunciation of LaUn pace 1 
 Protasis, V. 68. »**•*• 
 
 ftx)viso, clauses of, V. 87. 
 
 V^'m^k"^ ^y ">• «ubjunctive, 
 ™«*i *®,i }'y •"?'"« «^ter verb oi 
 
 • , • ' "'^^^i «Utlve of, y. 81. 
 
 j^ * ' '^ ■ 
 
 qaani, with superlative. V. 174 I • 
 
 ■'%' 
 
 R^iprocal retation, how expttt^td^OL 
 
 RefeVenoe, dative of, V. 80, 6. 
 
 ntnt!^* construction with, V 68. 
 tS!.^.H* P/onoun. declension oUII 20 • 
 peculiar forms of , III 62 a 'iw fl«i'-„^* 
 second person. lil esrrfVSi^^f^V 
 ^64 ; verbs. V. 69, vii. • «»«• "^ V. 
 
 K?V^'7^.' °' characteristic. V. 82 ; - 
 pJi!.*i ' *'^ ' concessive. V. I7i 
 Relative pronouns, declension of. I I 24« 
 
 rtapubll^i declension of. HL 9 
 Result, clauses of, V. 29-38. 
 
 •nfg and yntu, V. IM^ 
 
 «•yiw. construction with verbs of, V, 
 18, 5/ »»*"on»"yin the passlv;,v: 
 
 ■*enSrv.TA "1«'' = "- "'' ""•'• 
 
 Semi-deponents, III, 88, 0. 
 Sense construction, V. 18 11 a. 
 Separation, ablative of, V.W- dative with 
 vert» of, V. 80 o * ' "awve witn 
 
 ' iSofl "'^T,"' ^•'"« «nd ways ol 
 tranHlating. V. 144. "j" «• 
 
 ■I, with (onciitional clauses. V 68-88. 
 Source, ablative of, V. m ' '^' '*'*^* / 
 
 
 A. 
 
 S' 
 
 / 
 
PART VI.— INDEX. 
 
 "s. 
 
 563 
 
 Specification, aocoaative of, V. 73 : abla- 
 tive of, V. 102. . ' 
 
 Stem, nature of. III. 48ftn. 1. 
 
 Stems of the five declensionB, III. 48. a • 
 49, o; 60, a ; 61, o ; 62, a ; preaent, per- 
 fect and supme stems of. verbe, III. 66. 
 
 Stature of sentences in LaUn, V. 1-9; 
 
 Subject, ajrreement of verb with, V. 12 
 a ; subject ^f infinitive, V. 108 ; of his' 
 *0"«»> infinitive, V. 112 ; noun clauses 
 "»«»M«ubJects,V. 194-199. 
 
 Subjective genitive, V. 84. 
 
 Subjunctive mood, inflection of, III. 29. 
 SO ; m princip^ clauses, V. 134-136 : iii 
 
 V "^,o' ^"'5T' ^- 2*-27; ot resilt, 
 V. ^-32; in dependent question», V. 
 86 ; in conditional danses, V. 61. 63 : in 
 concessive cUuses, V. 66; in conciitional 
 clauses of comparison, V. «8: with 
 yettmpt fearing, V. 188; with ouinand 
 9U«wmt«. V. 139; witll ytiod,™. " - 
 with mim, y. 148, 161; with 
 flonee, qwad, V. 67 ; 166 ; with «i 
 9^m a,m\ priugqtidm; V. 166 : with 
 qui, V. 27 ; 32 ;7l71 ; 'in indl?e^t dS 
 course, V, 176 ; 186 ; of virtual Indirect 
 
 narration," V. 177 ;' b> "attli^tion," v! 
 
 Substahtival use of infinitive. V. 109-111 
 Substantive dauseiT. V. 27 ; 81 ; 194-199 ' 
 ■nm, conjugation of, III. 41 ; peculiar 
 forms of. in 70 ; compounds of. III. 70. 
 
 ■^"1?*?*%*'^'> /*"«« 0' characteristic, 
 »• az. I. ; 167, a. 
 
 iV«"?u'°'™'"**'" 0'' ""f- 8« ; UK» of, V. 
 
 116-117. V 
 
 SylUbication.pjgii 
 Syncopated verbliiCl III. 66. a. 
 
 nlA,vrith perfect indicative, V. 162, b • 
 with aublunctive in relative clause of 
 purpose, V. 26. ^ 
 
 "y^nii declension of, III. 14 ; uses of, 
 
 V. 166, ft. 
 
 Unas, declension of. III. 14. ' 
 
 "1."^^*')» *° denote concession, V. 184 • 
 fh final clauses, V. 24, 27 ; in consecu- 
 t ve clauses, V. 29, 81 ; substiintive 
 clauses introduced by, V. 196, 197 : in 
 temporal clauser, V^ 162, b; omis^on 
 after certain verbs,^ Vl 28, vi. """•"" 
 
 "^ W** declension of, III. 26 ; use of, 
 
 ntlnam, use of, V. 135. 
 
 utor, with ablative, V. 64 ; with two ab- 
 latives, y. 66, v.; gerundive of, used im- 
 perspnaUy, V. 67, fn.: gerundive of, 
 used personally, V. 119, ii. 
 
 atnuu....M|, V.8& 
 
 
 
 Temporal claules, V. 149-M(8. 
 ♦K^, °i ui® indicative, >. 178184; of 
 ^ H^ «nflnitiye, V. 16; no, ii. ; of par- 
 ticiples. V. 41 ; 123 ; of the subjunctive. 
 ^ we under the various kinds of subjuno- 
 Wilf U , '"direct narration, V. 187. 
 
 Time, duration of, V. 129 ; time when, Y. 
 
 180 ; time withm which, V. isi. 
 ti^ns.conipounds of, with tw6 accuaa- 
 
 ^*1W* *^*°'"^« o'» V. 88; ab|ativ*o«iV. 
 
 ^tr^*7HV^ ** dfeMrontfl, construe- 
 Udta of, V. 14-18 ; personal construction 
 -.•n I»«ive, V. 18, vii. 
 ^^^i^'^^^f-ifi^ genitive. V. 90, 1.; 
 
 Verbal nouns, infinitive, V. 109-112' 
 gerund, V. 113, IM; supine, V. 116-117.'^ T 
 
 Verbs, conjugation of, Ut. 27-46 ; princi«f^ 
 Pjl parta of, III. 66 ; deponent, ifi. 40 r ' 
 ^t' ■«""■deponent, III. fe, e ; defective, 
 III. 72 ; impersonal, III. 78 ; irregular 
 forms. III. *B ; position of, V. 2, 8r4. n' 
 tenement of finite verb with subject. 
 Y,- ^2. a; genitive with, V. 68 : 91 ; da- 
 
 ^«'ife*^®**'*» ▼«•tram, um of, 
 III. 0z, a. ' 
 
 Tldeor, used personally, V. 18,' viL 
 Virtual indirect narration. V. 17^ 
 
 vla,^ declension of. 111. 9g 4 ^ - 
 
 Vocative case, III. 1, fn 
 
 WIslv how expressed, V. 186. 
 )VmUd, different values and wano( tnu- 
 l»Ung, V. 187. , ^^' 
 
 ■/- 
 
 i:<.:. 
 
 ■f 
 
 "F 
 
> 
 
^